OdUr. GESENIUS'
HEBREW GRAMMAR
AS EDITED AND ENLARGED BY THE LATE
E. KAUTZSCH
PBOFESSOB OF THEOLOGY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF HALLE
SECOND ENGLISH EDITION
REVISED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TWENTY-EIGHTH GERMAN
EDITION (1909) BY
A. E. COWLEY
WITH A FACSIMILE OF THE SILOAM INSCRIPTION BY J. EUTING, AND
A TABLE OF ALPHABETS BY M. LIDZBARSKI
OXFORD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
Oxford University Press, Amen House, London E.C. 4
GLASGOW NEW YORK TORONTO MELBOURNE WELLINGTON
BOMBAY CALCUTTA MADRAS KARACHI CAPE TOWN IBADAN
Geoffrey Cumberlege, Publisher to the University
iq/o
SECOND ENGU8H EDITION I9IO
BEPRINTED LITHOGRAPHICALLY IN GREAT BRrTAtV
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS, OXFORD, I946, I949, 1952, I956
FROM CORRECTED SHEETS OF THE SECOND EDITION
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE
The translation of the twenty -sixth German edition of
this grammar, originally prepared by the Rev. G. W. Collins
and revised by me, was published in 1898. Since that
date a twenty-seventh German edition has appeared ; and
Prof. Kautzsch was already engaged on a twenty-eighth in
1908 when the English translation was becoming exhausted.
He sent me the sheets as they were printed off, and I began
revising the former translation in order to produce it as
soon as possible after the completion of the German. The
whole of the English has been carefully compared with the
new edition, and, it is hoped, improved in many points, while
Prof. Kautzsch's own corrections and additions have of course
been incorporated. As before, the plan and arrangement of
the original have been strictly followed, so that the references
for sections and paragraphs correspond exactly in German
and English. Dr. Driver has again most generously given
up time, in the midst of other engagements, to reading the
sheets, and has made numerous suggestions. To him also are
chiefly due the enlargement of the index of subjects, some
expansions in the new index of Hebrew words, and some
additions to the index of passages, whereby we hope to have
made the book more serviceable to students. I have also to
thank my young friend, Mr. Godfrey R. Driver, of Winchester
College, for some welcome help in correcting proofs of the
Hebrew index and the index of passages. 2S nott'* D3n p.
Many cori'ections have been sent to me by scholars who have
used the former English edition, especially the Rev. W. E.
Blomfield, the Rev. S. Holmes, Mr. P. Wilson, Prof. Witton
Davies, Mr. G. H. Skipwith, and an unknown correspondent
iv Translator s Preface
at West Croydon. These, as well as suggestions in reviews,
have all been considered, and where possible, utilized. I am
also much indebted to the Press-readers for the great care
which they have bestowed on the work.
Finally, I must pay an affectionate tribute to the memory
of Prof. Kautzsch, who died in the spring of this year, shortly
after finishing the last sheets of the twenty-eighth edition.
For more than thirty years he was indefatigable in improving
the successive editions of the Grammar. The German trans-
lation of the Old Testament first published by him in 1894,
with the co-operation of other scholars, under the title Die
Heilige Schrift des A Ts, and now (19 10) in the third and
much enlarged edition, is a valuable work which has been
widely appreciated : the Apocryphen und Fseudepigraphen
des A Ts, edited by him in 1 900, is another important work :
besides which he published his GrainTnatik des Biblisch-
Aramdischen in 1884, two useful brochures Bibelwissenschaft
und Religionsunterricht in 1 900, and Die bleibende Bedeutung
des A Ts in 1903, six popular lectures on Die Poesie und die
poetischen Bilcher des A Ts in 1902, his article 'Religion of
Israel' in Hastings' Dictionary of the Bible, v. (1904),
pp. 612-734, not to mention minor publications. His death
is a serious loss to Biblical scholarship, while to me and
to many others it is the loss of a most kindly friend,
remarkable alike for his simple piety and his enthusiasm for
learning.
A. C.
Magdalen College, Oxford,
Sept. 19 10.
FROM THE GERMAN PREFACE
The present (twenty-eighth) edition of this Grammar/ like
the former ones, takes account as far as possible of all impor-
tant new publications on the subject, especially J. Earth's
Sj^radnvissenschaftliche Untersuchungen zuvi Semitischen,
pt. i, Lpz. 1907 ; the important works of C. Brockelmann (for
the titles see the heading of § i ; vol. i of the GruTidriss was
finished in 1908) ; P. Kahle's Der Tnasoretische Text des A Tk
iiach der Uberlieferung der babylonischen Juden, Lpz. 1902
(giving on p. 51 ff. an outline of Hebrew accidence from a
Babylonian MS. at Berlin) ; R. Kittel's Bihlia Hehraica, Lpz.
1905 f., 2 vols, (discriminating between certain, probable, and
proposed emendations ; see § 3 ^, end) ; Th. Noldeke's Beitrdge
zur semit. Sprachivissenschaft, Strassburg, 1904; Ed. Sievers'
Metrische Studien (for the titles of these striking works see
§ 2r). The important work of J. W. Rothstein, Grundzilge
des hehr. Bfiythmus, &c. (see also § 2 r), unfortunately appeared
too late to be used. The two large commentaries edited by
Nowack and Marti have been recently completed ; and in
P. Haupt's Polychrome Bible {SBOT.), part ix (Kings) by
Stade and Schwally was published in 1904.
For full reviews of the twenty-seventh edition, which of
course have been considered as carefully as possible, I have
to thank Max Margolis (in Hehraica, 1902, p. 159 fF.), Mayer
* The first edition appeared at Halle in 1813 (202 pp. small 8vo) ; twelve
more editions were published by W. Gesenius himself, the fourteenth to the
twenty first (1845-1872) by E. ROdiger, the twenty-second to the twenty-
eighth (1878-1910) by E. Kautzsch. The first abridged edition appeared in
1896, the second at the same time as the present (twenty-eighth) large
edition. The first edition of the ' Ubungsbuch ' (Exercises) to Gesenius-
Kautzsch's Hebrew Grammar appealed in 1881, the sixth in 1908.
vi From the German Preface
Lambert {B.EJ. 1902, p. 307 ff.), and H. Oort (Theol. Tijd-
schrift, 1902, p. 373 ff.). For particular remarks and correc-
tions I must thank Prof. J. Earth (Berlin), Dr. Gasser, pastor
in Bucbberg, Schaffhausen, B. Kirschner, of Charlottenburg,
(contributions to the index of passages), Pastor Kohler, of
Augst, Dr. Liebmann, of Kuczkow, Posen, Prof. Th. Noldeke,
of Strassburg, Pastor S. Preiswerk junior, of Bale, Dr.
Schwarz, of Leipzig, and Prof. B. Stade, of Giessen (died in
1906). Special mention must be made of the abundant help
received from three old friends of this book, Prof. P. Haupt,
of Baltimore, Prof. Knudtzon, of Kristiania, and Prof. H.
Strack, of Berlin, and also, in connexion with the present
edition, Prof. H. Hyvernat, of the University of Washington,
who has rendered great service especially in the correction
and enlargement of the indexes. I take this opportunity of
thanking them all again sincerely. And I am no less grateful
also to my dear colleague Prof. C. Steuernagel for the
unwearying care with which he has helped me from beginning
to end in correcting the proof-sheets.
Among material changes introduced into this edition may
be mentioned the abolition of the term S^wd medium (§10 d).
In this I have adopted, not without hesitation, the views of
Sievers. I find it, however, quite impossible to follow him in
rejecting all distinctions of quantity in the vowels. It is no
doubt possible that such matters may in the spoken language
have worn a very different appearance, and especially that in
the period of nearly a thousand years, over which the Old
Testament writings extend, very great variations may have
taken place. Our duty, however, is to represent the
language in the form in which it has been handed down
to us by the Masoretes ; and that this form involves a dis-
tinction between unchangeable, tone-long, and short vowels,
admits in my opinion of no doubt. The discussion of any
earlier stage of development belongs not to Hebrew grammar
but to comparative Semitic philology.
The same answer may be made to Beer's desire {ThLZ. 1904,
From the Geinnan Preface vii
col. 314 f) for an ' historical Hebrew grammar describing the
actual growth of the language on a basis of comparative
philology, as it may still be traced within the narrow limits
of the Old Testament '. Such material as is available for the
purpose ought indeed to be honestly set forth in the new edi-
tions of Gesenius; but Beer seems to me to appraise such
material much too highly when he refers to it as necessi-
tating an ' historical grammar '. In my opinion these his-
torical differences have for the most part been obliterated
by the harmonizing activity of the Masoretes.
E. KAUTZSCH.
Halle,
July, 1909.
ADDITIONS AND COERECTIONS
Page 42, line 13 from below, /or note i read note 3.
Page 63, § 15 p. [See also Wickes, Prose Accentuation, 130 f,, 87 n.
(who, however, regards the superlinear, Babylonian system as the
earlier); and Ginsburg, Introduction to the Hebrew Bible, 76, 78. In
Ginsburg's Hebrew Bible, ed, 2 (1908), pp. 108 f., 267 f., the two
systems of division are printed in extenso, in parallel columns — the
10 verses of the superlinear (Babylonian) system consisting (in
Exodus) of V. 2.3-6.7.8-U.12.I3.U.16.16.17 (^s numbered in ordinary texts),
and the 1 2 verses of the sublinear (Palestinian) system, consisting of
y 2-3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13-16.17 g R D 1
< <
Page 65, note i,/or N3N read X|i< (as § 105 a).
[Editions often vary in individual passages, as regards the accen-
tuation of the first syllable: but in the 7 occurrences of NJK,
and the 6 of nJX, Baer, Ginsburg, and Kittel agree in having at\
accent on both syllables (as N3X) in Gn 50^^, Ex 32'^ \f/ 116", and
Metheg on the first syllable and an accent on the second syllable (as
n^3X) in 2 K 20?=Is 38', Jon I'V4^ xp ii6\ ii%'^-^\ Dn 9*, Ne i^",
except that in i/^ 116^ Ginsburg has n?^. — S. R. D.]
Page 79, § 22 s, before ^riD''*i"nn insert exceptions to h are. After
Jer 39^^^ add ifr 52° ; and for Ez 9^ read Ezr 9^
[So Baer (cf. his note on Jud 20*'; also on Jer 39'^, and several
of the other passages in question) : but Ginsburg only in 10 of the
exceptions to b, and Jacob ben Hayyim and Kittel only in 5, viz.
Jer 39'S Pr ii^ is\ yj, 52', Ezr 9«.— S. R. D.]
Page III, line 12, for H^nn read H'^T^T}.
Page 123, § 45 e, add: cf. also nasny followed by nx, Is 13'*,
Am 4" (§"5 4
Page 175, § 67. See B. Halpei-, ' The Participial formations of the
Geminate Verbs ' in ZA IF. 1 910, pp. 42 ff., 99 ff., 201 S. (also dealing
with the regular verb).
Page 177, at the end of § 67 g- the following paragraph has been
accidentally omitted :
Rem. According to the prevailing view, this strengthening of the
first radical is merely intended to give the bi-literal stem at least
Additions and Corrections ix
a 4^i-Hteral appearance. (Possibly aided by the analogy of verbs }*B,
as P. Haupt has suggested to me in conversation.) But cf. Kautzsch,
' Die sog. aramaisierenden Formen der Verba v"V im Hebr.' in Oriental.
Studien zum 70. Gehurtstag Th. NoldeJces, 1906, p. 771 ff. It is there
shown (i) that the sharpening of the ist radical often serves to empha-
size a particular meaning (cf. *13^, but ^H^.^^, ^nj and ?n^, 3D^ and 3DJ,
Dt?^ and DK'ri), and elsewhere no doubt to dissiniilate the vowels (as
1?!, ''1!, never "UJ, ^T, &c.) : (2) that the sharpening of the ist
ladical often appears to be occasioned by the nature of the first letter
of the stem, especially when it is a sibilant. Whether the masoretic
pronunciation is based on an early tradition, or the Masora has arbi-
trarily adopted aramaizing forms to attain the above objects, must be
left undecided.
Page 193, the second and third paragraphs should have the marginal
letters d and e respectively.
Page 200, § 72 2, line 2, after Est 2'* add 4".
Page 232, § 84" s, add nDpb' 2813^.
Page 236, § 85 c, a(i(i r\prf\ Ezr ^'^.
Page 273, § 93 qq end, add n^lpto Jer 5^ O^V?!, ^'^S^ Ez 2o\
n^JDCb' Is 49«, D^OOb' La i'« (cf Konig, ii. 109).
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations have occasionally been used for works and
periodicals frequently quoted : —
AJSL. = American Journal of Semitic Languages.
CIS. = Corpus Inscriptionum Semiticarum.
Ed.Mant.='B\h\i2k Hebraica ex recensione Sal. Norzi edidit Raphael
Hayyim Basila, Mantuae 1742-4.
Jabl. = Biblia Hebraica ex recensione D. E. Jablonski, Berolini, 1699-.
JQR. = Jewish Quarterly Review.
KAT.^ = Die Keilinschriften und das Alte Testament, 3rd ed. by
H. Zimmern and H. Winckler, 2 vols., Berlin, 1902 f.
Lexicon = A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament, based
on the Thesaurus and Lexicon of Gesenius, by F. Brown,
S. R. Driver, and C. A. Briggs, Oxford, 1906.
NB. = J. Barth, Die Nominalbildung in den semitischen Sprachen.
Lpz. 1889-94.
NGGW. = Nachrichten der Gottinger Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften.
OLZ. = Orientalistische Literaturzeitung. Vienna, 1898 if.
PEE. = Realencyclopadie fiir protestantische Theologie und Kirche,
3rd ed. by A. Hauck. Lpz. 1896 ff.
PSBA = Proceedings of the Society of Biblical Archaeology. Loudon,
1879 ff.
RE J. = Revue des Etudes Juives. Paris, 1880 ff,
Sam. = The iHebrew) Pentateuch of the Samaritans.
SBOT. = Sacred Books of the Old Testament, ed. by P. Haupt. Lpz.
and Baltimore, 1893 ff.
ThLZ. = Theologische Literaturzeitung, ed. by E. Schiirer. Lpz.
1876 ff.
VB. = Vorderasiatische Bibliothek, ed. by A. Jeremias and H. Winck-
ler. Lpz. 1907 ff.
ZA. — Zeitschrift fiir Assyriologie und verwandte Gebiete, ed. by
C. Bezold. Lpz. 18S6 ff.
ZAW. = Zeitschrift fiir die alttestamentliche Wissenschaft, ed. by
B. Stade, Giessen, 1881 ff., and since 1907 by K. Marti.
ZDMG. — Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft,
Lj z. 1846 ff., since 1903 ed. by A, Fischer.
ZDPV. = Zeitschrift des deutschen Palastinavereins, Lpz. 1878 ff.,
since 1903 ed. by C. Steuernagel.
CONTENTS
Additions and Corrections
List of Abbreviations
Table of Early Semitic Alphabets
SiLOAM Inscription
PAGE
. viii
X
INTRODUCTION
§ 1. The Semitic Languages in General .
§ 2. Sketch of the History of the Hebrew Language
§ 3. Grammatical Treatment of the Hebrew Language
§ 4. Division and Arrangement of the Grammar .
I
8
22
gns
PIBST PART
ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES, OR THE SOUNDS AND
CHARACTERS
Chapter I. The Individual Sounds and Characters
5. The Consonants : their Forms and Names
6. Pronunciation and Division of Consonants
7. The Vowels in General, Vowel Letters and Vowel S
8. The Vowel Signs in particular
9'. Character of the several Vowels
§ 10. The Half Vowels and the Syllable Divider (f§°wa)
§ 11. Other Signs which affect the Reading
§ 12. Dages in general, and Dages forte in particular
§ 13. Dages lene
§ 14. Mappiq and Raphe
§ 15. The Accents
§ 16. Of Maqqeph and Metheg
§ 17. Of the Q-re and K^thibh
§
§
§
§
Masora marginalis and finalis
24
31
35
39
45
51
54
55
56
56
57
63
65
Chapter II. Peculiarities and Changes of Letters: the
Syllable and the Tone
§ 18. In general 68
§ 19. Changes of Consonants 68
§20. The Strengthening (Sharpening) of Consonants ... 70
xii Contents
PAGE
75
76
79
82
84
§21. The Aspiration of the Tenues
§ 22, Peculiarities of the Gutturals
§ 23, The Feebleness of the Gutturals N and n . , .
§ 24. Changes of the Weak Letters 1 and ^ . . . .
§ 25. Unchangeable Vowels
§ 26. Syllable-formation and its Influence on the Quantity of Vowels 85
§ 27. The Change of the Vowels, especially as regards Quantity . 88
§ 28. The Rise of New Vowels and Syllables 92
§ 29. The Tone, its Changes, and the Pause 94
SECOWD PART
ETYMOLOGY, OR THE PARTS OF SPEECH
§ 30. Stems and Roots ; Biliteral, Triliteral, and Quadriliteral . 99
§ 31. Grammatical Structure 103
Chapter I. The Pronoun
§ 32. The Personal Pronoun. The Separate Pronoun . . .105
§33. Pronominal Suffixes 108
§ 34. The Demonstrative Pronoun 1 09
§ 35. The Article , . .110
§36. The Relative Pronoun 112
§37. The Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns . . . .113
Chapter II. The Verb
§88. General View 114
§39. Ground-form and Derived Stems 114
§40. Tenses. Moods. Flexion 117
§ 41. Variations from the Ordinary Form of the Strong Verb . .118
I. The Strong Verb.
§42. In general 118
A. The Pure Stem, or Qui.
§48. Its Form and Meaning 118
§ 44. Flexion of the Perfect of Qal 119
§ 45. The Infinitive 122
§46. The Imperative 124
§47. The Imperfect and its Inflexion 125
§ 48. Shortening and Lengthening of the Imperfect and Imperative.
The Jussive and Cohortative 129
§ 49. The Perfect and Imperfect with Waw Consecutive . . . 132
§ 50. The Participle .136
a
Contents xiii
B. Veiha Denvativa, or Derived Conjugations.
PAGE
§ 51. Niph'al 137
§ 52. Pi'el and Pu'al 139
§ 53. Hiph'il and Hopb'al 144
§ 54 Hithpa'el 149
§55. Less Common Conjugations 151
§ 56. Quadriliteials > . . .153
C. Strong Verb with Pronominal Suffixes.
§ 57. In general 1 54
(| 58., The Pronominal Suffixes of the Verb 155
59. The Perfect with Pronominal Suffixes 158
(^ 60. Imperfect with Pronominal Suffixes 160
§ 61. Infinitive, Imperative and Participle with Pronominal Suffixes 162
Verbs with Gutturals.
§ 62. In general 164
§ 63. Verbs First Guttural 165
§ 64. Verbs Middle Guttural ........ 169
§ 65. Verbs Third Guttural 171
ir. The Weak Verb.
§ 66. Veibs Primae Radicalis Nun (i"d) 173
§ 67. Verbs y^y 175
The Weakest Verbs {Verba Quiescentia).
§ 68. Verbs N"a 184
§ 69. Verbs '•''S. First Class, or Verbs originally Td . . .186
§ 70. Verbs '•'''Q. Second Class, or Verbs properly ^"d . . . 192
§ 71. Verbs """Q. Third Class, or Verbs with Yodh assimilated . 193
§ 72. Verbs Vy I94
§ 73. Verbs middle i (vulgo '•"y) 202
§ 74. Verbs s"^ 205
§ 75. Verbs n"^ 207
§ 76. Verbs Doubly Weak 217
§ 77. Relation of the Weak Verbs to one another . . . .219
§ 78. Verba Defectiva 219
Chapter III. The Noun
§ 79. General View 221
§ 80. The Indication of Gender in Nouns 222
§81. Derivation of Nouns 225
§ 82. Primitive Nouns 225
xiv Contents
§ 83. Verbal Nouns in General ....
§ 84". Nouns derived from the Simple Stem
§ 84*. Formation of Nouns from the Intensive Stem
§ 85. Nouns with Preformatives and Aflformatives
§ 86. Denominative Nouns
§ 87. Of the Plural
§ 88. Of the Dual
§ 89. The Genitive and the Construct State
§ 90. Real and supposed Remains of Early Case-endings
§ 91. The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes
§ 92. Vowel Changes in the Noun
§ 93. Paradigms of Masculine Nouns
§ 94. Formation of Feminine Nouns .
§ 95. Paradigms of Feminine Nouns
§ 96. Nouns of Peculiar Formation .
§ 97. Numerals, (a) Cardinal Numbers
§ 98. Numerals. (6) Ordinal Numbers
PAGE
226
227
233
235
239
241
244
247
248
254
260
262
275
276
281
286
292
Chapter IV. The Particles
§ 99. General View 293
§ 100. Adverbs 294
§ 101. Prepositions 297
§ 102. Prefixed Prepositions 298
§ 103. Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes and in the Plural
Form 300
§ 104. Conjunctions 305
§ 105. Interjections 307
J
THIRD PART
SYNTAX
Chapter I. The Parts of Speech
I. Synteix of the Verb.
A. Use of the Tenses and Moods.
§ 106. Use of the Perfect 309
§107. Use of the Imperfect 313
§108. Use of the Cohortative 319
§109. Use of the Jussive 321
§ 110. The Imperative 324
§ 111. The Imperfect with Waw Consecutive 326
§ 112. The Perfect with Waw Consecutive 330
Contents xv
B. The Infinitive and Participle.
PAOE
§ 113. The Infinitive Absolute 339
§ 114, The Infinitive Construct 347
§ 115. Construction of the Infinitive Construct with Subject and
Object 352
§ 116. The Participles 355
C. The Government of the Verb.
§ 117. The Direct Subordination of the Noun to the Verb as
Accusative of the Object. The Double Accusative . . 362
§ 118. The Looser Subordination of the Accusative to the Verb . 372
§ 119. The Subordination of Nouns to the Verb by means of
Prepositions 377
§ 120. Verbal Ideas under the Government of a Verb. Co-ordination
of Complementary Verbal Ideas 385
§121. Construction of Passive Verbs 387
II. Syntax of the Noxin.
§122. Indication of the Gender of the Noun 389
§ 123. The Representation of Plural Ideas by means of Collectives,
and by the Repetition of Words 394
§ 124. The Various Uses of the Plural-Form 396
§ 125. Determination of Nouns in general. Determination of
Proper Names 401
§ 126. Determination by means of the Article 404
§ 127. The Noun determined by a following Determinate Genitive . 410
§ 128. The Indication of the Genitive Relation by means of the
Construct State , -414
§ 129. Expression of the Genitive by Circumlocution . . .419
§130. Wider Use of the Construct State 421
§ 131. Apposition 423
§132. Connexion of the Substantive with the Adjective . . . 427
§ 133. The Comparison of Adjectives. (Periphrastic expression of
the Comparative and Superlative) 429
§ 134. Syntax of the Numerals 432
III. Syntax of the Pronovm.
§ 135. The Personal Pronoun 437
§ 136. The Demonstrative Pronoun 442
§ 137. The Interrogative Pronoun 443
§ 138. The Relative Pronoun 444
§ 139. Expression of Pronominal Ideas by means of Substantives . 447
xvi Contents
Chapter II. The Sentence
I. The Sentence in General.
PAGE
§ 140. Noun- clauses, Verbal-clauses, and the Compound Sentence . 450
§ 141. The Noun-clause 451
§ 142. The Verbal-clause 455
§ 143. The Compound Sentence 457
§ 144. Peculiarities in the Representation of the Subject (especially
V in the Verbal-clause) 459
■J § 145. Agreement between the Members of a Sentence, especially
between Subject and Predicate, in r^pect of Gender and
Number 462
§ 146. Construction of Compound Subjects 467
§ 147. Incomplete Sentences 469
n. Special Kinds of Sentences.
§ 148. Exclamations 471
§ 149. Sentences which express an Oath or Asseveration . . .471
§ 150. Interrogative Sentences . 473
§ 151. Desiderative Sentences ... i ... . 476
§ 152. Negative Sentences 478
§ 153. Restrictive and Intensive Clauses 483
§ 154. Sentences connected by Waw 484
§ 155. Relative Clauses 485
§ 156. Circumstantial Clauses 489
§ 157. Object-clauses (Oratio Obliqua) 491
§ 158. Causal Clauses 492
§ 159. Conditional Sentences 493
§ 160. Concessive Clauses 498
§ 161. Comparative Clauses ........ 499
§ 162. Disjunctive Sentences 500
§ 163. Adversative and Exceptive Clauses 500
§ 164. Temporal Clauses 501
§ 165. Final Clauses 503
§ 166. Consecutive Clauses 504
§ 167. Aposiopesis, Anacoluthon, Involved Series of Sentences . 505
Paradigms 507
Index of Subjects 533
Index op Hebrew Words 544
Index of Passages 565
^
^
'it'-—
^
^^>fe
a r
P 5S
£= r
n ♦
J- •
•^ g
n -j^
n n
%
n
*
n
2S
*
J^
n
♦
n
f-
♦
^
n
•
c
n
??
a
*
♦
n
%
^
• ♦
jz n
« n
>^ .
• n
sc ^-
• n
n ^
r~
n ^
n
-j^
n
>^
r
13
n ♦
F C^
*- JZ
25
n
a
ci
,- n ^
o
e3
o
OQ
s
o
0)
a
s
^ £
o s
Si 3^
iS.i
^ a c
» o ■♦^
-*^ ._: a
00 o
« 5 *^
J3 -^ C
^ ^ 1—
c ^ -^^
S « a
pd ^ • s P
O
'3
in
' — ' «<-;
a
-4-*
» L^ cS
^ 2 -
"" is
S m
00 "1 ^J
IT -S ""
w • ?? -=
je.n o
^ fl *■ 2
o S >- '^ .„•
a, P « t^ -
2 b „• OS s
03 P<
p
o
*>
60
a
c
o
O
O
O
I— I
W
H
HEBREW GRAMMAR
INTRODUCTION
§ 1. The Semitic Languages in General.
B. Stade, Lehrh. der hebr. Gramm., Lpz. 1879, § 2 ff. ; E. KOnig, Rist.-krit.
Lehrgeb. der hebr. Spr., i. Lpz. 1881, § 3 ; H. Strack, EM. in das A. T., 6th ed.,
Munich, 1906, p. 231 ff. (a good bibliography of all the Semitic dialects) ;
Th, Noldeke, article 'Semitic Languages', in the 9th ed. of the Enqjcl. Brit.
{Die semit. Sprachen, 2nd ed., Lpz. 1899), and Beitr. sur sem. Sprachwiss., Strassb.,
1904 ; W. Wright, Lectures on (he Comparative Grariimar of the Semitic Languages,
Cambr. 1890 ; H. Reckendorf, ' Zur Karakteristik der sem. Sprachen,' in the
Actes du .X^' Congres internal, des Orientalistes (at Geneva in 1894), iii. i ff.,
Leiden, 1896 ; O. E. Lindberg, Vergl. Gramm. der sem. Sprachen, i A : Konsonan-
tismus, Gothenburg, 1897 ; H. Zimmern, Vergl. Gramm. der sem. Sprachen,
Berlin, 1898 ; E. KOnig, Hebrdisch und Semitisch : Prolegomena und Grundlinien
einer Gesch. der sem. Sprachen, &c., Berlin, 1901 ; C. Brockelmann, Semitische
Sprachwissenschaft, Lpz. 1906, Grundriss der vergl. Gramm. der sem. Sprachen,
vol. i (Laut- und Formenlehre), parts T-5, Berlin, 1907 f. and his Kurzgef.
vergleichende Gramm. (Porta Ling. Or.) Berlin, 1908. — The material contained
in inscriptions has been in process of collection since 1881 in the Paris
Corpus Inscripiionum Semiticarum. To this the best introductions are M. Lidz-
barski's Handbuch der Nordsem. Epigraphik, Weimar, 1898, in 2 parts (text and
plates), and his Ephemeris zur sem. Epigraphik (5 parts published), Giessen,
1900 f. [G. A. Cooke, Handbook of North-Semitic Inscriptions, Oxford, 1903].
1. The Hebrew language is one branch of a great family of Ian- CL
guages in Western Asia which was indigenous in Palestine, Phoenicia,
Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, Assyria, and Arabia, that is to say,
in the countries extending from the Mediterranean to the other side
of the Euphrates and Tigris, and from the mountains of Armenia to
the southern coast of Arabia. In early times, however, it spread from
Arabia over Abyssinia, and by means of Phoenician colonies over many
islands and sea-boards of ihe Mediterranean, as for instance to the
Carthaginian coast. No comprehensive designation is found in early
times for the languages and nations of this family ; the name Semites
or Semitic^ languages (based upon the fact that according to Gn lo^'*^'
almost all nations speaking these languages are descended from
Shem) is, however, now generally accepted, and has accordingly been
retained here.'^
' First used by SchlOzer in Eichhorn's Eepertorium fiir bibl. u. morgenl.
Liter atur, 1781, p. 16 1.
^ From Shem are derived (Gn 10*' ^•') the Aramaean and Arab families
as well as the Hebrews, but not the Canaanites (Phoenicians), who are traced
back to Ham (vv. s-'^ff), although their language belongs decidedly to what
is now called Semitic. The language of the Babylonians and Assyrians also
was long ago shown to be Semitic, just as ASSur (Gn 10'"') is included among
the sons of Shem.
COWLKY B
2 Introduction [§ i b-d
b 2. The better known Semitic languages may be subdivided' as
follows : —
L The South Semitic or Arabic branch. To this belong, besides
the classical literary language of the Arabs and the modern vulgar
Arabic, the older southern Arabic preserved in the Sabaean inscrip-
tions (less correctly called Himyaritic), and its offshoot, the Ge'ez or
Ethiopic, in Abyssinia.
II. The Middle Semitic or Canaanitish branch. To this belonjjs
the Hebrew of the Old Testament with its descendants, the New
Hebrew, as found especially in the Mishna (see below, § 3 a), and
Rabbinic; also Phoenician, with Punic (in Carthage and its colonies),
and the various remains of Canaanitish dialects preserved in names of
places and persons, and in the inscription of Mesa', king of Moab.
C III, The North Semitic or Aramaic branch. The subdivisions
of this are — (i) The Eastern Aramaic or Syriac, the literary language
of the Christian Syrians. The religious books of the Mandaeans
(Nasoraeans, Sabians, also called the disciples of St, John) represent
a very debased offshoot of this, A Jewish modification of Syriac is
to be seen in the language of the Pabylonian Talmud, (2) The
Western or Palestinian Aramaic, incorrectly called also ' Chaldee '.'^
This latter dialect is represented in the Old Testament by two words
in Gn 31^^, by the verse Jer 10", and the sections Dn 2* to 7^;
Ezr 4* to 6'*, and 7^2-26^ ^^ ^^jj ^g ^^y ^ number of non-Jewish
inscriptions and Jewish papyri (see below, under m), but especially
by a considerable section of Jewish literature (Targums, Palestinian
Gemara, &c.). To th* same branch belongs also the Samaritan, with
its admixture of Hebrew forms, and, except for the rather Arabic
colouring of the proper names, the idiom of the Nabataean inscriptions
in the Sinaitic peninsula, in the East of Palestine, &c.
For further particulars about the remains of Western Aramaic (including
those in the New Test,, in the Palmyrene and Egyptian Aramaic inscriptions)
see Kautzsch, Gramm. des Biblisch-Aramdischen, Lpz. 1884, p. 6 ff.
d IV. The East Semitic branch, the language of the Assyrio-
Babylonian cuneiform inscriptions, the third line of the Achaemenian
inscriptions.
On the importance of Assyrian for Hebrew philology especially from a
lexicographical point of view cf. Friedr. Delitzsch, Prolegomena eines neuen
* For conjectures as to the gradual divergence of the dialects (first the
Babylonian, then Canaanite, including Hebrew, lastly Aramaic and Arabic)
from primitive Semitic, see Zimmern, KAT.^, ii. p. 644 ff.
' In a wider sense all Jewish Aramaic is sometimes called ' Chaldee '.
§ I e,/] The Semitic Languages in General 3
hebr.-aram. Worterbuchs zum A. T., Lpz. 1886 ; P. Haupt, 'Assyrian Phonology,
&c.,' in Hehraica, Chicago, Jan. 1885, vol. i. 3 ; Delitzsch, Assyrische Grammatik,
2nd ed., Berlin, 1906.
If the above division into four branches be reduced to two principal
<,'roups, No. I, as South Semitic, will be contrasted with the three
North Semitic branches.'
All these langunges stand to one another in much the same relation as those g
of the Germanic family (Gothic, Old Norse, Danish, Swedish ; High and Low
German in their earlier and later dialects), or as the Slavonic languages
(Lithuanian, Lettish ; Old Slavonic, Serbian, Russian ; Polish, Bohemian).
They are now either wholly extinct, as the Phoenician and Assyrian, or
preserved only in a debased form, as Neo-Syriac among Syrian Christians
and Jews in Mesopotamia and Kurdistan, Ethiopic (Ge'ez) in the later
Abyssinian dialects (Tigre, Tigrina, Amharic), and Hebrew among some
modern Jews, except in so far as they attempt a purely literary x-eproduction
of the language of the Old Testament. Arabic alone has not only occupied
to this day its original abode in Arabia proper, but has also forced its way in
all directions into the domain of other languages.
The Semitic family of languages is bounded on the East and North by another
of still wider extent, which reaches from India to the western limits of
Europe, and is called Indo-Germanic^ since it comprises, in the most varied
ramifications, the Indian (Sanskrit), Old and New Persian, Greek, Latin,
Slavonic, as well as Gothic and the other Germanic languages. With the
Old Egyptian language, of which Coptic is a descendant, as well as with the
languages of north-western Africa, the Semitic had from the earliest times
much in common, especially in grammatical structure ; but on the other
hand there are fundamental differences between them, especially from a
lexicographical point of view ; see Erman, ' Das Verhaltnis des Aegyptischen
zu den semitischen Sprachen,' in the ZDMG. xlvi, 1892, p. 93 ff., and Brockel-
mann, Grundriss, i. 3.
3. The grammatical structure of the Semitic family of languages, f
as compared with that of other languages, especially the Indo-Gerraanic,
exhibits numerous peculiarities which collectively constitute its dis-
tinctive character, although many of them are found singly in other
languages. These are — (a) among the consonants, which in fact form
the substance of these languages, occur peculiar gutturals of different
grades ; the vowels are subject, within the same consonantal frame-
work, to great changes in order to express various modifications of
the same stem-meaning ; (ft) the word-stems are almost invariably
triliteral, i.e. composed of three consonants; (c) the verb is restricted
to two tense-forms, with a peculiarly regulated use ; {d) the noun
has only two genders (masc. and fern.) ; and peculiar expedients are
adopted for the purpose of indicating the case-relations ; (e) the
* Hommel, Grundriss der Geogr. und Gesch. des alten Orients, Munich, 1904,
p. 75 ff., prefers to distinguish them as Eastern and Western Semitic
branches. Their geographical position, however, is of less importance than
the genealogical relation of the various groups of dialects, as rightly pointed
out by A. Jeremias in Th.LZ. 1906, col. 291.
' First by Klaproth in Asia Polyglotia, Paris, 1823 ; of. Leo Meyer in Kach-
richien d. Gott, Gesellschaft, 1 901, p. 454.
B 2
4 Introduction [§ \ g-i
oblique cases of the personal pronoun, as well as all the possessive
pronouns and the pronominal object of the verb, are denoted by forms
appended directly to the governing word (suffixes) ; (/) the almost
complete absence of compounds both in the noun (with the exception
of many proper names) and in the verb ; {g) great simplicity in the
expression of syntactical relations, e. g. the small number of particles,
and the prevalence of simple co-ordination of clauses without periodic
structure. Classical Arabic and Syriac, however, form a not un-
important exception as regards the last-mentioned point,
g 4. From a lexicographical point of view also the vocabulary of the
Semites difiPers essentially from that of the Indo-Germanic languages,
although there is apparently more agreement here than in the grammar.
A considerable number of Semitic roots and stems agree in sound
with synonyms in the Indo-Germanic family. But apart from ex-
pressions actually borrowed (see below, under i), the real similarity
may be reduced to imitative words (onomatopoetica), and to those
in which one and the same idea is represented by similar sounds in
consequence of a formative instinct common to the most varied
families of language. Neither of these proves any historic or generic
relation, for which an agreement in grammatical structure would also
be necessary.
Comp. Friedr. Delitzsch, Siudien iiber indogennanisch-semitische Wurzelverwandt-
scha/t, Lpz. 1873; Neldechen, Semit. Glossen zu Fick und Curtius, Magdeb.
1876 f. ; McCurdy, AryoSemiiic Speech, Andover, U.S. A, 1881. The phonetic
relations have been thoroughly investigated by H. MOller in Semitisch und
Indogermanisch, Teil i, Konsotianten, Copenhagen and Lpz. 1907, a work which
has evoked considerable criticism.
h As onomatopoetic words, or as stem-sounds of a similar charactei*, we may
compare, e.g. piP, ^n? A.«»x<"» lingo, Skt. lih, Eng. to lick, Fr. lecher, Qerm.
lecken ; ?pa (cf. b^X, b^V) icv\i<u, volvo, Germ, quellen, wallen, Eng. to well ;
n^3 t^irij nin xapaTToi, Pers. khdridan, Ital. grattare, Fr. gratter, Eng. (0
grate, to scratch, Qerm. kraisen ; p^S frango, Germ, brechen, &c. ; Reuss, Gesch.
der hi, Schri/ten A.T.'s, Braunschw. 1881, p. 38, draws attention moreover
to the Semitic equivalents for earth, six, seivn, horn, to sound, to measure, to mix,
to smell, to place, clear, to kneel, raven, goat, ox, &c. An example of a somewhat
different kind is am, ham (saw), gam, ham, in the sense of the German samt,
zusammen, together; in Hebrew DDK (whence TXt^V, people, properly assembly), Q])
(with) samt, DS also, moreover, Arab. yii3 to coUect ; Pers. ham, hamah (at the
same time) ; Skt. soma (with), Gk. a/ia (afi<pai), d/xSi, d/xov (ofuKos, ofmSoi), and
harder koivSs, Lat. cum, cumulus, cunctus ; with the corresponding sibilant Skt.
sam, Gk. avv, (vv, (w6s = koiv6s, Goth, sama, Germ, samt, sammeln ; but many of
these instances are doubtful.
I Essentially different from this internal connexion is the occur-
rence of the same words in different languages, where one language
has borrowed directly from the other. Such loan-words are —
§ I i] The Semitic Languages in General 5
(a) In Hebrew: some names of objects which were originally indi-
genous in Babylonia and Assyria (see a comprehensive list of Assyrio-
Babylonian loan-words in the Hebrew and Aramaic of the Old Testament
in Zimmern and Winckler, KAT.^, ii. p. 648 flf.), in Egypt, Persia, or
India, e. g. ^N^ (also in the plural) river, from Egyptian yoor, generally as the
name of the Nile (late Egypt, yaro, Assyr. yaru'u), although it is possible that
a pure Semitic "IK"* has been confounded with the Egyptian name of the Nile
(so Zimmern) ; iriN (Egyptian) Nile-reed (see Lieblein, ' Mots 6gyptiens dans
la Bible,' in PSBA. 1898, p. 202 f.) ; DlJ^B (in Zend pairidaesa, circumvalla-
tion = ira/xiSetcros) pleasure-garden, park; p31*lN daric, Persian gold coin; C*?!'!
peacocks, perhaps from the Malabar togai or toghai. Some of these words are
also found in Greek, as DS"]? (Pers. karbds, Skt. karpdsa) cotton, Kap-naaoi,
carbasus. On the other hand it is doubtful if Pjip corresponds to the Greek
Kjjnoi, K^Bos, Skt. kapi, ape.
(b) In Greek, &c. : some originally Semitic names of Asiatic products and
articles of commerce, e. g. V^H /Svacros, byssus ; HSbp Xi^avos, \iBavaiT6s, incense ;
ri3p tcavT], K&wa, eanna, cane ; |D3 icvfuvov, cuminum, cumin ; njTifp Kaaaia,
cassia ; ?D3 KanrjXos, camelics ; P3"^y dppafidjv, arrhabo, anha, pledge. Such
transitions have perhaps been brought about chiefly by Phoenician trade.
Cf. A. Miiller, ' Semitische Lehnworte im alteren Griechisoh,' in Bezzen-
berger's Beitrage zur Kunde der Indo-germ. Sprachen, GSttingen, 1877, vol. i.
p. 273 ff. ; E. Ries, Quae res et vocabula a gentibus semiticis in Graeciam pervenerinf,
Breslau, 1890; Muss-Arnolt, 'Semitic words in Greek and Latin,' in the
Transactions 0/ the American Philological Association, xxiii. p. 35 flf. ; H. Lewy, Die
semitischen Fremdwbrter im Oriech., Berlin, 1895 ; J. H. Bondi, Dem hebr.-phoniz.
Sprachzweige angehor. Lehnworter in hieroglyph, m. hieratischen Texten, Lpz. 1886.
6. No system of writing is ever so perfect as to be able to reproduce k
the sounds of a language in all their various shades, and the writing
of the Semites has one striking fundamental defect, viz. that only the
consonants (which indeed form the substance of the language) are
written as real letters,^ whilst of the vowels only the longer are
indicated by certain representative consonants (see below, § 7).
It was only later that special small marks (points or strokes below
or above the consonants) were invented to represent to the eye all
the vowel-sounds (see § 8). These are, however, superfluous for
the practised reader, and are therefore often wholly omitted in
Semitic manuscripts and printed texts. Semitic writing, moreover,
almost invariably proceeds from right to left.'*
* So also originally the Ethiopic writing, which afterwards represented
the vowels by small appendages to the consonants, or by some other change
in their form. On the Assyrio-Babylonian cuneiform writing, which like-
wise indicates the vowels, see the next note, ad fin.
' The Sabaean (Himyaritic) writing runs occasionally from left to right,
and even alternately in both directions {boustrophedon^, but as a rule from
right to left. In Ethiopic writing the direction from left to right has become
the rule ; some few old inscriptions exhibit, however, the opposite direction.
The cuneiform writing also runs from left to right, but this is undoubtedly
borrowed from a non-Semitic people. Cf. § 5 d, note 3.
Introduction [§ 1 1,
m
With the exception of the Assyrio-Babylonian (cuneiform), all
varieties of Semitic writing, although differing widely in some respects,
are derived from one and the same original alphabet, represented on
extant monuments most faithfully by the characters used on the stele
of Mesa, king of Moab (see below, § 2 d), and in the old Phoenician
inscriptions, of which the bronze bowls from a temple of Baal
{CIS. i. 22 ff. and Plate IV) are somewhat earlier than Mesa'. The
old Hebrew writing, as it appears on the oldest monument, the Siloam
inscription (see below, § 2 d), exhibits essentially the same character.
The old Greek, and indirectly all European alphabets, are descended
from the old Phoenician writing (see § 5 i).
I See the Table of Alphabets at the beginning of the Grammar, which shows
the relations of the older varieties of Semitic writing to one another and
especially the origin of the present Hebrew characters from their primitive
forms. For a more complete view, see Gesenius' Scripturae linguaeque Phoeniciae
monumenta, Lips. 1837, 4to, pt. i. p. 15 ff., and pt. iii. tab. 1-5. From numerous
monuments since discovered, our knowledge of the Semitic characters,
especially the Phoenician, has become considerably enlarged and more
accurate. Cf. the all but exhaustive bibliography (from 1616 to 1896) in
Lidzbarski's Handbuch der Nordsemitischen Epigraphik, i. p. 4 ff , and on the
origin of the Semitic alphabet, ibid., p. I73ff., and Ephemeris (see the heading
of § I a above), i. pp. 109 ff., 142, 261 ff., and his ' Altsemitische Texte|, pt. i,
Kanaanaische Inschriften (Moabite, Old-Hebrew, Phoenician, Punic), Giessen,
ic)07. — On the origin and development of the Hebrew characters and the best
tables of alphabets, see § 5 a, last note, and especially §56.
7?l 6. As regards the relative age of the Semitic languages, the oldest
literary remains of them are to be found in the Assyrio-Babylonian
(cuneiform) inscriptions,' with which are to be classed the earliest
Hebrew fragments occurring in the old Testament (see § 2).
The earliest non-Jewish Aramaic inscriptions known to us are that
cf -|3T king of Hamath (early eighth cent. B.C.), on which see Nbldeke,
ZA. 1908, p. 376, and that found at Teima, in N. Arabia, in 1880,
probably of the fifth cent. b. c, cf. E. Littmann in the Monist, xiv. 4 [and
Cooke, op. cit., p. 195]. The monuments of Kalammus of Sam'al, in the
reign of Shalmanezer II, 859-829 B.C. (cf. A. Sanda, Die Aramaer, Lpz.
1902, p. 26), and those found in 1888-1891 at Zenjirli in N. Syria,
including the Hadad inscription of thirty-four lines (early eighth cent.
B.C.) and the Panamrau inscription (740 B.C.), are not in pure
Aramaic. The Jewish-Aramaic writings begin about the time of
Cyrus (cf. Ezr 6^ '^■), specially important being the papyri from Assuan
ed. by Sayce and Cowley, London, 1906 (and in a cheaper form by
Staerk, Bonn, 1907), which are precisely dated from 471 to 411 B.C.,
and three others of 407 B. c. ed. by Sachau, Berlin, 1907.
* According to Hilprecht, The Babylonian Expedition of the University of
Pennsylvania, i. p. ii ff., the inscriptions found at Nippur embrace the
period from about 4000 to 450 b. c.
§ I n] The Semitic Languages in General 7
Monuments of the Arahic brancli first appear in the earliest
centuries A. d. (Sabaean inscriptions, Ethiopic translation of the Bible
in the fourth or fifth century, North-Arabic literature from the sixth
century A. D.),
It is, however, another question which of these languages has
adhered longest and most faithfully to the original character of the
Semitic, and which consequently represents to us the earliest phase
of its development. For the more or less rapid transformation of the
sounds and forms of a language, as spoken by nations and races, is
dependent on causes quite distinct from the growth of a literature,
and the organic structure of a language is often considerably impaired
even before it has developed a literature, especially by early contact
with people of a difFerent language. Thus in the Semitic group,
the Aramaic dialects exhibit the earliest and greatest decay, next
to them the Hebrew-Canaanitish, and in its own way the Assyrian.
Arabic, owing to the seclusion of the desert tribes, was the longest
to retain the original fullness and purity of the sounds and forms
of words.^ Even here, however, there appeared, through the revolu-
tionary influence of Islam, an ever-increasing decay, until Arabic
at length reached the stage at which we find Hebrew in the Old
Testament.
Hence the phenomenon, that in its grammatical structure the ancient n
Hebrew agrees more with the modern than with the ancient Arabic, and
that the latter, although it only appears as a written language at a later
period, has yet in many respects preserved a more complete structure and
a more original vowel system than the other Semitic languages, cf. Noldeke,
' Das klassische Arabisch und die arabischen Dialekte,' in Beitrdge sur
semitischen Sprachwissenschaft, p. i ff. It thus occupies amongst them a
position similar to that which Sanskrit holds among the Indo-Germanic
languages, or Gothic in the narrower circle of the Germanic. But even the
toughest organism of a language often deteriorates, at least in single forms
and derivatives, while on the contrary, in the midst of what is otherwise
universal decay, there still remains here and there something original and
archaic ; and this is the case with the Semitic languages.
Fuller proof of the above statements belongs to the comparative Grammar
of the Semitic languages. It follows,however, from what has been said: (i) that
the Hebrew language, as found in the sacred literatureof the Jews, has, in respect
^ Even now the language of some of the Bfedawi is much purer and more
archaic than that of the town Arabs. It must, however, bo admitted that
the former exalted estimate of the primitiveness of Arabic has been moderated
in many respects by the most recent school of Semitic philology. Much
apparently original is to be regarded with Noldeke (7>je setnit. Spr,, p. 5
\_ = £nqjd. Brit., ed. 9, art. Semitic Languaoes, p. 642 J) only as a modification of
the original. The assertion that the Arabs exhibit Semitic characteristics in
their purest form, should, according to NOldeke, be rather that 'the in-
habitants of the desert lands of Arabia, under the influence of the
extraordinarily monotonous scenery and of a life continually the same amid
continual change, have developed most exclusively some of the principal
traits of the Semitic race ',
8 Introduction [§ 2 a, 6
to its organic structure, already suffered more considerable losses tlian the
Arabic, which appears much later on the historical horizon; (2) that, not-
withstanding this fact, we cannot at once and in all points concede priority
to the latter ; (3) that it is a mistake to consider with some that the Aramaic
on account of its simplicity (which is only due to the decay of its organic
structure), is the oldest form of Semitic speech.
§ 2. Sketch of the History of the Hebrew Language.
See Gesenius, Gesch. der kebr. Sprache u. Schrift, Lpz. 1815, §§ 5-18; Th.
Noldeke's art., ' Sprache, hebraische,' in Schenkel's Bibel-Lexikon, Bd. v, Lpz.
1875; F. Buhl, 'Hebraische Sprache,' in Hauck's Realencycl. fur prot. T/ieol.
und Kirche, vii (1899), p. 506 ff.; A. Cowley, ' Hebrew Language and Literature,'
in the forthcoming ed. of the Encycl. Brit. ; W. R. Smith in the Encyd. BiU.,
ii. London, 1901, p. 1984 ff.; A. Lukyn Williams, 'Hebrew,' in Hastings'
Did. of the Bible, ii. p. 335 ff., Edinb. 1899.
a 1. The name Hebrew Language usually denotes the language of the
sacred writings of the Israelites which form the canon of the Old
Testament, It is also called Ancient Hebrew in contradistinction to
the New Hebrew of Jewish writings of the post-biblical period (§ 3 a).
The name Hebrew language (nn^y fW^b yXC^a-a. twv 'E/3p<u(ov, k^paiari)
does not occur in the Old Testament itself. Instead of it we find in Is
1 9'* the term language of Canaan,^ and nn^n^ in the Jews' language
2 K i8^«-^ (cf. Is aa"'^') Neh 13^ In the last-cited passage it already
agrees with the later (post-exilic) usage, which gi-adually extended
the name Jews, Jewish to the whole nation, as in Haggai, Nehemiah,
and the book of Esther.
O The distinction between the names Hebrew (D"''1Iiy 'E0fMtoi) and Israelites
pN'lb'^ ^p2) is that the latter was rather a national name of honour, with
also a religious significance, employed by the people themselves, while the
former appears as the less significant name by which the nation was known
amongst foreigners. Hence in tlie Old Testament Hebrews are only cpoken
of either when the name is employed by themselves as contrasted with
foreigners (Gn 40", Ex 26 '• 3I8 &c., Jon !») or when it is put in the
mouth of those who are not Israelites (Gn 39"-" 41'^ &c.) or, finally,
when it is used in opposition to other nations (Gn 14" 4332, Ex 3"-" 21^).
In I S is^T and 14*' the text is clearly corrupt. In the Greek and
Latin authors, as well as in Josephus, the name 'Efipaioi, Hebraei,"
&c., alone occurs. Of the many explanations of the gentilic ^"12^, the
derivation from 13J? a country on the other side with the derivative suffix >__
{^8f>h) appears to be the only one philologically possible. The name
accordingly denoted the Israelites as being those who inhabited the 'eber, i. e.
the district on the other side of the Jordan (or according to others the
Euphrates), and would therefore originally be only appropriate when used
by the nations on this side of the Jordan or Euphrates. We must, then,
suppose that after the crossing of the river in question it had been retained
by the Abrahamidae as an old-established name, and within certain- limits
* That Hebrew in its present form was actually developed in Canaan
appears from such facts as the use of yam (sea) for the west, negeb (properly dry-
ness, afterwards as a proper name for the south of Palestine) for the south.
" The Gracco-Roman form of the name is not directly derived from the
Hebrew >"13y, but from the Palestinian Aramaic 'ebraya, ' the Hebrew.'
§ 2 c, rf] History of the Hebrew Language 9
(see above) had become naturalized among them. In referring this name to
the patronymic Eber, the Hebrew genealogists have assigned to it a much
more comprehensive signification. For since in Gn lo" (Nu 24^^* does not
apply) Shem is called the father of all the children of Eber, and to the latter
there also belonged according to Gn iii**^- and lo*"* *f- Aramean and Arab
races, the name, afterwards restricted in the form of the gentilic 'ibii
exclusively to the Israelites, must have originally included a considerably
larger group of countries and nations. The etymological significance of the
name must in that case not be insisted upon.^
The term efipcuari is first used, to denote the old Hebrew, in the prologue C
to Jesus the son of Sirach (about 130 B.C.), and in the New Testament, Rv
9". On the other hand it serves in Jn 5^^, 19^31'' perhaps also in jg"^" and
Kv 16'^ to denote what was then the (Aramaic) vernacular of Palestine as
opposed to the Greek. The meaning of the expression tBpah Std\tKTos in Acta
21*", 22^, and 26'* is doubtful (cf. Kautzsch, Gramm. des Bihl.-Aram., p. 19 f.).
Joseplius also uses the term Hebrew both of the old Hebrew and of the
Aramaic vernacular of his time.
The Hebrew language is first called the sacred language in the Jewish-
Aramaic versions of the Old Testament, as being the language of the sacred
books in opposition to the lingua jprofatia, i. e. the Aramaic vulgar tongue.
2. With the exception of the Old Testament (and apart from the u
Phoenician inscriptions ; see below, f--h), only very few remains of
old Hebrew or old Canaanitish literature have been preserved. Of
the latter — (i) an inscription, unfortunately much injured, of thirty-
four lines, which was found in the ancient territory of the tribe of
Reuben, about twelve miles to the east of the Dead Sea, among the
ruins of the city of Dibon (now Diban), inhabited in earlier times by
the Gadites, afterwards by the Moabites. In it the Moabite king
Mesa' (about 850 B.C.) recounts his battles with Israel (cf. 2 K 3'' "),
his buildings, and other matters.^ Of old Hebrew : (2) an inscription
^ We may also leave out of account the linguistically possible identification
of the 'Ibriyyim with the Habiri who appear in the Tell-elAmarna letters
(about 1400 B. c.) as freebooters and mercenaries in Palestine and its
neighbourhood.
* This monument, unique of its kind, was first seen in August, 1868, on
the spot, by the German missionary F. A. Klein. It vras aftei wards broken
into pieces by the Arabs, so that only an incomplete copy of the inscription
could be made. Most of the fragments are now in the Louvre in Paris.
For the history of the discovery and for the earlier literature relating to the
stone, see Lidzbarski, Nordsemitische Epigraphik, i. pp. 103 f, 415 f., and iu
the bibliography (under Me), p. 39 ff. The useful reproduction and trans-
lation of the inscription by Smend and Socin (Freiburg in Baden, 1886)
was afterwards revised and improved by Nordlander, Die Inschrift des
Konigs Mesa von Moab, Lpz. 1896 ; by Socin and Holzinger, 'Zur Mesainschrift'
{Berichte der K. Sdchsisclien Gesell. d. Wiss., Dec. 1897) ; and by Lidzbarski,
'Eine Nachpriifung der Mesainschiift' {Ephemeris, i. i, p. i flf. ; text in his
Altsemitische Texte, pt. i, Giessen, 1907) ; J. Hal6vy, Eevue Simitique, 1900,
pp. 236 ff., 289 ff., 1901, p. 2Q7 ff. ; M. J. Lagrange, Revue biblique Inter-
nationale, 1901, p. 522 ff.; F. Pratorius in ZDMG. 1905, p. 33 ff., 1906, p. 402.
Its genuineness was attacked by A. Lowy, Die Echtheit der Moabit, Inschr. im
Louvre (Wien, 1903), and G. Jahn in Das Buck Daniel, Lpz. 1904, p. 122 ff.
(also in ZDMG. 1905, p. 723 ff.), but without justification, as shown by
E. KOnig in ZDMG. 1905, pp. 233 ff. and 743 ff. [Cf. also Driver, Notes on the
Hebrew Text (if the Books of Samuel, Oxford, 1890, p. Ixxxv ff. ; Cooke, op. cit., p. i ff.]
lo Introduction C§ 2 e,/
of six lines (proLably of the eighth century b.c.^) discovered in June,
1880, in the tunnel between the Virgin's Spring and the Pool of
Siloam at Jerusalem ; (3) about forty engraved seal-stones, some of
them pre-exilic but bearing little except proper names '^ ; (4) coins
of the Maccabaean prince Simon (from ' the 2nd year of deliverance',
140 and 139 B.C.) and his successors,^ and the coinage of the revolts
in the times of Vespasian and Hadrian.
6 3. In the whole series of the ancient Hebrew writings, as found in
the Old Testament and also in non-biblical monuments (see above, d),
the language (to judge from its consonantal formation) remains, as
regards its general character, and apait from slight changes in form
and differences of style (see k to w), at about the same stage of
development. In this form, it may at an early time have been fixed
as a literary language, and the fact tliat the books contained in the
Old Testament were handed down as sacred writings, must have
contributed to this constant uniformity.
f To this old Hebrew, the language of the Canaanitish or Phoenician * stocks
•^ came the nearest of all the Semitic languages, as is evident partly from the
many Canaanitisli names of persons and places with a Hebrew form and
meaning which occur in the Old Testament (e.g. plSfiSpip, IDD H^lp^ &c. ;
^ Of this inscription — unfortunately not dated, but linguistically and palaeo-
graphically very important— referring to the boring of the tunnel, a facsimile
is given at the beginning of this grammar. See also Lidzbarski, Nordsemitische
Epigraphik, i. 105, 163, 439 (bibliography, p. 56 ff. ; facsimile, vol. ii, plate xxi,
1) ; on the new drawing of it by Socin {ZBPV. xxii. p. 61 ff. and separately
published at Freiburg i. B. 1899), see Lidzbarski, Ephemeris, i. 53 ff. and 310 f.
(text in Altsemit. Texte, p. 9 f.). Against the view of A. Fischer {ZDMG. 1902,
p. 800 f.) that the six lines are the continuation of an inscription which
was never executed, see Lidzbarski, Ephemeris, ii. 71. The inscription was
removed in 1890, and broken into six or seven pieces in the process. It has
since been well restored, and is now in the Imperial Museum at Constan-
tinople. If, as can hardly be doubted, the name T\Vp (i. e. emissio) Is 8®
refers to the discharge of water from the Virgin's Spring, through the tunnel
(so Stade, Gesch. Isr. i. 594), then the latter, and consequently the inscrip-
tion, was already in existence about 736 b. c. [Cf. Cooke, op. cit, p. 15 ff.]
* M. A. Levy, Siegel u. Gemmen, dec, Bresl. 1869, p. 33 ff. ; Stade, ZAW.
1897, p. 501 ff. (four old-Semitic seals published in 1896) ; Lidzbarski,
Handbuch, i. 169 f. ; Ephemei-is, i. 10 ff. ; W. Nowack, Lehrb. d. kebr. Archaol.
(^Freib. 1894), i. 262 f. ; I. Benzinger, Hebr. Archaol.'^ (Tubingen, 1907),
pp. 80, 225 ff., which includes the beautiful seal inscribed Cy^"!'' IDV J?CK'^
from the castle-hill of Megiddo, found in 1904 ; [Cooke, p. 363].
* De Saulcy, Numismatique de la Terre Sainte, Par. 1874; M. A. Levy, Gesch.
der jud. Miinzen, Breslau, 1862; Madden, The Coins of the Jews, Lond. 1881 ;
Reinach, Les monnaies juives, Paris, 1888. — Cf. the literature in Schiirer's
Gesch. dcs jiid.Volkes im Zeitalter J, C, Lpz. 1901, i. p. 20 ff. ; [Cooke, p. 352 ff.].
* |y?3, ^P_V?3 is the native name, common both to the Canaanitish tribes in
Palestine and to those which dwelt at the foot of the Lebanon and on the
Syrian coast, whom we call Phoenicians, while they called themselves fV3D
on their coins. The people of Carthage also called themselves so.
§ 2 J7-0 History of the Hebrew Language 1 1
on 'Canaanite glosses '^ to Assyrian words in the cuneiform tablets of
Tell-el-Amarna [about 1400 b. c] cf. H. Winekler, ' Die Thontafeln von Tell-
el-Amarna,' in Keilinschr. Bibliothek, vol. v, Berlin, 1896 f. [transcription
and translation] ; J. A. Knudtzon, Die El-Amarna-Tafeln, Lpz. 1907 f. ;
H. Ziramern, ZA. 1891, p. 154 S. and KAT.^, p. 651 ff.), and partly from the
numerous remains of the Phoenician and Punic languages.
The latter we find in their peculiar writing (§ i k, I) in a great number of
inscriptions and on coins, copies of which have been collected by Gesenius,
Judas, Bourgade, Davis, de Vogiie, Levy, P. Schroder, v. Maltzan, Euting,
but especially in Part I of the Corpus Inscriptionum Semiticarum, Paris, 1881 If.
Among the inscriptions but few public documents are found, e.g. two lists
of fees for sacrifices ; by far the most are epitaphs or votive tablets. Of
special importance is the inscription on the sarcophagus of King Esmunazar
of Sidon, found in 1855, now in the Louvre; see the bibliography in
Lidzbarski, Nordsem. Epigr., i. 23 fif. ; on the inscription, i. 97 fif"., 141 f-,
417, ii. plate iv, 2 ; [Cooke, p. 30 ff.]. To these may be added isolated words
in Greek and Latin authors, and the Punic texts in Plautus, Poenulus 5, 1-3
(best treated by Gildemeister in Eitschl's edition of Plautus, Lips. 1884,
torn, ii, fasc. 5). From the monuments we learn the native orthography,
from the Greek and Latin transcriptions the pronunciation and vocalization ;
the two together give a tolerably distinct idea of the language and its relation
to Hebrew.
Phoenician (Punic) words occurring in inscriptions are, e. g. PK God, g
DIN man, p son, T)2 daughter, "^PO king, IDJJ servant, |n3 priest, riQT sacrifice,
7V2 lord, tfCB' sun, J'lK land, D*" sea, pK stone, 5)03 silver, 7t~0 iron, \C^ oil,
ny time, ^p grave, DiifO monument, DpD place, 33tJ'D bed, ^3 all, TnS one,
CJK' two, B'^K' three, ynnx four, ^DJI five, B'B' six, yaC seven, "iK'y ten,
p ( = Hebr. rTTl) to be, yOiJ' to hear, nflB to open, "113 to vow, "^IH to bless,
tJ'pa to seek, &c. Proper names : pjf Sidon, 12? Tyre, X3n Hanno, py33n
Hannibal, &c. See the complete vocabulary in Lidzbarski, Nordsem. Epigr.,
i. 204 ff.
Variations from Hebrew in Phoenician orthography and inflection are, h
e.g. the almost invariable omission of the vowel letters (§ 7 b), as n3 for IT'S
hmse, ^p for bSp voice, pX for ]\T'^^ DJn3 for Qianij) priests, D3^N (in Plant.
alonim) gods ; the fem., even in the absolute state, ending in n {ath) (§ 80 h)
as well as K (6), the relative tJ'K (Hebr. "IK'X), &c. The differences in pro-
nunciation are more remarkable, especially in Punic, where the i was
regularly pronounced as m, e. g. tDBCJ' siijet (judge), E'/B' salus (three), B'T
ms = K'X") head ; i and e often as the obscure dull sound of y, e.g. ^3311 ynnynnu
(occe eum), m (D^N) yth; the y as 0, e.g. -\p)}Ki Mocar (cf. nijjo LXX,
Gn 22^* Mcyx<i). See the collection of the grammatical peculiarities in
Gesenius, Monumenta Phoenicia, p. 430 ff. ; Paul Schroder, Die phoniz. Sprache,
Halle, 1869; B. Stade, 'Erneute Priifung des zwischen dem PhOnic. und
Hebr. bestehenden Verwandtschaftsgrades,' in the Morgenldnd. Forschungen,
Lpz. 1875, p. 169 ff.
4. As the Hebrew writing ou monuments and coins mentioned I
in d consists only of consonants, so also the writers of the Old
* Cf. inter alia : aparu, also haparu (Assyr. epru, ipru) = "IDy ; huUu = p'y
(with hard y ; cf. § 6 c, and Assyr. humri = '^yO'^ , hazzatu = T\\^) ; iazkur =
"laV, zuruhu = ^'\'li] , abadat = rtTza , saftrt = lytj', gate; fca/nw = |t33, belly;
kiliibi = 31^3, net ; saduk ^ phx (P^"^?) . Slc. [Cf. BOhl, Die Sprache d. Amarnabrie/e,
Lpz. 1909.]
12 Introduction [§ 2 h-m
Testament books used merely the consonant-signs (§ i k), and even
now the written scrolls of the Law used in the synagogues must not,
according to ancient custom, contain anything more. The present
pronunciation of this consonantal text, its vocalization and accentua-
tion, rest on the tradition of the Jewish schools, as it was finally fixed
by the system of punctuation (§ 7 h) introduced by Jewish scholars
about the seventh century A. D. ; cf. § 3 h.
h An earlier stage in the development of the Canaftnitish-Hebrew
language, i.e. a form of it anterior to the written documents now
extant, when it must have stood nearer to the common language of
the united Semitic family, can still be discerned in its principal
features: — (i) from many archaisms preserved in the traditional
texts, especially in the names of persons and places dating from
earlier times, as well as in isolated forms chiefly occurring in poetic
style ; (2) in general by an a 2)ostenori conclusion from traditional
forms, so far as according to the laws and analogies of phonetic
change they clearly point to an older phase of the language ; and
(3) ^y comparison with the kindred languages, especially Arabic, in
which this earlier stage of the language has been frequently preserved
even down to later times (§ i m, n)- In numerous instances in
examining linguistic phenomena, the same — and consequently so much
the more certain — result is attained by each of these three methods.
Although the systematic investigation of the linguistic development in-
dicated above belongs to comparative Semitic philology, it is nevertheless
indispensable for the scientific treatment of Hebrew to refer to the ground-
forms ' so far as they can be ascertained and to compare the corresponding
forms in Arabic. Even elementary grammar which treats of the forms of the
language occurring in the Old Testament frequently requires, for their
explanation, a reference to these ground-forms.
/ 6. Even in the language of the Old Testament, notwithstanding
its general uniformity, there is noticeable a certain progress from
an earlier to a later stage. Two periods, though with some
reservations, may be distinguished : the Jirist, down to the end of the
Babylonian exile ; and the second, after the exile.
Tfl To the former belongs, apart from isolated traces of a later
revision, the larger half of the Old Testament books, viz. (a) of the
prose and historical writings, a large part of the Pentateuch and
of Joshua, Judges, Samuel, and Kings ; (6) of the poetical, perhaps
1 Whether those can be described simply as 'primitive Semitic' is a
question which may be left undecided here.
§ 2 n-g] History of the Hebrew Language 13
a part of the Psalms and Proverbs ; (c) the writings of the earlier
prophets (apart from various later additions) in the following chrono-
logical order : Amos, Hosea, Isaiah I, Micah, Nahum, Zephaniah,
Habakkuk, Obadiah (?), Jeremiah, Ezekiel, Isaiah 11 (eh. 40-55).
The beginning of this period, and consequently of Hebrew literature W
generally, is undoubtedly to be placed as early as the time of Moses, although
the Pentateuch in its present form, in which very different strata may be
still clearly recognized, is to be regarded as a gradual production of the
centuries after Moses. Certain linguistic peculiarities of the Pentateuch,
which it was once customary to regard as archaisms, such as the epicene
use of nyj hoy, youth, for nly3 girl, and NIH for KTI, are merely to be attributed
to a later redactor ; cf. § 1 7 c.
The linguistic character of the various strata of the Pentateuch has been O
examined by Ryssel, Ue Elohistae Pentaieuchici sermone, Lpz. 1878; KOnig, Be
criticae saa-ae argumento e linguae legihus repetito, Lpz. 1879 (analysis of Gn i-ii) ;
F. Giesebrecht, 'Der Sprachgebr. des hexateuchischen Elohisten,' in ZAW.
1881, p. 177 flf., partly modified by Driver in the Journal of Philology, vol. xi.
p. 201 fif. ; Krautlein, Die sprachl. Verschiedenheiten in den Hexateuchquellen, Lpz.
1908. — Abundant matter is afforded also by Holzinger, Einleitung in den
Hexateuch, Freib. 1 893 ; Driver, Introduction to the Literature of the Old Testament *,
Edinburgh, 1908 ; Strack, Einleitung ins A. T.^, Munich, 1906 ; KOnig,
Einleitung in das A. T., Bonn, 1 893.
6. Even in the writings of this first period, which embraces w
about 600 years, we meet, as might be expected, with considerable
differences in linguistic form and style, which are due partly to
differences in the time and place of composition, and partly to the
individuality and talent of the authors. Thus Isaiah, for example,
writes quite differently from the later Jeremiah, but also differently
from his contemporary Micah. Amongst the historical books of
this period, the texts borrowed from earlier sources have a linguistic
colouring perceptibly different from those derived from later sources,
or passages which balong to the latest redactor himself. Yet the
structure of the language, and, apart from isolated cases, even
the vocabulary and phraseology, are on the whole the same, especially
in the prose books.
But the poetic language is in many ways distinguished from ^
prose, not only by a rhythm due to more strictly balanced (parallel)
members and definite metres (see r), but also by peculiar words
and meanings, inflexions and syntactical constructions which it uses
in addition to those usual in prose. This distinction, however, does
not go far as, for example, in Greek. Many of these poetic pecu-
liarities occur in the kindred languages, especially in Aramaic, as
the ordinary modes of expression, and probably are to be regarded
largely as archaisms which poetry retained. Some perhaps, also, are
14 Introduction [§ 2 r
embellishments which the Hebrew poets who knew Aramaic adopted
into their language.^
The prophets, at least the earlier, in language and rhythm are to
be regarded almost entirely as poets, except that with them the
sentences are often more extended, and the parallelism i? less regular
and balanced than is the case with the poets properly so called. The
language of the later prophets, on the contrary, approaches nearer
to prose.
/• On the rhythm of Hebrew poetry, see besides the Commentaries on the
poetical books and Introductions to the O.T., J. Ley, Grundzuge des Bhythmus,
<rc, Halle, 1875 ; Leitfaden der Metrik der hebr. Poesie, Halle, 1887 ; 'Die metr.
Beschaffenheit des B. Hiob,' in Theol. Stud. u. Krit, 1895, iv, 1897, i ; Grimme_,
'Abriss der bibl.-hebr. Metrik,' ZDMG. 1896, p. 529 flf., 1897, p. 683 ff. ;
Psalmenprobleme, &c., Freiburg (Switzerland), 1902 (on which see Beer in
ThLZ. 1903, no. 11); 'Gedanken iiber hebr. Metrik,' in Altschiiler's Viertel-
jahrschrift, i (1903), I ff. ; DSller, Bhythmus, Metrik u. Strophik in d. bibl.-hebr.
Poesie, Paderborn, 1899; Schloegl, De re metrica veterum Hebraeorum dispuiatio,
Vindobonae, 1899 (on the same lines as Grimme) ; but especially Ed. Sievers,
Metrische Studien : i Studien sur hebr. Metrik, pt. I Vntersuchungen, pt. 2 Textproben,
Lpz. 1901 : ii Bie hebr. Genesis, i Texle, 2 Zur Quellenscheidung u. Texikritik, Lpz.
1904 f. : iii Samuel, Lpz. 1907 ; Amos metrisch bearbeitet (with H. Guthe), Lpz.
1907 ; and his AUtest. Miszellen (i Is 24-27, 2 Jona, 3 Deutero-Zechariah,
4 Malachi, 5 Hosea, 6 Joel, 7 Obadiah, 8 Zephaniah, 9 Haggai, 10 Micah),
Lpz. 1904-7. — As a guide to Sievers' system (with some criticism of his
principles see Baumann, ' Die Metrik u. das A.T.,' in the Theol. Rundschau, viii
(1905), 41 ff. ; W. H. Cobb, A criticism of systems of Hebrew Metre, Oxford, 1905 ;
Cornill, Einleitung ins A.T.^, Tiibingen, 190-;, p.. 11 ff. ; Rothstein, Zeitschr.
fur d. ev. Bel.-Unterricht, 1907, p. 188 ff. and his Grundziige des hebr. Rhythmus,
Lpz. 1909 (also separately Psalmentexte u. der Text des Hohen Liedes, Lpz. 1909) ;
W. R.Arnold, 'The rhythms of the ancient Heb.,' in 0. T. and Semitic Studies
in memory of W. R. Harper, i. 165 ff., Chicago, 1907, according to whom the
number of syllables between the beats is only limited by the physiological
possibilities of phonetics ; C. v. Orelli, ' Zur Metrik der alttest. Propheten-
schriften,' in his Kommentar su den kl. Propheten^, p. 236 ff., Munich, 1908. —
In full agreement with Sievers is Baethgen, Psalmen^, p. xxvi ff., GSttingen,
1904. [Cf. Budde in DB. iv. 3 ff. ; Duhm in EB. iii. 3793 ff.]
Of all views of this matter, the only one generally accepted as sound was
at first Ley's and Budde's discovery of the Qina- or Lamentation-Verse {ZAW.
1882, 5ff ; 1891, 234 ff. ; 1892, 31 ff.). On their predecessors, Lowth, de
Wette, Ewald, see LOhr, Klagelied^, p. 9. This verse, called by Duhm * long
verse ', by Sievers simply ' five-syllabled ' (Fiinfer), consists of two members,
the second at least one beat shorter than the other. That a regular repetition
of an equal number of syllables in arsis and thesis was observed by other
poets, had been established by Ley, Duhm, Gunkel, Grimme, and others,
especially Zimmern, who cites a Babylonian hymn in which the members
are actually marked {ZA. x. i ff., xii. 382 ff. ; cf. also Delitzsch, Das babyl.
Weltschopfungsepos, Lpz. 1896, pp. 60 ff.). Recently, however, E. Sievers, the
recognized authority on metre in other branches of literature, has indicated,
in the works mentioned above, a number of fresh facts and views, which
have frequently been confirmed by the conclusions of Ley and others. The
most important are as follows : —
Hebrew poetry, as distinguished from the quantitative Classical and Arabic
^ That already in Isaiah's time (second half of the eighth century b. c.)
educated Hebrews, or at least oflScers of state, understood Aramaic, while
the common people in Jerusalem did not, is evident from 2 K x8'^* (Is 36^'_).
§ 2 s] History of the Hebrew Language 15
and the syllabic Syriac verse, is accentual. The number of unstressed
syllables between the beats {ictus) is, however, not arbitrary, but the scheme
of the verse is based on an irregular anapaest which may undergo rhythmical
modifications (e. g. resolving the ictus into two syllables, or lengthening the
arsis so as to give a double accent) and contraction, e. g. of the first two
syllables. The foot always concludes with the ictus, so that toneless endings,
■due to change of pronunciation or corruption of the text, are to be dis-
regarded, although as a rule the ictus coincides with the Hebrew word-
accent. The metrical scheme consists of combinations of feet in series (of 2,
3 or 4), and of these again in periods — double threes, very frequently, double
fours in narrative, fives in Lamentations (see above) and very often else-
where, and sevens. Sievers regards the last two metres as catalectic double
threes and fours. Connected sections do not always maintain the same
metre throughout, but often exhibit a mixture of metres.
It can no longer be doubted that in the analysis of purely poetical
passages, this system often finds ready confirmation and leads to textual and
literary results, such as the elimination of glosses. There are, however,
various difficulties in carrying out the scheme consistently and extending it
to the prophetical writings and still more to narrative : (i) not infrequently
the required number of feet is only obtained by sacrificing the clearly
marked parallelism, or the grammatical connexion (e. g. of the construct
state with its genitive), and sometimes even by means of doubtful emenda-
tions; (2) the whole system assumes a correct transmission of the text and
its pronunciation, for neither of which is there the least guarantee. To sum
up, our conclusion at present is that for poetry proper some assured and
final results have been already obtained, and others may be expected,
from the principles laid down by Sievers, although, considering the way in
which the text has been transmitted, a faUltless arrangement of metres can-
not be expected. Convincing proof of the consistent use of the same metrical
schemes in the prophets, and a fortiori in narrative, can hardly be brought
forward.
The great work of D. H. Miiller, Bie Propheten in ihrer urspmngl. Form (2 vols.,
Vienna, 1896 ; cf. his Strophenbau u. Responsion, ibid. 1898, and Komposition u.
Strophenhau, ibid. 1907), is a study of the most important monuments of
early Semitic poetry from the point of view of strophic structure and the
use of the refrain, i. e. the repetition of the same or similar phrases or words
in corresponding positions in different strophes.
The arrangement of certain poetical passages in verse-form required by
early scribal rules (Ex 15^-"; Dt 32I-" ; Ju 5 ; i S 21-'"; 2 S 22, 231-^; ^
18, 136; Pr. si'o-si; I Ch \(,^-^^ : cf. also Jo 129-2* ; gg 32-8. Est9'-'»)has
nothing to do with the question of metre in the above sense.
Words are used in poetry, for which others are customary in prose, e. g. ,
KnJS Mian = DIN: mx jpa^A = TITI ; n^» toord = ini: TWU to see=-T\Vir\ ; nflN
V: T T ' ~ ••.•;•' T • T T ' TT T 7 T T
to coTOe = N^2.
To the poetic meanings of words belongs the use of certain poetic epithets as
substantives ; thus, for example, TiiN (only in constr. st. "lON) the strong one
for Qod ; 1''3N the strong one for bull, horse ; n33p alba for luna ; IJf enemy for
Of word-forms, we may note, e.g. the longer forms of prepositions of place
(§ 103 n) \by = i'y, \bN = ^N, ny=ny; the endings ^__, i in the noun (§ 90) ;
the pronominal sufBxes 10, ilO_L, iD_l for D, D D (§ 58) ; the plural
ending p__ for D"" (§ 87 e). To the syntax belongs the far more sparing
use of the article, of the relative pronoun, of the accusative particle riN ; the
constinict state even before prepositions ; the shortened imperfect with the
same meaning as the ordinary form (§ 109 i) ; the wider governing power of
prepositions ; and in general a forcible brevity of expression.
i6 Introduction [§ 2 t-v
t 7. The second period of the Hebrew language and literature,
after the return from the exile until the Maccabees (about 160 B.C.),
is chiefly distinguished by a constantly closer approximation of the
language to the kindred western Aramaic dialect. This is due to the
influence of the Aramaeans, who lived in close contact with the recent
and thinly-populated colony in Jerusalem, and whose dialect was
already of importance as being the official language of the western
half of the Persian empire. Nevertheless the supplanting of Hebrew
by Aramaic proceeded only very gradually. Writings intended for
popular use, such as the Hebrew original of Jesus the son of Sirach
and the book of Daniel, not only show that Hebrew about 170 b.c.
was still in use as a literary language, but also that it was still at
least understood by the people.^ When it had finally ceased to exist
as a living language, it was still preserved as the language of the
Schools — not to mention the numerous Hebraisms introduced into the
Aramaic spoken by the Jews.
For particulars, see Kautzsch, Gramm. des Bibl.-Aram., pp. i-6. We may
conveniently regard the relation of the languages v^hich* co-existed in this
later period as similar to that of the Higli and Low German in North
Germany, or to that of the High Gei-man and the common dialects in the
south and in Switzerland. Even amongst the more educated, the common
dialect prevails orally, whilst the High German serves essentially as the
literary and cultured language, and is at least understood by all classes
of the people. "Wholly untenable is the notion, based on an erroneous
interpretation of Neh 8*, that the Jews immediately after the exile had com-
pletely forgotten the Hebrew language, and therefore needed a translation
of the Holy Scriptures.
U The Old Testament writings belonging to this second period, in
all of which the Aramaic colouring appears in various degrees, are :
certain parts of the Pentateuch and of Joshua, Ruth, the books of Ezra,
Nehemiah, Chronicles, Esther; the prophetical books of Haggai,
Zechariah, Isaiah 111(56-66), Malachi, Joel, Jonah, Daniel; of the poet-
ical books, a large part of Proverbs, Job, Song of Songs, Ecclesiastes,
and most of the Psalms. As literary compositions, these books are some-
times far inferior to those of the first period, although work was still
produced which in purity of language and aesthetic value falls little
short of the writings of the golden age.
D Later words (Aramaisms) are, e.g. niPIK declaration, D3N compel, 13 son,
yi chalk, |Dt = D}} time, 5]|5T raise up, *lDn Pi. reproach, i>^J3 Pi. roof over,
* The extensive use of Hebrew in the popular religious literature which
is partly preserved to us in the Midrasim, the Misna, and the Liturgy,
indicates, moreover, that Hebrew was widely understood much later than
this. Cf. M. H. Segal, ' ML^naic Hebrew and its relations to Biblical Hebrew
and Aramaic,' in J. Q. R., 1908, p. 647 ff. (also separately).
§§ i w, 3 a] History of the Hebrew Language 17
nyO stray, 5)3 rock, "]^0 a^frtse, PliD = }^i5 end, b3p = ni5b tafte, yjn = }^Xn J^rea/t,
N3E' 6e wiany, tD7B' = ^5J3 '■"fe; ^P.''^ = n?^ ^^ strong. — Later meanings are, e.g.
ipN (to say) to command ; njy (to answer) to begin speaking. — Orthographical
and grammatical peculiarities are, the frequent scriptio plena of S and ''__
e. g. l>n' (elsewhere IH), even E'Tp for tJ'lp, 311 for 31 ; the interchange
of n and N final ; the more frequent use of substantives in |i | n^
&c. Cf. Dav. Strauss, Sprachl. Studien zu d. hebr. Sirach/ragmenten, Zurich, 1900,
p. 19 ff. ; for the Psalms Choyne, Origin of the Psalter, p. 461 S., and especially
Giesebrecht in ZAW. 1881, p. 276 ff. ; in general, Kautzsch, Die Aramaismen
im A. T. (i, Lexikal. Teil), Halle, 1902,
But all the peculiarities of these later writers are not Aramaisms. Several
ilo not occur in Aramaic and must have belonged at an earlier period to
the Hebrew vernacular, especially it would seem in northern Palestine.
There certain parts of Judges, amongst others, may have originated, as is
indicated, e.g. by •£J', a common form in Phoenician (as well as l^N), for
"It^X (§ 36), which afterwards recurs in Jonah, Lamentations, the Song of
Songs, the later Psalms, and Ecclesiastes.
Rem. I. Of dialectical varieties in the old Hebrew language, only one W
express mention occurs in the 0. T. (Ju 12*), according to which the
Ephraimites in certain cases pronounced the B' as D. (Cf. Marquart in
ZAW. 1888, p. 151 ff.) Whether in Neh 13^* by the speech of Ashdod a Hebrew,
or a (wholly different) Philistine dialect is intended, cannot be determined.
On the other hand, many peculiarities in the North Palestinian hooks
(Judges and Hosea) are probably to be regarded as differences in dialect,
and so also some anomalies in the Moabite inscription of Mesa' (see above, d).
On later developments see L. Metman, Die hebr. Sprache, ihre Geschichte u.
lexikal. Enticickelung seit Abschluss des Kanons u. ihr Bau in d. Gegenwart,
Jerusalem, 1906.
2. It is evident that, in the extant remains of old Hebrew literature, ^ the
entire store of the ancient language is not preserved. The canonical books
of the Old Testament formed certainly only a fraction of the whole Hebrew
national literature.
§ 3. Grammatical Treatment of the Hebrew Language.
Gesenius, Gesch. derhebr. Sprache, §§ 19-39 ; Oehler's article, 'Hebr. Sprache,'
in Schmid's Encykl. des ges. Erziehungs- u. Unterrichtswesens, vol. iii. p. 346 ff.
(in the 2nd ed. revised by Nestle, p. 314 ff.). Cf. also the literature cited
above in the headings of §§ 1 and 2 ; also BOttcher, Lehrb. der hebr. Spr., i. Lpz.
1866, p. 30 ff. ; L. Geiger, Das Studium der Hebr. Spr. in Deutschl. vom Ende des
XV. bis zur Mitte des XVI. Jahrh., Breslau, 1870 ; B. Pick, 'The Study of the
Hebrew Language among Jews and Christians,' in Bibliotheca Sacra, 1884,
p. 450 ff., and 1885, p. 470 ff. ; W. Bacher, article 'Grammar' in the Jew.
Encyclopaedia, vol. vi, N«w York and London, 1904. Cf. also the note on d.
1. At the time when the old Hebrew language was gradually a
becoming extinct, and the formation of the O. T. canon was
1 Tl^ in the Minor Prophets throughout (Ho 3', &c.) is due merely to
a caprice of the Masoretes,
2 According to the calculation of the Dutch scholar Leusden, the 0. T.
contains 5,642 different Hebrew and Aramaic words; according to rabbinical
calculations, 79,856 altogether in the Pentateuch. Cf. also E. Nestle, ZAW,
1906, p. 2S^3 ; H. Strack, ZAW. 1907, p. 69 ff. ; Blau, ' Neue masoret. Studien,'
in JQR. xvi. 357 ff., treats of the number of letters and words, and the ve se-
division in the 0. T.
COWLET c.
1 8 Introduction [§36
approaching completion, the Jews began to explain and critically
revise their sacred text, and sometimes to translate it into the
vernacular languages which in various countries had become current
among them. The oldest translation is the Greek of the Seventy
(more correctly Seventy-two) Interpreters (LXX), which was begun
with the Pentateuch at Alexandria under Ptolemy Philadelphus, but
only completed later. It was the work of various authoi's, some of
whom had a living knowledge of the original, and was intended for
the use of Greek-speaking Jews, especially in Alexandria. Somewhat
later the Aramaic translations, or Targums (D''0^3iri i, e. interpreta-
tions), were foi'med by successive recensions made in Palestine and
Babylonia. The explanations, derived in part from alleged tradition,
refer almost exclusively to civil and ritual law and dogmatic theology,
and are no more scientific in character than much of the textual
tradition of that period. Both kinds of tradition are preserved
in the Talmud, the first part of which, the Misna, was finally brought
to its present form towards the end of the second century ; of the
remainder, the Gemara, one recension (the Jerusalem or Palestinian
Gem.) about the middle of the fourth century, the other (the Babylo-
nian Gem.) about the middle of the sixth century a.d. The Mi§na
forms the beginning of the New-Hebrew literature; the language of
the Gemaras is for the most part Aramaic.
b 2. To the interval between the completion of the Talmud and
the earliest grammatical writers, belong mainly the vocalization and
accentuation of the hitherto unpointed text of the 0. T., according to
the pronunciation traditional in the Synagogues and Schools (§ 7 h, i),
as well as the greater part of the collection of critical notes which
bears the name of Masora (•^'jiOO traditio 1).^ From this the text
which has since been transmitted with rigid uniformity by the MSS.,
' On the name Masora (or Massora, as e.g. E. KSnig, Einleitung in das A. T..
p. 38 fif. ; Lehrgeb. d. hebr. Sprache, ii. 358 fif.), and the great difficulty of satis-
factorily explaining it, cf. De Lagarde, Mitleilungen, i. 91 S. W. Bacher's
derivation of the expression (in JQR. 1891, p. 785 ff. ; so also C. Levias in
the Hebrew Union College Annual, Cincinnati, 1904, p. 147 ff.) from Ee 20"
(JT'l^n n"lDD ; moo, i.e. iTJpiD, being an equally legitimate form) is
rightly rejected by Konig, 1. c. The correctness of the form niDD (by the
side of the equally well-attested form JTIDIO) does not seem to us to be
invalidated by his arguments, nor by Blau's proposal to read D^iDD {JQK. xii.
241). The remark of Levias (I.e.) deserves notice, that with the earlier Masoretes
miDD is equivalent to orthography, i. e. plene- and defective writing, and only
later came to mean traditio. — G. Wildboer, in ZAW. 1909, p. 74, contends
that as ">DD to hand on is not found in the O.T., it must be a late denomina-
tive in this sense.
§3c,rf] Grammatical Treatment of the Language 19
and is still the received text of the O.T., has obtained the name of the
Masoretic Text.
E. F. K. Rosenmiiller already (Handbuch fiir d. Liter, der bibl. Kritik u. C
Exegese, 1797, i. 247; Vorrede sur Stereotyp-Ausg. des A. T., Lpz. 1834) main-
tained that our 0. T. text was derived from Codices belonging to a single
recension. J. G. Sommer (cf. Cornill, ZAW. 1892, p. 309), Olshausen (since
1^53)) ^nd especially De Lagarde (Proverbien, 1863, p. i ff.), have even made it
probable that the original Masoretic text was derived from a single standard
manuscript. Cf., however, E. KCnig in Ztschr. f. kirchl. Wiss., 1887, p. 279 f.,
and especially his Einleitung ins A. T., p, 88 ff. Moreover a great many facts,
which will be noticed in their proper places, indicate that the Masora itself is
by no means uniform but shows clear traces of different schools and opinions ;
cf. H. Strack in Semitic Studies in memory of . . . Kohut, Berlin, 1897, p. 563 ff.
An excellent foundation for the history of the Masora and the settlement of
the masoretic tradition was laid by Joh. Buxtorf in his Tiberias seu Commen-
iarius Masorethicus, first published at Basel in 1620 as an appendix to the
Rabbinical Bible of 1618 f. For more recent work see Geiger, Jiidische Ztschr.,
iii. 78 ff., followed by Harris in JQR. i. 128 ff, 243 ff. ; S. Frensdorff. Ochla
W'ochla, Hanover, 1864 ; and his Massor. Wiirierb., part i, Hanover and Lpz.
1876 ; and Ch. D. Ginsburg, The Massora compiled from Manuscripts, tfcc, 3 vols.,
Lond. 1880 ff., and Introduction to the Massoretico-critical edition of the Hebr. Bible,
Lond. 1897 (his text, reprinted from that of Jacob b. Hayyim [Venice, 1524-5]
with variants from MSS. and the earliest editions, was published in 2 vols.
at London in 1894, 2nd ed. 1906; a revised edition is in progress); H.
Hyvemat, 'La langue et le langage de la Massore' (as a mixture of New-
Hebrew and Aramaic), in the Revue biblique, Oct. 1903, p. 529 ff. and B: ' Lexique
massor6tique,' ibid., Oct. 1904, p. 521 ff., 1905, p. 481 ff., and p. 515 ff. In the
use of the Massora for the critical construction of the Text, useful work has
been done especially by S. Baer, in the editions of the several books (only
Exod.-Deut. have still to appear), edited from 1869 conjointly with Fr.
Delitzsch, and since 1891 by Baer alone. Cf. also § 7 /*.
The various readings of the Q*re (see § 17) form one of the oldest and most
important parts of the Masora. The punctuation of the Text, however, is not
to be confounded with the compilation of the Masora. The former was
settled at an earlier period, and is the result of a much more exhaustive labour
than the Masora, which was not completed till a considerably later time.
3. It was not until about the beginning of the tentli century that (I
the Jews, following the example of the Arabs, began their grammatical
compilations. Of the numerous grammatical and lexicographical
works of R. Sa'adya,' beyond fragments in the commentary on the Sepher
Yesira (ed. Mayer-Lambert, pp. 42, 47, 75, &c.), only the explanation
in Arabic of the seventy (more correctly ninety) hapax legomena in
the O. T. has been preserved. "Written likewise in Arabic, but fre-
quently translated into Hebrew, were the still extant works of the
grammarians R. Yehuda Hayyug (also called Abu Zakarya Yahya, about
the year 1000) and R. Yona (Abu '1-Walid Merwan ibn Ganah, about
1030). By the aid of these earlier labours, Abraham ben Ezra (com-
monly called Aben Ezra, ob. 1167) and R. David Qirahi (ob. c. 1235)
especially gained a classical reputation by their Hebrew grammatical
writings.
^ On his independent attitude towards the Masoretic punctuation, see
Delitzsch, Comm. su den Psalmen*, p. 39.
C 2
20 Introduction [§ 3 «. /
From these earliest grammarians are derived many principles of arrange-
ment and technical terms, some of which are still retained, e. g. the naming
of the conjugations and weak vexbs according to the paradigm of bVS, certain
voces memoriales, as DDB'IJB and the like.^
€ 4. The father of Hebrew philology among Christians was John
Reuchliu (ob. 1522),^ to whom Greek literature also is so much
indebted. Like the grammarians who succeeded him, till the time
of John Buxtorf the elder (ob. 1629), he still adhered almost entirely
to Jewish tradition. From the middle of the seventeenth century the
field of investigation gradually widened, and the study of the kindred
languages, chiefly through the leaders of the Dutch school, Albert
Schultens (ob. 1750) and N. W. Schroder (ob. 1798), became of
fruitful service to Hebrew grammar.
f 5. In the nineteenth century ' the advances in Hebrew philology
are especially connected with the names of W. Gesenius (born at
Nordhausen, Feb. 3, 1786; from the year 1810 Professor at Halle,
where he died Oct. 23, 1842), who above all things aimed at the
comprehensive observation and lucid presentation of the actually
occurring linguistic phenomena ; H. Ewald (ob. 1875, at Gottingen ;
Krit. Gramm. der Hebr. Spr., Lpz. 1827; Ausfuhrl. Lehrb. d. hebr.
Sjyr., 8th ed., Gbtt. 1870), who chiefly aimed at referring linguistic
forms to general laws and rationally explaining the latter ; J. Olshausen
(ob. 1882, at Berlin; Lehrb. der hebr. Sjtrache, Brunswick, 1861)
who attempted a consistent explanation of the existing condition of
the language, from the presupposed primitive Semitic forms, preserved
according to him notably in old Arabic. F. Bottcher {Ausfuhrl.
Lehrb. d. hebr. Spr. ed. by F.Miihlau, 2 vols., Lpz. 1866-8) endeavoured
to present an exhaustive synopsis of the linguistic phenomena, as
well as to give an explanation of them from the sphere of Hebrew
• On the oldest Hebrew grammarians, see Strack and Siegfried, Lehrb. d.
neuhebr. Spr. u. Liter., Carlsr. 1884, p. 107 fif., and the prefaces to the Hebrew
Lexicons of Gesenius and Fiirst ; Berliner. Beitrage zur hebr. Gramm. im Talmud
u. Midrasih, Berlin, 1879; Baer and Strack, Die Dikduke ha-i'amim des Ahron
ben Moscheh ben Ascher u. andere alte grammatisch-massorethische Lehrstiicke, Lpz.
1879, and P. Kahle's criticisms in ZDMG. Iv. 170, n. 2 ; Ewald and Dukes,
Beitrage z. Gesch. der altesfen Auslegung u. Spracherklarvng des A. T., Stuttg. 1844,
3 vols. ; Hupfeld, De rei grammaticae apud Judaeos initiis antiquissimisque scri-
pioribus, Hal. 1846 ; W. Bacher, 'Die Anfange der hebr. Gr.,' in ZDMG. 1S95,
I ff. and 335 ff. ; and Die hebr. Sprachwissenschaft vo7n 10. bis sum 16. Jahrh.,
Trier, 1892.
2 A strong impulse was naturally given to these studies by the introduction
of printing — the Psalter in 1477, the Bologna Pentateuch in 1482, the Soncino
0. T. complete in 1488 : see the description of the twenty-four earliest
editions (down to 1528) in Ginsburg's Introduction, p. 779 ff.
' Of the literature 01 the subject down to the year 1850, see a tolerably
full account in Steinschneider'a Bibliogr. Handb.f. hebr. Sprachkunde, Lpz. 1859.
§ 3 17] Grammatical Treatment of the Language 21
alone. B. Stade, on the other liand {Lehrb. der hebr. Gr., pt. i. Lpz.
1879), adopted a strictly scientific method in endeavouring to reduce
the systems of Ewald and Olshausen to a more fundamental unity.
E. Kouig^ in his very thorough researches into the phonology and
accidence starts generally from the position reached by the early
Jewish grammarians (in his second part ' with comparative reference
to the Semitic languages in general ') aud instead of adopting the usual
dogmatic method, takes pains to re-open the discussion of disputed
grammatical questions. The syntax Konig has ' endeavoured to treat
in sevei'al respects in such a way as to show its affinity to the common
Semitic syntax '. — Among the works of Jewish scholars, special atten-
tion may be called to the grammar by S. D. Luzzatto written in
Italian (Padua, 1853-69).
The chief requirements for one who is treating the grammar of
an ancient language are — (i) that he should observe as fully and
accurately as possible the existing linguistic phenomena and describe
them, after showing their organic connexion (the empirical and
historico-critical element) ; (2) that he should try to explain these
facts, partly by comparing them with one another aud by the analogy
of the sister languages, partly from the general laws of philology
(the logical element).
Such observation has more and more led to the belief that the a-
original text of the O. T. has suffered to a much greater extent than
former scholars were inclined to admit, in spite of the number of
variants in jJarallel passages: Is 2'*^ = Mi 4'"^-, 1336-39 = 2X18'^-
2o'^ Jer 52 = 2 K 24'«-25''», 2 S 22=^^ 18, f 14 = ^/^ 53, >/.4o»'' =
^ 70, >//• io8 = V' 57**^' and 60' '^•. Cf. also the parallels between the
Chronicles and the older historical books, and F. Vodel, Die konsonant.
Yarianten in den doppelt iiberlief. poet. Stucken d. masoret. Textes,
Lpz. 1905. As to the extent and causes of the corruption of the
Masoretic text, the newly discovered fragments of the Hebrew
Ecclesiasticus are very instructive; cf. Smend, Gott. gel. Anz., 1906,
P- 763-
The causes of unintentional corruption in the great majority of
cases are : — Interchange of similar letters, which has sometimes taken
place in the early ' Phoenician ' writing; transposition or omission of
' Ilistorisch-krit. Lehrgeb. der hebr. Sprache mit stetcr Besiehung auf Qitncki und
die anderen Autoritdlen : I, 'Lehre von der Sohrift, der Aussprache, dero Pron.
u. dem Verbum,' Lpz. 1881 ; II. i, ' Abscliluss der speziellen Formenlehre u.
generelle Forraenl.,' 1895; ii. 2, ' Historisch-kompar. Syntax d, hebr. Spr.,'
1897.
22 hiti'oduction [§ 4
single letters, words, or even whole sentences, which are then often
added in the margin and thence brought back into the text in the
wrong place ; such omission is generally due to homoioteleuton (of.
(jinsburg, Introd., p. 171 ff.), i.e. the scribe's eye wanders from the
place to a subsequent word of the same or similar form. Other
( auses are dittography, i. e. erroneous repetition of letters, words,
and even sentences ; its opposite, haplography ; and lastly wrong
division of words (cf. Ginsburg, Introd., p. 158 ff.), since at a certain
period in the transmission of the text the words were not separated.^ —
Intentional changes are due to corrections for the sake of decency or
of dogma, and to the insertion of glosses, some of them very early.
Advance in grammar is therefore closely dependent on progress
in textual criticism. The systematic pursuit of the latter has only
begun in recent years: cf. especially Doorninck on Ju 1-16, Leid.
1879; Wellhausen, Text der Bh. Sam,., Gott. 187 1 ; Cornill, Ezechiel,
Lpz. 1886 ; Klostermann, Bh. Sam. u. d. Kon., Nordl. 1887 ; Driver,
Notes on tlte Hehr. text of the Books of Sam., Oxf. 1890; Kloster-
mann, Deuterojesaja, Munich, 1893 ; Oort, Textus hebr. emendationes,
Lugd. 1900; Burney on Kivigs, Oxf. 1903; the commentaries of Marti
and Nowack ; the Internat. Crit. Comm. ; Kautzsch, Die heil.
Schriften des A.T.^, 1909-10. A critical edition of the O.T. with full
textual notes, and indicating the different documents by colours, is
being published in a handsome form by P. Haupt in The Sacred Books
of the Old Test., Lpz. and Baltimore, 1893 ff. (sixteen paits have
appeared : Exod., Deut., Minor Prophets, and Megilloth are still to
come); 'KiiieX, Biblia hebraica', 1909, Masoretic text from Jacob b.
Hayyim (see c), with a valuable selection of variants from the
versions, and emendations.
§ 4. Division and Arrangement of the Grammar.
The division and arrangement of Hebrew grammar follow the
three constituent parts of every language, viz. (i) articulate sounds
represented by letters, and united to form syllables, (2) words, and
(3) sentences.
The first part (the elements) comprises accordingly the treatment
of sounds and their representation in writing. It describes the nature
and relations of the sounds of the language, teaches the pronunciation
1 This scriptio continna is also found in Phoenician inscriptions. The
inscription of Me"a' always divides the words by a point (and so the Siloam
inscription ; see tlie facsimile at the beginning of tliis grammar), and fre-
quently marks the close of a sentence by a stroke.
§ 4] A7'rangement of the Grammar 23
of the written signs (orthoepy), and the established mode of writing
(orthography). It then treats of the sounds as combined in syllables
and words, and specifies the laws and conditions under which this
combination takes place.
The second part (etymology) treats of words in their character
as parts of speech, and comprises: (i) the principles oiihe formation
of words, or of the derivation of the different parts of speech from
the roots or from one another ; (2) the principles of inflexion, i. e.
of the various forms which the words assume according to their
relation to other words and to the sentence.
The third part (syntax, or the arrangement of words) : (i) shows
how the word-formations and inflexions occurring in the language are
used to express different shades of ideas, and how other ideas, for
which the language hus not coined any forms, are expressed by
periphrasis ; (2) states the laws according to which the parts of
speech are combined in sentences (the principles of the sentence,
or syntax in the stricter sense of the term).
FIRST PART
ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES OR THE SOUNDS AND
CHARACTERS
CHAPTER, I
THE INDIVIDUAL SOUNDS AND CHARACTERS
§ 5. The Consonants : their Forms and Names.
(Cf. the Table of Alphabets.)
Among the abundant literature on the subject, special attention is directed
to : A. Berliner, Beitrage zurhebr. Gramm., Berlin, 1879, p. 15 ff., on the names,
forms,and pronunciation of the consonants in Talmud and Midrash ; H. Strack,
Schreibkunst u. Schrift bei d. Hebraern, PRE?, Lpz. 1906, p. 766 ff. ; Benzinger,
Hebr. Archdologie^, Tiibingen, 1907, p. 172 ff. ; Nowack, Lehrbicch d. hebr. Archdol,
Freiburg, 1894, i. 279 fif.; Lidzbarski, Handbuch d. nordsem. Epigraphik, Weimar,
1898, i. I73ff. ; also his art. ' Hebrew Alphabet,' in the Jewish Encyclopaedia, i,
1 901, p. 439 fF. (cf. his Ephemeris, i. 316 ff.) ; and 'Die Namen der Alphabet-
buchstaben ', in Ephemeris, ii. 125 ff.; Kenyon, art. ' Writing,' in the Dictionary
of the Bible, iv. Edinb. 1902, p. 944 ff. ; NOldeke, ' Diesemit. Buchstabennamen,'
in Beitr. sur semit. Sprachwiss., Strassb. 1904, p. 124 ff. ; F. Praetorius, Ueber den
Ursprung des kanaan. Alphabets, Berlin, 1906; H. Grimme, 'Zur Genesis des
semit. Alphabets,' in ZA. xx. 1907, p. 49 ff. ; R. Stiibe, Grundlinien su einer
Entwickelungsgesch, d. Schrift, Munich, 1907 ; Jermain, In the path of the Alphabet,
Fort Wayne, 1907. — L. Blau, Studien zum althebr. Buchwesen, dc, Strassb. 1903 ;
and his ' Ueber d. Einfluss d. althebr. Buchwesens auf d. Originale ', &c., in
Festschr. zu Ehren A. Berliners, Frkf. 1903.
The best tables of alphabets are those of J. Euting in G. Bickell's Outlines
of Heb. Gram, transl. by S. I. Curtiss, Lpz. 1877 ; in Pt. vii of the Oriental Series
of the Palaeographical Soc, London, 1882 ; and, the fullest of all, in Chwol-
son's Corpus inscr. Hebr., Petersburg, 1882; also Lidzbarski's in the Jewish
Encycl., see above.
a 1. The Hebrew letters now in use, in which both the manu-
scripts of the O. T. are written and our editions of the Bible are
printed, commonly called the square character (V?"?? ^^?)> ^l^o the
Assyrian character (^l^tS'K '3),* are not those originally employed.
Old Hehrcio (or Old Canaanitish^) writing, as it was used on
^ The name 'l^E'N (Assyria) is here used in the widest sense, to include the
countries on the Mediterranean inhabited by Aramaeans ; cf. Stade in
ZAW. 1882, p. 292 f. On some other names for Old Hebrew writing, cf.
G. Hoffmann, ibid. 1881, p. 334 ff. ; Buhl, Car^on and Text of the 0. T. (transl.
by J. Macpherson), Edinb. 1893, p. 200.
' It is tacitly assumed here that this was the mother of all Semitic
alphabets. In ZDMG. 1909, p. 189 ff., however, Pratorius has shown good
I § 5 a] The Consonants : their Foiins and Names 25
public monuments in the beginning of the ninth and in the seconit
half of the eighth century B.C., is to be seen in the inscription of
Mesa', as well as in that of Siloam. The characters on the Macca-
baean coins of the second century B.C., and also on ancient gems,
still bear much resemblance to this (cf § 2 d). With the Old Hebrew
writing the Phoenician is nearly identical (see § i A;, ^ 2 f, and the
Table of Alphabets). From the analogy of the history of other kinds
of writing, it may be assumed that out of and along with this monu-
mental character, a less antique and in some ways more convenient,
rounded style was early developed, for use on softer materials, skins,
bark, papyrus, and the like. This the Samaritans retained after their
separation from the Jews, while the Jews gradually ' (between the
sixth and the fourth century) exchanged it for an Aramaic character.
From this gradually arose (from about the fourth to the middle of the
third century) what is called the square character, which consequently
bears great resemblance to the extant forms of Aramaic writing, such
as the Egyptian- Aramaic, the Nabatean and especially the Palmyrene.
Of Hebrew inscriptions in the older square character, that of 'Araq
al-Emir (15^ miles north-east of the mouth of the Jordan) probably
belongs to 183 B.C.''
The Jewish sarcophagus-inscriptions of the time of Christ, found in
Jerusalem in 1905, almost without exception exhibit a pure square character.
This altered little in the course of centuries, so that the age of a Hebrew MS.
cannot easily be determined from the style of the writing. The oldest known
biblical fragment is the Nash papyrus (found in 1902), containing the ten
commandments and the beginning of Dt 6*'*, of the end of the first or
beginning of the second century a. d. ; cf. N. Peters, Die dlteste Abschr. der 10
Geboie, Freibg. i. B. 1905. Of actual MSS. of the Bible the oldest is probably
one of 820-850 A. D. described by Ginsburg, Introd., p. 469 ff., at the head of
his sixty principal MSS. ; next in age is the codex of Moses ben Asher at
Cairo (897 a. d., cf. the art. ' Scribes' in the Jew. Encycl. xi and Gottheil in
JQR. 1905, p. 32). The date (916 a. d.) of the Codex prophetarum Babylon.
Petropol. (see § 8 jr, note) is quite certain. — In the synagogue-rolls a distinc-
tion is drawn between the Tam-character (said to be so called from Rabbi
Tam, grandson of R. Yishaqi, in the twelfth century) with its straight strokes,
square corners and ' tittles ' (tagin), in German and Polish MSS., and the
foreign character with rounded letters and tittles in Spanish MSS. See
further E. KOnig, Einl. in das A. T., Bonn, 1893, p. 16 ff.
grounds for believing that the South Semitic alphabet is derived not from
the Mesa,' character, or from some kindred and hardly older script, but from
some unknown and much earlier form of writing.
^ On the effect of the transitional mixture of earlier and later forms on the
constitution of the text, see R. Kittel, Ueher d. Notwendigk. d. Herausg. einer
neuen hebr. Bibel, Lpz. 1901, p. 20 fif. — L. Blau, ' Wie lange stand die althebr.
Schrift bei den Juden im Gebrauch?' in Kaufmanngedenkbuch, Breslau, 1900,
p. 44 ff.
' Not 176, as formerly held. Driver and Lidzbarski now read n"'3iy,
correctly, not rfilD.
S6 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§56
2. The Alphabet consists, like all Semitic alphabets, solely of
consonants, twenty-two in number, some of which, however, liave also
a kind of vocalic power (§ 7 6). The following Table shows their
form, names, pronunciation, and numerical value (see k') : —
FOEM.
NAME.
PRONUNCIATION.
NUMERICAL
VALUE.
N
'Aleph
' spiritus lenis
I
2
Beth
b (hh, but see § 6 w)
2
a
Gimel {Giml)
g{gK „ „ u )
3
n
Daleth
d {dh, „ „ „ )
4
n
He
h
5
1
Wdw{Wau)
w {u) '
6
r
Zdyln
z, as in English (soft s)
7
n
HHh
h, a strong guttural
8
\2
Teth
t, empliatic t
9
>
Yod
y (0 '
10
3, final T
Kaph
h {kh, but see § 6 «)
20
^
Lamed
/
30
D, final D
Mem
m
40
3, final }
mn
n
60
D
Sdmekh
s
60
V
'Ayin
' a peculiar guttural (see
beloR-)
70
3, final C)
Pe
p if, see § 6 n)
80
V, final y
Sdde
s, emphatic s
90
P
Qof
q, a strong k * formed at
the back of the palate
100
"1
ReH
r
200
fb'
iin
S
300
]t^
Sin^
s, pronounced sh
n
Taw {Tau)
t {th, but see ^ 6 n)
400
I
' Philippi, 'Die Aussprache der semit. Consonanten 1 und ^' in ZDMG.
1886, p. 639 fif., 1897, p. 66 flf., adduces reasons in detail for the opinion that
' the Semitic 1 and "• are certainly by usage consonants, although by nature
they are vowels, viz. m and i, and consequently are consonantal vowels ' :
cf. § 8 w. ^ J ,
^ As & representation of this sound the Latin q is very suitable, since it
occupies in the alphabet the place of tlie Semitic p (Greek K6vva).
' Nestle {Actes du onzieme Congres . . . des Orientalistes, 1897, iv. llsflF.) has
shown that the original order was K' b.
§ 5 c-f] The Consonants : their Form and Names 27
3. As the Table shows, five letters have a special form at the end C
t)f the word. They are called final letters, and were combined by the
Jewish grammarians in the mnemonic word K??.'?? Kamnephds, or
better, with A. Miiller and Stade, K???'?? i- e. as the breaker in pieces}
Of these, "], |, S], y are distinguished from the common form by the
shaft being drawn straight down, while in the usual form it is bent
round towards the left.^ In the case of D the letter is completely
closed.
4. Hebrew is read and written from right to left.^ "Words must d
not be divided at the end of tl>e lines ; ■• but, in order that no empty
space may be left, in MSS. and printed texts, certain letters suitable
for the purpose are dilated at the end or in the middle of the line.
In oiir printed texts these literae dilatahiles are the five following :
Q n "7 n {>? (mnemonic word DHp'!?^ '%altem). In some MSS. other
letters suitable for the purpose are also employed in this way, as
n, 3, "1 ; cf. Strack in the Theol Lehrb., 1882, No. 22; Nestle, ZAW.
1906, p. 170 f.
Rem. I. The forms of the letters originally represent the rude outlines of e
perceptible objects, the names of which, respectively, begin with the consonant
represented (akrophony). Thus Yod, in the earlier alphabets the rude picture
of a hand, properly denotes hand (Heb. 1^), but as a letter simply the sound
' (j/), with which this word begins; 'Ayin, originally a circle, properly an
eye (py), stands for the consonant y. In the Phoenician alphabet, especiallj',
the resemblance of the forms to the objects denoted by the name is still for
the most part recognizable (see the Table). In some letters (i^ )^ T, £3, tJ') the
similarity is still preserved in the square character.
It is another question whether the present names are all original. They
may be merely due to a later, and not always accurate, interpretation of the
forms. Moreover, it is possible that in the period from about 1 500 to 1000 b. c.
the original forms underwent considerable change. .
The usual explanation of the present names of the letters ^ is : Pj^N ox, /*
' In the Talmud, disregarding the alphabetical order, ^QV~|0 o/thy watcher,
i.e. prophet. See the discussions of this mnemonic word by Nestle, ZAW.
1907, p. 119 ff., K6nig, Bacher (who would read '!]^a>rfjp = proceed ing/rom thy
prophets, Is 52^), Krauss, Marmorstein, ibid. p. 278 ff. All the twenty-two
letters, together with the five final forms, occur in Zp3^
* Chwolson, Corpus Inscr. Hebr., col. 68, rightly observes that the more
original forms of these letters are preserved in the literae finales. Instances of
them go back to the time of Christ.
* The same was originally the practice in Greek, which only adopted the
opposite direction exclusively about 400 b.c. On the boustrophedon writing
(alternately in each direction) in early Greek, early Sabaean, and in the
Safa-inscriptions of the first three centuries a. d., cf. Lidzbarski, Ephemeris, i.
ii6f.
* This does not apply to early inscriptions or seals. Cf. Mela', 11. 1-5,
7, 8, &c., Siloam 2, 3, 5, where the division of words appears to be customary.
* We possess Greek transcriptions of the Hebrew names, dating from the
fifth century b. c. The LXX give them (in almost the same form as Eusebius,
J'raep. Evang. 10. 5) in La 1-4, as do also many Codices of the Vulgate (e. g. the
28 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 5 ^
n*2 house, ^03 camel (according to Lidzbarski, see below, perhaps originally
jna axe or pick-axe), TO"^ door (jproperly folding door ; according to Lidzbarski,
perhaps Tl the female breast), NH air-hole (?), lattice-window (?), 11 hook, nail, p)
tceapow (according to Nestle, comparing the Greek f^jra, rather JT'I olive-tree),
rrin /ence, barrier (but perhaps only differentiated from n by the left-hand
stroke), n"'tp a winding (?), according to others a leather bottle or a snake (but
perhaps only differentiated from D by a circle round it), HV hand, P|3 ben/
/lawci, IJ^p ox-goad, D^IO wa<er, pj fish (Lidzbarski, 'perhaps originally t^PIJ
snake,' as in Ethiopic), T]pD prop (perhaps a modification of T), PS? e2/e, J<B
(also '•Q) mouth, i^'^ fish-hook {?), P]ip ej/e o/a needle, according to others back of
the head (Lidzb,, 'perhaps nCJ'p bow'), B''"'} /leacf, pB* tooth, in sigrn, cross.
^ With regard to the origin of this alphabet, it may be taken as proved that
it is not earlier (or very little earlier) than the fifteenth century b. c, since
otherwise the el-Amarna tablets (§ 2/) would not have been written ex-
clusively in cuneiform.^ It seems equally certain on various grounds, that
it originated on Canaanitish soil. It is, however, still an open question
whether the inventors of it borrowed
(a) From the Egyptian system — not, as was formerly supposed, by direct
adoption of hieroglyphic signs (an explanation of twelve or thirteen characters
was revived by J. Halevy in Eev. Semit. 1901, p. 356 fif., 1902, p. 331 ff., and in
the Verhandlungen des xiii. . . . Orient.-Kongr. su Hamh., Leiden, 1904, p. 199 ff.;
but cf. Lidzbarski, Ephemeris, i. 261 ff.), or of hieratic characters derived from
them (so E. de Rouge), but by the adoption of the acrophonic principle (see e)
by which e. g. the hand, in Egyptian tot, represents the letter t, the lion =
laboi, the letter I. This view still seems the most probable. It is now
accepted by Lidzbarski ('Der Ursprung d. nord- u. siidsemit. Schrift' in
Ephemeris, i (1900), 109 ff., cf. pp. 134 and 261 ff.), though in his Nordsem.
Epigr. (1898) p. 173 ff. he was still undecided.
(&) From the Babylonian (cuneiform) system. Wuttke's and W. Deecke's
derivation of the old-Semitic alphabet from new- Assyrian cuneiform is
impossible for chronological reasons. More recently Peters and Hommel
have sought to derive it from the old-Babylonian, and Ball from the archaic
Assyrian cuneiform. A vigorous discussion has been aroused by the theory
of Frdr. Delitzsch (in Die Entstehung des alt. Schriftsystems od. der Urspr. der
Keilschriftzeichen dargel., Lpz. 1897; and with the same title 'Ein Nachwort',
Lpz. 1898, preceded by a very clear outline of the theory) that the old-Semitic
alphabet arose in Canaan under the influence both of the Egyptian system
(whence the acrophonic principle) and of the old-Babylonian, whence the
principle of the graphic representation of objects and ideas by means of
simple, and mostly rectilinear, signs. He holds that the choice of the
objects was probably (in about fifteen cases) iailuenced by the Babylonian
system. The correspondence of names had all the more effect since, accord-
ing to Zimmern {ZDMG. 1896, p. 667 ff.), out of twelve names which are
certainly identical, eight appear in the same order in the Babylonian arrange-
ment of signs. But it must first be shown that the present names of the
Cod. Amiatinus) in fi// iii, 112, 119, but with many variations from the
customary forms, which rest on the traditional Jewish pronunciation. The
forms Deleth (and delth), Zai, Sen (LXX also x"''"* cf. Hebr. JB' tooth) are to be
noticed, amongst others, for Daleth, Zain, Sin. Cf. the tables in Niildekc,
Beitrdge zur sem. Sprachwiss., p. 126 f. In his opinion (and so Lidzbarski,
Ephemeris, i. 134) the form and meaning of the names point to Phoenicia as
the original home of the alphabet, since alf, bet, dalt, udw, taw, pei = pi, pi,
mouth, and the vowel of pu> = ros, head, are all Hebraeo-Phoenician.
' In the excavations at Jericho in April, 1907, E. Sellin found ajar-handle
witli the Canaanite characters n*, which he dates (probably too early) about
1 500 B c.
§ 5 A] The Consonants : their Forjus and Names 29
'Phoenician' letters really denote the original jncture. The identity of
the objects may perhaps be due simply to the choice of the commonest things
(animals, implements, limbs) in both systems.
The derivation of the Semitic alphabet from the signs of the Zodiac and
their names, first attempted by Seyffarth in 1834, has been revived by
Winckler, who refers twelve fundamental sounds to the Babylonian Zodiac.
Hommel connects the original alphabet with the moon and its phases, and
certain constellations ; cf. Lidzbarski, Ephemeris, i. 269 ff., and in complete
agreement with him, Benzinger, Hebr. Archdologie' , p. 173 ff. This theory
is by no means convincing.
(c) From the hieroglyphic system of writing discovered in 1894 by
A. J. Evans in inscriptions in Crete (esp. at Cnossus) and ehewhere.
According to Kluge (1897) and others, this represents the ' Mycenaean script '
used about 3000-iooo'B. c, and according to Fries (' Die neuesten Forschungen
iiber d. Urspr. des phOniz. Alph.' in ZDPV. xxii. 118 ff.) really supplies the
original forms of the Phoenician alphabet as brought to Palestine by the
Philistines about iioo B.C., but 'the Phoenician-Canaanite- Hebrews gave to
the Mycenaean signs names derived from the earlier cuneiform signs'.
The hypothesis of Fries is thus connected with that of Delitzsch. But
although the derivation of the Phoenician forms from 'Mycenaean' types
appears in some cases very plausible, in others there are grave difficulties,
and moreover the date, 1 100 B.C., assigned for the introduction of the alphabet
is clearly too late. [See Evans, Scripta Minoa, Oxf. 1909, p. 80 ff.]
(d) From a system, derived from Asia Minor, closely related to the Cypriote
syllabary (Praetorius, Der Urspr. des kanaan. Alphabets, Berlin, 1906). On this
theory the Canaanites transformed the syllabic into an apparently alphabetic
writing. In reality, however, they merely retained a single sign for the
various syllables, so that e. g. p is not really q, but qa, qe, qi, &c. Of the five
Cypriote vowels also they retained only the star (in Cypriote = a) simplified
into an 'dlef (see alphabetical table) to express the vowels at the beginning of
syllables, and i and u as Yod and Waw. Praetorius claims to explain about
half the twenty-two Canaanite letters in this way, but there are various
objections to his ingenious hypothesis.
2. As to the order of the letters, we possess early evidence in the alphabetic^ Ji
poems: ^ 9 (N— 3, cf. ^ 10^ p, and vv^*~" p-fl ; cf. Gray in the Expositor, 1906,
p. 233 ff., and Rosenthal, ZAW. 1896, p. 40, who shows that \p ^3.15.17 3^ ^^ 3
exactly fit in between n D "■ and that ^ 10^'^ therefore has the reverse
order p 3 ^) ; also xp^p 25 and 34 (both without a separate 1-verse and with
B repeated at the end^) ; 37, m, 112, 119 (in which every eight verses begin
with the same letter, each strophe, as discovered by D. H. Miiller of Vienna,
containing the eight leading words of ^ 19* ^■, tord, 'eduth, &c.) ; La 1-4 (in 2-4
D before y^, in chap. 3 every three verses with the same initial, see LShr,
ZAW. 1904, p. I ff., in chap. 5 at any rate as many verses as letters in the
alphabet) ; Pr 2\^-^'^, 3110-31 (Jq the LXX with B before y') ; also in Na i^-io
Pastor Frohnmeyer of Wurttemberg (ob. 1880) detected traces of an alpha-
betic arrangement, but the attempt of Gunkel, Bickell, Arnold {ZAW. 1901,
^ On the supposed connexion of this artificial arrangement with magical
formulae ('the order of the letters was believed to have a sort of magic
power') cf. Lohr, ZAW. 1905, p. 173 ff., and Klagelieder'^, GOtt. 1907, p. vii ff.
* On this superfluous B cf. Grimrae, Euphemistic liturgical appendices, Lpz.
1901, p. 8 ff., and Nestle, ZAW. 1903, p. 340 f., who considers it an appendage
to the Greek alphabet.
3 [Perhaps also originally in if/ 34.] B before y is probably due to a magic
alphabet, see above, n. i. According to BOhmer, ZAW. 1908, p. 53 ff., the
combinations 3S, 1}^ in &c., were used in magical texts; Dy was excluded,
but by a rearrangement we get PjD and y]}.
30 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 5 i-m
p. 225 ff.), Ilappel {Der Ps. Ilah , Wiirzb. 1900) to discover further traces,
has not been successful. [Cf. Gray in Expositor, 1898, p. 207 fif. ; Driver, in tlie
Century Bible, Nahum, p. 26.] — Bickell, Zfschr f. Kath. Theol.,1882, p. 319 ff., had
already deduced from the versions the alphabetical character of Ecclus 51'^"'°,
with the omission of the "1-verse and with D' at the end. His conjectures
have been brilliantly confirmed by the discovery of the Hebrew original.
although the order from 2 to p is partly disturbed or obscured. If "I before i*
is deleted, ten letters are in their right positions, and seven can be restored
to their places with certainty. Cf N. Schlogl, ZDMG. 53, 669 ff. ; C. Taylor
in the appendix to Schechter and Taylor, The Wisdom of Ben Sira, Cambr. 1899,
p. Ixxvi ff., and in the Journ. of Philol., xxx (1906), p. 95 ff. ; JQli. 1905,
p. 238 ff. ; Lohr, ZAW. 1905, p. 183 ff. ; I. Levy, KEJ. 1907, p. 62 ff.
The sequence of the three softest labial, palatal, and dental sounds 3 3 *1
and of the three liquids ?, O 3^ indicates an attempt at classification. At
the same time other considerations also appear to have had influence. Thus
it is certainly not accidental, that two letters, representing a hand {Yod,
Kaph), as also two (if Qoph = ha.ck of the head) which represent the head, and
in general several forms denoting objects naturally connected {Mem and Nun,
• 'Ayin and Pe), stand next to one another.
^ The order, names, and numerical values of the letters have passed over from
the Phoenicians to the Greeks, in whose alphabet the letters A to T are
borrowed from the Old Semitic. So also the Old Italic alphabets as well as
the Roman, and consequently all alphabets derived eitlier from this or from
the Greek, are directly or indirectly dependent on the Phoenician.
fC 3. a. In default of special arithmetical figures, the consonants were used
also as numerical signs ; cf. G. Gundermann, Die Zahlseichen, Giessen, 1899,
p. 6 f., and Lidzbarski, Ephemeris, i. io5 ff. The earliest traces of this usage
are, however, first found on the Maccabean coins (see above, § 2 d, end).
These numerical letterswere afterwards commonly employed, e.g. for marking
the numbers of chapters and verses in the editions of the Bible. The units
are denoted by K-tD, the tens by ""—if, 100-400 by p-D, the numbers from
500-900 by n ( = 400), with the addition of the remaining hundreds, e.g. pn
500. In compound numbers the greater precedes (on the right), thus K"! 11,
NDp 121. But 15 is expressed by ID 9 + 6, not n^ (which is a form of the
divine name, being the first two consonants of mn"').'' For a similar reason
tt3 is also mostly written for 16, instead of V, which in compound proper
names, like PNI*, also represents the name of God, nilT'.
The thousands are sometimes denoted by the units with two dots placed
above, e. g. N 1000.
/ b. The reckoning of the years in Jewish writings (generally m*2fv ofter
the creation) follows either the full chronology (pITSl tS^Qp or '3 'Si?), with the
addition of the thousands, or the abridged chronology (pDp 'S/), in which they
are omitted. In the dates of the first thousand years after Christ, the
Christian era is obtained by the addition of 240, in the second thousand
years by the addition of 1 240 (i. e. if the date falls between Jan. i and the
Jewish new year; otherwise add 1239), the thousands of the Creation era
being omitted.
Ifl 4. Abbreviations of words are not found in the text of the 0. T., but they
occur on coins, and their use is extremely frequent amongst the later Jews.'
' See note 3 on p. 29.
' On the rise of this custom (n^ having been originally used and afterwards
\n), cf. Nestle in ZAW. 1884, p. 250, where a trace of this method of writing
occurring as early as Origen is noted.
' Cf. Jo. Buxtorf, De abbreviaturis Hebr,, Basel, 1613, &c. ; Pietro Perrcau.
§ 5 «, 6 a] The Consonants : their Forms and Names 31
A point, or later an oblique stroke, serves as the sign of abridgement in old
MSS. and editions, e. g. ''«'"' for ^NI")K'^, 'D for ^jSq aliqiiis, "^ for "I3"n aliquid,
'VA for ">Di31 et comphns, i.e. and so on. Also in the middle of what is
npparently a word, such strokes indicate that it is an abbreviation or a vox
■memoricdis (of. e. g. § 15 d CND). Two such strokes are employed, from § 41 d
onward, to mark the different classes of weak verbs. — Note also '•^ or ""^ (also
'n)fornin\
T :
5. Peculiarities in the tradition of the 0. T. text, which are already fi
mentioned in the Talmud, are — (i) The 15 puncta extraordinaria, about which
the tradition (from Siphri on Nu 9^" onwards) differs considerably, even as to
their number; on particular consonants, Gn 16*, i8^ iq^^-^'', Nu 9^" ; or on
whole words, Gn 33^ 37", Nu 339^ 21=0, 29I6, Dt 2928, 2 S 1920, Is 448, Ez 4120,
46^2, \p 2712, — all no doubt critical marks ; cf. Strack, Prolegomena Critica, p. 88
ff. ; L. Blau, Musoretische Untermchtmgen, Strassburg, 1891, p. 6 ff., and Einleitung
in die hi. Schrifi, Budapest, 1894; KOnigsberger, Jiid. Lit.-Blatt, 1891, nos. 29-31,
and Aus Masorah u. Talmudkritik, Berlin, 1892, p. 6 ff. ; Mayer-Lambert, BE J.
30 (1895), no. 59 ; and especially Ginsburg, Introd., p. 318 If. ; also on the ten
points found in the Pentateuch, see Butin (Baltimore, 1906), who considers
that they are as old as the Christian era and probably mark a letter, &c., to
be deleted. (2) The literae majusculae (e.g. 3 Gn 1^, 1 Lv 11*2 ^s the middle
consonant of the Pentateuch, "• Nu 14"), and minuscvlue (e. g. PI Gn 2^). (3) The
literae suspensae (Ginsburg, Introd., p. 3345.) 3 Ju iS^** (which points to the
reading HB'D for HlfJlO), y 1^ 80" (the middle of the Psalms i) and Jb 38"-i5.
(4) The 'mutilated' Wdw in n)h^ Nu 25", and p Ex 3225 (QniDpn), and
Nu 72 (DnipDH). (5) Mem clausum in nniD? Is 9*, and Mem apertum in
CVIID on Neh 2". (6) Nun inversum before Nu ic^^, and after ver. 36, as also
before f 10723-28 and *" ; according to Ginsburg, Introd., p. 341 ff., a sort of
bracket to indicate that the verses are out of place ; cf. Krauss, ZAW. 1902,
p. 57 ff., who regards the inverted. Nuns as an imitation of the Greek obelus.
§ 6. Pronunciation and Division of Consonants.
P. Ilaupt, 'Die Semit. Sprachlaute u. ihre Umschrift,' in Beilrdge sur Assyrio-
logie u. vergleich. semit. Sprachwissenschaft, by Delitzsch and Haupt, i, Lpz. 1889,
249 ff. ; E. Sievcrs, Metrische Sludien, i, Lpz. 1901, p. 14 ff.
1. An accurate knowledge of the original phonetic value of each a
consonant is of the greatest importance, since very many grammatical
peculiarities and changes (§ 18 ff.) only become intelligible from the
nature and pronunciation of the sounds. This knowledge is obtained
partly from the pronunciation of the kindred dialects, especially the
still living Arabic, partly by observing the affinity and interchange
Oceano delle abbreviature e sigle^, Parma, 1883 (appendix, 1884) ; Ph. Lederei-,
Hebr. u. Chald. Abbreviaturen, Frankf. 1893; Handler, Lexicon d. Abbreviaturen
(annexed to G. Dalman's Aram.-neukebr. WB., Frankf. 1897) ; Levias, art.
' Abbreviations,' in the Jew. EncycL, i. 39 ff. ; F. Perles, ' Zur Gesch. der Abbrev.
im Hebr.' {Archiv f. Stenogr.. 1902, p. 41 ff.). On abbreviations in biblical
MSS. see Ginsburg, Introd., 165 ff.
^ According to Blau, Studien zum althebr. Buchwesen, Strassburg, 1902, p. 167,
properly a large y, called t'lHya because suspended between the two halves of
the Psalter, and then incorrectly taken for a littera suspensa.
32 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 6 b-e
of sounds on Hebrew itself (§ 19), and partly from the tradition of
the Jews.'
The pronunciation of Hebrew by the modern German Jews, which partly
resembles the Syriac and is generally called ' Polish ', differs considerably
from that of the Spanish and Portuguese Jews, which approaches nearer to
the Arabic. The pronunciation of Hebrew by Christians follows the latter
(after the example of Reuchlin), in almost all cases.
O The oldest tradition is presented in the transcription of Hebrew names in
Assyrian cuneiform ; a later, but yet in its way very important system is
seen in the manner in which the LXX transcribe Hebrew names with Greek
letters.' As, however, corresponding signs for several sounds (D, V, 2f, p, tJ')
are wanting in the Greek alphabet, only an approximate representation was
possible in these cases. The same applies to the Latin transcription of Hebrew
words by Jerome, according to the Jewish pronunciation of his time.*
On the pronunciation of the modern Jews in North Africa, see Barges in
the Journ. Asiat., Nov. 1848 ; on that of the South Arabian Jews, J. D^renbourg,
Manuel du ledeur, &c. (from a Yemen MS. of the year 1390), Paris, 187 1
(extra it 6 du Journ. Asiat. 1870),
C 2. With regard to the pronunciation of the several gutturals and
sibilants, and of D and p, it may be remarked : —
I. Among the gutturals, the glottal stop N is the lightest, corresponding to
the spiritus lenis of the Greeks. It may stand either at the beginning or end
of a syllable, e. g. "IDX 'dmdr, DK'{<1 j/d'sdm. Even be/ore a vowel N is almost
lost to our ear, like the h in hour and in the French habit, homme. After a
vowel N generally (and at the end of a word, always) coalesces with it, e. g.
K^p qdrd for an original qard' , Arab, qdra'd ; see further, § 23 a, 27 jr.
d n before a vowel corresponds exactly to our h (spiritus asper) ; after a
vowel it is either a guttural (so always at the end of a syllable which is not
final, e. g. "ijSnj) ndhpakh ; at the- end of a word the consonantal H has a point
— Mappiq — in it, see § 14), or it stands inaudible at the end of a word,
generally as a mere orthographic indication of a preceding vowel, e. g. itpH
gala ; cf. §§ 7 & and 75 a.
e V is related to X , but is a much stronger guttural. Its strongest sound is
a rattled, guttural g, cf. e.g. n^y, LXX rdfa, ITlby Tofioppa; elsewhere, a
weaker sound of the same kind, which the LXX reproduce by a spiritus {lenis
or asper), e g. ""pJJ 'HXi, pb^V 'A/jiaXtic.* In the mouth of the Arabs one hears
in the former case a sort of guttural r, in the latter a sound peculiar to them-
selves formed in the back of the throat. — It is as incorrect to omit the ]}
* Cf. C. Meinhof, 'Die Aussprache des Hebr.,' in Neue Jahrb.f. Philol. u.
Padag., 1885, Bd. 132, p. 146 ff. ; M. Schreiner, 'Zur Gesch. der Ausspr. des
Hebr.,' in ZAW. 1886, p. 213 ff.
^ Cf. Frankel, Vorstudien su der Septuag., Lpz. 1841, p. 90 ff.; C. KSnneke,
'Gymn.-Progr.,' Stargard, 1885. On the transcription of eleven Psalms in
a palimpsest fragment of the Hexapla at Milan, see Mercati, Atti delta R.
Accad., xxxi, Turin, 1896. [Cf. Burkitt, Fragments of . . . Aquila, Ca.mhr. 1897,
' Numerous examples occur in Hieronymi quaestiones hebraicae in libro geneseos,
edited by P. de Lagarde, Lpz. 1868 ; cf. the exhaustive and systematic dis-
cussion by Siegfried, 'Die Aussprache des Hebr. bei Hieronymus,' in ZAW.
1884, pp. 34-83.
* It is, however, doubtful if the LXX always consciously aimed at repro-
ducing the actual differences of sound.
§ ef-n] Pronunciation and Division of Consonants 33
entirely, in reading and transcribing words ('•py Eli, pboy Amalek), as to
pronounce it exactly like g or like a nasal ng. The stronger sound might be
approximately transcribed by gh or 'gr ; but since in Hebrew the softer sound
was the more common, it is sufiScient to represent it by the sign ', as PSIK
'arba', nj? 'ad.
n is the strongest guttural sound, a deep guttural ck, as heard generally /
in Swiss German, somewhat as in the German Achat, Macht, Sache, Docht,
Zucht (not as in Licht, Knecht), and similar to the Spanish j. Like JJ it was,
however, pronounced in many words feebly, in others strongly.
As regards 1, its pronunciation as a palatal (with a vibrating uvula) seems n-
to have been the prevailing one. Hence in some respects it is also classed
with th© gutturals (§ 22 g, r). On the Ungual 1, cf. 0.
2. The Hebrew language is unusually rich in sibilants. These have, at any f^
rate in some cases, arisen from dentals which are retained as such in Aramaic
and Arabic (see in the Lexicon the letters T, Jf and K*).
B' and 1^ were originally represented (as is still the case in the unpointed I
texts) by only one form ^ ; but that the use of this one form to express two
different sounds (at least in Hebrew) was due only to the poverty of the
alphabet, is clear from the fact that they are differentiated in Arabic and
Ethiopic (cf. Neldeke in Ztschr.f. wissensch. Theol., 1873, p. 121 ; Brockelraann,
Grundriss, i. 133). In the Masoretic punctuation they were distinguished by
means of the diacritical point as B' (jah) and B' (i).*
The original difference between the sounds '{}' and D" sometimes marks A*
a distinction in meaning, e. g. *1DD to close, Ipty to hire, PSD to he foolish, 7Db> to
he prudent, to be wise. Syriac always represents both sounds by D, and in
Hebrew also they are sometimes interchanged ; as "13D for "15b' to hire, Ezr 4" ;
nh^^ for r\^b3D folly, Ec i".
T (transcribed ( by the LXX) is a soft whizzing s, the French and English 2, /
altogether different from the German z {ts).
3. to, p, and probably X are pronounced with a sti'ong articulation and fn
with a compression of the larynx. The first two are thus essentially different
from n and 3, which correspond to our t and k and also are often aspirated
(see below, n). Jf is distinguished fi'om every other s by its peculiar articu-
lation, and in no way corresponds to the German s or ts; we transcribe it
by s ; cf. G. Hiising, "^ Zum Lautwerte des If,' in OLZ. x. 467 ff.
3. Six consonants, the weak and middle hard Palatals, Dentals, fi
and Labials n B 3 1 3 3 ("Mn:3)
have a twofold pronunciation, (i) a harder sound, as mutes, like
* The modern Samaritans, however, in reading their Hebrew Pentateuch
pronounce K' invariably as C
* The original value of D, and its relation to the original value of b' and B*,
is still undetermined, despite the valuable investigations of P. Haupt, ^DMG.
1880, p. 762 f, ; D. H. Miiiler, ' Zur Geschichte der semit. Zischlaute,' in the
Verhandlungen des Wiener Orient. Congresses, Vienna, 1888, Semitic section,
p. 229 ff.; De Lagarde, 'Samech,' in the NGGW. 1891, no. 5, esp. p. 173;
Aug. Muller, ZAW. 1891, p. 267 ff. ; NSldeke, ZDMG. 1893, p. 100 f. ; E. Glaser,
Zwei Wiener Publicationen iiher Kabaschitisch-punische Dialekte itt Sii darabien, Munich ,
1902, pp. 19 ff. — On the phonetic value of X see G. Hiising, OLZ. 1907,
p. 467 ff.
OOWLKT D
34 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 6 o, p
]c,p, t, or initial b, g (hard), d; and (2) a softer sound as spirantes}
The harder sound is the original. It is retained at the beginning of
syllables, when there is no vowel immediately preceding to influence
the pronunciation, and is denoted by a point, Dages lene (§ 13), placed
in the consonants, viz. 2 b, i, g, "^ d, 3 k, Q p, r\ t. The weaker pro-
nunciation appears as soon as a vowel sound immediately precedes.
It is occasionally denoted, esp. in MSS., by Raphe (§14 e), but in
printed texts usually by the mere absence of the Dages. In the case
of 3, 3, D, n, the two sounds are clearly distinguishable even to our ear
as b and v, k and German (weak) ch, j) and ph, t and th (in thin). The
Greeks too express this twofold pronunciation by special characters :
3 K, 3 X J S "■' ^ ^ ' '^ "^j ^ ^- ^^ ^^® same way 3 should be pronounced
like the North German g in Tage, Wagen, and T like th in the, as
distinguished from 3 and "1.
For more precise information on the cases in which the one or the other
pronunciation takes place, see § 21. The modern Jews pronounce the
aspirated 3 as r, the aspirated T\ as s, e.g. 31 rav (or even raf), n^3 hais.
The customary transcription (used also in this Grammar) of the spirants
3 3 n by hh, kh, th is only an unsatisfactory makeshift, since it may lead
(esp. in the case of hh and kh) to an erroneous conception of the sounds as
real aspirates, h-h, k-h.
0 4. According to their special character the consonants are divided
into —
(a) Gutturals n y n N;
(6) Palatals P 3 ^ ;
(c) Dentals D t3 T ;
{d) Labials B 3;
(e) Sibilants 5f D B' tr T;
(/) Sonants ^1, bl, 0 3.
In the case of "1 its hardest pronunciation as a palatal (see above,
g, end) is to be distinguished from its more unusual sound as a lingual,
pronounced in the front of the mouth.
On the twofold pronunciation of r in Tiberias, of. Delitzsch, Physiol, und
Musik, Lpz. 1868, p. 10 ff.; Baer and Strack, Dikduke ha-famim, Lpz. 1879,
p. 5, note a, and § 7 of the Hebrew text, as well as p. 82.
p In accordance with E. Sievers, Metrische Stvdien, i. 1 4, the following
scheme of the Hebrew phonetic system is substituted for the table
formerly given in this grammar : —
i. Throat sounds (Gutturals) : N n J? n .
' So at any rate at the time when the present punctuation arose.
§6q-s,'ja] Pronunciation and Division of Consonants 35
ii. Mouth-sounds:
w.
m.
e.
P
m.
Palatal 2
3
3
Dental ^
n
D
1
n
Labial 3
a
n
0
T
DtJ'K'
X
... M
i'n
0 3
Mutes and
2. Sibilants:
3. Sonants :
Rem. I. The meaning of the letters at the top is, w. = weak, m. =midtlle (1
hard, e. = emphatic. Consonants which are produced by the same organ of
speech are called homorganic (e.g. 3 and 3 as palatals), consonants whose
sound is of the same nature homogeneous (e.g. 1 and "i as semi-vowels). On
their homorganic character and homogeneity depends the possibility of
interchange, whether within Hebrew itself or with the kindred dialects.
In such cases the soft sound generally interchanges with the soft, the hard
with the hard, &c. (e.g. 1=T, n = tr, tD = X). Further transitions are not,
however, excluded, as e.g. the interchange of n and p (n = 3=p). Here it is
of importance to observe whether the change takes place in an initial,
medial, or final letter ; since e.g. the change in a letter when medial does
not always prove the possibility of the change when initial. That in certain
cases the character of the consonantal sound also influences the preceding or
following vowel will be noticed in the accidence as the instances occur.
Rem. 2. Very probably in course of time certain nicer distinctions of f
pronunciation became moi-e and more neglected and finally were lost. Thus
e.g. the stronger y 'gt, which was known to the LXX (see above, e), became
in many cases altogether lost to the later Jews ; by the Samaritans
and Galileans y and PI were pronounced merely as K, and so in Ethiopic,
y like N, n like h, ^ like s.
Rem. 3. The consonants which it is usual to describe especially as weak, S
are those which readily coalesce with a preceding vowel to form a long vowel,
viz. N, 1, ■• (as to n, cf. § 23 fc), or those which are most frequently affected
by the changes described in § 19 b-l, as again N, ), "", and 3, and in certain
cases n and 7 ; finally the gutturals and 1 for the reason given in § 22 & and q.
§ 7. The Vowels in General, Vowel Letters and Vowel Signs.
1. The original vowels in Hebrew, as in the other Semitic tongues, a
are a, i, u. E and 0 always arise from an obscuring or contraction
of these three pure sounds, viz. e by modification from ? or a ; short
0 from u] e by contraction from ai (properly ay) ; and 6 sometimes
by modification (obscuring) from d, sometimes by contraction from au
(properly axo)}
In Arabic writing there are vowel signs only for a, i, u ; the combined
sounds ay and aw are therefore retained uncontracted and pronounced as
diphthongs (at and au), e. g. tDitJ? Arab, saut, and D"'5"'y Arab, 'ainain. It was
' In proper names the LXX often use the diphthongs ai and av where the
Hebrew form has e or 0. It is, however, very doubtful whether the al and av
of the LXX really represent the true pronunciation of Hebrew of that time ;
see the instructive statistics given by Kittel in Haupt's SBOT., on 1 Ch i***".
D 2
36 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 7 b-d
only in later Arabic that they became in pronunciation e and 6, at least after
weaker or softer consonants; cf. p3 Arab, hain, 6en, Di* Arab, yaum, yom.
The same contraction appears also in other languages, e.g. in Greek and
Latin {$avna, Ionic eai/xa; plaustrum = plostrum), in the French pronunciation
of ai and au, and likewise in the German popular dialects (Oge for Auge, &c.).
Similarly, the obscuring of the vowels plays a part in various languages (cf.
e. g. the a in modern Persian, Swedish, English, &c.).*
b 2. The partial expression of the vowels by certain consonants
(n, 1, '; k), which sufficed during the lifetime of the language, and
for a still longer period afterwards (cf. § i k), must in the main have
passed through the following stages ^ : —
(a) The need of a written indication of the vowel first made itself
felt in cases where, after the rejection of a consonant, or of an entire
syllable, a long vowel formed the final sound of the word. The first
step in such a case was to retain the original final consonant, at least
as a vowel letter, i. e. merely as an indication of a final vowel. In
point of fact we find even in the Old Testament, as already in the
Mesa' inscription, a n employed in this way (see below) as an indica-
tion of a final o. From this it was only a step to the employment
of the same consonant to indicate also other vowels when final (thus,
e.g. in the inflection of the verbs n'^b, the vowels d,^ e, e). After the
employment of 1 as a vowel letter for 6 and 4, and of ■• for e and i,
had been established (see below, e) these consonants were also em-
ployed— although not consistently — for the same vowels at the end
of a word.
C According to § 91 6 and d, the suffix of the 3rd sing. masc. in the noun (as
in the verb) was originally pronounced in. But in the places where this
in with a preceding a is contracted into 6 (after the rejection of the n), we
find the H still frequently retained as a vowel letter, e. g. Tf)"^]}, nhlD Gn 49",
cf. § 91 e ; so throughout the MeSa' inscription nJOS, nh^li (also nri3),
nb3 na rO nbnnSn ; on the other hand already in the Siloam inscription
^V"i ,* no"" Mesa', 1. 8 = 1"'D"' his days is unusual, as also ntJH 1. 20 if it is for V^^l
his chiefs. The verbal forms with n suffixed are to be read nOpH^l (1. 6),
nanoXI (l. 12 f.) and nB'">3''1 (1. 19).
d As an example of the original consonant being retained, we might also
include the i of the constr. state plur. masc. if its e (according to § 89 d) is
^ In Sanskrit, in the Old Persian cuneiform, and in Ethiopic, short a alone
of all the vowels is not represented, but the consonant by itself is pronounced
with short a.
' Cf. especially Stade, Lehrb. der hebr. Or., p. 34 ff.
' According to Stade, the employment of n for a probably took place
first in the case of the locative accusatives which originally ended in
n , as nsiK, nonp.
* The form lyT contradicts the view of Oort, Theol. Tijds., 1902, p. 374, that
the above instances from the MSia'-inscription are to be read benhu, bahu, lahu,
which were afterwards vocalized aa beno, bo, to.
§ 7 ^./] Vowel Letters and Vowel Signs 37
contracted from an original ay. Against this, however, it may be urged that
the Phoenician inscriptions do not usually express this e, nor any other final
vowel.^
(6) The employment of 1 to denote 6, H, and of ^ to denote e, i, may e
have resulted from those cases in which a "I with a preceding a was
contracted into au and further to 6, or with a preceding u coalesced
into 4, and where ^ with a has been contracted into ai and further
to e, or with a preceding i into i (cf. § 24). In this case the previously
existing consonants were retained as vowel letters and were further
applied at the end of the word to denote the respective long vowels.
Finally N also will iu the first instance have established itself as
a vowel letter only where a consonantal N with a preceding a had
coalesced into d or d.
The orthography of the Siloam inscription coiTesponds almost exactly with /
the above assumptions. Here (as in the M§la' inscr,) we find all the long '
vowels, which have not arisen from original diphthongs, without vowel letters,
thus K^N, D3Vn, f»''P (or IP»D) ; HbK, bp, ^bp, "1??. On the other hand
KJfiO (from mausa'), 1)]} (from 'aud) ; JCD also, if it is to be read \\p''K), is an
instance of the retention of a "• which has coalesced with i into i. Instances
of the retention of an originally consonantal K as a vowel letter are D^riNlO,
KSiD, and iTp, as also K'NH. Otherwise final a is always represented by-"^
H: ilDN riM. mT. n3p3. To this D* alone would form an exception (cf.
however the note on DV, § 96), instead of Di* (Arab, yaum) day, which one
would expect. If the reading be correct, this is to be regarded as an
argument that a consciousness of the origin of many long vowels was lost
at an early period, so that (at least in the middle of the word) the vowel
letters were omitted in places where they should stand, according to what
has been stated above, and added where there was no case of contraction.
This view is in a great measure confirmed by the orthography of the Mesa'
inscription. There we find, as might be expected, pH { = Daibon, as the
Aai0wv of the LXX proves), piin (6 from au), and r\h''ll (e from ai), but also
even '«:jj^n^ instead of ^JJJB'Vl (from haus-), 3t}'K1 = 3''K'iX3, n3 four times,
nha once, for n""? and nh"! (from bait); n^^ = n^^^, I^^H^ °^ P*?-
^ Thus there occurs, e.g. in Melit. i, 1. 3 333B' = 132 ^pB* the two sons;
elsewhere 3 for ^3 (but ""J in the MeSa' and Siloam inscrr.), T for iTf (the
latter in the Siloam inscr.), n3n = ^133 (so MeSa*) or '•JT'Sa, &c. Cf. on
the other hand in MSSa', 33K = 03S (unless it was actually pronounced 'anokh
by the Moabites !). As final o is represented by n and K and final i by '',
so final M is almost everywhere expressed by 1 in MeSa', and always in the
Siloam inscription. It is indeed not impossible that Hebrew orthography
also once passed through a period in which the final vowels were left always
or sometimes undenoted, and that not a few strange forms in the present
text of the Bible are to be explained from the fact that subsequently the
vowel letters (especially 1 and ■•) were not added in all cases. So Chwolson^
' Die Quiescentia ""in in der althebr.Orthogr.,' in Travaux du Congres .. .des Orien-
talistes, Petersb. 1876 ; cf. numerous instances in Ginsburg, Introd., p. 146 ff.
* ^3i?{J'n is the more strange since the name of king yK'in is represented
as An si' in cuneiform as late as 728 b.c.
^
38 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 7 g, a
g (c) In the present state of Old Testament vocalization as it appears
in the Masoretic text, the striving after a certain uniformity cannot
be mistaken, in spite of the inconsistencies which have crept in.
Thus the final long vowel is, with very few exceptions (cf. § 9 c£,
and the very doubtful cases in § 8 k), indicated by a vowel letter —
and almost always by the same letter in certain nominal and verbal
endings. In many cases the use of 1 to mark an 6 or 'A, arising from
contraction, and of "• for e or i, is by far the more common, while we
seldom find an originally consonantal N rejected, and the simple
phonetic principle taking the place of the historical orthography.
On the other hand the number of exceptions is very great. In many
cases (as e.g. in the plural endings D^-^- and rt) the vowel letters are
habitually employed to express long vowels which do not arise
through contraction, and we even find short vowels indicated. The
conclusion is, that if there ever was a period of Hebrew writing when
the application of fixed laws to all cases was intended, either these
laws were not consistently carried out in the further transmission of
the text, or errors and confusion afterwards crept into it. More-
over much remained uncertain even in texts which were plentifully
provided with vowel letters. For, although in most cases the context
was a guide to the correct reading, yet there were also cases where,
of the many possible ways of pronouncing a word, more than one
appeared admissible.*
// 3. When the language had died out, the ambiguity of such a writing
mufct have been found continually more troublesome ; and as there
was thus a danger that the correct pronunciation might be finally
lost, the vowel signs or vowel points were invented in order to fix it.
By means of these points everything hitherto left uncertain was most
accurately settled. It is trr.e that there is no historical account
of the date of this vocalization of the O. T. text, yet we may at
least infer, from a comparison of other historical facts, that it was
gradually developed by Jewish grammarians in the sixth and seventh
centuries a.d. under the influence of different Schools, traces of which
have been preserved to the present time in various differences of
ti adition.^ They mainly followed, though with independent regard to
1 Thus e. g. PDp can be read qatal, qaial, qatol, (ftol, qotel, qiftel, qatfel, quttal,
qifel, and several of these forms have also different senses.
' The most important of these differences are, (a) those between the
Orientals, 1. e. the scholars of the Babylonian Schools, and the Occidentals,
i. e. the scholars of Palestine (Tiberias, &c.) ; cf. Ginsburg, Introd., p. 197 ff. ;
(6) amongst the Occidentals, between Ben-Naphtali and Ben-Asher, who
flourished in the first half of the tenth century at Tiberias ; cf. Ginsburg,
Introd., p. 241 fif. Both sets of variants are given by Baer in the appendices
§§ 7 ». 8] Vowel Letters and Vowel Signs 39
the peculiar nature of the Hebrew, the example and pattern of the
older Syrian punctuation.'
See Gesenius, Gesch. d. hebr. Spr., p. 182 ff. ; Hupfeld, in Theol. Studien u.
Kritiken, 1830, pt. iii, who shows that neither Jerome nor the Talmud
mentions vowel signs ; Berliner, Beitrage sur hebr. Gramm. im Talm. u. Mulraschy
p. 26 ff. ; and B. Pick, in Hebraica, i, 3, p. 153 ff. ; Abr. Qeiger, ' Zur Nakdanim-
[Punctuators-]Literatur,' in Jiid. Ztschr. filr Wissensch. u. Leben, x. Breslau,
1872, p. 10 ff. ; H. Strack, Prolegomena critica in Vet. Test. Hebr., Lips. 1873 ;
' Beitrag zur Gesch. des hebr. Bibeltextes,' in Theol. Stud. u. Krit., 1875, p. 736 ff,
as also in the Ztschr./. die ges. luth. Theol. u. K., 1875, p. 619 ff. ; ' Massorah,' in
tlie Protest. Real.-Enc.^, xii. 393 ff. (a good outline) ; A. Merx, in the Verhand-
lungen des Orienialistenkongresses zu Berlin, i. Berlin, 1881, p. 164 ff. and p. 188 ff. ;
H. Graetz, 'Die Anfange der Vokalzeichen im Hebr.,' in Monatsschr. f. Gesch.
M. Wissensch. d. Judenth., 1881, pp. 348 ff. and 395 ff. ; Hersmann, Zur Gesch. des
Streites iiber die Entsiehung der hebr. Punktation, Kuhrort, 1885 ; Harris, 'The
Rise ... of the Massorah,' JQR. i. 1889, p. 1 28 ff. and p. 223 ff. ; Mayer-Lambert,
REJ. xxvi. 1893, p. 274 ff. ; J. Bachrach, Das Alter d. bibl. Vocalisation u. Accen-
tuation, 2 pts. Warsaw, 1897, and esp. Ginsburg, Inirod. (see § 3 c), p. 287 ff. ;
Budde, 'Zur Gesch. d. Tiberiens. Vokalisation,' in Orient. Stitdien zu Ehren
Th. Noldekes, i. 1906, 651 ff. ; Bacher, ' Diakrit. Zeichen in vormasoret. Zeit,'
in ZAW. 1907, p. 285 ; C. Levias, art. 'Vocalization,' in the Jewish Encycl. —
On the hypothesis of the origin of punctuation in the Jewish schools for
children, cf. J. Derenbourg in the Rev. Crit., xiii. 1879, no. 25.
4. To complete the histoi-ical vocalization of the consonantal text i
a phonetic system was devised, so exact as to show all vowel-changes
occasioned by lengthening of words, by the tone, by gutturals, &c.,
which in other languages are seldom indicated in writing. The pro-
nunciation followed is in the main that of the Palestinian Jews of
about the sixth century A.D., as observed in the solemn reading of the
sacred writings in synagogue and school, but based on a much older
tradition. That the real pronunciation of early Hebrew is consistently
preserved by this tradition, has recently been seriously questioned on
good grounds, especially in view of the transcription of proper names
in the LXX. Nevertheless in many caseSj internal reasons, as well as
the analogy of the kindred languages, testify in a high degree to the
faithfulness of the tradition. At the same recension of the text, or
soon after, the various other signs for reading (§§ 11-14, 16) were
added, and Ihe accents (§ 15).
§ 8. The Voivel Signs in particular.
P. Haupt, ' The names of the Hebrew vowels,' JAOS. xxii, and in the Johns
Hopkins Semitic Papers, Newhaven, J 901, p. 7 ff. ; C. Levias in the Hebr. Union
Coll. Annual, Cincinnati, 1904, p. 138 ft".
to his critical editions. Our printed editions present uniformly the text of
Ben-Asher, with the exception of a few isolated readings of Ben-Naphtali,
and of numerous later corruptions.
1 See Geiger, 'Massorah bei d. Syrern,' in ZDMG. 1873, p. 148 ff. ; J. P.
Martin, Hist, de la ponctuation ou de la Massore chez les Sjfi-iens, Par. 1875 ; E. Nestle,
in ZDMG. 1876, p. 525 ff. ; Wsingarten, Die syr. Massora nach Bar Hebraeus,
Halle, 1887.
40 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 8 a
Preliminary Remark.
The next two sections (§§ 8 and 9) have been severely criticized (Philippi,
ThLZ. 1897, no. 2) for assigning a definite quantity to each of the several
vowels, whereas in reality ___ ___^ _:_ are merely signs for a, e, 0: 'whether
these are long or short is not shown by the signs themselves but must be
inferred from the rules for the pause which marks the breaks in continuous
narrative, or from other circumstances.' But in the twenty-fourth and sub-
sequent German editions of this Grammar, in the last note on § 8 a [English
ed. p. 38, note 4], it was stated : 'it must be mentioned that the Masoretes
are not concerned with any distinction between long and short vowels, or in
general with any question Of quantity. Their efforts are directed to fixing
the received pronunciation as faithfully as possible, by means of writing.
For a long time only D'^Dplp nVDB' seven kings were reckoned (vox memor. in
Elias Levita ^n*?X 1t2N*1), Sureq and Qibbus being counted as one vowel.
The division of the vowels in respect of quantity is a later attempt at a
scientific conception of the phonetic system, which was not invented but
only represented by the Masoretes (Qimchi, Mikhlol, ed. Rittenb. 136 a,
distinguishes the five long as mothers from their five daughters).'
I have therefore long shared the opinion that 'the vowel-system repre-
sented by the ordinary punctuation (of Tiberias) was primarily intended to
mark only differences of quality' (Sievers, Metrische Siudien, i. 17). There is,
liowever, of course a further question how far these ' later ' grammarians
were mistaken in assigning a particular quantity to the vowels represented
by particular signs. In Philippi's opinion they were mistaken (excluding of
course i, e, 6 when written plene) in a very great number of cases, since not
only does stand, according to circumstances, for d or a, and ___ for S or a,
but also __ for e or e, and _:_ for 0 or 0, e. g. 133 and fop^ out of pause kdbed,
qaSn (form PDp), but in pause kabed, qaton.
I readily admit, with regard to Qames and S'gol, that the account formerly
given in § 8 f. was open to misconstruction. With regard to Sere and Holem,
however, I can only follow Philippi so long as his view does not conflict with
the (to me inviolable) law of a long vowel in an open syllable before the tone
and (except Pathah) in a final syllable with the tone. To me n|}3 = fca6^cf,
&c., is as impossible as e.g. 2i)} = 'inab or 'i\'\2 = bdrakh, in spite of the analogy
cited by Sievers (p. 18, note i) that 'in old German e.g. original t and u
often pass into I and 0 dialectical! y, while remaining in a closed syllable.
a 1- The full vowels (in contrtist to the half-vowels or vowel trills,
§ 10 a-f), classified according to the three principal vowel sounds
(§ 7 a), are as follows : —
First Class. A- sound.
' I, __ ' Qdmes denotes either a, d, more strictly & (the obscure
Swedish a) and a,^ as T^ yad (hand), D'K'K"! ra'ma
. \ (heads), or h, (in future transcribed as 0), called Qdmes
hdtilph, i.e. hurried Qames. The latter occurs almost
exclusively as a modification of u; of. c and § 9 w.
\ 2. -^ Fdthdh, a, HS bath (daughter).
* In early MSS. the sign for Qames is a stroke with a point underneath, i. e.
according to Nestle's discovery {ZDMG. 1892, p. 411 f.), Pathah with i/oton, the
latter suggesting the obscure pronunciation of Qames as 3. Cf. also Ginsburg,
Introd., p. 609.
* Instead of the no doubt more accurate transcription a, a we have
§8*, c] The Vowel Signs in particular 41
Also 3, -^ S^gol, an open e, e (<? or a), as a modification of a,' either
in an untoned closed syllable, as in the first syllable of D^l* yddkhem
(your hand) from yddkhem — or in a tone-syllable as in HpQ pesah ;
I cf. Trao^a, and on the really monosyllabic character of such forma-
tions, see § 28 e. But S^gdl in an open tone-syllable with a following
^ as in n3v3 gHend (cf. § 75/), TIJ V^dekhd (cf. § 91 i), is due
to contraction from ay.
Second Class. I- and E-sounds.
''-r- Hireq with yod, almost always i, as P'''^?? saddtq (righteous). J)
-r- either t (see below, i), as D^p"^?? saddiqim, only ortho-
graphically different from D^^^^f (Dpn2f),— or ?, as ipl^f
stc^go (his righteousness).
'__ Sert or ^ere with yod = e, e.g. iri^3 6e<^o (his house).
-^ either e, but rarely (see below, i), or e as CB' sew (name).
Sere can only be e, in my opinion, in few cases, such as
I those mentioned in § 2 9 /.
^j- S^gol, a, a modification of I, e.g. ''V?^' Aa/«t (ground-form
^!/?) > '1?' ^(^^ (ground-form sm).
r/nVd Class. U- and 0-sounds.
^ Silreq, usually -A, HID milth (to die), rarely it. C
-:^ QibhUs, either u, e.g. D?p sulldm (ladder), or il, e.g. ^J^p
g-wmw (rise up), instead of the usual ID^p.
S and -^ Holem, 6 and J, b^p qol (voice), 3T ro6/t (multitude).
Often also a defective -— for 6 ; rarely ^ for o.
On the question whether -:_ under some circumstances
represents 6, see § 93 ^.
-J- On Qdmes hdtdph = 0, generally modified from u, as "PC
hoq (statute), see above, a.
retained d, d in this grammar, as being typographically simpler and not
liable to any misunderstanding. For Qames hatuph, in the previous German
edition expressed by a, we have, after careful consideration, returned to 0
The use of the same sign for a (oj and a, shows that the Massoretes did
not intend to draw a sharp distinction between them. We must not, how-
ever, regard the Jewish grammarians as making a merely idle distinction
between Qdmes rahdb, or broad Qames, and Qdmes hatuph, or light Qames. It
is quite impossible that in the living language an d lengthened from a, as in
ddbdr, should have been indistinguishable from e.g. the last vowel in 3B'*1
or the first in D^K'lp. — The notation a, e, 6 expresses here the vowels essen-
tially long, either naturally or by contraction ; the notation d, e, 6 those
lengthened only by the tone, and therefore changeable ; a, S, 0 the short
vowels. As regards the others, the distinction into * and J, it and u is
sufficient ; see § 9. — The mark ' stands in the following pages over the tone-
syllable, whenever this is not the last, as is usual, but the penultimate
Byllable of the word, e. g. 2p\
' These S'gois, modified from o, are very frequent in the language, Tho
0
42 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 8 d-g
u The names of the vowels are mostly taken from the form and action of the
< <
mouth in producing the various sounds, as nriSI opening ; '•IX a wide parting
(of the mouth), also 1I1K' ( = ^) breaking, parting (cf. the Arab, kasr) ; p')^n
(also p'ln) naiYOw opening ; u?\n closing, according to others fullness, i. e. of
the mouth (also D12 XPD ' fullness of the mouth). y^P ^ ^^so denotes a slighter,
as p'l/lty and p2p (also D^S p3p) a firmer, compression or contraction of
the mouth. S'gOl (?i3D bunch of grapes) takes its name from its form. So
n^TpJ ^b^ {three points) is another name for Qihbus.
e Moreover the names were mostly so formed (but only later), that the
sound of each vowel is heard in the first syllable (J^Cp for yop, riHS for
nnS , ^"lif for t^Jf) ; in order to carry this out consistently some even write
Sdgol, Qomes-hatuf, Qiibbus.
J 2. As the above examples show, the vowel sign stands regularly
under the consonant, after which it is to be pronounced, "J m, 1 rd,
1 re, "3 rw, &c. The Pathah called furtivum (§ 22/) alone forms an
exception to this rule, being pronounced before the consonant, D'"^ rvP^h
(wind, spirit). The Holem (without wduo) stands on the left above the
consonant; ^ ro (but ^ = Zd). If K, as a vowel letter, follows a conso-
nant which is to be pronounced with 0, the point is placed over its
right arm, thus N3, B'Ni ; but e.g. DN3, since N here begins a syllable.
^ No dot is used for the Holem when 0 (of course without loaw) is pro-
nounced after sUn or before sin. Hence Kp'B' ions (hating), NtJ'i w*io (to bear),
n^D moU (not nB'b) ; but ICB' 'iomer (a watchman). When 0 precedes the
iin, the dot is placed over its right arm, e.g. b'B"]* yirpb§ (he treads with the
feet), D^xb'iin hannos^im (those who carry).
In the sign i, the 1 may also be a consonant. The i is then either to be
I'ead 6w (necessarily so when .a consonant otherwise without a vowel precedes,
e. g. np lowe, lending) or wo, when a vowel already precedes the "I, e. g. py
'dwon (iniquity) for jiiy. In more exact printing, a distinction is at least
made between \ {wo) and "i (i. e. either 0 or, when another vowel follows the
waw, 610 ').
Babylonian punctuation (see § 8 gr, note 1) has only one sign for it and tone-
bearing Pathah ; see also Gaster, 'Die Unterschiedslosigkeit zwischen Pathach
u. Segol,' in ZAW. 1894, p. 60 ff.
' On the erroneous use of the term melo pum, only in Germany, for sureq
(hence also pronounced melu pum to indicate u), see E. Nestle, ZDMG. 1904,
p. 597 ff. ; Bacher, ibid., p. 799 ff., Melopum ; Simonsen, ibid., p. 807 ff.
2 The usual spelling ^Ipp and nTlS takes the words certainly rightly as
Hebrew substantives; according to De Lagarde {Gott. gel. Am. 1886, p. 873,
and so previously Luzzatto), fOp and nriQ are rather Aram, participles, like
Dages, &c., and consequently to be transliterated QcUmx and Pdtka/i.
' Since 1 846 we have become acquainted with asystem of vocalization different
in many respects from the common method. The vowel signs, all except ^^
are there placed above the consonants, and differ almost throughout in form,
§ 8 A] The Vowel Signs m particular 43
3. The vowels of the first class are, with the exception of ""^^ in h
the middle and n___j K_.j n__ at the end of the word (§ 9 a-d,f),
represented onlt/ by vowel signs, but the long vowels of the I- and
U-class largely by vowel letters. The vowel sound to which the letter
and some even as regards the sound which they denote: -^- = d, a, -ii--tone-
hearing a and e, -^ =e,e,-^ = i,\^ -^ = 6, o, _1_ or ^ = m. In an unsharpened
syllable -^- = toneless a, and e, and also Hateph Pathah ; -=_ = toneless 6 and
Hateph S^ghol ; ^ = i, J±- =u, -^ = 6, and Hateph Qames. Lastly in tone-
less syllables before DageS, -^ =a, -H- =J _z_ =i -i_ = M J2--=a. §*wa is ^^
The accents differ less and stand in some cases under the line of the consonants.
Besides this complicated system of theCodex Babylonicus (see below)and other
MSS., there is a simpler one, used in Targums. It is still uncertain whether the
latter is the foundation of the former (as Merx, Cfirest. Targ. xi, and Bacher,
ZDMG. 1895, p. 15 ff.), or is a later development of it among the Jews of South
Arabia (as Praetorius, ZDMG. 1899, p. 181 ff.). For the older literature on
this Babylonian punctuation (vD2 1^153), as it is called, see A. Harkavy and
H. L. Strack, Katalog der hebr. Bibelhandschr. der Kaiserl. offentl. Bibliothek su
St. Petersb., St. Petersb. and Lpz., 1875, parts i and ii, p, 223 ff. A more
thorough study of the system was made possible by H. Strack's facsimile
edition o{ the Prophetarum postetiorum codex Babylonicus Petropolitanus (St. Petersb.,
1876, la. fol.) of the year 916, which Firkowitsch discovered in 1839, in the
synagogue at Tschufutkale in the Crimea. The MS. has been shown by
Ginsburg {Recueil des travaux rediges en memoire . . . de Chwolson, Berlin, 1899,
p. 149, and Introd., pp. 216 ff., 475 f.) to contain a recension of the Biblical text
partly Babylonian and partly Palestinian ; cf. also Barnstein, The Targum of
Onkelos to Genesis, London, 1896, p. 6 f. Strack edited a fragment of it in Hosea
et Joel prophetae ad Jidem cod. Babylon. Petrop., St. Petersb. 1875. Cf. also the
publication by A. Merx, quoted above, § 7 A, and his Chrestomathia Targumica,
Berlin, 1888; G. Margoliouth, in the PSBA. xv. 4, and M. Gaster, ibid.;
P. Kahle, Der masoret. Text des A. T. nach d. ijberlief. der babyl. Juden, Lpz. 1902,
with the valuable review by Rahlfs in GOA. 1903, no. 5 ; Nestle, ZDMG. 1905,
p. 719 (Babylonian -i^=y. According to the opinion formerly pi-evailing,
this Babylonian punctuation exhibits the system which was developed in the
Eastern schools, corresponding to and contemporaneous with the Western or
Tiberian system, although a higher degree of originality, or approximation
to the original of both systems of punctuation, was generally conceded to the
latter. Recently, however, Wickes, Accents of the Twenty-one Books, Oxford,
1887, p. 142 ff, has endeavoured to show, from the accents, that the
' Babylonian ' punctuation may certainly be an Oriental, but is by no means
the Oriental system. It is rather to be regarded, according to him, as a later
and not altogether successful attempt to modify, and tlius to simplify, the
system common to all the Schools in the East and West. Strack, Wiss.
Jahresb. der ZDMG. 1879, p. 124, established the probability that the vowels
of the superlinear punctuation arose under Arab influence from the vowel
letters NV (so previously Pinsker and Graetz), while the Tiberian system
shows Syrian influence.
A third, widely different system (Palestinian), probably the basis of the
other two, is described by A. Neubauer, JQE, vii. 1895, p. 361 ff., and
Friedlander, ibid., p. 564 ff., and PSBA. 1896, p. 86 ff. ; C. Levias, Journ. of
Sem. Lang, and Lit., xv. p. 157 ff. ; and esp. P. Kahle, Beitr. zu der Gesch.
der hebr. Punktation,' in ZAW. 1901, p. 273 ff. and in Der masoret. Text des A. T.
(see above), chiefly dealing with the Berlin MS. Or. qu. 680, which contains
a number of variants on the biblical text, and frequently agrees with tlie
transcriptions of the LXX and Jerome.
44 'J^he Iridividual Sounds and Characters [§ 8 i-n»
points is determined more precisely by the vowel sign standing before,
above, or within it. Thus —
1 may be combined with HirSq, Sere, S^gdl C-^, ''.^^ ''—.).
1 with Siireq and Holem (^ and i).^
In Arabic the long a also is regularly expressed by a vowel letter, viz. ^AUph
(N-__), so that in that language three vowel letters correspond to the three
vowel classes. In Hebrew K is rarely used as a vowel letter ; see § 9 6
and § 23 g.
I 4. The omission of the vowel letters when writing ?, H, e, 6 is called
scriptio defectiva in contrast to scriptio plena, p'^p, Dip are written
plene, fvp, Dp defective.
Cf. Bardowitz, Studien sur Gesch. der Orthogr. im Althehr., 1894; Lidzbarski,
Ephem., i. 182, 275 ; Marmorstein, ' Midrasch der voUen u. defekt. Schreibung,'
in ZAW. 1907, p. 33 flf.
k So far as the choice of the full or defective mode of writing is con-
cerned, there are certainly some cases in which only the one or the
other is admissible, Thus the full form is necessary at the end of the
word, for -A, 6, o, i, e, e, as well as for e in 7)}h &c. (§9/), also generally
with d, a (cf. however § 9 d), e.g. I^LSp, 'r\bo\>, "•T, ^^^D. (But the
Masora requires in Jer 26®, 44^; Ezr6'^'; 2 Ch32^^ ."lia instead of V.^a ;
Zp 2' ^ia [perhaps an error due to the following ■•] for ^^13; Is 40^^ .IPl
[followed by ^J for \-ipl ; JeraS'' .".i^a for V.ib.) On the other hand the
defective writing is common when the letter, which would have to be
employed as a vowel letter, immediately precedes as a strong consonant,
e.g. D^^a {nations) for D''^i3, nIVO {commandments) for nilXO.
/ That much is here arbitrary (see § 7 g), follows from the fact that sometimes
the same word is written very differently, e.g. ^niD'pH Ez i6«" : ^nbpHand also
^riiOpri Jer 23* ; cf. § 25 b. Only it may be observed,
(a) That the scriptio plena in two successive syllables was generally
avoided; cf. e.g. «'33 but D^N33; p^-^Jf, but D^p"^y ; bSp, r\\b\> ■ J/B^.^;
(b) That in the later Books of the 0. T. (and regularly in post-biblical
Hebrew) the full form, in the earlier the defective, is more usual.
m 5. In the cognate dialects, when a vowel precedes a vowel-letter
which is not kindred (heterogeneous), e.g. 1-^, ^^^y V__, ''__, ^__,
a diphthong {au, ai)^ is formed if the heterogeneous vowel be a. This
is also to be regarded as the Old Hebrew pronunciation, since it
* After the example of the Jewish grammarians the expression, 'the vowel
letter rests {quiescee) in the vowel-sign,' has become customary. On the other
hand, the vowel letters are also called by the grammarians, matres lectionis or
supports (fulcra).
' Cf. T. C. Foote, The diphthong ai in Hebrew (Johns Hopkins Univ. Circulars,
June, 1903, p. 70 £f.).
§ 9 a-c] The Vowel Signs in particular 45
agrees with the vocalic character of 1 and * (§ 5 6, note 2). Thus such
words as 11, '•n, ''^3, ^Vb'Vj 13 ^ n^2 are not to be pronounced according to
the usual Jewish custom ^ as vdv, hay, gdy, 'asHy, gev, hayith (or
even as vaf, &c. ; cf. ruodern Greek av af, ev ef for av, cv), but with the
Italian Jews more like wdu, hat, &c. The sound of V—- is the same
as 1^^, i.e. almost like du, so that 1-:^ is often written defectively
for IV-
§ 9. Character of the several Vowels.
Numerous as are the vowel signs in Hebrew writing, they are yet a
not fully adequate to express all the various modifications of the vowel
sounds, especially with respect to length and shortness. To understand
this better a short explanation of the character and value of the several
vowels is required, especially in regard to their length and shortness
as well as to their changeableness (§§ 25, 27).
I. First Class. A-sound.
1. Qames (-.^), when it represents a long a, is, by nature and origin,
of two kinds : —
(i) The essentially long d (in Arabic regularly written N-^^), which
is not readily shortened and never wholly dropped (§25 c), e.g. 3Jn3
l<fithdbh (writing); very seldom with a following N, as K'KT 2 Si2''*
(see the examples in § 72 p)."^
The writing of DKp Ho 10^* for Dp would only be justifiable, if the a O
of this form were to be explained as a contraction of aa ; cf. however
§ 72 a; JN"!! Neh 13I* for J"*! {dag) is certainly incorrect. — The rarity of the
d in Hebrew arises from the fact that it has for the most part become an
obtuse 6 ; see below, q.
(2)-«, lengthened only by position (i.e. tone-long or at all events C
lengthened under the influence of the tone, according to the laws
for the formation of syllables, § 27 e-h), either in the tone-syllable
itself (or in the secondary tone-syllable indicated by Metheg, see
below), or just before or after it. This sound is invariably lengthened
from an original a,* and is found in open syllables, i. e. syllables ending
in a vowel (§266), e.g. ^S, 7^^, D^pJ, T'DK (Arab. Idkd, qdtdld,
ydqUmu, 'dstru), as well as in closed syllables, i.e. those ending in
^ In MSS. 1 and ^ in such combinations as \3 *n are even marked with
Mappiq (§ 14 a).
* Of a different kind are the cases in which N has lost its consonantal
sound by coalescing with a preceding a, § 23 a-d.
' In Arabic this a is always retained in an open syllable.
46 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 9 d~f
a consonant, as 1J, 2?i3 (vulgar Arab, ydd, kaukdb). In a closed syllable,
however, it can only stand when this has the tone,">5"1, D^iV; whereas
in an open syllable it is especially frequent before the tone, e.g. ■^2"|J,
I^T, 03^. Where the tone is moved forward or weakened (as happens
most commonly in what is called the construct state of nouns, cf. § 89 a)
tlie original short d {Pathah) is retained in a closed syllable, while in
an open syllable it becomes ^^wd (§27 i) : 0311, constr. state DPl]
{mhdm); -in-l, -in-n (d'bhdr)', hl^p^, D^^i?. For examples of the
retention, in the secondary tone-syllable, of a lengthened from d, see
§ 93 a^-
d In some terminations of the verb {^ in the 2nd sing. masc. perf.,
J in the 2nd pi. fern, of the imperat., as well as in the 3rd and 2nd
pi. fern, of the imperf.), in ^^ thou (masc.) and in the suffixes ^ and ^;
the final a can stand even without a vowel letter. A n is, however,
in these cases (except with H) frequently added as a vowel letter.
On -Tf- for 0 see below, /.
e 2. Pathah, or short d, stands in Hebrew almost exclusively in
a closed syllable with or without the tone {bb\>, ^^f^P)- In places
where it now appears to stand in an open syllable the syllable was
originally closed, and a helping vowel (d, ?) has been inserted after
the second radical merely to make the pronunciation easier, e.g. ^'D?
(ground-form nahl), n^| (Arab, bait), see § 28 d, and with regard to
two cases of a different kind, § 26 g, h. Otherwise a in an open
syllable has almost without exception passed into a {-^, see above, c.
On the very frequent attenuation of a to i, cf. below, h. On the rare, and
only apparent union of Pathah with K (^-^)y s^® § ^3 d, end. On a as
a helping-vowel, § 22 f (Pathah furtivum), and § 28*.
f 3. Segol (e, e \a]) by origin belongs sometimes to the second, but most
frequently to the first vowel class (§270, p, u). It belongs to the first class
when it is a modification of a (as the Germ. Bad, pi. Bader; Eng. man,
pi. men), either in a toneless syllable, e.g. D^lv i^^^ yadkhem), or with
the tone, e. g. H? f^^om 'ars, n.i?. Arab, qdrn, npj? Arab. qdmh. This
S^gol is often retained even in the strongest tone-syllable, at the end
of a sentence or of an important clause (in pause), as ^^J^, P'^^lf.
(malakh, sadaq). As a rule, however, in such cases the Pathah which
underlies the S^gol is lengthened into Qames, e.g. npj?, pp, A S^gol
apparently lengthened from ^^wd, but in reality traceable to an
original d, stands in pausal forms, as ''IS (ground-form pdry), *n^*.
{ydhy), &c. On the cases where a ^ (originally consonantal) follows
this S^gol, see § 75/, and § 91 ^.
§ 9 g-m] Character of the several Vowels 47
II. Second Class. I- and E-sounds.
4. The long t is frequently even in the consonantal writing indicated /r
by ^ (a fully written Hireq ^-^) ; but a naturally long i can be also
written defectively (§ 8 i), e.g. P^"^?? {righteous), plur. D"*{?"^?f saddlqim;
'^T! iM fi'^''^)i plur. ^^<'?,1 . "Whether a defectively written Hireq is long
may be best known from the origin of the form ; often also from the
nature of the syllable (§ 26), or as in ^>'")^"'. from the Metheg attached to
it (§16/).
5. The short Hireq (always' written defectively) is especially frequent h
in sharpened syllables (^'^i?, "'BN) and in toneless closed syllables (''i'^l'?
2)salm); cf. however Sipjl in a closed tone-syllable, and even fS-^l, with
a helping S^gol, for wayytphn. It has arisen very frequently by
attenuation from a, as in ''"1?'^ from original ddbdre, ''Pllf (ground-form
sddq),^ or else it is the original ?, which in the tone-syllable had
become e, as in ''J?^.** {thy enemy) from Sl^N (ground-form 'dyih)? It
is sometimes a simple helping vowel, as in ri^3, § 28 e.
The earlier grammarians call every Hireq yrriiien fidly , Hireq magnum ; every
one written defectively, Hireq parvum, — a misleading distinction, so far as
quantity is concerned.
6. The longest e *-^ (more rarely defective -^, e.g. ^.^ for TJ^ ?
Is 3*; at the end of a word also H — ) is as a rule contracted from W ay
{ai), § 7 a, e.g. ''9''n {palace), Arab, and Syriac haikal.
7. The Sere without Yodh mostly represents the tone-long e, which, k
like the tone -long a (see c), is very rarely retained except in and before
the tone-syllable, and is always lengthened from an original i. It
stands in an open syllable with or before the tone, e.g. "^SD (ground-
form siphr) book, n3K' (Arab, stndt) sleep, or with Metheg (see § 16 c?,/)
in the secondary tone-syllable, e.g. *ri7i<ip my request, i^^fji let us go.
On the other hand in a closed syllable it is almost always with the
tone, as |3 son, D?i< dumb.
Exceptions : (a) e is sometimes retained in a toneless closed syllable, in /
monosyllabic words before Maqqeph, e. g. ~^y Nu 35^^, as well as in the
examples of ndsog ^dhor mentioned in § 29 /(on the quantity cf. § 8 6 3 end) ;
(6) in a toneless open final syllable, Sere likewise occurs in examples of the
nasog 'akor, as N;f> Ex 16" ; cf. Ju g^K
8. The S^gol of the I(E)-class is most frequently an e modified from M
originali, either replacing a tone-long e which has lost the tone, e.g.
^ At least according to the Masoretic orthography ; cf. Wellhausen, Text
der Bb. Sam. , p. 18, Rem-.
' Jerome (cf. Siegfried, ZAW. 1884, p. 77) in these cases often gives a for i.
' Cf. the remarks of I. Guidi, ' La pronuncia del sere,' in the Verhandl. d-:s
Hamburger Orient. -Kongr. of 1902, Leiden, 1904, p. 208 ff., on Italian e for
Latin t, as in fede ^Jtdem, pece=picem.
48 TJie Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 9 n-r
"1^ from \^ (give), T)??)' [thy creator) from "l-f', or in the case discussed
in § 93 0, ^?p^, "'ItJ? from the ground-forms hilq, 'izr ; cf. also § 64 /.
S^gol appears as a simple helping- vowel in cases such as 1BD for siphr,
bf^ for yigl (§ 28 e).
III. Third Class. U- and O-sounds.
n 9. For the U-£oimd there is —
(i) the long ti, either (a) written fully, ^ Sureq, e.g. ?^32 {boundary),
or (b) defectively written ^:- QibhUs ''\h'2^_ , \^T)12'] ;
(2) the short u, mostly represented by QibhUs, in a toneless closed
syllable and especially common in a sharpened syllable, in e.g. iCr'^
(table), nSD Q)ooth).
O Sometimes also m in a sharpened syllable is written ^, e.g. nS^H ^ 102'
n-iV Jb s'', D^13 Jer. 3i3«, inS^K'D Is 5', D*Giny Gn 2^^ for HSn, &c.
For this u the LXX write 0, e. g. D?"iy 'OSoXXd/^, from which, however, it
only follows, that this m was pronounced somewhat indistinctly. The LXX
also express the sharp Hireq by «, e.g. n!3X = 'E/t/xTjp. The pronunciation of
the Qibbus like the German ii, which was formerly common, is incorrect,
although the occasional pronunciation of the U sounds as ii in the time of the
punctators is attested, at least as regards Palestine ^ ; cf. the Turkish biilbul
for the Persian bvdbul, and the pronunciation of the Arabic dunyd in Syria as
diinyd.
p 10. The 0-sound bears the same relation to U as the E does to I
in the second class. It has four varieties : —
(i) The 6 which is contracted from aw (=aw), § 7 a, and accord-
ingly is mostly written fully ; ^ {Holem plenum), e.g. l^iC (a whij)),
Arab, saitf, >T^'iV (^iniquity) from Hp^y. More rarely defectively, as
'I'lb' (thine ox) from "'itJ' Arab. /aur.
q (2) The long 6 which arose in Hebrew at an early period, by a general
process of obscuring, out of an original d^ while the latter has
been retained in Arabic and Aramaic. It is usually written fully in
the tone-syllable, defectively in the toneless, e.g. ^t?'p Arab, qdtil.
Aram. qAtel, ni^K Arab, 'lldh, Aram. 'Hdh, plur. Cl^n^X; pitT {hg),
Arab, sdq ; "li^a {hero), Arab, gabbdr ; DHin {seal), Arab, hdtdm ; pQl
{pomegranate), Arab, rilmmdn ; JiobK' {dominion), Aram, l??^ and
lOpB' Arab, mltdn; Dv^ {j)eace), Aram. D?^, Arab, sdldm. Some-
times the form in d also occurs side by side with that in 6 as IJ"]?' and
JV'iK' (coa< 0/ mai7 ; see however § 29 w). Cf. also § 68 6.
r (3) The tone-long 0 which is lengthened from an original w, or
from an 0 arising from u, by the tone, or in general according to the
* Cf. Delitzsch, Physiologie u. Musik, Lpz. 1868, p. 15 f.
* Cf. above, b, end. On Jerome's transliteration of 0 for d, see ZAW, 1884,
P- 75-
§ 9 s, <] Character of the several Vowels
49
laws for the formation of syllables. It occurs not only in the tone-
syllable, but also in an open syllable before the tone, e.g. ^IP (ground-
form quds) sanctuary; ^1'3 for buirakh, ^^pfl >/' 104^, as well as
(with Metheg) in the secondary tone-syllable ; Ovv"^, ^^J?3- But the
original 6 (w) is retained .n a toneless closed syllable, whereas in
a toneless open syllable it is weakened to S^a-d. Cf. 73 all, but
"^3 {kol}, D^3 (Jcidlam); Vop^, ^S^p^ and ^^tii?% where original u is
weakened to ^^wd : yiqiHit, Arab, yaqtuld. This tone-long 0 is only
as an exception written fully.
(4) __ Qames-hatu2)h. represents 6 (properly a, cf. § 8 a, note 2)modified S
from u and is therefore classed here. It stands in the same relation to
Holem as the S^gol of the second class to Sere, 'b'^-kol, D^>1 wayyaqom.
On the distinction between this and Qames, see below, u.
11. The following table gives a summary of the gradation of the t
three vowel-classes according to the quantity of the vowels : —
First Class : A.
_ original d (Arabic
_ tone-long d (from
original a) chiefly in
the tone-syllable but
also just before it.
(as a modification
of a) sometimes a
tone-long e, some-
times S.
short a.
[" i attenuated from
d ; see A.]
Utmost weakening to
Second Class : I and E.
■i e, from original ay
\ai).
' or long i.
tone-long e (from i)
generally in the tone-
syllable but also just
before it.
TTiird Class : U and 0.
S 0, from original aw
(aw),
i or -^6 obscured from d.
^ or M.
— tone-long 5 (from
original m) in the tone-
syllable, otherwise in
an open syllable.
short »•
Utmost weakening to
», * or «.
6, modified from u.
short u, especially
in a sharpened sylla-
ble.
Utmost weakening to
a i " or *.
Rem. On the distinction between Qames and Qames- hatuph}
Ac-ording to § 8 o, long o or d (Qames) and short 0 or a (Qames-hatuph) are in
manuocripts and printed texts generally expressed by the same sign (^), e.g.
Dp qdm, "73 kol. The beginner who does not yet know the grammatical
U
1 These statements, in order to be fully understood, must be studied in
connexion with the theory of syllables (§ 26) and Metheg (§ 16 c-t).
COWLET E
50 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 9 v
origin of the words in question (which is of course the surest guide), may
depend meanwhile on the following principal rules : —
I. The sign -^ ' is 6 in a toneless closed syllable, since such
a syllable can have only a short vowel (§26 0). The above case
occurs —
(a) When S^v^d follows as a syllable-divider, as in noDn hokh-ma
(wisdom), i^}?^ '6kh-ld (food). With Metheg __ is a (a) and according
to the usual view stands in an open, syllable with a following S^wd
mobile, e.g. ^4'?^ 'd-khHa (she ate) ; but cf. § 16 i.
(6) W^hen a closed syllable is formed by Dagel forte, e. g. "'ijin
honneni (have mercy upon me); but D^ijl3 (with Metheg, § 16/^)
bdfttm.
(c) When the syllable in question loses the tone on account of
a following Maqqeph (§16 a), e. g. ClXH/S kol-hd-'dddm (all men).
In ^t 35'° and Pr ig' Maqqeph with ^3 is replaced by a conjunctive accent
(Mer^kha) ; so hy Darga, Ju 19^ with lyD, and Ez 37^ with Dip*! (so Baer after
Qimhi ; ed. Mant., Ginsburg, Kittel Dlp^l).
{d) In a closed final syllable without the tone, e.g. DiJ'l wayyaqom,
(and he stood up). — In the cases where <t or a in the final syllable has
become toneless through Maqqeph (§ 16 a) and yet remains, e.g.
JT^n'^ra Est 4^, v"^^ Gn 4"^ it has a Metheg in correct manuscripts
and printed texts.
In cases like ^^7"^, i^^? lamma, the tone shows that -j- is to be
read as d.
V 2. The cases in which -y- appears to stand in an open syllable and yet is
to be read as 0 require special consideration. This is the case, (a) when
Hafeph-Qames follows, e.g. ipyS his work, or simple vocal S'wd, e.g. P'l"'! ox
goad ; ilSyiS Jo 4'' ; mttSJ' (so ed. Mant., Ginsb.) preserve ip 86', cf. 16' and the
cases mentioned in § 48 i, n., and § 61/, n. ; other examples are Ob 11, Ju 14");
Hateph-Pathah follows in ^H'^dIj (so Ginsburg; Baer ^^{;^•rp|5) i S 151, ^jl"in^
24", and '^JJ'JS^ (so Baer, Gn 32^^, others ^'kJ'JQ^) ; (6) before another Qames-
Jiatvvh, e.g. ^pyQ thy work ; on ""p'TlX and ""^'rinp Nu 23'', see § 67 0 : (c) in
' ': TIT • T|T • T (T " f * \ •
the two plural forms Ct'lp sanctuaries and CBHtJ* roots (also written ^p
and 'IJi'). In all these cases the Jewish grammarians regard the Metheg
accompanying the -:;- as indicating a Qames rahabh (broad Qames) and
therefore read the -rr- as a ; thus pd-°l6, dd-r'bdn, pd-ol^khd, qd-ddsim. But
neither the origin of these forms, nor the analogous formations in Hebrew
and in the cognate languages, nor the transcription of proper names in the
^ In the Babylonian punctuation (§ 8 g, note) d and 0 are carefully distin-
guished. So also in many MSS. with the ordinary punctuation and in
Baer's editions of the text since 1880, in which -^r- is used for 6 as well as
for *. Cf Baer-Delitzsch, Liber Jobi, p. 43. But the identity of the two signs
is certainly original, and the use of -^ for 0 is misleading.
§ 10 a-d] Character of the several Trowels 51
LXX, allows us to regard this view as correct. It is just possible that Qames
is here used loosely for a, as the equivalent of o, on the analogy of ipya &c,,
§ 93 q. As a matter of fact, however, we ought no doubt to divide and read
po'^-lo (for po'-l6), po'o-Vkha, goda-H»n.— Quite as inconceivable is it for Meiheg to
be a sign of the lengthening into a in ^^"''"in^'^-^^ "*)' although it is so in "'3N3
ha-'°nx (in the navy), since here the a of the article appears under the 3.
§ 10. The Half Voivels and the Syllable Divider (Sewa).
L Besides the full vowels, Hebrew has also a series of vowel a
sounds which may be called half vowels (Sievers, Murmelvokale).
The punctuation makes use of these to represent extremely slight
sounds which are to be regarded as remains of fuller and more distinct
vowels from an earlier period of the language. They generally take
the place of vowels originally short standing in open syllables. Such
short vowels, though preserved in the kindred languages, are not
tolerated by the present system of pointing in Hebrew, but either
undergo a lengthening or are weakened to S®wa. Under some
circumstances, however, the original short vowel may reappear.
To these belongs first of all the sign -p-, which indicates an ex- b
treraely short, slight, and (as regards pronunciation) indeterminate
vowel sound, something like an obscure half e (— ). It is called S^wd,^
which may be either simple ^^wd [S^wd simjflex) as distinguished
from the compound (see /), or vocal S^wd {S^wd mobile) as distin-
guished from S"wd quiescens, which is silent and stands as a mere
syllable divider (see ^) under the consonant which closes the syllable.
The vocal S^wd stands under a consonant which is closely united, as C
a kind of grace-note, with the following syllable, either (a) at the
beginning of the word, as ^'^p qHol (to kill), ^yo'Q rtfmalle (filling),
or (6) in the middle of the word, as nbtpij? q6-fld, l^t^i?^ yiq-fU.
In former editions of this Grammar SHva was distinguished as medium CI
when it followed a short vowel and therefore stood in a supposed 'loosely
closed' or 'wavering' syllable, as in ""aplO, >Q33. According to Sievers,
Metrische Studien, i. 22, this distinction must now be abandoned. These
syllables are really closed, and the original vowel is not merely shortened,
but entirely elided. The fact that a following B^gadk^phath letter (§ 6 w)
remains spirant instead of taking Bages lene, is explained by Sievers on the
' supposition that the change from hard to spirant is older than the elision
* On a^p, the older and certainly the only correct form (as in Ben Asher),
see Bacher, ZDMG. 1895, p. 18, note 3, who compares Sewayya, the name of
the Syriac accentual sign of similar form -^— ( = Hebr. Zaqeph). The form
^?Z1K', customary in Spain since the time of Menahem b. Saruq, is due
to a supposed connexion with Aram. n!3E' rest, and hence would originally
have denoted only S'wd quiescens, like the Arabic sukHn (rest). The derivation
from riDK', n^^B' (stem 2^^, Levias, American Journ. ofPhilol., xvi. 28 ft'.) seems
impossible.
£ 2
52 J'he Individual Sounds and Characters [§ lo e-g
of the vowel, and that the prehistoric malakai became malakhai before being
shortened to malkhe'. In cases like iNp3 (from ND3), ^r\\)) (from ng^) the
dropping of the Dagei forte shows that the original vowel is completely lost.
C The sound e has been adopted as the normal transcription of simple S^wd
mobile, although it is certain that it often became assimilated in sound to
other vowels. The LXX express it bye, or even by ij, D""!!^"!!! Xepov0iiJ, H^ vpH
dK\r]\ovta, more frequently by a, PXIOB' Xaixov-qX, but very frequently by
assimilating its indeterminate sound to the following principal vowel,
e. g. Dip 'S.oSona, nb^K' XoKojxuv (as well as 2aA<u/«w»'), niKlJf 2ay3atutf,
?Niri3 KaOavariK.^ A similar account of the pronunciation of S*wd is given
by Jewish grammarians of the middle ages.^
How the Shed sound has arisen through the vanishing of a full vowel is
seen, e.g. in nS13 from bdrdkd, as the word is still pronounced in Arabic.
In that language the full short vowel regularly corresponds to the Hebrew
Shod mobik.
f 2. Connected with the simple S'wd mdbile is the compound S^wd
or Hdteph {correptum), i.e. a S"wd the pronunciation of which is more
accurately fixed by the addition of a short vowel. There are three
6'^i«<J-sounds determined in this way, corresponding to the three vowel
classes (§ 7 a) : —
(__) Hdteph-Pdthdh, e.g. 1i»n Ifmdr, ass.
(-^) Hdteph-S'gol, e.g. I^X '«mdr, to say.
(-^) ndteph-Qdmes, e.g. vH, h^U, sickness.
These Hdtephs, or at least the first two, stand especially under the
four guttural letters (§22 I), instead of a simjyle S^wd mobile,
since these letters by their nature require a more definite vowel
than the indetenninate simple S^wd mobile. Accordingly a guttural
at the beginning of a syllable, where the S^wA is necessarily vocal,
can never have a mere S^wd simplex.
On -=:- the shorter Hatef as compared with -^ cf. § 27 v.
§ Rem. A. Only and occur under letters which are not gutturals.
ffateph-Paihah is found instead of simple S'wd (especially 5*wd mobile), chiefly
(a) under strengthened consonants, since this strengthening (commonly
called doubling) causes a more distinct pronunciation of the S^wd mobile,
^731^ branches, Zc 4". According to the rule given by Ben-Asher (which,
however, appears to bo unknown to good early MSS. and is therefore rejected
by Ginsburg, Introd., p. 466 ; cf. Foote, Johns Hopkins Univ. Circulars, June 1903,
* The same occurs frequently also in the Greek and Latin transcriptions
of Phoenician words, e.g. NSpD Malaga, D^xW3 gubulim (SchrOder, Die phoniz.
Spr., p. 139 fif.). Cf. the Latin augment in momordi, pupugi, with the Greek
in T(Tv<pa, Ttrvfi/ifvos, and the old form memordi.
* See especially Yehuda Hayyug, pp. 4 f. and 130 f. in Nutt's edition (Lond.
1870), corresponding to p. 200 of the edition by Dukes (Stuttg. 1844) ; Ibn
Ezra's Sahoth, p. 3; Gesenius, Lehrgebdude der hebr, Sprache, p. 68. The Manuel
du lecteur, mentioned above, § 6 6, also contains express rules for the various
ways of pronouncing S*wd mobile : so too the Dikduke ha-t'amim, ed. by Baer
and Strack, Lpz. 1879, p. 12 fif. Cf. also Schreiner, ZAW. vi. 236 ff.
V
§ 10 A] Half Vowels and Syllable Divider {S'vca) 53
p. 71 f.), the Hateph is necessary'^ when, in a strengthened medial consonant
with SHod (consequently not in cases like ^ni^, &c.), preceded by a Pathah,
the sign of the strengthening {Dages forte) has fallen away, e. g. ^ppH (but ed.
Mant. and Ginsb. ^^^il) praise ye! ^Hif^Nni Ju i6i« ; no less universally,
where after a consonant with S'lcd the same consonant follows (to separate
them more sharply, and hence with a il/e</ieg always preceding), e. g. CirjiD
f 68*; "^nhhp, (ed. Mant. and Ginsb. 'bb\>) Gn 2f^ (but not without excep-
tions, e. g. "'•ppn Ju 5I5, Is 10^ ; \b|)if Jer 6^ and so always ""Jin behold me,
^Jjn behold us: on 3 before the suffix SI, see § 20 6) ; also in certain forms
under Kaph and Res after a long vowel and before the tone, e. g. nSp^Nn Gn
3IT ; ^2-\3 ip 103I; ^nnnK'ni i K i* (but Vi-^m ^ 72", cf. Jer 42, I Ch 2920,
because the tone is thrown back on to the d. After e S'wd remains even
before the tone, as ^3")3, &c. ; but before Maqqef N3"n3f>N Baer Ex 4", 2 S 15'',
Jer 40^^ but ed. Mant., Jabl., Ginsb. '[jN) ^ ; (6) under initial sibilants after 1
copulative, e. g. 2r\]} Gn 2^2 ; cf. Jer 482° ; nHD^ Is 45" ; Him Lv 25" ; n^{^>
Gn 27»« ; V^m Nu 2318, Is 37", Dn 91^, cf. Ju 512, i K 14", 2 K 9", Jb 14I, Ec
9^— to emphasize the vocal character of the .bVa. For the same reason under
the emphatic tJ in ^^0^^ Jer 22^8 ; cf. Jb 332^ ; after Qoph in ''ri'l'li'?^ (so Baer,
but ed. Mant., Jabl., Ginsb. 'p^) Ez 23"; -2");?^ >P 55"? cf- J^^- 3^^ under
Rei in n*jnN (ed. Mant. "IX) Gn i8«i ; DJJn'l \p zS^; even under fl Ezr 26-1 ;
under 3 Est 2* ; ^3-l31 so Jabl., Ginsb., but'ed. Mant. '13^) Dt 24" ; (c) under
sonants, sibilants or Qoph after t, e. g. pn^f"* Gn 2i«, cf. 30^8 and Ez 21^8 (under
P); nilOS <p 12*; TiSpnn Jer 2215; ^1^-^33 Jos ii»; 'r\^P2 ^ 74^— for t^^
snme reason as the cases under b ' ; according to Baer also in n^CD5I'
I S so"*; '^'^:p\ Gn 32I8 after 6 (cf, § 9 v), as well as after a in Hn^C'i^n Dn
91"; nan^n'Gn 2738; D''V'i^on 2 k 7*.
B. The ffateph-Qames is less restricted ^to the gutturals than the first two, //,
and stands more frequently for a simple S^wd mobile when an original 0-sound
requires to be partly preserved, e. g. at the beginning, in iNT (ground-form
ri'y) vision (cf. §932); ?.T333 2 Ch 31", &c., Q^re {K'th. ' "i):i) ; ni'SOy
Ammonitish women, i K u' (sing.' JTiJiDy) ; ^STl'' for the usual 1?.'^1^ Ez 36«,
from t]'"^T ; M'2pT\ Nu 23^5, Jer 31", and elsewhere before suffixes, cf. § 60 a ;
ni^nj? his pate (from ipij?) ip f, &c. ; HDj^K'SI Is i8< Q're. Further, like __,
it stands under consonants, which ought to have Dagei forte, as in nnp? (for
nriijjb) Gn 22s. In this example, as in nnyO^ i K 13'' ; HSD^ 2 K 7"; and
VV^'^ Jer 2 2^0 the Hateph-Qames is no doubt due to the influence of the
• T T : 1 • *
1 See Delitzsch, 'Bemerkungen iiber masoretisch treue Darstellung dcs
alttestam. Textes,' in the Ztschr. f. luih. Theol. u. Kirche, vol. xxiv. 1863,
p. 409 ff.
^ On the uncertainty of the MSS. in some cases which come under «, see
Minhat shay (the Masoretic comm. in ed. Mant.) on Gn 12' and Ju 7^
' Ben-Ashcr requires for (even for ^"wd quiescens) generally before
a guttural or "1 ; hence Baer reads' in 2 S i ■;» -3'np3 f 18'' XIpN ; 49'^ ?iNB'7;
658 nnin ; 68" ^nori ; Pr 3c" :j?^n ; Jb 29" -in^lN ; cf. Delitzsch, Psalms,
12'', note.
54 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§§ lo i-i, ii
following guttural as well as of the preceding U-sound. (Elsewhere indeed
after 1 in similar cases /lateph-Pathah is preferred, see above, b ; but with
nnp^ of. also "l^Bp Is 9^ lo", 14^^, where the U-sound must necessarily be
admitted to have an influence on the S'wd immediately following.) In
""inL21 (li-fhor) Jb 17' it is also influenced by the following 0-sound. In ''Jppi?
I S 28* Q're, the original form is DDp, where again the 0 represents an 6. It
is only through the influence of a following guttural that we can explain
the forms nii-\p^ Est 2" ; ^n33 Pr28«; nrnD3 Jer 49^ ; nyb'DX Is 27* ;
T t;': • T Til" T t; ; • tt: : •
ny?:K'S1 Dn S" ; nyr:tJ' ip 39^^ ; myoa 2 K 2I (Baer's ed. also in ver. ii) ;
tt:: viT tt:i' ' ' 'tt;!-
DTinpn 2 Ch 34I2 (ed. Mant., Opitius, &c. 'pn). Finally in most of the
examples which have been adduced, the influence "of an emphatic sound
(p t3 , cf. also nOp^N Ru z^-f), or of a sibilant is also to be taken into account.
/ 3. The sign of the simjyle 6hod -r- serves also as a mere syllable
divider. In this case it is disregarded in pronunciation and is called
^^wA quiescens. In the middle of a word it stands under every con-
sonant which closes a syllable ; at the end of words on the other hand
it is omitted except in final ^ (to distinguish it better from final |),
e.g. "nbp king, and in the less frequent case, where a word ends with
a mute after another vowelless consonant as in '^^). nard, J!^^ thou fem.
(for kint), Jjibpp thou fem. hast killed, p^l^ and he watered, 3f ^. and he
took cajytive, ^^^'^^ drink thou not; but NTT, Nt^n/
jf However, in the examples where a mute closes the syllable, the final 5«ud
comes somewhat nearer to a vocal S^iod, especially as in almost all the cases
a weakening of a final vowel has taken place, viz. riS 'a«« from ''Jjlt^ 'att'i {'anti),
nS^p from ''P\b6^ (cf. in this form, the 2nd sing. fem. perf. Qal, even
nN3, after a vowel, Gn I6^ Mi 4", &c., according to the readings of Baer),
3K'"' yisJ)^ from HB'^^ , «S!;c. The Arabic actually has a short vowel in analogous
forms. In Y]^ borrowed from the Indian, as also in tpK'p (qdU) Pr 22^^;
and in t^Din~^X ne addas (for which we should expect fipin) Pr 30« the final
mute of itself attracts a slight vowel sound.
/ Rem. The proper distinction between simple S'wd mobile and quiescens depends
on a correct understanding of the formation of syllables (§ 26). The beginner
may observe for the present, that (i) ^^wd is always mobile (a) at the beginning
of a word (except in D"'ri6J' ^nt^' § 97 b, note) ; (6) under a consonant with
Dage^ forte, e. g. ^D'lJ gid-d^phu ; (c) after another ^^wd, e. g. vtDp^ yiqflu
(except at the end of the word, see above, i). {2)^S^icd is quiescens (a) at the
end of a word, also in the T] ; {b) before another S^wd.
§ 11. Other Signs ichich affect the Reading.
Very closely connected with the vowel points are the reading-signs,
which were probably introduced at the same time. Besides the
diacritical point over b' and K', a point is placed loithirf, a consonant
» On n^ as an ending of the 2nd sing. fem. perf. Qal of verbs iTv, see
§ 75 »«.
§ 12 a-c] Other Signs which affect the Reading 55
to sliow that it has a stronger sound. On the other liand a horizontal
stroke {Rapfie) over a consonant is a sign that it has 7iot the stronger
f^ound. According to the different purposes for which it is used the
point is either (i) DageS forte, a sign of strengthening (§ 12); or
(2) Dages lene, a sign of the harder pronunciation of certain con-
sonants (§ 13); or (3) Mappiq, a sign to bring out the full consonantal
value of letters which otherwise serve as vowel letters (§ 7 b), especially
in the case of n at the end of the word (§14 a). The Raphe, which
excludes the insertion of any of these points, has almost entirely gone
out of use in our printed texts (§14 e).
§ 12. Dagek in general,^ and Dage§ forte in particular.
Cf. Graetz, ' Die mannigfache Anwendung u. Bedeut. des Dagesch,' in
Monatsschr. fiir Gesch. w. Wiss. d. Judent., 1887, pp. 425 S. and 473 £f.
1. Dage^, a point standing in the middle of a consonant,^ denotes, a
according to § 11, (a) the strengthening^ of a consonant [Dages forte),
e-g- ''^i? qittel (§ 20); or (6) the harder pronunciation of the letters
^?|*15? {Dages lene). For a variety of the latter, now rarely used in
our printed texts, see § 13 c.
The root ^T\ in Syriac means to pierce through, to bore through (with sharp f)
iron) ; hence the name Dagei is commonly explained, solely with reference
to its form, oy pMnrf«re, point. But the names of all similar signs are derived
rather from their grammatical significance. Accordingly ^y] may in the
Masora have the sense : acuere (Jiteram), i. e. to sharpen a letter, as well as to
harden it, i.e. to pronounce it as hard and without aspiration. \yH acuens
{literam) would then be a sign of sharpening and hardening (like Mappiq
P^Sip proferens, as signum prolationis), for which purposes a prick of the pen, or
puncture, was selected. The opposite of Da^eHs nQI soft, § 14 e, and § 22 n.
2. In grammar Dage^ forte, the sign of strengthening, is the more q
important. It may be compared to the sicilicus of the Latins {Luculus
for Lucullus) or to the stroke over m and n. In the unpointed text
it is omitted, like the vowels and other reading signs.
For the different kinds of Dages forte, see § 20.
1 Oort, Theol. Tijdschr. 1902, p. 376, maintains that 'the Masoretes recognized
no distinction between Dages lene and forte. They used a Dages where they
considered that a letter had the sharp, not the soft or aspirated sound.'
This may be true; but the old-established distinction between the two kinds
of DogeJ is essential for the right understanding of the grammatical forms.
* Wdw with Dagei (^) cannot in our printed texts be distinguished from a
wSw pointed as Surlq (^) ; in the latter case the point should stand higher up.
The ^ u is, however, easily to be recognized since it cannot take a vowel before
or under it.
* Stade, Lehrb. der hebr. Gr., Lpz. 1879, pp. 44, 103, rightly insists on the
expression strengthened pronunciation instead of the older term doubling, since
the consonant in question is only written once. The common expression
arises from the fact that in transcription a strengthened consonant can only be
indicated by writing it as double.
56 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§§ ra a-a,
l^a-c
§ 13. Dages lene.
Ginsburg, Introd., p. 114 if. : Dagesh and Baphe.
a 1. Dages lene, the sign of hardening, is in ordinary printed texts
placed only within the nSSl^a letters (§ 6 n) as a sign that they
should be pronounced with their original hard sound (without aspira-
tion), e.g. ^y^ melekh, but i3?P md'-ko ; ">S|J1 taphdr, but 'i^) yith-por ;
nriE^ tatha, but r\V\f\ yiUe. '
f) 2. The cases in which a DageS lene is to be inserted are stated in
§ 21. It occurs almost exclusively at the beginning of words and
syllables. In the middle of the word it can easily be distinguished
from Dages forte, since the latter always has a vowel before it, whereas
Dage^ lene never has; accordingly the Dages in ''3*5 'appt, D''3"l rabbim
must be forte, but in P'!!?^ yigdal it is lene.
C A variety of the Bagei lene is used in many manuscripts, as well as in Baer's
editions, though others (including Ginsburg in the first t\v<) cases, Introd.,
pp. 121, 130, 603, 662) reject it together with the Hatefs dlscusised in § 10 g.
It is inserted in consonants other than the B'gadk'phath to cajl attention
expressly to the beginning of a new syllable : (a) when the same consonant
precedes in close connexion, e. g. ^3?"b33 tp 9', where, owing to tK© Dages,
the coalescing of the two Lameds is avoided ; (J>) in cases like ''DTO ^62^ =
•>nah-si (not mdh"'-si) ; (c) according to some (including Baer ; not in ed. Mant.)
in N7 in the combination N^ 1^3 Dt 32*, or i? 6^7 Hb 1', 2« &c. (so always
also in Ginsburg's text, except in Gn 38') ; see also § 20 e and g. — Delitzsch
appropriately gives the name of Dage^ orihophonicum to this variety of Dagci
{Bibl. Kommentar, 1874, on ^t 94") ; cf. moreover Delitzsch, Luth. Ztschr., 1863,
p. 413 ; also his Oomplutensische Varianten zu dem Alttest. Texte, Lpz. 1878, p. 1 2.,
d 3. When Dages forte is placed in a B^gadk^phath, the strengthening
necessarily excludes its aspiration, e.g. ""SN, from ^33*?.
§ 14. Mappiq and Raphe.
a 1. Mappiq, like DageS, also a point toithin the consonant, serves in
the letters M n X as a sign that they are to be regarded as full
consonants and not as vowel letters. In most editions of the text it
is only used in the consonantal n at the end of words (since n can
never be a vowel letter in the middle of a word), e.g. I^^J gabhdh
(to be high), "^-f^?* 'arsdh (her land) which has a consonantal ending
(shortened from -hd), different from '"l^")^ 'drsd (to the earth) which
has a vowel ending.
h Rem. I. Without doubt such a Hs was distinctly aspirated like the Arabic
Hd at the end of a syllable. There are, however, cases in which this n has
lost its consonantal character (the Mappiq of course disappearing too), so
that it remains only as a vowel letter ; cf. § 91 e on the 3rd fem. sing.
C The name p'^QD means proferens, i. e. a sign which brings out the sound of
the letter distinctly, as a consonant. The same sign was selected for this
IU4d,e,isa,b-\ Mappiq and Raphe 57
and for Bagei, since both are intended to indicate a hard, i. e. a strong, sound.
Hence Raphe (see e) is the opposite of both.
2. In MSS. Mappiq is also found with K, 1, \ to mark them expressly as d
consonants, e.g. ^13 (got/), 1p {qaw, qdu), for which 1 is also used, as IK'J^, &c.
For the various statements of the Masora (where these points are treated as
Dages), see Ginsburg, The Massorah, letter H, § 6 (also Introd., pp. 557, 609, 637,
770), and ' The Dageshed Alephs in the Karlsruhe MS.' (where these points
are extremely frequent), in the Verhandluvgen des Berliner Orientalisten-Kongresses,
Berlin, i. 188 1, p. 136 S. The great differences in the statements found in
the Masora point to different schools, one of which appears to have intended
that every audible N should be pointed. In the printed editions the point
occurs only four times with N (N or N), Gn 432*, Lv 23", Ezr 8" and Jb 33"!
(1N"I ; where the point can be taken only as an orthophonetic sign, not with
KOnig as Dagei forte). Cf. Delitzsch, Hiob, 2nd ed., p. 439 ff.
2. Rd2)he (HDn i.e. weak, soft), a horizontal stroke over the letter, e
is the opposite of both kinds of DageS and Mappiq, but especially of
Dagd lene. In exact manuscripts every nD31J3 letter has either
Dage^ lene or Bdphe, e.g. ^^» melekh, isri, T\i^f. In modern editions
(except Ginsburg's ist ed.) Rdjpke is used only when the absence of a
Dages or Mappiq requires to be expressly pointed out.
§ 15. The Accents.
On the ordinal^ accents (see below, e), cf. W. Heidenheim, D^OytSH "'PBK'O ^
[The Laws of the Accents], EOdelheim, 1808 (a compilation from older Jewish
writers on the accents, with a commentary) ; W. Wickes (see also below),
D^ISD N"3 "iDytD [_The Accents of the Tuetiiy-one Books], Oxford, 1887, an
exhaustive investigation in English ; J. M. Japhet, Die Accente der hi. Schrift
(exclusive of the books n?Oi«{),ed. by Heinemann, Frankf. a. M. 1896; Pratorius,
Die Herkunft der hebr. Accente, Berlin, 1901, and (in answer to Gregory's criticism
in the TLZ. 1901, no. 22) Die Uebernahme der frilh-mittelgriech. Neumen durch die
Juden, Berlin, 1902 ; P. Kahle, ' Zur Gesch. der hebr. Accente,' ZDMO. 55
(1901), 167 ff. (i, on the earliest Jewish lists of accents; 2, on the mutual
relation of the various systems of accentuation ; on p. 1 79 ff. he deals
with the accents of the 3rd system, see above, § 8 «;, note) ; Margolis, art.
'Accents,' in the Jewish Encycl. i (1901), 149 ff. ; J.Adams, Semwns in Accents,
London, 1906. — On the accents of the Books D"Nn (see below, h), S. Baer,
niDK min [Accentual Laws of the Books Jl^DS], Rftdelheim, 1852, and his
appendix to Delitzsch's Psalmencommentar, vol. ii, Lpz. i860, and in the 5th
ed., 1894 (an epitome is given in Baer-Delitzsch's Liber Psalmorum hebr., Lpz.
1861, 1874, 1880); cf. also Delitzsch's most instructive ' Accentuologischer
Commentar' on Psalms 1-3, in his Psalmencommentar of 1874, as well as the
numerous contributions to the accentual criticism of the text, &c., in the
editions of Baer and Delitzsch, and in the commentaries of the latter ;
W. Wickes, n*!OX ""OyD [Accents of the Poet. Books], Oxford, 1881 ; Mitchell, in
the Journal of Bibl. Lit., 1891, p. 144 ff. ; Baer and Strack, Dikduke ha-famim,
p. i7ff.
1. As Pratorius (see above) has convincingly shown, the majority of 0
the Hebrew accents, especially, according to Kahle (see above), the
'Conjunctivi', were adopted by the Jews from the neums and punctua-
tion-marks found in Greek gospel-books, and, like these, their primary
purpose was to regulate minutely the public reading of the sacred
58 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 15 c, i
iext. The complete transformation and amplification of ihe system
(in three different forms, see § 8 ^, note), which soon caused the Jews
to forget its real origin, is clearly connected with the gradual change
from the speaking voice in public reading to chanting or singing.
The accents then served as a kind of musical notes.* Their value
as such has, however, with the exception of a few traces, become
lost in transmission. On the other hand, according to their original
design they have also a twofold use which is still of the greatest
importance for grammar (and syntax), viz. their value (a) as
marking the tone, (b) as marks of punctuation to indicate the logical
(syntactical) relation of single words to their immediate surroundings,
and thus to the whole sentence.*
C 2. As a mark of the tone the accent stands almost invariably (but
see below, e) with the syllable which has the principal tone in the word.
This is usually the ultima, less frequently the penultima. Amongst
the Jewish grammarians a word which has the tone on the ultima is
called Milra' (Aram. VlpO i.e. accented below ^), e.g. b6\> qdtdl; a word
which has the tone on the penultima is Mil'el (Aram. "P^^^P, accented
above), e.g. '^^O melekh. Besides this, in many cases a secondary tone
is indicated in the word by Metheg (cf. § .16). Examples such as
1D^ nnoVJL is 50* (cf, 4o'^ Ex i5«, Jb 12I', La 2'') are regarded by
the Jewish grammarians as even jproparoxytone.'^
d 3. As marks of interpunctuation the accents are subdivided into
those which separate {Distinctivi or Domini) and those which connect
{Conjunctivi or Servi). Further a twofold system of accentuation is
to be noted : (a) the common system found in twenty-one of the
Books (the n''3 i.e. twenty-one), and {b) that used in the first three
Books of the Hagiographa, viz. Psalms, Proverbs, and Job, for which
the vox memor. is riDN, from the initial consonants of the names, D^^nn
Psalms, vK'D Proverbs, 3i>N Job, or more correctly, according to their
original sequence, D^'XH (DNH twin), so that D'^Kn '•lOytD means the
accents (sing. Dy^) of these three Books. The latter system is not
only richer and more complicated in itself, but also musically more
significant than the ordinary accentuation.
* On the attempts of Christian scholars of the sixteenth century to express
the Hebrew accents by musical notes, cf. Ortenberg, ZDMQ. 1889, p. 534.
^ At the same time it must not be forgotten that the value of the accent
as a mark of punctuation is always relative ; thus, e. g. 'Athndh as regards the
logical structure of the sentence may at one time indicate a very important
break (as in Gn 1*) ; at another, one which is almost imperceptible (as in
Gn i»). ^ ^ ^
' 'Above' in this sense means what comes before, ' below ' is what comes
after ; cf. Bacher, ZAW. 1907, p. 285 f.
* Cf. Delitzsch on Is 40I8.
§i5e,/] The Accents 59
I. The Common Accents.
Preliminary remark. The accents wliich are marked as prepositive stand to 6
tlie right over or under the initial consonant of the word ; those jnarked as
postpositive, to tlie left over or under the last consonant. Consequently in
both cases the tone-syllable must bo ascertained independently of the accent
(but cf. below, I).
A. Disjunctive Accents {Distinctivi or Domini).^ f
1. (-p) P''?P Silluq {end) always with the tone-syllahle of the last
word before Soph pasuq (:), the verse-divider, e.g. ' Y')^'^.
2. {—) njns 'Athnah or i^^%^^ 'Athnahta {rest), the principal
divider within the verse.
3 a. {-^) i^^piJD S®g61ta, postpositive, marks the fourth or fifth sub-
ordinate division, counting backwards from 'Athnah (e.g.
Gn i7-2«).
36. (I — ) nb^pB' SalsMeth (i.e. chain), as disjunctive, or Great
Sal§61eth, distinguished by the following stroke ^ from
the conjunctive in the poetic accentuation, is used for
* All the disjunctives occur in Is 39^. — The earlier Jewish accentuologists
already distinguish between D''pPD Reges and D"'ri"1*iJ'p Servi. The division
of the disjunctive accents into Imperatores, Reges, Duces, Comites, which
became common amongst Christian grammarians, originated in the Scru-
linium S. S. ex accentibus of Sam. Bohlius, Rostock, 1636, and, as the source of
manifold confusion, had better be given up. The order of the accents ia
respect to their disjunctive power is shown in general by the above classifica-
tion, following Wickes. In respect to the height of tone (in chanting) i, 2,
5, 4, 8, which were low and long sustained notes, are to be distinguished from
the high notes (7, 3*, 6, 13, 9\ and the highest (.^'', 11, 12, 10); cf. Wicbi's,
N"3 't3 p. i2ff. — The name D^oyp (later = occente in general) was originally
restricted to the disjunctives, see Kahle, 1. c, p. 169.
* This stroke is commonly confused with Paseq, wliich has the same form.
But Paseq {= restraining, dividing, also incorrectly called P*siq) is neither an
independent accent, nor a constituent part of other accents, but is used as a
mark for various purposes ; see the Masoretic lists at the end of Baer's
editions, and Wickes, Accents of the Twenty-one Books, p. 120 S., where Pas6q is
divided into distinctivum, emphaticum, homonymicum, Rud euphonicum. The con-
jecture of Olshausen {Lehrb., p. 86 f.), that Paseq served also to point out
marginal glosses subsequently interpolated into the text, has been further
developed by E. von Ortcnberg, ' Die Bedeutung des Paseq fiir Quellenschei-
dung in den BB. d. A. T.,' in Progr. des Domgymn. su Verden, 1887, ^^^ '^ *'''®
article, 'Paseq u. Legarmeh,' in ZAW. 1887, p. 301 ff. (but seeWickes, ibid.
1888, p. 149 ff. ; also E. KOnig, in the Ztschr. f. kirchl. Wiss. u. kirchl. Leben,
1889, parts 5 and 6 ; Maas, in Helraica, v. 121 ff., viii. 89 ff.). Priitorius,
ZDMG. 1899, p 683 ff., pointed out that Paseq (wliich is pre-masoretic and
quite distinct from L'garniih) besides being a divider (used especially for the
sake of greater clearness) also served as a sign of abbreviation. For further
treatment of Paseq see H. Grimme, ' Pasekstudien,' in the Bibl. Ztschr., i. 337 ff.,
ii. 28 ff., and Psalmenprobleme, &c., Freiburg (Switzerland), 1902, p. 173, where
it is argued that Paseq indicates variants in a difficult sentence ; J. Kennedy,
The Note-line in the Ileb. Scriptures, Edinb. 1903, with an index of all the occur-
rences oi Paseq, p. 117 fif. According to Kennedy the 'note-line', of which
he distinguishes sixteen different kinds, is intended to draw attention to
some peculiarity in the text ; it existed long before the Masoretes, and was
no longer understood by them. See, however, the reviews of E. KOnig, Tlieol.
6o The Individual Sounds and Characters [§15/
S^golta (seven times altogether) wheo this would stand
at the head of the sentence ; cf. Gn 19^^ «&c.
4 a. (-^) ''^'^5 ^i?] Zaqeph gadol, and
4 h. (-^) P^iJ ^pt Zaqeph qaton. The names refer to their musical
character. As a disjunctive, Little Zaqeph is by nature
stronger than Great Zaqeph; but if they stand together,
the one which comes first is always the stronger.
5. (-_) S^HB^ Tiphha or Snn^ Tarha, a subordinate disjunctive
before Silluq and 'Athnah, but very often the principal
disjunctive of the whole verse instead of 'Athnah ; always
so when the verse consists of only two or three words
(e.g. Is 2"), but ako in longer verses (Gn 3^').
6. (-^) V'?l Rebhia'.
7. (-^) i<ij"jl Zarqa, postpositive.
8 a. {■^) «^f 3 Paita, postpositive,^ and
8 h. (-^) ^^n^ Yethibh, 2>repositive, and thus different from Mehup-
pakh. Y^thibh is used in place of Pasta when the latter
would stand on a monosyllable or on a foretoned word,
not preceded by a conjunctive accent.
9. (_) -inri Tebhir.
10 a. {—) B'7.a Geres or D^D T^res, and
106. (— ) Dt^7? G«ras^yim" or Double GfereS, used for Gferes, when
the tone rests on the ultima, and 'Azla does not precede,
ri a. (-^) ■(tS Pazer, and
1 1 b. {—) S^"ia "iia Pazer gadol (Great Pazer) or nns >)r\p_ Qarne phara
{cow-horns), only used i6 times, for special emphasis.
12. (— ) T\b)i: af'bn Tellga gedola or Great Telisa, prepositive.
13. (j ) nci"l5p Legarmeh, i.e. Munah (see below) with a following
stroke.
Stud. u. Krit., 1904, p. 448 ff., G. Beer, TLZ. 1905, no. 3, and esp. A. Kloster-
mann, Theol. Lit.-blatt, 1904, no. 13, with whom Ginsburg agrees {Verhand-
lungen des Hamb. Or .-kongresses von 1902, Leiden, 1904, p. 210 ff.) in showing
that the tradition with regard to the 479 or 480 uses of Paseq is by no means
uniform. Tlie purpose of Paseq is clearly recognizable in the five old rules :
as a divider between identical letters at the end and beginning of two words ;
between identical or very similar words ; between words which are absolutely
contradictory (as God and evil-doer) ; between words which are liable to be
wrongly connected ; and lastly, between heterogeneous terms, as ' Eleazar the
High Priest, and Joshua'. But the assumption of a far-reaching critical
importance in Paseq is at least doubtful. — Cf. also the important article by
H. Fuchs, 'Pesiq ein Glossenzeichen,' in the Vieiieljahrsschrift f. Bibelkunde,
Aug. 1908, p. I ff. and p. 97 flf.
' If the word in question has the tone on the penultima, PaSta is placed
over it also, e.g ^riD Gn 1' ; cf. below, I.
* Wickes requires GerSayim (D^K'1s|).
The Accents
6i
I.
2.
3-
h
§ 15 5-, A]
B. Conjunctive AccESTa (Conjunctivi or Sen?*). fir
14. (_) miD Munah.
15. (__) TjSrit? Mehuppakh or 'n?'!iP Mahpakh.
16 a. (— ) N31'0 or N^l^P Meiekha, and
16 b. {-—) nblQ3 'O Merekha khephula or Double Mer^kha.
17. (__) Ka"!"! Darga.
18. {-^) iO]^ 'Azla, when associated witb G^re§ (see above) also
called Qadma.
19. (— ) '"13^1? NB^'^n Telisa qetannS or Little Teliga, postpositive.
20. (_) b^% Galgal or nn^ Yferah.
[21. (_) fc«b*K» Me'ayyela or N^^NO May^la, a variety of Tiphha,
serves to mark the secondary tone in words which have
Silluq or 'Athnah, or which are united by Maqqeph
with a word so accentuated, e.g. nj"^^*.^ Gn 8^*.]
II. The Accents of the Books D^'sn.
A. DisTiNcrrvr.
( — ) Silluq (see above, I, i).
(7^) I'})'') nb^y '6lfe weyored,^ a stronger divider than
( ) 'Athnah (see above, I, 2). In shorter verses 'Athnah
suffices as principal distinctive; in longer verses 'Ole
vfyorld serves as such, and is then mostly followed by
'Athnah as the principal disjunctive of the second half
of the verse.
4. (— ) Rebhia' gad61 (Great Rebhia').
5. (-^) Rebhla' mugras, i.e. Rebhia' with Gere§ on the same word.
6. (— ) Great SalSfeleth (see above, 1. 3 6).
7. (-=^) "lisif Sinnor (Zarqa), as postpositive, is easily distinguished
from ri"'")^3if Sinnorith similarly placed, which is not an
independent accent, but stands only over an open syllable
before a consonant which has Mer^kha or Mahpakh.
8. (— ) Rebhia' q5t6n (Little Rebhia') immediately before 'Ole
w^yored.
9. (__) "'n'H D«hi or Tiphha, prepositive, to the right underneath
the initial consonant, e.g. ''13!^ (consequently it does not
mark the tone-syllable).
1 "Wrongly called also MSr*kha m'huppakh {Mer^kha mahpakhatum), although
the accent underneath is in no way connected with Mer*kha ; cf. Wickes, 1. c,
p. 14.
62 IVie Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 15 in
10, (— ) Pazer (see above, I, 1 1 a).
II a, (|-^) Mehuppakh legarmeh, i.e. MahpSkh with a following
stroke.
116. (|--^) 'Azla legarmeli, i.e. 'Azla with a following stroke.
I B. CONJCNCTIVI.
12. (— -) Meiekha (see above, I. i6a).
13. (_j-) Munah (see above, I. 14).
14. (-— ) ""l?y 'Illuy or Munah superior,
15. (__) t^ni^ Tarha (under the tone- syllable, and thus easily
distinguished from No. 9).
16. (-;j-) Galgal or Yferah (see above, I. 20).
17. ( — ) M^huppakh or Mahpakh (see above, I. 15).
18. (-^) 'Azla (see above, I. 18).
19. ( — ) Sal§eleth q^tanna (Little Salseleth).
Tlie last three are distinguished from the disjunctives of
the same name by the absence of the stroke.
[20. (-=^) Sinnorith, see above under No. 7.]
Remabks on the Accents.
I. As Signs of the Tone.
]^ 1. As in Greek and English (cf. (Ifd and (Im, compact and comfdct) so also in
Hebrew, words which are written with the same consonants are occasionally
< <
distinguished by the position of the tone, e.g. U3 ban^ (they built), ^33 hdnu
(in us) ; HOp qdma (she stood up), r\h\> qamd (standing up, fern.).
I 2. As a rule the accent stands on the tone-syllable, and properly on its
initial consonant. In the case of prepositives and postpositives alone (see
above, e) the tone-syllable must be ascertained independently of the accent.
lu many MSS. as well as in Baer's editions of the text, the postpositive sign
in foretoned vvrords stands also over the tone-syllable after the analogy of
Pa5ta (see above, I. 8 a, note); e.g. '^3^''' D"l6 Gni9*; so the prepositive
PC T : • .• v
sign in cases like ''11^1 Gn 8^^.
II. As Siijns of Punctuation.
ffl 3. In respect to this use of the accents, every verse is regarded as a period
which closes veith Silluq, or in the figurative language of the grammarians,
as a province (ditio) which is governed by the great distinctive at the end.
According as the verse is long or short, i. e. the province great or small, there
are several subordinate Domini of different grades, as governors of greater
and smaller divisions. When possible, the subdivisions themselves are also
split up into parts according to the law of dichotomy (see Wickes, The Accents
of the Twenty-one Books, p. 29 ff ). — When two or more equivalent accents (Zaqeph,
K'bhia') occur consecutively, the accent which precedes marks a greater
division than the one which follows ; cf. e.g. the Zaqeph, Gn i""".
7i 4. In general a conjunctive {Servua) unites only such words as are closely
connected in sense, e. g. a noun with a following genitive or a noun with an
^liso,p,i6a,b] The Accents 63
adjective. For the closest connexion between two or more words Maqqeph is
added (§ i6a).
5. The consecution of the several accents (especially the correspondence of 0
disjunctives with their proper conjunctives) conforms in tlie most minute
details to strict rules, for a further investigation of which we must refer to
the above-mentioned works. Here, to avoid misunderstanding, we shall
only notice further the rule that in the accentuation of the books D"Nn, the
R'hhi^' mugrds before Silluq, and the D^/ii before 'Athndh, must be changed into
conjunctives, unless at least two toneless syllables precede the principal
disjunctive. For this purpose §*wa mobile after Qames, Sere, or Holem (with
Metheg) is to be regarded as forming a syllable. After '016 w«y6red the
'Athnah does not necessarily act as pausal (cf. Delitzsch on \p 45'). The
condition of our ordinary texts is corrupt, and the system of accents can
only be studied in correct editions [see Wickes' two treatises].
6. A double accentuation occurs in Gn 35", from 331J'^1 onward (where p
the later accentuation, intended for public reading, aims at uniting vv. 22
and 23 into one, so as to pass rapidly over the unpleasant statement in v. 22) ;
and in the Decalogue, Ex 20^ ^- ; Dt 5* ^- Here also the later (mainly
superlinear) accentuation which closes the first verse with DHSV (instead of
"•33) is adopted simply for the purposes of public reading, in order to reduce
the original twelve verses (with sublinear accentuation) to ten, the number
of the Commandments. Thus W^ll]} at the end of v. 2 has Silluq (to close
• T -;
the verse) in the lower accentuation, but in the upper, which unites vv. 2-6
(the actual words of God) into a single period, only R«bhi''. Again iJD,
regarded as closing v. 3, is pointed ""JS (pausal Qames with Silluq), but in
the upper accentuation it is ''JQ with Pathah because not in pause. (Originally
there may have been a third accentuation requiring D'^py and ^3E, and thus
representing vv. 2 and 3 as the first commandment.) Further the upper
accentuation unites vv. 8-1 1 into one period, while in vv. 12-15 the lower
accentuation combines commandments 5-8 into one verse. Cf. Geiger,
Urschrift u. Ubersetsungen der Bibel, p. 373 ; Japhet, op. cit., p. 158, and eap.
K. J. Grimm, Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ. xix (May, 1900), no. 145.
§ 16. Of Maqqeph and MUMg.
These are both closely connected with the accents. a
1. Maqqeph (^i?0 i.e. hinder) is a small horizontal stroke between
the Tipper part of two words which so connects them that in respect
of tone and pointing they are regarded as one, and therefore have
only one accent. Two, three, or even four words may be connected
in this way, e.g. D'lX"?! every man, 3K'^"i'3"nK every herb, Gn i"*,
i^--|p«-^3-nX all that he had, Gn 25*.
Certain monosyllabic prepositions and conjunctions, such as "7NI to, "1^ Jj
uniil, ~?y upon, "DJJ with, "PS ne, ~DX if, whether, "|K)/rom, ~]B lest, are almost
always found with a following Maqqeph, provided they have not become
independent forms by being combined with prefixes, e.g. /Vl?, DJJD, in which
case Maqqeph as a rule does not follow. Occasionally Maqqeph is replaced
by a conjunctive accent (see above, § 9 u, i c), as, according to the Masora,
in Dt if, a S 20^8, Jer 25^0, 29^5, Ec 9* in the case of -^3 ^X ; f ^f, 60*, Pr 3'^
in the case of TiXj the objective particle. Longer words are, however, con-
64 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 16 c-/
nected by Maqqeph with a following monosyllable, e.g. nb'TjTnrin Gn 6*,
|D'"'n^1_ Gn i''; or two words of more than one syllable, e.g. "l"lJ'V"nj?3B'
seventeen, Gn 7'^. Cf. the Greek proclitics kv, tie, th, d, u/s, ov, which are atonic,
and lean on the following word.
<
C 2. Metheg (JriD i.e. a bridle), a small perpendicular stroke under
the consonant to the left of the vowel, indicates most frequently the
secondary stress or counter-tone, as opposed to the principal tone
marked by the accents. It serves, however, in other cases to point
out that the vowel should not be hastily passed over in pronunciation,
but should be allowed its full sound. Hence other names of Metheg
are Ma^-ikh, i.e. lengthener, and Gayd, i.e. raising of the voice,
which is Great Ga'yd with long vowels, otherwise Little Gayd}
d It is divided into: i. The light Metheg. This is subdivided again into
(a) the ordinary Metheg of the counter-tone, as a rule in the second (open)
syllable before the tone, e.g. DIKH (cf. also such cases as "lif"T]20) ; but also
in the third when the second is closed, e. g. D^y3"!Xn (also in such cases as
!]pSn"n!iy), and when the third is not suitable for it, even in the fourth
(open) syllable before the tone. This Metheg may be repeated in the fourth
syllable before the tone, when it already stands in the second, e. g. DDTlV^K',
Finally it is always added to the vowel of an open ultima, which is joined
by Maqqeph to a word beginning with a toneless syllable and so without
M6theg (e.g. i'Xnbpja, on the other hand D'^i'T^DB'"!, n''nN-Nb), or to a
word beginning with S'wd before the tone-syllable, e.g. ^p~^0 '3Zl~nb?B'
&c. ; the object being to prevent the S^tod from becoming quiescent.
e The ordinary light MethSg is omitted with a movable 1 copulative, con-
sequently we do not find D''IQ1, &c. (nor even ^J31, &c., contrary to b, a ; but
^l'I^i, &c., according to 6, 5, cf. § 10 g. b).
■P (b) The firm or indispensable Metheg. (o) With all long vowels (except in
certain cases, !| copulative, see above), which are followed by a S^wd 7nobile
preceding the tone-syllable; e.g. IN")'', ^JB'^ &c. ((3) To emphasize a
long vowel in a closed syllable immediately before Maqqeph, e.g. "•pTIK'
Gn 4^5 (not soth-li) ; hence also with "<'3 \p 138^ and "^X Jb 4126 (for "73 and
"DN ; cf. also ~nXO Jo 15^*, &c.). (7) With Sere, which has become toneless
through retraction of the tone, in order to prevent its being pronounced as
S'ghol, e.g. ny^ 2nK Pr 12^ (not 'ohebh). (5) With all vowels before com-
posite 5*u;d, e. g. TOy\, Q^^V^, &c- (except when the following consonant is
<
strengthened, e. g. ^Dllip.''. Is 62', because the strengthening by Dagei excludes
the retarding of the vowel by Metheg) ; so in the cases discussed in § 28 c,
where a shoi't vowel lias taken the place of a Hateph, as ntDJJ^ &c. (t) In the
preformative syllable of all forms of iT*n to be, and riTI to live, when S'wd
quiescens stands under the H or n, e. g. iTH'' n''nn (yih-ye, tih-ye), &c., cf.
^ Cf. as the source of this account of MethSg, the exhaustive treatment by
S. Baer, ' Metheg-Setzung nach ihren iiberlieferten Gesetzen,' in A. Merx's
Archiv fUr die wissenschaftl. Erforschung des A. Test., Heft i, Halle, 1867, p- 56 ff.,
and Heft ii. 1868, p. 194 ff. ; Baer and Strack, Dikduke ha-l'amim, p. 30 fit.
§§i6£^-t, i7a] The Accents 65
§ 63 q. (0 With the Games of the plural forms of n"'3 house (thus D*ri3
•IT
bdtttm, cf. § 96 under IT'S), and with nSN ^ prithee ! to guard against the pro-
nunciation bottim, onnd. — Every kind of light M6th§g may in certain
circumstances be changed into a conjunctive accent, e. g. D^RIH 2 Ch 34^^, &c.
2. The grave M'etheg {Ga'ya in the more limited sense) is especially employed p*
in the follov«ring cases in order more distinctly to emphasize a short vowel
or an initial S®wa : (a) with the Pathah of the article or of the prefixes
2^ Dj 7, when followed by S'wd under a consonant without Dages, e. g. n^DDH
n?Dp7 ^ &c., but not before ^ (before which \ also remains without MeiMg, with
the exception of ""n^l and "Tl^l when they are followed by Maqqeph, or accented
with Pasta), nor before the tone-syllable of a word, and neither before nor after
the common MetMg ; likewise not in words which are connected by a con-
junctive accent with the following word ; (6) with the interrogative H with
Pathah (except when it precedes ^, Dages forte or the tone-syllable of the word),
e. g. !lbxn. When a S^wd follows the n and after the S'wd there is an untoned
syllable, Baer places the MethSg to the right of the Pathah, e, g. riDI^H Gn 273^
(but ed. Mant. and Ginsb. '3n) ; (c) with the Pathah or S^gol of the article
before a guttural (which cannot take DageS), e. g. D'>>nn D''^nn. — The S'wd-
Ga'yd ( \ is especially important in the accentuation of the D"Nn , for purposes
of musical recitation ; it stands chiefly in words whose principal tone is
marked by a disjunctive without a preceding conjunctive, e. g. iTHI ip 1^.
3. The euphonic Ga'yd, to ensure the distinct pronunciation of those con- /l
sonants which in consequence of the loss of the tone, or because they close a
syllable, might easily be neglected, e. g. v V3tS'*1 Gn 24^ ; D1S Hi'^S (here to
avoid a hiatus) 28^, or in such cases as i'N'n^'l Jb 33*, &c. ; NEJ'in Gn i".
Metheg (especially in the cases mentioned in i, 6, a) is a guide to correct I
pronunciation, since it distinguishes d from 0 (except in the case noted in
§ Q t>, b) and i from i; e.g. n?3S 'd-khHd (she has eaten), but n^^N ^okhld
(food), since the stands here in a toneless closed syllable, and must
therefore be a short vowel ; thus also ^NT yi-r^^u (they fear), but ^X")^ yir'u
(they see), 13B''' (they sleep), but \W'^_ (they repeat). The Jewish grammarians,
however, do not consider the syllables lengthened by Metheg as open. They
regard the S'wa as quiescent in cases like DpaX and belonging to the pre-
ceding vowel ; cf. Baer, Thorat 'Emeth, p. 9, and in Merx's Archiv, i. p. 60,
Rem. I, and especially Dikduke ha-famim, p. 13.
§17. Of the Q^re and KHliihh. Masora marginalis and
finalis.
On Q'rfi and K*thibh see Ginsburg, Intr., p. 183 ff. ]
1. The margin of Biblical MSS. and editions exhibits variants a
of an early date (§ 3 c), called """lip ^ to he read, since, according to
<
^ The common form is N3N with an accent on both syllables, in which
case, according to Qimhi, the tone is always to be placed on the former. For
the above mode of writing and position of the tone cf. Is 38*, Jon i", 4',
2 On the necessity of the punctuation ^"Ip as passive participle ( = legendum)
F
66 The Individual Sounds and Characters [§ 17 h-d
the opinion of the Jewish critics, they are to be preferred to the
3''n|, i.e. what is written in the text, and are actually to be read
instead of it.
On this account the vowels of the marginal reading (the Q^re) are
placed under the consonants of the text, and in order to understand
both readings properly, the vowels in the text must be applied to the
marginal reading, while for the reading of the text (the KHhihh) its own
vowels are to be used. Thus in Jer 42^ ^.3^:5 occurs in the text, in the
margin """ip "ijnJN. Read IJfr? vje (or according to Jewish tradition ^^)
in the text, in the mai'gin ^JHJS. A small circle or asterisk in the
text always refers to the marginal reading.
h 2. Words or consonants which are to be passed over in reading,
and are therefore left unpointed, are called ""lip ^^\ ^"^ni {scri2)tum et
non legendum), e.g. TIN Jer 38'^ D^< 39'^ yM'' 5I^ Conversely, words
not contained in the text, but required by the Masora (as indicated
by the insertion of their vowels), are called y^TO N7I "•"ip, e.g. 2 S 8^
Jer 31^. See further Strack, Prolegomena Critica, p. 85; Dikduke
ha-famim, §§ 62, 64; Blau, Masoretische Untersuchungen, p. 49 ff.
C 3. In the case of some very common words, which are always to be
read otherwise than according to the KHhibh, it has not been con-
sidered necessary to place the Q^re in the margin, but its vowels are
simply attached to the word in the text. This Q^reperpetuum occurs in
the Pentateuch in ^^"in (Q^re N''/!) wherever Nin stands for the feminine
(§ 32 I), and in IV^. (Kethibh lyj, Q^re n"ij;3) always, except in Dt 22''
(but the Sam. text always has XTI, myj). The ordinary explanation
of this supposed archaism, on the analogy of Greek 6 ttol's and rj Trats,
our child, is inadequate, since there is no trace elsewhere of this epicene
use ; "lyj for my: is rather a survival of a system of orthography in
which a final vowel was written defectively, as in ^p^\> ; cf. § 2 n. —
Other instances are: "lOK'fe'^ (Q. "^^f)) Gn 30'^ &c., see the Lexicon,
and Baer and Delitzsch, Genesis, p. 84, and below, note to § 47 6;
°.^?'^1: (Q- ^'^V''"!:)' properly D.^B'n; ; nin; (Q.^yiN the Lord), or (after
^p^) nVn; (Q. O^n^X) properly nin: Yahwe (cf. § 102 w, and § 135 ^,
note) ; on D^?.K', U^m for V.f , '^f , see § 97 d, end.
d 4. The masoretic apparatus accompanying the biblical text is
divided into (a) Masora marginalis, consisting of (a) Masora (mar-
ginalis) magna on the upper and lower margins of MSS. ; (/S) Masora
{marginalis) parva between and on the right and left of the columns ;
inste.id of ''^p Q^t'i, which was formerly common but is properly a past tense
{^lectum est), see Kautzsch, Gramm. des Bibl.-Aram,, p. 81, note.
§ 17 e] Of the Q're and K'thibk 67
(b) Masora finalis at the end of the several books, counting Samuel,
Kings, Minor Prophets, Ezra-Nehemiah, Chronicles, each as one
book. On all three varieties see especially Ginsburg, Introd., p. 423 ff.,
and the appendices containing (p. 983 flf.) the masoretic treatise from
the St. Petersburg MS. of a.d. 1009, and (p. 1000 ff.) specimens of
the Masora parva and magna on two chapters.
In nearly all printed editions only the Masora flnalis is found, indicating ^
the number of verses, the middle point of the book, &c., and a scanty
selection from the Masora parra. The following alphabetical list of technical
expressions (some of them Aramaic) and abbreviations, may suffice with the
help of the lexicon to elucidate the subject. Further details will be found
in the appendix to Teile's edition of the Hebrew 0. T., p. 1222 flf.
niK letter. N^X nisi, except. JJ^OS middle. Pl"DX = p1DQ fllD H^nS in the
formula f|"DX XP3 vnthout ^Athnak or Soph-pasuq i.e. although no 'Athna/j or
Soph-pasuq is written.
3 with, before names of vowels or accents, as PlpTS J'Cp Qames with Zaqeph
used instead of Pathah (§ 291). — '2 as a numeral = <wo, as in D^Dytp '2 two
accents. nXp03, see Jli'prD. N"33 = ^''inX NHtpiJn (Aramaic) in another copy ;
Pl- IJ^in^ ICP''^?- — ^<"D2 = Dn^S □"'ISpa m other books. "Ijri3 (Aram.) after.
B'lJT fem. njJ'lJT marked with Dages (or Mappiq). f)'1 leaf, page.
■\''j;t fem. i^yV] (Aram.) small.
7in profayie, not sacred, e.g. ''y^^{ Gn 19' because not referring to God. pn
except, ion written defectively, also wanting as 'N Tl 'aleph is omitted.
DytO accent (see 3) ; Dyt3 in Hiphil to chant an accent.
"I'^ri^ superfluous.
}N3 here. ?p3 (Aram.) total, as adv. in general.
'7=n"i7 (Aram., from n''X XT' non es<) =the form is not found elsewhere.
p'lID accurately corrected. ^fh'Q fill i.e. written p^ewe. HtSpptp helow = ^'\..'0
(§ 15 c). n^yP!'P = ^7^P (§ 15 0- nhjIJlD separated, the name of tha
strangely formed Nuns before \p 107^^ 'f- (§ 5 w). XlpO that which is read,
the name for all the O. T. scriptures. njfpDpari.
nJ fem. nn3 quiescent, i.e. uot sounded. D^Vp concealed, i.e. only retained
orthographically. n^p3 a pomi. *l^p3 pointed.
X^D see 3. |D^D ffTjfieTov, sign, esp. a wmewontc word or, frequently, sentence.
'ID = n^20' total ?l"D = p1DS S]iD (§ 15/).
*l^Gy column of a page.
p1DE3 a masoretic verse. XpDQ a space, esp. in the phrase p^DS V^f^XS 'Q
o space within a verse, e.g. Gn 35^^ ; cf. H. Gratz, Monatschrift fur Gesch. u. Wiss.
des Judentums, 1878, p. 481 ff., and H. Strack, ibid. 1879, p. 26 fif.
'p = ''"lp, see above, c. mp properly DTp fce/orc. pjip fem. njf^Jjp jjom'ed
io;7;j Qamex. X~)ip reader of the sacred text.
XriSTj nn31, ''n3T (Aram , all fem. sing.) large.
n3''ri icord (consisting of more thf.n one letter). iT'^bri suspensa (§ 5 n,
3). '•"in (Aram.) two.
F 2
CHAPTER II
PECULIARITIES AND CHANGES OF LETTERS : THE
SYLLABLE AND THE TONE
§18.
The changes which take place in the forms of the various parts
of speech, depend pai-tly on the peculiar nature of certain classes
of letters and the manner in which they affect the formation of
syllables, partly on certain laws of the language in regard to syllables
and the tone.
§ 19. Changes of Consonants.
a The changes which take place among consonants, owing to the
formation of words, inflexion, euphony, or to influences connected
with the progress of the language, are commutation, assimilation,
rejection, addition, transposition, softening.
1. Commutation ' may take place between consonants which are
either homorganic or homogeneous (cf § 6 q), e.g. j^^V, Dpy, tbV to
exult, nxp, nro, Aram. NV? to be weary, |*np and J^nj to press, "13D
and "^PD to close, t^po and t^pQ to escape. In process of time, and
partly under the influence of Aramaic, the harder and rougher sounds
especially were changed into the softer, e.g. pHS into pHB' to laugh,
^y2 into P^\ to reject, and the sibilants into the corresponding mutes :
) into *7, B' into n, X into Q. In many cases these mutes may be
regarded as a return to an earlier stage of the pronunciation.
The interchange of consonants, however, belongs rather to the
lexicographical treatment of stems ^ than to grammatical inflexion.
To the latter belong the interchange (a) of n and B in Hithjia'el
(§ 54 ^) ') (^) of 1 and '» in verbs 2>rim^e Yod (§ 69), *1PJ for "1/1, &c.
b 2. Assimilation usually takes place when one consonant which
closes a syllable passes over into another beginning the next syllable,
and forms with it a strengthened letter, as illustris for inlustris, affero
for adfero, crvXXafi/3dvw for a-vv\afiftdvo). In Hebrew this occurs,
1 Cf. Barth, Etymologische Forschungen, Lpz. 1893, p. 15 ff. (' Lautverschie-
bungen ').
* See in the Lexicon, the preliminary remarks on the several consonants.
§ 19 c-k] Changes of Consonants 69
(a) most frequently with 3, e.g. DE'O (for min-^dm) from there, HID ('
(for min-ze) from this, J^^ (for yinten) lie gives. J is not assimilated
after the prefix p, e.g. ^23?, nor as a rule before gutturals (except
sometimes before n), nor when it is the third consonant of the stem,
e.g. ^'^^^ (of. however JJinj for ndthdntd) except when another Nun
follows, cf § 440; nor in some isolated cases, as Dt 33^, Is 29^ 58'*,
all in the principal pause; on ^"^^n and ^"^3ri >/^ 68^, see § 51 k, and
§66/.
(6) Less frequently and only in special cases with ?, n, T, e. g. HJ?^ d
(for yilqah) he takes; "1?"^? for mithdabber; NSIS^ <"or yithtammd; IP.isri
for tithkonen; KK'Sn for NtT^nn ; nns for 'ahadt; but in i S 4" for rh)
read probably rilb?.
(c) In isolated cases with n, '\, \ e.g. K3X prithee/ if from W f^Nt ; C
1 and ^ mostly before sibilants in the verbal forms enumerated in § 71.
In all these cases, instead of the assimilated letter, a Dages forte f
appears in the following consonant. Dage^, however, is omitted when
the strengthened consonant would stand at the end of a word, since
the strengthening would then be less audible (§ 20 I), e.g. ^^ nose
(from 'anp), nri to give (from tint).
The cases are less frequent where a weak letter is lost in pronunciation,^
and in place of it the preceding stronger sound is sharpened, i. e. takes Dages,
e.g. ^nptSp from ^nnpt^j? (§ 59 3). pDS for p2P^ (§ ^6 e) is an Aramaism.
3. Complete rejection takes place only in the case of weaker con- xr
sonants, especially the sonants 3 and 7, the gutturals N and n, and the
two half vowels 1 and * . Such rejection takes place,
(a) at the beginning of a word {aphaeresis), when these weak con- k
sonants (k, ^, 7, i) are not supported by a full vowel, but have only
Sewa, e.g. «n: we, also ^J^K; Vl for Vl) ; np for HpS) ; m for ^^^
*n for 'r}: Ez 2"'.
Aphaeresis of a weak consonant with a full vowel is supposed to occur in 11 1
Ju igii for nT ; in nnn 2 S 22*' for nnn3 : in nV^ for 2il^ Je 4210 ; on np
EZ17* for npp, and on DPlp Ho 11' for DPIpp, see § 66 g, end. In reality,
liowever, all these forms are to be regarded merely as old textual errors.
(6) In the middle of a word {syncope), when S^wa precedes the f^-
weak consonant"; thus in the case of N (see further § 23 b-f and
^ Such a suppi-ession of a letter is sometimes inaccurately called ' backward
assimilation '.
^ Syncope of a strong consonant (JJ) occurs in ""S prithee ! if this stands for
'>^2 (see Lexicon), also in HpC'JI Am 8», KHhibh for T\Vl^y\ (cf. nVptJ'l y'), and
70 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§§ 19 i-o, 20 a
§ 68 h-k), e.g. in D1^ for DIS^O. As a rule in such cases, however,
the K is orthographically retained, e.g. TWTSO for nti"ii5p. Syncope
occurs frequently in the case of n, e.g. "^^^J for '^'^Q? (§ 23 ^ and
§ 35 n), V\?^: for bv\yr>\ (§ 53 a).
Syncope of N with S^wa occurs in such cases as "Jl^j? for '*5'1??,?
(cf. § 102 m); ">^V**1 Zc II^' On the cases in which N is wholly
omitted after the article, see § 35 d.
Finally, the elision of "I and > in verbs n"^ (§ 75 ^) is an instance of
syncope. — On the syncope of n between two vowels, see § 23 k.
I (c) At the end of a word [apocope), e.g. n^a pr. name of a city (cf.
■'jS^fl Gilonite); ^f}., where X though really rejected is orthographically
retained, &c. On the apocope of 1 and ^ in verbs o''7, see § 24 gr,
and § 75 ^•
Bolder changes (especially by violent apocope), took place in earlier
periods of the language, notably the weakening of the feminine ending n__
ath to n a, see § 44 a, and § 80/.
m 4. To avoid harshness in pronunciation a helping sound, Aleph
prosthetic ^ with its vowel, is prefixed to some words, e. g. V^lj^ and
yilT arm (cf. x^€5. ^X^^'i) spiritus, French esprit). — A prosthetic y
occurs probably in 3"Jpy scorpion ; cf. Arab. 'usfUr bird (stem safara).
n 5. Transposition ^ occurs only seldom in the grammar, e. g. '^^W'?
for ">?^ri'? (§ 54 b) for the sake of euphony; it is more frequent in
the lexicon (^ and ab'S lamb, nbcb' and nD^B' garment), but is
mostly confined to sibilants and sonants.
0 6. Softening occurs e.g. in 32^3 star, from kaukabh=kawkabh for
kabhkabh (cf. Syriac raurab = rabrab) ; nisniD phylacteries for iaph-
td2)Mth ; according to the common opinion, also in E'"'K man from 'ins,
cf. however § 96.
§ 20. The Strengthening {Sharpening) of Consonants,
a 1. The strengthening of a consonant, indicated by Bages forte, is
necessary and essential [Dages necessarium)
(a) when the same consonant would be written twice in succession
in rhu Jos iq5 for H^yS (as in is^^). Probably, however, HpB'JI and H?.! are
TT -^ T-:ir^ " '
only clerical errors, as is undoubtedly "IN3 Am S^ for *lNO (9^).
1 Frensdorff, Ochla W^ochla, p. 97 f., gives a list of forty-eight words with
quiescent K.
* This awkward term is at any rate as suitable as the nnme Ale/ protheticum
proposed by Nestle, Marginalien u. Maierialien, Tubingen, 1893, p. 67 If.
3 Cf. Barth, Etumologische Studien, Lpz. 1893, p. i flf. ; KOnigaberger, in
Zeitschri/tf. wissenschaftliche Theo^ogie, 1894, P- 45^ ^'
§ 20 6, c] The Strengthening of Consonants 71
without an intermediate vowel oi- S^wd mobile; thus we have ^^HJ for
133n3 nathdn-niX and 'P^^ for ^^tW.
(b) in cases of assimilation (§19 b-f), e.g. |^^ for yinten.
In both these cases the Dages is called compensativiim.
(c) When it is characteristic of a grammatical form, e.g. "T?p he has
learned, TSj' he has taught {Dage^ characteristicum). In a wider sense
this includes the cases in which a consonant is sharpened by Dages
forte, to preserve a preceding short vowel (which in an open syllable
would have to be lengthened by § 26 e), e.g. DyP? camels for g^mdlim;
cf. § 93 e« and kk, § 93 pp.
This coalescing of two consonants as indicated above does not take place [)
when the first has a vowel or ^^wd mobile. In the latter case, according to
the correct Masora, a compound S^wd should be used, preceded by Methcg, e.g.
D''P_^.in^ rippp^&c. (cf. §§ iog,\6f). This pointing isnot used before the suffix Tlj
e.g. ^3n2ri Gn 27*, but the first 3 has a vocal S^wd, otherwise the second 3
would have Dage''s lene. Also when the former of the two consonants has
been already strengthened by Dages forte, it can only have a vocal S^wd, and
any further contraction is therefore impossible. This applies also to cases
where Dages forte has been omitted (see below, m), e.g. V/H properly v?n =
hal-lHu. The form '333 n i/- 9" (not *333n) might be explained as imperat.
Pi'el = ''33|n ; if it were imperat. Qal the non-contraction of the monosyllabic
root would be as strange as it is in mCJ' Jer ±q^, and in the imperf. D"!!^''
Jer58. '■' "'■"'■
2. A consonant is sometimes strengthened merely for the sake of C
euphony {Dage^ euphonicum), and the strengthening is then not so
essential. This occurs^ —
(a) when two words are closely united in pronunciation by Dages
forte conjunctivum : (1) in the first letter of a monosyllable or of
a word having the tone (or occasionally the counter-tone) on the first
syllable," when closely connected with the preceding word, if that
word ends in a tone-bearing Qames {i^-y-) with. S^wd mobile preceding,
or a tone-bearing '"l-^, — called P"'n'l (i. e. compressed) by the Jewish
grammarians.
The term monosyllable here and in /(by § -28 e) includes Segholates like
IP?, "'Dt^, *c., as well as forms like ns, ^NK', ilOB', and even fy33.
^ Cf. Baer, * De primarum vocabulorum literarum dagessatione,' in his
Liber Proverbionim, Lpz. 1880, pp. vii-xv ; F. Pratorius, ' Uber den Urspning
des Dag. f. conjunctivum,' in ZAW. 1883, p. 17 fF. (ascribed to an original
assimilation of fl or 3).
'^ ibN^ alone, although having the tone on the ultima, invariably takes
the Dages forte conj, when HJJ'JD with a conjunctive accent precedes, Ex 6'°-',
IS", &c.
72 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§ 20 d-g
Some limit the use of the D^hiq to the closest connexion of a monosyllable
with a following B^gadk'phath. However, it also applies to cases like N3"n3?
Nu 226 ; nNrnnp.^, Gn 2^3 ; Tj^-n'iX^ ^91"; and even with iJeJf, 7]"=1~1?.yp P^ ^S* )
5)p3~n3K'C^ Gn 43'^ In all these examples the tone, were it not for the
Maqqeph, would be on the ultima of the first word.
d Rem. I. When ni <Ats has Mag^^pTi after it, a Dagreif/or/e conj. always follows,
even if the next word is neither a monosyllable nor has the tone on the
initial syllable ; thus not only in ^O^TTCl Jer 23^, but also in rl^")3~ni1 Nu i^^'',
I Ch 22'. In ~N*3 nsn Gn 19^ (where Maqqeph is represented by a conjunctive
accent, § 9 m, i c, and § 16 b), the S'ghol coincides with the secondary tone-
syllable. On the origin oiBag.f. conj. after "HD (for HD) what?, see § 37 b, c.
p 2. Such cases as nsa PINa Exig^'^S the 2nd nsbS in ver. 11, n?Xa ver. 13,
pS3 ver. 16, do not belong here. In these the Bage^ can only be intended
for Dag. lene, see § 21 d.
f (2) In the first letter of a monosyllable, or of a word with the tone
on the first syllable after a closely connected mU'el ending in n__ or
n__. Such a mil'el is called by the Jewish grammarians P''^!)^ '''D?
(Aram. = Heb. pin"J)0 ^^i^) veniens e longinquo (in respect of the tone).
The attraction of the following tone-syllable by Dages forte conj. is
here also due to the exigencies of rhythm, e. g. ''3B' Jp"'?^ ■<\r 68'*;
K3 nv^B'in ,/. ii825 (so ed. Mant., but Ginsburg and Kittel W nr^'in);
ijiKE' nn^n-in is 5" ; |y33 nxnK Gn 1 1". The Mil'el may, however,
also be due to a subsequent retraction of the tone {nasdg ^ahor, §296),
as in ^IQ nb'V Gn i". — The prefixes ?, ?, ? and 1 alone do not take
a Dages in this case, except in ^^y always, and ^i']2? ^ 19*. Such
forms as '^ ny^E'n Gn 2I=^^ nn|> nN^JO ,/,2 6^ -30 nj^nn jb 21", and
even *in^^ "^"l^^j?. Is 5°* (i- e. the cases where the tone is thrown back
from the ultima on to the syllable which otherwise would have
Metheg), are likewise regarded as mil'el. On the other hand, e. g.
^f ^1!} Grii 4*> J^ot 'n? since the first a of n"in could not have Metheg.
When words are closely united by Maqqej)h the same rules apply as
above, except that in the first word Metheg, in the secondary tone, takes
the place of the accent, cf. ^Q'-'f^ Gn i"; «3-"^T?.^ Gn 32'", &c.
Finally, the Dagel is used when the attracted word does not begin
<
with the principal tone, but with a syllable having Metheg, ^E^^. •^^i?.
^Zf; ^I'X- "^]?. Is44'^ ^'O'^yip ri-'^V Ex 25'», provided that the
second word does not begin with a B^gadh^phath letter (hence e. g.
ninbin n^x Gn 2").
g Rem. Such cases as S^pj? Dt 326, and ri"'b'3 32^', and mys (so Baer, but not
ed. Mant., &c.) i S 1^^ are therefore anomalous ; also, because beginning with
§ 20 h-i"] The Strengthening of Consonants 73
a B«gadk»phath, 0^5X3 Ex 15" (cf. however above, e) ; "^Jn Jos 8^8 ; yini2
^ 77I6 ; N''n"|3 Jb 52''. — It is doubtful whether we should include here those
cases in which Dageiforie occurs after a word ending in a toneless u, such as
^Nir ^Dlp Gn 19'*, Ex 12S1 ; Ex 12^5 ("IN^), Dt 2"; also N-J Gn 192, i S 8" ;
i? Ju 18^^, Est 6'^ (where P. Haupt regards the Dage^ as due to the enclitic
character of the 1^); B^B H081O; r\l Jer 4980 ; VT^ i S I6«. When we
explained the Dagei in these examples not as conjunctive, but orthophonic
(see above. § 13 c, and Delitzsch, Psalmen, 4th ed. on tp 94"^"), we especially
had in view those cases in which the consonant with Bagei has a S^wd. The
extension of the use of Bagei to consonants with a strong vowel, seems,
however, to indicate that these are cases of the p^mo TlS which was
required by some Masoretes but not consistently inserted. On the other
hand, the Bagei forte in "i after a preceding i {if/ 118^'*), and even after u
(if/ g^}^), is due to an attempt to preserve its consonantal power ; see KSnig,
Lehrgeb., p. 54 b.
{b) When a consonant with S^wd is strengthened by Dagel forLe h
dirimens to make the S^wd more audible. In almost all cases the
strengthening or sharpening can be easily explained from the character
of the particular consonant, which is almost always a sonant, sibilant,
or the emphatic Qoph; cf. ^?3y Lv 25*, Dt32»*(for ^?3y); ^n'^S? l^^f
(wliere, however, 'JJ^i??!' is to be read); cf. Na3'^ Jb 9'^ 17^ Jo i^^
(with »); Is 57« (with!?); Ju 20«' i S i« (with "i) ; Gn ^i)'"'^ (and
so always in ^?ipV Ju5=^^Ct i^andniajpy ^ ^f\ 89'^); Ex 15", Dt23",
Ju 20^S I S 28>« (p)^ Ex 2^ Is 58^ Am 5^ f I4I^ Pr 4" (v) ; Pr 27^*
(b*) ; Is 5=«, f 371°, Jer 5i^«, Neh 4^ {p). Also, with 3 Ho 3^ ; with 3
Is 9', Jer 4^; with n 1 S 10". In many instances of this kind the
influence of the following consonant is also observable.
(c) When a vowel is to be made specially emphatic, generally in I
the principal pause, by a Dages forte affectuosum in the following
consonant. Thus in a following sonant, Ju s*" C^JI?), Jb 29^^' C'T-)'
22'^ (IBji); Ez 27^^ (in 3); in n Is 33'^ 41'^, Jer 5l^^ perhaps ako
Jb 2i>^(Wn."',).
{d) When the sonants 7, O, 3 are strengthened hj Dage^ forte firma- k
tivum in the pronouns HbH, nan, npN, and in HDP uhy ? cf. also ni33,
nca whereby ? nD3 how much ? (§ 102 k, T), to give greater firmness
to the preceding tone-vowel.
3. Omission of the strengthening, or at least the loss of the Dages I
forte occurs,
(a) almost always at the end of a word, since here a strengthened
* The ordinary reading inD''"!")n, where "« is without Bagei, is only in-
telligible if the 1 has Bages. "" ' ""
* Also in ip 45^0 read ^""rtniJ^S with Baer and Ginsburg, following Ben
Asher, and in Pr 30" nnp^b' (Ben Naphthali 'jp^a and '^"h).
74 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§ 20 m-o
consonant cannot easily be sounded.' In such cases the preceding
vowel is frequently lengthened (§27 d), e. g. 3i multitude, from 23") ;
Dy peo2)le, with a distinctive accent or after the article, DV, from
Dioy; but e.g. |3 garden, H? daughter, with the final consonant
virtually sharpened. On the exceptions Jjl^ thou (fern.) and JpHlJ
thou (fern.) hast given Ez 16^, see § 10 A;.
7}i {b) Very frequently in certain consonants with Ci^wd mobile, since
the absence of a strong vowel causes the strengthening to be less
noticeable. This occurs principally in the case of "I and '• (on ^ and *
after the article, see § 35 6 ; on '. after "HD, § 21 b); and in the
sonants J3 ,^ J and 7 ; also in the sibilants, especially when a guttural
follows (but note Is 62^ VDDSO, as ed. Mant. and Ginsb. correctly
read, while Baer has ''9f?P '^vith compensatory lengthening, and others
even 'DNO ; ^30fO Gn2 7=*='^; ^bfQ 38^' for '^O , D'3^f]l 1X7=^^;
-nj^'^X I K 19-" from ppi, ^)b^fil Ez 40^^ and 0'2^^)>_ >/' 104^^; D'li'E'O
Jon 4", D^y^lSfT Ex 8' &c.) ;— and finally in the emphatic p.'
Of the B^gadk^phath letters, 3 occurs without Dages in "*^2f3ip Ju 8*^ ;
3 in Dri-j^^JO EZ322''; n in ^nn? Isn-^^ t^6\y\ri ^f {not in Jer49^^),
supposing that it is the Participle Niph'al of nnj ; lastly, n in ^i*nn
Is 22'". Examples, C'llV, "'O^. (so always the preformative ^ in the
imperf. of verbs), H^VP^P, Djf?'?,^, ''J?'"?, '^^.f!, ^«5'P, ^'<9?, ^^T-^ ^"i?^
DvpP, '"lypD, &c. In correct MSS. the omission of the Dages is indi-
cated by the Raphe stroke (§ 14) over the consonant. However, in
these cases, we must assume at least a virtual strengthening of the
consonant {Dages forte implicitum, see § 22 c, end).
(c) In the Gutturals, see § 22 &.
n Rem. I. Contrary to rule the strengthening is omitted (especially in the
later Books), owing to the lengthening of the preceding short vowel, generally
/lireq (cf. mile for mille), e. g. jnTT' he makes them afraid, for |rin^ Hb 2^'' (where,
however, it is perhaps more correct to suppose, with KOnig, a formation on
the analogy of verbs W, and moreover to read ^H^n^ with the LXX), np''|
Is 50" for nSp].
0 2. Very doubtful are the instances in which compensation for the strengthen-
ing is supposed to be made by the insertion of a following 3. Thus for
^ So in Latin fel {for/ell), gen. fellis ; mel, mellis; os, ossis. In Middle High
German the doubling of consonants never takes place at the end of a word,
but only in the middle (as in Old High German), e g. val {Fall), gen. valles ;
swam {Schuamm , &c., Grimm, Deutsche Gramm., 2nd ed., i. 3S3.
^ Dages forte is almost always omitted in D when it is the prefix of the
participle Pi'el or Pu'al, hence if/ 104* iTIpDn who layeth the beams, but n^ptSn
the roof Ec lo'* (cf. nON^Dn the work, &c.).
3 According to some also in D in "'yon la 1 7^° ; but see Baer on the passage.
§ 21 a-di The Strengthening of Consonants 75
n^MyO Is 23", read n"'fy» (or n"'3iyO) ; and for WCn La z'^% I'ead IBIR. In
Nu 2^1' i33p is not an instance of compensation (see § 67 0, end).
§ 21. The Aspiration of the Tenues}
The harder sound of the six B^yadk^'phath letters, indicated by «
Dagel lene, is to be regarded, according to the general analogy of
languages, as their older and original pronunciation, from which the
softer sound was weakened {§ 6 n and § 1 3). The original hard sound
is maintained when the letter is initial, and after a consonant, but
when it immediately follows a vowel or S^wa mobile it is softened and
aspirated by their influence, e.g. H? paras, ps^ yifhros, ^3 kol,
^bS Vkhol. Hence the B^gadk^pliath take Dage^ lene
(i) at the beginning of words : (a) without exception when the 0
preceding word ends with a vowelless consonant, e. g. JIvV 'al-ken
(therefore),'''}^ fV.'es p^ri{ fruit-tree) \ (b) at the beginning of a section,
e.g. ri''E^S"l2 Gn i^ or at the beginning of a sentence, or even of
a minor division of a sentence after a distinctive accent (§ 15 d),
although the preceding word may end with a vowel. The distinctive
accent in such a case prevents the vowel from influencing the following
tenuis, e.g. "^f^^ "''i'^l and it was so, that uhen, Ju 11^ (but 1?"^'?),'!.
Gn i^).
Rem. I. The vowel letters H, >, 1, N, as such, naturally do not close a C
syllable. In close connexion they are therefore followed by the aspirated
B'gadh^phath, e. g. rO N2fD^, &c. On the other hand, syllables are closed by
the consonantal 1 and ■» (except ^nh"1i5 Is 34" ; n5 lj E^ Ez 2j« ; d5 tps
\t 6818), and by H with Mappiq ; hence e. g. there is Dage^ lene in DH^Q "^bV and
always after nin'', since the Q*re perpetuum of this word (§ 17) assumes the
reading ^JHS.
2. In a number of cases Dage^ lene is inserted, although a vowel precedes in (I
close connexion. This almost always occurs with the prefixes 3 and 3 in the
combinations 33 33 D3 (i. e. when a B'gadk'phath with §'wa precedes the
same or a kindred aspirate) and D3 (see Baer, L. Psalmorum, 1880, p. 92,=" on
ip 2f) ; cf. e. g. I S 25^ Is Io^ ^ 34"', Jb 19^; 33 is uncertain ; 13, *13, and
33 according to David Qimhi do not take Cages, nor J3, 33, and D3 accord-
ing to the Bikduke ha-famim, p. 30. Sometimes the B^gadk'phath letters, even
with a full vowel, take Dages before a spirant (and even before n in nE'DnS
1 K 12^'^) ; cf. the instances mentioned above, § 2oe (mostly tenues before N).
In all these cases the object is to prevent too great an accumulation of
aspirates. The LXX, on the other hand, almost always represent the 3 and
' Cf. Delitzsch, Ztschr.f. luth. Theol. u. Kirche, 1878, p. 585 ff.
2 Also L. Proverbiorum, 1880, Praof. p. ix ; and Dikduke ha-famim, p. 30 (in
German in KiJnig's Lehrgeb., i.p. 62).
76 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§§ ar ej, 22 a-c
a, even at the beginning of a syllable, by x and ^ ; XfpovP, XaKSaioi, ^apcpdp,
&c.— The forms lbl'2 (after '•nDK'l) Is 54", and ^3^3 (after ^n''A^3'!) Jer 20»
are doubly anomalous.
6 (2) In the middle of words after S^wd quiescens, i.e. at the
beginning of a syllable immediately after a vowelless consonant,^
e.g. NS")^ yirpd {he heals), ^^f^\? ye have killed', but after S^wd mobile,
e. g. ^<S") r^2^hd {heal thou), 'T^?^ she was heavy.
/On nbt^p, 3{J'*1 and similar forma, see § 10 i.
Whether S^wd be vocal and consequently causes the aspiration of a follow-
ing tenuis, depends upon the origin of the particular form. It is almost
always vocal
(a) When it has arisen from the weakening of a strong vowel, e. g. ^31"^
pursue ye (not ^Q'T)) from S]"l"1 ; *3pP (not ""3^0), because originally mdldkhe,
but ""SpO from the ground-form malk.
(6) With the 3 of the pronominal suffixes of the 2nd pers. ^ Q3
|3__j since S*wa mobile is characteristic of these forms (see § 58/; § 91 6).
Kem. Forms like finpE' thou (fem.) hast sent, in which we should expect
an aspirated n after the vowel, cf. "^JV) Ex i8^ have arisen from nn^U' "in""
&c. ; Pathah being here simply a helping vowel has no influence on the
tenuis ; cf. § 28 e.
§ 22. Peculiarities of the Gutturals.
a The four gutturals n, n, V, N, in consequence of their peculiar
pronunciation, have special characteristics, but N, as the weakest of
these sounds, and sometimes also J? (which elsewhere as one of the
harder gutturals is the opposite of N), differ in several respects from
the stronger n and n.
0 1. They do not admit of DageS forte, since, in consequence of
a gradual weakening of the pronunciation (see below, note 2), the
strengthening of the gutturals was hardly audible to the Masoretes.
But a distinction must be drawn between (a) the complete omission
of the strengthening, and (6) the mere echo of it, commonly called
^aZ/^ doubling, but better, virtual strengthening.
C In the former case, the short vowel before the guttural would stand
in an open syllable, and must accordingly be lengthened or modified."*
' The exceptions ?Nrip'' Jos 15^* (see Minhat shay, on this passage), 2 K 14'',
and DV'lp"' Jos 15^® may perhaps be due to the character of the p.
" Cf. terra and the French terre, the German Rolle and the French role ;
German drollig and French drole. The omission of the strengthening shows a
deterioration of the language. Arabic still admits of the strengthening of
gutturals in all cases.
§ 22 d-f'\ Peculiarities of the Gutturals 77
For a distinction must again be drawn between the full lengthening of
Pathah into Qames — mostly before K [always under the n of the
article, see § 35), as a rule also before y, less frequently before n, and
least often before n — and the modification of Pathah to S^ghol,
mostly before a guttural with Qames. In the other case {virtual
strengthening) the Dagei is still omitted, but the strengthening is
nevertheless regarded as having taken place, and the preceding vowel
therefore remains short. This virtual strengthening occurs most
frequently with n, usually with n, less frequently with y, and very
seldom with N. Examples of (a) |NO, Onxn, Dyn, nnn, N^n*. (for
yihhahhe) ; also inx, jrin^ D'^inn, ^"^^J^, (see more fully on the pointing
of the article before y in § 35).— Of (6) K'lnn, t2!in» (from minMt),
^^'"''!', ""i??, r^?, &c. — In all these cases of virtual strengthening the
Pages forte is to be regarded at least as implied (hence called Page^
forte implicitum, occultum, or delitescens).
2. They prefer before them, and sometimes after them (cf. h), d
a short A-sound, because this vowel is organically the nearest akin
to the gutturals. Hence
(a) before a guttural, Pathah readily (and always before H, H, y
closing a syllable) takes the place of another short vowel or of
a rhythmically long e or o, e. g. n3T sacrifice, not zeheh ; VP??' report,
not seme. This is more especially so when a was the original vowel
of the form, or is otherwise admissible. Thus in the Imperat. and
Imperf. Qal of guttural verbs, np?' send thou, npip^ he will send (not
yisloh) ; Perf. Pi'el H^E^ (but in Pausa D.^B') ; ibn: he will desire (not
yihmod) ; n3J1 and he rested (not wayydnoh) ; 1^5 a youth. In ^W
and iton^ d is the original vowel.
Rem. In such cases as NS'I N3L) N?B N^i the N has no consonantal C
value, and is only retained orthographically (see § 23 a).
(b) After a heterogeneous long vowel, i. e. after all except Qames, f
the hard gutturals^ (consequently not n), when standing at the end
of the word, require the insertion of a rapidly uttered a [Pathah
furtivum) between themselves and the vowel. This Pathah is placed
under the guttural, but sounded before it. It is thus merely an
orthographic indication not to neglect the guttural sound in pro-
nunciation, e.g. nn ril^h, yi3, y"\, n"'pK'n, niaj (when consonantal n is
1 Pratorius, Ueber den ruckweich. Accent im Uebr., Halle, 1897, p. 17, &c..
remarks that Pathah furtivum has not arisen merely under the influence of
the guttural, but is due to a duplication of the accented syllable, so that e.g.
S^E'^ I^X' would also be pronounced yasPbh, yam^dh although the short
intermediate vowel was not so noticeable as before a guttural.
78 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [^ 22 g-o
final it necessarily takes Mappiq), but e. g. ^nn, &c., since here the
rapidly uttered a is no longer heard.
g I^ch for ich, &c., in some Swiss dialects of German, is analogous ; a furtive
Pathah is here involuntarily intruded before the deep guttural sound. In
Arabic the same may be lieard in such words as mesiah, although it is not
expressed in writing. The LXX (and Jerome, of. ZAW. iv. 79) write t, some-
times a, instead o{ furtive Pathah, e.g. Plj Nwe, y^^ 'UZhova (also 'Ia55oi5).
h Rem. I. The guttural may also have an influence upon the following vowel,
especially in Segholate forms, e. g. "lyf (not na'er) a youth, pya (not po'el) deed.
The only exceptions are bnN \>y^, ^^. , ^Dl'
I 2. Where in the present form of the language an i, whether original or
attenuated from Pathah, would stand before or after a guttural in the first
syllable of a word, a S^ghol as being between a and i is frequently used
instead, e.g. \i^iirv /also ti'ann ^an"" '•bnn, "i"iw, niy, &c.
A-' On the other hand, the slighter and sharper Hireq is retained even under
gutturals when the following consonant is sharpened by Dage^s forte, e. g.
P?n n3n nisn ; but when this shai-pening is removed, S*gh6l is again apt to
appear, e.g. fVjn constr. li^jn, }i''?n constr. |Vtn,
/ 3. Instead of sim2>le S^wd mobile, the gutturals take without
exception a com2)ound Shod, e.g. ^t^D*^, ''^i^^, "^^^, ^??fj &c.
M 4. When a guttural with quiescent S'^wd happens to close a syllable
in the middle of a word, the strongly closed syllable (with quiescent
S^wd) may remain; necessarily so with n, y, and n at the end of the
tone-syllable, e. g. ^^2"'^, ^^T^, but also before the tone (see examples
under i), even with N.
But in the syllable before the tone and further back, the closed
syllable is generally opened artificially by a Hateph (as being suited
to the guttural) taking the place of the quiescent S'^wd, and in
particular that Hateph which repeats the sound of the preceding
vowel, e. g. ab'n;, (also y^ni) ; pin'^^ (also P]n>) ; ii?y2 poHd (for polo).
But when, owing to a flexional change, the strong vowel following the
Ilateph is weakened into S^wd mobile, then instead of the Hateph
its full vowel is written, e.g. Illpyi (from Toy;.), ^D-jVa , ^by3 (from
/'ys). The original forms, according to § 28 c, were ya'm^dhu, ne'r^mu,
pffl^khd. Hence ^T?]';. , &c., are really only different orthographic
forms of ^'T?^,''-, &c., and would be better transcribed by ya'"m^dhil, &c.
n Rem. I. On the use of simple or compound S*wa in guttural verbs, see
further §§ 62-65.
O 2. Respecting the choice between the three Hafephs, it may be remarked :
(o) n, n, y at the beginning of a syllable prefer __, but N prefers , e.g.
")iDn ass, jhn to kill, "ibK to say ; when farther from the tone syllable,
however, the even under K changes into the lighter __, e.g. ^J^ (poetic
for "?S) to, but DDyX to you, pb.N to eat, but 'b^H {''^khol, toneless on account
§5 22 J9-S, 23 a, b] Peculiarities of the Gutturals 79
of Maqqeph). Cf. § 27 w. The 1st pers. sing, imperf. Pi'el regularly has __.
Likewise is naturally found under N in cases where the Hateph arises
from a weakening of an original a (e. g. """jX lion, ground-form 'ary\ and __
if there be a weakening of an original u (e. g. ""JS a fleet, ^3y affliction, cf.
§93 3. 2)-
(6) In the middle of a word after a long vowel, a Hatej>h-Pathah takes the p
place of a simple ^"ivd mobile, e g. njSD TOVJ^ (see § 63 p) ; but if a short
vowel precedes, the choice of the Ha'eph is generally regulated by it, e.g.
Ferf. Hiph. T'DJJn (see above, t), Ivfln. T'Oyn (regular form ij'Dpn) ; Perf.
Hoph. TOyn (regular form ^LDi5n) ; but cf. V^m Jb 6"^- (§ 64 a).
5. The 1, which in sound approximates to the gutturals (§ 6 g), n
shares with the gutturals proper theii* first, and to a certain extent
their second, peculiarity, viz.
(«) The exclusion of the strengthening, instead of which the pre-
ceding vowel is almost always lengthened, e. g. ^"13 he has blessed for
hirrahh, 'HI? to bless for barrekh.
(5) The preference for a as a preceding vowel, e. g. t*")*! and he saw 7^
(from i^^"!?) ; "Ipjl both for ID'I and he turned back, and for "ID*! and
he caused io turn back.
The exceptions to a are JT^O morrdth, Pr 14I" ; JT^D khorrdth and !]"ni^ sorrekh, S
Ez 16* (cf. Pr 38) ; 'B'X'^B' ct 5^ Hoy'nri 1 s is'; Dn'N^n I s io2<, 1725,
2 K 6S2 ; insn^n Ju 2o« (cf. § 20 A) ; e)'Tnp I S 2328, 2 S i8i«'; also on account
of pTin (§ 20 c), Pr 151, 2o22, 2 Ch 26"'; and on account of p^HIO ^HN
(§ 20/) I S 156, Jer39i2, Hb 3'3, Pr ii^', Jb 399, Ez 96. A kind of virtual
strengthening (after D for JQ) is found in ^fll'lO Is 14^ In Samaritan and
Arabic this strengthening has been retained throughout, and the LXX write
e. g. ^a&pa for m'K'.
w T T
§ 23. The Feebleness of the Gutturals N and n.
1. The N, a light and scarcely audible guttural breathing, as a rule a
entirely loses its slight consonantal power whenever it stands without
a vowel at the end of a syllable. It then remains (like the German
h in roh, geh, nahte) merely as a sign of the preceding long vowel, e.g.
K^D, Npo, X^ifin (but when a syllable is added witii an introductory
vowel, according to b below, we have, e.g. ''?^^l?, ^^N^yiH^ since the N
then stands at the beginning of the syllable, not '^N^O, '?^<T^), NJfD,
Xl^? (cf, however, § 74 a), nxfo (for mdsatd), njxyori. Similarly
in ca^es like N^n, N"]!!, XIB*, &c. (§ 19 I), and even in K'^^, N^S (see
above, § 22 e), the K only retains an orthographic significance.
2. On the other hand, N is in general retained as a strong con- b
sonant whenever it begins a syllable, e.g. "^P^, ^D?^^, or when it is
protected by a Hateph after a short syllal)le, e.g. ^^^_^., and finally,
8o Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§ 23 c-f
when it stands in a closed syllable with quiescent S^wd after a pre-
ceding S'ghol or Pathah, e.g. IDN*!, TJW na'ddr, ^^Hn: ya'dimiX.
Even in such cases the consonantal power of X may be entirely lost, viz.
C (a) when it would stand with a long vowel in the middle of
a word after. S^wd mobile. The long vowel is then occasionally
thrown back into the place of the o^wd, and the N is only retained
orthographically, as an indication of the etymology, e.g. D^E'N'l heads
(for r^'dsim), D^HNO two hundred (for m^'dthdyim), ^CiNB' Ez 25^ for
TIDSB'; DSnia Neh 6» for DNni3; D1KD Jb cji? Dn 1* for DWD ; mSB
for nnXQ Is 10''; D'Ktpn Ao^tm, I S 14^ for D'N^h (cf. § 74 A, and
§ 75 00)] ''3n^N->n Nu 34", from |?-N1; so always nNDH or niNtSH
I K 14'®, Mi I*, &c., for n^Xtsn. Sometimes a still more violent sup-
pression of the X occurs at the beginning of a syllable, which then
causes a further change in the preceding syllable, e. g. "^^^^^^ ^0**^ ^oi"
n2X!?p (as in the Babylonian punctuation), ^xyo^J for ^NV^V' J ^^^?'
or ^IXD'^ the left hand, ground form sim'dl.
d (h) When it originally closed a syllable. In these cases X is
generally (by § 22 m) pronounced with a Hnteph, -^ ov ^::-. The
preceding short vowel is, however, sometimes lengthened and retains
the following X only orthographically, e.g. ?ifX^l Nu 1 1''^ for ■'r?^*! (of.
Ju 9''), and "inxs Jo 2' for 11"IS3 ; "ibxb for tbX^^ ; D^n^X^ for D'n'^.«,^ ;
but the contraction does not take place in nvvX^ Is 10". The short
vowel is retained, although the consonantal power of X is entirely lost,
in 'jnNl, &c. (see § 102 m), nx»1 Is 41^^ V^^l Ez 28'« for V^m^;
cf. Dt24>'', iKii»«, Is 10".
e Instead of this X which has lost its consonantal value, one of the vowel
letters "1 and '• is often written according to the nature of the sound, the
former with 0 and the latter with e and i, e.g. D^T buffalo for DXT. At tha
end of the word H also is written for X, H^IO; he Jills for Xj'O^ Jb 8^' (see
below, t).
J 3. When X is only preserved orthographically or as an indication
of the etymology (quiescent), it is sometimes entirely dropped (cf.
§ 19/fc), e.g. ^T}T Jbi" for 'mi\; 'n% Jb32'« for ^nxfe; ^mONuii";
Tnni 2820^; lai^l Jer 8" for 1XQT1 ; *:'-|.^ri1 2 S 2 2*\ but ^3->.^Kril y^r 1 8'" ;
Doin Gn 2s^* for Do^xri; Hsianx 3i39 for nsxtsnx; ^rhf_ i S i'^ for
"bsE'; d>j:"i 4r 22^ for D^oxi • ma jb 22^8 for nix2 ; ^n'lan i Ch n'"
for "^^Jf), and so ^ S 23=^'; nn>j^ i Ch I2=« for nnXK'; n^K'ni) 2X19'^
KHhihh for nixB^n!? (cf. Is37^«); non Jb 29« for nxrn.'' In n^3P
* In Jer 32**, ri3n3 is unquestionably a corruption of nn33 for rinjX) .
§23^-*] The Feebleness of the Gutturals ^ and n 8i
I K 5" (for "^'^^^ the strengthening of the following consonant by
Dages compensates for the loss of the X ; in H^bo Ez 20^, if for "^'^^
(but read ^9'^, with Cornill), the preceding vowel is lengthened ; of.
above, c. On "lOK for IPNX, see § 68 g.
Rem. I. In Aramaic the N is much weaker and more liable to change than cr
in Hebrew. In literary Arabic, on the other hand, it is almost always a
firm consonant. According to Arabic orthography, N serves also to indicate
a long a, whereas in Hebrew it very rarely occurs as a mere vowel letter
after Qames ; as in DXp Ho 10'* for Dp he rose up ; tJ'N"! Pr 10*, 1 3^^^ for B*"! poor ;
but in 2 S 11' the KHhihh D''3N?t3n the messengers, is the true reading ; of. § 7 6.
2. In some cases at the beginning of a word, the K, instead of a compound tl
S'lcd, takes the corresponding full vowel, e. g. lilN girdle for 1'llK ; cf. § 84 a, q,
and the analogous cases in § 52 m, § 63 p, § 76 rf, § 93 r (DyHN).
3. An N is sometimes added at the end of the word to a final m, i, or 6, e. g. t
N^3^n for wbn Jos io2*(before N !), N13S Is 28>2. These examples, however,
are not so much instances of 'Arabic orthography', as early scribal errors,
as in mi*l) Je lo" for Wb^ ; and in ^{V5^'^ i^ 13920 for ^xb'J. Cf. also N^n^
Ec n' (§ 75 s) ; N^p3 for ""pj pure ; ti'h for 1^ if; NiSX for IDN then {enclitic) ;
Xi2") for 12") myriad, Keh f^-''K On N^H and ^<^■^ see § 32 A;.
4. The n is stronger and firmer than the N, and never loses its A:
consonantal sound (i.e. quiesces) in the middle of a word* except in
the cases noted below, in which it is completely elided by syncope.
On the other hand, at the end of a word it is always a mere vowel
letter, unless expressly marked by Mapjxiq as a strong consonant
(§ 1 4 a). Yet at times the consonantal sound of 1^ at the end of
a word is lost, and its place is taken by a simple n or more correctly n,
with Raphe as an indication of its non-consonantal character, e.g. n?
to her for nb, Zc 5", &c. (cf. § 103 g, and §§ 58 g, 91 e) ; cf. also nj for 7\'\
(from in^) in proper names like ^"^f., &c. — Finally, in very many
cases a complete elision of the consonantal n takes place by syncope :
(a) when its vowel is thrown back to the place of a preceding S^wd
mobile (see above, c, with k), e.g. "Ip3^ for Ii^'Sl"? (the n of the article
being syncopated as it almost always is) ; D''*? for D^*n3 [but see
§ 35 n], 0^6^? for DtP'^n?; ]T}t^\ for lOJI.T ; perhaps also Dn"'33 for Dn'-naa
Ez 2 7^^ {h) By contraction of the vowels preceding and following the
n, e.g. iDID (also written nb^D) from sUsahu {a-\-u=d). — A violent
suppression of n together with its vowel occurs in D3 (from DOI), &c.
1 Only apparent exceptions are such propernames as pKriB'y, ^^ifiTlQ, which
are compounded of two words and hence are sometimes even divided.
Cf. forms like ^i«tn for ^NHTn, Another exception is .TBriQ^, the reading
■ of many MSS. for the artificially divided form PjBTIQ^ in the printed
texts, Je 4G20.
COWLET G
82 Peculiaiities and Changes of Letters [§§ 23 1, 24 a, h
I Rem. In connexion with o and «, a il which only marks tlie vowel ending
is occasionally changed into 1 or ' (iN'^ = nN"J, ^3n = n3n Ho 6'), and with
any vowel into N in the later or Aramaic orthography, but especially with
a, e.g. N:B' sleep, ^ 127' for njK' ; NK*: Jer 2359 for iW3, &c. Thus it is
evident that final H as a vo,wel letter has only an orthographical importance.
§ 24. Changes of the Weak Letters 1 and \
Philippi, Die Aussprache der semit. Konsonanten 1 und "• (mentioned above, § 5 b,
note i), a thorough investigation of their phonetic value as consonantal, i.e.
non-syllabic, vowel-sounds, not palatal or labial fricatives ; cf. also E. Sievers,
Metrische Studien, i. 1 5.
a 1 and ^ are, as consonants, so weak, and approach so nearly to the
corresponding vowels u and i, that under certain conditions they very
readily merge into them. This fact is especially important in the
formation of those weak stems, in which a 1 or ^ occurs as one of the
three radical consonants (§ 69 ff., § 85, § 93).
1. The cases in which 1 and "• lose their consonantal power, i. e.
merge into a vowel, belong almost exclusively to the middle and end
of words ; at the beginning they remain as consonants.^
The instances may be classified under two heads :
b (a) When either 1 or '' with quiescent o^wd stands at the end of
a syllable immediately after a homogeneous vowel (w or i). It then
merges in the homogeneous vowel, or moi'e accurately it assumes its
vowel-character (l as u, '* as i), and is then contracted with the
preceding vowel into one vowel, necessarily long, but is mostly
retained orthographically as a (quiescent) vowel letter. Thus 3B'^n
for huwsab ; Y\^\ for yiyqas ; so also at the end of the word, e. g. ^I^y
a Hebrew, properly 'ibriy, fern, nna^, pi. D^n?V (and D^"!:?V); I'^V J^^ 4 1''
for m (cf. niV::»JJ i S 25'' KHhthk). On the other hand, if the pre-
ceding vowel be heterogeneous, 1 and ^ are retained as full consonants
(on the pronunciation see § 8 m), e.g. \>^ quiet, "IT the month of May,
^13 nation, ^v3 revealed. But with a preceding a the 1 and ^ are mostly
contracted into 6 and e (see below, /), and at the end of a word they
are sometimes rejected (see below, g).
Complete syncope of 1 before i occurs in ''X island for ''1^{; ""y ruins
for ""ly; "•"! watering Jb 37" for '''!"); [""S burning Is 3^* for ^1?, cf.
§§ 84«c, c, 93 2/].
^ Or as consonantal vowels (see above), and are then transcribed by
P. Haupt, Philippi, and others, as u, j, following the practice of Indogermanic
philologists. 1 for ) and, alone is a standing exception, see § 26. i and § 104*.
On * = t at the beginning of a word, cf. § 47 b, note. According to § 19 a, end,
initial 1 in Hebrew almost always becomes •• ; always in verbs originally I^D,
§ 69 a. Apart from a few proper names, initial "I occurs only in "11 hook, *17l
child Gn ii^o, 3 S 6=» K'thibh [elsewhere ih)}, and the doubtful ITI Pr 2i«.
§ 24 c-g"] Changes of the Weak ^ and "^ 83
Thus an initial ? after the prefixes 3, 1, 3, S, which would then be C
pronounced with % (see § 28 a), and also almost always after O (see
§102 h), coalesces with the i to ^, e.g. niin^a m Judah (for '^3),
nninM and Judah, "^K^? as the Nile, nn^l^j? /or JifrfaA, ^y^ from the
hands of.
(6) When 1 and "i without a vowel would stand at the end of the (l
word after quiescent S^wd, they are either wholly rejected and only
orthographically replaced by n (e.g. ^33 from hikhy, as well as the
regularly formed ''33 weeping; cf. § 93 x) or become again vowel
letters. In the latter case ^ becomes a homogeneous Hireq, and also
attracts to itself the tone, whilst the preceding vowel becomes S^wd
(e.g. ■'l? from piry, properly j^'^^'l/) '■> '^ ^^ changed sometimes into
a toneless u (e. g. '^'i^r\ from tuhw).
Rem. In Syriac, where the weak letters more readily become vowel sounds, C
a simple i may stand even at the beginning of words instead of ^ or V The
LXX also, in accordance with this, write 'lovSa for m^H^, 'laaaK for pHlf^.
Hence may be explained the Syriac usage in Hebrew of drawing back the
vowel i to the preceding consonant, which properly had a simple vocal S^wd,
e. g. (according to the reading of Ben-Naphtali ^) TOy) Jer 25^6 for fOT) (so
Baer), j'nri"'3 Ec 2^^ for pin"!!) , cf. also the examples in § 20 h, note 2 ; even
l^n^l Jb 2921 (in some editions) for l^n'^l. According to Qimhi (see § 47 b)
^tDp^ was pronounced as iqfol, and therefore the ist pera. was pointed pbpS
to avoid confusion. In fact the Babylonian punctuation always has i for a
in the 1st pers.
2. With regard to the choice of the long vowel, in which ) and 1 f
quiesce after such vocalization and contraction, the following rules
may be laid down :
i (a) Witli a short homogeneous vowel 1 and "i are contracted into the
corresponding long vowel {u or i), see above, b.
{b) With short a they form the diphthongs o and e according to
§ 7 a, e.g. 3^t?'5 from ^^'p ; ^0 from 2'^):, &c}
Kem. The rejection of the half vowels ) and "• (see above, b) occurs especially g
at the end of words after a heterogeneous vowel («), if according to the
nature of the form the contraction appears impossible. So especially in
1 According to Abulwalid, Ben-Naphtali regarded the Yodh in aU such cases
as a vowel letter.
2 Instances in which no contraction takes place after a are, 0^3^0*0 iCh 12';
DTD-X Ho 7"2 (but cf. § 706) ; "Itt'^n ^ 5^ Q're; the locatives T)JV3^ n»fl>*ri,
&c. — On tho suffix ^D"'JL for T]""-*- see § 91 i.— Sometimes both forms are
found, as roVJ and Hpiy ; cf. ^Pl living, constr. state ^n. Analogous is the
contraction of PIO (ground-form mawt) death, constr. niD ; py (ground-form
'ayn [_'ain]) eye, constr. p);.
6 2
84 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§ 25 a-c
verbs T^"^ , e. g. originally v2 = ('')i'5 ° '"'^? ' ^^^^^ " after the rejection of the "•
stands in an open syllable, and consequently must be lengthened to a. The
n is simply an orthographic sign of the long vowel. So also ilT'K' for Mlaw.^
On the origin of HpJ^, see § 75 e ; on Dp as perf. and part, of D^p, see § 72 6
and g ; on 1?^, &c., from 1p), see § 69 6. — On the weakening of 1 and ■• to N,
see § 93 X.
§ 25. Unchangeable Voiods.
a What vowels in Hebrew are unchangeable, i.e. are not liable to
attenuation (to S^wa), modificatioUj lengthening, or shortening, can
be known with certainty only from the nature of the grammatical
forms, and in some cases by comparison with Arabic (cf. § i m). This
holds good especially of the essentially long vowels, i. e. those long by
nature or contraction, as distinguished from those which are only
lengthened rhythmically, i. e. on account of the special laws which
in Hebrew regulate the tone and the formation of syllables. The
latter, when a change takes place in the position of the tone or in
the division of syllables, readily become short again, or are reduced to
a mere vocal S^wd.
h 1. The essentially long and consequently, as a nile (but cf. § 26^,
§ 27 w, 0), unchangeable vowels of the second and third class, i, e, i2, d,
can often be recognized by means of the vowel letters which accom-
pany them C-:-, ''-^, ^ ^) ; e.g. 2"'D\'; he does well, ^^^'^ palace, ?13?
boundary, /'^p voice. The defective writing (§ 8 i) is indeed common
enough, e.g. 30^. and y^\ for 3^0^.; f^nj for ^ua ; h\> for ^P, but this
is merely an orthographic licence and has no influence on the quantity
of the vowel; the il in ?3|i is just as necessarily long, as in ?^3a.
As an exception, a merely tone-long vowel of both these classes is sometimes
written fully, e. g. PiDp"* for /bp^ .
^ 2. The essentially or naturally long d {Qames impure),^ unless it has
become 6 (cf. § 9 q), has as a rule in Hebrew no representative among
the consonants, while in Arabic it is regularly indicated by K ; on the
few instances of this kind in Hebrew, cf. § 9 5, § 23 p'. The naturally
long d and the merely tone-long a therefore can only be distinguished
by an accurate knowledge of the forms.
^ The Arabic, in such cases, often writes etymologically y3» hut pronounces
gala. So the LXX i^D ^tva, Vulg. Sina; cf. Nestle, ZAW. 1905, p. 36a f.
But even in Arabic N^C is written for yCJ' and pronounced said.
' By locales impurae the older grammarians meant vowels properly followed
by a vowel letter. Thus 303 k^lhdbh was regarded as merely by a licence
for 3Nn3, &c.
§§ 25 d, e, 26 a-ei Unchangeable Vowels 85
3. Short vowels in closed syllables (§ 26 h), which are not final, are d
as a rule unchangeable, e. g. tJ'^3pp garment, "^^lip wilderness, '^^p'?^
kingdom; similarly, short vowels in sharpened syllables, i.e. before
Dages forte, e. g. 333 thief.
4. Finally, those long vowels are unchangeable which, owing to C
the omission of the strengthening in a guttural or 1, have arisen by
lengthening from the corresponding short vowels, and now stand in
an open syllable, e. g. |?<?? for mi' en; ^12 for hurrahh.
§ 26. Syllable-formation'^ and its Influence on the
Quantity of Vowels.
Apart from the unchangeable vowels (§ 25), the use of short or long a
V
vowels, i.e. their lengthening, shortening, or change into vocal S^wd,
depends on the theory/ of syllable-formation. The initial and final
syllables especially require consideration.
1. The initial syllable. A syllable regularly begins with a consonant,
or, in the case of initial y and ^ (cf. note on § 5 b), a consonantal vowel.^
The copula is a standing exception to this rule. According to the
Tiberian pronunciation ] and is resolved into the corresponding vowel
^ before S^wd, and the labials, e.g. ''?*]', ^^^^ ; the Babylonian punc-
tuation in the latter cases writes T, i. e. \ before a full vowel.
2. The final syllable. A syllable may end — O
(a) With a vowel, and is then called an opew or simple syllable,
e. g. in ^7'^]^ where the first and last ai-e open. See below, e.
(6) With one consonant, and is then called a simple closed or com- C
pound syllable, as the second in b^ij, 33?. See below, 0, p. Such are
also the syllables ending in a strengthened consonant, as the first in
7^i2 qat-tel. See below, 5'.
(c) With two consonants, a doubly closed syllable, as ^?'p qoU, T^p^\>. a
Cf. below, r, and § 10 i-l.
3. Open or simple syllables have a long vowel, whether they have C
the tone as in ^3 in thee, ^>\ he goes, or are toneless as in ?^^, 33)?
a bunch of gra'pes? A long vowel (Qames, less frequently Sere) is
1 Cf. C. H. Toy, 'The Syllable in Hebrew,' Amer. Journal of Philol., 1884,
p. 494 ff. ; H. Strack, 'The Syllables in the Hebrew Language,' Hehraica^
Oct. 1884, p. 73 ff.
^ We are not taking account here of the few cases in which initial Yodh is
represented as simple i, by being written ^N or N, see § 246, and especially
§ 47 6, note ; nor of certain other cases in which N with an initial vowel has
only a graphic purpose, though it is indispensable in an unpointed text.
* In opposition to this fundamental law in Hebrew (a Zon^f vowel in an open
syllable), the original short vowel is found always in Arabic, and sometimes
86 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§ 26/-»
especially common in an open syllable before the tone (pretonic vowel),
e.g. dO^.D^P:,^^!?, 3?>.^
/Short vowels in open syllables occur :
(a) In apparently dissyllabic words formed by means of a helping vowel
r < < <
from monosyllables, as ?n3 brook, rT'B house, 3T let him increase, from nahl,
bayt, yirb ; cf. also D^_l_ the ending of the dual (§ 88). But see § 28 e.
tr [h) In the verbal suffix of the ist pers. sing. C^JL me), e.g. ""Jptai? (Arab.
qdtalani). The uncommon form '^2_L., however (Gn 3C«, cf. § 59/), proves that
the tone-bearing Pathah produces a sharpening of the following sonant, and
til us virtually stands in a closed syllable, even when the l^un is not expressly
written with Dages. In cases like ''3TX1 (§ 102 m) Pathah is retained in the
counter-tone after the N has become quiescent. ,
// (c) Sometimes before the toneless H local (§ 90 c), e. g. m3"!D towards the
xdlderness; only, however, in the constr. state (i K 19^"')) since the toneless
suffix n does not affect the character of the form (especially when rapidly
pronounced in close connexion) ; otherwise it is mano.
In all these cases the short vowel is also supported by the tone, either the
principal tone of the word, or (as in h) by the secondary tone in the constr.
st., or by the counter-tone with Metheg, as in "'JIS^ above, g ; cf. the effect of
the arsis on the short vowel in classical prosody.
J (d) In the combinations . , , e.g. iiyj his hoy, *lbX*
he wiU bind, vVQ his deed. In all these cases the syllable was at first really
closed, and it was only when the guttural took a //afeph that it became in
consequence open (but cf. e. g. IDN'', and "IDN' ). The same vowel sequence
arises wherever a preposition 3 3 ^5 or 1 copulative is prefixed to an
initial syllable which has a Hateph, since the former then takes the vowel
in the other Semitic languages, except of course in the case of naturally long
vowels. The above examples are pronounced in Arabic Mkd, qdtdld, 'indb.
Although it is certain therefore that in Hebrew also, -at an earlier period,
short vowels were pronounced in ojien syllables, it may still be doubted
whether the present pronunciation is due merely to an artificial practice
followed in the solemn recitation of the 0. T. text. On this hypothesis we
should have still to explain, e.g. the undoubtedly very old lengthening of i
and li in an open syllable into e and 6.
1 That these pretonic vowels are really long is shown by Brockelmann, ZA.
xiv. 343 f., from the transcription of Hebrew proper names in the Nestorian
(Syriac) punctuation, and e.g. from the Arabic 'Ibrahim = Dn"l3X. He
regards their lengthening in the syllable before the tone as a means adopted
by the Masoretes to preserve the pronunciation of the traditional vowels.
This explanation of the pretonic voAvels as due to a precaution against their
disappearing, is certainly right ; as to whether the precaution can be ascribed
to the Masoretes, see the previous note. For the pretonic vowel the Arabic
regularly has a short vowel {Idkiim, ydqum, &c.), the Aramaic simply a vocal
S^ivd (pn? D^p^, b^\>, 3?b) ; and even in Hebrew, when the tone is thrown
forward the pretonic vowel almost always becomes S^wu, see § 27. It would,
however, bo incorrect to assume from this that the pretonic vowel h:is taken
the place of S*wd only on account of the following tone-syllable. It always
arises from an original short vowel, since such a vowel is mostly lengthened
in an open syllable before the tone, but when the tone is moved forward it
becomes S'lvd.
§ 26 /.--;>] Syllable-formatiofi, its Influence on Vowels 87
contained in the Na\eph (see § 102 d and § 104 d). To the same category
belong also the cases where these prepositions with Hireq stand before a
consonant with simple S'wa mobile, e.g. "I?"]?, I?"]?, &c-
(e) In forms like Ipin;' yciha-^-qu (tliey are strong), ?jpy3 po'o Vkhd (thy /t
deed). These again are cases of the subsequent opening of closed syllables
(hence, e. g. Ipin"; also occurs) ; '?jby3 is properly po'i^A/ia ; cf. generally § 22 m,
end, and §280.^ ^ .
Such cases as tyinn, □'•HK (§ 96), nnnH (§ 67 w) do not come under this /
liead, since they all have a in a virtually sharpened syllable ; nor does the
tone-bearing S^ghol in suffixes (e.g. ^^Sl), nor S'ghol for a before a guttural
with Qames (§ 22 c). On D^JJ'IIJ' and D^B'Tp, see §91).
4. The independent syllables with a firm vowel which have been m
described above, are frequently preceded by a single consonant with
vocal S^wa, simple or compound. Such a consonant with vocal S^wa
never has the value of an independent syllable, but rather attaches
itself so closely to the following syllable that it forms piactically one
syllabic with it, e.g. 'vh (cheek) Vhl; '^^ (sickness) hTt; r^^Y- V^^'
vi''dhil. This concerns especially the prefixes \, 3, 3, p. See § 102.
The S^vcd mobile is no doubt in all such cases weakened from an original 7?
full vowel (e. g. ^i'tpp^ Arab, yaqtv'u, ^3 Arab. Mkd, &c.) ; from this, however,
it cannot be inferred that the Masoretes regarded it as forming a kind of open
syllable, for this would be even more dii-ectly opposed to their fundamental
law (viz. that a long vowel should stand in an open syllable), than are the?
exceptions cited above, f-k. Even the use of Metheg with S^wa in special
cases (see § 16/) is no proof of such a view on the part of the Masoretes.
5. Closed syllables ending with one consonant, when without the 0
tone, necessarily have' s/<or^ vowels, whether at the beginning or at the
end of words,^ e.g. HSpO queen, pSK'n understanding, ^^^n wisdom,
* ***** - \
"'P'l «^^ ^'^ turned hack, Dip.'l, Dj^'l (warjyaqom).
A tone-hearing closed syllable may have either a long or short vowel, p
but if the latter, it must as a rule be either Pathah or S^ghol.^ The
tone-bearing closed penultima admits, of the long vowels, only the tone-
long a, e, 0, not the longest i, e, 6, 4] of the short vowels, only a, e, not
i, u, 6 (but on I and u, see § 29 g). Thus v^t?p! (3rd pi. masc. Imperf
Hiph.) but njpbpn 3rd pi. fem., and IC1V (2nd pi. masc. Imperat. Qal)
but ^^PP fem.
1 In exceptions such as '•pTIkJ' Gn 4'^ (where sat is required by the character
of the form, although the closed syllable has lost the tone owing to the
following Maqqeph), Metheg is used to guard against a wrong pronunciation ;
similarly e is sometimes retained before Maqqeph, e.g. "Dli* Gn 2^^; "J*y Gn 2*^
^ See §9 6,/. i occurs thus only in the particles DN, Dy, |0 ; but these
usually (pp always) are rendered toneless by a following Maqqeph. Cf. al.so
such forms as 2K'*1 § 26 r and § 75 q.
88 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§§267,r,27a-c
q e. A special kind of closed syllables are the 8harj)ened, i. e. those
which end in the same (strengthened) consonant with which the fol-
lowing syllable begins, e. g. ''tpN 'im-mi, ^?3 kul-lo. If without the
tone, they have, like the rest, short vowels ; but, if bearing the tone,
either short vowels ns ^?P, ^3,3n, or long, as '"I?^, '*'?'!}•
On the omission of the strengthening of a consonant at the end of a word,
see § 20 I.
Y 7. Syllables ending with two consonants occur only at the end of
words, and have most naturally short vowels, ^ip^i^, ??'!!; but some-
times Sere, as "=|'l?., yi^'.!, or ITolem, Pfp *|tpin. Cf., however, § 10 «.
Usually the harshness of pronunciation is avoided by the use of a
helping vowel (§28 e).
§ 27. The Change of the Voweh, es2)ecially as regards
Quantity.
a The changes in sound through which the Hebrew language passed,
before it assumed the form in which we know it from the Masoretic
text of the O.T. (see § 2 k), have especially affected its vowel system.
A precise knowledge of these vowel changes, which is indispensable
for the understanding of most of the present forms of the language, is
derived partly from the phenomena which the language itself presents
in the laws of derivation and inflexion, partly from the comparison of
the kindred dialects, principally the Arabic. By these two methods,
we arrive at the following facts as regards Hebrew :
h I. That in an open syllable the language has frequently retained
only a half-vowel {S^wd mobile), where there originally stood a full
short vowel, e.g. npJJJ (ground-form 'dgdldt) a waggon, '^^'^^ (ground-
form sdddqdt) righteousness, vDf? (Arab, qdtdld), ^^tSp^ [Arah. juqattiM).
C 2. That vowels originally short have in the tone-syllable, as also
in the open syllable preceding it, been generally changed into the
cori'esponding tone-long vowels, d into a, i into e, u into 0 (see § 9,
a—e, Jc, r). If, however, the tone be shifted or weakened, these tone-
long vowels mostly revert to their original shortness, or, occasionally,
are still further shortened, or reduced to mere S^wd mobile, or, finally,
ai'e entirely lost through a change in the division of syllables ; e. g. ^9?
(Arab, mdtdr) rain, when in close dependence on a following genitive
in the construct state), becomes "1^1? ; ^pV (Arab, 'dqlb) heel, dual D^?k?S!,
dual construct (with attenuation of the original d of the first syllable
to t) '3ipy [on the P, see § 20 A] ; ^bp^ (Arab, ydqtdl), plur. ^^\>''. (Arab.
ydqtuld). For instances of complete loss, as in ''|?tp3, cf. § 93 m.
§ 27 d i] Change of Vowels, as regards Quantity 89
According to § 26, the following details of vowel-change must be
observed :
1. The original, or a kindred shoi t vowel reappears — d
(a) When a closed syllable loses the tone (§26 0). Thus, '^\ hand,
but '"'ji^^'*'! the hand of Yahwe; |3 son, but 'n?'?D"f? the son of tlie king;
P3 the whole, but D^n"?3 the whole of the j)eople ; so also when a tone-
bearing closed syllable loses the tone on taking a sufl&x, e.g. 2''t< enemy,
but l^^i* thy enemy, finally, when the tone recedes, Dp^, but Di^^l
{wayyaqdm); ^P.l, but 'H^f.l.
(6) To the same category belong cases like "^BD book, but ^ISp my
hook; E^lp holiness, but ^E^IQ my holiness. In spite of the helping
vowel, "^QD and ^Ip are really closed syllables with a tone-long vowel;
when the syllable loses the tone, the original i or 6 (properly u) re-
appears.
The same is true of syllables with a virtually sharpened final con-
sonant : the lengthening of original ? to e and w to 0 takes place only
in a tone-bearing syllable ; in a toneless syllable the ? or 0 (or H)
remains, e. g. D^? mother, but ''t?^ my mother ; pH law, plur. D^"pQ J but
iV strength, ""tV (and ^V!i) my strength.
2. The lengthening of the short vowel to the coiresponding long, e
takes place —
(a) When a closed syllable becomes open by its final consonant
being transferred to a suffix beginning with a vowel, or in general
to the following syllable, e.g. ^^^, vj^p he has killed him; ^n|9^D
primarily from riplD. Similarly d mostly becomes a even before
a suffix beginning with S^wd mobile; e.g. IrJ^i? from ^Dj^^ I'Pi?^^
from np^D.
(6) When a syllable has beco.ne open by complete loss of the J
strengthening of its final consonant (a guttural or Rei), e.g. ^IjS
for blrrakh, see § 22 c. Cf. also § 20 n.
(c) When a weak consonant (k, 1, '*) following the short vowel £*
quiesces in this vowel, according to § 23 a, c, rf, § 24 / e. g. N^O for
^?9. where the N, losing its consonantal value, loses also the power of
closing the syllable, and the open syllable requires a long vowel.
{d) Very frequently through the influence of the pause, i. e. the h
principal tone in the last word of a sentence or clause (§29 k).
Sometimes also through the influence of the article (§35 o).
3. When a word increases at the end and the tone is consequently i
moved foiward, or when, in the construct state (see § 89), or otherwise
in close connexion with the following word, its tone is weakened, in
such cases a full vowel (short or tone-long) may, by a change in the
90 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§ 27 i-o
division of syllables, be weakened to o^wd mobile, or even be entirely-
lost, so that its place is taken by the mere syllable-divider {o'^icd
quiescens). Examples of the first case are, Dj^ name, pi. ri^'^K', but
^IpB' my name, DHitCB' tJieir names, "1^'^ word, constr. st. "i?"^ ; '"'iJ'J^f
righteousness, constr. st. ni?1if ; an example of the second case is, 'I?!?
hlessing, constr. st. ri3"l3. Whether the vowel is retained or becomes
S^wd (D^, 'J?'1, but Dt?', *^^), and which of the two disappears in two
consecutive syllables, depends upon the character of the form in
question. In general the rule is that only those vowels which stand
in an open syllable can become S^ivd.
Thus the change into S^wd takes place in —
/..' , (a) The d and e of tlie first syllable, especially in the inflexion
of nouns, e. g. "'^'n word, plur. C'l^'^; ^^3 great, fern, nbns ; 33.7 heart,
'33p my heart ; but also in the verb, 31K'n she will return, plur.
<
n3^212'ri, and so always, when the originally short vowel of the prefixes
of the Imperfect comes to stand in an open syllable which is not
pretonic. On the other hand, an d lengthened from d before the tone
is retained in the Perfect consecutive of Qal even in the secondaiy
tone, e. g. ^f^\^] ; cf. § 49 i.
I (b) The short, or moely tone-long, vowels a, e, 0 of the ultima,
especially in verbal forms, e.g. b^i^, fern. H^Dp qafld; ^''^\>\, ^''Pi?!
yiqiHA; but note also ilt^Pp^, ppZlin, &c., according to § 47 m and 0.
The helping vowels are either entirely omitted, e.g. 'n?^ king (ground-
form malk), 'SpP my king; or, under the influence of a guttural, are
weakened to Hateph, e. g. "IV? boy, 1*iy? Jiis b^y. If the tone remains
unmoved, the vowel also is retained, notwithstanding the lengthening
of the word, e.g. vOp^ pausal-form for v^ip^
^'' Where the tone moves forward two places, the former of the two
vowels of a dissyllabic word may be shoitened, and the second
changed into S^wd. Cf. *13'1 word ; in the plur. Q''"!3"n ; \^•ith heavy
<
suffix Dn''"i3'n (cf. § 28 a) their words. On the attenuation of the a to
t, see further, s, t.
n Rem. I. An 6 arising from aw = au, or by an obscuring of a (see § 9 6),
sometimes becomes u, when the tone is moved forward, e.g. DIpJ ni6lp3
(see Paradigm Per/. Niph. of Dip) ; DOD .flight, fern. np13», with suflfix, *D1jp,
The not uncommon use of Wn a sharpened syllable, as ''jp^riB Ez 20" (for
*ipn3, cf. also the examples in § 90), is to be regarded as an orthographic
licence, although sometimes in such cases u may really have been intended
l.y the K^lhibh.
O Of the vowels of the I7-class, u and tone-long 0 stand in a tone-bearing
§ 27 p-s] Change of Vowels, as regards Quantity 91
closed final syllable, and o in a toneless syllable, e.g. D^pJ he idU arise,
DiT jussive, let him arise, Dp'1 and he arose. The only instance of it in an
ultima which has lost the tone is D^JI Ex iG^o (see § 67 n). Similarly, of
vowels of the 7-class, e, i, and e stand in a tone-bearing closed final syllable,
and g in a toneless syllable, e.g. D^p"" he will raise, Dp^ let him raise, G\>^\ and he
raised. The only instance of i in an ultima which has lost the tone is Y')^\
.Tu (f^ (see § 67 p).
2. In the place of a Pathak we not infrequently find (according to § 9/) p
a S''gh6l (c, e) as a modification of a :
(a) In a closed antepenultima, e.g. in the proper names ">ri^3>? and ^9t^?>
where LXX 'A^i- = '*3K, which is certainly the better reading, cf. XJlmer,
Die semit. Eigennamen, 1901, p. 12 : or in a closed penultima, e.g. ^I'ln"', but
also D^^^ your hand, for yad'khim. In all these case^ the character of the
surrounding consonants (see § 6 gf) has no doubt had an influence.
(6) Eegularly before a guttural with Qames or ITaleph Qame^, q
where the strengthening has been dropped, provided that a lengthen-
ing of the Pathah into Qames be not necessary, e.g. vnx his brothers,
for 'ahdw ; ^r\3 false, for kahds ; nns governor, constr. st. r.ns ; DHB
coal; "nn the living (with the article, H for n) ; Dmn^ Nu 23''^ &c.,
and so always before H and n, as l^TinH- ''** months, see § 35 A-.
Before n and V S^gMl generally stands only in the second syllable
before the tone, e.g. ^'''i^[}. the mountains; pVp the guilt; immediately
before the tone Pathah is lengthened into a (pretonic) Qames, e. g.
"inn. Oyn • but cf. also ^"intsn Nu 8". Before the weak consonants
T T 5 T T ' T V •
N and "J (cf. § 22 c, q), the lengthening of the Pathah into Qames
almost always takes place, e. g. 3f?n (he father, pi. ninxT ; B'Nin the
head, pi. D^N'^n. Exceptions, i'^l^} towards the mcuntain, Gn 14'", in
the tone-syllable, for hdrrd; ^^'\'P^^, (pr. name) for l^'^in^. On n as
a form of the interrogative H (n), see § 100 w; on «"lO for nD (np),
§ 37 e, f. Finally, v?^? Ex 33* also comes partly under this head, in
consequence of the loss of the strengthening, for 'Jf?^., and ''^i?|D:
Ezekiel for ^Ni?^n^=bsp;in^ God strengthens.
(c) As a modification of the original Pathah in the first class of the scgholato f
forms (§ 93 g), when a helping vowel (§ 28 e) is inserted after tlie second
consonant. Thus the ground-form kalb {dog), after receiving a helping S'ghol,
is modified into 2^3 (also in modern Arabic pronounced kelb),^ yarh {month),
with a helping Pathah, flV. The same phenomenon appears also in the
formation of verbs, in cases like bv' (jussive of the Hiph'il of npj), with
a helping S'ghol, for yagl.
3. The attenuation of a to i is verj' common in a toneless closed syllable. ,V
(a) In a firmly closed syllable, i*np his measure, for HC (in a sharpened
syllable) ; '^''h'6) I have hegotlen thee, from ''FtH'^^ with the suffix "^ ; cf. Lv 1 1",
Ez T,S^^, and § 44 d. Especially is this the case in a large number of srgholates
» So the LXX write VliKxiotUK for p"li*''3^p.
92 Peculiarilies and Changes of Letters [§§ 27 t-w, 28 a
from the ground-form qatl, when combined with singular suffixes, e.g. *{?*1X
my righteousness, for sadqi. ' '' '
t (6) In a loosely-closed syllable, i. e, one followed by an aspirated Begadk^phath,
as DDID"! your blood, for D3D'n, and so commonly in the st. constr. plur. of
segholates from the ground-form qatl, e. g. na3 from *733 (ground-form bagd)
a garment. In most cases of this kind the attenuation is easily intelligible
from the nature of the surrounding consonants. It is evident from a com-
parison of the dialects, that the attenuation was consistently carried out in
a very large number of noun and verb-forms in Hebrew, as will be shown in
the proper places.*
U 4- S^ghol arises, in addition to the cases mentioned in o and p, also from
the weakening of a of the final syllable in the isolated cases (J]-t^ for H )
in I S 2815 (? see § 48 d), i/^ 20* (?), Is 59^, Pr 24" (see § 48 Z) ; for examples' of
Locative forms in n__ see § 90 i end.
Z) 5. Among the HafqaA-sounds ___ is shorter and lighter than , and con-
sequently the vowel group is shorter than ; e.g. Di"IK Edom,
< , ~: i" v: IV v:
but *Jp"IK {Edomite), shortened at the beginning because the tone is thrown
forward ; DDK C'meth) truth, *iriDX his truth : D^'UJ hidden, pi. Q>hb]}i ■ T^iv^
but "'Jjlinyn^ ; but also conversely TWVi fem. nnb'J?: , cf. § 63/, 3.
^ 6. To the chapter on vowel changes belongs lastly the dissimilation of vowels,
i. €. the change of one vowel into another entirely heterogeneous, in order to
prevent two similar, or closely related vowels, from following one another in
the same word.« Hence N^^ for lH 16 (unless). Cf. also ji^'H from y^n •
pE'Sn from t^til ; ])2'>F\ from Ijin ; in33 from Hpi ; D*l"'j; from stem "fly ;
most probably also iSb) offspring, TiBj? porcupine, for '?^ , 'Sp, see § 68 c, note. —
On the proper names Kln^ and J/^B''', which were, formerly explained in the
same way, see now PrStorius, ZDMG. 1905, p. 341 f.
§ 28. The Rise of New Voivels and Syllables.
d 1. According to § 26 m a half-syllable, i, e. a consonant with S^wa
mobile (always weakened from a short vowel), can only occur in close
dependence on a full syllable. If another half-syllable with simple
S®wa follows, the first takes a full short vowel again.' This vowel
is almost always Hireq. In most cases it is probably an attenuation
of an original d, and never a mere helping vowel. In some instances
analogy may have led to the choice of the i. Thus, according to
§ 102 d, the prefixes ?, ?, ? before a consonant with S^wd mobile
become 2, 3, p, e.g. '^33, nQ3^ If?', before ^ they are pointed as
in niin^S (from hi-y^hildd, according to § 24 c); so too with Wdw
copulative, e. g. ^y^^^} for 'M attenuated from ''1. The first half-
* Analogous to this attenuation of « to t is the Lat. tango, attingo ; laxus,
prolixus ; to the transition of a to e (see above, a), the Lat. carpo, decerpo ;
spargo, conspergo.
* Cf. Barth, Die Nominalbildung iri den semit. Spr., p. xxix ; A. Miiller, Theol.
Stud. u. Krit., 1892, p. 177 f., and Nestle, ibid., p. 573 f.
3 Except 1 and, which generally becomes ? before a simple S'wa, cf. § 104 i.
§ 28 b-e] The Rise of New Vowels and Syllables 93
syllable, after the restoration of the short vowel, Bometimes combines
with the second to form a firmly closed syllable, e. g. ?33b Nu 14' for
linpphol, and so almost always in the infin. constr. after 7 (§ 4 5 S') J ^^
isolated cases also with 3, as "13]? Jer 17^.
2. If a guttural with Hateph follows, the original d of the prefixes h
is retained before Hateph Pathah, but before Hateph Seghol or Hateph
Qames it is modified to the short vowel contained in the Hateph.
Thus arise the vowel groups -=j-p-, -rr-r^, -n-rF> e.g. ^?>*.,l and I, "l'^5<3 aa,
"liy^ to serve, ^3^^ to eat, "hrh in sickness. On the Metheg with every
such short vowel, see § 16/ 8. Sometimes here also a fully closed
syllable is formed. In such a case, the prefix takes the short vowel,
which would have belonged to the suppressed Hateph, e. g. 3bn? for
3bn^; DDni> Is 47" for Don^ (see § 67 cc); ^0t6 but also IDN^. ; and
even "iHV) Jb 4^, cf. Gn 32'^ So always in the Infin. and Imperat. Qal
of the verbs n^n to be and n^n to live, e. g. ni'nb to be, ^^ni and be ye ;
even with |0, as r\i''np, on which cf. § 102 6 ; but 7\\n\_ and be, iTini.
and live, have e instead of ? under the prefix. For the Metheg, cf.
§16/, c.
3. When a Hateph in the middle of a word, owing to flexional C
changes, would stand before a vocal ^^wd, it is changed into the short
vowel, with which it is compounded. This applies especially to cases
in which the Hateph stands under a guttural instead of quiescent
i^wd, as an echo of the preceding short vowel, e.g.ltoj;^ he will stand
(for Ibv:), but plur. ^"It?y,\ for yd'^mHhxi,, and ^3Bn3 for neK'^ph^khxX
{they have turned themselves), ^bvs thy work, cf. § 26 k. The syllables ,
are to be divided yad-m^dhd, and the second dS is to be regarded
exactly as the helping Pathah in "V^, &c.^
4. At the end of words, syllables occur which close with two con- U
sonants (§ 10 i, § 26 r), but only when the latter of the two is an
emphatic consonant (U, ?) or a tenuis (viz.^3, "H, T, n^, e.g. ^f.''. let him
turn aside, pfl). and he caused to drink, ^J?^ thou (fern.) hast said, 'n3.'!l
and he wejit, "H"*."'.'! and let him have dominion, 31^*1 and he took captive.
This harsh ending is elsewhere avoided by the Masora,^ which C
inserts between the two final consonants a helping vowel, usually
1 In Ju 16" read '<y\^n not (with Opitius, Hahn and others) T\t<T) .
2 With a final B), the only example is B|p*in Pr 30^, where several MSS. and
printed editions incorrectly have 5| without Dagel. Instead of this masoietic
caprice we should no doubt read ^IPW .
5 An analogy to this practice of the Masora is found among the modern
Beduin, who pronounce such a helping vowel before h, /i, j, g ; cf. Spitta,
Gramm. des arab. Vulgdrdiakktes von Aegypten, Lpz. 1880, § 43 rf.
94 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§§28/, 290-^
S^yhol, but with medial or final gutturals a Patliah,^ and after ^
a Ilireq, e. g. ?3*1 and he revealed, for wayyiyl ; 2T Ut it multipli/, for
yirb ; t^lp holiness, ground-form quds ; ?rn brook, ground-form nafjl ;
riripB' - for J^inpK' thou hast sent ; H^? house, ground-form bayt. These
helping vowels are, however, to be regarded as exactly like furtive
Pathah (§ 22 f,g); they do not alter the monosyllabic character of
the forms, lind they disappear before formative suffixes, e. g. 'K'"li? niy
<
holiness, '"l^*? home-ward.
f 5. On the rise of a full vowel in place of a simple S^wd, under the
influence of the 2><iuse, see § 29 m ; on initial K for .^, see § 23 h.
§ 29. The Tone, its Changes and the Pause.
a 1. The principal tone rests, according to the Masoretic accentuation
(cf. § 15 c), as a rule on the final syllable, e.g. bpj^, -\2'l, Hn^, Dnn-n,
D^f'^i?, 1''Pi^, P*^"!t? — in the last five examples on the formative additions
to the stem. Less frequently it rests on the penultima, as in HT?
night, ^?PiJ, ^-il, ^^ij; but a closed penultima can only have the tone
if the ultima is open (e.g. ^PPiJ, "^J?.?, '^J'r'P)' "^^'l^^ilst a closed ultima
can as a rule only be without the tone if the penultima is open, e. g.
D|'^>1, D^*1; gee also below, e.
b A kind of counter-tone or secondary stress, as opposed to the
principal tone, is marked by Metheg (§ i6 c). Words which are closely
united by Maqqeph with the following word (§ 16 a) can at the most
have only a secondary tone.
C 2. The original tone of a word, however, frequently shifts its place
in consequence either of changes in the word itself, or of its close
connexion with other words. If the word is increased at the end, the
tone is moved forward {descendit) one or two places according to the
length of the addition, e.g. "l^'l word, plur. D"'"12'=|; t^y'}y^, your u-ords;
^IP holy thing, plur.D''B'*JP; nb6\> with suffix innS^jp, with Waw con-
secutive ^^^P). On the consequent vowel-changes, see § 27 d, i-ni.
cl 3. On the other hand, the original tone is shifted from the ultima
to the penultima {ascendit) :
^ On the apparent exceptions Kp'T, &c., cf. § 22 e ; other instances in which
N has entirely lost its consonantal value, and is only retained orthographically,
are Npn sin, t<)i valley (also ^3), Nl^ vanity (Jb 15=1 K^thibh IK').
* In this form (§ 65 g) the Bages lene remains in the final Taw, althongh
a vowel precedes, in order to point out that the helping Pathah is not to be
regarded as a really full vowel, but merely as an orthographic indication of
a very slight sound, to ensure the correct pronunciation. An analogous case
is "nn^ yihad from mn (§ 75 r).
§29 f./] ^^'^ Tone, its Changes and the Pause 95
(a) In many forms of the Imperfect, under the influence of a pre-
fixed Waw consecutive {•\ see § 49 c-e), e, g. iCiS^ he will say, ^'0^*\ and
he said ; "^l he will go, "^^.'.1 and he tvent. Cf. also § 51 n on the impf.
Niph'al, and § 65 g, end, on the impf. Pi'el ; on these forms in Pause,
when the ) consec. does not take effect, see below, jo.
(6) For rhythmical reasons (as often in other languages), when e
a monosyllable, or a word with the tone on the first syllable, follows
a word with the tone on the ultima, in order to avoid the concurrence
of two tone-syllables.' This rhythmical retraction of the tone, however
(liriN JiD3 receding, as it is called by the Jewish gramraai-ians), is only
admissible according to a, above, provided that the penultiraa, which
now receives the tone, is an open syllable (with a long vowel ; but
see g), whilst the ultima, which loses the tone, must be either an open
syllable with a long vowel, e. g. rh'^b^ N^P, Gn I^ 4'', zf, Ex i6^ ^/^ 5>',
104", Dn 11", or a closed syllable with a short vowel, e. g. D^^ ^^^^
Gn 3'^ Jb 3-\ 22^. 2 The grave suffixes DD-, |3-, DH-, |n- are exceptions,
as they never lose the tone. Moreover a fair number of instances occur
in which the above conditions are fulfilled, but the tone is not retracted,
e.g. esp. with n^n, and before N; cf. Qimhi, Mikhlol, ed. Rittenberg
(Lyck, 1862), p. 4^, line 13 ff.
Although Sere can remain in a closed ultima which has lost the tone, it f
is perhaps rot to be regarded in this case (see § 8 6) as a long vowel. At
any rate it then always ha.s, in correct editions, a retarding Metheg, no
doubt in order to prevent its being pronounced as S^ghol, e.g. pP^ "^,?i'5:
Nu 24^2; cf. Nu 1723, Ju 20^ Is 66^ Jer 23^', Ez 22^S V'37', and even with
a following/«r<ire Pathah Pr i'^, 1 1^®, &c., although there is no question
here of two successive tone-syllables. In other cases the shortening
into S^ghnl does take place, e.g. DVl af\T\ who smiteth the anvil. Is 41',
for Dys D^iri; IC"^ mii i K i6^^— The retraction of the tone even occurs
when a half-syllable with a S^wa mobile precedes the original tone-
syllable, e.g. ibllDNhGn 19*, and frequently; ""i^ -nni'^ V' 28'; '\> «00
* Even Hebrew prose proceeds, according to the accentuation, in a kind of
iambic rhythm. That this was intended by the marking of the tone, can be
seen from the use of Metheg. — Jos. Wijnkoop in Barche hannesigah sive leges de
accentus Eehraicae linguae ascensione, Ludg. Bat. 1881, endeavours to explain,
on euphonic and syntactical grounds, the numerous cases in which the usual
retraction of the tone does not occur, e.g. T]K'n N"»^3^ Is 45', where the object
probably is to avoid a kind of hiatus ; but cf. also Am 4'^. PrStorius, Veber
den riickweich. Accent im Hebr., Halle, 1897, has fully discussed the nasog 'a/ior.
* The reading D^^IJlf (so even Opitius and Hahn) Ez 16'' for D""iy is rightly
described by Baer as ' error tui-pis'.— That an unchangeable vowel in a closed
final syllable cannot lose the tone is shown by Pratorius from the duplication
of the accent (see above, § 22/).
96 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§ 29 ^-it
V'S^*; ^"30 V.J'!99^^ H"j as also when the tone-syllable of the second word
is preceded by a half-syllable, e.g. ''IQ HK'y Gn i^' (on the Dag. f., cf.
§20/); 'jbnrib'Gni57(cf. §20c).
g According to the above, it must be regarded as anomalous when the Masora
throws back the tone of a closed ultima upon a virtually sharpened syllable
with a short vowel, e.g. |3 inS i S io», § loi a ; 13 B'nD'l Jb 8", cf. Lv 5"
Ho 9' ; ^32 pn^p Gn .^q^*'" ; whereas it elsewhere allows a closed penultima
to bear the cone only when the ultima is open. Still more anomalous is the
placing of the tone on a really sharpened syllable, when the ultima is closed,
as in by Di^n 2 S 23I ; yiC' -I33 Jb34'^ cf. also J^i^-Dj?;' Gn 4^*, with Metheg
of the secondary tone. We should read either Dpn or, with Frensdorff,
Massora Magna, p. i67,Gin3b.,Kittel, after Bomb., DPH. Other abnormal forms
are ^2 pTHM Ex 4* (for similar instances see § 15 c, end) and DB' vn*"l Dt lo^
h (c) In pause, see i-v.
The meeting of two tone-syllables (see e,f) is avoided also by connecting
the words with Maqqeph, in which case the first word entirely loses the tone,
e. g. DK^"!Iiri3'"l and he wrote there, Jos 8^'.
T T ; ■ -
I 4. Very important changes of the tone and of the vowels are effected
by the pause. By this term is meant the strong stress laid on the
tone-syllable in the last word of a sentence (verse) or clause. It is
marked by a great distinctive accent, SilMq, 'Athndh, and in the ac-
centuation of the books D^sn, 'Ole ufyored (§ 1% h). Apart from these
principal pauses {the great pause), there are often pausal changes {the
lesser pause) with the lesser distinctive?, especially S^golta, Zaqeph
qatcn, R%hi"'', and even with Pasta, Tiphha, Gere^, and (Pr 30^) Pazer.^
The changes are as follows :
Ic (a) When the tone-syllable naturally has a short vowel, it as a rule
becomes tone-long in pause, e.g. P^^, ''K^ j ^^^. '^^^5 W^i?) '?••'?!?•
An a which has been modified to S^ghol usually becomes a in pause,
e.g. "y^p. (ground-form qa^r) in pause'f^\> 2 K 11'* ; y^.ii yjH Jer 22'° ;
* In most cases, probably on account of a following guttural or (at the end
of a sentence) ^ (cf. e.g. Ex 21^', Jer 3* [but Ginsb. ejanni], Ru 4^, Ec 1 1^ [but
Ginsb. "IB'3''] ; before"! Jen?'') [see also § 29 w]. TlX D3B' i S 7''', pNI
Is 65''', Pr 25^, where a has munah, are very irregular, but the lengthening
here is probably only to avoid the cacophony sdphdt 't<. In the same way
n^XM Ez\f^ (with Mahpakh before n) and ny]\ Ez 37* (with Darga before
<
J?) are to be explained. The four instances of ""JX for ""JX apparently require
a different explanation ; see § 32 c. — The theory of Olshausen and others that
the phenomena of the pause are due entirely to liturgical considerations, i. e.
that it is ' a convenient way of developing the musical value of the final
accents by means of fuller forms' in liturgical reading (Sievers, Metr. Studien,
i. 236, also explains pausal forms like >y^hp^ ^•'tJp^ as ' late formations of the
grammarians'), is contradicted by the fact that similar phenomena are still
to be observed in modern vulgar Arabic, where they can only be attributed to
rhythmical reasons of a general character.
§ 29 i-o] The Tone, its Changes and the Pause 97
also in 2 K 4" read 3B'i'5 with ed. Mant., &c. (Baer ^E^i^ y — "I2"n becomes
in pause "IS"!.
Sometimes, however, the distinct and sharper o is intentionally retained /
in pause, especially if the following consonant is strengthened, e. g. ^HB"* Jb 4'^",
or ought to be strengthened, e. g. fl^S 2 S 1 2^, T3 Is 8^, &c. ; but also in other
cases as 'riJpT Gn 27^, because from |j?T, cf. below, q; Ty Qn 49^'' ; IJK'npni
2 Ch 29^8 (so Baer, but Ginsb. '^pn, ed. Mant. '^p^) ; and regularly in the
numeral y3 "IN /owr, Lv 11 ^o, &c. In the accentuation of the three poetical
books (§ 15 d) the use of Paihah with 'Athnah is due to the inferior pausal
force oi^ Athnah, especially after '(5Ze vfyored (§ 150) ; cf. \p 100*, Pr 30^ and
Qimhi, Mikhlol, ed. Rittenberg, p. 5'', line 4 from below. Compare the list of
instances of pausal a and e in the appendices to Baer's editions.
(6) "When a full vowel in a tone-bearing final syllable has lost the ni
tone before an aflformative, and has become vocal S^wd, it is restored
in pause as tone-vowel, and, if short, is lengthened, e.g. ^^\l, fern.
nppi? {qdfla), in pause '"'^^^ ; ''VP?' (sim^u\ in pause ^V^F (from sing.
V^f) ; HN^p, HN^D ; l^epf, ^b'6\>) ' (sing. bbp^). The fuller endings of
the Imperfect ^ and P— (§ 47 m and 0) alone retain the tone even
when the original vowel is restored. In segholate forms, like '"H?, ^"l?
(ground-form lahy, pary), the original a returns, though under the
form of a tone-bearing S^ghol, thus ''^^ , "'"IS ; original ? becomes e, e.g.
''Vn, in pause ""ifn; original d {u) becomes o, y^. (ground-form huli/),
in pause yh (§ 93 as, 3/, z).
On the analogy of such forms as 'n^, &c., the shortened Imperfects n
'n^ and ''H^ become in pause 'H^, 'H'', because in the full forms i^'!/}) he
will be, and iTPl^ ^g 4<;t7Z live, the ? is attenuated from an original a-
Similarly D?K' shoulder, in ^^aws^ l^?^ (ground-form saJchm), and the
[iron. '^N /, in |)awse '3X; cf. also the restoration of the original a as
e before the suffix 'I-^ thy, thee, e. g. T)3"1 <% word, in ^jawse ^"i^'l ;
^"iDB'^ he guards thee, in pause ^T'DtJ'^; but after the prepositions ^, b,
^^ {^^) the suffix ^-j_ in pause becomes ^-^, e. g. 'H?, "H^, ^^^.
(c) This tendency to draw back the tone in pause to the penultima 0
appears also in such cases as '3bX /^ in jyause '3J^ ; nriX </jom, in 2)ause
nJRX (but in the three poetically accented books also '""^J?, since in
those books 'Athnah, especially after 'Ole vfy<yred, has only the force
of a Zaqeph; hence also ^^^)^\ Pr 24^ instead of ^^.^VO^; "'^V now, nny ;
and in other sporadic instances, like v3 ^ 37^" for v3 ; but in i S 12"^
' Such a pausal syllable is sometimes further emphasized by strengthening
the following consonant, see § 20 i.
2 SpB^ \f/ 456^ cf. also \chy' ^ 40^^, is to be explained in the same way, but
not ^pben Zc 2", where, on the analogy of HC^n Je 9^ we should expect
COWLXT
98 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters [§ 29 p-w
ISDJjl with Baer and Ginsb., is to be preferred to the reading of ed.
Mant., &c.
p [d) Conversely all forms of imperfects consecutive, whose final
syllable, when not in pause, loses the tone and is pronounced with
a short vowel, take, when in pause, the tone on the ultima with a
< ^ .<
tone-long vowel, e. g. riD>1 and lie died, m pause riD*l.
n Of other effects of the pause we have still to mention, (i) the transition of
an e (lengthened from i) to the more distinct a (see above, I), e.g. inn for tnn
Is i85 (of. § 67 t); § 72 drf) ; ^IDj^ Is 33» ; ^YN i Ch S^s (beside ^yi^ [, see v. 37.
Cf. : ^X2D Is 76 (^Knt9 Ezr 4'') ; ^', Ij^B' Jer 22'* ; "TlDp Ob 20 ; : ^n'*\ Ex 31'" ;
: K'SNil 2"s 12IS (below, § 51 m)— S."r. D.]) ; nsV Gn 17"; nSSH i S 15*3 ;
"iriNn \t 40'^ ; pmn Jbi3^^, mostly before liquids or sibilants (but alsoS^H
""" = " •■ t < ''\J
Is 42^2, and without the pause Tin La 3^*). So also '%\,'>^ (shortened from Tipi)
becomes in pause T]2*1 ; cf. l]?*! La 3^ ; J^ri for fpFl Ju 19''". On S^g/ioZ in pause
instead of Sere, cf. § 52 n, 60 d, and especially § 75 n, on iTni Pr 4* and 7^
f (2) The transition from ct to e in the ultima ; so always in the formula
nyi Dpiyp (for nU)/or ever and ever.
V T T ; ^
S (3) The paused Qames (according to § 54 A:, lengthened from original a) in
Eithpa'el (but not in Pi'el) for Sere, e. g. ^ pHH^ Jb 1 8* for Tjpnri^ . But pausal
forms like iriD £532' (in the absol. s(. "IflD 133^) go back to a secondary form
of the abs. st. inp, 133B',
/ (4) The restoration of a final Todh which has been dropped from the stem,
together with the preceding vowel, e.g. Vyil^ Vnti Is 21^*, for ^yzi^ ^nX^ the
latter also without the pause Is c,0^-'^^ ; cf. Jb I2«, and the same occurrence
even in the word before the pause Dt 32''', Is 21'^. .
U (5) The transition from 0 or 0 to a in pause : as HPXB' Is 7*', if it be a locative
of %\i^, and not rather imperat. Qal of ^SB' • TlS^^ Gn 43'* for TlilbB' • TV
Gn 49» ; fl^D^ Gn 492^; perhaps also |^"1^ i K 223^, Is 59", and nSpl^tp Is 28",
cf. 2 K 21". On the other hand the regular pausal form J'Sn"" (ordinary
imperfect ^bn') corresponds to a perfect J^sn (see § 47 A).
D (6) When a Paihah both precedes and follows a virtually strengthened
guttural, the second becomes a in pause, and the first S'ghol, according to
§ 22 c and § 275, e.g. TIK my brothers, in pause TIS. Similarly in cases where
an original Pathah after a guttural has been attenuated to i out oi pause, and
then lengthened to e with the tone (cf. § 54^;), e.g. Dnifl^, but in pause Qi^Jjri^
Dt 32=«; cf. NuS'', 23'9, Ez 5'^, ^135".— On pausal Sere, for S'ghol, in infin.,
imperat., and imperf. of verbs n"i?, see § "J^hh.
IK) [Other instances of the full vowel in lesser pause, where the voice would
naturally rest on the word, are Gn 15" •n'3y\ Is 8'«, 402'', Ho 412, 8^ Dn 9'',
and very often in such cases.]
SECOND PART
ETYMOLOGY, OR THE PARTS OF SPEECH
§30. Stems and Roots'^: Biliteral, Triliteral, and
Quadriliteral.
1. Stems in Hebrew, as in the other Semitic languages, have this ^^
peculiarity, that by far the majority of them consist of three con-
sonants. On these the meaning essentially depends, while the various
modifications of the idea are expressed rather by changes in. the
vowels, e. g. p^V {p^V or ptoy ; the 3rd pers. sing. perf. does not occur)
it ivas deep, P'OV dee}), p^V depth, p^)J, a valley, plain. Such a stem
may be either a verb or a noun, and the language commonly exliihits
both together, e.g. VII ^* '*'^^ sown, Vn.\ seed ; D?n he vjas wise, D^H
a wise man. For practical purposes, however, it has long been the
custom to regard as the stem the ^rd pers. sing. Perf. Qal (see § 43),
since it is one of the simplest forms of the verb, without any formative
additions. Not only are the other forms of the verb referred to this
stem, but also the noun-forms, and the large number of particles
derived from nouns ; e. g. tJ*"!^ he was holy, K'']P holiness, t^'l^i^ holy.
Sometimes the language, as we have it, exhibits only the verbal 0
stem without any corresponding noun-form, e. g. /pD to stone, pi^J
to bray; and on the other hand, the noun sometimes exists without
< <
the corresponding verb, e. g. P? stone, SJi south. Since, however, the
nominal or verbal stems, which are not now found in Hebrew, generally
occur in one or more of the other Semitic dialects, it may be assumed,
as a rule, that Hebrew, when a living language, also possessed them.
Thus, in Arabic, the verbal stem 'dbtnd (to become compact, hard)
< <
corresponds to I9?, and the Aramaic verb n^gab {to be dry) to 2^^.,
Rem. I. The Jewish grammarians call the stem (i.e. the 3rd pers. sing. C
Perf. Qal) B'"lb' root. Hence it became customary among Christian gram-
marians to call the stem radix, and its three consonants litterae radicales, in
contradistinction to the litterae servUes or formative letters. On the correct use
of the term root, see g.
' On the questions discussed here compai'e the bibliography at the Lead
of § 79.
H 2
loo Etymology, or the Parts of Speech [§ 30 d-g
Cl 2. others regard the three stem-consonauts as a root, in the sense that, con-
sidered as vowelless and unpronounceable, it represents the common foundation
of the verbal and nominal stems developed from it, just as in the vegetable
world, from which the figure is borrowed, stems grow from the hidden
root, e. g. ,
Root : 1^^, the indeterminate idea of riding.
Verb-atem, TJpO he has reigned. Noun-stem, TJ^IO king.
For the historical investigation of the language, however, this hypothesis
of unpronounceable roots, with indeterminate meaning, is fruitless. Moreover,
the term root, as it is generally understood by philologists, cannot be applied
to the Semitic triliteral stem (see/).^
C 3. The 3rd sing. Perf. Qal, which, according to the above, is usually regarded,
both lexicographically and grammatically, as the ground-form, is generally
in Hebrew a dissyllable, e.g. bop. The monosyllabic forms have only arisen
by contraction (according to the traditional explanation) from stems which
had a weak letter ("I or *) for their middle consonant, e.g. Dp from qawam ;
or from stems whose second and third consonants are identical, e.g. "IS and
T}if (but see below, §§ 67, 72). The dissyllabic forms have themselves no
doubt arisen, through a loss of the final vowel, from trisyllables, e.g. ?Cp
from qdtdld, as it is in literary Arabic.
f 2. The law of the triliteral stem is so strictly observed in the
formation of verbs and nouns in Hebrew (and in the Semitic languages
generally), that the language has sometimes adopted artificial methods
to preserve at least an appearance of triliteralism in monosyllabic
stems, e.g.T)2p for the inf. constr. of verbs I'^S; cf. § 69 b. Conversely
such nouns, as ^^ father, D?< mother, HS brother, which were formerly
all regarded as original monosyllabic forms [nomina jmmitiva), may,
in some cases at least, have arisen from mutilation of a triliteral stem.
g On the other hand, a large number of triliteral stems really point
to a biliteral base, which may be properly called a 7'oot [radix
primaria, bill iter alls), since it forms the starting-point for several
triliteral modifications of the same fundamental idea. Though in
themselves unpronounceable, these roots are usually pronounced with
a between the two consonants, and are represented in writing by the
sign -y/, e.g. \/^D as the root of 113, nni), "113, IwN. The reduction
of a stem to the underlying root may generally be accomplished with
certainty when the stem exhibits one weak consonant with two strong
ones, or when the second and third consonants are identical. Thus
e. g. the stems 'n?'!J, 'H^'^j ^9'^> '^?'^ ™*y ^■ll be traced to the idea of
striking, breaking, and the root common to them all is evidently the
two strong consonants "[I [dakh). Very frequently, however, the
development of the root into a stem is effected by the addition of
^ Cf. Philippi, ' Der Grundstamm des starken Verbums,' in Morgenlandische
Forschungen, Leipz. 1875, PP- 69-106.
§ 30 h-k'\ Stems and Roots loi
a strong consonant, especially, it seems, a sibilant, liquid or guttural.^
Finally, further modifications of the same root are produced when
either a consonant of the root, or the letter which has been addeJ,
changes by phonetic laws into a kindred letter (see the examples
below). Usually such a change of sound is accompanied by a modifica-
tion of meaning.
Examples: from the root yp (no doubt onomatopoetic, i.e. imitating the A
sound), which represents the fundamental idea of carving off, cutting in pieces,
are derived directly: }>Sp and H^fp to cut, to cut off; the latter also metaph. to
decide, to judge (whence yip, Arab, qddi, a judge) ; also aSj^ to cut off, to shear,
PjXp to tear, to break, JJXp to cut into, nSp to cut off, to reap. With a dental instead
of the sibilant, Dp, Ip, whence 2^\> to cut in pieces, to destroy, b^\) to cut doicn,
to kill, Fj^p to tear off, to pluck off. With the initial letter softened,
the root becomes D3, whence HDS to cut off, and DD3 to shave ; cf. also D33
7 - T * T
Syr. to slay {sacrifice), to kiU. With the greatest softening to 12 and li • tTS to
cut off, to shear : HW to hew stone ; T13 . Dta . JJW , ^W , "IW to cut off, to tear off, eat up ;
similarly Tia to cut into, JJna to cut off; cf. also ma , vni "113. Allied to this
root also is the series of stems which instead of a palatal begin with a
guttural (n), e.g. inn to split, cut; cf. also ^nn, plH, "nn, K'nn, and further
D^n, f'ln, nrn, nn, 3Dn, ccn, sicn, ^dpi, ddr, cion, axn, njfn, j^ifn, ixn
in the Lexicon.
The root DH expresses the sound of humming, which is made with the
mouth closed (/ivo) ; hence DlOn, Din, nion, Dn3 (Dt?3), Arab, hdmhama, to huzz,
to hum, to snarl, &c. ,
As developments from the root V"l cf. the stems Ijn, 7^1, DSH, VTl, T^,
K'jn, Not less numerous are the developments of the root "13 pS^ ?D) and
many others.*
Closer investigation of the subject suggests the following observations :
(a) These roots are mere abstractions from stems in actual use, and are I
themselves not used. They represent rather the hidden germs {semina) of the
stems which appear in the language. Yet these stems are sometimes so
short as to consist simply of the elements of the root itself, e. g. DFI to be
finished, 7p light. The ascertaining of the root and its meaning, although in
many ways very difiBcult and hazardous,'is of great lexicographical importance.
It is a wholly different and much contested question whether there ever was
a period in the development of the Semitic languages when purely biliteral
roots, either isolated and invariable or combined with inflexions, served for
the communication of thought. In such a case it would have to be admitted,
that the language at first expressed extremely few elementary ideas, which
were only gradually extended by additions to denote more delicate shades of
meaning. At all events this process of transformation would belong to
a period of the language which is entirely outside our range. At the most
only the gradual multiplication of stems by means of phonetic change (see
below) can be historically proved.
(6) Many of these monosyllabic words are clearly imitations of sounds, and K
^ That all triliteral stems are derived from biliterals (as Konig, Lehrg. ii. i,
370 ; M. Lambert in Studies in honour of A, Kohut, Berl. 1897, p. 354 If.) cannot
be definitely proved.
' Cf. the interesting examination of the Semitic roots QR, KR, XR, by
P. Haupt in the Amer. Journ. of Sem. Lang., xxiii (1907), p. 341 ff.
I02 Etymology, or the Parts of Speech [§ 30 i-q
sometimes coincide with roots of a similar meaning in the Indo-Germanic
family of languages (§ \ h). Of other roots there is definite evidence that
Semitic linguistic consciousness regarded them as onomatopoetic, whilst the
Indo-Germanic instinct fails to recognize in them any imitation of sound.
/ (c) Stems with the harder, stronger consonants are in general (§ 6 r) to be
regarded as the older, from which a number of later stems probably arose
through softening of the consonants ; cf. "ITQ and in pPlX and pHCJ' pVX and
pyr, ybV and y?V, D?y ; p\>''\ and T]3n^ and the almost consistent change of
initial 1 to '', In other instances, however, the harder stems have only been
adopted at a later period from Aramaic, e.g. nVD, Hebr. nVJl. Finally in
many cases the harder and softer stems may have been in use together from
the first, thus often distinguishing, by a kind of sound-painting, the intensive
action from the less intensive ; see above yip to cut, HJ to shear, &c.
W- (ri) When two consonants are united to form a root they are usually either
both emphatic or both middle-hard or both soft, e.g. J'p t3p, D3, t3 IJ never
JO^ yy^ tD3, D3, Tp. Within (triliteral) stems the first and second consonants
are never identical. The apparent exceptions are either due to reduplication
of the root, e.g. rm {^ 42^, Is 381^), Arabic XINH, or result from other causes,
cf. e.g. n33 in the Lexicon. The first and third consonants are very seldom
identical except in what are called concave stems (with middle 1 or i),
e.g. p3^ p2f ; note, however, p3, |n3, B'CK', B'lB', and on y^J? Jb 3930 see
§ 55/. The second and third consonants on the other hand are very fre-
quently identical, see § 67.^
^l (e) The softening mentioned under I is sometimes so great that strong
consonants, especially in the middle of the stem, actually pass into vowels :
cf. § 19 0, and ^"(Wy Lv 168 »• if it is for b'lb)^,.
0 if) Some of the cases in which triliteral stems cannot with certainty be
traced back to a biliteral root, may be due to a combination of two roots —
a simple method of forming expressions to correspond to more complex ideas.
1) 3. Stems of four, or even (in the case of nouns) of Jive consonants"
are secondary formations. They arise from an extension of the triliteral
stem : (a) by addition of a fourth stem-consonant ; (6) in some cases
perhaps by composition and contraction of two triliteral stems, by
which means even quinquiliterals are produced. Stems which have
arisen from reduplication of the biliteral root, or from the mere repe-
tition of one or two of the three original stem-consonants, e. g. ^3??
from ?13 or ?^'^, "^Dinp from ino, are usually not regarded as quadri-
lilerals or quinqueliterals, but as conjugalional foims (§ 55); so also
the few words which are formed with the prefix B', as ^I^k}}""^ flame
from 3npj correspond to the Aramaic conjugation Sapliel, ^Hp'^.
n Rem. on (a). The letters r and I, especially, are inserted between the first
and second radicals, e. g. DD3 Dp"13 to eat up ; t3''3"!K' = DIIK' sceptre (this
insertion of an r is especially frequent in Aramaic) ; HSypl hot wind from f|yT
* Consonants which are not found together in roots and stems are called
incompaiihle. They are chiefly consonants belonging to the same class, e.g. 33,
p3, p3, Dl, Dn, tjn, flD *lt, Dt, J'T, DV, yx, yn, &o., or in the reverse .order.
'^ In Hebrew they are comparatively rare, but more numei'ous in the other
Semitic languages, especially in Ethiopic.
§§ 3° '■.«. 3' «»^] Stems and Roots 103
to he hot. Cf. Aram. bsiJ? '° '^'^^h expanded from ?3y (conjugation Pa'el,
corresponding to the Hebrew Pi'el). In Latin there is a similar expansion
of fid, scid, tud, jug into findo, scindo, tundo, jungo. At the end of words the
commonest expansion is by means of p and f, e. g. |n3 axe, ?^~\'2 garden-land
(from DnJ), b'Vl^ corolla (yna cwi?) ; cf. § 85, xi.
Eem. on (6). Forms such as '^'ifi^li frog, rQ^2n meadow-saffron, niOpS shadow f
0/ death, '^ were long regarded as compounds, though the explanation of them
all was uncertain. Many words of this class, which earlier scholars attempted
to explain from Hebrew sources, have since proved to be loan-words (§ i i),
and consequently need no longer be taken into account.
4. A special class of formations, distinct from the fully developed s
stems of three or four consonants, are (a) the Interjections (§ 105),
which, as being direct iraitatious of natural sounds, are independent
of the ordinary formative laws ; (6) the Pronouns. Whether these
are to be regarded as the mutilated remains of early developed stems,
or as relics of a period of language when the formation of stems followed
different laws, must remain undecided. At all events, the many
peculiarities of their formation^ require special treatment (§ 32 ff.).
On the other hand, most of the particles (adverbs, prepositions, con-
junctions) seem to have arisen in Hebrew from fully developed stems,
although in many instances, in consequence of extreme shortening,
the underlying stem is no longer recognizable (see § 99 ff.).
§ 31. Grammatical Structure.
p. L6i-wald, ' Die Formenbildungsgesetze des Hebr.' {Hilfsbuch fur Lehrer
des Heir.), Berlin, 1897, is recommended for occasional reference.
1. The formation of the parts of speech from the stems (derivation), a
and their inflexion, are effected in two ways : (a) internally by changes
in the stem itself, particularly in its vowels: (6) externally by the
addition of formative syllables before or after it. The expression of
grammatical relations (e. g. the comparative degree and some case-
relations in Hebrew) periphrastically by means of separate words
belongs, not to etymology, but to syntax.
The external method (6) of formation, by affixing formative syllables, 0
which occurs e.g. in Egyptian, appears on the whole to be the more ancient.
Yet other families of language, and particularly the Semitic, at a very early
period had recourse also to the internal method, and during their youthful
vigour widely developed their power of forming derivatives. But the con-
tinuous decay of this power in the later periods of language made syntactical
circumlocution more and more necessary. The same process may be seen
also e.g. in Greek (including modern Greek), and in Latin with its Romance
offshoots.
1 So expressly Noldeke in .Z^W^ 189?) P- 183 ff. ; but most probably it is to
be read niJOpi? darkness from the stem D?2f [Arab, zalima, to be dark].
^ Cf. Hupfeld, 'System der semitischen Demonstrativbildung,' in the
Ztschr.f. d. Kunde des MorgenL, vol. ii. pp. 124 ff., 427 ff.
I
104 Etymology, or the Parts of Speech [§ 31 c
C 2. Both methods of formation exist together in Hebrew. The
internal mode of formation by means of vowel changes is tolerably
extensive (''P^, ^^\^, ^'l^\^; ?^p, 7^1?, &c.). This is accompanied in
numerous cases by external formation also (-'l^i^ri'!' , ''''^i?'?, ''^i??, &c.),
and even these formative additions again are subject to internal
change, e.g. ^^\1^\}, ''^iPO- The addition of formative syllables occurs,
as in almost all languages, chiefly in the formation of the persons of
the verb, where the meaning of the affixed syllables is for the most
part still perfectly clear (see §§ 44, 47). It is also employed to distin-
guish gender and number in the verb and noun. Of case-endings, on
the contrary, only scanty traces remain in Hebrew (see § 90).
CHAPTER I
THE PRONOUN
Brockelmann, Semit. Sprachwiss., p. 98 ff. ; Grundrisn, i. 296 ff. L. Reinisch,
' Das persQnl. Fiiiwort u. die Verbalflexion in den chamito-semit. Spi-achen '
(^Wiener Akad, der Wiss., 1909).
§ 32. The Personal Pronoun. The Separate Pronoun.
1. The personal pronoun (as well as the pronoun generally) belongs a
to the oldest and simplest elements of the language (§ 30 s). It must
be discussed before the verb, since it plays an important part in verbal
inflexion (§§ 44, 47).
2. The independent principal forms of the personal pronoun serve b
(like the Gk. eyw, crv, Lat. ego, tu, and their plurals) almost exclusively
to emphasize the nominative-subject (see, however, § 135 t?). They
are as follows :
2.4
thou.
Plural.
I. Com. vnaK, in ^awse^Jnax]
(ynj,in2?awseWn3), (13N)j
2.
m. cin«
■ ye.
f. nsn aiter prejixes |n , (H
they.
Singular.
I . Com. ^^"^^ , in pause *3i^ ; | ,
^Jfc^ , in pause ^J^ j
'm. nriN (riK), in pause'
nm or nris
/. >;i«('nx properly ^riK),
in pause ^^ j
fm. Nin he (it).
If. i<Vshe{it).
The forms enclosed in parentheses are the less common. A table of these
pronouns with their shortened forms (pronominal suffixes) is given in Paradigm
A at the end of this Grammar.
Remakks.
I. First Person.
I. The form ""pllN is less frequent than ^3N.i The former occurs in C
^ On the prevalence of *3l)K in the earlier Books compare the statistics
collected by Giesebrecht in ZAW. 1881, p. 251 ff., partly contested by Driver
in the Journal of Philology, 1882, vol. xi. p. 222 ff. (but cf. his Introduction, ed.
6, p. I35> line i f-). *>"* thoroughly established by KCnig in T?ieol. Stud. u. Krit,
'^93) PP- 464 ff. and 478, and in his Einleilung in das A. T., p. 168, &c. In some
of the latest books ^3:X is not found at all, and hardly at all in the Talmud.
[For details see the Lexicon, s. v. '•iX and ""abN.!
' -; . J ■'
io6 The Pronoun [§ 32 d-i
Phoenician, Moabite, and Assyrian, but in no other of the kindred dialects;^
from the hitter the suffixes are derived (§ 33). The 6 most probably results
from an obscuring of an original a (cf. Aram. N3S, Arab. 'ana). The pausal
form >3K occurs not only with small disjunctive accents, but even with con-
junctives ; so always in ^JS ""n as I live ! also Is 49^^ with Munah, ^ 119^''^ with
Merkha (which, however, has been altered from D^hi), and twice in Mai i».
In all these cases there is manifestly a disagreement between the vocalization
already established and the special laws regulating the system of accentuation.
' d 2. The formation of the plural, in this and the other persons, exhibits a
cei-tain analogy with that of the noun, while at the same time (like the
pronouns of other languages) it is characterized by many differences and
peculiarities. The short form IJN (13X) from which the suffix is derived
occurs only in Jer42« KHhihh. The form ^jn5 (cf. § 19 h) only in Ex ifp-^,
Nu 32^2, La 3^2 . !|j|-;3 in pause, Gn 42" ; in Arabic nahnu is the regular form.
In the Misna 1JX HJX) has altogether supplanted the longer forms.
^ 3. The pronoun of the ist person only is, as a rule in languages, of the
common gender, because the person who is present and speaking needs no
further indication of gender, as does the 2nd person, who is addressed (in
Greek, Latin, English, &c., this distinction is also lacking), and still more
the 3rd person who is absent.
II. Second Person.
r 4. The forms of the 2nd person iins, riS, DFlK, nanS, &c., are contracted
from 'aw^rt, &c. The kindred languages have retained the n before the n, e. g.
Arab, ^dnta, fem. 'dnti, thou; pi. 'dntum, fem. ^antunna, ye. In Syriac DJX,
fem. TlJS are written, but both are pronounced 'at In Western Aramaic
ri3S is usual for both genders.
P" riS (without n) occurs five times, e. g. tf 6*, always as KHhihh, with nriK
as (^re. In three places riX appears as a masculine, Nu 1 1'^, Dt 5^*, Ez 28^*.
// The feminine form was originally ''rit< as in Syriac, Arabic, and Ethiopic.
This form is found seven times as K'lhihh (Ju I7^ i K I42, 2 K 4^6.28^ gi, Jer
430, Ez 36") and appears also in the corresponding personal ending of verbs
(see § 44/), especially, and necessarily, before suffixes, as ^yjjlptDp, § 59 « [c] ;
cf. also i as the ending of the 2nd fem. sing, of the imperative and imperfect.
The final i was, however, gradually dropped in pronunciation, just as in
Syriac (see above, /) it was eventually only written , not pronounced. The '
therefore finally disappeared (cf. § 10 fc), and hence the Masoretes, even in
these seven passages, have pointed the word in the text as '•riX to indicate
the QVe riX (see § 17). The same final "»__ appears in the rare (Aramaic)
forms of the suffix iS.!,, ••3^4_ (§§ 58, 91).
i 5. The plurals DriX (with the second vowel assimilated to the fem. form)
and friX (jriX), with the tone on the ultima, only partially correspond to the
assumed ground-forms 'antumii, fem. ^antinnd, Arab, 'intihn (Aram. pnS,
|W:X) and 'dnMnna (Aram. priS, pri3«). The form \m. is found only in
Ez 34" (so Qimhi expressly, others JRi^:) ; njiRS (for which some MSS. have
1 In Phoenician and Moabite (inscription of Mesa', line 1) it is written "[JX,
without the final ^ In Punic it was pronounced anec (Plant. Poen. 5, i, 8)
or anech (5, 2, 35). Cf Schroder, Phbniz. Sprache, p. 143. In Assyrian the
corresponding form is anaku, in old Egyptian anek, Coptic anok, nok.
§ 32 h-vi-\ The Personal Pronoun 107
T\im) only four times, viz. Gn 316, Ez i3"-2», 34" ; in 1320 DFlK (before a D) is
even used as feminine.
III. Third Person.
6. (a) In Nin and N''n (M and M) the N (corresponding to the 'Elifofpro- k
longation in Arabic, cf. § 23 i) might be regarded only as an orthographic
addition closing the final long vowel, as in N17, N^"?:, &c. The N is, however,
always written in the case of the separate pronouns,' and only as a toneless
suffix (§ 33 a) does XIH appear as in, while N''n becomes H. In Arabic (as in
Syriac) they are written in and Tl but pronounced huud and hiya, and in
Vulgar Arabic even huwwa and hiyya. This Arabic pronunciation alone would
not indeed be decisive, since the vowel complement might have arisen from
the more consonantal pronunciation of the 1 and "> ; but the Ethiopic we'^tu
{ = liu'a-tu) for Nin, ye'ti {^hi'a-ti) for N'H (cf. also the Assyrian ya-iia for
Nin"*) show that the N was original and indicated an original vocalic termi-
nation of the two words. According to Philippi {ZDMG. xxviii. 172 and xxix.
371 ff.) N^n arose from a primitive Semitic ha-va, NM from ha-ya.
(b) The form X^H also stands in the consonantal text (K^ihibh) of the /
Pentateuch ^ (with the exception of eleven places) for the fern. N''n. In all
such cases the Masora, by the punctuation N'in, has indicated the Q^re N''n
{Q^re perpeiuum, see § 17). The old explanation regarded this phenomenon as
an archaism wliich was incorrectly removed by the Masoretes. This
assumption is, however, clearly untenable, if we consider (i) that no other
Semitic language is without the quite indispensable distinction of gender in
the separate pronoun of the 3rd pers. ; (2) that this distinction does occur
eleven times in the Pentateuch, and that in Gn 20^, ^S^^, Nu 5"" KIH and
N^n are found close to one another ; (3) that outside the Pentateuch the distinc-
tion is found in the oldest documents, so that the N""!! cannot be regarded
as having been subsequently adopted from the Aramaic ; (4) that those parts
of the book of Joshua whicli certainly formed a constituent part of the
original sources of the Pentateuch, know nothing of this epicene use of NIH.
Consequently there only remains the hypothesis, that the writing of Xin for
N^^ rests on an orthographical peculiarity which in some recension of the
Pentateuch-text was almost consistently followed, but was afterwards very
properly rejected by the Masoretes. The orthography was, however, peculiar
to the Pentateuch-text alone, since it is unnecessary to follow the Masora in
writing H^n for XIH in i K 17^5, Is 30^^ Jb 31", or N^H for N'n in f 731*, Ec
58, I Ch 29^^. The Samaritan recension of the Pentateuch has the correct
form in the K^lhibh throughout. Levy's explanation of this strange practice
of the Masoretes is evidently right, viz. that originally NH was written for
both forms (see k, note), and was almost everywhere, irrespective of gender,
expanded into Nlil. On the whole question see Driver, Leviticus (in Haupt's
Bible), p. 25 f. In the text Driver always reads NH.
7. The plural forms DH (ilSn) and n3n (after prefixes jH, JH) are of doubt- W
<
ful origin, but Dn HDn have probably been assimilated to nSH which goes
back to a form hinna. In Western Aram. f\t:iT}^ iDH (flSn, j^SX), Syr. henun
' In the inscription of King Mesa' (see § 2 d), lines 6 and 27, we find NH
for N^n, and in the inscription of 'ESmun'azar, line 22, for K'^H, but in the
Zenjirli inscriptions (see § 1 w) both NH and ^H occur (Hadad i, 1. 29).
'^ Also in twelve places in the Babylonian Codex (Prophets) of 916 A. D. ; cf.
Baer, Ezechiel, p. 108 f. ; Buhl, Canon and Text of the 0. T. (Edinb. 1892), p. 240.
ro8 The Pronoun [§§ 32 n, 0, 33 a-e
('emm), Arab, humu (archaic form of hum), and Ethiop. homu, an 6 or u is
appended, which in Hebrew seems to reappear in the poetical suffixes ID
to4.,^t:^(§9l^3)• ^
n In some passages ^VGii}^ stands for the feminine (Zc 5'", Ct 6^, Ru 1'* ; cf.
the use of the suffix of the 3rd masc. for the 3rd fem., § 135 0 and § 145 0-
For the quite anomalous Dn"ny 2 K c/^^ read Dnny (Jb 32*^^).
O 8. The pronouns of the 3rd person may refer to things as well as persons.
On their meaning as demonstratives see § 136.
§ 33. Pronominal Suffices.
Brockelmann, Semit. Sprachwiss., p. 100 f. ; Qrundriss, i. 306 ff. J. Barth,
'Beitrage zur Suffixlehre des Nordsemit.,' in the Amer, Journ, 0/ Sent. Lang.,
1901, p. 193 ff.
a 1. The independent principal forms of the personal pronoun (the
separate pronoun), given in the preceding section, express only the
nominative.^ The accusative and genitive are expressed by forms,
usually shorter, joined to the end of verbs, nouns, and particles {pro-
nominal suffixes or simply suffixes) ; e. g. ^'1 (toneless) and 1 (from dhi2)
eum and eius, ^n"'npC(p / have killed him (also ^""Jllr^i?), ^'"l^p^i? or (with
dhd contracted into 0) WpCj? thou hast killed him ; *i"liX (also ^'"l"?.^**)
Itix eius.
The same method is employed in all the other Semitic languages, as well
as in the Egyptian, Persian, Finnish, Tartar, and others ; in Greek, Latin,
and German we find only slight traces of the kind, e. g. German, er gab's for
er gab es ; Greek, nar-qp fiov for irarfjp ifiov ; Latin, eccum, eccos, &c., in Plautus
and Terence for ecce eum, ecce eos.
b 2. The case which these suffixes represent is —
(a) When joined to verbs, the accusative (cf., however, §117 ^),
e. g. ^rriripo^ I have killed him.
C (6) When affixed to substantives, the genitive (like Trarqp fiov, pater
eius). They then serve as possessive pronouns, e. g. '3N {'dbh-i) my
father, ID^D his horse, which may be either equus eius or equus suus.
d (c) When joined to particles, either the genitive or accusative,
according as the particles originally expressed the idea of a noun
or a verb, e.g. ^3""?, literally interstitium mei, between me {cf.mea
causa) ; but ^??n behold me, ecce m«.
e {d) Where, according to the Indo-Germanic case-system, the dative
or ablative of the pronoun is required, the suffixes in Hebrew are
joined to prepositions expressing those cases (? sign of the dative,
3 in, IP from, § 102), e.g. 'O to him {ei) and to himself (sibi), 13 in
him, ''lit? (usually "S'Sl?) from me.
* On apparent exceptions see § 135 <2.
§§ 33/. 9, 34 a-c] Pronominal Suffixes 109
3. The suffixes of the 2nd person (^-r-, &c.) are all formed with J
a ^--sound, not, like the separate pronouns of the 2nd person, with a
<-sound.
So in all the Semitic languages, in Ethiopic even in the verbal form
{qatalka, thou hast killed ='H.ehr. npi5p),
-4. The sujix of the verb (the accusative) and the suffix of the noun (the g
genitive) coincide in most forms, but some differ, e. g. '^ — me, ''-^ my.
Paradigm A at the end of the Grammar gives a table of all the forms of the
separate pronoun and the suffixes ; a fuller treatment of the verbal suffix and the
mode of attaching it to the verb will be found in § 58 ff., of the noun-suffix in
§ 91, of the prepositions with suflSxes in § 103, of adverbs with suffixes § 100 0.
§ 34. The Demonstrative Pronoun.
„. / m. nt ' \ Plur. com. n?NI (rarely PX) these. CI
^' ^'''^■\fn^Mr^\,S^YY^^'-
Kem. I. The feminine form HNT has undoubtedly arisen from DXt, by 0
obscuring of an original d to 0 (for Nl = nT cf. the Ai'ab. ha-da. this, masc. ; for
n as the feminine ending, § 80), and the forms ^^ ^ \] both of which are rare,'
are shortened from flNt. In \p 132^^ S\ is used as a relative, cf. It below. In
Jer 26^, K'thibh, nJlNp (with the article and the demonstrative termination
n ) is found for DXt. Tlie forms n?K and bn are the plurals of HT and riNT
by usage, though not etymologically. The form PN occurs only in the
Pentateuch (but not in the Samaritan text), Gn 19^-^^ 26'*, &c. (8 times),
always with the article, PNIH [as well as HPNI, n^NH frequently], and in
I Ch 20* without the article [cf. Driver on Dt 4*^].* Both the singular and
the plural may refer to things as well as persons.
2. In combination with prepositions to denote the oblique case we find np C
to (his (cf. for h, § 102 g), flNlf', HNlb to this (fem.), r\%b^ r]^kb to these ; HrnX
hunc, DNrnX hanc, H ?N"nK hos, also without "DK , even be/ore the verb ^ 75®,
&c. Note also rTf l^riD pretium huius (i K 21^), &c.
^ In many languages the demonstratives begin with a <i-sound (hence called
the demonstrative sound) which, however, sometimes interchanges with a
sibilant. Cf. Aram. |^ 7|"1 masc., N"! t]"'! /em. (this) ; Sansk. sa, sd, tat ; Gothic
sa, so, thata ; Germ, da, der, die, das; and Eng. the, this, that, &c. Cf. J. Earth,
'Zum semit. Demonstr. ri,' in ZDMG. 59, 159 ff., and 633 ff.; Sprachwiss, Unter-
suchungen zum Semit., Lpz. 1907, p. 30 fF. [See the Lexicon, s. v. iTf, and Aram.
^ That ni may stand for the feminine, cannot be proved either from Ju 16^*
or from the certainly corrupt passage in Jos 2".
' lit 2 K 6>^, and in seven other places ; S) only in Hos 7'*, rp 132^^.
* According to Kuenen (cf. above, § 2 n) and Driver, on Lev 18" in Haupt's
Bible, this pN is due to an error of the punctuators. It goes back to a time
when the vowel of the second syllable was not yet indicated by a vowel letter,
and later copyists wrongly omitted the addition of the H. In Phoenician
also it was written 7N, but pronounced ily according to Plautus, Poen, v, i, 9.
no The Pronoun [§§ 34 dg, 35 a-d
d 2. The secondary form IT occurs only in poetic style, and mostly for
the relative, like our that for who [see Lexicon, s.v.]. Like "i'^*^ (§ 36),
it serves for all numbers and genders.
€ Rem. I. This pronoun takes the article (njilj nWH nVxH^ 7Nn) according
to the same rule as adjectives, see § 126 m ; e.g. r^^T\ tJ'^NH this man, but S^^NH n't
this is the man,
f 2. Rarer secondary forms, with strengthened demonstrative force, are T\i^t^
Qa 2^^, 37^^; ^t?n fern. Ez 36^^; and shortened 1?n, sometimes nMSc, as in
Ju 620, I S \f^, 2 K 23", Zc 28, Dn 8'«, sometimes /em., 2 K 4^^ . ^f. i S 14^ [and
20^3 LXX; see Commentaries and Kittel].
^ 3. The personal pronouns of the 3rd person also often have a demonstrative
sense, see § 136.
§ 35. The Article.
J. Barth, ' Der heb. u. der aram. Artikel,' in Sprachwiss. Untersuch. zum Semit,
Lpz. 1907, p. 47 ff.
d 1. The article, which is by nature a kind of demonstrative pronoun,
never appears in Hebrew as an independent word, but always in
closest connexion with the word which is defined by it. It usually
takes the form 'H, with a and a strengthening of the next consonant,
e.g. K'^v''^ ^^^ ***^) "'^^l' the river, D!v,Q the Levites (according to § 20m
for "ix?n , D*1^n).
O Rem. With regard to the Bages in "• after the article, the rule is, that it is
inserted when a n or J? follows the \, e.g. On^n^n the Jews, CBJ/'H the wearij
(D^jy^S La 43 Q'-re is an exception)," but lIK^ri / Dn^^n , 1^0]^, &c. Dages
forte also stands after the article in the prefix D in certain nouns and in the
participles Pi'el and Pu'al (see § 52 c) before n JJ and "1, except when the
guttural (or ~\) has under it a short vowel in a sharpened syllable ; thus
HD^niSn Ez 226, nnyon the cave, D'^y-im ^ 37I (cf. Jb 38«, I Ch 4*1) ; but
!]^njpn ^ io4» (Ec 415, 2 Ch 23I'' ; before y ip 103*) ; nfJE'^On Is 2312 ; D''^n'?1
Jos 6^'. Before letters other than gutturals this D remains without DageS,
according to § 20 m.
C 2. When the article stands before a guttural, which (according to
§ 22 ft) cannot properly be strengthened, the following cases arise,
according to the character of the guttural (cf. § 27 9').
(i) In the case of the weakest guttural, K, and also with I (§ 22 c
and q), the strengthening is altogether omitted. Consequently, the
Pathah of the article (since it stands in an open syllable) is always
lengthened to Qames ; e. g. 3Kn the father, "^HSn the other, DXn the
mother, B'^NH the man, "lixn the light, Cl'^^^^f; 6 6/tds, ij^nn the foot,
m-\^ the head, V^^il the ivicked.
d So also niQK'n Neh 3", because syncopated from DiSt^'XH (cf. verse 14 and
Baer on the passage); Ciptt^H (as in Nu ii*, Ju 9^1, 2 S 23^3, with the K
§ 35 e-i] The Article 1 1 1
orthographically retained "), for 'TKH Jer 40* (cf. 'tN3 Terse i) ; t3'''1lDn Ec 4^*
for 'DSn • n^Bin 2 Ch 226 for 'ISH (cf. 2 K S^S).
-:,T 5 • -IT -:iT
(2) In the case of the other gutturals either the virtual strengthen- e
ing takes place (§22 c) — especially with the stronger sounds n and
n, less often with y — or the strengthening is wholly omitted. In
the former case, the Pathah of the article remains, because the syllable
is still regarded as closed ; in the second case, the Pathah is either
modified to S^ghdl or fully lengthened to Qames. That is to say : —
A. When the guttural has any otlier vowel than a (^p) or 6 {-^)- f
then
(i) before the stronger sounds PI and n the article regularly remains
n ; e. g. N^nn that, ti'inn the month, ?^nri the force, '^9?C'-' t^^ wisdom.
Before n, a occurs only in 'nn Gn 6'' [not elsewhere], Ctp^infJ Is ■f^,
D''3^nn Is I'j^ [not elsewhere] ; before n, always in n^H^l, ^HC"-
(2) before y the Pathah is generally lengthened to Qames, e.g. T!^T} g
the eye, Tyn the city, inyn the servant, plur. D"!?^^ ; D'.^?^,^ i K if^ ;
also in Gn 10^'^ 'i?'!^^ is the better reading. Exceptions are n^Diya
Ex i5^», a^liyn 2 S s''-^, Is 42>«, n^y? Is 242, D'3")yn Is 65", pfy?
Ez22', D"a[yn Pr 2'^ and nnVyn Pr 2'^ n\rt>. i S I6^ Ec n^ but
'yy,^ Gn 3^ Pr lo^^. Cf. Baer on Is 42'^
5. When the guttural has a {—^) then h
(i) immediately before a tone-bearing n or V the article is always
n , otherwise it is il) ; e. g. DVn the 2>eople, "inn ^/ig mountain, ])Vi) (in
pause) the eye, '"'I'^v' towards the mountain; but (according to § 22 c)
0^1'^f?. the mountains, ]^V^, the iniquity.
(2) befoie n the article is invariably H without regard to the tone ; i
e.g. ^?Civ ^'*^ ^'*^ maw, i^y} the festival.
C. When the guttural has -r^ the article is H before H ; e. g. k
t2"'^ir'n ^^*^ months ; HU'injn jjj, ^/jg waste places (without the article 'n3
bdh'^rdbhoth) Ez 33^^ nininn. Ez 36^"«, cf. 2 Ch 27^ but n before V, as
D''^Dy^ the sheaves E,u 2^^.
• T T : |T
The gender and number of the noun have no influence on the form
of the article.
Rem. r. The original form of the Hebrew (and the Phoenician) article -il /
is generally considered to have been ?n, the P of which (owing to the proclitic
nature of the article) has been invariably assimilated to the following con-
sonant, as in njp^ from yilqah, § 19 d. This view was supported by the form
of the Arabic article ^K (pronounced hal by some modern Beduin), the ? of
which is also assimilated at least before all letters like s and t and before I, n,
and r, e.g. "al-Qur'dn but 'as-sdnd (Beduin has-sana) = Rebr. Bi^T\ the year.
112 The Pronoun [§§ 35 m-o, 36
But Earth {Amer. Joum. of Sem. Lang., 1896, p. 7 ff.), following Hupfeld and
Stade, has shown that the Hebrew article is to be connected rather with the
original Semitic demonstrative ha,'- cf. Arab, hdda, Aram, haden, &c. The
sharpening of the following consonant is to be explained exactly like the
sharpening after 1 consecutive (§49/; cf. also cases like n?23 nT23, &c.,
§ 102 k), from the close connexion of the ha with the following word, and the
sharpening necessarily involved the shortening of the vowel.*
7n The Arabic article is supposed to occur in the Old Testament in CaofjK
1 K lo"-" (also D''K)^il!5N 2 Ch 2^, 9"-"), sandal-wood (?), and in K'''33i)N hail,
tce = B'^3a (Arab, gibs) Ez 13"", 3822, but this explanation can hardly be
correct. On the other hand, in the proper name *niof)K Gn lo^s the first
syllable is probably bx God, as suggested by D. H. Miiller (see Lexicon, s. v.)
and Noldeke, Sitzungsber. der Berl. Akad., 1882, p. 1186. Dpbx Pr 3081, com-
monly explained as = Arab, al-qaum, the militia, is also quite uncertain.
n 2. When the prefixes 3 ?, 3 (§ 102) come before the article, the n is
elided, and its vowel is thrown back to the prefix, in the place of the S^wa
(§ 19 A;, and § 23 k), e. g. D^W? in the heaven for D^OE'nil (so \p 36^) ; DvS for
Dynb to the movie, DHHS on the mountains, D^K'inS in the months ; also in Is 41',
TT: * -t 7 "TIV • TT;!'.' ■ '
read ISyS instead of the impossible "ISyS. Exceptions to this rule occur
almost exclusively in the later Books : Ez 40^5, 4722^ Ec 8\ Dn S^^, Neh 9",
123\ 2 Ch 10'', 251", 292^; of., however, i S 1321, 2 S 2120. Elsewhere, e.g.
2 K 7", the Masora requires the elision in the (^re. A distinction in meaning
is observed between Di*n3 about this time (Gn 39^1, i S g^^, &c.) and Di*3 first
of all (Gn 25^1, &c.). After the copula 1 {and) elision of th^ n does not take
place, e. g. Dyni.
T T : ^
0 3- The words ym earth, *in mountain, jn feast, Qy people, ^3 bull, always
appearafter the article with a long vowel (as in pawse) ; t*~lNn ''\7\n iHn Dyn
'VTT'tt'TV*Tt'
"ISn ; cf. also p"\X ark (so in the absol. st. in 2 K 12'*', 2 Ch 34^, but to be
read pIN), with the article always piXH.
§ 36. The Relative Pronoun.
The relative pronoun (cf. § 138) is usually the indeclinable 1'^X
{who, which, &c.), originally a demonstrative pronoun; see further
§§ 138 and 155. In the later books, especially Eccles. and the
late Psalms, also Lam. (4 times), Jon. (i^), Chron. (tvrice), Ezra
(once), — and always in the Canticle (cf. also Ju 7^^ 8"^, 2 K 6"), -p is
used instead ; more rarely "^ Ju 5", Ct i'' (Jb 19^?) ; once ^ before N
Ju 6^'' (elsewhere ^ before a guttural), before n even ^ Ec 3'*, and
according to some (e. g. Qirahi) also in Ec 2^.^ [See Lexicon, s. v.]
1 An original form han, proposed by Ungnad, ' Der hebr. Art.,' in OLZ. x
(1907), col. 210 f , and ZDMG. 1908, p. 80 ff., is open to grave objections.
2 In the Lihyanitic inscriptions collected by Euting (ed. by D. H. Miiller
in Epigraphische Benkmaler axis Arabien, Wien, 1889) the article is il, and also
in a North Arabian dialect, according to E. Littmann, Safa-inschriften, p. a,
Rem., and p. 34.
» The full form y^H does not occur in Phoenician, but only C'N ( = •K'K ?),
pronounced asse, esse (also as, es, is, ys, us), or — especially in the later Punic
§ 37 «-J/] Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns 113
§ 37. The Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns.
1. The interrogative pronoun is "l? who ? (of persons, even before a
plurals, Gn 33*, Is 6o^ 2 K 18^, and sometimes also of things Gn 33^,
Ju 13", Mi I* ; cf. also "'^"n? whose daughter ? Gn 24^' ; 'Pp to whom ?
'p-ns whoml)—^'0, no (see h) what? (of things). — nr""?? which? what ?
The form -111? -D &c. (followed hy Dage^ forte conjunct.: even in ^, Hb 2*, &c., I)
against § 20 m) may be explained (like the art. -n § 35 I, and -1 in the imptrf.
C07jsec.) from the rapid utterance of the interrogative in connexion with the
following word. Most probably, however, the Bcige^ forte is rather due to
the assimilation of an originally audible n (rlD, as Olshausen), which goes
back through the intermediate forms math, mat to an original mani : so
W. "Wright, Comparative Grammar, Cambridge, 1890, p. 124, partly following
Bbttclier, Hebrdische Grammatik, § 261. A ground-form mant would moat easily
explain JO (what?), used in Ex 16^* in explanation of |0 manna, while }lp is
the regular Aramaic for who. Socin calls attention to the Arabic mah (in
pause with an audible h : Mufassal, 193, 8). Observe further that —
(o) In the closest connexion, by means of Maqqeph, "iMD takes a following C
Dagei (§ 20 d), e.g. ';]?~np what is it to thee? and even in one word, as D3?10
what is it to you ? Is 3" ; cf. Ex 4.^, Mai i", and even before a guttural, DHD
Ez 86 KHhibh. i
(6) Before gutturals in close connexion, by means oi Maqqeph or (e.g. Ju 14"*, CI
I S 20") a conjunctive accent, either nD is used with a virtual strengthening
of the guttural (§ 22 c), so especially before n, and, in Gn 31^^, Jb 2121, before ]\
— or the doubling is wholly omitted. In the latter case either (cf. § 35 e-k)
a is fully lengthened to Qames (so always before the H of the article, except in
Ec 212 ; also before HOn, HSn, and so H (Hb 2^^), X (2 S i8« , 2 K 8"),
y (Gn si''^, 2 K 8'»), or modified to S^ghol, especially before y, H, and generally
before H. The omission of the strengthening also takes place as a rule with
n n y.^when they have not Qames, and then the form is either HD or nO,
the latter especially before PI or y, if Maqqeph follows.
The longer forms nO and flO are also used (nO even before letters which 6
are not gutturals) when not connected by Maqqeph but only by a conjunctive
1 accent. As a rule DD is then used, but sometimes niD when at a greater dis-
tance from the principal tone of the sentence, Is i'^, ip 4^. (On nO in the
, combinations ni33 nj33 and even HtDP i S i^, cf. § 102 k and I.)
V - ' V - ' V T > ft
I (c) In the principal pause PIO is used without exception ; also as a rule j
with the smaller disjunctives, and almost always before gutturals (ilD only in
very few cases). On the other hand, nO more often stands before letters
which are not gutturals, when at a greater distance from the principal tone
of the sentence, e.g. i S 4*, 15'*, 2 K i''. Hag i« (see KOhler on the passage),
\f/ 10'^, Jb 7'^! ; cf., however, Pr 31^, and Delitzsch on the passage.
2. On ^O and HO as indefinite pronouns in the sense of quicunque, g
quodcunque, and as relatives, is qui, id quod, Sec, see § 137 c.
and in the Poenulus of Plautus— CJ* {sa, si, sy, su). Also in New Hebrew -^
has become the common form. Cf. Schroder, Phon. Sprache, p. 162 fif. and
below, § 155 ; also BergstrSsser, ' Das hebr. Prafix B',' in ZAW. 1909, p. 40 S.
COWLEY
CHAPTER II
THE VERB
§ 38. General View,
a Verbal stems are either original or derived. They are usually
divided into —
(a) Verbal stems proper {primitive verbs), which exhibit the stem
without any addition, e,g. 'H?? ^^ ^^* reigned.
0 (b) Verbal derivatives, i.e. secondare/ verbal stems, derived from the
pure stem (letter a), e.g. ^'^[> to sanctify, K'?!i2^n to sanctify oneself, from
^1\> to be holy. These are usually called conjugations (§ 39).
C (c) Denominatives,^ i. e. verbs derived from nouns (like the Latin
causari, praedari, and Eng. to skin, to stone), or even from particles
(see d, end) either in a primitive or derivative form, e.g. ^>^^, Qui
and PHel, to pitch a tent, from^ pHN tent ; B'HB'n and B»"I2' to take root,
and {J'15?' to root out, from ^"p root (§52 A).
d This does not exclude the possibility that, for nouns, from which denomin-
ative verbs are derived, the corresponding (original) verbal stem may still be
found either in Hebrew or in the dialects. The meaning, however, is
sufficient to show that the denominatives have come from the noun, not
from the verbal stem, e.g. PIJIlp a brick (verbal stem ]2? to be white), denomin.
]2? to make bricks ; 31 afsh (verbal stem n31 to be prolific), denomin. iV\ to fish ;
Fl^n to winter (from tj'lh autumn, winter, stem fjlH to pluck) ; y^p to pass the
<
summer (from y^p summer, stem y^p to be hot).
On ' Semitic verbs derived from particles ' see P. Haupt in the Amer. Journ.
0/ Sem. Lang., xxii (1906), 257 ff.
§ 39. Oround-forrti and Derived Stems.
Brockelmann, Sew. Sprachwiss., p. 119 ff. ; Grundriss, p. 504 ff.
CI 1. The 3rd sing. masc. of the Perfect in the form of the pure stem
(i.e. in Qal, see e) is generally regarded, lexicographically and gram-
matically, as the ground-form of the verb (§ 30 a), e. g. ?!?[; he has
killed, ^?^ he was heavy, fO\^ he was little.^ From this form the other
^ Cf. W. J. Gerber, Die hebr. Verba denom., insbes. im theol. Sprachgebr. desA.T.,
Lf.z. 1896.
2 For the sake of brevity, however, the meaning in Hebrew-English Lexicons
is usually given in the Infinitive, e. g. HD? to learn, properly he has learnt.
§ 39 b-e] Ground-form and Derived Stems 115
persons of the Perfect are derived, and the Participle also is connected
with it. b''0\> or b^ip, like the Imperative and Infinitive construct in
sound, may also be regarded as an alternative ground-form, with
which the Imperfect (see § 47) is connected.
In verbs V'JJ (i.e. with 1 for their second radical) the stem-form, given both 0
in Lexicon and Grammar, is not the 3rd sing. masc. Perfect (consisting of two
consonants), but the form with medial 1 ^ which appears in the Imperative
and Infinitive ; e. g. 2V^ to return (3rd pers. perf. 3K') : the same is the case
in most stems with medial "•, e. g. p"!) to judge.
2. From the pui-e stem, or Qal, the derivative stems are formed ^'
according to an unvarying analogy, in which the idea of the stem
assumes the most varied shades of meaning, according to the changes
in its form (intensive, frequentative, privative, causative, reflexive,
reciprocal ; some of them with corresponding passive forms), e. g.
np^ to learn, "l^'? to teach ; ^^f to lie, S-I^'H to lay ; tSBC' to judge,
USB'i to contend. In other languages such formations are regarded
as new or derivative verbs, e. g. Germ, fallen (to fall), fallen (to fell) ;
trinken (to drink), tranken (to drench) ; Lat. lactere (to suck, Germ.
saugen), lactare (to suckle, Germ, sdugen) ; iacere (to throw), iacere
(to lie down) ; ytvofiai, yiwdo). In Hebrew, however, these fox-mations
are incomparably more regular and systematic than (e. g.) in Greek,
Latin, or English ; and, since the time of Eeuchlin, they have usually
been called conjugations of the primitive form (among the Jewish
grammarians C^J?!!, i.e. formations, or more correctly species), and are
always treated together in the grammar and lexicon.^
3. The changes in the primitive form consist either in internal d
modification by means of vowel-change and strengthening of the middle
consonant py^\>, ^^P; ^£?^p, b^V ; cf. to lie, to lay; to fall, to fell), or
in the repetition of one or two of the stem-consonants (''P^i?, ^^f^P),
or finally in the introduction of formative additions (■'^i??), which may
also be accompanied by internal change (^''^pn^ PtSj^J^n), Cf. § 31 b.
In Aramaic the formation of the conjugations is eifected more by formative
additions than by vowel-change. The vocalic distinctions have mostly become
obsolete, so that, e. g. the reflexives with the prefix nn^ HN HSI have entirely
usurped the place of the passives. On the other hand, Arabic has preserved
great wealth in both methods of formation, while Hebrew in this, as in other
respects, holds the middle place (§1 m).
4. Grammarians differ as to tlie number and arrangement of these C
conjugations. The common practice, however, of calling them by the
^ The term Conjugation thus has an entirely difiierent meaning in Hebrew
and Greek or Latin grammar.
I 2
ii6 The Verb [§39/.?
old grammatical terms, prevents any misunderstanding. The simple
form is called Qal (p\> light, because it has no formative additions) ; the
others (D''"!?3 heavy, being weighted, as it were, with the strengthening
of consonants or with formative additions) take their names from the
paradigm of bys he has done,^ which was used in the earliest Jewish
grammatical works. Several of these have passives which are dis-
tinguished from their actives by more obscure vowels. The common
conjugations (including Qal and the passives) are the seven following,
but very few verbs exhibit them all :
Active. Passive.
f I. Qal h\^\>tokill. (Cf. §52 6.)
2. Niph'al 7^1?? to kill oneself (rarely passive).
3. Pi'el 7^i? to kill many, to massacre. 4. Pu'al ?K)p.
5. Hiph'il ^'''Cipn to cause to kill. 6. Hoph'al ^^ipH.
7. Hithpa'el ''^ipnn to kill oneself. [Very rare, Hothpa al ?t?i^nn.]
p- There are besides several less frequent conjugations, some of which,
however, are more common in the kindred languages, and even in
Hebrew (in the weak verb) regularly take the place of the usual
conjugations (§ 55).
In Arabic there is a greater variety of conjugations, and their arrangement
is more appropriate. According to the Arabic method, the Hebrew con-
jugations would stand thus: i. Qal; 2. Pi'el and Pu'al; 3. Po'el and Po'al (see
§ 55 b) ; 4. Hiph'il and Hoph'al ; 5. Hithpa'H and Hothpa'al ; 6. Hithpo'el (see
§ 55 6) ; 7. Niph'al; 8. Hithpa'el (see § 54 0 5 9- ^^'^' (see § 55 d). A more
satisfactory division would be into three classes: (i) The intensive Pi'el with
the derived and analogous forms Pu'al and Hithpa'el. (2) The causative Hiph'il
with its passive Hoph'al, and the analogous forms {Saph'el and Tiph'el). (3) The
reflexive«or passive Niph'al.
1 This paradigm was borrowed from the Arabic grammarians, and, according
to Bacher, probably first adopted throughout by Abulwalid. It was, how-
ever, unsuitable ou account of the guttural, and was, therefore, usually
exchanged in later times for HpQ, after the example of Moses Qimhi. This
verb has the advantage, that all its conjugations are actually found in the Old
Testament. On the other hand, it has the disadvantage of indistinctness in
the pronunciation of some of its forms, e.g. n"Ii?El, Dri"1j5S. The paradigm
of pop, commonly used since the time of Danz, avoids this defect, and is
especially adapted for the comparative treatment of the Semitic dialects,
inasmuch as it is found with slight change (Arab, and Ethiop. ^T\p) in all of
them. It is true that in Hebrew it occurs only three times in Qal, and even
then only in poetic style (^ 139^', Jb 13^*, 24^*) ; yet it is worth retaining as
a model which has been sanctioned by usage. More serious is the defect,
that a number of forms of the paradigm of 7t3p leave the beginner in doubt
as to whether or not there should be a Dagei in the B^gadk^phath letters, and
consequently as to the correct division of the syllables.
§ 40 a-cl
Tenses. Moods. Flexion
117
§ 40. Tenses. Moods. Flexion.
A. Ungnad, ' Die gegenseitigen Beziehungen der Verbalformen im Grund-
stnmm des semit. Verbs,' in ZDMG. 59 (1905), 766 ff., and his 'Zum hebr.
Verbalsystem ', in Beitrdge sur Assyriologie ed. by Fr. Delitzsch and P. Haupt,
1907) P- 55 ff-
1. While the Hebrew verb, owing to these derivative forms or a
conjugatioBS, possesses a certain richness and copiousness, it is, on the
other band, poor in the matter of tenses and moods. The verb has
only two tense-iorms [Perfect and Imperfect, see the note on § 47 a),
besides an Imperative (but only in the active), two Infinitives and
a Particijple. All relations of time, absolute and relative, are expressed
either by these forms (hence a certain diversity in their meaning,
§ 106 flf.) or by syntactical combinations. Of moods properly so
called (besides the Imperfect Indicative and Imperative), only the
Jussive and Optative are sometimes indicated by express modifications
of the Imperfect-form (§ 48).
2. The inflexion of the Perfect, Imperfect, and Imperative as to b
persons, differs from that of the Western languages in having, to a
great extent, distinct forms for the two genders, which correspond to
the different forms of the personal pronoun. It is from the union
of the pronoun toith the verbal stem that the personal inflexions of these
tenses arise.
The following table will serve for the beginner as a provisional C
scheme of the formative syllables {afformatives and preformatives)
of the two tenses. The three stem-consonants of the strong verb are
denoted by dots. Cf. § 44 ff. and the Paradigms.
Pekfect.
Singular. Plural.
3. m.
3. /• "-.-
2. m. ^
2. /. ^
I. c. 'rt
c.
Impekfect.
Singular,
3. m.
3. /•
2. m.
2. /v
I. c.
n
n
n
2.
m. OPl
«
1 t
2.
/. 19
«
•
I.
c. «
«
• *
Plural.
3-
m. ^ ♦
^
3-
/na .
♦ n
2.
m. ^ '
. n
2.
/n: .
• n
I.
C.
• :
1 18 The Verb [§§ 41 a-d, 42, 43 a
§ 41. Variations from the Ordinary Form of the
Strong Verb.
a The same laws which are normally exhibited in stems with strong
(unchangeable) consonants, hold good for all other verbs. Devia-
tions from the model of the strong verb are only modifications due to
the special character or weakness of certain consonants, viz. : —
(a) When one of the stem-consonants (or radicals) is a guttural.
In this case, however, the variations only occur in the vocalization
(according to § 22), not in the consonants. The guttural verbs
(§§ 62-65) are, therefore, only a variety of the strong verb.
If ib) When a stem-consonant {radical) disappears by assimilation
(§ 196-/), or when the stem originally consisted of only two con-
sonants {verbs rs, yy, and ^V, as K^«, bp_, Dip, §§ 66, 67, 72).
C (c) When one of the stem-consonants {radicals) is a weak letter.
In this case, through aphaeresis, elision, &c., of the weak consonant,
various important deviations from the regular form occur. Cf.
§ 68 ff. for these verbs, such as 2^1 «?», rhi.
d Taking the old paradigm pyS as a model, it is usual, following the example
of the Jewish grammarians, to call the first radical of any stem D, the second
V, and the third 7. Hence the expressions, verb N^S for a verb whose first
radical is X (primae radicalis \_sc. literae] N) ; Y'V for mediae radicalis 1 ; V^V for
a verb whose second radical is repeated to form a third.
I. The Strong Verb.
§42.
As the formation of the strong verb is the model also for the weak verb, a
statement of the general formative laws should precede the treatment of
special cases.
Paradigm B, together with the Table of the personal preformatives and
afformatives given in § 40 c, oifers a complete survey of the normal forms.
A full explanation of them is given in the following sections (§§ 4.V.«;6), where
each point is elucidated on its first occurrence ; thus e. g. the inflexion of the
Perfect, the Imperfect and its modifications, will be found under Qal, &c.
A. The Puke Stem, or Qal.
§ 43. Its Form and Meaning.
a The common form of the 3rd sing. masc. of the Perfect Qal is -'^ij,
with d {Pathah) in the second syllable, especially in transitive verbs
(but see § 44 c). There is also a form with e {Sere, originally ?),
and another with d {Holem, originally m) in the second syllable, both
of which, however, have almost always an intransitive^ meaning,
1 But cf. such instances as Jer 48^. In Arabic also, transitive verbs are
found with middle I, corresponding to Hebrew verbs with e in the second
§ 43 b, c, 44 a] Fo?in and Meaning of Qal 1 19
and serve to express states and qualities, e.g.*'?! to he heavy, ]^\l
to be small.
In Paradigm B a verb middle a, a verb middle 5, and a verb middle o are
accordingly given side by side. The second example TDS is chosen as showing,
at the same time, when the Dagei lene is to be inserted or omitted. ,
Rem. I. The vowel of the second syllable is the principal vowel, and hence 0
on it depends the distinction between the transitive and intransitive mean-
ing. The Qames of the first syllable is lengthened from an original d (cf.
Arabic qdtdld), but it can be retained in Hebrew only immediately before the
tone, or at the most (with an open ultima) in the counter-tone with Melheg ;
otherwise, like all the pretonic vowels (a, e), it becomes S^wd, e. g. Drip^p and
plur. niasc. In the Aramaic dialects the vowel of the first syllable is always
reduced to §«wa, as i't3p = Hebr. btOp- The intransitive forms in Arabic are
qdtild, qdiaid; in Hebrew (after the^ rejection of the final vowel) t being in
the tone-syllable has been regularly lengthened to e, and u to o.
2. Examples of denominaHves in Qal are : niOn to cover with pitch, from IDH C
pitth ; n^D to salt, from nbh salt ; -\2^ (usually Hiph.) to buy or sell corn, from
ly^ corn ; see above, § 38 c.
§ 44. Flexion of the Perfect of Qal}
1. The formation of the persons of the Perfect Is effected hy the a
addition of certain forms of the pei sonal pronoun, and marks of the 3rd
fem. sing, and 3rd pL (as afformatives) to the end of the verbal-stem,
which contains the idea of a predicate, and may be regarded, in
meaning if not in form, as a Participle or verbal adjective. For the
3rd pers. sing. masc. Perfect, the pronominal or subject idea inherent
in the finite verb is sufficient : thus, ^^i? he has killed, ^'^^\> thou hast
killed (as it were, killing thou, or a killer thou), a killer wast thou=
nriX ?l3p ; NT he was fearing, Dri"NT ye were fearing = ^^^ **'*V The
ending of the ist pers. plur. (W — ) is also certainly connected with
the termination of 1Jn5N, ^3N we {^ ^2 b, d). The aiformative of the
ist pers. sing. ('JJI) is to be referred, by an interchange of 3 and n
(cf- § 33 /), to that form of the pronoun which also underlies ^3l3^^, I.^
In the third person n__ (originally ri.^, cf. below,/) is the mark of
the feminine, as in a great number of nouns (§ 80 c), and ^ is the
termination of the plural ; of., for the latter, the termination of
the 3rd and 2nd pers. plur. Imperf. -Ana in Arabic and t? (often also p)
syllable. Hence P. Haupt {Proc. Amer. Or. Soc, 1894, p. ci f.) prefers to
distinguish them as verba voluntaria (actions which depend on the will of the
subject) and involuntaria (actions or states independent of the will of the
subject).
1 Cf. Noldeke, 'Die Endungen des Perfects' {Untersuchungen sur semit.
Gramm. ii.), in ZDMG. vol. 38, p. 407 ff., and more fully in Beitrdge sur sem.
Sprathwiss., Strassb. 1904, p. 15 if.
^ According to NOldeke, I.e., p. 419, the original Semitic termination of the
ist sing. Perf. was most probably kO, ; cf. the Ethiopic qatalku, Arabic qatdtu.
I20 The Verb [§44 J-/
in Hebrew, also ilna (in the construct state €) as the plural tei-mina-
tion of masc. nouns in literary Arabic.
b 2. The characteristic Pathah of the second syllable becomes S^wd
before an afformative beginning with a vowel, where it would otherwise
stand in an open syllable (as ^}^P^, '^^^^.', but in pause nb^i?, I^^i^).
Before an afformative beginning with a consonant the Pathah remains,
whether iu the tone-syllable ij!}^bp^, ^%?,, "'J?^^!?, ''^S'^i^; in pause
ripDi? &c.) or before it. In the latter case, however, the Qames of the
first syllable, being no longer a pretonic vowel, becomes vocal S'^wd ; as
C^^^i?, i^.S'^i?; cf. § 27 z and § 43 6. On the retention of o with
Melheg of the counter-tone in the PcTf. consecutive, cf. § 49 ^.
^ Kern. I. Verbs middle S in Hebrew (as in Ethiopic, but not in Arabic or
Aramaic) generally change thei'-sound in their inflexion into Pathah (frequently
so even in the 3rd sing. masc. Perf.). This tendency to assimilate to the more
common verbs middle a may also be explained from the laws of vocalization
of the tone-bearing closed penultima, which does not readily admit of Sere,
and never of Hireq, of which the Sere is a lengthening (cf. § 26 p). On the
other hand. Sere is retained in an open syllable ; regularly so in the weak
stems K"p (§ 74 g), before suffixes (§ 59 »), and in the pausal forms of the
strong stem in an open tone-syllable, e. g. Hpi^ it cleaveth, Jb 29^" (not
np^'n), cf. 2 S 1^^, Jb 41^*; even (contrary to § 29 3) in a closed pausal syllable,
e. g. ]2^, Dt 3312 (out of pause fSB', Is 32") ; but br.j) Is 33^ &c., according
, to § 29 g.
It 2. In some weak stems middle a, the Pathah under the second radical some-
times, in a closed toneless syllable, becomes and, in one example, __.
Thus from ^'V: r\i^^y) and thou shalt possess it, Dt 17"; DriB'"]"! Dt 19I ;
DriB''}^1 Dt 4I, and frequently ; from l^J to bring forth, to beget ; ^''J^ni'^ ^ 2'
(ciF."Nu II", Jer227, ipioy^ from ^^^q. J2WSA Mai 320 ; from b^f; VJ^hii.^
I have asked him, i S i*" (Ju 13*), and three times DribSB' i S 12", 25^ Jb 21 29.
Qimhi already suggests the explanation, that the i [s) of these forms of ^iW
and B'1' is the original vowel, since along with 7SK' and K'T' are also found
PNt^ and Kh'' (sec the Lexicon). The possibility of this explanation cannot
be denied (especially in the case of {{'"I"', see § 69 s) ; the i in these forms
might, however, equally well have arisen from an attenuation of a (§ 27 s),
such as must in any case be assumed in the other instances. Moreover, it is
worthy of notice that in all the above cases the t is favoured by the character
of the following consonant (a sibilant or dental), and in most of them also by
the tendency towards assimilation of the vowels (cf. § 54 A; and § 64/).
€ 3. In verbs middle 0, the Holem is retained in the tone-syllable, e. g. ri"li^ thou
didst tremble ; *pb^ in pause for \^y ihey were able ; but in a toneless closed
syllable the original short vowel appears in the form of a Qames hatvph ;
^^i]^P^^ / have prevailed against him, if/ i^^; FO^'*] (see § 49 h) then shalt thou be
able, Ex iS^*; in a toneless open syllable it becomes vocal S'wd, e.g. n?3',
T 4. Rarer forms ^ are: Sing. 3rd /em. in n__ (as in Arabic, Ethiopic, and
1 Many of these forms, which are uncommon in Hebrew, are usual in the
il,
§ 44 o-rr^'] FUocion of the Perfect of Qal 121
Aramaic), e.g. r\b]ii it is gone, Dt 3286; nnSK'SI Is 231^ (in the Aramaic form,
for nn3e'3'!); from^ a verb V'V , T\2^], cf. § 72 0. This original feminine
ending -a<A is regularly retained before suffixes, see § 59 a ; and similarly in
stems n"b, either in the form ath (which is frequent also in stems N"? § 74 9),
or with the Pathcuii weakened to vocal S'wd before the pleonastic ending n__,
e. g. nnba § 75 ». in Ez 31^ the Aramaic form Nn33 occurs instead of nn33 .
2nd masc. HPl for n (differing only orthographically), e.g. nnnall thou liasi g
dealt treacherously, Mai 2^^ ; cf. i S I6», Gn 312 (nrim which is twice as common
as nri3, cf. § 66 A) ; Gn 21-3, 2 S 226, 2 K 9S, Is a*, ^^ sG* (so also in Eiph'il ;
2K9^Is3723,\t6o'»). ,
2nd/ewi. has sometimes a Yodh at the end, as in ">n3pn thou wentest, Jer 31" ; fl
cf. 2^3, 3<-6, 419 (but read the ptcp. nyot^, with the LXX, instead of the 2nd
fem.),46", and so commonly in Jeremiah, and Ez (i6i«, &c.) ; see also Mi^^^,
Ru f*. TlD^'n &c., is really intended, for the vowel signs in the text belong
to the marginal reading flD^n (without '^)^ as in the corresponding pronoun
"nS (^nS) §32/1. The ordinary form has rejected the final i, but it regularly
reappears when pronominal suffixes are added (§ 59 a, c).
ist pers. comm. sometimes without Yodh, as riJ?T f 140") ^^ 42S 1 K. 8**, t
Ez i663 (all in K*thibh), ip 16^, without a Q«re ; in 2 K iS^o also nnpS is
really intended, as appears from Is 36^. The Q're requires the ordinary form,
to which the vowels of the text properly belong, whilst the K*thibh is
probably to be regarded as the remains of an earlier orthography, which
omitted vowel-letters even at the end of the word. -
jn as the termination of the 2nd plur. m. for DH Ez 3326, might just possibly k
be due to the following T\ (cf., for an analogous case. Mi i^"^, § 87 e\ but^ is
probably a copyist's error. Plur. 2nd /em. in nW- (according to others HSri-)
Am 4', but the reading is very doubtful ; since n follows, it is perhaps
merely due to dittography ; cf., however, HiriK § 32 ».
3rd plur. comm. has three times the very strange termination j^ ^ ; l^yil", I>t /
83i« (both before N, and hence, no doubt, if the text is correct, to avoid a
hiatus), and in the still more doubtful form ppjf Is 26^*; on p in the Imperf.
see § 47 m ; on the affixed K in Jos 10", Is 28^2, see § 23 i.
It is very doubtful whether, as in most Semitic languages (see § 47 c, note), 111
tlie 3rd-/em. plur. in Hebi-ew was originally distinguished from the 3rd masc.
other Semitic dialects, and may, therefore, be called Aramaisms (Syriasms)
or Arabisms. They must not, however, be regarded as cases of borrowing,
but as a return to original forms.
1 Where the Masora apparently regards the ""ri as the termination of the
2nd sing, fern., e.g. in Jer 2^^° (twice). Mi 4^^^ ifc has rather taken the form
as ist pers. sing. (cf. Stade, Gramm., p. 253) ; so in Ju s', where ^PiDp, on
account of verse 12, must either have originally been intended as 2nd sing,
/cm., or is due to an erroneous pronunciation of the form tHOp as riDj? instead
of 3rd sing. fern. DPp (as LXX).
2 That these examples can hardly be referred to a primitive Semitic ending
un in the 3rd plur. Pevf., has been shown by Noldeke in ZDMG. vol. 38, p. 409
ff. ; cf. also ZDMG. vol. 32, p. 757 f., where G. Hoifmann proves that the ter-
minations in NUn of the 3rd plur. in Aramaic, formerly adduced by us, are
secondary forms. [See also Driver, Heb. Tenses^, p. 6 note."]
122 The Verb [§§ 44 «, 0, 45 «
p?Mr. by the termination H ^ as in Biblical Aramaic. NOldeke (ZDMG. 38
[1884"', p. 411) referred doubtfully to the textual readings in Dt 21'^, Jos 15*,
j812.i«.i9^ Jer 2^^, 22®, where the Masora uniformly inserts the termination m,
and to Gn 4810 in the Samaritan Pentateuch, Gn 49^2, i S 4I5, f iS^s, Neh 1310.
In his Beitrcige sur sem. Sprachwiss., p. 19, however, he observes that the con-
struction of a fem. plural with the 3rd sing. fern, is not unexampled, and also
that n is often found as a mistake for 1. On the other hand Mayer Lambert
(Une serie de Qere ketib, Paris, 1891, p. 6 ff.) explains all these K®thibh, as well
as if/ 73', Jer 50* (?), and (against Naldeke) i K 22" (where n is undoubtedly
the article belonging to the next word), Jb 16^® (where the masc. ""JEB requires the
marginal reading), also Jer 48*^, 51^', Ez 26^, i// 68^*, as remains of the 3rd/e?n.
plur. in n . The form was abandoned as being indistinguishable from the
(later) form of the 3rd /em. sing., but tended to be retained in the perfect of
verbs n"b, as HTI K^thibh six times in the above examples.
ft 5. The afformatives ri^ {Pi\ ""Fl^ ^i are generally toneless, and the forms
with these inflexions are consequently Mil'el (npt)p, &c.) ; with all the other
aflformatives they are Milra' (§15 c). The place of the tone may, however, be
shifted : (a) by tbe pause (§ 29 i-v), whenever a vowel which has become
vocal §*>wa under the second stem-consonant is restored by the pause ; as
rhhp for ni)t3p mpy^ for r\hy^\ and ^hh\> for \%\> m^ for ^N^?^^ ; (&) in
certain cases after wdw consecutive of the Perfect (see § 49 h).
0 6. Contraction of a final n with the n of the afformative occurs e. g. in
'<rn3 Hag 2^, &c. ; cf. Is I420, &c., in the Per/. Po'el; Dt 4^5 in the Hiph'il of
rintJ' ; Is 21*, &c., in the Hiph'il of DSB'. Contraction of a final 3 with the
aflformative 13 occurs in 13ri3 Gn 34" ; in Niph. Ezr g', cf. 2 Ch 14^*' ; in Eiph.
2 Ch 29^^; with the afformative n3 in the Imperfect Qal Ez 17^ ; Pi'eltf) 71^,
where with Baer and Ginsburg HSjIiri is to be read, according to others
nasin (cf. in PoUl najipri Ez 32"), but certainly not n33in with the Mantua
ed., Opitius and Hahn ; with n3 in the Imperat. Eiph. Gn 4^2, Is 32^.
§ 45. The Infinitive.
P. Pratorius, ' Ueber den sog. Inf. absol. des Hebr,,' in ZDMG. 1902, p. 546 fif.
(I 1. The Infinitive is represented in Hebrew by two forms, a shorter
and a longer ; both are, however, strictly speaking, independent nouns
{verbal substantives). The shorter form, the Infinitive constrioct (in Qal
''tSpj' sometimes incorrectly ''i'^i?), is used in very various ways, gome-
times in connexion with pronominal suffixes, or governing a substantive
in the genitive, or with an accusative of the object (§ 1 15), sometimes
in connexion with prepositions (^t^P? to kill, § 114/), and sometimes
in dependence upon substantives as genitive, or upon verbs as accu-
sative of the object. On the other hand, the use of the longer form,
the Infinitive absolute (in Qal •''i'^i^, sometimes also Pbi^^ obscured from
original qdtdl), is restricted to those cases in which it empliasizes
1 Cf. the analogous forms of the noun, § 93 t.
§ 45 h-f} The Infinitive 123
the abstract verbal idea, without regard to the subject or object of the
action. It stands most frequently as an adverbial accusative with
a finite verb of the same stem (§113 h-s)}
The flexibility and versatility of the Infin. constr. and the rigidity u
and inflexibility of the Infin. absol. are reflected in their vocalization.
The latter has unchangeable vowels, while the 0 of the Infin. constr.
may be lost. For bbj?, according to § 84**, e, goes back to the ground-
form qiltul.
Other forms of the Infin. constr, Qal of the strong verb are — C
(a) 7Dp, e. g. 33t^ to lie, Gn 34"^ ; bSK' to sink, Ec 12* ; especially with verbs
which have a in the second syllable of the Imperf. : hence sometimes also
with those, whose second or third radical is a guttural (frequently besides the
ordinary form). All the examples (except 235^, see above) occur in the
closest connexion with the following word, or with sufiixes (see § 61 c). In
Ez 2i33 the Masora seems to treat r\2hb (A'erse 20, in pause PlQCp) as an
Infinitive = n2pp; probably H^^P should be read,
(b) n^tii? and, attenuated from it, nb^f? ; 7]b^\) and H^Di^ (which are U
feminine forms' of ^tOp and bb|5, mostly from intransitive verbs, and some-
times found along with forms having no feminine ending in use), e.g.
HOB'S!) to be guilty, Lv 52*, HDnX to love, nK^b' to hate ; i^Hyb, often in Dt., to
fear ; n^p] to be old ; nN"!i5 to meet (in HNli?? § 19 A:) ; nWlp to lie down, Lv 20I6 ;
nnt^Db to anoint, Ex 29*^ ; r\)imb to wash, Ex 30^^, &c. ; nSOtsi) (also a subst. =*
t:t: ''^t:t; »t:t;
uncleanness, like HNDp) to be unclean, Lv 15^* ; H^l^p to approach, Ex 36^ &c. ;
cf. Lv 12^-^ Dt iiK is 30", Ez 21", Hag i^; alsoVl^nn to be far off, Ez 8« ;
n^pn to pity, Ez 16^; cf. Ho 7*. On the other hand in nbon Gn ly^^, the
original a has been modified to S ; cf. HJ^tH Is S^^, &c.
(c) In the Aramaic manner (ijpi?^ but cf. also Arab, maqtal) there occur as ^
Infin. Qal: nSb^D to send. Est 9" ; N"1pp to call and VDO to depart, Nu lo^ (Dt
10") ; ni^p to take, 2 Ch 19'', &c. ; iiw6 to carry, Nu 4", &c. (cf. even niN^!)
Ez 17^) ; also with a feminine ending ilbvp '0 9° wp> Ezr 7*, &c. ; cf. for these
forms (almost all very late) Ryssel, De Elohistae Pantateitchici sermone, p. 50, and
Strack on Nu 4^^*.
id) nSop in mh.\ Gn 8'; rb^2\ Nu I4'8; probably also nK'in Ex 31', 35".
2. A kind of Gerund is formed by the Infin. constr. with the prepo- f
sition P; as /'tip? ad interficiendum, ?33p ad cadendnm (see § 28 a).
1 The terms absolute and construct are of course not to be understood as
implying that the Infin, constr, pbp forms the construct state (see § 89) of the
Infin, absol. (PiDp ground-form qdtal). In the Paradigms the Inf. constr., as
the principal form, is placed before the other, under the name of Infinitive
simply.
* According to the remark of Elias Levita on Qimhi's Mikhlol, ed. Rittenb.,
14 a, these feminine forms occur almost exclusively in connexion with the
preposition b.
124 ^^^^ ^^f'b [§§45 3,46a-d
rr The blending of the p with the Infin. constr. into a single grammatical form
seems to be indicated by the fii-mly closed syllable, cf. 32K'? Gn 34'' ; PSJ?
ff/ iiS^', with Dage^ lene in the Q = linpol; hence, also liq-tol, &c. ; but ?sia
hin^phol, Jb 4" ; ^333 2 S 38*. Exceptions xax!) Nu 4^3, S^* ; J^iD?!?'! E'iDjb
Jer iw 18', 3i«8 ; nnK'jj Jer 47* ; nntD^) Jer 1 1^^, &c., ^ 37" ; pinnb 2 Ch 34IO ;
according to some also 330? Nu 21* and B'337 2 Ch 2810 (Baer tJ'SSp) ; on
the other hand f3K'3 Gn 3522; -|3)3 Jer 17^. ' For the meaningless Vinnb
EzrioiSreadCniJ'.
§ 46. 7%(2 Imperative.
CL 1. Tlie ground-forms of the Imperative, 7t3i? (properly qHul, which
is for an original qutul), and 7^P (see below, c), the same in pro-
nunciation as the forms of the Infin. constr. (§ 45), are also the basis
for the formation of the Imperfect (§ 47)." They represent the second
person, and have both fem. and plur. forms. The third person is
supplied by the Imperfect in the Jussive (§ 109 b); and even the second
person must always be expressed by the Jussive, if it be used with a
negative, e. g. Pbiprrbi? ne occidas (uot t't^ip'i'Ky The passives have no
Imperative, but it occurs in the reflexives, as Niph'al and Hithpa'el.*
h 2. The Afformatives of the 2nd sing. fem. and the 2')id plur. niasc.
and fem. are identical in every case with those of the Imperfect (§47 c).
In the same way, the Imperative of the 2nd sing, masc, in common
with the Imperfect, admits of the lengthening by tbe *^-^ paragogicum
(§48 i), as, on the other hand, there are certain shortened forms of
this person analogous to the Jussive (§ 48. 5).
C Rem. I. Instead of the form ?bp (sometimes also^kne, e.g. lilDB^ Ec la" ;
before Maqqeph "bt3p with Qames hatuph), those verbs which have an a in the
final syllable of the Imperf. (i. e. especially verbs middle I) make their
Imperative of the form ^^p, e.g. C^^b dress! (Perf. 1^3^ and {^3^) ; 33K' lie
down! in pause 33E' i S o^*-^.
7 at:
U 2. The first syllable of the sing. fem. and plur. masc. are usually to be
pronounced with S'wd mobile {qifli, qiL'lu, and so ''3DB', &c., without Bage^ lene,
and even ISB'D with Metheg, Ex 12^1; but cf. ''3DN Jer 10", and with the
same phonetic combination ''SiJ'n Is 47^ ; see analogous cases in § 93 w) ; less
frequently we find an 5 instead of the i, e.g. ""SPD rule, Juq^"; ^3K'D draw,
Ez 3220 ; 13"in Jer 2^^ (cf. >3"in Is 44I") ; on ^DDp i S 288 Q're, VVV Jer, 2220
(cf. I K 13'), see § ro /*. This 0 arises (see above, a) from a singular ground-
form qHtul, not from a retraction of the original m of the second syllable.
We must abandon the view that the forms with t in the first syllable (cf. also
^ The Infin. ahsol., like the Greek Infin., is also sometimes used for the
Imperative (§ 113 66). Cf. in general, Koch, Ber semitische Inf. (Schaflfhausen,
1874).
2 In Hoph'al an Imperative is found only twice (Ez 32^®, Jer. 49*), and
closely approximating in meaning to the reflexive.
§§ 46 e,/, 47 a] The Imperative 125
■•■DDX njn ''"IIIO "'')3y) arise from a weakening of the characteristic vowel o.
They, or at least some of them, must rather be regarded with Bartli {ZDMG.
i889,'p- 182) as analogous to the original i-imperfects. See further analogies
in §§ 47 i and 481; 61 &, 63n. ...
The pausal form of the 2nd plur. masc. is nf3 i K 3"; from V?>?', ^^f, C
&c. ; similarly the 2nd sing. fem. in pause is nnj? Is 23" ; even without the
pause '^yhh Ju 910", KHh. ; >Db'i? i S 2S8, KHh. (of. with this also naibo, &c.,
§ 48 0 ; from nob, "•nOB' Jo 2".
3. In the 2nd plur. fem. lyOK' occurs once, in Gn 4=^ (for MJJJIOE') with loss f
of the n and insertion of a helping vowel, unless it is simply to be pointed
IVDEJ. Also instead of the abnormal IK-lj? Ex 220 (for njSnp) we should
perhaps read as in Eu i^o J^np (cf. jsk) i' and ^\2^ i").
On the examples of a 2nd plur. fem. in 1, Is 32^1, see § 48 i.
§ 47. The Imperfect and its Inflexion.
1. The persons of the Imperfect,^ in contradistinction to those of (I
the Perfect, are formed by placing abbreviated forms of the personal
pronoun (preformatives) before the stem, or rather before the abstract
form of the stem (''t^p). As, however, the tone is retained on the
characteristic vowel of the Stem-form, or even (as in the 2nd sing. fem.
and the -yrd and 2nd. plur. masc.) passes over to the afformatives, the
preformatives of the Imperfect appear in a much more abbreviated
form than the afformatives of the Perfect, only one consonant ("", ^, N, J)
remaining in each form. But as this preformative combined with the
1 On the use of the Semitic Perfect and Imperfect cf. § 106 ff. and the
literature cited in § 106. For our present purpose the following account will
suffice : — The name Imperfect is here used in direct contrast to the Perfect,
and is to be taken in a wider sense than in Latin and Greek grammar. The
Hebrew (Semitic) Per/, denotes in general that which is concluded, completed, , /
and past, that which has happened and has come into effect ; but at the same Ky
time, also that which is represented as accomplished, even though it be continued
into present time or even be actually still future. The Impetf. denotes, on the
other hand, the beginning, the unfinished, and the continuing, that which is just
happening, which is conceived as in process of coming to pass, and hence,
also, that which is yet future ; likewise also that which occurs repeatedly or
in a continuous sequence in the past (Latin Imperf.). It follows from the
above that the once common designation of the Imperf. as a Future emphasizes
only one side of its meaning. In fact, the use of Indo-Germanic tense-names
for the Semitic tenses, which was adopted by the Syrians under the influence
of the Greek grammarians, and after their example by the Arabs, and finally
by Jewish scholars, has involved many misconceptions. The Indo-Germanic
scheme of three periods of time (past, present, and future) is entirely foreign
to the Semitic tense-idea, which regards an occurrence only from the point of
view of completed or incomplete action. — In the formation of the two tenses
the chief distinction is that in the Perfect the verbal stem precedes and the
indication of the person is added afterwards for precision, while in the
Imperf. the subject, from which the action proceeds or about which a condition
is predicated, is expressed by a prefixed pronoun.
i
126 I'he Verb [§ 47 ^-^
stem-form was not always Bufficlent to express at the same time
differences both of gender and number, the distinction had to be
farther indicated, in several cases, by special afformatives. Cf. the
table, § 40 c.
h 2. The derivation and meaning, both of the preformatives and the
afformatives, can still, in most cases, be recognized.
In theirs* pers. ^i^P?, plur. ^t3p3, N is probably connected with
'3^? , and 3 with «n3 ; here no indication of gender or number by
a special ending was necessary. As regards the vocalization, the
Arabic points to the ground-forms 'dqtul and ndqtul : the ? of the ist
plur. is, therefore, as in the other preformatives, attenuated from a.
The S^ghol of the ist sing, is probably to be explained by the pre-
ference of the K for this sound (cf. §220, but also § 51 i'); according
to Qimhi, it arises from an endeavour to avoid the similarity of sound
between !?bpi< (which is the Babylonian punctuation) and ?bp^, which,
according to this view, was likewise pronounced iqtol}
C The preformative n of the second persons (P't^pn, ground-form
tdqtal, &c.) is, without doubt, connected with the n of nriS, DriS. &c.,
and the afformative "-^ of the 2nd fem. sing. V^pri with the i of the
original feminine form "Jjl^ (see § 32 A). The afformative 1 of the 2nd
masc. plur. l^tDpn (in its more complete form, p , see m) is the sign of
the plural, as in the 3rd pers., and also in the Perfect (§44 a). In
the Imperfect, however, it is restricted in both persons to the
masculine,^ while th*^ afformative '13 (also S) of the 3rd and 2nd plur.
fem. is probably connected with nan eae and HiriS vos (fem.).
d The preformatives of the third persons (' in the masc. ?bp^, ground-
form ydqtid, plur. ^^[^\ ground-form ydqtuM; n in the fem. ^'^k^,
plur, nibopn) have not yet met with any satisfactory explanation.
With n might most obviously be compared the original feminine
1 Cf. § 24 e. In favour of the above view of Qimhi may be \irged the
phonetic orthography l^N (in Pr iS^* B'^N), 2814" (unless, with Perles, SB'S
is to be read), Mi 610, for B?";, and ''B'^N i Ch 2" for '•B'^ (as verse 12). Also
HBtSn Mi 6" is probably for 'INH = 'rn, npQX Is 1012 for ipS^ ; IJDnJN Is 51"
foVTl'lOm"; and conversely SaB'B'^ is'for 'E'B'N = "13^' B'''^'. Similarly, ''Y^''
1 S I4«"'i3 probably for i^B'N or H^B'N; in 2 S 238 na'«i'n ^B''' is, according to
the LXX, an error for n^SB''' = DB'BB'N . In Assyrian also the simple t
corresponds to the Hebrew "• as the preformative of the Impf. Qal.
2 This is also the proper gender of the plural syllable u, vn. In Hebre^^',
indeed, it is used in the 3rd plur. Perfect for both genders, but in the kindred
languages even there only for the masculine, e.g. in Syriac qValu, g^talun,
with the feminine form cftdlen, in Western Aram, q^dlu, fem. <ftdla ; in Arab.
qdtalu, fem. qdtdlnd, Eth. qdtdlu, qdtdld.
§ 47 ^-'0 The Imperfect and its Inflexion 127
ending T\__ of nouns, and of the 3rd fern. sing, perfect. For the
afformatives ' (P) and HJ, see c.
3. The characteristic vowel of the second syllable becomes S^wd e
before tone-bearing afformatives which begin with a vowel, but is
retained (as being in the tone-syllable) before the toneless afformative
nj. Thus : ^!'9Pn, li'^p:, i^'tDjpn (but in pause ^S'bpri, &c.), mbbpn.
Pem. I. The o of the second syllable (as in the inf. constr. and imperat.), f
being lengthened from an original m in the tone-syllable, is only tone-long "^
(§ 9r). Hence it follows that: (a) it is incorrectly, although somewhat
frequently, written plene ; (&) before Maqqeph the short vowel appears as
Qames Jjaiuph, e.g. Dty'anilJI and he wrote there, Jos 8^2 (but cf. also Ex 21",
Jos 18^") ; (c) it becomes S^wd before the tone-bearing afformatives ^ and ^
(see above, e ; but Jerome still heard e.g. iezbuleni for ^3>3r ; cf. ZAW. iv. 83).
^ Quite anomalous are the three examples which, instead of a shortening to^
S'wd, exhibit a long u : Qn ^tDISB'^ Ex i82«, immediately before the principal
pause,but according to Qimhi(ed.JJi«m6. p. i8''),ed.Mant.,Ginsb.,Kittel against
the other editions, with the tone on the ultima ; likewise H^O """I^Dyn'N^
Ru 2^ ; D^lOK'ri (in principal pause) Pr 14'. In the first two cases perhaps
^CISBE'^ and nnyri (for ^I33B'^, &c.) are intended, in virtue of a retrogressive
effect of the pause ; in Pr 14^ D^ICB'n is to be read, with August Miiller.
2. The 0 of the second syllable is to be found almost exclusively with transi- /*
tive verbs middle a, like ?^p. Intransitives middle a and e almost always take
d(Pathah)^ in the impf., e.g.l'n"), }>3")> to couch, 33B', 322'^ to lie domi (1)0^,
*llpi)^ to learn is also originally intransitive = to accustom oneself) ; pli^ ?^3^
to become great (but cf. |3B^ and |3K' imperf. |3B'^ to dwell and to inhabit, 733
imperf. ?i^ to wither) ; also from verbs middle 0, as jbp to be small, the imperf.
has the form |t3p^ .
Sometimes both forms occur together ; those with 0 having a transitive, I
and those with a an intransitive meaning, e.g. "\2fp'' he cuts off, "^2fp'' he is cut
off, i.e. is short; B'pn impf. 0, to overcome. Ex 17" ; impf. a, to be overcome, Jb 14^'*.
More rarely both forms are used without any distinction, e. g. "F]i?^ and T]K'^
he bites, ^Sni and J^bn^ he is inclined (but only the latter with a transitive
meaning = ;ze bends, in Jb 40"). On the a of the impf. of verbs middle and
third guttural, cf. § 64 b ; § 65 b. In some verbs first guttural (§ 63 n),
V"V (§ 67 p), """Q (§ 69 b), and N"D (§ 68 c), and in ]Pi) for yinten from JflJ to give,
instead of « or 5 a movable Sere (originally t) is found in the second syllable.
A trace of these i-imperfects ^ in the ordinary strong verb is probably to be
found in ^3p^*1 2 K 7^, since [013 otherwise only occurs in Qal. We call these
three forms of the imperfect after their characteristic vowel impf. 0, impf. a,
impf. e.
3. For the yd sing. fem. pbpfl ( = tiq-tol), Baer requires in i S 25^^° {yjCri /j
(but read with ed. Mant.,&c. K'HSri). For the 2nd sing. fern. cljtOpri) the form
^ This a is, however, by no means restricted to intransitive strong verbs ;
apart from verbs third guttural (§ 65 b), it is to be found in j^'Q and ]}"]}, and
in many verbs K^D and ''"Q (§§ 69-71).
2 Cf. Barth, 'Das Mmperfekt im Nordsemitischen,' ZDMG. 18S9, p. 177 ff.
128 The Verb [§ 47 1,
m
bbpri is found in Is 57*, Jer 3^, Ez 22*, 23^'^, in every case after the regular
form; but cf. also Ez 26". In Is 171", where the 2nd fern, precedes and
follows, probably '31 pyiin is to be read with Marti for IH^Itn. — For the
ird plur. fern. n3pt3pri we find in Jer 49I1, in pause iriD^Pl (for nanD^ri), and
thrice (as if to distinguish it from the and pars.) the form nJptBp'' with the
preformative "• (as always in Western Aram., Arab., Eth., and Assyr.), in
Gn 30^^, I S 6^*, Dn 8". On the other hand, njpbpri appears in some cases
to be incorrectly used even for the fem. of the 3rd pers. or for the masc. of
the 2nd pers. sing, as njnbtJ'ri Ju 5^8 (where, however, perhaps HDripB'ri is to
be read), and Ob^', for 2nd sing, masc, according to Olshausen a corruption
of nj rb^n -, in Pr i^\ S^ for npri read TXpn as in Jb 392^ ; in Ex 1" read
ilJSIpri with the Samaritan. — In Is 27^1, 28', as also in Jb 171* (if we read
"•713113 with LXX for the 2nd Tllpn), it is equally possible to explain the
form as a plural. This small number of examples hardly justifies our finding
in the above-mentioned passages the remains of an emphatic form of the
Impf., analogous to the Arab. Modus energicus I, with the termination amid.
I For n3 we frequently find, especially in the Pentateuch and mostly
after wdw consecutive, simply ^| nd, e.g. Gn i9^'-38, 37'', Ex i^^i^, 152"', Nu 2f.2,
Ez 32", 16^5 ; in Arab, always nd. According to Elias Levita JK'Ipn
(2 S 13I*) is the only example of this kind in the strong verb. The form
ni'-najni (so also Oimhi and ed. Mant. ; but Baer, Ginsb. n3n33ni) for ninfjni
they were high, Ez 16'*, is irregular, with ■• inserted after the manner of
verbs ]}"]) and l^'J?, § 67 d ; §721; according to Olshausen it is an error caused
by the following form.
VI 4. Instead of the plural forms in ^ there are, especially in the older
books, over 300 forms ^ with the fuller ending P (with NUn paragogi-
cum), always bearing the tone ; cf. § 29 m and § 44 / ; on its retention
before stiffixes, see§ 60 e; also defectively 1^*1^ Ex 2I^^ 2 2^&c. This
usually expresses marked emphasis, and consequently occurs most
commonly at the end of sentences (in the principal pause), in which
case also the (pausal) vowel of the second syllable is generally retained.
Thus there arise full-sounding forms such as P^P?^ they collect, >//• 104^®;
ni?T ^^y tremble, Ex 15"; pVlOK^ri ye shall hear, Dt i"; cf. Ex 34'^
with Zaqeph qa^on, Athnah, and Silluq; Jos 24'*, with Segolta; Is 13^
and 17" with Zaqeph qaton, 17'^ with Athnah and Silluq, 41* after
wdw consec. Without the pause, e.g. ^ ii"^ HK'p P^IT, cf. 4^, Gn
,828.29.30 ff.^ 4^1^ j^^ 22^^ Jos 4« (ri^?^:); Is 8^ 'I'S 9'='','Ru2« (p-^ifp:
and PS**^^) ; Ju 1 1'* after waw consec.
Some of these examples maybe partly due to euphonic reasons, eg. certainlj'
Ex I7"'', Nu i629, 3220, I S 9", I K96, and often, to avoid a hiatus before N or V.
It was, however, the pause especially which exerted an influence on the
restoration of this older and fuller termination (cf. § 159 c, note), as is mani-
fest from Is 26": IK'd^l lin"' }VTn"'"?3 they see not; may they see and become
•• : vrlv ' AT -.-.n
1 [See details in F. B«ttcher, Lehrb., § 930 ; and cf. Driver on i S 2^'.]
§§47«-i'.48a,6] The Imperfect and its Inflexion 129
ashamed. All this applies also to the corresponding forms in the Imperfect
of the derived conjugations.^ In Aramaic and Arabic this earlier }^ (old
Arabic una\ is the regular termination ; but in some dialects of vulgar Arabic
it has also become u.
With an aflBied X we find (in the imperf. Niph'al) xVK'3"' Jer lo'', evidently fl
an error for ^NKT, caused by the preceding kVK'J. — In D^B'b'^ Is 55^ since
D follows, the D is no doubt only due to dittography.
5. Corresponding to the use of Jl for ^ there occurs in the 2nd sing, fem., Q
although much less frequently, the fuller ending p (as in Aram, and Arab. ;
old Arab, ina), also always with the tone, for ^ generally again in the
principal pause, and almost in all cases with retention of the vowel of the
penultima ; thus pi?3iri Ru 28-21, cf. 3<-i8, i S i^* (PliriK'n), Jer 3122, Is 45".
6. On the reappearance in pause of the 0 which had become S*wd in the r)
forms ""p^pri , &c., see above, e ; similarly, the imperfects with a restore this
vowel in pause and at the same time lengthen it (as a tone-vowel) to a, hence,
e.g. ^!5"13n v^^V This influence of the pause extends even to the forms
without afformatives, e.g. ?'']3*1, in pause 7"n3*1. But the fuller forms in tin
and in have the tone always on the ultima, since the vowels u and t in a
closed final syllable never allow of the retraction of the tone.
7. On the numerous instances of passive forms in the imperfect, mostly n
treated as Hoph'al, see § 53 m.
§ 48. Shortening and Lengthening of the Imperfect and
Imperative. The Jussive and Cohortative.
1. Certain modifications which take place in the form of the CI
imperfect, and express invariably, or nearly so, a distinct shade of
meaning, serve to some extent as a compensation for the want of special
forms for the Temjyora relativa and for certain moods of the verb.
2. Along with the usual form of the imperfect, there exists also O
a lengthened form of it (the cohortative), tindL a shortened form (the
jussive)? The former occurs (with few exceptions) only in the ist
person, while the latter is mostly found in the 2nd and 3rd persons,
and less frequently in the 1st person. The laws of the tone, however,
and of the formation of syllables in Hebrew, not infrequently pre-
cluded the indication of the jussive by an actual shortening of the
form ; consequently it often — and, in the imjierfect forms with
aBPonnatives, always — coincides with the ordinary imperfect {indica-
tive) form.
In classical Arabic the difference is almost always evident. That language
distinguishes, besides the indicative yaqtiilu, (a) a subjunctive, ydqliild; {b) a
^ It is to be observed that the Chronicles often omit the Ni'm, where it is
found in the parallel passage in the Books of Kings ; cf. i K 8^8.43 with 2 Cli
529.33. I K i22«, 2 K 116 with 2 Ch II*, 23*.
' The perfect has only one form, since it cannot be used, like the imperfect,
to express mood-relations (see § 106 p).
OOWLXT IT
T30 The Verb [§48e-/
jussive, yaqtul', (c) a double 'energetic' mood of the impf., yaqtuldnna and
ydqtaldn, in pause ydqtuld, the last form thus corresponding to the Hebrew
cohortative.
C 3. The characteristic of the cohortative form is an d ('"'-r^) affixed
to the ist pars. sing, or plur., e.g. '"I?^!?? from /t^pS.' It occurs iu
ahnost r'll conjugations and classes of the strong and weak verb
(except of course in the passives), and this final n__ has the tone
wherever the afformatives 1 and ""-^ would have it. As before these
endings, so also before the n__ cohortative, the movable vowel of the
last syllable of the verbal form becomes o^wd, e.g. in Qal ""JD'^N
/ will observe,, in Pi'el 'Ij^nJi let us break asunder, V' 2'; on •^^R'^?
Is i8< Q^re (cf. also 27*, Ezr 8^\ &c.), see § 10 A; with the KHMbh of
these passages, compare the analogous cases IDIStyS &c., § 4^] g. — On
the other hand, an unchangeable vowel in the final syllable is retained
as tone-vowel before the n._, as (e.g.) in Hiph. '"l'^*?l^* / will praise.
In pause (as before -A and t), the vowel which became ci^wd is restored
as tone-vowel ; thus for the cohortative '"''J^?'^ ^^^ pausal form is
n-ibB?S ^ 5910 ; cf. Gn iS^S Is 41^".
(l The change of H into the obtuse H seems to occur in i S 28", unless,
with Nestle, we are to assume a conflate reading, S^pNI and ITIpNI ; and
with the 3rd pers. \p 20*, in a syllable sharpened by a following Bagei forte
conjunct. ; cf. similar cases of the change of H into the obtuse H in I and
in §§ 73 d, 80 i, 90 i. In tp 20*, however, hSb^'H^ — with suffix — is probably
intended. An H cohort, is also found with the 3rd pers. in Is 5^^ (twice) ;
Ez 23^0, and again in verse 16 according to the Q*re, but in both these cases
without any effect on the meaning. Probably another instance occurs
<
in Jb iii'^, although there nsyn might also, with Qimhi, be regarded as 2nd
masc. For the doubly irregular form nnNlSn Dt 33^* (explained by Olshausen
and Konig as a scribal error, due to a confusion with PNI^n inverse 14), read
niXUn. For '?jriNi3ri Jb 2 2^1 the noun ^JlN^Dri thine increase, might be
meant, but the Masora has evidently intended an imperfect with the ending
aih, instead of H ^ before the suffix, on the analogy of the 3rd sing. fern.
perfect, see § 59 a ; on TlSDm i S 25^*, see § 76 h.
€ The cohortative expresses the direction of the will to an action and
thus denotes especially self-encouragement (in the ist plur. an
exhortation to others at the same time), a resolution or a wish, as
an optative, &c., see § 108.
f 4. The general characteristic of the jussive form of the imperfect
is rapidity of pronunciation, combined with a tendency to retract
* Probably this d goes back to the syllable an, which in Arabic (see above,
Rem. to 6) is used for the formation of the 'energetic' mood, and in Hebrew
(see the footnote to § 58 t) often stands before suffixes.
I'
§ 48 g-i^ Shortening and Lengthening of Impej-fect 131
the tone from the final syllable, in order by that means to express
the urgency of the command in the very first syllable. This
tendency has, in certain forms, even caused a material shortening of
the termination of the word, so that the expression of the command
appears to be concentrated on a single syllable. In other cases,
however, the jussive is simply marked by a shortening of the vowel of
the second syllable, without its losing the tone, and very frequently
(see above, h) the nature of the form does not admit of any alteration.
It is not impossible, however, that even in such cases the jussive
in the living language was distinguished from the indicative by a
change in the place of the tone.
In the strong verb the jussive differs in form from the indicative g
only in Hiph'U (juss. T'|?P!, ind. ''''tpp!), and similarly in the weak verb,
wherever the imperfect indicative has i in the second syllable, e. g.
from 2K*J impf. Hiph. n^En\ juss. atJ'i^ ; from WO, ri^»^^ and nD> ; also
in Qal of the verbs Vy and ^"V, as rito>, ind. rao^; i??.^, ind. h^y^; in all
conjugations of verbs T\"7, so that the rejection {apocope) of the ending
n^^ in Qal and Hiph. gives rise to monosyllabic forms, with or
without a helping vowel under the second radical, e.g. Qal ind. nT>3^,
juss. ?5^ ; Hiph. ind. i^^T-, juss. ?2.'; ; and in the Pi'el "^V. from the
indie, n-ijf^ (called apocopated imperfects). But almost all ' the plural
forms of the jussive coincide with those of the indicative, except that
the jussive excludes the fuller ending P. Neither do the forms of the
2nd sing, fem., as v''t3p'?, '•niJSri, y'^'^, Sec, admit of any change in
the jussive, nor any forms, whether singular or plural, to which suffixes
<
are attached, e. g. ''3n''Ciri as ind. Jer 38'^ as jussive Jer 41^.
The meaning of the jussive is similar to that of the cohortative, h
except that in the jussive the command or with is limited almost
exclusively to the 2nd or 3rd pers. On special uses of the jussive,
e.g. in hypothetical sentences (even in the ist pers.), see § 109 h.
5. The imperative, in accordance with its other points of connexion i
with the imperfect in form and meaning, admits of a similar lengthening
(by n___j Arab, imper. energicus, with the ending -dnna or -dn, in pause
-a) and shortening. Thus in Qal of the strong verb, the lengthened
form of ^toK' guard is n'lDK's (^^/ym^rd, cf. ^ijOj? qUTi, § 46 d); atS|, nnw
Jer 49"; 2y^, nnDK' lie down; V^^, 'IVO^ Iiear, in lesser pause niDK'
^ Only in 1st plur. do we find a few shortened forms, as "(SB'S i S 14'*',
parallel with cohortatives ; and N"ip Is 41^ K'th.
2 On the reading mip*<i' (i. e. samara, according to the Jewish grammarians),
required by the Masora in \p 86*, 119'*'^ (cf. also Is 38'*, and ^J^DC f 16'), see
§ 9 u ; on HDvO, Ju 9^ K'lh., see § 46 e.
K 2
132 The Verb [§§ 48 h, i, 49 a
Dnp"; in Niph'al ny^l^n Gn 21^'. Cf., however, also -Tjar? sdl,
Gn 25='^ notwithstanding the impf. "130^ ; naij; Jb 33^ (cf. ^3"]y Jer 46=),
hut impf. t^T,.; '"ISO*? coZZec<, Nu ii^" (for 'DK cf. § 63 Z and the plural
^SDN), but 2nd masc. ^DN ; n"J^3 >//■ 141^ Barth (see above, § 471
note) finds in these forms a trace of old imperfects in i, cf. § 63 n.
On the other hand, nzi"]i5 ^ ep^** (also Imperat. 31p Lv 9^, &c.), but
impf. ^lip^ Without n, we have the form ^^ go, Nu2 3'^ Ju 19'^
2 Ch 25'^ The form 70\> in pause becomes '"iptap, the form bttp
becomes '"I??!?) c- g- '"^^H^ ^^^ SS'^'- But also without the pause we find
Tiy\% Ju 98 ir«</i. and nsifif v. 26' Z«<A., on which see § 46 e. On
the other hand HTJl, HDK'Si, ITiy, '"l^l^n Is 32" are to be explained as
aramaizing forms of the 2nd plur. fem. ; also for ^T|n v. 1 1 read *^']'m,
and for ClSip v. 12 read nYSD.
h The shortened imperative is found only in verbs T^T?, e.g. in Pi'el
y\ from n?a. The shade of meaning conveyed by the imperatives
with n__is not always so perceptible as in the cohortative forms of the
imperfect, but the longer form is frequently emphatic, e. g. D^P rise uj),
nop up ! \^ give, njri give up !
I Rem. The form T\^''\ for nyi, best attested in Pr 24" (where it is taken
by the Masora as imperat., not as infin., ny'l) is evidently due to the influence
of the n which follows it in close connexion (so Strack, on the analogy of
Jb 31^) ; for other examples of this change of a to S*ghol, see above, under d,
§ 73 d, and § 80 i. On the other hand, it is doubtful whether T\2l1 Ju 9^9 (from
TdX) is intended for n31 and not rather for the common form of the
T T-' T ->
imperative Pi'el HjII. In favour of the former explanation it may be urged
that the imperative nXV (from NJf) follows immediately after ; in favour of
the latter, that the ending t\~ , with imperatives of verbs H"/, is not found
elsewhere, and also that here no guttural follows (as in Pr 24^*).
§ 49. The Perfect and Imperfect with Wdw Consecutive.
a 1. The use of the two tense-forms, as is shown more fully in the
Syntax (§§ 106, 107, cf. above, § 47, note on a), is by no means
restricted to the expression of the past or future. One of the most
striking peculiarities in the Hebrew consecution of tenses ' is the
phenomenon that, in representing a series of past events, only the first
^ The other Semitic languages do not exhibit this peculiarity, excepting
the Phoenician, the most closely related to Hebrew, and of course the
Moabitish dialect of the AfeJa' inscription, which is practically identical with
Old Hebrew. It also appears in the inscription of "13T of Hamath (cf.
Noldeke, ZA. 1908, p. 379) where we find H^ NtJ'XI and I lifted up my hand,
*33yM and he answered me, after a perfect of narration.
§ 49 i-d] Perf. and Imperf. with Waw Consecutive 133
verb stands in the perfect, and the narration is continued in the
imperfect. Conversely, the representation of a series of future events
begins with the imperfect, and is continued in the perfect. Thus in
2 K 2o\ In those days was Hezekiah sick unto death (perf.), and
Isaiah . . . came (imperf.) to him, and said (imperf.) to him, &c. On
the other hand, Is 7", the Lord shall bring (imperf.) upon thee . . .
days, &.C., 7**, and it shall come to 2)ass (perf. H^HI) in that day . . .
This progress in the sequence of time, is regularly indicated by b
a pregnant and (called waw consecutive^), which in itself is really only
a variety of the ordinary waw copulative, but which sometimes (in the
imperf.) appears with a different vocalization. Further, the tenses
connected by waw consecutive sometimes undergo a change in the tone
and consequently are liable also to other variations.
2. The waw consecutive of the imperfect is (a) pronounced with c
Pathuh and a I) age} fort'} in the next letter, as TOp)] and he killed;
before N of the 1st pers. sing, (according to § 22 c) with Qames, as
bb\)^y and I killed. Exceptions are, ^E?!?^1 Ez 16'" according to the
Dikduke ha-famim, § 71 ; also ^'"inntoK"!. 2 S i'" according to Qimhi ;
but in Ju 6^ ^.J^lt should be read according to Baer, and '^^^ in both
places in Ju 2o^ Dages forte is always omitted in the preformative
^j in accordance with § 20 m.
(b) When a shortening of the imperfect form is possible (cf. § 48 g), d
it takes effect, as a rule (but cf. § 51 n), after waw consec, e.g. in
Hiphil b;?P!l (§53 n). The tendency to retract the tone from the
final syllable is even stronger after waw consec. than in the jussive.
The throwing back of the tone on to the penultima (conditional upon
its being an open syllable with a long vowel, § 29 a), further involves
the greatest possible shortening of the vowel of the ultima, since the
vowel then comes to stand in a toneless closed syllable, e.g. D'lp^, juss.
^ This name best expresses the prevailing syntactical relation, for by waw
consecutive an action is always represented as the direct, or at least temporal
consequence of a preceding action. Moreover, it is clear from the above examples,
that the waw consecutive can only be thus used in immediate conjunction with
the verb. As soon as waw, owing to an insertion (e. g. a negative), is separated
from the verb, the imperfect follows instead of the perfect consecutive, the
perfect instead of the imperfect consecutive. The fact that whole Books (Lev.,
Num., Josh., Jud., Sam., a Kings, Ezek., Ruth, Esth., Neb., 2 Chron.) begin
with the imperfect consecutive, and others (Exod., i Kings, Ezra) with waw
copulative, is taken as a sign of their close connexion with the historical Books
now or originally preceding them. Cf., on the other hand, the independent
beginning of Job and Daniel. It is a merely superficial description to call
the waw consecutive by the old-fashioned name waw conversive, on the ground
that it iilways converts the meaning of the respective tenses into its
opposite, i.e. according to the old view, the future into the preterite, and
vice versa.
134 '^^^ ^^'^^ [§ 49 «-*
Dp', with wdw consec. DI^Jl anci Ae arose (§ 67 ?i and x, § 68 c?, § 69 p,
§ 71. § 72 < and aa, § 736).'
f^' In ih.Q first pers. sing, alone the retraction of the tone and even the
reducing of the long vowel in the final syllable {d to o, i to e, and then
to 0 and e) are not usual.^at least according to the Masoretic punctuation,
and the apocope in verbs n"? occurs more rarely ; e.g. always DIpKI (or
Dp^l, a merely orthographic difference) and I arose; Hiph. ^'^\^^\
(but generally written Dp^,\, implying the pronunciation wd'dqem,
as Dp?^,t implies wadqum); ^^1^}^ and I saw, more frequently than
N'lKI , §75^. On the other hand, the form with final n__ is often used in
the 1st pers. both sing, and plur., especially in the later books, e. g.
r\nbf^\ and I sent, Gn 32^ 41", 43^', Nu 8" (n3nN\, as in Ju 6«, i S 2^8,
and often, probably a sort of compensation for the lost j) ; Ju 6^°,
12', 2 s 22^*, f 3«, 7^ 90", rI9^^ Jb I^«^ 19^ ez f^, s^ 9^
Neh 2", 5"•'■'^ 6", 13'-^'"^ '•, &c. — Sometimes, as in \^3^, with a certain
emphasis of expression, and probably often, as in Ju lo^^ •''V • **il
before N, for euphonic reasons. In Is 8^ HTyXI^ may haA'^e been
originally intended ; in yJA 73^^ 'nxi^ and in Jb 30^* ^^^\. In Ez 3^ read
nbaxi or n^Dxi.
T -.• : I T T : I T
,/ This O is in meaning a strengthened wdw copulative, and resembles in pro-
nunciation the form which is retained in Arabic as the ordinary copula (tea).'
The close connexion of this wd with the following consonant, caused the latter
in Hebrew to take DageS, especially as a could not have been retained in an
open syllable. Cf. nji)3, ni33, lltS? (for nJ3p\ where the prepositions 2 and p
and the particle 3, are closely connected with HD in the same way (§ 102 k).
if The retraction of the tone also occurs in such combinations, as in HtS? (for
n73? § 102 I). — Tl.e identity of many consecutive forms with jussives of the
same conjugation must not mislead us into supposing an intimate relation
between the moods. In the consecutive forms the shortening of the vowel
(and the retraction of the tone) seems rather to be occasioned solely by the
strengthening of the preformative syllable, while in the jussives the shorten-
ing (and retraction) belongs to the character of the form.
/j 3. The counterpart of wdw consecutive of the imjperfect is wdw
consecutive of the perfect, by means of which perfects are placed as
^ The plural forms in p also occur less frequently after wdw consecutive ; cf.,
however, p3^1^1 Ju 8^, iii», Am 6», Ez 44*, Dt 4", s^". The 2nd fem. sing, in
p . never occurs after wdw consecutive.
''■ In the 1st plur. 1^0^31 Neh 4* is the only instance in which the vowel
remains unreduced (cf. nitTJI, i.e. 1\m\, 4' A'«</i. ; Q^re nB'il). On the
treatment of the tone in the imperfect, imperative, and infinitive Niph'al, see
§ .SI "•
* In usage the Hebrew icdw does duty for the Arabic /a (wato apoilosis, see
§ 143 d) as well as wd.
§ 49 »-™] Perf. and Imperf. with Waw Consecutive 135
the sequels in the future to preceding actions or events regarded as
incomplete at the time of speaking, and therefore in the imperfect,
imperative, or even participle. This wavu is in form an ordinary wdv)
cojmlative, and therefore shares its various vocalization (1, 1, J, as 2 K y'',
and 1); e.g. 'TJ})., after an imperfect, &c., and so it happens ■= and it
will happen. It has, however, the effect, in certain verbal forms, of
shifting the tone from the penultiina, generally on to the ultima, e.g.
^FlD^v' I went, consecutive form ^J???,9] and I will go, Ju i^, where it is
co-ordinated with another perfect consecutive, which again is the con-
secutive to an imperative. See further on this usage in § 112.
As innumerable examples show, tlie Qaines of the first syllable is retained I
in the strong perf. consec. Qal, as formerly before the tone, so now in the
secondary tone, and therefore necessarily takes Metheg. On the other hand,
the 0 of the second syllable in verbs middle oupon losing the tone necessarily
becomes v, e.g. J^i'D'") Ex iS^^.
' ° T : T IT : J
The shifting forward of the tone after the waw consecutive of the perfect is, a
however, not consistently carried out. It is omitted — (a) always in the
istpers. pL, e. g. IJIIB'^I Gn 34^^ ; (6) regularly in Hiph'il before the afiformatives
n and ^ see § 53 r; and (c) in many cases in verbs N"? and n"?, almost
always in the ist sing, of N"P (Jer 29^*), and in n"p if the vowel of the
2nd syllable is i, Ex 176, 26*-^-''-'^'>^-, Ju 626, &c., except in Qal (only Lv 248,
before K) and the 2nd sing. masc. of Hiph'il-forms before N, Nu 20*, Dt 201^,
I S 15S, 2 K 13" ; similarly in Pi'el before X, Ex 25'*, Jer 27*. On the other
hand the tone is generally moved forward if the second syllable has e (in
«'6 Gn 2710 &c., in n"b Ex 40*, Jer 33«, Ez 327) ; but cf. also nS^JI Lv igi^"
and frequently, always before the counter-tone, Jo4''i, ^ ig^*.^ With a, in
the penultima the form is DNB'J'! Is 14*, and probably also HN'Jpl Jer 2', 3I*,
I S 10^ with little T*li!=a, a postpositive accent. .
But before a following N the ultima mostly bears the tone on phonetic /
grounds, e.g. "^K nSSI Gn 6^% Ex 3I8, Zc 6'° (by the side of flNfl), &c. (cf.,
however, niO?), before N, Gn 17", Jer f, Ez 362^) ; "HX n''3ri^ Ju 6", cf.
Ex 25", LV245 (but also -nS "•rT'W Lv 25"). L'kewise, before H, Am 8', and y,
e.g. Gn 2610, 2712, Lv 26» (cf., however, vbv ^nNliJI, Ez 3821) ; on verbs V"V,
see § 67 ft: and ee.
(d) The tone always keeps its place when such a perfect stands in pause, VI
e.g. ny^K'l Dt 6", 11'^; mOXI is 14*, Ju 4* ; sometimes even in the lesser
pause, as Dt 2^8, Ez 3^6, i S 29^ (where see Driver), with Zaqeph qaton ; and
frequently also immediately before a tone-syllable (according to § 29 e), as in
n3 nn3K'''i Dt 17", Ez 14" 17" Am i^-^o-w—but also Rn nptj'm Dt 21I1, 23".
AT T : - T : ' ' -tit' .,. T ■;_,., .
2419, I K 8«.
^ The irregularity in the tone of these perfects manifestly results from
following conflicting theories, not that of Ben Asher alone.
136 The Verb [§ 50 a~f
§ 60. The Participle.
a 1. Qal has both an active participle, called Poel from its form (''J?^),
and a passive, PaM (SlVS).'
Pa'ul is generally regarded as a survival of a passive of Qal, which still
exists throughout in Arabic, but has been lost in Hebrew (see, however, § 52 e),
just as in Aramaic the passives of Pi'el and Hiph'il are lost, except in the
participles. But instances of the form qutldl are better regarded as remnants
of the passive participle Qal (see §525), so that p^VQ must be considered as
an original verbal noun ; cf. Barth, Nominalbildung, p. 173 S.
h 2. In the intransitive veibs mid. e and mid. 0, the form of the
participle active of Qal coincides in form with the 3rd sing, of the
perfect, e. g. |K'J sleeping, from |K'J ; "liS^ (only orthographical ly different
from the perf. ">i^) fearing; cf. the formation of the participle in
Niph'al, § 51 a. On the other hand, the participle of verbs mid. a
takes the form «'t?'p (so even from the transitive ^<p,'^ to hate, part. NpB').
The o of these forms has arisen through an obscuring of the d, and is
therefore unchangeable, cf. § 9 5". The form 7^1^ (with a changeable
Qames in both syllables), which would correspond to the forms W\
and "li^, is only in use as a noun, cf. § 84"/. The formation of the
participle in Pi'el, Hiph'il, and Hithpa'el follows a different method.
C 3. Participles form their feminine ('"'^^ip or ri^^I^) and their plural
like other nouns (§ 80 e, § 84" r, », § 94).
(i Rem. I. From the above it follows, that the d of the form JK'"' is lengthened
from a, and consequently changeable (e.g. fern. n3tJ'^) ; and that the 6 of ?U\> on
the other hand is obscured from an unchangeable d.i In Arabic the verbal
adjective of the form qatil corresponds to the form qatel, and the part, qdtil to
qotel. In both cases, therefore, the e of the second syllable is lengthened from t,
and is consequently changeable (e. g. ?tpp ^ plur. Dyt3p ; 133 , constr. pi. ''133).
g 1]''Din ^ 16^, instead of the form qotel, is an anomaly; it is possible, how-
ever, that Tj^JDin (incorrectly written fully) is intended (cf. 3''3b 2 K S'^i), or
even the imperfect Hiph'il of T]lp^. The form f)D' in Is 29^*, 38^ appears to
stand for f)D*, but most probably the Masora here (as certainly in 5]^Di'' Ec 1")
intends the 3rd sing, imperf. Hiph., for which the better form would be
^DV ; b"'3iX I Ch 27^", being a proper name and a foreign word, need not
be considered. — n3N (constr. state of *13N), with d in the second syllable,
occurs in Dt 32^8 (cf. moreover, § 65 d). On obin Is 41' (for D?^n), see § 29/.
J 2. A form like the pass. ptcp. Pa'vil, but not to be confused with it, is
sometimes found from intransitive verbs, to denote an inherent quality, e. g.
]^r2ii faithful ; ^^2^ desperate, Jer 15'^ &c. ; TOD3 trustful, Is 26^ t/^ 112''; Q^vy
T ^ T *■ - T T
Strong; 1^35?' drunken, Is 51^^' ; and even from transitive verbs, T^PIX handling,
Ct 3^ ; 1^31 mindful, ^ 103"; yi*!^ knowing, Is 53* ; cf, § 84« m.
' The constr. st. DN3 in the formula niH"' DNJ, the word (properly the
whispering) of the Lord, &c., is always written defectively.
* Cf. Voilers, 'Das Qatil-partizipium,' in ZA. 1903, p. 313 ff.
§ 51 a-e] Niph'al l^J
B. Vekba Debivativa, ok Debited Conjugations.
§ 51. NipKal}
1. The essential characteristic of this conjugation consists in a «
prefix^ to the stem. This exists in two forms: (a) the (probably
original) prepositive na, as in the Hebrew perfect and participle,
although in the strong verb the a is always attenuated \ol: ?Cp!l for
original nd-qdtal, participle ''?!??, infinitive absolute sometimes ''itipJ;
(6) the (later) proclitic in (as in all the forms of the corresponding
Arabic conjugation vii. 'inqcUdld), found in the imperfect ^pi?^ for
yinqdtel, in the imperative and infinitive construct, with a secondary
n added, ^^^*} (for hinqdtel), and in the infinitive absolute bbj^n The
inflexion of Kijyh'al is perfectly analogous to that of Qal.
The features of Niph'al are accordingly in the perfect and participle the U
prefixed Nim, in the imperative, infinitive, and imperfect, the Dages in the
first radical. These characteristics hold good also for the weak verb. In
the case of an initial guttural, which, according to § 22 b, cannot take Dages
forte, the omission of the strengthening invariably causes the lengthening of
the preceding vowel (see § 63 h).
2. As regards its meaning, Niph'al bears some resemblance to the C
Gieek middle voice, in being — (a) primarily reflexive of Qal, e.g. )^D??
to thrust oneself {against), ""P^? to take heed to (yaeself, (fivXda-a-ea-dai,
V1D3 to hide oneself, i'WJ to redeem oneself; cf. also n||y3 to answer for
oneself. Equally characteristic of Niph'al is its frequent use to express
emotions which react upon the mind ; DD? to trouble oneself, ^3^^3 to
sigh {to bemoan oneself, cf. 6hvp^a-6ai, lamentari, contristari) ; as well
as to express actions which the subject allows to happen to himself,
or to have an effect upon himself {Niph'al tolerativum), e. g. tJ'liJ to
search, to inquire, Niph. to allow oneself to he inquired of, Is 65^
Ez I4^ &c.; so the Niph. of Nif^ to find, "Ip^ to warn, to correct,
Jer 6*, 31'', &c.
(6) It expresses reciprocal or mutual action, e.g. IB"^ to spea^, Niph. (l
to speak to one another; t^SB* to judge, Niph. to go to law with one
another; YT, to counsel, Niph. to take counsel, cf. the middle and
deponent verbs fiovXevea-OaL {Y^^^}, fiaxio-Oai (Dnp3), altercari, luctari
(njf3 to strive with one another) proeliari.
(c) It has also, like Hithpael (§ 54 /) and the Greek middle, the C
meaning of the active, with the addition of to oneself {sibi), for one-
^ Cf. A. Rieder, De linguae Hebr. verbis, quae vocanlur derivata nifal et hilpacl,
Gumbinnen (Progr. des Gymn.), 1884, a list of all the strong Niph'al forma
(81) andHithpa'el forms (36) in the Old Testament; and especially M. Lambert,
'L'emploi du Nifal en Hebreu,' REJ. 41, 196 ff.
» See Philippi in ZDMG-. 1886, p. 650, and Earth, ibid. 1S94, p. 8 f.
138 The Verb [§51/-*
self, e. g. ?i<f 3 to ask (something) for oneself (i S 20^-^, Neh 13®), cf.
alTovfxai ae tovto, ivSvcraaOaL ;(tTaiva, to put on (oneself) a tunic.
J {d) In consequence of a looseness of thought at an early period of
the language, Niph'al comes finally in many cases to represent the
passive^ of Qal, e. g. y>'\ to bear, Niph. to he horn; 1?iJ to hury, Niph.
to be buried. In cases where Qal is intransitive in meaning, or is not
used, JVi])h'al appears also as the passive of Pi'el and Hiph'il, e. g. "l??
to he in honour, Pi'el to honour, Niph. to be honoured (as well as Pu'al
n33) ; nns Pi'gl to conceal, Hiph. to destroy, Niph. passive of either.
In such cases I^ipKal may again coincide in meaning with Qal (n?n
Qal and Niph. to be ill) and even take an accusative.
cr Examples of denominatives are, "\3'\l to be born a male. Ex 34^' (from *13T ;
but probably "I3i}n should here be read) ; 33?3 cordatum fieri, Jb ii^' (from
33p cor) ; doubtless also n333 to obtain children, Gn iC^, 30^.
h The older grammarians were decidedly wrong in representing Niph'al simply
as the passive of Qal ; for Niph'al has (as the frequent use of its imperat. shows),
in no respect the character of the other passives, and in Arabic a special
conjugation ('inqdtdld) corresponds to it with a passive of its own. Moreover,
the forms mentioned in § 52 e point to a differently formed passive of Qal. —
The form vNJi Is 59^, La 4", is not to be regarded as a passive of Niph'al,
but with KSnig and Cheyne as a, forma mixta, in the sense that the punctuators
intended to combine two optional readings, IPNiS, perf. Niph., and V^^.3, perf.
Pu'al [cf. also Wright, Compar. Gramm., p. 224]. Although the passive use of
Niph'al was introduced at an early period, and became tolerably common, it
is nevertheless quite secondary to the reflexive use.
t Rem. I. The infin. absol. PIOpJ is connected in form with the perfect, to
which it bears the same relation as 7it3i? to P^p in Qal, the 6 in the second
syllable being obscured from an original a. Examples are, ^1033 Gn 31'";
Dnp3 Ju 11^*; i'NK'3 i S 2o«-^^ all in connexion with the perfect.
/i7 Examples of the form Pbi^H (in connexion with imperfects) are, ]h^T\ Jer
32*; ^bNH Lv 7I*; once B'l'IX Ez 14^, where, perhaps, the subsequent tJ'"}"|JN
has led to the substitution of K for n.— Moreover, the form bt^]^T} is not
infrequently used also for the infin. absol., « e.g. Ex 22*, Nu 15^1, Dt 4^8, i K
2o3^ On the other hand, f\'}iT)3 should simply be read for the wholly
abnormal e)'"n3n3 ip 68' (commonly explained as being intended to correspond
in sound with the subsequent fl^Jn, but probably a ' forma mixta ', combining
the readings PjlDHp and ^"133).
1 Cf. Halfmann, Beitrdge sur Syntax der hebrdischen Sprache, 1. Stiick.Wittenb.,
1888, 2. St. 1892 (Gymn.-Programm), statistics of the Niph'al (Pu'al, Hoph'al,
and qatul) forms at different periods of the language, for the purpose of
ascertaining the meaning of Niph. and its relation to the passive ; the selection
of periods is, however, very questionable from the standpoint of literary
criticism. ,
2 But, like 7bi?n, only in connexion with imperfects, except Jer 7^ Earth
is therefore right in describing {Nominalbildung, p. 74) both forms as later
analogous formations (in addition to the original Semitic ^iCj??), intended
to assimilate the infinitive to the imperfect which it strengthens.
i
§§ 51 ^-p. 52 fl] NipJial 139
Elision of the T\ after prepositions is required by the Masora in vK'UZl Pr /
24" (for '3n3), aina Ez 2615 and Pipyn La 2" ; also in verbs n'6 Ex lo^
(nijy';^.) ; 34'''*, Dt 31", is i" (niNl'p.); in verbs Vy Jb 2,f° Oi^<.^)■ It is, how-
ever, extremely doubtful whether the infin. Qal of tlie K'^thihh is not rather
intended in all these examples; it certainly is so in La 2^^, cf. ^ 6i'.
2. Instead of the Sere in the ultima of the imperfect, Paihah often occurs ///,
in pause, e.g. ?Da*1 Gn 21*; cf. Ex 31", 2812!^ (with final tJ*) ; 17^^ (with
p); Jon 1^ (with D) ; see § 29 q. In the 2nd and 3rd plur. fern. Pathah pre-
dominates, e.g. n3"1D?ri Is 65^^ ; Sere occurs only in njJyJj] Ru i'^ from pJJ^
and hence, with loss of the doubling, for n33yn • cf. even HSCNn Is 60*.—
With Nun paragogicum (see § 47 m) in the 2nd and 3rd plur. masc. are found,
fnS^'', pon^n, &c., in pause p>n2\ rnmm, &c. ; but Jb 19*' (cf. 24^*)
3. When the imperfect, the infinitive (in e), or the imperative is followed Jl
in close connexion by a monosyllable, or by a word with the tone on the first
syllable, the tone is, as a rule (but cf. B'"'S< p?f<*l Gn 32^^*), shifted back from
the ultima to the penultima, while the ultima, which thus loses the tone,
takes S^gm instead of Sere; e.g. HZl bph) Ez 331'; i^ Tny>1 Gn 25"; in the
imperative, 13*. — So always ^p "iptJ'n (since tjp counts as one syllable) Gn
246, &c., cf. I S 192; and even with Pathah in the ultima, yVH 3iyri Jb 18*
(but cf. D^n5x nnysi 2 S 21"). Although in isolated cases (e.g. Gn 322*, Ezr
S^) the tone is not thrown back, in spite of a tone-syllable following, the
retraction has become usual in certain forms, even when tlie next word
begins with a toneless syllable ; especially after 1 consec, e. g. "1XB'*1 Gn 7^';
Dn?|1 Nu 21^ and frequently, ipif*1 25*; and always so in the imperative
■HOE'n Ex 2321, Jb 36", and (before Metheg of the counter-tone) Dt 24*, 2 K 6».
On the avoidance of pausal-forms in the imperative (Am 2^* with Silluq, Zc
2" with Athnuh), and imperfect (Pr 24*, &c.), see § 29 0, and note ; on the
other hand, always toiJTiin Db?3^, &c.
In the imperative, ^2f3p3, for IJfDpn, with the rejection of the initial n O
occurs in Is 43', and in Joel 4^1 in pause ^V3p3 (cf. ^173 Jer 50^) ; but in these
examples either the reading or the explanation is doubtful. The 2nd sing.
imperat. of ySK'i is always (with H paragogicum) ''p HyDB'n swear to me,
Gn 21", &c. (also ""b riV^Wn Gn 47", i S 30I6).
4. For the ist sing, of the imperfect, the form /Pi?K is as frequent as Ptpi^X, W
e- g- K^l'IfrJ -f shall be inquired of, Ez 14*; V2fii I will swear, Gn 21"^*; cf. 16*,
Nu 23'^, Ez 2C/56j and so always in the cohortative, e. g. HOpSX / tcill avenge
me, Is 1"; cf. I S 12'', Ez 26^, and in the impf. Niph. of ro (§ 69 0- The
Babylonian punctuation admits only i under the preformative of the ist
person.
§ 52. Pi'el and Pu'al.
1. The characteristic of this conjugation consists in the strengthening ^
of the middle radical. From the simple stem qatal (cf. § 43 b) the
form ^isp (cf. the Arabic conj. 11. qdttdld) would naturally follow as
I40 The Verb [§526-*
the perfect of the active {Ptel). The Palhah of the first syllable is,
however, with one exception (see m), always attenuated to i in the
perfect. In the second syllable, d has been retained in the majority of
cases, so that the conjugation should more correctly be called Ptal ; but
very frequently ' this d also is attenuated to I, which is then regularly
lengthened to e, under the influence of the tone. Cf. in Aram. ?t3i5 ;
but in Biblical Aramaic almost always ?^\^. On the three cases in
which d before a final "\ or D has passed into S^ghol, see below, I. —
Hence, for the ^rd sing. masc. perfect, there arise forms like 13N,
l^b, E'^p; «]"^3, ^3^, &c. — Before afformatives beginning with a con-
sonant, however, d is always retained, thus ^f^\?, OriptSj?, ^3pi£)[?, &c.
In the infinitives {absol. 7^\^, obscured from qattdl ; constr. ?t2i?),
imperfect (p^?^), imperative {>W), and participle (p^PJ^) the original
d of the first syllable reappears throughout. The vocal S^wd of the
preformatives is weakened from a short vowel; cf. the Arabic
imperfect yHqdttU, participle miiqattU.
b The passive {Pu'al) is distinguished by the obscure vowel u, or
very rarely 6, in the first syllable, and d (in pause a) always in the
second. In Arabic, also, the passives are formed throughout with il
in the first syllable. The inflexion of both these conjugations is
analogous to that of Qal.
C Rem. I. The preformative D, which in the remaining conjugations also is
the prefix of the participle, is probably connected with the interrogative or
indefinite (cf.§ 37) pronoun ""DgMis? quicunque {fevn. i.e. neuter, nD);cf. §856.
U 2. The Dages forte, which according to the above is characteristic of the
whole of Pi'el and Pu'al, is often omitted (independently of verbs middle guttural,
§ 64 d) when the middle radical has S'wd iinder it (cf. § 20 m), e. g. JlVOp for
nn^K' Ez 1 7" ; ^n^pa 2 Ch 1 51^ (but in the imperatire always ^K'l^a i "S 28',
&c.), and so always in ibpH praise. The vocal character of the .S^wd under
the litera dagessanda is sometimes in such cases (according to § 10 h) expressly
emphasized by its taking the form of a Hateph, as in Jinp? Qn 2^, with
owing to the influence of the preceding u, cf. '"wVQ for vVS, &c. ; Gn 9^*, Ju
16'*. In the imperfect and participle the S^wd under the preformatives {Hateph-
Pathah under N in the ist sing, imperfect) serves at the same time as a character-
istic of both conjugations (Gn 261*').
€ 3. According to the convincing suggestion of BCttcher^ (Ausfilhrliches
Lehrbuch, § 904 ff. and § 1022), many supposed perfects of Pu'al are in reality
^ So in all verbs which end in Nun, and in almost all which end in Lamed
(Olsh. p. 538). Earth is probably right in supposing {ZDMO. 1894, p. i ff.)
that the vowels of the strengthened perfects have been influenced by the
imperfect.
* As Mayer Lambert obsei-ves, the same view was already expressed by Ibn
Ganah (see above, § 3 d) in the Kitab el-luma', p. 161. Cf. especially Barth,
'Das passive Qal und seine Participien,' in the Festschrift zum Juhildum Hildes-
heimer (Berlin, 1890), p. 145 ff.
§ 52/-A] Pi'el and Pu'al 141
passives of Qal. He reckons as such all those perfects, of which the Pi'el (which
ought to express the corresponding active) is either not found at all, or only
(as in the case of H?^) with a different meaning, and whicli form their
imperfect from another conjugation, generally Niph'al. Such perfects are the
quttal form of the stems b^H {imperfect ^ijIXn Is i""), B^Dn, FI^D, *1^\ "IX\
npb, nny, b:V^^ SIDK', •IEK'. Earth (see below) adds to the list the apparent
Pu'al-perfects o{ IDN, 113, HJT, 3Sn, niD, HBi, 2]]], nK'V, HST, and of verbs
with middle 1 (hence with m of the first syllable lengthened to o), jnn, n*in
Jb 33 [HIT, see § 6; m], yiT, p">T, fjlD, DID, N^p, eilb' ; also the infinitives
absolute ijnl ilH Is 59'^ In these cases there is no need to assume any
error on the part of the punctuators ; the sharpening of the second radical
may have taken place in order to retain the characteristic ic of the first
syllable (cf. Ai'ab. qutild as passive of qatMa), and the a of the second syllable
is in accordance with the vocalization of all the other passives (see § 39/).
Cf, §525 and § 53 u.
2. The fundamental idea of PHel, to which all the various shades f
of meaning in this conjugation may be referred, is to busy oneself
eagerly with the action indicated by the stem. This intensifying of
the idea of the stem, which is outwardly expressed by the strengthening
of the second radical, appears in individual cases as — (a) a strengthen-
ing and repetition of the action (cf. the intensive and iterative nouns with
the middle radical strengthened, § 84^),' e. g. PDif <o laugh, Pi'el to jest,
to make sport (to laugh repeatedly) ; b^^ to ask, Pi'el to beg ; hence
when an action has reference to many, e. g. "l?fj to bury (a person)
Gn 23'', Pi'el to bury (many) i K 11'*, and often so in Syr. and Arab.
Other varieties of the intensive and iterative meaning are, e. g. nns to
open,Vi'e\ to loose; "IQD to count, Pi'el to recount : [cf. 2F\^, 3K^n, :]?n,
NQ1, ben, iyssn; nnsD nnol
The eager pursuit of an action may also consist in urging and g'
causing others to do the same. Hence Fi'el has also — (6) a causative
sense (like Hiph'il), e. g. ^P^ to learn, Pi'el to teach. It may often be
turned by such phrases as toj^ermit to, to declare or hold as [the declara-
tive PHel), to help to, e. g. n*n to cause to live, P'jiV to declare innocent,
'^T. to help in child-bearing.
(c) Denominatives (see § 38 b) are frequently formed in this conju- h
gation, and generally express a being occupied with the object
expressed by the noun, either to form or to make use of it, e. g. ]}\>
to make a nest, to nest (from |p), isy to throw dust, to dust (from "l?V)>
1 Analogous examples, in which the strengthening of a letter has likewise
an intensive force, are such German words as reichen, recken (Eng. to reach, to
rack) ; streichen (stringo), strecken : cf. Strich (a stroke), Strecke {a stretch) ; wacker
from wachen ; others, in which it has the causative sense, are stechen, ste<ken ;
wachen {watch), wecken {wake) ; Tf\Kiu to bring to ayi end (cf. the stem TfAa; to end,
in TfKos, T(K((u) ; yevvaw to beget, from tlio stem ytvai to come into being (cf. 7«Vos).
142 The Verb [§ 52 i-n
?3.V to gather the clouds together (from f^V), ^'W to divide in three parts,
or to do a thing for the third time (from B'?K') ; probably also ">31
to speak, from 1^"1 a word. Or again, the denominative may express
taking away, injuring, &c., the object denoted by the noun {jyrivative
Pi el, cf. our to shin, to behead, to bone), e. g. ^^, from B^'^.b' to
root out, to extir2>ate, 33.T prop, to injure the tail (^JJ), hence to rout
the rear of an army, to attack it ; 3?? to ravish the heart ; W"^. to
remove the ashes (l!^"!J), ^^C ^o /^^e from sin (^<PD), ^KV ^o break any
one's bones (D2fJ^ ; cf., in the same sense, D1.3 from D^l) ', ^V.^ to lop the
boughs. Is lo^ (from ^''yo a bough). Some words are clearly denomina-
tives, although the noun from which they are derived is no longer
found, e. g. i'ijip to stone, to pelt with stones (also used in this sense in
Qal), and to remove stones (from a field), to clear away stones ; cf. our
to stone, used also in the sense of taking out the stones from fruit.
The meaning of the passive {Pu'al) follows naturally from the
above, e. g. C?*!!!? Pi'el to seek, Pu'al to be sought.
I In Pi'el the literal, concrete meaning of the verb has sometimes been
retained, when Qal has acquired a figurative sense, e.g. H^J, Pi'el to uncover,
Qal to reveal, also to emigrate, i.e. to make the land bare.
K Also with an intransitive sense Pi'el occurs as an intensive form, but only
in poetic language, e.g. DDU in Pi'el to be broken in pieces, Jersi^^; THIS to
tremble, Is 51^', Pr 28" ; T]T\ to be drunken, Is 34^-'' ; [t^J/JD to be few, Ec 12'] ; but
in Is 48*, 60I1 instead of the Pi'el of nnS the Niph'al is certainly to be read,
with Cheyne.
/ Rem. I. The (more frequent) form of the perfect with Patkah in the second
syllable appears especially before Maqqeph (Ec 9^^, 1 2') and in the middle of
sentences in continuous discourse, but at the end of the sentence (in pause)
the form with Sere is more common. Cf. P^3 Is 49" with b'lS Jos 4^*, Est 3^ ;
D^O Ez 33« with D^it? Ec g^^ ; y^^) 2 K 8'« with }*Jfp ^t 129* ; but Qames never
appears in this pausal form. The ^rd sing.fem. in pause is always of the form
nbtBp, except njfZlp Mi 1'' ; the 3rd plur. always as v^p; the 2nd and 1st sing.
and 1st plur. of course as DPlip n?t£p Tlp^p (but always '•mZl'n and ">rn?!)?V
I< t:t'. ';:t'.'':t'* •;"* •:-•/'
^JptSp. In the 3rd sing. per/. "12^ to speak, "1S3 to pardon, and D33 to uash
clothes (also D33 Gn 49^^) take S^ghol, but become in pause IS"! D33 (2 S 19^^*) ;
the pausal form of "133 does not occur.
Ifl Pathah in the first syllable (as in Aramaic and Arabic) occurs only once,
Gn 41*', ^3E'3 he made me forget, to emphasize more clearly the play on the
name Ht^SD.
fl 2. In the imperfect (and jussive Ju 16^^), infinitive, and imperative Pi'el (as also
in Hithpa'el) the Sere in the final syllable, when followed by Maqqeph, is
usually shortened into S^ghOl, e.g. ip"t^ij)3"' he seeks for himself, Is 40^" ; v'tJ*^^
sanctify unto me, Ex 13^. Pausal-forms with S'ghol instead of Sere, as ^H"!^
Dt 32", CiyyA Ho 2* (cf. Ex 32« in the infinitive, and Gn 21' in the participle),
owe their origin to some particular school of Masorctes, and are wrongly
accepted by Baer; cf. the analogous cases in § 75 w and hh. If the final
syllable of the imperfect Pi'el has Pathah (before a guttural or "1), it remains
§ 52 0-s'] Pi' el and Pu'al 143
even in pause ; cf. § 29 s and 65 e. In the ist sing, imperfect the e-sound
occurs in two words for Hateph-Pathah^ under thj preformative K; TV^^^
Lv 263^ Ez 5", 12" and D"iyDX) Zc 7" (in accordance with § 23 /»).— Before
the full plural ending p (see § 47 m) the Sere is retained in pause, e. g. p">3nri
\p 582 (but Gn 3220 P")3iri), cf. 2 K 6", Dt 12^ ; so before SiUuq \p 58^, Jb 21"
and even before Zaqeph qaton Dt 7". Instead of njp^pn, forms like nj^tspn
are also found, e.g. Is 31^, 13^8^ in both cases before a sibilant and in pause.
Also 3pQ ^ 55^" occurs as the 2nd sing, imperative (probably an intentional
imitation of the sound of the preceding Vv2) and Sip (for qarrabh) Ez 37^'^.
3. The infiniie absolute of Pi'el has sometimes the special form >t3p given in 0
the paradigm, e.g. "ID' castigando, \p 1181^ ; cf. Ex 21^^ i K 19I" (from a verb
H"7) ; \t 40^ (from a verb n"?) ; but much more frequently the form of the
infinitive construct (?t3p) is used instead. The latter has also, in exceptional
cases, the form PtSp (with a attenuated to i as in the perfect), e. g. in i Ch 8* iriptJ' ;
perhaps also (if not a substantive) "\^p Jer 44^1 ; and for the sake of assonance
even for infinitive absolute in 2 S 12" (nSN3 )*S3). On the other hand, D?B'
Dt 32^^ and "l^"! Jer 5I' are better regarded as substantives, while IB"! Ex 6^^,
Nu 3I, Dt 4I5 (in each case after QV2), Ho i' (after ni>nn), in all of which
places it is considered by KOnig (after Qimhi) to be infinitive construct, is really
perfect of Pi'el.
The infinitive construct Pi'U, with the fern, ending (cf. § 45 d), occurs in p
nno: Lv 26" ; rnipi \f> i^f ; with n of the fern, before a suffix ''i]rip'nX Ez 16^2. ^
On the verbal nouns after the form of the Aram. inf. Pa'il (n^lSp), see § 84'' e.
Instead of the abnormal VDOXO (so Baer, Is 62') as ptcp. Pi'el, read 'OHD
with ed. Mant. and Ginsburg.
4. In Pu'al 0 is sometimes found instead of m in the initial syllable, e. g. q
CnSp dyed red, Ex 25", &c., Na 2*, cf. 3'' HTHK' ; Ez 16*, ^ 7220, 80". According ^
to Baer's reading also in ^njfin Jp 62*, and so also Ben Aier, but Ben Naphtali
^nSiri. It is merely an orthographic licence when w is written fully, e.g.
t^V JU 1829.
5. As infinitive absolute of Pu'al we find 2jl3 Gn 40''. — No instance of the inf. f
constr. occurs in the strong verb in Pu'al ; from n'6 with suffix SnSi^ ^ 132^.
6. A few examples occur of the^ participle Pu'al without the preformative (O), S
e.g. i53N Ex 32 ; I^V (for l^lD) Ju 138 ; n\^b 2 K 2" ; rTiyb Is 54". These
participles are distinguished from the perfect (as in Niph'al) by the a of the final
syllable. For other examples, see Is 302*, Ec 9" (where D^B'pV, according to
§ 20 n, stands for 'j?!" =:'i5^D) ; but, according to the Masora, not Ez 26", since
■^i*^'""! ^^ Mil'el can only be the perfect. The rejection of the D may be favoured
by an initial », as in Is 182'' (but also Tj^^D) ; Pr 25" (where, however, read
niyitD) ; so also in the participle Pi'el |Xlp Ex 727, 92 (always after DN, but cf.
also CJXlSn Jer 1310, where, however, D^JNOH = D'^JXCIDH is to be read, with
Brockelmann, Grundriss, p. 264 f.) and "ITO Zp 1" (and Is8is?). Notice,
however, Barth's suggestion {Nomiruxlbildung, p. 273) that, as the active of
forms like 73X only occurs in Qal, they are perfect participles of former
passives of Qal (see e), and in Jeri3io, 23^2, perfect participles of Pi'el.— On
yano Ez 452, see § 65 d.
144 "^he Verb [§53«-«
§ 53. Hiph'il and HopKal.
a 1. The characteristic of the active (Hiph'tl) is a prefixed n (on its
origin see § 55 i) in the perfect H (with the a attenuated to t, as in
Pi'el), which forms a closed syllable with the first consonant of the
stem. The second syllable of the perfect had also originally an d\
of. the Arabic conj. iv. 'aqtdld, and in Hebrew the return of the
Fathah in the 2nd and ist pers. IJlp^iP'"?, &c. After the attenuation of
this a to t, it ought by rule to have been lengthened to e in the tone-
syllable, as in Aramaic ^^P^ , beside PtJpn in Biblical Aramiiic. Instead
of this, however, it is always replaced in the strong verb by ^,* ^—^,
but sometimes written defectively -7- ; cf. § g g- Similarly in the
infinitive construct '''•^Pl', and in the imperfect and participle TtDj?^
and ''"'tppP, which are syncopated from ''"•t^pn^ and P^CpriD; § 23^.
The corresponding Arabic forms [juqtU and muqtiV) point to an
original i in the second syllable of these forms. In Hebrew the regular
lengthening of this ? to e appears in the strong verb at least in the
jussive 'Andi in the imperfect consecutive (seew), as also in the imperative
of the 2nd sing. masc. (seem) ; on njptpipri, njptOjpri cf. § 26 p. On the
return of the original a in the second syllable of the Imperat., Jussive,
&c , under the influence of a guttural, cf. § 65/.
b In the passive (Hoph'al) the preforraative is pronounced with an
obscure vowel, whilst the second syllable has a (in pause a), as its
characteristic, thus: — Perf. ^^P^ or ^^?k}, Im2)erf. -'Pi?^ (syncopated
from ^^pn;) or bap', Part. b^pO or ^Oipo (from ^^i?Q9); but the
infinitive absolute has the form ''IPP^'.
Thus the characteristics of both conjugations are the H preformative in the
perfect, imperative, and infinitive ; in the imperfect and participle Hiph'il, Pathah
under the preformatives, in the Hoph'al 0 or u.
C 2. The meaning of Hiph'tl is primarily, and even more frequently
than in Pi'el (§52 g), causative of Qal, e. g. NXJ to go forth, Hiph. to
bring forth, to lead forth, to draw forth ; K'li' to be holy, Hiph. to sanctify.
Under the causative is also included (as in Ptel) the declarative sense,
e. g. p'^Vr' to pronounce just ; V^K^I^ to make one an evil doer {to pro-
nounce guilty) ; cf. B'pV, in Hiph'tl, Jb 9^°, to represent as 2>erverse. If
Qal has already a transitive meaning, Hiph'tl then takes two accusatives
(see § 1 1 7 cc). In some verbs, Pi'el and HipKtl occur side by side in
the same sense, e. g. *^?^!>pm^«, Pi'el and Hiph'il, perdidit ; as a rule,
1 This i may have been transferred originally from the imperfects of verb*
X'V, as a convenient means of distinction between the indicative and jussive,
to the imperfect of the strong verb and afterwards to the whole oi Hiph'il; so
Stade, Philippi, Praetorius, ZAW. 1883, p. 52 f.
§ 53 d-9] Hiph'il and Hoph'al 145
however, only one of these two conjugations is in use, or else they
differ from one another in meaning, e. g. 1?3 graveni esse, Pi'el to
honour, Hiph'il to bring to honour, also to make heavy. Verbs which
are intransitive in Qal simply become transitive in Hiph'il, e. g. "I^J
to bow oneself. Hiph. to bow, to bend.
Among the ideas expressed by the causative and transitive are included, u
moreover, according to the Hebrew point of view (and that of the Semitic
languages in general, especially Arabic), a series of actions and ideas, which
we have to express by periphrasis, in order to understand their being repre-
sented by the Hiph'il-form. To these inwardly transitive or intensive Hipli'ils
belong : (a) Hiph'il stems which express the obtaining or receiving of a
concrete or abstract quality. (In the following examples the Qal stems are
given, for the sake of brevity, with the addition of the meaning which — often
together with other meanings — belongs to the Hiph'il.) Thus pHN, IHT, VD',
yXi to he bright, to shine (to give forth brightness) ; opposed to TjtJ'n to become
dark; Y^H, 133 ^ pTPI to be strong (to develop strength), ffJDy to be weak; TI1N
to be long (to acquire length) ; n33 to he high ; Din to be in tumult, pyT to cry out,
yn, pT to make a noise, to exult ; fpH to sprout (to put forth shoots), cf. mS to
bloom, ^IV, pItJ' to overflow ; B'ln 7Vi}U, DSD, DDif to be silent (silentium facere,
Pliny) ; pDD to he sweet ; TO'H to have success ; PBB' to be low ; DTK to become red,
]y? to become white.
(h) Stems which express in Hiph'il the entering into a certain condition and, €
further, the being in the same : |IDN to become firm, to trust in ; t^N3 to become
stinking ; TlT to become boiling, to boil over ; npn to become ill ; IDH to come to want ;
mn to become hot ; \l}2'' to become dry, to become ashamed ; in"" to attain superiority ;
|3D to become familiar ; ~\"iy^ y^p to become awake ; HB'p to become hard ; yjl^ Dpt^
to become quiet (to keep quiet) ; DJD5J' to be astonished. The Hiph'il forms of some
verbs of motion constitute a variety of this class : {f'^S to draw near; Hip to
come near ; pm to withdraw far off (all these three are besides used as causatives) ;
mp to come before.
(c) Stems which express action in some particular direction : NDH to err ; j
p?n to flatter (to act smoothly) ; ^C to act well, to do good ; 730 to act foolishly,
PSB' to act wisely ; Diy to act craftily ; y3>f to act submissively ; yyi ytJ^T to act
wickedly, godlessly ; T)D'0 2VT\ to act corruptly, abominably ; D^t^ to act peacefully,
to be at peace, to be submissiie.
Further, there are in Hiph'il a considerable number of denominatives which rr
express the bringing out, the producing of a thing, and so are properly regarded
as causatives,^ e.g. lifX to set over the treasury, Neh 13^' (unless H^VNI is to be
read, as in Neh 7*) ; "133 to bring forth a flrstborn; OB'S to cause to rain ; y"H to
produce seed ; |0^ {Hiph'il Y^'^Tf) to go to the right, cf. ^'''NJOK'n to go to the left ; D"1Q
to get or to have hoofs ; y\p to get or to have horns ; 7315' to produce abortion ; i?^ to
become snow-white; )D{^ to grow fat; B'"I{J' to put forth roots, &c. ; so also according
to the ordinary acceptation ^IT'fTKn Is 19*, they have become stinking, from n31K
stinking or stench, with retention of the N prosthetic, § 19 to (but see below, p).
^ The same ideas are also paraphrased by the verb nb'y {to make), e. g. to
make fat, for, to produce fat upon his body, Jb 15" ; to make fruit, to wake
branches, for, to put forth, to yield, Jb 14^, Ho 8^, cf. the Lat. corpus, robur,
soholem, dividas facere, and the li&l. far cmpo, far forze, far frutto.
COWLBT Jj
146 The Vei'h C§53A-r«
Of a different kind are the denominatives from : |TX (scarcely to prick up the
ears, but) to act with the ears, to hear ; cf. |EJ'? to move the tongue, to slander, and
the German dugeln (to make eyes), /wsseZn, naseln, schwdnseln; "13B' to sell cor?i ;
DDB' to set out early (to load the back [of the camel, &c,] ?) ; opposed to T'lyn,
h 3. The meaning of Hoplial is (a) primarily that of a passive of
JJijjJitl, e. g. ^V^^r' proiecit, "^^y^ or '^^\} proiectus est ; (h) sometimes
equivalent to a passive of Qal, as DpJ to ivenge, Hoph. to he avenged
(but see below, u).
I Rem. I. The i of the 3rd sing. masc. perf. Hiph'il remains, without exception,
in the 3rd fern, (in the tone-syllable). That it was, however, only lengthened
from a short vowel, and consequently is changeable, is proved by the forms
of the imperative and imperfect where e (or, under the influence of gutturals, a)
takes its place. In an open syllable the i is retained almost tliroughout ;
only in veiy isolated instances has it been weakened to S^wd (see n and 0).
/c 2. The infinitive absolute commonly has Sere without Yodh, e.g. B'llpn Ju 17^ ;
less frequently it takes '•__, e.g. T'CK'n Am 9* ; cf. Dt 15", Is 59*, Jer ^^^,
2332, 4425^ j\y 2435^ Ec 10^". With N instead of n (probably a mere scribal
error, not an Aramaism) we find D''3K'S Jer 25^. Rare exceptions, where the
form with Sere stands for the infinitive construct, are, e.g. Dt 32^ (Sam. ?^n3ri3 •
read perhaps 7n3n3), Jer 44"-25, Pr 25^ Jb I3'(?); on the other hand, for
"ib'yb Dt 2612 (which looks like an infinitive Hiph'il with elision of the n,
for T'B'ynp) the right reading is simply "^W^p, since elsewhere the Pi'el alone
occurs with the meaning to tithe ; for "i^V^ Neh lo^^ perhaps the inf. Qal
("l"{^y3) was intended, as in i S S^'-^'' ( = <o take the tithe). At the same time it
is doubtful whether the present pi'nctuation does not arise from a conflation
of two different readings, the Qal and the Pi'el.
/ Instead of the ordinary form of the infinitive construct /'"'^i?n the form ^''tDpH
sometimes occurs, e.g. ^^J^5^^ to destroy, Dt 7^*, 28*8. (,f j^y i^46^ Jqs h^^
Jer 50^*, 51^^ and nixpn for niXpn Lv 14*' from Tilip ; scarcely, however,
Lv }'5 (see § 155 I), 2 S 22^ (jp iS^), i K ii^® (after 1^), and in the passages
so explained by KSnig (i. 276) where "l^XK'n appears after prepositions^;
[cf. Driver on Dt 3^, 4I6, f*, 2885].
With a in the second syllable there occurs DSlSin Ez 21^9 (cf. the
substantival infin. "l^QH i S 15^^). — In the Aram, manner rflV^pr\p is found
in Ez 242® (as a construct form) for the infinitive Iliph'il (cf. the infinitive
Hithpa'el, Dn ii'^'). On the elision of the H after prefixes, see q.
in 3. In the imperative the i is retained throughout in the open syllable,
according to i, and consequently also before suffixes (see § 61 g) and
n paragogic, e.g. HaVpn attend to, N3 ."lyB'in ^t nS^s, as in ed. Mant., Jabl.,
Baer, not N3 ny^tyin as Ginsb. and Kittel : with the tone at the end only
nrrilJ^fn ibid. v. 25''. On the other hand, in the 2nd sing. masc. the original t
(cf. Arabic 'dqtU) is lengthened to e, e. g. jCB'n make fat, and becomes S^ghol
before Maqqeph, e.g. N3"j3Dri Jb 22^1. — The form ^''Dpn for /tppH appears
anomalously a few times : ^ 94^, Is 43', Jer 17I8 (cf. § 69 v and § 721/);
elsewhere the Masora has preferred the punctuation b^tSpn , e. g. 2 K 8^ ; cf.
f 142^ — In La 5I ntS^fn is required by the Q*re for Can.
^ As to the doubtfulness, on general grounds, of this form of the Inf. Hiph.,
see Robertson Smith in the Journ. ofPhilol., xvi. p. 72 f.
§ 53 n-p] Hiph'il and HopKal 147
4. In the imperfect Hiph'il the shorter form with Sere prevails for the jussive 71
in the 3rd masc. and fern, and 2nd masc. sing., e.g. ?'1^F\~?^ make not great,
Ob '2 ; nip^ ie< Him cut off! if/ 12* ; even incorrectly i^-JPI Ex 19' and T"-!^
Ec ic***; cf. also "")J?T Ex 22*, where the jussive form is to be explained
according to § 109 h, and 13^"!. J'^ 39^6 before the principal pause. Similarly,
after 1 consec, e.g. b'j|3*^ and He divided, On 1*. On the other hand, i is
almost always retained in the ist sing., e.g. T'DB'NI Am 2' (but generally
without 1, as iriDNI Ez 39''''-, &c.) ; cf. §496 and § 74 I, but also § 72 aa ;
in 1st plur. only in Neli 4' ; in the 3rd sing. \p 105^*. With a in the principal
pause TTlini Ru 2^*, and in the lesser pause, Gn 49*; before a sibilant (see
§ 29 q) {^3*1 Ju 6^' ; in the lesser pause f]i5^1 La 3^ Before Maqqeph the Sere
becomes S'ghol, e.g. ^B'pin^ Ju 19*. In the plural again, and before suffixes,
i remains in the forms l^^bp^, v"'13i?ri even in the jussive and after 1 con-
secutive, e.g. p''Zn*1 Ju iS'^^. The only exceptions, where the i is weakened
to S^icd, are ^^ni'l Jer 92 ; ^p31»1 1 S 1422, 312, i Ch io2; ^"^2^1 Jer iii^;
nn^iNI Neh 13", if it is mph'il of IXS, but probably n|l>*S"l is to be read, as
in 7*; perhaps also ^ISHPl Jb 19^ (according to others, imperfect Qal). The
same weakening occurs also in the imperfect in 3rd and 2nd masc. sing,
before suffixes, i S 172^, i K 2c*^, Jp 6-,^'^, and in Jb 9'"^ unless the form be
Pi'gZ = ^3K'i?y"'1, since the Hiph'il is not found elsewhere. It is hardly likely
that in these isolated examples we have a trace of the ground-form, yaqtil, or
an Aramaism. More probably they are due partly to a misunderstanding of
the defective writing, which is found, by a purely orthographic licence, in
numerous other cases (even in 3rd sing. Ch^^ Is 442^), and partly are intended,
as formae mixtae, to combine the forms of Qal and Hiph'il. Instead of the
firmly closed syllable, the Masora requires in Gn 1^^ NK'nri, with euphonic
Ga'ya (see § 16 A).
5. In ihc participle, NlfiO ^t 135'' appears to be traceable to the ground-fonn, 0
maqfil ; yet the Sere may also possibly be explained by the retraction of the
tone. The Masora appears to require the weakening of the vowel to S*wd
(see above, n) in D^3?nip Zc 3' (probably, however, D^S^nO should be read),
also in D^O?nip Jer 29*, D^*liyip 2 Ch 282s (but as D precedes, and accordingly
dittography may well have taken place, the participle Qal is probably to be
read in both places ; the reading of the text is perhaps again intended to
combine Qal and Hiph'il, see above, n), and in the Q're D''"!Jfnp i Ch 152* &c.
(where the K^lhibh DHifVnD is better). — Tlie fem. is ordinarily pointed as
nihro Nu 6«, nJK'O Lv 1421'; in pause nSsK'D Pr 19".
6. In the perfect there occur occasionally such forms as ^3Dp3n i S 25' ; 7?
cf. Gn 4i28, 2 K 17", Jer 29I, Mi 6', Jb 16'; with the original a in the first
syllable ^niNini Na 3^— In Tlbx^X ^ / have stained, Is 63', N stands at the
beginning instead of n, cf. above, k, on D'>3K'K. On the other hand, ^n^3tXn^
^ Most probably, however, TlpKa {perfect Pi'H) is to be read, and the K is
only an indication of the change of the perfect into the imperfect, na also
previously, by a change of punctuation, D3"^TN1 and V) (instead of '"jSI^ and
)*^ are made future instead of past. Jewish exegesis applied these Edom-
oracles to the Roman (i.e. Christian) empire. So G. Moore in Tkeol. Literatur-
zeitung, 1887, col. 292.
L 2
148 The Verb [§ 53 q-u
Is 19* (see above, g) is a mere error of the scribe, who had the Aramaic form
in mind and corrected it by prefixing H,
n 7. In the imperfect and participle the characteristic H is regularly elided
after the preformatives, thus ?^t^^l ^^^pl? > but it is retained in the infinitive
after prepositions, e.g. P^tipHp. The exceptions are in the imperfect, y^E'in^
He will save for y^i'' i S 17*^, ^116^ (in pause) ; iTliri"' He will praise for mV
Neh ii^'', rp 28'', 45^* (cf. the proper name ??^n^ Jer 37', for which 38* 73V
[and fjOin^ ^ 8i6]) ; [^^'•J'^n^ (§ 70 d) Is 52^, ^^nn^ Jer 9*, ^^nnri Jb 139] and
niyypniS Ez 46^2 ; in the infinitive (where, however, as in Niph'al, § 51 Z, the
infinitive Qal is generally to be read) iriD? Is 29^^ for "l^JJItpHp • ?S3p and ni3ifp
NU522; Tny!? aS 19I9; pbrh Jer37i2; N'-enl? Ecs^; ]2hb (doubly anomalous
for rsbnb) Dn ii»B ; JJDB'b ^ 267 . y-^^^^ i S a^s ; 1C0 Is 33" ; n"'3K'^1 Am S*
(certainly corrupt) ; "l'»y3 for "1^yn3 \f/ 73^° (but in the city is probably meant) ;
N'nb Jer 397 (2 Ch 3ii«) ; nilCi^ Is 38, rp 78" ; Dnimb Ex 13" ; ni^23 (see,
however, § 20 h) Is 33I ; D3nN"lb Dt i'^ : cf. further, from verbs H"^, Nu s^',
Jer 2 7*0; on Dt 26" and Neh lo^*, see above, A; ; for n^niO^ Pr 31' read ninb|'
orninipt?5'.
' 8. "With regard to the tone it is to be observed that the afformatives ^
and n in Hiph'il have not the tone, even in the perfect with waw consecutive
(except in Ex 26^' before n, Lv 15^' before X, to avoid a hiatus) ; but the
<
plural ending p (see § 47 m) always has the tone, e.g. }^3'1pri Dt 1".
S 9. The passive (Hoph'al) has m instead of Qameshatuph in the first syllable
(/^pn), in the strong verb less frequently in the perfect and infinitive, but
generally in the participle, through the influence of the initial D (but cf.
nPIB'D Pr 2528) ; e.g. nSB'n Ez 32" (beside n^SB'n 32") ; TJ^B'n impf. T|^K'\
part, ^b^tp 2 S 20" (beside nS^B'n Is 14") nnpbn Ez i6< ; in the partic.
Hoph. without elision of the H : niVJfpHD Ez 46*2 ; on the other hand,
verbs \''Q always have m (in a sharpened syllable) : ^2^, IS]* (cf, § 9 n).
t 10. The infinitive absolute has in Hoph'al (as in Hiph'it) Sere in the last syllable,
e. g. ?nnn and n?On Ez 16* ; "IJn Jos g^*. An infinitive construct does not
occur in the strong verb.
II. With regard to the imperative Hoph'al, see above, § 46 o, note.
tl 12. According to BOttcher (Ausfiihrliches Lehrbuch, § 906) and Barth (see
above, § 52 e) a number of supposed imperfects Hoph'al are, in fact, imperfects
of the passive of Qal. As in the case of the perfects passive of Qal (see above,
§ 52 e) the question is again of verbs of which neither the corresponding
causative (i. e. here the Hiph'il), nor the other tense of the same conjugation
(i. e. here the perfect Hoph'al) is found ; so with DjT (for D|53"' ^ cf. yuqtdia as
imperfect Qal in Arabic) and jn'' , from Dpi and jri3 ; nj?'' from Hp? (cf.
§ 66 gr) ; IKV Nu 2 2« from TIX ; |ri'' from |3n ; im> Ho 10" (cf. Is 33I) from
TIB' ; Barth adds the verbs |"B : trrifl Ez 1912 from {TnJ ; J'W Lev iiSb from
yn: ; the verbs V"V : Ipn^ Jb 192s from ppH ; r\T &c. from nn3 ; the verb
ry : B'nV from mi; the verbs '"']}■. ^m\ IB'^^ DB'V from ^^H, 'T'B' and
IT'B'. On ti'^'^h &c., § 73/. In point of fact it would be very strange,
especially in the case of JR^ and n^ that of these frequently used verbs,
§ 54 a-e] Hiph'il and HopKal 149
amongst all the forms of Hiph'il and Hoph'al, only the imperfect Hoph'al
should have been preserved. A passive of Qal is also indicated in the Tell-
el-Amarna letters, according to Knudtzon, by a number of imperfect forms,
which are undoubtedly due to Canaanite influence, cf. Beitr. zur Assyriologie,
iv. 410.
§ 54. Hithpael.
1. The Hithpael ^ is connected with Pi'el, being formed by prefixing a
to the Pi el-stem {qattel, qattal) the syllable nn (Western Aramaic "K,
but in Biblical Aramaic nn ; Syr. 'et ^). Like the preformative ^ (3n)
of Ni])h'al, rin has also a reflexive force.
2. The n of the prefix in this conjugation, as also in Hothpaal U
(see h), Hithp'el, HithpaTel and Hithpalpel (§ 55), under certain
circumstances, suffers the following changes :
(a) When the stem begins with one of the harder sibilants D, V, or ^,
the n and the sibilant change places (cf. on this metathesis, § 19 w\
and at the same time the n after a V becomes the corresponding
emphatic D : thus ">sriK^n to take heed to oneself, for ~^WT\r} ; 73riDn to
become burdensome, for ^|Dnn ; \>'^}^'^T\ to justify oneself, from P*]^'.
The only exception is in Jer 49', nJtJDiC'rin^., to avoid the cacophony
of three successive ^-sounds.
(6) When the stem begins with a d- or <-sound (1,13, n), the D of c
the preformative is assimilated to it (§ 190?), e.g. "l?'^0 speaking,
conversing ; ^<^'^^ to he crushed, "^Vi^^ to purify oneself, NOtSn to defile
oneself, D^rin to act uprightly. (An exception occurs in Ju 19''^)
The assimilation of the n occurs also with 3 and 3 , e. g. ^<^3^l to
prophesy, as well as N3?rin (cf. Nu 24^ Ez 5", Dn 11"); |3i2n Nu 21*'
(cf. Is 54", y^ S9'')\ '"^??^ Pr 262«; with {:' Ec 7" ; with 1 Is 33>«.
Rem. Metathesis would likewise be expected, as in the cases under 6, (I
when n and T come together, as well as a change of n to T . Instead of this,
in the only instance of the kind {^3V} Is i^«) the n is assimilated to the T>
— unless indeed 13?n, imperative Niph'al of "J3t, is intended.
3. As in form, so also in meaning, Hithpa'el is primarily (a) reflexive
of Pi el, e. g. "1?.^^^' to gird oneself, K'"!!pnn to sanctify oneself. Although
in these examples the intensive meaning is not distinctly marked,
it is so in other cases, e. g. Dij!3nn to show oneself revengeful {Niph.
simply to take revenge), and in the numerous instances where the
Hithpa'el expresses to make oneself that which is predicated by the
stem, to conduct oneself as such, to show oneself, to imagine oneself, to
1 A. Stein, Der Stamm des Hithpael im Hvbr. pt. i, Schwerin, 1893, gives
alphabetical statistics of the 1151 forms.
» So also in Hebrew l^nnK 2 Ch 20" ; cf. ip 76^ (!|■>l3^nt^'K).
I50 The Verb [§ 54/-*
affect to be of a certain character. E.g. ^'^}^'} to make oneself great,
to act proudly ; 030^''? to show oneself wise, crafty ; '^^^'^^ to 2)retend
to be ill ; "'t?'^?'!' to make, i. e. to feign oneself rich ; 'T'.'JiK'n Nu 1 6^'*,
to make oneself a prince ; N??^^ i S i8'°, to act in an excited manner
like a prophet, to rave. The meaning of Hithpa'el sometimes coincides
with that of Qal, both forms being in use together, e. g. i'?^ to mourn,
in Qal only in poetic style, in Ilithpa'el in prose. On the accusative
after Hithpa'el (regarded as a transitive verb), see § 117 w.
/ (6) It expresses reciprocal action, like Niph'al, § 51 (Z, e.g. i^^"^'?'!'
to look upon one another, Gn 42' ; cf. >/' 41* ; — but
(c) It more often indicates an action less directly affecting the
subject, and describes it as performed with regard to ov for oneself, in
one's own special interest (cf. Niph'al, § 51 e). Hithpa'el in such
cascis readily takes an accusative, e.g. P"?.?'?'!' Ex 32^ and P?f?nn Ex 33^
to tear off from oneself; tS^fsrin exuit sibi (vestem), nrisnn solvit sibi
(vincula) ; 1* ^^i? Jos 9'^, to take (something) as one's provision ; without
an accusative, ^.?L'r^'? to walk about for oneself (ambulare) ; ^}^^^ sibi
intercedere (see Delitzsch on Is i'°) ; '"IJ^nrin to draw a line for oneself,
Job I3^S* on Is I4^ see § 57, note.
g (d) Only seldom is it passive, e.g. ^^'L'r^n X''n Pr3i^° she shall be
pjraised ; HZri^n to be forgotten, Ec 8'", where the reflexive sense {to
bring oneself into oblivion) has altogether disappeared. Cf. Niph'al,
§51/.
// The passive form Hothpa'al is found only in the few following examples :
N'StSn to he defiled, Dt 24* ; infinitive DSSn to he washed, Lv 1355.56. r\y^^r\ (for
nj^'^rin, the nj being treated as if it were the afiformative of the fem. plur.)
it is made fat, Is 348. On npSHn , see I.
I Denominatives with a reflexive meaning are in'riH to embrace Judaism,
from Tin^ ('^'J'''"'^) Judah; ^)'C)lf^ to provision oneself for a journey, from Hl^i*
provision for a journey (see § 72 m).
n' Rem. i. As in Pi'el, so in Hithpa'el, the perfect very frequently (in stems
ending in i^ p^ D, S) has retained the original Patha/i in the final syllable
(while in the ordinary form it is attenuated, as in Pi'el, to i and then length-
ened to e), e. g. ei3Snn Dt 4^1, &c. ; cf. 2 Ch 13'', 158; with ) consecutive Is S^i ;
so also in the imperfect and imperative, e.g. D3nriri Ec 7^^^ cf. Dt 98", i S
3W 2 S 10", I K 1 19, Is 552, 58", 6411, ^ 552 ; pjnnh I K 2o22, ^ 374, Est 510 ;
pBNnSI^ I S 1312.— In Lv 11", 20' and Ez 3S23, l tilkes the place of o in the
final syllable of the stem before B' (cf. § 44 d), and in the last passage before
7. In the ■perfect, imperfect (with the exception of Ec 7'^), and imperative of
Ilithpa'el (as well as of Hithpo'el, Hithpa'Ul, Hithpalpel, § 55) the original d alwaj's
returns in pause as Qame~, e. g. "I^XJIH ip 93' ; /3»<ri^ Ez 7"; Ijpnn^ Jb iS*;
ITsbn'' 38=" : V^npnn Jos 3' ; cf Jb 335 and § 74 b. — The « also appears before
the fuller ending 11 in the plural of the imperfect (cf. § 47 m) in <// 12^, Jb
§§ 54 h 55 «» t] Hithpael 151
9«, i6i°. — Like the Pl'el 7\':hhpT\ (§ 52 w), forms occur in Hithpa'el like n33?ririri
Zc 6'' ; cf. Am 8^^, and so in Hithpo'el, Jer 49', Am 9I' ; with g only in La 4I. —
In the Aramaic manner an infinitive Hithpa'el nOSnnn occurs in Dn ii^* (cf.
the Eiph'il inf. ntyOK'n in Ez 2426).
2. As instances of the reflexive b^\>T\T\ (connected with Pi'cl) a few reflexive /
forms of the verb li?S (to examine) are also probably to be reckoned. Instead
of a Pathah in a sharpened syllable after the first radical, these take Qamex in
an open syllable, e.g. npSnn Ju 20^°-i'', imperfect "IpBT)) 20^^, 21*. The corre-
sponding passive formnipEUnn also occurs four times, Ku 1*^, 2^^, 26^^, i K 20'^''.
According to others, these forms are rather reflexives of Qal, in the sense of
to present oneself for review, to be reviewed, like the Aramaic 'Ithpe'el (Western
Aramaic pppHN, Syr. /DpHK) and the Ethiopic taqat'la, Arab, 'iqtatala, the
last with the t always placed after the first radical (cf. above, h) ; but they are
more correctly explained, with Konig, as Hithpa'el forms, the doubling of the
p being abnormally omitted. — Such a reflexive of Qal, with the n transposed,
occurs in DnnPH (on the analogy of 0. T. Hebrew to be pronounced DPiripn)
in the inscription of the Moabite king Me^a', with the meaning of the 0. T.
Niph'al DHpi to fight, to wage war: see the inscription, lines it, 15, 19, and 32 ;
in the first two places in the imperfect with wdw consecutive DnriPXI ; in line 19
in the infinitive with suffix, ""^ ntonnPHB in his fighting against me.
§ 55. Less Common Conjugations.
Of the less common conjugations (§ 39 g) some may be classed with a
Piel, others with Hi'pHU. To the former belong those which arise
from the lengthening of the vowel or the repetition of one or even
two radicals, in fact, from an internal modification or development of
the stem; to the latter belong those which are formed by prefixing a
consonant, like the n of Hiph'il. Amongst the conjugations analogous
to Pill are included the passive forms distinguished by their vowels, as
well as the reflexives with the prefix nn , on the analogy of Hithpa'el.
The following conjugations are related to Piel, as regards their b
inflexion and partly in their meaning :
r. Po'U /Dip, passive Po'oi /'^ip, reflexive Hithpo'el PtpipHn, corresponding
to the Arabic conj. in. qdtdld, pass, qutila, and conj. vi. reflexive tdqdtdld ;
imperfect /Dlp^, participle PDipD, imperfect passive P^ip"" &c. Hence it appears
that in Hebrew the 0 of the first syllable is in all the forms obscured from d,
while the passive form is distinguished simply by the a-sound in the second
syllable. In the strong verb these conjugations are rather rare. Examples :
participle "'DSK'D mine adversary, who would contend with me, Jb 9'' ; ''itt'iPD
(denominative from fw7 the tongue) slandering (as if intent on injuring with the
tongue) xp ioi« K^th. (The (^re requires ''3B'^0 mHoM as Na i^ "^njl) ; IDlf
Ihey have poured out, \p 77" (if not rather Pw'aO ; ^ri^HV I have appointed, i S 21^
(unless "riyn'in should be read) ; nj/D^ Ho 132 ; ^-fp to take root, passive
152 The rerb [§ 55 c-f
<
B'liK', denominative from K'"}.B' root (but EHK' <o root out) ; in Hithpo'el ^B^bnn
<Aey shall be moved, Jer 25^^ ; imperf. 46* ; from a verb H'v TlK'iB' Is lo^'. The
participle |*X)))p Is 52* is probably a, forma mixta combining the readings J^XbD
and }*Nlbnjp.
C Po'el proper (as distinguished from the corresponding conjugations of verbs
V"]3 § 67 I and Vy § 72 m, wliich take the place of the ordinary causative
Pi'el) expresses an aim or endeavour to perform the action, especially with
hostile intent, and is hence called, by Ewald, the stem expressing aim (Ziel-
stamm), endeavour (Suche-stamm) or attack (Angrififs-stamm) ; cf. the examples
given above from Jb 9'^ ^t loi^, and |''^y i S 18' Q«re (probably for J.''.iyD, cf.
§ £2 s ; § 55/: seeking to cast an evil eye).
With btpip is connected the formation of quadri literals by the insertion of
a consonant between the first and second radicals (§ 30 p, § 56).
d 2. Pa'lel, generally with the « attenuated to t = Pi'lel''^ {Pi'M), 7/tDi? and
bpDp ; the e in the final syllable also arises from i, and this again from a ;
passive Pu'lal bptOp reflexive Hithpa'lel PPtDprin, like the Arabic conjugations
IX. 'iqtdlld and xi. Hqtdlld, the former used of permanent, the latter of accidental
or changing conditions, e. g. of colours ; cf. |3KK' to he at rest, |3y"l to be green,
passive //JDX to be icithered, all of them found only in the perfect and with
no corresponding Qal form. (For the barbarous form ""J^nniS^f 1/' SS^'' read
''jnriDJf ; for bbp^ Ez 28^^, which has manifestly arisen only from confusion
with the following P^n, read ?D3). These forms are more common in verbs
^*'y, where they take the place of Pi'el and Hithpa'el (§ 72 m). Cf. also § 75 kk.
^ 3. P^'aVal : P^pDp with repetition of the last two radicals, used of move-
ments repeated in quick succession ; e. g. in")np to go about quickly, to palpitate
(of the heart) \p 38", from "IPID to go about ; passive "Ip^lDH to be in a fertnen',
to be heated, to be red, Jb 16^*, La 1^", 2^1. Probably this is also the explanation
of ^Jf*l2fn (denom. from mifivn a trumpet, but only in the participle, i Ch 15**
&c. Kfth.) for 1S")ifn, by absorption of the first "1, lengthening of a in the
open syllable, and subsequent obscuring of a to 5. On the other hand, for
the meaningless I3n ^3nX Ho 4^* (which could only be referred to this con-
jugation if it stood for ^SH^riK) read ^^HN ^ and for the equally meaningless
r)^a'<Q'» if, 458 read ri'B^. In both these cases a scribal error {dittography) has
been perpetuated by the punctuation, which did not venture to alter the
K'thibh. On the employment of P*'arai in the formation of nouns, cf § 84'' n.
Closely related to this form is —
r 4. PUpH (pass. Pblpal), with a strengthening of the two essential radicals in
•'' stems yy, ry, and -"'y, e.g. hl^l to roll, from ba=^^3; reflexive blbl^T} to
roll oneself down; P3?3 from 7^3, passive 73p3 ; cf. also NCNtS (so Baer and
Ginsb. after Qimhi ; others NDND) Is 14*^, and with a in both syllables
owing to the influence of "1^ "^PIP from "1p Nu 24'^ (cf. however, in the
parallel passage, Jer 48*^ 1p"!P) and Is 22", in the participle ; iK'jb' Is 17" to
hedge in, ace. to others make to grow. Probably to this form also belongs
^Vbvy, the emended reading of Jb 39^0 instead of the impossible ^ypy ; also
' Cf. Wolfensohn, 'The Pi'lel in Hebrew,' Amer. Joum. of Or. Studies, xxvii
(i907)» P- 303 ff.
§§55!7-*, 56] Less Common Conjugations 153
nSDSD Is 27*, if that form is to be referred to an infinitive NDKD ; perhaps
also Kti'B' Ez 39^ for XK'NB'. This form also commonly expresses rapidly
repeated movement, which all languages incline to indicate by a repetition of
the sound,! g^g. sj^q^ to chirp; cf. in the Lexicon the nouns derived from
T13, ei^y, and ^^'i.
As Hilhpalpel we find ]^pppn^) Na 2^ ; ijnijnnni Est 4* ; "IO"JC)n»l Dn S', g
11". Of the same form is n"1"lK Is 38l^ if contracted from n"nnnS or
mnriN from the root 11 or n), and also !|nDni?nn tarry ye, Is 39' (but read
probably inQFin), HDnipn^l (in pause) Gn 19"', &c., if it is to be derived from
Pino, and not Hithpa'el from HDrilp.
Only examples more or less doubtful can be adduced of — h
5. Tiph'el (properly Taph'el 2) : ^Dpri , with fl prefixed, cf. ^ripi^n to teach to
walk, to had (denominative from hv] afoot?) Ho ii^; from a stem n"7, the
imperfect iTnnn'' to contend with, Jer 12^; participle, 221^ (from nin to be hot,
eager). Similarly in Aramaic, DSTTI to interpret, whence also in Hebrew the
passive participle D3")np Ezr 4''.
6. taph'el : ^Cpti*, frequent in Syriac, e. g. 3npB' from 2TV7 to flame ; whence '/
in Hebrew Dlh^^ flame. Perhaps of the same form is P^?3B' a snail (unless
it be from the stem ^2^), and nil"iypti' hollow strakes, cf. § 85, No. 50. This
conjugation is perhaps the original of Hiph'il, in which case the H, by a
phonetic change which may be exemplified elsewhere, is weakened from a
sibilant.
*
Forms of which only isolated examples occur are : — /t^-
7. cbDj?, passiVe tiptop ; as DEOnD peeled off, like scales. Ex 16", from flpH,
tlBTI to peel, to scale.
8. P\yO\y, in ejMIJ a rain-storm, from ^"Tt.
9. btS*ri3 (regularly in Mishnic Hebrew^) a form compounded o{ Niph'al
and Hithpa'el ; as IID^ai for nDinJI that they may be taught, Ez 23^ ; 1333
probably an error for SsiPn to be forgiven, Dt 21^ On mPK'3 Pr 37l^ see
5 75 a;.
§ 56. Quadriliterals.
On the origin of these altogether secondary formations cf. § 30 p.
While quadriliteral nouns are tolerably numerous, only the following
examples of the verb occur :
! Cf. Lat. tinnio, tintinno, our tick-tack, ding-dong, and the German xcirrwarr,
kHngklang. The repetition of the radical in verbs VV also produces this
effect; as in \>pj) to lick, ppl to pound, e]Dt3 to trip along. The same thing is
expressed also by diminutive forms, as in Latin by the termination -illo, e. g.
eantillo, in German by -eln, -em, c. g. flimmcrn, trillcrn, trijpfeln, to trickle.
' The existence of a Taph'el is contested on good grounds by Barth, Nominal-
bildung, p. 279.
' [See Segal, Miinaic Hebrew, Oxf. 1909, p. 30 ff.]
154 The Verb [§ 56
(o) On the analogy of Pi'el : DD")3, imperfect (1300^3^ he doth ravage it, \p 8c"
from Dps, cf. D]a. Passive K'SOl to grow fresh again, Jb 33". Participle
?Il")3Tp girt, clothed (cf. Aramaic 733 to bind), I Ch 15", It is usual also to
include among the quadriliterals TBHS Jb 26', as a perfect of Aramaic form
with Patha/i not attenuated. It is more correctly, however, regarded, with
Delitzsch, as the infinitive absolute of a Pi'lel formation, from bns to spread out,
with euphonic change of the first B' to tJ', and the second to T. Moreover,
the reading TKHS also is very well attested, and is adopted by Baer in the
text of Job ; cf. the Rem. on p. 48 of his edition.
(6) On the analogy of Hiph'il : {'"'NOK'n ^ by syncope b''tXO\ifri and ^^DK'n
to turn to the left (denom. from i'NCfe') Gn 138, Is 30", &c. On ^n>3TSn cf. § 53 p.
C. Strong Verb with Pronominal Suffixes.'
§57.
The accusative of the personal pronoun, depending on an active
verb,'^ may be expressed (i) by a separate word, HX the accusative
sign (before a suffix HN, HN) with the pronominal suffix, e. g. ^HN p^i?
he has killed him; or (2) by a mere suffix, ^"^^^P or vDj? he has killed
him. The latter is the usual method (§ 33), and we are here con-
cerned with it alone.' Neither of these methods, however, is em-
ployed when the accusative of the pronoun is reflexive. In that case
a reflexive verb is used, viz. Niph'al or Hithpa'el (§§ 51 and 54),
e. g. B''|!i5nn he sanctijied himself, not i^"^i?, which could only mean he
sanctified him.*
Two points must be specially considered here : the form of the
suffix itself (§ 58), and the form which the verb takes when suffixes
are added to it (§§ 59-61).
* This subject of the verbal suffixes is treated here in connexion with the
strong verb, in order that both the forms of the suffixes and the general laws
which regulate their union with verbal forms may be clearly seen. The
rules which relate to the union of the suffixes with weak verbs will be given
under the several classes of those verbs.
^ An accusative suffix occurs with Niph'al in i// 109' (since Dnp3 is used in
the sense of to attack), and according to some, in Is 44*1 ; with Hithpa'el Is 14*
(bnjnn to appropriate somebody to oneself as a possession) ; cf. above, § 54/, and
§ 1 1 7 tc.
3 On the cases where DK is necessary, see § 117 e.
* The exceptions in Jer 7^', Ez j^^-S-'o are only apparent. In all these
instances the sharp antithesis between DriN {themselves) and another object
could only be expressed by retaining the same verb ; also in EX5I' DHN after
an active verb sei*ves to emphasize the idea of themselves.
§ 58 a- d] The Pronominal Suffixes of the Verb 1 55
§ 58. The Pronominal Suffixes of the Verb.
Cf. the statistics collected by H. Petri, Das Verbum mit Suffixen im Hebr.,
part ii, in the D'':CJ'N1 CNUJ, Leipzig, 1890. W. Diehl, Das Pronomen vers,
suff. . .. des Hebr., Giessen, 1895. J. Barth, ' Beitrage zur Sufifixlehre des
Nordsem.,' AJSL. xvii (1901), p. 205 f. Brockelmann, Semit. Sprachwiss., i.
159 f. ; Grundriss, p. 638 S.
1. The pronominal suffixes appended to the verb express the CL
accusative of the personal pronoun. They are the following : —
A.
B.
c.
To a
form ending in
To a form in ike Perf.
To a form in the Imperf.
a Vowel.
ending in a Consonant.
ending in a Consonant.
Sing
I. com. ^3
"•3 * (in pause ''3_1-)
•'3 ' me.
2. m. ''I *
1 (in pause 1 ' , also ^ ^ ) thee.
f. ^
^— 'n^, rarely ^—
^.^
3. m. in_l,i
^^^,H^)
in * /itm.
f- r
n
n * /wr.
Plur.
I. com. ^J *
13'*
T
W ' us.
2. m. DD
f. .. .'. .'
3. m. on,' D
D3_
V
- you {vos)
D (from on ; ), D :
D (from on * ) eos.
poet. i» "
in *
T
^d"*
f. ?
U,^^
* ea*.
2. That these suffixes are connected with the corresponding forms b
of the personal pronoun (§ 32) is for the most part self-evident, and
only a few of them require elucidation.
The suffixes ^3, 13, in, n (and ''J, when a long vowel in an open C
syllable precedes) never have the tone, which always rests on the pre-
ceding syllable ; on the other hand, D3 and On always take the tone.
In the 3rd pers. masc, m-l., by contraction of a and u after the a
rejection of the weak n , frequently gives rise to 0 (§ 23 h), ordinarily
written i, much less frequently n (see § 7 c). In the feminine., the
suffix n should be pronounced with a preceding a (cf. below, /, note),
as n-1- or n-^, on the analogy of ahxl; instead of n^, however, it
was simply pronounced n__, with the rejection of the final vowel,
1 According to Diehl (see above), p. 61, 03 occurs only once with the
perfect (see § 59 e), 7 times with the imperfect, but never in pre-exilic
passages, whereas the accus. D^nX occurs 40 times in Jer. and 36 times
in Ezek. — Dn occurs only once as a verbal suffix (Dt 322'"', unless, with Kahan,
Infinitive u. Participien, p. 13, Dn^NDK from PINS is to be read), while the forms
15 (2nd/. pi.) and |_. and |n drdf. pi), added by Qimhi, never occur.
156 The Verb [§58e-i7
and with Mappiq, since the n is consonantal; but the weakening to
'"1__ is also found, see below, g.
^ 3. The variety of the suffix-forms is occasioned chiefly by the fact
that they are modified differently according to the form and tense of the
verb to which they are attached. For almost every suffix three forms
may be distinguished :
(a) One beginning with a consonant, as "•?— , ^'^—, 1 (only after i),
^— , (DH) D, &c. These are attached to verbal forms which end with
a vowel, e.g. ''?1^J?P^ ; ^'T'ripDpj for which by absorption of the n we
also get VripDp, pronounced q^talttu; cf. § 8 rn.
f (b) A second and third with what are called connecting voivels ^
{^3J_, ^3-^), used with verbal forms ending with a consonant (for
exceptions, see § 59 57 and § 60 e). This connecting vowel is a with
the forms of the perfect, e.g.*?^'^?, I^^'^i?, Q^^P (onTJ.^^ip, the ordinary
form of the 3rd masc. perf. with the 2nd fern, suffix, cf. below, g); and
e (less frequently a) with the forms of the imperfect and imperative, e.g.
'''"'.?pi??, 2.;Pi5 ; also with the infinitive and participles, when these do
not take noun-suffixes (cf. § 61 a and k). The form S also belongs to
the suffi.xes of the perfect, since it has arisen from '"^-^ (cf., however,
§ 60 d). With ^, 03, the connecting sound is only a vocal S^wd,
which has arisen from an original short vowel, thus ''I-^-, C5?-;-, e. g.
'i: n"? {ffiO'Vkh.a), or when the final consonant of the verb is a guttural,
1-=7- , e- g. ^^i^f • In pause, the original short vowel (a) reappears as
S^ghdl with the tone ^-^ (also ^-1-, see g). On the appending of
suffixes to the final |1 of the imperfect (§ 47 m), see § 60 e.
^ Rem. I. As rare forms may be mentioned sing. 2nd pers. masc. Hi Gn 27'',
1 K iS", &c., in pause also HS^ (see below, t) ; fern. *3 >3 ' \f/ 103*, 137*.
Instead of the form T]__, which is usual even in the perfect (e.g. Ju 4*",
Ez 27*^), TJ occurs as/em. Is 60^ (as masc. Dt 6^'', 28*^, Is 30^^, 55* always in
pause); with MunaJi Is 54*, Jer 23'''. — In the 3rd masc. H Ex 32*', Nu 23*;
in the T,rdfem. H without Mappiq (cf. § 91 e) Ex 2*, Jer 44**; Am i^*, with
1 We have kept the term connecting vowel, although it is rather a superficial
description, and moreover these vowels are of various origin. The connective
a is most probably the remains of the old verbal termination, like the « in
the 2nd pers./e»j. sing. ^iT'^lptOp. Observe e.g. the Hebrew form cftal-ani in
connexion with the Arabic qatala-ni, contrasted with Hebrew (ftalat-ni and
Arabic qatalat-ni. KOnig accordingly prefers the expression ' vocalic ending
of the stem', instead of 'connecting syllable'. The connective e, a, as
Pratorius {ZDMG. 55, 267 ft'.) and Barth (ibid. p. 205 f.) show by reference to
the Syriac connective at in the imperf. of the strong verb, is originally due
to the analogy of verbs ^"7 (^3nD = '3^110 from m^haini), in which the final e
was used as a connecting vowel first of the imperat., then of the impf.
(besides many forms with a, § 60 d), and of the infin. and participle.
§ 58 h, t] The Pronominal Suffixes of the Verb 157
retraction of the tone before a following tone-syllable, but read certainly
r\rh niOB'.— The forms iOJL, iOJ^, iOJL occur 33 times, all in poetry ^
(except Ex 23'^) [viz. with the perfect Ex 15^", 23", \\i 738 ; with the imperfect
Ex 155 (^D for to), 157.9.9.12.15.17.17^ ^36^ 21"'", 2 2^, 45", 8c«, 14010; with the
imperative \p 5^', 591*-'^, 83^*]. On the age of these forms, see § 91 Z 3 ; on
I and I . as suffixes of the 3rd fem. plur. of the imperfect, § 60 d. —
In Gn 48* N3"Dni:) (cf. DC'"D3*1 i Ch 14" according to Baer), D__ has lost
the tone before Maqqeph and so is shortened to D___. — In Ez 44* j^?2''B'ri1 is
probably only an error for DlD^B'rn .
2. From a comparison of these verbal suffixes with the noun-suffixes (§ 91) fl
we find that (o) there is a greater variety of forma amongst the verbal than
amongst the noun-sufiSxes, the foims and relations of the verb itself being
more various ; — (6) the verbal suffix, where it differs from that of the noun,
is longer; cf. e.g. ^3_1_, ^3 * ^3^ (me) with "• {my). The reason is that
the pronominal object is less closely connected with the verb than the
possessive pronoun (the genitive) is with the noun ; consequently the former
can also be expressed by a separate word (flN in 'flN, &c.).
4. A verbal form with a suffix gains additional strength, and some- 1
times intentional emphasis, when, instead of the mere connecting vowel,
a special connecting-syllable ^ (an) ^ is inserted between the suffix and
the verbal stem. Since, however, this syllable always has the tone,
the a is invariably (except in the ist pers. sing.) modified to tone-
bearing S^ghdl. This is called the iV't^n energicum* (less suitably
demonstrativum or epentheticum), and occurs principally (see, however,
Dt 32^" bis) in pausal forms of the imperfect, e. g. ^n33^1^ he will bless
him {yj/ 72'^ cf. Jer 5^^), ^^pJlK Jer 22^^*; ''??^33^ he will honour me
(y\r 50^) is unusual ; rarely in the perfect, Dt 24'' 4l?l-?. • On examples
like '3?"^ Gn 30*, cf. § 26 gr, § 59 /. In far the greatest number of
cases, however, this NUn is assimilated to the following consonant
(3, 3), or the latter is lost in pronunciation (so n), and the NUn
consequently sharpened. HeKce we get the following series of suffix-
forms : —
1 Thus in ^^ a iO occurs five times [four times attached to a noun or
preposition, §§ 91/, 103 c], and D__ only twice.
' It is, however, a question whether, instead of a connecting syllable, we
should not assume a special verbal form, analogous to the Arabic energetic mood
(see I, at the end) and probably also appearing in the Hebrew cohorta-
tive (see the footnote on § 48 c). — As M. Lambert has shown in REJ. 1903,
p. 1 78 ff. (* De I'emploi des suffixes pronominaux ...')» the suffixes of the 3rd
pers. with the impf. without waw in prose are ^3_1- and HHJL, but with
waw consec. in_L and n_l_ or H ; with the jussive in the 2nd and 3rd pers.
always in_!_ n_l_, . 1 the ist pers. more often ^Il_l_ than in_l_, and always
n34.. ■• ' " " ■•■ ■■ '
' According to Barth 'n-haltige Suffixe' in Sprachwiss, Untersuchungen, Lp;
1907, p. I ff., the connecting element, as in Aramaic, was originally in, whi
in Hebrew became en in a closed tone-syllable.
* So KOnig, Lehrgeb., i. p. 226.
y
158 The Verb [§§ 58 h i, 59 «, h
istpers. *3J_ (even in pause, Jb 7", &c.), "I^- (for *i3j-, *33J_).
2nrf pers. ^4- (Jer 22^* in pause ^?^ and, only orthographically
different,
n3_!_ (Is 10'^'', Pr 2" in pause),
yd pers. ^3-1- (for l'"!?^),^ fern. ^^-^ for i^ll-^.
[ist pers. 2>lur. 13-!^ (for ^^?-^), see the Rem.]
In the other persons Nun energetic does not occur.
A
Rem. The uncontracted forms with Nun are rare, and occur only in poetic
or elevated style (Ex 15*, Dt 32I" [bis'], Jer 5^^^, 22^^*) ; they are never found
in the yrdfem. $ing. and istiplur. On the other hand, the contracted forms
are tolerably frequent, even in prose. An example of ^3^ as isipiwr. occurs
perhaps in Jb 31I* [but read ^3__ and cf. § 72 cc\, hardly in Ho 12^; cf.
133n hehold us, Gn 44^^, 50^*, Nu 14*" for 133 H (instead of 133n ; see § 20»«). —
In Ez 4I* the Masora requires n33yri, without Dages in the Nun.
/ That the forms with Nun energicum are intended to give greater emphasis
to the verbal form is seen from their special frequency in pause. Apart from
the verb, however, Niin energicum occurs also in the union of suffixes with
certain particles (§ 100 0).
This Nun is frequent in Western Aramaic. In Arabic the corresponding
forms are the two energetic moods (see § 48 b) ending in an and anna, which
are used in connexion with suffixes (e.g. yaqtulan-ka or yaqtulanna-ka) as well
as without them.
§ 59. The Perfect with Pronominal Suflixes.
(I 1. The endings {afformatives) of the perfect occasionally vary
somewhat from the ordinary form, when connected with pronominal
suffixes ; viz. : —
(a) In the yd sing. fern, the original feminine ending n__ or n__ is
used for n_..
(b) In the 2nd sing. masc. besides ^ we find ^, to which the con-
necting vowel is directly attached, but the only clear instances of this
are with "'3_!_ .^
(c) In the 2nd sing. fern. ""J^ , the original form of W , appears ; cf.
^riN, "rip^i?, § 32/; § 44 g. This form can be distinguished from the
ist pers. only by the context.
{d) 2nd plur. masc. ^^^ for DW. The only examples are Nu 20*, 21^*,
Zc 7^ The fern. I^P^i? never occurs with suffixes; probably it had the
same form as the masculine.
• "We exhibit first the forms of the perfect HipJi'il, as used in con-
nexion with suffixes, since here no further changes take place in the
stem itself, except as regards the tone (see c).
^ On i3 = 13__ Nu 23", see § 67 0.
2 On the d as an original element of the verbal form, see § 58/, note.
§ 59 <^-/] ^^^ Perfect with Pronominal Suffixes 159
Singular.
3. m. i'^tJpn
2. m. riS'^pn, n!'!?pn
2. /. ^JiiS'^pn, i^S"?i?!?
I. c. 'ri^^pn
Plural.
2. //i.
wfjtDpn
I. c
. I^S'l??!?
The beginner should first practise connecting the suffixes with these Hiph'il
forms and then go on to unite them to the Perfect Qal (see d).
2. The addition of the suffix generally causes the tone to be thrown c
forward towards the end of the word, since it would otherwise fall,
in some cases, on the ante-penultima ; with the heavy suffixes (see e)
the tone is even transferred to the suffix itself. Considerations of
tone, especially in the Perfect Qal, occasion certain vowel changes :
(a) the Qames of the first syllable, no longer standing before the tone^
always becomes vocal S^wd ; (6) the original Pathah of the second
syllable, which in the 3rd sing. fern, and -^rd plur. had become S^wd,
reappeax's before the suffix, and, in an open syllable before the tone, is
lengthened to Qames ; similarly original I (as in the y'd sing. masc.
without a suffix) is lengthened to e, e. g. ^I^nt* i S 1 8^S Pr 1 9^
The forms of the perfect of Qal consequently appear as follows : — d
Singular.
3. m. b^\>
3. /. rb^\> (n^Pi?, see g)
2. m. ^}^\> {^^^\>, see h)
2. /. ^J!i.^^i?(nS'Cii?,seeA)
I. c. "fiiJCp
Plural,
c. 'h\$^
2, m.
^%\>
>^%\>
The connexion of these forms with all the suffixes is shown in
Paradigm C- It will be seen there also, how the Sere in the Perfect
Piel changes sometimes into S^ghol, and sometimes into vocal S^wd.
Rem. I. The suffixes of the 2nd and 3rd pers. plur. D3 and DH, since they e
end in a consonant and also always have the tone, are distinguished as heavy
suffixes (suffixa gravia) from the rest, which are called light suffixes. Compare
the connexion of these (and of the corresponding feminine forms J3 and JH)
with the 7ioun, § 91. With a perfect D2 alone occurs, if/ 11 8^6. The form b^j?
which is usually given as the connective form of the 3rd sing. masc. before
DD and p is only formed by analogy, and is without example in the 0. T.
2. In the yd sbig. masc. ^n?t3p (especially in verbs T]"p ; in the strong verb f
only in Jer 20" in Pi'el) is mostly contracted to \?Q\>, according to § 23 fc ; *
likewise in the 2nd sing. masc. ^n^p^p to inpDi?. — As a suffix of the ist sing.
^i_l_ occurs several times with the 3rd sing. masc. perf. Qal of verbs n'v, not
only in pause (as "•jSj? ^ 118' ; ^35p Pr 822 with D^/ii), but even with a con-
i6o The Verb [§§ 59 g-i, 60 a
junctive accent, as ^J'l'n Jb 30"; ^35y i S aS*' (where, however, the reading
••Jjy is also found). With a sharpened 3 : >|3"n Gn 30*, >f\^> \f> 118".
a- 3. The ^rd sing . fern. Vp^p (^zH^Bp) has the twofold peculiarity that (a) the
ending ath always takes the tone,i and consequently is joined to those sufiSxes
which form a syllable of themselves (*3^ ^^ IH H, 13), without a connecting
vowel, contrary to the general rule, § 58/; (b) before the other suffixes the
connecting vowel is indeed employed, but the tone is drawn back to the
penultima, so that they are pronounced with shortened vowels viz. T] '
D_ 1_^ e.g. TjnnnX she loves thee, Ru 4^^, cf. Is 47^°; Dn333 she has stolen them,
Gn 3i»2 ; DnS^K' it burns them. Is 47", Jos 2«, Ho 2", ^ 48'. For V^l-l-, 'T?-^
&c., in pause ^3n is found, Jer 8*^, \fi 6q^°, and ftn Ct 8* : and also without
the pause for the sake of the assonance ''JJiPBrt, she was in travail with thee, ibid.
The form inp^^p (e. g. Ru 4^') has arisen, through the loss of the H and the
consequent sharpening of the n (as in 13_L and n3_l. for in3JL and n3JL
cf. § 58 i), from the form innp'op, which is also found even in pause (?nri3nX
I S i8'8 ; elsewhere it takes in pause the form inJISDD Is 59^^) j go nript^j?
from nnptSp ; cf. I S I*, Is 34", Jer 49", Ru 3' ; in pause Ez 14'^, alwaj's, on
the authority of Qimhi, without Mappiq in the PI, which is consequently
always a mere vowel-letter.
n 4. In the 2nd sing. masc. the form ribop is mostly used, and the suffixes
have, therefore, no connecting vowel, e.g. IJniflD 13rin3t thou hast cast us off,
thou hast broken us down, \p 60^ ; but with the suflf. of the ist sing, the form
'3JlSop is used, e.g. "'3J^"!i5n ^ 139^; in pause, however, with Qames, e.g.
''3P12UI ^ 2 2^; Ju iio (with Zaqeph qaton) ; but cf. also ''^PiSrS ^ 17* "^yith
Mer'kka, — In the 2nd sing. fern, '•ri— is also written defectively, ^3J1''Q1 i S 19",
Ju i]36j Jer 15I", Ct 48. Occasionally the suffix is appended to the ordinary
form n__, viz. 13nV3B'ri thou (/em.) dost adjure us, Ct 5', Jos 2"*° ; cf. Jer 2",
and, quite abnormally, with Sere 13ri"1"}in thou {/em.) didst let us down, Jos 2^8^
where 13ri*l"}in would be expected. In Is 8" ^H?!! ^^ probably intended as
an imperfect.
2 5. In verbs middle e, the S remains even before suffixes (see above, c), e. g.
■^anX Dt 15", innnnK x S i8'», cf. 18^2 ; imN"!^ Jb 37". From a verb middle o
there occurs "I"'rip3"' I have prevailed against him, if/ 13', from bb"* with 0 instead
of 0 in a syllable which has lost the tone (§ 44 e).
§ 60. Imperfect with Pronominal Suffi-xes.
a In those forms of the imperfect Qal, which have no afformatives, the
vowel 0 of the second syllable mostly becomes -^(simple S^wd mobile),
sometimes -^; thus in the principal ^aw»«, Nu 35^^", Is 27^ 62^, Jer 31",
Ez 35*, Ho 10'" ; before the principal jpawse, yj/ iig^; before a secondary
2)ause, Ez 17^ ; even before a conjunctive accent, Jos 23*. Before 'I^-,
^ ?iri73n Ct 8^ is an exception. D3 would probably even here have the tone
(see e) ; but no example of the kind occurs in theO.T. In 1351^ the imperfect
is used instead of the perfect with a suffix.
§6o6-/] Imperfect with Pronominal Siiffixes i6i
Q3__, however, it is shortened to Qames hatuph, e.g. T!'?^'^ (but in
pause TJ^f^ or liy^f); with Ndn energicum, tee §58?"), Cl?19f!, &c.
Instead of njpopn, the form 1?t3pri 1 is used for the 2nd and 3rd fern.
])lur. before suffixes in three places : Jer 2^^, Jb 19'^ Ct i".
Rem. I. ^")3n^ f 94^" is an anomalous form for ^"IBn' (cf. the analogous 0
^3m § 67 n) and' ^"^JQ"; (so Baer ; others ^K^3D^) Gn 32I8 for ^*<J'3aV To the
same category as ^")Iin^ belong also, according to the usual explanation,
Onnyri (from *lbyri);'Ex 206, 232*, Dt 5% and '2Vl Dt if. As a matter of
fact, the explanation of these forms as imperfects of Qal appears to be required
by the last of these passages ; yet why has the retraction of the 6 taken place
only in these examples (beside numerous forms like ''3"73y^)? Could the
Masora in the two Decalogues and in Ex 23^* (on the analogy of which Dt 13'
was then wrongly pointed) have intended an imperfect Hoph'al with the
suffix, meaning thou shall not allow thyself to he brought to worship them'i
Verbs whicli have a in the second syllable of the imperfect, and imperative, C
Qal (to which class especially verba tertiae and mediae gutluralis belong, § 64
and § 65) do not, as a rule, change tlie Pathah of the imperfect (nor of the impera-
tive, see 5 61 g) into S^wd before suffixes ; but the Pathah, coming to stand in
an open syllable before the tone, is lengthened to Qames, e.g. "•JK'3?*1 Jb 29^^ ;
^mi?V5r 35; Dn^K'*! Jos 83; inNip^ \p 145I8; but i^-ip^ Jer 236, Ys' probably
a, forma mixta combining the readings INIp^ and 1N")i?\ cf. § 74 e.
2. Not infrequently suffixes with the connecting vowel a are also found CL
with the imperfect, e.g. ^Ji^Zinri Gn 19", cf. 29^2, Ex 33^0, Nu22S3, j k 2^* Q«re,
Is 563, Jb 9I8; also '•3_;_, Gn 2f^-^^, Jb 71*, 93*, 1321 (in principal pause);
rlT3>1 Gn 3733, cf. 16^, 2 S ii^'', Is 265, j^ 2827, i Ch 202 ; ^3-;>3'_ Is 63I6
(manifestly owing to the influence of the preceding ^jyT") j DC'^l?'' Ex 29"°,
cf. 2", Nu 2i3o, Dt 7'5, xp 748; even D^^DN n8»o-'2; ry^^si Ex 2"Vand :n'»n'»
1- • -: ^T • I- l|- . ;
Hb 2''' (where, however, the ancient versions read ''jJ^n'') ; even iST)'' (ofrom
ahu) Ho 83 ; cf. Ex 222^, Jos 2* (but read D?QVI!11) ! ^ S is^ KHh., 21'* (where,
however, the text is corrupt) ; 2 S 14* (where read with the old versions T]*1) ;
Jer 23« (see § 74 e), ^ 35", Ec 4'2._On pausal S^ghol for Sere in DDn3N1_ Gn 489
and inV^Sni (so Baer, but ed. Mant., Ginsb. ^nvisSni) Ju 16", seeV'29 q.
3. Suffixes are also appended in twelve passages to the plural forms in p C
viz. ""jilXZliri will ye break me in pieces? Jb 192 ; Tji^mK''' (here necessarily with
a connecting vowel) Is 6o''i'' ; Pr 522 (i but probably corrupt) ; elsewhere
always without a connecting vowel ; ''33{<'1|5^ with two other examples Pr i28,
8", Ho 515 ; cf. ^31^ ^t 63*, 91" ; ^HJ^. Jer 522 ; n2iJ_ Jer 2", all in principal
pause. [See BSttcher, Lehrb., § 1047 f.]
4. In Pi'el, P6yi, and Po'lel, the Sere of the final syllable, like the 6 in Qal, /*
becomes vocal S^wd ; but before the suffixes ^ and DD it is shortened to
S^ghol, e.g. '^i'2i5^ Dt 30*, ^34'^, Is 51*. With a final guttural, however,
■^np^'K Gn 3227; j,]go in Pr 4*, where with Qimhi ^"13^ri is to be read, e is
' This form is also found as feminine without a suffix, in Jer 49'', Ez 37''.
In the latter passage ^D^lpril is probably to be regarded, witli Konig, as
a clumsy correction of the original 'p*1, intended to suggest the reading
njZIlpril, to agree with the usual gender of DilOJfy.
OOWLET M
i62 The Verb [^6og,h,6ia-c
<
retained in the tone-syllable ; an analogous case in Hiph'il is ^"13^1 Dt 32'.
Less frequently Sere is sharpened to I/ireq, e.g. DilfJSSK Jb 16°, cf. Ex 31",
Is i'^, 52^2 . gf) jn Po'lel, Is 25I, tp 30^, 37°^, 145', and probably also in Qal ^DDX
I S i5«; cf. § 68 ;?.
^ 5. In Hiph'il the i remains, e.g. "'JK'^Spri Jb lo^i (after wdw consecutive it is
often written defectively, e.g. D{J'3p*l Gn 3^1 and often); but cf. above,/,
Dt 32'. Forms like HS'lK'yri thou' enrichest it, ip 6c,^'>, i S 17^^, are rare.
Cf. § 53 n.
h 6. Instead of the suffix of the 3rd plur. fern. (|), the suffix of the 3rd plur.
masc. (D) is affixed to the afformative ^, to avoid a confusion with the personal
ending |1 ; cf. D!|Nplp''1 Gn 26'^ (previously also with a perf. DlOnp) ; Gn 26'*,
33", Ex 2^' (where jyB'i'l occurs immediately after) ; 39'*'^'', i S 6^" (where
also Dn^pS is for |ri"'?3, a neglect of gender which can only be explained by
§ 135 0). — For PIlII Zc 11^ read perhaps |2")ni with M. Lambert.
§ 61. Infinitive, Imjyerative and Participle with Pronominal
Suffixes.
a 1. The infinitive construct of an active verb may be construed with
an accusative, and therefore can also take a verbal suffix, i.e. the
accusative of the personal pronoun. The only undoubted instances of
the kind, however, in the O. T. are infinitives with the verbal suffix
of the ist pers. sing., e. g. ''3t?'"]'lp to inquire of vie, Jer 37^ As a rule
the infinitive (as a noun) takes ?ioMW-suffixes (in the genitive, which
may be either subjective or objective, cf. §115 c), e. g. ^I^y my passing
hy ) iSp^ '"* reigning, see § 115 a and e. The infinitive Qal, then,
usually has the form qotl, retaining the original short vowel under the
first radical (on the probable ground-form qutul, see § 46 a). The
resulting syllable as a rule allows a following B^gadk^phath to be
spirant, e. g. ^2^^?? in his writing, Jer 45' ; cf., however, ''22n Gu 19^' ;
iS33 (so ed. Mant. ; others iB33) Ex 12^' ; ^32fy i Ch 4" ; before ^^ and
D3_- also the syllable is completely closed, e.g. ''ISDK3 Ex 23'^ Lv 23'"
(but in pause '^■T^k}? Gn 27''^), unless the vowel be retained in the
second sylhible ; see cf. With the form Pbp generally, compare the
closely allied nouns of the form y^p (before a sufiix blpi? or •'^.p),
§ 84'' a; § 93 g'.
O Rem. I. The infin. of verbs which have 0 in the last syllable of the imperfed
of Qal, sometimes takes the form qitt before suffixes, e.g. i*1333 Ex 21* ; D"1Dlp
Am 2« (but n-1D)p Ex 218), ii?D3 2 S i'« (but i^S3 i S 29'), i'^tpV^ Zc 3I, natJ'
Lv 26'^^, Ez 30^8 &c. According to Barth (see above, § 47 i with the note)
these forms with i in the first syllable point to former t-imperfects.
C Infinitives of the form pOp (§ 45 c) in verbs middle or third guttural (but
cf. also n33K^ Gn i9'3-3''— elsewhere "!]2DK' and iUDK') before suffixes sometimea
take the form qail, as isyi Jon i'^ (and, with the syllable loosely closed.
I
^ 6i dg'l Infinitive with Pronominal Siiffixes 163
iOyS Ju 13**), ^Knip and ^ypl Ez 25«; sometimes qill, with the a attenuated
to i, especially in verbs third guttural; as ^riC3, ''V^'^, DVl??. *'^??' ""C^?)
Piyan .—Contrary to § 58/ ^3^ (i Ch 12''') and 13_!_ (Ex 14'') are sometimes
found with tlie infinitive instead of ''34- ^^^ ^^4-- ^" "'Sm my following \p 3821
(but <^re ^3*11), cf. the analogous examples in § 46 e.
2. With the suffixes ^__ and D5__, contrary to the analogy of the corre- (i
spending nouns, forms occur like ''JP3K thy eating, Gn 2"; DSi'SK Gn 3^;
^"IDy (others "^"lOy) Ob ", i.e. with 0 shortened in the same way as in the
imperfect, see § 60. But the analogy of the nouns is followed in such forms as
D3"|Xp your harvesting, Lv 19', 23^^ (^with retention of the original t<), and
DDDXb (read moos^khem) your despising, Is 2,0^^ ; cf. Dt 20* ; on D3SVb3 Gn 2,2^'^
(for 'i*D3), see § 74 h. — Very unusual are the infinitive suffixes of the 2nd sing,
masc. with 3 energicum (on the analogy of suffixes with the imperfect, § 58 2),
as T^D^ Dt 4'*, cf. 23', Jb 33'*, all in principal pause.
Exaimples of the infinitive Niph'al with suffixes are, n^in Ex 14'* ; ^"IDj^H' C
Dt 282« (in pause, Tj^JDE'n verse 24) ; iJ2SB>n ip ^f^; DDl'sn Ez 2i29; Dnbtfn
Dt 7^^. In the infinitive of Pi'el (as also in the imperfect, see § 60/) the e before
the suflf. ^__, DD^ becomes S'ghol, e.g. ^nS'l Ex 4'", and with a sharpening
to i DDB'ls'ls i'^ (see § 60/). In the infinitive Po'el, DSDK'O occurs (with a
for e or t) Am 5", but probably 030^3, with Wellhausen, is the right reading ;
the correction D has crept into the text alongside of the corrigendum {}'.
2. The leading form of the im2)erative Qal before suffixes (p^\l) is _/
due probably (see § 46 d) to tlie retention of the original short vowel
of the first syllable (ground-form qntul). In the imperative also 6 is
not followed by Dagei lene, e. g. D^O? kothhhem (not kothbem), &c.*
As in the imperfect (§ 60 d) and infinitive (see above, c), so also in the
imperative, suffixes are found united to the stem by an a-sound ; e. g.
n3n3 Is^o**; cf. 2812-^— The forms ^'?^\>, I^Pi?, which are not
exhibited in Paradigm C, undergo no change. Instead of '"'Jr't^i?, the
masc. form (1''t?i?) is used, as in the imj)erfect.
In verbs which form the imperative with a, like np^ (to which class />•
belong especially verbs middle and third guttural, §§ 64 and 65), this
a retains its place when pronominal suffixes are added, but, since it
then stands in an open sellable, is, as a matter of course, lengthened
to Qames (just as in imiierfects Qal in a, § 60 c), e. g. ''?D?^ send me.
Is 6S '35n3 y\t 26^ ^3^")p ^ 5o>S ""aiyw Gn 23». In Am 9*, DyX3 (so ed.
Mant., Baer, Ginsb., instead of the ordinary reading Dy?f3) is to be
explained, with Margolis, AJSL. xix, p. 45 ft"., from an original i^^yxs,
as Dr'37,n"i_ Am 9* from original ^'^r^^^'^?,"'.. — In the imperative Hiph'U,
the form used in conjunction with suffixes is not the 2nd sing. masc.
' ''3'lDK' Jdm-'rent required by the Masorain f 16^ (also mOB' f 86", iiq'^"' ;
cf. Is 38'* and ^IJOy Ob "), belongs to the disputed cases discussed in § 9 o
and § 48 t note.
M 2
164 The Ferb [§§ 61 a, 62
''^i?D, but ?'^f?p<] (with t on account of the open syllable, cf. § 60 g),
e.g. ^nnnpn pres(?«< it, Mai i*.
'i 3. Like the infinitives, the participles can also be united with either
verbal or noun-suffixes ; see § 1 1 6/. In both cases the vowel of the
participles is shortened or becomes S^wd before the suffix, as in the
corresponding noun-forms, e.g. from the form i'tpP : ^P"!^, ^^"l^j &c. ;
but before S^wd mobile Tj^"',, &c., or with the original t, ^'^)^ Ex 23^,
&c., "^SpX 2 K 22^" (coinciding in form with the ist sing, imperfect Qal,
I S 15^ cf. § 68 h) ; with a middle guttural ('['X3), '^W\ ; with a third
guttural, "^X^a Is 43', but ^nVlS', ^nW'O Jer 28^ cf. § 65 d. Tlie form
ij^i^tp, with suffix *S"?l'2»; before ^-'wd sometimes like V^'?^ Is 48'^
DDtpmtp 5ii2, sometimes like D3DD^ilD 52'^ In Is 47'" ''3XT is irregular
for *JNT ; instead of the meaningless '^'§l?\l^ ^^. Jer i $'" read 'JlBl^i? Onb .
Also unusual (see above, d) with participles are the suffixes of the 2nd sing,
niasc. with 3 energicum, as "^IS]! Jb 5'; cf. Dt 8^, i2"-2*,
§ 62. Verbs with Gutturals.
Brockelmann, Grundriss, p. 584 fif.
Verbs which have a guttural for one of the three radicals differ
in their inflexion from the ordinary strong verb, according to the
general rules in § 22. These differences do not affect the consonantal
part of the stem, and it is, therefore, more correct to regard the
guttural verbs as a subdivision of the strong verb. At the most, only
the entire omission of the strengthening in some of the verbs middle
guttural (as well as in the imperfect Niph'al of verbs first guttural)
can be regarded as a real weakness (§§ 63 A, 64 e). On the other
hand, some original elements have been preserved in guttural stems,
which have degenerated in the ordinary strong verb ; e. g. the a of the
initial syllable in the imperfect Qal, as in ^^n^, which elsewhere is
attenuated to i, ^bp^. — In guttural verbs N and n are only taken
into consideration when they are actual consonants, and not vowel-
letters like the N in some verbs N^D (§ 68), in a few h"]} (§ 73^),
and in most s"? (§ 74). In all these cases, however, the N was at
least originally a full consonant, while the n in verbs n'v was never
anything but a vowel letter, cf. § 75. The really consonantal n at
the end of the word is marked by Ifapjnq. — Verbs containing a 1
also, according to § 22 q, r, share some of the peculiaiities of the
guttural verbs. For more convenient treatment, the cases will be
distinguished, according as the guttural is the first, second, or third
radical. (Cf. the Paradigms D, E, F, in which only those conjugations
are omitted which are wholly regular.)
§ 6^ a-e^j Ve7^hs Fii'd Guttural 165
§ 63. Verhs Firtt Guttural, e.g. IPV to stand.
In this class the deviations frem the ordinary strong verb may he a
referred to the following cases : —
1. Instead of a simple S^ivd mohile, the initial guttural takes
a compound Shod {Hateph, § lo/, § 22 Z). Thus the infinitives 'iOV,
^3$< to eat, and the perfects, 2nd plur. masc. Q^*ipy, D'l^^'Sn from J^SH
to be inclined, correspond to the forms btSp and D^?'t?P ; also ii'9?!? to
^/^ip, and so always with initial -^r- before a suffix for an original a,
according to § 220.
2, When a preformative is placed before an initial guttural, either h
the two may form a closed syllable, or the vowel of the pre-
formative is repeated as a JIateph under the guttural. If the vowel
of the preformative was originally a, two methods of formation may
again be distinguished, according as this a remains or passes into
Seghol.
Examples : (a) of firmly closed syllables after the original vowel c
of the preformative (always with 0 in the second syllable, except 33yri^
Ez 2 3\ ITiyri &c. from 'Tiy to adorn oneself, and ^'^T.; but cf. e):
nbn:, ^bn:, ab'n:, Tlb'n:, 2pv: Jerg' (probably to distinguish it from
the name ^^V)., just as in Jer 10'®, &c., the participle fem. Niph'al of
npn is npn3 to distinguish it from '"•^Dp-), &c., and so generally in the
imperfect Qal of stems beginning with n, although sometimes parallel
forms exist, which i*epeat the a as a Hateph, e. g. ^t^Dl"-, &c. The same
form appears also in the imperfect Hiph'll "l''Dn^, &c. Very rarely the
original a is retained in a closed syllable under the preformative 3 of
the perfect Nipth'al: ^^<3^J Gn3i"^; cf. 1819^ Jos 2'"; also the
infinitive absolute Difinj Est 8^ "iWy^ i Ch 5^", and the participle fern.
npna (see above), jj^wr, niirij?? Pr 27*. In these forms the original d is
commonly kept under the preformative and is followed by Halepli-
Pathah; thus in the perfect of some verbs T\"b , e.g. *^^V^., &c.; in the
infinitive absolute, 'H^SnJ. Est 9' ; in the participle H^p-) ^ 89*, &c.
(6) Of the corresponding Hateph after the original vowel : ^^Hf. "
(but B'Sn^ Jb 5'* in pause), D^D.l, "^^^1, t^'^H,!, and so almost always
with y and often with n in the imperfects of Qal and Hiph'll ; in
Hoph'al, npyn, ipr ; but cf. also =iN*3nn Is ^2-\ ^rinn Ez i6\
The d of the preformative before a guttural almost always (§22 i, C
cf. § 27^) becomes S^ghol (cf., however, 5-). This S^ghol again appeals
sometimes
(c) in a closed syllable, e.g. ^"2;% Ipn;;, Triy.% £3K'N^., always with
d in the second syllable, corresponding to the imperfects of verbs y"^,
1 66 The Verb [§63/-»"
with original I in the first and « in the second syllable, § 67 «, and
also to the imperfects of verbs 1"y, § 72 h; but of. also ^S'*."!, "^bxi,
and ^Mn.^; ill Mph., e. g. Tjani; ibn3 Am 6«, &c.; in //ep/t. "^'onn, D^Jivn
2K4'', &c.: sometimes
{d) followed by Hateph-S^gUl, e.g. pT.n;., si'DN;., ei'tyn;;,, aijj>_ in un-
pcrfectQal; '^VV'l Hiph'il; \i^}ll^'iph'al.
f Rem. With regard to the above examples the following points may also
he noted : (i) The foi-ms with a firmly closed syllable (called the hard com-
bination) frequently occur in the same verb with forms containing a loosely
closed syllable (the soft combination). (2) In the ist sing, imperfect Qal the
preformative K invariably takes S^ghol, whether in a firmly or loosely closed
syllable, e. g. CJ'a^^« (with the cohortative HB'anX), "IDnX (in pause), &c. In
Jb 32^^ njyX must unquestionably be Hiph'il, since elsewhere the pointing
is always 'JJX. Cohortatives like HJinN Gn 27« and n^'^HK Jb i6«, are
v: r.' T ; - 1~ * t : : - '
explained by the next remark. (3) The shifting of the tone towards the end
frequently causes the Pathah of the preformative to change into S'ghol, and
vice versa, e.g. nb'yi, but nflB'yj ^rd sing. fern. ; PlbX"' but '»SDS<n ; T'DVn.
T -:,-' ^ T J viv " , ' v:iv' ■ : ~ i- • vav '
but with lodw consecutive rinioyn"!, &c. ; so^"lpn*1 Gn 8' the plur. of ">pn*1, cf.
Gn II* ; and thus generally a change of the stronger Hateph-S^ghol group
{ _ — _) into the lighter Hafeph-Palhak group takes place whenever the tone
is moved one place toward the end (cf. § 27 0).
^ 3. When in forms like Hbr, npj?3 , the vowel of the final syllable
becomes a vocal S^wd in consequence of the addition of an aflformative
(^, ''-^j ^-^) or suffix, the compound S^wd of the guttural is changed
into the corresponding short vowel, e. g. I^J?' , plur. ^"ipV!. {ya-'a-m^-dhu
as an equivalent for ya-in^-dhu); '"'^jj?,^.. she is forsaken. But even in
these forms the hard combination frequently occurs, e. g. ^PSn^ they
take as a p)ledge (cf. in the sing, .'arri, also ''^D,.) ; ^PIO."! (also PID))
they are strong. Cf. m and, in general, § 22 m, § 28 c.
h 4. In the infinitive, imperative, and imperfect Niph'al, where the
first radical should by rule be strengthened (•'Pi?'?, ^^\^)), the strengthen-
ing is always omitted, and the vowel of the preformative lengthened
to Sere; lOV;. for yi"dmed,^ &c. Cf. § 22 c— For nb'il^r) Ex 25"
(according to Dillmann, to prevent the pronunciation i^^V.^, which
tl;e LXX and Samaritan follow) read •"•^VJi!.
Remarks.
I. On Qal.
i I. In verbs N"D the infinitive construct and imperative take Hateph-S'ghol in
the first syllable (according to § 22 0), e. g. "ItN gird thou, Jb 38*, 2nN love thou,
• ri3VX Jb 19'' (so even the Mantua ed.) is altogether abnormal : read n3yN
with Baer, Ginsb.
§ 63 fc-m] Verbs First Guttural 167
Ho 3^, Th!;^ seize thou, Ex 4* (on ^BX hake ye, Ex 16^*, see § 76 d) ; PDX to ea< ;
infinitive with a prefix Xnvh ^bx!? ^3X3 Is 52* : ^HX^ Ec 38. Sometimes,
liowever, Haieph-Palhak is found as well, e. g. infinitive tnX i K 6* ; CXH 73X3
Nu 2610 (before a suffix ^|j3X, ^IDX, DD^^X, D?"!DX § 61 d) ; cf. Dt f°, I22»,
Ez 25', ^ 102^, Pr 25'' (^P"niDX), Jb 34^*, always in close connexion with the
following word. With a firmly closed syllable after 7 cf. nionp Is 30^* ; "ISH?
Jos 22f- (on Is 220, cf. § 84^ w) ; ninn^ Is 3oi«, Hag 2^^; 3^0? Ex 31*, &c. ;
ITV^ 2 S i83 g«re, but also ifys i Ch'i.s^e.
'ripnnn Ju ^snis jg altogether anomalous, and only a few authorities give A-"
^ripinn (Hlph'il), adopted by Moore in Haupt's Bible. According to Qimhi,
Olshausen, and others, the Masora intended a perfect Hoph'al with syncope of
the preformative after the n interrogative = ^rip*]nn PI, or (according to
Olshausen) with the omission of the n interrogative. But since the Hiph'il
and Hoph'al of pin nowhere occur, it is difficult to believe that such was the
intention of the Masora. We should expect the perfect Qal, "•Rp'inn, But the
Qames under the PI falling between the tone and counter-tone, was naturally
less emphasized than in Tlp'in without the H interrogative. Consequently
it was weakened, not to simple S^wd, but to in order to represent the
sound of the Qames (likewise pronounced as a) at least in a shortened form.
The S^ghol of the n interrogative is explained, in any case, from § 100 n (cf.
the similar pointing of the article, e. g. in CB'THH^ § 35 k). For the accusa-
tive after PIH, instead of the usual |0, Jb 3^^ affords sufficient evidence.
Also in the other forms of the imperative the guttural not infrequently /
influences the vowel, causing a change of i (on this i cf. § 48 i) into S^ghol, e. g.
nSDX gather thou, Nu ii^^ ; T]2~\V set in order, Jb 33^ ; ^EKTl strip off, Is 47^ (on
this irregular Dages cf. § 46 d), especially when the second radical is also a
guttural, e.g. 13nX Am 5I6, ,f, 3i2<; cf, Zc S^^ ; ^tHS Ct 2^^; cf. also in verbs
iT'bj ^3y sing ye, Nu 21", tf/ 147' (compared with ^3y answer ye, i S 12^) and
^pX Jo 1^ — Patha/i occurs in ^np3n hold him in pledge, Pr 20", and probably
also in ^ 9" CJp.Jn). — As a pausal form for '•3"!n (cf. theiJ^wr. Jer 2^'') we find
in Is 44" ''3"in (cf. the imperf, 3in"'\ with the 6 repeated in the form of a
Ifafeph-Qames. For other examples of this kind, see § 10 h and § 46 e.
2. The pronunciation (mentioned above. No. 2) of the imperfects in a with 111
H'ghdl under the preformative in a firmly closed syllable (e. g. ?^n' D?'!'"')
regularly gives way to the soft combination in verbs which are at the same
time n"^, e.g. nTm, H^fn^'.&c. (butcf. mnl &c., nrin: Pr6", ri'J^H ed. Mant.,
Ex 3^''). Even in the strong verb pin\\ is found along with pTHV Cf. albo
33j;ri1 Ez 238; ^J3PV>1 Gn 27^6 (so Ben-Asher; but Ben-Naphtali '\>Vl\);
□ppnril Nell 9^2, and so always in the imperfect Qal of "ITV with suffixes, Gn
4'j**, &c. — ^3nNri Pr 1^ is to be explained from the endeavour to avoid too
great an accumulation of short sounds by the insertion of a long vowel, but
it is a question whether we should not simply read ^3nXn with Haupt in
his Bible, Proverbs, p. 34, 1. 44 ff. ; cf. the analogous instances under p, and
1 68 The Verb [§637*9
such nouns as "1NI3, 3XT, § 93 *.— On ^"ll!!!^ \p 94'"' for ^l^n^ (according to
Qimhi, and others, rather Pii'al) cf. § 606.
n D^N^ ^ 58° an(i D"]V- '" ^««' suhtiUy, i S 2322, Pr 15^ 19'^^ may be explained
with Barth (ZDMG. 1889, p. 179) as i-imperfects (see above, § 47 i), — the latter
for the purpose of distinction from the causative D''^y'' f 83*. — Instead of the
unintelligible form Dp^n*1 (so ed. Mant. ; Baer and Ginsb. as in 24^) i Ch 23*
and 'riM 24' (partly analogous to Dinyri § 60 b) the Qal Dppn^l is to be read.
The form ^'I'V ip 7* which is, according to Qimhi (in Mikhlol ; but in his
Lexicon he explains it as Hithpa'el), a composite form of Qal (^IT!^) and Pi'el
(T!' -^)' ^^^ only be understood as a development of f)Tl^ (cf. § 64 A on pPIV^ ,
and § 69 X on Tjbnn Ex 9-^, ^ 73^;. Pathah has taken the place of Hakph-
Pathafi, but as a mere helping-vowel (as in fiyOK' § 28 e, note 2) and without
preventing the closing of the syllable. It is much simpler, however, to take
it as & forma mixta, combining the readings tjl"!^ (impf. Qal) and ^TV< (impf.
Pi'el).
II. On Hiph'il and Hoph'al.
0 3. The above-mentioned (/, 3) change of to occurs in the
perfect Hiph'il, especially when icCiw consecutive precedes, and the tone is in
consequence thrown forward upon the afformative, e. g. D'lipvn but W"ipy"1
Nu 36, 8", 2719; ^rinnyn, but '•ril^yn') Jer 15^*, Ez 2c?'^ -, even in the 3rd sing.
piKnl ^ 77^^. — On the contrary occurs instead of __ in the imperatire
Hiph'il, Jer 49*-^°; and in the infinitive Jer 31^*^. The preformative of "TTiy in
<
Hiph'il always takes a in a closed syllable : Ex 8* ^T'riyn ; verse 5 TfiyS ; also
verse 25 and Jb 22*''.
P 4. In the perfect Hiph'il is sometimes changed into ^ and in
Hoph'al ____ into • (cf. § 23 ;i) ; ri^nyn Jos f, n^yn Hb i^^, nbyn Ju
6"^^, 2 Ch 20^*, Na 2*, always before y, and hence evidently with the intention
of strengthening the countertone-syllable (n or 11) before the guttural. On
a further case of this kind (HDyf ) see § 64 c. Something similar occurs in the
formation of segholate nouns of the form qofl ; cf. § 93 q, and (on pCN &c. for
pTDN) § 84" q. — In the imperfect consecutive S2 pTn*1_ the tone is thrown
back on to the first syllable. On the Hoph'al D^riyn Ex 20^, &c., see § 60 b.
III. n^n and r^n
TT TT •
fj 5. In the verbs HTI to be, and n^H to live, the guttural hardly ever affects
the addition of preformatives : thus imperfect Qal n^n"' and iTn"' Niph'al D^DD •
but in the perfect Hiph'il rT^Pin (2nd plur. DH^nni Jos 2^^, and even without
v;dw consecutive, Ju 8'*). Initial H always has J/ateph-S'ghol instead of vocal
S'u:d; n;;!, nVn, Dni^l i S 25', Dr!''\T (except ^^n be thou! fem. Gn 24«»).
The 2nd sing. fem. imperative of iTH is ""^H live thou, Ez 16*; the infinitive,
with suffix, DnVn Jos 5^. After the prefixes 1, 3, 3, ^, O ( = fO) both H
and n retain the simple S'wa (§ 28 6) and tlie prefix takes i, as elsewhere
before strong consonants with S'ud ; hence in the perfect Qal Cn^^ni imperative
Vni, infinitive DVn?, DITIS &c. (cf. § 16/, f). The only exception is the and
; 1 • 11'* 1 1 *
sing, masc. of the imperative after vxiio ; H^HI Gn i2-',&c., iT'ni Gn 20'.
§64a c] Verbs Middle Guttural 169
§ 64. Verbs Middle Guttural, e.g. t^riK' to slaughter.
The slight deviations from the ordinary inflexion are confined a
chiefly to the following ' : —
1. When the guttural would stand at tlie beginning of a syllable
with simple Shvd, it necessarily takes a Hateph, and almost always
Hatej)h-Patliah, e.g. perfect ^t^n*^, imperfect 1£3n^^, imperative Niplial
IJOn^n. In the imperative Qal, before the afformatives i and H, the
original Pathah is retained in the first syllable, and is followed by
I/ateph-Pathah, thus, '\>VJ_, W}-, &c.; in I^HN the preference of the N
for S^yhol (but cf. also "n''in^"| Jer 13^') has caused the change from
d io e ; in IIHtJ' Jb 6"^, even I remains before a hard guttural.
So in the infinitive Qal fern., e.g. n3nX to love, n^K"! to pine; and in the
. T-:|- T :i-
infinitive with a suffix myo? Is 9* ; the doubtful form ntSHK' Ho 5^, is better
explained as infinitive Pi'el ( = nnnK').
2. Since the preference of the gutturals for the a-sound has less b
influence on the following than on the preceding vowel, not only is
Holem retained after the middle guttural in the infinitive Qal tSriK'
(with the fern, ending and retraction and shortening of the 0 '"I^Ol and
'"'i5f!'^> of. § 45 &), but generally also the Sere in the imperfect Niph'al
and Pi el, e. g. DH?^ le fights, Ona^ he comforts, and even the more
feeble S^ghul after vxiw consecutive in such forms as DDf"!!, ^Jt't'!'!
Gn 41* (of., however, yw^, i K 12*, &c.). But in the imperative and
imperfect Qal, the final syllable, through the influence of the guttural,
mostly takes Pathah, even in transitive verbs, e.g. '^ni^, ^D^) ;
py|, Pyp ; "'D?, "^D?! ; with svjffixes (according to § 60 c), itnjyerative
^3Jn2, ':^^m, imperfect ^.V^^X3^
With o in the imperative Qal, the only instances are ?'V^ 2 S 13''; c
tnx Ex 4'', 2 S 2^', fern. "'TniS Ru 3'* (with the unusual repetition of the
lost 0 as Ilateph-Qames; 2nd^;Zztr. masc. in pause ^TPIK Neh 7'; without
the pause ^THN Ct 2'*) ; "nyip Ju ipl^ Finally nDS?f for HloyT, Nu 23^
is an example of the same kind, see § 63 p. Just as rare are the im-
perfects in o of verbs middle guttural, as Dn3\ THN"; , yyon Lv 5'*, Nu 5^
(but ^yrp>1 2 Ch 26'«) ; cf. ^^^m Ez i6^» ; "^V?'^ Jb 35"- Also in the
perfect Piel, Pathah occurs somewhat more frequently than in the
strong verb, e.g. Dn3 to comfort (cf., however, M?, ^^^, l^'^^, nriE') ;
* Hopk'al, which is not exhibited in tlie paradigm, follows tlie analogy of
Qal; Hiph'il is regulnr.
"^ Also Ju 19' (where Qimhi would read s^'dd), read s^'ocl, and on the use
of the conjunctive accent (here Darga) as a substitute for Motheg, cf. § 9 u (c)
and § 16 b.
lyo The Verb [§64rf-«7
but X and JJ always have e in 3rd sing. — On tlie infinitive with suffixes,
cf. § 61 h.
d 3. In Piel, Pu'al, and Hithpa'el, the Dages forte being inadmissible
in the middle radical, the preceding vowel, especially before n, n, and
y, nevertheless, generally remains short, and the guttural is conse-
quently to be regarded as, at least, virtually strengthened, cf. § 22 c;
e.g. Piel pD^,*l^np. Jos i^\ 'J^IV^^ i K 14^ 3n: Ex io'» (cf., however,
""D?? Gn 34'^ ; T}?f}}. Ex 15'^ but in the imperfect and participle 7^3^,
&c.; in verbs r]"b, e.g. ny-\), infinitive pnb', Pw'a/ I'D! (but cf. ^ril
>//• 36'^ from nn'l^ also the unusual position of the tone in ID'^* Ez 21'*,
and in the perfect Hithpa'el 'J?^n"inn Jb 9^") ; Hithpa'el perfect and
im2)eratlve lin^"?, &c.; in ^^awse (see ^§ 22 c, 27 5', 29 ?;, 54 ^) ''"^fj^'?
Nu 8^ 2 Ch 3o'« ; Dnan^ Nu 23'^ &c.
e The complete omission of the strengthening, and a consequent
lengthening of the preceding vowel, occurs invariably only with
n (JTna Ez 16'' is an exception ; nri]])b also occurs, Ju 6-**), e. g. "HI? (in
pause 'H"'.?), imperfect ^l^^, Pu'al T]13. Before N it occurs regularly
in the stems "»???, ^X?., f^O, "1X3, and in the Hithpa'el of {^^3, nNT,
and nxt^; on the other hand, N is virtually strengthened in the
perfects, ^??3 (once in the imperfect, Jer 29^^^) to commit adultery, J^N3
to despise (in the participle, Nu 14^^ Is 60^'*, Jer 23'' ; according to
Baer, but not ed. Manfeq-t)r Ginsb., even in the imperfect Yi<T. ^ 74'°).
"1K3 to abhor La 2' (also nri-)^3 f 89''") and ^^^ -^ 109'"; moreover, in
the infinitive ^^1 Ec 2^", according to the best reading. On the
Mappiq in the Pu'al INT Jb 33-', cf. § 14 d.
f Rem. I. In the verb 7XB' to ask, to beg, some forms of the perfect Qal appear
to be based upon a secondary form middle e, which is Sere when the vowel of
the N stands in an open syllable, cf. •?j|)NB' Gn 32"8, Ju 420 ; '^^^f ^ I37^
but in a closed syllable, even without a suffix, Dri^KK' i S 12'', 25^ Jb 2i29;
'in^J^bxK' Ju 136, I S 1^0. Cf., however, similar cases of attenuation of an
original a, § 69 s, and especially § 44 d. In the first three examples, if
explained on that analogy, the i attenuated from a would have been lengthened
to e (before the tone) ; in the next three i would have been modified to i.
Also in the Hi2Jh'iliorm liT'nijNK'n i S i'« the N is merely attenuated from H.
fir 2. In Pi'cl and Hithpa'el the lengthening of the vowel before the guttural
" causes the tone to be thrown back upon the penultima, and consequently the
Sere of the ultima to be shortened to S^ghol. Thus (a) before monosyllables,
according to § 29 e, e.g. DC* VH^^ to minister there, Dt I'j^^, even in the case of
a guttural which is virtually strengthened, Gn 39'^, Jb 8" (see § 29 g). {b) after
wdw consecutive, e.g. T]'}i"'1 and he blessed, Gn 1" and frequently, ^"IJ^I and he
drove out, Ex 10", DJ^Snril Dn 2^.
^ |n3 is explained by Abulwalid as the 3rd pers. perfect Pu'al, but by Qimhi
as a noun.
§§ 64 h, i, 65 a, t] Verbs Middle Guttural 171
.5. The following are a few rarer anomalies ; in the imperfect Qal pnV"* Gn 216 /;
i^elsewliere pHXri, &c., in pause pHi^, cf. § 10 jr (c) and § 63 w) ; iriNJ Gn 32^
;,for inXSI) ; in the perfect Pi'el nnN Ju s'^ (perhaps primarily for nnN ;
according to Gn 34'* 1"inN would be expected), and similarly '30011 \ ^t 51'' ^^r
'jnipn'' ; in the imperative Pi'el 31^ Ez 37" (cf. above, § 52 n) ; finally, in the
imperative Hiph'il pny^ Jb 132' and lyCin ^ 692^, in both cases probably
influenced by the closing conso ant, arid by the preference for Pathah in
pause (according to § 29 5) ; without the pause pn")n Pr 4^^^, &c. ; but also
nmn Jo 4".
4". As infinitive Hithpa'll with a suffix we find DE^n^fin Ezr 8\ &c., with '/
a firmly closed syllable, also the participle D''b'n:ntp Neh 'f* ; Baer, however,
reads in all these cases, on good authority, Db'n''nn &c.— The quite meaningless
KHhibh "INK'NJI Ez 9* (for which the Q^re requires the equally unintelligible
"IXK'JI) evidently combines two different readings, viz. "iNip:"! {part. Niph.)
and "IXB'NII {imperf. consec); cf.Kbnig, Lehrgebaude,i. p. 266 f.— In ^n~lXr^ Is 44"
(also ^msn'' in the same verse) an imperfect Po'el appears to be intended by
the Masora with an irregular shortening of the 6 for ''"IXh^ ; cf. § 55 b ''3K'?p
\fi 10 1^ Q^re ; on the other hand Qimhi, with whom Delitzsch agrees, explains
the form as Pi'el, with an irregular __ for __, as in the reading Htp^^fc?
Ku 22T ; cf. § 10 A.
5. A few examples in which S, as middle radical, entirely loses its
consonantal value and quiesces in a vowel, will be found in § 73 g.
§ 65. Verbs Third Guttural, e.g. nbe' to send}
1. According to § 22 c?, when the last syllable has a vowel incom- d
patible with the guttural (i.e. not an a-sound), two possibilities present
themselves, viz. either the regular vowel remains, and the guttural
then takes furtive Pathah, or Pathah (in pause Qames) takes its place.
More paiiicularly it is to be remarked that —
(a) The unchangeable vowels ^-;-, \ ^ (§ 25 h) are always retained,
even under such circumstances; hence inf. abs. Qal ^'O^, jpart. jpass.
r\'h^, Hiph. D'J'K'n, imperf. tyhfl, part. D'f'fP. So also the less firm
o in the inf. constr. rvp is almost always retained : cf., however, npip,
in close connexion with a substantive, Is 58', and V)^ Nu 20^. Examples
of the infinitive with suffixes are IP")?? Gn 35' ; iV^M Nu 35"*; i^i'^l?
Lv 1 8^3, &c.
(6) The imperfect and imperative Qal almost alvirays have d in the 0
second syllable, sometimes, no doubt, due simply to the influence of
the guttural (for a tone-long 0, originally it), but sometimes as being
the original vowel, thus rhf), nbf, &c.; with suffixes '?n^f % '^D^f,
see § 60 c.
' Verbs n'v in which the H is consonantal obviously belong also to this class,
e. g. rl^a to be high, r\'CiF\ to be astonished, HriD (only in Hilhpalpel) to delay.
172 The Verb [§650-)^
Exceptions, in the impehrfect rivDX Jer 5'', K'Oi. (ripDNl Q*re) ; in the
imiierative PIDD Gn 43"./ On snch cases as nytJ'DX; Is 27*, cf. § 10 h.
C (c) Where Sere would be the regular vowel of the final syllable,
both forms (with i"! and a) are sometimes in use ; the choice of one or
the other is decided by the special circumstances of the tone, i. e. : —
CI Rem. I. In the absolute state of the participle Qal, Pi'el and Hithpa'el, the forms
nVt:' (with sufif. inbb', but •^n^B'), n^^tJ'tD (with suflf. Tin^^'p), and Vl^^'Q are
used exclusively ; except in verbs JJ"? where we find, in close connexion,
also JJDi ^ 94S yn Is 51^5, Jer 31S5, yj,^ jg ^j^, 442*, yi^il ^t i36«, yctr Lv ii^,
all with the tone on the last syllable.— The part. Pu'al is y3"ip £245^ accord-
ing to the best authorities (Kittel y3"llD).
€ 2. Similarly, in the imperf. and inf. Niph'al, and in the perf. inf. and imperf.
Pi'el the (probably more original) form with a commonly occurs in the body
of the sentence, and the fuller form with e* in pause (and even with the lesser
distinctives, e.g. with I]^hi ^86* in the imperative Pi'tl ; with Tiph/ja i K 12^*
in the infinitive Pi'el ; Jer 4" imperfect Hithpa'el ; Jer 16^ imperfect Niph'al), cf. e.g.
yia"" Nu 27* with U"i3^ 36*; yzU'M Dt 1^*, even with retraction of the tone in
the inf. abs. Niph'al ]}2Wi} Nu 30' (elsewhere V^Wi) Jer 7^, 12'^ twice, in each
case without the pause); "V^^ri Hb 3^, with yp^ri Ez 13''; y?3 to devovr
Hb I '3, Nu 420 with y^3 La 2» ; for infinitive Hithpa'el, cf. Is 2820. The ivfinitivf
absolute Pi'el has the form n?tJ' Dt 22'', i K ii^^ ; the infinitive construct, on the
other hand, when without the pause is always as PlpK' except n?^p Ex 10*. —
nar Hb i'^ has e, though not In^JflMse, and even n^ri 2 K 16*, 2 Ch 28*; but
a in pause in the imperative Niph'al n'XH Ez 21"; jussive Pi'el inXfl f 40^*;
of. § 52 n. An example of a in the imperative Pi'el under the influence of
a final 1 is — iri3 Jb 36^ in the imperfect Niph'al "l^yni Nu i f^, &c.— In nns^
Jb 14' (cf. ^ 92'*, Pr 14''), Barth (see above, § 63 n) finds an i-imperfect of Qal.
since the intransitive meaning is only found in Qal.
J 3. In the 2nd sing. masc. of the imperative, and in the forms of the jussive and
imperfect consecutive of Hiph'il which end in gutturals, a alone occurs, e.g. HpSri
prosper thou, n^3^ let him make to trust, riDif*'! and he made to grow (so in Uithpalpel
npnpn^, &c., Hb 2'); even in pause nipX^I i Ch 29^3, and, with the best
authorities, nSV'! i Ch 12" ; jDy*^'''! Is 35* is perhaps to be emended into '^V^),
( = ''y>^^"j). — In the infinitive absolute Sere remains, e.g. rl33n to make high; as
infinitive construct npiPI also occurs in close connexion (Jb G'^*) ; on yC'iH
as infinitive construct (i S 25'^^-^'), cf. § 53 k.
g 2. When the guttural with quiescent S^vjd stands at the end of
a syllable, the ordinary strong form remains when not connected
with suffixes, e. g. ^^2'^, ''^^2^. But in the 2nd sing. fern, perfect
a helping- Pathah takes the place of the ^^wd, JpnfiK' Jer 13"^ (§ 28 <?) ;
also in I K 14^, flDJ^p ig to be read, not Jpni^p.
fl Rem. The soft combination with compound S^ica occurs only in the ist plnr.
perfect with suffixes, since in these forms the tone is thrown one place farther
forward, e.g. '?Jl5i?n* u-e know thee, Ho 8^ (cf. Gn 26^9, ^ 44'«, i32«). Before the
sujjixes "fj and D3, the guttural must have __ e.g. ^n^B'K I will strui thee,
I S 16' ; "nnWxi Gn 31"; •qy^CK'K Jer i&\
On the weak verbs N*/, see especially § 74.
§ 66a-c] Verbs Primae Radicalis Nun 173
II. The Weak Verb.'
§ 66. Verbs Primae Radicalis N4n {fz), e.g. ^l^ to approach
Brockelmann, Seniit. S2}rachiciss., p. 138 ff.; Grundriss, p. 595 fif.
The weakness of initial 3 consists chiefly in its suffering apkaeresis (I
in the infinitive construct and imjjerative in some of these verbs (cf
§ 19^). On the other hand, the assimilation of the 3 (see below)
cannot properly be regarded as weakness, since the triliteral character
of the stem is still preserved by the strengthening of the second
consonant. The special points to be noticed are —
1. The apkaeresis of the Nun (a) in the infinitive construct. This 0
occurs only (though not necessarily) in those verbs which have a in
the second syllable of the imperfect. Thus from the stem ^'33,
imperfect tJ'5^, infinitive properly ^^, but always lengthened by the
feminine termination n to the segholate form ri'J'a 2 • with suffix 11^1^3
Gn 33' ; with the concurrence of a guttural Vl^ to touch, imperfect Vl],
infinitive Oyj (also y33, see below); V^J to 2>lant, infinitive nyo (also
yto3, see below); on the verb 1^3 to give, see especially h and i. On
the otlier hand, apkaeresis does not take place in verbs which have o
in the imperfect, e.g. -'23 to fall, imperfect ?^1, infinitive PQ3, with
suffix i^S3, also ibs3 ; 1"=13|' Nu 6^, &c. ; cf., moreover, V^)> Gn 20^ &c.,
y331 Ex 19'^ (even yia3!5 Jb 6' ; cf. Jer i'»); with suffix 1^333 Lv 15^.
Also yb3S) Is 5ii« (but ny6^ Ec 3^) ; Nb'3 Is i'*, 18^ ; with suffix 'Nf 33
>/. 2 8^ (elsewhere ns?', cf. § 74 i and § 76 b), '?^}^ 2 S 20^
(6) In the imperative. Here the Niln is always dropped in verbs C
with a in the imperfect, e.g. 5J'33, imperative tJ*? (more frequently with
paragogic a, n^'3 ; before Maqqepk also "C^3 Gn 19^), p/wr. 15J'3, &c.
Parallel with these there are the curious forms with o, ^K^'3 Ku 2'*
(with retarding Metheg in the second syllable, and also nasog 'a.hor,
accoiding to § 295, before D^H) and ^5^3 Jos 3° (before HSn), i S 14^
(before D^n) and 2 Ch 29'' ; in all these cases without the pause.
With Ntln retained, as if in a strong verb, 3n; drive, 2 K 4^^ {imperfect
3113% without assimilation oftheiV^Ti), iyt331 2 K 192", Is 37'", Jer 29'-^;
cf. also the verbs n"^, which are at the same time|"D; nn3 Ez 32'^ nn^
Ex 32^, np3 Ex8\ &c.; the verb x"^, ^^) ^ lo^^ (usually Nb'); cf.
§ 76 6. But, as in the infinitive, the aplmeresis never takes place in
verbs which have o in the imperfect, e.g. "*if3, yr\}, &c.
1 Cf. the summary, § 41.
* The law allowing the addition of the fominine termination to the un-
lengthened form, instead of a lengthening of the vowel, is suitably called by
Barth 'the law of compensation ' {Nominalbildung, p. xiii).
174 "^he Verb [§66«f-a
d 2. "When, through the addition of a preformative, NUn stands at
the end of a syllable, it is readily assimilated to the second radical
(§ 19c); thus in the imperfect Qal,^ e. g. bs^ for yinpol, he will fall ;
^l) for yingas ; \^\ for yinten, he will give (on this single example
of an imperfect with original i in the second syllable, cf. li) ^ ; also in
the perfect NipKo^ K'33 for ningas ; throughout HipJiil (K'^SH , &c.) and
HopKal (which in these verbs always has Qibhus, in a sharpened
syllable, cf. § 9 »*) ^l\}.
The other forms are all quite regular, e. g. the perfect, infinitive
absolute and partici2)le Qal, all Pi'el, Pu'al, &c.
In Paradigm H, only those conjugations are given which differ
from the regular form.
C The characteristic of these Terbs in all forms with a preformative is Dages
following it in the second radical. Such forms, however, are also found in
certain verbs '""Q (§71), and even in verbs yj? (§ 67). The infinitive riJJ'a and
the imperative 1^3, also'E^a (Gn 19^) and |ri, resemble the corresponding forms
of verbs V'Q (§ 69).— On nj^^, Hi?, and nn]5, from np^ to take, see g.—ln Q'\p)
{imperfect Niph'al of D^p), and in similar forms of verbs Vy (§ 72), the full
writing of the 0 indicates, as a rule, that they are not to be regarded as
imperfects Qal of Dj^a, &c. — Also pDS {f 139*) is not to be derived from pD3,
but stands for pJtpS (with a sharpening of the-O as compensation for the loss
of the b), from ppD to ascend, see § 19/, and Kautzsch, Gramm. des BiU.-Aram.,
§ 44. Similarly the Hiph'il-torma ^p^Wn Ez 39*, p">E;^ Is 44I5, and the Niph'al
i^pW^ ^ 78^" are most probably from a stem [h)i^, not p'CJ.
■P Rem. I. The instances are comparatively few in which the forms retain
their NUn before a firm consonant, e.g. "HDJ, imperfect *lb3"' Jer 3^ (elsewhere
*lb^) ; also from "1X3 the pausal form is always ^")if3"» (without the pause ^"IJf
Pr 20^8) ; similarly in Is 29', 58', \J' 61*, 68' (where, however, ^IT\ is intended),
l4o''•^ Pr 2^1, Jb 40*', the retention of the Nxm is always connected wiUi the
pause. In Niph'al this never occurs (except in the irregular inf. ^"13113 \// 08',
cf. § 51 k), in Hiph'il and Hoph'al very seldom; e.g. 'ij"'ri3n|j Ez 222", pri3n
Ju 20'^ ; for ?53P Nu 5*' read 733?, according to § 53 q. On the other hand,
the Nun is regularly retained in all verbs, of which the second radical is
a guttural, e.g. 703^ he will possess, although there are rare cases like nn^ (also
rin3^) he will descend, Jer 21'' (even nn^l Pr 1710 ; without apparent reason
accented as Mil'el), plur. infl"* Jb 21^' (cf. § 20 z ; the Masora, however, probably
regards nrf^ and ^P\n\ as imperfect Niph'al from nnn) ; Niph'al DHS for Dn33
he has grieved.
g 2. The 7 of np7 to take is treated like the Nun of verbs |"Q (§ 19 d). Hence
imperfect Qal T\^, cohortativa (§ 20 m) nnpK, imperative Dp, in pause and
» Cf. Mayer Lambert, ' Le futur qal des verbes V'D J^D N"S ' in the REJ.
xxvii. 136 If. J • » >
^ An imperfect in a (pV') is given in the Paradigm, simply because it is
the actual form in use in this verb.
§§ 66 A-Jt, 67 a] Vei'hs Primae Radicalis Nun 175
before suffixes Up (on N3"Dnp^ Gn 48^, see § 61 g), paragogic form nnp ; 'Pip,
&c. (but cf. also npb Ex 291, Ez 37", Pr 2oi«, ""np^J i K 17", perhaps a
mistake for Tip rh, cf. LXX and Lucian) ; infinitive construct nnp (once nnp
2 K 12', cf. § 93 A) ; with b, nnp^ ; with suffix '•nnp ; Hoph'al (of., however,
§ 53 m) imperfect ni5'' • Niph'al, however, is always npp3.— The meaningless
form np Ez 17^ is a mistake ; for the equally meaningless DHp Ho 11^ read
3. The verb |n3 to give, mentioned above in d, is the only example of a h
verb |"D with imperfect in e (|n^ for yinten ; "|n3 ^ only in Ju 16^, elsewhere
before Maqqeph "jri"', &c.), and a corresponding imperative ]r\ or (very
frequently! H^n (but in if/ 8^ the very strange reading njn is no doubt
simply meant by the Masora to suggest njn^) ; before Maqqeph "jrij/em. 'Jfl^
&c. Moreover, this very common verb has the peculiarity that its final Nun,
< <
as a weak nasal, is also assimilated ; '•ririJ for ndthdntl, riJlJ or, very
frequently, nnn3, with a kind of orthographic compensation for the assimi-
lated Ni'm (cf. § 44 fir) ; Niph'al perfect Dnri3 Lv 26^5, Ezr g'.
In the infinitive consb-uct Qal the ground-form tint is not lengthened to tinetk I
(as nj^a from ^l}), but contracted to titt, which is then correctly length-
ened to nn, with the omission of Bage} forte in the final consonant, see § 20? ;
but with suffixes inn tan,&c. ; before Maqqeph with the prefix p="nri?,
e. g. Ex 521, and even when closely connected by other means, e. g. Gn 15''.
However, the strong formation of the infinitive construct also occurs in fn3 Nu
20^1 and -jn; Gn 38^ ; cf. § 69 m, note 2. On the other hand, for [nnb t K 6"
read either inn? or simply T\Tp, just as the Q^re, 1 K 17", requires nn
for jnn.
In other stems, the 3 is retained as the third radical, e.g. njDE', ^JJI^pT, cf. fc
§190 and § 44 0. On the entirely anomalous aphaeresis of the Nun with a
strong vowel in nnn (for nn3) 2 S 22*1, cf. § 19 f.— On the passive imperfect
]^l, cf- § 63 M.
§ 67. Verbs V'% e.g. 32D to surround.
Brockelmaun, Semit. Sprachwiss., p. 155 ff. ; Grundriss, p. 632 ff.
1. A large number of Semitic stems have verbal forms with only a
two radicals, as well as forms in which the stem has been made
triliteral by a re2)etiiion of the second radical, hence called verbs y'y.
Forms with two radicals were formerly explained as being due to
contraction from original forms with three radicals. It is more correct
1 P. Haupt on Ju 16^ in his Bible, compares the form of the Assyrian
imperfect iddan or itlan (besides inddin, indmdin) from naddnu — \T\^. But
could this one passage be the only trace left in Hebrew of an imporf. in a
from jn:?
V]6 The Verb [§676-^
to regard them as representing the original stem (with two radicals),
and the forms with the second radical repeated as subsequently
developed from the monosyllabic stem.' The appearance of a general
contraction of triliteral stems is due to the fact that in biliteral forms
the second radical regularly receives Dages forte before afformatives,
except in the cases noted in § 226 and q. This points, however, not
to an actual doubling, but merely to a strengthening of the consonant,
giving more body to the monosyllabic stem, and making it approximate
more to the character of triliteral forms.
The development of biliteral to triliteral stems (y'^y) generally takes
place in the 3rd sing. masc. and fern, and 3rd plur. pei'fect Qal of
transitive verbs, or at any rate of verbs expressing an activity, e. g.
33D, ."1330, 13no : fjn Gn 33^ (but with suffix ''33n, ver. 11); sometimes
with an evident distinction between transitive and intransitive forms,
as "11^ to make strait, '^'^ to be in a strait; see further details, including
the exceptions, in aa. The development of the stem takes place (a)
necessarily whenever the strengthening of the 2nd radical is required
by the character of the form (e. g. /.?n, *T^'2'), and (h) as a rule, when-
ever the 2nd radical is followed or preceded by an essentially long
vowel, as, in Qal, 2i3D, 313D, in Po'el and Po'al, nniD, 3210.
b 2. The biliteral stern always (except in Hi2)h'il and the imjyerfect
Niph'al, see below) takes the vowel which would have been required
between the second and third radical of the Ordinary strong form, or
which stood in the ground-form, since that vowel is characteristic of
the form (§ 43 h), e.g. DJ? answering to b^i', n^Fi to the ground-form
qdtuldt, 1?3ri to the ground-form qdtdld ; infinitive, 30 to ^t^ip .
C 3. The insertion of Dages forte (mentioned under a), for the puipose
of strengthening the second radical, never takes place (see § 20 ?)
in the final consonant of the word, e.g. DJ?, 3b, not BR, 3b; but
it appears again on the addition of afformatives or suffixes, e. g. ^SJ?,
«D, ^:dp, &c.
d 4. When the afiformative begins with a consonant (3, n), and hence
the strongly pronounced second radical would properly come at the
end of a closed syllable, a separating vowel is inserted between the
stem-syllable and the affoimative. In the perfect this vowel is S,
in the imperative and imperfect ^—, e.g. ^"l^?, ^3130, imperfect '"'^''^P^
(for sabh-td, sahb-nit, tasobb-nd). The artificial opening of the syllable
^ So (partly following Ewald and BOttcher) A. Muller, ZDMG. xxxiii.
p. 698 ff. ; Stade, Lehrbuch, § 385 h, c ; Noldeke, and more recently Wellliausen,
' Ueber einige Arten schwacher Verba im Hebr.' {Skizzen v. Vorarb. vi. 250 ff.).
Against BOttcher see M. Lambert, KEJ. xxxv. 330 ff., and Brockelmann, as
above.
§67e-^] Verbs y^y 177
by this means is merely intended to make the strengthening of the
second radical audible.^
The perfect ^JOn (for IJitsn) Nu 1 7^8, ^ 64'' (Jer 44" !|30n with Silluq), owing 6
to omission of the separating vowel, approximates, if the text is right, to the
form of verbs Vy (cf. ^JJDi^ from D^p).
5. Since the preformatives of the imperfect Qal, of the iierject f
Ni2)h'al, and of Hi2)h'il and Hoph'al throughout, before a monosyllabic
stem form an open syllable, they take a long vowel before the tone
(according to § 27 e), e.g. imperfect Iliph'U 3D^ for yci-seb, imperative
3Dn for hd-seb, &c. Where the preformatives in the strong verb have
?, either the original a (from which the i was attenuated) is retained
and lengthened, e.g. 30^ in imperfect Qal for yd-sob, or the i itself is
lengthened to e, e. g. 3pn perfect Hiph'tl for Jn-seb (see further under h).
The vowel thus lengthened can be maintained, however, only before
the tone (except the 4 of the Hojih'al, Sp^n for hil-sdb); when the
tone is thrown forward it becomes S^wd, according to § 2 7 A; (under c<
and n compound ^^tvd), e.g. 3bri, but '"'J^??'p ; imperfect Hiph'il ^pn,
but ^^'|pj;i; 2)erfect 'nion, &c.
Besides the ordinary form of tho imperfects, there is another (common in fir
Aramaic), in which the imperfect Qal is pronounced 2B) or 3D\ the first
radical, not the second, being strengthened by Dages forte, cf. DB'^ i K 9^,
np'l Gn 2426 ; with a in the second syllable, la''^ Lv 11^, h"^"] Is 17*, nK''»l
Is 2^, &c., tn) Am 5" and frequently, DSXI Dt92i, &c., 2b) {turn intrans.)
1 S s', &c., 2p*\ Lv 24", Qk) Ez 4712, &c., 6r\) (with DagreJ forte implicitum)
1 K 1^; in the plural, TOR^ Nu 14'^, &c. (in pause Itsri^ \p 102^^) ; perhaps
also btS'' Tjlii^ (unless these forms are rather to be referred to Niph'al, like
1)3^'; I S 2^ ; 'hiy'^ Jb 24M) ; with suffix la^i^ri occurs (cf. § 10 h) in Nu 23" ;
Imperfect Hiph'il Dfl^, Hoph'al n?'' , &c. The vowel of the preformative (which
before Bage's is, of course, short) follows the analogy of the ordinary strong
form (cf. also u and y). The same method is then extended to forms with
afformatives or suffixes, so that even before these additions the second
radical is not strengthened, e. g. ^nip*1 Gn 43^^, &c., for 1"np'1 and they boiced the
head ; in3*1 and they beat down, Dt 1" (from nJlS) ; ^Dri^l Dt 32^ ; lO"!"; Ex 15",
Jb 2921 (cf., however, ^2B'>\ Ju iS^^, i S 58, in?'' Jer 46^, Jb 42°). To the
same class of apparently strong formations belongs Hi^J^rV (without the
separating vowel, for n^pifJI, cf. i S 3'^ and below, p) they shall tingle,
2 K 21^2^ Jer 19S. — On the various forms of the Niph'al, see under t,
1 Of all the explanations of these separating vowels the most satisfactory
is that of RMiger, who, both for the perfect and imperfect (Ewald and Stade,
for the imperfect at least), points to the analogy of verbs H"?. We must,
however, regard ni3D as formed on the analogy not of nv3, but (with
P. Haupt) of a form DvJ ( = galaiitd, cf. Arab, gazauta), while nySDPl follows
the analogy of njvJJjl. [See also Wright, Camp. Gr., 229 f.]
COWl.EY N
1 78 The Verb [§67 a-/
h 6. The original vowel is retained, see /, (a) in the preformative of
the im'perfect Qal 3bj for yd- sob (cf. §§ 47 i, 63 h, and for verbs V'y
§ 72) ; {h) in the perfect Ntph'al 3p3 for nd-sdb (§ 51a) ; (c) in Ilojc-h'al
aWHj with irregular lengthening (no doubt on the analogy of verbs
V'si) for hdsdb from hti-sab, imperfect 301'' from yu-sab, &c.
2 On the other hand, an already attenuated vowel (z) underlies the
intransitive imperfects Qal with a in the second syllable (probably
for the sake of dissimilating the two vowels), e.g. "ip* for yi-mdr
(see p) ; and in the preformative of Hiph'il 3Dn from hi-seb (ground-
form 7y?P\}, § 53 «), as "well as of the participle 3pD (ground-form
7tppP), on the analogy of the perfect. In the second syllable of the
Perf. the underlying vowel is ?, attenuated from an original d, which
in the strong verb is abnormally lengthened to ^ (§ 53 a). The e
lengthened from i is, of course, only tone-long, and hence when
without the tone and before Dages forte we have e.g. J!j)i2pn. On the
retention of the original a in the second syllable, cf. v.
k 7. The tone, as a general rule, tends to keep to the stem-syllable,
and does not (as in the strong verb) pass to the aflfoi-matives n__,
^ and ''-;_ (2nd sing. fern, imperfect); e.g. 3rd sing. fern. perfect nrin
in pause nnn ; with 1 and gutturals nno (for n^O), nriK' yj^ 44=6; on the
other hand, with wdvj consecutive Hllll Is 6'"^ (but n^ni Ex i^"). In the
^rd plnr. perfect the tone-syllable varies; along with ^?"^, ^?i2, we also
find =1^'^ and ^^?_, =131 Is 59'% IW Hb 3^ &c.; but in pause always
wn, Itsri, &c. The tone likewise remains on the stem-syllable in the
imperfect Qal in ''3Dri, ^3DJ ; perfect Hiph'il n2pn^ ^3pn; imperfect
^3prij 'l^pj, &c. In the forms with separating vowels, the tone is
moved forward to these vowels (or to the final syllable, cf. ee), e. g.
rii3p, ri3''3pri, &c.; except before the endings DH and (H in the perfect,
which always bear the tone. This shifting of the tone naturally
causes the shortening of the merely tone-long vowels e and o to t and
u (or 0, see n), hence JHI^pn from 3pn, n3"'3pri from 3DJ ; on cases in
which the vowel of the preformative becomes S^wd, see above, /.
/ 8. In several verbs y"y, instead oi PHel, Pu'al and Hithpa'el, the
less frequent conjugation Po'el, with its passive and reflexive, occurs
(most probably on the analogy of the corresponding forms of verbs ^"V,
cf. § 72m), generally with the same meaning,^ e.g. P.^iV to ill-treat,
passive V^'W , reflexive ^.^iV^pn (from V^V ; cf. the Hithpffcl from VV),
^ Sometimes both Pi'el and Po'el are formed from the same stem, though
with a difference of meaning, e. g. |»5f"l to break in pieces, J*XT to oppress; ^3/1
to make pleasing, |3in to have pity ; 330 to turn, to change, 3310 to go round, to
encompass.
§67m-o] Verbs v"v 179
and ">1Q Is 24'^'); in a few verbs also Pilpel (§ 55/) is found, e.g.
73^3 to roll, Ililhjpalpel PUpSHH to roll oneself (from ?/3) ; imperative
with suffix i^^opp exalt her, Pr 4- ; J'K'ytt* <o comfort, to delight in ; passive
yC'ytJ' to he caressed (from VV^). These foims cannot appear in a
hiliteral form any more than Pi'el, Pu'al, and Hithjpa'el ; cf. D^yiy
(Is 19") and 1i?1|^ (Is i8^>'').— For "^^^i^ 2 S 22" read, according to
^18", -»-j3nn.
Remarks.
I. On Qal.
1. In the perfect, isolated examples .nre found with 0 in the first syllable, W.
which it is customary to refer to triliteral stems with middle 0 (like pb*"
§ 43 a) ; viz. ^12n ihey arc exalted, Jb 24^* to Db"^ ; ^HT </(et/ s/io^, Gn 49^3 to 3il"l •
^^t Is 1® to I^T. But this explanation is very doubtful : ^nj especially is
T
rather to be classed among the passives of Qal mentioned in § 52 e.
2. Imperfects Qal with 0 in the second syllable keep the original a in the /i
preformative, but lengthen it to S, as being in an open syllable, hence ^n"* ^
lb"* Tj?'' p'' JJ'T' (trans. ft« breaks in pieces, but yi^ intrans. =/je ts evil);
imperfects with a have, in the preformative, an e, lengthened from i. See
the examples below, under p, § 63 c and e, § 72 ;«, and specially Barth in
ZDMG. 1894, p. 5 f.
The Holem of the infinitive, imperative, and imperfect (3D 3D^) is only tone-
long, and therefore, as a rule, is written defectively (with a few exceptions,
chiefly in the later orthography, e. g. liv hind up, Is 8'« ; ^13 \p 37^ ; tX't.
ver. 7 ; 113? for 137 to plunder. Est 3", 8"j. When this 5 loses the tone, it
becomes in the final syllable 0, in a sharpened syllable ii, or not infrequently
even 0 (see above, k). Examples of 0 are : (a) in a toneless final syllable, i. e.
before Maqqeph or in the imperfect consecutive, ~p {7-on) to rejoice, Jb 38'' ; 3D'l
<
Ju 11^' (once even with il in a toneless final syllable, Dl*1 Ex 16^'') ; on the
other hand, in the plur. Msb''\, fern. ri3''3Dri1 ; (b) before a tone-bearing
afformative or suffix, e. g. imperative 2nd sing. fern. '•31 ^ ^^3 (cf. ff) ; ^3311 pity me ;
ni'pD Jer^o^S; DIK'^ Prii^Q^re; ^n3r!n Ex 12" (for the defective writing,
cf. ^nSD'' Jb 4o22). In ^3nj Gn 432^, Is 30" (for ?)3n^) this 0 is thrown back
to the preformative.
On the 2nd plur, fem. imperat. "ily make yourselves naked Is 32", cf. the ()
analogous forms in § 48 ».— Quite abnormal is the infinitive absohite nyi Is 24^'
(as n follows, probably only a case of dittography for yi, cf. 3p Nu 23'^' and
PK' Ru 21"); so also are the imperatives *?~n3p Nu 22" ", and '';y~n"1X 22^, 2},'^,.
with n paragogic. We should expect n3p PI^N. If these forms arc to bt>
<
read qoballi, 'oralli, they would be analogous to such cases as n~13"1J0 (§ 90 j),
the addition oi the paragogic T\. causing no change in the form cf tl»e word
(~3p like ~)1 above). If, however, as Jewish tradition requires, they are to
be read qaballi, 'uralli, then in both cases the Qamex must be explained, witJi
N 2
i8o The Verb \}^ip-s
Stade, as the equivalent of o (^y~T\'l\>, &e. ; cf. § 9 v). Still more surprising
is iJ3p curse him, Nu 23^^, for i|33p or '3p.^
JJ 3. Examples with Palha/i in the infinitive, imperative, and imperfect are
13 (in Q~\'2b to prove them, Ec 3^') ; IT Is 45^ ; ^^^ Jer 5^^^ ; D2K'3 m </ietV error,
Gn 6' (so ed. Mant., but there is also good authority for DJtJ'B, from
•K' = •5J' = IJJ'X and D3 ako ; so Baer and Ginsburg). Also ?3 <aA;e away,
f 1 19^2 . and the imperfects DPI"' i< is hot, Dt 19^, &c. (on the e of the preforma-
tive cf. n) ; ")p_''_ z< is 6t«er, Is 24^ ; '1X"'_ i7 is straitened ; ?|n'' t« is soft, Is 7* ; DK'n
it is desolate, Ez 121^ (in pause Dt^JI Gn 47^^) ; 7pri1 s/te was despised, Gn 16* (but
elsewhere in the impf. consec. with the tone on the penultima, e. g. 12f*1 Gn 32^^
&c. ; yiM Gn 21", &c., cf. Ez 19'); in the 1st sing, imperfect DfT'S! ^ tp 19", abnor-
mally written fully for DriK, unless DnX is to be read, as in some MSS., on
the analogy of the 3rd sing. Dri\ — In the impf. Qal of 77B' the reading of
Hb 28 varies between ^I^V) (Baer, Ginsb.) and ^I^B') (ed. Mant., Jabl.).—
The following forms are to be explained with Barth (ZDMG. xliii. p. 178)
as imperfects Qal with original i in the second syllable, there being no
instances of their Hiph'il in the same sense : 73V Gn 2910 ; p"" Is 31^, &c. ;
■ilDJI Ex 4c2i, ^ c,i4^ 4;c_ . perhaps also H^l^n i S 3" and ^HJ Jbsi^^&c.; in
accordance with this last form, 'l?n(3) Jb 29^ would also be an infinitive Qal,
not Hiph'il (for i?nn3), as formerly explained below, under w. Finally the
very peculiar form J'^ril Ju 9^^ may probably be added to the list.
ft Imperfects, with an original u in the second syllable, are also found with
this il lengthened to m (instead of 0), e. g. pi'' , if the text is correct, in Pr 296 ;
IIK'^ ip 916 (unless it be simply an imperfect from "IV^ to he powerful, to prevail) ;
pV (if from ^^1) Is 42*, &c. (also defectively px ^ iS^*; but in Ec 126,
according to Baer, pijll) ; Dnjjl Ez 24^1 (on the sharpening of the D cf. g
above).'
T A similar analogy with verbs VJ? is seen in the infinitives 113? (for '^2)
Ec 9I ; ipnn Pr S^'^ (cf. ipina Pr 829) for ipnn, and in the imperfect ^K'CK
Gn 2721. (The forms n'iSn iii ^ 77"", fl'lGK' Ez 36s, "•ni^n f 77", formerly
treated here as infinitives from V"y stems, are rather to be referred to T\"?
stems, with Barth, Wurseluntersuchungen, Lpz. 1902, p. 21.) On other similar
cases, see below, under ee. For examples of the aramalzing imperfect, see
above, g.
S 4. In the participle, the aramai'zing form Tj^DXb' for !]^DDb' occurs in
K^thibh, Jer 30I6 (the Q're indicates a participle from nOtJ') ; njji Pr 25I'
appears to be a contraction from nyyi , part. fem. = breaking in pieces.
1 For ij as suffix of the 3rd person a parallel might be found in Si^\
§ 100 0, and probably also in the Niin of the Phoenician suffix D3 : cf. Barth,
ZDMG. xli. p. 643, and the nota on § 100 0.
2 Also in Ez 6*, instead of HJOK'^n , which could only come from DB'''
'\^''P\ is intended, and ID^XI ^'^ ^'^^ same verse is probably only an error for
3 According to Stade, Grammatik, § 95, Rem., the pronunciation with «,
since it also appears in Neo- Punic [and in Western Syriac, see Noldeke, Syr.
Grainm., § 48], was that of everyday life.
§ 6^ t-w2 Verbs y'y i8i
II. On Niph'al,
5. Besides the ordinary fonn of the perfect Dp3 with Pathah (in pmse t
3D3) &Tid the participle 3D3 with Qames in the second syllable, there is also
another with Sere, and a third with Holem, e.g. perfect D)03 it melts, Ez 21 '2,
2 215; pijpj ^foj. -,3^3) Ez 26^; part. D»3 moi^en, 1 S 159, Na 2"; b\?,} it is
a light thing, 2 K 20", Is 49^ (perf. \)\y^) ; with 5, e. g. ^^iji they are rolled together;
Is 34* ; cf. 6319, 642, Am 3", Na i«, Eci2«''. In the imperfect with 0 in the
second syllable, on the analogy of verbs V'J? (from which KOnig would also
explain the perfects with 0), we find ^©""nfl thou shalt be brought to silence, Jer 48^
(unless this form should be referred to Qal with Qimhi, Olshausen, Konig) ;
yn''_ he suffers hurt, Pr lO^, 1320. p-jj^ (for <,>ro.?) Ez 297; with e in the
second syllable pnri she profanes herself, Lv 21', but PHXI Ez 22^6, and i?n^
Is 48'*, nn''_ Is 7', &c. For infinitives, cf. DSH to melt, \p 68' (as inf. constr. ;
2 S 17I" as m/. afcsoZ.) ; again, with compensatory lengthening in the first
syllable, i^nn Ez 20^, 14^2, but with suflSx i^nn Lv 21* ; also TIBH to he
plundered, and p^2n to he emptied, Is 24'; in the imperative, only ^"I3n 6e ye
clean, Is 52^^ On ^Q^H jre^ 2/ou wi?, Nu 171", and the corresponding imperf.
^tST Ez 10", &c., cf. 72 dd.
Examples of the perfect Niph'al with sharpening of the initial syllable are, u
?r\) it is profaned, Ez 22'*, 25' (from PpPI) ; in3 (from "TIH) if/ 69*, 102* (also
"inj Jer 629) . nn3 /rarfws esi (from nnPI) Mai 2^ ; cf. with this in the participle,
D"'ipn3 (for nihhamim) Is 57'', and Q'''1K3 Mai 3* : in the imperative and infinitive
Niph'al such a virtual strengthening of the guttural after preformatives nev^r
occurs. — The occurrence of u instead of 6 as a separating vowel in the perfect
^i^Vi Mic 2* is abnormal.
III. On EipKil and Hoph'al.
6. The second syllable in Eiph'il sometimes has Pathah instead of Sere, V
especially under the influence of 1 and the gutturals, e. g. perfect llon he made
hitter, TW^^ he howed, HDH he bath broken, Gn 1 7", in pause, cf. § 29 g ; other-
wise nsn, plur. nsn is 24B. in TSn \p 3310, Ez 17>9, cf. ^89'*, and in
^"T'OT Ho 8* (perhaps also in jri^n) Hab 2^'', but cf. § 20 n) there is an
assimilation to the corresponding forms of verbs Vy, see 0. Also "lifH
Dt 28'52^ tnn (in pause) Is 18^; inf. '\2n? to cleanse, Jer 4*', in pause. But
- •• I- t: .
also with other consonants, e.g. p*in 2 K 23^5, pj^n Is 82^; i]"]n Jb 23'^;
<
piur. ^3pn I S s'-i" (and so usually in the 3rd plur. perf, except before "I
and gutturals, e. g. ^JJ^n) ; imper. ygTI besmear, 18 61"; plur. ^tD'^PI be astonished,
Jb 21" ; imperfect yiri Thou dost afflict ; part. 72fD (on e in the first syllable, see
under t) shadowing, Ez 31* (but 1]*piO Ju 32* is assimilated to the form of
verbs ^*y, unless, with Moore, we simply read TjOD, or, with incorrect
spelling, 'i)''DD. So in the imperative ''3{5''JDn Ju i62« Q^re, and in the infinitive
?)Drin Is 33')." '
The e of the second syllable, when without the tone, may become S, e.g. H)
^3 pinn Gn 31'' (see also x). It is unusual (cf. § 53 k) to find the e written
fully as in the ir^nitive I^Snp Zc ii^^ Instead of Hateph-Pathah a Hatephr
i82 The Verb [§67^-00
S'ghol is found under the preformative in ''3ri?i?n 2 S 19", and a Pathah
occurs before 11 (with a virtual sharpening of the H) in such forms as
nnnn is q»; of. Gn ii«, Dt 2", 324^ i s 22J5, Est 6i3_in all these cases
before H.— On i?n3 Jb 29^ see above, p : on '•riFinni Jer 49", see below, dd.
U' 7. In the imperfect consecutive of verbs whose second radical is a guttural,
a is retained (§ 22 d) in the second syllable instead of I, e.g. yn'l i K i6«:
30 also with n, as isfl 2 Ch 2820, Dt 2"- I.ut cf. also IqJi Neh 49.
y 8. Aramaizing fornis (but cf. Rem. . § 67 g) in Hiph'il and Hoph'al are,
3E)''1 Ex 13", &c. ; cf. Ju. 18^3 ; "lEn-^JS Ex 23", but read "lOri~^S from TTVO :
^r\'2l\ Dt I** (cf. Nu I4«), but ^3|»1 Ju iS^s, l S 5*, 2 Ch 29^ ; hm prqfanabo,
Ez 39''; DPlPl Jb 22'; without elision of the H (cf. § 53 3), prinM i K 18",
but Jer 9^ 1^nn\ Jb 138 ^^nnri ; with i in the second syllable D^B*^ Jer 4950,
SC's ; cf. D''E'31 Nu 2i»'' ; in the perfect ni^'''^n La i^. In Hoph'al, ^3l3n ^Aey ajs
hrought low, Jb 242'; n?'' he is smitten, Is 24^2 {plur. ^ini' Jer 46*, Mi i') ; in
pause, ipn' Jb 192s, but also ^np; Jb 4*" (so Baer, Ginsb.,'but ed. Mant, Jabl.
^na'') ; with 0 in the initial syllable, HSK'n {infinitive with su^x = HlSK'n,
cf."§ 91 e) Lv 263<'-, cf. 2 Ch 36"; n©K'n3, with irregular syncope for
''E'na, Lv 26«.
' • IV. In General.
~ 9. Verbs li'^j; are most closely related as regards inflexion to verbs Y)i
(§ 72). The form of verbs W is generally the shorter (cf. e.g. 30^ and
DP'' Spn and D'^pH) ; in a few cases, however, the two classes exactly
coincide, e.g. in the imperfect Qal and Hiph'il with icuw consecutive, in Hoph'al
and in the less common conjugations (see above, I).
act 10. The developed forms (with three radicals), as mentioned in a, are
especially frequent in the 3rd sing. masc. and fern., and the 3rd plur. perf. Qal
(i.e. in forms without an afformative or with an afformative beginning with
a vowel) of transitive verbs, or verbs, at any rate, expressing action, e.g.
33D !|3nD (but before a suflBx also ^3^3D, as well as ''312DD, "'31'nK', &c.);
Dot njDf^T 'ISSX &c. Sometimes the contracted, as iceZ/ as the uncontracted
form, is found, e.g. tn to plunder, plur. ^T13 : in other parts, only ^3112 Dt 2*^,
' -T : IT ^ :~T
as well as «i|3 Dt 3' ; '•riDCT Zc S"!^ and "•ritol Jer 4«8. Other examples of
biliteral forms in 2nd sing. masc. are Dt 25", Pr 30^2 j in ist sing., Jos 5*.
Apart from Qal the only example of a developed form is '•ririnni Jer 49*''.
hb On the otlier hand, the biliteral forms are the moie common in the
3rd sing, and plur. of perfects which are infransitiie, and express a state ; cf.
pi Dt 9** (Ex 32*^ p'1 ; elsewhere always a transitive verb) ; nPI, fern. nPin ;
"110, /m. nnip (for marrd) ; 1'S, fern. H")^ (cf. iTim Ez 24"); 'T]'!, HE', /em.
T^n^\ on , &c. ; phtr. WH , lEri , &c. (but on the tone, cf. ee below). Exception,
CC The intransitive but developed perfects ^bb/\ (also ^^), 7?^, ^"V.},, ''"'I'l
(in pattse nn3), niD HK'B'y (plur. in ;)«j(se ^B'tJ'y ^ 31"), ^^!?V, inntt' (also
iriK'), almost all have, as Mayer Lambert observes, at least an active, not
a stativo meaning. Triliteral forms of the infnitive after p are iZOb Nu 21* ;
l\l^b Jer 47*; Tbb Gn 3i»9 (also 13^ Gn 38"); cf. also DOnb Is 47", in
iubordinate iMUse, for Dpn^ ; with suffix DD33n'i Is 30", and, from the same
16-idd-ff] Kerbs y"y 183
form pn, with retraction and modification of the vowel, rl33ni) ^ 102'*; also
ninb' is 60", 1122 i S 25^, DDJOS is 10", tiiya Pr S"^, iSl^^Fr 26».—Iniperatire
niti' Jer 49'' (cf. § 20 6, and ibid, also on ''J33n ^' 9^*) ; in the imperfect,
nnf Na 3'' (i// 68" ; cf. Gn 31*") from IIJ ; the strong form here, after the
assimilation of the Nun, was'unavoidable. On the other hand, Dl'IB') Jer 5^ is
anomalous for D'HK'^ (Pr 1 1^ Q're ; the eastern school read the Po'el DITlK''
in the K^Odhh) ; the strengthening of^the second radical has been afterwards
resolved by the insertion of a vocal S^iid. Cf. also \^W Am 5'^ (elsewhere
fh''). In Niph'al, the triliteral form 2'2y is found, Jb ii''^; in Iliph'il, all
the forms of pT, thus imperative ^3"'5in, imperfect p3"!ri; infinitive DKJK'n
Mi 6"; participle D''?3K'10 Ez 3^^, That the developed (triliteral) forms
possess a certain emphasis is seen from their frequent use in pause, as in
^ 118" after a biliteral form ^jmO'DJ ^130).
1 1. The above-mentioned (see g) neglect of the strengthening in aramai'zing Cici
forms, such as ^D"!^ and the like, occurs elsewhere tolerably often ; in the
perfect Qal IJtpri for WllSil Nu 1 72* (Jer 44^^ ; cf. above, e) ; imperfect riT33
I S 14^^ (n parag. without any influence on the form, cf. 0); even with
tlie firm vowel reduced to vocal ^^ivd ; H^^? Gn 11'' for n?b3 (cohortativo
( r < < ' T :m t t ^
from ppa) ; ^JDV for VQV ibid. ver. 6, they purpose ; following the analogy of
verbs Vy^ ^K'J^X (see above, r) ; from intransitive imperfects Qal, ^"lifri Is 49^*
{plur. masc. Jb" 18^; ^yT" Neh 2^; also riJDli'^n Ez 6« (for which read
'^'"'0= tJ'ri) might be explained in the same way. —Perfect Niph'al HDipJ
for n3D3 Ez 41''; ^^^3 Ju j^ for ^))h ■ Dn^lDJ for Dn'^03 Gn 17" (as if from
ppO not ,^1D (0 circumcise), cf. Is 19', Jer 8^*; imperfect H^pisri Zc 14^^;
participle D^DnJ , cf. m. So also ^D3 i S 13", HSW Gn 9" (cf! Is 338), are
perfects iVii)A'ai from ^^D (= pQ), not Qal from J*Q3.— In Hiph'il riSnn (for
ri'^nn) Ju i6'o (2 s 153*) ; nryn for n^ryn Pr 7" (cf. ct 6", f^).
No less irregular is the suppression of the vowel of the stem-syllable in
Da-lSnb Lv 2615.— On the perfect V^"^ Pr 26^, cf. § 75 m.
12. Cases in which the tone is thrown forward on the afformatives (see CC
k) are (a) in the perfect, the ist si7ig. regularly (but cf. ''ri^ifni_ Jer lo^^ before
On^) after 1 consec, Ex 33"-22, 2 K 19=*, &c., also Is 44I6 ('•nirsn before "I);
ip 92I1 (but the text is certainly corrupt ; see the Lexicon), 1 16", perhaps also
Jb 19*'', '•hSn'! (though in this passage, and in ip 17^, the form might bean
tnfnitive in 6th; see Delitzsch on Jb ig^'') ; in the 2nd sing, nnjfi^l (before
X) Dt 25" ; in the ^rd plural, ?£t multi sunt, ip 3', i04-<, Jer 5^, i S 251" ; 13T
they are soft, \p 55^2 :|^j5 t}^ey ^re swift, Jer 4", Hb i^ ; ^3] they are pure, Jb 15*^,
25^, La 4'' ; ^np they did, how, Hb 3^ ; HH they are burned, Is 246. A by form of
^n^ (vy, cf. § 72 dd) is ^m xp 49^', 73'.
(6) In the imperative (a command in an emphatic tone) ""il sing, Is 54*, it'
Zp 3", Ze 2i« ; 13-] Is 4423, 49", Jer 31^ (but >fi lament, La 2"), >ln keep {thy
feasts), Na 2\ Jer 72^ ; HJiy ( = njy) before «, ip 6829. Qn the retention of the
short vowels ii (0) and i before bagei forte, in place of the tone-long 0 and e,
sie above, k; on the change of the vowel of the preformative into S''Kd,
wlien it no longer stands before the tone, see g.
184 The Verb [§ 68 a-d
The Weakest Vekbs {Verba Quiescentia).
§ 68. Verbs k"q e. g. b?K to eat.
Brockelmann, Semit. Sprachwiss,, p. 140 ff. ; Grundriss, p. 589 ff.
a So far as N retains its full consonantal value as a guttural, these
verbs share all the peculiarities of verbs primae gutturalis, mentioned
in § 63. They are, however, to be treated as weak verbs, when the
!!< loses its value as a consonant, and coalesces with the preceding
vowel (originally short) to form one long syllable. This takes place
only in the following very common verbs and forms, as if through
phonetic decay : —
I) 1. In the im2)erfect Qal, five verbs (viz. *13X to perish, H^N to he
willing, /'?fr? to eat, "ipX to say, HDN to hake) regularly make the N
quiesce in a long 6, e. g. -'Di^.^ In a few others the ordinary (strong)
form is also in use, as triN^ (18 times) and TriXj". (^ times) he takes hold;
^D^ (see h), also ^^K^. , he collects. This 6 has primarily arisen from an
obscuring of <1 (§ 9 q), and the d from ^^^> the weak consonant N
coalescing with d io d ; of. § 23 a.
C In the second syllable o (for original U) never appears, but either e ^
or d ; and in j)ause almost always e, even before the tone-bearing
heavy afformative P, e. g. I^bas) Dt i8S without the pause P^^N', Dt 4^^
In the 3rd sing. masc. and ist sing, of 1P^, however, a is always
retained in pause, "P'<'' and "IDN ; but in the 2nd ma>^c. ""?,Nn i K 5"",
in the 3rd fem. ^ON^ Pr i^i ; in the plural 1">px^ Jer 5^ y^ \Ab^'\ ^"^^^^^
Jer 23'^ with S^golta; cf. also i'^^n i S i^ &c. But with conjunctive
accents in the body of the sentence, d (as being a lighter vowel) is
used, e. g. ''J?^ 13Nn ^^ g^^, but in pause "ip.t^^ ^^ i^ ; cf. a similar inter-
change of e and a in § 65 c. The 3rd fem. plur. imjif. always has the
form njS'PNn Zc 1 1\
d When the tone moves back, the final syllable of the imperfects of
n3N and ??K, with a conjunctive accent, also always takes Puthah,
e. g. Di^ nnN^ Jb 3^ h^\f>h and he did eat ; in np« the loss of the tone
from the final syllable only occurs in the form with wdw consecutive
' So in the modern vulgar Arabic of South Palestine, ya'kid (he eats)
becomes yokul.
* On this e (originally i) as a dissimilation from 5 (originally u), cf. § 37 re,
and F. Philippi, in the Zeiischri/t fur Vdlkerpsychologie und Sprachwissenschaft,
xiv. 178. The latter rightly observes that the existence of an original u in
♦he imperfect of bSN is indicated by the form of the imperative ?bK, the Arabic
ya'kul .lud the Aramaic 73NV as well as by the fact that ^hX' and SIDN^
. -■ •• . '' VI IV ' v: IV
are found along with triN^ and ^DN*.
§68e-A] Verbs N'a 185
(but never in the ist sing. '^'Q^\ ; cf. •'P'^^J, and then the final syllable,
if without the jpause, always takes S^ghol, 'l^'**! and he said (except
Sb ipNni Pr f%
In pause, however, the imperfect consecutive (except the ist pers. of <?
''??, see below) always has the form ??*^*1 (but plur. always '''5^\
^pSn'I), "ipN»1 ; except 1PN*1 in the poetic portion of the book of Job,
as 3^, 4', &c., but not in 32^ in the middle of the verse. The weak
imperfect of triN is always IHN^ and T^^*l, but in the ist sing.,
according to § 49 e, THNI^ Ju 20* ; cf. ^'^^\ Gn. 3"'^ in pause. — n2N and
nsx are, at the same time, verbs n"?, hence imperfect n^N^ (§75 c).
Before light suffixes the vowel of the second syllable becomes vocal S*wa, as f
DT'DNV ^UpDNn, but D3i53Nn. — In a few cases, instead of the 6 in the first'
syllable an e is found, which is due to contraction from the group -r:; — — (or
_) in place of ; e.g. iiriNri it shall come, Mi 4*, from HriNn (from
nnX) ; 3nK (for 3nK) I lore, Pr S''', also (four times) 3nN Mai i^,' &'c., with
suffixes ^npriN Ho 11^, 14', &c. (but only in ist sing., otherwise 3nK' , &c.,
< ' '' ■
from 3nX, 3nX) ; IHSII and I stayed, Gn 32^ The infinitive construct of "IJDX
with {) is always "ibN^ dicendo, for "itox!^..— According to Barth {ZDMG. 1889,
p. 179) PifX'1 Nu 11^5 is to be regarded as an imperfect Qal, without the
obscuring of K to 0, not as imperfect Hiph'il, since plfX elsewhere occurs
only in the perfect Qal and Nijih'al; on the original i in the second syllable,
see above, § 67 p. For ^nSDNH Jb 20^8 we should simply emend 'P3Nn ; the
view that it is imperfect Po'el (which nowhere else occurs) can, as regards
the change of 6 to 0, be supported only by the very doubtful analogies of
\f/ 62* (see § 52 q^ and i/> loi® Q^re (see § 55 b), while the view that it is Pi'el
('3Nn = 'DXn = '3Kn\ rests on no analogy whatever. It would be more
admissible to suppose that 'DNn stands for ■'^^f^l, Pu'al (cf. ^pSX for 1?3fc<,
§ 27 q) ; but no reason has been discovered for this departure from the
natural punctuation '3Xn.
2. In the ist^;ers. sing, impe'ifect, where two x's would ordinarily «•
come together, the second (which is radical) is regularly dropped
(§ 23/), as *ipsi (for "IPNN), &c., and even plene ip'i«l^ Neh 2', &c.,
ITJOiN y^r 42'°. In the other cases, also, where the N is ordinarily
regarded as quiescing in 6 or e, it is only retained orthographical! y,
and on etymological grounds. Hence the possibility of its being
dropped in the following cases : —
Always in the contracted forms of ^IpN, as PlpJI for fjDNri ip 104^ ; 5]pM h
3 S 61 (but for SlpXI Jb 271^ read flpN^=^tlpi^ with the LXX) ; cf. also in
1 The regularity of this orthography indicates that the contraction of NX
to d in this ist pers. occurred at a time when in the 3rd and 2nd persons the
N was still audible as a consonant (which accordingly was almost always
retained in writing). NOldeke (ZDMO. xxxii. 593) infers this from the fact
that also in Arabic the 3rd and 2nd persons are still written yakiilii, takma,
but the ist pers. 'dAwiw, not 'd'kiUii,
1 86 IVie Verb [§§ 68 i, h, 69 a
the 1st pers. Mi 4" and ^QpN i S 156, which is apparently (from the Metheg
with the i), intended for an imperfect Hiph'U: instead of it, however, read,
with the Mantua edition, ^SDN (with ?, according to § 60/). But flDDNn
Ex 57 (for 'Din), F19^^*1 I S 18^^ (for siDi''5),and flDX'' Jb 2f^ (see above) are
due to a mistake, since all three forms must be derived from the stem P]D\
Furthermore, ^no^ ^p 139'''' (where certainly '"lO;; is to be read) ; Xnh Pr ii«
(cf. § 75 hh); iinsni I S 2S2'«; I^J^i^ Ez 42* ; T\'07\ 2 S 19'*; ThHi 2 S 20^ ;
'•pin <;joM gaddest about (from PIX), Jer 2^6 . ^^J^^ j)j. ^^zi (^foj. -|;pjj{-i ^^ according
toother readings (on the analogy of the cases mentioned in § 75 p) Nn*1
Nn'1 or ^<^l>1.
Paradigm I shows the weak forms of the imjyerfect Qal, and merely
indicates the other conjugation?, which are regular.
I Rem. I. In the derived conjugations only isolated weak forms occur :
Perfect Niphal Vtm^ Nu 3230, Jos 228; Hiph. ^ifNJI Nu ii^s (but the statement
in verse 17 is ''ri|'?fNl, therefore Qal) ; equally doubtfulis the punctuation of
3-|»1 (for 3"IXM?) and he laid wait, i S 158, and plK I listen, Jb 32I1 (^qq t^p
analogy of verbs VJ?) ; cf. also y2\i< (0 from a) I give to eat, Hos 11* ; ni'^^k
(0 from d) I tt)i7Z destroy, Jer 46^; "ini'l 2 S 20^ Q^re (for 'nX*1) ; the K^thibh
appears to require the Pi'tl "in;;^1, from "IH^ as a secondary form of "IPIN ; but
''D^'l = inX"! for ■inN*'\ as imperfect Qal is not impossible. On mxiNI
Neh 13", cf. § ^^ n.— infinitive ^>pnf) Ez 2i33 ( = /_3xni) unless it is rather
infin. Hiph. from 7=13) ; Participle JMD gireth ear, Pr 17^ (clearly by false analogy
of verbs V'J?, for P]XO 1 ; Imperative Vnr\ bring (from nnX) Jer 129. (^Qn the
same form used for the perfect in Is 21", cf. § 76 <?.)
/^- 2. In the Pi'eZ the K is sometimes elided (like n in 7^t3[5n"' ^""tOp^), thus
f)pP (as in Aramaic and Samaritan) teaching, for ejyifio Jb 35I1 ; ^n^ (if not
a mere scribal error) for 7T\^) Is 132O; ^J'lTril thou hast girded me, 2 S 22*«, for
••J^Wni, as ^ iS«>; '^laXI. Ez 28" ; cf. § 23 c.
§ 69. Verbs '•"d. First Class, or Verbs originally i"d,
e.g. 3^; to dwell.
Brockelmann, Semit. Sprachiviss., p. 141 f. ; Grundriss, p. 596 flF.
a Verbs which at present begin with Yodh when without preforma-
tives are divided into two classes according to their origin and
consequent inflexion : (a) Verbs which (as still in Arabic and Ethiopic)
originally began with Wmo, e. g. "^T^ to give birth to, Arab, and Eth.
tvdlddd. In consequence of a phonetic change which prevails also
with few exceptions in the noun, this Wdtv in Hebrew and Aramaic
always becomes a Yvdh, at least when it is the initial consonant ; but
after preformativcs it either reappears, or is again changed into
§ 69 b, c] Verbs ^"^. First Class 187
YCdh, or, lastly, is altogether elided ; (6) Verbd which (as in Arabic)
originally began with Yodh (called Verba cum lod originario, see § 70).
A few verbs again (some with original Yodh, and some with original
Wdw) form a special class, which in certain forms assimilates the Wdw
or Yodh to the following consonant on the analogy of the N-dn in
verbs j"3 (see § 71).
With regard to verbs ^"s (i. e. '•"a with original Wdw) it is to be b
noticed that —
1. In the imperfect, imperative and infinitive construct Qal there is
a twofold inflexion, according as the Wdw is wholly rejected or only
changed into Ycdh. The complete rejection (or elision) takes place
regularly in eight verbs (see h) in the following manner :
A. Imperfect 2K'^, VT with an unchangeable ' Sere in the first
syllable and original ? in the second, which in the tone-syllable
(according to §270) becomes e (thus "I.?.''., ^T.., ''"I"'.; ^.?!!, see x), or,
under the influence of a guttural, with a in the second (Vl."'., yp*, ID';),
The tone-long e of the second syllable is of course liable to be
shortened or to become ^^wd, e.g. ^'^'l, '^^,\, &c. ; in the same way
a becomes ^^wd in such cases as ^V^V, &c., but is lengthened to Qames
in pav^e i^V']'!) and before sufiixes (Q}^'!J,^).
B. Imperative 3^ Avith aphaeresis of the Wdw and with tone-long e,
from i, as in the imperfect.
C. Infinitive T)^^ from original sibh, by addition of the feminine
ending (n) lengthened to a segholate form ; as in verbs f*D (cf. § 66 b)
this lengthening affords a certain compensation for loss of the initial
consonant.
Rem. Since the infinitives nyi, mb (see below, w) point to a ground- C
form di'at, lidai, we must, with Philippi {ZDMO. xxxii. 42) and Barth (ibid.
xli. 606), assign to fl^B', &c., the ground-form Hibt (which, therefore,
reappears in ''ri3B', &c.) ; the apparent ground-form sabt rests upon the law
that the » of the stem-syllable is changed into a whenever the syllable
becomes doubly closed by the addition of the vowelless feminine ending.
^ The e of the first syllable is really e, not tone-long e, since it is retained
not merely before the tone, and in the counter-tone (e.g. DJ^T'I Ho 14'"),
but also in "^VJ^ Ex 33'''^. It is no objection to this view that the scriptio
plena of this e occurs (with the exception of "Ip""' if/ 72", elsewhere pointed
1)5"'>) only in Mi i* and Ez 35® K^ih. ; in tp 13S* the Masora prefers to point
VT^. — Of the various explanations of the e the most satisfactory is that of
Philippi (ZDMG. xl. p. 653) that an original ytiltd, for example (see above),
became yiJid by assimilation of the vowel of the first syllable to that of tlio
second ; this then became yeled instead of yeled, in an attempt to raise
the word again in this way fby writing e instead of e) to a trilitei-al form.
i88 The Verb [^6gd-i
d In more than half the number of verbs 1"d the original Wdw in the
above-mentioned forms gives place to Yddh, which, unless it suffers
aphaeresis (see /), appears : —
in the imperatives p'^\, K'lj and infinitives "IDJ, S"l^, as a strong
consonant, but
in the imperfect ^T), properly yiyras, merges with the preceding i
into t
In the second syllable imperfects of this form regularly have a,
C (a) That the latter forms are derived from verbs with an original Wdw
(not Yodh) is shown partly by the inflexion of these verbs in Niph'al, Hiph'il,
and Hoph'al (where the original Wdw reappears throughout), and partly by
the Arabic, in which verbs I^Q likewise exhibit a twofold formation ; cf.
wdldda, imperf. ydlidu, with elision of the Wdw, and wdglld, yaugalu, with
retention of the Wdw.
f (b) Sometimes both forms, the weaker and the stronger, occur in the same
•^ verb; cf. pS 2 K 4" and p)i) pour, Ez 24* (cf, !|p^\ i K 18" and the infin.
npy Ex 38^^) ; B'-l take possession, Dt 1", i K 21^5 (but cf. s), B*") {in pause for
E'l) Dt 22<" ; plur. ^B?") Dt 18, 923, but also, with H paragogic, HBH^ Dt 3322.
In the imperfect ^j5''^ Dt 32^2 and 1^ Is lo^" it shall be kindled; "Si'^''! it was
precious, i S 18^0 and "Ip^ ^49^ (cf.'-jp"'^ i^ 72").— The form IDHM Gn 30^9,
^ -,. " '' '"■'•'"
for ^Dn*1_, beside n3pn*1 verse 38, is remarkable ; cf. § 47 k.
g (c) On nn Ju 19" for IT and nity Jer 42" for the infinitive absolute 3'.K'J,
cf. § 19 t, — But Tl^ Ju 5'' (twice) is not intended by the Masora either as
perfect (for TT*, which really should be restored) or as imperative of H"!"*,
but as an apocopated imperfect Pi' U from mi ( = n'i|1^) to have dominion.
h {d) The eight verbs,^ of which the initial consonant in the above-
mentioned forms always suffers elision or aphaeresis, are Ip^ to bring forth,
NJf to go forth, 3B''' to sit, to dwell, TT to descend, also ^pH to go (cf. below, x) ;
and with o in the second syllable of the imperfect, yT to know, in^ to be united,
yp^ to be dislocated. Examples of the other formation (tJ'l^"' , &c. ) are FjJT'
to be wearied, ^JJJ to counsel, ]p'> to sleep, NT {imperfect NT"*, imperative N"l^)
to fear.
I 2. The original Wdw is retained as a firm consonant : (a) in the
infinitive, imperative, and imperfect Niph'al, being protected by the
strengthening, e.g. 3B'jn, 2??^^ which are consequently strong forms
like ijpi^n, ^'t?!?^; {b) in the Bithpael of some verbs, e.g. V^inn from
VX, nainn from r\^), n^nn from HT; otherwise a radical Wdw at the
beginning of a word is now found only in a few nouns, e.g. *ipi offspring
from *1?J to bear. At the end of a syllable Wdw with the homogeneous
^ A ninth f)p' to add, is also to be included. In the Mesa'-inscription,
1. 2f, the infinitive is written DDD? (cf. ^nSD'', 1. 29); hence read in Is 30'
(Nu 32^*, Dt 29'*) riDD for DiSD. The 2nd plur. masc. imperative ^DD Is 29',
Jer 721 corresponds to ^SB' ; thus in proof of a supposed HSD addere, there
remains only HSDN Dt 322^ for which, according to 2S 12*, read nSDX.
§ 69 h-n'] Fei'hs ^"s. First Class 189
vowel u coalesces into li ; so throughout Hoph'al, e g. 3^in for
huwsabh ; but with a preceding a the Ff'ato is contracted into 6 (^) ;
so in the perfect and participle Niph'al and throughout Iliph'tl, e. g.
SK'U from an original ndwsdhh, ^''B'in from an original hdwsthh.
The first radical always appears as YCdh in the perfect and partici2)h k
Qal, ^^), &c., nt?'^ yi^)^ even when ] precedes, e.g. ^B'^l (but DPi^K^^.,
according to § 24 6), also throughout Pi'el and Fu'al, e.g. Pn^ <o wa?^,
1?"! ^0 be born, and in the imperfect and 2>(i"''f'ici2^^ ''D-\ ^T.^ knotvn
(from yT), and, as a rule, also iu Hithpael, e.g. n.^rnn," nrnri^ B'n^nn
(as against y^l^"?, &c., with Wdw).
The beginner may recognize verbs I^D in the imperfect Qal partly by the '
Sere under the preformatives ; in Niph'al and Hiph'il by the Waw (1 V; before
the second radical. (The defective writing, as in IvH, is rare.) Verbs
V'D liave forms lilse 1^ (V"^), HIIB', in common with verbs )"Q. Similarly
Hiph'al has the same form as in verbs yj? and V'J? .
Rem. I. The infinitive Qal of the weaker form (DZIK', ground-form siht, T)l
ntJ'T ; cf. above, c) with suffixes is pointed as '•rillK' ' iritJ*"} (the strong form
only in ^3p'"}''p Ju 14^^). The masculine form is very rare, e.g. yi to knoio,
Jb 32^1", as also the feminine ending H , e.g. Hy"))^ Ex 2*, TTv? Is 37'
(2 K 19*) ; Jer 13^1, Ho 9^1 ; HTll^ (g descend, Gn 46', where the change of
the e into vocal S^wa is to be explained, with KOnig, from its position
between the principal and secondary tone. From yi^, under the influence
of the guttural, nyi is formed, with suff. ^riyi,&c. ; but from Ni*\ DNV.
From *11' thei-e occurs in \p 30* in Q're ^"l")*© (the K'th. requires ^Tli*D) a very
remarkable case of the strong form (for ^JjlHlfD). For H? i S 4^' (generally
explained as a case of assimilation of 1 to H in the supposed ground-form
ladt; according to Mayer Lambert pausal of Tw = Udt, see above, c) read
simply prj^.
Examples of the strong form of the infinitive are NT" to fear, Jos 22^^, with ^
preposition IDv Is .51^^ (but 2 Ch 31'' according to Ben Naphtali *lbv, where
the ^ is only retained orthographically, but is really assimilated to the D ;
the reading of Ben Asher, llDy, accepted by Baer, is meaningless) ; jiCJ'*?
Ec 5II; Nl^ I S ife29 is irregular, but probably Nn!) (for KT^) is in-
tended. With suff. \"!DJ3 Jb 38^ cf. Ju 14IS, Ezr 3" ; -with D fern. flSb*''
to he able, Nu 14^^ On Tf^1\, which is likewise usually referred to this class,
cf. the note on § 70 a.
^ *n3K'1 \p 23S can hardly be intended for an infin. with suffix from 3K'^
but rather for a perf. consec. from D^B' ; but read '•riDB'^V
^ The infinitives Hy^ and iM'\ belong to the source marked E (Dillmann's B)
in the modern criticism of the Pentateuch. The same document also has
Jh3 to give, for DPi ; Ipil to go, for Uj^ ; and nby to make, for DV^V' See
Dillmann, Die BB. Num., Deut., Jos., p. 618.
190 The Fe7'b [§690-5
O 2. The imperative Qui frequently has the leiigtliening by H , e.g. H^B'
sit thou, m") descend thou. From HH'' to give, Arab, tcdhdbd, only the imperative
is used in Hebrew ; it has the form 3n give, lengthened H^n generally with
the meaning age, go to, henee in Gn ii^* even addressed to sevei-al persons
(Gn 29''i nin before N to avoid the hiatus) ; fern. *3n Ru 3", Milra on the
< <
analogy of the phn-al ^HH (once in Jb 6^ ^n before the tone-syllable ; but cf.
Dt 32'), whilst, on the analogy of other imperatives Qal of verbs V'D ^2n ^2n
would be expected. — On ny'1 Pr 24^*, cf. § 48 i.
4) 3. The imperfect with 1 elided takes a in the second syllable, besides the
cases mentioned above (under/), also in Tin Jer 13'^ (cf. La 3^*) and in
the pausal form "^y Jb 27^', &c. (from Tl^n, see x) ; on 1J5'' Is 10** see above,/.
The a in the second syllable, when followed by the afiformative ri3 MJH^n
T \ T ; — -
&c.), is in accordance with the law mentioned above (under c), by whicli
d takes the place of t in a doubly closed syllable. Forms with e in the
second syllable shorten the e to S^ghol, when the tone is drawn back (before
a tone-syllable or after wdw consecutive), e.g. N3"3^'' Gn 44'^; *T}*1 3JJ'*1*
but t is retained in an open syllable, even with Mil'el-tone, in Ni'^ Ex 162'-',
Ju 9'', in both cases with nasog 'ahor, § 29 e. The pausal is either of the
form 2p*) Ku 4^ or TV1_ ip 18^°; the 1st pers. sing., whether in or out of
pause, isTlXI , n^XI, &c., except 7] ^XWb ig" see a:.— For yi^ \t 138^ (cf.the
note above, on b and the analogous cases in § 70 d) yT*"" is intended.
y The imperfect of the form {^T^ is frequently (especially before afformatives'
written defectively, in which case the i can always be recognized as a long
vowel by the Metheg (see § 16/), e.g. 1DV'' Is 40''', ^iW Is652^ ; and so always
^K"!'' they fear, as distinguished from ^N")^ therj see (imperf. Qal of nS"l).— On
Db'^1 Gn so'", 2433 K^th , and TJD''^ Ex 30*2, see § 73/.
^' From yy to prevail, to be able, the imperfect Qal is 7^, which can only have
arisen through a depression of the vowel from P^i"* (ground-form yaukhal^
yawkhcd), to distinguish it, according to Qimhi, from PDIN, just as, according
to § 47 b, bbpK is differentiated from ?hp\ Cf. the Arabic ijauru'u {yoru'ii'
from waru'a, yaujalu (yojalu) from wagila, as also the vulgar Arabic (among
towns-people) yusal, &c., from u:auda. Others regard bsV as an imperfect Hoph'al
{he is enabled = he can), always used instead of the imperfect Qal ; cf., howevci',
§ 53 w- — b^WI occurs in Jer 3^ as 2nd sing. fern, for ""^D^ni, according to
IT - • IT -
KOnig because the 2nd fern, had been sufficiently indicated previously. —
Further D'lV or HT is to be regarded with M. Lambert {KEJ. xxxvii, no. 73^
as impf. Qal (not Hiph'il) of m^ to throw, shoot (the supposed impf. Qal D"T'31
Nu 21^*' is critically very doubtful). This is shown especially by the pas-
sages in which the impf. T]'})'' is immediately preceded by the imperat. Qal
(2 K 13*'') or infn. Qal {\p 64^), or is followed by the participle Qal (2 Ch 35"'' ;
but in 2 S 11''^ by the participle Hiph'il).
S 4. The attenuation of d to i in the perfect (in a toneless, closed syllable)
which is discussed in § 44 d (cf. § 64/) occurs in verbs T'D in a few forms
of iy Nu 11''', Jer 2", \p 2'', &c. (always after "•), as well as of B'l'', e.g.
DWIM., &c., Dt 4', 81, i7'«, 19I, 261, 31'' (always after '"I for ^l). In both
cases the attenuation might be explained from the tendency to assimilate
the vowels, especially if the initial ^ was pronounced, as in Syriac, like i
(§ 47 h). In the case of U'T', however, a secondary form B''}^ (cf. § 44 d) is
probably to be assumed, since in Arabic also the verb is warita. The forms
§ 69 t-x'\ Verbs ^"s. Fi7^st Class 191
'?|?{5n''1 Ez 36^2 and H^tJ'TI \f/ 6g^^, &c., are most simply explained from the
return of this t.
5. As an exception, the imperfect Niph'al sometimes has a ^ instead of the t
1, e.g. 7n**1 and he stayed, Gn 8^2 (unless the Pi'el or pJ^^^, as in ver. 10, is to
be read), cf. Ex 19" ; i S 13* K^th'ihh. — The first person always has the form
3K'JX, not DK'IX, cf. §51 p.— In the participle the plural \S5|3 (from nj^,
with depression of 6 to u, cf. § 27 n) is found in Zp 3^^ ; cf. La 1*. While in
these cases some doubt may be felt as to the correctness of the Masoretic
pointing, much more is this so in the perfect HpU nuWdhu, i Ch 3^, 20*, for
^*1-5iJ which appears to be required by the waio in the initial syllable.
6. In the imperfect Pi'el elision of the first radical (') sometimes takes place U
after wdw consec, (as in the case of S, § 68 k), e.g. nH*1 for HS^'^I and he has
grieved, La 3'^, ^''1*1 for ^iy^] and they have cast, verse 53, from m'', which may
also be a true verb '"'D (on the other hand, in pl'li ^"1^ they have cast lots,
Jo 4', Ob ", Na 3'", a perfect Qal of T]'' is required by the context ; but as
this, being a transitive perfect, ought to have the form 'Til'' according to
§ 67 a, perhaps we should read ^T*). So from a verb ^"D, of the second class,
'.r|'2*1 for iinK'S^^I and he made it dry, Na 1*; cf. Q'}}^^ 2 Ch 52^° Q^re (the
K^th. points either to Pi'el Dn.B'^M, or Hiph'il DlK'^^l).
7. The imperative Hiph'il, instead of the usual form 2B'in, sometimes has i in d
the second syllable; {<''Jfin Is 43^; ysin ip 94^ (before n, hence probably
a mere mistake for njJ^Sin). On the uncertainty of the tone in N3~njJ^B'in
see § 53 m. When closed by a guttural the second syllable generally has a, as
ynin, yC'in, cf. also ni^h Pr 25" (as in the infin. constr. HSin Jb 6'^'' ; see
§ 65/). On the other hand, i always appears when the syllable is open, thus
nn^E'in "•^''^'in, and so also before suffixes (§ 61 g). Ni'^H Gn 8" Q're {KHh.
NViri, see § 70 h) is irregular. — The jussive and the imperfect consecutive Hiph'il
when the tone is drawn back take S''gh6l in the second syllable, as in Qal,
e.g. FIDV that he may increase, Pr i^ before r\p? ; cf. Ex lo'^^ and Dt 3*" after
"?S • FjDM (^Din Pr 30^ is anomalous) ; in pause, however, also fjpin as
jussive, Jb 40^2 (usual ^wssu'e in pause 2^V, &c., which occurs even without the
pause after wdw consecutive, Gn 47", Jos 24^, 2 S 8*, &c.). With a final
guttural VT and n^V (jussive) and n31*1, &c. ; with a final 1 in pause ~\r\F\\
Ru 2": on D3yL^'^"! Is 35*, cf. § 65/).— On forms like ^EnHV see § 53 g.
In Hoph'al 6 stands instead of 1, in V]in (for V"1in) Lv 423-28^ n^n 2 S 20", ^^,
and perhaps in NTli^ (for H^.V) Pr ii^S; but cf. Delitzsch on the passage. —
Ptcp. nyilO Is 125 qe^g (ny^jO K^th).—An infinitive Hoph'al with feminine
ending occurs in DlvT} Gn 4020, for n'1pn = vin ; cf. above, t, on ^np^3, and
§ 71 at the end.
8. The verb TJpH to go, also belongs in some respects to the 1"Q class, since it {](;
forms (as if from T]p1) imperfect '^?^, with wdw consecutive Tjb'l (in pause 1)7'.l
Gn 24", &c.), 1st sing. TI^NI (but in Jb 19'° Tj^NIN ; infinitive construct 03?
with suff. ""riD? {S'ghol under the influence of the following palatal, as in
'''=133, cf. also ^33) ; imperative '^b, "^2, ^" ^^^ lengthened form nSp (as an
interjection referring even to a feminine, Gn 19^2^ or a, plural, Gn 31^^) and "^p
(Nu 23", Ju 19", 2 Ch 25") ; Hiph. 'Ij-'bin (also in Ex 2^ ^3''9in 2nd fern,
imperative is to be read for ''3^p'''n, which probably arose merely through
192 The Vei^h [§70 a, J
confusion with the following 'ini?3''n) ; imperfect TJvi^ but in the ist sing, of
the imperfect consecutive always TjpiNI Lv 26I', Am 2!", &c. Rarely, and almost
exclusively late or in poetry, the regular inflexions of TI^H are also found :
imperf ^"Sn^ {^p 588, &c. ; but Tj^nn Ex 9^3, ^p 738; cf. § 64^0 and h) ; Tj'^nX
Jb i622, also Mesa' inscription, line 14, "jSlK; infin. '■^r\_ (Ex 3", Nu22"f-", 1
Ec 68-^) ; imperative plur. 13pn Jer si^o. On the other hand, the perfect Qal is
always T|7n, participle T]P"n, infinitive absolute !]i?n, Niph'al TJ^HJ , Pi'ei !]?n
Hithpa'el Tj^nJin, so that a "i never appears unmistakably as the first radical.
The usual explanation of the above forms is nevertheless based on a supposed
obsolete ^T. It is, however, more correct to regard the apparent V'Q
forms of 'y?T\ with Praetorius {ZAW. ii. 310 ff.) as originating with the
Hiph'il, of which the ground-form hahlikh became hdlikh, and this again, on
the analogy of the imperfect Qal of verbs X"D, holikh. This holikh being
referred to a supposed haulikh (properly haxclikh) gave rise to new formations
after the manner of verbs VS.
§ 70. Vey-hs ^"Q. Second Class, or Verbs jjroperly '•"s,
e. g. 3^J to be good. Paradigm L.
Brockelmann, Scmit. Sprachwiss., p. 143 fif. ; Grundriss, p. 603 ff.
Verbs properly '>"d differ from verbs /'s in the following points :
a 1. In Qal the initial Yodh never suffers aphaeresis or elision ; hence
the infinitive has the form K^^^^^ ^j^g im'perfect '^'^^\, )'\^\, \>V\ (in pause
lT-)> ^Iso written 3^', &c. ; and so always with a tone-bearing a in the
second syllable, even after ivciw consec, e.g. |*lT?l, except Yp^)] Gn g^*,
and "<?f^h Gn 2''», unless "^^f^ is to be included among verbs Ts (cf. "tJfi3
Is 43^")-
0 2. In HipliU the original form ^^Ip^H is regularly contracted to ^''^'•n
(rarely written y\:?\\, ^tD-n, &c.) ; imperfect 3''t3V., 2^^'1. Instances of
the uncontracted form are ^"'K'^! Pr 4^*, according to Earth (see above,
§ 67p), an example of an i-imperfect of Qal, since the Hijyh'tl is other-
wise always causative ; "IK'NT (imperative) ■^ 5' Q^re (the K^th. requires
"IB'in according to the form of verbs i"d ; cf. Is 45^ nB'IN A'«/A., "^tj'rt?
(^Ve), cf. Gn 8^' Q^re; D^^^O^P i Ch 12^ to be explained as a
denominative from fO^ ; DTP^^ Ho 7'" (§ 24/, note), but perhaps the
punctuation here is only intended to suggest another reading D"!Q!i<.
1 Cf. above, m, note 2.
2 This may be inferred from ^l"*^ (^''3) Is 27^^ which with its fern.
tV^yi Gn 8'', is the only example of an infinitive construct Qal of these verbs.
No example of the imperative Qal is found : consequently the forms 3D^, &c.
(in Paradigm L of the earlier editions of this Grammar), are only inferred
from the imperfect.
§§7oe, 7i] Verbs ^"Zi. Second Class 193
Rem. I. The only verbs of this kind are : DO"* to be good (only in the C
imperfect Qal and in Hiph'il ; in the perfect Qal 310, a verb V'y, is used instead),
py to suck, YP"* to awake, "lif"" to form (but see above, a), 7T only in Hiph'il
7^yn to bewail, "ItJ*^ to be straight, right, also B'H^ (Arabic yabisd) to be dry (but
Hiph'il E'^ain 2 S 198, on the analogy of verbs 1"a ; on Is 30^, cf. § 72 x), and
the Hiph'il po^n (denominative from pOp, infin. ^12^6 2 S 14" fo go to
the right.
2. In some examples of the imperfect Hiph'il the preformative has been
subsequently added to the contracted form: 3'^.1^ Jb 24"; 7^.'!'! ^^ I5*'^
r6^ ; ^*h^ Jer 4SS1 . pjur. ^^^f)'»^ Ho 7", cf. Is 65I*. Qimhi and others
explain the above forms from a phonetic interchange of Yodh and He, arising
from the unsyncopated forms /'y^'^% &c. (cf. Is 52^). It is, perhaps, more
correct to suppose that the regular forms (3''ip^\ ''vV.) were originally
intended, but that in the later pronunciation the syllable was broken up in
order to restore artificially the preformative which had become merged
in the first radical.
Isolated anomalies are : perfect Hiph'il ^rOl2''T^'\ Ez 36" with separating
vowel (for ^nab**)!) on the analogy of verbs V'V ', imperfect 3"'P\'' for 2''p\'*_
I K i<7; '•ntp^n {imperfect Qal for ''212''^) Na f ; 1np.''3ri1 imperfect Hiph'il Ex 2\
eitlier an error for 'pym, or an irregular shoiiening of the first syllable,
caused by the forward movement of the tone. Similarly, the Hiph'il ypT]
. < .<
(from yip) is always used instead of pp"*!! from yp"^ ; hence also Hlifpn ^ ''112? ^pH ,
imperat. r\Tpr\, infin. pj^n.— On =in^3*1 Na \*, see § 69 u).
§ 71. Verbs """d. Third Class, or Verbs with Yodh assimilated.
In some verbs '•"s, the YCdh (or the original JVdu^ does not quiesce
in the preceding vowel, but is regarded as a full consonant, and, like
iVjJw,^ is assimilated to the following consonant. These forms,
therefore, belong properly to the class of strong verbs. Assimilatioa
invariably takes place in ]1T^ (pi op. y^'l) to S2>read under; Iliph'tl T^>^,
Hoph'aU^r}; r\T to burn, imperfect nx^, Mph'al nS3, Iliph'tl n^i'n
(in Is 27" also HSn^^'K is to be read with Kiinig ; in 2 S 14^" the Masora
has rightly emended the KHhihh iTJT'Vini, which could only be the ist
sing. perf. of a verb "i"d, to the imperative i|)in''5fni in agreement with
the context and all the early versions); T£\, IlipJitl ^^^ to place,
Hoph'al 35fn ; and probably also in the forms ordinarily derived from
2XD, viz. 3^: (Niph'al), n^n, Tr, ^i'ri; at any rate a stem 3i:^ is
implied by the Ililhpa'el 32f^rin ; instead of the anomalous ^snpl Ex 2*
read with the Samaritan n^Tini, i.e. 32;'nril, Besides the common
form we find once p"^^ in Is 44^ (from PT, to pour) with a transitive
meaning, beside P??'l intransitive, i K 22^^. Elsewhere the imperfect
^ These verbs, like verbs JC'V (cf. above, note on § 67 jr), may perhaps havo
been influenced by the analogy of verbs |"a .
COWLKY O
194 The Verb [§ 72 a
consecutive has the form pi'H Gn 28'^, 35", &c., cf. § 69/, where also
other forms of \>T, are given ; ^If^fl and "lif^ (Is ^^'\ 49^, Jer i^ Q're),
from "^IfJ to form, are, however, used in the same sense. Cf. also
OIOS Ho 10" ; njlI'M (for 'n\ according to § 47 ^) i S 6'- ; ^b'S' 2 Cli 3 1^
(cf. § 69 w) and *TE10 Is 28'^ This assimilation is found always with
sibilants (most frequently with v) except in the case of "15*1 i K 3'*
(eo ed. Mant., Ginsb., Kittel ; but Jabl., Baer Y^->) and in nnVn
Gn 40-", Ez 16' (cf. nihn verse 4), infinitive Hoph'al of lb; (cf. =n^»
§69 0-
§ 72. Verhs ^"V (vulgo l"y), e. g. Dip to rise up. Paradigm M.
Brockelmann, Semit, Sprachwiss., p. 144 ff. ; Grunclriss, p. 605 fif.
a 1. According to § 67 a a large number of monosyllabic stems were
brought into agreement with the triliteral fonn by a strengthening,
or repetition, of the second radical, i. e. of the consonantal element
in the stem. In another large class of stems the same object has been
attained by strengthening the vocalic element. The ground-form
used for these verbs is not, as in other cases (§ 39 a), the 3rd sing,
masc. perfect, but always the infinitive construct form (§39 h), Xhe u
of which is characteristic also of the imperative and of the imperfect
indicative Qal. These stems are consequently termed verbs l"y or
more correctly (see below) 1"y,^
1 The term 1"y was consequent on the view that the Wdiv (or ^ in the case
of verbs ''"J?) in these stems was originally consonantal. This view seemed
especially to be supported by the return of the Wdw in Pi'el ("IIV, the 1
usually passing into "• as in D*p, cf. Arabic qdwwnma), and by certain forms
of the absolute state of the nouns of such stems, e.g. niD death, compared with
HTO to die. Hence in explaining the verbal forms a supposed stem qawam
(in verbs '•'''y e. g. sayat) was always assumed, and Dp'' was referred to an
original yaqwum, the infinitive absolute Dip to original qawom, the participle
passive G)p to original qawiim. It must, however, be admitted : (i) that
forms like H^y D'p (see to) are only to be found in the latest books, and are
hence evidently secondary as compared with the pure Hebrew forms DOip
&c. ; (2) that to refer the verbal forms invariably to the stem Dip) leads in
many cases to phonetic combinations which are essentially improbable,
wliereas the assumption of original middle-voicel stems renders a simple and
natural explanation almost always possible. These Vy stems are therefore
to be rigidly distinguished from the real Vy stems of the strong forms, such
as HIT J yia, &c. (see below, gg). — As early as the eleventh century the right
view with regard to Vy stems was taken by Samuel Hannagid (cf. Bacher,
Leben und Werke des AbulwaHd, p. 16) ; recently by B5ttcher {Lehrbuch,
§ I II 2), and (also as to y"y stems) especially by Miiller, Stade, and
Wellhausen (see above, § 67 a, note). On the other hand, the old view of
1 and 1 as consonants has been recently revived by Philippi, Barth,
M. Lambert, and especially Brockelmann (op. cit.).
§ 72 6-e] Terhs vy ^95
2. As in the case of verbs y^y, the monosyllabic stem of verbs ''"y b
generally takes the vowel which would have been required in the
second syllable of the ordinary strong form, or which belonged to
the ground-form, since this is essentially characteristic of the verbal
foiTQ (§436; § 676). However, it is to be remarked: (a) that the
vowel, short in itself, becomes of necessity long in an open syllable as
well as in a tone-bearing closed ultima (except in Hoph'dl, see d), e. g,
3rd sing. masc. perf. Di^, fern. "^9^, plur. *'^\^, but in a closed penultima
riDp, &c.^; (6) that in the forms as we now have them the lengthening
of the original short vowel sometimes takes place irregularly. Cf. /.
Intransitive verbs middle e in the j)erfect Qal have the form HJO he C
is dead; verbs middle o have the form liN he shone, tJ'S he v:as
ashamed, y^^ he was good.^ Cf. n-r.
3. In the imperfect Qal, perfect Niph'al, and throughout Hiph'il and (l
Iloph'al the short vowel of the preformatives in an open syllable before
the tone is changed into the corresponding tone-long vowel. In Qal
and Niph'al the original a is the basis of the form and not the t
attenuated from a (§ 67 /t; but cf. also h below, on ^'y.), hence Dlp^,
for ydqum, ; Dip3 for ndqom ; on the other hand, in the perfect Hiph'il
CPH for Mqtm ; participle Cj?^ (on the Sere cf. z) ; perfect Hoph'al
Dpin for hitqam.
A vowel thus lengthened before the tone is naturally changeable and 6
Y <
becomes vocal S^wd when the tone is moved foi-ward, e.g. ^lUT'D^ he will kill
him ; so also in the 3rd plur. imperfect Qal with Niin paragogic ; prJ^C (without
NUn ^n^D''). The wholly abnormal scriptio plena of e in "T'tp^nn Jer 2^^ (beside
■\^tOn in the same verse) should, with Konig, be emended to l""??^!!] ; the
incorrect repetition of the interrogative necessarily led to the pointing of
the form as perfect instead of imperfect. — But in Hoph'al the ?1 is retained
throughout as an unchangeable vowel, when it has been introduced by an
abnormal lengthening for the tone-long 0 (as in the Hoph'al of verbs y"y).
^ In Aramaic, however, always DDp ; also in Hebrew grammars before
< < *
Qimhi flDp, "JjUOp, &c., are found, but in our editions of the Bible this occurs
only in pause, e.g. '•ijlDP^ Mi 7^, ynjD 2 K 7''*.
^ According to Stade {Grammatik, § 385 e and /) the e in HD is of the
nature of a diphthong (from ai, which arose from the union of the vowel 1,
the sign of tlie intransitive, with the d of the root', and likewise the 0 in
"liN, &c. (from aw). But 0 (from au) could not, by § 26 p, remain in a closed
penultima (n{^3, &c.) ; consequently the 0 of these forms can only be
tone-long, i.e. due to lengthening of an original n, and similarly the e of
niO to lengthening of an original i. This is confirmed by the fact that the
6 in riK'3 ^riK'Il ^2^2 is always, and in ^^2, irdplur. perfect, nearly always
(the instances are 11 to 2), written defectively. Forms like HCIIl, ^tJ'13,
^■^iK, &e., are therefore due to orthographic licence.
0 2
196 The Verb [§72/-*
y 4. The cases of unusual vowel lengthening mentioned in h are :
imperfect Qal DIpJ (also in Arabic ydqAmu), but jussive with normal
lengthening (§ 48 gf), DpJ, with retraction of the tone Dj^J (ydqom),
Qj^*! (in pause Qp'l) ; i'ni2)erative Dip, with normal lengthening of the w
in the 2nd plur. fe7n. "^^PP, since, according to § 26 p, the tt cannot
be retained in a closed penultiraa ; infinitive construct D^P. In Hiph'U
the original i is naturally lengthened to i (C^pH, imperfect ^''Pl, jussive
< <
Di?T> with retraction of the tone Dp^, Dp*1) ; on the transference of this
? to the Hiph'U of the strong verb, cf. § 53 a.
fir The following forms require special consideration : the participle
Qtl DI? is to be traced to the ground-form with d unobscured, Arab.
qdtil, § 9 5', and § 50 h. On this analogy the form would be qdini,^
which after absorption of the i became D^, owing to the predominating
cliaracter of the d. The unchangeableness of the d {plur. D^'?i^, constr.
'^i;, &c.) favours this explanation.
// In the imperfect Qal, besides the forms with original ii (now ti) there
are also forms with original a. This a was lengthened to a, and then
farther obscured to 6 ; hence especially Ni3^ (^^t)' ^^t-> ^^-i from the
perfect N3 he has come. In the imperfects lifr^"" (but cf. i^^l^ril i S 14^^)
and K'il'' from the intransitive perfects "liX, B'3 (see above, c), most
probably also in ^nx"" 2K12', niW Gn 34'^ from an unused niN to
consent, and perhaps in D^^J^l i S 4°, &c., as in the cases noticed in
§ 63 e and especially § 67 n, the e of the preformative is lengthened
from I (which is attenuated from original a) and thus yi-hds became
yi-hds, and finally ye-hos. Finally the A'iph. OPJ (nd-qdm), imperfect
Di|3^ from yiqqdm, originally (§51 m) yinqdm, arises in the same way
from the obscuring of d lengthened from a.
f 5. In the perfect Niph'al and Hiph'U a i is inserted before the
afformatives beginning with a consonant in the ist and 2nd persons,
and ^-:7- regularly (but see Rem.) in the imperfect Qal, sometimes also
in the imperfect Hij^h'U (as in n3^X^2J;i Lv 7^", cf. HSD^nri Mi 2'% before
the termination of HJ. As in verbs ]}"]} (§ 6-j d and note) tliese
separating vowels serve as an artificial opening of the preceding
syllable, in order to preserve the long vowel ; in the perfect Hiph'U,
however, before the i, instead of the t an e is somewhat often found ^
(as a normal lengthening of the original i), especially after wdw con-
* So in Arabic, prop, qd'im, since tlie two vowels are kept apart by the
insertion of an N, cf. Aram. DXp ; but also contracted, as Mk, hdr, for jfd'ifc,
&c. (cf. Wright's Gramm. of the Arabic Language, 2nd ed. vol. i. p. 164).
" D|!!13^ti_'n 1 I S 6'' (cf. 2 Ch 6^2^) could only be an orthographic licence for
'y^TW ; perhaps, however, "y^^TW was originally intended.
§ 72 it-m] Verbs vy 197
seculive, Dt 4^^ 30', as well as befoi'e the afformatives DTI and fri or
before suffixes, Dt 22^, i S 6^ i K 8^\ Ez 34^ For in all these cases
the tone is removed from the S to the following syllable, and this
forward movement of the tone produces at the same time a weakening
of the itoe; thus D'i?n, niD^pn (or 'pr}^ ; on nnnyn Ex 19-^ cf. x), but
nbi^.ni, &c., Ex 26^", &c.; Dt 4^ Nu'iS^^ (cf., however, l3toi?r,i Mi 5^).
In the same way in the ist j)ers. sing, of the 'perfect Nifh'al, the 6
before the separating vowel is always modified to li (''niJ21p3) ; cf. v.
In the imperfect Qal and Hiph'il the separating vowel ''^:- always
bears tlie tone (nj^npn).
Without the separating vowel and consequently with the tone-long 0 and /c
i instead of w and i we find in imperfect Qal njNQn (see § 76 gr) ; tP^'W Ez 16^^
(also ilJ^aiB'n in the same verse) ; Djnb'PlI i S 7" (cf. £235^ Q^ri; on the
KHhibh njac^'n cf. above, note on § 69 6) ; n^nNril 1 S 14" from "liX {K'thihh
njXiril and they saw, see § 75 to) ; in Hiph'il, e.g. nsjn Ex 20'^, also ^niD'^jn
Jb Si'^^ ; ""ripCni Jer 22-^; riiDK'n Jb 20!"; with a separating vowel, e.g.
n3''X''3ri Lv. 7 5'' from Ni3. S^ghol without ^ occurs in the imperfect Qal in
njnllDri Ez 13^^ Zc 1^'' ; and in Hiph'il Mi 2'^^ : the Dages in the Niin is, witli
Baer, to be rejected in all three cases according to the best authorities.
<
Wholly abnormal is njD^pn Jer 44^^ probably an erroneous transposition of
< * <
D* (for nJ''Dpri), unless it originates from an incorrect spelling n3p*j?n or
TV • :
6. The tone, as in verbs y"y (cf. § 67 ^), is also generally retained /
on the stem-syllable in verbs V'y before the afformatives i^-^, ^, ''-r- ',
thus nci? (but also 1? ""IT3 2 K 19'^', probably for the sake of rhythmical
uniformity with the following v '^JJ'!,, > after tvdw consecutive "^^^
Is 23''); ^0|^(but also 10^, cf. Is 28', 29», Na 3'*, f 76^ Pr 5^ La 4'«;
^i^ni I S 8" ; so especially before a following N, cf. § 49 I, Nu 13^^ ; ^V^]
I3i9>; before y, V' 131', Pr 3o'^ La 4'^); ^I?ipri, ^^P), but before
a suffix or with JViln j)aragogic DIDD^I 2 Ch 28'^ ; pCTp^ Dt 33", &c.
7. The formation of the conjugations Pi^el, Pu'al, and Hithpa'el is, m
strictly speaking, excluded by the nature of verbs ^'y. It is only in
the latest books that we begin to find a few secondary formations,
probably borrowed from Aramaic, on the analogy of verbs l"y (with
consonantal 1, see below, gg) ; e. g. the PHel 1;1.y to surround, only in
^T\}V ^/^ 119''; and with change of 1 to \ D'i? Est 9'", ^D>i? Est 9=',
impf. nn'.i5K\ y\r 1 1 9""', injln. D'p Ez \f, Ru 4^ &c.. Est 9^^ &c., imperat.
>3»»p r/.ii9'»; DPl^im Dni'« from 3in to he guilty. The Hithpa'el
''.^.^Vri Jos 9'^, which belongs to the older language, is probably a
denominative from *1^??. On the other liand the otherwise less common
conjugation Pclel (see § 55 c), with its passive and reflexive, is usually
198 The Ferb [§ 72 n-r
employed in the sense of Pl'el and as a substitute for it, e. g. D'i?^p to
set up from Dip; rifliD to slaughter, i S 14'^, 17*', 2 S i^ from niO;
DDi'l io exalt, passive O'O'n , from D1"> ; reflexive "l"liynn <c> stir up oneself
(cf. 'Ij^J'O? Jb 17'* in pause) from "11^; reciprocal 5J'K'3rin ^ fte ashamed
before one another, Gn 2^^. The conjugation Pilpel (§ 55/), on the
analogy of verbs v"y, is less common, e. g, ^!?PP to hurl away from ?1t3;
P3?3 to contain from ip^S ; "^[PP. to destroy from I^P.
Remarks.
I. On Qal.
n I. Of verbs middle e and 0, in which, as in the strong verb, the perfect and
participle have the same form (§ 50. 2), the follovring are the only examples :
< < <
no he is dead, fern. riDD, 2nd masc. nniO (cf. § 44 gr ; § 66 /») ; 1st sing. 'JJIO
< < < < .
"•npi (even in pause, Gn 19^^); i^Zwr. ^HD, i steers. WHO, in pause ^iflD • CS ^e
was ashamed, nK'S, ''JjlK'3, ^JK'i, lE'i ; "IIN it has shone, plur. Ilix ; 2113 to be good,
"13b. Participles DO a f?ea(i man {plur. D'^HO, ""riO) ; D^E'iS ashamed, Ez 32^".
For i: Is 27" read"n3, or, with LXX, ly.
0 Isolated anomalies in the perfect are : n3B'1 (with the original ending of
the fern, for nflKh) Ez 46" (see § 44 /) ; ppS Is 26" (see § 44 ;)•— In «3
I S 25* (for 1JN3 from Xi3) the N has been dropped contrary to custom. In
^S3 Jer 27'* (instead of ^X3) the Masora seems to point to the imperfect ^NS""
which is what would be expected ; as Todh precedes, it is perhaps simply
a scribal error.
p The form Dj^ occurs (cf. § 9 &) with N in the perfect, DNp Ho 10", also in
the participles DnS softly, Ju 421, cyXT poor, 2 S I2»-'*, Pr lO*, plur. 1323 ; D'^LJNE'
doing desjnte unto (unless D^lpXK' is to be read, from a stem 13NK' whence tSNK'
Ez 25'5, 365), Ez 282«-2''; /ew. '16"; also in Zc 14I0 n»N"J is to be read with
Ben-Naphtali for noXl. On the analogy of participles of verbs middle 0 (like
D''B'i3, see above) D^Dip occurs for D^Dp 2 K 16' and even with a transitive
•L • '' L
meaning L3v occultans, Is 25'' ; D''D13 Zc lo^.— Participle passive, ?5|D circumcised;
but a^D a backslider, Pr 14I*, and n"llD 1im< aside, Is 49*1 (cf. Jer 17" <yre), are
verbal adjectives of the form qaful (§ 50 /), not passive participles. For
D'E'n hastening, Nu 32", read D"'C'Cn as in Ex 13" ; for ^^ItT Mi 2^ read "'3^.
ft 2. Imperfects in m almost always have the corresponding imperative and in-
finitive construct in u, as DIpJ , imperative and infinitive D5p (also defectively written
Dp^, Dip) ; but trn^ /je threshes {infn. E'n), has imperative "^mk {fern.), Mi 4" ;
I3^b »■< sZippe^;*, infinitive CiO (^J- 38", 46*); cf. HU (also TO) Nu n^s and yi3
Is 72 (elsewhere y^3) with the imperfects niJJ and y^r j Tiy^ Is 30^ ; 3i{y
Jos 2J'5; nil Ez 10" (verse 16 nn).
7' Where the imperfect (always intransitive in meaning) has 0 the imperative
and infinitive also have it ; thus imperfect Ni3J (^^J)> '"^"- and mjper. NU or
N3' ; -1X»1 2 S 2S2, niN, niN; B'i3>, E'iS, &c.— tsipj Jb 8" (if it be a verb
at all and not rather a substantive) is formed on the analogy of verbs yy
^ In I K 1412 (nN33 before a genitive), the text is evidently corrupt : read
with Klostermann after the LXX TJXbS.
I § 72 s-v] Verbs vy 199
since the imperfect of b^p appears as D^pN in ^t 95^''. On the other hand
ptJ'p'' (as if from tJ'",p, on the analogy of NIT, &c,) occurs as imperfect of
K'p'' (''"D)- The imperfect pT*, with 0, Gn 6^, probably in the sense of to rule,
has no corresponding perfect, and is perhaps intentionally differentiated
from the common verb pT to judge (from p"n ''"]})■ Or can pT* be a, jussive
after N^ (cf. § 109 d) ? Similarly ("^J'^y) •'^y Dinn X^ might be taken as
a case of a jussive after NP, with irregular scriptio plena (as in Ju 16^"), in
Dt 7I6, 139, 1913.21^ 2512, Ez 6", 7*-9, 8", 910. But perhaps in all these cases
Dinn ii^ was originally intended, as in Is 13^*, Jer 21'', while cases like DH'
i// 72^3 are to be explained as in § 109 k. — The infinitive absolute always has 0,
e.g. llDIp; Dip Jer 4429.
3. In the imperative with afformatives (^D^p ^J2^p) the tone is on the stem 't
< < <
syllable (of., however, "'"liy Ju 5^^ intentionally varied from Hiy ; also "^Iri]}
Zc 137 and Is 51* beside ""DiS n^y ; '•b'"'? Zc 9^; n« Is 21^, ^£:iE; f 116^,
likewise for rhythmical reasons). So also the lengthened form, as HDIB'
Jer 3^2, i// 7*, and ni^y verse 7. But if an N follows in close connexion, the
lengthened imperative usually has the form HD^p, &c.,^ in order to avoid
a hiatus, e.g. Ju 4I*, ^ 82*; hence also before nin^, Q^re perpetuum ""yiX
(§ 17 c), e.g. if/ 38, •]'' riDlp (cf. , however, in the same verse n'^^)} and in Jer 40^,
nnB' before N), and so even before "> ^ 43I, 74^2, &c. (Han).
4. In the jussive, besides the form Dp"* (see above, /), Dip'' also occurs *
(as subjunctive, Ec 12* ; 3iDJ if/ So^^ may also, with Delitzsch, be regarded as
T <
a voluntative), incorrectly written plene, and Dp'' (Gn 27^1 ; cf. Ju 6^',
Pr 9^-^^), which, however, is only orthographically different from Dip"* (cf.
Jer 46^). In the imperfect consecutive (Dp*1 , in pause Dp'l , see above, /) if there
be a guttural or *1 in the last syllable, a often takes the place of 6, e. g.
< < <
nj>1 and he rested ; yj'l and it was moved ; 1D''< and he turned aside, Ju 4^*, Ru 4}
(distinguished only by the sense from Hiph'il "10*1 and he removed, Gn 8^*) ; "IX '1
Ex 21*, 2 K 52s, 175 (but also "ia>1 from both "153 to sojourn, and 1^3 to fear) ;
f]yM (to be distinguished from f\]!>\ and hefleio, Is 6*) and he was tveary, Ju 4^1,
1 S 1428-31, 2 S 2 lis, but probably in all these cases ^lyM for P|y^^1 from P]y'
is intended. For B'l^ni 2 S 13^ K^th., the Q«re rightly requires B'bni. On
< <
the other hand, in an open syllable always ^Dlp>1j niD*1, &c. On DpNI
(DpNI), see § 49 e.
Examples of the full plural ending p with the tone (see above, I) are ?^
pnpPl Gn f-* ; pD^r ^ 104'' ; p^n^ Jo i*-'^
II. On Niph'al.
< <
5. The form of the ist dng. ■perf. ""niD^pll , which frequently occurs CriilDJ , t'
^nil^D3, cf. also the ptcp. plur. D^D^33 Ex 14^), serves as a model for the
2nd sing. niDlp3 ni01p3, and the ist plur. ^jiD*p3 given in the paradigm,
although no instances of these forms are found ; but of the 2nd plur. the
^ Cf. Delitzsch's commentary on i^ 3*.
200 The Verb [§72M;-fla
only examples found have o (not m). "^iz. Dflifiaj ye have been scattered, Ez ii",
2c3<'«i, and Dnbpil and ye shall loathe tjourselves, Ez 20<3, 36^^— To the i (instead
of d) of the preformative may be traced the perfect ~liyo Zc 2" (analogous to
the perfect and participle ?te3, see below, ee), imperfect "1^V''_ for yi'or. — The
infinitive construct B'^'in occurs in Is 25^" ; in "liN7 Jb 3jS«, the Masora ass\imes
the elision of the H (for *liNn|5) ; but probably I'lXb {Qal) ii intended (see
J 51 i). — 3103 Is 1481^ jipj Is 5^13 are to be regarded as infinitives absolute,
III. On Hiph'il, Hoph'al, and Pi'lel.
Ii) 6. Examples of the perfect without a separating vowel (see above, k)
are : HXan , &c. (see further, § 76 gr) ; nriOH (from TilD) for hemdth-tu (of.
§ 20 a); 135n ist plur. perfect Hiph'il from pS 2 Ch 29", even Drijpn (§ 27 s)
Nu 176, &c. ; cf. I S 173B, 2 S 1328, also friDni Ex i^s, and Hinpni Ho 2^ ; but
elsewhere, with waw consecutive ""riion^ Is 14*"; cf. ""rip^ni Jer 16^^, and
riD3ni Ex 292^, &c. — In these cases the e of the first syllable is retained
in the secondary tone ; elsewhere in the second syllable before the tone
it becomes ^^^ (i Ch 15", &c.) or more frequently -^, and in the syllable
before the antepenultima it is necessarily -^ (e. g. '•ritopHV Gn 6^*). Before
a suffix in the 3rd sing. masc. (except Gn 40^^) and fem., and in the 3rd plur.,
the vowel of the initial syllable is Bafeph-S^ghol, in the other persons always
nateph-Fathah (KOnig) ; on 'inbpn 2 K 92, \t 89", cf. Ex 192s, Nu 3128, Dt ^39
22*, 272, 30^, Ez 34*, and above, t. The 3rd fem. perf. Hiph. nriDH i K 2129 is
<
quite abnormal for Hri'^pn from n^D or JVD,
X As in verbs ]i"V with n for their first radical (§ 67 w), all the forms of TlJ)
Ex 19^^ (where against the rule given under i we find nrnj^p with e instead
of I), Dt 8", Neh 9^*, Jer ^2^^, and "liy Is 4125, 45"^ take Pathah in these
conjugations instead of -^r. The irregular DiJli3K'ini Zc 10^ has evidently
arisen from a combination of two different readings, viz. D''ri2C''iri^ (from
2^'') and D^ni^vJ'ni (from nv^) : the latter is to be preferred.— On tr^n and
tynin as a (metaplastic) perfect Hiph'il of ^2, cf. § 78 6.
y 7. In the imperative, besides the short form Dpn (on 2t^n Is 42^2 with
Silluq, cf. § 29 5; but in Ez 2i35 for n^'H read the infinitive 2p7\) the
lengthened form i']12''pr\ is also found. With suffix ^3D^|?n, &c. The impera-
tive K^nn Jer 1 7I8' is ^irregular (for H^Ti Gn 43^^); perhaps N^nn (as in
I S 2C^" ; cf. 2 K 8«) is intended, or it was originally nN^DH.
Z In the infinitive, elision of the H occurs in N*nb Jer 39'', 2 Ch 311° (for
N'^Dni)) ; n fem. is added in nSJn!? Is 30"" ; cf. Est 2" and the analogous
• T ; ' T T T-:t
infinitive Ilciph'el in biblical Aramaic, Dn 52". — As infinitive absolute pDH occurs
in Ez 7" (perh. also Jos 4^, Jer ic"). — The participles have ?, on the analogy
of the perfect, as the vowel of the preformative, like verbs J?"y (§ 67 t). On
UO 2 S 52, &c. (in K'thibh), see § 74 k.
fia On the shortened forms of the imperfect (Dp^, Dpfl, but always ii2''\; in
the jussive also with retraction of the tone SK'rf/K i K 22") see above, /.
With a guttural or 1 the last syllable generally has Pathah (as in Qal), e.g.
nyn and he testified, 2 K ij" ; HT let him smell, 1 S 26" ; rnh Gn 82' ; nO'l
§ 72 bb-ee} Verbs vy 201
and he took away, Gn 8^^. The ist sing, of the imperfect consecutive commonly
has the form 3"'^N1 Neh 2^'>, or, more often, defectively nyxi i K 2*"^, less
frequently the form 2^ii\ Jos 14''.— For SIDN Zp i^ (after^'ei'DX) and in
verse 3, read ^Oii from ^DH, on the analogy of "\DX § 68 fir : similarly in
Jer S" DDDX instead of DE)''DS.
In the imp^Ject Polel the tone is moved backv^ards before a following tone- 00
syllable, but without a shortening of the vowel of the final syllable ; e.g.
''13 QDiin Pr i4»< ; 'b bbSm Jb 35" ; cf. Pr 252^, and ace. to Baer ^3 p'inm
Jb 30™ {ed. Mant., Ginsb. ^3 J33riri1), always in principal pause ; on the
Metheg with Sere, cf. § 16/ 7.— As Polal cf. yyi> Is iC^o.
As participle Eoph'al 3B'^!2n occurs in close connexion, Gn 43'^; cf. § 65 d.
Peculiar contracted forms of Poiel (unless they are transitives in Qal) are CC
1333^1 Jb 3115, !,3-^,y^ ^i2^ =l331Dri1 Is 64® for 13333^1, &c. [but read 13333^1
(§ 58 k), I3n;y^ or 133-lijJ^, and 1333001]; also DoSn Jb 17*, for DOD^n.— In
Is 1 5^ 1"^yy^ appears to have arisen from the PUpel ^'^V']V^ , the d after the loss
of the 1 having been lengthened to a, which has then been obscured to 0. —
For the strange form ^""DDipriS ^ i2>9^^> which cannot (according to §525)
be explained as a participle with the D omitted, read 'prijp3.
IV. In General.
8. The verbs V'y are primarily related to the verbs Vy (§ 67), which were UCl
also originally biliteral, so that it is especially necessary in analysing them
to pay attention to the differences between the inflexion of the two classes.
Several forms are exactly the same in both, e.g. imperfect Qal and Hiph'il with
wdw consecutive, the whole of Hoph'al, the Pi'M of verbs Vy, and the Po'eloi
verbs yy ; see § 67 s. Owing to this close relation, verbs l^y sometimes
have forms which follow the analogy of verbs yy, e.^. perfect Qal T3 he has
despised (from 113, as if from 113) Zc 4'" ; perfect Niph'al *1^3 Jer 48^^ (for ">iD3
from "yiD, as if from T1D). The same explanation equally applies to Ht^pJ
Jb loi for n^i53 (cf. § 67 cid)-n9*ip3 from Dip, and 1t£)'p3 Ez 6^ (for 1t3ip3) ;
IBin"" Ez 10" and IDn^l verse 15; IDhn {imperative) Nu 17"; 3D^ Mi 2« ;
Hiph'il perfect Iflll Is 18^ for inn (cf. § 29 g), which is for mn from lin. On
the other hand the imperfects ID^ Ez 48** (unless it be intended for "llD^
cf. ^ 15*) and ns^ Hb 2^, are to be regarded according to § 109 i, simply as
rhythmically shortened forms of l^JD^ and H^D"'.
9. In common with verbs y"y (§ 67 g) verbs 1*y sometimes have in Niph'al CC
and Hiph'il the quasi-Aramaic formation, by which, instead of the long
vowel under the preformative, they take a short vowel with Dagei forte in the
following consonant ; this variety is frequently found even along with
the ordinary form, e. g. iT'DH to incite, imperfect JT'D' (also n^DH D^D^) ;
TBT}^ imperfect yBl to remoce (from 31D), also Hoph'al 3Dn Is 59'* (on Djpn
cf. § 29 3) ; sometimes with a difference of meaning, as n*3n to cause to rest,^
but n"*!)!! {imperfect n*3^, consecutive niril Gn 39^' ; imperative nSH, plur. in^3n) to
<
set down ; for nn''3ni (Baer, Ginsburg '3ni) Zc 5^1 (which at any rate could
only be explained as an isolated passive of Hiph'il on the analogy of the
biblical Aramaic DD^pn Dn 7*) we should probably read nn^SHI with
* As the passive of this Hiph'il we should expect the Hoph'al n3ln, whicli
is, no doubt, to be read for n3in in La 5".
202 The Verb [§§72 J,!7i7, 73«
Kloste\;mann after the LXX. In Dn 8'i the KHhihh Dnn is intended for
a 2^erfect Hiph'il. There is also a distinction in meaning between pp^
to spend the night, to remain, and p^)^ Ex 16'^ Q'r'e {K^thibh ^JI^Pl ; conversely,
verse 2 K^ibh ^yfl, Q're ^31^^), participle p^l? Ex 168, Nu 1427, 1720, to be
stubborn, obstinate : in the latter sense from the form p?"* only p'l is found,
Ex 17^. Other examples are Niph'al 7"1133 he was circumcised, Gn I726'-;
participle 34^2 (from ^ID, not ^03) ; "I'lVp. .'»« is ivaAred wp, Zc 2^^ (see above, z)) ;
Hiph'il r\'^%r^ La i^ ; ^r^*' Pr 421.
T ■ • •
ff Perhaps the same explanation applies to some forms of verbs first guttural
^'' with Dages forte implicitum, which others derive differently or would emend,
e. g. ^nm for B'nril and she hastened (from C'^H) Jb 31^ ; Dy*1 (another reading
is DJJ*1"), Dyril 1 S 1519, 25" (14" Q^re) from LIJ? or D^p to^Zt/ aC anything. Both,
as far as the form is concerned, would be correct apocopated imperfects from
ntJ'n and nJOy en"?), but these stems only occur with a wholly different
T T T T ^
meaning.
firnr 10. Verbs with a consonantal Waw for their second radical, are inflected
throughout like the strong form, provided the first or third radical is not
a weak letter, e. g. IIH, imperfect '■\\n\ to be white ; yi3, imperfect yi2^ to expire :
mi to be wide; mX to cry ; Pi' el ^-ly, mper/ec< b)T. to act wickedly; D^.y to bend,
Hithpa'el n.\ynn to bend oneself; and this is especially the case with verbs
which are at the same time T]"b , e. g. Hl^, Pi'el HJ^ to command, HJi? to wait,
mi to drink, Pi'el TW (on "HI'lS Is iC^, see § 75 dd) and Hiph'il miH <o ffiW to
drink, &c.
§ 73. Vej^hs middle i (vulgo '•"y), e.g. P? ^ discern.
Paradigm iV.
ft 1. These verbs agree, as regards their structure, exactly with verbs
Vy, and in contrast to them may be termed '•"y, or more correctly,
'ayin-i verbs, from the characteristic vowel of the imp/., imj)ei'., and
injin. constr. This distinction is justified in so far as it refers to a
difference in the pronunciation of the imperfect and its kindred forms,
the imperative and ivjin. constr. — the V'y verbs having il lengthened from
original ii and '•"y having t lengthened from original ?. In other respects
verbs ''"y simply belong to the class of really monosyllabic stems, which,
by a strengthening of their wcaZi'c element, have been assimilated to the
triliteral form ' (§ 67 a). In the perfect Qal the monosyllabic stem, as
in 1"y, has a lengthened from a, thus: DK' he has set; infinitive ri"'B',
infinitive absolute Hit:', i7nperative JT'K', imperfect T^^Pl, jussive T\pl
(§ 48 g), imperfect consecutive n^'JI. — The perfect Qal of some verbs
* Tliat verbs Vy and >"y are developed from biliteral roots at a period before
the differentiation of the Semitic languages is admitted even by NOldeke
{Beitrdge sur sem. Sprachwiss., Strassburg, 1904, p. 34 ff.), although he contests
the view that ''ri'3''3 and mi^l are to be referred to Hiph'il with the preforma-
tive dropped.
§ 73 ?>] Verbs ^''y 203
used to be treated as having a double set of forms, a regular series,
and others like Hiph'il without the preformative, e. g. P3 Dn lo' ; "T'i'?
Dn 9'-, also JHi? ^129^; JHi^n tliou strivesl, Jb 33''', also ^^1 La 3^*.
The above perfects (1*3, ^n^ &c.) might no doubt be taken as forms
middle e (properly i), the t of which has been lengthened to i (like
the u lengthened to xi in the imperfect Qal of D^ip). It is more
probable, however, that they are really shortened forms of Hiph'il.
This is supported by the fact that, especially in the case of p?, the
shortened forms are few and probably all late, while the corresponding
unshortened forms with the same meaning are very numerous, e. g.
2)erfect t^^ili (but f? only in Dn 10^), Drii3''3ri, infinitive f^H (but injin.
abs. P? only in Pr 23'), imperative *Q:'^ (only in Dn 9^^ P3^ immediately
before pn], also ^y^ three times, and HJ^a ^ 5^)^ particijde P^P.'
Elsewhere I{i2)h'tl-{oTms are in use along with actual ^aZ-forms with
the same meaning, thus : 3''"!? (also ^1), D'K'P placing (but only in
Jb 4-", which, with the critically untenable ''^''fe'n Ez 21^', is the only
instance of D^fe* in Hi2)h'il), n''2D breaking forth Ju 20^^, with injin. Qal
in>3; ilE^'m they rushed f<yrth Ju 2o'^ with B'n, 'nph ; pV? glancing,
also in perfect P^; X^pH he spat out, with imperat. Qal I"*?. As passives
we find a few apparent imperfects Hoph'al, which are really (according
to § 53%) imperfects passive of Qal, e.g. ^HT^ Is 66* from /'H to turn
round, IB'V from "IT <o ^m^f, HC'V from n^B' ^o «««.
2. The above-mentioned Hiph'U-forms might equally well be derived u
from verbs ^"V ; and the influence of the analogy of verbs V'y is
distinctly seen in the Niph'al fi^J (ground-form nahan), Folel fP.i3, and
Hithpolel i^i^nn. The very close relation existing between verbs """jr
and 1'y is evident also from the fact that from some stems both forms
occur side by side in Qal, thus from <'''n to turn round, imjterative also
V^n Mi 4'"; CK* to place, infinitive construct commonly D'lB' (2814''^
D'b' Q^re), imperfect D*^^, but Ex 4'' Dlb'^, In other verbs one form is,
at any rate, the more common, e. g. ?"'3 to exvXt (^1^3 only Pr 23** K^tMhh);
from p/ (perhaps denominative from ? v) <o spend the night, p?^ occurs
six times as infinitive construct, Pr-p only in Gn 24^^ ; but the imperative
is always P?, &c. — Of verbs '•"j? the most common are ri^C' to set,
3'''! to strive, P'1 to judge, K'''B' to rejoice ; cf. also perfect -'3 {middle
^ Since n33 ^ 139* might be intended for ri'33, there remains really no
form of pi which must necessarily be explained as a Qal, except the pkjK
plur. D''33 Jer 49'. Nevertheless it is highly probable that all the above
instances of Hiph'il-forms, parallel with Qal-forms of the same meaning,
are merely due to a secondary formation from the imperfects Qal pD^, ^""^^ ,
&c., which were wrongly r-egarded as imperfects Hiph'il : so Earth, ZDMG. xliii.
p. 190 f., and Nominalhildung, p. 119 f.
204 The Verb l^i^c-g
Yodh in Arabic) to comprehend, to measure, Is 40^^ ; ti^y (as in Arabic
and Syriac) to rush upon, and the denominative ^er/ec« )'[> (from ^i^) to
pass the summer, Is i8^ On the other hand, D13"'1^ and they shall fish
them, Jer 16", generally explained as perfect Qal, denominative from
i'^fish, probably represents a denominative Pi'el, '3*1^
C Corresponding to verbs properly V'V, mentioned in § 72 gg, there are
certain verbs ^"J? with consonantal Todh, as ^^^ to hate, ^'^V to faint, H^n
to become, to be, HTI to live.
d Rem. I. In the perfect Qal 3rd fern. sing. Jli?) occurs once, Zc 5*, fo,r Mip"),
with the weakening of the toneless a to e (as in the fern, participle nniT Is 59*) ;
cf. the analogous examples in § 48 i and § 80 t.— 2nd sing. masc. HTlK' ^ 90®, (^re
(before V; cf. § 72 s) ; ist sing, once ^n^ ip 73'*, milra', without any-
apparent reason ; ist plur. 13^1 Ju 19" for Idn-nu. The lengthened imperatixe
has the tone on the ultima before gutturals, nin" nn^"] ^ 35^ ; see further,
§ 72 s. — Examples of the infinitive absolute are : IT liligando, Ju 11^, Jb 4c*;
OVt? Jer 42i«; ni? ponendo, Is 22'. On the other hand, 3>n^ n"*! (for 3^1)
Jer 5o3<, pnn r3 Pr 23s ^Jinn Sn Ez 30" i:«fA., are irregular and perhaps
due to incorrect scriptio plena; for the last the Q^re requires 7^nri P^n^
but read ^"in ; cf. § 1 1 3 x.
e 2. The shortened imperfect usually has the form |3J, tfe'^, HE'^ ; more rarely,
with the tone moved back, e.g. 'b nT Ju 6'S cf. Ex 23^, n2'r)-^« i S 9^.
So with waw consecutive Ciph and he placed, fZl'1 and he perceived ; with a middle
guttural Ona tsy'l i S 35" (see § 72 ee) ; with 1 as 3rd radical, "l^W Ju 5I.
As jussive of pb, f^Pt is found in Ju 1920 (in pause) and Jb \f, for Jpri.— For
niin-^K Pr 3*> Keth. {Q^re 3nri) read 2~\n
once, Nell 1 3^^ ;
niDlb' 2 S 13^2^ in the
Q're, even according to the reading of the Oriental schools (see p. 38, note 2) !
the K'thibh has nD'''E', A passive of Qal (cf. above, § 52 c and s, and § 53 «)
from Wp may perhaps be seen in Db'^'l Gn 5c2« (also Gn 2^^ KHh'ibh DE'^'»1,
Q«re D'B"»'V. the Samaritan in both places has OK'^I), and also in TJD'^ Ex 30'^
Samaritan "JDV. Against the explanation of •]D"''' as a Hop/t'a^-form from
!]5|D, Barth {Jubelschrifl . .. Hildesheimer, Berlin, 1890, p. 151) rightly urges
that the only example of a Hiph'il of !J1D is the doubtful !]D»1, which is
probably an i-imperfect of gai.— The explanation of DB'"'\ &c., as a passive of
Qal arising from yiysam, kc. = yuysam (so Barth, ibid., note i), is certainly also
unconvincing, so that the correctness of the traditional reading is open to
question.
* *****
«• 4. In verbs N"y the S always retains its consonantal value ; these stems
are, therefore, to be regarded as verbs middle Guttural (§ 64). An exception
is Y^y Ec 12» if it be impeifed Hiph'il of yni (for yHT) ; but if the form has
really been correctly transmitted, it should rather be referred to y^^, and
regarded as incorrectly written for yT. On ViS3 (from HIXl), which was
formerly treated here as H"V, eee now § 75 x.
f 3. As participle active Qal J? spending the night, occurs
participle passive CB' Nu 242*, i 89^^*, Ob*; feminine HDlb
§ 74 a-0 Vei'hs ^"h 205
§ 74. Verbs ^"h, e. g. Nifo ^^ ^h<^. Paradigm 0.
The N in these verbs, as in verbs n'^D, is treated in some cases as CI
a consonant, i.e. as a guttural, in others as having no consonantal
value (as a quiescent or vowel letter), viz. :
1. In those forms which terminate with the N, the final syllable
always has the i-egular vowels, if long, e. g. ^V^, X2»*0, ^Vi^ , X''Vt3n, i. e.
the N simply quiesces in the long vowel, without the latter suffering
any change whatever. It is just possible that after the altogether
heterogeneous vowel u the N may originally have preserved a certain
consonantal value. On the other hand, if the final N quiesces in
a preceding d (as in the ferject, ini'perfect, and imperative Qal, in the
2)erfect KipKal, and in Pu'al and Hoph'aV) this d is necessarily
lengthened to a, by § 27 g, as standing in an open syllable ; e. g. ^'^'O
SXtp^, &c.
The imperfect and imperative Qal invariably have a in the final syllable, on O
the analogy of verbs tertiae gutturalis ; cf., however, § 76 e. — In the imperfect
Hithpa'el a occurs in the final syllable not only (according to § 54 k) in the
principal pause (Nu 31"'), or immediately laefore it (Jb 10^*'), or with
the lesser disjunctives (Lv zi^*, Nu 19^3.^0^^ ^ut even out of pause with
Mer^kha, Nu 6'', and even before Maqqeph in Nu 19'^.
2. When N stands at the end of a syllable before an afformatlve C
beginning with a consonant (n, 3), it likewise quiesces with the
preceding vowel ; thus in the perfect Qal (and Hcqjh'al, see below)
quiescing with a it regularly becomes Qames (^^-f^ for J?^'-??) &c.) ;
but in the perfect of all the other active and reflexive conjugations,
so far as they occur, it is preceded by Sere (riKi'DJ, &c.), and in the
imperative and imperfect hj S^ghul, njSVtp^ njxyjpri.
(a) The S^ghol of these forms of the imperfect and imperative might be (*
considered as a modification, and at the same time a lengthening of an
original a (see § 8 a^. In the same way the e of the perfect forms in Pi'el,
Hithpa'el, and Hiph'il might be traced to an original i (as in other cases the
e and i in the final syllable of the 3rd sing. masc. perfect of these conjuga-
tions), although this i may have only been attenuated from an original a.
According to another, and probably the correct explanation, however, both
tlie Sere and the S^ghol are due to the analogy of verbs n*? (§ 75 /) in
consequence of the close relation between the two classes, cf. § 75 nn. — No
form of this kind occurs in Pu'al ; in the perfect Hoph'al only the 2nd tnasc.
sing. nriKIin Ez 40*, lengthened according to rule.
(h) Before suffixes attached by a connecting vowel (e.g. *3X"1|5"') the N (^
retains its consonantal value; so before ^ and DD, e.g. ^XVIDX Ct 8';
''\Vr\3r} Ez 28" (cf. § 65 h), not ^Xi'DS, &c., since tliese suffixes, "by § 58/,
a^re likewise attached to the verb-form by a connecting vowel in the form of
S'wd mobile. — As infinitive Qal with suffix notice ^XTO Ez 25^ ; participle with
suffix ^X^'3 Is 43^; infinitive Pi'cl D3Nt3^2. — The doubly anomalous form
^Nlp^ Jer 23* (for ^HN^i?^ or ^SS^p^) is perhaps a forma mixta combining the
readings iNip^ and isipV
2o6 The Verb llnf-^
J" 3, Wlien N begins a syllable (consequently before afformatives
which consist of or begin with a vowel, as well as before suffixes)
it is necessarily a firm consonant, and the form then follows the
analogy of the strong verb, e.g. nS'lfO mdfa, 1^<5fO^ &c. {\.n j}ause
Remarks,
ioc I. Verbs middle e, like NpD to be full, retain the Sere also in the other
persons of the perfect, e. g. '•riKTb {Sn?^ Est 7' lias owing to its transitive
use ; for DnNT* Jos 4^* read with Ewald DnXT'). Instead of HNSO the form
r\in\) she names, on the analogy of the n'v-forms noticed in § 75 m, occurs in
Is 7" (from nt?"!P J cf. § 44 /), and with a different meaning {it befalls)
in Dt 31*', Jer 44*^, in both places before K, and hence, probably, to avoid
a hiatus (on the other hand, DNDni Ex 5^^, could only be the 2nd sing. masc. ;
the text which is evidently corrupt should probably be emended to
^Oyb nNOm with the LXX) ; in Niph'al HN^SJ ^ 118^; in Hopk'al nN^H
Gn 33I*. — The 2nd fern. sing, is written rHOp by Baer, Gen 1611, &c., according
to early MSS.
fl 2. The infn. Qal occurs sometimes on the analogy of verbs H"? (Hva, &c.,
see § 75 mm) in the feminine form ; so always DN^D to fill (as distinguished
from nS» fullness), Lv 8'^, i2*«, 25^0, Jer 29I0, Ez 5^, also written niN^D
Jer 2512/jb 2o22, &c., and riNi^t? Est i^. Cf. further, DNip Ju 8'; m:^
Pr 8" ; before suffixes, Ez 33'*, and likewise in Niph. Zc 13* ; also in Pi'el
nxVnb Ex 3i5, 353s, or niX^lO^ Dn 92, &c. KHhibh ; with suffix 2 S 212.— On
the (aramaizing) infinitives NE'D and niXK'D, see § 45 e; on DSIpp obviam,
§ 19 k. — DSKVtoll when ye find, Gn 3220, stands, according to § 93 q, for
D3KifD. The tone of the lengthened imperative nNS") Ps 41' as Mil^ra' (before
^K'SJ) is to be explained on rhythmical grounds; cf. the analogous cases in
§ 72 s. — The 2nd fern. plur. imperative in Ru i^ has, according to Qimhi, the
form T|N2fjp and in verse 20 ■,]Vr}\> ; on the other hand, the Mantua edition
and Ginsburg, on good authority, read T}Xytp 'JXIP.
I 3. The participle fern, is commonly contracted, e. g. HNifb (for JlX^b) 2 S iS^^,
cf. Est 215 ; SO Niph'al nN^Q? Dt 30", Zc c,'' (but HNE'? Is 30^5), and Hoph'al,
Gn 38^5 . less frequent forms are T\^'f\'0 Ct 8" ; nXB'J i K 1022 (cf. § 76 b,
rivVU' beside riNb? as infinitive construct from Nt^J) and without K (see k)
nSi'"" (from \^T) Dt 285''. In the forms ^''^'dn sinning, 1 S 1^^^, cf. ^ 99* ;
DSnln feigning them, Neh 6^, the K is elided, and is only retained ortho-
graphically (§ 23 c) after the retraction of its vowel ; see the analogous
cases in § 75 00. — On the plur. masc. ptcp. Niph. cf. § 93 00.
fC 4. Frequently an X which is quiescent is omitted in writing (§ 23 /) :
(a) in the middle of the word, e. g. 132 i S 258; TlXO Nu 11", cf. Jb i^i :
"•riDS Ju 4^9, cf. Jb 32". In the imperfect njjfn Jer 9", Zc 5^, Ru i" (but the
same form occurs with Yodh pleonastic after the manner of verbs n"P in
Ez 23^9, according to the common reading ; cf. § 76 6 and Jer 5020) ; in Pi'el
nutans (after elision of the N, cf. § 75 00) Gn 31*^; and also in Niph'al
Dnbpi Lv 1 1« ; cf. Jos 2>6. (6) at the end of the word ; 13*1 i K 1 2I- K'thibh ;
Hiph'il »L5nn 2 K I3«, cf. Is 53'« ci)nn for X''^nn perfect Hiph'U of H^H formed
• v;lv • v:iv ' V:iv t t
§§ 74 1 75 «, *] Verbs n"!> 207
after the manner of verbs N"b) ; in the imperfect Hiph'il ''E^^ tp 55^^ K^thilh ;
^J^ tf 141^; ""nN I K 21", Mi 1^5. in the infinitive, Jcr 32*^; in the participle,
2 S 52, I K 21=1, Jer 191-^, 39'6, all in KUhihh (^310, always before N, hence
perhaps only a scribal error).
5. In i\\e jussive, imperfect consecutive, and imperative Hiph'il a number of cases /
occur with i in the final syllable ; cf. NK'^ Is 36" (in the parallel passages
2 K 18M 2 Ch 3215 N''E'!); N"'2;i Neh s'^ (before V) ; {<pn>l 2 K 2i'i (cf.
I K i62, 2i22) ; N3nP11 2 K 629 . ^'^.^s^_ Dj; ^20^ j K 1112, ^. 78''67'i"o5" ; imperative
K>3n Jer 17I8; K^ifin Is 438 (in both cases before J?). If the tradition be
correct (which at least in the defectively written forms appears very doubtful)
the retention of the i is to be attributed to the open syllable ; while in the
closed syllable of the 3rd sing. masc. and fem., and the 2nd sing. masc. after 1
consecutive, the i is always reduced to e. In the examples before ]} considera-
tions of euphony may also have had some influence (cf. § 75 hh). — la
Ez 40^, Baer reads with the Western school N"'3'1, while the Orientals read
in the K^tMbh S1T1, and in the Q^re ii2^\.
On the transition of verbs H"? to forms of n"? see § 75 nn.
§75. Verbs n"7, e.g. npa to reveal. Paradigm P.
Brockelmann, Semit. Sprachwiss., p. 149 ff. ; Grundriss, p. 618 S. — G. R. Berry,
'Original Waw in n'v verbs' in AJSL. xx. 256 f.
These verbs, like the verbs ^"d (§§ 69, 70), belong to two different a
classes, viz. those originally \"7 and those originally ''"7,' which in
Arabic, and even more in Ethiopia, are still clearly distinguished.
In Hebrew, instead of the original 1 or ^ at the end of the word,
a n always appears (except in the ^;^cp. pass. Qal) as a purely ortho-
graphic indication of a final vowel (§ 23 A;); hence both classes are
called n"7, e. g. npa for vj he has revealed ; H^B' for 1?^' he has rested.
By far the greater number of these verbs are, however, treated as
originally "•"? ; only isolated forms occur of verbs l"?.
nbti' to be at rest may be recognized as originally Y'7, in the forms in which ^
the TVdw appears as a strong consonant, cf, 1st sing, perfect Qal ^flyti' Jb 3^*,
the participle )p^ and the derivative TW?^ rest; on the other hand the imperfect
is vbV^ (with Yodh). In Hjy (Arab, '•jy) to answer, and nJJ? (Arab. 13J?) 2 to be
afflicted, are to be seen two verbs originally distinct, which have been assimi-
lated in Hebrew (see the Lexicon, s. v, Hjy).
- According to Wellhausen, ' Ueber einige Arten schwacher Verba ' in his
Skissen, vi. p. 255 ff., the n"b verbs, apart from some true Y'p and some
probable ^"p, are to be regarded as originally biliteral. To compensate for
their arrested development they lengthened the vowel after the 2nd radical,
as the 1"y verbs did after the ist radical. But although there is much to be
said for this view, it fails to explain pausal forms like n^DH (see m). It seems
impossible that these should all be late formations.
2 In the Mesa' inscription, line 5, Ijyi and he oppressed occurs as 3rd sing.
masc. imperfect Pi'el, and in line 6, liVN I will oppress as ist sing.
2o8 The Verb [§ 75 <^-e
Of quite a different class are those yerbs of which the third radical is a
consonantal H (distinguished by Mappiq). These are inflected throughout like
verbs tertiae gutturalis. Cf. § 65 note on the heading.
C The grammatical structure of verbs n"^ (see Paradigm P) is based
on the following laws : —
1. In all forms in which the original YCdh or Wdw would stand at
the end of the word, it is dropped (cf. ^ 24 g) and n takes its place as
an orthographic indication of the preceding long vowel. Such an
indication would have been indispensable, on practical grounds, in the
still unvocalized consonantal text. But even after the addition of
the vowel signs, the orthographic rule remained, with insignificant
exceptions (see § 8 Jc, and a in J?^^!?, &c.), that a final vowel must be
indicated by a vowel letter. In verbs n^b the n which is here em-
ployed as a vowel letter is preceded by the same vowel in the same part
of the verb throughout all the conjugations. Thus the endings are—
n_ in all perfects, n^3, nb:3, n^3, &c.
n__ in all imperfects and participles, n?3\ n^a, &c.
n__ in all imperatives, n?a, n?a, &c.
ni_ in the infinitive absolute (n>a , &c.), except in H{2)h'il, Hojph'al,
and generally also Pi' el, see aa andjf.
The participle passive Qal alone forms an exception, the original
"I (or 1 , see v) reappearing at the end, ""va ; and so also some derived
nouns (§ 84", c, c, &c.).
The infinitive construct always has the ending ni (with T\ feminine);
Qal ni^a, Pi' el JTi^a, &c.; for exceptions, see n and y.
d These forms may be explained as follows:— in the ■perfect Qal TO^ stands,
according to the above, for 0)^3, and, similarly, in Niph'al, Pu'al, and Hoph'al.
The Pi'el and Hiihpa'el may be based on the forms b^\>, b^pj)^ (§ B^ ^ ', and
§ 54 k), and Hiph'il on the form ^CpH , on the analogy of the a in the second
syllable of the Arabic "dqtala (§ 53 a). Perhaps, however, the final a of these
conjugations simply follows the analogy of the other conjugations.
e The explanation of the final tone-bearing n__ of the imperfect is still a
matter of dispute. As to the various treatments of it, see Earth, Nominal-
bildung, i. p. xxx ff, with § 136, Rem., and ZDMG. xliv. 695 f., against
Philippi's objections in the Zeitschrift fur Volkerpsychologie, 1890, p. 356 f. ; also
ZDMO. Ivi. 244, where Earth appeals to the rule that, in the period before
the differentiation of the North Semitic dialects, final iy becomes __ {constr.
n ), not i ; M. Lambert, Joum.Asiat. 1893, p. 285 ; Pratorius, ZDMG. Iv. 365.
The most probable explanation now seems to be, first, that the uniform pro-
nunciation of a« imperfects and participles with SV'o' in the lastsyllable merely
follows the analogy of the impf. QaJ, and secondly, that the S^ghol of the impf.
Qal does perhaps ultimately represent a contraction of the original termina-
tion ''__ { = ai), although elsewhere (e.g. in the imperative of n"P) ai is usually
contracted to e.
§ 75/-0 ^^^^«y ^"^ 209
2. When the original Yodh stands at the end of the syllable before f
an afformative beginning with a consonant (n, 3) there arises (a) in
the perfects, primarily the diphthong ai C^:^). In the middle of the
word this ought always to be contracted to e O-it-), but this e is only
found consistently in the passive conjugations, whilst regularly in Qal,
and frequently in the other active and reflexive conjugations (especially
in Pi el), it appears as t (cf. x, z, ee). This i, however, in the perf.
Qal is not to be explained as a weakening of an original e, but as the
original vowel of the intransitive form. It then became usual also
in the transitive forms of Qal (and in some other conjugations on this
analogy), whereas e. g. in Syriac -ihe two kinds of forms are still
carefully distinguished. — (6) In the imperfects and imperatives, ""^^
with the tone always appears before the afformative n3. On the most
probable explanation of this ''-rr-, see above, e.
Summary. Accordingly before afformatives beginning with a con- g
sonant the principal vowel is —
In the perfect Qal i, e. g. rCpa ;
In the perfects of the other active and reflexive conjugations,
sometimes e, sometimes *, n\f3 and ri''^? ; ri\?33 and ^ V?? 5
In the perfects passive always e, e.g. jn\?2 ;
In the imperfects and imperatives always ^-rr-, e.g. '"'Jv?' ^t «i"^'
The diphthongal forms have been systematically retained in Arabic and
Ethiopic ; only as an exception and in the popular language is the diphthong
contracted. In Aramaic the contracted forms predominate, yet the Syriac,
for example, has in Qal 2nd pers. sing, g'lait (but 1st pers. sing. riyS), and so
too the Western Aramaic n"*?!!, but also JT'^a.
3. Before the vocalic afformatives (^ , ''-r-, i^-^) the Yodh Is usually h
dropped altogether, e. g. v2 (ground-form gdldyd), y^^, participle
fern, npa, plur. masc. Dy^; yet the old full forms also not infrequently
occur, especially in pause, see u. The elision of the Yodh takes place
regularly before suffixes, e. g. ^^3 (see II).
4. In the 3rd sivg. fern, perfect, the original feminine ending ri__ i
was appended to the stem ; hence, after elision of the YCdh, arose
properly forms like npa, -with a in the final syllable with the tone.
This form, however, has been but rarely preserved (see below, m).
The analogy of the other fonns had so much influence, that the
common ending n_. was added pleonastically to the ending ri__.
Before the il-^ the vowel of the ending T^-^, which thus loses the
tone, becomes ^^wd, and thus there arise such forms as nrip3 , nrip33,
&c. (but in pause nnpa , &c.).
For similar cases see § 70 c?; § 91 m.
COWLEY P
2IO The Verb L§75't-«
k 5. Finally, a strongly-marked peculiarity of verbs n"7 is the
rejection of the ending n__ in forming the jussive and the imperfect
consecutive. This shortening c curs in all the conjugations, and
Eometiraes also involves further changes in the vocalization (see o, y,
bb, gg). Similarly, in some conjugations a shortened imperative (cf.
§ 48 k) is formed by ajwcope of the final n__ (see cc, gg).
I 6. The ordinary form of the imperfect with the ending n__ serves
in verbs T]"^ to express the cohortative also (§ 48 c); cf. Gn i^®, 2'*,
2 Ch 25^^, &c. With a final n_- there occur only: in Qal, ^V^^
yj/ 119"', i^^^Qf!? (with the ■• retained, see below, u) ^ ']']'*; and in
Eithpa'el nyriipJI Is 41^^ (with Tiphha, therefore in lesser pause).
Remarks.
I. On Qal.
VI I. The older form of the/ew. of the 3rd sing. perf. TO^, mentioned above,
under i (cf. § 74 g), is preserved in Db'y (before N) Lv 25^^ (cf. 2 K 9" K^thibh) • ;
likewise in Hlph'il nXin (before X) Lv 26" ; nX^n Ez 24I2 ; and in Hoph'al
Dpjn (before "•) Jer 13". — The 2nd sing. fern, is also wntten H'' ; thus in the
textus receptus ri"'^n"l 2 S 14^^, and always in Baer's editions (since 1872), as in
most other verbs ; H'tn and n"'^? Is 57* ; rT'B'y Jer 228, Ez i6*% &c. (so nx;pni
I K 17'^ from XX''). In the 3rd pers. plur. the tone, instead of keeping its
usual place (^P3, &c.), is retracted in ip z'j^", ^P3, both on account o{ the paiise
and also in rhythmical antithesis to the preceding IPS ; also in Is 16^ IVri
(according to Delitzsch for the sake of the assonance with ^^33) ; and in
Jb 24^ ^TH. — On the tone of the perfect consecutive see § 49 fc.
n 2. The infin. absol. frequently has S (probably a survival of the older ortho-
graphy) for nL_, e. g. ^''n Gn iS^^ ; ib'J? Jer 4^^, &c., Ez 31" ; ijf? 2 S 242* ;
^X") Gn 2628, Is 69 (cf. i S 6")^ &c., beside nX"1. The form nintt' Is 22" (beside
iriK' in the same verse) appears to have been chosen on account of its simi-
larity in sound to uHK'; so in Is 422" (yre and Ho 10*. ni?N (unless it is a
substantive, oaths) and nT3 ; cf. also flilj? Hb 3*3. — Conversely, instead of the
infinitive construct DvH such forms are occasionally found as n73 or \p^ , cf. HXl
Gn 48" ; nip Pr 16I6 ; ntJ'y Gn 5020, ^ iqjS^ also V^J? Gn 3128 (cf. Pr'31*), and
even with the suffix in the very remarkable form iHK'y Ex 18'*. 2 — The feminine
form niXT (for H^X"!) Ez 28", analogous to nouns like niX3 (cf. § 45 d), is
strange, but iTTI as infin. Ez 21'^ is quite inexplicable. — The forms ijn and il"n
Is 59^8 are perhaps to be regarded with Barth, Nominalbildtmg, § 51a, as
infinitives absolute of the passive of Qal (see above, § 53 u), not of Po'el. — The 2nd
sing. masc. imperative n^m occurs in the principal pause in Pr 4* and 72 ; but
' In the Siloam inscription also (see above, § 2 d), line 3, n^H may be read
riTl quite as well as fnTlTt,
2 All these infinitives construct in 0, in the Pentateuch, belong to the
document called E ; cf. § 69 m, second note.
§75 0-0 Ferhs r\"\> 211
probably these forms are simply to be attributed to ." Masoretic school, which
in general marked the difference between certain forms by the use of e for e,
and conversely e for e ; cf. the analogous examples in § 52 n, and especially
§ 75 hh, also Kautzsch, Grammatik des Bihl.-Aram., § 17, 2, Rem. i. — On the
reading r\yky} Ct 3" (for n^Xn^ on the analogy of the reading njX^J?, &c.,
§ 74 h), see Baer's note on the passage.
3. The shortening of the imperfect (see above, k, and the note on hh) occasions 0
in Qal the following changes :
(a) As a rule the first radical takes a helping S'ghol, or, if the second radical
is a guttural, a helping Pathah (according to § 28 e). Thus P^"" for pj"" • TI1*1
and he despised, Gn 25'* ; |5!1 ^^'^ ^^ built; ytJ"^ he looks ; niD^I and he destroyed,
Gn 7M
(&) The i of the preformative is then sometimes lengthened to e, e.g. HCi^ JJ
he sees. This, however, mostly happens only after the preformative n, whilst
after i the homogeneous i remains, e.g. ?2F\\ (but by'), |Bri1 (but fQ^), 2'}h)
(but 2njl) ; with middle guttural J/HJl, n3P)1 Jb 17^ (from HnS). The unusual
< <
position of the tone in K"iri Zc 9', iOT}] Mi 7^° (so Baer and Ginsb. ; ed. Mant.
< < ' <
N'V, a.")!^)) is best explained (except in X'l'' Gn 41^3, before B) on the analogy
<
of riDIp, &c., § 72 s, as due to the following N, But cf. also hh.
(c) The helping vowel is elsewhere not used under the circumstances men- (J
tioned in § 28 d ; 2^]\ Nu 21I, Jer 4110, ^f. riSM Jb 312^ ; on the other hand,
with I lengthened intoe (seep) P\^^\, ^2'1, T^)^ Lb'''. The form XV he sees,
occurs parallel with X")*1 and he saw (but 3rd /em. always XHWI), the latter
with the original Paihah on account of the following "I , and identical with
the 3rd sing. masc. of the imperf. consec. Hiph'il, 2 K 11*.
id) Examples of verbs primae gutturalis (§ 63), and at the same time H"?, T
are K'yi, in pause B'ys^ and he made, from ntJ^J? • 1^1 and he answered, from Hjy
-T- T T ' ' ' T T
(always identical with the corresponding forms in Hiph'il), yVih and he divided,
from njfn. On some similar forms of X"D see § 76 d. — In the following cases
the initial (hard) guttural does not affect the form : in»1 and he was wroth,
|n*1_ and he encamped (3rd plur. ^Jn^l)^ "^H^ (with Bagei lene and S^wd) lei ii
rejoice, Jb 3« ; cf. Ex iS^.— On ))\^ n, t:>l {r\"b as well as f'B), &c., see § 76 b, c,f.
(e) The verbs njH to be, and H^H to live, of which the shortened imperfects S
ought to be yihy and yihy, change these forms to ^n"" and "Tl"', the second Yodf.
being resolved into i at the end of the word ; but in pause (§ 29 n) \T TV"
with the original a modified to S^ghol with the tone (cf. also nouns like ""DS
for hakhy. in pause '>22 ; '<jV for 'ony, &c., § 84" c, and § 93 x). For >^h,
however, in Dt 32!", since no verb H*^ exists, we must read either K'ri, or
better r\fn (Samaritan XBTl), as imperfect Qal of HB'J to forget.— Analogous to
••n^ from njn, there occurs once, from niH to be, the form X^liT' for IH^ Ae will be,
Ec 1 13, but no doubt X^n is the right reading.
The full forms (without apocope of the n__ , cf. § 49 c) not infrequently t
occur after waio consecutive, especially in the ist pers, and in the later books,
e. g. nX"|Sl and I saw, twenty times, and Jos 7" in KHhihh, but never in the
Pentateuch (X^XJ fifteen times, of which three are in the Pent.) ; also in the
F 2
212 The Verh [§ 75 u-x
3rd pers. nKn»1 Ez iS^^, Jb 42^6 ge^g ; nby^ a*^'^ ^« »»««^> four times (but fe^y^l
over 200 times) ; cf. also Ju 19^ (.13101) ; iK lo^^ (nbypi) ; Dt 1" (mXXI ), and
Gn 24*'. So also occasionally for the ^ussue, cf. Gn 1*, 41'*, Jer 28^. — For the
well attested, but meaningless ^KTR Jb 6^' (doubtless caused by the following
WIW), read ^X^Jjl ye see, with Ginsburg.
fj, 4. The original * sometimes appears even before afformatives beginning
with a vowel (cf. above, h and V), especially in and before the pause, and before
the full plural ending p ^ or where for any reason an emphasis rests on the
word. Perfect H^DPI rp 57", V>6t\ Dt 32'^ cf. \p 73^ <^re ; imperative Vy3 Is 21".
Imperfect VflNI) Jb 16*2, 30" (without the pause, \p 6832) . ^i^^^s ^122*, Jb 12*,
cf. xp 77< ; \lir\^ Dt 8i» ; .// 368 : more frequently like |Vri^^ ^ 78" ; Is 1712, 21",
26", 31S, 33^ 41', \p 368, 397, 83S ; before a suffix, Jb 326.' Also in Pr 26'' vSl,
&sperf. Qal from n^'T, was perhaps originally intended, but hardly V?1, since
these full forms, though they may stand out of pause, do not begin sentences ;
V'?\ probably points to ^pl from yy^ as the right reading, since the sense
requires an intransitive verb. Cf. further, v, x, dd, gg.
X) 5. The participle active (cf. Vollers, ' Das Qatil-Partizipium,' ZA. 1903,
p. 312 ff., and on the participles of T\"b, ibid., p. 316 ff.), besides feminine
forms like TV)} Ju 20*^, &c., nt<i Pr 20^2^ j^^s also a. feminine which retains the
3rd radical 1, viz. n*3i3 ( = n3l;l) weeping,'La,i'^^; H^Oin tumultuous. Is 22* {plur.
Pr i2i) ; n>Biv spying, Pr 3127, n*"!3 /ratyM?, if> 128', plur. ni*nk the things that
are to C7me, Is 412s, With the ordinary strong inflexion 1 appears in rT'CJ? Ct i'',
but perhaps there also n'Oy was intended, unless it should be n*yb a wanderer.
For '•3X1 Is 47", liNT is to be read.— On HB'y i K 20^0 for rp]}, cf. § 116 fir, note.
— In the participle passive the 3rd radical still sometimes appears as 1 (§ 24 &),
cf. lb^ made, Jb 4125, ^3^ jj, j^za^ contracted from Wy, 11D^ ; and before
a formative ending, it even has its consonantal sound, DIIK'yn (read DlVtyjjrt)
2 K 23<; nilBT? (read "'suwoth) i S 25" KHhihh, nilDJ (read n'tuwoth) Is 3"
KHhihh. The shortening of the m in ni>N"1 Est 2^ is irregular.
tjt) 6. The defective writing is rare in such forms as HMI 2 S 1 5^' ; ''jyyi i K 8",
cf. I K 98; njb'nril Ex 2" (cf. Jer 1821, 48*, i Ch 7", Jb 17", &c.), and the
pronunciation nS^Ann Mi 7^'>, cf. n33yri Ju 52* (unless they are sing, with suff.
of the 3rd sing. fern.). Both cases are probably to be explained according
to § 20 i.
II. On Niph'al.
OC 7. Here the forms with '•__ in the ist and 2nd pers. sing, of the perfect
predominate C" only in r\''^2 Gn 24^) ; on the other hand in the ist plur,
always "i , as IJ"'!'?? 1814^ No examples of the 2nd plur. occur. — With
"I retained in pause V^i Nu 24'; once with an initial guttural ^"in3 Ct i« for
Vinj , probably arising from the ordinary strong form nikru, but the harshness
of n immediately followed by T is avoided by pronouncing the n with Hateph-
Pathah.— In the 3rd sing. fem. n)r\m Pr 271" (in pause for nin^3) 1 and D may
be transposed for euphonic reasons ; but probably we should simply read
nniB'3. — Among Niph'al forms of n"b must be classed, with Buxtorf »nd
§ 75 y-^b'] Verbs n^fj 213
others (cf. Noldeke, ZUJlfG. xxx. 185), HIKJ from mX, not Pi'lel of nW=1W ;
hence, according to § 23 d, S1N3 they are beautiful (for ^1N3^) Is 52'', Ct i'** ; but
in tp 03", where Baer requires mK3 , read niX3 with ed. Mant., Ginsb.
' -^ T~:tT' T~:i- '
8. The apocope of the imperfect causes no further changes beyond the rejection V
of the n___, e.g. %) from nbs^ ; in one verb middle guttural, however, a form
occurs with the Qames shortened to Pathah, viz. n©) (for n©^) \p 109^^, as in
verbs VJ? ; but in pause nSJI verse 14. Cf. lib. — The infinitive absolute nv33
emphasizing an infinitive construct, 2 S 6^°, is very extraordinary; probably it
is a subsequent correction of an erroneous repetition of DviH. — The infin.
consir. HNinS occurs in Ju 13", 1 S 3^1 for riNinJj ; cf. above, n. — On the
T|-: " " T,-: ' .
infinitive Niph'al with the n elided, see § 51 I. — The irregular ^pV^ Ez 36^
has probably arisen from a combination of the readings VV^ (Qa^) and ^pyn
{Niph'al). Similarly the solecism HTIllpS 1815^ might be due to a combination
of the participle fern. Niph'al (n)33, cf. H^nS nSPli ncyj) with the Eoph'al
(HTIip) ; but it is more correct, with Wellhausen, to explain the D from
a confusion with DDJ and to read, in fact, JlDNipJI (1123.
III. On Pi'el, Po'el, Pu'al, and Hithpa'el.
9. In the 1st and 2nd persons of the perfect Pi'el the second syllable in z
most of the instances has *__ on the analogy of Qal (see/), as ri'D"! 'HMp •
always so in the first plur., and before suffixes, e.g. ^3">D3 Gn 37^6, ^in^S":!
^ 44'^". The form with "•___ is found only in the ist sing. (e. g. Jo 4^^ ; Is 5*,
8" along with the form with i). On the tone of the perf. consec. Pi'el of H"?,
see § 49 k. — Hithpa'el has (besides ^__ Jer 17^^) as a rule "• (Pr 24^", i K 2^6,
Jer 50^^*). On the other hand, Pu'al always has "• e.g. T)'']^)} ^ 139^^ — ^A
jst sing, perfect Po'el ""JTlt^'lB' ( = ^TT'DIB') occurs in Is lo^^
10. The infinitive absolute Pi'el takes the form n?3 HIP (like ?^p, the more (ICl
frequent form even in the strong verb, see §520); with 0 only in ip 40^ rtp •
with 6th Hb 31^ n^iy (cf. above, n). On ii'n and *nn , infinitives absolute of the
passive of Qal, not of Po'el, see above, n. — As infinitive construct ^3n occurs in
Pi'el, Ho 6^ (only orthographically different from HSH, if the text is correct) ;
nb!) Dn 92* (on the N see rr) ; nb^-ny 2 Ch 24", 31I, for which in 2 Ki3"i9,
Ezr '9" n'^3~iy with in/in. abs. ; in Pu'al niSV ^ 132^
11. The apocopated imperfect must (according to § 20 I) lose the Dagei forte bb
of the second radical, hence llf^l and he commanded, *iyri (for niyO = <*'arre)
xf/ 141'; cf. Gn 2420 ; even in the principal pause ?3ri"i'N Pr 25'; Hithpa'il
^IK^Vl «"^ ^^ uncovered himself, Gn 9^1 ; ynnn Pr 22^* ; cf. f ^J^-''-^ With the
lengthening of Pathah to Qames, in^l and he made marks, 1821^* (but read with
Thenius f\^\''^, and instead of the meaningless SuVih) ibid, read ]^')). In
Hithpa'el ^srin~7K, in close connexion, Dt z^-^'; VnK'h Is 41^°; according to
Qimhi also iXH^, INJin f 45", Pr 233-8, 24^, i Ch 11", whilst Baer and Gins-
burg read with the best authorities ")Nn^ , I^JT"? Q^^^ ^^- KOnig, Lehrgebdude, i.
597).»— On ^inX Jb 15" (for ^^HS) cf. § 20 w ; on ?j|)3S Ex 33^, see § 27 3 ;
1 In Nu 34'"-, according to verse 10, ^Sriri ( = ^^Kriri) is intended to be
read for ^Sriri {imperfect Pi'el from nsn).
214 The Verb {Sn^cc-gj
on T]^ Ju 5", see § 69 g. Finally, on Vp"1, which is referred to Pi'el by some,
as a supposed imperative, see above, u.
CC 12. Examples of apocopated imperatives in Pi'el and Hithpa'el are : 12?; also
n^2f command thou, ?5 oi?en </ioit, ^ ii9i8-22 ; jp prepare thou, ip 61^ ; D3 for nB3
prove thou, Dn i^^ ; ^nnn /ci'Sfw thyself sick, 2 S 138 ; cf. Dt 2^^— On H?! Ju 92^,
of. § 48 I. — In if/ 137'^ ^iy rase i', is found twice instead of 'Ti'jJ (for 'arrii) for
rhythmical reasons (cf., however, ^IV*"") in the imperfect, 2 Ch 24").
f/^ 13- Examples of forms in which the Yodh is retained are the imperfects
/Vfi*iri Is 40^^, cf. verse 25 and 46'; ^D''DD^ they cover them. Ex 15^; participle
Pu'al D^n?;D Is 256 ; for T])n« Is 16^ (from HTJ) read with Margolis, TJ^H^.
IV. On Hiph'il and Hoph'al.
66 14. The 3rd sing.perfcctHiph'il sometimes h&SiS^ghol in the first syllable instead
of I (§ iiP), especially in n?2n (but perfect consecutive HpSni 2 K 24"), HN"!!!,
nxhn ; also with svffixes, e. g. nijjn i Ch 8'', lixbri Jb 16^, n"1Sni Ex 218. The
T 1 V T : V ^ -A^ : V T : v :
S^ghol also occurs in the ist sirig., e.g. ^TiKpH Mi 6'. On "•rT'S'in'j Na 3', cf.
§ 53 p. The forms with e in the second syllable (also written defectively, as
<
"•risn"! Jer 21^) are found throughout in the ist sing, (except Pr 5^^), rarely in
the 2nd sing, masc, and never in the ist plur. In the other persons they are
about equally common with i, except in the 2nd plur., where i predominates.
Before suffixes the forms with i predominate throughout ; cf., however, e in
Ex 4^2, Mi 6^, Pr 4^1. On the tone of the perf. consec. Hiph. of T\"7, see § 49 k.
In Hoph'al only '' occurs in the 2nd syllable.
^ 15. In the infinitive Hiph'il of n3T to he abundant, besides the construct fl'lS'in
we find the absolute riBIH taking the place of the common form nSIH, which
T : - V * .. . _ ^
had come to be used invariably (but Konig calls attention to its use as infini-
tive construct in Ez 2120) as an adverb, in the sense of much ; in 2 S 14^^ the
Q^ri requires n3")n for the K^thibh n''3"tn, an evident scribal error for niBIH,
Cf. Gn 41^3, 22", Dt 28«3; the pointing il'IHri Jer 42' probably arises from
regarding this form as a noun. — On niltSn Jb 17* (with Dagelf. dirimens) see
§ 20 h. — In 2 K 3^^ niSn (before N) is probably infinitive absolute, used in order
to avoid the hiatus, cf. § 113 x, and on a similar case in Qdl, see above, n. —
On the infinitives with elision of the H, cf. § 53 q.
P'fl^ 16. The shortened imperfect Hiph'il either takes no helping vowel, as flQ^ let
him enlarge, Gn 9" ; "IT he shall subdue, Is 41^ ; pK^'l and he watered, Gn 29I", &c. ;
K"]*! and he showed, 2 K 1 1* (see § 28 d) : or else has a helping vowel, as 73''
(for b^:, see § 27 r), e. g. 2 K 18" ; -\ph f 10524 ; ncril Ez 56 ■ ynsi 2 Ch 33' ';
aiKl i.e. probably n^SI Jos 24' KHhibh (naiXI Q«re).— Examples of verbs ^rs*
guttural: by^l Nu 23^, ?yN1, &c., which can be distinguished as Hiph'il from
the similar forms in Qal only by the sense. — The apocopated imperative Hiph'il
always (except in verbs |"S, e. g. !jn tDH, § 76 c) has a helping vowel, S'ghol
<
or Pathah, e. g. 1'\T\ increase thou (for harb, n3"in) ^i- 51* <^re, also Ju 20'^ ; where,
however, it cannot be explained the text stands; f)"in let alone (for B)"in
r\^'yr\ Dt 9", &c. ; ^yn (for nbyn) Ex 8^, 33" ; but for y^n xp 39l^ wiiich
could only be imperative Hiph'il of yyB' { = smear over, as in Is &°), read with
Baethgen nyK* look away. — The imperfect Hiph'il with Yodh retained occurs only
in jifjin Jb 192, from HJV Cf. u.
§^5hh-mm] Verbs r\''h 215
V. In Oenercd.
17. In Aramaic the imperfect a.nd participle of all the conjugations terminate fl't
in K or '' . The Hebrew infinitives, imperatives, and imperfects in n__, less
frequently S or ^ , may be due to imitation of these forms. On the
infinitive construct Pi'el *3n, see above, aa ; imperative Qal KIH Jb 37^ (in the sense
of fall) ; imperfect X"l^ let him look out, Gn 41^3 (but see above, p) ; T\^V\ f^e will
do, Is 64'; n"'_nri'^K Jer if; Nin-^JK co7isent thou not, Pr i^o ; nb'jJn'^N do
thou not, 2 S I s^^ (the same form in Gn 2629, jog ^9^ jgr 4oi« Q're) ; h'^m (so
Baer and Ginsburg, after cod. Hillel, &c.) I will le, Jer 31I; HK^ySI Jos 9";
nXiri Dn i", Cf. also in Niph'al Hlf^^ Lv 5'; n33ri (according' to Qimhi)
Nu 21" ; in Pi'el n^Jfl Lv i8''-^"-i7^ 2oi9, in each case H^jn iib, beside rhm
with a minor distinctive ; np)3.''. (Baer ni33^) Na i^ ; iTTTK Ez 5I2 (with Zaqtph ;
Baer niTN). The fact, however, that a great number of these forms occur in
pause and represent at the same time a jussive or voluntative (Jos 7^), suggests
the view that the Sere is used merely to increase the emphasis of the
pausal form, and at the same time to make a distinction in sound between
the jussive or voluntative and the ordinary imperfect.''- Elsewhere (Gn 262*,
Lv 5*, Jer 40^^, Dn i^' ; according to Baer also Mi 7^", Zc 9*) the pronunciation
with e is probably intended to soften the hiatus caused by a following N or
y ; cf. the analogous cases above, § 74 I-
The ending "i. appears to stand for n__ in the imperfect Qal in fiK'""'3iri1 H
and there hath she played the harlot, Jer 3^ ; perhaps, however, the 2nd sing. fem.
is intended, or it may have been introduced into the text of Jeremiah from
Ez 16^^, &c. Still more strange is it in the imperfect Hiph'il "ripri'bK Jer iS^ ;
but the Mil'el-tone probably points to npri as the correct reading (cf. Neh 13").
The ^ stands for n in the perfect Hiph'tl ''pnn he made sick, Is 53!*', which
is probably for NvPin from N7n, a secondary form of n?n ; see rr. The plur.
VDDn (Baer VDtSn) they made to melt, Jos 14^, is a purely Aramaic form.
18. In two verbs the rare conjugation Pa'lel or its reflexive (§ 55 d) occurs: kk
\inDO archers, Gn 21" (from nntO) ; but most frequently in PiriK' to bend, Pa'lel
nin^ not in use, whence reflexive HinriB'n to bow oneself, to prostrate oneself,
2nd pers. in ri''_!_ and 1st pers. in ^n""-!-, imperfect ITinriK'^, consecutive 3rd sing,
masc. inriK'JI for wayyikahw (analogous to the noun-forms, like IHC' for sahw) ;
3rd plur. V\T\P\^'^. — Instead of the aramaizing infinitive with suffix ''n^''jnriK'n3
2 K 5" read with Konig "•riiinn^'na ; in Ez 8i« Dn''inriE'D is still more certainly
a scribal error for D''inriK'tp.
19. Before suffixes in all forms ending in n , a connecting vowel is employed //
instead of the n and the connecting vowel which precedes it (§ 58/), e.g.
^3n3 Gn 24^^; in pause ""jSy i K 2^", &c., even with lesser disjunctives, \p 118^,
Pr 8^2, or with a conjunctive accent, i S 28^5 (but Baer ""jEy), Jb 30" ; cf.
§ 59 /j ; ^3y , in pause Ijiy, Is 30^' (and even when not in pause Jer 23") or
like, '^3P bt 328; ^2T"!, ^^Dlll Gn 28'; cf. also !in5y, Djy, imperfect ln5y|'_,
kiV' , Hiph'il ^:ir\, ^bv^, ^nir^.
Only very seldom does the imperat. or impf. end in ^___ before suffixes, e. g. ffllH
1 Possibly these examples (like the cases of S^ghol in pause, see n) represent
the view of a particular Masoretic school, which was intended to be con-
sistently carried out.
nn-rr
2i6 The Verb [§ 75
Dn'-KSN Dt 3226 ; S)yhy>_ tp 140" (^re ; •>yiri smite me, i K 2oS5-37 ; cf. Hb 3",
Is 38^8. Even in these examples a return to the original ending ay might
be assumed ; but perhaps they are merely due to a less correct plene writing.
In the 3rd sing. per/, fern, the older form n?3 (see i) is always used before a
suffix, e. g. ^n^3 (for inn^3) Zc 5* ; in pause >3Wy Jb 33* ; ^HNT 42^.
VI. The Relation between Verbs H"!) and H"^.
nn 20. The close relation existing between verbs N'6 and n'6 is shown in
Hebrew by the fact that the verbs of one class often borrow forms from the
other, especially in the later writers and the poets.
00 21. Thus there are forms of verbs ^"^ —
(a) Which have adopted the vowels of verbs n'6 , e. g. perfect Qal TlNlja I have
refrained, ip 119101 ; participle NCiH (Ntsh) sinning, Ec 228, 8", g^" ; cf! Is 6520 ;
apO Ec 726 . ^fj^j lending, i S 222 ; p'i'el perfect H^'g he has filled, Jer 51S* ; cf.
I K 9", Am 42 (where, however, the perfect Niph. is perhaps intended), \p 89",
143'; in^ll I heal, 2 K 221 ; cf. Jer 518 j imperfect NQ2^ Jb 392^; Niph' al perfect
nnsSw (like nrip33) it was wonderful, 2 S i2e ; Hiph'il perfect N^Sn Dt 28" ;
nriNIinn (not nriX — , cf. above, 2 S i2<i) she hid, Jos 6". On the other hand,
forms like D^KDh i S 14^^, WiOp ip 99*, INS")? Ez 478, "ijSiliOnn, according to
the correct reading, Jb 192 (cf. Gn ^i^^ HJ^riN), and !|N"1) imperative plur. masc.
from NT Jos 24", i S 122*, f 3410^ are due to the elision of the N, see § 74 «.
On nVcs^ Jer lo^ and Nlb'J ^ 13920, see § 23 ».
pp (6) Forms in H, but keeping their N'v vowels, e.g. imperfect Qal HBIK
Jer 322 ; imperative HD") heal thou, tp 60* ; Niph'al n3n3 Jer 49" (which must
evidently be a perfect; read with Ewald the infinitive absolute T\'2T\} as in
verse 23), and H^nn to hide oneself, i K 222^, cf. Jer 19II; Pi' el imperfect n?p^
feeiwHyjZZ, Jb 821.
(]C[ (c) Forms entirely of a T\"? character, e. g. perfect Qal nplf"! and when thou art
athirst, Ru 2^, cf. 2 S 3^ ; 5^53 ^Aej/ shut up, i S 610 ; cf. 2583 ; ^^Q they are full,
Ez 28I8, cf. 3928 ; infinitive icn (see above, n) to sin, Gn 20* (on DNPD see above,
§ 74 ft) ; imperative sing. fern, ""^n Is 2620 ; imperfect n!?3^ (for Np3^) fte will keep
back, Gn 23^ ; n3^Q">n they heal, Jb 5I8 ; participle HtSia Pr 12I8 ; /em. Nif' Ec 10'' ;
plur. n"*Zlbf Is 29''; participle passive ^VB'J ^32^; Niph'al nns")3 Jer 51^; JTiflJ
<7ioM hast prophesied, Jer 26' (cf. \t 139", Jb 18') ; imperfect ^D"l>1_ 2 K 222 (^infinitive
Jer 19") ; PfeZ imperfect 1ST1 Jer 8", cf. Gn si^s ; Hiph'il participle njpD Ez 8^ ;
mthpa'el n^33nn i S io« ; infinitive ni33nn I S lo". For the K^thihh nwrh
2 K 1925, Jablonski and others require as Q^re the form DlNtJ'n!' (so Is 372*) ;
the K^thibh would have to be read DIB'np , with elision of the N and retraction
of the vowel. .
TV 22. On the other hand, there are forms of verbs Ti^bi which wholly or in
part follow the analogy of verbs N"p , e. g. in their consonants KJIN he comes,
Is 21 12; N-)2 2 S 12" (fextus receptus n"12) ; ^HN^ni Ez 432^; N|iB>> Jb 8"}
KiB?^ La 4I ; NSn>1 2 Ch i6i2; njNlpn Ex iio, Lv 10"; D>N^ri i>t 28«« (cf.
Ho 11'') ; NnpJ (infin. absol. Niph'al beside ^n^pJ) 2 S i« ; JOB' 2 K 2528; NSno
§76fl-d] Verbs rfh 217
Jer 38*; t{3B^ Ec 8^ : in their vowels, «nK Jer 322 ; mp"» Dn 10": n^JSn
1 K 17" : in both, Nlp^ Gn 49^ ; cf. 42*, Is 51" ; h\ihn 2821" Q're; NiT-b
2 Ch 26i« (cf. D^iNIICn INT'I 2 S ii^* KHhthh) ; nN"lb iariiciple fern. Qal) Zp 3I ;
K^Q: Ho 13" ; CN^DO La 42 —For T\Mhh (so Baer, Ez i7«, cf. 318), which can
only be intended for DiXIB participle fern. plur. from N1S = ms , read ni"lN3
branches, according to Ez 31'^, &c.
§ 76. Verbs Doubly Weak.
1. In a tolerably large number of verbs two radicals are weak a
letters, and are consequently affected by one or other of the anomalies
already described. In cases where two anomalies might occur, usage
must teach whether one, or both, or neither of them, takes effect.
Thus e.g. from Tl3 to flee, the imperfect is liT in Na 3'' and IT in Gn 31*0
(on the analogy of verbs }"S) ; Hiph'il *T3n (like a verb ]}"]!), but the imperfect
Hoph'al again IT (as |"B).
2. The following are examples of difficult forms, which are derived 0
from doubly weak verbs :
(a) Verbs f'S and ii"b (cf. § 66 and § 74), e.g. SB'S to bear, imperative NB'
(if/ 10^2 xb'J, of which nD3 if/ 4' is probably only an orthographic variation) ;
infinitive tonstruct riNB* (for DKB' ; see the analogous noun-formations in § 93 t),
also Nfc'3 Is 1", 18S ;* Gn 4" KiiJ'3 ; ip 89" kVB' (perhaps only a scribal error) ;
after the prefix p always riNyp (otherwise the contracted form only occurs in
^n|^ Jb 41", with rejection of the N) ; imperfect WiS'n for HJNti'n Ru 1";
wholly irregular are n3''Nt5'Jjl Ez 23*^ (so Baer after Qimhi ; textus receptus, and
also the Mantua ed., and Ginsburg, n^S^'ri) and DKB'i 2 S 19*' as infinitive
absolute Niph'al (on the analogy of the infinitive construct Qal ?) ; but most probably
Kl?3 is to be read, with Driver.
(6) Verbs |"S and T\"b (cf. § 66 and § 75), as nD3 to bow, to incline, nD3 to C
smite. Hence imperfect Qal HtS^, apocopated ti*T (Gn 2625 "13*1) and he bowed;
1*1 (so, probably, also Is 63' for VX) 2 K 9^^ and he sprinkled (from nT3) ; perfect
Eiph'il n3n he smote, imperfect nS^ , apocopated TJ^ TJ*1 (even with Athnah 2 K 1 5^^ ;
but also ten times n3^J, Ijai i)t 2^3; so also t*1 Lv 8"so. t3ri-^{< ^ 1414 (cf.
Jb 23II) ; imperative nSH, apocopated Tjn smite thou (like tSn incline, with H^n),
infinitive ni3n , participle DSD ; Hoph'al iisn , participle HSp,
(c) Verbs N^a and n"b (cf. § 68 and § 75), as n3N to be willing, HSN to bafce, t?
nm to come. E. g. imperfect Qal n3N\ HSK', pZwr. IbJ?"" ; Nn»1 (cf. § 68 h) Dt 3321
for nriN*1 ( = nriX*1) ; imperfect apocopated nN*1 Is 412"* for riN*1 ; imperative VDVt
Is 21", 569-12 (cf.' ^BX bake ye, Ex i62S) for ^HK, VnN (§ 23 A ; § 75 «) ; Hiph'il
< < < ' ' L f
l)er/eciVnn forVHXn (VnXH) Is 21I*; imperfect apocopated pK'l and /le adjured,
I S 14**, properly nbN^_ (H^N^) from n^N, whence HPN^, and, with the obscuring
to 0, npN'' ; instead of the simple apocope (PN*1) the ^< which had already become
2i8 The Verb [§76e-i
quiescent, is made audible again by the helping S^ghol (unless perhaps there
is a confusion with the imperfect consecutive Hiph'il of pH'').
e (d) Verbs >"Q and H"^ (cf. § 69, § 70, and § 74), as NX^ to go forth, imperative
< ' T T
Nlf go forth, with n paragogic ilKiT Ju 9^^ in principal pause for nN2f ; 2nd/em.
plur. njKi* Ct 3" ; infinitive DNV ; Hiph'il X''Jfin to bring forth.— i^y to fear,
imperfect ^<")''^ and N"l^*1 (or Nl^l), imperative iO) ] imperfect Niph'al it.'}}'] f 130*,
participle N"li3.
4* (e) Verbs ^"D and 7\"h (cf. § 69, § 70, and § 75), e. g. HT to throw, Hiph'il to
confess, to pi-aise, and HT to throw (both properly verbs V'Q), and HE!'' to be
beautiful. Infinitive IT)^, Oil^. > imperative iTl'' ; imperfect consecutive Sji'l Ez 31''
(cf. also ""S^ril 16^^) ; with suffixes J2'V'3\ we have shot at them (from Hl^) Nu 21^" ;
perhaps, however, it should be read with the LXX D3"'31 and their race (also in
the very corrupt passage ^ 74* D3"'3 is probably a substantive, and not the
imperfect Qal with suffix from n3'*) ; Pi' el VlW for ^^^1 (§69 u). Hiph'il iMSn >
min ; infinitive HiST (as infinitive absolute 2 Ch j') ; imperfect ITli'', cf. 13ri"7S
Jer 22^ ; apocopated "li'1 2 K 13'''.
1^ (/) Verbs V'S? and N'6, particularly Ki3 fo cowe. Perfect X3, riK|, nK|l or
nSIl (Gn 168, 2 S 143, Mi 4"; cf. § 75 m), once m for ^3X3 i S 25^ ; for INS
Jer 27^', which is apparently the perfect, read ^N3V In the imperfect Qal the
separating vowel occurs (n^NDri instead of the more common n3X3n, cf. also
JN3ri Gn 30^8) only in Jer 9I6, if^ 45I6, and i S lo^ K'thibh.
Jl For nxnril i S 253* g«re (the KHhibh "TlNnni evidently combines the two
readings nxni and ""Nbril ; cf. Nestle, ZAW, xiv. 319), read '•NDni ; on the
impossible forms Dt 33'^ and Jb 22*1 cf. § 48 ci. — In the perfect Hiph'il N*3n
riN3n and (only before a suffix) riK""!!!!! ; the latter form is also certainly in-
tended in Nu 14^^ where the Masora requires ''nX''3n"!, cf. 2 K92, 1925, Is 4323,
Jer 25I3, Ct 3^ Before suffixes the e of the first syllable in the 3rd sing, always
becomes /fa^ep;t-SV*o') e-g- ^^^^H, *3X''Iin; elsewhere in variably Hafep/i-Pa</jaA,
e.g. ^3nX3n or ^JJlk^rin. On the other hand, e is retained in the secondary
tone in the perfect consecutive when without suflBxes, e.g. riN^ni. Cf. more-
over, inXpni (iriNpnl in Opitlus and Hahn is altogether incorrect), Pr 25I6,
from N''i? ; but Vp spue ye, Jer 25*'' (perhaps only a mistake for 1N''p), is not to
be referred to ^{''p but to a secondary stem iT'p. In the imperfect Xpni is found
once, Lv iS^^, besides Np^. (analogous to N3jV).— On *3N (for N''3N), ^3D '•r,
see § 74 k.
I (gr) The form ^*n to live, in the perfect Qal, besides the ordinary development
to n^n (/em. nn^n), is also treated as a verb V"]}, and then becomes ""n in
the 3rd pers. perfect, in pause TI, and with wdw consecutive ^Pll Gn 3^2, and fre-
quently. In Lv 2583 the contracted form "ifll is perhaps st. constr. of >n life, but
in any case read ^Hl perfect consecutive as in verse ^^. The form H^ni occurs in
~ T "^ * T T T
Ex i^fi in pause for n'ni (3rd/ew.) with Dages omitted in the ^ on account of
the pausal lengthening of a to a.
§§ 77 «-/. 78 a] Relation of Weak Verbs 219
§ 77. Relation of the Weak Verbs to one another.
The close relation which exists between some classes of the weak a
verbs (e. g. between i"d and ^"s, N"^ and r\"b, V^y and Vy, y'^y and n"^)
appears not only in their similarity or identity of inflexion, or their
mutual interchange of certain forms, but especially from the fact that
frequently the same root {radix hilittera, see § 30 g) recurs in various
weak stems of similar meaning. The meaning accordingly is inherent
in the two constant root-consonants, while the third consonant, which
is weak (and the particular class of weak verbs with it), does not
establish any difference in the meaning. Thus from the root ^1 there
occur with the same meaning ^3'1 , 1\\^ , NO*! to strike, to crush ; and
from the root 13 there are "113, TlJ, nnj tojiee.
In this manner the following classes are related in form and u
meaning :
1. Verbs VJJ and y"y in which the first and third consonants are the same
in both, as being essential to the meaning ; e. g. 'i]1JD and 'iQ'Q to become poor ;
C^D and tJ'K'O to feel ; *!« and TlJ to flee.
2. Verbs ""'Q and |"Q ; e. g. ZT and 2X3 to place, K'pj and K'PJ {ydqos) to lay C
snares. Moreover, stems belonging to the classes mentioned in i (especially
Vy) are frequently related also to verbs '»"D and {"S, e. g. "1^2 and *lh^ to fear ;
y\D and 313'' to be good ; nQ3 and fflQ to blow ; }*S3 and J>?9 to dash to pieces.
Verbs N'^Q are less frequently connected with these classes, e. g. ti'lN and
m"^ to thresh, &c.
3. Verbs N"!? and iTv (in which the first two consonants form the real U
body of the stem) are sometimes related to each other, and sometimes to the
above classes. To each other, in N^'H and nS"! to crush, N"lp and mp to meet
' TT TT 'TT TT
(of. § 75 nn) ; to verbs of the other classes, in HSD and ^^D to suck, nn"1 and H^
to thrust, &c.
4. Verbs y"y and n"b, on which cf. Grimm, Journal ofBiU. Lit., 1903, p. 196 ; e
e. g. n3X and J3N to sigh, HOT and DJD'H to be quiet, H^n and pPI to incline, np3
"tt '-T TT " T TT >-T TT
and ^^3 to end, H^p and ^bi? to despise, DJB' and ajB' to eir, nriB' and PiriB' to
bend doicn, HDB' and DDB' to plunder.
5. Verbs V'y and n"y ^; e.g. ^^O and ^no (New Hebrew ; in 0. T. only i?^nO f
Is i22) to circumcise, "11» and IHO to exchange, "113 (in iTliaO a light) and -iri3 to
shine ; cf. also D''On^ secret arts, Ex 7" with t37 secret, from C17.
§ 78. Verba Defectiva.
It often happens, when two kindred weak verbs are in use with a
the same meaning, that both are defective, i. e. do not occur in all the
forms. Since, however, those tenses and forms which are not in use
in the one verb are generally supplied by the other, they mutually
complete one another, and thus form together, as it were, an entire
220 The Verb [§78&, c
verb, as in Greek tpxafxai, aor. rjXOov, fut. €X€vo-o/i,ai, and in Latin /ero,
tuli, latum, ferre, &c., but with this difference, that in Hebrew the
roots of these verbs are almost always closely related.
h The most common verbs of this kind are —
tra to he ashamed. Eiph'il K'nn (inferred from niB'^^n), but also K'''nn,
E'^Din, as if from {^3% on the analogy of verbs V'Q ; also in Is 30' the Cfre
requires B'^nn, where the KHhthh has B'''N3n from B'XS.
niD to be good. Perfect 3iD ; but imperfect 2^'^) and Eiph'il 2''^!''^ from 30^
(but cf. nS'L^n 2 K iqSO).
")';"• to be afraid. Imperfect I^J"" (from 1^3).
yp'^ to awake, only in the imperf, Y^y*) ; for the perfect, the Eiph'il Y^pi^ is used
(from pp).
J^S3 fo break in pieces. Imperfect ^1D^ (from y^B). Imperative p3. Niph'al
pSJ / pre; J'QJ (from ^23). PoZei ^;fi3 (from pE3). i?ey?exjce ^Jfisnn . Htp;i'ti
}>''Dn. Also ^q;:q Jb 16".
3^3 (QaZ in post-biblical Hebrew, in Aramaic and Arabic) to place, whence
(possibly) Niph'al 3X3 and Eiph'il 3^irn (see above, § 71) ; but Eithpa'el 35f'rin.
nnC' to drink, used in Qal ; but in Eiph. T\\>^7^ to give to drink, from a Qal npK'
which is not used in Hebrew.
On '?|2n ('!]?'') to go, see above, § 69 x.
C Rem. I, To the same category belong also, to a certain extent, those cases
where the tenses or moods not in use in one conjugation, are supplied by forms
having the same meaning in other conjugations of the same verb. Thus :
f)D^ to add. The infinitive (but cf. § 69 h, note) and imperfect, unused in Qal,
are supplied by the Eiph'il f)"'Din ^''DV (on f)DV as imperfect indicative, see
§ 109 d, cf. also § 109 i).
7^3 to stumble. Perfect from Qal, imperfect from Niph'al.
B'jJ to approach, unused in perf. Qal, instead of which Niph'al K'33 is used ;
but imperfect E'J^, imperative ^3, and infinitive DK'E from Qal only are in use.
nn3 to lead. Perfect usually nn3 in Qal, so imperative iinS, but imperfect and
infinitive always in Eiph'il.
"]n3 to be poured out. Perfect Niph'al ^F\i with imperfect Qal Tjn^, but the perfect
Qal and imperfect Niph'al are not in use.
2. The early grammarians often speak of mixed forms {formae mixtae), i. e.
forms which unite the supposed character and meaning of two different
tenses, genders, or conjugations. Most of the examples adduced are at
once set aside by accurate grammatical analysis ; some others appear to have
arisen from misapprehension and inaccuracy, especially from erroneous views
of unusual plene forms. Others, again, are either merely wrong readings or
represent an intentional conflation of two different readings.
CHAPTER III
THE NOUN
§ 79. General Vieiu.
For the literature, see De Lagarde, Uebersicht uber die im Aram., Arab, vnd
Hebr. iibliche Bildung der Nomina, GOttingen, 1889 ; Index and Additions, 189 1 ;
J. Barth, Die Nomincdbildung in den semitischen Sprachen, first half, Simple nouns,
Leipzig, 1889 ; second half, Nouns with external additions, 1891; second edition,
with indices of words and subjects, 1894; E. K5nig, Historisch-kritisches Lehr-
gebdude, dec, ii. i, Leipzig, 1895, see above, § 3/. — Of these three important
works the first two especially have given rise to various articles. In support
of De Lagarde : Hommel in ZDMO. xliv, p. 535 flf. (against De Lagarde and
Hommel : Barth, ibid., p. 679 ff.), and dealing with the Index, ZDMG. xlv,
p. 340 S. — Against Barth (though with many points of agreement) : Philippi
in the Zeitschrift fiXr Volkerpsychologie, 1890, p, 344 ff. (answered by Barth in
ZDMG. xliv, p. 692 fif.), and ZDMG. xlvi, p. 149 ff. (answered again by Barth,
ibid., xlviii, p. 10 ff.), also in the Beitrage zur Assyriologie, ii (1892), p. 359 ff. ' Die
semitische Verbal- und Nominalbildung,' and lastly, in ZDMG. xlix, p. 187 ff. —
Cf. also A. Miiller, ' Semitische Nomina. Bemerkungen zu de Lagarde und
Barth,' ZDMG. xlv, p. 221 ff. — The main points at issue in the works of De
Lagarde and Barth are indicated below, § 83 d. — Brockelmann, Semit. Sprach-
tciss., p. 104 ff. ; Grundriss, p. 329 ff.
1. Since, according to § 30 a, most word-stems are developed into CI
verbal stems as well as into nouu-stems, it has become customary
(especially in the Lexicon) to refer the noun to the most simple
ground-form of the verbal formation, viz. the 3rd j)ers. sing, perfect
Qal, and, as it were, to derive it from that form. This is usual, not
only in those noun-stems which can be directly connected with
a corresponding verbal stem (^Nomina verbalia or derivativa, § 83 fF.),
but also with Nomina primitiva, i. e. those of which no verbal stem
is now found in Hebrew (see § 82), as well as finally with Nomina
denominativa, which have evidently been derived from other nouns
(§ 86).
The adjective agrees in form entirely with the substantive. On the forma-
tion of adjectival ideas by giving to abstracts a concrete sense, see § 83 c.
2. A special inflexion of the noun to express the various cases does b
not exist in Hebrew ; only a few ancient and almost extinct traces of
case-endings have survived (§ 90). The syntactical relation of a noun
can therefore in general only be inferred from its position in the
sentence, or from its being joined to prepositions. In either case,
the form of the noun undergoes no change (except for the constrxict
222 The Noun [§ 80 a-c
state, § 89), and the representation of case-relations belongs therefore
almost exclusively to the syntax (§117 ff.)- The comparative and
superlative of adjectives also can be expressed only by a syntactical
combination (§ 133). On the other hand, sevei'al changes in the
forms of nouns are occasioned by the additions of the plural, dual, and
feminine terminations, as well as of the pronominal suffixes, and also
by the close connexion of two nouns, by means of the construct state}
§ 80. The Indication of Gender in Nouns.
Brockelmann, Grundriss, p. 404 If. ; ' Ueber die Femininendung at, ah, a ' in
Semit. Sprachwiss., p. 106 f.; Grundriss, pp. 105, 405 ff. ; 'Die Femininendung
rim Semit.' (Sitzung d. orient. -sprachwiss. Sektion d. schlesischen Gesellschaft, Feb. 26,
1903) ; against him J. Barth, ZDMG. 1903, p. 628 ff. ; Brockelmann's reply,
ibid., p. 795 ff. ; and Barth again, ibid., p. 798 ff.
a 1. Tlie Hebrew, like all Semitic languages, recognizes only two
genders in the noun, a masculine and a feminine. Inanimate objects
and abstract ideas, which other languages sometimes indicate by the
neuter, are regarded in Hebrew either as masculine or feminine, more
often the latter (see the Syntax, § 1225-).
0 2. The masculine, as being the more common and important gender,
has no special indication.
Feminine nouns are also without an indication of gender when the
meaning of the word naturally denotes a feminine, as Di? mother, priN
a she-ass, T^ a she-goat, PHT an ewe (cf. § 122 6). As a rule, however,
the feminine had originally the ending ri__, as in the 3rd sing, perfect
of verbs (§44 a). This n_-, however, is regularly retained in Hebrew
only in close connexion with a following genitive or suffix (cf. §896
and § 910), except where the form has arisen through the addition of
a simple 0^ (see below, d). Otherwise, the feminine ending of the
independent form (the absolute state, § 89 a) is —
C (a) Most commonly a tone-bearing n__, e. g. D^D equus, HD^D equa.
Of nouns ending in ^-, like ''1?V> the feminine (by § 24 h) is ^p.?V>
cf. § 86 h. As in the 3rd sing. fern, perfect (^^IpP, &c.), this n__ seems
to have arisen by the rejection of the final n, and the lengthening of
the d in the open syllable, whereupon the n was added as an ortho-
graphic indication of the final long vowel : cf. the exactly similar
origin of such forms as <<^l for v?, § 75 c. It must, however, be
^ To speak of these changes as a declension of the Hebrew noun, as is usually
done, is accordingly incorrect.
2 In Mai i" nriB'D (so e.g. ed. Mant.) would stand for DnnW, the ptcp.
fem. Hoph'al ; but firiB'D (so Baer and Ginsb.) is also supported by good
authority.
§8od-<7] The Indication of Gender in Nouns 223
noticed that in Arabic (see m and note) the pausal formjof a< is ah, of
which a trace raay be preserved in the Hebrew n.-_.
(6) Simple n with nouns ending in a vowel, e. g. ''Iin^ Jew, JT'lin^. d
Jewess. The same ending n is very frequently added to stems ending
in a consonant, but only (except before suffixes) by means of a helping
vowel, which, as a rule, is S^ghol, but after gutturals Pathah, e. g. ^^?,
fern. n^;5p, hilling ; before suffixes, e.g. ''J^^^'p, according to the rule
given in § 69 c, cf. also § 84" s\ Vlio an acquaintance, f em. nyiio.
The forms which arise in this way follow in every respect the analogy
of the segholate forms (§ 94/). The forms which have been developed
by means of a helping vowel are retained even in the connective form
{construct state) ; except P^i^''] (for r\-fj\ which is used elsewhere)
Gn 16", Ju 13"; cf. Jer 22^^ and 51" Qfre, also ni^D i K i'\ par-
ticiple fern. Ft el, properly m«rara« = nnnK'»; also ^J?y?0 {participle
fem. Pi'el with suffix) arises from the form JpV?^ which was developed
into rinpo.
Rem. I. The fem. form in n is in general less frequent, and occurs e
almost exclusively when the form in n_. is also in use. It is only in the
participles and infinitives that it is the commoner, e. g. n?hp more common
than n^Dp m^ than r\Hb.
2. Rarer feminine endings are— (a) T)-^ with the tone, e. g. np"l3 emerald, J
Ez 28" (also npnn Ex 28") ; nVDB' « company, 2 K 9", unless the reading is
wrong ; more frequently in proper names, especially of places among the
Canaanites or Phoenicians (in whose language n__ was the usual fem. ending,
§ 2 d) and other neighbouring tribes,^ e. g. nSlji* Zarephath, ny33 Gibeath, nyp
Kiriath, D^^SI Greek Ailana in Idumea ; n^nX Gn 26^" : on the reading D]^^
cf. g. Cf., moreover, 03^23 i// 61I (prob. originally n'y^:) ; n»n LXX ni'H) 74"'"^;
nj^Q La 2^* ; [JIBT much, in 1// 651", 120®, 123*, 129^*, is a form borrowed from
the Aramaic (Syriac rahbaih) in which the original t of the/ew. is often retained
to form adverbs, see Wright, Comparative Grammar, p. 135.]
(6) n , which likewise occurs in some names of places, e.g. D^yB, T\\>bT\ xr
as well as in the wasc. proper name DvU 1S17*, &c. (in 17^', and 21'", ed. Mant.
lias rivU), and m the/em. proper name nyClJ'; otherwise, almost only in poetry,
viz. mO] Ex 1 5^ Is 1 2*, ^ 1 1 8^* (really for ^DIDI my song ; the absorption of the i,
however, can scarcely have ' taken place in the Aramaic manner', as suggested
by Duhm on Is 1 2^, nor is it due merely to the following Yodh, but is intended
'to facilitate the absorption of H"" ; so Geiger, Urschri/t, p. 277 f.) ; n?nj
heritage, if/ 16* (either again for TlpHJ my heritage, or for nn?n3_, cf. § 90 g, as
probably also Hliy help, \p 60", 108'^ for nmiV). These forms are possibly
1 In the list of Palestinian towns taken by Pharaoh Shoshenq, the feminine
town-names all end in t. Cf. also the Mesa' inscription, lino 3, nXT nJD3n
this high place; line 26, n^DDn the highway [see also Driver, Tenses, § 181, note'].
224 The Noun [§ 80 h-m
survivals from a period when even final voveels were not supported by a
vowel-letter. Cf. also ni3 fecunda (« fruitful tree) Gn 49^^^ ; mn'' abundance,
Jer 4S'* (before JJ ; but in Is 15'' '"TJO^) ; ^I^K' sleep (for nJB') tp 132*; and
(unless the P is radical) in prose flKp pelican (vehich reading is also preferable,
in Is 34II, jjo jijg form JlKp), also niHO the morrow, but in construct state always
niriDO.^ — n?nri Jer 45^5 Q''re is no doubt intended to indicate the reading
••ri^nri, parallel to i'K'VB'O ; cf, above, on n"JO), &c.
h (c) N , the Aramaic orthography for n , chiefly in the later writers;
NIT loathing, Nu ii™; NSH a terror-, Is 19" ; N3K' sZeep, ^ 127^; N*3p a lioness,
Ez 19* (unless N''!!? is intended) ; XllfllO a mark. La ^^^ ; cf. also NB'''I threshing
(participle Qal from {^^1) Jer 50^^ ; N"10 bitter, Ru i^". On the other hand,
according to the western Masora, nn^p baldness is to be read in Ez 2j'^ ; see
Baer on the passage.
i (d) n__, an obtuse form of n (§27 m), only in iTll^ri for iTI^P Is 59
(unless it is again a forma mixta combining the active ptcp. masc. iTli^n and the
passive ptcp. fern, mip) ; cf. n3? for n3? Zc 5* ; npN i K 2^^*^ (§ 90 i, and
§ 48 d).
k (e) n 5_ without the tone, e.g. noni Dt 14" [Lv ii^s On"!] ; n^p IISPl
an oven heated, Ho 7^ ; cf. Ez. 40", 2 K 15^29^ igw. In all these examples the
usual tone-bearing n is perhaps intended, but the Punctuators, who con-
sidered the feminine ending inappropriate, produced a kind of locative form
(see § 90 c) by the retraction of the tone, [In 2 K 16^*, Is 24^^, Ez 21'^ (note
in each case the following n), and in Jb 42^', Ho 7*, the text is probably in
error.]
/ (/) ■•___ as an old feminine termination, preserved also in Syriac (ai ; see
examples in Noldeke's Syrische Gram , § 83^ in Arabic and (contracted to e) in
Ethiopic, very probably occurs in the proper name '•"I'ti' Sarai, cf. Noldeke,
ZBMG. xl. 183, and xlii. 484; also iTl'K'y ten {fern.) undoubtedly arises
from an original 'esray ; so Wright, Comparative Grammar, p, 138; KOnig, Lehr-
gebdude, ii. 427.
ffl 3, It is wholly incorrect to regard the ^oweZ-ending H ^ as the original
termination of the feminine, and the consonantal ending fl as derived from
it. The Ethiopic still has the n throughout, so too the Assyrian (ai, it) ; in
Phoenician also the feminines end for the most part in n, which is pronounced
at in the words found in Greek and Latin authors ; less frequently in N (see
Gesenius, Monumm. Phoen., pp. 439, 440; Schroder, Phon. Spraclie, p. 169 ff.).
The ancient Arabic has the obtuse ending (ah) almost exclusively in pause ;
in modern Arabic the relation between the two endings is very much as in
Hebrew.
1 In I S 20^^ also, where the Masora (see Baer on Jos 5^1) for some unknown
reason requires JTinOD, read with ed. Mant., Jablonski, Opitius, and Ginsburg,
^ In this ending the H h can only be considered consonantal in the sense
that the n was originally aspirated, and afterwards * the mute n was dropped
before h, just as the old Persian mithra became in modern Persian mihr' ; so
Socin, who also points to the Arabic pausal form in ah, and observes that
among some of the modern Beduin an h is still heard as a fem. ending, cf,
Socin, Biwan aus Centralarabien, iii, 98, ed. by H. Stumme, Lpz. 1901. In
Hebrew this consonantal termination was entirely abandoned, at any rate in
later times.
§§ 8r a-d, 82] Derivation of Nouns 225
§ 81. DeHvation of Nouns.
Brockelmann, Grundriss, p. 329 ff.
Nouns are by their derivation either jynmitive, i. e. cannot be a
refened to any verbal stem at present extant (see § 82), such as
"2^ father, DK mother (but see both words in the Lexicon; according
to Stade and others 3N, DX, &c., are children's words and terms of
endearment, and so really primitive nouns), or derivative, i. e. either
Derivativa verhalia (§§ 83-5), e.g. D"J high, n»n high 2)lace, Ci"10
height, from D^"i to be high, or less frequently Derivativa denominaliva
(§ 86), e. g. rii73"jP the place at the feet, from ?y\foot.
Rem. I. The earlier grammarians consider the verb alone as stem, and q
therefore all nouns as verbals, dividing them into (a) Formae nudae, i.e. such
as have only the three (or two) radicals, and (6) Formae auciae, such as have
formative letters or syllables added at the beginning or end, e. g. ny^'D'O,
ni3|5p. The formative letters used for this purpose are "I '• fl 3 D N H
(Vriapxn)^! and the treatment of nouns formerly followed this order.
According to the view of roots and stems presented in § 30 d, nouns (other C
than denominatives) are derived not from the verbal stem, but either from the
(abstract) root or from the still undefined stem. In the following pages,
however, the arrangement according to the verbal stem is retained as being
simpler for the beginner. Cf. § 79 a.
2. Compound nouns as appellatives are very rare in Hebrew, e. g. PyvSl (I
worthlessness, baseness. On the other hand, they very frequently occur as
proper names, e.g. bsH^a {man of God), D'^p^in^ {Yahwe raises up), ]r\iS'^'] {Yahwe
gave), &c.*
§ 82. Primitive Nouns.
The number of primitive nouns in the sense used in § 81 is small,
since nouns, which in other languages are represented as independent
noun-stems, can easily be traced back in Hebrew to the verbal idea,
e.g. names of animals and natural objects, as "^^V^ he-goat (prop.
shaggy, from ">y?'), nijjb barley (prop, prickly, also from lyV). ^T^^
stork (prop. ;>7a, sc. avis), 3nT gold (from 3nT=3n^ to shine, to be
yellow). Thus there remain only a few nouns, e. g. several names of
members of the body in men or beasts, to which a corresponding
verbal stem cannot be assigned at all, or at any rate only indirectly
< <
(from other Semitic dialects), as Hi^ horn, I^y eye.
^ From this vox memorialis the nomina aucta are also called by the older
grammarians nomina heemantica.
* G. Rammelt (jjber die zusammengesetsten Nomina im Hebr., Halle, 1883, and
Leipzig, 1884) recognizes as appellatives only y'l'IBif (cf. below, § 85 w) and
niOpX (the latter certainly incorrectly [see, however, Noldeke, ZATW. 1897,
p. 183 ff.]). In p. 8 ff. the author gives a list of 'logical compounds', i. e.
new terms formed by composition with the negatives K?, y3, Vr"?.
COWLET Q
226 The Noun [§83a-rf
§ 83. Verbal Nouns in General.
a 1. In Hebrew, as in Greek and Latin, the verbal nouns are
connected in form and meaning primarily with certain forms of
the verb, especially the participles and infinitives, which are them-
selves, even in their ordinary form, frequently used precisely like
nouns, e. g. ^."l^* eozemy, riy^l to know, knowledge. Still oftener, however,
certain forms of the infinitive and participle, which are seldom or
never found as such in the strong verb, though in use in the weak
verb and in the kindred dialects, came to be commonly used for
the verbal noun; e.g. the participial form ?|?ij, the infinitives of the
(Aramaic) form ?t?ipp (as a noun also ^^P^), further ro'^p, '"l^^^,
nbpi^, nptpp (§ 45 d), &c. Others (as the Arabic shows) are properly
intensive forms of the participle.
If 2. As regards their meaning, it follows from the nature of the
case that nouns which have the form of the infinitive regularly denote
the action or state, with other closely related ideas, and are therefore
mostly abstract ; while the participial nouns, on the contrary, denote
for the most part the subject of the action or state, and are therefore
concrete. Moreover, it is to be noticed, that a particular meaning
is attached to many of the special forms of derivative nouns, although
it does not appear equally in them all.
C Hem. It need not appear strange, when we consider the analogy of other
languages, that a noun which in form is properly abs^rac^ afterwards acquired
a concrete sense, and vice versa. So in English, we say his acquaintance, for
the persons with whom he is acquainted; the Godhead for God himself; in
Hebrew y"liD acquaintance and aw acquaintance.
^ The inner connexion in thought between Semitic noun-forms and the
corresponding verbal forms is investigated in the works of De Lagarde and
Earth (see the titles at the head of § 79) on very different lines, but with
many points of agreement. De Lagarde starts from the fact that language
consists of sentences. A sentence which consists of only one word is called
a verb, and anything which serves as a complement to it is a noun. The
oldest form of the sentence is the imperative. Closely related to it are throe
kinds of sentences of the nature of verbal forms, differing according as the
property of the particular object of sense is to be represented as invariable
(form qatula). or as liable to change (form qatila), or, finally, as a circumstance
which takes place before our eyes (form qatala). Like the imperative, these
three forms of sentences have also been transformed into nouns, by means of
certain phonetic changes, — especially by the omission of the final vowels
and the addition of different terminations to the last consonant of the stem.
But just as the forms of the verbal sentence undergo numerous modifications
(in the tenses, moods, and conjugations), so also do tlie nouns, sometimes
by assimilation of the unessential to the characteristic vowel {qutul, qitil^,
sometimes by the lengthening of the characteristic vowel (qatHl, qatil, qatdl),
or else througli the displacement of the accent and the consequent reduction
of the noun to a monosyllabic form {qatl, qull, qitl), or, finally, by their being
formed from the derived stems (or conjugations), e.g. qaital, qattdl ; qi.'.il,
qitldl, &c. Further modifications arise from the use of the various imperfect
§ 84" a] Verbal Nouns in General 227
and infinitive forms, and also from the employment of the prefix m. Lastly,
denominalia are formed from deverbalia by appending certain suffixes.
De Lagarde does not, however, claim to be able to show in the case of each
particular noun the sense it conveyed in primitive times ; the origin of
a number of nouns can now no longer be detected. In those, however,
which are clearly derived from verbs, the original meaning is chiefly deter-
mined by the characteristic vowel.
Earth's system is based on the thesis that ' all Semitic nouns, adjectives,
and participles are derived from either the perfect or the imperfect stem '.
Thus, e. g. ^itOp is the infinitive of the perfect stem, pbp the infinitive of the
imperfect stem, 2^^ infinitive of DStJ'^ &c. In dissyllabic noun-forms the
second vowel is always alone characteristic and essential, the first vowel
unessential, and therefore variable. Further modifications of the simple
form are effected by strengthening (sharpening) the second or third conso-
nant, by lengthening the characteristic vowel (instead of which, however,
the feminine termination may also be used), or by 'metaplasm', i. e. by the
use of noun-forms derived from one of the two intransitive stems for the other,
e. g. qutl for qitl, and vice versa.
In nouns of the perfect stem, the vowels i and u indicate intransitive
formations, the vowel a a transitive sense. In nouns of the imperfect stem
on the contrary, u and i, being characteristic vowels, indicate a transitive
and a an intransitive sense : for yaqtulu is imperfect of the transitive perfect
qaiala, and yaqtaJu imperfect of the intransitive perfects qatila and qalula, &c.
This explains how nouns, apparently identical in form, may yet in sense
belong to different classes : a 5M«-form from a w-imperfect has a transitive
meaning, but the same form from a t<-perfect has an intransitive meaning.
This double system of perfect and imperfect forms runs through the vvhole
scheme of noun-formation, not only the forms connected with the conjuga-
tions, but also the forms with prefixes and suffixes.
Against the whole theory it has been urged that it postulates for the
development of the language a much too abstract mechanism, and further,
that the meanings of words as we find them may in many cases be due to
a modification of the original sense. But though many of the details (e.g.
the alleged unessential character of the vowel of the first syllable) remain
doubtful, yet the agreement between the characteristic vowel of certain noun
formations and that of the perfect or imperfect stem, is supported by such
a number of incontestable instances, that there can be no doubt as to a
systematic, intimate connexion between the two. At the same time it must
be admitted that De Lagarde has put forward many important and suggestive
points, and both scholars agree iu laying stress on one characteristic vowel as
indicative of the meaning.
§ 84'*. Nouns derived from the Simple Stem.
Pfeliminary remark. — From the statement made above, § 83 d, it follows that tt
an external similarity between forms is no proof of their similar origin, and,
vice versa, external difference does not exclude the possibility of their being
closely related both in origin and meaning.
I. Nouns with One Vowel, originally Short.
R. Rfizicka, 'Beitrage zur Erklarung der nomina segolata,* in Sitz.-ber. d.
bohmischen Ges. d. Wiss., Prag, 1904.
1. Nouns with one of the three short vowels after the first radical : present
ground-form qdtl, qitl, qHtl.
The supposition of monosyllahic ground-forms appeared to be required by
the character of forms now existing in Hebrew, as well as in Arabic, &c.
But there are strong reasons for believing that at least a large proportion of
these forms go back to original dissyllabic bases with a short vowel in each
syllable. When formative additions were made, the vowel of the 2nd syllable
<J 2
228 2'he Noun [§84" a
was dropped, i.e. before case-endings in Assyrian and early Arabic, and
before pronominal suffixes in Hebrew. From the forms thus produced, the
bases qatl, qiil, qutl have been assumed, although they never appear in Hebrew
except in the singular and then in connexion with suffixes.
In support of this view of a large number of original dissyllabic bases, we
must not, however, appeal to the S«gh6l or Pathah under the 2nd consonant
of the existing developed forms, "IDD, VIT, &c. These are in no sense
survivals or modifications of an original full vowel in the 2nd syllable, but
are mere helping-vowels (§ 28 e) to make the monosyllabic forms pronounce-
able,^ and consequently disappear when no longer needed. Under certain
circumstances even (e. g. in DK'p) they are not used at all. Actual proofs of
such original toneless full vowels in the 2nd syllable of existing Segholates
are —
1. Forms like Arab, mdlik, for which rarely malk, corresponding to the
Hebrew ground-form ; cf. De Lagarde, Uebersicht, p. 72 ff.
2. In Hebrew llj^ T]"!^^ 123^ ^r\3^ the connective forms of inS^ !]T, &c.,
which latter can only come from ground- forms gadir, yank, kdbid, kdtip.
3. The forms treated under e, which are in many ways related to the
Segholates proper, in so far as they are to be referred to original dissyllabic
bases.
4. The plurals of Hebrew Segholates, since, with very rare exceptions, they
take Qames under the 2nd radical before the termination D"*---, fem. fli — ,
of the absolute state, as D^S^O niD?D D"''1SD, &c. This Qames (see note 1 on
§ 26 e) can only be due to a lengthening of an original short vowel in the
2nd syllable, and hence it would seem as though the vowel were always a.
This is impossible from what has been said, especially under i and 2.
Hence the explanation of the consistent occurrence of Qatnes in the plurals
of all Segholates can only be that the regularly formed plurals (i.e. from
singulars with original a in the 2nd syllable) became the models for all the
others, and ultimately even for some really monosyllabic forms. -
(a) From the strong stem the above three ground-forms are further
developed to Pt3p 3 ''PP, ^^P C^^- § 27 r and in § 93 the explanations of
Paradigm I, a-c) ; without a helping vowel (§ 28 d) tOB'p truth. If the second
1 According to Delitzsch {Assyr. Gram., p. 157 f.) the same is true in
Assyrian of the corresponding qafl-fornis. Without case-endings they are
kalab, ^amas, aban ( = 373 t^B* J?^?)> with case-endings kalbu, iamsu, abnu.
On the other hand, ace. to Sievers, Metrik, i. 261, Hebrew ground-forms
probably have a twofold origin : they are shortened according to Hebrew
rules partly from old absolute forms like kdlbu, sifru, qudiu, and partly from
old construct-forms like the Assyrian types kalab, sifir, quduh
2 On the other hand, Ungnad, ZA. 1903, p. 333 ff., rejecting all previous
explanations, maintains that the a in m^ldkhim, mHakhoth is inserted merely
to facilitate the pronunciation. From qailim arose qatflim, then qafalim and
finally q^tdlim. See, however, Noldeke, 'Zur semit. Pluralendung,' ZA. 1904,
p. 68 ff., who points out that the Semitic nouns /a7, ^7, /m7 with their corre-
sponding feminines /a7a, &c., on assuming the plural termination commonly
take an a before the 3rd radical, but that no satisfactory account can be
given for it. M. Margolis, ' The plural of Segolates ' (Proc. of the Philol. Assoc,
of the Pacific Coast, San Francisco, 1903, p. 4 ff.), and S. Brooks, Vestiges of the
broken plural in Hebrew, Dublin, 1883, explain m*lakhim as n pluralis fractus.
' It is worthy of notice that St. Jerome also (cf, Siegfried, ZAW. iv. 76)
frequently represents the vowel of the first syllable by a, e. g. gader, aben,
ader, areb, for Tia^ |3N!^ "IIX^ ^1.^, ^^^ cedem, secel, deber, kc, for Dip, P\>'^ ,
"in-n.&c. ■
§84" h-d] Nouns derived from the Simple Stem 229
or third radical be a guttural, a helping PaiTjaiji takes the place of the helping
S^ghol, according to § 22 d, e.g. y^t seed, HJfJ eternity, pys work; but with
middle H or n, note DH^ hread, DHT (as well as DHn) womh, pHN tent, |n'£ thurnb ;
so with final K N"1S a wM ass, &c. ; with a middle guttural also the
modification of the principal vowel a to e does not occur, e.g. 2TO, "^V^^ }*D?
(exceptions, again, DH^, Oni). On the inflexion, cf. § 93, Paradigm I, a-/,
and the explanations. In NDPI sin, the N has wholly lost its consonantal
value. -
Examples of feminines: HB^IO (directly from the ground-form malk, king), 0
nnnp o covering (also TTID), ribsN food (also ^SN) ; with a middle guttural
myj girl, \\'\T\]^ purity (also "inb). Cf. § 94, Paradigm I.
(&) From weak stems : (a) from stems |"V, e. g. ^1^1 nose (from 'anp, hence C
with formative additions, e. g. ""QX for 'awp?, «;«/ nose) ; tj? a she-goat (ground-
form 'Im) ; fem. ni3n w^ieai ; (/3) from stems VV (§ 93, Paradigm I, l-n) ; na
a morsel, DV peppZe (so, when in close connexion with the next word ; uncon-
nected Dy ; with article Dyn, Dyb, &c.) ; 21 in the sense of much, but l"] great,
numerous (in close connexion also 31) ; yi evil, with the article in close con-
nexion yin, unconnected yin ; with the a always lengthened to a, D^ sea ;
fem. n>n ?Ve, and with attenuation of the a to t, n'TO measure ; from the
ground-form qifl, DX mother; fem. H^a a shearing ; from the ground-form qUtl,
p'n statute, fem. nj^n. (7) from stems Vy (Paradigm I, g and i) ; DID t^ea^A
(from md-ut, the u passing into the corresponding consonant, as in Tl)ri middle)
or contracted DV day, tilB' whip, "liB' a 6mZZ ; fem. n^iy perverseness (also con-
tracted nb'iy) ; from the ground-form qHtl, ">« a rocfc ; fem. HDID a s<onn.
(6) from stems "'"y (Paradigm I, h) ; n^T an olive-tree (with a helping Hireq
instead of a helping S'ghol) from zd-it, the i passing into the corresponding
consonant; or contracted p^FI bosom, 7^n 2 K 18" (elsewhere 7^n) host; fem.
ri3^{J> grey hair ; from the ground-form qitl, P"!) judgement ; fem. n^il wnrfer-
standing. (e) from stems H"? (Paradigm I, k) ; partly forms such as n33
weeping, nan murmuring, ni3 a present, njfp f/ie end, partly such as '33, "•'IK
a ?ion (ground-form baA:?/, ''dry) ; cf. also the forms from stems originally 1*?,
ini^ swimming (ground-form sd^w) ; fem. Hl;^ rfsf, n')K3_ exaitaiion ; from stems
"•"h •T'bK a fat tail, and with attenuation of d to i n'3K' captivity, also n''3B',
formed no doubt directly from the masc. '•3K' with the fem. termination D ;
from the ground-form qitl, lifH (from Msy) ; fem. nnil joy, nnj? and nny
nakedness ; from the gi-ound-form giJfi, ^n3 (from bohw) waste, ^riD emptiness;
ibl, for ''^'l, Jmcfcei; fem. H^JS a sAip (directly from ""aX a fleet).
The masculines as well as the feminines of these segholate forms may have (I
either an abstract or a concrete meaning. In the form btDJ? the passive or at any
<
rate the abstiact meaning is by far the more common (e. g. "ly'a youthfulness,
abstract of lya boy ; 73N/ood, &c.).i
1 M. Lambert also {REJ. 1896, p. 18 fif.), from statistics of the Segholates,
arrives at the conclusion that the qatl-fovra is especially used for concretes (in
nouns without gutturals he reckons twenty concretes as against two ab-.
Btracts), and the qitl-fovm, and less strictly the qufl, for abstracts.
230 The Noun [§84''e-/i
e 2. Nouns with one of the three short vowels under the second radical
(present ground-form q'M, (ftU, qHul), e. g. K'a'l honey, M"! sickness, nrin terror;
and so always with middle N, "1S3 a toell, 3N1 a wolf, {J'Nil stench. In reality
these forms, like the segholates mentioned in No. i (see above, a), are,
probably, for the most part to be referred to original dissyllabic forms, but the
tone has been shifted from its original place (the penultima) on to the ultima.
Thus dibds (originally dibas) as ground-form of tJ'2'n is supported both by
the Hebrew ''^2r\ (with suffix of the first person), and by the Arabic dibs, the
principal form ; bi'ir (according to Philippi with assimilation of the vowel of
the second syllable to that of the first) as ground-form of "1S3 is attested by
the Arabic 6t'?-; for {i'NIl (Arabic bu's) similarly a ground-form bu'us may be
inferred, just as a ground-form qutHl underlies the infinitives of the form
II. Nouns with an original Short Vowel in both Syllables.
f 3. The ground-form qdtal, fern, qatdtdt, developed in Hebrew to 7t3p (§ 93,
Paradigm II, a, b) and TO^p (§§ 94, 95, Paradigm II, a, b), mostly forms
intransitive adjectives, as DDPI rcise, B'^^ neio, IB'^ upright ; but also sub-
stantives, as "i^l a word, and even abstracts, as DtJ'N guilt, 3i,1 hunger, y^'C
satiety ; in the fem. frequently abstract, as nplif ^ righteousness ; with an initial
guttural nJD"75< earth. — Of the same formation from verbs ]}"]} are 113 alone,
py cloud ; passive b^n pierced. — In verbs n"P a final Yodh is almost always
rejected, and the « of the second syllable lengthened to e. Thus "ilC field, after
rejection of the * and addition of n as a vowel-letter, becomes iT}\y (cf. § 93,
Paradigm II, /) ; fem. e. g. ilJK' year ; cf. § 95, Paradigm II, c. From a verb
I^P the strong form ISy afflicted occurs.
<rr 4. The gi-ound-form qdtU, fem. qdttldt, developed to 7t3p (§ 93, Paradigm II,
c-e) and nbpp, is frequently used as participle of verbs middle e (§ 50 b), and
hence mostly with an intransitive meaning ; cf. ]p\ old, an old man ; 133 heavy;
fem. n?Dn3 cattle, HPDN and H^B^n darkness.— From, verbs ^"D : irregularlv,
VnVpl the branches of it, Jer ii'^, &c., generally referred to a sing. Dvl (stem
npT), and Vni*"in Ho 14* their women with child (from mn, st. constr. n~in
plur. St. absol. and constr. Diin). — From a verb 1"? with consonantal Waw : "l^jy
at ease, incorrectly written j^lene 1\pt^ Jb 21^'.
h 5. The ground-form qalul, developed to ?bp (also written 7iDp), generally
forms adjectives, e.g. D'X terrille, 113 piebald, pijIO sweet, l"p3 speckled, nby
interwoven, ?iy round, pby deep, 3'py hilly, 312? golden ; [bp small, only in sing,
masc, with a parallel form [Dp of the class treated under/, fem. ilSDp, plur.
D''ilDp. These forms are not to be confounded with those in No. Ill, from
1 On this theory cf. Stade, Hehrtiische Grammatik, § 1996; Do Lagarde,
Ubersicht, p. 57 f ; A. Miiller, ZDMG. xlv, p. 226, and especially Philippi,
ZDMG. xlix, p. 208.
"^ In St. Jerome's time these forms were still pronounced mdaca (np12f\
saaca (ilpyif), nabala (n?33), &c., see Siegfried, ZAW. iv. 79. Moreover, the
numerous abstracts of this form (e.g. even ilSlfp a splintering, iiniif a crying,
&c.) are undoubtedly to be regarded (with Barth, Nominalbildung, p. 87) as
feminines of infinitives of the foi'm qdfdl, the lengthening of the second
syllable being balanced, as in other cases, by the addition of the feminine
termination.
§ 84° i-n] Nouns derived from the Simple Stem 231
the ground-form qaial.—'Fem. n^"'X, iT^iaa (glorious), HTiay, najy (delicate),
n^jy , nplOy , with sharpening of the third radical, in order to keep tlie original
i< short, and similarly in the plurals D'''=]"13, D'^'^ipJ, D^Jy, D^SDX stores, &c.
6. The ground-form qifal develops to ^JDj? (cf. § 93, Paradigm II, Rem. i), i
e. g. 22b heart, 3jy a bunch of grapes, "irtJ' strong drink; from a verb n"7, probably
" T '* ' T •• T *•
of this class is ny"), generally contracted to y"| friend, ground-form ri'ay : the
< <
full form is preserved in 5ny"l his friend, for liT'yt.
III. Nouns with an original Short Vowel in (he First and a Long Vowel
in the Second Syllable.
7. The ground-form qdtdl in Hebrew always develops to the form ?)\2\) , the k
d becoming an obscure 6. The fact that this form is also written 70\) must
not lead to the confusion of these forms with those mentioned in No. 5, from
the ground-foi-m qdtul.^ Moreover the qafdl-c}as3 includes forms of various
origin, and therefore of various meaning, as (a) intransitive adjectives like
i?n3 great, ^Slp holy, fem. rhSl^, the short vowel becoming §«wa, whereas in
bna, &c., before the tone it is lengthened to a ; (b) the infinitives absolute of the
form ?*\Dp (§ 45 a) as representing the abstract idea of the verb, and abstract
substantives like 1*133 honour, Di?ti' peace (Arab, sdldm) ; (c) substantives and
adjectives in an active sense, as jinS assayer (of metals), p'lt^y an oppressor,
J'icn oppressing ; in the feminine niiJ3 treacherous Jer s''-^", the irregular
retention of the a in the third syllable from the end is no doubt to be
explained, with Brockelmann, from Aramaic influence, the punctuator having
in mind the Aramaic nomen agentis qdfol.
8. The ground-form qdiil develops to ^^\) (cf. § 93, Paradigm IV, a and b). I
Here also forms of various origin and meaning are to be distinguished :
(a) adjectives used substantivally with a passive meaning to denote duration
in a state, as "l^DN a prisoner, r\^&12 an anointed one. These proper qafil-forms
are parallel to the purely passive qaful-torms (see m.), but others are due to
a strengthening of original gafj^-forms. These are either (b) intransitive in
meaning, as "Tiyif srnall, and, from ''"? stems, ''pi pure, ""jy poor (see § 93 vv), or (c)
active, as X''33 a speaker (prophet), TipES an overseer.— Ot a different kind again
(according to Do Lagarde, infinitives) are (d) forms like ^''DH the ingathering,
1^i*3 vintage, ^''~\U ploughing time, 'T'yp harvest. On qcittU forms with a kindred
meaning, cf, § 84''/.
9. The ground-form qaful develops to /5Dp. As in the qatdl and qatil-fovms 7)1
(see k and I), so here forms of various kinds are to be distinguished : (a)
gafi/Z-forms proper, with passive meaning, especially all the passive participles
of Qal ; fem. e.g. HpiriB virgin (properly secluded). On the other hand, by
strengthening an original qatiil-form. we get (b) certain stative adjectives
(§ 50/), as B'^IJN incurable, D1i*y strong, Dliy subtil, or even transitive, as t^riN
holding; (c) active substantives, as B'lp'' a fowler. Further, some of the forms
mentioned in § 84^ g belong to this class ; see above, the remark on I.
10. The ground-form qitdl or qutdl "^ in Hebrew changes the i to vocal S'wd, 71
1 In Na 1^ only the Q're requires ~?*l|l (in the constr. state) for the KHhibh
bin?.
2 On the/w'di- forms (regarded by Wellhausen as original diminutives) see
Noldeke, Beitrage (Strassb. 1904), p. 30 ff. He includes among them Pny? *''^''»
and D''"inD hemonhoids.
232 The Noun [§ 84" o-u
and develops to 7t5i? (cf. § 93, Paradigm IV, c) or pitSp, with a obscured to 6
(as above, k). Cf. "1 j<{5' remnant, "1p^ honour, 203 600A; (Arab. H^ab), ^Ip war (the
last three probably loan-words from the Aramaic) ; of the other form, Di?n
a dream, lion an ass (Arab, hlmdr), rIvX God (Arab, 'ildh) ; with N prosthetic
(§ 19 »0, JJiltS an» (twice: usually yi"ll) ; fern. niVB'3 good news (Arab.
Uidrat) ; mi3y service, flDri? (Arab. Jdtdbat) tattooing.
0 II. The ground-form qitU seems to occur e. g, in Hebrew 7'')^, foolish, ^vN
vanity, ^''13 Zeai, ?''p3 a fool, "l^tH a swi'we (the prop, name l^tH points to the
ground-form qitil, cf. Arab, hinsir).
P 12. The ground-form qitHl or 9m<mZ, Hebr. b^Cp, e.g. P^33 a boundary, \j^2p
a garment; fern, rm23 sirewgr^A, HJ^lDN/aiWMZness.
flr Bem. When the forms g^tiil and g^tol begin with N, they almost invariably
take in the singular a Sere under the N instead of the ordinary Eaieph-S^ghol;
cf. D?3N! a crib, |1DN thread, j^DS faithful, 3itN hyss<yp, "liTX a wafsi-bawd,"! ^DX
a bond, lIDN an * ephod' ; cf. § 23 h, and the analogous cases of Sere for Hateph-
S^ghol in verbal forms § 52 w, § 63 j), § 76 d.
rV. Nouns with a Long Vocal in the First Syllable and originally
a Short Vowel in the Second Syllable.
T 13. The ground- form qdtdl, in Hebrew, always changes the d into an obscure
6, bC^p (bCp), e. g. D?iy (§ 93, Paradigm III, a), Arab, 'alam, eternity ; DHin
(Arab, hdtdm) a seal (according to Barth a loan-word of Egyptian origin), fem.
norih (from /^otdmt) ; ybifl worm (unless from a stem y?), like StJ'in from
DB'I ; see the analogous cases in § 85 b). On the participles Qal of verbs n'v
(§ 93, Paradigm III, c), cf. § 75 e; on the feminines of the participles Qal,
which are formed with the termination D, see below, s.
Rem. Of a different kind (probably from a ground-form qaufal) are such
forms as fSiK (or |aiN Ez 10^ in the same verse) a wheel ; PTiS a young bird, 33n
wax, &c. .
S 14. The ground-form qdtil also becomes in Hebrew almost invariably bc^p
(bCp). Besides participles active masc. Qal this class includes also fem.iniDes of
the form flb^j? , if their ground-form qotalt (§ 69 c) goes back to an original
qdfilt. The substantives of this form, such as ]iy3 priest (Arsih. kdhin), were
also originally participles Qal. The fem. of the substantives has S (lengthened
from i) retained before the tone, e.g. mb^ a woman in travail (cf. also m3l3
the treacherous woman, Jer 3^ ; HVpifLl ^^'^ ^«' halteth, Mi 4* *•, Zp 3" ; H^nb
a buckler, ^91*); the participles as a rule have the form mbS &Cm the
original i having become .i^wd ; however, the form with Sere occurs also in the
latter. Is 2988, 348, ^ 682«, 118^8 ^all in principal paitse ; in subordinate ^uuse
2 S 13^", Is 33" ; with a conjunctive accent, Ct i«).
t 15. The ground-form quidl, Hebrew bo^p (as bsV river, Jer 17*) or bc^p e. g.
3J^y a ^ipe, commonly 32y, and to be so read, with Baer, also in f igo*,
not 33);.
V. Nouns with a Long Vowel in each Syllable.
U 16. b^Cp, e.g. "ito^p smoke. The few forms of this kind are probably
derived from the ground-form cp.tdl {qittdl ?), i. e. the original d has become an
obscure d.
l!
l!
§ 84'' a-e] Formation of Nouns from Intensive Stem 233
§ 84^ Formation of Nouns from the Intensive Stem.
This includes all forms which have arisen, either through the a
doubling of the middle radical, or the repetition of one or of two
consonants of the simple stem.
VI. Nouns vcith the Middle Consonant sharpened.
As in the corresponding verbal stems (cf. § 52/), so also in some noun-
formations of this class, the DageS in the second radical expresses an
intensification of the idea of the stem, either emphasizing the energy of the
action or relation, or else indicating a longer continuance of the relation or
state. Other nouns of this character are evidently only by-forms of the
nouns derived from the simple stem, which were treated in the last section :
cf. the instances adduced under/and g, and Barth, Nominalbildung, Introd., p. x,
1 7. The gi-ound-form qattal is mostly lengthened in Hebrew to ?^j5 ; cf. 0
b*X a stag, fem. H^JK , constr. st. nb*K (from 'ayyalt) ; cf. also the fem. (origi-
nating from QaV) TOTO a flame (according to § 27 3 for Idhhdbha), n^in dryland
(for harrabha), Hp^'l and nn"ni? a burning fever, flB'Zl^ and nSJ'B^ dry land, r)V^Q
a seal-ring, HCnB' consumption. Adjectives of this class ('intensified participles
of the active Verb', Barth, ibid., § 33) are N^H sinful, na3 wont to gore, Wj?
jealous, B'na (for kahhdi, by § 22 c) lying. Nomina opificum also, curiously
enough, are so treated in Hebrew (at least in the amstr. state of the sing.),
although the corresponding Arabic form qdtidl points to an original (unchange-
able) d in the second syllable ; cf. 333 a thief, jS'^ a judge {constr. st. |>"^ ip 68*),
naC a cook, {yin (for harrds) artificer {constr. st. B'nn , hut plur. constr. ''KHH) ; {^"18
horseman {for parrdT), const, st. BHS Ez 26^°.
18. The ground -form qittdl appears in nnX dry, nS,3 haughty (the i being C
lengthened to e according to § 22 c), if these forms go back to original sihhdy,
gi"dy. On the analogy, however, of the adjectives denoting defects (see d
below), we should rather expect a ground-form qitM; moreoveT,'iwwalt, ground-
form of the fem. rQ}ii foolishness, goes back to an original iwwilt, see § 69 c.
• • " < .<
1 9. The ground-form qUftdl and qHUiil ; cf. the fem. nt2E)3 spelt, nSFlB coat.
20. The ground-form qattU ; from the intensive stem, the infinitives Pi'il of U
the form p^p.
21. The ground-form qiUil, in Hebrew lengthened to 7^j?. Of this form
are a considerable number of adjectives which denote a bodily or mental fault
or defect. Cf. 113N disabled, D.^N dumb, |3a hump-backed, I^J? blind, K'ln deaf {for
hirrei), nDS) lame, Pip bald, K'ijiy perverse ; nj59 open-eyed follows the same
analogy.
22. The ground-form qattal, cf. the remarks in b above, on the nomina e
opificum ; moreover, to this class belong infinitives Pi'el of the Aramaic form
n"ii32 a searching out ; nC'i^S a request ; with middle guttural (see § 22 c) nXNJ
contumely ; but cf. also ^^niXNi Ez 35", with full lengthening of the original
d before N ; HOnj comfort. From the attenuation of the d of this form to »,
arises undoubtedly :
23. The ground-form ^tfdl, e. g. "I3N husbandman (Arab, ^dkkdr).
24. The ground-form qHtol, most probably only a variety of the form qdttdl
with the d attenuated to i (as in No. 33), and the d obscured to 6 (as in n and
234 '^'he Noun [§ 84''/-'»
r) ; cf. "liaa hero (Arab, gabbdr), ~\Sq) caviller, "liS^f (piper or chirper) a bird, "liSK*
drunkard. On the other hand, nip^ 6orn probably arises from yullod, au old
participle passive of ^i, the m being dissimilated in the sharpened syllable
before 6 : so Barth, ibid., p. 41 f.
f 25. The ground-form 5rt/fi7, ?''^\), almost exclusively of persons, who possess
some quality in an intensive manner, e.g. *1''3X strong, p^"n^ righteous, ri''"}3
fxigiiive (for barri^'h), Y^~\V violent (for 'arris).
That some of these are only by-forms of the qd!il-c\as% (see above, remark
on a), appears from the constr. st. ^HES ravenous, Is 35^ (but D'^irns ''Jf^B
always), and according to Barth (ibid., 35 a) also from the constr. st. "1^3S (but
also T'llX I S 21*) of "1''ZlX. However, the form 1^3S, as a name of God, may
be intentionally differentiated from 1^3X, a poetic term for the bull.
In the same way 1'DS prisoner, C^D eunuch (constr. st. always D^TD, plur.
D''D"'"1D , constr, st. ""DHD Gn 40'', but in the book of Esther always ''DHD
with suffix VD''"]D, &c.), and p''riy weaned, may be regarded as by-forms of the
qdfU-cla.sa w ''-'^ passive meaning, see § 84* I.
P* 26. The ground-form qanUl, ?Vi3p, e.g. psn gracious, Q^VH compassionate
(with virtual strengthening of the n), J'^^H diligent (for harriis), probably,
again, to a large extent by-forms of the qatul-c\a,ss, § 84" m. The same
applies to substantives like ■ntj;K a step (in ''*)E'K, as well as ilK^S, &c.), l^SJ?
pillar; fem. n^inn a stripe {also im^n), nini33 security : cf. Barth, ibid., § 84.
// 27. The ground-form q&ttol; besides the infinitives absolute Pi'H of the
form bt2p, also NiHpjeaZows (as well as K3p, an obscured form of qdltdl, see e).
i 28. The ground-form gif/ili, 7^t3p, e.g. ''^Qlf a coating of metal, DI^E' requital,
''^pB' drink, P)^2^ detestable thing ; with concrete meaning l^Qp a disciple, T^^J?
strong ; frequently in the plural in an abstract sense, as CQI'tJ reproach, Q'iipip
filling (the induction of a priest), D''Dn3 consolations, compassion, D''p3C' bereave-
ment, DTi?K' dismissal, D''"1I3K' observance.
VII. Nouns with the Third Consonant repeated.
J^ 29. The ground-form qdfldl, e. g. fJXtJ^ quiet, fem. HS^XtJ^ (with sharpening
of the second Nun, in order to keep the preceding vowel short) ; pyT green,
plur. D''il3Sn.
/ 30. The ground-form -qMil, in Hebrew P.7'^'5; of this form are e.g. the
infinitives Pi'lel (prop. Pa'lil), cf § 55 d.
in, 31. The ground-form qatUd ; so the plur. D"'3;33 ridges (with sharpening of
the Nun, as in No. 29).
32. The ground-form qiUal, in niTlQ a brood.
33. The ground- form qittlal, in 770N/am*.
34. The ground-form qaflil, e. g, t3^D3y plunder, "("'^JD ram-sform, T'*)DK'
glittering tapestry, Jer 43I" Q^re ; with attenuation of the a to i D''']''")103 all that
makelh black, Jb 3" (but the better reading is nnJOS).
35. The ground-form qallul, e.g. inSB' Jer ^2,^°Knh.; D"'D1DX3_ adaZteries.
VIII. Noxms with the Secotid and Third Consonants repeated,
n 36-39' Q^laUid, q^udiil, q'taltiXl; q^ldllul, q'tdltol (in fem. and plur. often with
the last consonant sharpened for the reason given in a above) ; cf. !|3DEin
§§ 84*0,^,85 a, &] Nouns with Pref or matives, etc. 235
crooked, nipPppH slippery places, niPi^pj^y crooked (ways) ; i^FlpflS tortuous; also
words denoting colours, D"nDnX (Lv i3*2.'i9 jn pause) reddish, fern. JlO^DnX
plur. nb'np'IN ; p1\>T greenish, plur. fern, nplpl^ ; (ffallU, H'S^D^ very fair (to
be read in Jer 4620 for iT'BnD'') ; q'taltul, JT^ninK' (fern.) blackish ; flpDDX
a rabble (augmented from FlIDX collected). From a verb ""'S with aphaeresis
of the initial syllable D''NyNV offspring. Moreover, of the same form, probably,
is nn^iVn a trumpet (for Hn^^Xn, cf. § 55 e). Also in Is 2"^ nnBnsnb is to be
read instead of ni"13 1302 (from the sing, n"lQ"1Dn a digging or burrowing
animal, perhaps the mole). But nipnj5Q opening, Is 61* (ed. Mant, Baer, Ginsb.
nipTlpQ), is an evident mistake due to dittography ; read HpQ as in 42''.
IX. Nouns in which the Whole (Bilileral) Stem is repeated.
Naturally this class includes only isolated forms of the stems Vy and y"y 0
(on ni*Q''S see § 96 under HQ). Thus : —
40. ?p3 a wheel, and, with attenuation of the first a to i, 73p3 (from p?J) ;
fem. nbn^n anguish (from Pin or pTl) ; "133 (for kirkar) a talent; cf. also 3313
a star (fi-om kdwkdb, Arabic kaukdb, for 3333), DStOiU bands, for nbt3Dt3 ;
/^!5if probably o whirring locust.
41. /3i33 infin. PiTpe^ (prop. PalpiT) from p^S ; fem. nbtOpC a hurling (from ?;
blO). "'"
42. ISIS perhaps a ruby (for kddkiid), from 113.
43. I'pIP <^e crotvn of the head (for qudqiid), from ITp ; fem. np3p3 a skull (for
grilgult), from p^J.
44. inil ffi^f^erf, from 11] ; p13p3 a 60/tte, from pp3 ; D^"13"!3 /a^enetZ 6/rrfs(?).
§ 85. Nouns luith Preformatives and Afformatives.
These include nouns which are directly derived from verbal forms a
liaving preformatives [Hiph'U, Hof)h'al, Hithpa'el, Niph'al, ^c), as
well as those which are formed with other preformatives (x, *, 12, 3, n),
and finally those which are formed with afformatives. The quadri-
literals and quinqueliterals also are taken in connexion with these
formations, inasmuch as they arise almost always by the addition
or insertion of one or two consonants to the triliteral stem.
X. Nouns with Preformatives.
45. Nouns with X prefixed. Cf. the substantives with H prosthetic (§ 19 m), J)
such as yillX arm (Jer 32^1, Jb 31^^-; elsewhere always Jjni) ; y3ii*K a finger,
n3")t<l a locust, PjnjK^si; (others mattock, or clod\ nllCK'S or ni'CK'K a watch. In
these examples the N is a 'euphonic ' prefix (Barth, ibid., § 150 b) ; in other
cases it is ' essential ' ; cf. especially the adjectives, 3T3S deceitful, ■n3K cruel^
jn^N perennial (for 'aitan) [ = the Arab, 'clative', used for expressing the
compar. and superl. degrees]. The fem. n'\3]^ fragrant part *^ (of the meal-
^ Or perhaps more correctly with Jacob, ZAW. 1897, p. 79, ' declaration,' i.e.
the part of tlie meal-offering which ' announces the sacrifice and its object '.
236 The Noun [§ 85 c-a
offering) is a women verbaU of Hiph'il, answering to the Aramaic infinitive of
the causal stem ('ylp/i'eO, hence with suff. nm31t< Lv 2^, &c.
T tit: - '
C 46. Nouns with n prefixed. Besides the ordinary infinitives of Hiph'il
PtDpn and ^''t^pH, of Niph'al ^CpH bopn (for hinq.), and of the conjugations
formed with the prefix Dn , tliis class also includes some rare nomina verbalia
derived from Hiph'il (cf. § 72 s), viz. mSH appearance (from "133), Is 3^; nSJH
a swinging (from 51^3), [Is 30^® ; nrUH a rest-giving, Est 2 ^8] ; npjfn deliverance
(from ?Jf3), [Est 4'* an Aram, form : cf. mTH Dn 5^"] ; perhaps also 73^n
palace, from kaikdl, unless it is borrowed from the Assyrian ; see the Lexicon.
d 47. Nouns with '' prefixed, aslilif^ oil, I3pp^ wallet, ^Wy owl{?) • from verbs
Vy, e. g. Dlp^ a Zu'tng t/tmsr, "l^Tl'' a range ; from a verb ^"]3, yy an adversary.
Of a different character are the many proper names which have simply
adopted the imperfect form, as 2p]}\, pHX^, &c.
C 48. Nouns with D prefixed. This preformative Mem, which is no doubt
connected with "'JO who, and HO what (see §37 and §520), appears in a very
lai-ge number of nouns, and serves to express the most varied modifications of
the idea of the stem: (i) D subjective, when preformative of the participles
Ptel, Hiph'il, Hithpa'el, and other active conjugations. (2) 12 objective, when
preformative of the participles Pu'al, Hoph'al, and other passive conjugations,
as well as of numerous nouns. (3) D instrumental, as in HriBD a key, &c. (4)
O local, as in "13*10 a drive for cattle, &c.
/ As regards the formation of these nouns, it is to be remarked that the pre-
formative tt was originally in most cases followed by a short a. This a,
however, in a closed syllable is frequently attenuated to i ; in an open syllable
before the tone it is lengthened to a (so also the i, attenuated from a, is
lengthened to e), and in |3tD shield (with suff. ''33C) it even becomes unchange-
able a. But in an open syllable which does not stand before the tone, the a
necessarily becomes S^wd.
^ The following forms are especially to be noticed : (a) ground-form maqtal, in
Hebrew ^IDplD,^ e. g. ij3XO/ood : fem. naboiD kingdom, 71^5^0 a knife, naX^D
(for riDKpP by § 23 c) business; from a verb ]"Q^ (DD a gift; from verbs Y'Q,
NSiD a going forth, SC'ID a seat ; from verbs '•"S ^CD the best (from maitab) ;
with ^ (or 1) assimilated, ySD a bed ; from verbs JJ"]? ^DD a screen, and with
the shortening of the a under the preformative, 1)d6 bitterness (from "IDD
developed to a segholate), fem. HTSK'D desolation; from a verb Vy, probably
of this class is DipD place, the a lengthened to o and obscured to 0 (Arabic
maqdm) ; from verbs T\"?, nS")P appearance, |yp (for HiyO) prop, intention, only
in lypp on account of, in order that.
fl (b) Ground-form miqtdl (the usual form of the infin. Qal in Aramaic), Hebr.
rCpD, e. g. "1310 (in Jer 2*1 also, where Baer requires ISHDn, read with ed.
Mant., Ginsburg, &c. "ISIDH) a cattle-drive, fem. noripD war, n331D a chariot
' °' T : • -:' T T : • ' t t : v
(with S'ghol instead of t, but in constr. st. 713310 Gn 41*^ ; cf. pn")0 distance),
ri'lDB'O a watch ; from verbs y"y, e. g. 3pO surroundings (from mi-sab ; i in the
open syllable being lengthened to e ; but cf. also pE'P Is 33* as constr. state
from ppv) with sharpening of the first radical ; cf. § 67 gr) ; from verbs T\"?,
njlpD a possession, fem. njpD.
» In O'lpnO"? Ct 6'«, Neh 8I", the first syllable is artificially opened to avoid
the cacophony ; on the a of the second syllable cf. § 93 ee.
§851-9] Nouns with PreformativeSf etc, 237
(c) Ground-form maqni, Hebr. ^tSpO, e.g. IJJB'IO a support (fern. njVK'P), «
"^3DJD a smt</8, ib'UO a tithe ; fem. n?JJ'30 a ruin : from a verb K'S nD3D an
overthrow, n32kl? a i3»7tar ; from verbs ^"V , fpJD a shield ; fem. npJO a roll (from
773)) 'T^^'2 « <^"''s« (f*^i" m^^irrd from "I^X) ; from a verb 1"D, ^pi^ « snare
(from wdit'gis). .
(d) Ground-form mjgfiZ, Hebr. PppO, e. g. IStpD mourning, n31tD an aZtar A;
{place of sacrifice) ; from a verb V'y, e.g. 3DD (DDO?) consessus ; (e) ground-
form mdqiul, Hebr. ^bpiO ; fem. rh'6^;t2 food, n^fblO tcagres ; from a verb J)"y,
fem. n3CD a covering (from T|3D). Also from yy, according to the Masora,
TiyjO a re/wfife, with suffixes "'^yo and MIVD, plur. D''?yO, but, very probably,
most if not all of these forms are to be referred to the stem t^y to flee for safety,
and therefore should be written "'tiyO, &c. The form TyO, if derived from
the stem ]]]} , would mean stronghold, — Cf. also '•[ifi faintness, developed to a
segholate, probably from TjlD, for marokh from T|31, like DhD soundness of
body, from DlOri.
With a long vowel in the second syllable : (/) ground-form maqtdl, with d t
always obscured to o, e. g. "^^Dnip want, nippO ^°°^y > from verbs Vy , e. g. "liJD
fear, fem. mijlO and miJD (with the o depressed to m in a toneless syllable ;
tit; » ,
cf. § 27 n), no^riD, &c.. Is 22^ (gr) Ground-form miqtdl, in Hebr. again ?1t3p?0,
e.g. liriDD a covert, pil^SD a stumUing -block (cf. above under i, makhseld) ; fem.
07630 a fishing-net ; (A) the ground-forms maqtil, miqtU (cf. D''pD) are found
only in participles Eiph'il ; the fem. n''3"'p3p, cheerfulness, is a denominative
formed from a participle Hiph'il ; (t) ground-form maqtul, as K^l^piO a garment.
Eem. On ID as preformative of the participles of all the conjugations except VI
Qal and Niph'al, cf. § 52 c. Many of these participles have become substantives,
as JTIBIO snuffers, JTTIK'IO destroyer, destruction.
49. Nouns with J prefixed. Besides the participles Niph'al (ground-form n
ndqtal, still retained e.g. in 1?i3 for ndwldcJ, but commonly attenuated to niqtdl,
Hebr. ^t3p3) and the infinitive Niph'al of the form ^b[>^, the prefix 3 is found
in Dv'J^S? wrestlings, Gn 30*, which is also to be referred to Niph'al, and *1^|3
boiled pottage (stem T*!).
50. With K* prefixed, e.g. r\2np\^afiame. On this Saph'sl formation, cf. § 552. 0
51. Nouns with n prefixed. Examples of this formation are numerous, p
especially from weak stems, for the purpose of strengthening them phoneti-
cally (see Barth, ibid., p. 283), and notably from verbs l^'D and Vy. They
may be classified as follows :— (a) the ground- form tdqfdl in DOnri ostrich (?) ;
from verbs VB^ DE'in a settler; fem. Jlbnin expectation, nnpin (from the Hiph'il
n^ain) correction ; from a verb """D \D''Pl the south ; from verbs 1"Q and T\"b,
min thanksgiving, and min law, both from Eiph'il ; from a verb V'B and i<"7,
niNJfin issues ; probably belonging to this class, from verbs ])"V, P^ confusion,
and Dpri a melting away (developed from 730 and 0100 , from Pp? ^'^'^ ODD).
(6) Tiqfdl, e.g. fem. n■^^<Eln and JTlKSn glory; from a verb n'6, e.g. nipijl <y
ftope; (c) to^/tZ, o.g. J'SK'ri^ cAegwer Mor/c';'feni, nO^^ri deep sleep (probably from
the Niph'al D'^")3) ; from a verb V'Q^ nnS^D correction (from the Eiph'il-atem,
like the constr. st. plur. niTpin generations) ; from verbs yy^ n?nri praise, n?B))l
prayer (from the Pt'6{ of the stems ppn and ?2B).
238 IVie Noun [§85r-M
7' With a long vowel in the second syllable : {d) tiqfdl, as D^nfl the ocean, the
deep (for iOuim ; in Assyrian the fem. tidmtu, constr, st. tidmat, is the usual word
for sea), unless it is to be derived with Delitzseh, Prolegomena, p. J13, from the
stem Dnn ; (e) tdqfil (in Arabic the usual form of the infinitive of conjugation
II. which corresponds to the Hebrew Pi'el), e.g. from a verb H"?, fem, rivDn
completeness ; JT'Iliri increase, usury, with a parallel form TT'B'ip ; in a passive
sense, l^tp^R a disciple; (/) piDpri, e.g. HlSri an apple (for tdnpuP'h) ; very
frequently used to form abstracts, e.g. ?TO2ri a benefit (also ?^D3) ; from verbs
Vy^ nD13ri « treading down, r[Z''iir\ a leaving (like HD^Iljl a lifting up, from the
Hiph'il stem), HplK'n a longing, &c. ; very frequently also as an abstract plural,
e.g. ni^Snri perverseness, nv3nri guidance, D''")1"Hpri bitterness, D''0^n3n and
niDinjri consolation ; from a verb VJ? D^3Xri toil.
XI. Nouns with Afformatives.
S 52. Nouns with 7 affixed. Perhaps /DK'n amber (?), and probably PP^
iron, P013 garden-land {S'ghol in both cases is probably a modification of the
original a in the tone-syllable), ?y32 bloom, cf. § 30 q. — According to Pratorius,
ZDMG. 1903, p. 530 ff., al is an affix of endearment in the proper names pD''0
bL)«n {little lizard ?) b:''3N (also ^^^DK).
t 53. Nouns with D affixed. With an original dm as afiformative, QplX
vestibule (although the a in the sing, remains unchangeable), plur. D"'132N •
but in D33 a swarm of gnats, the D. is radical. With original afformative iim,
Dh'j; (also rh^) naked (from niV), plur. CBT'y Gn s', parallel form Di"»y,
plur. D"'ti)l"lJ? Gn 2^^ —To this class also belong the adverbs in dm and dm,
mentioned in § 100 g, and many proper names, as DkJ'")3, also DiB'lS, and
\r^-\l {patronymic ^SK'ia), DbijD, DlOy, &c. ; but for DV"13 ransom (?), Nu 3",
probably D^HQ is to be read.
11 54. Nouns with | affixed. The | is added by means of a simple helping
< .<
vowel in fyjl) Canaan, and p.3if a finger nail ; more frequently the addition is
made by means of a tone-bearing n, which in Hebrew is modified to S^ghol (as
|"I"13 axe) or lengthened to a (but cf. also JT'DIHt^ and fT'Sl^p) ; e.g. "C^ip a posses-
nion, IHptJ' a table, |3")p an offering. From an original d being changed into an
obscure 6 we may probably explain such forms as ]\2iir\ a pining away ; IQ"!"! (also
p'll) a goad ; I^Dyi hunger ; from verbs H"? pSH pride, ^\}2T\ noise, ptPI a vision ;
|i''")E' a coaf of mail; from a verb |"D^ fiXE'lO guile (the only instance with both
O preformative and on afformative) ^ ; very frequently from the simple stem
with an unorganic sharpening of the second radical, e. g P"13] memorial, |V?3
destruction {constr. st. IHOl and pv3), &c. ; cf. also ^)''~\7^ pregnancy (for '^n) and
§ 93 MM ; |Vp""p shame, for P^ppp. Proper names occur with the termination
im, as flT-i'^, § 86 g, and others.
' The plurals Q''2^i flowers, Ct 2'^, and D^3b't3p /^^jorns appear to be formed
directly from the singulars ^3 (cf. n5f3) and biOp with the insertion of an
(which in 'Op is obscured to on). See NOldeke, Mand. Gr., p. 169, Rem. 3 ;
similarly, according to Hoffmann, ' Einige phOniz. Inschriften,' p. 15 [Abh.
der Gott. Ges. der Wiss., xxxvi), D"'3U^y wares, Ez 27'<i«from 2W = 2^}!.
§§85v,w,86a-J] Nouns xvith Afformatives, etc. 239
Rem. A large number of proper names now ending in TM or \ — used to V
be classed as nouns originally formed with the affix \S The subsequent
rejection of the final Nun seemed to be confirmed by the form jn^tp, once
used (Zc 12") for HJO (and conversely in Pr 27^0 KHhihh n'"^nS, Q're HaX for
pinX destruction), also by the fact that for r\b^p the LXX 'give the form
'S.oKwfj.iiv or "ZaXwtiitiv , and especially that in patronymics and tribal names
(§ 86 h) a Nun appears before the termination 5, as '^'p^'l Gilonite from nl53 and
^y?''^ from n!5''E' (modern name Sailun). Wetzstein, however (in Delitzsch's
Commentary on Job, ist ed., p. 599), explained the Niin in fn^jp as a secondary
addition to the common old-Palestinian termination 0 (inn^^ i3y, i^itD"),
&c.), and Barth {Nominalhildung , § 224 6) has since shown the unsoundness of
the prevailing view on other grounds: the rejection of ihQ Nim would be
much more likely to occur in the numerous appellatives in on than in proper
names, and "'^Vs and "'f?''^ are due to the necessity of avoiding, for euphonic
reasons, such forms as gllo-i, iilo-i, &c, ; cf. also '3?{^' from HpK'.
On the afformatives ^__j *___^ ni H''-— , see below, § 86 h-l.
XII. Quadriliteruls and Quinqueliterals.
55. "110^3 barren, tJ'''D^n a flint, and the fem nSV^T heat, &c., have probably IC
arisen from the insertion of a 7 ; ?;"i"!n a locust, D'Tij? an axe, nByip a branch,
Ez 316 (verses 6, 8 nS.VD), D^Syib' (also D''3yb') anxious thoughts, i3''3"1t^ sceptre,
from insertion of a *1 which is common in Aramaic. Cf., moreover, CD^n
u sickle, "nOD vine-blossom ; with an initial ]! ^ ^.?^y« &«', K'OSV a spider, *133y
a mouse, 3"li5y a scorpion,^ &c. — Quinquelitei'al, yi|"lSif a frog.
§ 86. Denominative Nouns.
1. Such are all nouns formed immediately from another noun, (L
whether the latter be primitive or derived from a verb, e. g. P'^l^
eastern, immediately from D"]!?. the east (verbal stem D"1P to he in front).
2. Most of the forms which nouns of this class assume have already (j
been given in §§ 84 and 85, since the denominatives, as secondary
(although in some cases very old) forms, invariably follow the analogy
of the verbal derivatives. As, for instance, the verbals with a prefixed
D (§ 85 g to m) express the place, &c., of an action, so the denomina-
tives with ?3 local represent the place where a thing is found or its
neighbourhood (see e).
The most common forms of denominatives are — C
1. Those like the participle Qal (§ 84« s), e. g. "lyc a porter, from '^W « 9'«'« ;
"1P3 a herdsman, from IpS a herd ; D"13 a vinedresser, from D"13 a vineyard.
2. Those like the form qatjal (§ 84** 6\ e.g. T\'^\) an archer, from 0^*1"? a bow. (J
1 Derenbourg {REJ., 1883, p. 165) infers from the above examples and a
comparison of the Arabic 'uiffur, sparrow (from safara, to chirp), that V was
especially employed to form quadriliteral names of animals.
240 IVie Noun [§86
e-t
Both these forms (c and d) indicate customary occupations, inhering in the
subject, like Greek nouns in ttjs, revs, e. g. iroXir^y, ypafjuarevs.
C 3. Nouns with D prefixed, denoting the place where a thing is (cf. § 85 e),
or its neighbourhood, e. g. pyo a place of fountains, from py ; ni?a"!ip the place
about the feet, niB'Nip the place about the head, from ^n, K'NT ; HB'pO (for
nStJ'pD) a cucumber field, from NE^p cucumber. Cf. d/iweXtoj' from cifive\os.
f 4. Nouns with the termination f or \S expressing adjectival ideas: ]\Cr\Ji
eastern, irom "Olp ; p"inS posfenor, from inS ; jilfn exterior, from ^^H ; probably
also irT'lp coi7e«i, hence co«7ed animal, serpent, from iT'p a winding ; \T\'^Xyi brazen,
from riB'ni brass. Also abstracts, e. g. jil^y blindness, from *l-iy. Cf. § 85 m. —
With a double termination {on or an with i) '•iDlK reddish, ''i)}'^) « knounng
(spirit) ; ''3'yDif basilisk ; ni*3Dn"l merciful [fem. plur.].
^ |i appears to be used as a diminutive ending (cf. the Syriac p) in |iB'''X
little man (in the eye), appk of the eye, from K'''N^; on the other hand lb''BB'
adder, which was formerly regarded as a diminutive, is properly an adjectival
form from flDC to rub (hence, as it were, a rubbing creature) ; in the same way
P"1B'"' is a denominative from I^K''' (="\B''), properly wpngrA* {righteous people), and
not a diminutive (^nous little people, and the like) ; finally, p'inb' is not lunula,
but an artificial moon (used as an ornament), and CJi^X not Utile neck, but
necklace (from 1N1S neck). Cf. Delitzsch on Ct 4'.
h 5. Peculiar to denominatives is the termination *•__, which converts a
substantive into an adjective, and is added especially to numerals and names
of persons and countries, in order to form ordinals, patronymics, and tribal
names; e.g. ^^T[ footman, plur. Dv21, from ^y\foot; ''"1T3N cruel, """IDJ strange,
from 1D3 strangeness, ""rinri lotcer, from nnri below, fem. JT'Onn and iTrinri,
plur. C'^nnn ni»nnn ; ^tU the sixth, from E^B' six ; "•2X10 Moabite, from nxiO
plur. D''3Kb, fem. n>3NiO and D^S'lO, plur. nV^XID ; nny Hebrew, plur.
nnny and'cnny, fem.' nnny, plur. ri'in^y; ^b^lV^'^' Israelite, from f'N■)■B'^
When the original substantive is a compound, it is resolved again into two
words, e. g. ^3''ip''"f3 Benjamite, from p0^33 (cf. on the use of the article in
. such cases, § 127 d).
t Instead of "i we find in a few cases (a) the ending '__. (as in Aram.),
e. g. ""P^a {crafty, or, according to others, churlish) if it stands for ''TS? and is
not rather from a stem t02 or nbs ; "'">in white cloth. Is 19^ in pause ; perhaps
also "'33 a swarm ofloaists, Am 71 C^iU Na 3") ; hardly ^n'lrjJ Is 38^^°, Hb 3" ;
AT , - !•:
but certainly in proper names as 'ptIB {ferreus) Barsillai;^ and (6) n__,
[} Cf. Barth, § 212 ; KOnig, ii. i, 413. Diminutives in Semitic languages
are, however, most commonly formed by inserting a «/ after the second radical,
e. g. Aram. XC'/^y, Syr. fVi«^\ , Arab. *-P^ a very young man, kulaib, a little
dog, &c. Since Olshausen (§ 180), y^^] a little (Is 28'<'-i'', Jb 36*) has commonly
been regarded as an example of the same form, to which others have added
D^D^DK' Is 3'" (as though a foreign dialectical form for JiMwais, little sun), and
|^3"'tDK 2 S 1^"^°, as a contemptuous diminutive form of pJCK ; cf. Ewald, § 167,
W. Wright, Arab. Gramm^ i. § 269, De Lagarde, Kominalbildung, pp-. 85-87,
Konig. ii. 1, p. 143 f. The existence of the form in Hebrew is disputed by
Barth, § 192 of.]
1 On * as an old fem. ending, see above, § So I.
§ 86 k, 1, 87 a-c'] Denominative Nouns 241
arising from ay, in HE'N belonging to fire (K'NI), i. e. a sacrifice offered by fire ; HJlS?
(prop, milky) the storax-shrub, Arabic lubnay.
6. Abstract nouns formed from concretes by the addition of HI , nr'__l ]^
(§ 95 0> cf. our terminations -dom, -hood, -ness, e.g. Jl^n?' youth, ^\^^J>^ kingdom
(the omission of the Dage^ in 3 shows that the ^^icd is weakened from a full
vowel ; on malik as underlying the present form T|^D cf. § 84" a) ; DIJOj^N
widowhood, from lObX widower, n30l?K widow. In Aram, this fem. ending fl^
(or ^ with rejection of the n) is a common termination of the infinitive in the
derived conjugations (cf., as substantival infinitives of this kind, niVDB'n the
announcing, Ez 24^^^, and n^lSPfin the making 0/ a league, Dn 11^) ; in Hebr. Tfl
as a termination to express abstract ideas (including some which ap.pear to
be directly derived from the verbal stem, as DvSD folly, niNQ"! a healing ^)
becomes more common only in the later books. It is affixed to adjectives
ending in i (see above, h) in n^*")T3X cruelty, and fl^'DtOip upright position
(Lv 26'^, used adverbially). , .
The ending D^ is found earlier, e.g. in JT'INB' remainder, n^K'NT prin- I
cipium, from B'X'l = B'NI {head) princeps. The termination 6<ft seems to occur in
niODH wisdom (in Pr 1^", 9', joined to a singular ; so also DiDpn Pr 14^, where,
probably, DiMn should likewise be read) and in DibpiH Ec 1", &c., with the
parallel form Dv^in Ec 10''.
§ 87. Of the Plural.
Brockelmann, Grundriss, i. 426 S., and on the feminines, p. 441 ff ;
M. Lambert, ' Remarques sur la formation du pluriel hebreu,' REJ. xxiv.
99 ff., and ' Les anomalies du pluriel des noms en Hebreu,' REJ. xliii. 206 ff. ;
P. LajCiak, Die Plural- u. Dualendungen im semit. Nomen, Lpz. 1903 ; J. Barth,
•Beitrage zur Pluralbildung des Semit.,' ZDMG. 1904, p. 431 ff., i. 'the ai of
the constr. st.'
1. The regular jdural termination for the masculine gender is ^*-r-, a
always with the tone, e.g. D^D horse, plur. D^plD horses; but also very
often written defectively D-^-, especially when in the same word one
of the vowel letters, 1 or \ precedes, e.g. Gn i^^ D?''?^. Nouns in ^-r-
make their plural in C?-^, e. g. ''l^V a Hebrew, plur. Ci'^nny (Ex 3^^) ;
but usually contraction takes place, e. g. ^'^l^V ; D^^V' crimson garments,
from 'if.
Nouns in n__ lose this termination when they take the plural J)
ending, e.g. iTth seer, plur. D^th (cf. § 75 /t). — In regard to Ihe loss
of the tone fiora the D-^ in the two old plurals D^P water and ^)'0^
heaven, cf. § 88 c? and § 96.
The termination D* — is sometimes assumed also by feminines (cf. C
DT? ivomen, § 96 under T\fii ; D"'3K' i/pars, from HJB'; OvDl ^^'^^' ^^'^^
''Dl), so that an indication of gender is not necessarily implied in
it (cf. also below, m-/)). — On the use of this termination C-t- to
express abstract, extensive, and intensive ideas, cf. § 124.
^ [See a complete list of instances in KOnig, Lehrgetaude, ii. i, p. 205 f.]
COWLET B
242 The Noun [§ 87 d-i
Cl The ending im is also common in Phoenician, e. g. D3*lif Sidonii ; Assyrian
lias dni (ace. to P. Haupt originally ami, cf. § 88 d) ; Aramaic has in ; Arabic
una (nominative) and ina (in the oblique cases, but in vulgar Arabic in is
also used for the nominative) ; Ethiopic an. Cf. also the verbal ending p in
the 3rd plur. perf. (§ 44 I) and in the 3rd and 2nd plur. impf. (§ 47 m).^
£ Less frequent, or only apparent terminations of the plur. masc. are —
(a) p , as in Aramaic, ^ found almost exclusively in the later books of the
0. T. (apart from the poetical use in some of the older and even the oldest
portions), viz. pa^O Mngs, Pr 31^, fllllj* i K ii^^^ |ij{-) ijig guard, 2 K ii"^
Y^^r^ wheat, Ez4^; defectively f*X islands, Ez 26^^; pO'' days, Dn 12^'. Cf. also
P'ntp carpets, Ju 5'", in the North-Palestinian song of Deborah, which also has
other linguistic peculiarities ; p*y heaps. Mi 3^^ (before T\; cf. § 44 k) ; p-lQ
words (from the really Aram. Th^), Jb 4^, and twelve other places in Job
(beside D^^O, ten times in Job) ;" further, p*n Jb 24^2, pnnX 31I0, and pOCIB'
La I*, piin 4*. — The following forms are doubtful :
/(6) 1 (with the D rejected, as, according to some, in the dual ^T" for CT
-T • -T
Ez 13'^, cf. § 88 c), e.g. 'ilO stringed instrument?, \p 45' for ClIO (unless it is to
be so written) 3 ; ^!3y peoples, \p 144^, and, probably, also La 3^* (in 2 S 22" it
may be taken as ""Qy my people ; cf. in the parallel passage \p 18^* DV ; also in
Ct 82 the i of ^Jb") is better regarded as a suffix) ; see also 2 S 23^ as compared
with I Ch 1 1^1, and on the whole question Gesenius, Lehrgebdude, p. 524 ff.
More doubtful still is —
^ (c) ''___ (like the constr. state in Syriac), which is supposed to appear in
e. g. iYb' princes, Ju 5^^ (perhaps my princes is intended : read either the constr.
st. nb', which also has good authority, or with LXX Dn'C') ; for 'D1 '•Ji^PI
Jer 22^* (according to others dual, see § 88 c, or a loan word, cf. ZA. iii. 93)
read pDD VJi^n. On i^iS and nin, which have also been so explained, see
above, § 86 2.— ^Dlb'n Is 20* (where the right reading is certainly "•SIK'n)
must be intended by the Masora either as a singular with the formative
syllable ''__ =bareness or, more probably, as a constr. st. with the original
termination ay (cf. § 89 d) to avoid the harsh combination h"sufe set*; in ""JIX
the Lord (prop, my lord, from the plur. majesiatis, D^3"tX lord), the ay was
originally a suffix, § is.s </.
h (d) D a supposed pZwra? ending in D33 = D''33 ffwate (or ?tce), and D?p ladder
(supposed by some to be a plur. like our stairs) ; but cf. on the former, § 85 t.
I 2. The plural termination of the feminine gender is generally
indicated by the termination ni (often written defectively n' — , e. g.
n?nri song of praise, 2>salm, plur. ni?nn (only in post-bihlical Hebrew
^ On the connexion between all these endings see Dietrich's Ahhandl. sur
hebr. Gramm., Leipzig, 1846, p. 51 fif. ; Hal^vy, RE J. 18S8, p. 138 ff. [cf. also
Driver, Tenses, § 6, Obs. 2].
2 So also always in the MeSa' inscription, e.g. line 2 ]\^?iy thirty; line 4
p/D kings ; line 5 \2~\ fC many days, &c.
^ According to some tliis t is simply due to a neglect of the point (§ 5 m),
which In MSS. and elsewhere marked the abbreviation of the plur. ending.
* Priltorlus, ZDMG. 1903, p. 525, regards 'QVKTI as an instance of the affix
of endearment (cf. '•pinX, "'3v3) transferred to an appellative, but such an
explanation is rendered unlikely by the meaning of this isolated instance.
§ 87 A-i^] Of the Plui^al 243
D^nri, as in the headings of the printed editions, as well as nipnri "130
the Booh of Psalms) ; nnjx a letter, plur. rii"l?X ; nX2 a loell, plur.
nhS3. Feminines in r)^__ form their plural in rii>__, e.g. ri'"")^rj
an E(j'>/j)tian looman, plur. rii'"]V'? ; and those in T\'^ either make riV__j
as ni3b» kingdom, plur. T\S'>p^)p, Dn S^^ (cf. ni'Jn ceZZs, Jer 37'«), or are
inflected like J^i"!V. testimonies (pronounced 'edh^wuth for 'edhuiooth).
It is only from a mistake or disregard of these feminine endings HI and A;
n'' that some words ending with them form their plural by the addition
of DV__ or ni , e.g. JT'^n S2}ear, plur. D''ri''3n and niJT'jn ; m] whoredom,
plur. D''n^Jl (by the side of D''31J1) ; D'^niJID^K widoichood ; nSn^np pits, niJlDS
amulets (if connected with Assyr. kdsu, to 6mrf), &c. ,
The termination -oth stands primarily for -dlh (which is the-form it has in I
Arab., Eth., in the consfr. st. of Western Aramaic, in Eastern Syriac, and also
in Assyrian ; on the change of d into an obscure o, see § 9 q). On the other
hand, it is doubtful whether this dth is to be regarded as a lengthened and
stronger form of the singular fem. ending ath (cf. § 80 5^.
How the changeable vowels of a noun are shortened or become
Shed in consequence of the addition of the plural endings is explained
in §§ 92-5-
3. Words which in the singular are used both as masculine and Ifl
feminine (§122 d), often have in the plural parallel forms with the
masculine and feminine terminations, e. g. 3y cloud, plur. D^^y and
ritay ; and each form may be treated either as masculine or feminine,
according to the usage of the particular word. — But even those words,
of which the gender is invariable, sometimes have both plural forms,
e. g. in masc. a generation, plur. D'^'ii'^ and riiiH ; T\W fem. a year,
plur. 0"?^' and DiJ^ (see the Rem.). In these words the gender of
both plural forms remains the same as in the singular, e. g. ^1^ masc.
a lion, plur. ri^ns* masc, Zp 3^ riilil masc, Jb 42".
Sometimes usage makes a distinction between the two plural forms of the n
same word. Thus, D^O^ days, D^3B' years are the usual, but niJD^ (only twice,
in the constr. st. Dt 32'', -i 90^^) and niJK' (also only in the constr. st. and before
suffixes') are rarer poetic forms.
A difference of meaning appears in several names of members of the body, o
the dual (see § 88) denoting the living members themselves, while the plur.
in ni expresses something like them, but without life (§ 122 u), e. g. D^T
hands, niT' artificial hands, also e.g. the arms of a throne ; D''Q3 hands, ni33
handles (Lat. manuhria) ; QV^foot, HICyQ artificial feet (of the ark), Q)PJ> horns,
ni3"lp horns (of the altar) ; D^^y eyes, nS^V fountains; cf. also D''^1X lions, J^V■^^<
the^ figiires of lions on Solomon's throne, "iiori palm, nibn a palm-like column,
plur. onton and Diibn .
4. A considerable number of masculines form their plural in r\S,p
while many feminines have a plural in D^^-. The gender of the
singular, however, is as a rule retained in the plural.
B 2
244 The Noun [§§ 87 q~t, 88 a
Undoubted instances of masculines with (masculine) plural in Jii are :
2X father, "lifit< treasure, 1X3 and "113 cistern, D3t tail, Di^n dream, XE)3 throne,
3_^ and 23^ /jeart, m^ <a6Ze<, ^^b' and H^^b' wzgr/t', HSIJp altar, DipO p?ace, nX3
skin-bottle, "13 ?a?wj(?, lij} sfcm, pip voice, \rib^ table, Dki' wame, "131^' trumpet.
fj Feminines ending in H which take in the plural the termination D^
are HpX terebinth, nD''X terror (but also niJD''X), np3"^ a cafce of figs, ntSPI loAeai,
n33!3 a brick, n?J3 (only in poetry) a «<;or(Z, nXD sea, a dry measure, miyb' barley,
and the following names of animals miST a bee and HJi'' a dove ; also, for
CiifS fem. eggs, a singular njf^3 is to be assumed. n?t)pN s/jc-a/ and HJK' «/ear
(see above, w) take both C . and T\\ ', of. finally n?3K' an ear o/ corn, plur.
DvIEJ', and without the fem. termination in the singular t^:ip''2 concubine,
V 5. A strict distinction in gender between the two plural endings
is found, in fact, only in adjectives and participles, e. g. D^^ID honi,
niS'iD honae, D^PtDp masc, OvtOp fem. So also in substantives of the
same stem, where there is nn express distinction of sex, as ^''^'^JUii,
T\Si'^Jiliae; ^"'PPP reges, rii^po reginae.
S Eem. I. In iome few words there is added to the plural ending ni a
second (masculine) plural termination (in the form of the constr. st. '' , cf.
§ 89 c), or a dual ending D''^, e.g. riD3 a high p'ace, plur. niD3, constr. s'.
■•riiJDS (also ''1)03 bam^the, Is 14^^, Jb 9*, &c., sometimes as Q^re to the K^thibh
Tnoa ; see § 95 0) ; ^^NK' 'nb'X'lD from SauVs head, i S 26" ; noin u-all, plur.
niOin moenia, whence dual D^nto^.n douV.e walls. This double indication of
the plural appears also in the connexion of suffixes with the plural ending
ni (§ 91 m).
t 2. Some nouns are only used in the singular (e. g. D*7X man, and collectively
me7i) ; a number of other nouns only in the plural, e. g. D\"lp men (the old
sing, ino is only preserved in proper names, see § 90 0 ; in Eth. the sing, is
mSt, man) ; some of these have, moreover, a singular meaning (§ 124 a\ as
D'3E3 /ace. In such cases, however, the same form can also express plurality,
e.g. 0^33 means also /aces, Gn 40'', Ez i^ ; cf. D\n?X God, and also gods (the
sing. i^pX, a later formation from it, occurs only ten times, except in Job
forty-one and in Daniel four times).
§ 88. Of the Dual.
Cf. the literature on the Semitic dual in Griinert, Die Begriffs-Praponderam
und die Duals a potiori im Altarab. (Wien, 1886), p. 21 ; Brockelmann, Grundriss,
P- 455 ff-
a 1. The dual is a further indication of number, which originated
in early times. In Hebrew, however, it is almost exclusively used
to denote those objects which naturally occur in pairs (see e). The
dual termination is never found in adjectives, verbs, or pronouns.
In the noun it is indicated in both genders by the termination D^-4-
§ 88 b, c] Of the Dual 245
appended to the ground-form,^ e. g. D^*1J hotli hands, D^.PV two days.
In the feminine the dual termination is always added to the old ending
ath (instead of n_^), but necessarily with a (since it is in an open syllable
before the tone), thus 0^6^, e. g. HDb' U^:,,^ D^D?^ hoth lips. From
a feminine with the ending ri-__i-, e.g. riK'nj (from nPhust) the dual
is formed like C)^^r}} double fetters.
With nouns which in the singular have not a feminine ending, the 0
dual termination is likewise really added to the ground-form; but
the latter generally undergoes certain changes in consequence of^the
shifting of the tone, e.g. H?? wing (ground-form kdnaph), dual D^?>5|,
the first a becoming ^^wd, since it no longer stands before the tone,
and the second a being lengthened before the new tone-syllable.
In I K 16^^ 2 K 5^3^ the form Oni? (which should be D^??) evidently
merely points to the cor)^tr. st. ''133, which would be expected before
fipl; cf. 0^133 in 2 Ks"^"^ and on the syntax see § 131 cZ. In the
segholate forms (§ 84^ a) the dual ending is mostly added to the
ground-form, e. g. hy\foot (ground-form rdgl), dual D^pp ; of., however,
D^?li? (only in the book of Daniel), as well as D^?"]i2 from HP. horn, and
^t^^ from ""rh cheek (as if from the plurals T\Sy\^, D^nj)).— A feminine
dual of an adjective used substantivally occurs in t3^.I?j't?K a sluggish
pair (of hands) Ec 10'® from the sing. ??fy.
Rem. I. Certain place-names were formerly reckoned as dual-forms (so in C
earlier editions of this Grammar, and still in Konig's Lehrgebdude, ii. 437), viz. —
(a) those in |>J_ and |_, e.g. J^nM Gn 37''?« (locative nj^rfl, but in "'' fnM),
and ^nM 2 K 6" ; jnip Jos 21", identical with D^nnp in i Ch 6« (cf. also the
Moabite names of towns in the MeSa' inscription, line 10 |n^1p = Hebrew
D^nnp; line 30 |n^3n n3 = D^ri^3'^ n''3 Jer 48^2 ; lines 31, 32 plin = Dfonh
Is 15^ &c.) ; (&) in D_, Jos 15" Dy};n ( = 0^5''); Gn 3821). The view that
f and D arise from a contraction of the dual terminations pjl. (as in
T T * ~
Western Aramaic, cf. also nom. dni, accus. aini, of the dual in Arabic) and
D"<4- seemed to be supported by the MeV inscription, where we find
(line 20) inXO two hundred = ]'T\it.'0 , Hebrew D^nSD. But in many of these
supposed duals either a dual sense cannot be detected at all, or it does not
agree at any rate with the nature of the Semitic dual, as found elsewhere.
Hence it can hardly be doubted that f^_!_ and D^J_ in these place-names
only arise from a subsequent expansion of the terminations J__ and D__ : so
Wellhausen, Jahrbiicher fiir Deutsche Hieologie, xxi. 433 ; Philippi, ZDMG. xxxii.
65 f. ; Barth, Nominalhildung, p. 319, note 5; Strack, Kommentar zur Genesis,
p. 135. The strongest argument in favour of this opinion is that we have
a clear ease of such an expansion in the Q^re perpetuum (§170) D)?K'^1^ for
□ yWl"' fso, according to Strack, even in old MSS. of the MiSna ; cf. Urusalimi
in the Tel-el-Amarna tablets, and the Aramaic form- Dp^l"!^) : similarly in S
' On dual endings appended to the plural see § 87 s and § 95 0 at the
beginning.
246 The Noun [§ 88 d-g
the Aramaic \'fl\y^ = pp'.i^ for the Hebrew filDb' Samaria.— We may add to
this list D^IDK ClHS the river country (in the Tel-el-Amarna letters narima,
na^rma), Cl^O Eg^jpt, Phoenician D"l>fD ; also the words denoting time,
D^■^^^f midday (Mesa' inscription, line 15 DIHif), and perhaps D^^iy in the
evening^ if the regular expression D^llV'"}"!"'? Ex 12®, 16^2^ &c., is only due to
mistaking D''3"iy for a dual : LXX -npos iffirtpav, to SeiXivov, dipt, and only in
Lv 23S dva fxtaov toiv ((Trrepivwi'. The Arabs also say el 'isd'dn, the two evenings,
of. Kuhn's Literaturhlatt, iii. 48.
Instead of the supposed dual "•"]'' Ez 13** read D^T. On "•ii^H (generally
taken to be a double window) Jer 22", see above, § 87 g,
^ 2. Only apparently dual-forms (but really plural) are the words D^O water
and D^lpE' heaven. According to P. Haupt in SBOT. (critical notes on Isaiah,
p. 157, line 18 fif.), they are to be derived from the old plural forms (found in
Assyrian) mdmi, samdmi, whence the Hebr. D''D D''DK' arose by inversion of
the i, mdmi, mdimi, maim. It is simpler, however, to suppose that the primi-
tive singulars marj and samay, when they took the plural of extension (§ 124&),
kept the tone on the ay, thus causing the im (which otherwise always has the
tone, § 87 a) to be shortened to im. Cf. the analogous formations, Arab.
tardaina, 2nd fern, sing, imperf. of a verb """p, for iarday + ina, corresponding
to taqtidina in the strong verb ; also bibl.-Aram. p33 the abs. st. plur. of the ptcp,
Qal of ri33 (^"''), which otherwise always ends in in with the tone, e.g. in the
p'cp. Qal of the strong verb, pn^T sacrificing.
e 2. The use of the dual in Hebrew is confined, except in the
numerals 2, 12, 200, &c'. (see § 97), practically to those objects
which are by nature or art always found in pairs, especially to the
double membex's of the body (but not necessarily so, cf. D^P"!! and
riiy*^T armSy never in the dual), e.g. DJ'T* both hands, ^^5]^? both ears,
Ci)W teeth (of both rows), also ^)2V.-L a pair of sandals, D??^^ " P^^'''
of scales, Lat. hilanx, Sec. ; or things which are at least thought of
as forming a pair, e.g. D^pV two (successive) days, Lat. biduuni; D^y^ip
two weeks ; D^DJ^ two years (in succession), Lat. hiennium ; D^n^^
two cubits.^
f In the former case the dual may be used for a plural, either indefinite or
defined by a numeral, where it is thought of in a double arrangement, e. g.
D^^n yil~!S/oMr/«e<, Lvii"; 0^233 ^^^ six wings (i.e. three pairs). Is 6^, Ezi«;
even D"':''y iiy^B' seven eyes, Zc ^^, D''3"I3"^3 all knees, Ez 7" : D''l"'~b3 all hands,
Ez 2il= ; D*ripifp cymbals, Ezr 3^" ; D^RDK' douUe-hooks, Ez 40". — To express
a certain empliasis the numeral two is used with the dual, as in Ju 16'^*, Am
3^^ — See some other remarks on the use of the dual in § 87 0 and s.
£" It is not impossible tliat Hebrew at an earlier period made a more extensive
and freer use of the dual, and that the restrictions and limitations of its use,
mentioned above, belong to a relatively later phase of development. The
^ But for D^a")"! Pr 28''-i* (which the Masora takes as two roads leading from
the cross- ways) D'^jI"! is to be read,
§ 89 a] Of the Dual 24-/
Arabic literary language forms the dual in the noun, pronoun, and verb,
almost as extensively as the Sanskrit or Greek ; but in modern Arabic it has
almost entirely disappeared in the verb, pronoun, and adjective. The Syriac
has preserved it only in a few stereotyped forms, with which such duals as
tiie Latin duo, arnho, odo may be compared. In the same way, the dual of the
Sanskrit is lost in the modern Indian languages, and its full use in Old
Slavonic has been restricted later, e.g. in Bohemian, just as in Hebrew, to
pairs, such as hands, feet, eyes, ears. On the Germanic dual, see Grimm's
Gramm., 2nd ed., i. p. 814.
§ 89. The Genitive and the Construct State.
Philippi, Wesen und Ursprung des Stat. Constr. im Hebr. . . ., Weimar, 1871,
p. 98 ff: on which cf. NOldeke in the Gott. Gel. Anzeigen, 1871, p. 23. —
Brockelmann, Grundriss, p. 459 fif.
1. The Hebrew language no longer makes a living use of case- 0.
endings,^ but either has no external indication of case (this is so for
the nominative, generally also for the accusative) or expresses the
relation by means of prepositions (§ 119), while the genitive is mostly
indicated by a close connexion (or interdependence) of the Nomen
regens and the Nomen rectum. That is to say, the noun which as
genitive serves to define more particularly an immediately preceding
Nomen regens, remains entirely unchanged in its form. The close
combination, however, of the governing with the governed noun causes
the tone first of all to be forced on to the latter,^ and the consequently
weakened tone of the former word then usually involves further
changes in it. These changes to some extent aff"ect the consonants,
but moi-e especially the vocalization, since vowels which had been
lengthened by their position in or before the tone-syllable necessarily
become shortened, or are reduced to S^v^d (cf. § 9 a, c, ^ ; § 27 e-r)i) ;
e. g. "'3'n toord, C'y.^ '^?"1 word of God (a sort of compound, as with
us in inverted order, God's-word, hous^^o]), landlord) ; ^^ hand, 1!
T|7Dn the hand of the king ; C"!?"^ tvords, ^V\} ''')!y^. the words of the
2)eople. Thus in Hebrew only the noun which stands before a genitive
suffers a change, and in grammatical language is said to be dependent,
or in the construct state, while a noun which has not a genitive after
it is said to be in the absolute state. It is sufficiently evident from
the above that the construct state is not strictly to be .regarded as
a syntactical and logical phenomenon, but rather as simply 2'honetic
and rhythmical, depending on the circumstances of the tone.
^ On some remains of obsolete case-endings see § 90.
' The same phenomenon of the tone may also bo easily seen in other
languages, when two words are closely connected in a similar way. Observe,
for example, in German the natural stress on the last word in ' der Thron des
Konigs'; though here the other order of the words (inadmissible in Hebrew)
' des Mnigs Thron ' exhibits the same peculiarity.
248 The Noun [§§ 89 i-f, 93 a
b Very frequently such interdependent words are also united by Maqqeph
(§ 16 a) ; tliis, however, is not necessary, but depends on the accentuation in
the particular case. On the wider uses of the constr. st. see the Syntax, § 130.
C 2. The voivel changes which are occasioned in many nouns by the
construct state are more fully described in §§ 92-5. But besides these,
the terminations of the noun in the construct state sometimes assume
a special form. Thus :
(a) In the construct state, plural and dual, the termination is ''-v^,
e. g. D'WD horses, nj^nQ ""DID the horses of Pharaoh ; D^^y eyes. ^.''5/
"nPin the eyes of the king.
(I Rem. The ^__ of the dual has evidently arisen from ""^ (cf. D''^^), but the
origin of the termination ''__ in the constr. st. plur. is disputed. The Syriac
constr. St. in ay and the form of the plural noun before suffixes CDID T]"'D^D
&c., § 91 h) would point to a contraction of an original "•__, as in the dual.
But whether this a?/ was only transferred from the dual to the plural (so
Olshausen, and Noldeke, Beitr. sur sem. Sprachwiss., Strassb. 1904, p. 48 ff.),
or is to be regarded as the abstract, collective termination, as in Hl^N (see/) and
nin (so Philippi, ThLZ. 1890, col. 419 ; Earth, ZDMG. 1904, p. 431 if.), must be
left undecided.
e (b) The original ri__ is regularly retained as the feminine termina-
tion in the construct state sing, of those nouns which in the absolute
state end in n_^j e. g. '"Ilpp queen, i^^P nspO the queen of Sheha. But
the feminine endings T\ * ., n__l., and also the plural Hi — , remain
unchanged in the construct state.
J (c) Nouns in n__ (cf. § 75e) from verbs n"? (§ 93, Paradigm III c)
form their constr. st. in n__j e.g. niSli seer, constr. •I^?"'. If this n___
is due to contraction of the original *'~^, with n added as a vowel
letter, we may compare '''^, constr. '''?| sufficiency, ""n, constr. ""n life;
«;3 (^3), constr. N\3 (\a) valley.
On the terminations i and ''-r- in the constr. st. see § 90.
§ 90. Real and Supposed Remains of Early Gase-endings.
'"i-^ local, ^ in compound proper names, ""-r- and ^ in the
Construct State.
K. U. Nylander, Om Kasuscindelserna i Ilehrdiskan, Upsala, 1882 ; J. Earth,
' Die Casusreste im Hebr.,' ZDMQ. liii. 593 ff.
CI 1. As the Assyrian and old Arabic distinguish three cases by special
endings, so also in the Hebrew noun there are three endings which,
in the main, correspond to those of the Arabic. It is, however, a
question whether they are all to be regarded as real remnants of
former case-endings, or are in some instances to be explained other-
§ po b, c] Remains of Early Case-Endmgs 249
wise. It can hardly be doubted (but cf. h, Rem.) that the (locative)
termination n__ is a survival of the old accusative termination «, and
that 1 in cei'tain compound proper names is the old sign of the
nominative. The explanation of the i as an old genitive sign, which,
as being no longer understood in Hebrew, was used for quite different
purposes, and the view that i is a form of the nominative termination
1, are open to grave doubts.
In Assyrian the rule is that u marks the nominative, i the genitive, and 0
a the accusative,! ' in spite of the many and various exceptions to this rule
which occur' (Delitzsch, Assyrische Gramm., § 66). Similarly, the Arabic
case-endings in the fully declined nouns {Triptotes) are : -u for the nominative,
-i for the genitive, and -a for the accusative ; in the Biptotes the ending -a
represents the genitive also. In modern Arabic these endings have almost
entirely disappeared, and if they are now and then used, as among the
Beduin, it is done without regularity, and one is interchanged Avith another
(Wallin, in ZDMG. v, p. 9, xii, p. 874; Wetzstein, ihid., xxii, p. 113 f.,
and especially Spitta, Gramm. des arab. Vulgdrdialekts ron Agypien, Lpz. 1880,
p. 147 fif.). Even as early as the Sinaitic inscriptions, their regular use is
not maintained (Beer, Stvdia Asiatica, iii. 1840, p. xviii ; Tuch, ZDMG. iii.
139 f."). Ethiopic has preserved only the -a (in proper names -hd), which
is, however, still used for the whole range of the aceusative, and also (the
distinction of case being lost) as a termination of the consir. st. to connect it
with a following genitive.
2. As remarked above, under a, the accusative form is preserved C
in Hebrew most certainly and clearly in the (usually toneless) ending
'"l-^, originally a, as in the old Arabic accusative. This is appended
to the substantive :
(a) Most commonly to express direction towards an object, or
motion to a 2)lace," e. g. ^©^ seaward, westward, ""l^li? eastward, '"IJ^S^
northward, rniU'N to Assyria, '"ip^^ to Babylon, iTin (from "IH) to the
mountain, Gn 14'", nirns to the earth, nn^2 to the house, >^^'^y^ to Tirzah
(nx-iri) I K 14'^ &c.,^nri|y to Gaza (njy)'ju i6' ; with the article nnnn
to the mountain, '"in^jn into the house, '1'i'inn into the chamber, i K i'*;
'"'?J!!^'^^ into tlie tent, Gn 18^, &c. ; similarly with adverbs, as HEK'
thither, HJN whither ? ; even with the constr. st. before a genitive nri^3
..-SI - * *
n(?V into Jose2>h's house, Gn 43'''^^; ^^sn HiflK toward the land of the
south, Gn 20' ; D^i^fJ? nxnN to the land of Egypt, Ex 4^" ; pb'DI H-jf-ip
to the wilderness of Damascus, 1X19'^; CW nnilO toward tlie sun-
rising, Dt 4" ; and even with the plural no'^'IK'? into Chaldea, Ez 11";
no^DE'n towards the heavens.
1 This rule is almost always observed in the Tellel-Amarna letters (see
§ 2/) ; cf. the instances cited by Barth, 1. c, p. 595, f rom Winckler's edition.
^ On this meaning of the accusative see the Syntax, § 118 rf, and cf. the
Latin accusative of motion to a place, as in Romam profectus est, domum reverti,
rus ire.
^ n^riNn in Baer's text, Gn i8', is an error, according to bis preface to
Isaiah, p. v.
250 The Noun [§ 90 d-f
Rem. The above examples are mostly rendered definite by the article, or
by a following genitive of definition, or are proper names. But cases like
ntS^ mn nrr'Il show that the locative form of itself possessed a defining
power.
d {b) In a somewliat weakened sense, indicating the place where
something is or happens (cf. § n8 d), e.g. no^'^Jnp m Mahanaim,
I K 4"; n^^ there (usually thither, see c), Jer i8^, cf. 2 K 23*, and the
expression to offer a sacrifice nn3|Qn, properly towards the altar for on
the altar. On the other hand, n733 Jer 29^^ and n73| Hb 3", are to
be regarded as ordinary accusatives of direction, to Babylon, into the
habitation; also expressions like i^JiS^ ^^^ the quarter towards the
north, Jos 15* (at the beginning of the verse, i^^li^ ■'''"'? ^^'* border
toward the east), cf. i8^^-^", Ex 26^^ Jer 23*.
e (c) The original force of the ending n__ is also disregarded when
it is added to a substantive with a preposition prefixed (cf. also
njx~iy how long ?), and this not only after f, ~?^ or "IJ? (which are
easily explained), e.g. '^^Vv? wpwards, ntSOp downwards, npiSK'p to
Sheol, ^ 9'^ ni^S>^"^y unto Ajihek, Jos I3^ n:'i£5rn-^S toward the north,
Ez 8", cf. Ju 20'^ ; but also after 2, and even after fO, e.g. ^3333 in the
south, Jos 15% cf. Jui4^ iS23>-'», 31", 2820^ Jer52"'i r\b22^
from Babylon, Jer 27^^ cf. i^\ Jos lo^^ 15'", Ju 21", Is 45*.
/ Rem. Old locative forms (or original accusatives) are, according to the
Masora, still to be found in
(a) nyy, in pause nbv, the usual word in prose for night, which is always
construed as masculine. The nominative of this supposed old accusative ^
appeared to be preserved in the form by, only used in poetry, Is 16', constt: st.
b^b (even used for the ahsol. st, in pause Is 21^^). Most probably, however,
T^yb is to be referred, with Noldeke and others, to a reduplicated form vv ;
cf. especially the western Aramaic N v''.^, Syr. lilya, &c. — Another instance is
HDIXID something, probably from DIND, D^O spot, point, generally with a negative
= nothing. Similarly nX"lS Is S^ and (in pause) Jb 34", nnSID Ho 8'', and
the place-name Hifn^ i Ch 6**, might be explained as accusatives. Elsewhere,
however, the toneless n can be regarded only as a meaningless appendage,
or at the most as expressing poetic emphasis ; thus niflX (in pause) Jb 37^* ;
nnyihr} death, i/- 1 1 615; {^pT^JJ \t ii6"i8 . p|l,i-,5 streatn, ^12^*; H^DC'riri amber,
Ez Sz [in 1* ^PK'nn, cf. §8ofc],&c. InJoais" niS'n is probably only a scribal
error (dittography). In Ju 14^8 instead of the quite unsuitable poetic word
nD")nn (towards the sun??) read as in 15^ n"l*inn to the bride-chamber.
^ Brockelmann, Sem. Sprachwiss., p. 113, also takes it as such, Idyld being
properly ui night, then M«^/t< simply. Barth, however {Sprachwiss. Abhandlungen,
p. 16, note i), refers it to an original nbv; like n3J< from ^5^<.
§90^-;^] Remains of Early Case-endings 251
(&) In the termination nn J_ often used in poetry with feminines, viz. g
nn6\Ni terror (=nD''N), Ex 15I6 ; nmiy help (=.Tity), '/'44"> 638, 94"; nnyic'^
salvation ( = 1!))^,^)), \p }?, 80^, Jon 21°; iinS'iy unrighteousness { = r\b)V), Ez 2815,
Ho 10", ^t 1258; nnb'y "A 92^3 a'«/;j. Jb 5I6; nnny i/- 120I; nriD'^j; darkness,
•Jb lo^'^ ; nntspn Jer ii^^ is corrupt, see the LXX and Commentaries. These
cases are not to be taken as double feminine endings, since the loss of the
tone on the final syllable could then hardly be explained, but they are
further instances of an old accusative of direction or intention. In examples
like nrr\]V for help (^ 44") this is still quite apparent, but elsevphere it has
become meaningless and is used merely for the sake of poetical emphasis. ^
This termination n__ usually has reference to pZrtce (hence called k
n__ locale -) ; sometimes, however, its use is extended to time, as in
no''pj D^OJO froiyi year to year. Its use in HTpn, properly ad pro-
fanum/=absit/ is peculiar.
As the termination H is almost always toneless (except in nn^tO constr. st. t
Dt 4*1 ; nns and nny Jos 19^^) it generally, as the above examples show,
exercises no influence whatever upon the vowels of the word ; in the constr. st.
iTli'ltp Jos 1812, I K 19!^, and in the proper names iini i K 2*°, nj"^ 2 S 24®
(so Baer; ed. Mant. and Ginsb. Hi^), ."ins^f 2 Ch 149, nnDIV iKif, HiniV
^ TTT-; ^'t-;it 't-.-.t
I K 4^2, an a is retained even in an open tone-syllable (cf., however, r\'^r\
Gn 14^", 1*1319 Gn 28* from HS, with modification of the a to e : also n?D"l3
1 S 25^ from 71p")3). In segholate forms, as a general rule, the n local is
joined to the already developed form of the ahsol. st., except that the helping-
vowel before H naturally becomes S^icd, e.g. nn"'3 n^HNn Gn iS«, &c. :
T , T ;- > T V: T '
my'n Jos 17'^, my^n ^ Ju 20^', &c., but also n^n3 Nu 34^ (constr. si. ; likewise
to be read in the 'absolute in Ez 47", 4828) and h'ly'.J' Is 28^ (with Silluq) ; cf.
n33p Ez 47^^ and n3"ia (Baer, incorrectly, n3")3) Mi 4I2 (both in pause). — In
the case of feminines ending in H the H . local is added to the original
T T
feminine ending n__ (§ 80 h), the a of which (since it then stands in an
<
open tone-syllable) is lengthened to a, e. g. iinifiri . — Moreover the termination
n is even weakened to n in n33 to Nob, i S 21^, 22' : n3N whither, 1 K 2^'^'^'^
T V V ' V T '
and np'I'n to Dedan, Ez 25^^
3. Of the three other terminations 1 may still be regarded as a /^;
survival of the old nominative ending. It occurs only in the middle
[1 The form clings also to a few place-names, as m3"13 Dt 10'' ; Hti'pt^ i S 9*,
2 K 4« ; nnb'np Nu 3322 '• ; nnit:"' verso 33 f. ; nnjon Jos i9«, &c. : nmss
Mi 5I, &c.]
2 Cf. Sarauw, * Der hebr. Lokativ,' ZA. 1907, p. 183 ff. Ho derives the
n from the adverbs HTSK' n3N and holds that it lias nothing whatever to
T T T ' T T
do with the old accxisative.
» So Qimhi, and the Mant. ed. (Baer iTjyjI'n), i.e. locative from ly"^ (Is 72*';.
The reading niytJ'n (Opit., Ginsb.) implies a feminine in H .
252 The Noun [§ 90 /r
of a few (often undoubtedly very old) proper names,' viz. ''P'lnx (if
compounded of IPN and ''JO), h^^Kin (for which in Jer 52' KHh. ^^"pn),
TX^inp and HptJ'^nrp (otherwise in Hebrew only in the plur. Cno
men\ to ino corresponds most probably 103 in 7X103), ?N1JQ Gn 32^'
(but in ver. 3 2 P??''??) face of God (otherwise only in the plur. 0*33
constr. St. *?.?).- — 1'2K'3 Neh 6^ (elsewhere D?'?.), is the name of an Arab,
cf. 6'. On the other hand the terminations ■•-:- and i are most probably
to be regarded (with Earth, I.e., p. 597) as having originated on
Hebrew soil in order to emphasize the constr. st., on the analogy of
the constr. st. of terms expressing relationship.
In view of the analogies in other languages (see b) there is nothing
impossible in the view formerly taken here that the Utterae compaginis ''___
and i are obsolete (and hence no longer understood) case-endings, I being the
old genitive and 0 for the nominative sign u. Barth objects that the i and 6
almost invariably have the tone, whereas the accusative H . is toneless, and
that they are long, where the Arab, i and ii are short. Both these objections,
however, lose their force if we consider the special laws of the tone and
syllable in Hebrew. The language does not admit a final i or li, and the
necessarily lengthened vowel might easily attract the tone to itself. On the
other hand a strong argument for Barth's theory is the fact that these
Utterae compaginis are almost exclusively used to emphasize the close connexion
of one noun with another, hence especially in the constr. st. Consequently it
seems in the highest degree probable that all these uses are based upon forms
in which the constr. st. is expressly emphasized by a special termination, i. e.
the constr. st. of terms of relationship, ^3X TlX 'JOn from 3N father, HN
brother, Utl father-in-law (cf. § 96). The instances given under I and m followed
this analogy.
Like I, i is also used only to emphasize the constr. st. (see 0), and must
therefore have a similar origin, but its exact explanation is difficult. Accord-
ing to Barth, this 1 cori-esponds to a primitive Semitic a (cf. § 9 3) and is
traceable to 'aba, 'aha, the accusatives of terms of relationship in the constr. st.,
which have a only before a genitive. Against this explanation it may be
objected that there is no trace of the supposed Hebrew accusatives i3X, iHK,
IDn, and only of the analogous iJ3. It is also i-emarkable that so archaic
a form should have been preserved (except in iJ3) only in two words and
those in quite late passages. However we have no better explanation to offer
in place of Barth's.
Finally we cannot deny the possibility, in some cases, of Barth's explana-
tion of the 1 in compound proper names like PNIinS, &c. (see above), as duo to
the analogy of terms of relationship with nominative in 1. But this in no
way militates against the view expressed above, that in some very old
names, like 7S1JQ, 7X103, &c., the original common nominative sign has
simply been preserved.
^ Cf. the list in L. Kaila, Zttr Syntax des in verbaler Abhiingiglceil stvhenden
N omens im alttest. Hehr., Helsingfors, 1906, p. 54.
^ The name 7S1DK' formerly regarded as a compound of IDtJ' = □!!>" name
and 7SI, is better explained with PriUorius, ZDMG. 1903, p. 777, as a name of
affection, for bx PIDK' - i'XyOE'^ [but see Driver on i S i^o] ; similarly,
according to Priitorius, PNinS = 7X niflQ and many others.
§ 90 z-n] Eemains of Early Case-endings 253
Tlie instances found are :
(a) Of the ending "'-^: iJhX \32 Ms asss colt, Gn 49" ; JX^^n >3Vy /
//ia< havetJi the flock, Zc 11'' (of. the preceding ^\^>^n ^p); n3D ^33b' </ie
fZit'eZ/er m ^/te ftus/t, Dt 33'"^ (on ^33^' cf. below Jar 49""', Ob^j;
appended to the feminine '"ipl? '''??,??'' 0*''' T'?,-.? whether stolen hy <Jiay or
stolen hy night, Gn 31^^ (in prose, but in very emphatic speech);
DEtro '•nxbD plena iustitiae, Is i^^- DV ''nil /mZ^ of jpeofle, La i' (on
the retraction of the tone befoie a following tone-syllable, cf. § 29^;
in the same verse the second Tl^"! and T'l^i see below, follow the
example of ''ri3l, although no tone-syllable follows; cf. also Ho 10"
l)elow) ; P"!Jf"''2pp ''n"in"1~^y after the order of Melchizedek, y\r iio^', cf.
also >//■ 1 13', Jer49'^''. To the same category belong the rather numerous
cases, in which a preposition is inserted between the construct state
and its genitive (cf. § 130 a), without actually abolishing the dependent
relation, e. g. 0^13? ''H?! she that was great among the nations, "T'l?'
ni3''"lti)2 j)rincess among the jrrovinces, La 1' ; K'n? '•ri^HN that loveth to
tread, Ho 10"; cf. also Jer 49»°^ Obi— In Ex 15^ ^■!^^{2 can only
be so explained if it is a vocative referring to mn'', but perhaps we
should read "^T^^?. as predicate to '^T'''-\'
Further, i\\e Hireq com2)aginis is found with certain particles which
are really also nouns in the constr. st., as ''riplt ( = ri7lT) except, ^l^
(poetical for lO) from, "•Pp? 7iot, ^DDt< not (thrice in the formula ^3?^
liy '•DDSI / am, and there is none else beside me ; but many take the
^^ as a suffix here). Is 47*'", Zp 2'^ [The above are all the cases in
which this ""-r- is attached to independent words in the O.T. ; it
occurs, however, besides] in compound proper names (again attached
to the constr. St.), as pl?f"''?pP {king of righteousness), ?^''1?2 {7nan of
God), b>?"'3n {favour of God), and others (cf. also the Punic name
Hannibal, i. e. ''y?"'?D favour of Ba'al).
Otherwise than in the constr. st. the Hireq. compaginis is only found VI
in participial forms, evidently with the object of giving them more
dignity, just as in the case of the construct forms in i. AVe must
distinguish, however, between passages in which the participle never-
theless does stand in close connexion, as Gn 49", Is 22'" (^T^^ and 'i?i?n,
also in impassioned speech), Mi 7'* (probably influenced by Dt 33"^),
\// loi^, 113'^; and passages in which the t added to the participle
with the article merely serves as an ornamental device of poetic style,
e.g. in the late Psalms, w^^-^-''-^ (on verse 8 see n), II4^ 123'.
In KHhihh the termination i also occurs four times in ^fiaK'IS i.e. ''J1!l^\ n
Jer iqIt, 2 223 (before 2), Ez 278 (before "^JJ), La 4^1 (before 3). The (fre always
254 ^'^'^ Noun [§§ 90 0, 91 fl, 6
requires for it D^B'i'' (or '^>), except in Jer 222' ra:& ; cf. ibid. "riJJpO KHh.,
naSpp Q're, and finally Jer 51" TlJ^t^ X«<;i., ri3Db^* QVe. Perhaps '•fl^B''' and
'•JTIJDK' are /ormae mlxtae, combining the readings n3J^\ &c. and fl^Ji'^ {2nd fern.
2>erf.), &c., but ''riJ3pJD may be merely assimilated to "'Jjl^ti''' which immediately
precedes it. .
The following are simply textual errors : 2 K 4^' TlsSin K^th., due to the
preceding TlX, and to be read flD^nn as in the Q^re; \p 30^ (read ''~ir}'l)) ^^3*
(read *l2''K'inp), 116I (read 'Tin ?ip, as in five other places). On WIS,
thrice, in Lv'26«, cf. § 128 d.
0 {h) Of the ending i ' (always with the tone) : in prose only in the
Pentateuch, but in elevated style, Gn i^'' J*T!^"''n^.n the beast of the earth
( = }^7.Sn n>n ver. 25) ; similarly in ^ 50'", 79-, 104"-^°, Is 56^ (twice),
Zp a'"*; otherwise only in "tQ-f i33 son of Zippor, Nu 23'*; "^V^ iJ3 son
of Beor, Nu 24^-^^; and 0^9 ^^''.VP a fountain of waters, >//■ 114*.
§ 91. The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes.
W. Diehl, JDas Pronomen pers. suffixum 2 m. 3 pers. plur. des Hehr., Giessen,
1895 ; A. Ungnad, 'DasNomen mit Suffixen im Semit.,' Vienna OrientalJournal,
XX, p. 167 if.
a With regard to the connexion of the noun with pronominal suffixes,
which then stand in a genitive relation (§ 33 c) and are, therefore,
necessarily appended to the construct state of the noun, we shall first
consider, as in the verb (§57 ff.), the forms of the suffixes themselves,
and then the various changes in the form of the noun to which they
are attached. The nouns are also tabulated in the Paradigms of the
flexion of the noun in § 92 ff. Cf. also Paradigm A in the Appendix.
We are here primarily concerned with the different forms of the
suffixes when added to the singular, plural, and dual.
I) 1. The Suffixes of the singular are —
With nouns ending in a —
Vowel.
Consonant
Sing. I. c. ■•
^ . my.
(in. T
^ . {pause V. )]
thy.
m. in, 1
i (n-), in ' his.
n__., n4_ her.
1 Cf. Kaila, I.e., p. 59 ff.
§ 91 c-e] The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes 255
Vowel.
Const
mant.
n\ I. c. ^3
« ' our.
m. D?
2.
i/f?
(7n. on
°T }
3-^
io
(poet. to;)j
eorum.
. /. ?? (?n)
U
earuin
Rem. I. There is less variety of forms in these than in tho verbal suffixes ; C
the particular forms are used as follows : —
(a) Those without a connecting vowel (on the derivation of these 'con-
necting vowels' from original stem-vowels, see note on § 58/) are generally
joined to nouns of a peculiar form (see § 96), the constr. s(. of which ends in
a vowel, as ?I''3N ^n"'3K and V3X, n-ifx, l^flS DD'-aS* p''3S* Dn^N, pn^
sometimes also to segholate forms ending in i from n"? stems (see § 93 x,y),
0. g. Dri''*lQ the fruit of them, Am 9^^ (also D^lS Is 37'", &c.), fPinS Jer 29^8 (also
p"13 verses); cf., moreover, fHSpPI Lv S^''-^^ and similar examples with JH
(Is' 3" ]r\) Gn 2i28, E2 ijn 1663; i '■ Also in Gn i^i, 4*, Ez 10", Nah 2», &c., the
K't i. perhaps intends the singular, DH^VIip, &c., but the Masora requires the
plural with defective e.
(6) The forms with connecting vowels (§ 58/") are joined to nouns ending u
in a consonant. The connecting vowel is regularly a in the 3rd sing. fern. H
^ (for aha) and 3r(ZpZMr. D iP " ] also in the 3rd sing. masc. S (H), since
the 6 is contracted from «[/»]«, and in the pausal form of the 2nd masc. "^JL-
(a modification of original ^-L).
The f rms with e in the above-mentioned persons are common only with
nouns in n__ (from stems T\"?), constr. st. H (cf. § 89/), e.g. liTlK' (from
sadaihix) his field ; H^J? its leaf, Is 1'"; nX"llO the appearance thereof, Lv 13* (from
maraiha ; on the S^ghol see k) ; but mC her field. The orthographic retention
of the ""j e. g. ^''CJ'yO, V^yO^ gives to many forms the appearance of plurals ;
see the instances in § 93 ss.
Apart from these H"? forms the connecting vowel e in the 3rd pers. occurs
only in isolated cases; 1nT^? his light, Jb 25^; 'inp/ttp after its kind, Gn ii^-^s
[+12 times] ; Na i^^ ; in Ju 192* read iK'|ip''Q as in vv. 2, 25. On the other
hand '^___ in the 2nd sing. fern, and ^3_L in the ist plur. are by far the more
common forms, while '^. ^ 13_^ are of rare occurrence ; see e. — Instead of
^—. (nD^_ in Gn 10", Ex 13^6, Jer 2925, &c., cf. n33, Hd!? § 103 g), D3_ , |3^_
(with S^ud mobile), if the last consonant of the noun is a guttural, the forms
are ^__ DD__^ P-^:-) ®'S* ^H'''^ ^^^ spirit, ^X"13 thy creator, Is 43I, DDi)n your
friend, Jb 6^'' (on such cases as D33in3 Hag 2^, see § 10 g). — With Nmi
energicum (cf. § 58 i, and on "^IJij? Jb 5^, &c., cf. § 61 h) 1*T_ occurs in Pr 25^^,
in principal pause.
2. Kare or incorrect forms are —
Sing. 1st pers. ^3_1_ in ^Jlllf'Il Ez 47'' (certainly only a scribal error, caused C
by V?^!! in verse 6).
1 Also in Jer 15I0 read (according to § 61 /}, end) ''3wfP Dl"?? ; in Ho 7«
probably DnSK for DnDX.
256 The Noun [.U^Lo
2nd pers, m. in pause n3_l-, e.g. nSQS {thy hand), \(/ 139^, cf. Pr 24I'; once
^'^P ^ hZ^ (cf- the analogous cases in the verbal suffix § 75 II) ; ftm. !)"• Ez 5^2
(in i663 also for Tl^n"'aK' probably '!]''n''3K' is intended), >'2JL. Jer iii^, ^ 1038,
ii6i^, 1358 (corresponding to the Aramaic suffix of the 2nd fern. sing. ; on the
wholly abnormal n^JL Na 2", cf. I), ''3_7 Km. 2 K 42, Ct 2". Also TJ_L Is 22^,
Ez 2328, as''. _ ■■ ■■ "■
3rd pers. ri (cf. § 7 c), e.g. ii^^i< Gn g!^\ 12^ 13^, 35^1 (always with Q^re
i^nX); nm Nu lo^S; nhb Dt 34''";' ri->3 Jer 20^, Na 2I Q«re; nj^p 2 K 1923
A'^^X., for which iSj? is read in Is 37^^ ; nh''J? and nniD Gn 49", cf. Ex 2226
(Q'-re "iTy, "iniD); nsD ^ io9, 2f K^ih.; nii*iDn EZ31I8, &c., A'«</j. ; nhx^n
Ez48'8 [altogether fourteen times in the Pentateuch, and some forty times in
other books : see Driver, Samuel, p. xxxv, and on 2 S 2^, 21^].
^rclfeni. n for PI (with the softening of the Mappiq, cf. § 23 k, and the
analogous cases in § 58 g) occurs repeatedly before B'ghadhk'^phath and other
soft consonants, Ex 9^^ (before 1, if the text is right), Lv 13* (before ?),
Nu 1528-31^ I S 1' (unless DppK, the infin. with fem. termination, is intended ;
nh^ follows), Ez i6«, 246" (before n), 1 S 2020, 2 K 8«, Pr 1 228 (before S), Na 3^
(before 1), ^t 48^* (before D), Ez 4710, Jb 3122 twice (before n), Is 212, Jer 20"
(before H), Nu 32*2, Am i^^ (before 3), Lv62 (before J?) ; even in pause, Lv 12*"
and 5''; Is 23", Pr 2122, also with Zaqeph, Is 45^, Jer 6^ (probably), 44"; on
riQB'n Lv 26^*, &c., see § 67 y, Cf. also N Ez 36^ — Sometimes the Masora
appears (but this is very doubtful) to regard the H with feminines as
a shortening of HD. , e.g. rlS3 Gn 4010 for HD^J v\lB Pr 78 for rin3Q; also
D for on in 03^303 Ho T32 and DDIU Jb j^^. The examples, however,
are for the most part uncertain, e.g. in Is 28* the reading is simply to be
emended to nni33, and in Zc 42 to n^3, Jb ii^ to iT^O, Neh 5" to nns. [See
also, after prepositions, § 103 gr.]
J Plur. 1st pers. ^3_L, in pause ^JD"*!? Jb 2220 (where, however, ^JDp is certainly
to be read) ; cf. Ru 32 [Is 471", cf. § 61 c, h], and so always ^J?3 aU of us,
Gn 42", &c [cf. !|33, IjS ijnK iJtSyl.
<
2nd pers. /em. HJD Ez 23*8-^^
3rd pers. masc. i?3_L ^ 17^" (on ID in )J2^Q in the same verse, and in ip 58''
see I) ; DH 2 S 23', according to Sievers probably to call attention to the
reading 0,1^3. Fem. HjnJ- i K 7'^, Ez 16^3 (in pause) ; HJJL Gn 4121 ; n34_
Gn3o*'; nJJL Ru i^*; elsewhere generally in pause (Gn 212', ^2^^, Jer S'',
Pr 3129, Jb 2^2^ . finally JH as suffix to a noun, only in Is 3".
For examples of singulars with plural suffixes see I.
g 2. In the iJlural masc. and in the dual the suffixes are to be
regarded primarily as affixed to the original ending of the construct
state ('-1., cf. § 89 d). This ending, however, has been preserved
unchanged only in the 2nd fem. In most cases it is contracted to ^-^,
as in the constr. at. without suffixes (so throughout the plur. and in
the poetical suffix ^'"l"".!, of the -^rd sing, masc.) ; in the 2nd masc. and
■^rd fem. sing, it is *'^r- (cf. k). On the ist pers. and '^rd masc. sing.
see i. — Thus there arise the following
1
§9iA-A;] 2Vie Noun with Pronominal Suffixes 257
Suffixes of Plural Nouns. Ji
1
Singular,
c. ''-^-, pause "•-r^ my.
{f.r.l, pause T.4-Y^'^'
m. 1"'^p-, poet. ^n''4- his.
f. n^4- her.
Plural.
I. c. ^3^4-
(m. Dnv, poet, ^t:^-!-) , .
our.
ycur.
Thus the original ''^:r- is (a) contracted in the 3rc? sing. masc. i
^n^JL and throughout the jdural, as IIT'DID, 13''piD, &c.; (6) retained
unchanged in the ist sing. "'DID, the real suffix-ending '' (see b) being
united with the final Yodh of the ending ''-^-; and in the 2nd fern.
sing. '^?WD, with a heljnng-Hireq after the Yodh. On the other hand
(c) the yd(Z^ of ""-^ is lost in pronunciation and the a lengthened to a,
in the ^rd masc. sing. VD1D, i. e. sUsaw (pronounced susd-u).^ The
2nd masc. sing. 'J''P^D and the "^rd fern. sing. i^"'P^D were formerly
also explained here as having really lost the \ and modified the a of
silsakd, sUsahd to S^ghol ; but cf. the view now given in g and k.
< < < f
Rem. I. As ^J^D^D represents susai-nu, so^'^D^D and n^D^D represent susai-kd, A;
susai-hd, and the use of S^ghol instead of the more regular Sere is to be explained
from the character of the following syllable, — so P. Haupt who points to
n?tpi?^ as compared with iH^DpV In support of the view formerly adopted
by us that the "i is only orthographically retained, too much stress must not
be laid on the fact that it is sometimes omitted,^ thereby causing confusion
in an unpointed text with the singular noun. A number of the examples
which follow may be due to an erroneous assumption that the noun is a plural,
where in reality it is a singular, and others may be incorrect readings. Cf.
^5"1"'| thy ways (probably ^|l"|"n is intended), Ex 33^^, Jos i^, ip 119^'' ; for other
examples, see Jos 21" *f- (ilBnjjp ; but in i Ch 6^* *^- always n"*.!.), Ju 19^
I K 8^9, Is 58'^, f ii94i<3-98 (probably, however, in all these cases the sing.
is intended); nnON Nu 30* (cf. v. 5); nnSQ Jer 198, 49"; nA''3?D Dn 118.
For tlie orthographic omission of ^ before suffixes cf. ^ny"l for IJT'yi his friends
I S 30^2^, Pr 29^* ; Jb 42^" (but it is possible to explain it here as a collective
singular) ; ^Jjiy our iniquities, Is 64^-^, Jer 14'' ; Ex 10^, Neh 10^ (^J>v fi"om D*v
which is always written defectively) ; D33D3 Nu 29^^ . 03^1^)^ Jer 44^ ; DSl"*
\p 134''; Dnyop after their kinds, Gn i" (but see c), cf. 4* and Na 2^ The
^ In the papyrus of the decalogue from the Fayyum, line 16, VC^p'"'! occurs
for intinp^l Ex 20". Gall, ZAW. 1903, p. 349, takes this as an indication
that the traditional forms of the noun-suffix V or 1 represent am or eu.
P. Haupt aptly compares the Greek use of the iota subscript (a).
2 So in the MSIa' inscription, 1. 22 nnblJlO its towers (along with n^iyty its
gates). Can it have been the rule to omit ^ after the termination 6th ? Cf.
below, n.
COWLKT g
258 ' The Noun [§ 91 i-n
defective writing is especially frequent in the 3r(i masc. sing. 1 , which in
Q^re is almost always changed to V , e.g. 1J?n his arrows, \p 58^, Q^e VSH.
On 1"'in^, only three times V^H^, cf. § 135 r.
/ 2. Unusual forms (but for the most part probably only scribal errors) are —
Sing. 2nd pers. Jhn T]^__ (after ^"IK'X happy! Ec lo^'', which has become
stereotyped as an interjection, and is therefore unchangeable; cf. Delitzsch
on the passage) ; '<:?'' JL (cf. Syr. ''3__) 2 K 4^, and '^ in K^th., ^ loa'-s, 116''
(*3^_1_ in pause).— In Ez 16^1 T]^_I- (^o D?^-^ ^^ 6^) occurs with an infiti.
ending in Di, the fli being therefore treated as a plural ending ; similarly,
the plural suffix is sometimes found with the feminine ending ni (Nu 1423,
Is 54<, Jer 3^ Ez 16^^, 23'', as well as in 16^° Q^re, and Zp 3^0), with the ending
ith (Lv 5^^*, reading iDK'JDn), and even with the ordinary feminine ending ath ;
Is 47's, Ez 35^^, xp g^^, Ezr g^^. — Wholly abnormal is naSxplO thy messengers,
Na 2", evidently a case of dittography of the following H : read !]''3n?P.
3rd masc. 5in''_l. Hb 310, Jb 24^3 ; !|n_l. i S 3o2«, Ez 43", Na 2* ; '<riS (a
purely Aramaic form) >// 116^^. — ^rdfem. Nn^_L Ez 41^^.
Plur. The strange 2nd pers. masc. DDTliViDW (with t, so Qimhi ; cf. Norzi)
Jer 253*, is probably a mixed form combining ^2flDn and DD''ni^''Qn ; fern.
n35"'__ Ez 13"'.
2,rd masc. nDn''__ Ez 40^6 ; fern. T]ir\''^^ Ez 1".
3. The termination iD_!- (also with the dual, e.g. if> 58'', 59"), like \T2 and
iD_L, occurs with the noun (as with the verb, § 58 gr) almost exclusively in
the later poets [viz. with a substantive in the singular, if/ 21^^ I7i''-i", 58'',
5913, 89IS; with a dual or plural, Dt ^2^^■32.3■!.3S^ 33=^ i/- 23-3, 11'', 35I6, 49I2, 58^
69"» 73^'^> 83"•^^ 140*1'*, Jb 27^3. after prepositions, see § 103/, 0, notes], and
cannot, therefore, by itself be taken as an indication of archaic language.
On the other hand there can be no doubt that these are revivals of really old
forms. That they are consciously and artificially used is shown by the evi-
dently intentional accumulation of them, e. g. in Ex is^''-^ >p 2^-'^, and i^o*'^'',
and also by the fact observed by Diehl (see the heading of this section) that
in Ex 15 they occur only as verbal suffixes, in Dt 32 only as noun suffixes.
171 3. It is clear and beyond doubt that the Yodh in these suffixes
with the plural noun belongs, in reality, to the ending of the construct
state of the masculine plural. Yet the consciousness of this fact
became so completely lost as to admit of the striking peculiarity
(or rather inaccuracy) of appending those SM^cc-forms which include
the plural ending ''-^, even to the feminine plural in T\S (l^'niDID,
^'niDip, &c.), so that in reality the result is a double indication of
the plural.^
^ Such is the rule : the singular suffix, however (see b), also occurs with the
ending HI (probably through the influence of Aramaic), e.g. Tlinj? ^ 132"
(unless it be sing, for '•ri'ny, as, according to Qimhi in his Lexicon, '"Jlinn 2 K
68 is for ''ni^nn); ^nbO Dt 28^9 (treated on the analogy of an infin.''n''b);
1 See an analogous case in § 87 s. Cf. also the double feminine ending in
the 3rd sing. per/, of verbs T]"p, § 75 i.
§ 91 o~q'\ The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes 259
l]nvn« Ez i652_ On the other hand ^Oi^O (so Baor, Ginsb. ; but Opit. Tj-JL)
^t 11958, Dn 9^ is merely written defectively, like ^niSlS according to Baer
(not Ginsb.) in Pr i^, «&c. In the ird plur. the use of the singular suffix is
even the rule in the earlier Books (see the instances in Diehl, 1. c, p. 8),
e.g. DnnX (their fathers) oftener than DH^'niX (this only in i K 14^^ and in
Jer, Ezr, Neh, and Ch [in i K, Jer, Ezr, however, DHUX is more common]) ;
so always DJliOB' JJliCB' their names, DOII^I their (fenerations. From parallel
passages like 2822*^ compared with \// iS<«, Is 2* with Mi 4^ it appears that
in many cases the longer form in DH"'-;^ can only subsequently have taken
the place of D .
4. The following Paradigm of a maeouline and feminine noun 0
with suffixes is based upon a monosyllabic noun with one unchangeable
vowel. "With regurd to the ending n.^ in the constr. st. of the fem.
it should be further remarked that the short a of this ending is only
retained before the grave suffixes D? and |3 ; before all the others
(the light suffixes) it is lengthened to a.
Singular. p
Masculine.
DID a horse.
^p^D my horse.
^P^D thy horse.
!]plD thy horse.
IDID equus eius (suus).
HDID equus eius {suus).
Sing. I. com
nn.
/■
Im.
I,
3-
Feviinine.
noiD a mare.
"irip^D my mare.
^npID thy mare.
!|rip1D thy mare.
inp^p equa eius (sua).
/.
rinp^p equa eius {sua).
riur.
2.
com. ^3p^D our horse,
m. D3pip your horse.
f-
m.
f.
Sing.
com.
m.
I/.
m.
/•
15 pip your horss.
Dp^D equus corum {suus).
ip^D equus earum {suus).
Plural.
Masculine.
D'piD horses.
^pID my horses.
<
^■•pID thy horses.
<
Tj^p'iD thy horses.
VpiD equi eius (lui).
n^piD equi eius {sui).
Plur. I . com. 1J''plD our horses.
m. D?'pip your horses.
y. J^'piD your horses.
\m. Diil^P^p equi eorum, {sui).
^ 1 /. in^pID equi earum {sui).
s 2
l^npip our mare.
DDr^P^p your mare.
l^ripID your mare.
Drip^D equa eorum (sua).
|rip1D equa earum {sua).
Feminine.
niD^D mares.
"•n'lDID my mares.
^"•niD^p thy mares.
•il^niDlp thy mares.
VriiD^p equae eius (suae).
n^rilDID equae eius {suae).
^JTllDID our mares.
DD''riiDlD your mares.
]yiy\D^D your mares.
Dn'niDID equae eorum (suae).
{n'rilDID equae earum {bUMe).
26o The Noun [§ 92 a-a.
§ 92. Vowel Changes in the Noun,
a 1. Vowel changes in the noun may be caused (a) by dependence
on a following genitive,* (6) by connexion with pronominal suffixes,
(c) by the plural and dual terminations, whether in the form of the
absolute state or of the construct (before a following genitive of
a noun or suffix).
h 2. In all these cases, the tone of the noun is moved forward either
one or two syllables, while the tone of the construct state may even
be thrown upon the following word. In this way the following
changes may arise : —
(a) When the tone is moved forward only one place, as is the case
when the plural and dual endings ^''-r-, riT and D?-l- are affixed, as
well as with all monosyllabic or paroxytone suffixes, then in dissyllabic
nouns the originally short vowel of the first syllable (which was
lengthened as being in an open syllable before the tone) becomes
§^wd, since it no longer stands before the tone. On the other hand,
the originally short, but tone-lengthened vowel, of the second syllable
is retained as being now the pretonic vowel ; e. g. "i^'l word (ground-
form ddbdr), plur. ^''l.'^'l ', with a light suffix beginning with a vowel,
na-n, ^ann^; plur. n3"=|, ^i?^, &c.; «133 mng, dual D)DJ3. With an
unchangeable vowel in the second syllable : ^N?? overseer, plur. C'l^'^Q;
with the suffix of the sing. 'I'i?^, «Ti?Q, &c.; with the suff. of the
plur. ^1''i?S, ^''^.''pS, &c. With an unchangeable vowel in the first
syllable: D^iy eternity, plur. D'»^iy, with mff. ^^h^V, &c.'
C But in participles of the form ?^p, with tone-lengthened e (originally
i) in the second syllable, the e regularly becomes S^wd mobile before
a tone-bearing affix, e. g. ^.I^^ enemy, plur. Q""?^**, with suffi. ^^^M, &c.
Likewise in words of the form b^i?, b^i?, &c. (with e in the second
syllable ; § 84* d, I, j); § 85 i and k), e. g. uPH dumb, plur. CD^i^.
d (b) When the tone of the constritct state, plural or dual, is carried
over to the following word, or, in consequence of the addition of
the grave suffixes to the constr. st. plur. or dual, is moved forward
two places within the word itself, in such cases the originally short
vowel of the second syllable becomes ^^wd, while the vowel of the
first syllable reverts to its original shortness, e. g. DVn '"i?"l the words
of the people, D3^"13'7 your words, D^^"'.?'^ their words (in all which
instances the i of the first syllable is attenuated from an original a).
* The participles Niph'al '^H'Ti Dt 30*, irTIS 2 S 14", and some plurals of the
participle Niph. of verbs N"b form an exception ; cf. § 93 00.
§ 92 e-fc] Vowel Changes in the Noun 261
In the segholate forms in the singular and mostly in the dual the suflfix is C
appended to the ground-form C'SpD my king, ^33plD, &c.) ; on the other hand,
before the endings D"* HI (sometimes also before D''_L) a Qames regularly
occurs,^ before which the vowel of the first syllable then becomes vocal S'wd
(D^3?D niaPD). This Qames (on which cf. § 84" a) remains even before the
light suffixes, when attached to the plur. masc. CS/D, ^"'5''^) &c.). On
the other hand, the constr. st. plur. and dual, regularly, according to d, has
the form ""^PD, with grave suffix D5''3''P)&c., ^71?"^ from D^rib'l folding-doors.
(c) Before the o^wd mobile which precedes the suffix ^ when f
following a consonant, the a-sound, as a rule, is the only tone-
lengthened vowel which remains in the final syllable (being now
m an open syllable before the tone), e.g. ''JOT, 'J"!,?"^, &c. (on the
forms with e in the second syllable, see § 93 5^5-) ; but before the grave
suffixes D^-r ^°*^ '?-^ ^^ ^^^ same position it reverts to its original
shortness, as ^5'!?"^ {d^bhdrkhem), &c. In the same way the tone-
lengthened a or e of the second syllable in the constr. st. sing, also
becomes short again, since the constr. st. resigns the principal tone to
the following word, e. g. D^D'Sk in"! ; n^|n ixn (from ivn).
Rem. The Masora (cf. Liqduqe ha-famim, p. 37) reckons thirteen words jo*
which retain Qames in the constr. st., some of which had originally d and
therefore need not be considered. On the other hand, Dp^S or D?N i K 7*,
Ez 40", &c. (in spite of the constr. si. plur. ''GiSs) ; nC3» ^ 65*, Pr 25*9 ; D^O
1 S 1 323 (so Baer, but ed. Mant., Ginsburg, &c. 35fp) ; iJpK'D Ezr 8*° and |riD
Pr 18'* are very peculiar.
3. The vowel changes in the inflexion of feminine nouns (§ 95) are h
not so considerable, since generally in the formation of the feminine
either the original vowels have been retained, or they have already
become S^wd.
Besides the vowel changes discussed above in a-g, which take place according t
to the general formative laws (§§ 25-28), certain further phenomena must also
be considered in the inflexion of nouns, an accurate knowledge of which
requires in each case an investigation of the original form of the words in
question (see §§ 84-86). Such are, e.g., the rejection of the n of n'v stems
before all formative additions (cf. § 91 d), the sharpening of the final consonant
of y"y stems in such cases as ph ^jpn, &c.
A striking difference between the vowel changes in the verb and noun is ^
that in a verb when terminations are added it is mostly the second of two
changeable vowels which becomes S^wd (bcp rOt2p \?Dp), but in a noun,
the first 02"^^ nn'n , onn-i), cf. § 27. 3. - •" ^ = •'' = >"
* For the rare exceptions see § 93 I and § 97/, note 2.
262 The Noun [§ 93 a-d
§ 93. Paradigms of Masculine Nouns}
Cl Masculine nouns fiom the simple stem may, as regards their form
and the vowel changes connected with it, be divided into four classes.
A synopsis of them is given on pp. 264, 265, and they are further
explained below. Two general remarks may be premised :
(a) That all feminines without a distinctive termination (§ 122 /i)
are treated like these masculine nouns, e.g. ^l^/. sward, like \yb m.
king, except that in the ^^Zwra/ they usually take the termination Hi ;
thus J^i3")n, constr. T\\2~\n (and so always before suffixes, see § 95). ^
b (b) That in the plural of the first three classes a changeable vowel
is always retained even before the light suffixes as a lengthened
pretonic vowel, whenever it also stands before the plural ending C^-.
All suffixes, except M, f3, DH, jn (D3V, f?V , °?W> lO'-^)- are
called light. Cf. § 92 e.
Exjplanations of the Paradigms (see pp. 264, 265).
6' 1. Paradigm I comprises the large class of segholate nouns (§ 84*^
a-e). In the first three examples, from a strong stem, the ground-
forms, mdlk, siphr, quds have been developed by the adoption of a
helping S^ghol to '^b'O (with o modified to e), ^Sp (i lengthened to e),
^IP {u lengthened to o).^ The next three examples, instead of the
helping S^ijhol, have a helping Paf^aA, on account of the middle {d, f)
or final guttural (e). In all these cases the constr. st. sing, coincides
exactly with the absolute. The singular suffixes are added to the
ground-form ; but in c and /an 6 takes the place of the original u,
and in d and/ the guttural requires a repetition of the a and 6 in the
form of a Hateph CI^P-, V^,?) ; before a following ^^wd this ITafeph
passes into a simple helping vowel (a, 0), according to § 28 c; hence
V^}-, &c.
d In the plural an a-sound almost always appears before the tone-
bearing affix D''-r- (on the analogy of forms with original a in the
^ A sort of detailed commentary on the following scheme of Hebrew
declensions is supplied by E. Konig in his Sist.-krit. Lehrgeb. der hebr. Spr.,
ii. I, p. I fif.
'^ According to P. Haupt 'The book of Nahum' in the Joum. of bibl. Lit,
1907, p. 29, the e in "lElp and the 0 in {yip are not long but accented, and
hence to be pronounced ai^p, 6^v (flN), a theory unknown at any rate to the
Jewish grammarians.
§ 93 e-A] Paradigms of Masculine Nouns 263
second syllable ; cf. § 84'' a), in the form of a pretonic Qames, whilst
the short vowel of the first syllable becomes vocal S'^wd. The original
a of the 2nd syllable is elided in the constTuct state, so that the
short vowel under the first radical then stands in a closed syllable.
The omission of Dages in a following Begadkephath ("'?f'P, not *lr"Pj
&c.) is due to the loss of a vowel between ? and 3. On the other
hand, the pretonic Qames of the absolute state is retained before the
light plural suffixes, whilst the grave suffixes are added to the form
of the construct state. — The ending of the absolute state of the dual
is added, as a rule, to the ground-form (so in a-d and h, but cf. k).
The construct state of the dual is generally the same as that of the
plural, except, of course, in cases like m.
Paradigms g and h exhibit forms with middle u and i (§ 84*^ c, y g
and 8) ; the ground forms maul and zait are always contracted to moth,
zeth, except in the absol. sing., where u and i are changed into the
corresponding consonants 1 and V
Paradigm i exhibits one of the numerous forms in which the
contraction of a middle u or i has already taken place in the absol.
sing, (ground-form saut).
Paradigm A is a formation from a stem n ? (§ 84" c, e).
Paradigms I, m, n are forms from stems y''y, and hence (see § 6*] a) J
originally biliteral, yam, 'im, huq, with the regular lengthening to
^\, 0^, pn. Before formative additions a sharpening, as in the
inflexion of verbs y'^y, takes place in the second radical, e.g. ^^^,
D^s:, &c. (see § 84" c, /?).
Kemaeks.
I. A. On I. a and d (ground-form qatl). In pause the full lengthening to a />*
generally takes place, thus D'li) vineyard, "iy5, yi] seed (from Vl)), and so
always (except xp 48^'), in y}^ earth with the article, ^^.'^^j according to § 35 0
(cf. also in the LXX the forms 'Aj3e'X, 'la<pie for ^nn^ DD^). However, the
form with e is also sometimes found in pause, along with that in a, e.g. ^p^
together with ^p^ ; and very frequently only the form with S^ghol, c. g. TJ^D,
.< < ' t < < < * '.<
KB'T grass, nX3 perpetuity, NpQ a wonder, pl2f righteousness, Dip the East, 2^^^
help, &c. — With two S'ghols, although with a middle guttural, we find QVO
(< < < <
Iread (in pause Dn^) and DPIT womb (in pau^e DD'')> besides DHT Ju 5^" (in pause
Dni). A helping S^ghol always stands before a final N, as KJ^"1 t<J)t3 (with
suff. "^N3^), xbi, N"?.S (also written ITIB), except in N^3, see v.
B. The constr. st. is almost always the same as the absolute. Sometimes, /t,
however, under the influence of a final guttural or T, Pathah appeai-s in the
second syllable as the principal vowel (see below, s), e.g. 133 f 18**; VI]
264
The Noun
[§93
I.
Paradigms of
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
/•
Sing, absolute
^^?
IDD
^i>
ny3
1^^?.
bya
„ construct
(Icing)
(book)
{sanduury)
(a 2/0M«/i)
{perpetuity)
ml
{work)
bya
„ with light suj^.
^?!'p
"•"ISD
'^1^
nyj
^nx3
^f>y3
• t:it
ir>)>^
^"Ipp
^ni?
'^T^^
"^nv?
^^yQ
': Tit
„ with g rave suff.
D??!'^
0?1?>D
'3?t:'"!i?
V : 1^
Dsn^j
DD^ya
v: TIT
Flur. absolute
• T J
onsD
• t't:.
Dny3
' T :
D^ni'3
D\byQ
„ construct
^?^P
nsp
^^15
nyp_
"•rii'a
iva
„ loith light suff.
"•P^l?
T !
. - t't:.
^ny;
>nv3
~ T :
'-^V?
„ with grave suff .
oa^^bp
t^?^"*.??
ds'-K'ni^
Danyj
D?^nv?
D3''bya
V ••t:it
Dual absolute
i^in
D^pi?
^5y?-
{feet) {two heaps) {loins)
[proper name.]
{sandals)
„ construct
\^?1
'>:m
^!?y3
II.
a.
b.
c.
Sing, absolute
T T
D3n
T T
m
{word)
{wise)
{an old ma
„ construct
"'^'l
D?n
m
„ loiih light suff.
"T :
^Dsn
'm
IW
^p3n
„ with grave suff.
13?'!?"=!
D5»Dn
Flur. absolute
D''??n
^'^p\
„ construct
nn-n
'??D
V.i?!
„ with light suff.
'^i?l
„ with grave suff.
D?^?3D
^Tm
Dual absolute
D^S32
• -T ;
• - T -:
^)^y.
{wings)
(Joins)
{thighs)
,, construct
*B?3
d.
^sna
e.
/.
•• T
V T
{court)
(/e?d)
■1^0
*i>*n
• T
v^
D''?;?n
D-3S
• T
■•IIVD
^3
nyn
*3a
- T
Danxn
D3^3a
{/ace)
§93]
Paradigms of Masculine Nouns
265
Masculine Kouiis.
^'<
h.
z".
k.
I.
m.
n.
DID
VT
r>:i
CiE'
na
T
Q^?
pn
(death)
(olive)
(whip)
(fruit)
(sea)
(mother)
(statute)
"PC
>pn
DDnio
V : 1
D2nn
V : 1-
V : 1
T1#
D^nio"
n^n\t
D'DiB'
• t:
d^q:
niBK
D^-pn
^rii»
'm
^DiB'
«n3
•• t;
^»:
niBN
^m
^ciK'
(kids)
^s:
^niBK
"•i^n
DD^nn^
V •• 1
D?'^-
D?'!?"
D^rjj
D^PV
nynb
D^B3
D^3E>
(ei/es)
(two days,
biduum)
(cheeks)
(hands)
(teeth)
III.
IV.
a.
h.
C.
a.
b.
c.
Dj>iy
a-k
mh
^^!?S
• T
3n3
(eternity)
(ene^ny)
(seer)
(overseer)
(poor)
(Mjrt^mg)
D.^iy
n^K
nth
n^pa
^n
3n3
T ;
^»biy
^3^X
*th
n-ipQ
''3n3
• T ;
^»^<iy
'^rk
^t
^I'ij'S
^m
Dicbiy
V : - 1
D3Tn
V : 1
D51^pa
D33n3
V : |T :
• J' 1
• : 1
DMh
D^'i??
D^»3y
■D^3n3'
• T ; _
••Dbiy
•■: 1
•• : 1
\in
n>p3
\>3J?
>3n3"
^iD^iy
- : 1
nh
^Ti?s
- T ; _
Ds^ofjiy
V •• : 1
V *• : 1
V " 1
Dan^pa
V ** 1* I
D5\>3X?
■D3^3n3'
_ V " IT : -
DlDi^.^B
D^5iko
D;yn^
(pair of tongs)
(balance)
(<m;o weeks)
^:wD
266 The Noun [§ 93 i-n
(only in Nu ii', before Maqqeph), nnn Ju 32* (but Ct 3* lin), yD3, iriD as
well as y^l, &c. ; cf., moreover, Jinp 2 K 12® (for HPIp, in/zn. constr, from npT5).
• '■* ~ • *~ " "■''
I C. The n locale is, according to § 90 i, regularly added to the already
developed form, e.g. mjp ^ ii6"-^8: nnriEn Gn 19^, to the door ; but also with
a firmly closed syllable 11333 Ex 40^* ; under the influence of a guttural or *1
mnn, nXIX, in pause 7Vi'\k (cf. mia i Ch I4i« from-ltE).
■9 T : - ? T : - T : T ^ T;t ' vv'
K D. The suffixes of the singular are likewise added to the ground-form, but
forms with middle guttural take Hafeph-PathaA instead of the i^wd quiescens ;
'''iy3, &c. (but also *pnp, ''ipVL &o.). In a rather large number of grt/Z-forms,
however, before, suffixes in the sing., as well as in the constr. st. plur. and
dual, the a of the first syllable is attenuated to i,^ thus ''3D3 my wumb, ilTl^ •
so in n3|, yxi, vi?., nnf, n^h, v^b, nn|, pif , inj?, nn^, vk't, B'dk', and
many others. In some cases of this kind besides the form with a there most
probably existed another with original i in the first syllable ; thus certainly
with y^''' beside JJtJ*'' ns 3 beside nif3 , &c. (According to the Diqduqe ha-famim,
§ 36, the absolute st. in such cases takes e, the constr. e ; cf. T13 Nu 30* (^absol.)
and lip. 301° (constr.) ; 12B' Lv 2420 (absol.) and ~I3B' Am 6^ {constr.). According
to this theory ^ KPQ (so the best authorities) Is 9^ would be the constr. st.,
although the accentuation requires an absol. st.) — A weakening of the firmly
closed syllable occurs in ''133, &c. from 133 and ?J3p^ Dt 15", 16", in both
cases evidently owing to the influence of the palatal in the middle of the
stem. With S^ghol for i : ""Jjan, ^VB'.I, ''"133, &c.
/ E. In the plural the termination ni is found as well as D"* , e.g. n^B'D3
niDXy together with Wmi (Ez 1320 [but read D'»B'3n ; see'comm.]), &c'',
constr. St. n^,B'D3. Other nouns have only the ending flT, e.g. DIXIX, constr.
niiflN from yik. Without Qames before the ending D^__ we find D^DHl
(bowels) mercy. On the numerals □"'"ib'y twenty, &c., cf. § 97/, note 2. More-
over a is not inserted before plural suffixes with the tone on the penultima
in 'J'''12'S, &c., properly thy happiness ! (a word which is only used in the constr.
st.pl. and at an early period became stereotyped as a kind of interjection).
Wi f , In the constr. st. plural a firmly closed syllable is sometimes found,
contrary to the rule, e.g. Dn''Qp3 Gn 4226-»5; ig^-i ct S^ CBB'"} ^ 76*) ; ''*3"!t3
Ez 179; '•'IDif Is s'o, and so always in 03^303 Nu 29»9, Dn"'3p3 ^ 16*, &c. (on
the other hand, according to the best authorities not in ^lOn Is 55^, &c.,
though in f 107" Ginsburg reads ^'ICn) ; cf. § 46 d. Even with a middle
guttural |n ■ SyS Est i"-20._The attenuation of a to i also occurs sometimes
in this form Csee above, k), e.g. ^TM), &c., even ''Ipi Is 57* beside ^liT
Ho i2, &c. "'" "' ' ■"'
n G. In the dual absol. beside forms like D''!>3"l /eei, with suff. ^''S"3"> vb3"l, &c.
< I .< < .- . - ' I v: -> t: -'
D^BpK two thousand, Dyy3_ sandals, D^3"!3 knees (a attenuated to i, constr, st. ''3'I3
with a firmly closed syllable), with suffixes ^313, &c. (cf., however, Dn''3'13
Ju 7*), forms with pretonic Qames are also found (in consequence of the
1 According to M. Lambert, REJ. 1896, p. 21, a tends to remain with labials ;
so in 14 cases out of 22 masculines, and in 3 out of 6 feminines.
2 Probably only a theory of one particular school and not generally accepted,
or at any rate not consistently carried out ; cf. KOnig, Lehrgeb., ii. 22.
§93o-r] Paradigms of Masculine Nouns 267
tendency to assimilate the dual to the plural in form : so KOnig, Lehrgeb.,
ii. 17), as D^Slp horns, with suff. V3">ip (Dn S^ ^- ; elsewhere always D''5")i5j
V3")i5, &c.), and so always D^ri?*1, constr. st. ''rO''\ folding-doors, Q^DT'j (?) double
way.
2. On Paradigms b and e. With a final X rejected (but retained ortho- 0
graphically) we find NOn sin. An initial guttural before suffixes generally
receives S'^ghol instead of the original i, e.g. ''\>?r\, ''")ty, &c., so in the constr. st.
plur. "i^Jj;, &c. ; NtJn forms ""N^n 2 K lo^*, &c.' retaining the Qames of h'^^Xin
before the weak N. — The pausal forms "TTID and MC (out of pause always
"inp, D3K') go back to by-forms "TTlD, CDK'.— On n*l3B'y {constr. st. plur, of y^^)
Pr 2)"^^, cf. § 20 A; CippB' sycamores, without Qames before the termination
D^__ (see above, I), is probably from the sing. ViO\^V^ found in the MiSna.
3. On Paradigms c and/. ^B'p occurs in Pr 22^^ without a helping vowel ; p
with a middle guttural 7^3, &c., but with n also pHNj |ri'£ ; with a final
guttural nna, J?2n, &c., but with K, NDfl ; with a firmly closed syllable ""SlDK
Mi 7I.
Before suffixes the original it sometimes reappears in the sing., e.g. wli (J^
{\p I so'*) beside ^^"13, from Plh greatness; V3p (with Bagel forte dirimens, and
the M repeated in the form of a Hateph-Qames, cf. § 10 h) Is 9^, &c, ; PICK'S
Ez 22^*. — Correspondiotg to the form D3pVQ pobFkhem we find ^3t3p Ho 13'*,
even without a middle guttural ; similarly ^3pp (so Jablonski and Opitius)
I K 1 2^°, 2 Ch 10^", from |tD*p Utile finger ; but the better reading is, no doubt,
"'ilMP (so ed. Mant., 'the p proleptically assuming the vowel of the following
syllable ' ; Konig, Lehrgeb., ii. 69), and the form is to be derived, with KOnig,
from '(^\>, not qutixn, as Brockelmann quotes him, in Grundriss, p. 103. The
reading ^iJDp (Baer and Ginsburg) is probably not due to a confusion of the
above two readings, but __ is merely intended to mark the vowel expressly
as 0. In the forms i^ys Is 1" (for Sbv^) and ^HNPl Is 52" (for ilNPI 1 S 28^*),
-: I ^ t:it -: I ^ ^ t: ir ''
the lengthening of the original m to 0 has been retained even before the suffix ;
cf. § 63 p and § 74 A (D3NVb3 Gn 322").— In the same way 0 remains before
n locale, e.g. n3"13. npHNn Gn 18', 24*^, &c. Dissimilation of the vowel (or
T ' T : ' T v: T 7 T » \
a by-form nD3?) seems to occur in in33 Ex 14^, Ez 46', for ^n33.
In the absol. st.plur. the original m generally becomes S^wd before the Qames, T
e. g. D"'")p3 from *1p'3 morning, CpyS works, W^V!Cr\ lances, C^plip handfuls {constr.
St. yytJ' Ez 13^') ; on the other hand, with an initial guttural the w-sound re-
appears as Hafeph Qames, e. g. D^E'TH months, DHSy gaselles, nin"lt< ways ; and
so even without an initial guttural, niJISH (he threshing -floors, 1 S 23', Jo 2^* ;
D"'B'Tp sanctuaries, and D'^B'IJJ' roots {qodhasim, &c., with 0 for - ) ; also '•K'Tp
[but ^"B'npj VK'IP, once 'P], where, however, the reading frequently fluctuates
between''}? and 'p ; with the article 'i^n ^ '(53, 'pp, according to Baer and
Ginsburg. On these forms cf. especially § 9 v. From ?nK tent, both
DvnN3 and D^pnX (cf. §23/1 and ipy'a above) are found ; with light suffixes
"•pnx, &c.; so from niX way, Vrih^X (also ""nhlX)— hence only with initial K,
' on account of its weak articulation' (Konig, Lehrgeb., ii. 45). It seems that
by these different ways of writing a distinction was intended between the
268 The Noun [§ 93 s-v
plural of nn")X caravan, and of U'^A way ; however, DiniN is also found in
the former sense (in constr. st. Jb 6^') and nifTlX in the latter (e.g. Jb 132^
according to the reading of Ben Naphtali and Qinihi) ; cf. also r)i*3^X 2 Ch 8^^
K^th. ('3N Q^re).— The constr. st. plural of ?ni thumh is ni3'n3 Ju i^'-, as if from
a sing. \T\'^ : of ^1^3 brightness, Is 59* ninil3 (on these 9*/o/-forms, cf. t). — If
V3DX Pr 25^1 is not dual but plural (see the Lexicon) it is then analogous to
the examples, given in I and 0, of plurals without a pretonic Qames ; cf. CiDa
pistachio nuts, probably from a sing. n3D3. According to Barth, ZDMG. xlii,
345 f. V3SK is a sing. CSDN, the ground-form of npQK, with suffix).
In the constr. st. plur. the only example with original u is ""DS"! ^ 31*^ ; other-
wise like "'B'np ••bnN, &c.
•• :'t > •• t; it'
S 4. Besides the forms treated hitherto we have to consider also a series of
formations, which have their characteristic vowel under the second radical,
as is ordinarily the case in Aramaic (on the origin of these forms see further,
§ 84« e). Thus (a) of the form bt2\> ; K'^'H honey, LyO little; in pause, E'n'n,
BJJD ; 135 man (as constr. s'., see above, h), \p 18'^ (elsewhere always *1I13), and
infinitives like 33^' (§ 45 c; on Dnp, see above, h); D3{J' shoulder, a being
modified to e (but in pause D^B') ; locative T\'oip, also HMK' Ho 6^. With
suffixes in the usual manner ""ME^, rlDSB' Gn 19SS.35 (^n infin. with suffix,
therefore not n23EJ'). On the other hand, the a is retained in the plur. absol.
by sharpening the final consonant: D^BiN {constr. ''1D3N) marshes, D"'D*in
myrtles, Q^jpyTi few.
t (b) Of the form bt;i\> : "IN3 a well, 2Nt wolf, &c.' ; locative iTlN3, with suff.
"•1X3 »Zj<r, n"'3XT "'3Kt : butnilSS constr. nilNS; on the infin.' constr. m^,
cf. § 76 ft.
(c) of the form bbp: {^X3 s^encft (with suff. iK'N3, just as 1330 occurs in
Jer 4' along with the constr. st. "T]3tp ^ 74^ ; cf. for the Dages, § 20 }i), perhaps
also DXp nation, pi. D^Bn|).
U 5. Paradigms g-i comprise the segholate forms with middle T or * : (a) of the
form qdtl with Wdw as a strong consonant, in which cases the original d is
almost always lengthened to d (Paradigm g), thus DID |"IN vanity, Piy iniquity,
T]iri TOJdsi ; with final S XIB' falsehood ; cf. however, also niT space. In the
constr. St. contraction always occurs, niO, &c. (from original mauf), and like-
wise before suffixes ifliD, &c. Exception, piy as constr. st. Ez 28'^ (according
to Qimhi) and with suff. viy. The contraction remains also in all cases in
the plural (but see below, w).
D (6) Of the form qdtl with consonantal Yodh (Paradigm h). With final K
N^5 (also ^a), in Is 40* K^3, in the constr. st. (also absol. Zc 14*) N\3 (also \3);
plur. 2 K 2" and Ez 6' K^lh. according to Baer TY\M, i.e. doubtless DiSa
(cf. ^''riiK''3 Ez 35* ; according to another reading [and so Ginsburg] niK"'3,
1 The proposal of Haupt (SBOT. ' Proverbs ', p. 34, 1. 44 ff.) to read "INS^ 3X1,
&c., does not seem to be warranted. The case here is quite different from
that in Pr 1=2 where the Masora requires ^3nNri ^ no doubt on the analogy of
"1X3, &c. , for ^3nNJi] , which was probably intended, see § 63 »n.
§ 93 w-z} Paradigms of Masculine Nouns 269
i. e. doubtless niN''a), but in (yre, and all other passages, ni''N3 , The uncon-
tracted form (in the absol. st. with helping Hireq) remains also before H
locale, e.g. nn^i (but in the constr. st. e.g. f\QV nri''£).— H^''^ (fromn^y) Gn49"
is peculiar, so also iJT'C' Is lo" (from D^K').— In the plural absol. uncontracted
forms occur, like D^b^n hosts, ViS^'^V springs, D"*")^ young asses, W^p^T) he-goats,
&c. ; as constr. st. Pr 828'ni3''y for nirV.
(c) With the contraction of the 1 and "• even in the absol. st. sing. (Para- IV
digm i). In this way there arise formations which are unchangeable
throughout ; thus from the ground-form qcitl : QV (of., however, § 96), PliD,
niB', &c. ; with middle Yodh, b'^H 1 Ch g^^ (elsewhere ^^H), ^\b Is 21" (else-
where ^'<^ in prose n^''^', see above, § 90/) ; from the ground-form qifl, pT^
1>B> "l"iy (see, however, § 96) ; from the ground-foi-m qiitl, 1^3^ UX^^ &c. The
plurals Dnn pots, D''p1B' streets, D^IB' oxen, have a strong formation (but for
D^nin I S 138 read Dnin as in 14^^). Finally, forms with a quiescent middle
N also belong to this class, such as E'N"! head (obscured from ^iO = ra% see
§ 96) and JNJf sheep.
6. On Paradigm A; : segholate forms from iT^? stems. Besides the formations ,V
mentioned in § 84" c, e, like 1133, &c., and ^H^ Ez 47^, with the original 1
resolved, according to § 24 d (cf. the constr. plur. ""^jn clefts, Ob ', &c., and Mifj^
ends, i/'48", &c., where the ^ becomes again a strong consonant,^ from 13n and
IXp or ^an and ^Xp), there occur also (a) commonly, of the ground-form qall,
foi-ms like nQ, ip3, ""na, '•n!?, ''3V, ""li^r&c. ; in pause n|, »33, >n5, ""3^ (cf.
§ 29 m), but ""Sn Ju 14I* ; with suffixes i"'"l3 (attenuated from pdryo), "^^SS \p 6',
but also ^">")3 Vn!?) &c.; before a grave suffix Dn'''15, but also DS^'lEl. Plur.
ens (constr.' ''na , see above, 0, ""XtSn), D"''*">N and ni^N ; with softening of the
■• to N (as elsewhere in 'XIPZl Jer 38^2 for which there is ivll in verse 11,
according to § 8 fc ; D"'X''3"iy 2 Ch 17", cf. 26' KHh.', probably in D^NW, T\S^b)>
from ""Tn and "hi^ ; also b^N3^n ^ ic" A'*<A., divided into two words by the
Masora, is to be referred to a sing. ^3pn hapless) : D^XPn jewels, Ct 7^ (from
''bn), D''Nbp Zawfts, Is 40" (from '>^0) ; but instead of D''NriQ and D"'N3if (from
■•riQ and >3if) the Masora requires D^sriQ and D^N3X ; dual : D^'PIp, constr. st.
**n^, with suff. '•;;np, &c. On PT door, cf. § 95/, and on such formations
generally, see Earth on biliteral nouns in ZDMG. 1887, p. 603 ff., and Nominal-
bildung (isolated nouns), p. i ff.
(6) From the ground-form qitl, ''Ifn half, in pause ""ifn^ with suff. i^^n, &c. — y
From stems with middle Waw arise such forms as ^N (from 'iwy), >]}^ ^If
ship, plur. D"'*{< D''*^, &c. ; instead of the extraordinary plur. D^if Nu 24^^ read
i with the Samaritan D''NXi\ and for QiifS Ez 30^ read probably with Cornill
■ ^ .< .<
(c) From the ground- form qiifl sometimes forms like inn^ ^n'3 (from trthw, ;v
biikw), sometimes like "'pn ^ ^3y, and even without an initial guttural ""pT^ ""D^^^
^ Noldeke, Beitriige, p. 58 : the direct or indirect retention of this "I is hardly
a feature of early Hebrew. The true Hebrew forms from DYp would be HVp^
! niXi?, niXp, the aramaizlng forms Hi'i?, n^p, flilSp.
?
270 The Noun [§ 93 aa-dd
nV (also ip'n '>D^, nif), ""Xn, &c ; in pause "i!)n,&c.,with suflf.i^bn, plur. D^^^f).
From '•Dy branch, there occurs in ^i- 104I2 the plur. D^XQJ? (analogous to D^XriS^
&c., see above, x) ; the K^lh. evidently intends CNDi? (so Opitius and others).
Dual, with suffA'O'^ NU24'', &uc&e< (from ipT, for ''p"!), more correctly, with the
Masora, V?"1 with Munah for Metheg, This unusual Metheg is to be treated
as following the analogy of the cases mentioned in § 91'.
Cld 7. On Paradigms l-n : segholate forms from stems j;"y (see § 84" c, ^).
(n) In the g-afZ-form the a of the contracted formation is sometimes lengthened
in the ahsol. sL, sing, as in D'' (so also in the constr. st., except in the combina-
tion t)lD~D^ the Bed sea ; and even before Maqqeph, npBH'D"' the salt sea),
sometimes it remains short, e. g. nS morsel, Dy people, but even these forma-
tions generally have Qames in pause, as well as after the article (e. g. Dyn).
Adjectives under the influence of a guttural either have forms like DTlp
DTlJf or, with compensatory lengthening, Ciyi "'JJ"). In the constr. st. TI living
(in the plural D''^n also a substantive, life), and '•"I sufficiency, are contracted to
TI ^ and '''H. As a locative form notice mn to the mountain, Gn 14^0 (see § 27 q)
beside mnn , The stem is expanded to a triliteral form in "''1'in (unless it is
simply derived from a by-form "i"in on the analogy of gaia^forms) Jeri7'
(but in ip 30^ for ^"IIH read ''1")n) and D"l")n Gn 14^ ; plur. constr. """nn Nu 23'',
&c. (but only in poetical passages), with suffix, H^^.'^n Dt S^ ; Q^Doy Ju 5^^
(where, however, read probably Tjcya), Neh 9^2 ; '•lOCy Neh 9^4 . elsewhere
D^Sy ^Dy. — Before suffixes and in the plur. a is sometimes attenuated to i,
e.g. ''m^ D''P13, from nS ; D*3p and niSD (also DiSD 2 S 17^8) from 5]p.
Before n a is retained in a virtually sharpened syllable, e.g. D^HS traps.
bb (&) Qi«-forms: DX, ^Vt fire (with suff. '>m, but of. also DDB't? Is 50"),
< • • •
fV} favour, &c. ; of a triliteral form, the plur. ^'•ifVn ^ 77^*.
(c) QHtl-forms : pH, ^3 totality, before Maqqeph "pPI^ "73^ with suff. ""pn, &c.,
with omission of Bages forte (according to § 20 m) always ^pH^ D2pri, but from
T'y, ''^y, "^IV, D3)y, for which ny and ^^y are also found. '''\>J>n^ expanded to
a triliteral form, Ju 5^^ and Is lo^, generally explained as a secondary form
of ""ppn with abnormal weakening of the m to i, is more probably to be referred
to a qitl-form = Arabic Mqq.
CC The forms with assimilated middle Nun likewise follow the analogy of
Paradigms l-n, e.g. e)K nose, anger CSX, dual D^QS, also/ace) for 'anp ; TJPl 2^alate
for Mnk, Q'^^] fetters, Tj; goat, plur. W^]]}, for 'im, probably also 3N green herb,
for 'inb.
(Id 2. Paradigm II comprises all formations witli original short vowels,
whether in the first or second syllable ; of. § 84"' f-i, and the general
laws of formation, § 92 b-g.
^ ""n only in Dn 12'' as constr. st., since in the asseverative formulae (cf*
§ 149) "ly-jQ '•n, '?JK'p3 ^n (otherwise only in 2 S 1521, after mn> '•n, and
Amos 8"), ''H is a contracted form of the absol. st. (prop, living is Pharaoh ! &c.).
It is evidently only a rabbinical refinement which makes the pronunciation
in distinctive of an oath by God (or of God by himself), as in the regular
formulae ""JN TI (iDbX -n Dt 32") and nin^ "TI ^ = *ynX Ti)
§ 93 ee-kk^ Paradigms of Masculine Nouns 271
Rem. I. On Paradigms a and h : ground-form qatul. Tlie lengthening of the
second a to « is maintained in the constr. st. sing, only in t<"7-forms, e.g. X32f
army, N3if. For the construct forms 3^n millt, ~|3|J white, Gn 49^^^, instead of
the ordinary absolutes l^n H^, a secondary form ibu ]2b must be assumed ;
from jtJ'y smoke, the constr, st. jK'^ occurs once, Ex 19^*, beside jt^J?, from *l"in
ornament the constr. st. "CIH Dn ii^o, beside the common form "IIH. — The plur.
D^B'^Q horses, Is 21'' (instead of D''ki'"lQ, ground-form paras) is no doubt due to
a confusion with the qattdl-form. 5^">Q horseman.
A. Sometimes a sharpening of the third radical takes place, in order to C6
keep the preceding vowel short, e. g. D^?103 camels, D^3Dp stnall ones, DijpS
brooks (see § 20 a). — The attenuation of the a of the iirst syllable to i does not
take place in the constr. st. plur. as a rule after an initial guttural, as '•ODn^
'Ijy, but '•[pin, and never before a middle guttural, e.g. nn3 ; nor (according
to Konig, owing to the influence of the nasal) in the non-guttural forms
nU:T tails, niS33, and (in the dual) ''D33 wings, from 3JT, ^133.— The dual
CiriJ from "inj river, shows an abnormal omission of the lengthening of the
• --:r TT ' ij '^
a before a tone-bearing termination, but cf. § 88 c.
B. From J?"y stems, forms like pbn^ |3y, &c., belong to this class. ^
C. The few nouns of the ground-form qitdl follow the same analogy, such as rrior
22b heart, "ISB' strong drink, 33)/ grape, &c. From'iyK' hair, in the constr. st. besides
"lyb* the form ~iyb' is also found (perhaps a survival of a secondary form like
those in Paradigm I, d) ; so from y^if rib, yb^ and even yp^ 2 S 16^' (so ed.
Maut., Ginsb. ; but Baer ypV), both, probably, old secondary forms (also
used for the absol. st.) of y^if ; cf. also ""ypif and iypS, as well as the constr. st.
plnr. niypS ; also from "133 strangeness, the constr. st. ~1D3 is found, Dt 31'®.
2. On Paradigms c-e : ground-form qdtil, developed to qdtel', with a final /i/f
guttural, e. g. y^B' satisfied. In the constr. st. the original i of the second syllable,
probably on the analogy of the forms discussed in § 69 c, becomes a, e. g. |j5t ,
Hn ^ "Ipn, &c., but not before suffixes, ''Dns, &e., nor in forms from N'v stems,
e. g. N^D full, N^l? ; cf., moreover, 2\>V Gn 25^6 from 2pV heel, and "^nX f 35^*,
mourning. Paradigm d represents forms which in the constr. st. instead of
the ordinary f]ri3, &c., have a segholate form, as'Tj'IX, "I'la, I]'!'', ?13, /"^y
(Ez 44^), constr. st. of !]1X long, 113 wall, "^y thigh, pia robbery, 7")^ uncircumcised.
In Is 11" ^033 would be altogether without precedent as a constr. st. (for
P]ri33) ; most probably the absol. st. is intended by the Masora (according to
Noideke, Gott. Gel. Anseigen, 1871, No. 23 [p. 896] for inS ''33 with one shoulder,
i.e. shoulder to shoulder) ; [cf. Driver, Tenses, § 190, Obs.'].
In the plur. constr. the e lengthened from i is frequently retained in verbal H
adjectives of this formation, e.g. •«n3E', ^HOK', ""b^S, "'3??'!, ''rf??r! > cf- also
Vnin^ (with e under the protection of the secondary tone) from inj tent-peg.
On the other hand from Nl'' fearing, always ''X"(^ ; cf. also ^^3") f 2^"^° from
yST.— With a retained in the initial syllable of. nriN alius (with a virtual
sharpening of the PI). — From Vy stems come forms like HO dead person, "13
resident stranger, ny witness, with unchangeable Sere ; hence D^JID, 'riD, &c.
Kindred in character are the formations from the ground-form qdlul. This A'A'
I
272 The Noun [§ 93 ii-oo
ground-form is regularly lengthened to qdtol,B.g. ?'j]} round, ^>)2]} deep, CHHred ;
but before formative additions the short u returns, protected by the sharpen-
ing of the following consonant (see ee above), as D'pJV , &c. (but in stems with
a third guttural or T^ nnb?, DnPIt^). The form ^Jijy, i K lo^', is abnormal ;
likewise nplDJ? Pr 22,^^, Jablonski (ed.Mant. Hppy, Baer and Ginsburg HpDy).
// 3. On Paradigm /: ground-form qdtdl from T]"^ stems. As in verbs n'v
§ 75 h, the general rule is that before the terminations of the plur. and dual
and before suffixes beginning with a vowel, the third radical is usually elided
altogether. But besides mb* the form Hb', with the final Todh retained, is
V T - T . '
also found in poetry (cf. also the singulars with suffixes, like Dn"'WK'0, in ss) ;
in the same way final 1 is retained in DM^V the poor, constr. ""ISy. The plur. of
rrib' is ninb', constr. nilb' (also '•HB', unless this is a sing., contracted from HK' •
so Barth, ZBMQ. xlii, p. 351). The qitdl-form (see § 84" i) nj?! 2 S 15", 16I6,
I K 4^ is remarkable as a constr. st. (the reading HV"! of Opitius and others is
opposed to the express statement of the Masoi-a). To the category of these
forms also belongs without doubt CiS/ace (only in phir.), ^pS, ^JS^ DD""3S, &c.
WDl In a few formations of this kind the vowel of the second syllable appears
to have been already lost in the absol. st. sing, ; so according to the ordinary
view, in T* hand, constr. T* with suff. i^^. but DDT* ; plur. niT* constr. niT".
dual D^"!^ *1^ with suff. ^T* D3"'T' &c., and in Ul blood, constr. D'T with
suff. "©"n, but Dpl?'^ (a attenuated to i), plur. □'•O'T "10'^. But perhaps both
these nouns are to be regarded as primitive (§ 81), and as original mono-
syllabic formations.
nn 3. Paradigm III comprises forms "vvith an unchangeable vowel
in the first syllable, whilst the vowel of the second syllable has been
lengthened from an original short vowel, and is therefore changeable.
The special cases are to be distinguished in which the original short
vowel is lengthened both in and before the tone, but in an open
syllable becomes S^wd (Paradigm a, but cf. also examples like D^ilDiN
wheels, for C??!^, and Cw^f porches), secondly, the cases in which the
vowel becomes S^wd even before the tone (Paradigm b), and finally,
those in which the termination of n"? formations is entirely lost
(Paradigm c).
00 Rem. i. On the model of CibSV (which, moreover, is obscured from 'dlam),
the following forms also are inflected : btSpO (§ 85 h), in some cases with
virtual sharpening of the third radical (see § 20 a), as iflD^jp Jer 17'', ip 40®,
Jb 8^*, &c. ; N"? nouns of this form maintain the Qames in the constr. st. plur,,
e. g. ''X'lipjp from K"lpO ^ ; on the other hand, in the plur. of the participles
Niph. (§ 85 n) of verbs N"/ (which likewise belong to this class), are found
not only regular forms like D^N^p: but also CN^np Jos 10", D*NOt33 Ez 2osof-,
1 Dn''K'npD Ez 724 for 'EJ''np» (from K''npt?) is wholly irregular; perhaps,
however, the part. Pi'elis intended, without Dagei in the T (jtccording to
§ 20 w).
§ 93 pp-ss'] Pa?'adigms of Masculine Nouns 273
and so always D''N33 (except Ez 132 DVX33n) and D'XXJ?? i S 13I', 2 K 14'*,
&c. (except Ezr 8^5 D^K^'Ojin in pause).i
Moreover, the other participles in d also follow the analogy of Uy>V as pi)
regards the final syllable (biSpO /tSpD ; cf., however, 3K'^tSn Gn 43^2 j^ close
connexion ; see the analogous cases in § 65 d) ; also \T0^ table (§ 85 u ; plur.
nijripK', constr. rS^rp^), \^')p, constr. f3"lP, hence in plur. constr. with svff.
Dn''331i5 Lv 788 ; nnpy (§ 85 w), plur. D'^lpy (with sharpening of the final
consonant for DU^py, cf. also D^T^y naked, plur. G'^tpyV Gn ^^ [but in 2^5
D^tS^iy, according to §90 an orthographic licence for D''l3iy from D^y], D''J3~iyD
nakedtiess, 2 Ch 28"; D'Tlp, itS'^'lp ; 'ipOyO Is 511"; i^3D3 Is 238'-; ^ZW'O
^i' iS' ; even with attenuation of the a to i, D''3")*ID threshing instruments, 2 S 24^^^
I Ch 2i23, from J-JIJD), |ril? (§ 85 g), |2C (§ 85 «), TyCi (§ 85 k), inasmuch as they
retain the a of the first syllable, contrary to rule, even when not pretonic.
e.g. ""sarD, "^yo ; 2K'to (§ 85 g) ; 3B^n (§ 85 p), constr. at. plur. "'^K'ri i K 17I ;
also isolated forms according to § 84" t, and § 84** b, c, k, m, n, 0. Cf. finally,
1N1X neck (from sdw'ar), constr. st. "^WX Jer 281"^-, constr. st. plur. ^~\\^\'i
Gn 45'*, &c.
2. (Paradigm 6 ; cf. § 84" s.) Instead of the original i in such forms as gn
DD3''X (cf. 2 K 22^^), the second syllable more frequently has e, e.g. ^"IX^ thy
creator ; with a closing guttural (according to § 91 d ; but cf. also IDJ? Dt 32^*)
forms are found sometimes like ^H^'B', sometimes like ^XIB ; constr. st. without
suff. yob ^ 94^* (according to § 65 d) ; with a middle guttural ^pK2 Is 48" ; cf.
43!*. — The same analogy also is followed in the flexion of the other participles
which have e in the final syllable (^tSpD^ b^pOD, &c.), see further, in § 84** d,
|32, &c. (but with exceptions, as D''B>_W, D''y31), and ibid. I, p ; § 85 i, k
(nap altar, constr. st. 11310, plur. Din^TO), and ibid, q, but here also there are
exceptions like D vHpp >p 26'*.
3. (Paradigm c: part. Qal of verbs H'v, differing from Paradigm II,/in the TV
unchangeableness of the vowel of the first syllable.) In Ez 17^^ e in the
absol. st. is abnormal, and S^ghol in the constr. st. in 2 S 24^' (so Opitius,
Ginsburg ; but Baer HTh), Ec 2'^ (according to Baer, but not the Mantua ed. ;
iTIpD Ec 3'^ is in the absol. st.). To this class belong, as regards their formation,
the ri'^i'-forms mentioned in § 84" r, § 85 jr (with suff., e.g. ^pyOH Dt 20',
which brought thee up), and h.
In a few instances, before a suffix beginning with a consonant, the original SS
(iij of the termination has been contracted to (•, and thus there arise forms
which have apparently pZura? sM#xes ; as Dil^r^O Is s'^ Dn I'o.ie; Qn-NIP
their appearance, Dn i'^, Gn 41^', cf. Na 2^; Dn"'pi3 who stretched them forth,
Is 42^ ; defectively DnSX Ho 7^ (cf. Dni3 Ez 34'*) ; on the other hand, the
examples in Is 14", Gn 47^'', which were formerly classed with the above,
are really plurals. But ^''5nO thy camp, Dt 23^^^ (^jino occurs just before),
^ Brockelmann, Grundrxss, p. 659, observes that except in 2 Ch 5^1, 35^^
D"'KXtD3n is always followed by a preposition governing a word, so that the
punctuators perhaps intended to indicate a sort of constr. st.
COWLKY
\
274 '^^^^ Noun [§ 93 ti-xx
^ifpO thy cattle, Is y)^^ (probably also ?)n.B' i K 2^^), Tj^KniO Ct 2", and "fXIP
the sight of him, Jb 41^ (with the '• here retained orthographically), IvJJ^
Ez 40^1, &c., are still to be explained as singulars. — On a few other examples
which may perhaps be thus explained, see § 1 24 A:. Before the plural ending
the original termination ay reappears in D^nOD Is 25^ (^part. Pu. from
nno).
tt 4. Paradigm IV comprises the forms with a changeable vowel (a, b),
or a vowel which has already become S'^wd (c), in the first syllable,
and an unchangeable vowel in the second. With Paradigm c (which,
however, for the most part consists merely of forms based on analogy,
without biblical parallels) are also connected all the forms which
have unchangeable vowels in both syllables, and therefore (like 3^3)
cannot undergo any vowel changes.
UU Rem. i. Analogous to T'pQ (ground-form paq'id) are § 84" k, ?n3, &c.
(with 6, not changeable 0 for ?<) ; in substantives like DipK', this 6 is demonstrably
obscured from d (Arab, sdldm) ; ibid. I, m, I^DN, "T'DK, &c. ; § 85 m, |i^3t,
constr. |n3T • fl^lH, constr. ]V]r\ • |i''?3, consir. jVp3 (cf., however, the forms in
the constr. at. ]'\2'^V, \S^l\>, and with the plural suffix T]^5in^y Ez 27'2 ff.) ; § 85 w,
tJ'-'O^n, constr. ^^Ipbn ; § 85 ^, Dip», &c.
W 2. ""jy (ground-form 'dniy, stem njy) represents forms in which a final
Yodh has been resolved into i ; before formative additions the original Yodh
under the protection of a Dages forte again becomes audible as a firm consonant,
whilst the (originally short) vowel of the first syllable becomes S^ud ; cf.
§ 84" Z, ''pj, plur. D"*!?:, and § 87 a.
WW 3. 303 with unchangeable a in the second syllable, whilst the S'wd is
weakened from a short vowel (Arab, kitdb) ; constr. st. "303 Est 4^ (readings
like 3113 2 Ch 35* are incorrect, although "Ij?'' Est 1^ and "303 4* are supported
by fairly good authority; however, these 5*_;dZ-forms in Hebrew are probably
all loan-words from the Aramaic). The only plufal form found in the 0. T.
is Dn''T3y their deeds, Ec 9^ In a narrower sense the forms enumerated
in § 84" n-p belong to this class ; in a wider sense all those which have
unchangeable vowels throughout, thus § 84" m, § 84^6 (blSp, cf., however, the
anomalous forms mentioned there), ibid, f-i, m (No. 34 f.), n (No. 39), p
(No. 44), also partly § 85 h-ic (especially I and r). ,
XOC In opposition to the anomalous shortening of the form Pt^i? (see above),
cases are also found where pretonic vowels are retained even in the ante-
penultima (with the secondary tone) ; cf. above, it and pp, also of the form
^■•tap (properly qdtil) the examples CD'^'ID, Ci^lQ, D''K'^^E', whilst the constr.
st. sing, according to the rule, changes the ainto S^wd (D"'"ip, p^Q). (These
are not to be confounded with forms like piy tyrant, which is for p'ly, and
consequently has an unchangeable Qames.) Of the form b^Dp (qaft'd) in this
class are yi3B' week, plur. D^y3C' and DSV^^, constr. T)\V2^, but with Metheg
of the secondary tone in the fifth syllable from the end, D3^riy3ti*. — On liyo
''?yD,&C., cf. § 85 A:.
§ 94 a-d] Formation of Feminine Nouns 275
§ 94. Formation of Feminine Nouns.
1. The feminine ending ""l__, when appended to the masculine d
forms treated in § 93, effects in ahnost all cases the same changes
as are produced in the masculine forms by the addition of a light suffix,
since in both cases the tone is moved one place farther forward (see
§ 92 6). The following scheme is based on the same division into four
classes, with their subdivisions, as in § 93 ; a few special forms
will be treated in § 95 in connexion with the paradigms of feminine
nouns.
Paradigm I : segholate forms, with the feminine ending always O
added to the ground-form, (a) HSpp queen, '"iV??, and with attenuation
of fl to ? nb'33 lamh, nsif"! hot stone, Is 6^ (from another root '1?^7'' ^^^
Baer on Ez 40'^), Hj^tn strength (unless belonging to Paradigm h);
(6) '"l^riD covering (masc. "WD) ^ HJIJ; pleasure (n.i'), not to be con-
founded with the unchangeable forms with a prefixed O, derived
from n'6 stems, as HJlfrD command, plur. rii^rp; (c) '"T^pn, proper
name (nSK mole), rh^^' food (^3X) ; {d) n-;j?p_'^zW 0^]);'{f) HB'Kn
weed, n^HD 2)uriti/ (lili^) ; {g) npiy wrong (also '"ipiV, Paradigm i) ;
(i) riTJf victuals (masc. 1.''?, cf. Paradigm h) ; from ^z.^Z and qutl-iorms,
nj'a understanding, nsID tempest ; (A;) H^pN /«< iai7 (as if from v^),
n^n^ (a attenuated to ?) captivity C?^), '"Illy wreath (probably an
original qitl-iovm) ; (Z) n*n Z?ye, ITltp measure (attenuated from "T^P).
Adjectives derived from y"y stems also belong in flexion to this class,
as nan multa, with middle guttural T\y\ mala ; (m) H^] plan ; («) ni^n
s<a^«<e (pn).
Paradigm II : ground-form qdtdldt, &c., (a) n»^3 vengeance (Di^J) ; c
(5) nnnx ga?-<A ; (c) n^?3 corpse ; (d) n^'!;^Janguida ; {f\^^l beautiful,
n^i? e/icZ (from HDJ, Hifi?). From stems V'y arise such forms as 'Tlj;
(masc. "ly, properly ;;ar<. <2aZ from I^V) female tvilness. From the
ground-form g'a^wZ, Hi^OJ? profunda (masc. P^V), rrnnj? servitude, &c.
Paradigm III : unchangeable vowel in the first, changeable in the d
second syllable, (a) nnT a woman with child (cf. the examples in
§ 84«s, and the retention of the e in the part. Ft el, Ex 22'', 23^*;
in the Hithpa'el i K 14^^), but also with the change of the e
(originally ?) into ^hod, nnip* dwelling, Na 3^ However, in these
participial forms the feminine is mostly indicated by ri__ (see below, h);
(c) n^ia those of the captivity (masc. nbia), but also with a return
of the final Yodh, H^ton clamorous, Pr 7", and the examples in § 75 v.
On the d of the participles of verbs ^"V, which also belong to this
class, such as H^J peregrina, cf. § 7 2 g.
1 2
276 The Noun [§§ 94 e-h, 95 a
e Paradigm IV : originally changeable vowel in the first syllable,
unchangeable in the second, (a) np"ia magna, '"iTDn stork, properly
jna ; np^DIl virgin, properly seiuncta ; (b) n^3y misera.
f 2. A simple n is added as feminine ending in forms like ^"'33
weeping (masc. ''3?, § 93 sr,,a), ri^"l2 covenant; hnt feminine participles
of verbs n"?, as riNlf, riN?fb, may be due to contraction from yoseet,
&c. (hardly to lengthening of the i in the ground-form most), whilst
forms like riXlfiD, riNK'J (see § 74 t) are to be explained on the analogy
of the forms treated in § 93 ^. Apart from the n*? formations, we
find the simple n in the participle ni^O i K i'^, contracted from
riniK'D. But r^i?^] Gn 16", Ju 13'' is the ground-form of the ptcp.
^i?^) (as in the same connexion in Gn 17'^, Is 7'''), cf. § 80c? and the
Q^re ri^^, &c., discussed in § 90 n.
g The forms which arise by appending the T\ feminine to masculine
nouns with a changeable vowel in a closed final syllable are, as a rule,
developed exactly in the same way as masculine segliolate forms.
Thus there arise in Paradigm I (a) from ^1?3 (for original g%irt;
§ 69 c), the form JT?.^? mistress (but only in construct St.; in Is 47' also
<
ny n^.^a are to be taken together; the absolute st. is •TJ"'??); from
ri32», nD^D queen (in Paradigm II, a); rinriQ (nm = r\nh pit) Lv 13^*;
(c) I'llS tcall, rT?!"ia (from J^'\'\i=g^dirt ; cf. ?i?T as construct st. of ?i?T) ; on
the other hand, flK'pn is construct st. of ^^^DJive, with lengthening of
the original t of ^^^^i.
h Formations with a changeable o in the second syllable belonging to
this class are riKTia bronze (from ^I^Q?), J^^^S the constr. st. of rians coat,
perhaps also ^'^^^ writing (unless it be obscured from 3ri3, § 93,
Paradigm IV, c). — Paradigm III, (a) ri^nh (from J^Jprih)^ masc. £3ri*in
seal; (b) ^Ip^/l'' (properly sucking) sprout (in pause, e.g. ^11^^ Ex 26'',
&c.), and so most feminines of participles ?^p. On this transition
of the ground-form qotilt to ijip^p (regularly before suffixes in ^'^t??i*,
i^l?), &c.), cf. § 69 c; qdtalt serves as the ground-form under the in-
fluence of a guttural as well as before suffixes, e.g. njJT, feminine of
Vy knowing ; in a wider sense, J^^^pa skull may also be included here,
see § 95, Paradigm IV, c.
On the endings W and ^T'-t-, see § 86 k, I, § 95 at the end.
§ 95. Paradigms of Feminine Nouns.
Ct In accordance with the general formative laws, stated in § 92 b-k,
the following cases have chiefly to be considered in the flexion of
§ 95 b] Paradigms of Feminine Nouns
277
feminiRes also: (i) a tone-lengthened vowel on the removal of the
tone reverts to its original shortness (thus the a of the termination
n__ becomes again d in the construct st. ^^^). On the other hand,
even an originally short vowel is retained as (a long) pretonic vowel
before the endings n__ and T\S in the abs. st., e.g. '^1?']^^; (2) without
the tone or foretone an originally short vowel almost always becomes
S^wd ; on the other hand, before a vowel which had thus become S^icd
the a in the first syllable which had hitherto also been reduced to
S^wd returns, although usually attenuated to t, e. g. ni5"l5f from
sddhdqdth ; (3) in the plural of the feminines of segholate forms before
the termination of Hi or C-r-, and in formations of the latter kind also
before the light suffixes, a pretonic Qames reappears, while the short
vowel of the first syllable becomes S^wd. This short vowel, however,
returns in the construct st. j)lur., whether ending in T\\ or ^-t^- I in
formations of the latter kind also before the grave suffixes.
The following Paradigms (with the exception of I, d) deal only with
such of the forms treated in § 94 as incur some vowel changes or
other. AU forms with unchangeable vowels follow the analogy of
Paradigm I, d.
<>ng. absolute
„ construct
a.
(queen)
b.
C.
n3"in
T :t
(waste)
nann
d.
ni5n
(statute)
e.
n-'bal nsnn
t; ' J T ; •,-
(kidney) (reproach)
nsnn
(mistress)
V V :
,, with light
suff.
• T : -
^nsin
■ T :t
^ri|5n
"Jji")??
„ with grave siiff.
nansfjp
D?n??in
V : - ; T
Dsn^n
Damna
V ; : • :
^lur. absolute
T :
nv^3 niDin
T : T-;
nbin
nSpn
,, construct
nb^p
nvb? ' niBin
nuin
nipn
„ with suff.
^niDjjp
'Oi'1'3
-niain
•'nipn
^ual absolute
(a double piece
(/ embroidery)
(cymbals)
* Only in ^ 69'", contrary to rule, with a firmly closed syllable, cf. § 93 m.
278
T/te Noun
[§95
c-f
II.
III.
a.
b.
c.
a.
b.
Sing, ahsohite
"1^1?
^m
T T
ni5?.i^
nbhii
(
righteousness)
{outcry)
(year)
(sproM^)
{skidl)
„ construct
fll'51^
DllVf.
r\:f
i^i?3.i^
••• : ■:
„ with light .
niff.
""i'lV
'rii?i»
' T :
^J?!??^^
•-.■'•.■■.
,, with grave
suff.
C5?^l"?1V
D?ri2yf.
D?n3K'
D3i;ip3^^
D3n!?3^a
V : : T : ■•.
Phir. absolute
nip-iif
iniaB'
nipai;"
„ construct
nipnx
niiB?
nip3i^
1^1^53
„ with suff.
^Oipis
"niatj'
^nip3i^
Dual absolute
"D^riB'ny
D^nsB*
{fetters of brass)
(Zj^js)
j
„ construct
^nE)B>
J
Eediares.
a I. Paradigm I : feminines of segholate forms, (a) The locative of this
class has the form Hriyna towards Gibeah (masc. V^a). In some cases, especially
with an initial guttural, there is no means of deciding whether the form in
question is to be referred to a qatl or a gttl base, e. g. npin strength (cf. HS'in
under b). A dual of this form occurs in D^nySB' seven times (cf ynK' seven, fem.).
Analogous to masculine forms like B'n'l (§ 93 s) is HDIH myrtle. — From
masculines of the form ns (n'6 , cf. § 93 I, k) arise feminines sometimes like
'^l^}i, '^l?^, ^1?^ (see above, § 94 b), sometimes like n''33 (§ 94/) ; occasion-
ally the final n is retained before the plural ending, as if it belonged to the
stem (cf. § 87 k), e.g. niJT'jn spears. Forms like ,1**13 (cf. iT3N a qiltl form)
are derived directly from the masculine forms na kid, "'3K a fleet.— {b) From
astern |*y^ ntSH w^ica^ (for n^3n), plur. □'•tsn.— (c) From nh'^]} foreskin, the
plur. absol is ni^Jiy (cf. D''bya, § 93, Paradigm I, /), constr. ni!)"!y.— (<f)
Example of a feminine segholate form from a stem y"y (ground-form qHtl,
like n>n of the form qafl, HDT of the form qitl), with 0 for it, Nan /error, Is 19"
(Aramaic orthography for naH).
^ (e) To the list of segholate forms with D fem. belong also the infinitives of
verbs V'D and f'Q^ which have rejected the weak consonant at the beginning,
as nnB* (from yi}>), nv\ (from yT), T)pl (from B^JJ), as well as nnp (from
npp) ; cf. § 69 rn and § 66 fc and g. The infinitives of verbs 1*Q ai-e, however,
also found in the form i^V"^, m_p, HNJf, and of the same origin also are mj;
congregation (from ny^), Hiry counsel (from ^yj), HJ^ sZeep (from fB'p, cons?r.
J^^y, J^?^, while in the constr. forms r\V\ SKeat, Gn 3" (from VV to Jlow), and
riNV excrement, Ez 4", the Sere has remained firm.
f From a stem Vy (cf. K''l3 <o be ashamed) is WB sfcawie, with suffix ^riy^B.
^ On niJB' as a leas frequent (poetio) form for D^3K' see § 87 n.
§ 95 Hi Paradigms of Feminine Nouns 279
From a stem T["b ('^^'^, cf., however, Barth, ZDMG. 1887, p. 607, who
assumes a stem PI"'') the masculine p'l appears to have been formed after the
rejection of the final Yodh, and afterwards the feminine n^^ door ; but in
the plural n^fl?''! constr. ninl5"n, the n of the termination is retained
(see above, d, nin*3n). In a similar way D''ri2"| stalls, Hb 3", has arisen, if it is
from the stem riQT and DpK' trough (from HpB'), of which the masc. must
have been p^ = ip^j ; on the other hand, the plur. constr. ninj^K' Gn 30^8 (again
retaining the feminine n as an apparent radical) can only be an abnormal
formation from the singular Dpt^, not from a kindred form npK' or DpK'.
2. Paradigm II : ground-form qatdlat, &c., cf. § 94 c, Paradigm II, a and b. g
Analogous to the masculine forms like j^j^^ plur. D''|l^p, we find HS^p Ibarra,
&c.— The constr. forms, like npHX (sidh^qath), are distinguished by the vocal
S^wd (§ 10 d) from the segholate forms, likenK'33 {kibh-sath). Consequently the
constr. St. nS^a Gn 28*, &c. (from n3";3 blessing], and n"n"|n 1 S 14^5, &c. (from
min a trembling), are abnormal. — Under the influence of a guttural (see
Paradigm b) the original a is retained in the first syllable in the constr. st.
(cf. also nons earth, HOnK) : in other cases it is modified to S^ghol, e. g. npjy
wagon, ^DbiV . Frequently from an absol. st in H the constr. is formed with
the termination n, e. g. n")Cy crown, constr. T\'VgV (from tpJt^V) ] along with
msy assembly, JTlJy is found usually, even in the absoL st. ; DOD^ (from QT
levir) before suffixes is pointed as in "'POn^ and thus entirely agrees with
n??? (Paradigm I e). From a stem |"5? (JDK) is formed DOX <rM/7j (from 'dmant,
and this no doubt for an original ^dmint, § 69 c) before suffixes ^IjlJpX., &c.
From the masc. form i^tpp (gahl) are formed, according to rule, n"113 tt-aZ?, h
n!333 corpse, constr. n^n3 ; HDnS ca«Ze, constr. npHB (for fipna), with suffix
^riDri3 Lv 19'^. More frequently, however, the e of the second syllable is
retained before the termination ath of the constr. st. ; thus from npD3 once
•ribnj Is 26^9, and always n3"l3 pool, nSlS pre?/, nSD^ unclean, "'JlN/D /w^^, Is 1"
(with Hireq compaginis, see § 90 0, ^rTJ^O Jb i6'3;' ^n^NB' i S i^'', &c. (with
elision of the X, !]n5>Kf i S i"), also "•nbxK' Jb 6\ Cf. the analogous forms
of the constr. st. nsajp plagu£, nip"j!"!ri rfee;? s?eep, from nD310, nOiJin,
As dual we find D'nDT sides (cf. inan^ Gn 49", from the obsolete nsi.^, f
feminine of !]T) ; the constr. s<. ''ri3T is perhaps to be referred to a segholate
form (nS"!" , cf. "iiy as constr. st. of ^IT), unless the closed syllable be due to
the analogy of n3"!3 and DTTi (see g).
In the forms with simple n feminine the ground-form qdtiU is developed rC
(§ 69 c) to q^talt, and this again regularly to rbh\). Thus the feminine of 1311
comi)amo?i is JTinn (with suffix nni3n Mai 2", cf. rlP133^ Ex 322), of 112 fern,
nina besides n"Tia.— Of Vy stems the segholate forms nn3 rest and nriK' Pi<
(from ny mC') belong to this class; BOttcher {Gratn. i. 411) rightly distin-
guished the latter from nn|' corruption (stem nnC') ; in the same way also
nn5 rest is distinct from nrii a lighting doicn (stem DIIJ).
The feminines of the form qa:il from stems V'V, as nriD mortua, iTl); fem. /
28o The Noun [§95^-?
icitness (from T\\'0 *Tiy\ have likewise an unchangeable vowel in the first
syllable. Cf., on the other hand, the forms from """D stems mentioned above,
under e, such as nJK' sleep, constr. st. fli^ ; moreover, nOH anger, constr. st.
npn (but npn a Uathem bottle, in pause HOn [so Baer, Ginsb., but Kittel 'PI]
< <
Gn 21^^, constr. st. D^D niOn Gn 21^^, perhaps from a stem nCPl).
>fl The feminines of the form qatul, like PlpOy (masc. pby)> maintain the
original u by sharpening the following consonant (cf. § 93 kk) ; on the other
hand, by appending the fem. n, segholate forms arise like ntJ'ilJ, before suff.
nntrnj, &c. Dual D'^riK'm (see Paradigm II, a) ; but cf. ''mn: La 3',
Jl A few (aramaising) feminines from H'v stems (Paradigm II, c) are found
with the ending dth, due to the rejection of the final Wuw or Yodh and con-
traction of the preceding d with the d of the termination ath ; thus HJO
portion (for mdndyaih or mdndimth), T\t\> end (also nifi? and Hifp), plur. ni''3D
{constr. St. Neh 12^^, 13") and DiXJC (Neh 12") ; Diifp Ex 388 ; cf. zf and 39*
K'th. ; on ^'^<3 valleys, see § 93 v. — niN sign (stem mN) is obscured from DN,
and this is contracted from ^dydth^'divdyath; plur. niDN, with the double
feminine ending ; cf. above, /, and § 87 k. — The retention of the d in the first
syllable in Tl^X, &c., Gn 24^1, &c., is abnormal.
0 3. Paradigm III, cf. the various forms in § 94 ci and /-A. The dual D^nbin
two walls, Is 22", &c., taken directly from the plur, rilDln, for D^nOin, is
abnoi-mal (cf. § 87 s, and the proper name D^ri^"]3 Jos 15^®). — Among the
forms resembling participles Qal of verbs V'y, such as iT\) (masc. "IT from sdir,
hence with unchangeable d), must be reckoned also niDZl high place (from D^3),
which has for its constr. st. plur. the pleonastic form ""niDS, or written
defectively Tib!! (see § 87 s) ; for this the Masora everywhere requires ''1103,
which is to be read hdyn^the (not honfthe), with an anomalous shortening of
the 6 to ; but with suffixes "TlilDB, &c.
P In a wider sense the feminines of the form ?'^\> (§ 84'' e) belong to this
clas?, in so far as they shorten the a of the second syllable before the termina-
ls o *
tion n, e.g. rip?'n injlammation (from dalldqt), with suff. TlPlp"!!? Ez 16^^; riyilC
signet ; also fem. of the forms ?t3p and bt2f5 (§ 84^ c and d), as r\b}i(, folly (for
Hwwdlt), and of all the forms which have a changeable vowel in the second
syllable, and are formed with the prefix D (§ 85 g-k), e.g. nDbOlO kingdom,
constr. always nS^DlO; mOlCl (not used in the sing.) pruning-hook, plur. nilDtp ;
nnsbO reward, with suff. ''^l"l^t^'^p ; cf. also the examples given in § 85 gr andjs,
like KJiyO birth (but from i^"b, HNXip outgoing), JTlS^in generation, n^yiPl
abomination, constr. n^yiri , &e,
fj Sometimes the plural of these forms is to be traced to a secondary form,
e.g. nnSN a letter, plur. nilJX (as if from niSN) ; also Hip^i^, which is merely
formed on the analogy of the other plur. fem. of participles Qal, is to be
referred to a sing. npiiV Cf., moreover, r\^'}r]'0 ploughshare, plur. flit^inO
(as if from ntjnno) ^ ; on the other hand, rii"iri3 capitals (of columns), and
niriDin reproofs, are the regular plurals of nins and nnDlD.
J JTlHK'y Astarte (plur. niintJ'y), which was formerly included among
these examples, is most probably due to an intentional alteration of the
§§ 95 '•-«' 96] Paradigms of Feminine Nouns 281
In ri3Fl3 coat the original m of the first syllable is maintained by the V
sharpening of the following consonant (cf. Arab, quiun), with suff. ""n^riS ,
<
the constr. st., however, is n3ri3 (as also in the absol. st in Ex 28'^) ; plur.
nijriS, constr. niinS.— The form vhlbii given in Paradigm III, 6 is a Pulpiil-
form of the stem ^^2, cf. ipn^, § 84^ p.
4. To the fourth class, for which no Paradigm is required, belong all the s
numerous forms which in classical Hebrew have unchangeable vowels
throughout, the originally short vowel of the first syllable having become
S^wd, owing to the tone being thrown forward. Of the forms mentioned in
§§84 and 85 those from JJ"y stems especially belong to this class, as npjip
scroll, n^nn praise. niS>pPi prayer (§ 85 i and q), as well as the feminine of the
participle Hiph'il of verbs V'V, e.g. nTNID enlightening {h-om''\''ii'g), and generally
the feminines of VJ? stems which are compounded with the preformaiixe D, as
nm^D rest (from Hi^D), see § 85 i ; from T\"\) stems perhaps also ."ipyn conduit
(consir. st. T)b]}^ Is 7^, &c.) and HX^ri travail. Thus all these forms coincide
externally with those which already, in the masculine form, have unchange-
able vowels throughout (see the list of them in § 93 wiv).
5. The feminine ending rT"-— (apart from n"7-forms like n''33, § 94/) arises t
from the addition of the feminine H to the ending ''__, which is employed
to form adjectives, &c., see § 86 d, h, and k. The ending nl , mentioned there,
is attached, in segholate forms, sometimes to the ground-form, as niDipy
Jb 12^ (v.l. niriK'y), sometimes to forms with a loosely-closed syllable, as
noblO kingdom ; from n"b stems we find forms sometimes like rfi2^ captivity
(according to others from the stem 3^K', like DVlb perzerseness from W), some-
times like n03 weeping, Vfibt exile, miH vision ; the latter retain the a of the
first syllable even in the constr. st. and before suffixes. From a gaftl-form is
formed 71^133 heaviness; from a qdiil-form raifpS, &c.
In the plural of these forms different methods of treatment may be dislin- U
guished. In some cases the whole ending ni is retained, as if belonging to
the stem (cf. above,/), e.g. "ij^niaO^X from n«obs, in others this ending is
resolved, as in rt^pblO Dn S^* (no doubt for mdVkhuwwoth), and DilV 'edh^woth,
from nnj; testimony, but only with suffixes, T^^I.V. ^ "9"> &c. ; Vni"jU
I K 2^, &c.
§ 96. Nouns of Peculiar Formation.
In the following Paradigms,' pp. 282 to 284, a number of frequently-
used nouns are arranged, wliose flexion presents more or less striking
peculiarities. These peculiarities, however, are almost always subor-
dinate to the usual phonetic laws, and the usual designation of the
nouns as irregular is, therefore, not justified, when once the ground-
forms are properly recognized on which the present forms are based.
original nnPIB'y, like '^bta Lv 18^1, &c. (for ^h), with the vowels of nK'f
shame, the latter word being substituted in reading for the name of the goddess.
1 The only omissions from these Paradigms are THK, Cn, and niDil (on
which see the remarks), and all forms which are not found in the 0. T.
282
T/ie Noun
[§96
ing
'. absolute
T
T
ninx
T
ly^N
r\m ipl
(father)
(prother)
(sister)
(man)
(woman)
>i
construct
^n«
^l?«
ninx
B'^K
r&k
))
with suff. of 1
[ sing.
• T
• T
"•nhN
••^'N
^PI^K
)>
2 wasc.
T?«
^^nN
^niip??
I^B'K
>)
2 /em.
^^?«
^^PIK
T]ninx
^t?'''?
))
3 masc.
(^n^iflN) V3K
(!in^nN) VHN
inns
ity^N
WB'N
1)
3 fern.
T • T
T • T
nnhs
T
)>
1 PL
• T
• T
ijnhs
•
>>
2 masc.
D513K
C3?'nK
■Qaninx"
>)
2 fern.
t?'?^
>5
3 masc.
DH'?^
Di?^'?^
onhK
>)
3 /em.
fn^3J?
P/wr. absolute . rS^A
,, ctms^rwci nuX
„ with suff. of I sing. 'nbS "•ns, pawse ^ns
>)
2 masc.
»>
2 fern.
J)
3 masc.
T ~;
)1
3 /em.
))
I PL
lynbs
))
2 masc.
D3"'n3K
V ■• 1 -:
))
3 masc.
(Dn^nbN) onbs
)}
3 /«^«-
D^nK
■ T
••riK
^m^
T?
se ^ns
"•n'l-'nN
*B'3S
- T-;
''B'3
— T
t6^
T'B>3S
' V T-:
Tr?
^^nx
!j^nin«
vns
vn'ns
T T -:
T T
n^ns
T V ■"
n"'K'3X
T V T-:
«^nK
«^B'3K
•• T
D3>nN
D3^nin«
V •• 1 -:
D?^??'?
Dn-inK
Dn^n'^nK
Dn^B'JN
DH^B'a
Remarks.
3X father; the constr. '»2S, like ^nN and ""ja (which occurs once), belongs to
the connective forms discussed in § 90 A;, which serve as the model for the
Hireq compaginis. However, 3S also occurs in compound proper names, e.g.
Di^t^nS, beside dii'B'^aS, &c. ; also Gn 17* '• |ton~nS for the purpose of
explaining the name Dn["l]3X. On the plur. ni3N see § 87 p.
nS brother. The plur. absol. D^nX has Dagei forte implicitum (§ 22 c) ; VnS
stands for VnS according to the phonetic law stated in § 27 3, and so also
••nS in pause for ""nX. The sharpening of the n merely serves to keep the
It v. it - .
preceding Pathah short, as in D^iP?, &c. (§ 93 ee).
nnS one (for inS. likewise with Dagei fo)ie implicitum, § 22 c, cf. § 27 q),
constr. and otherwise in close connexion, inS, Gn 48^*, 2 S 17'^^, Is 27",
§96]
Nouns of Peculiar Formation
283
T T
n^l
|3
n3
DV
^!'?
dmaid)
{house)
(sow)
{daughter)
(day)
(I'tssei)
n^3
11
n3
Dr
-^?
m,
^?3
<
2)ause ^3?
"l^??,
-ri3
<
pause ^^13
I'S'i
T ~:
in"?
i33
ir.3
ior
T T-:
rin>3
T ■•
n33
T :
T •
«33
D3n>3
D3n3
Dn^3
DDV
nin»K
nines
"•nrioK
vnntDK
T ; —
D3''n-cs
^n3
^'•03
D3''P13
V "IT
Dn''n3
V •• IT
£3^33
• T
^33
" T
^>33
V33
T T
n^33
T V T
!|3>33
•• T
D3''33
Dn''33
ni33
T
• T
D^bs
ni33
•• •
^b3
"•nil
- T
^^1
^'rib3
rt
r%
•|*nl33
tp:
vn33
VOJ
V^3
n"'nb3
0"^'
^'^
T V I
?3^rii3
"T
^^'%
^^V.
D3\^?
Dn^n!)3
Dn-o"*
DnvS*?
rn-nnos |n'Pi3
Zc 11'' ; and especially before |0 (») Gn s'^, Ex sc'^, Nu i6'=, Ju 17', i S 9',
Ez iS'" ; fern. nnX wna (for ri"inS, according to § 19 d), in pawse Ont?. Once
in masc, (by aphaeresis, § 19 A), Ez 333", as in Aramaic ; plur, D^riN some,
but also iidem.
ninN sister, from 'd/idwat or ^dhayat, with elision of the "I or ""^ and with the «,
which has arisen from dd, obscured to 6.^ In Nu (P inhS stands for ilinX
(with virtual sharpening of the H). The plur. ahsol. (ni^n«) does not happen
1 This explanation of DinS (and niori q. v.) still seems to us more probable
than the assumption that the fom. ending dlh is lengthened to compensate
for the loss of the 3rd radical (so Wellhausen, Skiszen, vi. 258), or that the
form is derived from ^ahd, the old-semitic constr. st. of the accusative, with
n feminine (so Earth, ZDMG. 1S99, p. 598).
284
The
Noun
[§96
Sing, absolute
"'»"
i^y
n|
K'SI
Dty
_ ~ T
{water)
{city)
(moi«</i)
{head)
(name) {heaven)
„ construct
i^V
•.Q
m-y
^^, "D?'
„ withsuff.
of^
sing.
nty
^3
^B'NI
''PB'
„ 2 masc.
^17
T?
^^N-l ^OB>,25a«5e'^OB?
i
., 2 fern.
•jK'N-l
^'PK'
1'
„ 3 masc.
^i-iy va, i.T-s
Sm-\
)D^
1
„ Zfem.
HTy
T •
T
T ;
^■1
„ I PI.
«^3
13t?'X-l
!ij6b'
„ 2 masc.
03*3
D^B'Nl
DrP^
„ 3 masc.
DTy
Dn^a
T
T ;
„ 3 fern.
jr^a
JK'N-l
Plur. absolute
D^p
Dny
ni>a
T
niJDB'
• ~ T
„ construct
••p, '"O")?
ny
•• T
•* T
r\S^0
•'CK'
„ withsuff. of I
sing. *P^O
n_y
,, 2 masc.
f^V
TIV
rw
,, 2 fern.
^nv
„ 3 masc.
T ■•
vnv
T T
T T
„ 3 f«"i-
„ I PI.
T V T
T
„ 2 nmsc.
03 ny
D?'l?^
„ 3 masc.
... .. ,..
Dnny
V --iT
V " ir
DJpic^
„ 3 f^ff^-
]\}V^1
intoB'
to occur. In Ez le^^ TjOi'inX occurs (for ?i;n'nK). In the forms ^ninS
Jos 2" K^th., "q'ninX Ez i6"-65.«i (to be read also in verse 45 for TjninX, which
has been erroneously assimilated to the singular occurring in vv. 48, 49, 56),
and DD^ninS Ho 2^ (for which, however, read DSflinK), the third radical has
been entirely lost.
K'''X man, according to the common opinion either incorrectly lengthened
for B'NI (from 'iJJ, with assimilation of the Nun of the ground-form 'injf, which
again has been attenuated from 'ani from the stem B'JX), or softened directly
from 'ini. It is, however, probable that a separate stem (E'^K to be strong?) is
to be assumed for the singular* ; consequently the stem K'3K to he sociable,
' So already Gesenius in his Thes. linguae Hehr., i. 83 f., and recently again
Friedr. Delitzsch, Prolegg., p. 160 ff., Praetorius in Kuhn's Orient. L.-B., 1884,
p. 196 ; Konig, Lehryeb., ii. 38 ; while Noldoke {ZDMG. 1886, p. 739 f.), against
Delitzsch, would connect both B'''X and D''B'3 with the stem EJ'JX.
§ 96] Nouns of Peculiar Formation 285
would be connected only with the plur. D''t^'3^{ (D''K''X is found only in Is 53^,
^ 141^ Pr 8<).
nJOX slave, handmaid; with the plur. ninJDX, with consonantal n, of. in
Aram. \T\'2.'^^ fathers, and similarly in Phoen. nn?T from ri/T, also Arab.
'abahcU (fathers), 'ummahdt (mothers), with an artificial expansion into a
triliteral stem.
ntJ'X woman, probably for ntJ'JN ; from t^3K i.e. not (as Aram. XJlFlX shows)
{}'3N to be sociable (see above, on EJ'^N) but t'5^ (0 be weak (Arab, 'unuffi). So
De Lagarde, Uebersicht, p. 68 ; K6nig, Lehrgeb., ii. 159 f. The form HB'X (for
'ist, with nfem., {roia'iss, after rejection of the doubling and lengthening of
the t to e) occurs in Dt 21", i S 28'', \p 58', even in absol. st. [cf., however,
below, § 130. 4, 5]. — In ^ 128^ 'T!!^^ is found for 'TjriB'K. Instead of the plur.
Qi^:, we find in Ez 23" nts'N.i " "
< < < < < <
n^2 fwuse, locative nn*3 nn"'3n in pause HIT'S n/T'Bn consir. nri''3 plur.
D'ri3 (but in Dt 6", i Ch 28" CFlU without Metheg), pronounced bdttim.
The explanation of the Dages in the fl is still a matter of dispute. The
Syriac bdttin, however, shows that the Dages is original, and belongs to the
character of the form.^ According to "Wright, Comparative Grammar, p. 88,
< <
u''ri3 is simply contracted from bai-tim (as JX from pX^ tlT)l from D''^''}^, &c.),
and the Dages, therefore, is lene; Konig, Lehrgeh., ii. 56, proposes the name
Dages forte orthoconsonanticum ; on the other hand Rahlfs, ThLZ. 1896, col. 587,
suggests that the ^ is assimilated to the fl, while Philippi, ZDMG. xlix, p. 206,
assumes for the plural a stem distinct from that of the singular. A definite
solution is at present impossible. The incorrectness of the formerly common
pronunciation bottim is sufficiently shown by the Babylonian punctuation
(see § 8 jr, note 3), which leaves no doubt as to the d.
|3 son (Gn 30'^ ^E'K'"|3) co«s<r. usually "|3 (also with a conjunctive accent as
an equivalent for Maqqeph, Gn 17^'', Is 8^, &c., i Ch 9^1 ; even with smaller
disjunctives, especially in the combination |jlO, Ex 30'*, Lv 27-', &c. ["fSD
only after DNI and before S'ln, also in Is 51 '2; see Strack on Ex 30^*]), rarely
~|3 (Dt 252, Jon 4'° twice, Pr 30^, and so always in the combination p3~f3
and in the proper names pC'JB [but ''3''D"'"f3 Benjamite'] and np^"|3 Pr 30'),
once 133 (cf. § 90 0 Gn49ii, aiid i:3 (§ 90o)'Nu 23I8, 24315.— In Gn 49^2 |3^
for which "}3 ought to be read, is intended by the Masora for the absol. st.,
not the constr.
' Friedr. Delitzsch (in his Babylonian glosses to Baer's text of Ezekiel,
p. xi) on Ez 23^* remarks that in Assyro-Babylonian the plur. of assatu
(woman) is assdti, coriesponding, therefore, to p'ltJ'N, not to the ordinary
plur. D^^3. The a of D''C'3 (instead of i as in Arab, or e as in Syr.) is to be
explained with Earth {Orient. Studien su Ehren Th. Nbldekes, Giessen, _ 1906,
p. 792) from the natural connexion of the ideas ' men ' and ' women ', D^C'3 and
D"'K':x.
* This disposes of the traditional view that the Dage^ (after a firm Metheg,
see § 16/Q only serves to distinguish it from W^DH passing the night, ptcp. Qal
of nl3, a stem which never occurs in the 0. T, According to P. Haupt the
stem is N3 to go in, D therefore being the feminine termination, as in lint
daughter, and the original form ba'tu, baiu (entrance) is preserved in the plural
Idltim where the tt is to be explained as due to the analogy of trisyllabrc
stems. In the singular bat passed into bet (?), and this was resolved into bait,
as Y'rHsdlem into Y^ruidlaijim.
286 The Noun [§97a
n!!l daughter (from hant, and this again, according to the law stated in § 69 c,
for hint, fem. of JB), with suff. "'02 for "•riJB. Plur. ni:3, from the sing. n33,
comp. CIS sons.
DH husband's father, only with suff. Tl'ipn^ iT'On ; and nion husband' smother,
only with suff, 7]ni?0n, nnton. Cf. nX, n«i and especially niHK.
Di'» da!/ (Arab, yaum),'^ dual D^6i^ ; the plur. D^jpiJ is probably from a
different sing. (C yam), constr. ""D^ and (poetically) r\S'0), Dt 32'', ^ 90^^.
■•pS ressei, in pause ipl (with suff. ^y3 Dt 232B) from n?3 to contom, plur.
Dv3 (as if from 73 n?3 ; according to Konig, ii. 63, shortened from kilyim).
D^P tcater ; on the plur. cf. § 88 d.
"T'y city. The plur. D'>")y is scarcely syncopated from D''*1''y , as it is pointed
in Ju 10* (no doubt erroneously, in imitation of the preceding CI^JJ ass colts),
but from a kindred sing. IJJ, which still occurs in proper names.
ns mouth, constr. st. ""Q (for original ""3 = DS?). Its origin is still disputed.
According to Gesenius and Konig (ii. 103), nS stands for nXS (ground-form
pi'ay) from HNB to breathe, to blow ; according to Olshausen, for ^Q, from a stem
rfB or niS. But parallel with the Hebrew HQ are Assyr. pH, Arab. /ii, /am,
■I T T T '^
famm, fumm, bibl. Aram. DQ, N)i)Q, Syr. pirn, pHrnd, so that Earth, ZLMG.
xli, p. 634, assumes two forms of development from the same stem ("IJ2D), viz.
fm and/w. ''Q my mouth, from pi-y ; for DrCSl we find in ^ 17I", 58'', 59'^ iD''3.
The supposed plur. D"»3 i S is'^i is generally explained as a contraction from
D^SQ, but the text is altogether corrupt. The plur. JVI'B, for the edges of
a sword, occurs in Pr 5* ; reduplicated ni*Q''Q Is 41^^, if> 149^.
K'N"! head (obscured from B'N-J = ra'J); plur. D'B'NT (for D'^B'X'], § 23 c);
Virx") only in Is 152.
nb* a /iead 0/ small cattle (sheep or firoa<)) constr. st. nK*, with suff. ^rfE' 1814'^
and Vb' Dt 22^, according to Konig, ii. 131, from a ground-form si^ay, but
according to De Lagarde, Uebersicht, 81 f., from a stem ""ti'l (Ti^ = say =^ unsay).
D{^ name, constr, generally DK' (only six times "02') ; cf. |3.
D^DB' heaven (§ 88 d).
§ 97. Numerals, (a) Cardinal Numbers.
Brockelmann, Sew. Sprachmss. , p. 116 ff. ; Grundriss, i. 484 ff.
a, 1. The formation of the cardinal numbers from 3 to 10 (on i and 2
see below) has this peculiarity, that numerals connected with a mascu-
1 Cf. Noldeke, Beilrdge, p. 58, yaum, probably an extension of a biliteral
word which has survived in D''P\ ""O^ . Earth, however, Orient. Studien,
p. 791 (see above on nB^K),seesinD"'J?;j, ""b^, niD^ new formations in Hebrew,
caused by the naturally close connexion and association of these plurals
with D^3B' ''W T\SW years, to which they became assimilated in form. The
view that DV is merely an incorrect obscuring of D^, and therefore distinct
from the Arab, yaum, is contradicted by the invariable spelling Di% &c.,
notwithstanding the spelling D'HI ( = D'31?) in the Siloam inscription, line 3
Ccf- § 7/)) an<i la^C^Jp Ho 6^. Cf. also the note on § 100 g.
J
§ 97 a] Numerals. Cardinal Numhers 287
line substantive take the feminine form, and those with a feminine
substantive take the masculine form. The common explanation of this
strange phenomenon used to be that the primary form of the numeral
was an abstract noun in the feminine (cf. § 1 22p). This was originally
attached in the constr. st. to the word qualified, then came to be also
used in apposition to it, and finally was placed after it like an adjective.
The consequence of the appositional, and finally adjectival, construction
was, that for numerals connected with feminine nouns a special shorter
form came to be used, whilst the original forms, with the abstract
feminine ending, were used in connexion with masculine nouns, after
as well as before them.
On this view the historical process would have been that originally the
abstract numerals (like Latin trias, decas, Greek nfVTas, Sf/cdy, &c.) were placed
in the constr. st. before masculines and feminines alike, e. g. D"'3]l D^i^p^ trias
filiorum , D''K'J H'lb'y decas muUerum. A trace of this earlier usage was seen in
the examples mentioned under c, like D"'K'3 nCJ'bV-— F"*'*^®'"' ^^ ""'^^ possible to
say D^p nC'^B' trias, sc. Jtlii, as well as n^b^ D''3Il fiUi, tiias. From this
second appositional construction it was only a step to the treatment of
the abstract numeral as an adjective, filii tres. Similarly the subsequently
shortened forms of the abstract numeral, which were used in connexion with
feminines, might stand either in the constr. st. before, or in apposition before
or after the word numbered, thus ni33 B'^B' trias filiarum, or niill U?^ trias,
sc. filiae, or B'PB' 01^3 filial, i'rias, or adjectivally yitoe tres.
A different and much more intelligible explanation of the striking
disagreement between the gender of the numeral and that of the word
numbered has recently been given by Reckendorf, Die syntaktischen
Verhdltnisse des Arabischen, pt. ii, Leiden, 1898, p. 265 ff. He also
considers that the earliest forms were abstract numerals which were
placed in the constr. st. before the noun numbered, the latter depending
on them in the genitive. The original form, however, of the abstract
numerals from 3 to 9 is not the feminine, but the masculine, used for
both genders, as it still is in the tens, 20, 30, &c. The feminine
abstract numeral was first distinguished by a special form in the
numbers from 13 to 19 (see further, below) when connected witli
masculines, and this distinction was afterwards extended to the numbers
from 3 to 10. This explanation does not affect the view stated above
that the appositional and adjectival use of the abstract numerals was
only adopted later in addition to their use in the genitive construction.
The differentiation of the numerals (originally of common gender) into
masculine and feminine forms in the second decade, was occasioned, accord-
ing to Reckendorf, by the use of the abstract feminine iT}.^)^ ^^ compounds.
288
The Noun
[§97^
So long as it was felt that H^k'y K'/K' simply meant the three of the decade, the
gender of the noun numbered made no difference. When, however, the
consciousness of this meaning became weakened and the combination of
units and tens came to be felt as a copulative rather than a genitive relation,
it seemed suitable to connect only feminine nouns with the feminine form
mb'y. New forms were therefore invented, both of the units and the tens,
for use with masculine nouns. The former, however, no longer had the
form of the constr. but of the absolute state, clearly showing that the con-
sciousness of the original syntactical relation in HIK'y ^7^, &c., was lost.
On the other hand, after the extension of these new formations to the first
decade, the new feminine forms readily came to be used also in the genitive
construction (and therefore in the constr, st.) on the analogy of the earlier
masculine forms.
Of the first two numerals, *in>* one, with its fera. nns (see § 96), may-
be recognized, from its form aud use, as an adjective, although even so
it admits of such combinations as C3''Tnn TriK unus e montibus. The
numeral two, as would be expected, appears as an abstract in the
dual, but, like the other numerals, can also stand in apposition to
the noun numbered. In form it always agrees with the gender of
its noun. Accordingly, the numerals from i to 10 are as follows :
With the Masculine.
With the Feminine.
Absol.
Constr.
Absol.
Constr.
I.
ma
T V
im
nns
nnx
2.
n<2;y
'?.f
^n)m
in^
3-
T I
n0f
\hv
4-
"V?l^
nyiiK
y3is
ya-isi
5-
2nKn?n
npbn
^m
K'on
6
T ■
^W
W
K^SjJ
7-
r\V2p
nyDB'
v^f
3 j-yntj;-
8.
T ;
n3bK'
nabK'
nabB'
9-
T ; *
nyK'n
y^'jri
'[yK'ri"
10.
nnc'y
^"W^.
"^'?'y
'>?'^
^ Shortened from D^ri3K', which would be the regular feminine form of
DW. Nevertheless, the Bages in D^W, &c. (even after |p ; D^riK'p Jon 4I' ;
of., however, iriK'D Ju i6'''*), can by no means be regarded as a.Bagesforte arising
from assimilation of the Nun, for in that case the word could only be CriB'
(cf. Arab, tjntuni). This form does occur in the Codex Babylonicus of a. d. 916,
but it is only a later correction for D'"nK', while in the Berlin MS. or. qu. 680
descvibed by Kahle (Lpz. 1902) there is no trace of the DageS. It is rather
to be read hdyim, ite (with Dagei lene), cf. D^riK'Nl, representing the later
Palestinian pronunciation (Philippi, ZBMG. xlix, p. 206), and Arab. Htniitdni
(with a kind of prosthetic N ; cf. § 19 m), aa a further feminine form of
§ 97 c, rf] Numerals. Cardinal Niimhers 289
On the connective forms yaB', VK'n, of. the analogous forms in § 93 h.
The other Semitic languages also exhibit the same peculiarity in the C
external differentiation of the numerals from 3 to 10 as regards gender. The
fem. form of the numeral abstracts is only rarely found in connexion with
feminine nouns,* e. g. D''B'J HK'bV ^^ 7"' ^ ^ '°'» ^^ ^*' ^^ ^^ ^'^^- ' Probably
also Jos 17", where we should read with Dillmann niDSn '^. In apposition,
Zc 3^, 4', cf. Jer 36^. From what was said above, under a, it follows that
these cases are not a return to original usage, but only an intrusion of the
form used before masculines into the sphere of the feminine. Conversely in
Gn 38** CB^nn B'^B' (but in the Samaritan DB'^B').— For ny^tJ' seven, there
occurs in Jb 42!^ the strange form njyDB', according to Ewald lAusfuhrl,
Lehrb.^, § 269 b] an old feminine substantive (German ein Siebcnd, a set of
seven), but more probably a scribal error.
2. The numerals from 1 1 to 1 9 are formed by placing the units, d
without the copula, before the number ten (in the form "I'^P masc,
•T?.f V fem.), but without the two words being joined into one. As was
said above, under a, and as is proved by the use of '^^^4J nns in the
numeral 1 1 , the feminine numerals from 1 3 to 19 are to be regarded
as construct forms in a genitive connexion. The connective forms of
the masculine abstracts, like HB'Pip, &c., are not admitted in combina-
tion with "^VV) since they are merely in apposition, and not in a
genitive relation (see the rare exceptions at the end of e). On the
other hand ''?.K' and ''riB' in the numeral 12 are undoubtedly true
constructs, like IHS and the fem. numerals 13-19. But instead of ''?^
(Ex 28^^ Jos 3^^ and four other places) and ^^if (Jos 4* and three times
in Ezek.), we generally find D''?.K' and ^''P}^. Two explanations have
been given of these forms: (1) that the K^tMbh really intends ^\}f,
D^FltJ', in the ahsol. St., which was first introduced in the case of D^?B',
on the analogy of m/W , &c., and then extended to D'^IB' ; the Masora,
however, required V.^, ''^'f (but see below), and therefore pointed
D''3B', D^riB'as a Q^re j)erpetuum (see § 17). — (2) that the absolute forma
D>3K', n)F\^ (introduced on the analogy of HB'?^, &c.) were contracted
to Q''3B', D^riB' to facilitate the pronunciation of the duals when closely
Htnani, duo. According to Barth {Orient. Studien . . . Th. Noldeke, ii. 792 f.) the
irregularity of D'^riB' (he takes the DageS as Dagei forte) is due to the complete
assimilation of its vowels to those of the masc. D^3E' where the S^iod mobile ia
normal.
2 With DageS probably on the analogy of HK^, as DB'B' on the analogy of
mhn. Cf. also J. K. Blake on HE-pn, □'•E'lOn in JAOS. 1905, p. 117 ff.
' yilB' and yC'ri appear only as connective forms before n"lb'J? and niND.
* In the vulgar dialects of Arabic, and in Ethiopic, the feminine form of
the numeral is by far the more common. This form appears also in Hebrew,
when the number is regarded in the abstract, as in the multiplicatives
(see § 97 h).
cow LET \J
I
I
II.
12
13-
290 The Noun [§ 97 e.f
connected with "i^'V and ^^IPV. , and that the contraction is founded on
an early and correct tradition. The second explanation is supported
by the large number of examples of D''3C' (66) and D^ntJ^ (34)' ^^
would be strange if the Masora required the alteration of the far
commoner forms on account of isolated instances of ''?.^ and ''^^. As
a matter of fact even in regard to the latter forms the tradition often
varies between V.^ and ^\VP, &c., cf. e. g. Ginsburg on Jos 3'^ We
cannot therefore assume a Q^re perjyetuum.
6 Accordingly the numbers from 1 1 upwards are —
Masculine, Feminine.
j , , -- ... .,
, -ib'y D''3B» n-pv wm
{ ib'y "'2B' ni.K'y 'Pif
&c., on the analogy of the last. These numerals regularly have only
the above form. In regard to their syntax, cf. § 134/.
• ■ <
Very rarely the units appear in the masc. in the constr. sL, as "iCy riB'Dn
fifteen, Ju S"", 2 S 19'^ ; -\K^y DitoK' eighteen, Ju ao^^.— Connected by "1 we find
nBnsni mb'y in ex 4512. ' '^ '
/* 3. The tens from 30 to 90 are expressed by the plural forms of the
units (so that the plural here always stands for ten times the unit),
thus, n^pb^ 30, D^yni« 40, dtpD 50, c^T 60, cy?^ 70, d^pf 80,
D^y^n 90. But twenty is expressed by ^I'^'J^, plur. of "l^y <e?i.^
These numerals are all of common gender, and do not admit of the
construct state. — In compound numerals, like 22, 23, 44, &c., the units
1 ^ntJ'y, which remained for a long time unexplained, was recognized (first
by J. Oppert) in the Assyro-Babylonian inscriptions in the form istin or {"sten ;
cf. Friedr. Delitzsch, Assyrische Grammatik, p. 203, and P. Haupt, in the
American Journal of Philology, viii. 279. Accordingly, "ib'y ''riK'y is a compound,
like the Sansk. ekddar^an, tvSfKa, undecim (analogous to the combination of
units and tens in the numerals from 12 to 19), and is used at the same time in
the composition of the feminine numeral eleven. On the gradual substitution
of 'y "•riK'y for 'y nnX and ^y n^^t see Glesebrecht in ZAW. 1881, p. 226;
'V "TlK'y occurs only in Jer., Ez., in the prologue to Deuteronomy (i^), in
the Priestly Code, and in passages undoubtedly post-exilic, so that it may
very well be a loan-word from the Babylonian.
2 For D'^lb'y, D''y3B', D''yE'n (from the segholates "IB'y, V?^, Vth)> ""'^ should
expect ''^sdrim, Fbhd'im, i^su'im. Is this very unusual deviation from the
common formation (see above, § 93 I, 0, r) connected with the special meaning
of these plurals, or are these survivals of an older form of the plural of
segholates ?
P
§97^0 Numerals. Cardinal Numbers 291
may precede {two and twenty, as in Arabic and English), e.g. Nu 3^',
26'*. Very frequently, however, the reverse order is found {liventy
and two, as in Syriac, of. French and English twenty-two), e.g.
I Ch 1 2^, 1 8^ ^ In all cases the units and tens are connected by the
copula, ordinarily 1, but 1 before numerals with the tone on the
penultima, 1 before -^, ^ before S^wd; see § 104 c?, e, g.
The remaining numerals are the substantives — g
100 HNO fern., constr. nstp.
200 D^riNO dual (contracted from D'nXD; cf. § 23 c).
300 niND thf plur. (but in 2 K n^sioi^^ K'th. WNSn).
1000 ^^^ masc.
2000 D^l?^ dual.
3000 D'B^>^ n'/pV plur., and so on (except ^'^)^^ ^1? ia 2 S I8^
2 K 24" KHh.; elsewhere always D^sbx nn§'i|).
1 0000 i^^?"!, in the later books the aramaising^ forms ^3*1, ^^3"!,
niS") (properly multitude, cf. /Avpias).
20000 D^nal dual (see below, h); but ni3"l -rif Neh f"" (also '^f
Ki3-! Neh 7'').
40000 Ki3-i. ya-is Neh f\
60000 niK2TtJ^K' Ezr 2«« (Baer and Ginsburg n^Na-i, as in Dn ii^^y
nrin"! '•ppX thousands of myriads, Gn 24^
,60
Rem. I. The dual form which occurs in some of the units has the meaning fl
of our ending -fold, e. g. D^riV?"!^ fourfold, 2 S i2« ; D^nV'^K' sevenfold, Gn 4^^-*,
Is 3o26, ip 1 2'', 7912 (cf. § 1 34 r). The dual D';ri3"! ^ 68" (explained by }X3K^ ''pb^
thousands of duplication) is not meant to be taken in the sense oitwo myriads or
tivice the number of myriads, but in a multiplicative sense.^ — Besides the plural
which denotes the tens, there are also the plurals C'lHS some, also iidem, and
nnb'y decades (not decern) Ex iS^'-'^
2. The suffixes to numerals are, as with other nouns, properly genitives, I
although they are translated in English as nominatives, e. g. DSritJ*?!^ your
triad, i.e. you three, Nu 12*; VB'IOn his fifty (i.e. the 50 belonging to him)
2 K i9-i3, and ^''B'Cin 2 K iwi^.
1 According to the conclusions of Konig {De Criticae Sacrae Argvmento, p. 6r,
and Lehrgeb., ii. p. 215 &.), the smaller number more commonly precedes in
Ezek. and the Priestly Code, but the larger always elsewhere. S. Herner
{Syntax der Zahlworter im A. T., Lund, 1S93, p. 71 ff.) arrives at the same
conclusion by a full examination of the statistics ; cf. also his remarks on
Konig in ZAW. 1896, p. 123, and Konig's replj^, ibid., p. 32S f.
2 Cf. Kautzsch, I)ie Aramaismen im A.T. (Halle, 1902% p. 79 f.
^ Cf. D. H. Miiiler, 'Die numeralia multiplicativa in den Amai'natafeln u.
im Hebr.,' Semilica, i, Wien, 1906, p. 13 if.
U 2
292 The Noun [§ 98 a, b
§ 98. Numerals, (b) Ordinal Numbers.
a The ordinal numbers from 2 to 10 are formed from the correspond-
ing cardinals by adding the termination ''-^ (§ 86 h), before which
another ^-r- also is generally inserted between the second and
third radicals. They are as follows: ^32' second, ''^V^', ''T'2'] (like
V^l, y?1, !2'V?"} without the prosthetic N, which appears in J??")*?,
&c.), ""K^'pn or ■'E'pn (which, according to Strack, is always to be read
for 'mn),''^^, ^V'??', '?'^f , T^^, 'yW. The ordinal /rs« is ex-
pressed by lit^XI. (cf. § 27 w), from t^N"> head, beginning, with the
termination H (§ 86/). On the use of ^1^^ as an ordinal in numbering
the days of the month, cf. § 134 ^j; in such cases as Gn 1*, 2", the
meaning ofjlrst is derived solely from the context.
b The feminine forms have the termination ri^__, more rarely (and
only in the case of 3 and 10) '*1J-t-- They are employed also to express
fractions, e.g. r\>^^n fifth or fifth 'part, nn.^b'j; and nn^B'J? tenth far I.
Side by side with these, in the same sense, there are also forms like
y?1 and y?7 a quarter, C^H a fifth fart, and with the aflformative p,
pilE^y (plur. D'3'iib'};) a tenth fart ; these are to be regarded as abstracts,
and are denominatives from the cardinal numbers. Cf. finally y'i3K'
£/38o/xas, a week ; "ilB'i? a decade (of days), and also the tenth day.
On the expression of the other relations of number, for which the Hebrew
has no special forms, see the Syntax, § 134 2 and r.
\
CHAPTER IV
THE PARTICLES
§ 00. General View.
Brockelmann, Grundriss, i. 492 f.
1. The particles, which in general express the secondary modi- CL
fications of thought in speech, the closer relation of words to one
another, and the mutual connexion of sentences, are for the most part
either borrowed or derived from noun-forms, sometimes also from
pronouns and verbs (§ 30 s). Primitive particles (apart from a few
demonstrative forms, see § 100 t) can only be so called in the sense
defined in § 81 f,
2. So far as the origin of the particles can be discovered with u
certainty, they are either ( i ) borrowed from other parts of speech ;
i. e. certain forms of the noun, pronoun, or verb, with more or less
loss of their original meaning, have come to be employed as particles ;
cf. in the Indo-Germanic languages, e. g. the Latin certo, falso, partim,
verum, causa, the German statt, anstatt, wegen, weg, and the English
instead, away; or (2) derived from other parts of speech, either (a)
by the addition of formative syllables, as D^^'' ^1/ ^^^V^ from 01'' (cf.,
however, \ 100 g); or most commonly (6) by abbreviations effected in
various ways, the extent of their mutilation being in pi-oportion to
the frequency of their use, so that in some cases (see below) the
original stem has become wholly unrecognizable.
Cf. in German gen, from gegen, Gegend; seit, from Seite; well (originally
a particle of time, like our vchile), from Weile.
Still more violent abbreviations occur in Greek, Latin, and the Romance
languages, e. g. avo, ah, a ; i^, ex, e ; ad, Fr. a ; ant, Fr. ou, Ital. 0 ; sitter,
Ital. sM.i
The greatest shortening occurs in those particles which have c
entirely lost the character of an independent word, by being reduced
to a single consonant with its vowel (generally short) or S^wd.
According to the laws of syllable formation in Hebrew (§26 m),
1 Even short phrases are contracted into one word : Lat. forsitan, from
fors sit an, 5r]Kov6Ti, SijAaSij, Fr. peut-etre, Eng. prithee from I pray ihec.—ln
Chinese most of the particles are verbs or nouns ; e.g. ik (to give), also the
sign of the dative ; i (to make use of), to, for ; nti (the interior), in.
I
294 The Particles [§§ 99 d,e, 100 a-c
such particles cannot stand by themselves, but are united, as prefixes,
with the following word {§ 102), very much like the preformatives of
the imperfect (§47 a-d).
(J The view that this shortening of whole words to single letters has actually
taken place in the gradual course of linguistic development is rendered
highly probable by the fact that similar abbreviations in later Hebrew and
in Aramaic, i.e. as the development of the original Semitic speech progresses,
become more and more striking and frequent. Thus the -Biblical Aramaic '•'i
becomes at a later period "H ; in modern Arabic, e.g. hallaq (now) is from
halwaqt ; Us (Avhy ?) from li-ayyi-saitn, &c. Cf. also the analogous cases men-
tioned above from the Western languages. Nevertheless, the use of the
simplest particles is found already in the earliest periods of the Hebrew
language, or, at any rate, in the earliest documents which have come
down to us.
e 3, Less frequently particles are formed by composition; as V^'^P
wherefore ? for y^*l*"nip quid edoctus ? {ri fiaOwv ;) or quid cognitum ? ;
^nj?b3 (from ^3 and ^'}V) besides; rh'Sllhh^ (from |r?, !?, n^yp) from
above, above.
More frequent is the combination of two words into one without contraction,
e.g. |D"nnX, ''?"flK, CX""?, iS'^yiS; cf. also the compounds of '"N with
demonstrative pronouns, as T\^'Cr^^ from what?; nXT? ""SI wherefore? [R.V. hoicl.
See the lexicon under iX.
§ 100. Adverbs.
On demonstrative adverbs cf. Brockelmann, Grundriss, i. 323 ; on inten-o-
gative adverbs, ibid., i. 328 ; on adverbs in general, i. 492 fif.
a 1. The negative ^^ not, and a few particles of place and time, as
DK* there, are of obscure origin.
b 2. Forms of other parts of speech, which are used adverbially
without further change, are —
(a) Substantives with prepositions, e. g. li<9? (with might) very ;
n?? alone (prop, in separation, Fr. ct part), with suffix '''^.^f I alone ;
n^ip frmux within, within ; cf. also *1C?3 (as one) together, npVp and
npypp (originally in connexion with) near to, corresponding to, like,
&c., cf. § 161 6.
C {b) Substantives in the accusative (the adverbial case of the Semites, ^j
§ 1 1 8 m), cf. rqv apxvv, Swpcdj', e. g. "INO (might) very, DDK (cessation) H
no more, Di*!? (the day) to-day (cf. § 1 26 b), "inn ' to-morrow, in]
(union) together. Several of these continued to be used, though rarely,
as substantives, e.g. ^20, plur. D''3''3tp and rii^no, circuit, as adverb
* Generally derived from the j^tl^- ft«'«^ "l^^P m^'o/iur {=m'''oIihar) and
hence to be read mohar (cf. mnQ mominrj) ; but according to P. Haupt (notes
to Ksthor, p. 159) from "inS QV.
§ 100 d-h] Adverbs 295
circum, around ; others have quite ceased to be so used, e.g. "133 (length)
long ago [Aram. : only in Ec.]; liy (repetition, duration) again or further.
(c) Adjectives, especially in the feminine (corresponding to the d
Indo-Germanic neuter), e.g. Hjiti'N'i primum, formerly (more frequently
n3iK'N^3,also njiK'N"!?); nan and nil [both rare] multum, much, enough]
niK?S3 wonderfully (properly mirabilibus, sc. modis), T)'^yir\) Jewish,
i. e. in the Jewish language.
(d) Verbs in the infinitive absolute, especially in Hi2)h'il, which e
are likewise to be regarded as accusatives (§113 h), e. g. •■'3"]n (prop.
a multiplying) much [frequent], i"13"inp [rare and late] in multitude]
^I'Pl' {mane faciendo) early; 3"iyn {yespere faciendo) in the evening.
(e) Pronouns and numerals, e.g. HT (prop. there=^at this place) here, J
nan here, hither (also of time, 'ISn'ny till now, cf. the late and rare J'ly
and n3"iy = |n-iy); nnx, D'riip, yne', nxo once, twice, seven times, a
hundred times ] ri'':ti' for the second time.
3. Some adverbs are formed by the addition of formative syllables £^
(most frequently ^^r) to substantives or adjectives, e.g. 0^^?^ and
^T?^ truly (from I^N truth) ; D3n (by favour) gratis (from JH gratia) ;
^i^''"?. in vain, frustra, but also empty (from P'"! empty, emptiness,
vanum), Ru i^^ parallel with the /em. Ti^^r^full] D^^"* ^U day (from Di"')^'
with 6 in the last syllable, DJ^^S^ for Dyn?, in a twinkling, suddenly
(from yns a twinkling, the o being probably obscured from an original
d).2— Moreover, cf. ri"'3in« backward, and JT'Ilinp darkly attired, Mai 3".
In both these cases, the formative syllable an has been first attached
to the stem, and then the feminine ending Uh, which is elsewhere
used to form adverbs, has been added to it.
The termination D occurs also in the formation of substantives, e.g. ](,
D?1N porch, and hence the above adverbs may equally well be regarded as
nouns used adverbially, so that D _ D_:_ would correspond to | |i (§ 85)
Nos. 53, 54), cf. DNnD3(witli prep.) suddenly, 2 Ch 29'^. According to others,
this am is an obsolete accusative ending, to be compared with the indeter-
minate accusative sing, in an in Arabic.
^ Is this D an instance of the locative or temporal termination (cf.
especially DlPli) mentioned in § 88 c? NOldeke, ZDMG. xl. p. 721, considers
DOV a secondary substantival form (used adverbially like n?v noctn), corre-
sponding to the Phoenician and Aramaic DD"*, Syr. 'imdmd; cf. on the other
hand, KOnig, ii. 255, who follows Olshausen in maintaining that the am is an
adverbial termination.
* DOIl silent (an adjective in Is 47", La 32'; a substantive in Hb 2'^), which
was formerly included under this head, is better taken, with Earth {Nominal-
bildung, p. 352, Rem. 2), as a participle formed like 331^^ PP'iV) so that DOH
(perhaps assimilated to r\}2M) stands for original DIDH .
I
296 The Particles [§ 100 i-o
Z 4. A number of forms standing in very close relation to the
demonstrative pronoun may be regarded as primitive adverbs, since
they arise diiectly from a combination of demonstrative sounds. Some
of these have subsequently suffered great mutilation, the extent of
which, however, can now very rarely be ascertained with certainty.
Such are e.g. TX the7i, HSn here (according to Earth, Sprachwiss.
Ahhandlungen, p. 1 6, formed from the two demonstrative elements hin
and na), |3, '"133 thus (cf. na^N, nD3^X how ?),'n« only, |?K truly (on all
these adverbs, see the Lexicon), and especially tlie interrogative \\
i^He interrogativurn), e. g. ^^7n ^Dt 3'* ^^Vi) nonne .?, D^n num etiam ?
This He interrogativurn is perhaps shortened from ?i^, which is still
used in Arabic, and, according to the view of a certain Echool of
Masoretes, occurs also in Hebrew in Dt 32^. ^
Ic The n interrogative takes — (i ) Haieph-Palhah generally before non-gutturals
(even before *1), with a firm vowel, e.g. njOt^n hast thou set? see the interroga-
tive clause, § 150 c (3D''*n Lv 10^* is an exception).
/ (2) Before a consonant with S^wd, usually Pa^W? without a following BagieJ
forte, e.g. nSlIin Gn 27^*, cf. 18^'', 2g^, 30", 34^' ; less frequently (in about ten
passages), Pathak with a following Dagei forte, e. g. ^Tll^n num in via, Ez 2o'<*,
jn^n Gn 17", 18", 37»2, Nu 13", Jb 23* ; even in 1, i sVo"*, 1725, 2 K 6^2.
fn (3) Before gutturals, not pointed with either Qa we.? or Hateph-Qamex, it takes
Patha/i, e.g. TjbxH shall I go?, nnSH num tu?, DNH num si; D^nxn Mai 1";
also in Ju 6'^ read DriNH (not 'ND), likewise n in Ju I2^ Jer 8", Neh 6'i. —
In tJ'''Nn Nu 1 622, the Masora intends the article ; read B'"'Kn , and cf. Dt 2o'8;
in Ec 321 read iT?]}i^ and rn"l*n : the article is a correction due to doctrinal
considerations.
91 (4) The n takes S^ghol before gutturals pointed with Qames or (as in Ju 9"^-)
Hateph-Qames, e.g. I^OKH Mi 2''; i^bsn Jb 2i<; nnVIH Jo i2; 2^rV-\ Gn 248
(cf. the analogous instances in § 22 c, § 35 k, § 63 Jc). The place of this inter-
rogative particle is always at the beginning of the clause [but see Jb 34'^,
Neh 132'', Jer 22^^, where one or more words are prefixed for emphasis].
O 5. Some adverbs occur also in connexion with suffixes, thus ICJ*."!
thou art there, 3rd sing. masc. iJB'^. ^ (but see note below), 2nd plur.
masc. ^^fl; ''?\'^ I am not, 2nd sing. 'fJi'-X, fem. "^y^, 3rd sing. =I33;K,
fcm. '"IsrN, 2nd plur. DD3''SI, 3rd plur. masc. D3''SI. — Also *3l'iy / am yet
(n*iy only in niy2 and hiyo), ^n'ly, ^-fw, i3niy (La 4^7 Q're; n^niy
* The separation of the n at the beginning of Dt 32', expressly noticed by
Qlmhi (ed. Rittenb., p. 40 b) as an unique instance, is perhaps a protest
against admitting a particle pn .
* This form, which occurs in Dt 29'*, i S 14^*, 23*', Est 3*, is textually very
doubtful, and cannot be supported by the equally doubtful ijDp (for ^33p)
Nu 23''. Most probably, with Stade, Gramm., § 370 b, and P. Uaupt, SBOT
Numbers, p. 57, line 37, we should read ^3B'"|.
§§ ioo;j, 101 a, 6] Adverbs 297
KHh.; the oriental school [see above, p. 38, note 2] recognize only
the reading IJ^iy), a'}'\V .—n^*JA where art thou ?, ^*« where is Jie ?, DJ«
where are they ? The same applies to |n ("fH) and nan behold/ (prop.
/(ere, ^ere zs ; see § 105 6), only in Gn 19^ *<3""'?'^; with suffixes, ''?3n,
once ''33n (Gn 22" with Munah), in 2>««se ''?3n behold me {here am I),
^an {pause 4l3n >/' 139*), ^3!?, 'isn, and insn [both very rare], ^33n (fte/toZ(Z
ws). and13.3n (in 2>ause IJSn)^ Q??'?, ^I"? ; [see more fully in the Lexicon,
p. 243].
The usual explanation of these suffixes (especially of the forms with Nun p
energicum) as verbal suffixes, which ascribes some power of verbal government
even to forms originally substantival (e.g. ^JK*]! there is, he is), is at least
inadmissible for forms (like VSI, '''fiV^) which are evidently connected with
noun- suffixes ; even for the other forms it is questionable. Brockelmann
suggests that the J in connexion with these particles is a survival from nJH
corresponding to the Arab, 'anna which introduces dependent clauses.
101. Prepositions.
Brockelmann, Grundriss, i. 494 ffi
1. All words, which by usage serve as prepositions, were originally Ct
substantives, viz. :
(a) Substantives in the accusative and in the construct state, so that
the noun governed by them is to be considered as in the genitive,
and in Arabic actually has the genitive ending, cf. in German stalt
desxeri, kraft dessen, in Greek tovtov x^P'-^> ^^ Latin huius rei causa,
or gratia, mantis instar} Cf. "inx (hinder part*) behind, after {MiVel
in I? -^DK Lv i^'\ Dt2i'\ I S lo^ HT iriK 2 Ch 32^); h^^ (side)
dose by; p3 (intermediate space*) between; lys, "IVi (distance")
behind, around ; T\y!\, or with Hireq compaginis ^Op^T (removal, want)
except ; \T. (purpose) on account of; ^^'^ (?iO only in Dt i^) before, over
against; "fO (separation; cf. § 119 v) from, out of; "155 (coming in
front, that which is over against) before, over against; "ly (progress,
duration*) during, until; "?y (height, upper part*) upon, over; "Dy
(connexion 1) with ; it is doubtful whether this is to be derived from
the same stem as HBiy, ns^p near, beside, like; ^nri (under part*)
under, instead of.
(b) Substantives in the construct state, but to be regarded as in the 0
genitive, since they depend on prepositions (especially the inseparable),
e. g. ^pSp (in the face of *) before ; ^B3 , "•Sp' (according to the mouth,
^ In the examples which follow, the meaning of the noun is added in
parentheses, and, when it is actually in use [though it is mostly in such cases
very rare], is marked with an asterisk. — On a similar use in other languages,
see W. von Humboldt, tjber die Kawisprache, iii, p. 621.
* So also J. Hoch de Long, Die hebr. Ptdpos. lys^ Lpz. 1905.
298 IVie Particles [§§ 1010,102 a-d
i.e. the command of*) according to; ''?|i? (in the concern of) on
account of; fyp^ (for the purpose of) on account of.
C 2. Substantives used adverbially very frequently become preposi-
tions in this way, e.g. ''bll, ^^3, ^fiao, ^n^3, pN3, DDK3(with cessation)
without, "liys (in the duration of) during ; '^'S^, ''ll (according to the
requirement of) for, according to.
§ 102. Prefixed Prepositions.
a 1. Of the words mentioned in § loi, "|J? from, out of frequently
occurs as a prefix (§ 99 c), with its Niin assimilated to the following
consonant (by means of D ages forte), e. g. 1^10 out of a forest.
J) Rem, The separate "JD (always with a following Maqqeph) is usual (but not
necessary, cf. Ju 20^* with verse 15, Ez 43*, &c.) only before the article, e.g.
J>lKn"f?D, and sometimes occurs before the softer consonants, e.g. IN"}!^
Jer44", ''pn-fO Jo 112, i Ch 5I8 ; cf. Ex 18'*, Lv 1", 1480, Ju 723, 10", i9i«,
\p 104'' (2 K 23^6 before "1; also before p in ^ iS*^)( and elsewhere in the later
books (as in Aramaic) ^ ; there is besides a poetic by-form ^30 (cf. § 90 m) and
"•JlD Is 30!^. Its form is most commonly '"0 with a following Dages, which may,
however, be omitted in letters which have S^wd (cf. § 20 m). With a follow-
ing 1 the O is, as a rule, contracted to ""D, e. g. "•n"'© = ^TD or ''l^D (but cf.
^pK'^D Dn 12^ ; ^fltS'TO 2 Ch 20") ; before gutturals it becomes D (according
to § 22 c), e.g. DnXO Dyi3 ; before n the tt occurs with the guttural virtually
' ^ T T 1"' T "
sharpened in ^^ino on the outside, and in DiniD Gn 14^' ; before n in flVHO (cf.
§ 28 6 and § 63 q. The closed syllable here is inconsistent with the required
virtual sharpening of the n ; probably nVHO is merely due to the analogy of
nvn^) ; similarly Is 14^ before n; but in i S 2328, 2 S 18^6 fp'^Ki is to be read,
according to § 22 s.
C 2. There are also three other particles, the most commonly used
prepositions and the particle of comparison, which liave been reduced
by abbreviation (§ 99 c) to a single prefixed consonant with S^wd (but
see below, and § 103 e), viz. :
3 [poet. ^03] in, at, with.
? [poet. ^^P] towards, (belonging) to, for, Lat. ad.
3 [poet. iJOS] like, as, according to (no doubt the remnant of a sub-
stantive with the meaning of matter, kind, instar).
(t With regard to the pointing it is to be observed that —
(a) The ^''wd mobile, with which the above prefixes are usually pronounced,
has resulted from the weakening of a short vowel (an original a, according
to/) 2 ; the short vowel is regularly retained before S'wd : before S^wd simplex
^ KOnig, Einleitung ins A. T., p. 393 (cf. also the almost exhaustive statistics
in his Lehrgebdude, ii. 292 ff.), enumerates eight instances of |p before a word
without the article in 2 Samuel and Kings, and forty-five in Chronicles.
2 Jerome (see Siegfried, ZAW. iv. 79) almost always represents 3 by ba.
§ 102 e-i] Prefixed Prepositions 299
in the form of an i, attenuated from a : before a Hateph the prefix takes the
vowel of the flafeph, e.g. '''\Z)b for fruit, ^"1X3 as a lion, '»3i;3 bd">m, in affliction
(sometimes with the syllable subsequently closed, of. § 28 b, and the infinitives
with ^ § 63 i) : before weak consonants it follows the rule given in § 24 c, e.g.
m^n''') for '^b. When the prefixes 2.1 3. ? precede Cn'^N God, the S^wd
T p ;• "^ :':':': ■L ' ''"' L
and Hafeph S^ghol regularly coalesce in Sere, e.g. D\n?X3, &c., for '7N3 ; so
with suffixes Vnl'NI., &c. (once also in the sing. \r\Wb Hb i") ; also regularly
Ibab to say, for "iOV^b, see § 23 d.
(6) When the prefixes precede the article, the il is almost always dropped, e
and they take its vowel. See further in § 35 n.
(c) Immediately before the tone-syllable, i.e. before monosyllables and dis- /*
syllables with the tone on the penultima (in the fore-tone), they take Qames ^
(undoubtedly a lengthening of an original a, cf. § 26 e, § 28 a), but only in
the following cases :
(aa) b before infinitives of the above-mentioned forms, as nn? to give, P"!?
to judge, 13^ to plunder, Tbb to shear, ih? to keep a festival, fTlP? to bring forth,
D^^b to go, nnpb to take, except when the infinitive (as a nomen regens) is closely
connected with another word (especially its subject, § 115 e), and consequently,
as being in a sort of constr. state, loses the principal tone, e.g. HXiv Ex 19^,
n3K'^ Gn 16', and so always DOn Hlb Nu 13", &c. (in such cases as 2T|rrnri7
Ex 521 the a is protected by the secondary tone ; before infinitives of verbs
Vy, the b is retained even in close connexion ; cf. Ez 2120-25, 22^) ;
(66) before many pronominal forms, e.g. nn (so also in i S 211"; not rlQ), g'
m^ mS nXlb (in close connexion, however, niiV Gn 2^3 ; riKt3 Gn 452^) ;
vT ) •.■ T » T ^ : . :
nV^II as these ; and especially 033^ 03^^ D33 (D33) and Cin3 Dnp, DHS (DHS),
see § 103 e ;
(cc) b before monosyllables or fore-toned nouns in such combinations as ft
npb T\B mouth to mouth, 2 K lo^i, D>Dp D^lp p5 between waters and waters, Gn ]« ;
tXyobfor a trouble, Is i", but always before the principal pause. The instructive
example in Dt 17^ also shows that the punctuation 7 is only possible with at
least the lesser pause after it; in Is 28i''i3 the S is twice repeated, even
before the small and smallest disjunctives ;
(drf) in certain standing expressions, which have become stereotyped almost I
as adverbs, e.g. -\vb to eternity, 3^S in multitude, H^?? in security, njf37 to
eternity, but DTIY: W^lb to all eternity. Is 34". Cf. also B'SD? for the dead,
Lv 1928, Nu 5S 9'V ' ;
(d) With the interrogative HO they are pointed as in nS? ; in pause and K
before N as in n^3 by what? (before a following relative clause, as in Ec 3^2,
np3; cf. Delitzsch, Jesaia, 4th ed., on Is 2^^) ; J^r^^ how much ? but also n©3
1 k 22", in close connexion, and at a greater distance from the pause. The
S^ghol in these forms arises from a modification of the original u, while the
D is sharpened in order to maintain the original a of the prefixes.
When b (prop, la) is united to HO, it takes, according to § 49/, g, the form /
ntsS* (Jb 72° nO^, I S i« no!?, all Mini, and hence the a in the tone is
tt^'tt' vt' <[
lengthened to a) for what? why? Before the gutturals K, H, V, HD? is used
for euphonic reasons (exceptions 1 S 28'*, 2 S 143', Jer i^^^, before H ; 2 S 2^,
300 The Particles [§§ 102 m, 103 a, b
\p 49^, before N) ; T\q), however, remains before H. Before letters which are
not gutturals, T]\j? is found in f 42I', 43^^ (immediately after a tone-syllable),
t)l Rem. The divine name Tf\T\\, which has not its original vowels (riin'\
but those of ""JIK (see § 17 c), except that the 1 has simple not compound S^wa,
takes the prefixes also, after the manner of "•yiX, thus niH^I Hiriv nin^3
T -: T |-, T l-> T 1- J
niiTO (since they are to be read inXI ""inxS ""y-INS, ""31X0) : for the K of
^JIX, as of ■'yiN 2'3"IX , &c. (see below), quiesces after the prefixes 3 3 2 1
but is audible after O (for |D), ^ (no instance in the 0. T.), and n (in D^JlSn
Dt 10^'',^ 136^, the article, not H interrog., is intended; the only example
with n interrog.,- Jer 8", is to be pointed ninTl, i.e. '•jhXH, not nin^H).
Hence the rule, N'^iflD n^J3 Moses brought out (i. e. D, V^ PI make the N audible),
D''33p ^^^l ^''^'^ Caleb brought in (i.e. 1 3 ^ 3 allow it to quiesce).' — As
regards the other plural forms of (HN, elision of the N always takes place
after 3, 1, 3, b, except in the form ''jn>{, thus VpX^, ^''ns^,&c. ; but
"•piN^, &c., ^^vnx^^, &c., DH'-ynNb.
§ 103. Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes and in the
Plural Form.
a 1. As all prepositions were originally nouns (§ loi) in the accusative,
they may he united with the noun-suffixes (§91 h-l), e.g. vV^ (p^'op-
at my side) hy me, ""JJIX (in my proximity) with me, Drinri (in their place)
instead of them, like the Latin mea causa, for my sake.
Jj Rem. I. The preposition HN (usually TlS:) near, with, is distinguished
from nSI (see below, and § 117 a, note 4), the sign of the definite accusative
(§ 117 a), in its connexion with suflSxes, by a difference of pointing, the
former making iriX^ 'ir''!!', i" iJaitse ^riX, 2nd fem. 'ijnx (Is 54^" 'n^'<)> '^^^,
PinX, ^3^X, D3riX, DriX (also in the later books, especially in Kings, and
always in Jer. and Ezek., incorrectly ^Tlix with me ; T]niXt5 /?om thee, i K 20''* ;
inXD from him, i K 22' ; DriX with them), while the latter retains its 0 (obscured
from d) before the light sufiixes, but before grave suffixes is pointed with
S'ghol. This S'ghol is to be explained, with Praetorius, ZDMG. Iv. 369 f., as the
modification of an d which again was shortened from original a (in 'dthi, ^dtho,
&c.) in a closed syllable {'dth-hem, &c.). The same shortening and modification
of the original d takes place before words in close connexion, hence ?3~nX ,
&c. When not in close connexion, the toneless flX becomes tone-long flX,
e.g. D^DE'n nX Gn i\ Hence the following forms arise: —
Sing. ^ Plur.
I. ^nX me. ^3riX MS.
m. ^nx patise TjOkj D3nX you.
/. Tinii'. . . /. l""''- .V;. . .
w. inx him, Dnk, rarely DHflX
/. nnX her. |nnX, rarely |riX
* Another vox memor. is Q?V^ i3~/'3 all is hidden in hitn.
them.
§ 103 '^-f'\ Prepositions xdth Pronominal Suffixes 301
Less common are the plene forms 'nis, ^n^K (Nu 2 2^3 nrnX before n), !]riit<
(Ex ap'f' HDnX), iniN, nniX, IJniK, OriiX. Moreover, for D3nK we find
DDniS Jos 23'"; for DnX, five times DHnK (Gn 32', Ex iS^o, &c.), and in
Ez 23''« DnniS ; for jnnS (GniQS &c, [13 times]), |nN (only found in Ez 16" ;
Ex 35''« njnx ; Ez 34" Hjn'lN), and fnniN Ez 23*''.— No instance of the 2nd
fern. plurJpnS occurs in the O. T. ; in Cant 2', &c., DSn^^i is used instead.
3. The preposition "Dy with (with suffixes on the model of stems V'^V, "^^V , ^
^©y [i S i2« naisy], in pawse !]?3y ; 2nd fem. T]^y; TOJ?, H^i?) is united with
the suffixes 13 DD, and DH by a (pretonic) Qames, which causes the sharpening
of the Mem to be distinctly audible: Ijisy, ^r)^V, ^>I}^V (so in Nu 22'^,
Dt 29'^, both in principal pause, and often in very late passages, otherwise
DISy is generally used). In the first person, besides ""tsy, we also find Hisy
(probably from original ''Ijy ; cf. Arab, 'inda, beside, with).
3. It is but seldom that prepositions occur with verbal suffixes, as ""irinri d
2 s 22S''*o.43 (for which f iS^-'-mas -"jrinri), nsrinn Gn 2" and '•3nya ip 139'!
(here probably for the sake of the rhyme with '•JWJ:'^).'
2. When pronominal suffixes are added to the prefixes (§ 102), there e
appears occasionally, especially in the case of the shorter suffixes,
an endeavour to lengthen the preposition, so as to give it more strength
and body. Hence to 3 is appended the syllable io (see below, k),
and ? and b take at least a full vowel, 3 and ^ (§ 102 d, f). — The
following deviations from the analogy of the noun with suffixes are
to be noticed (a) in the pausal forms ^3, "q^, "^J?^<, "^^i^, "^^V (not
bekhd, &c.) ; (6) in the similar forms with the suffix of the 2nd sing,
fem. (not bekh, &c.) and in ^l. ^^% ''^W, &c. (not bmu, &c.).
(a) ? with Pronominal Suffixes. f
Sing. Plur.
I. y to me. 13? to us.
J ': \ t:/. jr ^ [to thee. , ■ r „^ <i\to you.
Sb to him. DnJ', r^^b^, poet. S^^)
3.
[53 times] =
f.^btoher. in^/f^jn^
■to them.
' Fini and bini (in me), in vulgar Arabic for fyya and bi, are compared by
Socin. Brockelmann, ZA. xiv. 347, note i, suggests that ""jrinn Hinnn ,
<
''3^y3 are later formations on the model of ^|QJp when its origin from the
reduplication of the preposition had become obscured, but see below, »n.
' p? does not occur in the 0. T., by a mere accident, no doubt ; Ez 13'*
1133^.
T V T
[For notes 3 and 4 see next page.]
302
The Particles
[§ 103 y, h
g 3 takes suffixes in the same manner : ^3, ^3 (Ex '7^^ 2 S 22^", ^/' 141*
'133, as in Gu 2f\ 2 S i%'\ Is 3^ Hsf) [for 2nd fem. i^ the KHh%h ^3^
occurs in 2 K 4^ Ct 2'^ cf. § 91 e]), ia, &c.; except that for the 3rd
plur., besides 0^3 (especially in the later books) and '"I^O? (only in
Ex 30", 36S Hb i'®; n^n? only in Jer 14'^), the form 03 is also used;
and for the fominine, besides '"l^nil (three times), 1^3 is found fifteen
times, and 1^3 only in i S 31^ Is 38'^, Ez 42". — According to the
Masora, Np is found fifteen times for v (as conversely in i S 2", 20*
V for xb), e.g. Ex 21*, I S 2^ Is 9^, i/' 100^ (and, as has been con-
jectured, also Jb 41^); cf. Delitzsch on -^ IOO^ — In Nu 32''^, Zc 5",
Eu 2", the Masora requires np instead of "ip (in all three places before
a following tone-syllable; cf. § 23^, and the analogous cases of the
loss of Mappiq in § 58 ^, § 91 e).
h
{b) 3 with Pronominal Suffixes.
Sing.
^31035 as I.
m. ^ib3\
. '' [as thou.
. <
m. ^rriDS as he.
f. ni03 as she.
Plur.
, <
131D3 as we.
DD3, DDS, rarely D3'lD3
Dn3, rDn3, nQn3l, Dni»3
•• T ' L V T ' T •• T J' V :
mi ^3n3
as ye.
as they.
' The question whether ilD? can also stand for the sing, ib, which Rsdiger
and recently W. Diehl {Das Pronomen pers. svff. . . . des Hebr., p. 20 f.) and
P. Haupt (SBOT. on Pr 23^2'', a contraction of la-hmnu) have altogether denied,
must be answered in the affirmative unless we conclude with Diehl and
Haupt that all the instances concerned are due to corruptions of the text.
It is true that in such places as Gn 9^6.27^ jyi ^^^2^ jg ^qS^ ^ ►^^i" (all in or
immediately before the principal pause ; in Dt 33^ with Zaqeph qafon at least)
\D? can be better explained as plural (in reference to collective nouns) ; and
in Is 538 for S'O^ yj5 we should read with the LXX njhb ^33. On the other
hand, in Is 44^® its explanation as plural would be extremely forced. Even
then there would remain — presuming the traditional text to be correct —
iO^JQ if' ii' and iD''Q3 Jb 27^3, as well as iD\by, three times, Jb 20", 27"
(beside V^V), and especially Jb 22^. In all these places the most extreme
exegetical artifices can only be avoided by simply admitting a singular suffix
( = 1''35 VQ3 vbV)- — On the question of the antiquity of the suffixes in ST2
see § 91 I.
* The form jHS in Ru i^^ is Aramaic ( = iherefore).
® The use of ""i here for '* (cf. above, d) might be due to euphonic
.< <
reasons.— ^iD3 (defectively) only in the Pentateuch, ^b3 Ex 15".
§ 103 »-"»] Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes 303
(c) "fP with Pronominal Suffixes.
Sing. Plur.
■•jiDD, poet. ''?'? [4 times], in pause 13I3D /rom ms.
also "•?? [6 times] /rwft me.
(m. '^eo, in ?)awse inlP) ^ , ^3213
I
/m. ^SBO, Jb 4^2 in j)ause ^n:D, [inSD DHD, ni^hip [twice], I
3. J or ^narp: see belovv]/ro7/i him. Jb 11^ 0^3'? I
( f. n3|» from her. ]\}^, HSnO [7 times] ) *^"*'
The syllable iO (in Arabic wa KO = Heb. HO tc;taO in '•jiCS (probably from ^•
''3K nD3, prop, according to what I, for as I) is, in poeti-y, appended to the
three simple prefixes 3 3 ? even without suffixes, so that ^03^ iD3, ^Dp
appear as independent words, equivalent in meaning to 3, 3, p. Poetry is
here distinguished from prose by the use of longer forms ; in the case of JD^
T on the other hand, it prefers the shorter, which resemble the Syriac and
Arabic.
The form DHS, enclosed in brackets above, occurs only in 2 K 17'^ (in /
pause), n?2n3 only in Jer 36'^ (in pause) ; |n3 (Baer following Qimhi \T\3) only
in Ez 18^*. Cf. Frensdorff, Massora Magna, p. 234 fif. — For D33 as ye, Qimhi
requires D33 (invariably or only in Jb 16^?) ; in Jos 1'^, Ju 8^, Ezr 4^^ Baer
gives DD3.
<
With regard to fO with suffixes, ^SJ^'Ofrom mo is usually explained as arising, ffi,
by a reduplication of |p, from an original ''3J03D, just as ^3EO/»o»n him, from
in-3JD3D, identical in form with ^3J3p ^/rom us, from 13-3030, while n3)2ip/rom
her, goes back to 113030. Far simpler, however, is Mayer Lambert's explanation
{REJ. xxiii. 302 ff.), that ""llOp, &c., have arisen from ""ilSp, &c., and that the
forms of the suffixes are to be explained on the analogy of ''33"'SI, ^ll^V, HSrinri ^
§ 100 0. — The bracketed form ^n30, for which Baer, following Qimhi and
others, writes ^113?^, occurs only in i// 68^*, and is there regarded by Delitzsch,
Hupfeld, and others (following Simonis) as a substantive(|0^£ort!;o2i},__Ihe
expression NliTjO (for ^300?) Is 18^'' is very strange. — HOHO occurs only in
Jer io2, Ec 12^2 (^jb 1 120 QnaO) ; fHO (so Baer and Ginsburg, following the
best authorities, instead of the ordinary reading |np) only in Ez 16"".
^ The Babylonian Masora writes ^300 (to distinguish it from the 3rd sing.),
which is justly blamed by Ibn Ezra.
304 The Particles [§ 103 n, 0
n 3. Several prepositions, especially those which express relations of
space and time, are (like the German wegen) properly plural nouns
(for the reason, see § 124 a), and are, therefore, joined with the pro-
nominal suffixes in the form of the plural construct state, just like other
plural nouns (§91 g). On the other hand, the apparent connexion of
"•'^j ~iy, "-'5? with plural suffixes is explained from the ground-forms
of those prepositions (from stems H"?) ^JN (7*?), ""IJ?, VJ! (contracted to
'b^., \^^, &c.).'
0 Without suffixes these prepositions are —
ins, more frequently ''"in|^ (prop, hinder 2>arts) behind, after.
~''?>^ poet. [4 times in Job] also \?i^ {region, direction), tovjards, to,
according to.
P? {interval) between ; the suffixes indicating the singular are added
to the singular PI, thus ^^5, l^^?, &c. (Gn i6^ T?/?, the second Yodh
is, however, marked with a point as critically doubtful ; 1*J^?, which
occurs three times, is only the Masoretic Q^re for i^''?, which is found
e. g. in Gn 30^^). On the other hand, the suffixes indicating a plural
are attached to the plural forms ''P.''? or rii^a,
2''3D {circuit) around, as a preposition, always has the plural form,
sometimes masc. ^"'5''??, &c. [10 times], but much more frequently in
the fern. rii3"'3D {surroundings). In Ez 43"^ nniN 3''ap is a corruption
of ri''rib''3p ; [in I K 6' ritj 2^20 also is so contraiy to usage, that it
must be due to some textual error].
"iy {continuation, duration, from 'Tiy) as far as, unto, poet, ''^y [12
times]. In Jb 32'^ ^?"'"1V> with the a, retained in the secondary tone,
is abnormal. Also in 2 K 9'* for ^>I\~^V read 0'!?'''!]^.
vy upon, over (cf. the rare subst. ^V height [see Lexicon], from ^pV
to ascend), poet. \?y [40 times, and 2 Q^re].
< <
nnri under (prop, what is beneath). On ^3rinri^ &c.; cf. above, d.
^ The reference of these forms to original plurals has been again expressly
supported by De Lagarde, Symmida, ii. loi ff. ; Nachrichten der G. g. G., 1881,
p. 376, cf. Mittheilungen, 1884, p. 63 ; also GGA. 1884, p. 280 f. According
to Earth, ZDMG. xlii. p. 348 £f., and Nominalbildung, p. 375 ff., ^^rinjPl, &c.,
was only formed on the analogy of ^ vV, &c., and ^'7.nX, &c., only on the
analogy of '*}pP, &c., since the real plural forms ouglit to be ^'rinri^ "'l^lll'^,
&c. ; cf., however, Konig, Lehrgebdude, ii. 305 f.
2 On the use of this particle see § 1193.
rS^
^i'v
T "
viy
T T
v)v
T V ••
n'ny
T VT
T V T
5ir!5X
ir5y
§§io3i), 104 a] Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes 305
TJ^^■<^ Suffixes.
Sing. nnK "r? ^^113^30 'ripin 'bs ny ^byp
(a/ifer me) (between me) {around me) {beneath me) (to me) (\into me) (on me)
5. /: T^riH Tl*n'i3'3D
S.vi. vinx ij^s rni3'3D vnnn
, T-;|- •• T I* : T : -
I & V3'3D
5. f. nnnx n'n'i3'3D n^rinn
-"• y T v-:i- T V r : t v : -
PZwr. ^jnnx ij-ys irn*i3"'3D irrinn
:PZ.7n. D3nnx D3'y3 D3^n^r3D QS'jnnn Ds^bs D3'ny D3'by
PI. m. Dnnnx an^ys Dn'n*i3'3D Dn^nnn nr\^b\^ ronnyi Dn^^y
j & Dn"iy3 & Dn^3'3tp usually orinri & D^l>^{ [2 'Wv]
PI. f. pnnx rn^nnn |n'bx |n\^y
i & mba
i V -:
1
§ 104. Conjunctions.
1. The conjunctions serve to connect sentences, and to express their a
relations one to another. They may be either —
(a) Original pronouns, e. g. the demonstrative "? that, because, for.
[b] Original substantives, which afterwards were reduced to the
rank of pronouns, adverbs, or conjunctions ; so perhaps "IK'S (see § 36),
which is sometimes used to express the general idea of relation,
sometimes as a relative pronoun (properly a demonstrative), but in
many cases stands simply for '? ; also vt< {nothing), that not ; "fS that
not (the Greek /X17 of jyrohibition), &c. To these may be added the
adverbial combination of substantives with prepositions, e.g. D^.^S
* As Mayer Lambert observes, usage (cf. esp. Gn 2628) distinguishes between
the two forms : 13"'niy3 means between us and you, wliereas 1^3*3 (Jos 2 225-".28
before D3"'3*31) means between us on the one side.
« The poetical form iJD\'?S only in ^^2' ; iCi\by, on which see note 3 on /,
13 times [viz. Dt 32*', f 5", 55", 6^\ JbG's, 20^3,' 21". 2 22, 27", 2922, 3025].
COWLEY X
3o6 The Particles [§ 104 h-g
{in the not yeC) earlier, hefore, for which Q^-^J? is also used. Oa the
combiuatiou of two particles to express complex ideas (e. g. '2"^??
added to this, that=:much more), see the Syntax, § 163 f.
5 (c) Prepositions, which with the addition of the conjunction T^8<
or '3 together form one single conjunction, e.g. "^^^ Wl because, prop.
on account of the fact that; T^?< inx, and more frequently '^B'^{ ""inx^
after that ; "1!^*?3 according as (with 3) ; '3 ^^^ and '^^^. ^\>V in conse-
quence of the fact that, for the reason that, because. Sometimes, how-
ever, the conjunction in such cases is omitted, and the preposition
itself used as a conjunction, e.g. vV (for "1K'>^"7y) although, Jb 16'^.
So, at any rate, according to our linguistic principles. It would, however,
be more correct to say, that instead of the intermediary "1t^^{ the whole of the
succeeding sentence is regarded as one substantival idea, under the immediate
government of the preposition. In the same way, all prepositions governing
the gerund in English may be paraphrased by conjunctions with the finite
verb, see §§114 and 115, passim.
C 2. Besides those already mentioned, there are certain other small
words now used as conjunctions, of which the derivation or original
meaning is altogether obscure, thus ^X or, "DK if (also or before the
second member of a double question), ^^ also, \ and, and others.
a Rem. The pointing of the \ (originally \, as still before Hateph Pathah
and — with a following Bagei forte — in wdw consecutive of the imperfect; cf.
§ 49/) is in many respects analogous to that of the prefixes 3 3 p (§ 102 d-i),
but as being a weak consonant, the wdw copulative has some further pecu-
liarities :
(a) Usually it takes simple S^wd ("l\
(b) Before words wliich begin with a guttural having a compound S^wd,
it takes the vowel with which the S"wd is compounded (according to § 28 b),
e. g. D3ni and be thou wise, D^13yi and servants, ]^)y ^ and strength, PbNI and eat
--:r -ry .,:,v v:,..-
thou, vn* and sickness. On DTl^XI Tir'N^ fee, see § 102 d ; on "•JISI &c.,
• T;|T • ' I"' - I"' ' - l-> '
see § 102 m ; on such cases as ~\)l]}\ Jb ^^, cf. § 28 b.
e (c) Before words with simple S^wd under the first consonant (except in the
cases under/), the Wdw becomes the vowel m (cf. § 26 a), e. g, /bpl and to all,
so also (except in the case under g) before the cognate labials 3, D, D, hence
!]p6^ . On the cases in which simple S^wd has become a Hateph after 1 copulative
(e.g. ann Gn 2"), cf. § 10 jr.
■f^ (d) With a following ^ the 1 coalesces to form ""I according to § 24 b, as ^HM
and let him be. On the peculiar punctuation of the wdw copulative before forms
with initial S^wd from iTn to be and iTH to live (e. g. DrTiMI Jos 8*, n*ni Gn 20''),
T T T T V • : !• •' : IV
cf. § 63 q.
tr (e) Immediately before the tone-syllable it frequently takes Qame.^, like
3, 3, p (see § 102/), but in most cases only at the end of a sentence or clause
(but cf. also N31 2 K 22^";, e.g. nOI Ex 21" (on the other hand, in verse 20
§ 105 a, *] Conjunctions 307
nJ3^ is in closer logical connexion with what follows) ; 2 K 7* DB' ^3rrt3"l , IJJT^I
.,. • ° . ,. ■^ : j-t'. : A'T
and 5|in01 ; Ku 38 rippl ; ^ lo^s ynf; i S 9^ |^N1 ; 2 S 1326 n1?i ; Ez 47^ ^Hl ; cf.
also (with Tiph/ia) Gn 33^^, 2 S 15^^^. The very frequent connexion of nouns
expressing kindred ideas, by means of 1, is due simply to considerations of
rhythm, for even in such cases the Wdio must immediately precede the tone-
syllable, which must be marked by a disjunctive accent, e. g. ^HDI ^nri Gn i^,
HTpl Di^ Gn 8** (see also the previous examples) ; Gn 13I* (thrice) ; Ex 25'
^P?J ^\}l > 'P 96^ ^V] Ii33 ; ip 76' D1D1 nDll ; Gn 7" DD^I DCTtlKn nb ; i K 2110
TlS»1 D^nl5S • nbl nb thus and thus : Est i^ tJ'"'XrE'"'K at the end of the verse,
'v AV • v: ^ T ' l-T •
but in ^ 875 K'-XI B'^N in spite of the D'/ii with the second B'"'K, because it is
closely connected with the following predicate. Also with three words
riQI nriBI in3ls24i''. On the other hand, the rapid pronunciation "1 occurs
before a conjunctive accent (and, when farther removed from the principal
pause, even with the smaller disjunctives, in spite of a following tone-syllable),
e.g. T3y"! |KX Gn 326; cf. Gn 31", Lv 72s, Dt 2^1, and among the examples
given above, Gn 7^ and tl 76''. (Exceptions : ntD*1p"l Gn 13^*, where evidently
the ) is intended to ensure the slow and solemn recitation of the promise,
T
but also H^n Jos 15^^, inyi 19', 1^31 19*^, all immediately before the pause.)
For the same rhythmical reason ) (not 1) is used regularly with certain
monosyllables which, by their nature, lean more closely upon the following
word, thus nil, JINI, D^^ N?1 (to be distinguished fromNPI if not, -with Zaqej'h
gadol, 2 K 5^''), and others.
§ 105. Interjection?.
1. Among the interjections some (as in all languages) are simply O,
natural sounds, or, as it were, vocal gestures, called forth involuntarily
by certain impressions or sensations, e. g. •'inN (Ez 30^ ^^), HK ah ! Hxn
aha! (cf. this HX also in '^HK and '^r\it utmam J), N3>< Ex 32^'. &c.
(Gn 50'^ N3X) ah/ (from PIN and W), otherwise written HSN 2 K 20^
Jn i'*, yjr 116*; also DPI (in pause Dn, even in the plural ^DH hold yovr
feace! Neh 8") hush ! '^H (Am 5^« inin) ha/ woe/ '^N, .T^N (,/, 120*),
-N (in ^fj'N Ec 4'"; ^W io'«) woe/
2. Others, however, originally expressed independent ideas, and 0
hecome interjections only by rapid pronunciation and by uf age, e. g.
in (**n) or nan behold ! (prop, here) ; HN"! hehold I (prop, imperative) ;
>^'^'^ , plur. 'fln (prop, give, imperative of ^DJ ,* as to the tone, cf. § 690),
come, the Latin age, agite/ HDp (also \?), ^3 p (prop, go, imperative
of 'n?ij)) with the same meaning ' ; '"l^vC /«** ^^ it ^ (prop, ad frofanum/)
^ nSI (Dt 1^), nan and nap are also used in connexion with the feminine
•• ; ^ '' T T T ;
and the plural, which proves that they have become quite stereotyped as
interjections.
X 2
3o8 The Particles [§ 105 h
^? (see the Lexicon) / beseech, hear me ! t^J ipray ! ' used to emphasize
a demand, warning, or enti'eaty, and always placed after the expres-
sion to which it belongs.^
1 W serves to express the most various shades of expression, which are
discussed in the various parts of the syntax. It is used especially (a) after
the imperative, either in commands or entreaty, see § nod; (b) with the
imperfect, either in the cohortative (§ io8 6) or jussive (§ 109 b) ; (c) once with
perfect, Gn 40" ; (d) after various particles : Wn3n behold now ; particularly
after the conjunctions b^? and DN : N3"/K ne quaeso and N3~DX if now, untp,
ttTTOTf, if, in a deprecatory sense, expressive of politeness or modesty. In
Nu 1213 X3 stands after a noun; but we ought certainly to read K3"?S. —
In polite language this particle is used constantly in all these ways, Gn 18^*,
i9''-8-", and 50".
2 Against the usual view which regards N3 as a hortatory particle ( = up !
come ! analogous to the original imperatives HDH and n3p and the Ethiopic
na'd, properly hither, also come!), P. Haupt, in the Johns Hopkins University
Circulars, xiii, no. 114, p. 109, justly observes that we should then expect the
particle to be prefixed to the imperative, &c. He proposes to describe N3 as an
emphatic particle. Haupt's suggested identification of this {<3 with the
Assyrian, Arabic, and Ethiopic particle ma (which is also an enclitic of
emphasis), and ultimately with the interrogative mo, we shall not dis-
cuss here.
THIRD PART
SYNTAX 1
CHAPTER I
THE PARTS OF SPEECH
I. Syntax of the Verb.
A. Use or the Tenses and Moods.^
§ 106. Use of the Perfect.
The perfect serves to express actions, events, or states, wliich the Ci
speaker wishes to represent from the point of view of completion,
whether they belong to a determinate past time, or extend into the
present, or. while still future, are pictured as in their completed state.
The definition formerly given here (' the perfect serves to express completed
actions') applies, strictly speaking, only to some of the varieties of the perfect
discussed under b-p : hence the above modification based on the arguments
of Knudtzon (for the title see note 2, and cf. further § 107 a).
More particularly the uses of the perfect may be distinguished as
follows : —
1. To represent actions, events, or states, which, after a shorter Jj
1 Recent works on Hebrew syntax are : A. B. Davidson, Introductory Heb.
Gram., vol. ii, Heb. Syntax, Edinburgh, 1894; Ed. KOnig. Hist.-compar. Syntax
der hebr. Sprache, Lpz. 1897 (see above, § 3/). Important contributions to
Hebrew syntax are also contained in H. Reckendorfs work Die syntakt.
Verhciltnisse desArab., 2 pts., Leiden, 1895, 1898, of which we have already made
use in § 97 a. Cf. also the same author's very instructive discussions Utber
syntakt. Forschung, Munich, 1 899.
2 Cf. the sketch of the tenses and moods used in Hebrew in § 40 ; and on
the general characteristics of the perfect and imperfect see the note on § 47 a ;
also Driver, A Treatise on the Use of the Tenses in Hebrew (Oxford, 1874; 3rd ed.
1892) ; Bennett, 'Notes on the Use of the Hebrew Tenses' {Hebraica, 1886,
vols, ii, iii). A partial modification of the accepted definition of the Semitic
perfect and imperfect was proposed by J. A. Knudtzon, Om det saakaldte
Per/ektum og Imperfektum i Hebraisk, Kristiania, 1890; of which a summary
entitled ' Vom sogenannten Perf. und Imperf. im Hebr.' appeared in the
Transactions of the Oriental Congress at Stockholm, section semitique b, p. 73 flf.
(Leiden, 1893), Cf. also Kimdtzon's articles, ' Zur assyrischen und allgemein
semitischen Grammatik ' in the Zeitachriftfiir Assyriologie, especially vi. 422 ff.
and vii. 33 ff.
3IO The Parts of Speech [§io6c-/
or longer duration, were terminated in the past, and hence are finally
concluded, viz.:
(a) Corresponding to the perfect proper in Latin and the English
perfect definite, in assertions, negations, confirmations, interrogations,
&c., e. g. Gn 1 8^^ then Sarah denied, saying, I laughed not (N?
*ripnif) ; and lie said, Nay, hut thou didst laugh (rii?n2f); Gn 3"
f\h n>an ^Q loho told thee ? Cf. 3»i4.i7.22^ ^jg^ pointing to some
undefined time in the past, e.g. Is 66* HND ypK'"''D loko hath {ever yet)
heard such a thing ?
C Rem. In opposition to this express use of the perfect to emphasize the
completion of an event, the imperfect is not infrequently used to emphasize
that which is still future, e.g. Jos 1^ as I was (W^H) ivith Moses, so will I be
(ninN) with thee; Jos ii''. Ex lo^*, Dt Z2^\ i K 288/ Ig 46411, Jo 2^, Ec i^.
d {b) As a simple temjms historicum (corresponding to the Greek
aorist) in narrating past events, e. g, Gn 4* and Abel, he also brought
(N'nn), &c.; Gn 7" the waters did irrevail (^'l?^), &c.; Jb i' there was
a man (H^n ^'N) in the land of Uz, &c.; even in relating repeated
actions, i S 18'".
^ Rem. As the above examples indicate, the perfect of narration occurs
especially at the head of an entire narrative (Jb i^ ; cf. Dn 2^) or an indepen-
dent sentence (e.g. Gn 7^^-^'), but in co-ordinate sentences, as a rule, only
when the verb is separated from the copulative l by one or more words (cf.
above Gn 4* and 7^8). In other cases, the narrative is continued in the
imperfect consecutive, according to § ma. The direct connexion of the
narrative perfect with l copulative (not to be confounded with the perfect
consecutive proper, § 112) agrees rather with Aramaic syntax (cf. Kautzsch,
Gramm. des Biblisch-Aram., § 71, i 6). On the examples (which are in many
respects doubtful) in the earlier texts, see § 112 pp-uu.
f (c) To represent actions, &c., which were already completed in the
past, at the time when other actions or conditions took place (plu-
perfect),' e.g. I S 28^ now Samuel was {long since) dead"^ . . . and Saul
had j>ut avmy (T'DH) those that had familiar sjoirits . . . out of the land.
Both these statements, being as it were in parentheses, merely assign
a reason for the narrative beginning at verse 6. Cf. i 89'^, 25"',
2 S i8'l— Gn 20'* {for the Lord had fast closed up, &c.); 27^, 31'^-^,
Dt 2"; and in a negative statement, Gn 2^ for the Lord God had not
(up to that time) caused it to rain, &c. This is especially frequent,
from the nature of the case, in relative, causal, and temporal clauses,
when the main clause contains a tense referring to the past, e.g. Gn 2"
and he rested . . . from all his work which he liad made ('"'VV) > ^In 7',
1 Cf. P. Haupt in the Notes on Esther, 9*.
* Incorrectly, e.g. in the Vulgate, Samuel autem moiiuus est .. . efSaul abstulit
magos, &c.
§io6(7-0 ^s^ of the Perfect 311
19% &c.; 29" now when Jacob had seen Rachel ('160 1B'K3) . . . , Jacob
went near, &c.; so also in clauses which express the completiou or
incompleteness of one action, &c., on the occurrence of another, as in
Gn 24'^, 27^", &c.; cf. § 164 b, with the note, and c,
2. To represent actions, events, or states, which, although completed g
in the past, nevertheless extend their influence into the present (in
English generally rendered by the present) :
(a) Expressing facts which were accomplished long before, or con-
ditions and attributes which were acquired long before, but of which
the effects still remain in the present (present perfect), e.g. i/r 10"
VJS "rriDH Jie hath hidden his face {and still keeps it hidden) ; {{/ 143®
'jjl^ns / Jiave spread forth my hands {and still keep them spread forth).
This applies particularly to a large number of perfects (almost ex-
clusively of intransitive* verbs, denoting affections or states of the
mind) which in English can be rendered only by the present, or, in
<
the case mentioned above under /, by the imperfect.^ Thus, "^Vll
I know (prop. / have 2>erceived, have experienced) Jb 9^, 10", '^V'V X7
/ knoio not Gn 4^ &c.; on the other hand, e.g. in Gn 28", Nu 22^*,
the context requires / knew not ; ^^'pl we remember Nu 1 1^ ; ""'J^?'? she
refuseth Jb 6' ; Y2V it exulteth ; 'JjinpC' / rejoice 182^; tJ'i?.? he requireth
Is I ••2; -nli? / wait Gn 49", i/r 130^ (parallel with 'J^^nin) ; 'man
/ delight ij/ 40^ (mostly negative, Is 1'^, &c.) ; 'J?^']^ / love Gn 27'';
'riKpb' / hate i/^ 31' ; 'JjlD^? ^ despise Am 5'*; "il^J/n they abhor me
Jb 30'" ; 'Jyinon / trust i/r 25^; "fl'DH I put my trust 1/^31^; 'Jjlpl? ^ «"*
righteous Jb 34^; 'J?1i2? / have decided to requite i S 15^. — We may
further include a number of verbs which express bodily characteristics
Or states, such as JJiplJ thou art great \(/ 104' ; J^^isj? / am little Gn 32";
^ri33^ they are high Is 55'; PDJ^ they stand aloof Jb 30'"; ^3b they are
goodly Nu 24^ ; ^1W they are beautiful Is 52'' ; ''^^i>l I am old Gn 18" ;
'riV5I / am weary if, (P ; 'PiV??' / am full Is i", &c.
Rem. To the same category probably belong also the perfects after ''riD~*iy ]i
Ex 10^ how long hast thou already been refusing (and refusest still . . . ? which
really amounts to how long wilt thou refuse ?), f 80^, Pr i^^ (co-ordinate with the
imperf.), and after njN-ny Ex i628, Hb i^.
(i) In direct narration to express actions which, although really t
only in process of accomplishment, are nevertheless meant to be repre-
^ With regard to the great but very natural preponderance of intransitive
verbs (expressing an existing state), cf. the lists in Knudtzon (see above,
p. 309, note 2), pp. 117 and 122 in the Danish text.
2 Cf. novi, odi, memini ; oT5a, (iffivrj/xai, ioma, SiSopfca, KtKpaya ; in the New
Testament, ^\mKa, ■qfdiTTjKa.
312 I'^he Parts of Speech [§ io6 h-n
sented as already accomplished in the conception of the speaker, e. g.
"nbin 7 lift up (my hand in ratifying an oath) Gn 1 4^- ; 'Jj^V??'? I swear
Jer2 2^; 'nnVp / testify Dt 8>« ; ^^T I counsel 2S17" (but in a
different context in ver. 15, 7 have counselled); ""^"^^^ (p^op- I say)
I decide (7 consider as hereby settled) 2 S 19^°; 7 declare Jb 9^^, 32'".
fc (c) To express facts which have formerly taken place, and are still
of constant recurrence, and hence are matters of common experience
(the Greek gnomic aorist), e. g. if/ g}^ for thou, Lord, hast not forsaken
(ri3iy"N7) them that seek thee. Of. ver. 13, also ij/ 10^, 119*" and Gn 49"
(033).
/ Rem. In almost all the cases discussed in No. 2 (included under the English
present) the imperfect can be used instead of the perfect, wherever the action
or state in question is regarded, not as already completed, but as still con-
tinuing or just taking place (see § 107 a). Thus, '•ripD'' NP I am not able \p 40"
and bp^K X^ Gn 31'^ have practically the same meaning. Hence also it very
frequently happens that the imperfect corresponds to such perfects in poetic
or prophetic parallelism, e.g. Is 5^^, ^ 2^'-, Pr i**, Jb 3I''.
711 3. To express future actions, when the speaker intends by an
express assurance to represent them as finished, or as equivalent to
accomplished facts :
(a) In contracts or other express stipulations (again corresponding
to the English present, and therefore closely related to the instances
noted under i), e.g. Gn 23^' the field I give Cj"!??) thee; cf. ver. 13 and
48^^ 2 S i4^\ 24^^^, Jer 40^; in a threat, i S 2'^, 285^ (unless, with
"Wellhausen, "^y^) is to be read). — Especially in promises made by God,
n (h) To express facts which are undoubtedly imminent, and, therefore,
in the imagination of the speaker, already accomplished {perfectum
conjidentiae), e.g. Nu 17^^ I^I^K y?3 W13N Ijyia |n behold, we perish, we
are undone, we are all undone. Gn 30", Is 6* ( v^?"!? I «w* undone '),
Pr 4^ Even in interrogative sentences, Gn i8^^ Nu 17^, 23'°, Ju 9^",
Zc 4'" (?), Pr 2 2^".^ This use of the perfect occurs most frequently in
prophetic language (^perfectum pro2)heticum). The prophet so ti'ans-
^ Cf. the similar use of 6\ai\a {Sii<p6opas, II. 15. 128) ^ndiperii! On the
kindred use of the perfect in conditional sentences, cf. below, p.
^ In Gn 40^* a perf. conjidentiae (after DN *3 ; but cf. § 163 d) appears to be
used in the expression of an earnest desire that something may happen {hut
have me in thy remembrance, &c.). Neither this passage, however, nor the use of
the perfect in Arabic to express a wish or imprecation, justifies us in assuming
the existence of a precaiive perfect in Hebrew. In Jb 21^*, 22^*, also, translate
the counsel of the wicked is far from me. Cf. Driver, Tenses^, p. 25 f. In Is 43^
either ^if3i?3 is imperative (see § 51 0) or we must read 'XIlp^, cori-esponding to
IBDX* which follows.
§§io6o,p,io'j a] Use of the Perfect 313
ports himself in imagination into the future that he describes the future
event as if it had been ah-eady seen or heard by him, e. g. Is 5" there-
fore my peojile are gone into captivity (p^^) ', g^^', 10^^, ii® (after ""a, as
frequently elsewhere); 19^ Jbs*", 2 Ch 20^'^. Not infrequently the
imperfect interchanges with such perfects either in the parallel member
or further on in the narrative.
(c) To express actions or facts, which are meant to be indicated as 0
existing in the future in a completed state {futurum exactum), e. g.
Is 4'' Y^l ^^ ichen he has washed away=when he shall have washed
away (an imperfect follows in the co-ordinate sentence ; cf. the con-
ditional sentences in § 107 a;); Is 6" (after Di< "^^^ "'y, as in Gn 28^^,
Nu 32" ; also 2 S 17^^ after IB'K ny, Gn 24" after DX ny and elsewhere
frequently after temporal conjunctions); Mi 5^ ('^l^,?^) 5 Glii 43^ ''^^V
"''J'PpV' ""^P^^ "^-^-r ^'^^ ^ — ^f ^ ^''^ bereaved (orhus fuero), I am
bereaved, an expression of despairing resignation. Cf. Pr 23'^ E&t 4'^
4. To express actions and facts, whose accomplishment in the past J9
is to be represented, not as actual, but only as possible (generally
corresponding to the Latin imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive), e.g.
Gn 31''^ except the God of my father . . . had been with me, surely now
hadst thou sent me away empty C^^^W) ; Gn 43*", Ex 9'* (''J?0?V I^i'dd
almost put forth, &c.); Nu 22^S Ju ^3^^ i4»«, i S 13" (Ppn) ; 2 K 13'%-
so frequently after t3yD3 easily, almost, Gn 26^", Is i' (where i^V^V is
probably to be connected with the word after it), ^/'73^ 94'^ 119"',
Pr 5» Cf. also Jb 3'^ 23'" 035(12), Ku i^^ (if I should think, &c.; cf.
2 K 7^); in the apodosis of a conditional sentence, i S 25^^ — So also
to express an unfulfilled desire, Nu 14^ ^3n6 V? would that we had
died . , . / (v with the imperfect would mean would that we might
die/ I S 14^°). Finally, also in a question indicating astonishment,
Gn 21^ t'.?'? ■'0 who would have said . . . ? quia dixeril ? yjr 73".
§ 107. Use of the Imperfect
The imperfect, as opposed to the perfect, represents actions, events, a
or states which are regarded by the speaker at any moment as still
continuing, or in process of accomplishment, or even as just taking
place. In the last case, its occurrence may be represented as certainly
imminent, or merely as conceived in the mind of the speaker, or
simply as desired, and therefore only contingent (the modal use of the
imperfect).
^ Cf. the literature cited above, p. 309, note a.
314 1^^^^ Parts of Speech [§ 107 b, c
Knudtzon (see above, Rem. on § io6 a), comparing the Ass. -Bab. usage,
would prefer the term present rather than imperfect, on the ground that the
tense expresses what is either actually or mentally present. In any case,
the essential difference between the perfect and imperfect consists, he argues,
in this, that the perfect simply indicates what is actually complete, while
the imperfect places the action, &c., in a more direct relation to the judgement
or feeling of the speaker.
More precisely the imperfect serves—
1. In the sphere oi past time'.
b (a) To express actions, &c., which continued throughout a longer
or shorter period,' e.g. Gn 2^ a mist vjent up continually ('"1?^^.), 2^",
37", 48'", Ex I'^ 8^ 13^ i5«i2.u.u Nu 9^^'- ^«S 23\ Ju 2\ 5','i S 3',
13"S 2 S 2^ 23'", I K 3^ f, 2i«, Is i'\ 6^{xf^:), if"'; 5I^^ Jer 13',
36", yjr i8'-"''''^-38'^-, 24^ 32^-^ On^^), 4f, 68"'•'^ 104^^-, io6^ lof^"",
139'^, Jb 3'\ 4^^-^^'-, 10'°^, I5''- — very frequently alternating with a
perfect (especially with a frequentative perfect; cf. Nu 9'^"^' and
§ 1 1 2 e), or when the narration is continued by means of an imperfect
consecutive.^
C Rem. I. The imperfect is frequently used in this way after the particles
TN then, 0^6 not yet, D163 before, "nj? until, e.g. Ex 15I HK'Cl'T'K'J TN then sang
Moses, &c. ;' ku 21", Dt"4«', Jos 10", i K 3^6, 8^, ip 126^ Jb 3821. (The perfect
is used after TX when stress is to be laid on the fact that the action has really
taken place, and not upon its gradual accomplishment or duration in the
past, e. g. Gn 4^^ Pffln IK then began, &c. ; Gn 49*, Ex 15", Jos 22*1, Ju 5",
^ 8920.) 3 After Dn6 e.g. Gn 19^ ^33B'^ Dn6 before they lay do^cn; Gn 2^, 24^,
I S 38'', always in the sense of our ^ZM^er/ed, (In Gn 24^^ instead of the perf.
n^3, the imperf. should be read, as in verse 45 ; so also in i S 3''' [H^SI] an
imperf. is co-ordinated with VT'). After D"1D3 (sometimes also simply CHD
Ex 12", Jos 3I), e.g. Jer i^ NSffl D"l6ll before thou earnest forth ', Gn 27'', 37^*,
41^", Ru 3I* (perhaps also in ^ 90* an imperf. was intended instead of H?' •
cf. Wellhausen on 2 S 3^ ; but note also Pr 8^', in a similar context, before the
mountains ivere settled, ^y3Dn, the predicate being separated fromD^£)3 by C^H^
as in ip 90'). After "ij] Jos lo^', 1// 73^^ (until I went), 2 Ch 29^* ; on the other
^ Cf. the Mesa' inscription, 1. 5, n2f^K3 t^'03 fjiX^ ^2 for Chemosh was angi-y
ivith his land. As Driver, Tenses, 3rd ed., § 27, la, remarks, this vivid
I'ealization of the accomplishment of the action is especially frequent in
poetic and prophetic style.
" According to the Masora such imperfects occur in Is lo^^ '"* (where,
however, "T'DNI might also mean I am wont to remove, &c.). Is 48', 57", ip 18"",
also (according to § 49 c) in 2 S 1^" and Ez 16'**. In some other cases ) is no
doubt a dogmatic emendation for "I (imperf. consec.) in order to represent
historical statements as promises; cf. Is 42*, 43*' [contrasted with 42^^],
gi2 bis^ 5^8 ff. r^J^^ the note on § 53 p.
' After TK then (to announce future events) the imperf. is naturally used in
the sense of a future, Gn 24*1, Ex 12**, Mi 3*, Zp 3^ ip 51".
§ 107 d-9] Use of the Imperfeci\ 315
/ \ « "^
hand, with the perf., e.g. Jos 2"^. As after IX, so also after D")p Q'?^i?fi, *"^
~iy the iuiperf. may be used, according to the context, in wie arfise of our
future, e.g. 2 K 2', Is 65^*, Jb lo^i ; after ~*iy e. g. Is 22". The knperf. is used
<
in the sense of our present after D"lt3 in Ex 9''', 10'^.
2. Driver (Tenses^, p. 35 f.) rightly lays stress upon the inherent distinction CI
between the participle as expressing mere duration, and the imperfect as ex-
pressing ^rogrre.ssn'e duration (in the present, past, or future). Thus the words
NV' "injl Gn 2^° represent the river of Paradise as going out of Eden in
a continuous, uninterrupted stream, but TIB"", which immediately follows,
describes how the parting of its waters is always taking place afresh. In the
same way Hpy' Gn 2* represents new mists as constantly arising, and N??2^
Is 6* new clouds of smoke. Also those actions, &c., which might be regarded
in themselves as single or even momentaiy, are, as it were, broken up by
the imperfect into their component parts, and so pictured as gradually com-
pleting themselves. Hence iO^^Sri Ex 15" (after a perf. as in verse 14)
represents the Egyptians, in a vivid, poetic description, as being swallowed
up one after another, and ^iHi^ Nu 23'' the leading on by stages, &c.
{b) To express actions, &c., which were repeated in the past, either e
at fixed intervals or occasionally (the modus ret repetitae), e. g. Jb i*
thus did (n^'IT ) Job continually (after each occasion of his sons'
festivities); V'-, 22"'-, 23", 29"-''-'-'-, Gn 6*, 29^ 30-», 42"-3« {I used
to bear the loss of it), Ex i'^, 19^', 33'"^' (ni5^ used to take every time),
40^^^-, Nu 9"'-=«"^., 11^.9, Ju 6\ I4'», 2 1^% I S I^ 2^, 9^ I3'^ i8\
27^, 2 S i^^, 12^ 13**, I K 5-* (of tribute repeated year by year), io%
I3^^ I4^^ 2 K4«, 8^ 13^ 25'^ Jer36^^ yjr 42% 44^ 78'^-^", I03^
Est 2"; even in a negative dependent clause, i K 18^".
2. In the sphere of present time, again /*
(a) To express actions, events, or states, which are continued for
a shorter or longer time,' e.g. Gn 37'* C'lpsriTlD wJiat seekest thou ?
19I9 ?21X"N7 / cannot ; 24*", 31^, Is i". Other examples are Gn 2'",
24'', I S I*, II*, I K 3', yjr 2^, and in the prophetic formula ^\>^) 'V^''
saith the Lord, Is i"*'^, &c., cf. 40'. So especially to express facts
known by experience, which occur at all times, and consequently
hold good at any moment, e.g. Pr 15'° a wise son maketh a glad
father; hence especially frequent in Job and Proverbs. In an
interrogative sentence, e. g. Jb 4'^ is mortal man just before God t lu
a negative sentence, Jb 4'*, &c.
(6) To express actions, &c., which may be repeated at any time, /r
including therefore the present, or are customarily repeated on a
given occasion (cf. above, e), e. g. Dt 1*^ as bees do (are accustomed to
' It is not always possible to carry out with certainty the distinction between
continued and repeated actions. Some of the examples given under/ might
equally be referred to y.
3i6 The Parts of Speech [§ 107 ^-
ira
do) ; Gn 6'S 32^', 43''. Ju n'", i S 2«, sS 20^ 2 S I5'^ Is i^, 3^
•<^ i^ So again (see/) especially to express facts known by experience
which may at any time come into effect again, e.g. Ex 23* a gift
blmdeth (11.y;), &c. ; Gn 2^ 22", Is 32«, Am 3', Mai I^ Jb 2^ &c.
Of the same kind also is the imperfect in such relative clauses (see
§ 155)) ^■s Gn 49^' Benjamin is ^1^) 3X| a wolf that ravineth (properly,
is accustomed to ravin). Finally, compare also the formulae "^^^l. it
is (wont to be) said (to introduce proverbial expressions) Gn 10',
22", &c. ; I? nb'y''"N7 it is not (wont to be) so done (and hence mai/
not, shall not be, see u), Gn 29^®, 20^, 34'', 2 S 13'^
ll (c) To express actions, &c., which although, strictly speaking, they
are already finished, are regarded as still lasting on into the present
time, or continuing to operate in it, e.g. Gn 32^° wherefore is it that
thou dost ask (/W^) after my name ? 24^', 44^ Ex 5*% 2 S i6l In
such cases, naturally, the perfect is also admissible, and is sometimes
found in the same formula as the imperfect, e.g. Jb i'^ (2^) t<3ri J^XO
whence comest thou (just now) 1 but Gn 16^ (cf. 42') T\t<'2 n?)0"^X whence
earnest thou ? The imperfect represents the coming as still in its last
stage, whereas the perfect represents it as an accomplished fact.
i 3. In the sphere of future time. To express actions, &c., which
are to be represented as about to take place, and as continuing a
shorter or longer time in the future, or as being repeated ; thus :
(a) From the standpoint of the speaker's present time, e. g. Ex 4*
thet/ will not believe (^3''DX^_) me, nor hearken (^VDB'^) unto my voice :
for they will say (IIOX^), &c., 6\ 9^ &c.
^ (6) In dependent clauses to represent actions, &c., which from
some point of time in the past are to be represented as future, e. g.
Gn 43'' could we in any wise know that he would say CT?*^') ? 2'®, 43"*,
Ex 2*, 2 K 3^^ '!1^1?^"1B'X qui regnaturus erat ; 1 3''', Jon 4*, Jb 3^
Ec 2', V' 7^* ^^^^ '^'^ generation to come might know, ^1.?5! D'33 the
children ivhich should he bom {qui nascituri essent ; the imperfect
here with the collateral idea of the occurrence being repeated in the
future).
/ (c) To represent a futxirum exactum; cf. Is 4*, 6" (co-ordinated
with a perfect used in the same sense, see § 106 0) ; so also sometimes
after the temporal particles IV, >//■ 132*, and I^X 1^ until, Gn29*,
Nu 2o'% &c.
M 4. Finally to the sphere of future time belong also those cases in
which the (modal) imperfect serves to express actions, events, or
states, the occurrence of which is to be represented as willed (or not
§ 107 n-p] Use of the Imperfect 317
willed), or as in some way conditional, and consequently only contingent.
More particularly such imperfects serve —
(a) As an expression of will, whether it be a definite intention and 71
arrangement, or a simple desire, viz. :
(i) Sometimes in positive sentences in place of the cohortative (cf.
e-g- lA 59" with verse 18; 2 S 22^° with ^ 18'"; Ju 19", &c.), of the
imperative (Is 18^), or of the jussive (which, however, in most cases,
does not differ from the ordinary form of the imperfect), e. g. ^^y^. let
it appear Gn i', 41^*, Lv 19^^ 2 S 10'^ (and so frequently in verbs n"b;
cf. § 109 a, note 2); Zc 9^ (^'•nPi) ; ij/ 61' (Tpi^^); Pr 22^^ {^T^); 23',
Jb 6^' (co-ordinated with the imperative), io^° KHh.] so probably also
rij let him judge! ij/ 72^ — So also in the ist pers., to express a wish
which is asserted subsequently with reference to a fixed point of time
in the past, e. g. Jb 10'* V]'^^ I ought to [not should as A.V., R.V.] have,
(then,»immediately after being born) given up the ghost ; cf. verse 19
'T'7^ ^^^^ ''^^^ I^v 10^^, Nu 35^. Even to express an obligation or
necessity according to the judgement of another person, e. g. Jb 9^^' V^'l^?
/ am to be guilty, 12*. Cp. Jb 9'^, 19^®; iu a question, if/ 42'°, 43^^.
(2) To express the definite expectation that something will not 0
happen. The imperfect with i<^ represents a more emphatic form of
prohibition than the jussive^ with "bx (cf. § 109 c), and corresponds
to our thou shalt not do it ! with the strongest expectation of obedience,
while "''^ with the jussive is rather a simple warning, do not that I
Thus N/ with the imperfect is especially used in enforcing the divine
commands, e.g. ^i^n iO thou shalt not steal Ex 20"; cf. verses 3, 4, 5,
7, 10 ff. So K? with the 3rd pers. perhaps in Pr i6^°.
Rem. The jussive, which is to be expected after "pK , does not, as a rule p
(according to n, and § 109 a, note 2), differ in form from the simple imperfect.
That many supposed jussives are intended as simple imperfects is possible
from the occurrence after "PS of what are undoubtedly imperfect forms, not
only from verbs H'v (cf. § 109 a, note 2), but also from verbs V'JJ, to express
a prohibition or negative wish, O^ari'i'X Gn 19", "IIDIT^JK Jos i'', Clp^ N3"^N
I S 25*5. Even with the ist pers. plur. (after an imperative) niD3"?X1 that we
die not, i S 12^'. Also to express the conviction that something cannot happen,
D^ypt;! he will not slumber,^ \f/ 121^ ; cf. Jer 46®, a Ch i^^".
^ As stated in § 46 a, a prohibition cannot be expressed by "^K and the
imperative.
^ To regard this as an optative (so Hupfeld) is from the context impossible.
It is more probably a strong pregnant construction, or fusion of two sentences
(such as, do not think he will slumber!). Verse 4 contains the objective con-
firmation, by means of X? with the imperf., of that which was previously
only a subjective conviction.
3i8 The Parts of Speech [§ 107 q-u
q (3) In dependent clauses after final conjunctions (§ 1656), as '^'f^.,
Gn 11^ (lytp^^ nS '\m that they may not understand); ninya. Gn 21^",
27^-'«, Ex 9", &c.; ■iK'X lypij Nui7^; lyp^ Dt 4', ^ $i\ 78^, and \t
1.^« 1 Ez 1 2'^ m order that^ ; 'J!>|'?^ «/ia< . . . not, Ex 20=", 2 S 14" ; also
after '']^ that not, lest, Gn 3^^, ri"*, 19'^ &c.^ ; cf. also the instances intro-
duced by Nbl in § 109 g. — In Lv 9* such an imperfect (or jussive 1 see
the examples in § 109/) is added to the expression of the command
by an asyndeton, and in Lai^^ to the principal clause simply by ^. :
while they sought them food dppTT)^ ^^'^^)) to refresh their souls (cf.
also La 3^^*, it is good and let him hope, i. e. that he should hope) ; so
after an interrogative clause, Ex 2''. Finally also in a relative clause,
j/' 32^ ^.?ri irTjinil in the way which thou shouldst go.
r {b) To express actions, &c., which are to be represented as possibly
taking place or not taking place (sometimes corresponding to the
potential of the classical languages, as also to our periphrases with
can, may, should*). More particularly such imperfects are used —
S (i) In a permissive sense, e. g. Gn 2'^ of every tree of tlie garden
(?5Nn 7bN) thou mayest freely eat (the opposite in verse 17) ; 3^, 42^^,
Lv 2i'-^'', Jb 2 1^ In the ist pers. ^ 5^ 22^^ {J may, or caw, telV)-, in
a negative sentence, e. g. >//• 5*.
t (2) In interrogative sentences, e.g. Pr 20® "ipN^'V^ quis dixeritl
Cf. Gn 17'', 18", 3i«, I S 1 1^ 2 K 5^2 Ons KOir^S'n may I not wash
in them ? Is 33'^, ^ i5\ 24^ Ec 5^ So especially in a question ex-
pressing surprise after ^'X, e.g. Gn 39' how then can I . . . ? 44^*,
Is 19", i]/ 137^ and even with regard to some point of time in the past,
looking forward from which an event might have been expected to
take place, e. g. Gn 43^ V"!?. y''*ljn could we in any vnse know . . . ?
Cf. 283^ (niDJ tvas A bnev to die as a fool, i. e. was he destined to
die ...?), and so probably also Gn 34" {should he deal ..,?). Very
closely connected with this is the use of the imperfect —
II (3) In a consecutive clause depending on an interrogative clause,
e.g. Ex 3", who am I (^2X "•?) that I should (ought, could) go? 16',
Nu II'^ Ju 92\ I S i8'«, 2 K 8'^ Is 29^ Jb 6", 21'% similarly after
Tf ^ Gn 38i», Ex 5^
^ But ItJ'J^ |y' in a causal sense (because, since), e. g. Ju 2^" (as '\pH Gn 34'^)
is followed by the perfect. On Jos 4^^* see above, § 74 g.
[* R.V. because he shall not see.]
' In 2 K 2'^ "|Q occurs with the perf. in a vivid presentment of the time
when the fear is realized and the remedy comes too late. (In 2 S 2c*, since
a perfect consec. follows, read with Driver Nif)3''.)
* By this, of course, is not meant that these finer distinctions were con-
sciously present to the Hebrew mind. They are rather mere expedients for
making intelligible to ourselves the full significance of the Semitic imperfect.
I
§§ 107 »-^. io8 «,b] Use of the Imperfect 319
Rem. In passages like i S u"*, \p %^, 114^ the context shows that the V
imperfect corresponds rather to our present. lu such sentences the perfect
also is naturally used in referring to completed actions, e.g. Gn 20'", Ju 18^',
aS 7I8, Is 22I.
(4) In negative sentences to express actions, &c., which cannot or W
should not happen, e.g. Gn 32^* i'lO 1313^^'^ "1E'« which cannot he
numbered for multitude; ao'' deeds (IJ^V''."^'' "V^d ^'*«* ^^d^^*- '^^^ ^^
he done (cf. above, g) ; >//• 5^
(5) In conditional clauses (the modus condit'ionalis corresponding X
to the Latin present or imperfect conjunctive) both in the protasis
and apodosis, or only in the latter, >/^ 23* y"J Kn*X"N^^ . . . ^P^^'S Q?
yea, though I walk (or had to walk) . . . I fear (or / would fear) no
evil', Jb 9^ though I he righteous, mine own mouth shall condemn me.
After a perfect in the protasis, e.g. Jb 23'°. Very frequently also in
an apodosis, the protasis to which must be supplied from the context,
e. g. Jb 5* but as for me, I would seek unto God (were I in thy place) ;
3"'8^ 14""-, >/r 55'3, Eu i^l However, some of the imperfects in these
examples are probably intended as jussive forms. Cf. § 109 h.
§ 108. Use of the Cohortative.
The- cohortative, i.e. according to § 48 c, the ist pers.^ sing, or a
plur. of the imperfect lengthened by the ending <"'-_,2 represents in
general an endeavour directed expressly towards a definite object.
"While the corresponding forms of the indicative rather express the
mere announcement that an action will be undertaken, the cohortative
lays stress on the determination underlying the action, and the
personal interest in it.
Its uses may be divided into —
1. The cohortative standing alone, or co-ordinated with another h
cohortative, and frequently strengthened by the addition of the
particle S3 :
(a) To express self-encouragement, e. g. Ex 3^ 'J"l X3~n")pN / iciU
turn aside now, and see . . . ! So especially as the result of inward
deliberation (in soliloquies), e.g. Gn i8^\ 32^' (rarely so used after
'^^, Gn 21^" ht me not look . . .! Jer 18'*), and also as a more or less
emphatic statement of a fixed determination, e. g. Is 5^ / ivill sing ^
....'' 5®, 3 il Cf. also Gn 46^*' now let me die (/ am uniting to die),
1 For the few examples of cohortatives in the 3rd sing., see § 48^.
2 But verbs n"?, according to § 75 1, even in the cohortative, almost ahv.iya
have the ending n__ ; cf. e.g. in Dt 32^0 nX-lX after HTripK.
[' R.V. let me sing.']
320 The Parts of Speech [§ io8 c-g
since I have seen thy face; and V' 31^ In the ist pers, plur. the
cohortative includes a summons to others to help in doing something,
e. g. \^ 2^ '"^1?^^? come ! let us break asunder ! &c., and Gn 1 1^
C ip) To express a wish, or a request for permission, that one should
be allowed to do something, e. g. Dt 2^ '"ll^V^ may I he allowed to
pass through {let me pass through) ! Nu 20'^ N3"n"i3y3 may we be
allowed to pass through ! Jer 40^* let me go, I pray thee ! &c. ; 2 S 1 6' ;
so after X^ 2 S 18'"; after "^K 2 S 24^^ Jer \f\ if, 25^ (HK'iix-^K Ut
me not be ashamed; of. ij/ 31^'^*, 71^); 69'*. After W"?i? Jon i'"*.
d 2. The cohortative in dependence on other moods, as well as in
conditional sentences : (a) In dependence (with wdw copulative ; \J/ 9^^
after lyPp) on an imperative or jussive to express an intention or
intended consequence, e.g. Gn 27'* bring it to me, i^/^M) that I may
eat, prop, then will I eat; Gn 19°, 23^ 24^^, 27^^, 29^^ 30^^'', 42^, 49',
Dt 32^ Ho 6\ ij/ 2^ 39", Jb lo^o Q^re; Is 5'^ and let the cowisel of
the Holy One of Israel draw nigh and come, •"'Vi]?.'! ^^*«^ w^ may know
(it) I Gn 26^, I S 27". Also after negative sentences, Gn iS'"'-^^,
Ju 6^^, and after interrogative sentences, i K 22'^, Is 46^^, 41"^, Am 8°.
e {b) In conditional sentences (with or without DN) to express a con-
tingent intention, e.g. Jb 16* '"'')?1^"Q^' should I determine to speak,
my grief is not assuaged, i^^y}^\ and should I forbear, what am I eased ?
without Di< Jb 1 9'*, 30^^ (where, however, n?n"Nl is probably intended) ;
xf/ 73'^ (unless TINI^ should be read), I39*'". After the 3rd person,
Jb ii'^ though it be dark, &c. So perhaps also 2 S 22^ '1?11^ if
I determined to jmrsue, then . . . , but cf. \p 1 8^^.
J (c) Likewise in the apodosis of conditional sentences, e.g. Jb 31^''
if my step hath turned out of the way • . . , "^Vl-? ^^*^** ^^' ^^ sow; cf.
i6'"' / also could S2)eak as ye do, if . , , ./ So even when the con-
dition must be supplied from the context, e.g. i/'40^ else would I
declare and speak of them; 51^^ else would I (gladly) give it, i.e. if
thou didst require it (cf. the precisely similar >5K*N1 ij/ 55"^ ; Jb 6^°.
In the 1st plur. Jer 20^". To the same category belong the cohortatives
after the formula expressing a wish i^r^^, '??.'i'r''Pf e- g- Jer 9' oh, that
I had . . . , "^^IXf^l then (i. e. if I had) should I (or would I) leave my
people, &c. ; Ju 9^^'; without Wdw Is 27'', if/ 55^, Jb 23'' (cf. also verse 7).
jor Rem. i. The question, whether a resolution formed under compulsion
(a necessity) is also expressed by the cohortative (so, according to the prevailing
opinion, in Is 38^" naSx ; Jer 325^ 4'9-2i, 6^°, if> 55»-'« (?) ; 57^, where, however,
with Hupfeld, HM^ should be read ; 77'', 88^«, and in the ist plur. Is 59»0),
is to be answered in the sense that in these examples the cohortative /onn is
used after its meaning has become entirely lost, merely for the sake of its
fuller sound, instead of the ordinary imperfect. This view is strongly
§§io8 A, 109 a-c] ^*^ ^f ^^^^ CoJiortative 321
supported by the rather numerous examples of cohortative forms after waw
consec. of the imperfect (cf. § 49 e, as also ^ 66^ nnpb'3 DtJ' there did we rejoice ^ ;
ip ii9'63 nnvri'*'' j P"* 7')t which can likewise only be explained as forms
chosen merely for euphony, and therefore due to considerations of rhythm.
2. The cohortative is strange after "ly ip 73" until I went . . . H^'^N / con- ll
sidered their latter end ; possibly a pregnant construction for ' until I made up
my mind, saying, I will consider', &c. (but n^^X Pr 7'' is still dependent
on the preceding 1) ; ny''3"lX~*iy Pr 12^^ is at any rate to be explained in the
same way (in Jer 49'^, 50** we have ''N"''3 with a similar meaning), as long
as I (intentionally) wink with the eyelashes (shall wink). On the other hand, in
Ex 32^" "IQ3X is to be read, with the Samaritan, instead of mQ3X after v^X.
§ 109. Use of the Jussive.
As the cohortative is used ia the ist pars., so the jussive is especially Ct
found in the 2nd and 3rd pers. sing, and plur. to express a more or
less definite desire that something should or should not happen (cf.
for its form, which frequently coincides with that of the ordinary
imperfectj' § 48 /, g). More particularly its uses may be distinguished
as follows :
1. 1h.e jussive standing alone, or co-ordinated with another jussive :
(a) In afl5rmative sentences to express a command, a wish (or a u
blessing), advice, or a request ; in the last case (the optative or pre-
cative) it is frequently strengthened by the addition of ^3. Examples :
Gn 1^ "liX ""n^ let there he light! Gn i®-^-", &c. (the creative commands);
Nu 6^® the Lord lift uj) his countenance upon thee, and give thee peace!
cf. verse 25. After particles expressing a wish, Gn 30^ ''1)) v I would
it might be; i/^ 81^ ''p"ypK'ri"DX if thou wouldest hearhn unto me! As
a humble request, Gn 44^^ . . . ^v! "lyini . . . "f^^^ ^V^f^. let thy servant,
I fray thee, abide, &c., and let the lad go up, &c., Gn 47*.
(6) In negative sentences to express prohibition or dissuasion, C
warning, a negative wish (or imprecation), and a request. The
prohibitive particle used before the jussive (according to § 107 0)
is almost always "/X (in negative desires and requests frequently
^ Analogous to this cohortative (as equivalent to the imperfect) after DK'
is the use of the historic imperf. after tX, § 107 c.
2 With regard to verbs n'v , it is true that the full form of the imperfect
is frequently used with the meaning of the jussive (as also for the cohortative,
see § 108 a, note 2), e.g. nX"l^~pK Jb 3^ (but previously 1j5^ let it look for!) :
especially in (Neh 2') and immediately be/ore the principal pause, Gn 1'
nX"in ; Ju 6^9 ,Tn\ but previously Xpn^ ; Is 47^ nX"in, previously ^JJjl ;
t// 109''. On the attempt to distinguish such jussives from the imperfect by
means of a special meaning n__, see § 75 hh.
COWLKY Y
322 The Parts of Speech [§ 109 d-f
^i?^); e.,er. Ex 34^ ^T"''^ ^'^' neither let any man he seen/ Pr 3^
he not (''nri"?^) wise in thine oivn eyes! Jb 15^' f^^,!"''^ ne confidat. In
the form of a request (prayer), Dt 9-" rin^ri"7X destroy not / i K 2-",
ci Rem. I. The few examples of N^ with the jussive could at most have
arisen from the attempt to moderate subsequently by means of the jussive
(voluntative) form what was at first intended to be a strict command
(X7 with imperf, indie.) ; probably, however, they are either cases in which
the defective writing has been misunderstood (as in 1 K 2', Ez 48'*), or (as
in Gn 24*) instances of the purely rhythmical jussive form treated below,
under k. Moreover, of. f]Di'' VO Jo 2^ and from the same verb Gn 4" (unless
it is to be referred to K) and Dt 13'. The same form, however, appears also
to stand three times for the cohortative (see below), and in Nu 22'' for the
ordinary imperfect (but see below, i). Thus it is doubtful whether an
imaginary by-form of the ordinary imperf. is not intended by the Masora in
all these cases, and whether consequently fjDV, &c., should not be restored. —
On '^V'V O'lnn-Nfj, &c., Dt 7'6, 139, &c., Ez 5'^ &c., cf. § 72 r, according to
which Dinn should probably be read in every case. — The jussive appears in
the place of the cohortative after N? i S 14^^ (■1NB'5~^''1 co-ordinated with
two cohortatives), 2 S 17"; ef. Is 4123 K'th. (N1J1, i.e. Nlfl, after another
cohortative) ; also (see above) FjDN Nj Dt 18^^, Ho 9^^, and even without N?
Ez 5i«.
^ 2. "bs with the jussive (or imperf., cf. § 107 p) is used sometimes to express
the conviction that something cannot or should not happen ; cf. Is 2^ (where,
however, the text is very doubtful) Dh!' XK'ri'PX'l and thou canst not possibly
forgive them [R.V, there/ore forgive them not'] ; \// 34®, 41', 50', 121^ (|ri^"pK) ; Pr 3^,
Jb s'^^ N'T'n~bx neither needest thou be afraid ; 20''', 40'*.
f* 2. The jussive depending on other moods, or in conditional sentences :
(a) Depending ' (with Wdic) on an imperative or cohortative to
express an intention or an assurance of a contingent occurrence, e. g.
Gn 24*' take her and go^ and let her he (^n^l^ prop, and she vjill he) . . .;
30^ 3r♦^ 38=^ Ex 8^ 9'^ lo^ 14', Jos 4^" Ju 6^», I S 5", 7^ I K 2i'°,
if/ 144^, Pr 20^^, Jbi4''. Also after interrogative sentences, which include
a demand. Est 7^ (say) tvhat is thy desire . . ., t^V^^ '^"^ *' shall (i. e. in
order that it may) he granted ! i K 22"", Is 19^^, Jb 38^^'' Depending on
a cohortative, e.g. Gn 19^° HS^ X3 n^ppBN oh, let me escape thither . . .
^B'33 ""nril that my soul may live; even after a simple imperf. (cf.
below, g), 1X13*^ whosoever ivould, he consecrated him . . . 'H^l that he
might he a priest (read JH^) of the high j^laces, but probably the LXX
reading 'n^l is to be preferred.
' This does not include the cases in which the jussive is not logically
dependent on a preceding imperat., but is merely co-ordinated, e. g. Gn 20'',
f 2f*, &C.
§ I09 g-^l Use of the Jussive 323
Rem. In 2 Ch 35^1 a negative final clause with "PNI is dependent on an ff
imperative, forbear from (meddling with) God . . . that he destroy thee not.
As a rule, however, negative final clauses are attached to the principal
sentence by means of Np") and a following imperfect ; so after an imperative,
Gn 42^, I K 14^ 18" ; after a jussive, Ex 3020, Neh 6'; after a perfect consec,
Ex 2835« 30", Nu 18"; after iib with an imperfect, Lv ics, Nu iS^, Dt 17"
neither shall he multiply vnves unto himself 033p "^^D^ N/l) that his heart turn not
away; i S 20", 2 S 21", Jer ii'^i; after ~h\^ with jussive, Lv lo^, n", 16^,
2 S 13^^^, Jer 258, 3720, 332* '• ; after the asseverative DK with the impft., Gn 14" ;
even after a simple imperfect, Jer 10* with nails . . . they fasten it (p''DJ ti?)) that
it move not ; after a participle, Jb 9'.
(6) Frequently in conditional sentences (as in Arabic), either in the /*
protasis or in the apodosis, cf. ij/ 45'^ 1^^^ should he desire . . . then . . . ;
104^ '•n'''! • • • riK'ri if thou makest darkness, then it is night ; so also in
the protasis, Ex 2 2^ Lv 15^ Is 41^8, Ez 14^ (?t\), ^h 34^ ; in the
apodosis, Ex 7' then will it (not, then shall it) become a serpent ; Pr 9®
after an imperat. in the protasis; Jb lo'^ 13°, 22'^ In a negative
apodosis, Gn 4'' {^oh-iib , but see above, d). In 2X6^ ^JiK^V-Sk (if
the Lord do not help thee, &c.) is to be explained as a jussive in
a negative protasis.
Rem. Undoubtedly this use of the jussive (in conditional sentences) is based t
on its original voluntative meaning ; let something be so and so, then this or
that must happen as a consequence. Certain other examples of the jussive,
however, show that in the consciousness of the language the voluntative has
in such cases become weakened almost to a potential mood, and hence the
jussive serves to express facts which may happen contingently, or may be
expected, e.g. Nu 22^^ (t)D^~nilD, but cf. above, d) ; Jb 9'^ there is no daysman
betwixt us, that might lay (HJi'"', hence plainly a subjunctive = qui ponat; also in
Nu 2315 3^3"'1 that he should lie is probably intended as a jussive) ; Ec5^* ; so
after interrogative sentences, Jer 9^^ who is the wise man, J!l'*1 qui intelligai hoc?',
Ho 14K'. '"" ,
Moreover, in not a few cases, the jussive is used, without any collateral K
sense, for the ordinary imperfect form, and this occurs not alone in forma,
which mayarise from a misunderstanding of the defective writing,asDt 282^-^',
328, I K 8\ Is 12I, Mi 3S 58, .1/ ii«, 1812, 2i2 Q^re (^j'^-HO , X«<A. b^'i)), 259,47*,9o8,
91*, 10723, Pr 152B, Jb 13", 1533, i89, 2o2- 1722, 33"736", 382^ Ec i'2« (verse 7 2]ih^
but immediately afterwards S^tJ'n), Dn S'2, — but also in shortened forms,
such as "in^ Gu 49" (Sam. n^niy Dt 288, i S lo^, 2 S 52*, Ho 6\ 1 1*, Am 5", Mi i2,
Zp 2", Zc" 96, ip 72«f- (after other jussives), 1048', Jb 1812, 2o23-26.28^ 278, 3321. 3437^
Ru 3*. This use of the jussive can hardly be due merely to poetic licence, but
is rather to be explained on rhythmical grounds. In all the above-'»ited
examples, in fact, the jussive stands at the beginning of the sentence (and
hence removed as far as possible from the principal tone), in others it is
immediately before the principal pause (Is 42^, 502, ^^68^'', Pr 2328, Jb 24^*, 29^,
40^^), or actually in pause (Dt32^8^ Jb 23'ii, La 3^"), and is then a simply
rhythmical shortening due to the strong influence of the tone. Moreover,
since the jussive in numerous cases is not distinguished in form from the
imperfect (§48 g), it is frequently doubtful which of the two the writer
intended. This especially applies to those cases, in which a subjunctive is to be
expressed by one or other of the forms (cf. § 107 A: and rn-x),
Y 2
324 The Parts of Speech [§ i lo a-f
§ 110. The Imperative.
Mayer Lambert, 'Sur la syntaxe de I'imp^ratif en hebreu,' in
REJ. 1897, p. 106 ff.
a 1. The imperative,^ which, according to § 46, is restricted to the
2nd pers. sing, and plur., and to 2^ositive commands, &c., may stand
either alone, or in simple co-ordination (as in i K 18", Is 56^ 65^*)
with other imperatives :
(a) To express real commands, e.g. Gn 12^ get thee out of thy
country, or (like the jussive) mere admonitions (Ho lo''^) and requests,
2 K 5^^, Is 5*; on the addition of W see below. Rem. i. The imperative
is used in the sense of an ironical challenge (often including a threat)
in I K 2'^ ask for him the kingdom also; 22^^, Ju 10", Is 47'^ (with
W), Jer f\ Ez 20^ Am 4', Jb 38^'-, 40"^-, La 4^1. The imperative
has a concessive sense in Na 3'^ (though thou make thyself many, &c.),
and in the cases discussed under/, e.g. Is8^'^', 29'.
0 {b) To express permission, e.g. 2 S 18^^ after previous dissuasion,
(then) run (as far as I am concerned) ! Is 21^^, 45'^
C (c) To express a distinct assurance (like our expression, thou shalt
have it) ^ or promise, e. g. Is 65^^ but be ye glad, &c. (i. e. ye will have
continually occasion to be glad); and Is 37^, yf^iio^; in a threat,
Jer 2''. So especially in commands, the fulfilment of which is
altogether out of the power of the person addressed, e. g. Is 54" be far
from anxiety (meaning, thou needst not fear any more) ; Gn i^, &c. (for
other examples, such as i K 22}"^, 2 K 5", see below,/). Most clearly
in the case of the imperative Nij)h!al with a passive meaning, e. g.
Gn 42>« llDNn DriK-i and ye shall be bound; Dt ^2"'", Is 49^ (Is 45^2, see
below, /).
U Eem. I. The particle N3 age ! (§ 105) is frequently added to the imperative,
as to the jussive, sometimes to soften down a command, or to make a request
in a more courteous form (see above, a), Gn la^^, 24^, sometimes to strengthen
an exhortation uttered as a rebuke or threat (Nu 16''*, 2oi°) or in ridicule
(Is 4712).
e 2. The imperative after the desiderative particle V? Gn 23I' (at the end of
verses 5 and 14 also read v for i? and join it to the following imperative) is
due to an anacoluthou. Instead of the imperfect which would be expected
here after v, the more forcible imperative is used in a new sentence.
J 2. The imperative in logical dependence upon a preceding impera-
tive, jussive (or cohortative), or an interrogative sentence, serves to
^ On the close relation between the imperative and jussive (both in mean-
ing and form), cf. § 46 and § 48 i.
2 Like the threatening formulae in the Latin comic writers, e. g. vapula,
Xer. Phorm. v. 6, io = vapulare te iubeo, Plaut. Cure. vi. 4, 12.
§iiop-fc] The Imperative 325
express the distinct assurance or promise that an action or state will
ensue as the certain consequence of a previous action. So especially:
(«) The imperative when depending (with wdio cox^ulative) upon
another imperative. In this case the first imperative contains, as a
rule, a condition, while the second declares the consequence which the
fulfilment of the condition will involve. The imperative is used for
this declaration, since the consequence is, as a matter of fact, intended
or desired by the speaker (of. divide et impera), e.g. Gn 42'^ ^^V ^^5l
Vni this do, and live, i.e. thus sliall ye continue to live. Gn 17^,
I K 22>2, 2 K 5>^ Is 36^ 45^2 (^yB;5m), Jcr 6">, Am 5^«, ^ 37% Pr 3^%
4\ 7^ 132" KHh., Jb 2^ 2 Ch 20'°; in Jer 25% Jb 22^' W is added to
the first imperative. In other cases, the first imperative contains a
mocking concession, the second an irrevocable denunciation, e. g. Is S'
inni D''13y ^yi (continue to) make an uproar, 0 ye peoples, and ye shall
he broken in pieces ; cf. verse 9 h.
Rem. I. If a promise or threat dependent on an imperative be expressed in P
the 3rd pers. then the jussive is naturally used instead of the 2nd imperative
Is 810, 552.
2. In Pr 20'^ the second imperative (containing a promise) is attached by fi
asyndeton ; elsewhere two imperatives occur side by sic! 1 without the copula,
where the second might be expected to be subordinated to the first, e. g.
Dt 2" {jh pnn (where B'T is virtually, as it were, an object to bnn) begin, take
in possession for to take in possession (cf., however, Ju 19^ ppl N3~?Nin be content,
I pray thee, and tarry all night, and on this kind of co-ordination in general,
cf. § 120 d). But such imperatives as !]p (l^p), Dp (^JO^p), when immediately
preceding a second imperative, are for the most part only equivalent to inter-
jections, come ! up !
(b) The imperative, when depending (with wdw copulative) upon i
a jussive (cohortative), or an interrogative sentence, frequently ex-
presses also a consequence which is to be expected with certainty,
and often a consequence which is intended, or in fact an intention ;
cf. Gn 20' and he shall pray for thee, n''Jl1. and thou shall live; cf.
Ex 14'*, 2 K 5'°, Jb 11^ ^ 128^ the Lord bless thee . . . so that (or in
order that) thou seest, &c.; Ru 1®, 4*'; after a cohortative, Gn 12^
45'^ Ex 3'° K^f^ilTl that thou may est bring forth) Ex iS-'^, 1812'^,
I K i'^; Jer 35^^ (after imperative and jussive) ; after an interrogative
sentence, 2821^ wherewith shall I make atonement, '^r'.-?'' that ye may
bless, &c. — In Nu 5" the imperative without ] (in 32-^ with 1.) is used
after a conditional clause in the sense of a definite promise.
Rem. The 2nd sing. masc. occurs in addressing feminine persons in Ju 4'° fc
(*lby, according to Qimhi an infinitive, in which case, however, the infinitive
absolute *lby should be read ; but probably we should simply read ""IDy with
T • : •
Moore), Mi 1^^ and Zc 13'' (after n^y) ; and in Is 23^, the 2nd plur. masc. (On
326 The Paints of Speech {^ma-d
the four forms of the indfem. plur. imperative in Is 32'*, erroneously explained
here in former editions, see now § 48 i). In Na 3^^ the interchange of masc.
and fem. serves to e'^press totality (the nation in all its aspects). Cf.,
moreover, § 145 p on other noticeable attempts to substitute the corresponding
masculine forms for the feminine.
§ 111. The Imperfect with Wdw Consecutive.
(I 1. The imperfect with wdw consecutive (§ 49 a-g) serves to express
actions, events, or states, which are to be regarded as the temporal
or logical sequel of actions, events, or states mentioned immediately *
before. The im2>erfect consecutive is used in this way most frequently
as the narrative tense, corresponding to the Greek aorist or the Latin
historic perfect. As a rule the narrative is introduced by a perfect,
and then continued by means of imperfects with wdw consecutive (on
this interchange of tenses cf. § 49a, and especially § 112a), e.g.
Gn 3' now the serpent was if^lyf) more subtil . . . and he said p^^*-)
unto the woman; 4', 6^^ io»S 15'', ji^^«-^'«; 14''; 151'-, i6'S 2Il^
24"; 25'«^-, 36^^ 37^
b Rem. I. To this class belong some of the numerous imperfects consec. after
various expressions of time, whenever such expressions are equivalent in
meaning to a perfect^ (viz. n^H it came to pass), e. g. Is6i in the year (hat king
Vzziah died, I saw {T\Vr\^\), &c.; Gn 22*, 278*, Ju ii-", 1 S 4"; if, 216, Ho ii^:
on the use of *n''1 to connect expressions of time, see below, g. — It is only in
late books or passages that we find the simple perfect in a clause following an
expression of time, as i S 17*' (cf. Driver on the passage), 2 Ch 12^, 15*, &c.,
Dn lo^i, 15^*; the Perfect after "j and the subject, 3 Ch 7^.
Q 2. The continuation of the narrative by means of the imperfect consec. may
result in a series of any number of such imperfects, e. g. there are forty-nine
in Gn. i. As soon, however, as the connecting Waw becomes separated
from the verb to which it belongs, by the insertion of any word, the perfect
necessarily takes the place of the imperfect, e.g. Gn 1* and God called (,^^"^i5*^)
the light Bay, and the darkness he called (N"lp '^^np"!) Night ; verse 10, 2°°, 11' and
frequently.
tt 3. Of two co-ordinate imperfects consecutive the former (as equivalent to
a temporal clause) is most frequently subordinate in sense to the latter, e. g.
Gn 28^ ''■ T]p>1 . . . lb*JJ K")*1 when Esau saic that . . . , he tvent, &c. ; so also,
frequently yDtJ**!, &c., Gn 37'^^, &c. On the other hand, a second imperfect
consecutive is seldom used in an explanatory sense, e.g. Ex 2^" ("IDNni/or she
said) ; cf. I S 7^2. Other examples of the imperfect consecutive, which
apparently represent a progress in the narrative, in reality only refer to the
same time, or explain what precedes, see Gn 2*^ 0''"}!! '^*^2/ were; but Jos 4',
1 K 88 they are) ; Gn 36" (n|?ni), 36^2 (!]5lO»1), 1 K 1".
1 On an apparent exception (the imperf. consec. at the beginning of whole
books) see § 49 & note.
'^ Cf. Is 45*, where the imperf. consec. is joined to an abrupt statement of the
cause, and Jb 36^, where it is joined to an abrupt statement of the place.
§111 e-h'] The Imperfect with Wdw Consecutive 327
4. The imperfect consecutive sometimes has such a merely external con- C
nexion with an immediately preceding perfect, that in reality it represents
an antithesis to it, e.g. Gn 32^' and {yet) my life is preserved ; 2 S 3' and yet thou
chargest me ; Jb 10*, 32^ ; similarly in dependence on noun-clauses, Pr 30^^^ ^•
2. The introduction of independent narratives, or of a new section f
of the narrative, by means of an imperfect consecutive, likewise aims
at a connexion, though again loose and external, with that which has
been narrated previously. Such a connexion is especially often
established by means of ^'l^l {koX iyevero) and it came to pass, after
which there then follows either (most commonly) an imperfect con-
secutive (Gn 4^-^, 8^ ii'^, Exi2^^ 13", &c.), or Wdw with the perfect
(separated from it), Gn 7^", 15'^, 22', 27^", or even a perfect without
Wdw (Gn 8", 14^'-, 40', Ex i2^\ 16^^ Nu 10", Dt I^ i S iS^"*, 2 K 8",
&c.), or finally a noun-clause introduced by Wdw, Gn 4 1 ^
Rem. I. This loose connexion by means of \T'1^ is especially common, a-
when the narrative or a new section of it begins with any expression of time,
see above, 0 ; cf., in addition to the above-mentioned examples (e.g. Gn 22^
and it came to pass after these things, that God did prove Abraham), the similar cases
in Gn 19^*, 21^2^ i S 1 1^^, Ru i^. Elsewhere the statement of time is expressed
by 3 or 3 with an infinitive (Gn 12^*, ig"-^^ 39^3, 15^8 f.^ jy jgzs^ qj. jjy
an independent sentence with the perfect (equivalent to a pluperfect, cf.
§ 106/), e.g. Gn 151'', 24^^ 273", or by a temporal clause introduced by "iS uhen,
Gn 268, 27I, Ju i6i«, ■^B'K? when, Gn 12", 20", '\^12from the time that, Gn 39^;
or, finally, by a noun-ciause (cf. § 116 m), e.g. 2 K 13" B'"'K Dn3p Dn ^'^'''l
and it came to pass, as they wens (just) burying a man (prop, they burying),
that . . . ; Gn 42^*, 2 K 2^1 (the apodosis in both these cases being introduced
by nam); iSf", 2S13S0, 2K65-2«, i93T( = Is3738)._ln iSio", ii", 28223,152
a noun standing absolutely follows ^ri"'1 (as the equivalent of a complete
sentence ; see below, h), and then an imperfect consecutive follows.
2. Closely related to the cases noticed in g are those in which the imperfect Jl
consecutive, even, without a preceding TT'I, introduces the apodosis either —
(a) to whole sentences, or (6) to what are equivalent to whole sentences,
especially to nouns standing absolutely. As in certain cases of the perfect
consecutive (see § 112 z), so the imperfect consecutive has here acquired a sort of
independent foi"ce. Cf. for (a) i S 15** because thou hast rejected the word of the
Lord, ^DXp*1 he hath rejected thee (cf. Nu 14^^, Is 48*, where the causal clause
precedes in the form of an infinitive with preposition). Ex 9^1 ; for (&) Gn 22^*
iB'3?*2^ and (as to) his concubine..., *1)?rn_ she bare, &c. ; Ex 382'*, Nu i^^'^'-,
I S 14", 17", 2 S 4I", 19" KHh., 21I6, I k 92<'f-, 12", 2 K 2522, Jer 6", 28*, 332*,
442". 2 — In I K l5^^ 2 K 16^* the preceding noun, used absolutely, is even
regarded as the object of the following imperfect consecutive, and is therefore
introduced by "HK.
^ Exhaustive statistics of the use of TT'I in its many and various connexions
are given by Konig in ZAW. 1899, p. 260 ff.
2 Cf. the Mesa' inscription, 1. 5 {Omri) the king of Israel, Ijyi he oppressed
Moab, &c. — The peculiar imperfect consecutive in Gn 302"''' (in the earlier
editions explained as equivalent to an object-clause) arises rather from a preg-
nant brevity of expression : I have observed a7id have come to the conclusion, tho
Lord hath blessed me, &c.— In Gn a?^* read, with LXX, ^T)"') before ybtJ'3.
328 The Paris of Speech [§ m i-q
i 3. The imperfect consecutive serves, in the cases treated under a-h,
to represent either expressly, or at least to a great extent, a chrono-
logical succession of actions or events ; elsewhere it expresses those
actions, &c., which represent the logical consequence of what preceded,
or a result arising from it by an inherent necessity. Thus the
imperfect consecutive is used —
k (a) As a final summing up of the preceding narrative, e. g. Gn 2^,
23^^" 01 iTW^ DiJJlso (in this weij) the Jield became (legally) the pro2)erty
of Abraham, &c. ; i S 17^°, 3I^
/ (6) To express a logical or necessary consequence of that which
immediately precedes, e. g. Gn 39^, Jb 2^ and he still holdeth fast his
integrity, '31 ^3ri''tpri1 so that thou thus (as it now appears) grov.ndlessly
movedst me against him ; >//■ 65^ «o that they are afraid . . . ; even
a consequence which happens conditionally, Jer 20'' ^7^1 so that my
mother should have been . . . Another instance of the kind perhaps (if
the text be correct) is Jer 38^ riD*l so that he dies (must die).
m Rem. Such consecutive clauses frequently occur after interrogative sen-
tences, e. g. Is 51^^ who art thou (i.e. art thou so helpless), ''N"l^ni that thou art
(^rnust needs be) afraid? \p 144* (of. ^ 8^, where in a very similar context ""S that
is used with the imperfect) ; Gn 12^^ (nj^Nll) ; 31^'^ 'jn?K'i<1 so that I might have
sent thee away.
4. As regards the range of time it is to be carefully noticed —
11 (a) That the imperfect consecutive may represent all varieties in the
relations of tense and mood, which, according to § 107 a, follow from
the idea of the imperfect ;
0 (fe) That the more precise determination of the range of time to
which an imperfect consecutive relates must be inferred in each case
from the character of the preceding tense (or tense-equivalent), to
which it is attached, in a more or less close relation, as temporal or
logical sequence. Thus the imperfect consecutive serves —
p (i) To represent actions, events, or states, which are past (or were
repeated in past time), when it is united with tenses, or their
equivalents, which refer to an actual past.
Q Cf. the examples given above, under a and /, of the imperfect consecutive
-^ as an historic tense. The imperfect consecutive also frequently occurs as the
continuation of a perfect {preterite) in a subordinate clause; e.g. Gn 27*,
Nu ii^o, Dt 4", I S 8», I K 2», iiS3, 18", &c.; also in Is 49'' ^inn^l is the
continuation of a preterite, contained, according to the sense, in the preceding
(DN3 '^SJ'fr^. — In Jb 3i28s« the imperfect consecutive is joined to an imperfect
denoting the past in a conditional sentence. An imperfect consecutive
occurs in dependence on a perfect which has the sense of a pluperfect (§ 106/),
e. g. in Gn 26'*, 289'-, 3119-3* {now Rachel had taken the teraphim, DDB'ril and had
§ III r-w] The Imperfect with Wdw Consecutive 329
put them, &c.) ; Nu 14^5, i S 28', 2 S 2"^^, Is 39I. Finally there are the cases in
which an infinitival or participial construction representing past time,
according to §ii3r, § ii6x, is taken up and continued by an imperfect
consecutive.
(2) To represent present actions, &c., in connexion with tenses, or r
their equivalents, which describe actions and states as being either
present or lasting on into the present (continuing in their effect) ; so
especially,
(a) In connexion with the present perfects,, described in § 106 g,
e.g. >// 16' therefore my heart is glad (nOK*) and my glory rejoiceth
(''5'!) j Is 3'® (parallel with a simple imperfect). Cf. also such
examples as ■*//• 29'" 3^;''.l (prop, he sat down, and has been enthroned
ever since), -^ 41".
(/3) In connexion with those perfects which represent experiences S
frequently confirmed (see § 106 k), e.g. Jb 14^ he cometh uj) {^'^'))
like a flower, and is cut down (''^*1) ; hefleeth (HID^I) also as a shadoiv,
'^^'^X- \ ^'"'^ contimieth not ; Jb 20'*, 24^*", Is 40^^, Pr 1 1'^.
(y) In connexion with imperfects which, in one of the ways t
described in § 107. 2, are used in the sense of the present; e.g.
Jb 14'" hut man dieth (J^I^IJ) and becometh j^owerless (tl'^n*!), &c., i. e.
remains powerless; Jb 4^, Ho 8'^ Hb i^% >A 55'^ 9°^ Jb 5^°, 7^^ n^
{when thou mockest), 12^^, 34^'', 37* (parallel with a simple imperfect);
39**. In the apodosis of a conditional sentence, ^ 59^*, so also after
an interrogative imperfect, i S 2"^^, yj^ 42^ (''*?n|^l for which in verse 1 2
and in 43^ we have ""ipni^Tip^ and why art thou disquieted ?).
(8) In dependence on participles, which represent what at present U
continues or is being repeated, e.g. Nu 22", i S 2®, 2 S 19"^ behold the
king weepelh ('"I^^) and mourneth (P-^^^))) for Absalom; Am 5*, 9^'",
Na i^ V^ 34", Pr 2o2«, Jb 122"*-, but cf. e.g. Jb 12^ r\'ibvh, N-i.p u-ho
called ujpon God, ^"^P.y'.l and he answered him.
(c) In dependence on other equivalents of the present, as in Is 5 1 '^, V
^\t 144^ (see above, m) ; Jb lo'^^. So especially as the continuation of
an infinitive, which is governed by a preposition (cf. § 114 r), Is 30'^,
Jer lo'^ y\f 92*, &c.
(3) To represent future actions, &c., in dependence on — (a) an W
imperfect which refers to the future, -^ 49'^ 94^^'*; — (/?) a perfect
consecutive, or those perfects which, according to § 106 n, are intended
to represent future events as undoubtedly certain, and therefore as
though already accomplished { perf. propJieticum) ; cf. Is 5'* (parallel
with a simple imperfect separated from )) ; 5'® (cf. 2"-''^, wliere the
same threat is expressed by the perfect consecutive); 5^^ 9^-^'"-»
330 The Parts of Speech [§§ m a^, 112 o, 6
igis.uff.^ 22'''-, Jo 2^^ Mi 2'^ Ez 33^-\ ,/, 7'3, 648^- ;— (y) a future
participle, Jer 4'^ '
i27 Rem. An imperfect consecutive in dependence on a perfect or imperfect,
which represents an action occurring only conditionally, is likewise used
only in a hypothetical sense, e. g. Jb 9'^ '^P.yil ''ONIp'OK if I had called, and he
had answered me, yet . . . ; \p 139^^ "ipi<1 if I should say (previously, in verse 8 f.,
hypothetical imperfects are used). — In Is 48^^ '■ an imperfect consecutive occurs
in dependence on a sentence expressing a wish introduced by Nv utinam CHM
and it, or so that it were, equivalent to then should it be). Cf. also the examples
mentioned above, under I (Jer 20") and m (Gn 31^''), where the imperfect
consecutive expresses facts occurring contingently.
§ 112. The Perfect with Wdiv Consecutive.
O. R. Berry, ' Waw consecutive with the perfect in Hebrew,' in Bibl. Lit.,
xxii. (1903), pp. 60-69.
a 1. The perfect, like the imperfect (§ m), is used with wdw con-
secutive (cf § 49 a ; on the external differentiation of the perfect
consecutive by a change in the position of the tone, see § 49 h) to
express actions, events, or states, which are to be attached to what
precedes, in a more or less close relation, as its temporal or logical
consequence. And as, according to § ill a, the narrative which
begins with a peifect, or its equivalent, is continued in the imperfect
consecutive, so, vice versa, the perfect consecutive forms the regular
continuation to a preceding imperfect, or its equivalent.
}) Rem. I. This alternation of perfect and imperfect or their equivalents is
a striking peculiarity of the consecutio temporum in Hebrew. It not only
affords a certain compensation for the lack of forms for tenses and moods,
but also gives to Hebrew style the charm of an expressive variety, an action
conceived as being still in progress {imperfect, &c.), reaching afterwards in the
perfect a calm and settled conclusion, in order to be again exhibited in
movement in the imperfect, and vice versa.* The strict regularity of this
^ Also in Jer 51*^ the imperfects consecutive are attached to the threat
virtually contained in the preceding imperatives. On the other hand \?TV\
Ho 81" would be very remarkable as expressing a future ; the text is, however,
certainly corrupt, and hence the Cod. Babyl. and the Erfurt MS. 3 endeavour
to remedy it by 'n""!, and Ewald reads ^l^n^l.— In Ez 28i« (cf. Jer i6«f-) ^b^HKI^
appears to announce an action irrevocably determined upon, and therefore
represented as already accomplished ; cf. the prophetic perfects in verse 1 7 ff.
2 It is difficult to give a proper explanation of this phenomenon (according
to § 49 a, note, to be found only in the Canaanitish group of languages), when
we have given up the theory of a special wdw conversivum in the unseientitic
sense mentioned in § 49 b, note, at the end, and if we accept the fact that the
perfect and imperfect consecutive cannot possibly be used in a way which con-
tradicts their fundamental cliaracter as described in §§ 106 and 107. In
other words, even the perfect consecutive originally represents a finally com-
pleted action, &c., just as the imperfect consecutive represents an action which
§ii2c-e] TJie Perfect with Wdw Consecutive 331
alternation belongs indeed rather to the higher style, and even then it depends
upon the view and intention of the speaker, whether he wishes the action,
&c., to be regarded as the logical consequence of what has preceded, or as
simply co-ordinate with it, and so in the same tense.
2. A succession of any number of other peifects consecutive may be co-or- C
dinated with a perfect consecutive (cf. e. g. Ez 14'^, Am 5'', Ru 3', four perfects in
each case, Is 8'' five, Ex 6^'- eight). It is true, however, of the perfect (as
conversely of the imperfect, § 1 1 1 c), that as soon as the Waw is separated by any
intervening word from the verb to which it belongs, an imperfect necessarily
takes the place of the perfect, e.g. Gn li^"^ when the Egyptians shall see thee, they
shall say (^"ItDSI) , This is his wife : and they will kill me PHK 15")n 1) but thee they
will save alive H'n^ TjriNI).
2. The perfect consecutive, like the imperfect consecutive, always (l
belongs to the period of time expressed by the preceding tense, or
its equivalent, vrith which it is connected as the temporal or logical
consequence. The particular cases may be classed under three heads :
(a) the perfect consecutive in immediate dependence (see e), {b) in
loose connexion (see x) with the preceding, and (c) the perfect con-
secutive at the beginning of the apodosis to other sentences, or their
equivalents (seej^).
3. The perfect consecutive in immediate dependence on the pre- e
ceding tense, or its equivalent, serves
(a) As a frequentative tense to express past actions, &c., i.e. actions
repeatedly brought to a conclusion in the past, and follows tenses,
or their equivalents, representing actions which have continued or
been repeated in the past :
(a) After a simple imperfect, e. g. Gn 2* n^V). "1^ there went up
a mist (again and again) from the earth, H^lpn^ and watered (as it
were, and ever watered afresh), &c. This frequentative use of the
perfect consecutive is equally evident after frequentative imperfects,
Gn 2'° ("^TT^ ^^ ^^ became again every time; ''0^1 would mean, and it
became so once for all); 2 9" '• (four perfects consecutive referring to
actions repeated daily); Ex 33^"" ^\^) he used to take at each new
encampment the tent, H^JI and to pitcji it again every time without the
camp; notice, amongst the numerous frequent, perff. consec, the
imperf. in vv. 7, 8, 9, 1 1, always in a frequentative sense; 34^'',
Nu 9"-^' (among several simple imperfects), 10''', Ju 2'®, i S 2'® >^^V^
is only beginning, becoming or still continuing, and hence in any case incom-
plete. The simplest view is to suppose, that the use of the perfect consecutive
originated from those cases, in which it had to express the conclusion (or
final consequence) of an action which was continued (or repeated) in past time
(see the examples above), and that this use was afterwards extended to other
cases, in which it had to represent the temporal or logical consequence
of actions, &c., still in progress, and thus in the end a regular interchange
of the two tenses became I'ecognized.
332 The Parts of Speech [§ii2/-»»
she used to make . . . i^T}}'!^\]\ and hrought it to him from year to year ;
27' C^i^?!), I K 14^*, 2 K 3'^^, 12'^ (in verses i6'- imperfects occur
again). So also in dependent sentences, Gn 6'* i^vl). as a continuation
J {jS) After an imperfect consecutive, e. g. Ex 39^ (Samaritan IXVpl),
1 S 5^ (?see § 112 rr), 7**, 2 S li^^-^, 16" and he threw stones at him,
■^Syi. and cast dust continually ; 1 2^^-'\ 2 K 6^", 1 2" ^- ^^, Jer 37^*, Jb i\
^' Rem. The frequentative perfect consecutive is sometimes joined even with
imperfects consecutive which simply express one single action or occurrence
in the past ; thus Ex iS^s, 4^31 '-, i S l^ 2 S 151'-, i K 14" (cf. verse 28) ; i K i8^
2 K 12^". For other examples of a loosely connected frequentative perfect
consecutive, see below, dd.
h (y) After a perfect, Gn 37^ (i? nb'yi, i.e. as often as h3 needed
a new garment)^; Gn 31'^, Nu 11^, i S 16", 2 K 3", -^ 22^-^ in
interrogative sentences, 1826^ who has ever, &c.; if/ 80", Jb i'-^ Ru 4^.
i (8) After an infinitive, Am i'' ^ISII'-'V because he did pursue his
brother, nnc'^ and (on each occasion) did cast off all 2)ity (then an
imperfect consecutive); after an infinitive absolute, Jos 6", 2 S 13",
Jer 23''*.
k («) After a participle. Is 6' (^^i?)), &c., frequentative, as a con-
tinuation of D'ltp'y, verse 2); i S 2-^, 2 S 17^^*
/ (C) After other equivalents of tenses, e. g. Gn 47^ the priests had
a portion from Pharaoh, ^^'?^\ and did eat (year by year), &c. ; i K 4'.
■)}l (6) To express present actions, &c., as the temporal or logical con-
sequence of actions or events which continue or are repeated in the
present, especially such as have, according to experience, been at all
times frequently repeated, and may be repeated at any time :
(a) After a simple imperfect, e, g. Gn 2^^ therefore a man leaves
(3TJ|^_ is accustomed to leave) . . . p^]). and cleaves, &c., here, as
frequently elsewhere, clearly with the secondary idea of purpose, i.e.
in order to cleave ; Is 5" (if HMI is to be taken as a continuation
* Also in Ez 44" (where Stade, ZAW. v, 293, would read ^TCW and Vn*1)
the unusual tenses may have been intentionally chosen : becaxise they continually
ministered and so always became afresh . . .
* Driver, on this passage, rightly refers to 1 S 2''.
' Am 4'' would also come under this head, if ^fTltDDni is really intended,
and the statement refers to the past ; ""riyiD might, however, also be a perfect
expressing positive assurance (§ 106 m), and the passage would then come
under s.
* That nspni, &c., are frequentatives {the maidservant used to go repeatedly and
tell them) may be seen from ^3p^ (necessarily an imperfect, since it is separated
from 1 by DH) and ^?3V : on the other hand in verse 18 KT1 and W^J'T of
actions which happened only once.
§ii2n-<] The Perfect with JVdw Consecutive 333
of Dp^S'T); la 2S^, Jer I2^ Ho 4\ f, ij/go\ Jb 14%- also in dependent
clauses, Lv 20^^ Is 29^-"'-, Am 5'°.
(^) After a participle, as the equivalent of a sentence representing fl
a contingent action, &c., e.g. Ex 21^^ ri»1 {^^N nsp (instead of n3»
there is in verse 20, &c. 55''^ n3^ '•3']) ty or^e smite a man and (so that)
he die, &c., Ex 2I'^ Is 29'^ Am 6', Hb 2'\
(y) After an infinitive absolute, Jer 7''' will ye steal, murder, and 0
commit adxdtery (simple infinitives absolute ; of. § 113 ee), DriN3^ and
then come and stand before me . . . and say, &c. ; cf. below, u.
(c) To express /w^wre actions, &c., as the temporal or logical con-jp
sequence of tenses, or their equivalents, which announce or require
such future actions or events. Thus— -
(a) After impei'fects in the sense of a simple future, e.g. Am g^'-
Crini??'! {f QnX DK'O / will search and take them out thence, &c. ; Gn 4",
40'^ Ex 7^ I S 1 7*^ 2 K 5", Jb 8^'- (also with a change of subject,
Gn 27'^, Ju 6'^, &c.); and in interrogative sentences, Gn 39^, Ex 2^,
2 8 12'^ 2 K 14'", Am 8*, \j/ 41^; cf. also Ru i"; in sentences
expressing a wish, 2 S iS*; as well as in almost all kinds of dependent
clauses. Also in conditional clauses after "DN Gn 32**, Ex 19^ i S i",
or "'3 Gn 37^, or |n Jer 3' ; in final clauses after m'? Gn I2»^ Nu 15'",
Is 28'3; after T^K Dt 2^ or '\Q Gn f\ ig'\ 32^^ Is 6'«, Am 5« ; in
temporal clauses, Is 32'°, Jer 13'®; and in relative clauses, Gn 24'*,
Ju I'^ I S if\
()S) After the jussive (or an imperfect in the sense of a jussive or g
optative) or cohortative, with the same or a different subject, e. g.
Gn i"'- ''•n'! ♦ • • rinXD '•n^ Ut there be lights . . . and let them be, &c. ;
Gn 24", 28^ 31'", I K i^, 22", Ru 2', I Ch 22"; after a jussive
expressing an imprecation, i/r 109'".
(y) After an imperative, also with the same or a different subject, r
e. g. 2 S 7^ ?l'?f?l '=!.? go and tell (that thou mayst tell), &c., and often,
perf. consec. after ^.? (as also the perf. consec. of "1P^? and "^1"^ very
frequently follows other imperatives);, Gn 6", 8'^ 27^'-, i S I5'•'^
I K 2^, Jer 482«.
(8) After perfects which express a definite expectation or assurance S
(cf. § 106 m and n), e.g. Gn 17^0 ink ^niQni inx ^n313 niin behold,
I have blessed him, and will make him fruitful, &c. ; Is 2", 5''*; on
Am 4^ see above, note 3 on A ; in an interrogative sentence, Ju 9^, 11".
(c) After a participle, e. g. Gn 7'' for yet seven days, "^''^DD ""SiX t
and I will cause it to rain . . . ^^''0?^ ^''^ I i^iH (i- g. in order to)
destroy, &c.; Jer 21'; also with a different subject, Gn 24^^'* the
334 '^he Parts of Speech [§ 112 u-a?
maiden which cometh forth (HNJf'n) . . , , H^K "^^IPf?) to whom I shall
say . . . , n"llDN'! and she (then) shall say, &c. This use of the perfect
consecutive is especially frequent after a participle introduced by
'^?.'?> e.g. Gn 6"'-; with a different subject i K 20^^ Am 6'^; after
a complete noun-clause introduced by ^PJ} (cf. § 140), Ex 3^* behold,
I come (i.e. if I shall come) • • ♦ DH^ "'^"]'?f!j^. and shall say unto them
. . ., ^"I»J?1 and they (then) shall say, &c. ; i S 14^^; Is f\ S"; 39".
U (0 After an infinitive absolute, whether the infinitive absolute serves
to strengthen the finite verb (see §113 t),e. g. Is 31*, or is used as an
emphatic substitute for a cohortative or imperfect (§ i r 3 c?c? and ee),
e. g. Lv 2^ Dt i'\ Is 5^ Ez 23*^'-
y (rj) After an infinitive construct governed by a preposition (for
this change from the infinitive construction to the finite verb, cf.
§ 114 r), e.g. I S 10^ '^5' ''^Vi^^) T^^ '''<'i2""'y till I come unto thee
(prop, until my coming) and show thee, &c. ; Gn i8"^', 27'^, Ju 6'^
Ez 39-'; cf. I K 2''-'\
^ Rem. To the same class belong i S 14^*, where the idea of time precedes,
until it be evening and until I be avenged, &c., and Is 5^, where the idea of place
precedes, in both cases governed by "ly.
07 4. The very frequent use of the perfect consecutive in direct
dependence upon other tenses (see above, d-v) explains how it finally
obtained a kind of independent force — especially for the purpose of
announcing future events — and might depend loosely on sentences to
which it stood only in a wider sense in the relation of a temporal
or logical consequence. Thus the perfect consecutive is used —
(a) To announce future events, &c., in loose connexion with a
further announcement, e. g. Gn 41^" ^^\>] and two co-ordinate perfects
consecutive, equivalent to but then shall arise, &c. ; frequently so after
nan with a following substantive (i S 9®), or a participial clause (cf.
the analogous instances above, under t), e.g. i S 2'' behold, the days
come, ''^Vl}): that I will cut off, &c. ; Is 39®, Am 4^ 8'\ 9", and very
often in Jeremiah; after an expression of time, Ex 17*, Is 10^, 29'',
Jer 51^, Ho I*. Further, when joined to a statement concerning
pi-esent or past facts, especially when these contain the reason for the
action, &c., expressed in the perfect consecutive ; cf. Is 6'' lo, this hath
touched thy lips, ">pi therefore thine iniquity shall be taken away, &c.
(not copulative and it is taken away, since it is parallel with a simple
imperfect), Gn 20", 26^^^, Ju 13^ (here in an adversative sense);
Ho 8'\ In loose connexion with a noun-clause, a long succession of
perfects consecutive occurs in Ex 6^"- Also in Amos 5^® D'^Nb'?^ may
be an announcement yea, ye shall take up ; but cf. below, rr.
§ 112 y-dd'\ The Perfect with Wdzv Consecutive 335
Rem. I. Very frequently the announcement of a future event is attached y
by means of HMI ^ and if shall come to pass (cf. the analogous continuation in
the past by means of ^H^l, § iii, 2), after which the event announced (some-
times after a long parenthesis) follows in one or more (co-ordinate) perfects
consecutive, Gn 9^*, 12^2 C^ iTni = j/, as in 46^3, Ex i^", 2 2^25 and frequently),
I K 1812, Is 148 f-, Am 8*; or in the imperfect, Gn 4", Is 2^, 32^, 48, 7I8.21 ff.
(cf. 29') ; or in the jussive, Lv 14^ It very rarely happens that the verb
which is thus loosely added, agrees in gender and number with the following
<
subject, as in Nu 5*'', Jer42i6 ^n^^1 (before 3"inn), and in Jer 42" ViT'l (before
• T-:|T T
2. The jussive form \'T'1 occurs (in the sense described in y) instead of H^ni Z
in I S 10^, 2 S 52^ (i Ch 14^^), 1 K 14", Ru 3*, although in the first three places
a jussive is wholly inadmissible in the context, and even in Ru 3* (where an
admonition follows) iTTII would be expected (see below, hb). In 1X14^ the
form is a textual error, and the pointing should simply be Tl^l. In the other
passages TT'I (always before an infinitive with a preposition) stands at the
beginning of the sentence at an unusually long distance from the principal
tone, and hence is certainly to be explained according to § 109 k, except that
in I S 10", &c., the simply rhythmical jussive form takes the place, not of the
full imperfect form, but (exceptionally) of the perfect consecutive.
(6) To introduce a command or wish : Dt 10" love ye therefore the aa
stranger; i S 6^, 24'®, i K 2® (in Gn 40''' the precative perfect con-
secutive, as elsewhere the cohortative, jussive, and imperative, is
strengthened by means of W). So, also, in loose connexion with
participial and other noun-clauses (see above, a;), Gn 45'^'^-, i K 2^^',
I'^i 3^'> 3^- — In Gn 17" the perfect consecutive (OripP^I and ye shall
be circumcised, &c.) is used to explain a preceding command.
Rem. As in the cases mentioned above under j/, the connexion may be UU
made by means of iTrTl. Thus with a following perfect consecutive, e.g.
Gn 4688^ 4^24^ ju ^2o_ Cf also Gn 24^*, where the real wish, at least as regards
the sense, is contained in the next sentence.
(c) To introduce a question, wliether in loose connexion with CC
another interrogative sentence (see above, p), e.g. Gn 29'* art thou my
brother (equivalent to. Surely thou art), ""^ril^yi. and shouldest thou then
serve me for naught ? or with a positive statement, e.g. Ex 5^ (□riBB'ni
will ye then make them rest ?) ; Nu 16'", i S 25", and (if it is Mil^ra)
f 50-' ('W'lnni).
{d) To introduce actions frequently repeated (hence analogous to dct
the numerous examples of a frequentative perfect consecutive, above,
under e), e.g. i S i^ ('"'<V^ of annual festival journeys); 13"' (where,
however, the text appears radically corrupt); 27^ ('"'?''!'1, i.e. every
time, therefore continued by means of '"1*0^ '^^l) ; i K s'' (v???!,
1 On the various combinations with DTl) see KOnig's statistics in ZAW.
xix. 372 ff.
336 The Parts of speech [§ii2ee-M
parallel with a simple imperfect); g^^, Jer 25*, Ho 12", Dn 8*. — In
Jb i^'' a series of frequentative perfects consecutive is interrupted by
an imperfect consecutive, while a simple imperfect (as the modus rei
repetitae) forms the conclusion. In Jer 6^^ a similar perfect is expressly
marked, by placing the tone on the final syllable (according to § 49 h),
as parallel with the real perfects consecutive.
Ce Rem. The loose connexion of tempora frequenlativa by \VT\\ (cf. the Rem. on
tj and &&) is also very common in this sense ; thus with a following perfect
consecutive, Gn 30*1^- (but in verse 42", where the verb is separated from
the Waw by an insertion, we find D'^b*'' Xb he used not to put them in, according
to § 107 e) ; Gn 389, Ex 17", 33^^- (see above, e), Nu 2i9, .Tu 6^, 19SO, j s i623
(followed by five perfects consecutive) ; 2 S 15^; with a following imperfect
(as the modus rei repetitae), Ju 2^*, 2 S 14^'. — In Ju 12^'- H^ni, contrary to what
would be expected, is continued by means of the imperfect consecutive, and
in I S 13^2 by j^^i with the perfect (instead of the imperfect).
^ 5. Further, the perfect consecutive is very frequently employed with
a certain emphasis to introduce the apodosis after sentences (or their
equivalents) which contain a condition, a reason, or a statement of
time. Such an apodosis, as in the cases already treated, may represent
either future events, or commands and wishes, or even events which
have been often repeated in the past. Thus —
(a) The perfect consecutive occurs in the apodosis to conditional
sentences ^ (§ 159 g, 0, s) :
(a) After D«< with the imperfect, e.g. 2 K 7^* ^Jnci «n^J?;-DX if they
kill us, (well then) we shall but die; here the perfect consecutive
is used obviously with greater emphasis than the imperfect ('"'.^'!'?)
which immediately precedes; Gn 18^^, 24^'", 32', Nu 30'*, Ju 4^,
iSi'\ 20", I K 3», Na 3'', Ec 4".
p-p" {(3) After D{< with the perfect (in the sense of a futurum exactum),
Nu 5^', 2 K s'"', 7''", Is 4'"^- ; as precative apodosis after N^'Dt* with the
perf. preteritum, Gn 33'" ; as a frequentative perfect consecutive, to
represent past events in the apodosis after DN with a perfect, Gn 38',
Nu 21', Ju 6^, Jb 7'* ; after DN with imperfect, Gn 31^
hh (y) After ""S {in case, suppose that) with the imperfect, Gn 12'*,
Ex 18'*, Ju 13", Is 58', Ez 14".^ Frequentative with reference to the
past, after ^3 with frequentative perfect, Ju 2'^ Jb 7"'"
1 In a number of the examples of this kind the protasis is already loosely
connected by means of nTII, and hence some of them had to be already
mentioned above, under y, bb, ee.
* In I S 24!^ a question appears to be expressed by the perfect consecutive,
for if a man find his enemy, will he let him go well aivay? Probably, however,
with Klostermann, ""D^ should be read for '31.
• • • •
§ 112 n-oo] The Perfect with Waw Consecutive 337
(8) After -(fX with the imperfect, Gn 44' HDI . . . inx NiT^^ T^>« H
with ivhomsoever . . . it be found, let him die ; with the perfect, Ex 21"
and if a man lie not in wait, &c.; Ju i^^.
(e) Very frequently after a perfect consecutive (one or more) con- kk
taining the condition, e. g. Gn 44^ ^^I'^^'^l • • • '"1.]"^?"°? D^Hi?!''' and if
ye take (or shall have taken) this one also . . . ye shall bring doivn, &c.;
cf. Gn 33'^ 42^, 44'-'^ 47'", Nu so'S Ru 2«, and probably also Ez 39=^.—
Also frequentative in reference to the past, e. g. i S 17^^'' • • • ''")^\! ^<3^
'"'i'^^J'! and when there came (as sometime'^ happened) a lion . . . I went
out, &c. ; Ex 33^", Nu lo'^*^-, i K 18'°, Je^- 20^ (the perfects consecutive
being regularly continued in the apodosis by ^^^ with au imperfect').
Eem. The perfect consecutive may be used also in the protasis to express //
a condition when the employment of the perfect consecutive in the apodosis
has become impossible, owing to an emphatic word having to stand before it ;
thus in Ez 141* on account of T\'QT\ ; 33* on account of SU^. — In i S 14^2 the
imperfect consecutive, contrary to what might be expected, stands in the
apodosis, and when Saul saw any . . . valiant man, he took him unto him, where
inDDSM suggests the special case, rather than a repeated occurrence ; cf.
2 S 152. Conversely, in i S 2i« ("lbN»1 perhaps a mere mistake for "HpX')), 17^'^^
an imperfect consecutive stands in the protasis.
(^) After various equivalents of sentences, which contain a condition; mill
thus, after a substantive standing absolutely, or a participle (a casus
j)endens), Gn 17'^ 'Jl nnipsi , , , "IDT ?"ij)'! and the uncircumcised rnale
(in case such an one be found), he shall be cut off, &c.; cf. Gn 30^",
Ex 12'*, 2 S 14^", Is 6'^ and (after an infinitive with a preposition)
2 S 7'*; in a wider sense also Ex 4^', 9", 12^*, Is 9^ 56^
(6) The perfect consecutive serves as the apodosis to causal clauses; n?l
thus e. g. after ^3 ]f. with the perfect, Is 3"^^- ; after "^K'X |y': with
perfect, i K 20"*; after 3^ with perfect, Nu 14^^; also after what
are equivalent to causal clauses, e.g. yj/- 25" {^^7^] • • • ^9^ lyP? f^
thy name's sake . . . pardon . . .) ; Is 37^' after IT- with an infinitive.
(c) The perfect consecutive occurs as the apodosis to temporal 00
clauses or their equivalents, e. g. i S 2'' t«?=l . . • 3^nn-n« pnt^p: D^ba
inbn "iy3 before they burnt the fat, the priest's servant came (used to
come), &c., hence a frequentative perfect consecutive relating to the
past, as in Ex i"; also after participial clauses (§116 iv), e.g. i S 2'^^-
N3^ , , , n^T nni B'''X"73 tvhen{e\er) any man offered sacrifice, then came,
1 In all these examples (not only in the frequentative perfects consecutive)
the original idea of the perfect, which also underlies the perfect consecutive,
comes out very distinctly. Gn 442" (see above) implies in the mind of the
speaker, If it ever shall have come to this, that ye have taken this one also,
then ye have thereby brought me down to Sheol.
COWLET Z
33^ The Parts of Speech [§ii2pp, 99
&c. (so Ju 19^", 2 S 20'^^), with a frequentative perfect consecutive.
The perfect' consecutive is very frequently used to announce future
actions or events after simple expressions of time of any kind ; thus
Gn 3^ Ex 32^^ (after Di^2 with the infinitive), cf. also such examples as
Gn 44", Ju 16'^, Jos 6'", I S i^'^, 16'^ (numerous frequentative pei-fects
consecutive after the infinitive with a preposition ; so 2 S 1 5*, see
above, ce); i S 20'*, 2 S 14^^ 15'", Is 18*; moreover, Ex i7\ Is lo^',
29'', 37^*; even after single disconnected words, e.g. Ex 16* ^'JV
DPiV1''J. at even (when it becomes evening) then ye shall know; cf.
verse 7, Lv 7'^ i K 13^^ Pr 24^'.
PP 6. Finally there still remains a number of passages which cannot be
classed with any of those hitherto mentioned. Of these, some are due
to the influence of Aramaic modes of expression, while in others the
text is evidently corrupt.* In a few instances we can do no more
than merely call attention to the incorrectness of the expression. (We
are not of course concerned here with the cases — usually occurring in
dependent clauses — in which a 2nd pers. perf. with Waw copulative
is simply co-ordinate with what precedes, as in Gn 28^, and probably
Nu2ii^ Dt33''.)
(o) The influence of the Aramaic construction of the perfect with "I as the
narrative tense, instead of the Hebrew imperfect consecutive (cf. Kautzsch,
Gramm. des Bibl.-Aram., § 71 b), is certainly to be traced in Qoheleth, and
sporadically in other very late books,^ perhaps also in a few passages in the
books of Kings, which are open to the suspicion of being due to later inter-
polation ; so probably i K i252 TipiJp) ; 2 K ii^ KHh. nnN"11 ; 14" Hj?^! (in the
parallel passage, 2 Ch 25**, the word is wanting) ; 2 K 23* XCJI, &c. ; verse 10
NBtp"!, &c. ; verse 12 ^I'^^K'ni, &c. ; verse 15 fjlbn, &c.3 Cf. also Ez^f''-^^.
QQ (&) The text is certainly corrupt in Is 40* (read with the LXX and Vulgate
1 Mayer Lambert, REJ. xxvi. 55, is probably right in pointing some of these
forms as infin, abs. instead of perfects.
^ In the whole of Qoheleth tlie imperfect consecutive occurs only in i''' .and
4^ •''. Several of the perfects with 1 can no doubt be explained as frequentatives,
e.g. 1", 25-9""i6^ 518^ compared with 6^ ; but this is impossible in such p.assagos
as 9^* ^- In Ezra, Driver reckons only six examples of the historical perfect
with 1, in Nehemiah only six, and in Esther six or seven.
' Stade in ZAW. v. 291 flf. and in Ausgewdhlte akad. Reden, Giossen, 1899,
p. 194 ff. and appendix p. 199, discusses, in connexion with 2 K 12'^, anumbc^r
of critically questionable perfects with "I. He considers that the whole
section, 2 K 23* from Nfil to verse 5 inclusive, is to be regarded as a gloss,
since the continuation of an imperfect consecutive by means of a perfect with
^ never occurs in pre-exilic documents, except in places where it is due to
corruption of the original text. The theory of frequentative perfects con-
secutive (even immediately after imperfects consecutive), which lias been
supported above, under / and g, by a large number of examples, is quite
inconsistent with the character of the action in 2 K 23^ n"'3E'ni, verse 8 ^Hil^
and verse 1 4 "T^B'I .
§§ii2rr-Mw,ii3a] The Perfect with Waw Consecutive 339
*HDN1) ; Jer 38*^, where the narrative breaks ofif in the middle of the sentence ;
40^ (n^ni, &c., wanting in the LXX) ; also in Ju 7" PHNn ^DJI is altogether
redundant ; in i S 3^^ read, with Klostermann, the 2nd sing. masc. instead of
Tnam ; in i Kai^* n^E'ni is, no doubt, incorrectly repeated from verse 9,
where it is an imperative.
Of other questionable instances, (a) the following, at any rate, may also be Vr
explained as frequentatives, Gn zi^s, 492s, Ex 36=58, 3528^ 3^3^ j g ^t^ iy2o^ 24II j^^ut
even so ^JDNI would be expected) ; 2 K 23'^ Is 28^8 (parallel with an imper-
fect") ; Am 5^28 (unless it is rather, yea, ye shall take up ; see above, a;) ; ip 26^,
Ez 83«.
(i3) A longer or constant continuance in a past state is perhaps represented SS
by the perfect with 1 (as a vai-iety of the frequentative perfect with 1), in
Gn 15*, 34^ Nu 2120, Jos 9'^, 22^*, Is 22^^ Jer 3^ But the unusual perfects consec.
in Jos i5^~i^ 16^-8 (ultimately parallel with an imperf. as in 17^ 18'^"), 1812-21,
ic,ii-H.22.26-29.34^ are without doubt rightly explained by Bennett (SBOr., Joshua,
p. 23) as originally containing the directions either of God to Joshua or of
Joshua to the people; cf. the evident trace of this in 15^^. A redactor
transformed the directions into a description but left the perfects consec, which
are to be explained as in aa. In the same way VrTl Ex 362^ is most simply
explained as repeated from 26^^
(7) The following are due to errors in the text, or to incorrect modes of it
expression : Ex 36" '-, Ju 3^8, 1 16I8 (read ^bv'JJ, 1 S 4", 1 7^8, 2 S 1 6^, 19I8 '■ (read
inbv and 1"13y^V), I K 3" (where ni'NEJ^ is, no doubt intentionally, assimi-
lated to the four other perfects); 13', 20^1 ; 2 K 14'' (where, with Stade,
bsri y^DHTlNIl should be read) ; 141*, i8< (where, at any rate, "13^1 might
be taken as a frequentative, but not m31 , &c. ; evidently the perfects are
co-ordinated only in form with "CpH N^n) ; iS^^^ 21^^ 24", Jer 371^ (where
^ani , but not ^jnj"! , might be frequentative) ; Ez 9'' (omit ^N^^ 1 with Stade,
and read ^3ni) ; 20^2 ('•nSK'ni Mil'el before an imperfect consecutive) ; Am 7*
(npDN^ after an imperfect consecutive) ; Jb 16^^.
Finally, in i S 112, lo^, 17", 25^0, 2 S 6I6, 2 K 3", Jer 37", Am f iH^I is to be UU
read throughout instead of n^iTl, but in Gn 38^ it.'^TTi) with the LXX.*
B. The Infinitive and Paeticiple.
§ 113. The Infinitive Absolute.
Cf. the dissertation of J. Kahan, and, especially, the thorough investigation
by E. Sellin, both entitled, Ueber die verbal-nominale Boppelnatur der hebrdischen
Participien und Infinitive, &c., Lpz. 1889 ; E. Pratorius, 'Ueber die sogen. Infin.
absol. des Hebr.' in ZDMG. 1902, pp. 546 ff.
1. The infinitive absolute is employed according to § 45 to emphasize a
the idea of the verb in the abstract, i. e. it speaks of an action (or
state) without any regard to the agent or to the circumstances
of time and mood under which it takes place. As the 7iame of an
action the infinitive absolute, like other nouns in the stricter sense,
^ Or does ?V^), as a frequentative, imply fastening with several bolts ? It is,
at all events, to be noticed, that in 2 S 13^8 also pyjl follows an imperfect
consecutive.
Z 2
340 The Parts of Speech [§1136-^
may form part of certain combinations (as a subject, predicate, or object,
or even as a genitive,' see below) ; but such a use of the infinitive
absolute (instead of the infinitive construct with or without a preposi-
tion) is, on the whole, rare, and, moreover, open to question on critical
grounds. On the other hand, the infinitive absolute frequently
exhibits its character as an expression of the verbal idea by taking an
object, either in the accusative or even with a preposition.
J) Examples of the use of the infinitive absolute : —
(a) As subject, Pr 25^^ ait3 N^ n^ain ^y^ hb^ a is not good to eat much
honey; Jer lo^ Jb625, £04^'; epexegetically, after a demonstrative pronoun,
Is586SZci4i'2.
C Q>) As predicate, Is 32^'' and the effect of righteousness (is) HCni DpK'n qidetness
(prop, to find rest) and confidence.
d (c) As object, Is i" 3;3\n nob learn to do well; Is 7^5 Pr 15", jb 9";
according to the sense also Jer 9*' 23^*, as well as Is 5"* ("IDH and y^B virtually
depend on the idea of the wish contained in nt^j?) ; Is2 2^3, where a long
series of infinitives absolute is governed by Hjin, and 59^' (six infinitives
governed by D^jy'l'' in verse 12) ; Dt 28^® is strange since the object precedes
the infinitive absolute which governs it,^ also 1342^', where the statement of
place precedes the infinitive absolute. — In Jer 9*, Jb 13' the infinitive absolute
as the object of the verb is placed before it for the sake of emphasis (with the
verb negatived by X7 in Is 572", Jer 49^'), so also in La 3*^ where it is the
remoter object and co-ordinated with a substantive.
e {d) As genitive, Is 14*^ "'^K'n KONCDS with the besom of destruction ; so
perhaps also 4* 1}^3 rm3 ; cf. further, Pr i^, 21I*. The infinitive absolute
is never used in immedia*e connexion with prepositions ^ (which as being
originally substantives govern the genitive), but always the infinitive con-
struct ; but if a second infinitive is co-ordinated by "j with such an infinitive
construct, it has the form of the infinitive absolute (since it is released from
the immediate government of the preposition), e.g. i S 22" , , , DH^ v I'!"!'?
D^r6X3 S? biSK^"! in that thou hast given him bread . . . and hast enquired of Oodfor
him ; Ez 368 ; i 82526-33 (after JD) ; after b Ex 32*, Jer 7I8, 44I''.
f (e) Governing an accusative of the object, e.g. Is 22" |X2f tOHBh 1p3 i^H
slaying oxen and killing sheep ; cf. Ex 20*, 23'*', Dt 5^2, Is 371^, Ez 233", and of the
examples in a-d, Dt 28^*, Is 5", 58*'-, Pr 25'''', &c. ; followed by a preposition,
e.g. Is 7I6 3itS3 "linn^ yi2 OitilO to refuse the evil and choose the good; Pris^*
(ib nain).
£" If the object be a personal pronoun, then, since the infinitive absolute can
never be united with a suffix (see the note on a), it is aflBxed by means of
the accusative-sign nS (HN), e. g. Jer 9^ *riN yn^l and knoweih me ; Ez 36'.
* The infinitive absolute can never be joined with a genitive or a pro-
nominal sufSx.
2 Perhaps JSH according to §53/1; should be explained as an infinitive
construct, or should be written JlfH,
* nriE^ nriNI i S i' is impossible Hebrew, and as the LXX shows, a late
addition.
§113^-^] The Infinitive Absolute 341
2. Analogous to the use of the infinitive absolute as the accusative //
of the object, mentioned in d, is its employment as a casus adverbialis '
in connexion with some form of the finite verb, to describe more
particularly the manner or attendant circumstances (especially those
of time and place) under which an action or state has taken place, or
is taking place, or will take place; e.g. Jer 22'' he shall be buried
'with the burial of an ass, 'i\]?f>^] ^^HD a dravnng and casting forth, i. e.
being drawn and cast forth, &c,; Gn 21*® (pn-|n a removing, i.e.
distant; cf. Ex 33^, Jos 3'^); Gn 30^^ Ex 3o'«, Nu 6^-", 15"' (where
a subject is added subsequently ; see below, gg) ; Jos 3'', i S 3^*
(npDI pnn a beginning and ending, i.e. from beginning to end) ; 2 S 8^
Is 7" (P^yp and I!l3an, prop, a making deep . . ., and a making high,
i. e. whether thy request extend to the world below or to the height
above); 57" (iJ^Dn in hiding, sc. my face); Jer 3^^ (^'lV"^l -^V^ «'«"^'*
knowledge and understanding) ; Hb 3" (ri^"'V> for the form cf.
§ 75 aa); Zc f, f 35'® (P^O, to define more precisely ^V]?^ verse 15);
JbI5^='
Rem. I. To an adverbial infinitive absolute of this kind, there may further i
be added a casus adverbialis (the accusative of state or circumstance), or even
a circumstantial clause, to define more exactly the manner in which the
action is performed, e. g. Is 20^ and he did so ein"*"! Di"iy ^?n walking naked and
barefoot, prop, in the condition of one naked, &c. ; Is 30" a breaking in pieces
(ace. to the reading nin2 ; the Masora requires nWS) without sparing.
2. A few infinitives of this kind, all of which are in Hiph'il, have, through «-"
frequent use, come to be treated by the language as simple adverbs; so
especially n2"jn (cf. § 75jr) multum faciendo, i.e. multum, very frequently
strengthened by HNO very and even used without connexion with a finite
verb (see the Lexicon) ; also atp'^n bene faciendo, i. e. bene, used especially to
express the careful and thorough performance of an action (e.g. Dt 13^^) ; in
Dt 9*', 27^ it is added epexegetically to another adverbial infinitive absolute,
in Jon 4^ it twice precedes the verb for the sake of emphasis. Finally, DSB'n
mane faciendo, i. e. early in the morning, then in general early with the additional
idea of earnestness; in i S 17" joined with the infinitive absolute 2'\}}TV\
a denominative from 2")^ evening (morning and evening, i. e. early and late),
elsewhere (with the exception of Pr 27") always joined with the infini^tive
absolute of the governing verb, e.g. Jer 11' for I earnestly protested Cnnyjl)
xmto your fathers . . . HJ/rTl DSK'n rising early and protesting, i. e. with earnest
protestation ; Jer 25^, 26"* (where ) should be omitted before 'H); Jer 29", 32'^
2 Ch 16".
^ That this cosiis adverbialis also was originally regarded as an accusative,
may be seen from classical Arabic, where an infinitive of this kind expressly
retains the accusative ending. In Latin the ablative of the gerund corre-
sponds in many ways to this use of the infinitive absolute.
2 Also in 2 K 2 1'» for "-[QT]) nno read with Stade and Klostermann ^jbri"! nhD ;
similarly, with Stade, n^j>) in JU4'",- pITHI in Jer 23'*, and on l3 3i« cf. t.
342 The Parts of Speech [^n^i-o
J 3. The infinitive absolute occurs most frequently in immediate con-
nexion with the finite verb of the same stem, in order in various ways
to define more accurately or to strengthen the idea of the verb}
VI These infinitives absolute joined immediately to the finite verb belong in
a sense to the schema etymologicum treated in § 117^, i.e. they are objects of
the finite verb in question, except that the infinitive absolute (as a nomen
abstradum) lays stress rather on the actual occurrence or the energy of the
action (see the examples below), while the noun proper emphasizes the
result or extent of the action ; cf. e. g. Ex 22^2 ^^^? pyy^ pV^"DN if it actually
happens that he cries to me, with Gn 27'^ (as it were, he cried, so that a great cry
was heard).
We must further distinguish —
7^ (a) The infinitive absolute used before the verb to strengthen the
verbal idea, i. e. to emphasize in this way either the certainty
(especially in the case of threats) or the forcibleness and completeness
of an occurrence. In English, such an infinitive is mostly expressed
by a corresponding adverb, but sometimes merely by putting greater
stress on the verb ; e. g. Gn 2'' rilDn HID thou shalt surely die, cf. iS'"-'*,
22'^, 28^-, I S 9® {cometh surely to pass)] 24^', Am 5^ 7", Hb 2^ Zc 11'';
with the Infinitive strengthened by 'H^ Gn 44^* (but 27^° and Jacob
was yet scarce gone out, &c.) ; Gn 43' ^33 lyn HJ^H he did solemnly
protest unto us ; i S 20® ^^^^ ^i^^^ David earnestly asked leave of me ;
Jos 17'^, Ju i^^ ^K''''iin N7 tJ'''"!lin^ and did not utterly drive them out;
especially typical instances are Am 9* I will destroy it fi-om off the face
of the earth '31 n^Of ^< '^^pT^ N^ "3 DDK saving that I will not utterly
destroy, &c. ; Jer 30" and will in no wise leave thee unpunished; cf.
further Gn 20'*, i K f\ Jo i\ Jb I3^
0 The infinitive absolute is used before the verb with less emphasis :
(i) Frequently at the beginning of the statement; cf. Driver on
I S 20''. However, in these cases a special emphasis on the following
verb is sometimes intended ; cf. above, n, on Gn 43^, i S 20" ; also
Gn 3'^, 26'^ 32'', I S 14-^ 20^. Elsewhere the infinitive absolute is
evidently used only as possessing a certain fullness of sound (hence for
rhythmical reasons, like some uses of the separate pronoun, § 135 a),
as in Gn i^'\ 43' •^«, Ju 9«, i S io'«, 23'", 2 S i\ 2o'l
(2) Very frequently in conditional sentences after DN, &c. The
infinitive absolute in this case emphasizes the importance of the con-
' Cf. A. Rieder, Die Verhindung des Inf. abs. viit dem Verb, fin . . . im Hebr.,
Lpz., 1872; also his Quae ad syntaxin Hebraicam . . . planiorem faciendam ex
lingua Graeca et Latina affcrantur, Gumbinnen (Programm des Gymnasiums),
1884. G. R. Hauschild, Die Verbindung finiter und infiniter Verbalformen desselben
Stainme^ in einigen Bibelsprachen, Frankfurt a. M., 1893, discussing especially
the rendering of such constructions in the Greek and Latin versions.
§ii3i)-0 "^he Infinitive Absolute 343
dition on ^vhicll some consequence depends, e. g. Ex i ^^^ if thou wilt
diligently hearken, &c., Ex 19^ 2iS 2 2^-'^'- ^"•"'^ (see above, m); 23"'^,
Nu 21^ Ju 16", I S i", 12-^; after "h 1 S 14^°.
The infinitive absolute is used to give emphasis to an antithesis, e.g. j?
2 S 24^^ nay; hut I will verily buy ('"'JpNt S^\>) it of thee, &c. (not
receive it as a gift); Ju 15'' no; hut we ivill hind thee fast . . . but
surely we will not kill thee; cf. further Gn3i^'' (thou art indeed
gone = ) though thou wouldst needs he gone (Vulg. esto), because thou sore
longedst, &c.; >//■ ii8'^'^ 126^ (the second infinitive absolute as a sup-
plement to the first — see below, r — comes after the verb). — Hence
also, as permissive, Gn 2"'" ''?^*^ -'S^ thou mayest freely eat, but, &c.
(so that verse 16 is in antithesis to verse 17); or concessive, i S 2^°
I said indeed . . . , 1 4''^.
The infinitive absolute is used to strengthen a question, and q
especially in impassioned or indignant questions, e. g. Gn 37* "V^ll
'^\?V ^''9^ shall thou indeed reign over us? Gn 37^", 43'', Ju ii'^',
I S 2^7, 2 S 19", Jer 3\ i^'\ Ez 28^ Am 3^ Zc f; but cf. also
Gn 24* must I needs bring again ?
(6) The infinitive absolute after the verb, sometimes (as in n) to r
intensify^ the idea of the verb (especially after imperatives and
participles, since the infinitive absolute can never precede either, e. g,
Nu ii'% Jb 13'', 21-, 37- yiOB' ^VDB^ hearken ye attentively; Jer 22'";
after participles, e.g. Is 22", also elsewhere, e.g. Nu 23", 24^° thou
hast altogether blessed them; Jos 24'", 2 K 5", Dn ii^°, and with the
infinitive absolute strengthened by means of 03 Gn 31'', 46"*, Nu 16") ;
sometimes to express the long continuance of an action ; here again
after an imperative, Is 6^ yiJOB* ^ycEJ' hear ye continually ; after a
perfect, Jer 6^' ; after a participle, Jer 2 3" ; after an imperfect
consecutive, Gn 19^, Nu n^^
To this class belong especially those cases in which a second infini- S
tive absolute is co-ordinated with the first; the latter then expresses
either an accompanying or antithetical action or the aim to which the
principal action is directed ; e. g. i S 6^^ iVJI '^'^ "^^7^ lowing as they
went (lowing continually; so after a participle, Jos 6'^^ Q^re); Gn 8''
it went forth to and fro"^ ; Is 19"^ smiting and (i.e. but also) healing
again; Jo 2''' (see above, m).
Rem. I. Instead of a second infinitive absolute (see above) there is some- t
times found a perfect consecutive (Jos. 6"" and 2813!^ [but Stade's pW^ is
^ In Arabic also, the intensifying infinitive regularly stands after the verb,
but in Syriac before the verb.
2 Also in Ez i'* for the distorted form N12n reads simply Nir iNif^ .
344 ^'^^^ Parts of Speech \^ii^ u-w
is preferable], in both places as perfect fi-equentative ; Is 31' referring to the
future, unless with Stade, ZAW. vi. 189, we read ?^2fni and DvOnl), or an
imperfect consecutive (i S 19^^^ 2 S i&^) or participle (2 S 16^) ; cf. also u.
U 2. The idea of long continuance is very frequently expressed by the verb Tjpn
to go, along with its infinitive absolute, or even by the latter alone, and this
occurs not only when it can be taken in its literal sense {to go, to walk, as in
the examples given above, Jos 6^", i S 6^^ 2 S 3^^, 13^^; cf. also, Is 3^6, where
both infinitives stand before the verb, and ^ 126^, where Tjibn precedes), but
also in cases where 'r]pn in the sense of to go on, to continue, merely performs
the function of an adverb. The action itself is added in a second infinitive
absolute, or sometimes (see above, t) in a participle or verbal adjective.
. . .! < <.
Examples, Gn 8^ 31B'1 !]i?n . . . D^©n OK"1 and the waters returned . , . con-
tinually ; Gn 8^, 12^, Ju 14^ 2 K 2" ; with a participle following, Jer 41^ (unless
we read nb3?, as in 2 S 3^6) ; with an adjective following, Gen 26'*, Ju 4^*,
I S 14", 2 S5^° (I Ch ii9), 2 S i825. 1
On the other hand, in i S 17" the participle -jpn is used instead of the
infinitive absolute. Of a different kind are the instances in which the
participle Tjbn is used as predicate along with the co-ordinate adjective
(Ex i9'», I S 226, 2 S 3', 1 6^2^ Est 9*, 2 Ch 1712) or participle (i S 17", Jon i»,
Pr 4I8, Ec 16).
jj 3. The regular place of the negative is between the intensifying infinitive
absolute and the finite verb,^ e.g. Ex r^^ n?Sn"N? 7^n"l neither hast thou
delivered at all, Ju 15'^, Jer 13'^, 30"; cf. Mi i'" (?K). Exceptions are Gn 3*
(where the negation of the threat pronounced in 2'^'' is expressed in the same
form of words) ; Am 9^, yp 49*.
^ 4. With a finite verb of one of the derived conjugations, not only the
infinitive absolute of the same conjugation may be connected (Gn 28^2 Pi'el ;
I7'8, Ex 22S, Ez 14S Niph'al ; Gn 40^6 Pu'al; Ho 4" Hiph'il; Ez i6< Hoph'al),
but also (especially with Niph'al, rarely with Pi'el and Hiph'il ; see Driver
on 2 S 20^8) that of Qal as the simplest and most general representative of the
verbal idea, 2 S 20^* (with Pi'el ; but in Gn 37^', 44^^ P|^b is a passive of Qal,
§ 52 e) ; 46* (with Hiph'il) ; Ex 19IS, ai^", 2 S 23^ Is 40^°, Jer lo^, Jb 6^ (with
Niph'al) ; Is 24^^ (with Hithpo'gl ; nj)T in the same verse must also, according
to the Masora, certainly be the infinitive absolute Qal ; see § 67 0), and so always
niO^'' nitD he shall surely be put to death. Elsewhere the infinitive absolute of
a conjugation with kindred meaning is found, Lv 192°, 2 K ^^ Hoph'al for
Niph'al (but most probably we should read, with Driver, the infin. Niph. in
both places, iT^Sn and 2nnn) ; i S 21* (Pi'el for Hiph'il, unless ]\^\^)\>) is to be
read); Ez 16* (Hoph'al for Pu'al).^ Finally, the infinitive absolute may
* Cf. in French, Le mal va toujours croissant, la maladie va toujours en augmentant
et en empirant, ' continually increases and becomes worse and worse.'
2 Cf. Rieder, Quo loco ponaniur negationes ^? et 7^ . . . {Zeitschrift fur Gymn.-
ITesm, 1879, p. 395fif.).
8 In three passages even the infinitive absolute of another stem of like
sound occurs ; but in Is 28^* {^ilN is no doubt a mere textual error for {^n
and in Jer 8^', according to § 72 aa, we should read DDDK, and in Zp i^ fjDN.
Barth, Nom.-bildung, § 49 b, sees in l^nN and t]iDK infinitives Hiph'il, exactly
corresponding in form to ^'^qdmla] the Aram, infin. 'Aph'el of Dp ; but there is
no more evidence for a Hiph. of B'^'n in Hebrew than for a stem 1{'*1K.
§ 1 13 x-aa] The Infinitive Absolute 345
equally well be represented by a suhstantiw of kindred stem.' In Is 29'*
the substantive intensifying the verb is found along with the infinitive
absolute.
5. Instead of the infinitive absolute immediately connected with the finite X
Verb, an infinitive construct form appears (of. § 73 d), in Nu 21^^ (3'p D3 ; cf.
Ru 2I6 ^K' D3) ; Jer 50" {yy an) ; Pr 23I (pan p3). In the last instances
the infinitive is probably assimilated to the imperfect, like the infinitive
Niph'al in the forms noticed in § 51 A; and note. — Cf. also 2 K 3^* Vb. 1X3*1
nisn"! (read so with the LXX) before N, hence, no doubt due to the dislike of
a hiatus ; so in i/- 50^1, Neh 1'' C?3n), all in rapid style ; after the verb, Jos 7^,
unless "l^ayn is intended.
4. Fiually the infinitive absolute sometimes appears as a substitute y
for the finite verb, either when it is sufficient simply to mention the
verbal idea (see z), or when the hurried or otherwise excited style
intentionally contents itself with this infinitive, in order to bring out
the verbal idea in a clearer and more expressive manner (see ad).
(a) The infinitive absolute as the continuation of a preceding finite Z
verb. In the later books especially it often happens that in a
succession of several acts only the first (or sometimes more) of the
verbs is inflected, while the second (or third, &c.) is added simply in
the infinitive absolute. Thus after several perfects, Dn 9* (cf verse 11)
v:e have sinned . . . and have transgressed thy law, "liD] and have turned
aside (prop, a turning aside took place); so after a perfect Ex 36^(?),
I S 2^, Is 37", Jer 14*, 19", Hag i^ (four infinitives), Zc 3'' (but
read with Wellhausen, after the LXX, ink ^K'aJ'ni), f, Ec %\ 9",
Est 3'^ 9«-^«-^«, I2*''-, Neh 9«•l^ i Ch 5^", 2 Ch aS^^;^ after the f effect
consecutive, 7iG 12'°; after the perfect frequentative 1 K 9^^ (unless
T'tDpni be intended) ; after the simple imperfect, Lv 2 5'^, Nu 30^,
Jer 32'" (three infinitives), 36^, i Ch 21^*; after a cohortative, Jos 9^°;
after the imperfect consecutive, Gn 41^* (as a continuation of 33")?1) ;
Ex 8", Ju 7'^ Jer 37^1, Neh 8«, i Ch i6^«, 2 Ch f; with IN or after
the jussive, Dt 14", Est 2^, 6'; after the imperative, Is 37^°^ Am 4*'-;
after the participile, Hb 2^" (strengthened by ^6<, and regarded, like
the participle itself, as an adverbial accusative) ; Est 8*.
(6) At the beginning of the narrative, or at least of a new section dCl
of it. The special form of the finite verb which the infinitive absolute
represents must be determined from the context. The infinitive
^ On these substantives (and on the use of the infinitive absolute generally
as absolute object, see above, m), cf. the schema etymologicum treated in con-
nexion with the government of the verb in § 1 17 p, g.
* In Ez 7'* a perfect appears to be continued by means of an infinitive
construct ; but the text is quite cori'Upt ; Cornill reads |3n ^3"'3n Jjipn ^V\?^.
346 The Parts of Speech [§ii3&6-/
absolute is most frequently used in this way, corresponding to the
infinitive of command in Greek, Sec,} : —
Jjl) (a) For an emphatic imperative,'^ e. g. 1^0^ (thou shalt, ye shall),
observe Dt 5'^; 113^ (thou shalt) remember, Ex 13^ 20^ (the full form
occurs in Dt 6'' iniOf Pi niDK' ; 7'8 13|P1 ibl) ; Lv 2«, Nu 4^, 25'^ Dt i'\
2 K 5'°, Is 38^ Jer 2^^, followed by a perfect consecutive; Jos I'^
2 K 3^®, Is 7^ 14'' (parallel with an imperative; in Na 2^ three
imperatives follow). But tS""?!? ^ 142^ may be only an incorrect
spelling of I33n imperative.^
CC (y8) For the jussive, Lv 6', Nu 6^ 2 K IIl^ Ez 23^^ ; cf. also Pr 17''
(Jet it rather meet).
dd (y) ^°^" ^^^ cohortative, Is 22"'' ^HB'l ^J^K (the exclamation of the
mocker) ; Ez 21'', 2 3^*'-'*'' ; perhaps also Jer 31^ (^^''v')-'*
ce (S) For the imperfect in emphatic promises, e. g. 2 K 4"* ye shall
eat and leave thereof; 19^^ (Is 37^"), 2 Ch 31"'; also in indignant
questions, Jb 40^^ shall he that cavilleth contend with the Almighty 1 ^
(on the addition of the subject cf. the Rem. below); Jer 3' and
thinhest thou to return again to me ? Jer 7**^- (six infinitives, continued
by means of the perfect consecutive ; cf. § 1 1 2 0).
4f (e) For any historical tense (like the Latin historic infinitive) in
lively narration (or enumeration) and description, even of what is still
taking place in present time, e.g. Hos 4^^ swearing and breaking faith,
and killing, and stealing, and committing adultery (in these they are
busied); 10* (after a. perfect); Is 21*, 59^ Jer 8'^ 14", Jb 15''; cf.
further Jer 32^^ Ec 4^— InEz 23"", Pr 12', I5'^ and 25^ the infinitive
absolute is best rendered by the passive.
1 Cf. also such infinitives in French as ?;otV(page so and so, &c.), s'adresser. . . ,
se mefier des voleurs !
^ Pratorius, op. cit.,p. 547 i the extraordinarily common use of the infinitive
form qdtol in the sense of an imperative, jussive, or cohortative has long since
caused it to be compared with the Arab, fa'dli. It thus appears that the
infin. qdtol in Hebrew^ could be used from early times as a kind of fixed,
invariable w^ord of command. .
3 In Ez 21 SI, for the infinitives construct "("'Dn D'ln P^SK'n (beside Piajn)
read with Cornill the infinitives absolute "^Dn, &c. The K*thibh probably
intends TDH, &c.
* In 2 S 3I8 the infinitive construct appears to be used instead of the
cohortative, but V'B'iK should certainly be read for yE'in. Also in i K 22^"
(2 Ch 18^^), which was formerly included under this head (I will disguise
myself and go into the battle), read N2N"! L^'QnnNl.
^ In Jb 34I' in a similar question instead of the infinitive constr. we should
rather expect the infinitive absolute (^bSH), unless with the LXX and Vulg.
the participle with the article ("llOXn) is to be read.
§§ii39'J7, ii4a-e] The Infinitive Absolute 347
Rem. The subject is sometimes added to the infinitive absolute when it fj^g
takes tho place of the finite verb, e, g. Lv 6^ Nu i^^^, Dt 152, 1// i;^, Pr 1712, '^
Jb 40^, Ec 4=^, Est 9I. So, probably, also in Gn 17I", Ex 12*^, although here
"13T"^3 according to § 121 a might also be taken as an object yvith. a passive
verb ; cf. Est 3^^ In i S zs^^-^^ the subject follows an infinitive absolute
which is co-ordinated with an infinitive construct, see above, e.
§ 114. The Infinitive Construct.
1. The infinitive construct, like the infinitive absolute, may also CI
represent a nomen verbale (§45 «), but of a much more flexible
character than the infinitive absolute (cf. § 1 1 3 a). Its close relation
with nouns properly so called is especially seen in the readiness with
which the infinitive construct may be used for any case whatever;
thus,
(a) As the nominative of the subject, e.g. Gn 2'^ rivn 3iD"X7
n3p ^^?p) literally, not good is tlie being of man in his sejjaration;
Gn'3o'% I S 232", Is 7", Pr if\ 25^-^^ (but cf. 2i« nn^b Sb in the
same statement); yj/^ 32^ prop, there is not a coming near unto thee,
but the text is probably corrupt. With a feminine predicate, i S i8">
Jer 2''.
{b) As genitive, e. g. Ec 3'' lip*l nj^l I^DD Ti)) a time of mourning h
and a time of dancing; Gn 2'^, 29^, Neh 12'"', 2 Ch 24". This
equally includes, according to § loi a, all those cases in which the
infinitive construct depends on a preposition (see below, d) [and
Driver, Tenses, § 206].
(c) As accusative of the object, e. g. i K 3^ ^<31 riNV VtN S7 / know C
not the going out or the coming in (/ know not how to go out and come
in) ; Gn 2i«, 3i'», Nu 20^', Is i", 372* (even with ON), Jer 6'^ Jb 15^
(cf. for the use of the infinitive absolute as object, §113/); as
accusative with a verb expressing fullness. Is II^
2. The construction of the infinitive with prepositions (as in Greek, a
lv Tw cTi'tti, 8ia TO civat, &c.) may usually be resolved in English into
the finite verb with a conjunction, e. g. Nu 35" n"iy3D3 m his meeting
him, i.e. if (as soon as) he meets him; Gn 27^^ (21C^"ny); Is 30'^
^?^?,? 1^- because ye despise ; Jer 2^^ 'H'?.^?'''!? because thou sayest ;
Gn 27' and his eyes were dim riN"!D from seeing, i.e. so that he could
not see.
This use of the infinitive construct is especially frequent in con- e
nexion with 3 or 3 to express time-determinations (in English resolved
into a temporal clause, as above the combination of the infinitive with
]T. or vV is resolved into a causal clause), especially after ''0^1 (see the
348 The Parts of Speech [§ 114/-*
examples, ^ i\i g), e. g. i S 2-" 0^?*?? t^^^''']^ when they were in
Egypt ; Gn 24^ 01 ijJDK'DI . . . DT3n-nN nN^a ^H^. and it came to pass,
when he saw (pi'op. in the seeing) the ring . . . , and when he heard
(prop, in his hearing), &c.
f But by far the most frequent is the connexion of the infinitive
construct with p.^ Starting from the fundamental meaning of ?,i. e.
direction towards something, infinitives with ? serve to express the
most varied ideas of purpose or aim, and very commonly also (with
a weakening or a complete disregard of the original meaning of the p)
to introduce the object of an action, or finally even (like the infinitive
absolute used adverbially, § 113 A, and the Latin gerund in -ndo)
to state motives or attendant circumstances. See the instances in the
Remarks.
nr Rem. i. The original meaning of the p is most plainly seen in those
infinitives with p which expressly state a purpose (hence as the equivalent of
a final clause), e.g. Gn 11^ and the Lord came down, TiynTlK nk"!P to see the city ;
also with a change of subject, e. g. 2 S 12^" and thou hast taken the wife of Uriah
the Eittite nt^s!' "^ nVn!? to be (i. e. that she may be) thy wife ; cf. Gn 28*,
Jer 38^2^ (n^D?). — If there is a special emphasis on the infinitive with p, it is
placed, with its complement, before the governing verb, e. g. Gn 42*, 47*,
Nu 2220, Jos 2», I S i62 with Ni3 ; Ju 1^^°, iSif^ with rhv.
fl 2. Just as clearly the idea of aiming at a definite purpose or turning
towards an object may be seen in the combination of the verb riTl to be,
L •• L TT '
with p and an infinitive. In fact fllB'y? H^H may mean, either (a) he wa? in
the act of, he was about to (as it were, he set himself), he was ready, to do some-
thing, or (6) he or it was appointed or compelled, &c., to do the action in question.
In the latter case HiK'yp D^n con-esponds to the Latin faciendum erat, cf. also
the English I am to go. In both cases n^n (as elsewhere when copula) is
often omitted.
t Examples of (a) Gn 15" xi3^ ^W\} ''<^'^^ «"* ^^^^ '*« »"" «'«« S'<»'"S' ^"wn
(just about to set) ; 2 Ch 26^ D''n'f'N B'Tlp '•n^l and he set himself to seek God
(here with the secondary idea of a continuous action) ; with the omission of
njn Is 3820, ""iVTinb nin^ the Lord is ready to save »ne; i S 14*1 (?), Jer 5i«,
^ 25" (et foedus suum manifestaturus est eis) ; Pr 18" (?), 19* (t^Jfipp consecuturus
^ Cf. § 45 g, according to which the close union of the p with the first
consonant of the infinitive (3ri3p with a firmly closed syllable, as opposed to
37133, 3n33, &c.) seems to point to the formation of a special new verbal
form. Quite distinct are the few examples where the infinitive with p serves
to express time, as Gn 24«» 3ny nijsb at the eventide (prop, at the time of the
return of evening) ; cf. Dt 23", Ex 14'', Ju 1926; 2 S i829 when Joab sent the
king^s servant.
§114*, z] The Infinitive Construct 349
est, unless we simply read N'iO^ with the LXX) i ; ao^^ Ec 3" T\S'^r\\ nC'K quod
futurum est; 2 Ch ii^^, 12^2 (^jq a negative statement); in a question, Est 7"
{will he even . . . ?). Cf. also 1 S 4I'.
Of (&) Jos 2^ -linpb ')V^n ""n^l and the gate was to be shut (had to be shut) ; k
Is 3728, if^ io9's.2 Mostly with the omission of iTH, e.g. 2 K 4^3 niB>J?^ HD
'i^ T]!? w^a^ is to be done for thee? {"ip'linp K'Tl) wouldest thou be (lit. is it to be)
spoken for to the king, &c. ? 2 K 13I' niSH? «7 was to smite equivalent to thou
shouldest have smitten ; Is 5*, if/ 32', 68^' (?), Jb 30® {habifandum est iis), i Ch g'^,
io'8, 226, 2 Ch 8" (?), 1 122, 192, 36" (?), Ho 9", Hb 1^'. In a question 2 Ch 192 ;
after K^ i Ch 5^, 152; after ps 1 Ch 2326, 2 Ch 5" and frequently.
Of the same kind also are the cases, in which the infinitive with p depends ^
on the idea of an obligation or permission (or prohibition) ; especially in such
forms of expression as 2 S iS^^ '31 Tp r)Tp vV it was upon me, i. e. it would
have been my duty to give thee, &c. ' ; cf. Mi 3^ (2 Ch 13'') it is not for you to (i. e.
are ye not bound to) ?* with a negative, 2 Ch 26^* '31 ^S 6^7 it pertaineth not
unto fliee, Uzziah, to bum incense unto the Lord, but only to the priests ; also ? J^X
with an infinitive expresses it is not permitted (nefas est), m,ay not, e.g. Est 42
aSl? PK '•3 /or none might enter ; 8*, i Ch 152 ; ^ p px with an infinitive is used
in a somewhat different sense, equivalent to itis not feasible, not possible, e.g.
in if/ 406, Ec 3I*, 3 Ch 5^^. * — With either meaning X? can be used instead of
pX, e.g. Am 6^° "I*"?]'!'!' N/ nefas est, to make mention of the name of the Lord :
but Ju 1^' for it was not possible to drive out, Sec, perhaps, however, the text
originally stood as in Jos 17^2 /-^J) ^1^31 ^^ . j ^j^ jg2^
1 P. Haupt (SBOT., Proverbs, p. 52, lines 10 ff. ; Critical Notes on Esther, p. 170,
on 7*) considers it possible that here and in Pr 2^, 62*, 7^, 16^", 30^*, as well as
in 14'^, 1721 before a noun, the 7 is a survival of the emphatic ? with an
imperf, which is especially common in Arabic. In that case NlfOp must be
read NiflOp, i. e. b -r KJfJD''. But all the above instances can be taken as infini-
tives with ^ without diflSculty.
2 Somewhat different are the cases where p riTl with the infinitive (which
is then used exactly as a substantive) implies to become something, i. e. to meet
with a particular fate, as Nu 2422 (cf. Is 5^, 6'^) IVlp for wasting, for which
elsewhere frequently T]'Q^p and the like ; probably also ni?2p rf/ 49'® is to be
explained in this way, the HTl being omitted.
' 2 S 4'** (cMi dandum erat mihi) appears to be similar ; it may, however, be
better, with Wellhausen, to omit the "Ip'X .
* But in I S 2320 after ^3?"| and our part shall be the infinitive without p
stands as the subject of the sentence.
^ Quite different of course are such cases as Is 37^ •"'l.c''' P?? D^l *'**' ^^^* **
not strength to bring forth ; cf, Nu 20^, Ru 4*.
8 In 2 S 14^^ t^K ( = 55'.'*. *< *s, there is) is used in a similar sense after DK, the
negative particle of asseveration, 0/ a truth it is not possible to turn to the right
hand or to the left.
350 The Parts of Speech [§ii4 7», n
fjl 3. A further class comprises the very numerous cases, in which the infini-
tive with p is used as the object ^ of a governing verb, hence, again, for the
direction which an action takes. The verbs (or conjugations) which occur
most frequently in this combination with p and an infinitive are : priH (with
an infinitive without p, e.g. Dt a^^-^^ Jos 3''), b"'Nin to begin, fl'^piilj fjD''
(prop, to add) to continue, very frequently, even in prose, with an infinitive
without 5), as Gn 4^^, S^"-^^, 37^, i S 3*, Jb 27^, &c. ; 7*in to cease from, to desist;
n ?3 to complete, to make an end of ; Dttn to be finished ; nnpH to come near to,
Gn 12" ; "nnJD to hasten (with an infinitive without p Ex 2'^) ; HDN to be willing
(with an infinitive without p Is 28^^, 30®, Jb 39^) ; ^*pn to will, to desire ; JND
to refuse (to be unwilling) ; t^|?3 to seek ; pb^ to be able (with an infinitive without
p, e.g. Gn 24^", 37*, Ex 2^, iS^^, Nu 22^^, Jb 4') ; |ri3 with an accusative of the
person in the sense of to give up to some one, to cause, or perrrdt him to do some-
thing, e.g. Gn 20^, if/ 16^^ (with an infinitive abs. Jb 9'*, see § 113^), yT to
understand how to do something (in Jb 3^ llj? D"]\"iy'^ ^^ analogous) ; 112?
to learn ; H^p to wait, expect (with a change of subject, e.g. Is 5^^ and he waited
for it to bring forth grapes),
^i' We must further mention here a number of verbs in Hiph'il (partly
denominatives), which express an action in some definite direction (cf. § 53/,\
as ^''"nin to do greatly, ij'»SK'n to make (it) low, rl''33n to make (it) high, p"'DJJn to
make (it) deep, p^Hin to make (it) far, distant, 3''t3''n to make (it) good (with an
infinitive without p if/ 33', but i S 16^'', in the same combination, with p) ;
D"'3CJ'n to do anything early (\p 127^, along with its opposite IPIX to do something
late, with an infinitive without p) ; T\'^'y\ to make (it) much, K^QH to make (it)
wonderful (even with a passive infinitive 2 Ch 26^^) ,' &c.
* This view is based upon the fact, that in numerous expressions of this
kind (see the examples above) the ? may be omitted, and the infinitive con-
sequently stand as an actual accusative of the object (see above, c). However,
the connexion of the verb with the object is in the latter case closer and more
emphatic (hence especially adapted to poetic or prophetic diction), than the
looser addition of the infinitive with b ; thus yilDK' ^3N N? Is 28^^ is equiva-
lent to they desired not obeying (^3N N7 also with the infin. abs. in Is 42^^ ; cf.
§ ii3rf); butytoK'p ^3^< iip Ez 20^ rather expresses they could not make up their
mind as to hearkening. When connected with p, the governing verb has
a more independent sense than when it directly governs the accusative of
the object.
^ In almost all these examples the principal idea is properly contained in
the infinitive, whilst the governing verb strictly speaking contains only
a subordinate adverbial statement, and is therefore best rendered in English
by an adverb ; e. g. Gn 2720 hoic is it that thou hast found it so quickly? (prop,
how thou hast hastened to find !), Gn 31'''' ivherefore didst thou flee secretly? So
frequently with nZl")n {=often, abundantly). Ex 36^ i S 1^', 2 K 21^ Is 55^,
Am 4<, ^ 7888, &c^ . ^Vith yi^ (= again), Dt 308, i K 13", Ho nS Ezr 9^* ; cf.
also 2 S 19*, Jer i^^, jn 42, and the analogous instances in § 120 g; also 2 K 2^
thou hast asked a hard thing.
§1140-5] The Infinitive Construct 35!
4. Finally, the infinitive with p is very frequently used in a much looser 0
connexion to state motives, attendant circumstances, or otherwise to define
more exactly. In English, such infinitive constructions (like the Latin gerund
in -do; cf./) must frequently be turned by that or a gerund ; e.g. i S 12"
"^70 DDp b'ifXh in asking you a king; 14^3, 196^ 20^6, Gn 3^2, igi^, 34''", Ex 23",
LvV-22-26, 8IS, Nu 1486, 2 S 310, I K 23 f-, 148, Jer 44''-, ip 63', 78I8, 1018, 103^0,
1041*'-, iii«, Pr 28, 83<, 186, Neh 13^^ Sometimes the infinitive with b is used
in this way simply by itself, e.g. i Ch 12* as the roes upon the mountains "inp?
(as regards hasting) in swiftness ; Gn 2', 2 S 14^5 (!?^nb) ; Is 21^ (^i^n^) ; Jo 2*6,
Pr 2^, 26^ and so very frequently the infinitive "ibxS dicendo which has
become stereotyped as an adverb to introduce direct narration (in the sense
o{ thus, as follows).''-
5. In a number of instances — especially in the later books — the infin.^
constr. with p appears to be attached by Wdw (like the infinitive absolute,
§ 113 3), as the continuation of a previous finite verb. In most examples of
this kind it is, however, evident that the infinitive with p virtually depends
on an idea of intention, effort, or being in the act of, which, according to the
sense, is contained in what has preceded, whilst the copula, as sometimes
also elsewhere, is used in an emphatic sense (and that too) ; thus e.g. Ex 32''^
(if the text be right) fill your hand to-day (sc. with an offering) for the Lord , : .
and that to bring a blessing upon you, i. e. that ye may be blessed ; cf. i S 25^1
(otherwise in verses 26 and 33 where the infinitive absolute is used, see
§ 113 e) ; ip 10421,!' Jb 348, Ec 9I, Neh 8", 2 Ch 7"._In Lv lo^of- b'''^2r\'p^
might be regarded as an explanatory addition to the command contained in
verse 9 & ( = this prohibition of wine before the service shall ye observe, and
that in order to put a difference, &c.); but probably the text has been
disturbed by a redactor. — In 2 Ch 30^ 3^{J'!)1 depends on the idea of receiving
a favour which lies in D^Om?. On the other hand, in i S 8^2 it is sufficient
to explain and in order to appoint them unto him for captains of thousands (sc. he
will take them). In Is 44^8 translate and he (Cyrus) shall perform all my
pleasure, and that in saying of Jerusalem, &c.
3. The period of time to which an action or occurrence represented Q
by the infinitive construct belongs, must sometimes be inferred from
the context, or from the character of the principal tenses; cf. e.g. Gn 2"
iJiese are the generations of the heaven and of the «ar</t, D^!!"j3^3 when
they were created (prop, in their being created) ; Ju 6'^ '31 ^N3"iy until
' "^bX^ is very often so used after "(aT"") in the Priestly document (Gn 81',
I73,&c., and numberless times in the legal parts of Exod., Lev., and Num.) — a
pleonasm which is not surprising considering the admittedly prolix and
formal style of the document.
2 "When Delitzsch on \p 104^1, referring to Hb i", explains the infinitive
with p as an elliptical njode of expressing the coniugatio periphrastica (equiva-
lent to flagitaturi sunt a deo cibum suum), this is, in point of fact, certainly
applicable to this and a few other places mentioned above ; but all these
passages, in which the infinitive with p^ follows, are to be distinguished
from the cases treated above under h, where the infinitive with ? without Wdw
corresponds to a Latin gerundive, or ia actually used to express the coniugatio
periphrastica.
352 The Parts of Speech [§§114^5,115 a
/ come unto thee, and bring forth, &c. Cf. i S i8'' ( = when she should
have been given) ; 2 K 2', Ho 7^
T Rem. i. The constructions of the infinitive with a preposition, described
above under d, are almost always continued in the further course of the
narrative by means of the finite verb, i. e. by an independent sentence, not by
a co-oi'dinate infinitive. Such a finite verb we regard as governed by a con-
junction, which corresponds to the preposition standing before the infinitive.
Thus the infinitival construction (frequently even with a change of subject)
is continued by a perfect (with N7), Jer g^^ because they have forsaken (D31S}~/y)
my law . . . lyCB' iip] and have not obeyed my voice ; Gn 39^", i S 24^2^ ^m i " ;
without tip Jb 28^^ (perf. after ? and infin.) ; by a perfect with 1 (cf. §1121
and v) Am i^^ ''31 iDHTby because he did pursue his brother with the sword, riHK'l
and did cast off continually all pity (a frequentative perfect ; for examples of
the perfect consecutive proper see Gn 27^^, Ju 6^^, i S 10^, 2 K 18^2 [Is 36"],
always after ''N3~ny until I come) ; by a simple imperfect, e.g. Pr i'^^ (after 3) ;
Is 30^'' (after Di''3 in the day, a temporal phrase which has here become
equivalent to a preposition) ; Is 5^* (after 3), lo^, 13^, 14^5, 45I, 49*, i S 2',
Pr 2*, 5^, 8^1 (always after p) ^ ; by an imperfect consecutive, e. g. Gn 39^^ and
it came to pass, NIpNI '•pip ""D^inS as I lifted up my voice and cried, that. . .;
1 K io9, Jb 38" (after f)) ; 1 K iS^^, Is 388, Jb sS''-' ^- (after 3) ; Is 30^2, Jer 7",
Ez 348 (after fy^).
S 2. The negation of an infinitive consti'uct, on account of the predominance
of the noun-element in its character, is effected not by the verbal negative tO
(except in the compound N?3, which has come to be used as a preposition,
without, Nu 3 J, 23, Pr 19^), but by ""PlpS, originally a substantive (see the Lexicon),
with b prefixed (but also Nu 14I6 '•ribsO), e. g. Gn 3" 13Qr?"^3{< ""J!!.^?^ wo^^ ^0
eat of it; in a final sense, 4'^ lest any finding him should smite him; only in
2 K 23^" is p repeated before the infinitive. In if/ 32^ (if the text be right) 73
negatives, not the infinitive, but the predicate which is understood.
§ 115. Construction of the Infinitive Construct with
Subject and Object.
a 1. Like the infinitive absolute (see § 113 a), the character of the
infinitive construct as a verbal noun is shown by its power of taking
the case proper to its verb, and hence in transitive verbs ^ the accu-
sative of the object, e. g. Nu 9'* |3^Qn~ns: D^jpn DV3 on the day the
^ The great frequency of examples of this kind, especially in the poetical
books, is due to a striving after what is called chiasmus in the arrangement
of the parallel members in the two halves of the verse, i. e. in the instances
given, the finite verb at the end of the second (co-ordinate) clause is parallel
with the infinitive at the beginning of the first. In this way the verbal form
necessarily became separated from the "j, and consequently the imperfect
liad to be used instead of the perfect consecutive. Such a parallelism of the
cx^ernaZ and m^erna? members of a verse is frequent also in other cases, and
was evidently felt to be an elegance of elevated — poetic or prophetic — style.
" For examples of the accus. of the object with a pass, infin., see § 121 c.
§ 115 b,c] Construction of the Infinitive Construct 353
tabernacle was reared up; i S 19' '1'!"^"'^^ ^'''P'^P that they should slay
David; Gn 14", 19'^^ Ex 38^^ i K 12'^ 15*; with a negative, e.g.
Lv 26*^ ''JTl'iyD'^B-nN; nib'y ""ripn? so that ye will not do all my command-
ments; with the accusative of the personal pronoun, e.g. Dt 29'^ iyp|'
^riN"D^pn that he may establish thee ; Gn 25^^, Jer 24'' ; with a verbal
suffix, e. g. Ex 2" ^ypr\) to hill me ; Jer sS^^ ^33^K'n ^n^ajj that he would
not cause me to return (on the suffix, cf. c). In Is 49^ the object even
precedes the infinitive with p ; on this order cf. the note on § 1 14 r. —
If the verb governs a double accusative, the infinitive may also take
the same, e. g. Gn 41^^ nNT-bTlN ^nVs p^nSx ynin ^-\n<A forasmuch as
God hath showed thee all this ; Dt 21'®.
Rem. I. The object after the infinitive constnict must also always be 0
regarded as in the accusative, even when it is not expressly introduced (as in
all the above examples) by the nota acciisativi "DX , and when therefore the
substantive in question might easily be taken as the genitive of the object
governed by the infinitive (the usual construction in Arabic), e.g. Pr 21^"
tSEK'p nVcy to do judgement. Against regarding it as a genitive, which is in
itself possible (the doing, the executing of judgement), is the fact (a) that elsewhere
the nota accusativi is so frequently added ; (b) that in such a case the secondary
forms of the infinitive, such as HNI for (y\'^l^) riN"! Gn 48" (cf. \p ioi3,Pr 16I6),
would be unintelligible; (c) that certain infinitive forms, if they were to be
regarded as in the construct state, could hardly retain the pretonic Qamea
without exception, whereas, when connected with suffixes (i. e. with real
genitives; cf. § 33 c), this Qames necessarily becomes S^wd; e.g. Gn i8*^
P'''^^ rT'pn? to slay the righteous (never as JT'Dn? ; cf., on the other hand, above,
*3Il''C'n) ; 2 K 21^, Ez 443". Similarly in such cases as Is 3!^ {\p 50*) instead
of CBU p*lP we should rather expect p"]?, if the infinitive were regarded as
in the construct state, and D'^Oy as the genitive. Hence also in cases like
Is 58^ (HpK' for Tp^) we must assume, with Sellin, op. cit., p. 78, a merely
'external phonetic connexion' and not the genitive construction.
2. The verbal suffixes added to the infinitive are (with the exception of C
^nSifinp Jer 39^^) only the suffix of the 1st pers. sing, (besides the above
examples cf. also 1 S 5^°, 271, 28^, Ru 2", i Ch 12I'', &c.) and plural; e.g.
WTDK'n!) to destroy us, Dt 1" (immediately after ^JHN T\rh, so that ^^JL_ is
doubtless a verbal not a noun-suflSx, although in form it might be either) ;
^Jri^Onp Nu 16^2, Ju 13^3 (after ^Cn). Elsewhere the pronominal object is
appended either by means of the accusative sign (e.g. Gn 25''«Drij< rilpS prop.
in the bearing thetn; Tlk Dyi? to know me, Jer 24'') or in the form of a noun-
suffix (as genitive of the object). The latter occurs almost always, whenever
the context excludes the possibility of a misunderstanding; e.g. i S ac"
inunp (prop, for his smiting) to smite him, not, as the form might also mean,
in order that he might smite; ef. i K 20^^ ; with the suffix of the 3rd sing. fern.
Nu 2 2^^^ ; of the 3rd plur. Jos 10*", 2 S 21*, &e. Hence also the suffixes of the
2nd sing, with the infinitive, as ''iribrip Jer 40'^, cf. Mi 6^^, and even ^p'la
to magnify thee, Jos 3'', must certainly be regarded as nominal not verbal suffixes.
The connexion of the noun-suffix, as genitive of the object, with the infinitive,
COWLEY ^ a
354 The Parts of Speech {^u^d-j
was so fully established, that it could be used not only in such strange cases,
as Gn 37* DPC'p i"l31 v^'' Vh they could not speak to Mm peaceably, cf. Zc 3^
^Jtpb'i' to be an adversary to him, but ultimately even in the ist sing., as in
Nu 22" ''rinp to give me leave [Dt 25'' >)p32 H^X N? he will not perform the duty 0/
a husband's brother unto me ; i Ch 4^" "iZlify "'Jjlp^r' that it may not grieve me /]
(2 3. The power of governing like a verb is also retained in those verbal nouns
which, although originally secondary forms of the infinitive, have fully
acquii-ed the value of nouns, e. g. Is 11^ nifT'TlX nV"l (prop, to know the Lord)
the knowledge of the Lord ; '•flX HXl''^ to fear me, Dt 4^*', 5^^*, lo^^ ; an accusative
follows nDnxfj Dt 1012-15, Is 56«" (cf. also i K lo^, Ho 3I) ; nSjn^ Is 302*' ;
Ijnx nrr\) nXib'S Dt 127 ; after verbal nouns formed with the prefix D (cf.
§ 45 e), Nu io2, Is 13I', Am 4II, Ez 17*. The accusative of the object likewise
remains after infinitives (or their secondary forms') which have the article,
e. g. Gn 2^, Jer 22i«, or a suffix, e. g. Gn 5*, &c., 28^-fi, 2g^^'-, 30I', 38^, 2 S 3",
Is 29".
e 2. The subject of the action represented by the infinitive is mostly
placed immediately ^ after it, either in the genitive or nominative.
The subject is in the genitive (§ 33 c) whenever it has the form of a
noun-suffix, and also when the infinitive has the termination of the
constr. st. fern. sing, (see /) ; probably also in many other cases, where
the infinitive in form and meaning is used moi'e like a substantive, and
accordingly governs like a noun. On the other hand, the subject of
the infinitive is certainly to be regarded as a nominative, when it
is separated from the infinitive by any insertion, and according to
certain indications (see g) very probably in many other instances.
/Rem, I. Examples of genitives of the suV>ject after infinitives in the
< . . .
connective form are Dt 127 ^jns niH^ DSJB'a prop, in the Lord''s hating us;
cf. 78, Gn 19I6, I K io9, Is 13", 479, Ho 3\ Am 4". The subject of the
infinitive is probably also to be regarded as genitive in such cases as Ex 17I
and there was no water DUn HFIK'Ij /or the people to drink (prop, for the drinking
of the people), and in cases like Gn 16^* ("Ijn n"|P3) ; Gn 16', Ex ig}, Nu 20^ ■•,
33^8, I K6\xp 133I, 2 Ch f, &c.
£^ 2. Examples in which the subject is separated from the infinitive by an
insertion, and hence must certainly be regarded as a nominative, are Jb 3422
?"IX vy3 Dti* "inDn? that the workers of iniquity may hide themselves there (prop, for
the hiding themselves there the workers of iniquity) ; cf. Gn 34'^, Nu 35*,
Dt 19', Ju 92, 2 S 24I3, if/ 76'", and below, i. The subject is likewise to be
regarded as a nominative, whenever the Lamedh is prefixed to the infinitive by
means of a pretonic Qames (cf. b above), e.g. 2 S 1920 i3|3~pK !]PG)n DW^
1 In Gn 2430 the subject of nX"!3 is wanting (but iyrp^3 follows) ; the
original reading waa undoubtedly inX"13, and the text is now in a state of
confusion ; verse 30a should come before verse 29 &. In Gn 192^, 252^, Ex 9I*,
1321, I S iS'*, Jer 41*, ^42* the subject, although not indicated, is easily
supplied from the context. The infinitive in such cases is best rendered in
English by a passive.
§§ ii5A-it, ii6a] In^nitive Conshnict : Participles 355
since, if the infinitive were used as a nomen regens, we should rather expect
DIIJ'? according to § 102/. That the subject of the infinitive is regarded
elsewhere also as nominative is again (see above, b) probable, since in such
forms as n^3n Dt 25'^, Is 14^, T'OH ^46', &c., the pretonic Qames is retained
without exception, whereas on the analogy of TT'Sjl Ez 24", iD"'i?n Jer 23^", &c.,
we should expect IV^Tl "1"'t3n, &c., if the infinitive were regarded as a nomen
regens. Or was the retention of the Qames (assuming the thorough correctness
of the Masoretic punctuation) rendered possible even before a following
genitive, because that vowel was characteristic of the form ? It is at all
events certain that owing to the lack of case-endings,' a distinction between
the genitival and nominatival constructions could not have been consciously-
made in the case of most infinitives, e. g. in unchangeable forms like
bbp, D^p, &c.
3. When Loth a subject and an object are connected with the //
infinitive, the rule is, that the subject should immediately follow
the infinitive, and then the object. The latter, in such a case, is
necessarily in the accusative, but the subject (as in e) may be either
in the genitive or in the nominative. The noun-sufiixes again are, of
course, to be regarded as genitives, e. g. Gn 39'* v^P '*'?''"!n,? c(S I lifted
up my voice (cf. i K 13^', and the examples, Gn 5^ &c., enumerated
above, under d), and so also substantives which follow a connective
form, Dt i^^, &c.; see above, d and/.
On the other hand, the subject appears necessarily to be in the ?■
nominative in such cases as Is 10^^ "'''9''"^^"'^^ ^^^ T?'^? as if a rod
should shake them that lift it up (for the plur. IVO^ltt cf. § 124 k), not
^''?ni? , as would be expected (see g above), if t23K' were in the genitive ;
cf. 2 S 14", Jb33''. And so probably also in other cases, as Gn 5',
13'°, Jos 14^, I K 13'', 2 K 23^", Is 32''. The subject is separated from
the infinitive by an insertion (and consequently must necessarily be in
the nominative ; see g above), e. g. in Jer 21^
Rem. Less frequently the object is placed immediately after the infinitive, K
and then the nominative of the subject, as a subsequent complement, e. g.
Is 20I Jinp ink rf:>p2 when Sargon sent him ; Gn 4^5, Jos 14", 2 S iS^^, Is ^'^*,
^ 561, Pr 25^ In Nu 24^3 the subject follows an infinitive which has a noun-
suffix in place of the object.
§ 116. The Particijjies,
Cf. Sellin (see above at the head of § 1 13), p. 6 ff., and Kahan, p. 11 ff.
1. Like the two infinitives, the participles also occupy a middle CI
place between the noun and the verb. In form they are simple nouns,
' In Arabic, where the case-endings leave no doubt as to the construction,
it is equally possible to say either qatlu Zaidin (gen. of subj.) ' Amran (ace),
literally ZaicCs killing' Amr, or qatlu'Amrin (gen. of obj.) Zaidrm (nom. of subj.),
or even el-qatlu (with article) Zaidun (nom. of subj.) 'Amran (ace. of obj.).
A a 2
356 Tlie Pa7'ts of Speech [§ii6 6-e
aad most nearly related to the adjective; consequently tbey cannot
in themselves he employed to represent definite relations of tense
or mood. On the other hand, their verbal character is shown by their
not representing, like the adjectives, a fixed and permanent quality
(or state), but one which is in some way connected with an action or
activity. The particijile active indicates a person or thing conceived
as being in the continual uninterrupted exercise of an activity. The
partici])le passive, on the other hand, indicates the person or thing in
ii state which has been brought about by external actions.
I) Rem. That the language was fully conscious of the difference between
a state implying action (or effected by external action) and mere passivity,
is seen from the fact, that participles proper cannot be formed from the
purely stative Qal, but only verbal adjectives of the form qaiel (NPD ^23, &c.)
or qCdfil (rlb2 , &c.), whereas the transitive Qal Hi'^p to hate, although it coincides
in form with the intransitive Qal (as a vei-b middle s), nevertheless forms
a participle active Npb', and participle passive N^3b' (cf. the feminine nwyK'). —
In cases where the participle proper and the verbal adjective both occur,
they are by no means synonymous. When the Assyrians are called in Is 28^1
nSK' "ijyp men of stammering lips, a character is ascribed to them which is
inseparably connected with their personality. On the other hand y i)P n?3
Jer 20'', describes those about the prophet as continually engaged in casting
ridicule upon him. Cf. also \^ 9" Cn^K') with 50^2 ('•nab').
C On the difference between the participle as expressing simple duration and
the imperfect as expressing progressive duration, cf. what has been stated
above in § 107 d. Nevertheless the participle is sometimes used — especially
in the later books, cf. e.g. Neh 6", 2 Ch 17'^ — where we should expect the
action to be divided up into its several parts, and consequently should expect
the finite verb. But the substitution of the participle for the tempus historicum,
which becomes customary in Aramaic (cf. Kautzsch, Gramm. des BiU.-Aram.,
§ 76. 2, d and e), is nevertheless quite foreign to Hebrew.
d 2. The period of time indicated by (a) a jiarticiple active, either as
an attribute or predicate, must be inferred from the particular
context. Thus riD may mean either moriens (Zc 11^), or mortuus
(so commonly; with the article OBn regularly = ^^.e dead man), or
moriturus (Dt 4^^) ; ^^3 coming, come Gn 18'^, &c., venturus i S 2^', &c. ;
7D3 falling, but also fallen, Ju 3-^, i S 5', and ready to fall (threaten-
ing ruin, Is 30^^, Am 9"). For other examples of perfect participles
see Gn 27^^, 43^* (^E'l' that was returned; cf. Ezr 6^', &c., D"'3^n which
were come again from the captivity) ; Gn 35', Ex ii^ Zc 12', -^ I37^
Pr 8®, Jb 12^ (^"IP)) and see m below. For future participles see
Gn 41^', I K I8^ Is 5% Jon I^ &c., probably also '•npl) Gn 19'*. On
\he futurum instans (esp. after i"l3n) see p below.
e (b) Of the passive participles, that of Qal (e.g. 21113 scriptus)
always corresponds to a Latin or Greek perfect participle passive,
those of the other conjugations, especially Niph'al, sometimes to
§116/ 9] IVie Participles 357
a Latin gerundive (or to an adjective in -hilis), e. g. t^'^IJ metuendits,
to he feared, -^ 76^ &c. ; 'I?'??- desiderandus {desiderahilis) Gn 3",
y]r 19", &c. ; N']33 creandus yjr 102''; l^^^, usually natus, but also (like
^?^*^ Ju i'^^) procreandus, nasciturus i K 13^, >//■ 22*^; j^'jyj terrihilis
V'Sp^; ^yn; abominable Jb 15^®; SK'ni aestimandus Is 2^; ri^5x3n
</ia< way 6e ea^ew (an animal) Lv ii"*^. In Pu'al ??'!}*? Jaudandus,
worthy to be praised -^ iS''. In Ho2)h'al, 2 S 20'^' ^^^9; 2 K 11^
DTOSn ; Is 1 2' Q«re T\T^}'0}
3. The participles active, in virtue of their partly verbal character, f
possess the power of governing like verbs, and consequently, -when '
used in the absolute state, may take after them an object either in the
accusative, or with the preposition with which the verb in question
is elsewhere usually construed, e.g. i S 18'^'' "''!'^"^^< yJA hating David;
Gn 42'^^; with the suffix of the accusative, e.g. ''Jt^'y that made me
Jb 31*' ; 13Nn 'O who seeth us ? Is 29'° (in Is 47^" 'JNT is abnormal) ;
D"!"! ruling them -^ 68^^*, sometimes also with the article, e.g. -^ 18^'
^jn^Xlpri that girdeth me (LXX 6 Kparaim- fxe) ; Dt 8"-'«, is^'\ 20',
2 S i^^ Is 9'^ (where, however, Cheyne omits the article), 63", >/'8i",
103'', Dn 11^; followed by a preposition, e. g. i K 9'^^ Dys ^"I^P tvhich
bare ride over the people; 2 K 20^ ^^ NS^ ''33n behold, I will heal thee.^
By an exhaustive examination of the statistics, Sellin (see the title at the
head of § 113), p. 40 ff., shows that the participle when construed as a verb
expresses a single and comparatively transitory act, or relates to particular
cases, historical facts, and the like, while the participle construed as a noim
(see g) indicates repeated, enduring, or commonly occurring acts, occupations,
and thoughts.
So also the verbal adjectives of the form qdtel may take an
accusative of the person or thing, if the finite verb from which they
are derived governs an accusative, e. g. Dt 34' '"l^^C -''~' ^-^9 /^^^ ^f
the spirit of wisdom ; -^ 5^ V^"] }*Qn that hath pleasure in wickedness.
As a sort of noun the participle may, however, also exercise the^
same government as a noun, being in the construct state, and followed
by the object of the action in the genitive (see § 89 a; and cf.
§ 128 x), e.g. yj/^ 5^^ ^K)^ ''?^^< that love thy name; cf. ^ 19^^'; also
when a verbal adjective, e.g. Gn 22'- and often D^npN NT one fearing
^ Such examples as N"1^3, 10113, PPntp show plainly the origin of this
gerundive use of the participle passive. A person or thing feared, desired, or
praised at all times is shown thereby to be terrible, desirable, or praiseworthy, and
therefore also to be feared, &c.
2 On the other hand, in Is. 11' as <^ waters D"'D3D D*? covering the sea, the
L • - : T-
7 serves only to introduce the object preceding the participle [cf. the Arabic
parallels cited by Driver, Tenses, § 135, 7 06s.]. Cf. Hab. 2'*.
358 The Parts of Speech [§ii6A-A:
God ; Hb 2^^; with an infinitive, y^r 127"; with a noun-suffix (which,
according to § 33 c, also represents a genitive), e. g. Gn 4" '"'I'-f'?"''?
whosoever findeth me {prop, my finder; cf. ""^V my maker) ; 12^ 'I'^^H-J'?
that bless thee, "^Ppi^P that curseth thee (but read either T?pi^'?' ^^ 'I?'???
in the preceding clause); 27^, i S 2^", Is 63''', ■<\r i8^^ In Jer 33^^
read "TIN DTl-lC'lD.i
:|T
1, Rem. To the class of objective genitives belong also specifications of place
after the participles X3 iniens and N2f^ egrediens, since the verbs NiS and Klf
in the sense of ingredi, egredi, can be directly connected with an accusative ;
e. g. Gn 23"-i8 il^y lyc' iXIl that went in at the gate of his city; La 1* ; after ''Nlf'
Gn 9^", 34^^, 46^^^, &c. — In poetic language the participle in the construct state
may be connected not only with a genitive of the object, but also with any
other specifications (especially of space) which otherwise can only be made to
depend on the verb in question by means of a preposition : cf. Is 38'*, and
frequently, ~li3~niV they that go down into the pit (the grave) ; ^ 88^ "lllp ^2DK'
that lie in the grave ; Dt 32^* (Mi 7^'') ; i K 2'', 2 K 1 1^-''-^ those that came in (or went
out) on the sabbath, Pr 2"^, i Ch 5I', &c. ; instead of the construction with ~|0
e.g. Is 592" {those who turn from transgression), Mi 2* (cf. § jzp).
I These genitives of nearer definition appear also in the form of a noun-
suffix, e. g. f iS"" "'jp^ (for >by D''»i5) that rise up against me ; cf. Ex 15^, Dt 33",
xp 446, Ex 3^2^ Is i27 HUB' her converts ; \p 536 (-uh) ; Pr 2" ri''N3-^3 all that go
nnto her ; the construction is especially bold in Is 20^ rimbfJDl n^5if"P3 all that
' '^ T T I : T V T
fight against her and her stronghold (for 'D'Pyi H vj? D''N32fn"?3) ; f 102^ even
with a participle Po'al, ypiilD they that are mad against me (?), but read perhaps
with Olshausen vPiritD who pierce me. — In Is 1'" as a terebinth nbv riv^'U fading
-: , : TVT vv
as regards its leaf, it remains doubtful whether Dpll^ is in the absolute state,
and consequently TO]} in the accusative, or whether it is to be regarded as
construct state, and npJJ as the genitive. In the latter case it would be
analogous to Pr 14^^ (see k).
h' 4. The passive participles also may either be in the absolute state,
and take the determining word in the accusative/ or may be connected
^ When, as in Jb 40", the participle with the noun-suffix ijj'yn he that made
him, also has the article (cf. § 1271), the anomaly is difficult to understand,
^since a word determined by a genitive does not admit of being determined
by the article, — No less remarkable is the use of the constr. st. of the participle
before the accusative in Jer 33^^ ^flX ''TTIK'D that minister unto me (for which
there is '•niK'P in verse 21). In Am 4'^ an accusative of the product
follows the genitive of the object, ("ID^J? "iriK' nb^J? maker of the morning into
darkness. In Jer 2''' TJD^I'D JIVS is supposed to mean at the time when he led thee ;
perhaps the perfect ('?in) should be read as in 6". In Ez 27'*, the ancient
versions }-ead ri'l|K'3 (n)riy now thou art broken, instead of the difficult
mitj': ny. in i K 20^0 read nb'y before HSni HSn
^ On the proper force of this accusative when retained in the passive coa-
I
§ii6?-2>] The Participles 359
with it in the construct state, e.g. Ju i8", i S 2'^ Ez 9^ D*^3 nnb
clothed in linen, cf. verse 3 Q"'1?'I' 5J'3?n ; (even with a suffix iri:n3 yn;?
r£n< as regards his coat 2815^^; with the participle following Ju i');
but Ez9" a^'nan ^^2) the one clothed with linen; 2 S 13^' Dnj3 '^p
rert< m respect of clothes, equivalent to with (heir clothes rent (cf.
Jer 41'); Nu 24^ Dt 25'", Is f, 33'*, Jo I^ \// 32^ (VC'Q-nb: forgiven in
respect of transgression, '1^?9" ''^^^ covered in respect of sin) ; with a
suffix to the noun, Pr 14^ "'''91^ '^'^^ ^^ ^^'""^ '* jjerverse in his u-ays.
Rem. The passive participle occurs in the construct state before a genitive t
of the cause, e.g. in Is 1'^ tTN niDIC:' hunit with fire ; cf. Gn 416, Ex 28", Dt 322* ;
before a genitive denoting the author, e. g, Gn 24^1 niiT) T]1"121 blessed of (he Lord
(but ^ 115I5 nin-'b D'^na, see § 121/); cf. is 53*, ^^'22^, Jb 14I (15", 25<j;
<
hence also with noun-suffixes (which are accordingly genitive) Pr 9'* H^XIp
her invited ones, i.e. those invited by her ; of. 7^, >p 37^'.
5. The use of the participle as predicate is very frequent in noun- 7fl
clauses (which, according to § 1 40 e, describe established facts and
states), in which the period of time intended by the description must
again (see above, d) be inferred from the context. Thus :
(a) As present, in speaking of truths which hold good at all times, e. g. Eci< 71
K3 "ini T]>n IIT one generation goeth, and another getieration cometh ; and the earth
ahideth (Dip)}) for ever ; cf. verse 7 ; also to represent incidental (continuous)
occurrences which are just happening, Gn 3^, 16^ (/ am fleeing) ; 32"^, Ex 9",
1 S 16'', 23^, 2 K 7', Is i' ; when the subject is introduced by the emphatic
demonstrative nHH behold! (§ 1000 and § 105 b), e.g. Gn 161^ mn ^3n behold,
thou art with child, &c, ; 27*2 ; frequently also in circumstantial clauses (con-
nected by Wdw), cf. § 141 e, e.g. Gn 15^, &c.
(&) To represent past actions or states, sometimes in independent noun- O
clauses, e. g. Ex 20^* npipHTlN D"'Ni Dyrrbs"! and all the people saw the thunder-
ings,&c.; iKi"; in negative statements, e.g. Gn 39*^"; sometimes in relative
clauses, e. g. Gn 39^^, Dt 3* (cf. also the frequent combination of the participle
with the article as the equivalent of a relative clause, e.g. Gn 321" "l'?i<'^
tchich saidst ; 1 2'', 16^', 35'-^, 36", 48'*, 2 S 15'^ &c.) ; sometimes again (see m)
in circumstantial clauses, especially those representing actions or states which
occurred simultaneously with other past actions, &c., e.g. Gn 19' and the two
angels came to Sodom 3{J'' Dvl and (i.e. while) Lot sat, &c. ; iS^-^-i^-^^, 25^6, Ju 138,
2 Ch 22"; also with the subject introduced by 11311 37'', 41'^. (On Tlp'n with
a following adjective or participle to express an action constantly or occasion-
ally recurring, cf. § 113M.)
(c) To announce future actions or events, e. g. I K 2^, 2 K 4'® at this season p
wlien the time cometh round, |3 np5n JIK tlu)U shall embrace a son ; so after a
specification of time, Gn 7^, 15'*, 17'^, ig^^, H-ag 2^ (but in Is 23"*, where, after
r\T\\ we should rather expect a perfect consecutive, it is better to explain
struction cf. below, § 117 cc, &c., and § 121c, d. So also Neh 4''' is to bo
understood, and the builders were "I'jnO'py D^I.IDX i3^n tJ'"'N girded every one
with his sword on his side, and building.
360 The Parts of Speech [§1169-?
nn?{J'!l'!, with Qimhi, as the 3rd sing. fern, of the perfect; on the form, cf.
§ 44/) ; or in relative clauses, Gn 41^5, Is 5" what I am doing, i.e. am in the act
of doing; in a deliberative question, Gn 37^"; but especially often when the
subject is introduced by nsri (especially also if the subject be attached as
a suffix to nsn as ''3Jn '^l^^ &c.), if it is intended to announce the event as
imminent, or at least near at hand (and sure to happen), when it is called
futurum instans, e.g. Gn6i'', 15*, 20', 24'^^-, 48'^^, 50^, Ex 3*^, 8^^, 9^, 34'", Jos 2'*,
Ju 7", 9^3, I S 3", 2 K f, Is 3*, f*, 17', Jer 30^", Ze 2^^^ 3*; with a participle
passive, 2 S 20^^^ : cf. also § 112 t.
Q Rem. i. As the above examples show, a noun-clause with a participle as
predicate may have for its subject either a substantive or a personal pronoun ;
in both cases the participle, especially if there be a certain emphasis upon it,
may precede the subject. Also in noun-clauses introduced by nSH the subject
may be either a substantive, or (e. g. Gn 37'') a separate personal pronoun, or
a suffix attached to n3n. In the same way, the subject may also be introduced
by B']'_ {est, see the Lexicon) with a suffix, and in negative sentences by px
{non est) with a suffix, e. g. Ju 6^^ ytJ'iD ^5J'''~DX if thou wilt save ; Gn 43'
nWo "irN-DN if thou wilt not send ; i S 19".— In' such cases as Is 14" H'^IDSn ^1^
the stretched out hand is his, rT'lDSH is not, like n*^D3 in g^^-'^^, &c., the predicate
(in which case the participle could not take the article), but the subject ;
cf. Gn 2", 4512, Is 669, Ez 20=9, Zc 7* (cf. § 126 k), whore the participle with
the article likewise refers to the present, also Nu 7^, Dt 3^1, 4^, &c., i S 4^',
where it refers to the past. In i K 12^ and 21I1 even in relative clauses
after T^X.
f 2. To give express emphasis to an action continuing in the past, the perfect
riTl in the corresponding person is sometimes added to the participle, and
similarly the imperfect n'TI'' (or the jussive ^rT*, or the imperfect consecutive)
is used to emphasize an action continuing in the future, e.g. Jb 1^^ VH Ip^in
nitJ'in the oxen (cows) were plowing; Gn 37*, 39^2, Ex 3I, Dt 9^*, Ju 1'', i S 2",
283^; the same occurs with a passive participle, e. g. Jos 5^, Zc 3' ; niH^
with a participle is found e. g. in Is 2^; the jussive in Gn 1®, if/ 109^2 ^i and
^n"'1 with a participle in Ju 16^1, Neh 1*.
g 3. The personal pronoun which would be expected as the subject of a participial
clause is frequently omitted, or at least (as elsewhere in noun-clauses, cf.
Is 26^, ip 16^, Jb 9^2^ the pronoun of the 3rd pers. Kin, e.g. Gn 24'*', 37^^, 38",
41I, I S 10", 15^2, Is 29* (the participle always after nSH) ; cf., moreover,
Gn 32', Dt 333, 1 S 1725, 20I, Is 335, 40", If/ 2229, 336^ ,.^20^ Jb'V2".i9ff., 252, 267.—
N*n is omitted in Lv iS"* ; H^n in Is 32^2^ Ez 8", Neh 9^ ; in a relative clause,
Gn 3922, Is 24^ — The personal pronoun of the 2nd pers. masc. (HnX) is omitted
in Hb 2^0 ; the 2nd fem. (flN) in Gn 20'* (where, however, for the participle
nriDil the 2nd fem. perf. rinDbl ^^ ^^ ^® read) ; the pronoun of the ist sing,
in Hb 1^ (?), Zc 9", Mai 2'* ;' the ■2nd plur. (Dm) i S 22* (if the text be right),
6', Ez I37(?). But these passages are all more or less doubtful.
t Of a different kind are the cases in which some undefined subject is to be
supplied with the participle; e.g. Is 21" N"lp v*? ^^^^^ '^ o**^ calling unto me
( = one calleth ; §144^); cf. Is 30^*, 33*. — So with participles in the plur.,
e.g. Ex 5^6 (OntpS sc. the taskmasters) ; Jer 38'^ (in 33^ the text is corrupt),
Ez 13'' (?), 36'^, 37" (equivalent to sunt qui dicant).
' A jussive is practically to be supplied also in the formulae of blessing and
cureing, T]^13 blessed be . . . Gn 926, &c. ; IIIX cursed art thou . . . 3'*, &c.
§ii6«-x] The Participles 361
4. We must mention as a special class those noun-clauses which occur at U
the beginning of a period, and are intended to lay stress upon the fact that
the first action still continues on the occurrence of the second (always intro-
duced by 1) ; e. g. Jb i^^ r. j^^ nfl ns^D HI nij? he was yet speaking, and { = when)
another came, &c.^ ; cf. Gn 29^, 1 S 9"-"', ao'*, i K 141^ she was entering the threshold
of the house, when the child died ; 2 K 2'», 4^, Dn 9"-'» ^- ; also in Ju I9^'^ i S 9^*, 1 7''*^
I K i*^, Jb i'^''-, in all which passages the apodosis is introduced by n3ni. —
On the other hand, in i K i'* the noun-clause itself is introduced by nSH (as
in verse 22 by Hiini), and denotes an action only just impending.^ Finally)
when the whole sentence is introduced by means of '•ilM (cf. § in g), and the
apodosis by Hlini, Gn42S5, 2 K 2^1, 1321 ; without nSH in the apodosis, i S 7",
2K 19" (Is 3 J 38)'.
Participles active, which are used in the sense of the perfect participle, and V
also participles passive, in accordance with their meaning, express in such
noun- clauses a state still continuing on the occurrence of the principal action,
e. g. Gn 38^5 nn^K' N"'n'! nX^ilO Nin she was being brought forth, when she sent,
&c. ; cf. Gn 50K' [See 'further in Driver, Tenses, §§ 166-169.]
5. Different from the examples treated in u and v are the instances in W
which a participle (either alone or as the attribute of a noun) stands at the
beginning of the sentence as a casus pendens (or as the subject of a compound
noun-clause, see § 143 c) to indicate a condition, the contingent occurrence of
which involves a further consequence ; e.g. Gn 9^ iJDiJ D■^^?^ ^1^\} ^"^ ^!?^
'iJQtJJ"' shedding man's blood, i. e. if any one sheddeth man's blood, &?/ man shall
his^ blood be shed; Ex2i'2, ,/, 75*, Pri?", Jb 41" ; so especially if "73 every
precedes the participle, Gn 415, 1 S 3" (2 K ai^^^), 2 S 5^ {whosoever smiteth),
1 Ch n6. The apodosis is very often introduced by ) {waw apodosis), e.g.
Ex 12^5 (with a following perfect consecutive), Nu ss^" ; i S 2" nnt B'''8<"?3
inbn *iy3 N21 n^l when any man qff'ered sacrifice, the priest's servant came, &c. ;
2 S I4I0 (participle with article); 22" (where, however, the text is to be
emended in accordance with ip ib") ; 2 S 23^ '■, Pr 232^ Km. ; 299.— As in the
instances discussed under u, such sentences are sometimes preceded by ''1}'^},
cf. I S 10", nil, 2 S 2^5 N2n"?3 "TT'I and it came to pass, that as many as came,
&c, [or by r^^T\), frequentative, Ju i930]._On the other hand, n"5|K'3ni Dn 8"
is a mere catchword (equivalent to and as for that which was broken) to call to
mind the contents of verse 8. ,
6. On the use of the participle after the infinitive absolute T)vn cf. § 113 m.
7. Almost as a rule the participial construction beginning a sentence (like X
the infinitival constructions according to § 114 r) is continued by means of
a finite verb with or without 1, before which the English construction
requires us to supply the relative pronoun implied in the participle ; thus,
1 The independent noun-clause here lays stress upon the simultaneous
occurrence (and consequently the overlapping) of the events far more forcibly
than could be done by a subordinate expression of time (as e. g. i"13*13 ^H^D-
In English it may be represented by scarcely had he finished speaking when. . . .
As the above examples show, the apodosis also frequently consists of a noun-
clause.
2 At the same time the preceding niy still shows that what is announced
is not merely a future event, but a future event contemporaneous with some-
thing else ; the case thus entirely differs from the examples given in § n2 <,
where npri refers to the following participle, while here it belongs properly
to the apodosis, before which it is therefore generally placed ; see the
examples.
3^2 The Parts of Speech [§117 a
continued by means of a perfect, Is 14I'' DIH inyi "131^3 i?nn Db* that made
</ie woj-W as a wilderness, and overthrew the cities thereof^; 43'', Ez 22', if I36i3ff.^
Pr 2" ; by a perfect without Waw, Gn 49" ; by a simple imperfect (as the
modus rei repetitae in the present"), Is 5^3^ 46^, Pr 78, Jb 12""^-, 24^1 ; by an
imperfect without Wdw, e. g. i S 2*, Is 5*, Pr 2'*, 19^6 ; by an imperfect con-
secutive, Gn 2733, 358^ I s 26, Jer 131" (after several participles) , if, i8»*, i36i<"-
C. The Goveenment of the Vekb.
§ 117. The Direct Subordination of the Noun to the Verb
as Accusative of the Object. The Double Accusative.
L. Kaila, Zur Syntax des in verbaler Ahhangigkeil stehenden Nomens im alttest.
Hebr., Helsingfors-, 1906.
(I 1. The simplest way in wliich a noun is subordinated to a verbal
form is by the addition of an accusative of the object to a transitive
verb.^ In the absence of case-endings,^ this accusative can now be
recognized only from the context, or by the particle "riX ^ns, before
suffixes also HK, DMiy prefixed to it. The use of this nota accusativi
^ On the parallelism between the external and internal members, which
appears here and in many other examples of this kind, see the note on § 114 r,
■■' The verb in question may either have been originally transitive, or only
have become transitive by a modification of its original meaning. Thus the
vocalization shows that f^DH (to have pleasure, usually with 2) to desire, N^D {to
he full of something, also transitive) to fill, were originally intransitive. Cf.
also such cases as nD3 to weep (generally with "py "pX or 7), but also to bewail
with an accusative ; D^^ to dwell (usually with 3), but also to inhabit with an
accusative (cf. further, under m). — The examples are different in which verbs
of motion such as KIB inirare, also aggredi, Sif^ egredi (cf. ^ 116 h above), 3^B'
redire, Is 52', take an accusative of the aim of the motion, while Ni3 according
to the Old Semitic usage, even takes an accusative of the person (at least
in poetry, equivalent to ~bx NIS in prose).
' On ti;aces of these endings, especially the remains of a former accusative
ending in a, cf. § 90 c.
* "nS (toneless owing to the following Maqqeph), and DK (with a tone-long
e, "HS only in Jb4i''^), nx or HIN before the liglit suffixes (on all these forms
cf. § 103 6 : the underlying form dth was obscured in Hebrew to 6th, shortened
to dth before suffixes beginning with a consonant and then modified to "DS^
whence finally the secondary form DK with the tone), Phoenician D^X i. e.
probably iyydth (for the Phoenician form, cf. G. Hoffmann, Einige phonik.
Inschriften, Gftttingen, 1889, p. 39 f.), Punic yth or (according to Euting) pro-
nounced even as a mere prefixed t, Arabic, before suffixes, Hyyd, Aram. H^ , H^.
It was no doubt originally a substantive, meaning essence, substance, self (\\V.q
the Syriac ydth ; on the other hand, any connexion with the Hebrew DiX,
Syriac \ltd, Arabic 'uyat, a sign, must, with NOldeke, ZDMG. xl. 738, be rejected),
but now united in the construct state with a following noun or suffix stands
for the pronoun ipse, avros. In common use, however (cf. Wilson, 'The
particle DX in Hebrew,' Hebraica, vi. 2, 3, and the precise statistics of the use
§ u7 6, c] Dii'ect Suhoi^dination of the Noun, etc. 363
is, however, somewhat rare in poetry, and even in prose it is not
invariably necessary but is restricted to those cases in which the
accusative of the object is more closely determined by being a proper
name, or by having the nrticle, or by a following determinate genitive
(hence also by the suffixes), or in some other way (see below, c), e. g.
Gn 4^ and she bare Tir"? Cain ; 6'°, i' God created Xl^r\ DSI D^OE^n nX
the heaven and the earth (but 2^ D^OBn )>nN); i^'" and God made ri^n-nx
r^.Nn the least of tlie earth ; 2^\
Rem. I. The rare occurrence of the nota accusativi in poetic stj'Ie (e.g. it U
never occurs in Ex 15^^*, Dt 32, Ju 5, i S 2, &c., though it is frequent in the
late Psalms) may be explained from the fact that in this as in other respects
(cf. § 2 ?) poetry represents a somewhat more archaic stage of the language
than prose. The need of some external means of indicating the accusative
could only have been felt after the case-endings had become wholly extinct.
Even then the ON would probably have been used at first to indicate only
an object placed before the verb (when it followed, it was already suflSciently
characterized by its position as depending on the verb), or proper names.^
Finally, however, the nota accusativi became so customary everywhere in prose,
that even the pronominal object was expressed rather by HN with suffixes
than by verbal suffixes, even when none of the reasons mentioned under e
can be assigned for it; cf. Giesebrecht in ZAW. 1881, p. 258 if., and the
statistics of H. Petri, cited above at the head of § 58. Such examples as
D\"]^K iriN r)\i -IK'K bb3 Gn622 in the Priestly Code, beside Hin; ^niV"1^"X i'bS
7^ in the Jahvist, are especially instructive.
2. As accusatives determined in other ways, we have in the first place to C
consider the collectives introduced by ?3 entirety, without a following article
or determinate genitive, inasmuch as the meaning of 73 includes a deter-
minative sense, cf. e. g. Gn i^i-so^ 521^ dj 2^*, 2 K 25'. /3"nX is used absolutely
in Gn 9^, cf. 39^3 ; similarly, ^J3 is determinate of itself, since it always denotes
a person, hence "'D"nK quern? e. g. Is 6*, 37^^, &c., but never HlDTlS quid? So
also the relative "IJJ'N in the sense of eum qui or quern, &c.. e. g. i S iC, or id
quod, Gn 9**, &c. Cf. also such examples as Jos 2'", i S 24^^, where "IJJ'X nX
is equivalent to the circumstance, that, &c. — Elsewhere DN stands before nouns
which are determinate in sense, although the ai-ticle is omitted, which
according to § 1 26 h is very frequently the case in poetic or otherwise elevated
style ; thus Lv 26®, Jos 24^*-^^, IS41'' (to distinguish the object from the subject) ;
5c* (with the first of two accusatives, also for the sake of clearness) ; Ez 1^^°,
43^**, Pr J^^^ (where the Cp^'^llf are to be regarded as a distinct class) ; Jb 13^^
of HN on p. 140 S.), it has so little force (like the oblique cases avrov, avrw,
alrov, sometimes also ipsius, ipsum, and the Germ, desselhen, &c.) that it merely
serves to introduce a determinate object ; D"')plS'n DK prop, avrov rbv ovpaySv
(cf. avTTjv XpvarjtSa, Iliad i. 143) is no stronger than the simple D"'DB'n tov
ovpavov. Cf., further, P. Haupt on Pr i8'* in his Rainbow Bible, and also in
the Notes on Esther, p. 191.
^ Thus, in Dt 33, nx occurs only in verse 9 (twice, with an object preceding
the verb), in Gn 49 in the blessing of Jacob only in verse 15 with a co-ordinate
second object (consequently farther removed from the verb). Of the thirteen
instances of DK in the Mesa' inscription, seven stand directly and four
indirectly before proper names.
364 The Parts of Speech {}ii^d-g
(unless, with Beer and others, we read DNI for TlNl'!) ; also Ec 7'' may be
a quotation of an ancient maxim.
d On tlie other hand nX occurs very seldom in prose before a noun actually
or apparently undetermined. In i S 24* 5)33 is more closely defined by
means of the following relative clause ; in 2 S 4I1 p'''^^ {J'''X refers to Ishbo-
sheth (as if it were him, who was an innocent man) ; in i K 6^^ ilKK D^'I^'V
refers to the particular twenty cubits. In Ex 21^8 (otherwise in verse 29)
perhaps the "riN is used in order to avoid the combination B'^X ~\S^ (as in
Nu 21^ to avoid the cacophony B'''X ^Uir\ Tj^J ?) ; in Lv?^ and 20I0 the accusa-
tives are at any rate defined by the context. — In Nu 16^5 QpiD inXTlK
probably means even a single one (and then ipso facto a definite one) of them, as also
in I S 9^ Dnj)3nO nnXTiK may refer to some definite one of the men-servants.
In Gn 2i20 we should read T\^'2'2T\ y^K'TlNl with the Samaritan, since the
seven lambs have been already mentioned ; in Ex 2^ translate with Meyer,
Die Israeliten, p. 79, ""IpTllTlSI the daughter of Levi ; in Ex 28® read DHB'n with
the Samaritan ; in Lv 20" HE'X'nX; is probably a scribal error due to
niSN-nN"! ; in I S 2620 read IK'S? with the LXX for im B^VIg ; in 2 S 5=* read
mVJfn as in 1 Ch i^^^; in 2 S 151® the "DK is incorrectly inserted from 20^,
where it refers to the women already mentioned ; in 2 S iS^^ read n^jinsn,
or omit both "HS and IB'X with the LXX and Lucian ; in i K 1 2*1 omit "JIK ;
in 2 K 2320 probably DnilOXy"nS; is to be read ; in 2 K 25' the text is corrupt.
In Ez i6'2 D^ITTIX might refer to the strangers in question ; but see Smend on
the passage.
e 3. The pronominal object must be represented by nS with a suffix (instead
of a verbal suffix), when (a) it precedes the verb, e.g. Nu 22'' ■'JjlJ"}'^ i^?'!'^
*ri\">nn riniSI I had slain thee and saved her alive ; Gn 7^, Lv 22^, i S 8'', Is 43'^'',
57", ier 41^-22^ 719 ; (6) when a suffix is already attached to the verb, and as
a rule when a second accusative with \ follows, e.g. 2 S 15^^ ^DN ^3K"ini and
he will show me it ; Ex 17' ""jaTlKI ^nX ri*tDn|) to kill us and our children ; Nu 16^^
1 S 5", 2 S 141s (but cf. also Dt Vi«, is^^, &c!, and Driver on i S 51°) ; (c) after
an infinitive absolute, see above § 113a note; (d) after an infinitive con-
struct, when it is immediately followed by the subject, e.g. Gn 41^', or when
the combination of a suffix with the infinitive might lead to a misunder-
standing, e.g. Gn 4I5 iriN"ni3n "•rip^b lest one should smite him, &c., where
inisn ^Jyiplip might also mean lest he should smite.
/4. The pronominal object is very frequently omitted, when it can be easily
supplied from the context ; so especially the neuter accusative referring to
something previously mentioned (the English it) after verba sentiendi (yOB') and
dicendij.e.g. Gn 9*2, &c., '^P\ and he told (it) ; also after jri3 to give, Gn 18'', 24",
&c., nj5^ to take, K^nn to bring, D"''B' to lay, Gn 923, &c., KSD to find, Gn si'^, &c.
A personal object is omitted, e. g. in Gn 12^^, 24^1 (after r\\p. — The omission
of the plural object, is remarkable, because it leaves an opportunity for
a misunderstanding, in Gn 37" D^"))pk "'JjiypB' ^ I heard them saying ; perhaps,
however, we should read D^riyOK' with the Samaritan.
^ 5. In common formulae the substantival object is also sometimes omitted
^ According to the ordinary rules of syntax (cf. § 116 1) we should translate,
J hedrd men who said, &c.
§ 117 ^-'^1 Direct Subordination of the Noun, etc. 365
(an elliptical expression) ; thus e.g. ni3 i S 20'^, &c. (see the Lexicon) stands
for TV)!! TTQ like the English to close (sc. a bargain) with any one ; "ltD3 to keep
(sc. f)X anger) equivalent to to be resentful, \fj 103', &c. ; so also 1DB' Jer 3^
(beside "ItOJ) ; Nb'3 for ^ip Nt^i to lift vp the voice, Is 3'' ; b Kb'3 for b 'AV N'Ca
~T TT 'tt ,:tt :'ttt
to take aivay any one^s sin (to forgive), Gn iS^*-^, Is 2^ ; TV^ to put forth (sc. T"
the hand) equivalent to to reach after something, 2 S 6^, ^t 18".
6. Verba sentiendi may take a second object, generally in the form of a parti- h
ciple or adjective and necessarily indeterminate, to define more exactly the
action or state in which the object is perceived, e.g. Nu iii" ilK'D VQp^
nD3 Dyn~nX and Moses heard the people weeping; Gn 7^ p"''^X '•H^XI fjnX thee have
I seen righteous. Frequently, however, the second object is expressed by
a separate clause. This is especially frequent with nST to see, e. g. Gn 1* and
God saw the light, that it was good; Gn 6^, 12'^*, 1310, 49IS, Ex 2*, ip 25'^, Pr 23",
Jb 22'2, Ec 224, §17 ; go with VT to know, Ex 3222, 2 S f^, if (with two objects) ;
I K 5".
7. In certain instances DS serves apparently to introduce or to emphasize t
a nominative. This cannot be regarded as a reappearance of the original
substantival meaning of the D^, since all unquestionable examples of the
kind belong to the later Books of the Old Testament. They are rather (apart
from textual errors or other explanations) cases of virtual dependence on an
implied verhum regens understood. The constant use of DX to indicate a clause
governed by the verb, necessarily led at length to the use of flS generally as
a defining particle irrespective of a governing verb. So in the Hebrew of the
Mishna^ (see above, § 3 a) iriN and rlTlX are prefixed even to a nominative
without any special emphasis.
Naturally the above does not apply to any of the places in w-hich HN is not fc
the nota accusativi, but a preposition (on DN with, cf. § 1036), e.g. Is 571^,
I S 172^ (Zli'^inTlXI and that, with a bear; "DK here, however, has probably
been interpolated from verse 36, where it is wanting) ; nor the places in
which the accusative is subordinate to a passive (according to § 121 c) or to
a verb of wanting as in Jos 22" and Neh 9^^, see below, s. In Ez 43^'' 3)20
about governs like a verb, being followed by PiniN.
Other cases are clearly due to attraction to a following relative pronoun in /
the accusative (Ez 1422, Zc 8"; but Hag 2^", to DH^DD, must be omitted,
with the LXX, as a later addition), or the accusative depends on a verbal
idea, virtually contained in what has gone before, and consequently present
to the speaker's mind as governing the accusative. Thus Nu 3*6 (tj^e verbal
idea contained in niDtJ'JDI verse 25 is they had to take charge of) ; in Jos 1711
? *n''1 implies it was given up or they gave him ; i S 26^^ see where is equivalent
to search note for ; in 2 S ii^s ■]^3"'y3 y"l^~bN is used in the sense of noli aegre
ferre 2 ; Jer 36^^ and he had the brazier before him ; in Ec 4' a verb like I esteem
is mentally supplied before "^K'N HX. On Jos 22^'', Neh 9*2, see below, aa. —
Aposiopesis occurs in Dt i i2/or not your children (do I mean) ; still more boldly
in Zc f, where either Dri^O^ or lyOK'n {V2^VJ^) is to be supplied.
Setting aside a few undoubtedly corrupt passages^ there still remain the fU
1 Cf. Weiss, r\:^r::in ]\\^b OSB'n (Vienna, 1867), p. 112.
2 So also in I S 20^' the Qal (3D^^) is, with Wellhausen, to be read instead
of the Hiph'il.
' Thus I S 26^^, where ''XI is to be read for DNl ; i K ii*", where at present
the predicate of the relative clause is wanting ; in 2 K 6^ the DN is probabJy
366 The Parts of Speech [\ii',n-p
following examples, in which "flX in the later Hebrew manner (almost in
the sense of the Latin quod atlinet ad) introduces a noun with more or less
emphasis, Nu 3« s^", 358, Ju ao^-^s, Ez 1721, 2oi«, 3510, 44^, Neh g^^-^*, Dn 913,
2 Ch 31''^. — In Ez 47""^^ (cf. also 43'') it is simplest to emend nXT for ~DH^
according to verse 20. However, even the LXX, who have ravra only in
verse 18, can hardly have known any other reading than DN ; consequently
in all these passages JlX must be regarded as virtually dependent on some
governing word, such as ecce (LXX 43^ tuipaKas), and 47''"'^- as equivalent to
thou Shalt have as a border, &c.
fl 8. Another solecism of the later period is finally the introduction of the
object by the preposition p (prop, in relation to, in the direction of), as sometimes
in Ethiopic^ and very commonly in Aramaic.'^ Less remarkable is this
looser connexion of the object with a participle, as with ?DN La 4^, f)DN
Nu io25, Fii5T ^ 145I* (but ef. 1468), "TVi Nu 25", m^T} and HClK' Jb \2^ ;
before the participle Is 11®. — To introduce an object preceding the finite verb
^ is employed in Jb 5^ (cf. also Dn ii^'); also after 3nN Lv i9'8" ; !l''"lNn
'\p i2<f; ^nnn Ezr 82<, 2 Ch 251"; fnn Jb 9"; •!]13 1 Ch 2920 (immediately
before with an accusative) ; rhvT} i Ch s^s ; ^"T^^ Ezr62', i Ch 22", 2 Ch 17";
n^nn Gn4c;'', where, however, readHDvES with the LXX for niivS/ and take
Tv:r.,. t^ ' f 1 T " :
DD? as a dativus commodi ; ??n i Ch 16^^, 2 Ch 5^^ ; J^H 2 S 3^", ^ 135" (verse 10
with accusative), 136^^'- ; B'^PI {to bind up) Is 61^ (Ez 34* before the verb) ; JJT
ip 696 ; n23 ^ 869 . njpb Jer 40^, 2 Ch 23I ; "il^^Di) and HK-'O i Ch 2922 ; ^JriJ
2 Ch 2815; !])0D ip 145'*; 3]^ i Ch iG^^; n^JJ.'?. ^^ 26'; nri3 ^ ii6i«; 5)n-1
Jb 1928; p'<'^:ir\ Is 53" ; Ipb' 2 Ch 2412 (previously accusatives) ; D''b' i S 22''
(but probably D3?3") is to be read); 3^^n (in the connexion^p "I2'1 ^^E'n)
2 Ch io« (but verse 9 and i K I29with an accusative) ; DU^ Nu 32'^, i S 23'";
n"'E' >p 73" ; n^B' Ezr 8i«, 2 Ch 2^2, 177; ipB' i Ch 29", 2 Ch 5".
O 9. Sometimes the verb, on which an accusative of the object really depends,
is contained only in sense in the verb wliich apparently governs, e.g. Is I4"
nn^3 nnS'N? V"1*DX Ms prisoners he let not loose nor sent them back to tlieir
T . ,T - T T . -; ^
home. On this constructio praegnans in general, see § 1 19^;
p 2, With the proper accusatives of the object may also be classed
what is called the internal or absolute object (also named schema etymo-
logicum ov figura etymologica), i.e. the addition of an object in the form
derived from a text which read the Hiph'il instead of bD3. In Jer 23'^
instead of the artificial explanation what a burden (is, do ye ask ?) we should
read with the LXX and Vulg. NB'13ri CriK \je are the burden. In Ez 1022
DniNI Dn''X")10 is unintelligible ; in 3719 read with Hitzig "^S for nX ; in
Hag 2" for D^DN read with the LXX DanjJ' [or DSrSI ; for the i)fcjl cf. 2 K 6",
Jer 15I, Ez 369].
'^ Dillmann, Grammatik der athiopischen Sprache, p. 349.
^ With regard to Biblical Aramaic, see Kautzsch's Grammatik des Bibl.-Aram.,
p. 151 f. In other ways, also, a tendency may be observed in later Hebrew
to make use of the looser connexion by means of prepositions instead of the
closer subordination of the noun in the accusative.
§117 q-s'] Direct Subordination of the Noun, etc. 367
<
of a noun derived from the same stem,' e.g. >//• 14® "ID? '^'^U^ tltey feared
a fear (i.e. they were in great fear), Pr 15^''; alpo with the object
preceding, e.g. La i' 0.2^^"'^ "^^PP ^'P- Jerusalem hath sinned a sin;
with a double accusative (see below, cc), e.g. i K i'^ Hi*); N3 ^^'^J^ let
me, I pray thee, yive thee counsel', i K i".''
Rem. (a) Strictly speaking the only cases of this kind are those in which (i
the verbal idea is supplemented by means of an indeterminate substantive (see
the examples above). Such a substantive, except in the case of the addition
of the internal object to denominative verbs (see below), is, like the infinitive
absolute, never altogether witliout force, but rather serves like it to strengthen
the verbal idea. This strengthening is implied in the indeterminateness of
the internal object, analogous to such exclamations as, this was a nian!^
Hence it is intelligible that some intensifying attribute is very frequently (as
in Greek usually) added to the internal object, e.g. Gn 2f* nS"!? H^VV PVV.\
nXD"Ty md he cried (with) an exceeding great and bitter cry ; cf. the Greek
voaeiv vdaov KaKTjv, ixapT)aav xofoif lityakijv (Matt. 2^°) ; magnam pugnare pugnam ,
tutiorem vitam vitere, &c.
Examples of an internal object a/"/er the verb, and without further addition,
are Ex 22^, 2 S 12I6, Is 2422, 352, 42", Ez 2515, 26i-\ 2735, Mic 4^, Zc i^, Pr2i26;
with an intensifying attribute, Gn 27'^, Ex 32^^ Ju 15', 2 S 13^^, i K 1^" (cf.
Jon 4«, I Ch 299) ; Is 21', 45!'', Jon I'o, Zc i", S^", Dn 1 1^ ; along with an object
proper the internal object occurs with an attribute in Gn 12I'', 2 S 13^^ ; cf.
also Is 146, Jon 4^. — An internal object without an attribute before the verb :
Is 24^8, Jer 46^, Hb 3^, Jb 27^2 ; with an attribute before the verb : Jer 141'', Zc 1^'
(cf. also Gn 30^, Jer 22'^ 30", ^i- 139^2). Instead of the substantive which
would naturally be expected, another of kindred meaning is used in Zc 8^.
(b) Only in a wider sense can the schema etijmologicum be made to include ?*
cases in which the denominative verb is used in connexion with the noun
from which it is derived, e. g. Gn 1", 9", ii^, 37'', Ez iS^, jp 1448, probably also
Mi 2*, or where this substantive, made determinate in some way, follows
its verb, e.g. Gn 30", Nu 25", 2K413, 13^^, 13451'', La 3^8, * and, determinate
at least in sense, Jer 22I8 ; or precedes it, as in 2 K 2^*', Is 8'^^, 62^, Zc 3' ; cf.
also Ex 39. In both cases the substantive is used, without any special
emphasis, merely for clearness or as a more convenient way of connecting
the verb with other members of the sentence.
3. Verbs which denote speaking {crying out, weeping), or any s
external act, frequently take a direct accusative of the organ or means
by which the action is performed. In this case, however, the accusa-
tive must be more closely determined by an attributive adjective or
a noun in the genitive. This fact shows the close relation between
these accusatives and the internal objects treated under j^>, which also,
1 On a kindred use of the infinitive absolute as an internal object, see above,
§ 113 w.
2 Cf. &ov\ai ^ovXivuv, Iliad x. 147.
* The Arab grammarians assign to the indeterminate cases generally an
intensive sense in many instances ; hence the commentators on the Qoran
usually explain such cases by adding and what . . . .' see § I2j 6.
* Also in \t 13* lest I sleep the sleep of death, JlljOn is only used pregnantly
for niisn n3t^' (cf. Jcr 513'), as nipnV is 33^5 for nipny T1"1T. On the similar
use of D^pn Tipn in ^ 15*, see § 118 n.
368 The Parts of Speech [§ 117 ^-»
according to q, mostly take an intensifying attribute. On the other
hand, they must not be regarded as adverbial (instrumental) accusa-
tives, nor are they to be classed with the second (neuter) subjects
treated below in § 144 Z.
t Examples of the accusative following the verb are 7il2"?ip pV^XI and I
cried a loud voice, i.e. with a loud voice, Ez 1 1^', 2 S 15^^ (after the proper object,
Dt i}^, I K 8^') ; \f/ 109* they have spoken unto me "^p^Jf pK'? a tongue of deceit, i. e.
with a lying tongue ; Pr 10* he becometh poor n'ttV^jD rib's? dealing a slack
hand, i. e. who dealeth with a slack hand ; cf. the German erne schone Stimme
singen, to sing a fine voice, eine tiichtige Klinge schlagen, to smite a trusty sword,
Schlittschuhe lau/en, to run skates (i. e. to skate), and our to write a good hand,
to play ball, &c. — Examples of the accusative preceding are ''3"?j)n'' niJ3"l '•riDB'
my mouth shall praise with joyful lips, if/ 63^ ; cf. ^ 1 2^, where a casus instrumenti
with 3 follows the accusative.
U 4. Many verbs originally intransitive (sometimes even in form ; see
a, note 2) may be used also as transitives, in consequence of a certain
modification of their original meaning, which has gradually become
established by usage; cf. e.g. 3^") to strive, but also with an accusative
causam alicuius agere (so even in Is 1^', &c.; elsewhere with p of the
person for whom one strives) ; bb^ absolutely to be able, with an
accusative to jyrevail over any one ; |*??0 to be inclined and HXT to have
2)leasure (usually with 3), with an accusative to wish for some one or
something ; ^pB' cubare, then in the sense of concumbere, originally
joined with "Oy cum, but quite early also with the accusative, equiva-
lent to comj)rimere (feminam), &c. So in 2 S i3'''j &c., unless in all
or some of the passages the preposition riX is intended, e. g. i^^i^i for
nriN; in the earlier passages "QP is the more usual.
V Rem. I. It is certainly difficult to decide whether some verbs, which were
afterwards xised absolutely or joined with prepositions, were not nevertheless
originally transitive, and consequently it is only the supposed original meaning,
usually assigned to them in English, which causes them to appear intransi-
tive.^ In that case there is of course no syntactical peculiarity to be considered,
and a list of such verbs would at the most be requisite only for practical
purposes. Moreover, it is also possible that certain verbs were originally in
use at the same time both as transitive and intransitive, e. g. perhaps ]^2?
to be clothed along with K'3? to put on (a garment). Finally the analogy of
certain transitives in constant use may have led to intransitives of kindred
meaning being also united directly with the accusative, so that, in other
words, whole classes of verbs came to be regarded in a particular aspect as
transitives. See below, y.
^ Thus e.g. n3y to reply to {afxii^faOai riva), to answer any one ; rmf to command
T T t * ^ '
(iubere aliquem) ; "IDt to remember ; Hip (also with p) to wait for any one (to
expect any one) ; ijj'a to bring glad tidings to any one (see the Lexicon) ; PJKJ
and C1S3 to commit adultery (adulterare matronam) ; ^3y to serve (colore) ; 3iy
to become surety for . . . , and many others.
§ iiyto-^] IHrect Subordination of the Noun, etc. 369
2. The modification of the original meaning becomes especially evident XV
when even reflexive conjugations {Niph'ai, Hithpa'el, &c.) take an accusative
(cf. § 67, note 2); e.g. N33 to prophesy, Jer25"; 303 (prop, io put oneself
round) to surround, Ju 19^2. on?3 to fight, if/ 109' (where, however, the Qal
*3?6np*1 should be read ; cf. tp 35^) ; also n?3rin to shave (something) /or oneself,
Num 6^^ ; ^njnn to take some one for oneself as a possession, Is 14^ ; 733rin to
make some one an object of craft, Gn 37^^ ; ?2^3nn io strip a thing off oneself. Ex
33* > 'l?y^'!' '" bring on oneself the anger of any one, to anger him ; J^iBH'!' ^^
consider something, Jb 37^* ; plSnn to break something off from oneself, Ex 32*.
In Gn 34^ after ^jriPinn make ye marriages, read 13riN instead of ^jriN . Cf. § 54/
3. So also it is only owing to a modification of the original meaning of CC
a verb (except where the expression is incorrect, and perhaps derived from
the popular language), when sometimes the remoter object (otherwise intro-
duced by p) is directly subordinated in the form of an accusative suffix, e.g.
Zc 75 ""JX "'J'^ipS D^ifn did ye fast at all unto me, even to me ? as though to say,
hare ye be-fasted me? have ye reached me with your fasting? Still more
strange is Jb 31^^ 3N3 ^-f?"}^ '*« (tli® orphan) grew up to me as to a father ; cf
Is 27*, 655, Jer 31', and in Aramaic Dn 5^ ; but ^3rin3 3|13n y\^ Jos 15" is to
be regarded as a double accusative after a verb of giving^ seeff. In i S 2^^ read
^bbp^ for i^i)D^ ; in Is 442', instead of the Niph'ai, read ''3B'3ri ; in Ez 29'
either VJl''b'y is to be read with Olshausen or DTT'tJ'S? (and previously ^N^)
with Smend ; in ip 42^ rTllK or D'jI'lX ; in ip 55^^* (where KSnig takes ^3n^ as
he has given it to thee) we must certainly assume a substantive 3n'' ( = fate?).
4. Whole classes of verbs, which, according to v above, are regarded as y
transitive, either on account of their original meaning or (for the sake of
analogy) by a modification of that meaning, are —
(a) Verba induendi and exuendi, as ]^2? io put on, tSB'S to put off a garment,
my io put on ornaments, io adorn oneself with (cf. also HHT D^XBCO enclosed
TT TT'T-.. :
in gold, Ex 282"). Also in poetic expressions such as rp 65'^ |XSn D^"}3 ^K^Zl!? the
pastures are clothed with flocks, cf. \p lo^"^^ ; 104^ (DDV) ; 65"^ (Pj^P), &c.i
(b) Verba copiae and inopiae (also called verba abundandi and deflciendi), as z
ViTO, to be full 0/ something. Ex 8"; here, and also frequently elsewhere,
construed with "DS, and hence evidently with an accusative; Gn 6^' ;
with a personal object. Ex 15^ my lust shall be satisfied upon them ; with an
accusative preceding the verb for the sake of emphasis, e. g. Is 1^^ your
hands IN.^D D''CI are full of blood, cf. Is 22^; so also the Niph. KpDS to fill
oneself loith something, e.g. Gn 6^^, Ex 1' (where the object is connected
by nX) ; Is 2^'-, 6*, Pr 310 ; yni3 to be fructified with, Nu 5^8 ; y^J^ to swarm
mth, Gn 120-21 Ex 728; yab' (ynU') to be full of, Is i", Jo 2", Pr 12";
133 to become strong, to uiax mighty in something, Jb 21''; }*1Q to overflow
with something, Pr 3^" (with the object preceding) ; IT prop, to descend,
poetically also to pour down, to overflow with something (cf. in Greek
■npoptiiv vSojp, ScLKpva ara(ttv), e.g. La 3*8 >^i^ *Tin Qip >3pQ mine eye runneth
^ From the idea of covering oneself with something, we might also, if necessary,
explain Ex 30'" D"*© WfT)^ they shall wash themselves with water ; but the reading
is simply to be emended to the ordinary D^J33.
eOWLEY B b
-4
370 The Parts of Speech [§ 1 17 aa-/
down (with) rivers of water; i'^, Jer 9^'', 13^'', \p 119^'^; so also "F]^n to run ocer
with, to flow with, Jo 4" ; ?]) to gush out with, Jer 9^'' ; f)t33 to drop, to overfloio with,
Ju 5*, Jo 4!^" ; n"2£3 to break forth, Ex 9° ; ^\^V} to overflow, but also (transitively)
to overfloio icith, probably in Is lo^'^; 313 to hud with, Pr 10^' ; so perhaps also
l^y to pass over, to overflow with, Jer 5^^ ; ^?X^ to go forth with, Am 5^. — Especially
bold, but still on the analogy of the above examples, is Is 5^, where it is said
of a vineyard T\^^) T'Oti' nbui lut it shall come up (it shall be overgrown) xvith
■TT'Ttt: ^
6n'ers and thorns; cf. Pr 24^', and still more boldly, Is 34''.
ClCl Witli the opposite idea, "IDH to he in want of, to lack, Gn iS^^; 73^^ to be
bereaved of (as though it were to lose), Gn 27*^ — jn Jos 22''' even i37"ll2y)Dn
(prop, was there too little for us of . . . ?) as being equivalent to a verbum inopiae
( = had we too little of ...?) is construed with an accusative ; cf. Neh 9'^.
bb (0 Several verbs of dwelling ; the accusative in this case expresses either the
place or the thing at which or with which any one tarries ; thus Gn 4^'', ip 21*
after 2Z')^ of. § 118 gr; Ju 5IT, Is 33" after ni2 ; tp 57^ after 23^'; ^ 68^.
Pr 8^2, Is 33^^ with pK^ ; or even the person (the people) with whom any one
dwells or is a guest, as \p 5^, 120' after 113, Gn 30^" after ^2), ^ 681^ with ]2^ .
CC 5. Two accusatives (usually one of tlie person and one of the thing)
are governed by —
(a) The causative conjugations {Pi'el, Hiph'il, sometimes also Piljyel,
e.g. ''^r'? Gn 47^^ &c.) of verbs which are simply transitive in Qal,
and hence also of verba induendi and exuendi, &c. (cf. above a and u,
and also y, z), e.g. Ex 33'* ^Ti^STlX X3 ''3X'in show me, I pray thee, thy
glory. Thus very frequently y^ii^ to cause some one to know some-
thing ; "TSp docere aliquem aliquid, &c. ; cf. further, Gn 41''- iriK B'3p*1
5^^"''!]?? and he caused him to jput on vestures of fine linen {he arrayed
him in vestures, &c.) ; cf. in the opposite sense, Gn 37^ (both accusa-
tives after D''K'Qn introduced by riK) ; so with ^5?p to fill, to fill up
with something, Gn 21'', 26'*, Ex 28^; 1;^ to gird some one with
something, -^ 18^; "l^V to crown, -^ 8", &c. ; "^Bn to cause some one to
lack something, -^ 8"; ''^P^?'] to feed some one with something. Ex 16^^;
'"'i??^r' to make some one drink something, Gn ig^-^'
dd ip) Many verbs (even in Qal) which express an influence upon the
object through some external means. The latter, in this case, is
attached as a second object. They are especially —
^^ (a) Verbs which express covering, clothing, overlaying, "IJPI Ex 29', HBif Ex 26^'',
&c., niD Ez 1 3io«f-, n^y \p 5" ; cf. also pK Oil Jos 7^5, &c. ; hence also verbs
which express sowing (y^T Jud 9^^, Is 17'", 30^^), planting (Is 5^), anointing
(\j/ 45*) tvith anything.
/r (/3) Expressions of giving, thus |n3 Jos 15'' where the accusative of the
**' thing precedes ; endowing, 13t Gn 30^"; and its opposite taking away, as ynp
Pr 22^^ ; TJ'ia to bless some one with something, Gn 49", Dt 15" ; to give graciously,
J3n Gn 33*; to sustain (i.e. to support, to maintain, to furnish) with anything,
iTj
§ii7^<7-n] Direct Suhoj'dination of the Noun, etc. 371
e.g. Gn 27", f 51'* (T|pp) ; Ju 19^ (nyo) ; to do something to one, ^103 Gn 5o'5-i',
I S 24'* ; cf. also D"!!"? to come to meet any one loith something, -^ 21^, D?K' to repay
some one with something (with two accusatives, ^ 35'^, Pr 13^'), and for the
accusative of the person cf. e5, KaKwi nparrdv Tivd. In a wider sense we may
also include such phrases as they hunt every man his brother with a net, Mi 7^ ; to
shoot at one uith arrows, \p 64* (though this is against the accents) ; Pr 13''* seeks
him early (with) discipline, i. e. chastises him betimes, &c.
(7) Expressions of asking some one for something, desiring something from P'P
some one (7SK' Dt 14''®, ^p 137') ; answering any one anything (njy Mi 6^, &c. ;
cf. in the other conjugations "131 ^'K'n prop, verbum reddere, with an accusa-
tive of the person, i K 12'^, &c., also in the sense of announcing; sometimes
also l^an to declare something to some one, Jb 26*, &c., for p T'Sn) ; n^S to enjoin
a person something, Ex 34^^, Dt 1^^, 32*^, Jer 7^^^ , .
(S) Expressions which mean to make, to form, to build something out of some- fl/l
thing ; in such cases, besides the accusative of the object proper, another
accusative is used for the material of which the thing is made, e.g. Gn 2^
riDIXn-JD -\Dy D"INn"nS DTiSn nin^ "l^^*l and the Lord formed man of the dust
T T-; |T ' • T T T T IT V • V! T ; V ' " ^ . .
of the ground ; so with "IS^ also in i K 7"; further Ex 388 Dpn: nb'V Iva-pS
all the vessels thereof made he of brass (for another explanation of the accusative
nt^n3 linto brass], linguistically possible but excluded by the context, see
below, a with kk) ; cf. Ex 25"-23. 26i"f--9, 27I, 368, i K 72^ ; with a preceding
accusative of the material, Ex 252^, 292, Dt 276 nStO-nS Hpnn niobc' D''33v^
nin^ of unhewn stones shall thou build the altar of the Lord.
(c) Verbs which express making, j)re2)aring, forming into anything, //
along with the object proper, take a second accusative of the product,
e. g. Gn 27^ D''?3yep DHX H'K'yx / toill make them (the kids) into savoury
meat; cf. Gn 6"-^ Ex 26''''','3o"^ ^2', Is 44'% Ho 8*, i K iS^^ n23>l
naiO D''33Xn"nK and liehuilt the stones (into) an altar ; cf. lo^^ So also
nsx, with two accusatives, to bake something into something, Ex 12^",
Lv 24* ; D''^ (prop, to set up for something, cf. Gn 27% 28'^, yj/ 39",
and similarly CIH Gn 31^*) to change into something, Jos 8'*, Is 50",
51'", Mi 1', 4^^; with two accusatives of the person {to appoint,
proviote any one to the position of a . . .), Is 3' ; [^J is also used in
the same sense with two accusatives, Gn 17*, and JT'E' i K 11^*; as
a rule, however, the description of the office, and also frequently of
the product, is introduced hy 7 to, ^ iig t; also ^'6^' to make a thing
so and so (Is 5", 26^; with a personal object, yfr 21^^ 91^); T^^'^ to
make dark. Am 5*. Of the same class also are instances like Jb 28^
HE'in; p^T |3X a stone they smelt into brass; i K ii^" "i^V °'?.?' CHi?-^-
C^IP and rent it (the garment) into twelve pieces; cf. Is 37^", accusa-
tive of the product before the object proper, after HiX^Hp to lay waste.
<. , <
1 Cf. a very pregnant expression of this kind in ip 21^' ^^^ ^^D^K'n ^3 for
thou shall make them (as) a neck, i. e. thou shalt cause them to turn their necks (backs)
to me; similarly i/- 18*' (2 S 22^1, Ex 23") ; tyr^ 1^ nPri3 ''2*X thou hast given
mine eneynies unto me as a back ; cf. Jer 1 8^''.
B b 2
372 The Parts of Speech [§§ 117 m, w, uSa.b
On a second object with verba sentiendi (as V1J to know something to
he something, Ec 7"°; nN"J to see, find to he, Gn 7^ ; HK'n to esteem one
to he something, Is ss'*, elsewhere always construed with ? or ?), of. h.
nk Rem. At first sight some of the examples given above appear to be identical
in character with those treated under hh ; thus it is possible, e.g. in 1 K iS'^^
by a translation which equally suits the sense, he built from the stones an altar,
to explain n31D as the nearer object and CJ^Xn'riN as an accusative of the
i - •• : • " • T -:iT v
material, and the construction would then be exactly the same as in Dt 27*.
In reality, however, the fundamental idea is by no means the same. Not
that in the living language an accusative of the material in the one case, and
in the other an accusative of the product were consciously distinguished. As
Driver {Tenses, § 195) rightly observes, the remoter accusative in both cases
is, strictly speaking, in apposition to the nearer. This is especially evident
in such examples as Ex 20^^^ thoti shall not build them (the stones of the altar)
JT'ia as heivn stones, cf. also Gn i^''. The main point is, which of the two
accusatives, as being primarily affected (or aimed at) by the action, is to be
made tlie more prominent ; and on this point neither the position of the
words (the nearer object, mostly determinate, as a rule follows immediately
after the verb), nor even the context admits of much doubt. Thus in i K 18*2
the treatment of the stones is the primary object in view, the erection of the
altar for which they were intended is the secondary ; in Dt 27^ the case
is reversed'.
// (d) Finally, the second accusative sometimes more closely deter-
mines the nearer object by indicating the part or member specially
affected by the action,^ e. g. ^l^ ^^ for thou hast smitten all mine enemies
"•n^ (as to) the cheek hone, equivalent to upon the cheek hone ; cf. Gn 37^^
let us not smite him B'S3 in the life, i.e. let us not kill him; Dt 22'^^,
283^^; also with fj^K' Gn 3'*; with nV") Jer 2^^; in poetry the object
specially concerned is, by a bold construction, even placed first, Dt 33"
(with r^?).
§ 118. The Looser Subordination of the Accusative to the Verb.
a, 1. The various forms of the looser subordination of a noun to the
verb are distinguished from the different kinds of the accusative
of the object (§ 117) by their specifying not the persons or things
directly affected by the action, but some more immediate circumstance
under which an action or an event takes place. Of such circumstances
the most common are those of place, time, measure, cause, and finally
the manner of performing the action. These nearer definitions are, as
a rule, placed after the verb ; they may, however, also precede it.
Q Rem. That the cases thus loosely subordinated to the verb are to be
regarded as accusatives is seen first from the fact that in certain instances the
nota accusativi (HN) is prefixed ; secondly from the fact that in ono form of
1 Analogous to this is the axfifia itaO' oKov koi ttarci /xipos in Greek epic poetry,
e. g. noioy ae twos (pvje '4pKos 686vtwv,
§ ii8c-j7] Looser Subordination of the Accusative 373
the casus loci a termination (H ) is employed, in which (according to § 90 c)
the old accusatival ending is preserved ; and finally from the consistency
with which classical Arabic puts these nearer definitions in the accusative
(which may be recognized by its form) even under circumstances in which
one wotild be rather inclined to expect a nominative in apposition.
The relation subsisting between the circumstantial accusative and the C
accusative of the object is especially apparent when tlie former (as e.g. in
a statement of the goal after a verb of motion) is immediately connected
with its verb. But even the more loosely connected circumstantial defini-
tions are certainly to be regarded as originally objects of a governing word
habitually omitted, only that the consciousness of this closer government
was at length lost, and the accusative more and more acquired an indepen-
dent value as a castes adverbialis.
2. The accusative serves to define more precisely the place {accus. d
loci), either (a) in answer to the question whither ? after verbs of
motion,' or (&) in answer to the question where ? after verbs of being,
dwelling, resting, &c. (but also after transitive verbs, see the examples),
or finally (c) to define more precisely the extent in space, in answer to
the question how far ? how high ? how much ?, &c.
Instead of the simple accusative, the locative (see above, § 900)^ is fre- €
quently found in the cases mentioned under / (sometimes also in those under
g) or the preposition "bs ,' especially before persons as the aim of the move-
ment, or 3, usually, to express being at a place.
Examples of (a) : i^l^r} NJfp let us go out into the f eld, i S 20" ; cf. Gn 27^, 31*, f
Jb 297 ; kJ^B^IPI r\2^b to go to Tarshish, 2 Ch 2o3« ; cf. Gn 10", if, 24", 26^3, si*',
EX49, i7i'',Jui2«,2Kiii9,Nai8(?),^i342;withni3^ NU23"; with |n3 Jos62<;
with the accus. loci emphatically preceding (cf. Driver on i S 5'), i K 2^*,
Is 22,^\ Jer 2^°, 20*, 32^ ; with Si3 (in the sense of aggredi, equivalent to Ni3
~?y, cf. § 117 a, note 2) the personal aim also is poetically added in the
accusative, Ez 32", 38", Pr 10", 28^2, Jb 1521, 20^2 ; but in the last passage it is
better taken as an accusative of the object (cf. the German einen ankorhmen,
iiberkommen). See also Nu lo^^ (where ^IB' can hardly be transitive) ; Ju 1 1'^^,
1 S 13^' (where, however, "7NI has probably fallen out after 7N1B'^ ; so
Strack).— Finally, cf. also the use of "IB'K for HSC' . , . n;^K whither, Nu
13^^. — The accus. loci occurs after a passive, e.g. Gn 12^^
Examples of (6) : Gn 38^1 remain a widow '?J''3K n^3 in thy father's house ; cf. n-
Gn 2423, I S 17" 2 S 2S2, Is 36, Hos 126, Mi 6", 2 Ch 3320 ; ^JpiKn HTIS in the tent
door, Gn iS^-^", 19", and frequently. As observed by Driver on i S 2",
accusatives of this kind are almost without exception (but cf. i K 8^2, Is l6'^
28'', 2 Ch 33^°) connected with a noun in the genitive. In all the above
examples, however, the accusative may have been preferred to the natural
construction with 3 (which is not rare even with JVIl and HTIS) for euphonic
reasons, in order to avoid the combination of such sounds as '33 and 'D3 •
of., moreover, Gn 2^*, 41*, Ex 18", Lv 6' (ns^sn instead of the usual nnsion
^ So commonly in Sanskrit; in Greek only poetically, e.g. Iliad i. 317
Kviat] S' ovpavbv Ik(v ; in Latin, e. g. rus ire, Romam proficisci.
2 Hence e. g. in i S g^* the Masora requires ri33n instead of the K'th. 3an,
' So in Ju 19" for "^ n''3'nS the better reading is '3"?K.
374 '^^^ Parts of Speech [§ii8ft-n
Ex 29", &c.) ; Dfc i"9, 1 2 S 1726, I K 78, Pr S^, g'*. On Is I'o see § 116 j; on
3^'" , with the accus. loci, see §11766. On the other hand, in Dt 6', according
to the LXX, a verb of giving has dropped out before J*"1S .
// Examples of (c) : Gn 7^' fifteen cubits upward did the waters prevail ;
Gn 31^2, 41*° ^'5'^ ^"^^^ NE)3n pT only in the throne will I be greater than thou ;
Dt 1^' we went (through) all that great and terrible wilderness; cf. Jb 29'. Of the
same kind also are such cases as Ex 16^^ {according to the number of your persons,
for which elsewhere "ISlDDp is used); i S 6* (with the accus. preceding);
6^*, 2 S 21*°, Jb 1*. — A statement of weight is put in the accusative in
2 S i42».
/ 3. The accusative is employed to determine more precisely the time
[accus. temporis), (a) in answer to the question when ? e. g. D1*D the
day, i.e. on the day (in question), at that time, but also on this day,
i.e. to-day, or finally by day, equivalent to D9^\ like ^1^ at evening,
npv noctu, ^i^3 in the morning, early, ^ 5*, &c., ^HH]? ^^ noonday,
yjr gi^ ; IH^J Di'' on one and the same day, Gn 27''^ ; NJB' in sleep, >//■ 1 27^;
nny^ -l'>irp rhm (Q«re 'n?) at the beginning of barley harvest, 2 S 21';
in stating a date, Gn ii"*, 14'' in the thirteenth year^
J^ ib) In answer to the question how long ? e. g. Gn 3", &c., ''^r-'l
'IV'.n all the days of thy life; *j* forty days and forty nights; 7'*, 14'',
15", 21^^, 29'^, Ex 20^ {for six days); 23'^, 31'^; f3''jp?*iy ybr ever,
I K 8'^; also with the accusative made determinate, Ex 13^ ^3^ nx
D''0*n throughout the seven days in question, mentioned immediately
before ; cf. Ju 14'^ Dt 9^'.
/ 4. The accusative is sometimes used of abstract ideas to state the
reason [accus. causae), e. g. Is 7"^* thou shalt not come thitlier "l^OB' nX"|''
for fear of briers.
m 5. Finally the accusative is used very vai'iously (as an accus.
adverbialis in the narrower sense), in order to describe more precisely
the manner in which an action or state takes place. In English such
accusatives are mostly rendered by in, with, as, in the form or manner
of ... , according to, in relation to, with regard to. For more
convenient classification we may distinguish them as —
fl (a) Adjectives expressing state, placed after the verb to describe more ac-
curately some bodily or other external condition, e.g. Is 20"^ walking ^TVy Di"iy
naked and barefoot ; cf. verse 3, S''^, Gn i^^, 33'* {hb^), Ju S<, Mi 1*, \p 107^ i^but
in 15^^ Cpri is rather a substantive directly dependent on T] ?in = he that walketh
in uprightness ; cf. § 117 r, note) ; Jb 30^'. After an accusative, e.g. Dt 15" ;
to specify some mental state, e.g. Gn 37^^ C«'?^^)' — Before the verb (and then
with a certain emphasis), Am 2I8, Jb i^i, Ec 5" ; Lv ao^", Jb 19^^, 271^^ 31*2*
^ In t// 2^^ TJ'HT is not to be taken as an accus. loci (on the way), but as an accus,
of respect [with regard to the way) ; see below, >n.
§ ii8o-s] Looser Subordination of the Accusative 375
(unless "Ip^ be a substantive); Ru i'^ (HX^D parallel with the adverb Dp''"!).
In Mi 2^ the text is clearly corrupt.
Those examples are especially instructive in which the adjective expressing Q
a state, although referring to several, is nevertheless used in the singular,
e.g. Jb 24'° ^3?I7 D'ny naked, i.e. in the condition of one naked, they go about;
of. verse 7 and 12^^. In Is 20* the singular occurs after a plural object, and
in Is 475 the masc. after the 2nd sing. fern, imperative, which clearly proves
that the term expressing the state is not conceived as being in apposition,
but as an indeclinable adverb.
(&) Participles, again either after the verb, Nu 16^'', Jer 2^'', 43^, if/ 7^, Jb 24^, 2^
Ct 2^, or before it, Gn 49", Is 57^^, Ez 36'^ f 56^, 92I*, Pr 20^* ; cf. also the
substantival use of the participles Niph'al niN"li3 in a fearful manner {\p 139^*)
and niS^DJ in a loonderful manner, Jb 37'', Dn S'^*. — Also participles in con-
nexion with genitives, as '=]?nriK) Gn 3* (cf. also nN3 i K 14®), are to be
regarded as expressing a state and not as being in apposition, since in the
latter case they would have to take the article. — In 2 S 1 3'^", i K 7'' and Hb 2^^
the explicative Wdw (equivalent to and that too) is also prefixed to the
participle. In ^ 69* for pHX) read 7n*D.— On i K 11*, 2 K 10^, 19^, Hag 1*,
cf. the note on § 131 A.
(c) Substantives ^ in the most varied relations : thus, as describing an n
external state, e. g. Mi 2^ riDi") WpH ii?) neither shall ye walk haughtily (as
opposed to niriK' Is 60I*) ; Lv 6' (accus. before the verb = as unleavened cakes),
Dt 2^, 4", Ju 521, Is 572, Pr 710, Jb 3i26, La i'; as stating the position of a
disease, i K 15^3 he was diseased IvJVnX in his feet (2 Ch 16^2 "jipj^a), analogous
to the cases discussed in § 117 H and § 121 rf(rf); as describing a spiritual,
mental, or moral state, e. g. Nu 32I*, Jos 9* (Hns HS ivith one accord, i K 22^' ;
cf. Ex 243, Zp 38), I S 1532, 2 S 23*, Is 41' (unless 0*175^ is adjectival, and the
passage is to be explained as in n) ; Jer 31'', Ho 12^^, 14^, ip 56*, 58^, 75^, Pr 31',
Jb 16', La 1®; Lv 19^^, &c., in the expression P''3^ Ijpn to go up and down as
a tale-bearer ; also nD3 unawares, Gn 34'^*, Ez 30' ; D"'")B'''D uprightly, \f/ 58^, 75'
(in both places before the verb) ; as stating the age, e.g. i S 2'^ (if the text be
right) D'K'JN W^D'' they shall die as men, i. e. in the prime of life ; cf. i S 2^^
py3), Is 6520, and Gn 15^'; as specifying a number more accui-ately, Dt 4",
I S 13", 2 K 52, Jer 318 [in Jer 13" D'>Di^B' whoUy (?) is corrupt; read nobK' ni^a
with LXX for ^^ np3n] ; as stating the consequence of the action, Lv 1 c.^', &c.
The description of the external or internal state may follow, in poetry, in 7"
the form of a comparison with some well-known class, e.g. Is 21^ n^K Nlp'1
' o .. ; - t'; • -
and he cried as a lion ; cf. if/ 22^*, Is 22^8 (^'-f,'^'^ like a ball) ; Is 24^2, Zc i*, ^t ii^
(unless "lisy be vocative) ; 58'* (unless the force of the preceding 3 is carried
on, as in \p 90*) ; ip 14412^ Jb 24" (D''N'1Q, before the verb) ; 41'' shut up together
as with a dose seal.^ ' ''
6. To the expressions describing a state belong finally those nouns S
which are introduced by the comparative particle 3,^ since the ? is to
1 Of. above, § 100 c, on certain substantives which have completely become
adverbs ; and § 113 A and k on the adverbial use of the infinitive absolute.
2 It is, as a matter of fact, permissible to speak of the above examples as
comparatio decurtata, but it must not be assumed that the comparative particle
3, which is otherwise regularly prefixed (see s}, has actually dropped out.
' On the use of 3 as a prefix, cf. § 102 c.
376 The Farts of Speech [§ii8/-a:
be regarded as originally a substantive ^ in the sense of amount, kind
{instar), standing in the accusative (so that 3 is equivalent to as
a kind of, after the manner of, according to), while the following noun
represents a genitive governed by the 3. From this, which is the
proper meaning of the 3, may be explained its power of representing
a great many pregnant relations, which in English can only be
rendered by the help of prepositions.' Thus the comparison may
refer to —
/ (a) The place, e.g. Is. 5^^ D"ID13 after the manner of, i.e. as in their pasture;
23"" as (it is said) in the song of the harlot; 28^1, 29'' DvnS as in a dream.
U (&) The time, especially in the combination Di''3 after the manner of the day,
equivalent to as in the day, Is 9', Ho 2^ ; ^)D'3 as in the days of. . ., Is 51', Ho 2^'',
9®, 121", Am 9" ; cf. moreover, Lv 22'', Ju 20^^, Is 17^, Jb s^*, 29^, and the
expressions Di''3 DVS as day by day = as in the former days, i S iS^" ; DyDH DyS3
as at other times, 1 S 3^", &c. ; nJB'Il rue's as informer years, 2 K 17*; cf. § 123 c.
Of a different character is the use of 3 as a simple particle of time, e.g.
Gn 18^° n*n nys at this time (not about the time), when it lives again, i.e. at the
end of a year ; "IIID nj^!D to-morrow at this time ; cf. Is 23^, and the frequent
connexion of 3 with the infinitive construct to express a definite time (in the
sense of a pluperfect), Gn 12^*, 27^*, Ex 9^^^, &c.
V (c) The person, e.g. Gn 34'^ should he deal with our sister as with a harlot?
^ (d) The thing, e. g. Is lo^*, f 33'', Jb 28^ 5J'N~)03 as afire, i. e. as it were by fire
(cf. Is i^B -123 as with lye) ; Jb 292^ iCSS as for the rain (they waited for me) ;
Jb 381* (as in a garment) ; 38^° |3N3 as to stone (the waters are solidified in
freezing).
X Rem. According to the earlier grammarians, 3 is sometimes used pleonas-
tically, i.e. not to indicate a similarity (as in Lv 14'^ as it were, i.e. something
like), but simply to introduce the predicate (Kaph teritatis), e.g. Neh 7^ for fie
wasHDN B'''K3 a faithful man; cf. i S 2o»y^D3, La i^o niM. Such a pleonasm
is of course out of the question. At the most a Kaph veritatis can only be
admitted in the sense that the comparison is sometimes introduced by 3 with
a certain emphasis (equivalent to in every respect like) ; thus DDK U'^NS in
Neh 7^ means simply of the nature of a faithful man, i.e. as only a faithful man
can be ; cf. Nu iii, Is i'', i3«, Ho 4*, 5^0, Ob ", Jb 24!*, 27', La i^o, 2* ; also
DyOS) in such passages as ip loc,^^ yea, veiyfew; but e. g. in Is 1' only just, a very
small . . .
1 Schwabe (3 nach seinem Wesen und Gebrauch im dlttestam. Kanon gewiirdigt,
Halle, 1883) contests this explanation (which is defended especially by
Fleischer and is certainly indisputable). He, with Gesenius and Ewald,
places 3 as a preposition on the same footing as 3 and p, and believes it to be
probably connected with the stem |13 as well as with ^3 and |3. The above
view of 3 as a substantive of course does not imply that the language as we
have it is still in every case conscious of the substantival meaning.— On 3 in
numerical statements, in the sense of about, nearly, see the Lexicon.
* It would be altogether unsuitable here also (see above, note 2 on r) to
assume a loss of the preposition. Such examples as Is i*® (Hjb'NIlS and
n?nn33), Lv 26'' CPEJ??) are to be explained from the fact that here the
§ 119 «-c] Subordi7iation of Nouns to the Verb, etc. 2>11
§ 119. The Subordination of Nouns to the Verb by means
of Prepositions.
1. In general. As is the case with regard to the looser subordina- a
tion of nouns to the verbal idea (§ ii8), so also their subordination
by means of prepositions is used to represent the more immediate
circumstances (of place, time, cause, purpose, measure, association, or
separation) under which an action or event is accomplished. In the
case of most prepositions some idea of a relation of space underlies
the coiistniction, which then, in a wider sense, is extended to the
ideas of time, motive, or other relations conceived by the mind.
On tlie origin of the prepositions and the original case-relation in which
they stand to the nouns governed by them, cf. § loi, where a list of the
prepositions is given with their original meanings. Cf. also § 102 on the
prefixes, and § 103 on the union of prepositions with suffixes.
2. A not unimportant part is played in Hebrew by the compounding h
of prepositions to represent more accurately the relations of place,
which either precede or follow the action. In the former case "|D,
and in the latter (which is not so frequent) "7K occurs before other
prepositions of place; cf. e.g. Am 7'* the Lord took me I^^Jfn ^"ID**?
from behind the flock ; 2 K 9** turn thee "^IW^'^^ to behind me, i.e. turn
thee behind me ; "DVO , nXD from being with . . . , as in French de chez,
d'apres quelquun} For further examples, see c.
Eem. I. We must not regard as combined prepositions in the above sense C
either those substantives which have become prepositions only by their union
with prefixes, as "•iSi? before, ^pQD jyDp on account of (but e.g. ''DDpO /row
before, Gn 4'*, &c., is such a compound) ; nor adverbs, which are also formed by
combining words which were originally substantives (also used as preposi-
tions) with prepositions, as y^VlO without, nnriO in the sense of below,^ 7^)0
preposition and substantive had already become simply one word before the 3
was prefixed. We find also 7y3 Is 59'*, 63', \p 119^*, and 2 Ch 32!'; cf.
Driver on i S 14" C^fn^S), where the text is wholly corrupt.
1 In other cases French, as well as English and German, can only emphasize
one of the two combined ideas ; thus, such expressions as il prend le chapeau
sur la table, German and English er nimmt den Hut vom Tisch, he takes his hat
from the table, all regard the action from one point of view only ; the Hebrew
here brings out both aspects of it by means of ~?yt5 /rom upon, cf. e. g. Is 6*.
* Hence not to be confounded with nnriO from under, in such examples as
Pr 22", which is a real compound preposition. In the above-mentioned
adverbs also the ~}0 was originally by no means pleonastic ; finrip denotes
properly the locality, regarded primarily as a place from beneath which some-
thing proceeds, and so on. This original sense of the "|tp, however, has
become so much obscured by its regular combination with words of place to
form independent adverbs, that it is even prefixed (evidently only on the
analogy of such common adverbs as ~?yo DnnO) in cases where it is really
inadmissible, owing to the meaning of the adverb, e.g. in ^nVpBtp, *^?P9
37^ The Parts of Speech [§119^-^
above (so also in Gn 2 7 ^9, 49^5, not from above). These adverbs of place,
however, may become prepositions by the addition of p, e.g. p pPlO outside
as regards . . . , i.e. outside of something, in i K 21^^ even after a transitive verb
of motion ; p finriO below as regards . . ., i.e. under something (cf. !? nnnO'iy
until they came under. . ., i S 7^^), p bVD over something, &c. ; ']2? prop, in
separation ; ~J)0 ^2p in separation from, i.e. apart from, besides. Only rarely in
such a case is the p omitted for the sake of brevity, e. g. Jb 26^ D^D nHFID
beneath the waters ; Neh 3^8 ("pyp).
(I 2. Real combinations of prepositions (each retaining its full force) occur —
(a) With ~|Jp, in inXD ''"inNC (see above) from behind something; nXD
and DyO/rom with (see above) ; p3D or ni^''^^ from betwe".n something (with
motion in either direction, see e. g. Gn 49^") ; ''JjDpO from before (see above) ;
sometimes also PIQJD Lv 5*, &c. ; ~?yD from upon, i.e. off from; TSV/kt^ away
from under (see footnote 2 on p. 377).
e (b) With -^K, in ''inN-^K to behind, nS^^'W to between] ^ n''20-^S forth
between 2 K ii*^; p ^iriD'PK forth without, i. e. out in front of, Nu 5' ; nnri"/'K
down under.^ — In Jb 5^ the two prepositions of motion are combined in
a peculiarly pregnant constraction, CDSfD'^K (he goes thither and takes it)
out of the thorns, i. e. he taketh it even out of the thorns, but the text is hardly
correct.
f 3. A general view of the union of certain verbs, or whole classes
of verbs, with particular prepositions, especially in explanation of
certain idioms and pregnant expressions.'^
jor (a) "iJS C.^N)' towards, properly an expression of motion or at least direction
towards something (either in the sense of Mp to = *iy, or Mo = Tjin'bs) , is used
after verbs not only in answer to the question whither? but by a specially
pregnant construction, in answer to the question where ? e. g. Jer 41^^ they
without, cf. also such examples as v3)D ?^D0 *^?2!p, DE'O {there), &c. Since
a "IP is not usually repeated after *15?^ ^^ appears as if "I^^P ^7 ^ trans-
position of the "IP stood for the usual ~|}D "!??• In reality, however, the
preposition which forms the adverb into a preposition is omitted here, as in
byp, nnntp, without a following p (see above). Properly l^pD has a purely
adverbial meaning = iaTfew by itself, like ^ysJp TO^'Cip'O (Syriac men le'el) above
(adv.), as distinguished from p pysO or p"?yp (Syriac le'el men), over, upon
something. — Also "^l^pfrom . . . onward is not for ?~]ip, but the p serves merely
(just like the Latin usque in usque a, usque ad, usque ex) to indicate expressly
the stai'ting-point, as an exact terminus a quo (of place or time).
^ Also in I S 2i^nnFI"PS by a pregnant construction is virtually dependent
on the idea of coming into, contained in the preceding ~pX .
'^ A summary of all the relations and senses in which a preposition may be
used, belongs not to the Grammar but to the Lexicon.
' Cf. Mitchell, 'The preposition el,' in the Journal of the Society cf Biblical
Literature and Exegesis, 1888, p. 143 ff., and especially A. Noordtzij, Ilet
hebreeuwsche voorzetsel ?X, Leiden, 1896, a thorough examination of its uses,
and especially of the relation between "7N; and "?y.
§ iipA-it] Subordination of Nouns to the Ve7^h,etc. 379
found him D^BT D''P"/X hy the great waters; cf. Dt i6«, i K 13^^", and a still
more remarkable instance in ifi^ D''p2^n"bX '^ri^^ Dptp"?^. This combina-
tion of two different ideas, of motion to a place and being or acting in the place
(very plainly seen in Dt 16* hut to the place which the Lord thy God shall choose. . .
slialt thou bring thine offering and there shalt thou sacrifice, &c.), is the same
as the Greek use of eis, ty for sf, the Latin in potestatem, in amicitiam ditiunemque
esse, manere (Cic. Verr. 5, 38 ; Div. 2, 14, &c.l ; cf. also the common German
expressions su Hause, su Leipzig sein, zu Bette liegen, &c. ,
(6) 3.1 Underlying the very various uses of this preposition is either the ft
idea of being or moving within some definite region, or some sphere of space
or time (with the infinitive, a simultaneous action, &c.), or else the idea of
fastening on something, close connexion with something (also in a metaphorical
sense, following some kind of pattern, e. g. the advice or command of some
one 'Q "^^IS, 'S riSy3, or in a comparison, as in Gn i^^ ^JrtD'ID ^JDpifS in
our image, after our likeness ; cf. i^'', s'-'), or finally the idea of relying or depend-
ing upon . . ., or even of merely striking or touching something.
Thus the use of 3 is explained — ^
(i) In the sense of among (in the domain of), e.g. Mi 7^ px DINS "IK'"'
there is none upright among men ; in the sense of consisting of, in specifying the
constituents of a collective idea, e.g. Gn 7^^ and all flesh died . . . in ( = con-
sisting of) fowl, &c. 8^'', 91", Ho 4*. Also after ideas of appearing, manifesting
oneself, representing, being, in the sense of as, in the capacity of (prop, in the
sphere, after the manner of, see above), consisting of . . .,tanquam, the 3 essentiae
of the earlier grammarians, corresponding to the Greek eV, the Latin in,^ and
the French en, e. g. Ex 6^ I appeared unto Abraham . . . '•"'IK' bN3 as El Shaddai ;
Jb 2313 "inSIl Wni but he is (manifests himself as) m^e, i.e. he remains always
the same ; JDt 26", 28*2 oyj^ T"^? ^^ ^^^ condition of being few, cf. 10'^'^ to the
number of seventy ; Is 40^", \p 39''. — Cf. also such examples as Ex 18* (ip 35^^, 146^)
*lTy3 as my help ; Dt 26^* being unclean ; Is 28^* in Sion (i.e. I make Sion a foun-
dation) ; Ez 20^1 as a sweet saiwtr; Pr 3^8, perhaps also Ex 32 m (i.e. as) aflame
of fire; Is 66^5 with (i.e. like) fire ; \f' 31^^, 372" (102*}. For the origin of all
these forms of expression ^54^ is especially instructive, since ^{J'SJ ''2DD3 ^3"IX
is not meant to refer to the Lord as belonging to the D''30b , but only to ascribe
to him a similar character, i. e. the Lord is one who upholds my soul ; so also
\(/ 99^, 118', Ju 11'^ [the plur. as in § 1243-1].^ — Cf. Gesenius, Thes. Linguae
Hebr., i. i74f., and Delitzsch on \p 35^*.
(2) To introduce the object after transitive verbs, which denote touching, K
striking, reaching to (thus to some extent a fastening on, see above) something,
in English sometimes rendered by al, on, &c., and in German generally by
compounds with an, e. g. anfassen = 3 THIX , anruhren = 3 V53 , &c. To the same
categoiy belongs also the construction of verbs denoting authority {^^^, P^D,
B'JJj mi , the last prop, to tread on . . .) with 3, inasmuch as the exercise of
the authority is regarded as a laying hold of the person ruled ; so also, the
introduction of the object by 3 after certain verba diccndi, or when the mental
action is to be represented as extending to some one or something : e. g.
1 Cf. Wandel, De particulae Hebr. 3 indole, vi, usu, Jena, 1875.
2 e. g. res in praeda captae, i.e. things taken as spoil ; see Nagelsbach, Laf.
Sfilistik, § 123*. On the Hebrew 3 essentiae, see Hauschild in the Festschrift zur
Einweihung des Goethegymn. Frankf. a. M. 1897, p. 16.:?.
^ Other instances formerly cited here (Is 26*, \// 55^', where 3 is used before
the subject) as well as \t 68' IDK' n^3 Jah is }iis name, are tcxtually very
uncertain. Cf. Cheyne, SBOT. Isaiah, p. 173, on Is 26*.
380 The Parts of Speech [§1191-9
3 Xip to call on some one, 3 VBB'S iurare per aliquem, 3 ?tjtB' to enquire of some
one. Again; 3 riN") to look upon, 3 ypt^ <o hearken to (but cf. also wi), generally
with the secondary idea of participation, or of the pleasure with which one
sees or hears anything, especially pleasure at the misfortunes of others,
hence 3 HNI to see his desire on any one or anything ; cf. however, Gn 21^^ let me
not look upon the death of the child ; i S 6^^ because they had looked [irreverently] at
the ark of the Lord.
Closely related to this is the use of 3 :
/ (3) To introduce the person or thing, which is the object of a mental act,
e. g. 3 pONH to trust in (to cleave trustingly to) somebody or something ;
3 ni33 to have confidence in . . .; 3 DIDE' to rejoice in or at something, &c. ; 3 *13''|
to speak of (about) some one or something, Dt 6'', 1 S 19' ^•, &c.
in (4) The idea of an action as extending to something, with at the same time
the secondary idea of participation in something, underlies finally the
partitive use of 3, e.g. 3 ?3N to share in eating something. Ex 12*'*^-, Lv 22" ;
also simply to eat, to taste 0/ something, Ju 13'*, Jb 21^5 ; so also 3 DPI? to eat of,
and 3 nnt^^ to drink 0/ something, Pr 9^ ; 3 VIOE^ to hear a whisper of something,
Jb 26^* ; 3 NYD they found remaining of her only . , ., 2 K 9^^ ; 3 Nb'J to bear
a share of something, Nu 11", Ez 18^, Jb 71'. Cf. also 3 ppn to give a share of
something, Jb 39^'' ; 3 n33 to do building to, Neh 4*.
n (5) With the idea of touching, striking against anything is naturally connected
that of proximity and vicinity near, and further that of association with
something; cf. Gn 9* iB'a33 unth the life thereof; 15'*, 32" vipOS mth my staff.
Sometimes 3 combined with a verb of motion (to come with something),
expresses the idea of bringing, e.g. Ju 15^ Samson visited his wife with a kid,
i.e. he brought her a kid ; Dt 23^, ^ 66", i Ch is^^^-, 16^.
0 (6) From the idea of connexion with something, being accompanied by
something (see n), is developed, finally, the instrumental use of 3, which
represents the means or instrument (or even the personal agent), as some-
thing vnth which one has associated himself in order to perform an action ;
cf. Mi 4I* t33B'3 they smite with the rod; Is lo^* ; 1// iS^o ^3 by thee (so also 44',
parallel with ^DB'S) ; Is io»*, Ho i'', 12" ; of also 3 12)} to labour by means of
some one, i. e. to cause him to labour at it, Ex i", &c. On 3 with the passive
to introduce the means or the author, see § I2t/.
P A variety of the 3 instrumenti is 3 pretii (the price being considered as the
means of acquiring a thing), cf. Gn 23*, 29I8 (^nnS) ; 30", 33", 34" (OKTS on
this condition) ; 37^^* ; also, in a wider sense, Gn 18^ 3 for the sake 0/; i S 3".
y Rem. The use of 3 instrumenti to introduce the object is peculiar in such
expressions as if/ 44^ and thou coveredst over us niDp^3 mth the shadow of death ;
Jb 1 61" Dn''Q3 ""by nya they have opened wide their mouth against me (prop, have
made an opening icith their mouth) ; cp. ^ 22*, Ex 7*° he lifted up n^133 the rod ;
Lv 16* "Ijn and PjaX followed by 3; Jos S^S La 1". Analogous to some
English expressions we find both to gnash the teeth, ^ 35^', and to gnash with the
teeth, Jb 16* ; to wink the eye, Pr ioi«, and to wink with the eye, Pr 6^^ ; sfiake the
head, f 22", and to shake with the head, Jer 18", Jb 16*.— In all these instances
1 To be distinguished from 3 nOB' ■= to drink from (a cup, &c., Gn 44*, Am 6«),
as in Arabic and Aramaic (Dn 5'). Cf. also iv noTrjpion (Xen. Anab. vi. i, 4),
iv xpvauinaai -nivtiv (3 Ezr 3«), vmenum in auro bibitur, Seneca, Thyestes 453,
and the Fi'ench boire dans tine tasse.
§ ii9»--m] Subordination of Nouns to the Verb, etc. 381
the verb (intransitive) construed with 3 has a greater independence, and
consequently more emphasis than the verb construed with a direct accusa-
tive ; the latter conveys a sort of necessary specification of the action, while
the noun introduced by 2 is used rather as a merely adverbial complement.
An instructive example of this is ?)p fri3 vocetn ernittere, to utter a voice, also (o
thunder, while in vip3 1^3 \p 46'' (68^*, Jer 12*), |ri3 has an independent sense
= he thundered with his voice (i.e. mightily).
(c) p ^ te, a very general expression of direction towards anything, is used to r
represent the most varied relations of an action or state with regard to a person
or thing. On the use of ? as a periphrasis for the genetivus possessoris or aucforis
(the idea of belonging to), see §129; on p with the passive, to introduce the
author or the cause, see § 121/; on p in a purely local sense (e.g. 'I3''^y
j I at thy right hand, prop, towards thy right hand), or temporal (e. g. yy^b at evening,
' ' &c.) or distributive, see the Lexicon.
The following uses of b properly belong to the government of the verb :
(r) As a nota dativi^ to introduce the remoter object ; also S
(2) To introduce the dativus commodi. This dativus commodi (or incommodi,
e.g. Ez 3711) is used — especially in colloquial language and in later style —
■| in the form of a pronoun with b, as an apparently pleonastic dativus ethicus,
with many verbs, in order to give emphasis to the significance of the occur-
rence in question /or a particular subject. In this construction the person of
the pronoun must always agree with that of the verbal form.' By far the
most frequent use of this p is with the pronoun of the 2nd person after
imperatives, e.g. ''lp"Tlb go, get thee away, Gn 12^ 22^, Dt 2" (also in the
feminine, Ct 2^°'^^) ; ?jp HOI turn thee aside, 2 S 2^1 ; D3p ^Vp take your journey,
Dt iT ; D3^ nny pass ye over ; ^b"nl2 flee (to save thyself), Gn 27" ; "^"OV
get thee Mp, Is 40^ ; D3^ 133 turn you, Dt i«; D3^ 121^' return ye, Dt 52' ; "qS "•Clp
rise up, Ct 2I0 ; 03^ inK' abide ye, Gn 22^ ; ?j|) ^nn forbear thee, 2 Ch as" (in the
plural, Is 222) . Q3^ ^^^ t^j^g yf^^ Dt jis^ jog 18*, Ju 20', 2 S i620, and so almost
regularly ?|f) "IDB'n (see above, § 51 w) cave tibi ! and 03^ T\p^'r^ take heed to
yourselves ; ^^ rUDT be thou like, Ct 2" (cf. verse 9), 8", is remarkable ; after
a perfect consecutive, i K 173,1822^; after an imperfect consecutive, e.g.
Is 36' ?j!j nC3ni and puttest thy trust.— In the 3rd person, e. g. rO 3B'ri1 and sat
her down, Gn '2ii«, cf. 22^, Ex iS^, rpiio^, 123^ Jb 6" ; even after a participle,
Ho 8^ — In the ist person plural, iSz 37II.
(3) To introduce the result after verbs of making, forming, changing, t
appointing to something, esteeming as something ; in short, in all those cases
in which, according to § 117 ii, a second accusative may also be used.
(4) In loose connexion with some verbal idea in the sense of in reference to, U
with regard to . . . (§ 143 e) ; so after a verbum dicendi, Gn 201^ ; i K io23, cf.
^ Cf. Giesebrecht, Die hebr. Prdpos. Lamed, Halle, 1876.
2 Just as in the Komance languages the Latin preposition ad (Italian a,
before vowels ad, French a, Spanish d) and in English io are used as a peri-
phrasis for the dative. — On the introduction of the nearer object by p,
cf. § 1 1 7 w.
3 Such expressions as the analogous English he plucked me ope his doublet, but
me no buts, and the like, are accordingly inadmissible in Hebrew.
382 The Parts of Speech [^ngv-y
Is 36^ ; even before the verb, Jer g\ — To the same class belongs also the
Lamedh inscriptionis (untranslatable in English, and hardly more than a mere
quotation-mark) which introduces the exact wording of an inscription or
title ; thus Is 8^ write upon it , . . (the words) "IJI p?^ "IHl? (cf. verse 3, where
the p naturally is not used) ; Ez 37^®.
V {d) Jjp, originally (according to § loi a) separation} represents both the
idea of distance, separation or remoteness from something, and that of motion aicay
from something, hence also descent, origin from a place, Am i^.
W (i) F'^'oni the idea oi separation is naturally derived on the one hand the
sense of (taken) from among . . ., e rtumero, e. g. Gn 3^^ subtil as none other of the
leasts, &c, ; cf. 3^^, Dt 33^*, i S 15^^, Ju 5^^^ (so especially after the idea of
choosing out of- a larger class, 182^*; cf. Ex 19^, &c.), and on the other hand,
the sense of loif/toMi (separated, free from . . .), e. g. Is 22^ ^IDX DK'i'jJIO without
the how (i. e. without one needing to bend a bow against them) they were made
prisoners ; cf. Jer 48^^ n3?0 without strength ; Ho 6®, as the first half- verse shows,
not more than burnt offerings (as R. V.), but and not burnt offerings ; Mi 3^, ^ 52',
Jb iii^, 1925, 21^, also such examples as Nu i^'^* far from the eyes, i.e. unobserved
by the congregation ; Pr 20'.
Zl' Here also belongs the use of |Jp after the ideas of restraining, withholding
from, refusing to any one, frequently in pregnant expressions, which we can
render only by complete final or consecutive clauses, e.g. i S 15^^ he hath
rejected ^Aee'TjpGp away from (being) king, instead of 'D flVriD (as in verse 26),
that thou be no longer king ; cf. i K 15^^, Is 17^ "^^V^ so that it is no longer a city ;
Jer 171^, Jb 28^1 he bindeth the streams ""DSO that they trickle not; Gn 16^, 23^
12(50 that thou shouldst not bury thy dead ; Is 24^".
y The jjp has a still more pregnant force in those examples in which the idea
of precluding from anything is only indirectly contained in the preceding
verb, e.g. Gn 27^ his eyes were dim T)'iCy2 away from seeing, i. e. so that he could not
see ; Is 7^ Ephraim shall be broken in pieces DVO that it be not a people (just as in
Is 23^, Jer 482'«2, ^ 83^) ; Lv 26^3, Is 5^, 49!^, 548, Ezr 2*2 (for other pregnant
constructions with JO see below, ^) ' ; on"'^20 and pXO without, cf. § 152 y.
^ Cf. 0. Molin, Om prepositionen min i Bibelhebreisken, Upsala, 1893, ^^*^
especially N. Zerweek, Die hebr. Praep, min, Leipzig, 1893, who, instead of the
partitive meaning (formerly accepted by us also), more correctly takes
' separation ' as the starting-point of its various uses.
2 All the partitive uses of |0 also come most naturally under this idea of
separation out of a larger class. Thus ]12 is used in the sense of so^ne, something,
and even one, in such expressions as and he sletc . . . also PNlb*^ "'ItJ''? (divers)
of the princes of Israel, 2 Ch 21* ; ~73D Lv 4^ ; i K iS^ ; ISH D"'1t2 some of the
blood of the bullock. Ex 29^^, &c. ; Jb 2";^ my heart doth not reproach me 'D'D/or any,
i. e. for one, of my days ; 38^^ ^''D*tD one of thy days, i. e. ever in thy life (this
explanation is confirmed by i K i^ ; cf. also i S 14*', 25^). In this way also,
the frequently misunderstood Hebrew (and Arabic) idiom is to be explained,
by which |0 before THISI^ nilK is equivalent to hUus ; e. g. Lv 4^ anrf shall do
riSnO nnSD any one of these things; 5", Dt 15", Ez 18^"; so before a nomtn
unitatis (see § 122 t), i S 14^^ (2 S 14", i K 1^'^) lE^'N"! niVU'tt not one hair of his
head. — ~f)3 is used in the sense of the Arabic min el-beydn or explicative min
(often to be simply translated by namely), e.g. in Gn "j"^^ of all that was, i.e. so far
as it was, probably also Gn 6^ { = whomsoever thty chose).
^ On the use of JO to express the comparative, which likewise depends on
the idea of distance from . . , , cf. below, § 133 a ; on |)p as expressing the
^iig z-dd] Suho7'dinatwn of Nouns to the Verb, etc. 383
(a) On the sense of motion away from anytliing depends the use of |0 after Z
such ideas as to take away from, to beivare, to be afraid of, to fee, to escape, to hide
oneself from (cf. KaXv-mai d-no, custodire ab), sometimes again in pregnant
expressions, e. g. Is 33'^. On the idea of starting from anything depends
finally the very frequent causative use of J?0 on account of, in consequence of (cf,
our that comes from . . .), prae, e. g. 3"1?D for mxdtiiude, i K 8^.
(«) ~Py.^ The two original local meanings of this preposition are u]con ClCl
(Itt/) 2 and ore)- {vnep, super).
(i) From the original meaning upon is explained the use of "?y after ideas
of commanding, commissioning ("py 1i2S\ &c., inasmuch as the command,
obligation, &c., is laidupon the object. The construction is self-evident in the
case of to lie, rest, lean, rely, press upon something; cf. also, for the last, such
examples as Is i", Jb 720, 232, and especially 2 S 18" vyi prop, upon me would
it have been, it would have been incumbent upon me, &c.
(2) From the original meaning over is explained the use of "by after ideas OU
of covering, protecting, guarding ~p]3 HDB "by |33 ; also the combinations "?y OriT
to have compassion upon . . ., "by Din "by blpPI to spare some one, arise from the
idea of a compassionate or protective bending over something. Cf. also "by DPlbs
Ju 9!'' = to fight for some one, i. e. in his defence.
(3) Moreover "by is used after verbs of standing and going, to express CC
a towering orer some one or something, sometimes in phrases, in which the
original local idea has altogether fallen into the background, and which are
therefore to be rendered in English by means of other prepositions {by, with,
before, near), e.g. Gn 41^, &c., Pharaoh , . . stood 'lX\'n"by by the Nile (above the
water level ; cf. ip 1^), and so especially "by *1)py in the pregnant sense to stand
serving before some one (prop, over one who sits or reclines at table) Zc 4'* (cf.
Is 6^, where b bySO is used for "by) ; "by ^Jf'Jin to present oneself by command
before some one, Jb 1^, &c. Cf. also ^'"by 'T'"by (Jb 1^*) near, at (on) the side
of some one or something. '
(4) From the original meaning above (not, as formerly explained, on to Cl(t
something, at something) there arise finally all the various constructions
with "by in the sense of towards, against. The original idea (which in many
of these constructions has become wholly unrecognizable) starts from the
view that the assailant endeavours to take up his position over the person
attacked, so as to reach him from above, or to overpower him ; cf. especially
"by Dip to rise up orer, i.e. against some one, then with a transference of
distance of time from a fixed limit, in the sense of after, e. g. \p 73^" J'"'i?~P
after awaking (cf. «f dplffrov, ab itinere), or after the lapse of ,.., e.g. Gn 38^*,
Ho 6^, and very frequently |*|j)?0 /rom the end of, i. e. after the lapse of ... , see the
Lexicon ; also for the use of [D to represent resting beside anything, like the
Latin prope abesse ab . . . .
1 Cf. Budie, Die hebr. Prapos. 'Al (by), Halle, 1882.
* Since the placing upon anything is an addition to it, "by also implies
in addition to something, cf. Gn 28' (31^°); 30*", 32** (probably a proverbial
saying = »notter and children) ; Dt 22*. Also by notwithstanding is no doubt
properly in addition to, e. g. Jb 10^ although thou knowesf, prop, in addition to thy
knowing. — From the original meaning upo7i is also derived tliat of on account of
(prop, upon the ground of) and in agreement with, according to, since the pattern is
regarded as the foundation upon which a thing stands or rests.
384 The Parts of Speech [§ii9ee-«
thought applied to any kind of hostile approach, "pj? Dri?3 to fight against. . . ,
*?y n3n to encamp against . . . , ~?y HP^?. ^° ^* gathered together, to assemble against
(Mi 4I1 ; cf. if/ 2^), &c. ; even after verbs which express a mental action, e.g.
~?y nyi ItJ'n to imagine evil against any one, &c.
ee 4. Sometimes a preposition appears to be under the immediate
government of a verb, which, by its meaning, excludes such a union.
In reality the preposition is dependent on a verb (generally a verb
of motion), which, for the sake of brevity, is not expressed, but in
sense is contained in what is apparently the governing verb.
/p Various examples of this constiuctio praegnans have been already noticed
above in x and y under "JD ; for ~|p cf. also ^22^2 *3ri''3y D'')p"l ^P.Ii^Jp^ and thou
hast answered and saved me from the horns of the wild oxen (in Is 38^'', which
Delitzsch translates by thou hast loved and delivered my soul from the pit, read
riD^n with the LXX) ; Gn 2e,'^, 2 S i8i9, Jb 28"; cf. also "fD HJJ ^ •JZ^ to'go
a whoring from any one i.e. to he unfaithful to him ; ~|D ytf'1 \p 18^2=^ depart
wickedly from God ; "jp {y^H \}j 28^ to he silent from one (to turn away in silence) ;
cf. Jb 13" [; so with ^yiD Jb 3o"-30].
trcr Pregnant constructions with "'"inX : Nu 142* equivalent to ''"inN HD^P N?l?^1
and he made full to walk i.e. walked fully after me; in i S 13'' read with
the LXX ViriND ^Tin they trembled, i.e. went trembling away from him; with
vK Gn 43^' ~7S non to turn in astonishment to some one (cf. Is 13^) ; ""?{< B'T'I
Is 11^", &c., to turn inquiringly to some one ; vS B'^'inn Is 41! to turn in silence
to some one ; ~pK Tin Gn 42^* to turn trembling to some one (cf. flNIpp Tin to
come trembling to meet, i S 21* [also with m^^ J^"""!!! flDti' and other verbs,
Ju 14', 15I*, 19' ; see Lexicon]) ; cf. further Jer 41'', ip 7'^, 2 Ch 32^ ; with 3
\t 55^* he hath redeemed and hath put my soul in peace, exactly like ^ 118^ ; with
p \fi 74'' they have profaned and cast . . . even to the ground ; cf. 89*".
hh 5. In poetic parallelism the governing power of a preposition is
sometimes extended to the corresponding substantive of the second
member ; ' e. g. 3 Is 40'', 48" he shall perform his pleasure ^'^'^ on
Babylon, and his arm shall be D'''1B'3 (for D^'n'K'33) on the Chaldaeans ;
Jb 15^; p Is 28^, 42^ (but probably ^ has fallen out after another p),
Ez 39'', Jb 34'" (perhaps also Gn 45^; ^^ may, however, be taken
here as a second accusative according to § 117 ii) ; \V'Qp Is 48'; ~|1?
Is 58", V' 141" (unless n^QW is to be read) ; '^V Is 15* ; nnn Is 6I^
II 6. Adverbs which have acquired a substantival value are sometimes
governed by prepositions, e. g. D3n"7K in vain, Ez 6"* ; i?"''T!Dj!? after
this ] i53 (Ec 8'°, Est 4^^) then, on this condition ; \^h and |3"i?y
therefore ; I3"^y hitherto.
1 Similarly the force of a negative is sometimes extended to the parallel
member ; see § 152 «.
§ r2o a-c] Verbal Ideas under Government of a Verb 385
§ 120. Verbal Ideas under the Government of a Verb.
Go-ordination of Complementary Verbal Ideas.
1. When a relative verb (incomplete in itself) receives its necessary a
complement in the form of a verbal idea, the latter is, as a rule,
subordinated in the infinitive construct (with or without p), less
frequently in the infinitive absolute, in a few instances in the form of
a participle (or verbal adjective), or finally in the imperfect without
the copula. In these combinations the principal idea is very frequently
represented by the subordinate member of the sentence, whilst the
governing verb rather contains a mere definition of the manner of
the action ; cf. d and g below, and § 1 14 n, note 2.
(a) On the subordination of an infinitive construct as an accusative of the 0
object, and as the complement of relative verbal ideas, see above, § 114 c,
and the numerous examples given in § i\^m; on the infinitive absolute as
object, see § 113 d. — The complement in the form of a participle (as in Greek,
and also frequently in Syriac) occurs in Is 33^ I^^B' ^C)rin3 (cf. for the form,
§ 67 v) when thou hast ceased as a spoiler, i. e. to spoil ; Jer 22^° 3ti'^ . , , H?^'^ K?
he shall never prosper, sitting, i. e. so as to sit, &c. ; Jon i* what meanest thou,
sleeping ? i. e. that thou sleepest ; ^ by a verbal adjective, 1 S 3^ now his eyes
ninS 1?nn had begun being dim, i.e. to wax dim (unless we read nirt3 = ninp|'j
cf. § 114 m); by a substantive, Gn 9^0 and Noah began to be an husbandman
(omitting the article before rUDHK).
(b) Examples of the subordination of the complementary verbal idea in the C
imperfect '^ (in English usually rendered by to, in order to or that) are — (i) with
both verbs in the same person : after the perfect, Is 42^^ ?*^3! • • • Kr?? ^\'^)
it pleased the Lord . . . to magnify, &c. ; Jb 30^^, 32^2 nSDK ''0^1'' XT' I know not
to give flattering titles ; after a perfect consecutive, i S 20^' (where for Tlf) we
should read with the LXX Ij^Bljl) ; after an imperfect, \f/ 88", 102", Jb 19',
24I* ; after an imperf. consec, Jb 16*; after a participle. Is 5^1". — (2) with
a difference in the persons : after a perfect, Lv 9* this is the thing n^if"T^S
VtJ'yFI nin^ which the Lord commanded (that) ye should do ; a negative imperfect
follows n^^ in La i^O; after the imperfect, Is 471 («) 1S]} '•D''Din i6 "'3
'51?~^K"]p'' for thou shalt no more continue (that) they call thee, i.e. thou shalt no
longer be called, &c. ; Ho 1* Dn^X iSV fj^DiN N? I will no longer continue (and)
have mercy, i.e. I will no more hare mercy; Is 32^, Pr 23'^ — Nu 22^ peradventure
I shall prevail (that) we may smite them, and (that) I may drive them out of the land
(?3^X may, however, be a scribal error for 7513, due to the preceding vW,
and in that case the example would belong to No. 1) ; after a participle,
1 In \pyi2 Vy 1 S 1 6^8, which appears to be a case of this kind, two different
readings are combined, fjljp y*l' and the simple |33C).
^ This kind of subordination is frequent in Arabic and in Syriac (cf. e. g.
the Peshitta, Luke i&^) ; as a rule, however, a conjunction (corresponding
to our tJiat) is inserted. Cf. moreover, the Latin quid vis faciam ? Terence ;
rolo hoc oratori contingat, Cicero, Brut. 84 ; and our I would it were; I thought tie-
would go.
COWLXT C C
386 The Parts of Speech [§ 120 d-g
2 S 21*. — A perfect is possibly subordinated in La i"; but the explanation
of 3K3 as a relative clause is preferable.
d 2. Instead of subordination (as in the cases mentioned in a-c), the
coordination of the complementary verbal idea in the finite verb (of.
above, c) frequently occurs, either —
(a) With the second verb co-ordinated in a form exactly corre-
sponding to the first (but see below, e) by means of \ (1, 1).^ As a rule,
here also (see above, a) the principal idea is introduced only by the
second verb, while the first (especially ^IK', ^PJ,^ H^P^"^) contains the
definition of the manner of the action, e.g. Gn 26^* "^^D!! ^B'^l and he
returned and digged, i. e. he digged again; 2 K i"*^*; in the p*fect
consecutive, Is 6^^; with 1''pi'T, e.g. Gn 25* and Abraham added and
took a wife, i. e. again took a wife ; Gn 38* and frequently; with TNin
in the jussive, Jb6®; in the imperative (cf. § iio^), Ju i * W'^NIVt
V7\ he content, I pray thee, and tarry all night (cf. the English he was
persuaded and remained, for to remain); 287^®; with "^HD Gn 24'''''^*',
&c. ; with ""?n Ct 2\
e Rem. I. Instead of an exact agreement between co-ordinate verbal forms,
other combinations sometimes occur, viz. imperfect and perfect consecutive
(cf. § 112 d), e.g. Dt 31^2 ifiat fiigy nin^"nSI WT'I T\'0h\ may learn, and fear the
Lord, i.e. to fear the Lord ; Is i^^, Ho a", Est 8*, Dn 9^'^ ; perfect and imperfect,
Jb 233 (0 that I knew how I might find him) ; perfect and imperfect consecutive,
Jos 7'', Ec 4I''; jussive and imperative, Jb 17^"; cf., finally, Gn 476 riyT~DN1
D3~{J»'l and if thou knowest and there are among them, &c. , i. e. that there are
among them.
J 2. Special mention must be made of the instances in which the natural
complement of the first verb is suppressed, or is added immediately after in
the form of an historical statement, e. g. Gn 42^' then Joseph commanded and
they filled ' (prop, that they should fill, and they filled . . . ; cf. the full form of
expression in Gn 50^) ; a further command is then added by means of p and
the infinitive ; Ex 36^ ; another instance of the same kind is Gn 30'" I have
divined and the Lord hath blessed me, &c., i, e. that the Lord hath blessed me for
thy sake.
^ {b) With the second verb (which, according to the above, represents
the principal idea) attached vnthout the copula * in the same mood, &c.
In this construction (cf. § no A) the imperatives Dip ('"I^^P, ""PP,
^ Cf. the English colloquial expression I icill try and do it.
' Of a different kind are the cases in which SID"* with a negative is
co-ordinated with a verb to emphasize the non-recurrence of the action ;
cf. Nu 11*^ they prophesied and added not, sc. to prophesy, i.e. but they did so no
more ; Dt 5", Jb 27" (reading 5)>pN'' iib\).
' Cf. the analogous examples in Kautzsch's Oramm. des Bibl. Aram., § 102.
* To be distinguished, of course, from the cases in which two equally
important and independent verbs are used together without the copula ia
vigorous poetic imagery, e.g. Ex 15^, Jb 29', &c.
§§ 1 20 A, 1 21 a] Verbal Ideas under Gove^^nment of Verb 387
&c.) and ^.? l^"^?, ''y?, &c.) are exceedingly common with the sense of
interjections, before verbs which express a movement or other action,
e.g. 'n.?DOr' ^V arise, walk, Gn 13'', 19^^, 27''^; in the plural, Gn 19''';
Ex 1 9^ T^'^^ go, get thee down ; 183^; with a following cohortative,
I S 9'° nD?p na? come, let us go; Gn 31'''' and frequently. — Also with
y^^ (a periphrasis for again) in the perfect, Zc 8'^ ; in the imperfect,
Mi 7", V' 7^^ 59') 1^^°) ^^ the jussive, Jb 10'®; in the cohortative,
Gn 30^' ; in the imperative, Jos 5^, 183° lie down again ; ?'*Nin (some-
times to express the idea of willingly/ or gladly) in the perfect, Dt i^.
Ho 5''; in the imperative, Jb 6^; r\2-\'n=much, i S 2^ ^innn wnn-^X
nnba do not multij)ly and talk, i.e. talk not so much arrogancy; in the
imperative, V' 51^; ''HH, Dt 2^* ^^ ^HH hegin, possess; P3J, La 4^'* fc^bll
^yj^ ^?^V^ without mens being able to touch, &c.; '^^^ = quickly, in the
perfect, yj/- 106^^ ; in the imperative, Gn 19^^, Ju 9^^, Est 6'". — Other
examples are: Ho 9' ?''^)^]}. = deeply, radically; Zp 3^ U^'ZpiJzn early
(even in the participle. Ho 6'', 13^); Is 29'' ??^^'=low, cf. Jeri3'^;
Jos 3'® WOJ^ =. wholly ; >//■ 112^ "^1^= plentifully.
Rem. This co-ordination without the copula belongs (as being more fl
vigorous and bolder) rather to poetic or otherwise elevated style (cf. e.g.
Is 62^, Ho i^, 9^ with Gn 25^ &c.). Asyndeton, however, is not wanting
even in prose ; besides the above examples (especially the imperatives of
Dip and T]^n Gn 3o»S Dt !», 2", Jos 3I6, i S 3^) cf. also Neh 320, i Ch 132. For
special reasons the verb representing the principal idea may even come first ;
thus Is 53II ya^s nX"1^ he shall see, he shall be satisfied (sc. with the sight), for
the satisfaction does not come until after the enjoyment of the sight ; Jer 4^
?KpP ^^<1i5 cr«/, fill, i, 6. cry with a full (loud) voice.
§ 121. Construction of Passive Verhs,
Blake, 'The internal passive in Semitic,' JAOS. xxii.
1. Verbs which in the active take one accusative (either of the a
proper object, or of the internal object, or of some other nearer
definition; cf. § 117 a, p, u) may in the passive, according to our
mode of expression, be constmed personally, the object of the active
sentence now becoming the subject, e.g. Gn 35'^ "'?i?'^l ^Hl DOril and
Rachel died, and was buried, &c. The passive, however, is also
used impersonally (in the 3rd sing, masc), either absolutely, as Dt 21^'",
Is 16'", Ez 16^'' (with a dative added, 2 S 17'^ Is 53", La 5^), or, more
frequently, with the object of the active const j-uction still subordinated
in the accusative,' e.g. Gn 27^^ Vb^JJ nzi'^-nK ni^anf) ns'l and there tcere
told. (I.e. one told) to Rebekah the words of Esau; 2 S 21", i K 18'^.
1 When tliis is not recognizable either by the nota accusatiri, or by its
disagreement with the passive form in gender, number, and person, it
C C 2
388 The Parts of Speech [§121 h-d
h other examples are : after Niph., Qn 4" Tl"'y"riK TllSn^ l.c'J*! ^^'^ "'^*<'
Enoch was born Irad (cf. Nu 26®*, and after an infinitive, Gn 21'') ; Gn 17^, 21*
(after an infinitive); 29^ (unless HiWI is ist plur. cohortative) ; Ex 21**,
25*8, Lv 6i», Nu 710 (after an infinitive) ;" 26^' (cf. verse 53) ; Dt 208 (where,
however, for DJS"" the Hiph. DQ^ should be read, according to i^') ; Jos J^^j
Is 161"; with the object preceding, Ex 13'', Lv 2*, ig^°, Nu 16^', Dan g'^*.^—
Also after Pu'al, Jer 50"^" ; before Pu'al, Is 14S ('IB'X equivalent to the internal
object T]li'2]} = which they have caused to be served by thee) ; Jb 22' ; according to
the Masoretic text also Gn 46^2, where, however, the Samaritan and LXX
read ni^"' for l-C ; the Samaritan in Gn 352« and 46" also reads W?'' , and
t: it -■; •■ 'T
this (or T?"") should certainly be read instead of HP^ in 2 S 21*2.— After Hoph.,
Ex 108, 27''," Lv 10", i62T, Nu 32^ 1 K 2^1, Pr i6s», Jb 301^ ; after the infinitive
Hoph,, Gn 40^2°, Ez i6<'-, 27^; before Hoph., Is if, 212, Ho io«, Zc I3« ; after
the infinitive Hothpa'el, Lv 1366'-
C 2. Verbs which in the active take two accusatives ^§117 cc) retain
in the passive construction at least one accusative, namely that of the
second or remoter object, whilst the nearer object now becomes
the subject. Thus, corresponding to ^I?")^ "^W^; which I will show thee
(Gn 12') the passive is nxno r\m -IB'^{ (Ex 25^) which thou hast been
shown, i.e. which has been shown to thee ; cf. Ex 26'° (but in Lv 13^'
with an accusative of the person); Jb 7^ In >//• 22'* ""jQ^Pr^ P?1?
depends on an assumed transitive p"*?*]"? governing two accusatives
(= my tongue is made to cleave to my jaws); also in Is i^, v3NJp 3"in
ye shall be devoured with the sword, 3*5^ is not an accus. instrumenti,
but most probably an accusative of the object retained from the active
construction.^
u Rem. I . Examples of the retention of the second accusative are — (a) with
verba induendi and exuendi (§ 117 cc), \p^d^^, H?if D''*in ?D3 the mountains were
covered with the shadow of it (the vine) ; Pr iq^^. So also some of the examples
in § ii6 fc of passive participles of these verbs, Ju iS^i, i S 2I*, 17^, i K 221°,
naturally cannot be determined whether the construction is really imper-
sonal. The construction itself can only be explained by supposing that while
using the passive form the speaker at the same time thinks of some author
or authors of the action in question, just as on the theory of the Arab
grammarians a concealed agent is included in every passive. This accounts for
the possibility (cf. § 144 £f) of using the active without a specified subject
as a periphrasis for the passive.
1 In 2 K 18'" |ri3^ is to be read or "HN is to be omitted, as in the parallel
passage Is 36^®.
^ In the active, the sentence would be I will cause the sword to devour you ;
by the rule stated above, under c, this would become in the passive, the sword
(nom.) shall be made to devour you (ace). Instead of this, the remoter object
is here made the subject, and the nearer object is retained in the accusative.
Otherwise, the only possible explanation would be, according to the Arabic
idiom, to cause one to devour the sword (remoter object), i.e. to give him over to it.
It would then be simplest to read v^^^^l.
'»•'
§§121 e,/, 1 22 a] Construction of Passive Verbs 389
Ez 923 ; 1 with the accusative preceding, Neh 4^^ — (h) with verba copiae and
inopiae, Ex 1', Is 381° (equivalent to I must forego the residue of my years) ;
Is 4020.— (c) an accusative of the result (§ 117 n) with the passive, Is 6",
Zc 14*, Jb 282 . ^vith the accusative preceding, Is 24'^, Mi 312 (Jer 26"), Jb is',
22i*.2 Also in Ez 40^'' and j\6^, the accusative preceding ""ICJ? (in 41^* follow-
ing it) can only be taken as the accusative of the result ; some general idea,
such as that of place, is to be understood as the subject of MtJ'y. — (d) an
accusative of the member or part specially affected by the action (§ 117 ^0»
Gn 17", 142*, Ju 1'' (accusative be/ore part, pass.); 2 S 15'^ (accusative with
suffix after the part. pass.).
2. Both accusatives are retained in an unusual manner after the passive of e
a verbum implendi in Nu 14^1 ; instead, however, of the Niph. KPS^I the Qol
(which is sometimes used transitively elsewhere) should simply be read with
the LXX; similarly in \p 72^', although there the LXX also translate the
passive.
3. The efficient cause (or personal agent) is, as a rule, attached to f
the passive by ? (thus corresponding to the Greek and Latin dative),
e. g. Gn 25^^' nin^ y? iriV^l the Lord let himself he inireated by him; of.
Lv 26^, \j/ 73'" and the blessing >^i>^''^ t^^i^ 'Jl'i'^? blessed be he of the Lord
Ku2^»; cf. Gni4", Jnif\ 1815'^ also in the plural, 1823^'
(2 S 2'% ^ 115'*). — Before the verb, Pr 14^ and frequently; less com-
monly by "p? (called "|l? of origin = comjw^f from), e. g. Gn 9" ; before
the verb, >//■ 37^, Jb 24'; by 3 (instrumenti) [rarely, Konig § 106],
Gn 9^ (D'^^5^ by man) ; Nu 36^, Is 14"" \\)Vii 'i — wherevnth it was worked
(§ 52 e) with thee; cf Dt 21^ Konig § 106; and see 3 I^V in the
Lexicon], Ho 14*, always to introduce a personal agent. — On the con-
nexion of the passive participle with a genitive of the agent, cf. § 1 16 Z.
II. Syntax of the Noun.
§ 122. Indication of the Gender of the Noun.
Cf. F. Schwabe, Die Genusbestimmung des Nomens im bibl. Hebr., Jena, 1894, and
especially the thorough investigation by K. Albrecht, * Das Gesclilecht der
hebr. HauptwOrter,' in ZAW. 1895, p. 313 ff,, and 1896, p. 61 fif. H. Rosenberg,
'Zum Geschlecht der hebr. HauptwOrter,' in ZAW. 1905, p. 325 ff. (supple-
menting Albrecht's work by a treatment of the gender of many nouns in the
Mishna) ; and his 'Notizen aus der tannaitischen Literatur . . .' ZAW. 1908,
p. 144 ff.
1. According to § 80 a, Hebrew, like the other Semitic languages, a
distinguishes only a masculine and feminine gender. To indicate *he
1 Analogous to D^''|3n tJ''l2?n who was clothed in linen, Ez 9', would be "iniHH^
n-tn pDnn'nS a Ch 3110 ; but we must certainly read there '\Tf\l\ with the
LXX. — Still less can \p 87' be so explained, ni*1333 being not an accusative,
but the subject of a noun-clause. On the other hand, n^7^ i K 14^ may be
explained with Ewald in the sense of being charged with something, so that,
like n'lif, it may be construed with an accusative.
2 In reality D"^*1 Ex 16^^ {it became putrid) is equivalent to a passive {it uas
changed), to which D''y-'in is added as an accusative of the result.
390 The Parts of Speech [§ 122 &-/
latter a special feminine ending is generally used (§ 80 b and § 871)
both in the singular and plural (see, however, § 87^), its use being
most consistent in adjectives and participles ; cf. § 87 r. The employ-
ment of these special endings is most natural when by means of them
the feminine names of persons or animals are distinguished from the
masculine of the same stem and the same formation, e. g. HK brother,
niriK sister ; D^J? a young man, HOpy a young woman, maid ; "^S
iuvencus, niB iuvenca ; ?55^ vitulus, npjy vitula. On the other hand,
the feminine plays an important part in denoting the gender of whole
classes of ideas (see below, p, &c.), which the Hebrew regards as
feminine. The language, however, is not obliged to use the feminine
ending either for the purpose of distinguishing the sex of animate
objects (see b), or as an indication of the (^figurative) gender of in-
animate things which are regarded as feminine (see h).
I) 2. The distinction of sex may be effected even without the feminine
ending, (a) by the employment of words of different stems for the
masculine and feminine; (6) by the different construction (either as
masculine or feminine) of the same word {communia). But the dis-
tinction may also, (c) in the case of names of animals, be entirely
neglected, all examples of a species being included under one particular
gender, either masculine or feminine [epicoena).
C Examples of (a) are : DK father, DK mother ; P"'X ram, pni ewe ; K'^F) he-goat,
TV she-goat ; liOn he-ass, [iDN she-ass ; H'l'IS lion, X^Zl? lioness. Sometimes
with the feminine ending as well, e.g. 13y male slave, man-servant, HDN or
nnSB' female slave, maid ; |nn bridegroom, n?3 bride.
(I Of (&) : PD3 camel. Plur. D"'?1C3 construed as masculine, Gn 24^ ; as
feminine, Gn 32^^ ; "1p3 collect, oxen, Ex 21^^, construed as masculine, but in
't T <
Gn 33^3^ jb ii4 as feminine. In Jer 2*4 i\^q construction of iTIS wild ass,
changes directly from the masculine (intended as epicene) to the feminine.
Cf. the Greek 6, ^ irats' 6, -q fiovs.
Q Of (c) : analogous to the epicene nouns of other languages, many species of
animals which are strong and courageous, are regarded in Hebrew as always
masculine, while the weak and timid are feminine ; cf. o Xvkos, ^ x*^'^""')
and the German der Lowe, der Adler, &c., but die Katze, die Taube, &c. Simi-
larly in Hebrew, e.g. f]^?K ox {\jj 144^* even referring to cows when pregnant),
y^ bear, Ho 13* ?^3B' li'l (a bear that is bereaved of her whelps; cf., however,
a K 2^*, Is 1 1''), 3K1 wolf, 2p3 dog, all masculine ; but 033"!^ hare, rOI* dove,
m^On stork, miQ'n bee, nbD2 ant, &c., feminine.
T--: 't: tt; ' '
/* Rem. I. Masculine nouns which either have a separate feminine form or
might easily form one, are but seldom used as epicene ; such are, liDH ass,
2 S IQ^'' for ]\m ; bl^ hart, f 42^ for H^'K. In Gn 233^- riD a dead borfj/,-refers
more especially to the body of a woman ; poX a master workman, in Pr 8'°
refers to wisdom (nD3n feminine, cf. Plin. 2, i natura omnium artifex ; and our
§ 122 g-i"} hidication of the Gender of the Noun 391
uae of friend, teacher, servant, neighbour, either as masculine or feminine; in
German, Gemahl i spouse, also for fern. Gemahlin, Sec).
2. Of words denoting persons iy5 tois, according to the formerly common g
opinion, was in early times used as epicene (see, however, above, § 2 n).
The use of the plural D"''iyD in Jb i^* and Ku 2^^ in the sense of young people
(of both genders) does not, however, prove this. In this and in similar
cases (cf. e.g. DflX 6n 1*'' and DHri^ 32^) the masculine as prior gender includes
the feminine.2
3. The following classes of ideas are usually regarded as feminine,' h
although the substantives which express them are mostly without the
feminine ending : *
(a) Names of countries and towns, since they are regarded as the
mothers ^ and nurses of the inhabitants ; e. g. "I^E'i? Assyria, D^.^^
Idumaea, *lif Tyre] cf. also such expressions as -'93 02^ p>^ n? daughter
vf Babylon, daughter of Zion, &c. On the other hand appellatives
which are originally masculine, remain so when used as place-names,
e. g. Am 5^ V^'?, i'?l'?Li, &c.
•
Rem. The same proper nouns, which as names of countries are regarded I
as feminine, are frequently used also as names of the people, and may then,
like national nan\es in other languages, be construed as masculine (the
national name almost always being used also as the personal name of the
supposed ancestor of the people); thus m^H^ masc. Is 3*, &c., Judaei; but
^ So in early Arabic, ha'l (lord) and &au^ (conjux) are used both for martins
and uxor ; 'arUs for bridegroom and biide ; the later language, however, distin-
guishes the feminine from the masculine in all these cases generally by the
ending a {at). In early Arabic also the feminine ending is commonly omitted
in such participles as hdmil, batin (gravida), and the like, which from the
nature of the case can only be Used of females. Thus also |DN, at least in
Nu 11" (Is 49^^^?), probably means nurse (for DiDN 2 S 4*, &c.), not nursing-
father.
^ The Arab grammarians call this use of the masculine plural and dual
(e.g. el-abaicani, the two fathers, i.e. pafentes) taghlib or the making (the
masculine) prevail (over the feminine). — Cf. M. Griinert, Die Begriffs-Prdpon-
deranz und die Duale a potiori im Altarab., Vienna, 1886.
' The masculine gender is attributed ' by the Hebrews and the Semites
generally to whatever is dangerous, savage, courageous, respected, great,
strong, powerful . . . ; the feminine to whatever is motherly, productive,
sustaining, nourishing, gentle, weak, . . » subject, &c.' (Albrecht, ZAW. 1896,
p. 120 f.).
* When, on the other hand, words with a feminine-ending, such as T\y^\>
a how (stem K'lp), T\\l time (see the Lexicon), are sometimes construed as
masculine, this is owing probably in some cases to a misunderstanding of the
formation of the word, the 0 of the feminine being regarded as a radical.
^ Cf. a city and a mother (DN) in Israel, 2 S 20^^ In the same way DN (like
firiTrfp, mater) on Phoenician coins stands for mother-city, fxrjrpovoXis. The same
figure is used in such expressions as sons of Zion, if/ 149* ; sons of Babylon,
Ez 23!^, &c., as also in speaking of the suburbs of a city as its davghleis, e. g.
.Tos 16*'^-, &c. — The comparison of Jerusalem to a woman is especially
frequent in allegorical descriptions, o. g. Ez ib"^^, La i', &c.
392 The Parts of Speech [§ 122 ico
Is 7', fem., Judaea; DIN masc, Jdumaei, Nu 20^"; fem., Idumaea, Jer 49",
Nevertheless, it sometimes happens that by a very common transference of
thought (just as we say Turkey concludes peace) tliese names are construed as
feminine, even when they denote not the country but the inliabitants ; so
nni-T La i3; cf. Gn 41*, Ex 10'', 1233, i s 1721, 2 S 8^, 24', Is f, 21^, 42'',
Jer 50^°, Jb I's. Hence the frequent personification of nations (as well as of
countries and towns, see h, note 5) as female beings, e.g. Is 50^ 54^ *'>
and the use of the expressions 7211 03 Is 47^ ''■, fi'if 03 &c. (see above) as
collective poetical personifications of the people.
k (b) Appellative nouns, which denote a circumscribed space, such as
n? earth, land, ??0 world, ?i^f the abode of the dead, "^3? circle (of
the Jordan valley), ">^V « tovm, "I*?? a well, pSif the north, JD'-ri the south.
I In the majority of nouns denoting place the gender is variable, e.g. PIIN
and Tjl^ a way (usually feminine ; the masculine gender only begins to pre-
dominate with Ezekiel ; cf. Albrecht, 1. c, 1896, p. 55), N^3 C?) valley, |3 garden
(fem. Gn 2^^, unless ni^yiJ, &c., is to be read), ?3'n palace, tempk, "12fn court,
W)3 vineyard, lytJ' door,^ &c. ; also U\p1D place, at least in Gn 18'* (referring to
Sodom), Jb 20®, and 2 S 1 7^^ K'thibh, is construed as feminine. The mountains
and hills commanding the surrounding country are almost without exception
masculine (see Albrecht, I.e., p. 60 f.).
jjl (c) The names of instruments, utensils, and (on the same analogy)
members and parts of the body in man or beast, since these are all
regarded as subservient and subordinate (consequently as feminine).
fl Thus ann sword, *iri^ tent-peg, ^^ bucket, 013 cup, ?]}2 shoe, ^]3 bed, &c. ; in
other cases, as fr\V> chest, ark (with the article filXH), "1^30 oven, the gender is
variable. ('Instruments for binding or holding, girdles and the like, as
constraining and mastering, are masculine,' Albrecht, I.e., p. 89.) — Also
fix ear (and in general, members occurring in pairs, Albrecht, 1. c, p. 73 f.),
ySifS finger (and so probably fn3 thumb, great toe), *T^ and S|3 hand, pO^ right
hand, 7y},foot, X\'\3 knee, T]"l^ thigh, P]ri3 shoulder, ^n^J cheek, Jt23 belly, P)33 wing,
pj? horn, ^ tooth ; as a rule also y^")T arm (masc. Is 17', &c.), pCJ'^ tongue (masc.
^ 22", Pr 26=8, &c.), [^y eye (masc. Zc 3', &c.), pitT thigh (masc. Ex 29").2
Q {d) Certain names of natural forces or substances are feminine,
being probably regarded as instruments, while in the names of the
heavens, the heavenly bodies and natural phenomena, the masculine
generally predominates (cf. Albrecht, I.e., p. 323 ff.) ; thus feminine
are ^^ sun (but often also masc, yff 19^ 104"); K'N (Ethiopic 'esdt)
^ nsntD camp is feminine only when it is a collective, denoting the persons
in a camp. . ,
2 CIS tiose, T'S sinew, D3t tail, "^tl palate, nn3 liver, 37, 337 heart, D>yD^ D'^Jpni
bowels, D'^b forehead, "liy skin, P)"iy back of the neck, nS mouth, "IN^if neck, B'XI head,
DDB* shoulder, also DriT womb, except in Jer 20^'', are invariably construed as
< * '
masculine. — D2fy bone is common.
§ 122 p-r} Indicatio7i of the Gender of the Noun 393
fire (rarely masc.) ; HJi brightness, P^ a stone, as a rule also nil wind,
spirit; IJ'Sa breath, soul; also "IIN light in Jer 13"^, Jb 36^% and other?.
4. The following classes of ideas, which are also regarded asJJ
feminine in Hebrew (see aljove, h), are usually indicated by the
feminine form, notwithstanding their occasional transference to mascu-
line persons (see r and s) :
(a) Abstracts 1 (sometimes along with masculine forms from the same (i
stem, as nOi53 vengeance, as well as Dp3^ HlTj; help, as well as "liy), e, g. HJIDN
firmness, faithfulness, rHM^ strength, nbllj greatness, Hxbo fullness, ilpB'tpp
dominion, &c. Similarly, the feminine (sing, and plur.) of adjectives and
participles is used substantivally in the sense of the Latin and Greek neuter,
e. g. n3iD3 stedfasitiess, \p 510, nnit3 goodness, njJ"! euiZ, Gn 5020, n^p3 a h'fif/ii thing
(i.e. a trifling thing), Jer 6"; so especially in the plural, e.g. nvIS great
things, f 12*; DlO'inSn the ruined places, Ez 36^*, along with r^SK'Sn that which
ivas desolate, DlDb kindnesses, 2 K 25^8, ninbJ uprightness, honesty, Is 26^*', HiO^yj
amoena, f r6'^ (but in verse 6 in the same sense D^D^y3), niN?D3 wonderfid
things, Ex 34IO and frequently, JlS^^p hard things, roughly^ Gn ^2''-^'> (but cf. also
D^p^"l vain things, Pr 12^^, 28^*). Cf. moreover, the very frequent use of nST,
X"*!! (as well as n"( and NIH), Ju 14*, \t 118^*, &c, in the sense of hoc, illud (also
rt^Ti equivalent to ilia, Is 51*') : also the use of the feminine form of the verb
in Is ;'' DTin X?1 DIpJl N? '' shall not stand, neither shall it come to pass ; cf.
Jer 10'' ; so too the suffixes Gn 15*, Ex 10^', Jb 38^', referring back to a whole
statement.^
(6) Titles and designations of office, properly a subdivision of the abstract V
ideas treated above, under q, and specially noticed here only on account of
their peculiar transference to concrete male persons. Thus we have roi^p
Ec 1^, &c. (as a title of Solomon), properly no doubt that which takes part in or
sj}eaks in a religious assembly, hence LXX (KtKrjaiaaTTii, i. e. concionator, preacher ;
the proper names n^QD Ezr 2^^, Neh 7^'', and JT^DS Ezr 2", Neh 7'*, and the
foreign word nns viceroy ; in the plural niJS prop, cognomina, then like-named,
colleagues ; J^SV^Q princes (if this be the true meaning).^ All these words, in
accordance with their meaning, are construed as masculine (in Ec 7" instead
of 'p rnpS the words should rather be divided as 'pH IDN; of. 12*).
^ Cf. the list of masculine and feminine abstracts in Albrecht, i.e., 1896,
p. Ill ff.
^ While in all these instances it is simplest to speak of the feminine in
Hebrew as being used for the neuter (which in Latin, Greek, and German is
commonly employed for similar purposes"*, it must yet not be forgotten that
since the language is wholly wanting in neuters, the Semitic mind regarded
the above-mentioned forms primarily as actual feminines. Wence the Arab
commentators are accustomed to explain tlie feminines of adjectives and
participles (which would be neuter in Latin, &c.) by supplying a feminine
substantive.
* This use of the feminine form is far more frequent in Arabic, Ethiopic,
and Aramaic ; cf. e. g. in Arabic halifa (fern, from halif, following after,
taking the place of) in the sense of the successor or representative (of
Muhammad 1, and 'alldma {great wisdom) as a title of learned men. Analogous
to this is the Latin magistrattis, magistracy, for magistrate, and our his Majesty,
Excellency, Highness, &c.
394 The Parts of Speech [§§ 122 s-v, 123 a
S Abstract ideas include also —
(c) Oollectives in the fern. form,i generally fern, participles used substantivally,
especially as the comprehensive designation of a number of persons, e. g. niTlK
(fem. of travelling), prop, the travelling (company), i. e. travelling persons
(a caravan) ; npia (fem, of TVl one going into exile) the company of exiles (also
frequently used of those who had returned home again) ; T\2^V (that w^hich
inhabits) i.e. the population, Is I2«, Mi i^^ '• ; D^^N (prop, that which is hostile)
the enemy, Mi y^-io (cf. Mi 4* '• the halting, cast off, driven away, i. e. those who halt,
&c.) ; n?^ (the abject) the poorest sort ; of living beings which are not persons,
cf. ri*n (that which lives) in the sense of cattle, beasts ; nj'n a shoal offish, Gn i^^*
(but in Jon 2* as a nomen unitatis, cf. t, for 3"^ a fish, which in verses 1 and n
IS used as the nomen unitatis). Cf., moreover, n^33 dead body. Is 26^®, &c.
(construed as masculine), for "a heap of dead bodies. — On the collective poetic
personification of a nation, by means of ^12 daughter, in 722 03, "•Oy 03
(equivalent to ^SJJ ''33) my countrymen, see above, i.
t id) Conversely the feminine form of substantives is sometimes used (as in
Arabic) as a nomen unitatis, i. e. to indicate a single example of a class which
is denoted by the masculine form ; cf. ""JN a fleet (i K 9^28), n»3X a single ship
(Jon i^^-) ; l>i hunting, game, nTiif Gn 27' K'th. (l^V Q*re) a piece of venison;
"iyb> hair (coll.), iTjyb' a single hair (Ju 20« ; in the plural, \p 40", 69^) ; 1"^
a poem, frequently collective, ni^E' a single song ; so probably also nJSJl a fig
(the corresponding masculine tin is collective in Arabic) ; nSB'iti^ o lilji (also
.. . ; T- I
IB'iB') ; n33p a brick (Arab, libina, but libin collective), &c.
U («) The feminine is also used for things without life (as being weaker or less
important), which are named from their resemblance to organic things
expressed by the corresponding masculine form ; cf. T]"l^ side (of the body),
thigh, n3"l^ or HS"!^ back part, border (of a country, house, &c.) ; PIXD forehead,
nnXjp greaves. On a similar distinction between the masculine for natural,
and the feminine for artificial objects, see § 87 0.
V Rem. The juxtaposition of the masculine and feminine from the same stem
serves sometimes to express entirety ; e. g. Is 3^ Hiyt'DI IJ^^P *'<*2/ aM<^ staff,
i.e. every kind of support (unless we omit verse 1" as a gloss and take staff us
= staff-bearer, official; the list of officials begins in verse 2) ; cf. Is 16®, Pr 8^'.
For similar groupings in the case of persons, see Is 43^, 49*^, 60* (sons and
daughters) ; 49^3, Ec 2*.
§ 123. The Representation of Plural Ideas by Means of
Collectives, and by the Repetition of Words.
a Besides the plural endings treated in § 87 a-i, the language era-
ploys other means to express a plurality of living beings or things :
(a) Certain words employed exclusively in a collective sense, while
the individual members of the class are denoted by special words
{nomina unitatis, but not in the same sense as in § 122 t).
^ Cf. in Greek ^ 'tmroi, the cavalry (as well as rb iirniKSi'), 1) KdixrjKos, Hdt.
1, 80, &c., the camel corps.
§ 123 6, c] The Representation of Plural Ideas, etc. 395
Thus "Ip2 cattle, oxen^ (even joined with numerals, e.g. Ex 2i"1pl n^On
five head of cattle), but "sS^ an ox ; |NJf small cattle, i.e. sheep and goats (/i^A.a),
cf. Jb i» fXysSj* nyDK' seven thousand sheep; but nb' a single head of small
cattle (a sheep oV a goat). Other more or less common collectives are : V]
(prop, that which prowls or roams) wild beasts, t|t3 (perhaps prop, tripping)
a number of little children ; ii^"^ fresh green herb, i.e. young plants, pi*" green, i.e.
vegetation in general ; P)iy birds, fowl ; 33T chariots or cavalcade, nD") worms,
CDT creeping things (of small creatures), J^'IB' sicarming things.
ih) The collective use of substantives which at the same time sei-ve h
as nomina unitatis ; thus, D")^ (never in plur.) means both man (homo)
and men (homines) ; K'"'N a man (vir) and men (viri) ; •"'K'K woman and
women (Ju2i'®, 1821®); *^'y^ a locust, but usually a swarm, of
locusts ; K'S3 soul and somZs (persons) ; ^i?P s<«^ and staves (Gn so'') ;
t3^y a bird of jyrey and Urds of prey ; nby a leaf and foliage ; ^K'^
a plant sxuik plants, herbs; YV. « ^^ee and <r««s (as it were foliage) ; ^^S
/rw?i and fruits ; H'^K' a s^rwJ and shrubs ; in isolated instances also
nouns like T^V ^nan-servant, nnSB' maid-servant, l^t^H ass, "^IK' oaj (cf.
Gn32''). — On the singular (especially of gentilic names) with the
article (which may, however, be omitted in poetry, cf. e. g. -^/^ 1 2^
TDH, Pr 11'^ fff") to include all individuals of the same species, cf.
§ 126 ?. On the special meaning of the plurals formed from certain
collectives, see § 124 Z.
(c) The feminine ending ; see § 122 s.
'{d) The repetition of single words, and even of whole groups of C
words, especially to express entirety, or in a distributive sense. The
following cases are more particularly to be noticed :
I. The repetition of one or more words to express the idea of every, all,
as DV DV Gn 391", &c., day by day, every day; njtj' nJB' year by year, Dt 14^*;
iJ'^X K'^N every man, Ex 36* ; with 3 before each, as "Ipfs "lp23 Ex 16" every
morning (and similarly before a group of words, Lv 24*), for which the
distributive p is also used, "lp3P "1p£^ i Ch 9*'', and with one plural DnpS?
^ 7i^*) D^liJ?? Jb 7^^ parallel with D''y3"ip every moment. Somewhat different
are the instances with 3 before the second word only, e. g. DV3 DV day by
day, I Ch 1222 ; njB'n H^K' year by year, Dt is**, 1 S 1' (but in verse 3
nD''JpJ COJD), DySS DyD3 Nu 24», Ju 1620, 20""-, i S z^" as at other times. Also
with the two words united by means of waw copulative, K"N1 CJ'^N ^ 87^, or
E'''N1 t:'''t< Est 18 ; nnj in a« generations, Dt 32' ; DVI Dl^ Est 3*; cf. Est 8',
* The plural form D''^p3 from "lp3 is found only in very late Hebrew,
Neh 10" (where according to the Mantua edition, Ginsburg, &c., even ^J^JKX
our sheep, is also to bo read ; Baer, however, has ^iJNX), and 2 Ch 4^ la
Am 6" read, with Hitzig, D"" np33.
396 The Parts of Speech [§§123^-/, 124 a
Ezr 10^*, I Ch 26^' and often (cf. Cheyne, Bampton Lectures, 1889, p. 479,
according to whom the use of the "I copulative with the second word is
especially common in Ch and Est, and therefore belongs to the later
language ; Driver, Introd.^, p. 538, No. 35) ; sometimes (but with the exception
of ^t 45I* only in very late passages) with a pleonastic "^3 preceding, if/ 145^',
Est 2", 9*8, 2 Ch 1 1", &c.
U 2. Repetition of words in an expressly distributive sense ^ (which may to
some extent be noticed in the examples under c) equivalent to one each, &c.,
e. g. Nu J 4^* forty days r\wb Di'' nJtJ'p Dl^ counting for every day a year ; cf. Ez 24',
Ex 28'* (three words repeated) ; also with the addition of 13? apart,
^"HD? "11)^ "llj^ eiery drove by itself, Gn 32^'' ; cf. Zc 12''^. Most frequently with
the addition of a numeral (for the simple repetition of numerals for the
same purpose, cf. § 1345), and with the words not only in groups of two
(Lv 24^ Nu 13*, 31*) or three (Nu 7II, ly^^), but even of six (Ex 26') or seven
(Ex 25^3, 26^^'^^-^^) ; in Ex 25^^ five words even three times repeated.^
£ 3. Repetition to express an exceptional or at least superfine quality; e.g.
2 K 25!^ which were of gold, gold, of silver, silver, i. e. made of pure gold and pure
silver ; Dt 2^'' Tufs 'HT!?.? onZj/ along by the high way ; cf. Nu 38, 8*^ they are
given, given to him, i.e. given exclusively for his service, for his very own.
Also with a certain hyperbole in such examples as 2 K 3^^ 0*33 0^33 nothing
but trenches ; Gn 14^° "lOn riiX3 niN3 all asphalt-pits. — Repetition serves to
intensify the expression to the highest degree in Ju 5^2 ly reason of the violent
pransings of his strong ones, Ex S*" (countless heaps), and Jo 4'* {countless multitudes) ;
cf. also tDyp Dyp Ex 23^0 by little and little, very gradually; cf. § 133 A.
■P 4. Repetition with the copula to express of more than one kind ; thus Dt 25^'
•^ (Pr 20IO) pKI pS a weight and a weight, i.e. two kinds of weight (hence the
' V V T V V • •
addition great and small) ; ^' 1 2' 371 3j?3 with two kinds of heart, i. e. with a double-
dealing heart; cf. the opposite S;'! 3^ N^3 i Ch 12*'.
§ 124. The Various Uses of the Plural-form.^
a 1. The plural is by no means used in Hebrew solely to express
a number of individuals or separate objects, but may also denote them
collectively. This use of the plural expresses either (a) a combination
of various external constituent parts (plurals of local extension), or
{b) a more or leso intensive focusing of the characteristics inherent
in the idea of the stem {abstract plurals, usually rendered in English
by forms in -hood, -ness, -shiji). A variety of the plurals described
under (6), in which the secondary idea of intensity or of an inteimal
' Cf. in the New Testament St. Mark 6^' '■ aviiiroma avfiwoaia, vpaaiai npcKXiai
(Weizsacker, tischweise, beetuxise).
' These repetitions of larger groups of words belong entirely to the Priestly
Code in the Pentateuch, and are unquestionably indications of a late period
of the language. Of quite a different kind are such examples as Ez 16*,
where the repetition of four words serves to give greater solemnity to the
promise, unless here, as certainly in !*>, it is a mere dittography ; th« LXX
omit the repetition^in both passages.
» Cf. Dietrich, ' Uber Begriff und Form des hebr. Plurals,' in the Abhandl.
zur hebr. Grammatik, Leipzig, 1846, p. 2 ff.
§ 124 6-f] The Tarious Uses of the Plural-form 397
multiplication of the idea of the stem may be clearly seen, is (c) the
pluralis excellentiae or 2>luralis maiestatis.
Examples of (a) : Plurals o{ local extension to denote localities in general, but I)
especially level surfaces (the swr/ace-plural), since in them the idea of a whole
composed of innumerable separate parts or points is most evident, as D^DB'
(§ 88 d) heaven (cf. also D^DI'^D heights of heaven, Is 33^', Jb 16^'; elsewhere
Di"10) ; D^p water ; Wl^l (the broad surface of the sea) poetically for D'' sea ;
D'3B (prop, the side turned towards any one, then) surface in general, usually
face; C'linX the back, Ex 26^^ 33^3, &c., D''"}N15f "^^^^t *»«i'« of the neck'^; also
niB'X^K) the place at the head, ni?2'ip place at the feet ; C^Sy place on the other side
(of a'river) ; D''i5pyO depth, D^'pniO (also pHlD) distance^ D^33B'» bed, Gn 49*
(unless, with Dillmann, it is to be explained in the sense of double bed, i.e.
torus), D^iSB^O V 46S and ni33K'» 43^ 842, 132", dwelling (perhaps also D^f'nk
encampment, in passages like i S 4^°). The last four belong, however, to poetic
style, and are better reckoned amongst the plurals q/" amplification treated
under d-f. So perhaps W^^'^\ bed {\p 63'', Jb 17" ; but Gn 49*, ^ 132', &c., in
the singular) ; probably, however, D^ll^X^ (prop, strata) refers to a number of
coverings or pillows.
The plural of extension is used to denote a lengthened period of time in
D^pP^y eternity (everlasting ages).
Eem. The plural of extension includes also a few examples which were C
formerly explained as simply poetic plurals, e.g. Jb 17^ "ip D'l^p graves are
(ready) for me, i.e. the place where there are many of them (as it were the
graveyard) is my portion, Jb 21^2, 2 Ch 16" ; cf. 2 K 22^".
Of (6) : the tolerably numerous abstract plurals, mostly of a particular cl
form {(ftulim, qittulim, &c.), may be divided into two classes. They sum up
either the conditions or qualities inherent in the idea of the stem, or else the
various single acts of which an action is composed. Cf. for the first class,
Onina and nin^na youth, □"'jpt old age, On^yi youth ; D''f)5in3 maidenhood, lih^^
bridal state; 0^*1^30 condition of a sojourner, CI^H Jleshliness (only in Pr 14"),
D**n life (the abstract idea of the qualities of a living being) ; DvlSB' child-
lessn,ess, D^'iy D blindness, D^yiy perverseness.
There are also a number of plurals, found almost exclusively in poetry 6
(sometimes along with the singular), which are evidently intended to
intensify 2 the idea of the stem (plural of amplification), as D''3iK might,
Is 4o26 ; n''31»K (as well as HJ^bK) and D^iSON faithfulness ; nB'K (according
to § 93 I, only in the construct state plural or with suffixes = <Ae happiness of),
fiotppy; ni"1^3 (complete) prosperity, f 68'; n^3''3 Is 27^' and 0^3^20 Is 40",
&c. (keen) understanding ; niJfy (true) counsel, Dt 32«8 ; D^y-^ Jb 37" and niyi
* Cf. the same use of the plural in tol artpva, to. vSna, ra rpaxv^a, praecordia,
cervices, fauces ; on plurals of extension in general, cf. the prepositions of place
and time in the plur. form, § 103 n. D^'IDD is not a case in point, in the
sense of letter (properly a sheet folded into several pages ; elsewhere also
■1QD) I K 2i*''^-, 2 K 10^, 19" (Is 37" ; referred to afterwards by the singular
suflSx) ; Is 39*, Jer 29^', 32^* {after being folded, previously "IQD).
^ Cf. A. Ember, 'The pluralis intensivus in Hebrew,' .4 JSi. 1905, p. 195 ff.
398 The Parts of Speech [§124/,^
I S 2^ (thorough) knowledge; DintSB Jb 12® and DTI^^O 1332^' (full) confidence;
niOIB (abundant) blessing, \p 21''; nin^33 (exceptional) strength, Jb4i*; DHl
if/ 510 (very) ivickedness ; nin^JDH Dn 9^^^ (greatly) beloved ; fl^Dn rf 76^1, &c.
(fierce) wrath ; TliBin Dn 1 2^ (utter) coniemiH ; n^yK*^ (real) help, Is 26*^, &c. ;
nX")D Gn 46^ (an important) vision; D''"IE'^D uprightness; niSEHri perversity;
nicp3 (complete) vengeance, Ju 11^^, &c. ; D^3K-'n and D^3^n?2 (thick) darkness;
D"'"irib?p a (close) hiding-place; Dn''33 no&i7% ; D''30B' Is28Va<ness; n'ini'nX
(complete) aridity ; D"'i3riDp sweetness ; D^'^JlpHO preciousness ; Cytt^i/kJ* delight ;
D''3ny and D''33yn pleasure; D^orn compassion; nniJD ^ 23^ resJ, refreshment;
nblnb Am 39 <MmMZ<. Probably also n'T"*]^ (heartfelt) love, \p 45I ; DnnO
(extreme) bitterness, Jb 13^^ ; niD"!)p (base) deceit, \p 38" ; n*lpnif (true) righteous-
ness, Is 33'^, &c. ; niriDK' (the highest) jo!/, ^ i6^^ On the other hand, niDDn
wisdom (Pr i'^", &c.) can hardly be a plural ( = the essence of wisdom, or wisdom
personified), but is a singular (see § 86 I).
A further extension of this plural of amplification occurs according to
P. Haupt's very probable suggestion (SBOT. Proverbs, p. 40, line 50, &c.) in
C'lN"' the great river (of the Nile, generally "IN"") Is 7^", 19^ (though with the
predicate in the plural), Ez 30^2, ^ 78^*, but in Is 37^5, Ez 29' the usual explana-
tion, arms or channels of the Nile, can hardly be avoided ; also in niinj \(/ 24^ of
the ocean, ■\vhich encircles the earth, 137^ of the great river, i.e. the Euphrates,
but in Is 181 B'^J ''inj is evidently a numerical plural. — In Pr 161^ Cp^D
(ace, to P. Haupt = the great king) is very doubtful. In "'X"'b'3 Ez 19^ the
second yodh is evidently due to dittography, since /X'^b''' follows.
f The summing up of the several parts of an action is expressed in D^t33n
embalming, D''']33 atonement, D^XTO (prop, filling, sc. of the hand) ordination
to the priesthood, W^Txp'p dismissal, D''tD?B' retribution, CriDQ engraving (of a seal,
&c.) ; D"'3nX fornication, Ci^il whoredom, D''QX3 adultery; D''0n3 (prop, no doubt,
warm compassion) consolation, D^JIjnn supplication, D''"113 Jb 7* (restless) tossing
to and fro, CX^Q wonder La i', DvPy gleaning ; perhaps also 7113^33 4> 4^, 6', &c.,
if it means the playing on stringed instruments, and D''3bpK' Is i^' bribery, unless
it be a plural of numVjer.^
jor Of (c) : the plurdlis excellentiae or maiestaiis, as has been remarked above,
is properly a variety of the abstract plural, since it sums up the several
characteristics ^ belonging to the idea, besides possessing the secondary sense
of an intensification of the original idea. It is thus closely related to the
plurals of amplification, treated under e, which are mostly found in poetry.
^ Mayer Lambert in EEJ. xxiv. 106 flf., enumerates no less than ninety-five
words ending in Im, which in his opinion are to be regarded as pluralia
tantum,
2 The Jewish grammarians call such plurals ninSH ^^3"} plur. virium or
virtutum ; later grammarians call them plur. excellentiae, magnitudinis, or plur.
maiestaticus. This last name may have been suggested by the we used by kings
when speaking of themselves (cf. already i Mace, lo^^, 1 1'^) ; and the plural
used by God in Gn 1^^, 11'', Is 6* has been incorrectly explained in this way.
It is, however, either commv.nicatiie (including the attendant angels ; so at all
events in Is 6*, cf. also Gn 3^^^), or according to others, an indication of tlie
fullness of power and might implied in DTPX (see Dillmann on Gn i'*) ; but it
is best explained as a plural of self -deliberation. The use of the plural as a form
of respectful address is quite foreign to Hebrew.
§ 124*-^] The Various Uses of the Plural-form 399
So especially D''n^N Godhead, God (to be distinguished from the numerical
plural gods, Ex i i^"^, &c.). The supposition that D''ri?K is to be regarded as
merely a remnant of earlier polytheistic views (i.e. as originally only a
numerical plural) is at least highly improbable, and, moreover, would not
explain the analogous plurals (see below). That the language has entirely
rejected the idea of numerical plurality in DTDX (whenever it denotes one
God), is proved especially by its being almost invariably joined with a
singular attribute (cf. § 132 h), e.g. pi'^Jf D^HPN \p 7'°, &c. Hence D'^nPlJ? may
have been used originally not only as a numerical but also as an abstract
plural (corresponding to the Latin numen, and our Godhead), and, like other
abstracts of the same kind, have been transferred to a concrete single god
(even of the heathen). ,
To the same class (and probably formed on the analogy of D^l^X) belong h
the plurals D''B'ni? the Most Holy (only of Yahweh), Ho 12^, Pr pi", 30' (cf.
D''5J'1i? W^W Jos 24", and the Aram, pjvjjj? the Most High, Dn 7I8.22.25) . ^nd
probably CDlfl (usually taken in the sense of penates) the image of a god,
used especially for obtaining oracles. Certainly in i S 191316 only one image
is intended ; in most other places a single image may be intended 1 ; in Zc lo^
alone is it most naturally taken as a numerical plural. In Ec 5'' CHDJ
supremus (of God) is doubtful ; according to others it is a numerical plural,
superiores.
Further, Di^hX, as well as the singular filN, (lordship) lord, e.g. r\tf\) Ci^X I
a cruel lord. Is 19*; J^'INn \3hK the lord of the land, Gn 42*0, cf. Gn 321^; so
especially with the suffixes of the 2nd and 3rd persons ^''3"'^ ^^^"'^ ^ 45^^
VilK, &c., also ^3''3nN (except i S 16") ; but in ist sing, always ^j'nX .^ So
also D''py3 (with suffixes) lord, master (of slaves, cattle, or inanimate things ;
but in the sense of maritus, always in the singular), e.g. V^JJB Ex 21^,
Is i', &c.* I
On the other hand, we must regard as doubtful a number of participles in "-'
the plural, which, being used as attributes of God, resemble plurales ex-
cellentiae; thus, "'b'y my Maker, Jb 3510; •j^B'y Is 54^; Vfe'V ^ 149^; n''b'y
Is 22" ; Dn''DiJ stretching them out. Is 42* ; jfor all these forms may also be
explained as singular, according to § 93 ss.* — Vfc'Ji Is 3^^ might also be
regarded as another instance, unless it be a numerical plural, their oppressors ;
moreover, VD^'ID him icho li/teth it up. Is lo^^ (but read probably iD"*")©) ;
Vnpb' him who sendeth him, Pr lo^^, 22" (so Baer, but Ginsburg ^npK'), 25" (in
pai-allelism with V^nX). These latter plurals, however (including VD"""!©),
may probably be more simply explained as indicating an indefinite in-
dividual, cf. 0 below. — For ^''liolf' ^t' 121^ (textus receptus) and ''J"'Nli3 Ec 12I
(textus receptus) the singular should be read, with Baer.
1 Even in Gn 31**, notwithstanding the plural suffix in DlDK'ril and DHvy,
since the construction of these abstracts as numerical plurals is one of the
peculiarities of the E-document of the Hexateuch ; cf. Gn 201^, 35'', and
§ 145 '• .
* On '•jnK (for '•anS) as a name of God, cf. § 135 ?.
' Euting, Reise in Arabien, p. 61, mentions the interesting fact that the
subjects of the Emir of Hayel commonly speak of their ruler as hyukh, a plur.
majestatis ^ the great sheikh.
* T|^?y3, which in Is 54^ is in parallelism with ^yK'y, must then be ex-
plained as merely formed on analogy.
400 The Parts of Speech [§ 124 i-q
I Rem. I. (a) Coherent substances, &c., are mostly regarded as single, and are,
accordingly, almost always represented by nouns in the singular, cf. p3N fine
dust, "IDS ashes, 12 linen, ?^"|3 lead, 3nT gold, C)D5 silver, HK'nJ brass, SpH milk,
]^^ wine, *13y dust, the ground, ^JJ wood. Plurals are, however, formed from
some of these words expressing materials in order to denote separate portions
taken from the whole in manufacture {plurals of the result) or parts otherwise
detached from it; thus, D'"13 linen garments; D''ElD3 silver pieces, Gn 42^'^;
D''^I6^'^3 (dual) fetters of brass ; D^ifJ^ ligna {timber for building or sticks for
burning) ; also in a wider sense, D"'p''']3 particles of alloy to be separated by
smelting, Is i''"; JTH^V fragments of earth, Pr 82«, cf. Jb 28« IHT THSiV dust
of gold.
f}l (&) To the class of plurals of the result belong also a few names of natural
products, when represented in an artificial condition ; thus, D^tSH wheat in
grain (threshed wheat), as distinguished from nisn wheat (used collectively)
in the ear ; cf. the same distinction between D"'jpD3 and ri)0E)3 spelt ; D'B'iy
and nC'iy (the singular preserved only in the Mishna) lentils ; D"''!'yb' and
nnyCJ' harley ; also D^'riB'S linen, Td'h (to be inferred from ''FiB'S) flax.
n (c) Finally, the distinction between D'l blood and COT requires to be
specially noticed. The singular is always used when the blood is regarded as
an organic unity, hence also of menstrual blood, and the blood of sacrifices
(collected in the basin and then sprinkled), and in Nu 23''* of the blood
gushing from wounds. On the other hand, D^D'H as a sort of plural of the
result and at the same time of local extension, denotes blood which is shed,
when it appears as blood-stains (Is i^^) or as blood-marks (so evidently
in Is 9*). But since blood-stains or blood-marks, as a rule, suggest blood
shed in murder (although D''l21 also denotes the blood which flows at child-
birth or in circumcision), D'^DI acquired (even in very early passages) simply
the sense of a bloody deed, and especially of bloodguiltiness, Ex 22^^-, &c.
0 In some few cases the plural is used to denote an indefinite singular ;
certainly so in Dt 17^ ^''nVB'"!?^ unto one of thy gates; Zc 9^ ni3hS"|3 (cf. Ct 2*) ;
Ex 21^2 nn^^ (where evidently only one child is thought of, though certainly
in connexion with a contingency which may be repeated) ; cf. also Ec 4^*'
(if one of them fall).— So probably also Gn 8*, 1 S 17*^, Dn 2^, Neh 38, 6^; hut not
Gn 19''*, since the same document (Gn 1312J makes Lot dwell in the cities of the
Jordan valley; in Gn 21'' D^33 denotes the class with which the action is
concerned. In Ju 12'' instead of the unusual lyisj *"iy3 in the cities of Gilead
T : • " T :
(formerly explained here as in one of the cities of Gilead) we should most pro-
bably read, with Moore {SBOT. Judges, p. 52), lyb? nSifOS n^y3 in his city, in
Mispeh (in) Gilead.
7) 2. When a substantive is followed by a genitive, and the compound
idea thus formed is to be expressed in the plural, this is done —
(a) Most naturally by using the plural of the nomen regens, e. g.
7^n nisa mighty men of valour (prop, heroes of strength), i Ch 7^-^;
80 also in compounds, e.g. ""i^Ot ''?3 1822^, as the plur. of "J^iPj'l^
Benjamite ; but also
q {b) By using the plural of both nouns,' e. g. D''|'^n nisa i Ch 7* ;
' Cf. KOnig, Lehrgebiiude, ii. 438 f., according to whom the plural of the
principal word exercises an influence on the determining genitive.
§§ 1 24 r,s, 125 a-c] VaHous Uses of the Plural-form 401
D'K^a ^nan^ and in prison houses, Is 42^' ; cf. Ex 34', &c., D''33K nhb-;:^
fwo tables of stone (but Ex 31'^ pK nh^); Nu I3'^ Dt r«, Jos 5^ 6*,
2 K 14", 25^ Is 5i», Jer 4i>«, Ezr 3^ &c. niX-jX'T ^?y <Ae 25«o;;?e of the
country; 2 Ch 26"; so perhaps Dv^? ''P.? sons of God, ■»//■ 29^ 89^
(according to others sons of gods) ; or finally even
(c) By using the plural of the nomen rectum ; * e. g. T\)2H IT'a Ex 6", r
Nu i'-""^-, &c., as plur. of 3N ri"'5 father's house, family ; niD3n n-^ <Ae
houses of the high places, 2 K \f^ (also ni03n ^ri2 23^'); Dn^21fJ? n^3
<Ae houses of their idols, i S 31®, Ez 46^'' ; cf. also Ju 7"* the head ofOreb
and Zeeb, i.e. the heads, <Src.
Kem. When a substantive (in a distributive sense) with a suffix refers S
back to a plural, the singular form of the substantive suffices, since the idea
of plurality is already adequately expressed by the suffix, e.g. iD'3 os (for ora)
eorum, i/*!?^"; D3''ID^ their right hand, ip 144^ [so in the English KV.], for
hands.
§ 125. Determination of Nouns in general. Determination
of Proper Names.
Brockelmann, Grundriss, i. 466 flf.
1. A noun may either be determinate in itself, as a proper name CL
or pronoun (see below, d and i), or be made so by its context. In
the latter case, the determination may be effected either by prefixing
the article (see § 126), or by the connexion of the noun (in the
construct state) with a following determinate genitive, and conse-
quently also (according to § 33 c) by its union with a pronominal
suffix (§127 a). It is to be taken as a fundamental rule, that the
determination can only be effected in one of the ways here mentioned ;
the article cannot be prefixed to a proper name, nor to a noun
followed by the genitive, nor can a proper name be used in the
construct state. Deviations from this rule are either only apparent
or have arisen from a corruption of the text
Rem. Only in a few passages is a noun made expressly indeterminate by the O
addition of inS in the sense of our indefinite article ; cf. Ex 16''^, Ju 9^*, 13^
I S iS 79-12, I k 13", 19*, 20", 229, 2 K 4I, 8«, 12" Ez 88, Dn 8', io» (in 8"
tJ'^lp nnx i. e. one, viz. a holy one, is opposed to another).
It is further to be noticed, that in Hebrew the phenomenon sometimes C
occurs, which the Arab grammarians call indeterminateness for the sake of
amplification; e.g. Is 31' and he shall Jlee 3"in~^3EtD from a sword, i.e. from an
irresistible sword (God's sword) ; cf. Is 28* n^3 ; '2 S 6^^ DB' ; Ho 3I HB'X such
a woman, without doubt to be referred to the Gomer mentioned in cap. i ;
* Cf. Brockelmann, Grundriss, i. 482.
COWLET p (J
402 The Pai'ts of Speech [§125^-7
Am 6" >\l ; ^p 7715 yn|3 ; Pr 21" p^•^X, if with Delitzsch it is to be referred to
God ; Jb S^" D'^^jp meaning important ivorcls, but in 15" p^Q rejyroachful words.
Cf. on this point, § 117 g, note 3, and Delitzsch, Psalmen, ed. 4, p. 79.
« 2. Real proper nouns, as being the names of things (or pei-sons)
only once met with, are sufficiently determinate in themselves. Such
names, therefore, as nin'', nn, ni5J||_, fy:3^ DnD do not admit of the
article,' nor can they be in the construct state. On the other hand,
not only gentilic names (as denoting the various individuals belonging
to the same class), but also all those proper names, of which the
ap2)ellative sense is still sufficiently evident to the mind, or at least
has been handed down from an earlier period of the language,
frequently (often even as a rule) take the article (according to § 126 e),
and may even be followed by a genitive.
e Examples. Like the above-mentioned proper names of individuals,
countries, and cities, so also national names, which are identical in form
with the name of the founder of the race (e.g. ?Nlb'^ DHK 3NiD), are
always determinate in themselves. Of gentilic names (e.g. ^l^yn the Hebrew,
Dnayn the Hebrews, Gn 4015 ; "'iyJSn the Canaanite) the plural D^PltJ'pa, even
when meaning the Philistines, is generally used without the article (but in
I S 4'', &c., ''QH) ; so always D^"iriS3. — Evident appellatives (like such modern
names as the Hague, leHame) are HyZlSn the hill, in the construct state b'lNtJ' 0^33 ,
i. e. ike Gibeah named after Sazd to distinguish it from others; HD^n the height ;
^yn the heap ; p33?n (prop, the white mountain) the Lebanon ; "IN^H (prop, (ht
river) the Nile, cf. Am 8^ Dp^fO ")iN''3 like the river of Egypt ; yT\^T\ the Jordan
(according to Seybold, Mittheil. und Nachr. des DPV., 1896, p. 11, probably
the drinking-place [TT" , Arab, warada, meaning orig. to go down to drink]).
J Rem. I. In a few instances original appellatives have completely assumed
the character of real proper names, and are therefore used without the article ;
thus DTIPX God, to denote the one true God (as elsewhere nirT") Gn i^ and so
generally in this document of the Pentateuch up to Ex 6, elsewhere sometimes
Cn'^Xn 6 eeos (cf. § 126 e) ; also the sing. rii!?N God, fvby the Most High, and
^'nti' the Almighty never take the article. — Moi'eover, DIN Adam from Gn 5^
onwards (previously in 2'', &c., DIXH the first man) ; JtOtJ' Satan, 1 Ch 21'
(but Zc 3I, Jb I*, &c., JtSE'n the adversary) ; cf. lyiO /HX the tent of revelation
(i.e. the tabernacle), always without the article.
£^ To the class of nouns originally appellative, which the language regards
1 Consequently, ntJ'iOn Dt j'^, Jos i'^^ &c. (in the Deuteronomist) in the
combination nt^iOn D^K' (for which elsewhere nii'JlD tDHtJ') is to be regarded
not as a proper name but as a gentilic name { = the tribe of the Manassites), for
which in Dt 29'' "'tJ'JDn 'ly is used, as in 10* ^"ipH 'K^ the tribe of the Levites, and
in Ju 18I ^nn 'K' the tribe of the Danites.— In Jos 13'' ntj^iOn (like gentilic
names in "•__) is even used adjectivally.
§ 125 h-k] Determination of Nouns 403
as proper names, and which consequently never take the article, belong also
certain archaic words mostly used only by poets, such as PINK' Hades, ^3ri
uorld, Dinri ocean, of the body of water which encircles the earth, Gu i^, &c. ;
but Is 63", \p 106^ niD'nri|l through the depths, viz. of the Red Sea.^
2. When nouns which the usage of the language always treats as proper Ji
names occasionally appear to be connected with a following genitive, this is
really owing to an ellipse whereby the noun which really governs the
genitive, i. e. the appellative idea contained in the proper name, is suppressed.
So evidently in the case of niXnif Hin^ Yahweh (the God) of hosts ; the fuller
form n'iNny "•n'Sx mn^ 2 s 5io,'&c.,'or niNnsrn "•n^x mn'' Am 3", &c., is
a secondary expansion of the original niNnV niiT" • hisn^ D^H^X in \l 50",
t: t:^ . t: -v: r v ^ /
8oi6-20, 849 is due to the mechanical substitution of D'^H^N for nin"> affected in
the 2nd and part of the 3rd book of the Psalms. So also in geographical
names such as Dn'K'3 "11X Ur (the city) 0/ the Chaldees, Gn ii^Sj Q>hr\: D"1X
Aram (the region) of the two rivers; rTlln^ DH^' n^3 Bethlehem (the city) of
Judah ; nDJ/D IVTi b^^ 2 S 20", &c., to distinguish it from D^D b^X Abel by
the water, 2 Ch i6< ; nv^ia B'^nj i S ii\ &c. ; in"!^ ]Y^;i Nu 22I, 263-63, &c. ; on
Ju 832 cf. § 1 28 c ; i'X")K'^ B'ini? |'i*V the Zion of the Holy One of Israel, Is 66^* ; but
in I S ii for D''D^2f read ^D^Jf a Zuphiie. Some of these examples (cf. also
Am 6*) come very near to the actual construct state (cf. above, P^Xt^ ny^J),
since e.g. the addition of the genitive serves to distinguish the place from
four others called Aram (see the Lexicon), or from another Bethlehem.
Aram, Bethlehem, &c., are accordingly no longer names found only in one
special sense, and therefore also are no longer proper names in the strictest
sense.
3. Of the pronouns, the personal pronouns proper (the scpaiate /
pronouns, § 32) are always determinate in themselves, since they can
denote only definite individuals (the 3rd person, also definite things).
For the same reason the demonstrative pronouns (§ 34) are also
determinate in themselves, when they stand alone (as equivalent to
substantives), either as subject (Gn 5^^) or as predicate (e. g. Di*n HT
this is the day, Ju 4'''; O^I^'^D "^^^ these are the words, Dt i'), or as
object (e.g. nxmx 2 S 13''), or as genitive ('"It T'llO 1X21^), or
finally when joined to a preposition (riXTb Gn 2^; nn i g 16", see
§ 102 g).
So also the personal pronouns XIH^ X\T, DH, iyt^\\ , T\IT} when they A*
are used as demonstratives (=t«, ea, id, ills, &c.) are always deter-
minate in themselves, e.g. "'^'^'I' Xin that is the thing, Gn 41^. They
^ That various otlier words, such as K'iJX 7nan, niDPif deep darkiiess, fp
prince, ^IK' field, H'K'W effectual working, are always found without the article
is not to be attributed to any special archaism, but is to be explained from
the fact that they belong solely to poetic language, which avoids the article ;
in other cases, such as HD'jliri deep sleep, there is no occasion for the article in
the passages we possess.
D d 2
'
404 The Parts of Speech [§ 126 a-d
are made determinate by the article, when they are joined like adjectives
(see § 126 w) with a determinate substantive, e.g. nin K'^xn this man;
Ty^kr\ CE'JXn these men ; N^nn rij?ni >yi&r\7\ D''pj3 in those days, and in that
time, Jo 4^. The demonstrative, however, even in this case, is fre-
quently used vnthout the article, as being sufficiently determinate in
itself (of. § 126 ?/).
§ 126. Determination hy Means of the Article.
a 1. The article ('H, 0> 0 > § 35) "^^^ originally, as in other languages
(clearly in the Romance ; cf. also 6, rj, to in Homer), a demonstrative
pronoun. The demonstrative force of the article, apart from its
occasional use as a relative pronoun (see § 138 i), appears now, how-
ever, only (a) in a few standing phrases, and (6) in a certain class of
statements or exclamations.
I) (a) Cf. £]i>n this day, hodie (§ 100 c) ; nypH this night, Gn 19'* ; DySH this
time, Gn 2^; nJI^n this year ( = in this year) Is 37'", Jer zS^".
(b) includes those instances in which the article, mostly when prefixed
to a participle, joins on a new statement concerning a preceding noun.
Although such participles, &c., are no doubt primarily regarded always as in
apposition to a preceding substantive, the article nevertheless has in some of
these examples almost the force of XIH (N^n HDn) as the subject of a noun-
clause ; e. g. f 1910 the jiulgements of the Lord are true . . ., verse li '31 D"''lDn3n
prop, the more to be desired than gold, i.e. they are more to be desired, or even they,
that are more to be desired,^ &c. ; cf. Gn 49^1, Is 40^^ '■, 4^^ '■, 46^, Am 2', 5'',
^ 33*^ 49' (DTlDBn in the parallel half of the verse continued by a finite
verb) ; \p 104', Jb 6^®, 28*, .^o^, 41^^ and frequently. When such a participle
has another co-ordinate with it, the latter is used without the article, since
according to the above it strictly speaking represents a second predicate, and
as such, according to i, remains indeterminate ; e, g. Jb 51" who giveth (jrisn)
ram, &c., and sendeth (ni^X), &c.
C The article is sometimes used with similar emphasis before a substantive,
which serves as the subject of a compound sentence (§ 140 d) ; e.g. Dt 32*
i?J?E3 D''pn "l^Xn i.e. as a fresh statement (not in apposition to the preceding
dative), really equivalent to he is a rock, perfect in his work (i. e. whose work is
perfect) ; cf. ^p i8".
d 2. The article is, generally speaking, employed to determine a
substantive wherever it is required by Greek and English ; thus :
(a) "When a person or thing already spoken of is mentioned again,
and is consequently more definite to the mind of the hearer or reader;
e. g. Gn i' and God said, Let there he light : verse 4 and God saw the
light ("<iNn"nS) ; I K "^^^ fetch me a sword : and tliey brought the sivoi'd;
Ec 9". (In 2812^ therefore "T'^y? must be read.)
* On the analogous use of the article before participles which have a verbal
suffix, as in tf/ jS^', &c., cf. above, § 116/.
§ 126 e-h] Detcrviination by Means of the Article 405
(6) With a title understood and recognized by every one, e. g.
i\u^^ ^^1>n 6 /Saa-iXev's SaAw/Awv : Gn 35* under the oak (the well-known
oak which was there).
(c) "With appellatives to denote persons or natural objects which are
unique, e. g. b'^'^^y^ fn^n the high priest, ^^>] the sun, Yl^y} the earth.
(d) When terms applying to whole classes are restricted (simply by e
usage) to particular individuals (like 6 ttoitjtt^s, meaning Homer) or
things, e. g. ]^'^ adversary, \^^^ the adversary, Satan ; pV^ lord, /'y?D
Baal as proper nan^e of the god; ^']^\\ the (first) man, Adam;
0*1?^^'^ ' or bxn 6 ^£o's, the one true God (cf, also 6 ^piaro^ in the New
Testament); also "1^3^ the river, i.e. Euphrates; "ISIil the circle, sc. of
the Jordan, the Jordan plain [Gn 19'', &c.].
(e) Very often with the vocative, e.g. 2 S 14* ^^'^J} nVE'in help,
0 king ; Zc 3^ ^iian ]ri^^ y^'in^ O Joshua the high priest : i S 1 7=**,
24', 2 K 9*; in the plural, Is 42'*, Jo i^*'*; but cf. also Jos 10^"-, Is i-,
49"(D^OB'and H?) ; 23", Ho 13", Jo \\ f 34'-, Ec lo'^ II^ &c.-
The vocative occuis ivithout the article in Is 22^, since it has been
already defined by a preceding accusative.
Rem. Strictly speaking in all these cases the substantive with the article /
is really in apposition to the personal pronoun of the 2nd person, which is
either expressly mentioned or virtually present (in the imperative), e. g.
1 S 17"* thou, the young man. But such passages as Is 42^', where the vocative
precedes the imperative, prove that in such cases the substantive originally
in apposition eventually acquired the value of a complete clause.
(/) With words denoting classes (see particulars under I). g
(g) In a peculiar way, to specify persons or things, which are so
far definite as to be naturally thought of in connexion with a given
case, and must be assumed accordingly to be there (see q-s).
(h) W^ith adjectives (also ordinal numbers and demonstrative pro-
nouns used adjectivally) which are joined to substantives determined
in some way (see u).
Rem. The article may be omitted in poetry in all the above-mentioned /i
cases; in general it is used in poetry far less frequently than in prose. Its
use or omission probably often rests on rhythmical grounds ;' it is sometimes
omitted also for rhetorical reasons. Cf. e.g. }*~IS for J^INH iL 2'^; D''D?D as
vocative, verse 10; '?]pD for !]P?3n 2i2; K11J1 >na ^W (contrary to u, v) 99'.
In the instances in which the H of the article is omitted after a prefix
(§ 35 ")) t^® vowel of the article is often retained after the prefix even in
poetry, e. g. 0^0^*3 f 2*, &c.
^ On the subsequent change of |Db*, UlU, C^iy^ into real proper names
by the omission of the article, cf. above, § 125/.
2 For farther exceptions see Nestle, ZAW. 1904, p. 323 flP.
' Cf. the useful statistics of J. Ley in the Neue Jahrhikher fur Philologie und
Pddagogik, 2te Abteilung, 1891, Heft 7-9, and M. Lambert, ' L'article dons la
po^sie hebr.,' BE J. 37, 363 ff.
'
4o6 The Parts of Speech [§ 126 i-n
i (z) On the other hand, the article is always omitted when a person
or thing is to be represented as indefinite (or indefinable) or as yet
unknown ; consequently also before the predicate, since this is from
its nature always a general term, under which the subject is included,
e.g. Gn 29' 71*13 Di>n "l^J? as yet the day is great, i.e. it is yet high day;
33« 40^4I^Is66^
/t Rem. I. As exceptions to the above rule it is usual to regard those examples
in which a determinate adjective or participle (equivalent to a relative
clause) is used apparently as a predicate, e.g. Gn 2^^ ^Dbn N^H it is the
compassing, i.e. that is it which compasseth; 42^, 45^^ Ex 9*'', Dt 3^^, 8^*, 11'',
I S 4^«, Is 142^, Mai 3* (cf. in Greek, e.g. St. Mat. lo^o, where Winer, Gram,
des neulest. Sprachidioms, § 58, 2, Rem., explains ol Kakovvrts as a predicate
with the article). In reality, however, these supposed predicates are rather
subjects (ace. to § 116 q), and the only peculiarity of these cases is that the
subject is not included under a general idea, but is equated with the
predicate.
2. Sometimes the article is used with only one of two parallel words, as
Na i5 nnn and n^y^JH, 2 Ch 3" pD>0 and ^KCiB'nD.
/ 3. The use of the article to determine the class is more extensive
in Hebrew than in most other languages. In this case the article
indicates universally known, closely circumscribed, and therefore
well defined classes of persons or things. The special cases to be
considered are —
ttl (a) The employment of general names as collectives in the singular, to
denote the sum total of individuals belonging to the class (which may,
however, be done just as well by the plural) ; e.g. the righteous, the wicked man,
Ec 3^^; the woman, i.e. the female sex, 7^' ; i^NH th. enemy, i.e. the enemies (y)
^9'; 3"lNn the tier in wait, i.e. the Hers in wait; j^vHn the armed man, i.e.
soldiers; f]Elfcjipn the rearguard; n^nK'tSn the spoiler, i S 13";^ so also (as in
English) with names of animals, when something is asserted of them, which
applies to the whole species, e.g. 2 S 17^° as the courage of n^Nn the lion.
Especially also with gentilic names, e.g. the Canaanite, Gn 13'' (cf. 15^^') ; so
in English the Russian, the Turk, &c., in Attic writers 6 'AOrjvaioi, & ^vpa-
Koaios, &c.
71 (b) Names of materials known everywhere, the elements and other words
denoting classes, even though only a part and not the whole of them is
considered, in which case in other languages, as e.g. in English, the article
is usually omitted (cf., however, our to fall into the water, into the fire, &c.), e. g.
Gn 132 and Abram was very rich QHOI ^1033 nipQS in cattle, in silver and in gold ;
Jbs 11^ and he burnt their chariots {{'X!l with fire; cf. Gn 6^^, 41*2 (unless this
means, the chain necessarily belonging to the official dress) ; Ex 2', 31* (SS*''),
Is 1^2^ &c, and /DK'B with oil'^ very commonly in the sacrificial laws, Ex 29^,
^ But in Ex 12^' 'on is either to be explained as the destroyer (now men-
tioned for the first time) according to q, or a particular angel is meant whose
regular function it was to inflict punishments. Others again take 'IDD even
in Ex 12^3 impersonally = des^ruc/iow.
2 In nearly all the above examples the presence of the article is only
indicated by the vowel of the prefix (3^ 3^ b) and might therefore be merely
§ 126 0-r'] Determination hy Means of the Article 407
&c., and also Dt 33^*, 2 S 1", Is i^, f 23*, &c. Similarly the article is used
with terms of measurement, as HDNH Ex 16'®, &c. : '^'Ch^ and riBH Ez 45I' ;
ipyn Ex 1 622; ^3n3 2 S 82.
(c) The expression of abstract ideas of eveiy kind, since they are likewise
used to represent whole classes of attributes or states, physical or moral
defects, &c.; e.g. Pr 25^ (pl^3); Gn 19^- and they smote the men . . . D^"!13D21
with blindness ; Am 4', &c. ; but in TjEJ'nn Is 6o2 the article is no doubt due to
dittography of the n, and the parallel bQiyi_ has no article.
(rf) Comparisons, since the object compared is treated not (as usually in 0
English) individually but as a general term, e. g. Is i^* white J^t?? as snow,
"10^3 as wool ; red ybin3 like crimson ; Is 34* and the heavens shall he rolled together
1QE)3 as a scroll ; cf. Nu 11^2^ Ju 8^^, 16^ as JT^ySn V^flQ a string of tow is broken ;
I S 2620, 1 K 14I5, Is 10", 2420, 2710, 298, 63«,'Na 3I', ip 33^ 49I5 ; cf. also such
examples as Gn 192*, Ju 14®, where the object compared is determined by
a determinate genitive which follows (according to § 127 a).
Examples of indeterminate comparisons are rare, and perhaps due only to W
the Masora, — so at least in the case of singulars, while in such plurals as
those in Gn 42^", i K io2^, Jo 2*-'', the omission of the article maybe explained
by the ordinary rules. On the other hand, the article is regularly omitted
wheu the object compared is already defined by means of an attribute (or
relative clause, Jer 23', \f) 17"), e.g. Is 16* n?{yD Jj3 THIJ ^^V? "^ wandering
birds, (as) a scattered nest (but cf. 10" |ip3) ; 14", 29^ -\2V fO'? (^"* ^ ^* f'^?) ''
Jer 2^", Pr 27*, Jb 292^, 30^*. — In comparisons with persons also the Masora
seems to avoid the use of the article, as in 11333 Jb 161* and seven other
places (11333 only in Is 42^^), 3X3 Jb 31I8, -^^ys Jb 388, 40^.
4. Peculiar to Hebrew ^ is the employment of the article to denote Q
a single person or thing (primarily one which is as yet unknown, and
therefore not capable of being defined) as being present to the mind
under given circumstances. In such cases in English the indefinite
article is mostly used.
Thus Am 5I' as if a man did flee from a lion (''ISn, i.e. the particular lion r
pursuing him at the time), and a bear (3in) met him, &c., cf. 3^2^ i k 20'*
(John 10^2) . also Gn S'"-, 14^^ (tOvBH, i.e. one that had escaped, the particular
one who came just then ; so also Ez 242^, 3321 ; cf. 2 S 15") ; Gn 15' ", iS' the
seivant, who is regarded as being constantly at hand and awaiting his com-
mands ; cf. 2 S 17" (but nyfn Nu ii27 is used like t3'*!5En above); Gn 1930,
unless niy©3 means in the well-known cave; DipT33 Gn 2S11, according to
Dillmann, upon the place suitable for passing the night, or the right place,
but it may possibly also refer to the sanctuary of Bethel afterwards so sacred
and celebrated ; Gn 42^3, 462, 5o2«, Ex 2^% 32, 420, 2120 (2 S 2321), Lv 23" 24I0
(Samaritan "•bsiK'^ without the article); Nu 17", 2i«-9, 256, Dt 19^ Jos 2^-;
Ju 4I8, 825, ijiij i6i9^ I £,29^ 2oi«, I S if*, 1 9", 21", 2 S 1 7", I K 6^, i3>* (?most
due to the masoretic punctuation. There is, however, no reason to doubt
the correctness of the tradition. The same is true of the examples under
n and o.
^ Cf., however, analogous examples in biblical Aramaic in Kautzsch's
Gramm. des BiU. Aram., § 79/, e.g. Dn 2", 3^, &c.
4o8 The Parts of Speech [§ 126 s-w
probably a pai-ticular tree is meant) ; 19', Is 7^* (HOpyn, i.e. the particular
maiden, through whom the prophet's announcement shall be fulfilled ; we
should say a maiden [cf. Driver on i S 1*, 6*, 19I'] ; Jb 981.
^ So always to tvrite in the book (or on the scroll, Nu 5^^, Jer 321°), i.e. not in the
book already in iise, but in the book which is to be devoted to that purpose,
equivalent to in a book, on a scroll, Ex 17^*, i S 10''^, Jb 19^^ Especially in-
structive for this use of the article is the phrase Di*n ^n^l, which does not
simply refer back to the previous narrative in the sense of the same day, but
is used exactly like our one day (propei'ly meaning on the particular day when
it happened, i. e. on a certain day), 1 S 1*, 14^, 2 K 4*, ii^', Jb 1"^. In Gn 39^^
even rUH Di*n3.
^ The article is sometimes used in this way before collectives in the singular,
which are not meant to denote (like the examples given under I) a whole
class, but only that part of it which applies to the given case ; thus ilJJ'^,
njrn Gn s'', ny-i^n Ex 2^^.
U 5. 'When a substantive is defined by the article, or by a suffix, or by
a following genitive determinate in any way (see the examples below),
the attribute belonging to it (whether adjective, participle, ordinal, or
demonstrative pronoun) necessarily takes the article (see, however,
the Hem.), e.g. Gn lo'^ n^l^n l^yn the great city; Dt s"* ^\^V^\1 ITrr %
Strang hand. A genitive following the substantive may, according to
§ 127 a, be determined either by the article, e.g. i S 25^* ''V^r'^n B'^X
njn this worthless man (prop, man of worthlessness; cf. also such
examples as 2 Ch 36'**, where the article is prefixed only to a second
genitive following the noun) ; or as a proper name, e. g. Dt 11' nb'J^J?
bhan nin^ the great work of the Lord; or by a suffix, e. g. Is 36' ^"[j^y
D"'jlf?l?D *?1^ the least of my master s servants.
V When several attributes (whether connected by Wdw or not) follow
a determinate substantive, each of them takes the article, e.g. Dt 10"
snian"! "llaan bian bxri the great God, the mighty, and the terrible. Cf.
also Ex 3', Dt i'", in both of which places a demonstrative with the
article also follows the adjective,'
Rem. I. The article is, however, not infrequently used also —
W (o) With the attribute alone, when it is added to an originally indefinite
substantive as a subsequent limitation ; so always with ordinal numbers after
DV," e. g. Gn i^i (cf. 2^, Ex 20I", &c.) •'B>B'n DV the sixth day (prop, a day namely
^ The demonstrative used adjectivally is generally placed after the adjective
proper ; in such cases as tiSIHTX D^n '?JtZ)y 2 Ch 1^° the adjective forma a further
(fresh) addition to r\)J\ '^'^■^^
2 Cf. Driver, Tenses, 3rd ed., § 209; M. Lambert, REJ. 31, 279 f, — The
omission of the article from the substantive is not to be regarded in this
instance as an indication of late style, and consequently cannot be put
forward as a proof of the late origin of the ' Priestly Code ' (cf. DillmaHn on
Gn 1^1, Holzinger, Einl. in d. Hexateuch, p. 465, and especially Driver in the
Journal of Philology, xi. 229 f., against Qiesebrecht in ZAW. i88i, p. 265/.).
On the other hand, the common omission of the article from the substantive
before a determinate adjective (e.g. nPHUn 0033 the great synagogue, in the
Alishna ; cf. Segal, Miinaic Hebrew, p. 19 fif.) is certainly a later idiom.
§ 126 X, y] Determination hy Means of the Article 409
ihe sixth ; but ''3B' DV a second day, Gn i^) ; Ex 12" fb'Niri DV?p /rom the first
day onward (not before Dn lo^^ and Neh 8^* is pK'^<'^^ DVn'flO used instead of
it). On the other hand, the article is always found after 3, hence "'E^B'n D^*3,
&c., although it is possible that the original reading in these cases was DV3,
and that the article is only due to the Masora. In Ju 6^' the text is evidently
corrupt (see verse 26). — Especially also in certain frequently recurring com-
binations as in particularizing the gates in Jer 38^*, Ez 9^, &c., Zc 14^", and
courts in I K 7*-^^, &c., Ez 40^^ ; and very often when the attribute consists of a
participle, e.g. Dt 2^^^, Ju 21^^, i S 2^'^°, Jer 27', 46^^ HiVn 2"}^ the sword which
oppresses {?) ; Ez 14^2, Zc ii^ KHh. {the impenttrable forest?) Pr 26^^, ip 119^.
Of the other examples, Gn 2i''5 (where, however, the Samaritan reads ^
niK'32n), 4i26 (but cf. verse 4), Nu ii^*, Ju iG^^, i S 17" may at any rate
be explained on the ground that the preceding cardinal number is equivalent
to a determinant ; in Gn 1^^, 28^1", &c., the substantive is already determined
by -^3, and in i S 1428 ({yn'H) by Dyt?.— In i S 1223, 2 S 12*, Is 720 (where,
however, nTDK^n might also be understood as a subsequent explanation of
"lyna) and Neh 9^^, the omission of the article after the preposition is
certainly due merely to the Masora. In i S 16^^ (unless □'•npK Pill is to be
read twice), Zc 4'' (where however "inn Pi^ is probably meant), ^ 104^^ (where
a n precedes D^TH, hence probably a case of haplography), the omission of
the article before N^ 1 (?) and H may be due to a regard for euphony (see s
below). On the other hand, in 1 S 6^^ (read 'an ]'2Vir^), 17" {r[^r\ is a later
addition), 1922 (cf. the LXX), Jer 172, 32", 40^ K^tJL, Ez 2^ (read ""^a or omit
D^ia with Cornill), Mi 7", t^ 62*, either the text is corrupt, or the expression
incorrect. But in 2 K 20^', Jer 620, Ct 7^0 ace. to D. H. Miiller {Ameiger der
Wiener Akad., phil-hist. Kl. 1902, no. x) 3it3n is the gejiitive of a substantive,
aromatic oil, sweet cane (in Jer 62" read naj?^), like spiced wine. In Is 39^ read
aitsn ]D'lf and in f 1332 'tSH jlOE'S.
(6) No article with the attribute, while the substantive is determined y
either by the article, or a suffix, or a following genitive. Thus the article
is sometimes omitted with demonstratives, since they are already to a
certain extent determined by their meaning (cf. also the Me§a' inscription,
1. 3, riNT noan this Mgh place); as with Wn Gn 19^ (evidently for euphony,
and so probably often) ; 30", 32^, i S 19'° ; with N^n Gn 3821 ; with ^T
^12' (according to the Masora ^T is a relative pronoun here, as always
elsewhere) ; with rhk 1 S 2^, according to the present corrupt text (the
original reading niH^ Djrbs became D^■^SK DSri'3, and DTipX was then
. T • v: - T • v:
corrupted to TIpSI) ; so, almost without exception, when the substantive is
determined oniy by a sufiSx, e.g. Jos 220, Ju 6", i K 10', 2 K i* and 8*'-,
where ""bn , as in Jer lo^', has arisen by contraction from ""yn , or we should
simply read yH (in all these passages with ni) ; Gn 24* (with DNT) ; Ex 10*,
1 K 2223, Jer 3121 (with n^>A).
The article is sometimes omitted also with the attributes referring to
proper names,^ as n3"} pTJf Jos 11', 192*, HST HDn Am 6^. Other examples
are Jos i6^\ 18", 1^X9" (but in i Ch 72*", 2 Ch '8« with the article). In
Gn 7",&c., n3"l Dinri is also a case of this kind, Dinri being used (almost always
without the article) as a sort of proper name ; cf. also ]Sy}} bx the most high
^ Cf. NOldeke, Beitrdge zur semit Sprachwiss,, p. 48, n. i.
4IO The Parts of Speech [§§126^,00,1273
God and ^H CH^K the living God. In Ju i^^ JT'^V ri^.3 and n^nnn '3 aro
strange ; Jos is^^ has T\\'*)>V '3 and ni'Jjinri '3.
Z Of the remaining examples Is ii' explains itself; the direct connexion
of the attribute with its substantive is broken by the insertion of Dv.
In Ez 34^2, Hag. i* (as Wellhausen says, a good instance of a Hebrew adjective
in the stative form = D"'3^DD DHI), i/- 143*°, Ct6'2(?) the substantive is also (see
above) determined by a suffix, and consequently the attribute is less closely
attached ; the same applies to Gn 37*, 42I*, 43I*, ip 18", except that in these
passages the omission of the article before "H^ X, V may at the same time
be due to considerations of euphony (as also in Jos 16^ before y, Nu 14'^
before 1, 28*, Ez lo' before N, 21" before ny In i S ii^''^- (inS) and
2 K 25^6 (D"'3B' after a determinate substantive), the attribute again, being
a numeral, is determinate in itself (see above, x) ; in Is 65^^ the N? prevents
the use of the article ; finally, in 2 Ch 26'^ D'^SfHS and D''33X3 are to be read,
as in Jer 221 fsa for fQ3n, in 22^8 ps for 'Nn ; in 2 S 6' omit nE'nn, and in
Ez 39*^ omit D''31. Without any apparent reason the article is omitted in
Dn 8" and ii»i!
aa 2. When, as in Mi 7^? (Kin D^ in that day'?), the article is omitted from
both substantive and demonstrative, and in Ezr 3^^, the demonstrative even
precedes (r)''3n nT= iljin n^3n), this is obviously due in both cases to a radical
corruption of the text (not only in the words quoted). In Jos 9^^ ^JCnp
is either in apposition to the independent demonstrative nt ( — this our bread,
&c.), as in verse 13 nilX3 is to n?NI, or they are complete sentences, this is
our bread, &c. So also in Ex 32^ Hi^D ( = that [iste] Moses, &c.), and in f 48^^
DVipN are to be taken in apposition to n?. On \p 68^ and Is 23^' cf. § 136 d.
§ 127. The Noun determiined by a following Determinate
Genitive.
Brockelmann, Grundriss, i. 475.
a When a genitive, determined in any way, follows a nomen regens,
it also determines the nomen regens, which, according to § 89 a, is
always in the construct state. Moreover, every pronominal suffix
attached to a substantive is, according to § 33 c, to be considered as
a genitive determinate by nature. An independent genitive may be
determinate — ■
(«) By its character as a 'proper name (according to § 125 a), e.g.
ii\T\'^ *13"l tJie v)ord of the Lord.
(6) By having the article, e. g. nonptsn K"S (prop, the man of the
war) the soldier (but nonS?? C^'N Jos i f, a soldier) ; nDnJ»r3n '^:H
^ The same reason no doubt also favoured the omission of the article
before XlH and n?X, see above, under y. Also in Is 23'' {is this your joyous . . . ?)
the article is omitted before ni^pj? probably only for euphony.
§i2'jb-d'] Noun determined by Determinate Genitive 411
Nu 31"", the soldiers; i^^^}<^ "t?"^ the word of the proi^het, Jer 28' (but
e. g., on the other hand, T\'yByQ D^K'JK Hlift? a commandment of men
which hath been taught, Is 29"; "ipB^'IS"^ word of falsehood, Pr 29'^^).
(c) By the addition of a pronominal suffix (see above), e. g. ''3N"n''3
my father's house.
(c?) By construction with another genitive determined in some way,
e.g. Gn 3^ IJDT.y ''"^t"? of (he fruit of the trees of the garden. Thus in
Is 10^^ four, and in 21'^ even five, members of a series are determined
by a concluding determinate genitive.
Rem. I. The above explains also the various meanings of 73 (prop, a [)
substantive in the sense of aggregate, whole), according as it is followed by
a determinate or indeterminate genitive. In the former case ^3 has the
meaning of the entirety, i.e. all, the whole (like the French tous les /jowjwes, toute
la ville), e. g. ^nxn"73 the whole (prop, the entirety of the) earth, DnXT^S
all men;^ Ex 18^2, Nu 15", Jer 428, and cases like Nu 425'«'', 218 where i>3
is followed by a singular participle with the article. On the other hand,
before an indeterminate genitive 73 is used in the more indefinite (in-
dividualizing) sense of of all kinds, any (cf. tout homme, a tout prix), or
distributively each, every, e.g. ^Jf^ZI every (kind of) tree, Gn 2»; cf. 4*2, 2410,
I Ch 29^ ; "\3Tb3 any thing, Ju 19^' ; Di^~P33 every day, every time, \j/ 7'^
It is, however, to be observed — £
(a) That the article may in this case also (see § 126 A) be omitted in poetic
style, although the substantive is to be regarded as determinate, e. g.
nijnbB^^S all (the) tables, Is 288.
(b) That the meaning every is frequent even before singulars used collectively;
afterwards the idea of quisque passes naturally into that of totality, e. g. *n~?3
each living thing, i. e, every (not every kind of) living thing ; "lE'B'PS all flesh, i. e.
all men or all living creatures (with the article only in Gn 7^^ before a relative
clause, and in Is 40*) ; sometimes also Y]l~?3 all trees, 5]iir^3 all birds ;
finally —
(c) That before the names of members of the human body,. "73 frequently
(as being determinate in itself) denotes the entirety, e.g. Is 1^ the whole head,
the whole heart (the sense required by the context, not every head, &c., which
the expression in itself might also mean) ; 9'^, 2 K 23^, Ez 29'' all (i.e. the
whole of) their shoulders . . . aU {Vie whole of) their loins ; 36'''. — On p3 with
a suffix when it follows a noun in apposition (e.g. Is 9* i?3 Dyn the people,
all of it, i. e. the whole nation, more emphatic than Dyn~73, cf. Driver on 2 S 2^),
as well as when it follows absolutely in the genitive ( = all men, every one, e. g.
Gn i6^2),2 see the Lexicon, pp. 481'', 482''.
2. Gentilic names (or patronymics), derived from compound proper names d
(consisting of a nomen regens and genitive), are determined by inserting the
article before the second part of the compound (since it contains the original
* Dnxn being a collective, cf. B'^NH'^S 2 S 15^, all men, ;3n*b3 Ex i'^ all
T T IT . ° . T T. '' > I .. _ .,
sons, nsn v3 all daughters ; in itself D1Nn~73 could also mean the ichole man.
!» In Ezr 10" instead of D^t^iS 733 read simply D^B'3Nn"733.
• T-: - *• rf . x-2,T T :
/
412 The Parts of Speech [§i27e,/
genitive), e.g. "'3"'?p^~J3 (see § 86 A) a Benjamite; "J'^lpVrfa Ju 3", &c., the
Betijamite ; "•jpnpn'n^B the Bethlehemife, 1 S 16^, &c. (cf., however, i Ch 27"
Q're ""riD^ ]^b) ; ^E'DE'riTl^a the Beth-shemite, i S 6" ; ntj;.-! t^X the Abiesrite,
Ju6", &c., cf. I K i6".
^ 3. In a few instances the nomen regens appears to be used indefinitely
notwithstanding a following determinate genitive ; it is not so, however, in
Gn 16'', where the reference is to a well-known fountain ; 21^^, where in the
original context there must have been some reason for the seven ewe lambs of (he
flock ; 2 S 1 2^° the spoil found in the city ; but it often is so before a proper name,
as in Ex lo^ T\S7\\ JPl a feast of the Lord (unless it is the spring festival), Dt 7^,
and frequently nin^ n^ViJ^ "■n abomination unto the Lord ; cf. also Gn 46^*,
Dt 22^3 a virgin of Israel ; i S 41^2 a man of Benjamin ; Pr 25^, Ct 2^, 3' ; similarly
before appellatives with the article (or before a genitive determined by
a suffix, as in Lv i<\^*), i S 2020 three arrows ; 2 S 23I1 n^ETI T\\y?T\ a plot of the
ground (but see Gn 33", Jos 24^2); Ju i3«, Jer 13*, 41", Ct iH-isf-, ^is^ ys^ g2.
On the other hand, rivVSn "I^B' in the titles of Psalms 120 to 134 (except
121^, nipysp "y^p) was most probably originally the title of a collection, in
the sense of ^ the pilgrimage-songs'' (according to § i24r), and was subsequently
added to these Psalms sevei'ally. — In Ex 20^* Dipl3n~pD2 in all the place, sc. of
the sanctuary, is a dogmatic correction of DipD"?33, in every place, to avoid
the difficulty that several holy-places are here authorized, instead of the one
central sanctuary. In Gn 20^^ also Dip!2n~?3 (unless it means in the whole
place) is i-emarkable, since elsewhere every place is always (8 times) Dipl3"?3.
4. The deviations mentioned under e, from a fundamental rule of syntax,
are in some cases open to suspicion on textual grounds, but much more
doubtful are the instances in which the article is found before a noun already
determined in some other way, as —
(a) Before a noun which appears to be determined by a following in-
dependent determinate genitive. The least questionablfe are the instances
in which the genitive is a proper name, since these may be elliptical forms of
expression like the apparent construction of proper names with a genitive,
noticed in § 125 h, e.g. Nu 21I* n3")N Dvnan the valleys, namely the valleys of
Arnon ; 2 K 23" bNI"n^3 n3]Dn the altar, namely the altar of Bethel (i.e. with
the suppression of the real nomen regens, 113110 without the article ; by the
pointing n3tBn the Masora evidently intends to allow the choice either of
reading r\7i]t27\ or correcting it to H^XO) ; ^N'r^S ^XH the God of Beth-el ^
(equivalent to '3 ^K ^NH), Gn 31" (the LXX read n*lpG)3 ^"'bx nXljin SsH
ike God who appeared to thee in the holy place) ; l^l^K '?|pQri the king of Assyria,
Is 36^' (probably a scribal error due to verse 13 ; it does not occur in the
parallel passage, 2 K i&'^), cf. Jos 13®, 2 K 25^^, Jer 38', Ez 47^*; in the
vocative, Jer 48'^, La 2". On the other hand, ilSK ni'ty Gn 24*'' is no doubt
1 According to Philippi {St, Constr., p. 38) ?S~n''3 is rather a case of ' sub-
position ' in the accusative, as also [vfin TJ'l^n Ez 47*^ (for which, however,
in 4S1 there is the correct reading IvOn "i]")^) by the way to Helhlon ; and in
fact, Ez 47I* may without difficulty be explained in this way ; so B'B' Ex 39"
as an accusative of the material.
1
^ 12^ g-i'] Nouns determined hy Determinate Genitive 413
only a subsequent insertion ; so also ^'J^'^B'! ^^^ ^'''' ^'^^' ^^^)i 2 S 20^',
2 K 7", ll^Sn I S 2622 after n^jnn (simplified by the Masora to rT'Jn Q*re);
THK r\'*bv 2 K 2312, i^is^s Is 368 (cf. 2 K t82»), l?lj?n Ez 46" (unless the article
with niSB'^ is to be omitted), also n^ortn Dn 8", and \^''^2l^r\ nn'y 2 Ch 158.
In Ex 9^8 read with the Samaritan DI'Dp ; in 2 S 1925 nD7 might possibly be
taken in apposition to Di*n \'ob ] in 2 K lo^ restore '•32l~nS;, with the LXX
and Lucian, before DNnX ; in 2 K 25" omit the article, as in Jer 522*,
before "lED.
A similar ellipse must also be assumed in 2 K 23^'' the sepulchre is the ^
sepulchre 0/ the man of God (but most probably "13p has dropped out after
"IDjJn) and i// 123* (cf, however, the LXX, and observe that in the parallel
member the genitive is paraphrased by p). — In Jos 3^* H^ian (verse 17
nin^ ri"'")3) has been added to the original |i")Nn by a redactor ; cf. similar
syntactically impossible additions in verse 11 (also in iS48,&c.,wheretheLXX
still had simply ilin^ 11"^^?) > in Ifl^n Ju 16^* the Masora evidently combines
two different readings '^JV^ and JINH *iri'' ; and similarly in Jer 2526 (where
I'lXn was only subsequently introduced into the text), the two readings
niaSoDn and 'Kn nbbrDO are combined.— In Jos 8", i K 14", Jer 31*0,
T : - T : : - ,
Ez 45^' the article, being usual after *?3, has been mechanically added, and
_ T ^ <
30 also in 2 Ch 8'* after ""ly ; in 2 K 9* the second "ly^n (instead of lyj) is
occasioned by the first ; in Ez 7'' HlO^nD belongs as a nominative to what
follows ; in Ez S*^ the meaning perhaps is in the chambers, in the house of the
Lord, or the article is to be omitted ; in 1 Ch 152'' the text is manifestly
corrupt. J
Of another kind are the instances in which a determinate noun is followed rl
by a definition of the material in apposition (hence, not in the genitive ;
cf. § 131), e.g. Zc 4^" b^lSn ]^^^ the weight, the lead, i.e. the leaden weight;
Ex 39^'', 2 K 16^* (njJ'nDn, both here and in verse 17, is probably only a later
addition, while ni33Dn nnSDOH in verse 17 has arisen from a confusion of
two readings, n"l33rDn nn2D» and ni33DnD DITJOCn). In Jer 32" also
njpDn (unless the article is simply to be omitted) is in apposition to IDDn.
(6) Before a noun with a suffix (which likewise represents a determinate I
genitive ; see above, at the beginning of this section). This does not apply
to cases in which a verbal (i.e. accusative) suffix is affixed to a participle which
has the article, e.g. Sn3t3n Is 9^2^ the one smiting him ; in Dt 8^^, 13^ also ^ is
a verbal suffix, but hardly the i in ib'S?'"! for ^nE'yn Job 40^^, nor the H in
. IT , ■• , - T
r\lyn Dn 11'; § 116 flf. For ^piyn Lev 272^, read ^S'lV as in verses 2, 3, 5, 7,
13, &c., twelve times (but cf. also the note on § i28d). — Of the remaining ex-
amples nniDSS Is 242 (probably an intentional alliteration with the eleven other
words beginning with 3), ^HpyOp Pr 16*, and ^3^iy3 (so Baer, following the
best authorities) Ezr lo^*, rest only on the authority of the Masoretes, not
of the authors. So also in ""ijnNn Jos 721 i"tvnn Jos 8" (previously i'^Jfn),
• t; It T : VI- I "
JT'ri^inn 2 K 151* (dittography of the n), the article is simply to be omitted
as syntactically impossible ; the 1 of i"13'in Mi 2" is the copula belonging to
the next word.
414 "^he Parts of Speech [§ 128 a-c
§ 128. The Indication of the Genitive Relation by means
of the Construct State.
Cf. especially Philippi's work cited at the head of § 89.
a !• The genitive relation is I'egularly expressed (see § 89) by the close
connexion of the nomen regens (in the construct state) with the nomen
rectum (in the genitive). Since only one nomen regens can be
immediately connected with a nomen rectum, it follows that the same
genitive cannot depend on two or more co-ordinate nouns, but a second
(sometimes even a third, &c.) regens must be added with a suffix
referring to the nomen rectum, e. g. I^rt^l in '')2 the sons of David
and his daughters (not in niJ31 ^33) ; cf. i K 8^. ' The language
also prefers to avoid a series of several co-ordinate ^ genitives
depending upon one and the same nomen regens (such as occur in
Gn 14'', Nu 2o^ si^-* [i Ch 13^], i S 23', 2 S I9^ Is 22*, yj^ 5^ 8^),-'
and rather tends to repeat the nomen regens, e.g. Gn 24^ D^ipB'n 'n?N
Yl-^'} ''H^^l i^i^ God of heaven and the God of the earth (so in Jer 8' the
regens is five times repeated). A lengthened series of genitives may,
however, be formed by a nomen rectum serving at the same time as
regens to a genitive depending on it (cf. § 127 a [c^]); e.g. Gn 47"
''O^i* \'n ''pK' ^p^ the days of the years of the life of my fathers ; cf.
Jb 12''*, where there are three genitives, Is 10'^ fo&r, and 21'' five
(unless the last three are in apposition). As a rule, indeed, such an
inconvenient accumulation of genitives is avoided by means of a
circumlocution in the case of one of them (see § 129 d).
Jj Rem. As the fundamental rules stated above are the necessary conse-
quence not merely of logical but more especially of rhythmical relations (see
§ 89 a), we must feel the more hesitation in admitting examples in which
genitives are supposed to be loosely attached to forms other than the construct
state. Some of these examples (the supposed genitives following a regens
which is determined by the article) have been already discussed in § 127/-A.
Compare, moreover :
C (a) Genitives after the absolute state, e.g. Is 281 f^f '•lOl^n D''3DCJ'-N^3 the
fat valley of them that are overcome with loine. The usual explanation that
D"'3DK'~K^2 forms one single idea (in German Fettigkeitstal), on which the
^ Very rare, and only possible in very rapid utterance, are such exceptions
as Ez 3ii« (pjnb'nVJI innD") ; Pr 16".— In Is ii^ the spirit of knowledge and of
the fear of the Lord, D]}^ may at any rate also be taken as an absolute genitive,
BO also "IQD Dn 1*.
2 In if' 114^ a second genitive is added even without the copula, but the
parallelism of the members renders any misunderstanding impossible.
' In almost all these instances the two (or three) genitives form one
closely connected whole, as heaven and earth, sons and daughters.
§ 128 d-f] Tlie hidication of the Genitive Relation 415
genitive p' 'OvH then depends, in reality explains nothing ; the text is
almost certainly corrupt. In Dt 15" HJl^'ip would be expected; in Jos 3'^
nnan is a later addition ; in Is 32" ('{Tib'O), and ^ 6822 (lyb), the absolute
for the construct state probably rests only on the authoi-ity of the Masoretes.
In Ju 6=5 ff- the text is obviously in confusion. In Ju 8^2 (^cf. d"^*) iTISyB
should come either after "13p)M or at the end of the verse, unless, with Moore,
we omit 'yn ""nX as a gloss (from 6^*) ; in Is 63^' ntJ'JD is probably a gloss on
Obiy^tD'' which has crept into the text; in 2 S 4= FlB'S'JJ'^Kp, according to
the LXX, has dropped out before f3 ; in Ez 6^^ niV"! is to be omitted with the
LXX ; if originally in the text, it could only be genitive { = all abominations 0/
evils), not an adjective ; Pr 21" the text is altogether uncertain (the LXX read
''K'piO for iJJ'pDD) ; in I Ch 9" the preposition p (after a ?) has dropped out
before DSi^brp (cf. 1225).— Elsewhere (j)^ ^5^ j ^ 413, 2 Ch 9,^) the supposed
genitives are to be taken rather as words of nearer definition standing in
apposition, i.e. with high walls, gates, and bars. In Jer 8^ D^PtJ'IT' is either in
apposition to HTn DVil or is better (since not in the LXX) omitted as a gloss.
\b) Genitives after a noun with a suffix (where the suffix prevents the direct d
government by th^ nomen regens). Thus in Lv 2'j^-^-^, where "ID^n after ^3"!!? '
might be taken, contrary to the accents, as subject of the following clause ;
in Lv 5I5.25 thg suffix may refer to Moses. In Lv 6^ 12 ilD his garment,
namely the garment of linen, unless simply in apposition, cf. § 131 d (or read
*'j|0 ?) ; Lv 26*2, where "131 '^'^V'* T'*!? could at most be explained as an ellipse
for 3'py^ T\*''y2 *n"'13, cf. § 125/i (probably, however, it is a case of dittography
of the ^, which was repeated also before Dn~l3X ; so Valeton, ZAW. xii. 3) ;
equally strange is Di*n TT'IS Jer 3320, &c. On the other hand, n^rT* DN
nin'' D3X^33 Nu 12^ could not possibly mean if your prophet be a prophet of the
Lord ; the text is manifestly corrupt (probably nin*0 ^^?''33 is to be read, with
Marti). In if/ 45'' DTl^X ^KD3 (usually explained as thy divine throne), D\n?X
is most probably a later addition [another suggestion is to read D"'nbN3
like God{'s throne) : cf. § 141 d, note]. In Jer 52-" two readings are probably
combined, DnK'TOp without any addition, and Dv3n~P3 JlK'n^p. In Nu 25'=
CSb^ is in apposition to "'Jins. On HD] TJIII'n Ez 16*^, cf. § 131 r.
(c) The interposition of a word is assumed between ~p3 (the whole ; cf. 6
§ 127 b) and the genitive governed by it in 2 S 1', Jb 27^ ("liV)) and, if the
text is correct, in Hos 14^ (NJJ'ri). In reality, however, in all three places
the genitive relation is destroyed by the transposition of the words (instead
of "^3 liy &c.), and ~?3 is rather to be taken adverbially (equivalent to
icholly), e.g. 2 S 1' because my life is yet ivholly in me, i.e. my whole life ; cf.
Philippi, Stat. Constr., p. 10. — On the instances in which the original construct
state pX non-existence is used without a following genitive, see the negative
sentences, § 1520.
2. The dependence of the nomen rectum on the nomen regens by /*
no means represents merely what is, properly speaking, the genitive
relation (see the examples under g-i). Very frequently the nomen
' Hal6vy, J. A. xiv. 548, removes the difficulty by pointing '^3'iy.
4i6 The Parts of Speech [§128^-0
rectum only adds a nearer definition of the nomen regens, whether by
giving the name, the genus or species, the measure, the material,
or finally an attribute of it {genit. ejpexegeticus or apjpositionis,^ see the
examples under h-q).
Examples. The nomen rectum represents —
g (a) A subjective genitive, specifying the possessor, author, &c., e. g. •jJQrTn^S
the king's house ; niH^ "ID"! the word of the Lord.
]l (b) An objective genitive, e, g. Ob^" T'C^ ^PH^ /*"■ '^^ violence done to thy
brother"^ (but in Ez 12^^ D10n*D is followed by a subjective genitive) ; Pr 20^*
Ijbp rilO''N the terror of a king ; Gn iS^o Dhp rij^yT the cry concerning Sodom ; Is 23*
"IS ypjJ' the report of {about) Tyre, cf. 2 S 4* ; Am S^" T'n'' b'^Vithemourningforan
only son ; Dt 20^* ^""^^^ ^2^ praeda hostibus tuis erepfa ; cf. Is 3^*. In a wider
sense this includes such examples as D'*^nn yV. '^'^3. ^^ '"^^V °f ('• ®' ^°) '''® '''^^ °f
life, Gn 32* ; cf. Pr f, Jb 3820 ; D*n ^l^^ the way of {by) the sea, Is 8^ ; '•n^t
D\n?K the sacrifices of (i.e. pleasing to) God, ^^ 51^' ; Hin^ nySK' the oath of (i.e.
sworn before) theLord, i K 2**' ; 7WDp ^"I3"n the wordsef(i.e. addressed to) L., Pr3i^
I (c) A partitive genitive ; this includes especially the cases in which an adjec-
tive in the construct state is followed by a general term, e.g. H^nilb' niOSPl
T V IT ; -
the wisest of her ladies^ Ju 5^' ; cf. for this way of expressing the superlative,
7 § 1.^3 ^) and also r below.
n Merely formal genitives {genit. explicativus or epexegeticus, genit. appositionis)
are those added to the construct state as nearer definitions —
{d) Of the name, e. g. THB "in3 the river Euphrates ; jy33 J^'IX the land of
Canaan ; bN^fe'^ riP^nil the virgin Israel (not of Israel), Am 5^.
' (e) Of the grenws, e. g Pr ic,^ {21^'^) W\iib''0'2 a fool of a man { = a foolish man);
cf. Gn 16", Is i<, 29", Ho 132, Mi ^*, &c,
7H (/) Of the species, e. g. "lip H^nX a possession of a burying-place, i.e. hereditary
sepulchre, Gn 23*, &c. ; ni"133n ""pSJl the early figs, Jer 24* ; "'jri"'3 PllN the taber-
nacle of my house, i. e. my dwelling-place, }p 132'.
71 {g) Of the rr\ea&ure, weight, extent, number, e. g. "ISDD "•nip people of number,
i. e. few in number, Gn 34'", Dt 26^ ; cf. also Ez 47'"^ waters of the ankles, waters
of the loins, waters of swimming, i.e. which reached up to the ankles, or loins,
< <
or necessitated swimming ; but in verse 4 in apposition (?) D^3").'? D^D.
O {h) Of the material^ of which something consists, e.g. 'B'"in ^P3 a vessel of
earthenware, Nu 5^'' ; t]D3 ^?3 vessels of silver (cf. the French des vases dor) ;
Y)J |i*1K an ark of wood, bn? L53^ a rod of iron, \p 2* ; cf. Gn 3*1, 6", Ju 7", &c.
^ The latter term is preferred especially by KOnig, Theol. Stud, und Krit.,
1898, p. 528 fif,
2 Cf. in Latin a similar use of the genitive after iniuria (Caes. B. G. i, 30),
metus {hostium, Pompeii, &c.), spes, and other words. In Greek, cf. evvoia twv
<piX<uv, TTtaris rod 6eov, 6 \6yos 6 tov (Travpov, I Cor. i^'.
* In the almost entire absence of corresponding adjectives QVMi made of
cedar, a denominative from fli?, and {J'inj brazen are the only examples), the
language regularly has recourse to the above periphrasis. On the form qatid,
as expressing an inherent property, cf. § 50 / ; cf . also the proper name,
§i28j9-m] The Indication of the Genitive Relation 417
(t) Of the attribute of a person or thing, e.g. Gn 178 Dpij? n?nX an everlasting p
possession ; Pr 178 a precious stone ; cf. Nu 288, Is 138^ 28*, ;// 23^, 318, Pr 5l^ 14^,
.Tb 4ii9, an<j the examples of the genitive with a suffix given in § 135 n.
Such a periphrasis for the expression of attributes frequently occurs, even
when the corresponding adjectives are in use. Thus especially K'l'p holiness
very frequently serves as a periphrasis for the adjective CJ'iTp (e. g. CJ'lpn ''133
the holy garments, Ex 29'''), since B^Hp is used almost exclusively in reference
to persons (hence also with DJJ and ''13 people, and with D^ the name of
a person) ; the only exceptions are K'Tlp DlptS holy place, Ex 29^1, &c. ; D^D
D^B'np holy water, Nu 5" ; K'^p as the predicate of UV day, Neh 81° f-, and of
nano cawip, Dt 23^^ So also the use of p^"nS righteous is always confined to
persons, except in Dt 48 ; elsewhere the periphrasis with p'ly or npllf is always
used, e, g. ply ''3 WD iwsi baZances, Lv 1 9'^.
In a wider sense this use of the genitive also includes statements of the Q
purpose for which something is intended, e. g. nnrilp [KJf sheep/or the slaughter,
ip 44^; '\yhiVp "ip^D the chastisement designed for our peace, Is 53^; cf. 51" {tha
cup which causes staggering), xp 116^^; finally, also, the description of the
material, with which something is laden or filled, e. g. i S 16^° p^ nN3'l Dflp "ibn
an ass laden with bread and a bottle of wine (but probably niCJ? is to be read for
•nbn) ; cf. Gn 21", Pr 720, &c.
Kem. I. Certain substantives are used to convey an attributive idea in the T
construct state before a partitive genitive; thus "in3D choice, selection, as in
Gn 23' ^3''^.3p "iniito the choice of our sepulchres, i. e. our choicest sepulchres ;
Ex 15*, Is 22'', 37^*; other examples are, Is 1^* the evil of your doings, emphatic-
ally, for your evil doings ; Is 17*, 37^* { = the tall cedars thereof), \p 139^^^, Jb 15**. —
This is the more common construction with the substantive >3 entirety, for
aU, the whole, every, see § 127 & ; it is also frequent with tsyp a little, {or few,
I S 1728, &c.
2. To the periphrases expressing attributive ideas (seep above) by means S
of a genitive construction may be added the very numerous combinations of
the construct states {J'^N a man, /Jja master, possessor, ~|3 son, and their feminines
and plurals (including ""niO men, used only in the plural), with some appella-
tive noun, in order to represent a person (poetically even a thing) as
possessing some object or quality, or being in some condition. In English,
such combinations are sometimes rendered by single substantives, sometimes
by circumlocution.
Examples : —
(a) Of {jJiK, &c. : D^"12"l li'''N an eloquent man, Ex 4I0 (but D^nSB' {^''N Jb ii»^
a man of lips, i.e. a boaster) ; ]S\yb K'^N = a slanderer, \p 140^2. j^y-] ^>,^ a man of
knowledge, Pr 24^ ; nOR V)""^ a wrathful man, Pr 15^* ; D'^JOI B'^K a man of blood,
2 S 16'', ^ h' ; cf.^ further, i S 16", i K 22*, Is 53^, Pr 196, 2621, 29^, Ezr 8'*;
also D*3''"lip njJ'N a contentious woman, Pr 27^^; in the plural, e.g. Gn 6*
D^n "'B'3S the men of renown, famous ; cf. Gn 47®, Is 41", Jb Z4^-'^'> (33^ ''K'3«
men of understanding) ; with TlD, e. g. Is 5^' (SJ)"! "^Ht^ famished men; but read
probably 2]}'\ ''10 weak with hunger) ; ip 26*, Jb n^^, 22^^
(b) Of byl, &c. : ny'B> byi hairy, 2 K 18 ; nteSnp ^y| the dreamer, Gn ^f^ ; U
cf. Na i2, Pr 1", i8» (a destroyer), 23", 23^ {disposed to eat, greedy), 248 ; feminiaa
COWLIX JJ Q
41 8 The Parts of Speech [§ 128 v-x
3iN"ripy3 a woman that hath a soothsaying spirit, i S 28'' ; cf. Na 3* ; in the
plural, e. g. D"'5fn \by2 archers, Gn 49^3, n^in \by3 confederates, Gn 14" ; i^ya
nyiDK' sworn supporters, Neh 6^*.
V (c) Of "f2, &c. : b)n']^ a hero, warrior, i K 1^2 ; pB'p-f3 ;jeiV, Gn le^ ; njE'"}?
yearling. Ex 12^, &c. ; HJE^ nS)0"|3 centum annos natus, Gn 21^; n"ip"f3 worthy
to die, I S 2c3i (Luther, 2 S 12^ ein Kind des Todes) ; cf. Dt 25^ ri*l3n"f3 ivorthy to
be beaten. Feminine, e.g. 79v3"n3 a wicked woman, i S 1^^ ; frequently also
bvlb^ t^'N', '3 ""pS, '3 ^kJ'JK, and even simply ^y^[>3, like the Latin scelus for
scelestissimus, 2 S 25^, Jb 34!". Plural masculine, e. g. ""lO ''33 children of
rebellion, Nu 172^. "|3 is used poetically of things without life, e. g. Is 3^
IPE'"!? a fat, i. e. a fruitful (hill) ; Jon 4^" n^"'5"|3 i. e. grown in a night ;
Jb 412" son of the bow (i.e. an arrow) ; so also PjK'T "'33 = spa»"A;s, Jb c,'' ; La 31^ ;
Di33 Ec 12'* the daughters of song, probably meaning the individual notes.
There is another use of ~J3 or "'33 to denote membership of a guild or
society (or of a tribe, or any definite class). Thus DTlpN ""JS or DTl^XH '"33
. ■ v: - : • v: it •• :
Gn 6^*, Jb i^, 2>, 38'' (cf. also DvN ^33 xp 29^, 89'') properly means not sons of
god(s), but beings of the class of D''n"S^^ or D''!)^ ; D''N''33n"''33 i K 20^5 (singular
in Am 7I*) persons belonging to the guild of prophets; DTlpl'TIS Neh 3* 07ie of the
guild of apothecaries, cf. 3^^ where CD^SfrTlS is to be read. Similarly D''K'?K' "'33
Gn 50^^ are most probably not great-grandsons but grandsons, i. e. those belonging
to the third generation. Cf. also "'Il'^'ian ""pS Nu 427'- Gershonites, D"'rinipn "'pS
2 Ch 20^^, &c., Kohathites; Dip ''33 dwellers in the East.
7V 3. Special mention must be made of the not infrequent idiom by which
adjectives (sometimes also ordinals, see § 1340) are added in the genitive,
like substantives, rather than as attributes in the same state, gender, and
number as the noun wliich they qualify ; thus, Is 28* 733 n^^if the flower of
that which fades, for Avhich verse i has ?33 pif the fading flower ; cf. further.
Is 22^*, Jer 22"(?), 52", ^ 7310, 74I5 ^but |j-,sjj| jnay be a substantive), 78";
also the use of V^ as a substantive, e.g. in Pr 2^* ", 6^* (JJT riK'N),.&c.. analogous
to the New Testament phrase o oIkovohos t^? dSi/ctaj, Luke 16*, and tlie French
un homme de bien.^ — Finally, an adverb (treated as a substantive) may likewise
be used as an epexegetical genitive ; cf. D3n '•D'H blood shed without cause, i K 2°i ;
Pr 2428, 262 ; Ez 30I6 (DDV).
J7 3. The epexegetical genitives include finally the numerous nearer
definitions which follow the construct state of adjectives (and of active
and passive participles, or verbal adjectives, cf. § 116 f-l). For,
while the word of nearer definition is added to the verb in the
accusative (e.g. "ly^'^'riX npn he was diseased in his feet, i K 15"^), it
may, with participles and verbal adjectives, be either in the accusative
1 On the other hand, in such passages as Is 362 (2 K JS"), Zc 14*, Ec 8'°, &c.,
there is no apparent reason why the Masora requires the construct state
instead of the absolute; hence ?TI Is i(>^ and S*3 Zc 14* must be intended as
forms of the absolute state, shortened in consequence of their close
connexion.
§§ 128 y, 129 a-c] Indication of the Ge?iitive Relation 419
(§ 1 16 /and k) or in the genitive, the case of a word depending on
a noun. Such a genitive relation is usually termed an improper
annexion. The nearer definition contains a statement either of the
material, e. g. Ex f, &c., tl'?"|1 3^n rUT H? « ^««<^ flowing with milk
and honey; or of the means, e.g. 3^.n~\7pn s?om loith the sword,
Is 2 2- ; or the cawse, Ct 2* s?cA; 0/ Zore ; or of the scope of the attribute,'
e.g. Gn 39« "lijSn'ns; /«?> o//orm ; cf. Gn 412-^ Ex 34^, Is i*, Jer 32",
Na i^ V 119'. Jb sv'**; or of the manner, e.g. V^ 59" \)}^ ''^.^'^ faithless
ones 0/ wickedness (wickedly faithless).
Especially frequent is the use of this genitive to name the part of 2/
the body described as being affected by some physical or mental
condition, e.g. ^//■ 24'* Dl?? ''i?3 clea^i as regards hands, &c. ; 2 S 9',
Is 6^ Jb 17^ Is I9'« l^^r^'O^^' grieved in soul; i S i^ Jb ^'^. Also
such examples as Am 2'", Pr 19', where a suffix is attached to the
substantive, must be regarded as instances of the genitive construction,
on the analogy of Pr 1 4-, see § 116^.
§ 129. Expression of the Genitive hy Circumlocution.
Pesides the construction of a nomen rectum dependent upon a nomen a
regens in the construct state (§§ 89 and 128), the connexion of two
nouns may also be effected otherwise, either by simply attaching the
dependent noun by means of the preposition p, which, according to
§ 119 r, expresses, besides other ideas, like that of belonging to,^ or by
the addition of a relative clause (P "1'^?^, ^ee h below).
I. The introduction of a genitive by p sometimes occurs even when the 0
construction with the construct state would be equally possible, e. g. 1 S 14"
b'lNB'b D''Q2fn the watchmen of Saul; \p 37'8, 2 Ch 28!^ (where indeed the
circumlocution makes the sense much plainer) ; as a rule, however, this use
is restricted to the following cases : —
(a) To prevent a nomen regens being determined by a following determinate C
genitive, e. g. i S 16'' ^K-'^b p a son of Jesse (''^'"'"[3 would be, according to
§ 127 o, the son of Jesse) ; cl Gn 14", 3612, ^,12^ Nu 1622 (27i«), i S 178, 2 S 19",
^ I22\ Hence, regularly "IpS "^1^1'? i'P SS &c.) a p»ahn of David (properly
belonging to David as the author), for which '^\lp of David is used alone
olliptically in ^ ii^, 14I, &c. Such a case as "ViKiXip IH? (ip 24', &c.) is not to
^ Cf. the Latin integer vitae sceltrisque purvs ; iristes animi, &c.
2 Cf. the axvh"'- K-o\o(puji'iov in Greek, e.g. 17 KopaKr) rw aiOpij-nai for toC
avOpujTTov (Bernluudy's Syntax, p. 88). The Arab grammarians distinguish
a twofold genitive, one of which may be resolved by p, and the other by JD
[see Wright's Arabic Grammar, vol. ii, § 7? ff.]. The de of the Romance
languages is a development of the latter idta ; the Gascon, however, says e.g.
la fiUe a Mr. N.. laying stress upon the idea of belonging to and not that of
origin, as in lajille de . . . oi the literary language.
£62
420 The Pa7'ts of Speech [§129^-/*
be regarded as a transposition, but "IIJDID is used epexegetically for the
general term omitted before HIT? (as it were, a poem of David, a psalm).
Moreover, the introduction of the author, poet, &c., by this Lamed auctoris ia
the customary idiom also in the other Semitic dialects, especially in Arabic.
(I (6) When a genitive is to be made dependent on a nomen regens, which is
itself composed of a nomen regens and rectum, and represents, as a com-
pound, one united idea, e. g. Ru 2^ ly^p n'lE'n nj5pn the portion of field belonging
to Boas (tyb mb' 'n would be the portion of the field of Boas) ; 2 K ^^ at the house-
door of Elisha. This especially applies to the cases in which the compound
regens represents a term in very common use, the fixed form of which
cannot be altered, e.g. 1 K 14" ^KIB''' •'D^JD^ D''D*n "'"in'l ISD^^y in the book
of the chronicles of the kings of Israel ; 15^^, &c. ; cf. also Jos 19*^.
e (c) When for any other reason the construction with the nomen regens in
the construct state is inadmissible ; cf. e. g. Lv iS^", where '^P\2^p, on account
of the sufBx, cannot be used in the construct state; but hv le^^^^-, &e.,
yi1~n3Dy' ; Ju 3^^ the Jordan fords of Moab (|"]I")^ as a, proper name cannot be used
in the construct state) ; Ex 20^ upon the third and upon the fourth generation of
them that hate me ; D''y3'}~7y^ must be kept in the absolute state for the sake
of conformity with Di^^v^rbV, and for the same reason also "•^HNp D''Q?X?.
f (d) After statements of number in such cases as Gn 8" DV bnb'yi iiyaB'S
K'lnp on the seven and twentieth day of the month ; cf. 7^^, 16' and frequently, or
as in Hag i^ tJ'Vn^ D'TIK' DJK'B in the second year of Darius ; the numeral here
*,T it^; * " i ■;•
is always one compound idea with the substantive numbered, and con-
sequently (as in the examples under &) does not admit of being in the constr.
st. with a genitive. The same naturally applies also to such examples as
I K 3I* Tl"!?!) ''tJ'vE'n Di*3 on the third day of my giving birth (i. e. after my
giving birth). Cf also the standing phrase K'Hn? ^^K3 on the first (day) of the
mofith, Gn 8^ and frequently.
^ Rem. In cases like 2 S 3^ and his firstborn was Amnon DyiTlN? of Ahinoam,
the genitive expressed by circumlocution with p is in reality dependent
on a regens which is omitted (Dyb^HX? )3 a son of Ahinoam) ; cf. 2 S 3'-',
I K 14", Am 53 (unless bsi'lb'^ T'llb originally depended on thus spake the
Lord), and the remarks on "litDIJD T!*!? "'^*5®'" <^ above.
// 2. The periphrastic expression of the genitive by means of ? IK'S is used
principally to state the possessor, e.g. Gn 29' n"'3Xp ll^X JXJfH her father^ s sheep
(prop, the sheep which belonged to her father) ; Gn 47* and frequently. So also
(according to § 128 a) when a genitive depends on more than one substantive,
e.g. Gn 40^ the butler and the baker who (belonged) to the king of Egypt (T]PD HDNl
D^lXp would indicate only the baker as belonging to the king) ; or when
a genitive (as in the examples under d above) is added to a compound, which
expresses one united idea (Ru 4') ; or when, as a fixed term (e. g. a title),
it appears always in the same form, e.g. Ct i^ nbStJ'f) "IK'K WV^T^ T'B' the
Song of songs, of Solomon ; I S 21^, 282',! Ch 11^" ; cf. also Gn 41*^.^
1 In New Hebrew hp (derived from ^B* = h "IB'X, see § 36, and cf. Ct i«,
l' ''?K', Tkhp>>^) is used like the simple relative '"Jj^ "1 in Aramaic, as an
independent sign of the genitive.
§i3o«-c] Wider Use of the Construct State 421
§ 130. Wider Use of the Construct State.
The construct state, which, according to § 89 a, primarily represents a
only the immediate government by one substantive of the following
word {or combination of words), is frequently employed in rapid
narrative as a connecting form, even apart from the genitive relation;
60 especially —
(i) Before prepositions,' particularly in elevated (prophetic or
poetic) style, especially when the nomen regens is a participle. Thus
before 3, "T'lfj?? nnOK' the joy in the harvest, Is 9^, 2S i"', f I36*''-;
in participles, Is 5", 9^ 19^ yjr 84'', and especially often when 3 with
a suffix follows the participle, e. g. ■»//• 2^^ ^3 ''p'in"73 ; cf. Na i', Jer 8"
{\l/ 24^); \//' 64' (unless nttn should be read); 98'.- — Before ?, Ho 9*
(but read probably DEtp? ^"nnm); ,|, 58^ (before to^) ; Pr 2 4^" Jb I8^
La2>« (before ^^) ; i Ch 6^ 23^^ in participles, Ez 38", Jb24»;
before ? with an infinitive. Is 56'", and again before ? with a suffix,
Gn 242'', Is 3o'S 64^•=*— before -^K, Is 14^9, Ez 21 •7;— before TIN [with),
Is 8^;— before f», Gn 3^, Is 28' (a participle); Jer232^ Ez 13^, Ho 7^;—
before '?V, Ju 5'";— before V?^, Is 14"; — before the iiota accus. HN,
Jer 33^; — before a locative (which in such cases also serves as a
genitive). Ex 27", Jer I^^
(2) Before wdw cojmlative, e.g. Ez 26'°; but rilpsn Is 33^^ TQ^l 35^^ J
and rilSK' 51^1 may be cases of an intentional reversion to the old
feminine ending ath, in order to avoid the hiatus (1) \ n_..
(3) When it governs the (originally demonstrative) pronoun '^'^^,; C
so especially in the combination IB'N DipJ?, Gn 39™, 40', the j)lace where
(prop, of that in which) Joseph was hound; cf. § 138 gr; or "'!?'N D'iplpa
Lv ^'''•^\ 2 S 15^ I K 21", Jer 22'^ Ez 2i''S Ho 2\ We should "expect
IK^N D^p^n, -IK^N Dip^a, as in Gn 35^^ &c., at the place which . . . , cf.
§138; but "l^N is treated as a nomen rectum instead of as an attribute.
1 Cf, KOnig, ' Die Ueberwucherung des St.-constr.-GebraucLs im Semit.,'
ZmiG. 63, 52 Iff.
* In Ju 8" the article is even used before a construct state followed by 3,
in order to determine the whole combination C^HX^ *313tJ' teni-du-ellers, taken
• tt:it •• :
as one word; cf., however, the remarks in § 12'j f-i on similar grammatical
solecisms.
' These are to be distinguished from the cases where p follows a construct
state, which in conjunction with ^ (and the following p) has become a sort
of preposition or adverb of place ; thus, we have j)"n''3D Ex 26'^ (for which in
Ez 1^ merely p n^3) meaning simply within ; b P'?"'10 (2 K 23", Ez 10') on (he
right hand (i.e."south) of; b pSJID (Jos 8"", &c., Ju 2') on the north of; cf. also
Jos 1521 and ;d V.?!' Neh 13*.
422 The Parts of Speech [§ 130 df
Cf. also 'N Di'D followed by a perfect in i S 29^, and 'N "•»; Lv I3«
Nu 9'«. ^
^ (4) When it governs independent sentences (cf. § 155), which
virtually stand to the construct state (as nonien regens) in a sort of
genitive relation, e. g. Ex 4'^ ro^pr^l"^ prop, hy the hand of him whom
thou wilt send; Nu 23^ ''i'^']!"'iP "1?"1 the matter of that ivhich he shall
show me, i. e. whatever he shall ; Is 29' "IH HJn T\'Pp^ the city wJiere
David encamped; Jer 48^^ ^ 16^ (if the text be right), 65* (Pr 8^^),
■^81", Jb 18"^ the place of him that knoweth not God; Jb 29'^ La i"
(if the text be right) into the hands of those against whom / cannot
stand? In Gn 39'' (v'B'.l"-'!) the "i'3 takes after it a noun-clause, and
in Ex 9^, still more boldly, a subst. with ?. — Very often a time-
determination governs the following sentence in this way ; thus "^ID^
followed by a perfect, Lv 25^*, 185^; D^"'3 i^t' 102^ (before a noun-
clause), Ex 6^, Nu 3\ Dt 4'*, 2 S 22\ i/^ 18', 59>^, 138^ (in every case
before a following perfect), xp 56'° (before an imperfect); Di*P
followed by the perfect, Jer 36^; ^»)-b Lv 14^*, i S 25'^ Jb 29^ (^D^3
as in the days when . . . * ; cf. niD""? and T\S'^f before a perfect, ^ 90'');
nj^Il before a perfect, Jer 6'^ (cf. 49^, .50*') ; before an imperfect, Jb 6";
npnri before a perfect, Ho i''.
e (5) Connected with a following word in apposition ; certainly so in
such cases as p^iTn? Hpinil the virgin, the daughter of Zion, Is 37^;
cf. 23'^, Jer 14"; also i S 28" ^^NTipy? riB'X a woman, possessor of
a soothsaying spirit ; cf. Dt 21".— Gn 14'", Ju 19^^ (but read probably
Q'mVi with Moore, as in Dt I3'^ Ju 2o•^ i K 21'°); 2 K 10", 17''
^rl; Jer 46^ ^ 35"(?)» 1^\ Jb 20'^'' (unless nnp. or \^np_ be a gloss).
f Rem. Some of the above passages may also be explained by supposing that
there exists a real genitive relation towards the preceding construct state,
which has been, as it were, provisionally left in suspenso, in consequence of
the insertion of some interrupting word, e.g. Is 37-2, &c. ; Jb 20"". Else-
wliere (Dt 33^^, \f/ 68'*) the no^nen regens probably governs the following
construct state directly.*
1 In Dt 23^ the construct state governs a sentence introduced by the
conjunction ~\p^ O*^^? I^'I'^V by reason 0/ the fad that, i.e. because) ; so also in
I S 3".
^ Probably Gn 22'* is also to be so explained (contrary to the accents), and
certainly (contrary to the very unnatural division of the verses) 2 Ch 30*',
which should read on thus : pDH ^^D^'^S 1^3 "ISD^ 3it3n mj]] the good Lord
pardon every one that setteth his heart to seek God. [See Wickes' Accentuation of the
Twenty one Prose BooJcs of the Old Testament, p. 140.]
' Cf. Na 2' X^n ''P''0, usually explained to mean from the days that sht hath
been, but the text is evidently very corrupt.
* So also Is 28^* a corner stone of the 2y>'eciousness (nip"* is a substantive not
an adjective) of a fxed foundation, i.e. a precious corner stone of surest founda-
tion.— In 2 S 20^' the text is wholly corrupt; in ip 119^** read ^"•"l^pB'bs.
§§ i^og, 131 a-c] Wider Use of the Co7istruct State 423
(6) The numeral "inN one for*in*J in close connexion, and even with^
small disjunctives, e. g. Gn 3^, 48", i S 9^ 2 S if\ Is 27'", Zc 1 1^.
The character of these passages shows that the numeral here cannot be in
tlie construct state, but is merely a rhythmical shortening of the usual (tone-
lengthened) form.
§ 131. Apposition.
1. Apposition in the stricter sense is the collocation of two sub- a
stantives in the same case in order to define more exactly (or to
complete) the one by the other, and, as a rule (see, however, below,
under g), the former by the latter. Apposition in Hebrew (as in the
other Semitic languages') is by no means confined to those cases
in which it is used in English or in the classical languages. It is not
infrequently found when either the subordination of one substantive
to the other or some more circumstantial kind of epexegetical addition
would be expected.
2. The principal kinds of apposition in Hebrew are : —
(a) The collocation of genus and species, e. g. "^59?^ '^^^ ^ woman b
(who was) a widow, i K7"; n^ina iTlJ?p_ a damsel (that is) a virgin,
Dt22=='^, Ju4^ I9\ 2I'^ 1830'^ iki^; cf. Guif, 2 r» (where,
however, T)^2 is probably an explanatory gloss); Ex 24* (i S 11'*),
2 S I5'^ I K 3'^ 5"^ (but probably ^590 should be read instead of ?3P);
Is 3-' (unless mp. is to be read), Jer 20^ Perhaps also B'N"in fnb the
2)riest (who is) the chief man, 2 K 25'^ &c.; others take |n3 as
constr. St. — In 2 S lo' read '23n N5^~73 with the LXX, as in the
parallel passage i Ch 19' for 'an fc<3i;-73, which is evidently meant to
refer to the reading in 2 S.
(6) Collocation of the 2)erson or thing and the attribute, e. g. Jb 20^ C
(27") V^l Ql^'pbh ni this is the portion of a man, (who is) a wicked
man (but V^^ might also be an adject.) ; cf. Pr 6'".— Lv 6'^ 1 6' (where,
however, ^Ip is probably a gloss) ; Pr 22^" n»N D''19>« words (which
are) <m<A ; (immediately after nON nrpN) cf. i S 2•^ Mil" (where,
however, T\fi is most probably a gloss on nj^J?); Zc i*^ {^^comfortable
words); >/'45*(?), 68'^ (cf. verse 16). In a wider sense this includes
also such cases as {{/ 60* n^J?')'!!' ])! wine which is staggering (intoxictiting
drink), which cauees staggering 2; 1X22^% 2 Chi 8^" Yu2 D^P (in
1 On certain uses of apposition peculiar to the Semitic languages, cf. the
exhaustive discussion by Fleischer, 'Ueber einige Arten der Nominnhipposi-
tion im Arab.' (Kleine Schriften, ii. 16); [and see also Driver, Tenses,
Appendix IV.]
2 Unless it is to be translated thou gavest us intoxication to drink as wine (and
so in I K 22^^ give him affliction to eat as bread, &c.) ; cf. if/ 80^ and the analogous
examples of apposition in the form of a second accusative in § iij kk. More-
424 The Parts of Speech [§ 131 rf, ^
Is 30''° parallel with lif DH^) water which is affliction, drunk in trouble
(imprisonment). Still more boldly, 1X5^ "'VI ""ij? oxen which were
taken out of the jiastures, and i K 6^ undressed stones which come
from the quarry, probably a corruption of VEirajp, A person and
a condition are in apposition in Ez 1 8^ (unless "^^"5?? is to be read). —
In I S 4^ read 'Vn J3K, as in 5\ f\
d (c) Collocation of the person (Dt 28^*) or thing (form) and material,^
or of the 2^^<^ce or measure and its contents, e.g. i Ch 15'^ D^ripifM
riKTljl iviih cymbals which were brass, i. e. of brass ; cf. Ex 26^, Dn 1 1*,
1 Ch 28'^'^ (?) ; Ex 28*' four rows, namely stones (for which 39'" has
jnx n^t3) ; cf. 2 Ch 4'^ Lv 6=* (see, however, § 1 28 cZ) ; 2 K 7^ nVo nXD
a\eah oi fine flour; cf. 2" K f^''\ Gn i8«, Ex 16^, Lv 5", Ru 2",
I K i6^ 2^52' flD| Dn33 ^1^,0 <aZew<s of silver;' cf. 5'^ Ex 39'',
Ez 22'* (if the text be right). With the material placed before the
measure, Ex 30^'^''. — A period of time and its contents are placed in
apposition D'''?^ Clh a month oi days, i. e. a month's time = for a whole
month, Gn 29'*, Nu ii^o-^^, of. Dt 21", 2 K I5'^ and D'»^ D^nj^ two
years' time, i.e. two full years, Gn 41', 2 S 13^^ 14^, Jer 28^-",
Dn lo^'-.
Finally, under this head may be included all the cases in which
a numeral (regarded as a substantive) is followed by the object
numbered in apposition, e.g. Q^?^ JlB'pip trias bc. filii, § 97 a and
§ 134 b.
e (d) Collocation of the thing and the measure or extent, number, &c.,
e. g. Nu 9"^" "'Sp'? ^"^^1 days, (a small) number, i. e. only a few days ;
npB'O f]D3 money, repetition, i. e. twice as much money, Gn 43'^ (unless
^D3 be constr. St.); ^^2"!? ^'^T? water which was of the measure of the
knees, which reached to the knees, Ez 47^ (also ^''.^/)'^ ^P water that was
to the loins, in the same verse). This likewise includes the cases in
which a noun is followed in apposition by a numeral (see § 134 c) or
an adverb, originally conceived as a substantive, e.g. Neh 2"^ ^""^^^
tsyp men, a few, i. e. some few men ; i K 5^ i^WV^ n3^3ri understanding,
much-making, i. e. much understanding, unless '^?"!''!} is to be taken as
an adverb with ]J!}^], as in 2 S 8* with nj^?.
< < < <
over, having regard to nj5"in p^ spiced wine, Ct 8*, and N'lB l^y a wild ass s colt,
Jb 11^2 ^in which passages p^ and Ty must certainly be in the construct
<
state) we cannot but ask whether the Masora does not intend the p^ in tfi 60*
to be taken as construct state (for which elsewhere p^),
^ Cf. also the examples treated above in § 127/1.
' On the anomalous form ClDS (instead of D"'"i33 ; cf. D'''133 immediately
tefore), see § 88 b.
§ i3i/-n] Apposition 425
(e) Collocation of the thing and its name, e. g. '^''V'??' i^l!!^? in their f
mountainous district, Seir (perhaps only a later gloss), Gn 14^; Y']^'}
fy33 the land Canaan (fyj3 probably only a later gloss), Nu 34^;
cf. Ezr 9\ I Ch 5^ (see under g below). — For examples of nouns in the
construct state before a noun in apposition, see § 130 e.
Rem. I. Only in certain combinations does the noun of nearer definition g
come first, e. g. Tl'n T] ?Sn T\'ty?'p ^ ?Sn king David, king Solomon (less frequently
Tlbon irn as in 2 S is^S I K 2", 122, 2 K S^s, 915, and in late Hebrew, Hag i^"
[cf. the Aramaic order XSpO K'lm], and often in Chron.). — A chiasmus occurs
in Is 45^, the name standing after the defining noun in the first part of the
verse, and before it in the parallel clause.
2. When the nota accusativi (pS "^^?) or a preposition precedes the first fl
substantive, it may be repeated before the noun in apposition, e.g. Gn 4^, 22^,
24*, 47'^ Is 66^1 ; this usually occurs when the nearer definition precedes
& proper name. As a rule, however, the repetition does not take place (Dt 18^,
Jer 33'*, I S 2^*). A noun in apposition is made determinate, even after
a noun with a prefix, in the ordinary way, e.g. 2 Ch 12" "T'yn Dv!J'^"l''3
in Jerusalem, the city which, &c.^
3. Sometimes a second adjective is used in apposition to a preceding I
adjective, in order to modify in some way the meaning of the first, e. g.
Lv I3'9 nO"nmS nj^b mna a wMU-redcUsh (light red) Iright spot.
V AT : ~ ~; T T : V •,• - ^ »
4. Permutation is to be regarded as a variety of apposition. It is not com- K
plementary like apposition proper (see a above), but i&ther defines the preceding
substantive (or pronoun, see below), in order to prevent any possible
misunderstanding. This includes cases like Gn 9^ with the life thereof (which
is) the blood thereof; Ex 22'", Dt 2^®, i S 7^, 2 K 3* an hundred thousand rams, the
wool, i.e. the wool of the rams ; Jer 25^* this cup of the tome, that is of fury (but
niDnri is probably a gloss) ; Is 42^^^ he poured upon him fury, namely his anger i^
but especially the examples in which such a permutative is added to a pre-
ceding pronoun, viz. — .
(a) To a separate pronoun, e. g. Ex 7" ; with regard to the vocative, cf. I
§ 126/.
(6) To an accusative suffix, e. g. Ex 2^ she saw him, the child (unless '^ilTlS IH
be a later gloss) ; Ex 35^, Lv l3^''^ i K ig'^^ (where, indeed, "ib'Iin appears to
be a late gloss) ; 21", 2 K 16^^ Km., Jer 9", 31^, Ez 3^', Ec 22i\according to
Delitzsch rather a double accusative).'
(c) To a noun-suffix, e. g. Ez 10' B'''Nn iNDB when he went in, the man ; 42" ; Tl
cf. Pr I3*(?), Ez 3"; so also after a preposition with suffix, e.g. Ec 4I"
nriKn Sb "'X woe to Mm, the one alone ; with a repetition of the preposition,
Nu ^2»3 Jos i2 bxn'ty^ "^in!? Dnb to them, to the children of Israel; Ju 21'', Jer 51'^,
1 In I K n« participles after VK^r^D^, as in 2 K lo^ after n^yn \^'"ia-n«,
in 19? after a determinate accusative, aiid in Hag 1* after DD'/H^Il, are used
without the article ; these, however, are probably to be explained not as in
apposition, but according to § ii8j?.
2 But wh Gn 6" (cf. 7^) is to be regarded as a later gloss upon the archaic
» For iSB'^l 1 S 21" either' n3B'''l is to be read or the KHhibh is to be ex-
plained according to § 75 b, note. Also ^Jisb^ Pr 5^ has hardly preserved the
correct form. '" ' '
426 llie Parts of Speech [§131 o-r
Ez 42B (?), Dn II", I Cli 4« 2 Ch 26".i— Cf. finally, Cfc 3^, where the suffix
precedes the genitive periphrastically expressed by '?K', as in Ez 9^, where
the genitive is expressed by p?
0 Of a different kind are the cases in which the permutative with its proper
suffix follows as a kind of correction of the preceding suffix, e. g. Is 2^"^ when
he (or rather) his children see, &c. (but V^^^ is clearly a gloss) ; of. ^p 83^^^ ; in
Jb 29* read i?nn3 (infin. Hiph.) or at least its syncopated form i?n2.
P 5. Cases of apposition in a wider sense are those in which the nearer
definition added to the noun was originally regarded as an adverbial accusative ;
on its use with the verb and on the relative correctness of speaking of such
an accusative in Hebrew, cf. § 118 a and m. Owing to the lack of case-
endings, indeed, it is in many instances only by analogies elsewhere
(especially in Arabic) that we can decide whether the case is one of apposition
in the narrower or in the wider sense ; in other instances this must remain
quite uncertain. However, the following are probably cases of apposition
in the wider sense : —
fj[ (a) Such phrases as f]p5 HDK'jp a double amount in money, Gn 43!^ . cf_
Jer 17^* ; i S 17' five thousand shekels in brass, but this might also be taken (as
in d) shekels which were brass; certainly such cases as Jb 1510 oZrfer than thy
father in days, and the expression of the superlative by means of IHD
(originally a substantive), e. g. 1X0 3iD ve)-y good, Gn i^^ (cf. also Ec 7^^ f
i^^nT] p^'nJf righteous over much), and the very frequent *1ND lyippi prop, a much-
making exceedingly, i.e. exceedingly great, Gn 15^, 41^', also Pr 23^^^ DSH CjJJfQ
wounds without cause,^ perhaps also Gn 34^5 (nt33).
7^ (6) A few examples, in which an epexegetical substantive is added to a
substantive with a suffix ; thus, Ez 16^'' n?3T T]3"l'n)0 of thy conduct in lewdness
(but it is also possible to explain it (as in c) of thy conduct, which is lewdness) ;
cf. Ez 24^^, 2 S 22^^ pTI '-pyo my fortress in strength, i. e. my strong fortress
(cf., however, ^ 18'') ; Hb 3*, ip 71''. While even in these examples the
deviation from the ordinary usage of the language (cf. § 135 w) is strange, it
is much more so in 3*in in?hn Ez 18'', i.e. according to the context his pledge U
for a debt ; Ezr 2^2 Q'tJTT'riDn D^np, i. e. their register, namely of those that were '
reckoned by genealogy (but perhaps "•riSH is in apposition to the suffix in
D3ri3), also the curious combinations (mentioned in § 128 d) of '"0*13 with
a proper name (Lv 26*^), and in Jer 3320 with Di>n.* f
^ But in Is 178 we should certainly divide the words dififerently and read
n»"}5)n ^SyD2, in Jer 48** read T^bi for r\'<^^, and in Pr I4" T]nmr\ DnnX ;
in Gn 2^^ n*n {J'sf is a late gloss upon Sb, and in Ez 4126 ^ynn Din^T^K
a gloss on jn vX .
2 Some of the examples given above are textually (or exegetically) doubtful,
whilst in th« case of others, especially those from the later Books, we cannot
help asking whether such a prolepsis of the genitive by means of a suffix (as
e.g. Ez 10') is not due to the influence of Aramaic, in which it is the
customary idiom ; cf. Kautzsch's Gramm. des Biblisch-Aram., § 81 e and § 88.
3 In \t 69^ D3n (like "Ipt^ in a false way, falsely, ip 35I* and 38*') is used as an
adverbial accusative with a participle ; cf. § 1 1 8 g.
* But in Nu 25I2 DipK' may also be explained, according to c, as really in
apposition. Cf. on the whole question Delitzsch, Fsalmen, 4th ed., p. 203,
note I.
§§ 131 s, <, 132 a] Apposition 427
6. In Dt 33< (n^li», perhaps ThT\\h 'nitt is to be read), 332'' (nj'yD), Ju 7' S
(mX), the absolute state appears to be used instead of the construct to govern
a following logical genitive ; this, however, cannot be explained either as
a special kind of apposition, or (with Hitzig) as a peculiarity of the dialect of
Northern Palestine, but is merely a textual corruption. On the other hand,
in Jb 31^1 py is evidently intended to combine the readings DvV? Pi! ^^^
^b^bs py (as in verse 28). — The remarkable combination niNl)? D"*!!^!!? in
\p 8o*-^' is due to the fact that in \p\p 42-83 D'^rOX has almost throughout been
subsequently substituted by some redactor for the divine name TWiV ; on
niXnV nin^ cf. §125/8. in \p 59^ So^-^o^ and 848 nin'' has been reinstated in
the text before itVO^ D'H^X.^
7. Lastly, the nearer definition (qualification) of a noun may be effected by t
means of a preposition (either with a suffix or with an independent noun),
but must then be distinguished from the cases in which the preposition is
dependent on a verb or verbal idea, e. g. Gn 3^ and she gave also rl12y nK'''NP
imto her husband with her {= her husband who was with her); in Gn 9^^ {that
I may remember the everlasting covenant between God and every liring creature of all
flesh) and other places, the qualification of the noun is itself also qualified.
§ 132. Connexion of the Substantive with the Adjective.^
1. The adjective (like the participle used adjectivally), which serves a
as an attribute of a substantive, stands after the substantive, and agrees
with it in gender and number, e. g. 7^1^ B'"'N a great man, HD^ rtE'N
a beautiful woman. If the substantive is immediately connected with
a genitive, the attribute follows the latter, since, according to § 89
and § 128 a, the construct state and the genitive belonging to it are
inseparably united, e.g. Est 8'^ '"'?^"'? ^CJ ^l^V. a great crown of gold. —
On the attribute when attached to a determinate substantive, see
above, § 126 u.
1 Without this assumption it would be inconceivable that D^X^if ""H^X niH"*
should not have been written ; that the author of these Psalms regarded
niXnS already as an independent name of God (so Gesenius and Olshausen)
is out of the question.
* On the expression of attributive ideas by siibstantives, cf. above, § 127 h,
and § 128 0, with the note ; § 135 n and § 141 c (substantives for adjectives
as predicates of noun clauses) and § 152 w (periphrases for negative qualities).
On the use of the feminine of adjectives (and participles) to express abstract
ideas, see § 122 5. It remains to mention further the employment (mostly
only in poetry) of certain epithets in place of the substantives to which the
quality in question belongs ; e. g. "fDX the strong one, i. e. God ; "l''3X the strong
one, i. e. the bull (in Jer 8", &c., the horse) ; 7(5 swift = the runner (of the horse,
Is 30"); n^nb alba, i.e. luna; n*"13 (/ructifera) a fruitful tree. Is 17* (so n"^3
*^ ' T T : T " I '.
Gn 49*') ; J*3T a croucher, i. e. a crouching beast of prey, Gn 4''. Cf. also fp
{gravis, augustus) and X^'K'3 (elatus?), i.e. a prince. The use of adjectives and
participles for substantives is much more extensive in Arabic. In Greek
and Latin poetical language cf. such examples as 67/117 = the sea; merum for
vinum, &c.
428 The Parts of Speech [§ 132 h-h
P Rem. I. Where an adjectival attribute appears to stand lefore its substantive
(according to the usual explanation, for the sake of special emphasis) the
relation is really appositional in character; thus, Is lo^'' niDJy n'3y 0 thou
poor one, Anathoih '. (but probably T\''^^ answer her, is to be read) ; cf. 23I2, 53^^
(a righteous man, my servant ; but in 2iP "IT ami *")33 are predicates preceding
the substantives); Jer 3«-iof.^ \t 18* him who is worthy to he praised will I call
vpon, the Lord ; 92^2 (apposition after participles). — But CBT and niBl many,
are sometimes placed, like numerals, before the substantive, Jer 16'^, Neh y^
(in \fj 145'' yy is a suhst. regens, in 89^^ the text is corrupt) ; an appositional
relation can scarcely be intended in these instances.
C 2. In a few expressions (mostly poetic) the adjective appears not as an
attribute after the substantive, but in the construct state governing it ; so in the
singular, Ex 15^* (unless pill should be read) ; i S 16'' {the height of his stature) ;
in the plural, i S 17*" D''33i;{ "'ppH smooth ones of (among) stones, i.e. smooth
stones ; Is 35®, Ez 7^^, ip 46^, and with a following collective instead of a plural,
e.g. Is 29I3 mN ""P.i^?^ ^f^^ P'>°^ among men, i.e. poor men ; Jer 49^", Zc 11'' ; cf.
in Latin canum degeneres. However, in almost all these cases the adjective
which is made into a regens is strongly emphatic, and is frequently equivalent
to a superlative (see below, § 133 g).
d 3. When two adjectives follow a feminine, sometimes only that standing
next to the noun takes the feminine termination, e. g. i K 19^^ nplS ri'll
'131 ptm (but read i^ha) ; i S is* (but cf. § 75 j/) ; Jer 2o9, ^ 6f. A similar
dislike of the feminine form may also be observed in the case of verbal
predicates referring to feminine subjects, cf. § 145 p and t.
When an attribute qualifies several substantives of different genders, it
agrees with the masculine, as being the prior gender (cf. § 146 d), e.g. Neh 9''
D'-niD niJflD^ n''ipn ; Jer 348, Zc 8«.
When three attributes follow a substantive, the first two may stand without
a conjunction, and the last be attached by waw copulative, cf. Zc i*.
^ 4. After feminines plural ending in D* (§ 87 p) the adjectival attribute
(in accordance with the fundamental rule stated above, under a) takes the
ending ni, e.g. Is 10" nilty D''lf^3 /orsaA^en eggs; Gn 32!*. For a strange
exception see Jer 29^'' (difi"erently in 24^;.
J 5. With regard to number it is to be remarked that —
(a) Substantives in the dual are followed by adjectives (or participles) in
the plural, e. g. ^ i8=« (Pr 6") DilD") D^^J^ haughty eyes ; Is 35', Jb 4^ '•, cf. § 88 a.
g [b) Collective ideas are not infrequently joined with the plural of the adjective
or participle {constructio ad sensum) ; thus, e.g. |XX sheep [with fem. plur.\
Gn 30*8, I S 25" ; Dy = »Men, i S i?". Is 9^ ; ^X"1K'^"^3 = aZZ the Israelites, i S 2" ;
n^pa = the exiles, Jer 28* ; cf. also D^JK' K'D3 two souls, Gn 46''''.^ Cf. similar pheno-
mena in the connexion of collectives with plural predicates in § 145 c.
/l (c) The pluralis exceUentiae or pluralis maiestatis is joined, as a rule, to the
singular of the attribute, e.g. f 710 pn^ D^Pi'Sn ; 2 K i9<i« (=Is37<");
Is 19*; but cf. D«n D^nSx^ Dt 5^", I S if^-^«, Jer 10", 23'*, perliaps also
' But it is impossible to take DO^Dri in Ez 46^ as an attribute of lp3 ;
probably it is a correction intended to harmonize the passage with Nu 28".
where two young bullocks are required.
2 Cf, I S 28", where D''r6x (in the sense of a spirit) is followed by WTji
ae a second accusative; conversely in 1 S 19^'-^*, a singular suffix refers back
§ 133 «j *] Connexion of Substantive with Adjective -429
Ex 20» D'^riK D^nSK = another god, and Jos 24" CB^np D''r6N (but cf. above,
§ 124 g-k\ On the other hand, i S 4^ is to be explained as having been said
by tlie Philistines, who supposed that the Israelites had several gods. On
the connexion of D''nr'l!5 with a plural predicate, see § 145 i.
2. On the adjective (in the construct state) governing a following
genitive, see § 128 a; ; for the participle in the same construction, see
§ii6/-Z.
§ 133. The Comparison of Adjectives. {Periphrastic
Expression of the Comparative and Superlative.)
A. Wiinsche, ' Der Komparativ im Hebr. im Lichte der arab. Gramm.,'
in Vierteljahrsschriftfur Bibelkunde, 1904, p. 398 S.
1. Hebrew possesses no special forms either for the comparative or a
superlative of the adjective.' In order to express a comparative, the
person or thing which is to be represented as excelled in some par-
ticular quality is attached to the attributive word by the preposition
-|D (-0), e. g. I S 9' Dyn"i'3t? nba higher than any of the people. The
fundamental idea evidently is, tall away from all tJie people (beyond
all the people); cf. Ju 14'^ ^"!>«0 ty HDI B'a^tJ pin^-np tvhat is siceeter
than Jwney 1 and what is stronger than a lion ? Ez 28', Am 6'.
Frequently an infinitive appears as the object of the comparison, e. g.
Gn 29" it is better that I give her to thee, than that I should give her,
&c.; Exm'SV'IiS''--
Rem. I. This use of "|D is also very common whon the attributive idea is u
represented by an intransitive verb, e.g. i S lo^' Dyn vSTD i^??*! «»»^ '"^ "'««
higher than nnv of the people ; Na t,^, .Tb 7«. Elsewhere, especially after transi-
tive verbs, "jO rather represents (on its different senses see § 119 v-s) the ide.a
I
to D''D"iri household god (but not so in Gn 31'*), as in ip 46* to the plural of
amplification D^JS^ sea. On the other hand, it is very doubtful whether nai
ip 78^5 is to be regarded as an attribute of nichri and not rather as the
adverb, abundantly.
1 There is in Arabic a speci.il form of the adjective (the dative) for the
comparative and superlative, which in Hebrew would h.ave the form /DpX.
Instances of it, perhaps, are "lT3S daring, cruel, 3!3K deceptive (of a brook
drying up), and its opposite ID^X (contracted from 'aitan) constantly flowing,
perennis. These forms are, however, used without any perceptible emphasis,
and cannot be regarded as more than isolated relics of an elative formation
which has become obsolete, much as the Latin comparative disappears in
Italian, and still more so in French, and is supplanted by the circumlocution
with piii, plus.
2 In Ju ii25 the adjective is specially intensified by repetition, art thou so
much better than Balak '? It would also be possible, liowover, to translate art
thou really belter . . ,?
430 The Parts of Speech [§ 133 c-e
of a separation, distinction or superiority of one pei'son or thing /?o»i or over
others. 1 This is evident in such cases as "fD IHS to choose something (to
prefer it) before something else, e. g. Jb 7^*, cf. Dt 14^ (also "fD . , , |i'iri'] the
excellence of . . , over . . . , Ec 2'^^) ; it is also seen in examples like Gn 37'
VJ2"73)p P)pV"nX 2ns ?X"lb'^'! now Israel loved Joseph more than all his (other)
children ; 2g^o, i S 2^', Ho 6«.2 '
C 2. A somewhat different idea underlies the use of ~}tp after adjectives, or
intransitive vei-bs possessing an attributive sense, when the thought to be
expressed is that the quality is too little or too much in force for the attainment
of a particular aim or object, e. g. Is 7^^ D3D DyJOH is it a small thing (i. e. too
little) /or you to . . . ? Jb 15I1 ; after an intransitive verb, e. g. Gn 32^1 I am too
insignificant (""ri^Op) for all the mercies (I am not worthy of . . .), &c. ; cf. also
the expressions ~])^ T33 to be too heavy for one, Ex iSi", Nu ii^*, if 38^ ; "fjp riE'p
to be too hard for one, Dt 1^' ; ~|0 DytO to be too few for something, Ex 12*;
~ffp 123 to be too strong for one, ip 65* ; ~[0 DSy to be too mighty for one, Gn 26^^ ;
"iP D^"l to be too high for one, f 61^ ; ~|0 llf to be too narrow for one. Is 49^^ ; "l^p
~f jp to be too short for something, Is 50^, and very frequently "[JO N^'SS to be too
wonderftd for one (and, consequently, inconceivable or unattainable), Gn 18'*,
Dt 17^, 30I', Jer 37", Pr 30'* ; in f 139^ riNvS in the same sense is followed
by |Jp. — This use is especially seen in the numerous instances in which the
attribute is followed by "|0 with an infinitive, e. g. i K 8^^ the brasen altar . . .
was b''3nO f'Op too little to receive (to be able to receive) the burnt offering, cf.
Gn 4^^, 36' too great for them to dwell together ; after verbs, e. g. Ex 12*, Is 28^0^
ip 40^ Finally, cf. "|tt DD? 31, followed by the infinitive, it is enough (prop.
too much) for you to . . . , meaning ye have . . . long enough, i K 12^*; cf. Ex 9^*
and Ez 44^ ("Jjp followed by a substantive).'
(i In all these instances ~|0 expresses either the removal of a thing from a
person, or the severance of the person from some aim or object ; cf. also the
expression '"131 p3 DnD 1if3^"S? nothing will be unattainable for them (prop, there
shall not be cut off from them anything which, &c.\ Gn 11^, Jb 42'.
e 3. Tlie attributive idea, on which ~|D logically depends, must sometimes,
in consequence of a pregnant use of the ~|D (see the analogous examples in
§ 119.^), be supplied from the context, e.g. Is lo^" DvB'^T'O DIIyDD^ whose
graven images were more numerous than those at Jerusalem, &c.;* Mi 7* worse
than a thorn hedge ; \p 62^" lighter than a breath ; Jb 1 1^''' clearer titan the noonday ;
Ec 4^'' better than, &c.
^ Cf. the Latin ablative with the comparative; also the etymology of such
words as eximius, egregius, and the Homeric «/f itavrwy fiaXiara, II. 4, 96 ; fK
■naaioov, 38, 431.
^ On the other hand, the phrase ~|D plS expresses not a comparison, but
only a relation existing between one person and another; thus, in Gn 38^*
^3Qp ^p'yi means, she is in the right as against me ; cf. \p 139^^^, Jb 4''', 32''. — In
Pr 1 7" rather (to meet with so and so) than ... is expressed by "/N1 before the
second member.
* Cf. also 2 K 4', where the idea of doing something too little is paraphrased by
<he Hiph. t^^]})2T\ = do not too little, sc. PNtJ*!? in borrowing empty vessels.
* With this comparatio decurtata, cf. the still bolder pregnant construction in
if/ 4", nyo greater gladness than at the time, &c.
§133/^^] The Compmison of Adjectives 431
2. The correlative comparatives greater — less {older — younger) are f
expressed by the simple adjective with the article {the great, equivalent
to the greater, &c.) ; Gn i'«, I9^'•^^ 2f\ 29''-''-''.
3. To express the superlative it is also sufficient (see above, /) to ^
make the adjective determinate, either by means of the ar.icle or
a following jjartitive genitive (or suffix); in this case the article
or genitive indicates that the attribute in question belongs especially
to one or more definite individuals; ' e. g. i S 9'' ^'^^'^^ the least; 16"
l^i^Ll the little one, i.e. the youngest of eight sons; 17''' David was
i^i^n tlie youngest, and the three great, i.e. elder, &c.; Gn 42'^, 44"^
Ct I^ — So also with a qualifying adjective, e.g. Gn 9-'* l^i?'!' i^? his
youngest son; cf. Jos 14'^; also with a following genitive, 2 Ch 21''
Vy^ fbp the youngest of his sons : Pr 30^^ the least upon the earth ; with
suffix, Mi Y"* D3iD their good one, i. e. the best of them; Jon 3^ DpilJP
l23^P""iyi froni the greatest of them even to the least of them; cf, the
inverse order in Jer 6'^, 31^''.
Rem. I. The above examples apply only to the most common relative h
attributes {great, small, good), and to expressions which by usage easily came to
be recognized as periphrases for tlie superlative. Other adjectives, however,
when followed by a partitive genitive, also acquire the sense of a superlative ;
this appears from the context, e. g. Dt 33" the most hidden treasures of the sand ;
Ju 529 the wisest amongst her ladies; Is 143", 19", 23»'-, 291^, Jer 4920, Ez aS'',
Zc 11'', Jp 45", Jb 3o« (in the most horrible of valleys), 41^2 ; probably also ^ 351^.
On this government by the adjective generally, cf. § 132 c— Moreover, the
combination of a substantive in the construct state with an adjective used
substantivally {,§ i 28 re) sometimes serves as a periphrasis for the superlative,
e. g. Is 2 22< |t3i?n \b3 ^3 all the smallest vessels. On Ct 710 see § 126 x.
2. Other periphrases for the superlative are the use of a substantive in the t
construct state before the plural of the same word (which is naturally to be
regarded as a partitive genitive ; cf. our book of books), e. g. Ex 26^3 Wiy']^r\ C'lp
the most holy place ; D^")''K'n li'ij? (Ct i^) the most excellent song ; cf. Gn 9^' ( = servus
,10
Similarly in Jer 6"* two participles are combined, and in Ho 10^'' two
substantives in the singular. Finally, the same object is attained by connect-
ing one substantive in the construct state with another of the same stem
(Pn3K' n3K' a sabbath of solemn rest, i.e. an obligatory day of rest, Ex 31^5^ &c.)
or of the same meaning (e. g. n^DX Tlt^H a thick darkness, Ex lo^^),
3. The intensification of attributes by means of repetition belongs rather k
to rhetoric than to syntax, e. g. Ec f* pbV pby exceeding deep ; i S 2^, Pr 20" ;
the adjective is even used three times in Is 6^— Cf. the repetition of adverbs
for the same purpose in Gn 7", Nu 14'' (HNrp INO exceedingly, also INt? 1X^33
Ex i'', &c.) ; Ez 42^^— On the other hand, iri Dt 28" the repetition expresses
1 Cf. also jivj? the one above, i. e. the Most High.
2 God of gods,' and Lord of lords, just as the supreme god of the Babylonians
is called bcl bell (Tiele, Compend. der Rel.-Gesch., p. 87).
432 The Parts of Speech [§§ 133 i, 134 a- c
a continuous progress, higher and higher . . , loiver and lower ; in Dt 2*^ (see
§ 123 e) and 16^" (nothing but justice) the constancy of the action. Cf. Ex 23*''
tOyip tsyp little by little, very gradually.^
I The repetition of substantives serves also as a periphrasis for the superlative
in such cases as "iM "ihp (Ex 3^^) = to the remotest generations ; cf. 17'', Jer6^*, 8^^
(perfect peace) ; Ez 21*2 (n^y three times) ;2 35', Na i* ; cf. also Ho 2^^'- and
the emphatic combination of synonymous verbs in Is 331". Sometimes the
completeness of an action or state is expressed by placing together two or
even three substantives of the same stem and of similar sound, cf. Is 22^,
Ez 6" (3328'., 358) ; 32I5, Na 2", Zp i« (Jb 3o^ 38^^).
§ 134. Syntax of the Numerals.
Cf. the exhaustive statistics collected by Sven Herner, Syntax der Zahlworter
im A. T., Lund, 1893. E* Konig, ' Zur Syntax der ZahlwOrter im A. T.,'
AJSL. xviii. 129 ff.
a 1. The numerals from 2 to 10, as being originally abstract sub-
stantives,' may be connected with their substantives in three different
ways. They may stand either —
(a) In the construct state before the substantive (the object numbered
being consequently in the genitive), e. g. Cp^ ^Y^^ a triad of days^
i. e. three days ; ^''^'J^fJ ''5^ the two men ; or
h (b) In the absolute state before it (the object numbered being in
apposition, § 131 (i), e. g. D^?? T\Wp a triad, viz. sons, i. e. three sons;
D^K'JX D^3^ two men ; or
C (c) In the absolute state (likewise in apposition) after the object
numbered, e.g. tJ'i?^ Jli^S. So especially in long lists, since in these
the substantives naturally come first, e.g. Gn 32'\ Nu 7'', 28".
Apart from such cases, the frequency of this order in the later Books
is due to the fact that the character of the numeral tended more and
more to become adjectival rather than substantival.''
^ Adverbs of the same stem are connected in this way in Nu 6^, Is 29^, 30^' ;
of different stems in Is 5^2^ and Jo 4*. In Nu 12^ the particles !]t< pT appear
to be placed together for a similar purpose, equivalent to simply and solely.
2 Different in kind from the triple utterance of the same words in 2 S 18^',
Jer 7* and 22^9, and the double exclamation in Jer 4^^ and La i^^ (?).
' Cf. § 97 a, where it is shown that the masculine is the original form of
the numerals (used for both genders), and that the feminine was afterwards
differentiated and used with masc. nouns, primarily in the second decade
and then in the first as well.
* From Herner's tables (op. cit., pp. 5.5-66) it appears, according to p. 68,
that in the documents J, E, D of the Pentateuch, and in Jos 1-12, Judges,
Samuel, Isaiah, Jeremiah, the Minor Prophets, Psalms, Megilloth, and Job,
the numeral never, or very rarely, stands after its noun ; in Kings and
Ezekiel it stands several times after; in the Priestly Code nearly always after;
in Chronicles, Ezra, Nehemiah, and Daniel, nearly as often after as b^ore the
noun. In Ek 28^° the Masora makes the numeral iu the genitive follow
the construct state of the substantive numbered ; we should, however, read
nw\^^ ntoE'~nX^ ; for the omission of the article before 'B', cf. § 126 to,
§ 134 d-jl Syntax of the Numerals 433
Eem. In Lv 24^ IHS follows the construct state DQB'tp, but here as in (I
Nu 15I6 OSB'ID should be read. In Gn 421^ ItlH is in apposition to a sub-
stantive with a suffix { = one of you brethren ; but verse 33 ihe one of you brethren).
In Nu 31^8 nnx precedes the substantive in the Aramaic manner ( = one each).
—For nJB'-riND (Gn 17", &c.) we find regularly in the Priestly Code (except
in Gn 17^'', 23I) HJK' nt<D (Gn 5^, &c.) an hundred years. On the connexion of
abstract numerals with suffixes, as Dn''3B' their duality, i. e. they two, Gn 2^, &c.
(also with a strengthening separate pronoun, as 13n3X y\3K' i S 20*^),
cf. § 97 i.
2. The numerals from 2 to 10 take the object numbered in the 6
plural,' with very few exceptions, such as Ex 16^ (where ""^VC ''W
=the double of an omer), 2X22', Ez 45', cf. 2 K 8'' and 25'^ KHh.
The numerals from 11 to 19 generally take the plural, but with
certain substantives frequently used with numerals the singular is
more common (see further, under/). The tens (from 20 to 90), when
they precede, take the singular (in the accusative, cf. § 131 p) of
certain nouns frequently used with numerals (^^^ a thousand, B'''X,
Di\ 13, B'dB, i'i?'^'— but only in Ezekiel and the Priestly Code), other-
wise the plural, as 0^33, Hm, D'ly (but cf. also Ju ii"^), &c.; on the
other hand, the plural is necessary when they follow the object numbered
in apposition (e. g. ^'''WV niD{< twenty cubits, 2 Ch 3^'- ; with the
exception of 2 S 24"*, only in late Books). After HXD and ^^^ the
substantive numbered may be used either in the singular or plural,
see further under g.
Rem. I. After the numerals from 11 to 19 the singular is used, as a rule, f
< <. iJ
with DV day, n35J' year, K'''N man, CDD soul (person), t32B' tribe, HSSIO pillar
(Ex 24*), sometimes with rH2K cuhit, Cin month, Tiy city, ppK' shekel (compare
OMV four-year-old, ten pound), e.g. Dt i^ DV "^b^J? THN (cf., however, such
exceptions as Dt 1^, Jos 4*, &c.). — Substantives other than these are used in
the plural with the numerals from 11 to 19, and the numeral may even
follow the substantive, especially in later passages, as Nu 'j^'"-, 1 Ch 4^'^, 25^.
2. After nXO (nXJO [so almost exclusively in the Priestly Code, e.g. always £"
eibx riND], niND D'^nXO) and Plbx {Wth^ ^ih^ D^bx) the substantives
{^"•N, Clbs, ni|)K (except in Ez 402^), nS\ "b?!, T?^ ^r® regularly used in the
singular, generally also nj2', 133 . 13 , ?(5B' (with the exception of Jos 7",
2 S 1426, &c.); cf., moreover, Gn 33", 24S0 (n331 "•dJ'X), Est x^, Ju 21I2, Dt ?«,
1 K 512, 2 Ch 9IB.— Examples of the plural after HND are Gn 26^2, i S iS^^,
2 S 161, I K i8<; after HKO Ex 38"; after fliND Ju isS 2 S 8*, i K 10",
^ On examples such as Gn ^6"" {W^}^ C'sS txco sovis), cf. § 132 g (collectives
joined with the plural of the adjective).
COWLET -p f
434 ^'^'^ Parts of Speech [§134 h-i
Ez 42IT ; after D^nXO i S 25I8, i K 7^^° ; after fl^N i S 252, i K i\ 5«, 2 K sS
i// 90* ; after D''D^S 1 S 17E, Jb 4212 ; after ''d!)X Mi 6'' ; after D^i^K Is 36^—
In Dn 12^1 the plural D"'t3"' precedes the numeral twelve hundred.
Il 3. Numerals compounded of tens and units (like 21, 62) take the
object numbered either after them in tlie singular (in the accusative),
e. g. Gn 5-" nr^ D'E'E'1 D^riip two and sixty years (HJ^ in the singular,
according to e, since it conforms to the ten immediately preceding ;
but also nj^ T\pm n'^^bf Dta'"), or before them in the plural,
especially in the later Books, Dn 9^®, &c. ; or the object is repeated
(but only in i K 6^ and the Priestly Code ; sometimes even several
times, e.g. Gn 23^ 2^^-^^ thrice) in the plural with the units, and in
the singular with the tens and hundreds, e. g. Gn 12" D^V^^'1 D^?^' ^"On
r\y^ seventy and five years; Gn 23^ ^'^^ V'^f\ nj^ Dnb'j;i njB' HND an
hundred and twenty and seven years. Cf. Gn s** ^'
I Rem. I. It may further be remarked with regard to the order, that the
thousand or thousands always precede the hundreds, &c., and the hundreds
almost always come before the smaller numbers (in Kings and Ezekiel
sometimes, and in the Priestly Code usually, after the smaller numbers),
the tens in the earlier Books (documents J and D of the Pentateuch, in
Joshua 1-12, Judges, Samuel, Isaiah, and also in Ezra and Nehemiah) before
the units, but in Jeremiah, Ezekiel, the Priestly Code, Joshua 13-24 after the
units (see Herner, op. cit., p. 73). After the hundreds the smaller number
is very frequently added without 1, especially in Ezra, Nehemiah, and
Daniel.
On the syntax of the cardinals in general : —
K 2. The cardinals are determined by the article, when they refer back
(without being connected with the object numbered ; cf., however, Lv 2^'^^^-,
Nu 16^^, Jos 4^, 2 S 23") to a number or list already mentioned, e.g. Gn 2^1
(iK'^3 insn Dtt* the name of the one (the first) is Pishon ; Gn 1^^ four kings against
the fire (enumerated in verse 2) ; cf. i Ch 1 1*" '■, and the determinate tens in
Gni 829-51 ^- A demonstrative with the article may also be added to a
numeral determined in this way, e. g. Dt 19^ (but cf. also Gn 9", 2 2^3, where
the numeral and demonstrative are practically determinate in themselves).
In the case of the numerals from 11 to 19 the article may stand either before
the unit (i Ch 25!^, 2'j''-^) or before ib'y (Jos 4*); it is used before all three
members of a compound number (273) in Nu 3".
/ In apposition with any determinate substantive the cardinal number is
used without the article, not only when it precedes the substantive, as in
Jos 15" (pjyn ""pn nt^Sb^-m, where n^Sb^ is equivalent to a substantive
determinate in itself; cf. Gn iS^^, JosG^-^z^ i S 17", i K ii'^and the passages
discussed above in § 126 x, Gn 21"^, &c.), but also when it follows the
substantive, e. g. 1 K 'j^'^-*^ '■ "Vy]} and il'WV ; the omission of the article may
here, as in the cases noticed in § 126 s, be also due to the dislike of a hiatus,
but cf. also D^iK* 2 K 25!^ after a determinate substantive. The fact that it
is by nature determinate would also be a very simple explanation of ins
Nu 28*, I S 13"'-, Jer 24^, Ez lo', instead of the more usual inNH, and of
nnx 1 s 1' for nnsn .
§ 134 m-pi Syntax of the Numerals 435
Such cases as D''fD''n Ti^ltD Ju 14^'' (which is determined by a following 111
determinate genitive) are explained from § 1276; i Ch 9^ perhaps from
§ 126 5; in Is 30^* probably the light of all the seven days of the week is
meant ; on the other hand, in i S g'^" and 25^^ the article is, with Wellhausen,
to be omitted.
3. Certain specifications of measure, weight, or time, are commonly omitted ^^
after numerals, e.g. Gn 20^^ 5)02 Fj^SI a thousand (shekels) of silver] so also
before DHT Gn 2422, i K \d^^, Is 72^, cf. \p 119^2. Moreover, Ru 315 DnVK' ^p
Six (ephahs) 0/ barley ; i S 10* Dnp~''riB' two (sc. loaves, see verse 3) of bread, cf.
17^^ Dn^ mb'y ; 2 S 16^, where before y^P ^ measure, or perhaps some term
like cakes, is to he supplied. — The number of cubits is stated in the Priestly
Code (Ex 262, &c.) and in i K 6 and 7 (otherwise only in Ez 40^-21^ ^^s 2c 52^
I Ch ii23j 2 Ch 42') by the addition of ni2S3 prop, bij the cubit. Also in
Ex 27" the Samaritan and LXX read n?3N3 after ^"ik, and in 27^5 H^S
after n"ib»y.
4. The ordinals above 10 have no special forms, but are expressed ^
by the corresponding cardinals, which may then stand either before or
after the object numbered, e. g. Gn 7" D'l'' "I'^V "^V^^^ ^** ^^*^ seventeenth
day, Dti^ njK' D^y?"!^? w the fortieth year; cf. Gn I4^ 2K25",
and, with repetition of HJC' in a compound number, i K 6^ ; such
a cardinal occurs without 3 (and therefore in the accus. temporis,
according to § 118 k) in Gn 14'' (the Samaritan, however, has 5J'^B'3"l) ;
with the article (but without a numbered object, see under k),
1 K 19^1^ — On the position of the numeral as a genitive following
its noun, cf. e.g. i K 16'" WK'I Dnfe'j; n;^2 in the twenty and seventh
year, and with a determinate numeral. Ex 12'^, Nu 33^, Dt 15^ In
this case, however, HJK' is very frequently repeated, e.g. Gn 7",
2 K 13^"; after a determinate numeral, Lv 25'".^
Rem. In numbering days of the month and years, the cardinals are \eryP
frequently used instead of the ordinals even for the numbers from i to 10,
e.g. D^riK' n3£^3 1 K 1525 ; ^^'^ n3K'3 2 K iS^, &c., cf. Dt 158. The months
themselves are always numbered by the ordinals (pK'N"!3, ^iK'3, &c., up to
n-K'ya), but not the days of the month, e.g. ^-\fh inX2 Gn 8^, &c., ny^nxa
v)irh Zc 71 ; v}ifh nK^ona Ez i', &c., mfh rwiwn 2 k 25^, K^in^ r\wr\ii
T . :, ^ ^^ ^ V - T ; • ; V T ; • ;
Lv 23*2 (always, however, yin^ Ifyil on the tenth day of the month). On the
^ Somewhat different from this is Ex 19^^ he ready D''tt'' JIK'^K'? prop, after
three days, i.e. on the third day (in verses 1 1 and 16 and in Ezr 10* the ordinal
is used), also 1 S 30^^ HE'^B' Di^H "TT'pn ''3 because three days agone I fell sick,
prop, to-day three (days).
2 All these expressions may indeed be explained by supposing that, e.g. in
Lv 25I", the proper meaning is the year of the fifty years which it completed,
i.e. the fiftieth year; but it is more correct to regard nSK' or n3K'3 in such
cases not as a real nomen regens, but simply as a connective form to be explained
on the analogy of the cases mentioned in § 128^.
r f 2
436 The Parts of Speech [§ 134 q, r
omission of DV in all these cases see under n ; only in late passages is DV
added, e.g. 2 Ch 29" mrh HJiOK' DV^ ; Ezr 36 B'Ynb inS 01*0.— Finally,
■when the year is stated by DJB'B governing a determinate ordinal, viz. 2 K 17^
n''i?^tJ'rin DJEJ'B m the ninth year ; 2 K 25I (in Jer 52* njB'a), Jer 28I K'th., 32^
if*<A., 46^, 51'^, Ezr 7^; n3B'3 in such cases is again (see note 2 on 0) to be
explained according to § 128 k. This is supported by the fact that the
Masora on Jer 28^, 32^ requires in the QHe n3K'3 for nJC3.
f/ 5. Distributives are expressed either by repetition of the cardinal
number, e.g. Gn 7^-^^ D^^V of?^ two and two; 2821^ C'K'1 &^ six
each', with the numbered object also repeated, e.g. Jos 3'"^ IHX t^"'K
D3lfP nns B'"}* /or g'ygr^/ <W6e a man; Nu 13'', 34'** (i^ "iHi^^ as in
Neh ii\ one <n*< of every ten); cf, § 123 (Z; or a periphrasis with
p "ins is used, Nu 17'^, Dt i^, cf. Is 6"^ "^0?? after six wings twice
repeated ; the simple distributive p is, however, sufficient (as in
D^"li^3?, § 123 c), e. g. D''S?i<?'! niNOl? hy hundreds and by thousands.
T 6. The muliiplicatives are expressed either (like the ordinals above
10, see under 0) by the cardinals (in the feminine, probably owing to
the omission of Dy?, D'^yS; so Konig, Lehrgeb., ii. 228), as ^)^f
twice, Jb 40^ ; Vy^ seven times, Lv 26^'-^'', Pr24^^; cf also nns once,
2K6''', Jb40^ for which in Jb 33" nnS3> along with D\r\f^ (the
latter also in i S 18^') ; or by the dual of the numeral, thus D^nynS'
Gn 4'" (in verse 24 along with the cardinal 77 for 77 times); Is 30*^®,
^ 12^, 79'^ ; D^riy|l1N 2812®;^ or periphrastically by Dys a time (prop.
a step, with the article, Dysin this time; cf. also riN^n Dyss, with 3,
like rinxa above), as rinx Dy| once (Neh 13™ D^ri'^l Dys once and ticice),
n>bp_ twice, D'JpyQ ^^^ (for which in Ex 23'^ Nu22^-='- D'f'n ^^^)
three times; cf ^z ^i^ thirty -three times; 2 S 24* an hundred times;
Dt i" a thousand times; i K 22^^ Q'^V? '^^S'^y until how many times,
i. e. how often. Cf. also D^?b nn'^y ten times, Gn 31'-", and D'lyiy ni^l
man?/ ^f/nes, Neh 9^. — In Gn 43^^,^^^ times is expressed by nnj l/'On
(prop._^?;e hands)^ and in Ex 16° the double is expressed by "^y HDK'p
(prop, a rej)etition over and above that which, &c.). — Of the ordinals
ri^OK' is used as a numeral adverb, Gn 22'*, &c., a second time, cf. the
Latin tertium consul ; np^'bf^ the third time, 183**; n''K'''t?n Dys
ajtfth time, Neh 6*; n"»ynS'3 at the seventh (time), i K 18", and Dys?
'E'n Jos 6'^.
1 But nnS2 Nu 10* is to be translated on one (trumpet).
2 Probably also DvD3 Jb ii^ (from !?D3 doubling) does not mean doubled but
wa>i(/bZ(i.
3 But niTH yanSt Gn 472* means the (other) /our parts ; cf. 2 K 11'', Neh ii^.
§§ T34 s, 135 «. *] Syntax of the Numerals 437
Rem. The collocation of a numeral with the next above it (either in the S
same or in different sentences) is a rhetorical device employed in nvmcrical
sayings to express a number, which need not, or cannot, be more exactly
specified. It must be gathered from the context whether such formulae
are intended to denote only an insignificant number (e. g. Is 17*, tivo or at the
most three), or a considerable number, e. g. Mi 5*. Sometimes, however, this
juxtaposition serves to express merely an indefinite total, without the
collateral idea of intensifying the lower by means of the higher number.
Thus one and iivo are connected by 1, Dt 32'", Jer 3^^, Jb 33^^, 40^ (without )^
\p 62'2j ; two and three, Is 17* (Sirac 23!*, 26*8, 50^5), and without "!, 2 K 9^^^
Ho 6^, Am 4* ; three and four, Jer 36^^, Am i^"", Pr 30I*, 212^ (Sirac 26'), and
witliout 1, Pr 30^^ ; four and five, without 1 , Is i ;« ; six and seven, Jb 5^", Pr 6'" ;
sevm and eight, Mi 5*, Ec 11* ; {nine and ten, Sirac 25').
III. Syntax of the Pronoun.
§ 135. The Personal Pronoun.
1. The separate pronouns, — apart from their employment as the a
subject in noun-clauses (of. § 141a) and the idiom mentioned under
d-h, — are used, according to § 32 6, as a rule, only to give express
emphasis to the subject; e.g. Gn 16*, 2 S 24'' ^33X i.e. I myself, so
also ^3^< 2 S I22«, 17'' (after the veib), Ez 34^% i/^ 2« ; * but i S Io'^
2 S 127,' Is ^gi2 .33X / and none else; cf. also ^Ji< ^?N /, I! IIo 5" &c.;
nriS Gn I5l^ Ju 15^ I S i7^« (as in 2o», 22'«, Ex'i8^«, Dt 5-^ Ju 8^',
after the imperative); i K 21'; DriX Gn 9^ Ex 20" (after the verb,
Ju i5'2); fem.Gn3i«; Nin I S22'«; N^n Gn 3=°, Ju 14^ nsn Jer 5^—
Sometimes, however, the separate pronoun appears to be placed before
the verb more on rhythmical grounds, i. e. in order to give the state-
ment a fuller sound than that of the bare verbal form (cf. the similar
use of the infinitive absolute, § 113 0). Thus Gn 14^'', y^ 139", and
most clearly in such passages as Gn 21% 47'", Ex S'^*, Ju 6'^ 11',
I S 12^", 2 S 3", 21®, I K 2'^ (in solemn promises). The same explana-
tion applies to ""^X at the beginning of sentences, e.g. Gn 24*°, Ho 5',
10", 12", V.39", 82^ Jbsl^*
Rem. I. Different from this is the pleonastic addition of the separate Jj
pronoun immediately after the verb (according to Delitzsch on Ct 5° perhaps
^ Also Xin, N''n he himself, she herself (of persons and things), e.g. Is 7'*
idn ''3'lX the Lord himself; Est 9^ HtSn □"'H^n^n the Jews themsehes. In the
sense of the same (6 avToi) or {one and) the same, X^H is used in Is 41*, 43^°-'',
46*, 48" (always NIH ^:N), i/- 10228 (j<!|n nriK), and probably also Jb 3I9.— The
<
position of rusn , as an accusative of the object, before a perfect in i Ch 9**,
can at most be explained on the analogy of Aramaic (Ezr 5I2),
2 As early as the M65a' inscription (line 21 IT.) *]i{< frequently stands at
the beginning of a new sentence after the dividing stroke.
438 The Parts of Speech [§ 135 c-h
a trace of popular language), e.g. i S 2322(^9)^ Cfc 5', and (like otlier indications
of the very late origin of the book) very frequently in Ecclesiastes, e.g. i^*,
21.11.15^ j\if. and thirteen other places ; in Aramaic, Dn 5^*.
C 2. Substantival subjects also are somewhat frequently resumed, and thus
expressly emphasized, by the insertion of the corresponding separate pronoun
of the 3rd person before the predicate is stated, e. g. Gn 3'^ the woman whom
Ihou gavest to be with me, she (STl) gave me, &c. ; 14^* (Di!}) > '5*) ^4^ ^^' > ^^^ ^'"^
in Is 7'* after the predicate and subject is equivalent to he himself.^
d 2. Not infrequently the separate pronoun serves to give strong
emphasis to a suffix of the same person which precedes (or sometimes
even to one which follows), whether the suffix be attached to a verb
(as accusative) or to a noun or prej)osition (as genitive). In English
such an emphasis on the pronoun can generally be rendered only
by laying greater stress upon it, or sometimes by repeating it ; cf.,
on the contrary, the French mon livre a moi. The separate pronoun
in such instances is not to be regarded as a casus obliquus (accusative or
genitive), but as the subject of an independent sentence, the predicate
of which must in each case be supplied according to the context.
e Examples of emphasis : —
(a) On a verbal suffix by means of ''3S Ol^\ Gn 27^* ""jA'D: ""JDIil Mess me,
even me also (prop. Vess me, I also would be blessed) ; Zc 7^ ; cf. also Ez 6',
3^11.20 sj^ ^33n . by ^m (nnx) Pr 22" (but the text is most probably corrupt).
— The separate pronoun precedes in Gn 2^^ (''3l3S); 49' (nJ|lX, not Judah, thou
art he whom, hut Judah thee, thee thy brethren shall praise !) , and Ec 2^^ ^3X D3,
J {b) On a noun-suffix with a substantive, by means of ^3S 2 S 19^, Pr 231^;
by T\T\\^ I K 2ii» nriN-QJ "^D^TlX thy blood, even thine ; by N^'n 2Sif, Jer 27^,
Mi 73 ; by i:n5x I S 20", after IJ^JK', but without special stress ; Neh 5* (?) ;
by nm Nu 14^2; by DH >/■ 38" (without special stress), H^n ^ 9''.— The
separate pronoun precedes in Jb 21* (""^bX); Gn 40^^, Is 45*'', i Ch 28* (""^X) ;
Zc 9" (riN) ; Jos 239 (DriS) ; Ez 33" (HBn).— In ^ 89^, where '•3X might be
taken as strengthening '^7^^ (equivalent in sense to *^pn), we should read
"•ynX for ^JX, as in verse 51.
/r (c) On a suffix united with a preposition, i S 2^^* ""iX ""B upon me, upon me ;
I K i2o ^JK . . . •'^; 2 Ch 3521 nnX ^''pyxi' not against thee; i S 1923 D3 vbv
X^n upon him also ; Dt 5^ ^Jn5x IjnX ''3 but with us, even us ; Hag 1* DRX DD?
for you yourselves ; Jer 25'^ nT3n"D2 D3. — The separate pronoun precedes in
1 S 1223 ^J) . . . iDbX; I K 120 TI'^V . . , nnX ; Mi 5I ^KO , , , nnX, and
2 Ch 2S10 DDGiy DPix!
//, The same principle also explains Gn 4^6 X^n~D3 JWp to Seth, to him also (not
i^-D2) ; cf. 10", and Ex 35" Nu 422.
^ Analogous to this is the resumption of a noun dependent on a preposition,
by means of a pronominal suffix united with the same preposition, e.g. Gn 2",
2 S 622, 2 K 22^*, or of an object by means of the nota accusativi nX with suffix,
e.g. I S 15' (where npxp3"l is certainly to be read), Is b".
I
§ 135 «■-'»] ^/^^ Personal Pronoun 439
3. The oblique cases of the personal pronouns expressed by means of 2
a preposition (or the nota accus. HN) with a suffix may be used either
in a demonstrative or reflexive sense,' as i? to him, but also to Jiimself,
e.g. Ju 3'® and Ehud made V for himself a sword, cf. Gn 33'^ ; so also
Dn^ sibi, Is 3'' ; l''^^? unto him, and Gn S^ unto himself; W{< with him,
and Gn 22' with himself; >^^V with her, and i S i'^^ ivith herself; also
apparently as a pleonastic dativus ethicus (see § tig s), Jb 12'', 13'.
Rarely, and only when marked emphasis is intended, is the accusative n
of the reflexive pronoun represented by the notu accusativi nx with
a suffix (this being ordinarily expressed by the reflexive conjugations
Niph'al and Hith2)a'el^); thus, DHN se ipsos. Ex 5", Jer 7'^ in sharp
antithesis to "•HNn ; Ez 34--*''°. Cf. § 57 at the end, together with
note 2.
Rem. There is a similar emphasis in Is 49^8 on D'jb'a and DOT in the I
sense of their own flesh, (heir own blood. On the sometimes demonstrative,
sometimes reflexive meaning of noun-suffixes of the 3rd person singular and
plural, cf. § 91, p and q. For other circumlocutions to expi-ess the idea of
self, see § 139/.
4. The possessive pronouns are, according to § 33 c, expressed by 7?l
the svffixes of the noun (in the genitive),^ which may represent either
a subjective genitive, or (like the genitives proper, § 128 /<.) an objective
genitive, e.g. '•D^H the wrong done against me, Gn 16^, Jer5i''; cf.
Gn 9^ iS^S 27" (2 S 16'- KHh.)', Gn so'\ 39'' (cf- Ex 3^', &c.); 50'.
Ex 20-", 21^, Ju 4^ 13'^ {^^^VP the treatment of him) ; Is 56^ Jer 9^
Na 3", Pr i"'', 24-', Jb 20^^*, 23''', 34^. Cf. also such pregnant expres-
sions as ■v//' 20^ TITJ? nb^^ he will send thy help (help for thee), i.e. he
will send thee help ; Gn 30'^, 39^', Ex 2', Is 1^® {and I will restore
judges for thee); Ez 37'^
When several substantives are co-ordinated, the pronominal suffix must be
attached to each singly, e.g. Gn 36* an(l Esau took "HN^ VJ3TIS1 VK'rnK
Vn33 his ivives and his sons a?id his daughters, &c. ; 38^*, &c. In 2 S 23^ the text
is hardly correct.
^ As in Luther's Bible jm (ihm), jr (ihr) for sich, and in our version him, ha-
for himself, herself.
* Niph'al according to § 51c (like Hithpa'el according to § 54/) may also
include the dative of the reflexive pronoun.
' Like the substantival genitive, according to § 129 h, the possessive
pronoun may also be paraphrased by a relative clause, e.g. Ru 2^' D^")j:3ri
^? "^'^ii the young men, which are (0 me, i. e. my young men ; so especially, when
the substantive, which should take a genitive suffix, is already followed by
a genitive, e.g. 1 S 17**'. In tliis case, however, the suffix also is sometimes
attached pleonastlcally, e.g. Ct 1* ^?K' ^O"!? ^"2/ vineyard, ichich belongs to me,
Cf. Ct 3^, and the analogous pleonasms in 2 S 22^ (but see ^ iS^i and f 27^
440 The Parts of Speech [§ 135 n~p
fl 5. When the genitive, following a construct state, is used periphras-
tically to express the idea of a material or attribute (§ 128 o andp),
the pronominal suffix, which properly belongs to the compound idea
(represented by the nornen regens and genitive), is, like the article
(§ 127), attached to the second substantive (the genitive), e.g. "'^"lij"''^
prop, the Mil of my holiness, i. e. my holy hill, yjr 2®, &c.; "^Plp^ "^'V ^%
h^lj/ city, Dn 9^* ; iStp? V7N his idols of silver. Is 2"", 30"'^, 31" ; ^ cf.
Dt i^'. Is 9^ 28S 41"', Ez g''; f 4i>», 150', Jb 18' i3iN ^iJV his steps of
strength; 38^; after an adjective as nomen regens, Is 13^ (Zp 3") T?!?
^niNj my 'proudly exulting ones. — On the same analogy is the use of
e.g. WOnpr? v| Dt 1'" his weapons of war [cf. Is 41^^^]; Is 56" ^"3
^ripDri my house of prayer, although the genitive here does not convey
the idea of an attribute.
0 Rem. I. Through a weakening in the distinction of gender, which is
noticeable elsewhere (cf. § no A;, 144 a, 145 p, t, u) and which probably-
passed from the colloquial language^ into that of literature, masculine
suffixes (especially in the plural) are not infrequently used to refer to
feminine substantives; thus a noun-suffix in the singular, Ex 11^, 25'^,
Ju ii34;3 in the plural, Gn si^, 32I6, 4123^ Ex i^i, 2^'', Nu 2f (but the
feminine suffix twice immediately after, and so the Samaritan also in
verse 7); 36« (Samaritan jn''nX, but also Dri''rj!3) ; Ju 192*, 2122, i S 6'^-^°''
(Dn'?3) ; 92", Is 3", Ez 23«ff- (alternating w'ith'}ri) ; Am 41/- (but afterwards
a feminine suffix) ; Jb 1", 39' (DHvIin in parallelism with (n''Tp') ; 42^',
Ct 42, 6*, Ru i^''^- (along with feminine suffixes) ; Dn i^, 8'. Verbal suffixes
in the singular, Ex 22^5 ; in the plural, Ju i6^ Pr 621, Jb i^^ But Gn 26^5.18^
33^3, Ex 2!'', I S 6^"" are to be explained according to § 60 h. On nizf] as
feminine, see § 32 n. On the use of the masculine in general as the prior
gender, see § 122 g.
P 2. The suffix of the 3rd person singular feminine (as also the separate
pronoun X^n Nu 14*^. Jos ic^^, Ju 14*) sometimes refers in a general sense
to the verbal idea contained in a preceding sentence (corresponding to our
it) ; thus the verbal suffix, Gn I5«, Nu 2319, i S ii2, i K 1112, le 30*, Am 8";
cf. Gn 24" (rl3 thereby), 42^^, 4726, Ex 10" (nriN that), Is 47'. Elsewhere the
suffix of the 3rd singular feminine refers to the plurals of things, e. g. 2 K 3'
' On the other hand, more explicitly in prose, Gn 442 PjDiin y^33 ^y^35~nK
my cup, the silver cup. ' ' . • . •
2 According to Diehl (see the title at the head of § 91 a), who adduces
numerous instances on pp. 44 ff., 54 ff., 67 f., many of these cases may be set down
to corruption of the traditional text, while the sudden (and sometimes
repeated) change of gender in suffixes is mainly due to the influence exercised
on the copyists by the Mishnic and popular Aramaic dialects, neither of
which recognizes such distinctions. Such influence, however, is insufficient
to explain the large number of instances of this weakening, occurring even
in the earlier documents.
' The Masora reckons six instances of ^SDD, where nSDO would be expected
(Ju ii34, where, however, the text is most probably corrupt), Ex 25^5(?),
Lv 6*, 718^ 27', Jos 1''; almost all these passages can, however, be easily
explained in other ways.
§ 135 9. r] The Personal Pronoun 441
[but see Kittel ; so is^-"" ; lo^^, but LXX DnSflO], Jer 362', Jb 6=0 (if the text
is correct), 39'* (read DlOnri in v. I4), and to the plurals of names of
animals, Is 35'', Ezr 11^. Conversely, plural suffixes refer to collective
singulars, e.g. in Gn 15", Nu i6^ 1 S 2^, Zp 2'' [but read D>n 75?] ; and to
a verbal idea contained in tlie preceding clause, in Ez 33^*, Jb 22^^ (Di^^
thereby), Ez iS'^*, 33^^ (DD\;y "'* ^^^"'^ account, thereby)} But the suffix in ijrij
Dt 211" refers to the collective idea contained in ^''5"'k; in Jon i^DHtiy refers
to the sailors included in sense under the term n'3K. In Jos 2* read
T • T :
D3Q5fri1 ; in Is 30* (DHtt), 38I6, Jp 19' (0113) the text is most probably corrupt.
3. In a few examples the force of the noun-suffix or possessive pronoun fj
has become so weak that the language appears to be almost entirely
unconscious of it. Thus in '•ynX my Lord, usually explained as being fr.om
the pluralis maiestads D"'3hS (§ 124 i) with the suffix of the ist singular
(always with Qames to distinguish it from ''3hX my lords, Gn 19^ ; but see note
below), used exclusively of God, not only in addressing him (Gn 15*, 18^,
ip 35^), but ultimately (see, however, the note below), without any regard
to the pronoun, as equivalent to the Lord.^ On ""ynx as a Q^re perpetuum of the
Masoretes for nin* see § 17 c and § 102 m.
A similar loss of vitality in the suffix is generally assumed in I'ln^ prop, in T
his unitedness, i.e. he &c. together, e.g. nn^ DVHvS Ex 19^; then, without
regard to the suffix, even after the ist person HH' IJnSx 1 K 3^* in reference
to two women; Is 41^, Jb 9^2^ Neh 6'-''; after the 2nd person, Is 45^0^ &c.
But the supposed pronominal suffix is perhaps rather to be explained, with
Brockelmann, ZA. xiv. 344 f., as an old adverbial ending, which survives in
the Arabic adverbs in u and in Assyrian. — Cf. further D?3 prop, their entirety,
but also after the 2nd person equivalent to all together, i K 22^*, Mi i^ (hear^
ije peoples, all of you ; cf. § 144 p); and even before the and person, Jb 17I" (in
1 S 6^ read 03? with the LXX).— On the redundant suffix in ^31)^n Lv 27^8^
cf. § 127 t. '
1 In 2 K 710 for -IVB? (the LXX had yj^) read nyfe?.
2 Cf. the same weakening of the force of the possessive pronoun in ""31
prop, my master, from the second century a. d. onwards the master ; so also in
Syriac ^"ID my lord, and ultimately as a title the lord ; in Italian Madonna,
French Madame, Notre Dame, Monsieur, Monseigneur, &c. It can, however,
hardly be doubted that the regular distinction between ^JIX as a holy name,
and "yiH as an ordinary appellative is merely due to the practice of the later
Rabbis. G. H. Dalman, Der Gottesname Adonaj und seine Geschichte (Berlin,
1889), in an exhaustive discussion, shows that apart from the book of Daniel
and the eight critically doubtful passages, in which ""JTS is used by God
liimself, there is nowhere any necessity to regard the suffix as entirely
meaningless, since ""JIX is always used either in an address to or (like "^yiH
which also is never a mere phrase or title) in reverent language about God —
as the Lord of the speaker — like the Assyrian bili-ia, my lord. Against any
original distinction between ""JIX and ^3hK it may be urged especially that
when unconnected with suffixes the singular \T\ti is always used of God, and
not the pluralis maiestatis presupposed by ''i'^Vl ,
442 The Parts of Speech [§ 136 a-d
§ 136. Tlie Demonstrative Pronoun.
a The demonstrative pronouns are *^),, fem. nST, plur. n|N (§ 34)^
hie, haec (hoe), hi, Sec, and the personal pronoun N^H, likewise used
as a demonstrative, fem. N n, plur. masc. Hisn, fem. Hsn (§ 32 6), rs,
ea (w^), or itle, &c., it, eae or ilU, &c. The distinction between them
in usage is that Ht (like Mc, o8e) almost always points out a (new)
person or thing present, while ^5^^ (like is, ille, avros, tVeivos) refers to
a person or thing already mentioned or known (see the examples
below).'
1) Rem. I. Compare the instructive examples in Gn 32', .Tu 7* of whom I say
unto thee, this (nj) shall go with thee, he (K^H) shall go with thee (so afterwards
with negatives). Moreover, 7\)T\ Di'H this day, i.e. the actual day on which
one is speaking or writing (Gn 26^*, &c.), but X^nn Di*n the day or period of
which the historian has just been speaking (Gn 15'*, 26^^) or of which the
prophet has just been foretelling (Is c^^^, yis.roff.-) ^nd of which he continues
to speak or foretell. Nevertheless n't and n?NI are also found in certain
common combinations where XlH and n?3n would be expected, and vice versa ;
thus almost always TW\ n3"nn, plur. nksH Dnn'nn, but rV(t>7\r\ n"'ID>3
or Dnn D''t3'3. — With a secondary sense of contempt (like Latin iste) 7\\
occurs, e.g. in i S 10% 21^^, i K 22^^^, Is G^", &c. In the sense of the neuter,
this, riNl is more common than nt , as Is 5^5^ 43*, &c., but N^H more common
than N''n.
C 2. Both nt and NIH are sometimes used almost as enclitics to emphasize
interrogative words (like the Latin nam in q^iisnam ; cf. also quis tandem) ;
e.g. Jb 38^ r\) "'O who now (darkeneth, &c.) . . . ? i S ij^^*^-, Is 63', Jer 491^,
\p 248, 25^2^ &c ; nrniO what now? i S lo^^ ; how now? Gn 2720 ; lohy now?
Ju I&2*; but before the verb nC'V it is usually HNrniO Gn 3", 12", Ex 14",
Ju 15" ; nrni^^ wherefore mw? Gn 18", 25^2, i S 17*8, 2 S u^s, &c.-So also
Wn-''?? Is'so^^Jb 4^^-; and still more emphatically nrNIH ^O ^ 24IO,
Jer 30^1.
d 3. ni is likewise used as an enclitic (see c above) : (a) of place, in such
passages as Gn 27^1 ^)i'\ rTJ nnNH whether thou (that art here) be my son Esau?
2 S 220 is it thou? nrnjin lehold, here, 1 K 19^, Is 21^ ;' cf. also the strengtheu-
^ On m and X^H standing separately as determinate in themselves, see
§ 125 i. On the use of determinate demonstratives as adjectives, see § 126 m.
^ On the other hand, it is very questionable whether T\\ in ip 104^* (D^H T\V),
Is 23I3 (oyn n't), Ju5^, ^ 68' ("•J''p ni) can be taken, according to the common
explanation, simply as a prefixed demonstrative particle {the sea yondei; &c.).
In xp 104-^ D*n may be in apposition to nt; cf. § 126 aa, on Ex 32^, and Zc 5'',
where nnX HE'N is in apposition to DNT depending on n3n, and also Ez 40*',
where n3B'?n is in apposition to nf ; otherwise it is most naturally taken as
tlio subject, this is the sea. Is 23'^, Ju 5^, i K 14'^, and if/ 65" might also be
explained in the same way ; but in these passages tlie text is almost certainly
§ 137 a-c] The Demonstrative Pronoun 443
ing of the separate pronoun by tilH Is 4325 CSbs), i S 72", Is 37'6, xp 446
(nriN), and DH H^N <;(ese are, Gn 25I8, 1 S 4* ; (6) 0/ time : nT nriy now;, i K 1 72^ ;
just now, 2 K 5^' ; and rather frequently before words denoting number, e.g.
Gn 27*6 D'^oyS ni twice, now ; cf. 31^*, 2 S 14'*, Jb i^^, 7^^ i^s . separated from
the numeral in Gn 31*1 "'?"n'| elliptically for <Ws, i.e. this present period, is
to me, i. e. makes altogether, twenty years, &c. The other examples are
similarly elliptical.
§ 137. The Interrogative Pronoun.
The interrogative pronoun 'O who may refer either to a masculine CI
or feminine person (Ct 3^), or even to a plural, e, g. D^K "D who are
ye? Jos 9*; >^^h'V Gn 33*, Nu 22^ (more minutely, *t?J ''P Ex lo^
i. e. who exactly, who in particular ?). It is used of the neuter only
when the idea of a person is implied, e. g. ^r^~^^ ivho are the
Shechemites ? Ju 9^*, 13'^ Gn 33^, Mi i^; even more boldly, with the
repetition of a ''I? used personally, in i S i8'^ 2 S 7'^ — Another inter-
rogative is 'T"*^ which, what ? ; of persons only in Est 7'.
Moreover, 'O may also be used in the sense of a genitive, e. g. 0
riS 'p-n? whose daughter art thou? Gn 24=^ i S 1 7^^'^"-'^ ; 'P 1?'^ whose
word ? Jer 44^^^, i S 12'; in the accusative, 'l?"nx qucmnam ? 1 S 28'\
Is 6^; with prepositions, e.g. 'P? i K 20'* (in an abrupt question bt/
whom?); '^) Gn32'^ 'O 'inx i S 24^— Similarly HO, "no, HO
what ? is used for the nominative, or accusative, or genitive (Jer 8^),
or with prepositions, e.g. nO"Py vjhereupon? Is i^ Jb 38^ ; why?
Nu 22^^, &c.; '"10"iy quousque ? i/' 74^ ^
Rem. Both ''O and HO are used also in indirect questions (on the merely C
relative distinction between direct and indirect questions in Hebrew, see
the Interrogative Sentences), e.g. Gn 39* (but read HCWO with Samar. and LXX),
43-'', Ex 32^ — On the meaning of ^O and nO as interrogatives is based also
their use as indefinite pronouns (equivalent to quisqnis, qiiodcunque or quicqiiain),
e.g. Ex 32=^, Ju 7*, I S 20*, Is 501" (read V^P) in the apodosis), 54^', Pr 9<'«,
2 Ch 36*^; even ^)p"nCK' have a care, whosoever ye be, 2 S 18'^ (unless '•^ is to
be read, with the LXX, for ^O) ; so also HD {whatever it be) Jb 13", i S 19',
2 S 1822-3; cf. Nu 23S ■'JSn^'nip "inn^ and whatsoever he showeth me. Cf. also
T^K "'P whosoever 'Ex 32^3, 2 S 2c", and "X^^ l^''Nn"*0 any man who Dt 2c5'^-,
corrupt. In Ju 5^ in fact *J^D T\) is most probably to be regarded with
Moore as a very early gloss, which subsequently found its way from this
passage into >p 68.
1 A quite different use of riD was pointed out (privately) by P. Haupt in
Ct 5' will ye not tell him ? i.e. I charge you that ye tell him, and 7' = look tioio at the
Shulamite, corresponding to the lute Arabic md tard, just see! md taquUi, say
now ! It has long been recognized that riD is used as a negative in Ct 8*.
444 ^-^'^ Parts of Speech [§1380,6
Ju 10^'. A still further weakening of the indefinite use of HID is the combina-
tion •B'"niO that which, Ec i», 3I' (just like the Syriac T XO) ; cf. Est 8S and
no . . . ?3 Pr 9I', no . . . N7 Neh 2^2, nothing whatever.— On riD^NlD quicquam,
anything at all (usually with a negative), and as an adverb m awj/ way, i 821^,
see the Lexicon.
§ 138. The Relative Pronoun.
Cf. Philippi, Stat, constr. (see heading of §89), p. 71 f., and especially
V. Baumann, Hebrdische Relativsdtze, Leipzig, 1894.
a Relative clauses are most frequently (but not necessarily; cf. § 1 55 &)
introduced by the indeclinable "i'^*^ (see § 36).' This is not, however,
a relative pronoun in the Greek, Latin, or English sense, nor is it
a mere nola relationis,^ but an original demonstrative pronoun [as
though iste, istius, &c.].' Hence it is used —
(i) In immediate dependence on the substantival idea to be defined,
and virtually in the same case as it (hence belonging syntactically to
the main clause); e.g. Gn 24^ ... rhf\ Sin . . . >3ni?f» nC'X nin^ the
Lord, iste, he tooTc me . . . he shall send, &c. { = who took me); Gn 2^
and God finished nb'y "IK'S in^xpjp his work, istud, he had made (it).
Such qualifying clauses may be called dependent relative clauses.
h Rem. I. In the above examples IK'S in Gn 24'' is virtually in the nomina-
tive, in Gn 2^ in the accusative. A further distinction between the examples
is that in Gn 24'' the main idea (mn*), to which T^X is added in apposition,
is only resumed in the qualifying clause by the subject {he) inherent in
1 The etymology of the word is still a matter of dispute. Against the
identification of IK'S, as an original substantive, with the Arabic 'atar, trace,
Aram. "iriX place, trace, Noldeke urges {ZDMG. xl. 738) that the expression trace
of . . . could hardly have developed into the relative conjunction, while the
meaningof pZace has been evolved onlyin Aramaic, where the word isneverused
as a relative. According to others, "IK'S is really a compound of several pro-
nominal roots; cf. Sperling, Die Nota relationis im Hebrdischen, Leipzig, 1876,
and KOnig, Lehrgeb., ii. 323 &., who follows Ewald and B6ttcher in referring
it to an original t'K'X. According to Hommel (ZDMG. xxxii. 708 ff.) IX^X
is an original substantive, to be distinguished from •B' and •K' (an original
pronominal stem), but used in Hebrew as a nota, relationis, or (as ni and 1*
are also sometimes used, see below, g and A) simply for the relative pronovn.
Baumann (op. cit., p. 44) sees in the Assyrian sa, Phoenician, Punic, and
Hebrew B', the ground-forms, of which the Phoenician and Punic B'X (see
above, § 36 note) and the Hebrew "IK'S are developments.
^ E. g. like Luther's use of so, in die fremden Gutter, so unter euch sind,
Gn 3.=^^
' This is the necessary conclusion both from the analogy of the Arabic
^dlladi, which is clearly a demonstrative (like the Hebr. PH^ '"Ipil), and
from the use of ni and IT as relatives.
I
§i38c-e] The Relative Pronoun 445
*3npp, while in Gn 2^ it is not resumed at all. This suppression of the
retrospective pronoun^ takes place especially when it (as in Gn 2^) would
represent an accusative of the object, or when it would be a separate
pronoun representing a nominative of the subject in a noun-clause, e.g.
Gn 1" yp^P nnrip "IB^N D^ran the waters, those, under the firmament, &c. In
negative sentences, however, the retrospective pronoun is not infrequently
added, e.g. Gn 17^2 WH ; 7^ N\T ; i K 920 ni2n ; Dt 26^^ n3n ; but cf. also
"•n N^n T^N Gn 98. The addition of N>n in a verbal clause, 2 K 22", is
unusual.
The very frequent omission of the retrospective pronoun is noticeable in
cases where the predicate of the qualifying clause is a verbum dicendi, e.g.
Nu I d'^ we are journeying unto the place, DD? fnX IDN niiT' IDX T^^K that pl&ce,
\'T ' ■■ V T : - T V ~:
the Lord said (of it), It will I give to you ; cf. Nu 14*0, Ju S^s i s qI''-" 24",
I K 82'\ Jer 32«
2. When the substantive, followed by IB'K and the qualifying clause, C
expresses an idea of place, it may also be resumed by the adverbs of place
DB' there, HD^ thither, UWID thence, e.g. Gn if n^HN Dt:' n'>n-"llJ'K D^p?3n-ny
unto the place, that one, his tent had been there, i.e. where his tent had been ; cf. Gn 3^
Dti'ip, Ex 21^3 riDK'. But even in this case the retrospective word may bo
omitted, cf. Gn 35I*, Nu 20^^, Is 64*"^ where DB' would be expected, and
Gn 3c38, jsiu 132^, I K 12^, where riDB' would be expected.— When the
appositional clause is added to a word of time, the retrospective pronoun is
always omitted, e.g. 1 S ao^i for all the days, '•H ^K'^"|3 "I'J'N those— ike son 0/
Jesse is living (in them); cf. Gn 45*, Dt 1^^, g', 1 K 11*-; see Baumann,
op. cit., p. 33.
3. If the governing substantive forms part of a statement made in the u
first or second person, the retrospective pronoun (or the subject of the apposi-
tional clause) is in the same person, e.g. Gn45* I am Joseph, ""riK DrilDD'^K'J^
he — 7je sold me, i.e. whom ye sold; Nu 22^°, Is 49**; 41* thou, Jacob, "IK'S
< * '
T^ID? ^^ — ^ ^^^^ chosen thee; Jer 32'', Ec lo^^^- ; Gn 1^'' I am the Lord,
^TiNiin T^S he— I brought thee out, &c., Ex 20'' (Dt 56).
(2) Not depending (adjectivally) on a governing substantive, but e
itself expressing a substantival idea. Clauses introduced in this way
may be called independent relative clauses. This use of "^K'S ig generally
rendered in English by he v:ho, he whom, &c. (according to the context),
or that which, &c., or sometimes 0/ *i*cA a kind as {qualis), cf. Ex 14'*'',
and in a dependent relative clause Is 7'^ In reality, however, the
"i^X is still a demonstrative belonging to the construction of the main
clause as subject or object, or as a genitive dependent on a noun or
preposition, e.g. Nu 22® "^W"* "ixri T^X iste — thou cursest (him) — is
cursed, i. e. fie whom thou cursest, &c. ; Ex 22*; '^ "^p^. as object, Gn 44^
^ The instances in which, instead of a retrospective pronoun, the main
idea itself is repeated (Gn 49^", 50'', Jer 31^2^ are most probably all due to
subsequent amplification of the original text by another hand.
2 The absolute use of "12'S is very peculiar in the formula ""^ "Ml iTTI "IS'N
~7S this (ia it) — it came as the word of the Lord to , . ., Jer 14^, 46^, 47^, 49^*.
446 The Parts of Speech [§138/, j/
49', I 816^*^-, Mi 6^ (15?'^? riN) ; and even preceding the verb, e.g.
Is 52'% \p(ig'; T^X as genitive, Ez 23=^ / will deliver thee "I'ffrJ T2
nxyc' into the hand of those — thou hatest (them) ; depending on a pre-
position, e.g. "i:^X^ Gn 44S 2 K lo^^; "^K'^<2 Gn 2i'\ ^^ N^n Tf^^^ m
that (phice) — he is there, i. e. where he is ; cf. Ju 17* and Ru i'*^ '^K'X~?K
whither ;' i K 18^- "f^M whither; "if XO Ex 5".
/ From these examples it follows that in independent relative clauses the
retrospective suffix, or adverb of place, may be, and in fact generally is,
omitted. As a rule, however (as in the dependent relative clause), this does
not apply to cases in which the retrospective pronoun, by the construction
of the sentence, depends on a preposition,? e. g. Gn 44''- flDI . . . WN ^ii*'2^ "'^^
he — it (the cup) is found with him, — shall die (for the Waw of the apodosis in
riDI cf. § 143^). In such cases "IB'X preceded by the preposition is quite
anomalous, as in Gn 31^2 ^jfj^n ->jj;jj Qy ^ujith whomsoever thou findest, where
"12'X is a relative pronoun in the English sense ; on the other hand, in
Is 4712 (and probably also 56*) "I5J'K3 is to be explained (w^ith Baumann,
op. cit., p. 37) by reference to 47^', as a demonstrative pronoun, stand now
with thine enchantments . . . , with those — thou hast laboured (with them).
[With regard to the preceding explanation of "1K'^?, the student will of
course understand that, in Hebrew as we know it, IB'X never occurs as
a mere demonstrative. A particle which, whatever its origin, is uniformly
used with reference to something in another, contiguous clause, will naturally
have acquired in practice that force which we denote by the term ' relative '.]
^ Like the original demonstrative pronoun "l!?'^*, the demonstratives
proper HT, iT, IT (the last commonly),^ and sometimes the article, are
used somewhat frequently in poetic language to introduce both
dependent and independent relative clauses. "With regard to the
construction of ITIj &c., the remarks on T^^, under a and e, also
hold good.
Examples : —
(a) ni in apposition to a governing substantive in the nominative, if/ 104*®
ri"!^^"nT fn^lp (there is) leviathan, he — ihou hast fortned {him), i.e. whom thou hast
fomied ; Is 42^* (IT) ; in the accusative. Is 25^ \p 74* (in both cases with a
retrospective pronoun ; IT is used without it in xp 132^*); in apposition to
a genitive dependent on a preposition, Pr 23^2 ^1^^ HT ^'3X? S)10C' hearken
unto thy father, him — he begat thee, i.e. who begat thee; \p 17^ (^T)- — In ^ 104*
Dn? riTp'' HT Dipp"/NI unto the place which thou hadst founded for theyn (cf. § 130c),
HT is in the genitive after the construct state DIpD to the place of that, thou hadst
1 In Zc 12^" also, instead of the unintelligible '^B'S nX vX, v?e should
probably read liJ'N'bX, and refer the passage to this class.
2 Such a strong ellipse as in Is 31^, where ^3G0 would be expected after
Ip^t^yn, is only possible in elevated poetic or prophetic language.
' The etymological equivalent ^"=1^ "=1 in Aramaic is always a relative.
§§ I38A-A-, i39«-c] The Relative P7^onoun 447
founded (it) /or them ; on the same analogy we may also take, with Baumann
(op. cit., p. 48), 1/- 786" (nt nn) and Ex 15" (n^Nj irDy), I5'^ is 43". f 9''.
10^, 31^, 328, 62^^^, 142^, 143^ (all examples ofit).
To introduce independent relative clauses Dl is used as a nominative in k
Jb 19"; as accusative, Jb 15" and M Hb i^^, \p CS^^ (after a preposition, T\)
Ex 13^ ; but the text is evidently corrupt).
ih) More certain examples of the use of the article as a relative pronoun /
(more correctly, perhaps, of the demonstrative which is otherwise used as
article) are i Ch 26^8 ^XltDK' K'''"=!pnn i^S M that Samuel had dedicated, &c. ;
I Ch 29* (where Ni*103 can only be perfect Niph'al); 2 Ch 29^6, Ezr lo^^ In
connexion with a plural, Jos lo^* the chiefs of the men of war IDN ISpi^H "'''o
went with him ; Ezr 8^5, 10^'', i Ch 29I''. Finally, in the sense of irf quod, Jer 5I'
(where, however, we sliould read with the LXX l^'^n). Of. moreover,
I S 9** the thigh rtvyni and that which was upon it (but see k below) ; 2 Ch 1*
•^ T V T I V :
pans equivalent to p3n "IK^K!! to the place, that he had prepared.
In all the examples adduced except i S g^* (where n^Sn^ should probably K
be read for Hvyni) tlie H is followed by undoubted perfects; almost all the
examples, moreover, belong to the latest Books (Ezra and Chronicles). On
the other hand, anotJier series of instances (even in the older texts) is
extremely doubtful, in which the Masora likewise requires perfects, either by
placing the tone on the penultima, as in Gn 18", 46^", Jb 2^^ H^Iin ; Is 5110
niDB'n ; Ez 26I'' nb^'nn Eu 122, 2« and 4' nn^n, or by the punctuation, Gn 2i3
TT-' TT-.. 1— ' ' TT —
n^ian ; i K n', Dn 81 nN")3n ; Is 56^ m^3n, while no doubt the authors in
all these cases intended participles (and in fact perfect participles, cf. § Ii6rf)
with the article, thus nX3n, &c., Ez 26" nb^nn for nb?non according to
' TT-' '._ TT-..r I T T •.. : - "
§ 52 s, and in the other examples l^isn HK^iiri nipsn.
§ 139. Expression of Pronominal Ideas hy means of
Substantives.
Analogous to the periphrases for expressing materials and attributes a
by means of substantives (§ 128 0 and p), is the use of substantives
to represent certain kinds of pronominal ideas, for which no special
expressions exist. Thus —
I. B'^N ntj'X man, woman, are used to express — J
(a) The idea of each, every (in the sense of each severally) with reference to
persons,! and even animals (Gn 151"), e.g. Gn 10^, feminine Ex 3^2; {j;^}<
is the object, e.g. in Jer 121'. On {J'''N — tJ'^K cf. § 123 c.
In a few passages tJ'''N in the above sense is placed for the sake of emphasis C
before the governing noun (always a substantive with a suffix), thus {J'^K Ttp
VnX Gn 9^, according to the usual explanation, stands for C'^N Tit? I^D at the
hand of the brother of every man. But although the explanation seems to be
1 As a rule {J'^K is used in the particularizing sense of each man, with the
phiral of the verb, e.g. Gn 44" ; sometimes, however, as subject to a verb in
the singular, e.g. Gn 44I2.
448 The Parts of Speech [§ 139 d-f
supported by Gn 42^6 and Nu 17", it is inconceivable that such an inversion
of nomen regens and rectum should occur. It is more likely, either that the
second substantive is in apposition to K'''N (thus Gn 9^ at the hand of every man,
Jtis brother, [unless it is a combination of the two readings {^""N n^D and
DlXn lip] ; similarly 15I" and he laid each or, more exactly, one piece of it, &c.,
and so probably also Nu 17^'' every one, sc. his name), or tJ^'^X precedes as a kind
of casus pendens, and only receives its nearer definition from the following
(substantive with suffix ; thus Gn 41^^, 42^' (according to the context = to every
one in his sack) ; 42^^, where ipb'H ^BD3~li"lif is virtually the predicate of
B^'N ; Ex i2<, 2821, Nu 5I0, 26", 2 K 2^^^, and especially Zc 710.1
(I (h) Any one, some one, e.g. Gn 13^^, Ct b'', with a negative no one ;2 so after
"b^ Ex 1619-29; before N^ Gn 236 and frequently.— Instead of B'''N we some-
times find in a similar sense D1X man, homo, e. g. Lv i' (cf. mXH IPISB as any
TT ' /*-» \ TT|T :
one else, Ju i6''-*i), B'd5 (somZ) person, Lv 2^, 5I, &c., and in a neuter sense "Ql
(prop, word, thing) for anything, Gn 18", or "I^TplD Lv ^^, Nu 312*. With
a negative HS'I means nothing; thus after ~7^ Gn 19^; after XP Ec 8^ —
Cf. finally, imtD any one, Dt is'; anything, Ez iS'o (but in Lv 4^, t" finXO)
and the expressions noticed in § 144 e. The latter include also instances
like Ez iS^2 j ^j^ve no pleasure ntSH ni&3 in the death of him that dieth, i.e. of
any man.
e (c) In connexion with VHX ^2S brother or 'IHyi /i/s neighbour, K'^X one, masc.
(as ilE'X one, fem., in connexion with HDinX her sister or nn^JJl her neighbour)
is used to represent the ideas of alter — alter, the one — the other ' (in reference to
persons, animals, or things without life ; see the Lexicon) or the idea of one
another, e.g. Gn 13" and they separated themselves VflX bVQ 5^*^< ^^e one from the
other ; Ex 26^ five curtains (Jiy"''!'' fem.) shall be coupled together rinhX'bX HE'X one
to another.
J 2. B'DS soul, person expresses the idea oiself,* both in the singular, Pr 19^1*,
292*, Jb iS* (in all cases IK'Di equivalent to himself) and in the plural,
Jer 37', &c. Similar to this is the use of nZl")i?3 Gn 18'^ (prop, in her inward
part) in the sense of within herself.^
1 Cf. on the whole question the thorough discussion by Budde, Die bill.
Urgeschichte, p. 283 ff. : according to him, the words in Gn 9^ are to be
rendered at the hand of one another (from men mutually) will I require It, [In
support of this view, Budde points to Zc f° ^E^nri-^X VHX ^"^ Dyni
0333^3, which in the light of 8", Dan?!?^ nB'nr|-^X ^inyi ny^TlX V^ii),
can only, he observes, be rendered 'and devise not the hurt of one another in
your heart '. So also KSnig, Syntax, § 33.]
2 Cf. also K'''X~["'X Gn 39". On the expression of the idea of no one by
means of pX with a following participle, see the Negative Sentences, § 152 I.
2 Elsewhere nt . . . Ht are used in a similar sense. Ex 1420, Is 6'; also
Tnxn , . , inxn 2 S 14^, or the substantive is repeated, e.g. Gn 47" (from
one end . . .to the other end'^,
* On the representation of this idea by pronouns, separate and suffixed, see
§ 135 a, i and A;.
* In a similar way the idea of self in Arabic, as in Sanskrit {atman), is
paraphrased by soul, spirit ; in Arabic also by eye ; in Kabbuiic by ^i body,
§ 139 ^y h"] Expression of Pronominal Ideas 449
3. Dyy ione (then metaphorically for substance) expresses the idea of self, ^
selfsame, venj same, in reference to things (as K'Dp to persons, e.g. rUn Di*n DVy2
in the selfsame day, Gn 7", cf. Jos lo^'', Ez 24" ; inbb D^OE'n D;f J?3 as t7 were the
very heaven for clearness, Ex 24'° ; iisri DJfi'B m the very fullness of his strength ( = m
the midst of his full strength), Jb 21^3.
4. The simple plural of words denoting time sometimes includes also the Ji
idea of a few, some ;i thus □''D'' a few days, Gn 24^^, 40* (here even of a longer
period, =for some time); Is 6520, Dn 8" (on the other hand, Gn 2;", 29"'
Dnns* Q'^jpi ; see § 96 under nriN) ; C^K* some years, Dn ii^-*.
Dn3 or DJfy 6owe, in Ethiopic and Amharic by head, in Egyptian by mouth,
hand, &c. ; cf. also the Middle High German min lip, din lip, for ich, dv.
However, {J'Sf in such cases is never (not even in Is 46^ DB'DJ they themselves)
a merely otiose periphrasis for the personal pronoun, but always involves
a reference to the mental personality, as affected by the senses, desires, &c.
^ Some in reference to persons in Ex 162° is expressed by D"'tJ'3X, and in
Neh 5*"* by IK'S K'"'_ sunt qui, with a participle following.
cow LET
og
CHAPTER II
THE SENTENCE
I. The Sentence in General.
§ 140. Noun-clauses, Verbal-clauses, and the Compound
Sentence.
a 1. Every sentence, the subject and predicate of which are nouns
or their equivalents (esp. participles), is called a noun-clause, e. ^.
!i:3bp nin; the Lord is our king, Is 33^2. D'N^fJni D^J?! ^"^^ '^^^] now the
men of Sodom were wicked and sinners, Gn 13'^; ^\0 nSl a mouth is
theirs, i//- 1 1 5* ; see further, §141.
b 2. Every sentence, the subject of which is a noun (or pronoun
included in a verbal-form) and its predicate a finite verb, is called
a verbal-clause, e.g. ^'^i^^ "^P^'l and God said, Gn i^; ?'n?!l and he
divided, i^ ; see further, § 142.
C Rem. In the last example the pronominal subject is at least indicated by
the preformative ("•), and in almost all forms of the perfect by aflformatives.
The 3rd pers, sing, pei-f. however, which contains no indication of the
subject, must also be regarded as a full verbal-clause.
d 3. Every sentence, the subject or predicate of which is itself a full
clause, is called a compound sentence, e.g.yjri 8^' ^^"f^. D''^'^ bxn God —
his way is perfect, equivalent to God's way is perfect ; Gn 34* ^33 031^
^^'p?? ^^^^ ^i??','? ^y ^^'^ Shechem — Ms soul longethfor your daughter;
see further, § 143.
e 4. The above distinction between different kinds of sentences —
especially between noun- and verbal-clauses — is indispensable to the
more delicate appreciation of Hebrew syntax (and that of the Semitic
languages generally), since it is by no means merely external or
formal, but involves fundamental difierences of meaning. Noun-
clauses with a substantive as predicate, represent something fixed,
a state or in short, a being so and so ; verbal-clauses on the other
hand, something moveable and in progress, an event or action. The
latter description is indeed true in a certain sense also of uoun-clausea
§§i4o/,i4i fl,J] Noun-clauses, Verbal-clauses , etc. 451
with a participial predicate, except that in their case the event or
action (as distinguished from that expressed by the verbal-clause) is
of a fixed and abiding character.
Rem. By the Arab grammarians every clause beginning with an inde- ,/
pendent subject is regarded as a noun-clause, and every clause beginning
with a finite verb as verbal. If a finite verb follows the noun-subject the
two together (since the verb comprises its own subject and is thus a complete
verbal-clause) form a compound noun-sentence, just as when the predicate
consists of an independent noun-clause. Though this definition of the
different kinds of sentence, which we formerly accepted (in § 144 a of the
22nd to the 24th German editions of this Grammar), is rejected above, a-d,
we must, nevertheless, mention here the point in which this more compli-
cated view of the Arab grammarians may be regarded as at least relatively
correct, namely, in classifying verbal- clauses according as the subject precedes
or follows the verb, a distinction which is often of great importance in Hebrew
also; see further, in § 142a.
§ 141. The Noun-clause.
1. The subject of a noun-clause (see § 140 a) may be — a
(a) A substantive, e. g. \'}^'Q ^V '^\}\\ «Wf? a river went out (was
going out) of Eden, Gn 2'".
{h) A pronoun, e. g. Gn y'* T'tp^P "aiX I will cause it to rain ; 1 4'*
|nb Kini and he was priest ; 2"^ (OXT before a feminine predicate, as
n^SI before a plural in EX32''); D3n ""jp who is wise? Ho 14'". — In
I Ch 5- ^S^P '^^?5r'^ and of him one became a prince, the subject is
<
contained in ISGD.^
2. The predicate of a noun-clause may be — b
(a) A substantive, e.g. Dt 14' "131 DriN CJIl ye are children 0/ the
Lord your God; Gn 42". Specially characteristic of the Semitic mode
of expression are the cases in which both subject and predicate are
substantives, thus emphasizing their identity ('the thing is its
measure, material, or equivalent '), e. g. Ez 41^ Y)} 1''J0^^P'! • • • TV D?|^lI
the altar (was) wood . . . , and the walls thereof (were) wood, i. e. of
wood. Cf. below, c.
(b) An adjective or participle, e. g. Gn 2'^ 3iD N^nn pNH ^^il^ and
the gold of that land is good ; 2K''' jnsj^l now Ephron was sitting, &c.,
Gn23". ^ Very frequently such noun-clauses, attached by Wdw to
a verbal-clause, are used to represent a state contemporaneous with
the principal action ; cf. e below.
(c) A numeral, e. g. Gn 42'^ ^"'Tl?l| "I'^V D"'?.^ the twelve (of us) are
thy servants.
1 For other remarkable instances of ellipse in the Chronicler, see Driver,
Introduction, ed. 8, p. 537, no. 27.
2 Cf. the numerous examples in § 116 n-p.
Gg 2
452 The Sentence [§1410, rf
{d) A pronoun, e. g. Gn lo'^ ^s^n), Ex 9"' ('3S), Gn 24^^ ('»), i K 9'^
(e) An adverb or (esp. if formed with a preposition) any specification
of time, place, quality, possessor, &c,, which may be regarded as the
equivalent of a noun-idea, e.g. npiBn DB' there is the bdellium, Gn 2'^;
■'?'?} "^ where is Abel ? 4^ ; i"^9D ^^^^? his mercy endureth for ever,
yj/ 136''-; in'^S ">'^y riches are in his house, >//■ 112^; ''^nJK i? 4<;e arc
his, ylr 100^ ^Ve.
C Rem. I. The employment of a substantive as predicate of a noun-clause is
especially frequent, either when no corresponding adjective exists (so mostly
with words expressing the material; cf. § 1280) or when the attribute is
intended to receive a certain emphasis. For in all cases there is a much
greater stress upon a substantival predicate,'' since it represents something as
identical with the subject (see above, & [a]), than upon an adjectival or verbal
<
predicate ; cf. Ct i^"; \// 25^° all the paths of the Lord are riDNI TDPI lovingkindness
and truth (i.e. wholly lovingkindness, &c. ; cf. Jer 10^"); Ez 38^, ip lo^ 19^", 23^,
88^8, Pr 3",^ Jb 22^2, 23^^, 26'^, Ru 3^^. Sometimes the emphasis on the predi-
cate is obtained by the use of the plural form (according to § 1246), e.g.
if/ 1x0' thy people are ^3^3 altogether willingness ; Ct 5^®, Dn 9^*.
Ct Sometimes the boldness of such combinations is modified by the repetition
of the subject, as regens of the predicate, e. g. Jb 6^^ TIS D*33X n3~DJ< is my
strength the strength of stones? Pr 3^''. That the language, however — especially
in poetry — is not averse even to the boldest combinations in order to em-
phasize veiy strongly the unconditional relation between the subject and
predicate, is shown by such examples as Jp 45* myrrh and aloes and cassia are all
Ihy garments (i.e. so perfumed with them that they seem to be composed of
them) ; Ct i^^ thine eyes are doves, i. e. dove's eyes (but 5^^^ D"'3i"'3) ; * ^ 23^, 109*,
Jb 8^, 1 21^2, Ct 2^^. In prose, e.g. Ex 9^^, Ezr lo^^ D^Oti'|l nj^H the season is rain
showers, i.e. the rainy season; with a bold enallage of the number, Gn 34^°
^£^DD ^nO ^2x1 and I (with my family) am persons few in number. For
similarly bold expressions with iTTI cf. Gn ii^, 12^, Ex 17", Is 5I2, Jer 2''*,
and again with a bold enallage of the number, Jb 29^^ I was eyes to the blind,
and feet was I to the lame, but in prose, Nu lo'^ and thou shalt be to us D^VJ^p.
^ Why in these examples the pronouns, notwithstanding appearances to
the contrary, are to be considered as predicates and not as subjects, may
be seen from what has been remarked above, § 126 Ar.
' The same naturally applies to most of those cases which are not pure
noun-clauses, but have the substantival predicate connected with the subject
by n^n (e.g. Gn i^ and the earth was a rcaste and emptiness ; cf. f 35^, Pr 8^",
Jb 3*) or where a preposition precedes the substantival predicate, as ^ 29* the
voice of the Lord is with power, i. e. powerful.
^ DvtJ' here, as in Jb 21 5, is evidently a substantive after a plural subject ;
on the other hand, it is doubtful whether DIpK' in such passages as Gn 43^",
2 S 20', if/ 120'', &c., is not rather to be regarded as an adjective.
^ As a rule, in such comparisons 3 (which is then to be regarded as
nominative) stands before the predicate, e.g. Is 63^2 wherefore are thy garments
n33 ^"(""13 liJ^e those of one that treadeth in the wine-press ? (prop, the like of one that
treadeth, instar calcantis) ; Jer 50^. The comparison is then much less
emphatic than in the noun-clauses cited above.
§ 141 e-A] The Noun-clause 453
2. The noun-clause connected by waio copulative to a verbal- clause, or its C
equivalent, always describes a state contemporaneous v?ith the principal action,
or (when the predicate is a transitive participle) an action represented in
constant dura1;ion (cf. § 107 d, as well as § 116 n and 0), e.g. Gn 19' and the
two angels came to Sodom at even, Ip'' Dv") while Lot sat, &c. ; i8i-8i6-22, 252*,
Ju 13*, I S i', 2 S 4'', II* (always with a participle); with an adjectival
predicate, Gn 18^2. -nrith a substantival predicate, 18"; with an adverbial
predicate, 9^^. Not infrequently such a circumstantial clause indicates at the
same time some contradictory fact, so that 1 is equivalent to whereas, whilst,
although, e.g. Gn 15^, iS^'', 20^, 48I* {although he was the younger); Ju 16^^ how
canst thou say, I love thee, ""riK pX 'JB?'! whereas thine heart is not with me? 2 S 3^',
i// 28^ whilst mischief is in their hearts. These clauses describing a state are,
however, only a subdivision of the large class of circumstantial clauses,
on which see § 156.
3. As the examples given under a and b show, the syntactical f
relation existing between the subject and predicate of a noun-clause
is as a rule expressed by simple juxtaposition, without a copula of any
kind. To what period of time the statement applies must be inferred
from the context ; e. g. i K 1 8^' ^'O^^,'^ '^j'"'^ the Lord is the true God ;
I S 9'^; Is 31^ 050 ^^|TD3 yet he also is wise ; Gn 42''; on the other
hand, Gn 19' ^P' taii'l and (= while) Lot was sitting; Ez 28'^; Gn 7*
TLDDO "'33N I am raining, i. e. / will rain. Sometimes even a jussive
or optative is to be supplied as predicate, Gn 27" upon me be tht/
curse; Gn ii^ 20'', Ex 12^ Cf. § ii6r, note.
Not infrequently, however, a connexion is established between subject ^
and predicate (a) by adding the separate pronoun of the 3rd person
singular or plural, expressly resuming and therefore strengthening
the subject, or (6) (especially for the sake of a more exact specification
of time) by the help of the verb 'l^n. The first of these will be
a compound sentence, since the predicate to the main subject consists
of an independent clause.
Examples of (a) : Gn j^i^^ the seven good kine illh CJU' V2p they are seven fl
years ; Dt 1", 4" ; Ec 5" K^H D\n5K nriO Ht this— it is a gift of God; Nu 32^
Dn n?N ; in a question, Gn 27^^. Sometimes WH is used in this way to
strengthen a pronominal subject of the first or second person, and at the
same time to connect it with the predicate which follows,^ e.g. K^H ""pllX ^3bX
Is 4325 I, even I, am he that bloUeth out, &c. ; 51"; i<!|n r\m 2 S 7*8, Is 37",
f 44^ Neh 98''; in an interrogative sentence, Jer 14*2.2 jq Jer 49" K^H in
a rerbai-clause strengthens nnS.
1 On a similar use of the separate pronoun of the third person in Aramaic
(Dn 2^^, Ezr 5I1, &c.) see Kautzsch, Gramm. des Bill. Aram., § 87. 3.
2 This is of course to be distinguished from the use of X^H (to be inferred
from the context) as predicate in the sense of 6 avrSi ; see above, § 135 a,
note I ; or such cases as Dt 32^® see now NIH ""SX ^3K '3 that I, even J, am he ;
1 Ch 21".
|»
454 ^^^ Sentence [§ 141
i-ra
I Of Q)) : naturally this does not apply to the examples, in which nTl, in
the sense oi to become, to fare, to exist, still retains its full force as a verb, and
where accordingly the sentence is verbal, and not a noun-clause ; especially
when the predicate precedes the subject. On the other hand, such examples
as Gn i'' and the earth was (iin^n) waste and emptiness, can scarcely be regarded
as properly verbal clauses ; nri\T is used here really only for the purpose of
referring to past time a statement which, as the description of a state,
might also appear in the form of a pure noun-clauso ; cf. Gn 3I. This is
especially true of the somewhat numerous instances in which n^H occurs as
a connecting word between the subject and the participial predicate ; e. g.
Ju i'', Jb 1^* (immediately afterwards a pure noun-clause). The imperfect
of iTn announces what is future in Nu 14^', &c. ; cf. § 116 r. However,
especially in the latter case, DTI is not wholly without verbal force, but
comes very near to being a mere copula, and this use is more frequent in the
later books ^ than in the earlier.
/t" Rem. On the employment of f^ existence, and J^fjt non-existence, which were
originally substantives (on their tendency to be used as verbs, equivalent. to
est, and non est, cf. § 100 0, and the Negative Sentences, § 152) as a connecting
link between a pronominal subject and a participial predicate (especially in
conditional and interrogative sentences, Gn 24*2-*^, 43*, &c.), see above,
§ 116 3, and the various kinds of subordinate clauses mentioned in §§ 150, 159.
/ 4. The natural arrangement of words in the noun-clause, as describ-
ing a state, is subject — predicate; the principal stress falls on the
former since it is the object of the description. Very frequently,
however (and not merely in poetry, where greater freedom is naturally
allowed in the arrangement of words), the reverse order is found, i. e,
predicate — subject. The latter order must be used when special
emphasis is laid on the predicate,^ or when it consists of an inter-
rogative word; thus with a substantival predicate, e.g. Gn 3" "isy
nriX dust thou art; 4', 12" (my sister, not my wife); 20*'^ 29'",
Is6»^ Jb5^^ 6'2; with an adjectival predicate, e.g. Isd"", 28^
Jer 10^; with a participle, Gn 30^ 32'^; with an interrogative pro-
noun, e. g. Gn 24®^ ; ^ with an adverbial interrogative, e. g. Gn 4^
1)1 Rem. On the above cf. the exhaustive investigations of C. Albrecht, ' Die
Wortstellung im hebr. Nominalsatze,' ZAW. vii. 218 flf. and viii. 249 ff. ; with
a complete list of the exceptions to the order subject — predicate, p. 254 ff. The
predicate must precede for the reasons stated (an adjectival predicate is parti-
cularly emphatic when it has the force of a comparative, e. g. Gn 4" ; the
predicate expressed by means of a preposition precedes most frequently
when it serves to convey the ideas of having, possessing, e. g. Gn 18^*, 29'^, &c. ;
cf. also 2620,3 1 '«•").
n The predicate may precede : (a) when the subject is a pronoun, for ' the
person assumed to be generally known, does not excite the same interest as
1 According to Albrecht, ZAW. viii. 252, especially in Deuteronomy and
in the Priestly Code.
2 For the same reason specifications of place (e.g. Gn 4'') or other adverbial
qualifications may stand at the beginning of the sentence.
3 The only exceptions, according to Albrecht (see the Rem. above), are
Ex iC*.
§ 142 a-c] The Noun-dause 455
that which is stated about him ;' (6) 'in order not to be a mere appendage
to a subject which consists of several words,' e.g. 2 K ao^^ ; (c) in interroga-
tive sentences (with a substantival or adjectival predicate or one compounded
with a preposition), e.g. i S 16*; finally {A) in a relative clause, when the
predicate is adverbial or compounded with a preposition, as a rule closely
united (by Maqqeph) with "IB'K, e.g. Gn 2^1 DBr-^CJ'X. ; i^^f- i^-T^K.
§ 142. The Verbal-clause.
1. By § 140/ thei-e is an essential distinction between verbal- a
clauses, according as the subject stands before or after the verb. In
the verbal-clause proper the principal emphasis I'ests upon the action
which proceeds from (or is experienced by) the subject, and accord-
ingly the verb naturally precedes {necessarili/ so when it is in the
perf. consec, or imperf, consec). Nevertheless, the subject does some-
times precede even in the verbal-clause proper, in the continuation of the
narrative, e.g. Gn 7^*, i S i8\ 2 S 19^" ; especially so if there is special
emphasis upon it, e. g. Gn 3" (it is not I who am to blame, but) the
serpent beguiled me, cf. Gn 2^ &c.' In the great majority of instances,
however, the position of the subject at the beginning of a verbal-clause
is to be explained from the fact that the clause is not intended to
introduce a new fact carrying on the narrative, but rather to describe
a state. Verbal-clauses of this kind approximate closely in character
to noun -clauses, and not infrequently (viz. when the verbal form might
just as well be read as a participle) it is doubtful whether the writer
did not in fact intend a noun-clause^
The particular state represented in the verb may consist — 6
(a) Of an act completed long before, to which reference is made only
because it is necessary for understanding the sequel of the principal action.
If the predicate be a perfect (as it almost always is in these cases), it is
generally to be rendered in English by a pluperfect ; cf. the examples
discussed above in § 106/(1 S aS^, Ac); also Gn 6» (not Noah found grace);
16I, 18", 20*, 24I, 39I {and Joseph in the meanv/hile had been brought down to
EgypOi 4'^*) J" 1*^ ' S 9^^ H''^ 25", i K l^ &c.— In a wider sense this
applies also to such verbal-clauses as Gn 2^ (see further, § 112 el, since when
they serve to represent an action continuing for a long period in the past,
and thus to some extent a state.
(6) Of a fact, contemporaneous with the principal events or continuing as C
the result of them. To the former class belong all those instances in which
the predicate is combined with iTH (provided that riM has not, as in Gn i^,
3^, &c., been weakened to a mere copula, in which case the precedence of the
subject is fully explained from the character of the clause as a noun-clause ;
cf. § 141 i, and the examples of iTH, &c., with a participle, § 116 r) ; as an
example of the second class, cf.'e.g. Gn 13" "lil IU33-pX3 DK'J D")3«
Abraham accordingly continued to dwell in the land of Canaan, but Lot dwelt, H^c.
1 This of course applies also to the cases, in which the subject consists of
a strongly emphasized personal pronoun, e.g. Gn 32" nrit< thou thyself; 33^
Nin he himself.
456
The Sentence [§i42(Z-/
(I Rem. I. The close relation between verbal-clauses beginning with the
subject and actual noun-clauses, is seen finally from the fact that the former
also are somewhat frequently added with \ (or subordinated) to a preceding
sentence in order to lay stress upon some accompanying circumstance ; on
such noun-clauses describing a state or circumstance, cf § 141 e. This is
especially the case, again, when the circumstantial appendage involves an
antithesis ; cf. Gn 18^* seeing «/*«« nevertheless Abraham shall surely become, &c. ;
24B6, 26^'', Is 29", Jer 14!^, \p 50!'', Jb 21^2^ and such examples as Gn z^^-*, 29I',
where by means of 1 a new subject is introduced in express antithesis to
one just mentioned. Moreover, in the examples treated above, under b and c
(i S 28*, &c.), the subject is frequently introduced by \, which then corre-
sponds to the Greek 5«, used to interpose an explanation, &c., see Winer,
Gramm. des neutest. Sprachidioms, § 53. 7 h.
Q, 2. By a peculiar construction verbal-clauses may be joined by means of 1
and a following subject to participial clauses, e.g. Gn 382* K^ni riNiflC K'H
nriptj' she was already brought forth, when she sent, &c. ; 44^'*, Ju 18^, 19^^, 2 S 20*;
for other examples, see § 116 m (where it is pointed out, note i, that Ihe
apodosis also frequently appears in the form of a wown-clause, a further
proof of the clo«ie relation between verbal-clauses beginning with the subject
and noun-clauses proper). Without doubt there is in all these cases a kind
of inversion of the principal clause and the temporal subordinate clause ;
the latter for the sake of greater emphasis being raised to an independent
noun-clause, while the real principal action is added as though it were an
accompanying circumstance, and hence in the form of an ordinary circum-
stantial clause. [Cf. Driver, Tenses, § 166 ff.]
J 2. According to what has been remarked above, under a, the
natural order of words within the verbal sentence is : Verb — Subject,
or Verb — Subject — Object. But as in the noun-clause (§ 141 /) so also
in the verbal-clause, a variation of the usual order of words frequently
occurs when any member of the sentence is to be specially emphasized
by priority of position.' Thus the order may be : —
(«) Object — Verb— Subject : Gn 30^°, 37^ i S isS 2 K 23'^ and fre-
quently. Naturally the examples are far more numerous, in which
the object precedes a verbal form which includes the subject in itself,
e.g. Gn s"'■''■'^ 6'«, 8'^ g'\ Ex iS^', Ju 14^ i ^ t8'', 20", 21'", 2 K 22*,
Pr ^3^ &c.
{b) Verb— Object— Subject : Gn 21^, Nu5^, i S i5^\ 2S 24"^ (but labizr]
is probably only a subsequent addition) ; Is 19'^, ■^ 34^^, Jb 11'^, &c.
{c) Subject— Object— Verb: Is 3'', Il^ 13'*, Ho 12", f6'\ ii%
Jb292\2
^ Not infrequently also the striving after chiasmus mentioned in § 1 1 4 r,
note, occasions a departure from the usual arrangement of words.
2 This sequence occurs even in prose (Gn 17*, 23^, &c.) ; it is, ho%vever,
more doubtful here than in the above prophetical and poetical passages,
whether the preceding subject should not be regarded rather as the subject
of a compound sentence (§ 143), the predicate of which is an independent
verbal -clause ; this would explain why the verbal-clause is usually separated
from the subject by one of the greater disjunctives. — On the other hand, the
aequence Subject — Object — Verb is quite common in Aramaic (e.g. Dn 2''"'; ; cf.
I
§§ 142 g, 143 a] The Verbal-clause 457
{d) Object— Subject— Verb (very rarely): 2 K 5", Is 5", 28'", ^/^ 51';
Pr i3>«(read^3).>
{e) A substantival complement of the verb n^^ is placed first in
Is 18° n^3 nin"" ^D2 "^phl a«c? a ripening grape thefloiver becometh.
Rem. Of specifications compounded with a preposition those of place stand ^
regularly after the verb, unless they are specially emphatic as e.g. Gn 19^,
30", 325, Mi 5\ Estgi^ ; in Gn 292^ ^JPlia with 3 pretii precedes for the sake
of emphasis. Cf., however, in Gn 35" the order ijerft— specification of place-
subject— The remoter object precedes for the sake of emphasis, e.g. in Gn 1315
(26»), 158 ; even before the interrogative, Gn 2^ (cf. Jer 221= where the subject
precedes an interrogative, and i S 20^ Jb 34*1 where a prepositional specifi-
cation precedes). — Prepositional specifications of time, such as n"'K*K"ia
(Gn ii), DV2, a^m Di*3, &c. (but notnjb'iina, nor the simple ^i^i^"}., ^^1103,
obiyp), stand, as a rule, before the verb, provided it be not in the perf. consec.
or imperf. consec. ; so also certain adverbs of time, such as IX^ nriV, whilst
others like lS]} TDn regularly follow the verb.
§ 143. The Compound Sentence.
A compound sentence (§ 1 40 d) is formed by the juxtaposition of a
a subject ^ (which always precedes, see c) and
(a) An independent noun-clause, which (a) refers to the principal
subject by means of a pronoun, e.g. Na i^ iS"^"! ns1D2 nin^ the Lord —
in the storm is his way, 2 S 23*, \//- i8^\ 104'^, 125", Ec2"; cf. also
Gn 34^, where the predicate is an interrogative clause. — A personal
pronoun is somewhat frequently used as the principal subject, e. g.
Is 59^^ Dnx ''n''")3 DNT ^3i<1_ and as for me, this is my covenant with them,
&c.; Gn 9^, 17'', Is i', i Ch 28^;^ with an interrogative noun-clause,
Gn 37^", Jb 21*, 38'': — or (/?) is without a retrospective suffix (in
which case naturally the connexion between the subject and predicate
is much looser), e. g. i S 20^' and as touching the matter which, &c.
. . . behold the Lord is between thee and me for ever; Pr 27^.
Gesenius, Comm. on Is 42^^*, and Kautzsch's Gramm. des Bibl. Aram., § 84. i b.
The pure Aramaic usage of placing the object before the infinitive occurs in
Hebrew in Lv 198, 2121, Dt 28^6, 2 S n^^. Is 496, 2 Ch 2810, 31^, 36"(?)-
1 This sequence occurs more frequently in noun-clauses with a participial
predicate, e.g. Gn 371^, 41^, 2 S 13*, &c., in interrogative sentences, e.g.
2 K 6^2, Jer 7^^ ; in all which cases the emphasized object is placed before
the natural sequence of subject — predicate. [Cf. Driver, Tenses, § 208.]
"^ In Gn 31^0 a verbal-clause (^D^^n I was) occurs instead of the subject, and
is then explained by another verbal-clause.
3 In I Chr 282 (cf. also 22' ''33b"Dy PfH ""^X) ""iX might also be taken as
\ • T ; • T T • -: * -;
strengthening the pronominal suffix which follows (equivalent to I myself had
it in my mind), as e. g. Ez 33^^ whereas their oivn way is not equal ; cf. § 135/.
458 The Sentence [§i43 6-e
b (6) An independent verbal-clause : (a) with a retrospective suffix,'
e.g. Gn 9® (of. § 1 16 w) ; 17'* as for Sarai thy wife, thou shalt not call
her name Sarai; 26'^ 28", 34^ Ex 30^^, 32^ i S 2"*, 2 K lo^, Is 9',
ii'°, Ez 33^^, Ho 9", >//■ ii\ 46^ 65*, 74", Dn i'^; with a pronoun as
the principal subject, Gn2 4^^; (^8) without a retrospective suffix,
Is 19''^ every one that mentions it (Judah) to it (Egypt), it (Egypt)
is afraid.
C Rem. r. In all the above examples prominence is given to the principal
subject (by its mere separation from the context by means of a greater
disjunctive, as a casus pendens"^) in a manner which would be quite impossible
in a simple noun or verbal-clause (e.g. Na i^ if it were HD^DS niiT' 'i\')/\) ; cf.
the French c'est moi qu'on a accuse. But the statement or question contained
in the claus'e which forms the predicate also receives greater weight. For
the same purpose other members of the sentence also are sometimes placed
at the beginning and resumed again by a following suflSx ; thus the object,
Gn 13^5^ 2i", 3512, 4721 (with the Samaritan and LXX read perhaps T'^yn") ;
I S 25^^; a specification of place, Gn 2^'', 2 K 22^8, &c. ; a substantive with p,
1 S 92", 286^'; cf. the examples in § 135 a. — In Nu 15^^ a dative is co-ordinated
with the casus pendens, i.e. there is a transition to a different construction.
Ci 2. To compound sentences belong also the numerous examples already
treated in the account of the tenses, where the predicate of a casus pendens is
introduced by the wdw apodosis. The isolation and prominence of the
principal subject is in this case still more marked than in the instances
treated above ; on the casus pendens with a following imperfect consecutive
(e.g. Jer 6'*, 33^*), cf. § iMh; with a following perfect consecutive (e.g.
Ex 4''i, 12", Nu 23», I S 25**, 2 S I4i'<', Is 9*, 56«f-)» § "2 < and mm-, on the
participle as casus pendens. § 112 00 and § 116 w. — In Jb 15^'' waw apodosis
follows with the cohortative ; in Jb 23^^^ ^ 115^, the imperfect is separated
by ii? from the waw apodo&is ; in Jb 4* as for tfiy hope, it is the integrity of thy
ways, 36'*, Ec 5*, an incomplete noun-clause is appended by vxiw apodosis. On
wdw apodosis after disconnected specifications of time, cf. § H2 00 at the end,
and Gn 40*, 2 S 15'* 'l^^V ^?^1 nnyi and now (so far as the present is con-
cerned) I will be thy servant, Nu 1 2^^, Jer 4^ (me thou needest not fear).
^ 3. Sometimes a substantive introduced by p (m respect to ; cf. § 119 m) serves
the same purpose as the casus pendens beginning the sentence, as Nu 18*
(unless the p here serves to introduce the object, according to § 1 17 n) ; Is 32^
(where, however, C'lCl should most probably be read) ; Ec 9*, i Ch 7^, 2^^'"-,
2 Ch 7". On the other hand, i// 16*, 17*, 328, 89*', 119'*, are very doubtful.
The suggestion of P. Haupt {Johns Hopkins University Circulars, xiii. no. 114;
Baltimore, 1894) also deserves attention, that in passages like Ec 9*, and in
yjp Gn 9^", 23^°, Ex 27'!*, Ez 44', &c., p is not the preposition, but an
emphasizing particle, answering to the Arab, la, surely ; Assyrian lu ; with 73
it is equivalent to iH short. Cf. also ?--b site — sive, et—et, Jos 17'", Ezr i",
Assyrian lu—lu.
^ Cf. the Mesa' inscription, 1. 31, and Horonain, therein dioelt, &c.
2 But this term must not (any more than that formerly used 'the subject
preceding absolutely^) be misunderstood to mean that the principal subject is,
as it were, floating in the air, and that the whole sentence results in an
anacoluthon. On the contrary, to the Semitic mind, such sentences appear
quite as correctly formed as ordinary noun- and verbal-clauses.
§ 144 a-c] Peculiarities iii Representation of Subject 459
§ 144. Feculianties in the Rejjresentatioii of the Subject
{especially in the Verbal-clause).
1. According to § 40 ff. most forms of the finite verb include a ci
specification of the subject in the form of personal afformatives (in the
imperfect also in the form of preformatives). Not infrequently,
however, masculine forms are used in referring to femiiiines, e.g.
DriVT). Ez 2 3«; Dn^bj? Ru i"; in the imperfect, Jo 2^ Ct 2' ; in the
imperative, Am 4^ Zc 13^ (for other examples, see § iio^). On
emphasizing the pronominal subject by the addition of the separate
pronoun, see § 135 a and h.
On the masculine as prior gender, cf. § 122 g ] on similar anomalies in the
use of the personal pronoun, § 135 0, in the connexion between substantive
and adjective, § 132 d, between subject and predicate, § 145 i>, t, u.
2. The third person singular is often used impersonally, especially J)
in the masculine, e. g. ""n^). and it came to pass, nM"l and it shall coine
to xjass; n^n followed by v, &c., it became hot to him, i.e. he became
angry, Gn 4^, &c. ; i/ 1?f.^1 lit. and it became strait to him, he was
distressed, Gn 32^;^ also in the feminine, e.g. i S 30" (Ju 10^) ""^^l
in!'; Ju 11=*, Jer 7^', Ez I2-^ Jb 15^^ (unless 'inilDn in verse 31 be
the subject) ; cf. also the impersonal passives, Is i^ (noS'i), 29" ("lips'!!).
Somewhat different are the instances in which the 3rd singular
feminine occurs as the predicate of a feminine subject which is not
mentioned, but is before the mind of the speaker, e.g. Is 7^, 14^"',
Jer 10^, Jb 4^, 18'® (in 2 K 24'' 1^^^"?3 is used in this way with a
feminine predicate, and in Jer 1 9* "IK'S alone) ; different, too, are the
instances in which the 3rd singular masculine refers to an act just
mentioned, e.g. Gn 17" iT^I and this (the circumcision) shall be a token
of a covenant, &c.
Rem. The expressions for natural phenomena may be either in the 3rd C
sing, masculine or feminine, e.g. IIN it becomes light, i S 29^" (but with an
explicit subject, Gn 44^) ; "1^K*"I and it became light ; so also TjB'n' it groios dark,
Jer 13"; but naB'm Mi 3'; HSyn though there be darkness, Jb 11"; TCDri
it rains. Am 4' (where, however, the context requires the reading "^'"^Jp^!l) ;
^ 50^ f^^V'^^ it is tempestuous.
^ In Arabic and Ethiopic the masculine is commonly used in this case, in
Syriac the feminine. — The foi-ms Dn hoi, 2^0 good, u:ell, "ID bitter, "lif narrow,
Xn evil (frequently joined by ^p^ 17, &c.), which many regard as impersonal,
are no doubt to be regarded in most cases not as forms of the 3rd pers. sing,
perf., but, with Hupfeld on f 18'', as adjectives.
460 The Sentence [§ 144 d-i
d 3. The indefinite personal subject (our tliey, one, the French on, and
the German man ') is expressed —
(a) By the 3rd person singular masculine, e. g. N"^!^ one (so. any one
who named it, see the Eem.) called (or calls) it, Gnii^, 16", 19"^^,
Ex 15"^ N-Jpn Gn 35«'», 2 S a'", Is 9^ "ION'1 owe sa?J, Gn 48\ i S 16^;^
other examples are Gn 38^^ one put out a hand; Nil 23^', i K 22^*,
Is 6^" i^ ND-11 and one heals them ; 8^ (NE':) ; 46' (PVi?^) ; Am 6^% Mi 2^
Jb 27^^; by the 3rd singular feminine ('^'].'',\) Nu 26^'.
^ Rem. The Jewish commentators, following the Arab grammarians, usually
explain these singulars by the addition of the participle (generally deter-
minate) of the same stem, e.g. N'ipn Kip. This view is supported by the
fact that such a complement sometimes occurs, e.g. Is 16^0 "^"i/^^ ^"'l! ^^^
treader treads out, for one treads out; 28*'^ (doth one plow continually?) ; Dt 17®
(Ez i8'2), Dt 22*, 2 S 173 (Ez 33*), Jer 9^3 ; with an indeterminate participle
(as in Arabic, e. g. qdla qcVilun, a sayer says, i. e. some one says), e. g. Nu 6^,
Am 9^ ; cf. above, § 116 t, and, on the whole question. Driver on i S 16^.
./ (^) V^^y frequently by the 3rd plural masculine, e.g. Gn 2g^ for
out of that well VPl they (i.e. people generally) ivatered the flocks;
26'«, 35^ 41^ 49^ I K i^, Is 38^ Ho 128, Jb i8>«, 34^, Est 2\ Neh 2^
^ Rem. The 3rd plur. also is sometimes used to express an indefinite subject,
where the context does not admit of a human agent or at least not of several,
e.g. Gn 34^''. In such a case the 3rd plur. comes to be equivalent to a
passive, as very commonly in Aramaic (see Kautzsch's Gramm. des Bibl. Aram.,
§ 96. I c) ; e.g. Jb 7^ wearisome nights ^?"13Jp have they allotted to me (equivalent
to were allotted to me ; to make ' invisible powers ' the subject is a merely
artificial device) ; Jb 4", (>\ iSi^, 1926, 3420, Ez 3226, ^ 63", Pr 222 (in parallelism
with a passive) ; 9''^.
<. . .1
h (c) By the 2nd singular masculine, e. g. Is "j"^ HSK' K13ri~X7 one will
(or can) not come thither (prop, thou wilt . . .); Jer 23^', Pr 19^^, 30^
(unless the reading should be '^^^'^). Cf. also ^^.2"ny or simply "^^^
(Gn lo'^'^, 13'° n3X3) prop, until thy coming, i. e. until one comes.
i (d) By the plural of the participle, e. g. Jer 38^^ and all thy wives
and thy children D^NlfiO (prop, are they bringing out=-) they will bring
out, &c.; cf. Is 32'^, Ez 13^, Neh d'" (/o?' some are corning to slay thee)
^ In I S 9' {J'^NH (prop, tlie man) is used in exactly the same sense as
our one.
2 Elsewhere in such cases ^")pX*1 usually occurs (but not in the perfect,
e.g. I S 2322), so that it is doubtful whether the present reading of Gn 48', &c.,
would not be better explained according to § "j d, note. In Gn 482 for the
extraordinary 1-jM the common form 12*1 is to be read ; so in 502* for DK'^'1
(after a plural) cither D5f^*1 or the 3rd plur. ; in 2 K 21'^ ^3?*!.
§ 144 *-«] Peculiarities in Representation of Subject 461
and the passages discussed above, § 1 1 6 ^' In i K 5' the text is
corrupt.
(e) By the passive, e. g. Gn 4'* f'iPr' ^^"^i^ W then {was it begun = ) Jc
began men to call upon, &c. (but read bnn T\) he began).
4. A peculiar idiom, and one always confined to poetic language, /
is the not infrequent occurrence of two subjects in a verbal sentence,"*'
one of the person and the other of the thing. The latter then serves
— whether it precedes or follows — to state the instrument, organ, or
member by which the action in question is performed, and may be most
often rendered in English by an adverb, as a nearer definition of the
manner of the action. All the examples of this kind have this in
common, that the subject denoting the thing takes a suffix in the
same person as the personal subject.' They are thus distinguished
from the accusatives treated in § 117 s, with which they are ofteu
confused.
(a) Examples where the subject denoting the thing precedes, nin^~?SI v^p 7n
iO\)V% my voice — I cry unto the Lord, i. e. I cry aloud unto the Lord, \p 3^, 27', 142^ ;
''riN1i5~''3 my mouth — T cried, i.e. I cried aloud, xf/ 66" (cf. 17^") ; Is 26^ ''K'D3 with
my soul, i.e. fervently, and parallel with it ''fflVSlX ; but ''B'Q3 \f/ 57^ is rather
a periphrasis for the ist pers. J. t. 1
{b) Where the subject denoting the thing follows, T]pip ''pHV cry — thy mice (i.e.
aloud), Is 10^° ; so also after an imperative, ip 17^^ C^^ID) ^^^ verse 14 (^*1^ ) ;
60'', loS' (^yO^) ; after a perfect, Hb 3" (^''DID) ; after a cohortative, tp loS^
(^"li^S'fJK). The subject denoting the thing stands between the personal
subject and the predicate in ip 44' ?J*1^ nRK.*
Rem. I. Sometimes (as in other languages) an action is ascribed to a n
subject which can only have been performed at his direction by another
1 That this form ot expression also (see g) comes to be equivalent to
a passive is seen from the analogy of such Aramaic passages as Dn 4^^,
which exclude any idea of human agency. Cf. Kautzsch, Gramm. des Bibl.
Aram., § 76. 2 e at the end, and in post.-bibl. Hebrew, e.g. Pirqe Aboth 2, 16 ;
3) 5. &c.
2 Two subjects occur in a noun-clause in if/ 83^'.
^ In Ex 6^ ''OK' is subordinated to the following passive ""riyi^J (§ 121 6) ;
in I S 2c,'^^-^^ "IT J ^T are subjects to the infinitive absolute yB'in, according
to § 113 ffff. In f 69" read HSyN^ for n33K1.
* In several of the above examples it might naturally be supposed that the
subject denoting the thing (especially when it follows the verb) is to be
explained rather as a casus instrumentalis, i. e. as an accusative, analogous to
the adverbial accusatives in § 118 q. But although it is true that tlie subject
denoting the thing often defines more closely the manner in which the action
is performed, and although in similar (but still different) examples, ^ 89^,
109^", Jb 19^^, ""S occurs with 3 instrumentaie, the explanation given above
must nevertheless be accepted.
462 The Sentence [§§ 144 o,p, 145 a-c
person ; cf. e.g. Gn 40^2 (41^^), 41^*, 43^* {and he commanded to set before them,
&c.); 4623, 2 S 129.
O 2. Supposed ellipses of a definite subject are due either to a misunder-
standing of the passage, or to a corruption of the text. Thus in i S 24^^ after
Dnril either ^T^l has dropped out (through confusion with ^ vj?) or we should
read with the LXX DHN^, In 2 S is^^* (HH ^301) the text is obviously
corrupt. "^'^
rj 3. In poetic (or prophetic) language^ there sometimes occurs (supposing
^ the text to be correct) a more or less abrupt transition from one person to
another. Thus from the 2nd to the 3rd (i. e. from an address to a state-
ment), Gn49<(?), Is 3ifl(?), 4220, 52", 61'', Mai 2^^ (where, however, for
^33^ we should ilhdoubtedly read HU^n) ; ^ 22' [and regularly after a vocative,
IS2V6, 478^ 48I, 54!-", Jer 22i«, 49<-ie, Am 56^-, Mic i^ ( = 1 K 2228), Mai 39,
2X9^!; and after ""^T Is 5*, 29^^, Jer 12^^'\. From the 3rd to the 2nd pers.,
Dt 32i5j Is i29 (but read probably Dri"nDn for Dri"|10n, which has caused the
insertion of IK'S), 5*, Jer 29'^, Jb 16'', cf. also Dt 32". From the ist to the
31-d pers., La 3^ (in a relative clause). In Jb 132* the 3rd pers. N^n^ is probably
employed Suktiicus for the ist.
§ 145. Agreement between the Members of a Sentence, especi-
ally betiveen Subject and Predicate, in respect of Gender
and liumber.
a !• As in other languages, so also in Hebrew, the predicate in general
conforms to the subject in gender and number (even when it is a
pronoun, e.g. ''n"''!3 riNT this is my covenant, Gn 17^"). There are,
however, numerous exceptions to this fundamental rule. These are
due partly to the constructio ad sensum (where attention is paid to the
meaning rather than to the grammatical form ; see h-l below), partly
to the position of the predicate (regarded as being without gender)
before the subject.
J) 2. Singular nouns which include in themselves a collective idea
(§ 123 a), or which occasionally have a collective sense (§ 123 h),
may readily, in accordance with their meaning, be construed with the
plural of the predicate, whether it precedes or follows. This is also
the case, when the collective is itself feminine but represents, exclusively
or at least generally, masculine persons.
Examples : —
C (a) Of collectives proper (cf. § 1325?): (a) with the predicate preceding,
Gn 30^8 |Nj;n |S3ri (cf, 3039, 318 and 33"); Ju i"f- n^3 representing
persons belonging to the tribe; Mi 4^ ^12 ; 2 K 25^ 7^n army; Pr ii^s Q^xp
^ In prose, Lv 2* ; but Pl^npni here is hardly the original reading. Different
from this is Gn 26'', where there is a transition to direct narration.
§ i45<?-»] Agreement between Members of a Sentence 463
the people ; Nu io» iTIj^n'^S all the congregation (cf. i K S^) ; i K i", Is 9*, 25^,
Am i^ DV; i S 17", Ezr lo^* ^■^^p assembly. Cf. also the construction of
national names, as D1K (§122 i), e.g. i K 2020 QIK ^D3*1 and the Syrians fled ;
I S 4^. — (;3) with the predicate following, i K 8^ -|i?31 jXif s^ieep and orrew,
construed with the plural in the following relative clause; Jb i"Vri ">i53n
nitJ'lh the cattle (cows) were ploughing ; 283^ and i Ch lo* ri^3=/a>ni7«/ (in
1 S 6" K'DK' n*3 on the analogy of names of countries, is used for the inhabi-
tants of Bethshemesh) ; Ho 11'', Ezr 4^ Dp ; ^ 68" n*n herd [if correct, figuratively
for people'] ; Is 26" Tlhi: dead bodies ; Is 27" Tifj? boughs ; i S 4^ ^fr?")'f ^ , preceded
by a predicate in the singular.
(b) Of substantives occasionally used as collectives : (a) with the predicate d
preceding, Gn 34^* IDT ; Ju 9'*^, 15^" B'''N ; Is 16* DOT the treaderdoim.—(fi) with
the predicate following, Jb S^^ 'T\'^ = others; Ez 288 D^inp a secret; \jp g', and
even after HI Jb 19".]
(c) Of feminines as collective terms denoting masculine persons : (a) with e
the predicate preceding, i S 17" pXn"^3 ^VT.] that all the earth may know,
i.e. all the inhabitants of the earth ,^ cf^ Dt '9*, ^ 66\ 961-9, &c. ; Am !«
rflX^ remnant; (^ 33^ pX'?"^?)-— C'^) "^^*^ *^® predicate following, Gn 416%
2 S 15", 1 K io2^ Gn 486 mJiO wswe ; i S 238 rTinnip-^l aU the increase ; Jb 30^2
nn")E3 rab&Ze. In Hag 2'' read HIDn with the LXX.
Examples of predicates in the singular, notwithstanding the collective /*
meaning of the subject, occur in Gn 35", Ex lo^*, 14'", Dt i^\ &c.— For '^
examples of bold enallage of the number in noun-clauses with a substantival
predicate, see above, § 141 c.
Rem. Not infrequently the construction begins in the singular (especially g
when the predicate precedes ; see 0 below), but is carried on, after the
collective subject has been mentioned, in the plural; e.g. Ex i^'> Dyn 31*1
IND lOVy.l and the people multiplied, and waxed very mighty ; 33*.
3. On the other hand, plurals which have a singular meaning A
(§ 124 a) are frequently construed with the singular, especially the
2)luralis excellentiae or maiestatis (§ \2^ g-i; on the union of these
plurals with attributes, cf. § 132 h), as Cn^N Gn I^•^ &c. (but see the
Eem.), D^31K master, Ex 21* D^ya master, owner, Ex 21^; cf., more-
over, D''JQ with the singular, Jb 16'^ KHh., D^»nT Pr 12'".— So feminine
forms with a masculine meaning are construed with a masculine
predicate, e.g. Ec 12® D3n DpHp iTn the preacher was wise.
Rem. The construction of CnSx God with the plural of the predicate may I
be explained (apart of course from such passages as i K 19^, 20", where the
speakers are heathen, and D^n'!)N may, therefore, be a numerical plural)
partly as an acquiescence in a polytheistic form of expression, partly from
the peculiar usage of one of the early documents of the Hexateuch, called E
by Wellhausen, &c., B by Dillmann ; cf. his commentary on Numbers —
Joshua, p. 618, and above, § I24£r, note 2. So Gn 20" (but in conversation
with a heathen); 2,1^^, 35'', cf. also Jos 24". That this construction was
afterwards studiously avoided from fear of misconception, is shown by such
passages as Neh 9^* compared with Ex 32*•^ and i Ch 17'^^ compared with
2 S 723. Cf. Strack's excursus on Gen 20" in Die Genesis, Munich, 1905, p. 77.
464 The Sentence [§145 h-m
Ic 4. Plurals of names of animals or things, and of abstracts, whether
they be masculine or feminine, are frequently construed with the
feminine singular of the verbal predicate ^ (on the collective sense of
the feminine form, cf. § 122 s); thus Jo i'° 3^i|p HIB' nions the beants
of the field long ; Jer 1 2"* (where the predicate precedes), cf. also
Jb 1 2'' ; names of things with the predicate preceding occur in 2 S 24",
Is 34", Jer 4», 51=^, ^ I8='^ 37="^, ifKHh., 103^ (unless E'^lOOn is to be
read for B'jjnnn), Jb 14", 27^; with the predicate following, Gn 49-"
{ri^=hranches); Dt 21^ i S 4'^ (n»^ V3^);]),2 2 S io«. Is 59'^ Jer 2^'
KHh., 48*', 49^S Pr 152-^, 20>8, Jb 4i'«.'
/ 5. Moreover, the plural of persons (especially in the participle) is
sometimes construed with the singular of the predicate, when instead
of the whole class of individuals, each severally is to be represented as
affected by the statement. Undoubted examples of this distributive
singular are Gn 27^ (Nu 24^) ^^"i? ^'^IJ^^'' "I"? TV^ those that curse
thee, cursed be every one of them, and those that bless thee, blessed be
every one of them; Ex 31^'*, Lv 17" and 19^ (in both places the
Samaritan has '^^^^) ; Is 3^^ unless Vb'llb is to be regarded as a pluralis
maiestatis according to § 124 A;; Pr3i«-^^(?), i8^'{?), 2i27«', 27'", 28'^
28'« KHh.
9)1 Rem. Analogous to the examples above mentioned is the somewhat fre-
quent * use of suffixes in the singular (distributively) referring to plurals ;
cf. the rer&aZ-suffixes in Dt 211", 28**, Am 6^^; and the noww-suffixes in Is 2*,
30^^, Jer 31^*, Ho 4^ (but since "| follows, itJ'S3 is undoubtedly a dittography
for tJ'DJ), Zc 14I2, ip 5I" (where, however, ID'S is clearly to be read with all
the early versions) ; 6i^ 14110 (?), Jb 38S2, Ec io^b [but LXX ^^DSH] ; finally,
the suffixes with prepositions in Is 2'" i?"Vt^y '^P^. w'^'cft they made each one
for himself (according to others, which they {the makers) made for him) ; 5^8, 8*",
Jb 24^, in each case v ; in Gn 2^' v refers to the collectives n*n and Sjiy ; cf.
further, Jos 24'', Is 5" ^3GiO after Cp^'n^ (but read probably p'^H^ with the
LXX, &c.). Conversely in Mi i" DD^ """l^y [cf. Jer 132° K^th.], but the text is
undoubtedly corrupt.
^ Cf. in Greek the construction of the neuter plural with the singular of
the predicate to. wp60aTa daivti ; in Attic Greek the plural of the predicate is
allowed only when the neuter denotes actual persons, as rd dvSpdwoSa (\a0ov.
In Arabic also the pluralis inhumanus (i.e. not denoting persons) is regularly
construed with the feminine singular of the attribute or predicate, as are all
the plurales fradi (properly collective forms).
2 On the possibility of explaining forms like \\t2ip as 3rd plural feminine,
cf. above, § 44 m ; but this explanation would not apply to all the cases under
this head, cf. Jo i^", ^ 37^^ 103^
3 In Pr 14I an abstract plural niDpH (to be read thus with 9^, &c., instead
of ntoan) is construed with the singular ; but cf. § 86 Z, § 1 24 e, end.
* In several of the above examples the text is doubtful, and hence Mayer
Lambert {REJ. xxiv. 1 10) rejects the theory of distributive singulars generally.
[QL Driver, Jeremiah, p. 362, on 16''.]
§ 145 ™-9] Agreement between Memhei's of a Sentence 465
6. Subjects in the dual are construed with the plural of the predicate, n
since verbs, adjectives, and pronouns, according to § 88 a, have no
dual forms; thus D^^y, Gn 29'' HiSl nxp ^^Vs and LeaUs eyes were
dull; 2 S 24^ Is ^o^, Jer 14^, Mi 7^ f i8=», 38" (on the other hand,
in I S 4"* the predicate is in the feminine singular after the subject,
and in Mi 4" before it ; on both constructions cf. h above) ; so also
D:5|K ears, 2 Ch 6'"; DHJ hands, Is i'^ Jb IO^ 20^» (in Ex 17'' even
with the plural masculine D'1?3 ; cf. ^>) ; ^VW W^^ ^ ^ ^"' Jb 27*;
Dp.K' breasts, Ho 9".
7. Variations from the fundamental rule (see above, a) very fre- 0
quently occur ichen the predicate precedes the subject (denoting animals
or things '). The speaker or writer begins with the most simple form
of the predicate, the uninflected 3rd singular masculine, and leaves us
without indication as to which of the following subjects (and so which
gender or number) is to define the predicate thus left temporarily-
indefinite.^ Thus inflexions are omitted in —
(a) The verb, with a following singular feminine. Is 2'^ nin22 HK'I
D"lNn and bowed down shall be the loftiness of man ; 9'^ 14", 28", 47";
I S 252? (see note i below); i K 8^'^ 22^ 2 K z'\ Jer 51'', Ec 7';
with a following plural masc, Is 13-'^ C^X ^yUA and there shall cry
wolves, &c.; Ju i^'^ KHh., 20^«, i S I^ 4", 2 S 24'^ i K if\ Jer 51^
>/^ I24^ Est 9-^ (see note i below) ; Gn i" nnNO ^n^ let there be lights;
with a following plural feminine, Dt 32^% i K 11'", Is 8^ Jer 13'^
Mi 2^ -^ 57"; before collectives and mixed subjects, e.g. Gn 12'^ 13',
30", 32^ &c.; before a following dual, Is 44*^ ^ 73'' (where, however,
with the LXX icjij? should be read).
Rem. I. The instances in which a preceding predicate appears in the^
plural masculine before a plural (or collective singular) feminine of persons
(Ju 2 1^1, I K 1 1' ''), of animals (Gn 30^9 where however JNif may refer specially
to male animals) or of things (Lv 26^^, Jer 13I6, Ho 14'', xp 16*, Jb s^S Ct 69),
or before a dual (2 S 4^, Zp 3^®, 2 Ch 15'') are to be explained not on the
analogy of the examples under 0, but from a dislike of using the 3rd plur.
fem. imperf., for this is the only form concerned in the above examples (cf.,
however, Na 3^1 \nri instead of ^^nPl) ; cf. the examples of a following predicate
in the 3rd plur. masc, instead of the fem., under f and u, and on an analogous
phenomenon in the imperative, see § no k.
2. As in the case of verbs pi-oper so also the verb HTl, when used as a 0'
copula, frequently remains uninflected before the subject ; cf. Gn 5^^-, 39^
1 Only rarely does an uninflected predicate precede a personal subject, as
I S 25" (but ni<"'fin should probably be read, as in verse 35) ; Est 9" (before
a plur. masc). Such examples as Jb 42^® are to be explained according to
§ 121 a.
* In a certain sense this is analogous to the German es kommt ein Mann, eina
Frau, &c.
COWLET H h
466 The Sentence [§ 145 r-u
Bt 2 1^ (according to the accents) : 222', Is 18^ nS3 nTf ?0a "iDbl and a ripening
jrra2?e the flower becometh.
^ (fe) The adjective in a noun-clause, e.g. ■*//• 119"' T^?^*? "'^t
upright are th^ judgements ; cf. verse 155.' — On the other hand, '15;h
iu TT^V. ]^^ '^T^ thy servants are shepherds, Gn 47*, is either an
unusual orthography or simply a misspelling for ''y.
S Kem. I. As soon as a sentence which begins with an uninflected predicate
is carried on after the mention of the subject, the gender and number of the
subsequent (co-ordinate) predicates must coincide with those of the subject,
e.g. Gn i" Vn^ . , . nnNO \n^ (see 0 above) ; Nu 96, Ez 14I; cf. also Gn 30"
(seep above).
/ 2. The dislike mentioned in p above, of using the feminine form (cf.,
further, § 144 a, with the sections of the Grammar referred to there, and
below, under u), is exemplified sometimes by the fact that of several
predicates only that which stands next to the feminine substantive is inflected
as feminine (cf. the treatment of several attributes following a feminine
substantive, § 132 d) ; thus in Is 14' HTp, and afterwards "l")iy (but I"})]} is
better taken as an infin. abs. = excifando, reading Dpn for D'pH) ; 33' 72^
V'lN nSpDN mourneth, languisheth the land. Cf. Jer 4'°, Jb i", and the examples
(§ 47 k) where only the first of several consecutive forms of the 2nd sing.
fern, imperf. has the afformative i, Is 57*, Jer 3^, Ez 22*, 23^^ C'^.li^'^ after
^JjlK'ri) ; on the converse sequence of genders in imperatives, Na 3^^, cf.
§ no k. — Of a different kind are instances like Lv 2^, 5^, 20^, where B'S3
person (fern.) as the narrative continues, assumes (in agreement with the
context) the sense of a masculine person.
21 3. The instances in which the gender or number of the following predicate
appears to differ from that of the subject are due partly to manifest errors
in the text, e.g. Gn 32' read with the Samaritan THXri instead of nnKH •
T VtT . ^ IT ?
n^ni then follows correctly ; 182'^'' read with Wellhausen PNB', according to
128^ 'instead of b^f ; i S i6< read nioxn ; Ez iS^^ instead of jsn^ read the
plural as in verse 25 ; so also Ez 20^* for ^13'',^ and in Jb 6'^" for n!33 ; in
-^ La 5^0 read "ID33, and cf. in general, § 7 rf, note; 1 Ch 2** read m?*;
in Jer 48^^ also the text is certainly corrupt. Other instances are due to
special reasons. The anomalies in Is 49", Ho 14^, Pr i^^ (after Ivil), \t 11*
(after VJ'^y), 63*, Pr 5^, io2^-32 186, 26^3, Jb 156 (all after D^nSK'), Pr 32 (after
••niX'?); ^ 10228, Jb i622 (after DiJK'), Dn 1 1« (read ni3"1"!), and perhaps Gn 20"
are also to be explained (seep) from the dislike of the 3rd plur. fem. imperf. ;
moreover, in Jer 44'^, Pr 262' the plur. masc. even of a participle occurs
instead of the plur. fem. — In Gn 31* f- n''n'' , after a plural subject, is explained
as a case of attraction to the following singular predicate.' — In Gn 4' yy^
^ This does not include such cases as Jb 2^"'-'^°, where QS"]]} is rather to be
explained as an accusative denoting a state, § 118 n.
^ K13^ probably an error for 1X3^. The Masora on Lv 11'* reckons fourteen
instances of N3'', where we should expect the plural.
' So also the pronoun K^H emphatically resuming the subject (see § 141 fi)
is attracted to the predicate in number in Jos 13" inbnj N^H , . , niH^ "'K'N
T -:i- T : ■• •
the offerings of the Lord , . . that is his inheritance ; in number and gender, Lv
3^$3 Qtre ; Jer 10'.
§ 146 a-c] Agreement between Members of a Sentence 467
is a substantival participle (a lurker, a coucher). In Gn 47^* H^H^ remains
unde6ned in gender (masc), although the noun precedes for the sake of
emphasis; so also in Gn 28^^^ Ex 12*^, 28"'-^'^, Nu 9^*, 15^9, Jer 50**. Ec 2''
('I5 r[''r\ as if the sentence began afresh, and servants bom in my house . . . there
fell to my lot this possession also). In Jb 20^^ PIQp'Nb may (unless B'N is
regarded as masculine, § 122 0) be taken impersonally, j7r«, without its being
blown upon. — In Is 16* and Hb 3^'' the predicate in the singular is explained
from the collective character of n'lDIB' (see h above) ; on the other hand, the
masculine form of the predicate is abnormal in \p 87', Pr 2^", 12^*, 29^",
Jb 8^, 3618.
§ 146. Construction of Compound Subjects.
1. When the subject is composed of a nomen regens (in the construct ^
state) with a following genitive, the predicate sometimes agrees in
gender and number not with the nomen regens, but with the genitive,
when this repiesents the principal idea of the compound subject.'
Thus 182'' CWn Onaa nt'p the bow of the mighty men is hrolcen, as if
it were the mighty men with their how are broken; Ex 26'-, Lv 13',
1 K I*' (but the text is clearly very corrupt), 17'*, Is 2", 2V, Zc 8'",
Jb 15^", 2i^\ 29'", 32' (p^'it nn equivalent to many years) ; 38-' ; with
the predicate preceding, 2 S IO^ unless it is to be explained according
to § 145 k.
Rem. I. The cases in which pip {voice, sound) with a following genitive 0
stands at the beginning of a sentence, apparently in this construction, are
really of a different kind. The pip is there to be taken as an exclamation,
and the supposed predicate as in apposition to the genitive, e.g. Gn 41" the
voice of thy brother's blood, which crieth (prop, as one crying) . . . ! = hark! thy brothers
blood is cryitig, &c. ; Is 13^, 66^. In Is 52^ an independent verbal-clause follows
the exclamation the voice of thy watchmen '. ; in Jer 10^2 and Ct 2^ an independent
noun-clause ; in Is 40' Xl'p ?ip the voice of one that crieth .' i.e. hark ! there is one
crying is followed immediately by direct speech ; in Mi 6' ^ip hark ! may be
used disconnectedly (cf. the almost adverbial use of i>ip in § 144 m) and nin""
be taken as the subject to Kip"*.
2. When the substantive 73 ("73) entirety is used in connexion with a C
genitive as subject of the sentence, the predicate usually agrees in gender
and number with the genitive, since ?3 is equivalent in sense to an attribute
{whole, all) of the genitive; hence, e.g. with the predicate preceding, Gn 5"
D"1X ''^'''P'2 Vn*1 and all the days of Adam were, &c. (in 5^3, 92' \n<ii ; but the
Samaritan reads Vn>1 here also); Ex 152°; with the predicate following,
tf/ 150*, &c. Exceptions are, e.g. Lv 171* (but cf § 145 I), Jos 8^^ Is 6^^", Pr 16^,
Na 3'. On the other hand, in such cases as Ex i2^« the agreement of the
1 Sometimes, however, the attraction of the predicate to the genitive may
be merely due to juxtaposition.
H h 3
468 l^he Sentence [§ 146^-/1
predicate with "?3 is explained from the stress laid •upon the latter, HDNTO'Sa
.( '' T T : T
K? being equivalent to the whole of wvrk (is forbidden).
cl 2. When the subject of the sentence consists of several nouns
connected by wdw copulative, usually
(a) The predicate following is put in the plural, e. g. Gn 8^^^ seed
time and harvest, and cold and heat . . . shall not cease (^T\3l^\ N?);
after subjects of diflPereiit genders it is in the masculine (as the prior
gender, cf. § 132 d), e. g. Gn 18" D"'3i?.| nnbn Dn"J2S; Abraham and Sarah
were old; Dt 2 8^^ i K i^*.
e Rem. Bare exceptions are Pr 27^ 3?"nsb''' ri'lOpl |CB' ointment and perfume
rejoice the heart, where the predicate agrees in gender with the masculine
JDB' (as in Is 51^ with |VB''B') ; on the other hand, in Ex 21* (where HB'Nn
n^l?''1 are the subjects) it agrees with riE'Xn as being the principal person ;
in the compound sentence, Is 9*, it agrees with the feminine subject immedi-
ately preceding.^
J (b) The predicate preceding two or more subjects may likewise be
used in the plural (Gn 40^, Jb 3^ &c.) ; not infrequently, however,
it agrees in gender and number with the first, as being the subject
nearest to it. Thus the predicate is put in the singular masculine
before several masculines singular in Gn 9^, 11"®, 21^^^, 24^", 34^°,
Ju 14^; before a masculine and a feminine singular, e.g. Gn 3^, 24''*
then said C^S^'l) her brother and her mother ; 33"; before a masculine
singular and a plural, e. g. Gn 7'^ VJ^^ Hi K3;1 and Noah went in, and
his sons, &c.; Gn 8'* (where feminines plural also follow) ; 44", Ex 15',
285^'; before collectives feminine and masculine, 2 S 1 2^
g Similarly, the feminine singular occurs before several feminines
singular, e.g. Gn 31'* nxpl 7nn |yril then answered Rachel and Leah ;
before a feminine singular and a feminine plural, e.g. Gn 24"'' ; before
a feminine singular and a masculine singular, Nu 12' QJ")1? "131^1
P^Hj??"! then spake Miriam and Aaron ; Ju 5' ; before a feminine
singular and a masculine plural, e.g. Gn 33'' (cf., on the other hand,
^75* n^Q^^'bDI J^"1X D^3to3 dissolved are the earth and' all the inhabitants
thereof). The plural feminine occurs before a plural feminine and
a plural masculine in Am 8". — In Jer 44"* for D^'K^J^ DriS read DPIK
D''K'3n with the LXX, and cf. verse 19.
Jl (c) When other predicates follow after the subjects have been
mentioned, they are necessarily put in the plural ; cf. Gn 21^^, 24",
31", 33^ &C-, and § 145 s.
^ Similarly with a mixed object, Gn 33' he put . . . Leah and her children
Q''?'^D^ "/'^'' > D^?^D^ agrees with the masculine immediately preceding.
§ 147 fl, ?»] Incomplete Sentences 469
§ 147. Incomplete Sentences.
1. Sentences are called incortijplete, in which either the subject or a
the piedicate or both must in some way be supplied from the context.^
Besides the instances enumerated in § ii6 « (omission of the personal
pronoun when subject of a participial clause) and the periphrases for
negative attributes § 152 u, this description includes certain (noun-)
clauses introduced by nan (see h below), and also a number of exclama-
tions of the most varied kinds (see c below).
Rem. Incomplete sentences are very common in Chronicles, but are
mostly due to the bad condition of the text ; cf. Driver, Introd.^, p. 537,
no. 27. Thus in 2 Ch 11" 6 restore 3^n, with the LXX, before n'lboni? ; in
3521 add ""riNfl, with the LXX, after Q\*r\ and read JTJQ for n"'3 ; in 2 Ch 19*
and 28^^^ the pronoun Nin is wanted as subject, and in 30^ the predicate
Vn"* ; cf. also the unusual expressions in i Ch 9^ (Ezr 3'), i Ch 15" {ye were
not'present?), 2 Ch I6», i6".i2(bi.)^ igs.
2. The demonstrative particle IH, •^1!'? en, ecce may be used either O
absolutely (as a kind of interjection, cf. § 105 &) before complete noun-
or verbal-clauses, e.g. Gn 28'^ ^'^V 'p^i* n3W and, behold/ I am with
thee; 37'', 48"*, Ex 3", 34'", or may take the pronoun, which would
be the natural subject of a noun-clause, in the form of a suffix, see
§ 100 0. Whether these suffixes are to be regarded as in the accusative
has been shown to be doubtful in § 100^. However, in the case of
^P,\i the analogy of the corresponding Arabic demonstrative particle
'inna (followed by an accusative of the noun) is significant.^ If HSn
with a suffix and a following adjective or participle (see the examples
in § xi6 2> and q) forms a noun-clause, the subject proper, to which
nan with the suffix refers, must, strictly speaking, be supplied again
before the predicate.^ Sometimes, however, the pronoun referring to
the subject is wanting, and the simple Hlin takes the place of the
. ^ This does not apply to such cases as Gn 33*, where an infinitive with
p appears alone in answer to a question, the substance of the question being
presupposed as a main clause ; cf. also Gn 26'', where H'^ri must again be
supplied after ^JIB'K.
2 On the same analogy any substantive following HSn would have to be
regarded as originally a virtual accusative. Since, however, Hebrew does
not possess case-terminations (as the Arabic does, and uses the accusative
necessarily after Unna), it is very doubtful whether, and how far, substantives
following n3n were felt to be accusatives.
3 That these are real noun-clauses and that the participle (e.g. JlO in
niO ^jn Gn 20') cannot be taken as a second accusative (as it were ecce
te monturum), is also shown by the analogy of Arabic, where after 'inna with
an accusative the predicate is expressly in the nominative.
470 The Sentence [§ 147 c, d
subject and copula (as Gn 18^ ''Q^? '"•?.'? behold she is in ^/te tent] 42'^*),
or there is no indication whatever of the predicate, so that the
sentence is limited to nsn with the suffix, as in the frequent use of
"^?.'?, ''^J} here am I, in answer to an address. Elsewhere a substantive
follows nan (or ]>} Gn 11^ Jb 31^), and yy^l<) then includes the meaning
of a demonstrative pronoun and the copula, e.g. Gn 22^ ^^'^ •"'?.'!'
^'^fJ^pl here is the fire and the wood, &c.; 12'' behold thou liast thy
wife! Ex 24*; with reference to the past, e.g. Am 7^ 'Jl K'ip? T\ijy\
and la, it was the latter growth, &c. By a very pregnant construction
the simple ^PJ} is used as the equivalent of a sentence in Jb 9'', lo,
here am I !
C 3. Examples of exclamations (threatening, complaining, triumphing,
especially warlike or seditious) in which, owing to the excitement of
the speaker, some indispensable member of the sentence is suppressed,
are — (a) with suppression of the predicate (which has frequently to be
supplied in the form of a jussive), e.g. Ju 7^ a sword for tlie Lord and
for Gideon! (verse 18 without 3^.11); 2 820^ and 2 Ch 10'® (cf. also
1 K 2 2^*) every man to his tents, 0 Israel / (i. e. let every man go to or
remain in his tent); without B''N i K 12"; moreover, Is i^*, is* (on
the exclamatory pip equivalent to harJc! cf. § 1466); 28'", 29'^
(D333n 0 your perversity ! i. e. how great it is !) ; Jer 49^^ (if ^riifpcri
be equivalent to terror be upon tlieef); Jo 4", Mai 1'^ (nx?^p nij]
< <
behold what a weariness!); Jb2 2'^^; perhaps also Gn 49'' D^S? tna
a bubbling over as water (sc. happened), unless it is better to supply
a subject nriX (^thou wast). — (6) With suppression of the subject, Ju 4^^°,
cf. § 152 k; Jb 15^ n'i? where sc. is bread? — (c) With suppression of
both subject and predicate, Ju 7'^ (see above); i K 12" (see above);
2 K gi" iriN D3 him also ! explained immediately afterwards by ^nsn
smite him / Ho 5** after thee, Benjamin ! sc. is the enemy (differently
in Ju 5") ; ^ 6\ 9o'^ Hb 2« ^nD~iy ; yp. 74^ no-ny.—On N^l and if not
(unless v1 is to be read), 2813^®, 2 K 5''^, see § 159 dd.
d Rem. I. To the class of incomplete sentences naturally belong exclamations
introduced by interjections nnX^ ""IN, 'in^ DH ;^ cf. § 105. After the first
two the object of the threat or imprecation follows regularly with ? (cf. vae tibi)
or ~bs or ~^y^ e.g. w '''i^ woe unto us ! 1 S 4', Is 6' ; of. also Di*p nnX alas for
the day ! Jo i^ ' ; on the other hand, the object of commiseration (after ^IH) fol-
lows mostly in the vocative, or rather in the accusative of exclamation (cf. roe te
in Plautus) ; so in lamentation for the dead, "TIN MH alas, my brother .' i K 13^',
* We do not consider here the cases in which these interjections (e.g. DH
Ju 3^', Ara 6 0) stand quite disconnectedly (so always riK and nNH).
§§ 147c, 148 fl-rf, 149 o] Incomplete Sentences 471
Jer 22"; NCh ^ia *in a;i, smfid nation ! Is i*, 58.11.i8.20.22 ^^k! they that . . .)
For on cf. Hb 2^0, Zp i^, Zc 2".
2. Finally, instances of noun-clauses shortened in an unusual manner 6
may perhaps occur in Dn''T' and Dn\^21 ip 115'', for DHP D^H'' ^/tet/ have hands,
&c. ; cf. verses 5 and 6 DHpTIQ &c. Perhaps also it^Jp^D^ Gn 22**, and
ivHI Ec 5^8 are to be regarded in the same way, but hardly D3X^33 Nu 12^;
cf. § 128 d above.
II. Special Kinds of Sentences.
§ 148. Exclamations.
The originally interrogative HO is used to introduce exclamations a
of wonder or indignation = 0/iow/ or ridicule, w/ty / how/ sometimes
strengthened by 'It or HNT according to § 136 c. — Astonishment or
indignation at something which has happened is introduced by 'H''??
how (likewise originally interrogative) with the perfect ; the indignant
refusal of a demand by "i]^^ (but also by HD Jb 31') with the imperfect;
an exclamation of lamentation by '"'^''N, less frequently 'ij*?? how/; in
Joi'^by no.
Examples : —
no (or "nip with a following Dages, see § 37) expressing admiration (or O
astonishm'ent) before verbal-clauses, e.g. Gn 27^0 (nj'nip) ; 382^, Nu 24^ Qwio
goodly are ...!); \p 21"^, Ct 7^; before the predicate of noun-clauses, e.g.
Gn 28^'', ^ 8^ ; mockingly before the verb, 2 S 6'**' {how glorious was . ..!)',
Jer 2223, Jb 262f- ; indignantly, Gn 3" nxmo ; 4^", 20^ 3i2« what hast thou,
done !
1]^X with the perfect, e.g. Gn 26^, \p 73^' ; in scornful exclamation, Is 14^-'^;
in a lament (usually HD^N), 2 S i^s-^t. ^ith the imperfect, in a reproachful
question, Gn 39^, 448, \p iii, 137*; in a mocking imitation of lament, Mi 2*.
riD^N with the perfect. Is i"^, La 1^ ; with the imperfect, La 2^, 4^.
Rem. I. The close relation between a question and an exclamation appears C
also in the interrogative personal pronoun ''O in such cases as Mi 7^* Tji^^s bX'^D
who is a God like unto (hee? and so in general in rhetorical questions as the
expression of a forcible denial ; similarly in the use of an interrogative
sentence to express a wish, see §§ 150 d, 151 a.
2. A weaker form of exclamation is sometimes produced by the insertion (I
of a corroborative '3 verily, surely, before the predicate, Gn 18*" ; cf. 33^',
Is 7', and the analogous cases in the apodoses of conditional sentences,
§ 159 ««•
§ 149. Sentences u-hich exprets an Oath or Asseveration.
The particle D^*, in the sen?e of certainly not, and N?"DX (rarely '3 O,
Gn 22") in the sense of certainly, are used to introduce promises or
threats confirmed by an oath (especially after such formulae as '^i'"'^,~*0|
472 The Sentence [§ 149 b-e
^fsr*n,i "-JX ^n, -riVaV; '3, &c., as well as after imprecations, see
below), and also simple asseverations, e.g. 182^°, 2820^", Jb 27^
after y ^^7^ far he it from me, but mostly without any introductory
formula.
O Rem. No certain explanation of these particles has yet been given.
According to the usual view, phrases expressing an oath depend on the
suppression of an imprecation upon oneself, e.g. the Lord do so unto me, if I do
it equivalent to I certainly will not do it ; then naturally Nb~DN properly if
I do it not equivalent to / certainly ivill do it. It is indeed difiBcult to under-
stand such self-imprecations, put into the mouth of God, as in Dt i^*'-,
Is 142*, 22", Jer 22^, Ez 3®, 35^, if/ 95". Possibly, however, the consciousness
of the real meaning of the formula was lost at an early period, and S?~DX
simply came to express verily, DN verily not. — In i S 25^^^, where, instead of
a self-imprecation, a curse is pronounced upon others, read '^)'^p with the
Lxxfornn "Tid.
• T •■ : I :
Examples : —
C (a) The particles DX and Np"DX used after the utterance of an oath and
after formulae of swearing, e.g. 2 S 11" (see note on a) fJCJ'DJ '•ni miT~''n
run "13"in~nSI nb'JJX~DX as the Lord liveth, and as thy soul liveth, I will not do this
thing //s 14^^ 2 K 5I6 (after nin^ in ; in i S 1439 and 296 ^■'-'•n is followed by
a simple ''3); Ct 2'', 3^ (after '•riySE^'n I adjure you); cf. also Gn 14^', 21-',
26"; spoken by God, Dt 1^*^; i's'3", ^ 95"; similarly N^'DN Gn 24^7 f- ;
spoken by God, Is i^"^*, whore sb'DN occurs first with the perfect in tlie
sense of a prophetic perfect, § 106 w, but in the parallel clause with the
imperfect; Jer228; in Gn si^'^ the negative oath introduced by iJX"DN,
nnX*DN is immediately afterwards continued by N? with the imperfect. —
In Ez 34^0 the threat introduced in verse 8 by ^<p"D^i is, after a long
parenthesis, resumed with '33n.
^ {h) DN and n!?-DK after formulae of cursing, e.g. i S 3" ^^"Hb'yi HS
'J1 "I3"J '3Q0 nriDn-DK ^''pS'' rO) D^nSx God do so to thee, and more also ! thou
Shalt not hide anything from me, &c. ; cf. i S 2'^'^'^. On the other hand, ""Z) follows
the curse, in i S 14^^, i K 2" (here with a perfect), and in 2 S 3^^ Dt< ''3 ; in
1 S 25^^ the preceding '•3 is repeated before DN ; in i S 20^^ tlie purport of
the asseveration is repeated (after the insertion of a conditional sentence) in
the perfect consecutive.
Q (c) DX and Nb"DX as simple particles of asseveration, e.g. Ju 5* [30
^y\ npil riXT'"DS trvly, there ivas not a shield and spear seen, &c. ; Is 22^*, Jb 6''*
(in the middle of the sentence) ; after nS^i^n hS^^H absil, 2 S 2020 : N^'DK
with the impcrf. Is 5', with the perfect, Jb 22'"'.
' Also combined ^K'SJ T\) nirT^'^n i S 20^, 25'* as the Lord liveth, and as thy
sold {i.e. thou) liveth! (Also in 2 S 11^* read riini"''n instead of the impossible
<
!]*n). On ^n and ^H in these noun-clauses (prop, living is the Lord, &c.), cf.
§ 93 art, note.
§ I50 fl-c] Interrogatioe Sentences 473
§ 150. Interrogative Sentences.
H. G. Mitchell, ' The omission of the interrogative particle,' in Old Test,
and Sem. Studies in memory of W. R. Harper, Chicago, 1907, i, 113 if.
1. A question need not necessarily be introduced by a special a
interrogative pronoun or adverb. Frequently ' the natural emphasis
upon the words is of itself sufficient to indicate an interrogative
sentence as such ; cf. Gn 27^* IK'y ''33 nt nns thou art my son Esau ?
(but cf. note i below) Gn i8'^ Ex 33^* p ^33); i S ii^^ rf;)^^ ^!|xc>
^3\bV Saul shall reign over us? i S 22^ 2 S i6'^ 18^ "^ylS Di^B' is it
well with the young man ? (but cf. note i) ; i S 16*, i K i^^, Is 28'*,
Ho 4'^, Zc 8^ {should it also be marvellous in mine eyes ?) ; Pr 5'®. So
especially, when the interrogative clause is connected with a preceding
sentence by ), e.g. Jn 4" D^nN N7 Vi<t and I should not have pity ?
Ex 8^^^ unll they not stone us? Ju 1 1^^ 14'^ i S 20', 24^, 25", 2 S 1 1'^
is"". Is 37", 44>«^ Jer 25^8, 45^ 49^=, Ez 20^ Jb2'", lo^ or when (as
in some of the examples just given) it is negative (with N? for ^^7^
nonne ?), 2 K 5^^ (but cf. note i), La 3^^ ^
Rem. The statement formerly made here that the interrogative particle is O
omitted especially before gutturals, cannot be maintained in view of
Mitchell's statistics (op. cit. p. 123 f.). The supposed considerations of
euphony are quite disproved by the 118 cases in which H or H occurs before
a guttural.
2. As a rule, however, the simple question is introduced by lie C
interrogative l\ {k} ; as to its form, cf. § 100 k-n), ne ? num ? the
disjunctive question by H {num ? utrum ?) in the first clause, and DN ^
(also DN1, less frequently i^<) an ? in the second, e.g. i K 22" • • • ^.??.r]
^ Mitchell (op. cit.) restricts the number of instances to 39, of which he
attributes 12 (or 17) to corruption of the text. Thus in Gn 27^^ he would
read, with the Samaritan, nnxn as in verse 21, in i S 16* DPtJ'n, in 2 S iS^*
Di?K'n as in verse 32 ; similarly he would read the interrogative particle in
2 K 526, Ez ii3, Jb 4o2', 41I ; I S 30^, 2 K 9", Ez 11", 178.
' But in I S 27^" instead of ~7X (which according to the usual explanation
would expect a negative answer) read either "D/K OP'/'V) with the LXX,
or better, JK (HJN) whither? with the Targum. In 2 S 23' read N^n ^DH
with Wellhausen,
^ Quite exceptional is the use of the particle pS num? (common in
Aramaic) in i S 21' ri3"tt'"' pXI num est hie? The text isj however, undoubtedly
corrupt ; according to Wellhausen, Text der Biicher Sam., the LXX express the
reading E^'H nN") ; but cf. the full discussion of the passage by KOnig, ZAW.
xviii. 239 ff. — The above does not apply to interrogative sentences introduced
by interrogative pronouns (§ 37) or by the interrogatives compounded with
no what? such as HO? how many? ri)3P ivhy? (see § 102 A:), ynD why? (§ 996),
or by n*^ where? l]^Xj na^N how? (§ 148), &c. On the transformation of
474 '^^^^ Sentence [§ 150 d, e
by}'}. ^ ON shall we go ... or shall we forbear 1 Cf. also |^? where ?
whither ? n3N whither, and J. Baith, Sprachwiss, Untersuchungen,
\. 13 ff.
CL The particular uses are as follows : —
(a) The particle n stands primarily before the simple question, when the
questioner is wholly Uncertain as to the answer to be expected, and may be
used either before noun-clauses, e. g. Gn 43'' PIN 03? ^^T\ '•n 03''?^ liVn
is your father yet alive 1 have ye another brother ? for B'^H cf. Gn 24'^, 189^^;
for >2r[ is it that? Jb 6^2 ; for "B''' "pn is there yet? 2 S 9I (but in 2 S 23I9 for
••pn read SlT) with i Ch ii^s); for pSH is there not? i K 22^, &c. ; or before
verbal -clauses, e.g. Jb 2' hast thou considered (^3^ HOi^n) my servant Job?
In other cases H ( = num?) is used before questions, to which, from their tone
and contents, a negative answer is expected, e.g. Jb 14^* if a man die, nWri
shall he indeed live again ? Sometimes a question is so used only as a rhetorical
form instead of a negative assertion, or of a surprised or indignant refusal, ^
e.g. 2 S 7^ n^3 '?"n33n nnxn shalt thou build me an house? (in the parallel
passage i Ch 17* ^i) nnX X^ thou shalt not, &c.) ; Gn 4* ''p"5x ''m ICb'n am I my
brother's keeper? cf. 2 K 5'', and the two passages where H is used before the
infinitive {constr. Jb 34^', absol. Jb 40^; on both, see § 113 cf, with the note).
—On the other hand, in 1 K 16" for i?[?3n (after ^H^l) read bi^Sn.
e Rem. I. A few passages deserve special mention, in which the use of the
interrogative is altogether different from our idiom, since it serves merely to
express the conviction that the contents of the statement are well known
to the hearer, and are unconditionally admitted by him. Thus, Gn 3^1 surely
thou hast eaten ; Gn 27*^ Nip "'pn prop, is it so that one names? &c,, i. e. of a truth
he is rightly named Jacob; Gn 29^^ verily thou art my brother; Dt 11^", Ju 4^,
1 S 2'^'' 2 did indeed, &c. ; 20^'', i K 22^ ye know surely . , . ; Mi 3^, Jb 20*. —
In I S 23^^ (cf. \(/ 54^) a surprising communication is introduced in this way
(by Npn) in order to show it to be absolutely true, and in Am 9'' a concession
is expressed by NvH I have, it is true, &c. Finally, we may include the
formula of quotation n^inp K\"1 NPH Jos 10" or D'>p^n|l Dn~N?n equivalent
to surely it is, they are written (the latter in i K 11", 14''^, and very often
elsewhere in the books of Kings and Chronicles), synonymous with the
simple formula of assertion nz.inp T\IJ\ 2 S i^*, and D^pinp DSH i K 14'^,
2 K 15", 2 Ch 27^ 32". ' ^ '
Of very frequent occurrence also are questions introduced by XXa}, which
really contain an affirmation and are used to state the reason for a request or
Warning, e.g. 2 S 2^*^ turn thee aside . . . wherefore should I smite thee to the ground ?
i.e. otherwise I will (or must) smite, &c. ; cf. i S 19^^, and Driver on the passage ;
2 Ch 25I6 ; also Gn 2;« Ex 3212 (Jo 2^\ i^ 7910, 115*) ; Ct i'', Ec j,«, 7", Dn i"*.
pronouns and adverbs into interrogative words by means of a prefixed *X, see
the Lexicon.
' On the use of the imperfect in deliberative questions, see § 107 t; on the
perfectum confidentiae in interrogative sentences, see § 106 n.
* Analogous to this is the use of the interrogative HD in the sense of a
reproachful i-emonstrance instead of a prohibition, as Ct 8* ^"\*yri"niO why
should ye stir up ? i.e. pray, stir not up ; cf. also Jb 31' ; see above, § 148.
§ I5O/-0 Interrogative Sentences 475
2. The rare cases in which a simple question is introduced by DN (as some- J
times in Latin by an? is it?) are really due to the suppression of the first
member of a double question; thus i K i^'', Is 29^^, Jb 6", 39''.
(6) Disjunctive questions are, as a rule, introduced by DX — H {utrum — an?) ^
or sometimes by DN1 ^ — H, e. g. Jo i^, Jb 21* (even with H repeated after DNI
in a question which implies disbelief, Gn 17^^). In Jb 34^^, 4o8'- special
emphasis is given to the first member by P|i<n prop, is it even? The second
member is introduced by ^N or in 2 K 62'', Jb 16', 38^*, 31'^ (Mai 1* H iS), in
each case before D, and hence no doubt for euphonic reasons, to avoid the
combination 'O CN; cf. also Ju iSi', Ec 2".
Double questions with (DN1) DK — H need not always be mutually exclusive ; /i
frequently the disjunctive form serves (especially in poetic parallelism ; but
cf. also e.g. Gn 37*) merely to repeat the same question in different words,
and thus to express it more emphatically. So Jb 4" shaU mortal man be just
before God? or (DN) shall a man be pure before his Maker? Jb 6^'-, 8^, lo*'-, ii*-'',
22^, Is lo^^, Jer 5^^ The second member may, therefore, just as well be
connected by a simple 1 , e. g. Jb 13'', 15'' '■, 38'^ f.22.32.s9 . (.f_ also i// 8^ after HD j
Jb 2i"'- after nJ33; or even without a conjunction, Jb 8^*, 22*; after
no f 144S.
(c) With regard to indirect questions' after verbs of inquiring, doubting, I
examining,* &c., simple questions of this kind take either n whether, Gn 8*,*
or DN Gn 15^, 2 K i', Ct 7" ; even before a noun-clause, Jer 5* ; in i S 201°
the indirect question is introduced by IS, i.e. probably if perchance. In
disjunctives {whether — or) DX— H Nu 13^* at the end (or i<7~DX— n Gn 24", 27^1^
3;32j Ex i6<), and r\—r\ Nu 13J8, which is followed by DX— n"; also "iX— H
Ec 2^'. The formula DX J?l^^ '•D has an affirmative force, who knows whether . . .
not, like the Latin neecio an, Est 4^*.
In Jon i'* the relative pronouns B' and "\5^*X owing to the following k
^jpp have become also interrogative, for whose cause ?
{d) nt and X^H (cf. § 136 c) immediately after the interrogative serve to /
give vividness to the question ; so also XiSX (for which IDX five times in Job)
then, now, Gn 27" Xin X'iDX""'D who then is he ? Ju 9**, Is 19", Jb 17" ; ^BX n»X
^ DX1 occurs in Pr 27** after a negative statement; we should, however,
with Dyserinck read pX*!. Not less irregular is xbn instead of Xp DX in the
second clause of Ju 14^', but the text can hardly be correct (cf. Moore, Jwlges,
New York, 1895, p. 337) ; in i S 23^^ the second H introduces a fresh question
which is only loosely connected with the first.— In Nu 17^^ and in the third
clause of Jb 6^', DXn is best taken with Ewald in the sense of xbn> since
DX from its use in oaths (see above, § 149 b) may simply mean verily not.
2 It should here be remarked that the distinction between direct and
indirect questions cannot have been recognized by the Hebrew mind to the
same extent as it is in Latin or English. In Hebrew there is no difference
between the two kinds of sentence, either as regards mood (as in Latin) or
in tense and position of the words (as in English). Cf. also § 137 c.
3 In Gn 438 the H after l^Hn? is explained from the fact that the latter,
according to the context, implies to give information upon a question.
* Also in Ec 3*^ we should read VO'J^ and JTin^n {whtther — whether) instead
of the article which is assumed by the Masora.
47^ The Sentence [§§ 150 m, 71,151 a
icAere then is . ..? However, fc<iDN may also be placed at the end of the entire
question (Ex 33^®, Is 22*; also Ho 13^0^ since either ipiX is a dialectical form
of n>X, or n>{«! should be read instead of it) or at the beginning of the question
proper, after a strongly emphasized word, as in Gn 27'^. ^
jfl (e) Sometimes one interrogative governs two co-ordinate clauses, the first
of which should rather be subordinated to the second, so that the interro-
gative word strictly speaking affects only the second ; thus Is 5* after JJ^^D
wherefore looked I . . . and it brought forth? i.e. wherefore brought it forth, while
I looked, &c. ; Is 50^ ; after n Nu 328, Jer 8<, also Nu i6»2 (read K'^NH) ; after
N^n Jos 2220 ; after Hsb' Is 5^', 2 Ch 32* ; after "^p-^K Is 4025. 2 3^^ H Jb 4^
and Kpn 4^^ are separated from the verb to which they belong by the insertion
of a conditional clause.
71 3. The affirmative answer is generally expressed, as ia Latin, by
repeating the emphatic word in the question (or with the second
person changed to the first, Gn 24^*, 2"]^*, 29*, Ju 13"), Gu 29^ 37^^ S
I S 23", 26^', I K 21^", Jer sfl (On tJ'.'n if it be so in the corrected
text of 2 K io'\ see § 159 dd.) As a negative answer the simple i^^
is sometimes sufficient, as in Gn 19'^, i K 3*^, &c.; cf. § 152c; and in
Ju 4^ the simple i^ffj equivalent to no or no one.
§ 151. Desiderative Serdences.
a A wish may be expressed not only by the simple imperfect (§107 n),
cohortative (§ io8, especially with N3 § 108 c), jussive (§ 109; with
^^ § 109 b), imperative (§ 1 10 a), perfect consecutive (§112 aa) or by
a simple noun-clause (§ 116 r, note, and § 141 g) but also in the
following ways : —
1. By exclamations in the form of interrogative clauses : ' especially
sentences with "t? followed by the imperfect as being the mood of that
which is still unfulfilled but possible, and hence also of that which is
desired, e.g. 2 S 15'' t^DE' '3Cb'^~''p who maketh me judge ? i.e. 0 that
I were made judge/ i S 20'*', 2 S 23'\ On the other hand, ^t? with
the perfect (Gn 21', Nu 23'", i S 26', Is 53', &c.) or participle {if/ 59^
Pr 24^, &c.), rather expresses a rhetorical question, i.e. a denial, cf.
§ 150 c?. Especially frequent is the use of ]J!}T''P (prop, who gives ?) to
introduce all kinds of desiderative clauses (see under b). — In Mai i '" the
desiderative clause proper is co-ordinated with an interrogative clause,
^ On the other hand, in Jb 9^^* and 24'^' ^DS is not prefixed to the ^D, but
appended to the conditional sentence.
2 Cf. the analogous sentences after ]^2 because, Is 65*^, Jer 35"; after causal
^pa I S 26^' ; after >3 Is 12' ; likewise after D2 § 153 at the end ; after "JB
Dt 8'12-H, 253, Jos 6»8, 2 S 1228.
' The transition from a question to a wish may be seen, e.g. in Nu 11^ who
shall give usjlesh to eat? i.e. 0 that we had flesh to eat!
§ fsi b-e'] Desiderative Sentences 477
D^npT "^ilD^I D32l"D5 '''? would that one were among you and would shut
the doors, i. e. 0 that one would shut the doors !
Rem. Sometimes the original sense of ffl^"''^ is still plainly discernible, I)
e. g. Ju q''^ ''T'3 n^H DUriTlX jn**"^© who gives this people into my hand ? equiva-
lent to, O that this people were given into ray hand ! cf. ip 55''. In these
examples, however, irT^'^D is still equivalent to 0 had I ! and in numerous
other instances the idea of giving has entirely disappeared, |ri^"''0 having
become stereotyped as a mere desiderative particle (utinam). Its construction
is either —
(a) With the accusative (in accordance with its original meaning) of a sub-
stantive, Dt 28^'^ would that it were even ! . . . morning ! Ju g^^, tp 14'' (53'0> 56^ ;
with an accusative and a following infinitive, Jb 11^; with two accusatives,
Nu II**, Jer 8^3; with the accusative of an infinitive, Ex 16^, 2 S 19^ fJ^^"'0
^^rinn *3X ^niro icould that I had died/or thee (for ''3X cf. § 135/) ; of a participle,
Jb 31^5 ; of a personal pronoun (as a suflRx), Jb 29" (with a following 3 ; but
Opri''~^D Is 27* and Jer 9^ with a following accusative is not simply equivalent
to ^p f'!!!^"''^ but is properly who endows me with, &c. ; cf. § ii"] ff). — With
a still greater weakening of the original meaning |ri^~"'0 is used with an
adjective in Jb 14* could a clean thing hut come out of an unclean', i.e. how can
a clean thing corns, &c. ; similarly in Jb 31'^ who can find one that hath not been
satisfied I
(6) With a following perfect, Jb 23^ (cf. § 120 e) ; with a perfect consecutive, C
Dt 5^^^ 0 that they had such an heart '. ■,
(c) With a following imperfect, Jb 6^, 13^, 14" ; in Jb 19'^ the imperfect is d
twice added with Wdw (cf. a above, on Mai. i'").
On the cohortative in the apodosis to such desiderative clauses, cf. § 108/.
2. The wish may also be expressed by the particles DX (t/^ 81^, 95'^, e
139'^ Pr 24", X Ch 4^" ; always with a following imperfect) and ^ (for
which in 1/^ 119^ we have vns, 2X5^ vnj*, from nx ah! and V=v;
both with a following imperfect) si, 0 si ! utinam} v is followed by
the imperfect, Gn 17''', Jb6^; by the jussive, Gn 30^^ (rather con-
cessive, equivalent to let it he so) ; by the perfect, as the expression of
a wish that something might have happened in past time (cf. § 106 p\
Nu 14^ ^^np V would that we had died', 20^ and Jos 7'' (both times
vl); on the other hand. Is 48^** and 63" (both times ^<v) to express
a wish that something expected in the future may already have
happened. — On ^^ with the imperative (by an anacoluthon) Gn 23''
cf. § no e. On the perfect after DX *? Gn 40", 2 K 5™, cf. § 106 w,
note 2.
^ Cf. a similar transition from a conditional to a desiderative particle, in
consequence of the suppression of the apodosis, in the English, 0 if I had !
and the like ; e.g. Nu 22^* if there were (~B'|' v) a sword in my hand now had
J surely killed thee t
478 The Sentence [§ 152 «, 6
§ 152. Negative Sentences.
a 1. Besides the use of rhetorical questions (§§ 150^, 151 a), inde-
pendent sentences are made negative by the adverbs ^ (Jb 6^', where
instead of the KHh. i? we must evidently read ^<? ; perhaps preserved
as a substantive) = the Greek ov, not, ~)>^ = fj,,y (Jb 24^* as a sub-
stantive), I'N {it is) not ; D^.^ not yet, DSN not, ''PSS (cf. § 90 m) not.
The forms ?^, v?, ''^P? not belong almost entirely to poetry. — With
regard to i^^ and V^ the main distinction is that verbal-clauses (rarely
noun-clauses, see e) are regularly negatived by *^/ (besides its use as
negativing single words '), while T*? is used exclusively with noun-
clauses (see the examples below).
b The conjunctions "}3 and ^^p^p that not, serve to negative dependent
clauses. The particular uses of these particles are as follows : —
(a) N? (less frequently N v), like ov, ovk, is used regularly for the objective,
unconditional negation, and hence is usually connected with the perfect or
imperfect (as indicative) ; on K? with the imperfect to express an uncon-
ditional prohibition, see § 1070; on its use with the jussive, see § 109 d. — On
sip for N^n nonne, in interrogative sentences, cf. § 150 a. In connexion with
7*3 "?3 { = any), N? is used to express an absolute negation, nullus, none whatever
(cf. the French ne . . . personne, ne . . . rien), usually in the order 73 ♦ . » N?,
e. g. Gn 3^ |ari }*y bbjp ??3Nn iO ye shall not eat of any tree of the garden ; 9^^,
Ex 10I6, 20I0, Lv 723, Dt 89J Jer 13'', 32" ("IIV^S . . . N^ nothing at all; ci. the
same statement in the form of a rhetorical question, Jer 32^'') ; Pr la^i, 30^"
* Especially in compounds, e. g. /N'NP lit. a no-God (Germ. Ungott) who is
indeed called a god, but is not really a god, Dt 32^1 ; npx H? verse 17, cf.
Jer 57, 2 Ch 139; D^-sb Ht. a not-people (Germ. Unvolk), Dt 3221 ; n^T N^
a nothing, Am 6" ; yV N^ lit. not-wood. Is 10'" ; l^^K'N^, D*1N"xb lit. not-man,
superhuman (of God), Is 31*; p'l^xb unrighteousness, Jer 22^', cf. Ez 22^^';
Cnnp-N^ disorder, Jb lo^^; DOH-K^ not-violence, 16"; after b Jb 262'- (nb-xi',
T'y"N? helplessness, nOSn ii? insipientia) ; cf. also Is 55- nv^b*? Kv3/<"" v^hat is
unsatisfying; )// 44'^, Jb S^i, 15'^^ i Ch 12^^. — In Nu 20^ a construct state with
several genitives is negatived by N7. — Also N? is used with an infinitive,
Nu 35^ ; with an adjective, D3n N? unwise, Dt 32^, Ho 13^^ ; l^Dn~N7 impius,
^ 43^ Ty"N^ and D1VV"N^ not strong, Pr 3o25f-; |3-{<^ unsuitably, '2 K ?»;
DiD~X? not-good, Is 65^^, Ez 20^^, &c. ; "lint3 X? not-clean, 2 Ch 30''' ; with a parti-
ciple, e.g. Jer 2^ {unsown) ; 6^, Ez 4^*, 22", Zp 2^, 3^ ; the Masora, however,
requires nDHJ in Is 54", naW in 62I2 n3ir*l3 in Jer68, nofn in Ho i« i.e.
always 3rd sing. fem. perf. in pause = s^e was not comforted, &c., and conse-
quently not compounds, but either relative clauses or (Is 54", Ho 1®, and
especially 2^^^) main clauses instead of proper names. — On the abc /e com-
pounds generally, cf. the dissertation mentioned in § 81 d, note 2 ; on their
use in sentences expressing a state, to convey attributive ideas, see u below.
§ 152 c-g] Negative Sentences 479
pb~''3QJp . . , Np and turneth not away /or any; 2 Ch 32^"; but cf. also the
inverted order, Ex 1 2^^ ilb'y\7NP HDNpO v3 no manner of work shall he done ;
12*', 152', 22'^, Lv 16", Jb 33", Dn 11". The meaning is different when >3
by being determinate is used in the sense of whole, e. g. Nu 23I3 HN^ri N? ^?3
thou shall not see them all, but only a part.
Analogous to 73 , , , N? is the use of Np , . , K'^N Gn 23*, &c., in verbal-
clauses in the sense of no one at all, not a single one. On T'3"|''NI nothing at all,
see under p.
Rem. I. The examples in which iO is used absolutely as a negative answer, C
equivalent to certainly not! no! must be regarded as extremely short verbal-
clauses, e.g. Gn 19* (Xp according to the context for ">1DJ N/ &c.) ; 23^^, 42'",
Hag 2^2, Jb 23', sometimes with a following ""S but, Gn 19^ (see above) ;
Jos 5", I K 322.
2. The negation of woMW-clauses by N^ (as opposed to the regular negation (t
by px) always includes a certain emphasis, since the force of the negation
falls rather upon a particular word (cf. e.g. Ez 36^^)^ than upon the whole
clause. In 2 S 3^* Dil^DN'^b 'J'"'!"' thy hands were not bound, a participle is
thus specially negatived by X? ; cf. if/ 74', where, however, N/ is separated
from the participle by Ijnx, and Jb 12^. As a rule, noun-clauses with
a pronominal subject are thus negatived by X7, Gn 20^2^ jq-y ^^23 ^d^ ^42^ j^4^ .
I S 1529, 2 S 2i2, Jer422, /, 22^ Jb 28", parallel with px ; generally with K^
before a substantival predicate, e.g. Ex 4'° ''3iK Q^I^'H K^'X iO I am not a man
of words; Am 5^'. — Noun-clauses with a substantival subject, Gn 29'', Nu 23",
Is 22^, 44", Hag i2, i/- 223, Jb c,32^ jgi'^ 2i9, 22^6, 3626 (with ^ of the apodosis) ;
412 ; in Jb 9*' even C^"' N/ non est is used instead of px. — In Pr 18^ XP is used
before an adjectival predicate ; in i S 202" (where a preceding noun-clause is
negatived by '•riSa) read ")nb X^ with the LXX, for linO X^. On X^ for px
in circumstantial clauses to express attributive ideas, see u below.
3. As a rule Xp stands immediately before the verb, but sometimes is C
separated from it (frequently to bring into special prominence another word
which follows it) ; thus Jb 22'', Ec 10^" before the object and verb ; Nu 162^'
before the subject and verb ; Dt 8', 2 S 3^*, \jj 49^8, 103^°, Jb 13^^, 3423 before
a complementary adjunct. In Dt 32^ X^ according to the accentuation even
stands at the end of the clause {they offend him not) ; but undoubtedly "1^33 Xp
are to be taken together.— On the position of XP with the infinitive absolute,
see § 11 iv.
(&) "PX is used like uri and ne to express a subjective Sindi conditional negation, f
and hence especially in connexion with the jussive (§ 109 cand e) to introduce
prohibitions, warnings, negative desires, and requests. On "?X with the
imperfect, see § 107 p ; with the cohortative, see § 108 c ; on 2 K fy",
see § 109 ft.
Rem. I. "bx (like X7, see note on a above) may be used to form a compound fi^
word, as in Pr 122* niO"7X not-death (immortality); though all the early
versions read niO'PX . The instances in which ^X appears to stand absolutely,
equivalent to no, certainly not (like ^77 for //^ yivrjTcu), e. g. Ru i" ^033 /X nay,
my daughters, and Gn 19'*, 33'*' (X3"bx), are also due (see under c) to extreme
shortening of a full clause (in 2 S 1325 such a clause is repeated immediately
480 The Sentence [§ 152 h-n
afterwards) ; thus in 2 S i^i, Is 62^, \p 83^ ">n^ is evidently to be supplied, and
in Jo 2^', Am 5^*, Pr 8^" the corresponding jussive from the preceding
imperatives, in Pr 17^^ from the preceding infinitive absolute.
Ji 2. ~?X, like Xp, regularly stands immediately before the verb, but in Is 64^,
Jer 10**, 15^^, \p 6^, sS'' before another strongly emphasized member of the
sentence.^
i C'^) r^ construct state (unless it be sometimes merely a contracted con-
nective form, cf. CJJK' for D^JB' § 97 d) of pS non-existence (as also the absolute
state, see below) is the negative of K''' existence ; cf. e.g. Gn 312^ with Neh 5^
, <
As {y* {he, she, it is, was, &c.) includes the idea of being in all tenses, so |^S, pN
includes the idea of not being in all tenses. Hence —
y^ (i) The absolute state J^S, with an evident transition to the meaning of
a verbal predicate, there does not exist, always follows the word negatived, e.g.
Is 37^ (2 K 19') n*l?P PX nbl and strength does not exist to bring forth ; Qn 2^
])^ was not present ; Ex 17'' PX"DX or is he not? after K'''n is he . . .2 (cf.
Nu if") ; Lv 26", Nu 20^, Ju 420 (pSI no). In i S 9* and iqI* p^ is used in
reference to a plural ; i K 18^", Is 41", 45^1, 59", Mi f, Pr 13*, 25", Jb 3^
pXI and let there be none, let none come ! Ec 3''. — Of. finally pS'DX if it be not so,
6n 3o\ Ex 32^^, Ju 9^^, 2 K 2^^. — Quite anomalous is px Jb 35^^ before a
perfect as an emphatic negation ; the text, however, can hardly be correct.
I (2) The construct state px stands in its natural position immediately before
the substantive whose non-existence it predicates, or before the subject of
the sentence which is to be negatived. To the former class belong also the
very numerous instances in which pX is joined to a participle, e. g. i S 26'^
K^i?^ P^"! V"^'' r^^ '^^'^ r^) ^'"^ ^^'^^^ ^'"^ "°' °^^ seeing, &c., i.e. and no man
saw it, nor knew it, neither did any awake ; so especially pxi with a participle
in subordinate circumstantial or descriptive clauses, such as Is 5^^ ^^JfJD pxi tDvD'l
and fie shall carry it away, while there is none delivering, i.e. without any one's
delivering it ; \p 7', &c. ; Lv 26® &c., 1^"!nD PXI tvithout any one's making you
afraid ; cf. § 141 e. pX is used as the negation of an entire noun-clause, e.g.
in Gn 39^3, Nu 14" DD3"lp2 ilin"" pX the Lord is not among you ; Gn 37" PlD^-pX
"1133 Joseph %vas not in the pit.
til (3) When the subject which is to be negatived is a personal pronoun, it is
joined as a suffix to pX, according to § 100 0, e.g. ''ilp"'X I am not, was not, shall
not be ; ^3''X, fern. T]3''X, thou art not, &c. ; ^3))^X, fem. n33'X he, she is not, &c. ;
also absolutely, Gn 42'' he is (5^* he was) no longer alive ; D3"'X they are not, &c.
When the accompanying predicate is a verb, it follows again (see I) in the
form of a participle, since pX always introduces a noun-clause, e.g. Ex 5^"
}nb ""arX I wHl not give ; 8", Dt i^a.
71 Rem. In Neh 4" ""JX pX for *1)5'X is due to its being co-ordinate with three
other (substantival) subjects; these are again expressly summed up in
^3n3X~pX . — In Hag 2^'' DpJlX pX the pronominal complement of pX appears
1 In Jer 51^ the pointing ~?X occurs twice instead of ~7X, and is thus, in
the opinion of the Masoretes, equivalent to against him that bendeth; but
undoubtedly we should read ~7X.
§ 152 0-Q Negative Sentences 481
to follow -with the sign of the accusative ; ^ but most probably we should read
with the LXX DSnC' for DDHS,
(4) The fact that pN (like ])H) always includes the idea of a verb (is not, 0
was not, &c.) led finally to such a predominance of the verbal element, that
the original character of pt4 as a construct state (but cf. i above) was
forgotten, and accordingly it is very frequently separated from its noun
(substantive or participle) ; especially so by the insertion of shorter words
(of the nature of enclitics), e.g. \2 Is i«, Sb Lv iiio-i^, rib Gn ii^o, D3 ^ 14^
DB' Ju iSio, Ex 1230; ^ut cf. also \t s^", 6^, 32% and pX used absolutely in
Ex 22^^, I K 8^, Ru 4*. — Hence, finally, even the transposition of pSI and its
noun became possible, e. g. Gn 40* and 41^^ ^flK pN inb^ and an interpreter
there is not of it ; Gn 4713, Ju 146, 1 S 2i2, Is i^o, Jer 30", Hb 2", Pr 517 (pXI
= neve sint ; cf. k above, on Jb 3^); 30". — In Gn 19^^, Ex 5'^ pX is placed
between the subject and predicate.
Rem. I. Like 7b , , , N? or X7 , , , 73 (see b above) so also ?b PXJ9
expresses an absolute negation, e. g. Ec 1' {^lITpS pX there is no new thing, &c. ;
2 S 12^, Dn \* (cf. also riD^XO pX there is nothing, i K iS^^, Ec 5"); as also
pX ... -^3 Hb 2" ; cf. pX HDIXD Ju 146.
2. Undoubtedly akin to pX in origin is the negative syllable ""X occurring (1
in the two compounds ^^3^ ""X (as a proper name, 184^^; Baer li33~*X) and
'pi'^X not innocent, Jb 22^° ; but the proper name IDrTiX is doubtful, and the
fern. ?3rX very doubtful. In Ethiopic this ""X is the most common form of
negation, prefixed even to verbs.
{d) Dlb not yet, when referring to past time is used, as a rule (§ 107 c), f
with the imperfect, Gn 2^ D^.D ... 73 none . . . yet ; see 6 and p above ;
Gn 19*, 24*5, Jos 2', I S 3' ; with the imperfect in the sense of a present,
Ex 10'' Vin Dnpn knowest thou not yet? Ex g^" ; but cf. Gn 24^5, and W)b2
with the perfect in f 90^ (but see § 107 c), Pr 8^.
(e) DDX (prop, a substantive, cessation) no longer, including the verbal idea S
of existing, cf. Dt 32^®, Is 45*-^*, 46* ; used absolutely. Am 6^° in the question
B^'X niy DDXn is there none left ? &c., 2 S 9^ ; frequently also in the sense of
non nisi ; with ''__ paragogic (§ 90 m) ^DSX Is 47'-^°, Zp 2^^ liy IDDXI ""JX
/ am, and there is none else.
(/) 73,2 in poetic and prophetic style, and with a certain emphasis, = X7, t
is used with the imperfect, e. g. Is 26^*, a'^"-'^^ (immediately afterwards with
a perfect) ; Ho 7*, ip 49^^, Pr lo^" (but Is 14^^! before the jussive, =~7X) ;
before an adjective, Pr 24^^' ; before a preposition, ip 16^, Pr 23''.
(g) v3 with a perfect, Gn 31^^", Is 14*; with an imperfect, Jb 41'*; to
negative a participle, Ho 7*, tf/ 19*; to negative an adjective, 2 S i".
(h) ^ri73 to negative an adjective, i S 20^^; on ""Jjlbll Ez 13', see x ; on
^ According to De Lagarde, Novae psalte^ii graeci editionis specimen, p. 26,
nriVIB'^ ip 3^ is also an accusative after px.
' Evidently from 1*173 to waste away, from which stem also vS and n?3
(whence ^flpS § 90 m), originally substantives, are formed.
COWLEY I 1
w
482 77ie Sentence [§ 152 «
"•rip^b as the regular negative with the infinitive construct, see § 114 s ;
on "ripzip as a conjunction, see x below.
On DN as a negative particle in oaths {verily not), see § 149 c above.
U Rem. on N? pN, v3. To the category of negative sentences belongs also
the expression of negative attributes by means of N? y2 not (both so used
almost exclusively in poetic language) or pN with a following substantive,
mostly in the simplest form of circumstantial clause; e. g. 2 S 23* X? "Ip3
n^3y a morning when there are not clouds, i. e. a cloudless morning ; cf. Jb 1 2^*,
262*, 3826 (K>>X-X^ where no man is, i.e. uninhabited); 1 Ch 2^^-^^ D''33 N^
childless; so also vSl e.g. Jb 24'" and pN e.g. tp 88^ I am as a man 7''N~pX
there is not help, i.e. like a helpless man; Is 9* pp"PN endless; 47I, Ho 7^1 ;
"lSDD"pX countless, Ct 6', &c., but usually (v^ 104^^, &c.) like a proper circum-
stantial clause (cf. § 141 e) connected by Waw, "lSDD"PN1. — Less frequently
such periphrases take the form of relative clauses (cf. § 155 e), e.g. Jb 30^^
to? "iVy N? they for whom there is no helper, i. e. the helpless (but probably iVy
is only an intrusion from 29^*, and we should read *12fV without any one's
restraining them ; in 29^^ translate the fatherless and him that had none to help him ;
in \p 72I2 'ypxi is used in the same sense) ; Hb i^*; with pSI Is 45^ thy work
is that of a man who hath no hands ; Zc 9^1 out of the waterless pit^-
V How far such compounds finally came to be regarded by the language
simply as negative adjectives, may be seen partly from the fact that they (as
also relative clauses analogous to the above) are frequently co-ordinated with
real adjectives, Jo i^, ip 72^2, Jb 29^2 ; cf. also Is 59^°, where D^3''}^"pX3 is
parallel with DHIp? ; partly from their being introduced by the sign of the
dative p, e.g. Is 40^2^ (= and to the powerless) ; Jb 2(y^"-^, Neh 8'°.
W (i) ~fS lest, that not, at the beginning of a clause expressing a fear or
precaution, hence especially after such ideas as fearing, Gn 32^^^, &c. (cf.
S(iSa> iiT], vereor ne), taking heed, frequently after "IDB'n ^"^DtPn Gn 24^, 31^*, &c.,
taking care, 2 K lo^', &c. Not infrequently the idea on which ~|S depends,
is only virtually contained in the main clause, e. g. Gn 19'^ I cannot escape to
the mountain (because I am afraid), DSTin ^3p3iri"|3 lest some evil overtake me ;
Gn 26', 38" ; also in Gn 44'* from the rhetorical question how shall I . . .?
we must understand I cannot, governing J3. This is especially the case after
an appeal to do or not to do an action by which something may be pre-
vented (in which case ~jQ is simply equivalent to the final ne) ; cf. e.g.
Gn II*, 19'^, Nu 20^* (where ~|Q lest is separated from the verb by a strongly
emphasized substantive); Ju 15^^ after swear unto me; Pr 24'*. — In Gn 3^^
and now, lest he put forth his hand, &c., ~[S is to be regarded as virtually
dependent on a cohortative, which immediately afterwards (verso 23) is
changed into an historic tense; cf. also Gn 26'', 31'^, 42* Ex 13^^, i S 13'^
27", i// 38", in every case after ^Jjl'IDK *3 "110X ^3, kc. = I thought, &c., I mus^
beware lest, &c.
Rem. According to § 107 q, ~JS is naturally followed by the imperfect ;
for the exceptions, 2 S 20*, 2 K 2", see § 107 q, note 3 ; cf. moreover, 2 K 10^
* In Pr 9^' (perhaps also 14'' ; but see Delitzsch on the passage) a verbal-
clause is used co-ordinately in this way as a periphrasis for an adjective.
§§ 152 x-z, 153] Negative Sentences 483
(k) ""ri^^p that . . . not, with the imperfect, Ex ao^", 2 S 14''* (in Jer 23'^ ^
read the infinitive 3!|B' for ^B', in 278 WT for is£). In Ez 133 ^ixT •'ri^3
is a relative clause governed by p'= according to things which they have not seen.
2. Two negatives in the same sentence do not neutralize each other y
(as in nonnulli, non nemo), but make the negation the more emphatic
(like ovK ovS€L<;, ovk ovSafxw<;, nulli — non, nemo non) ; e. g. Zp 2^ (if the
text is correct) Ki3J~X/ D"^p3 before (here shall (not) come} This
especially applies to the compounds formed by the union of PX or v?
with "|» tvithout (§119 y), e.g. Is 5' (6") n??'!^ PKO (for which in
Jer 2'* 3K''' v?'?)» prop, tvithout no inhabitant, i. e. so that no inhabitant
is left there. On the other hand, in Is 50^ D^P ^^?Pthe "P is causative,
because there is no water; as also in Ex 14'^ T^ ^r'^^H is it because
there were no . . . ? 2 K I^■^•>^ In Ec 3" i^^ "^f^. ^^^'0 excejit that {yet
so that man cannot, &c.).
3. The negative sometimes extends its influence from the first to Z
a second negative sentence parallel with it (which may or may not
have Wdw) ; e. g. i S 2' talk not so much arrogancy ; let (not) boasting
com^ out of your mouth ; Ex 28"^ Lv 19'-, 22^-'"'-, Nu 16", 23", Dt 7^,
Is 23\^28^ 38'«, 47", Ez 16^', >|.9'«, 13*, 35^9, 38s 44", 75', Jb 28^^ (so
NP nisp why . . . not ? in Jb 3" also affects the parallel clause),
§ 153. Restrictive and Intensive Clauses.
The particles ^fc?, pi only, serve to introduce restrictive clauses, and
D?, ^^ also, besides, even, intensive clauses. It is to be observed that
the force of these particles does not necessarily affect the word which
immediately follows (as is the case with 'H^ Gn 7^^ 34*^; PI Gn6'',
Am 3^ ; even '^^ P1i\ hath he indeed only ? Nu 12- ; D3 Gn 27^, Jb 7";
^^ Dt 15^''), but very frequently extends to the whole of the following
sentence. Thus with !!«, e.g. Nu 14', i K i'j'\ Pr 17", Jb 13^ 14^,
i67, 23«; PI Gn 20", 24«, */.32«, Pr 13'*'; D? Gn 27^, 32^' (nsn 03), 44IO;
1S227, 28«', Zc9", Ft if, 20"; «1« JbI4^ I5^— In Mali'" and
Jb 2'" D3 is placed before two co-ordinate sentences, although, strictly
speaking, it applies only to the second. Cf. the analogous examples
in § 150 m.
* In 1 K 10" t]p3"pX goes with what precedes and must be emended,
with the LXX and Lucian, to 5)0311 ^3.
I i 2
484 The Sentence [§ 154 a
§ 154. Sentences connected by Wdw.
(I Wdw cojnilativum * ()) serves to connect two or more sentences, or
single words (on its various vocalization, cf. § 104 d-g). Its use,
however, is by no means restricted merely to joining sentences which
^ For further particulars of the use of waiv copulativum, see Gesenius'
Thesaurus, i. 393 ff. On its use in tlie co-ordination of similar tenses and
moods (e.g. five imperfects consecutive in Gn 25^*, live perfects with D31) as
well as of dissimilar tenses and moods, the remarks made in the treatment
pf the tenses will suffice. With regard to the connexion of single nouns by "5
(which strictly speaking is always really a contraction of so many clauses
into a single sentence) the following observations may be made : —
(a) Contrary to English usage, which in lengthy enumerations uses the and
to connect only the last member of the series, in Hebrew polysyndeton is
customary, as in Gn la^^ waw copulativum six times, 24^^ seven times, ijisff-
nine times, and in Jos 72* ten times. Sometimes, however, only the last two
words are joined (so in a series of three members, Gn 5^2^ jqI^ nze^ j^z^ 1^1^
30^", &c. ; the last three out of a series of four, Jer 2^*) ; less frequently only
the first two, \p 45^ ; cf. § 132 d. The formula DiB'pB' pitDJI yesterday (and) the
day before yesterday, Ex 5*, &c., is alwaj's without the copula. On the other
hand, the cnnstructio asyndetos in a series of verbs is used as a rhetorical
expedient to produce a hurried and so an impassioned description ; e.g.
Ju 5^7 at her feet he bowed, he fell, he lay ; Ex 15^, Dt 32^^, i S 15*, Jer 4'', Am 5^',
^ loio, 14I, 455, Jb 20", 28^ 298, Ct 2", 56, &c.
(6) Frequently wdw copulativum is also explanatory (like isque, et — quidem, and
the German und zwar, English to wit), and is then called waw explicativum, e.g.
Gn 4* and (i.e. namely) of the fat thereof {un\ess. it is simply copulative) ; Ex 24^2^
2512 (to wit two) ; 27I'', 28^3, Ju 173 (in riDDlpI; here as often elsewhere, to
introduce an explanatory gloss, cf. Is 17*, Ez 3^^, and especially P. Haupt,
SBOT. Isaiah, p. 90, 1. 21 ff.), i S t?^* and that too with the bear; 2 S 1320, Is 57",
Jer 1710, Am 3", 4I0, Ze 9^, Pr 3I2, Neh 8", 2 Ch 2310 (but in i S 28' the !| before
iT'yB is to be omitted with the LXX); cf. also such combinations as *iyi — JO
from . . . and even to ... , Gn 13^, 14'^^, ig*-^^, &c. — In i S 6" (see Driver on the
passage), 2 S i^^, &c., 1 is equivalent to yea, and; in Is 32'' even.
1 is used to express emphasis {^and especially), e.g. in Gn 3^^ ^P.^iT! '» Is 2^,
ip 18^, perhaps also in Jb 10" «/««? « whole host; 2 Ch 16". — An undoubted
example of what is called wdw concomitantiae occurs in Jb 41^^^ a seething pot
jtoJXI with burning rushes; cf. Ex 10^" {with your little ones), 12^, Lv i^^^ Is 42^.
In Arabic this wdw concom. is followed by the accusative.
1 — ) is used in the sense of both — and in ip 76'', Dn 1', 8^'. On ) — "j as mean-
ing sive — sive, cf. §-162 b.
(c) See the Lexicon on adverbs used in a copulative sense, such as D3 aJso,
moreover, summing up a number, e.g. D^Sk^'DS both together, Gn 27^^, Pr 17*^;
?'3~D2 all together; as an intensive and, e.g. Gn 30*, 37'', i S 30^ ; cf. also such
examples as i S 24^^ see, yea see! D3— D3 or 03"! — D3 Gn 34'^* = both — and; 03
occurs three times in Gn 24*^ und 32^''; also 5){<t , which is generally still more
intensive, in the sense of also, in addition to this, even, and belongs rather to
poetry, and to the later language ; frequently also equivalent to a mere and,
but sometimes adversative but now, \p 44'", &c. ; and f)X — fjK (also three times),
equivalent to both — and ; cf. D3 ^\X\ and even, Lv 26^* ; *3~^X prop, add to this
also that, equivalent to not to mention, according to the context either quanta
magis or quanta minus.
§§ i54b, i55«. ^] Sentences connected by Waw 485
are actually co-ordinate. Frequently the language employs merely
the simple connexion by Wdw, even to introduce an antithesis (Gn i7^\
19'^, Lv 2'-, Jb 6"^ and very frequently in circumstantial noun-clauses),
or when one of the two clauses is not co-ordinated, but subordinated
to the other. On the use of 1 to introduce circumstantial clauses, cf.
especially § 141 e and § 142 d; inti'oducing causal clauses, § 158 a;
comparative clauses, § 161 a; final clauses, § 165 a; consecutive
clauses, § 166 a. On vjdw apodosis, cf. § 143 c?, and the sections there
cited ; on the use of Wdio in numerical sayings, cf. § 134 5.
Rem. Sometimes waw copulativum joins a sentence apparently to what U
immediately precedes, but in reality to a sentence which is suppressed and
which must, therefore, be supplied from the context. So especially \ with
imperatives to express inferences, e.g. i K 2^2 ''pNtJ'^ ask note rather] Ez 18''
for I have no pleastire in the death of him that dieth . . ., ^yp:^) wherefore turn your-
selves. Also at the beginning of a speech in loose connexion with an act
or speech of another person, e.g. Ex 220, 2 S 18", 24', 2 K 4"", 7", 2 Ch 25" ;
cf. also Jos f (1^1), ^ 2^°, 4*, Is 8^. Sometimes the suppression of the protasis
is due to passionate excitement or haste, which does not allow time for full
expression; this is especially illustrated by Nu 12^^, 20' (^71), i S lo^^, 15",
22", 28i«, 2 S i8J2, 243, I K 222 (n^b*1), 2 K !«>, 7" (cf. verse 2) ; Is 3", Zc 21",
\// 28 (at the same time a circumstantial clause whereas I=and yet I have, &c.) ;
cf. also a new clause beginning with the formula of wishing ^D^ Nu 11",
Ju 929 ; on the disconnected use of Npl and B^M cf. § 159 dd.
§ 155. Relative Clauses.
SeeV. Baumann, Eebrdische Relathsdtse, Leipzig, 1894 (cf. the heading of
§ 138 above) ; G. Bergstrasser, ' Das hebr. Pnifix B',' ZATIV. 1909, p. 40 ff.i
1. By § 138 a, e, relative clauses are divided into two classes : those CL
which are used for the nearer definition of a noun (substantive or
pronoun), and those which are not dependent on a noun. The former
may be called incomplete, the latter complete relative clauses.
Complete relative clauses, as a rule (see the exceptions under n), h
are introduced by the originally demonstrative pronoun "^'^^ ; " see
further in § 1386. Similarly, incomplete relative clauses may also
be introduced by "^K'^, or by some other demonstrative pronoun; see
further in § 138 a and g-k. Very frequently, however, especially
1 In this exhaustive article the author shows that between K' (on the pro-
nunciation see § 36) and IK'S there is syntactically no primary difference,
but only a secondary distinction which arose in the course of the development
of the language, namely that "IB^X is preferred in combinations which are
customary in the old literary language, and E' in those which are derived
from the popular language or from Aramaic.
I
486 The Sentence [§ 155 c-f
in poetic style, the attributive relation is expressed by simple
co-ordination.'
C The governing substantive or pronoun is fi-equently (in certain cases
always) resumed by a pronominal suffix or an adverb. The resumption
may, however, be omitted, just as in relative clauses introduced by
IK'X, &c.; see § 138/
(J In Arabic a distinction is made between relative clauses used for the
nearer definition of a determinate substantive (sila), and those which are
attached to an indeterminate substantive {si/a). The former must be introduced
by the demonstrative pronoun alladi, the latter are always simply co-ordinated.
The same distinction was no doubt originally observed in Hebrew, since
simply co-ordinated relative clauses are most commonly found after indeter-
minate substantives (see the examples below), and in cases like Dt 28*^
(S'X}b V'O^rrvh IK't^ ""ia a nation whose tongue thou sJmU not understand; cf. Is66'3,
and especially i S 3^^), the addition of ^B'^5 is explained from the special
stress laid on the indeterminate substantive,^ a nation of such a kind, thou
understandest not their tongue. On the other hand, in poetic style at least,
"ICyX is somewhat frequently omitted even after a determinate noun, but
only rarely in prose (except by the Chronicler ; cf. i Ch 9^2, 1 2'^^, 29' (read
prob. T^N for inS), 2 Ch 15" ; after -?3 i Ch 29', 2 Ch iS^s, 30", 31",
Ezr i"", but also Gn 39* ; for further instances, see Driver, Introd.^, p. 537,
no. 30); so Ex i82o, Ju 8\ 2oi5, i K 13I2 (= which way), so 2 K 38, 2 Ch iS^^ ;
Neh 13^^ ; after a pronominal subject, i S 6^ In Jer 52'^ foj. '^py rg^d ID]]
■with the LXX.
€ 2. If the nearer definition of a substantive or pronoun is effected by
simple co-ordination of the relative clause, it may take the form —
(a) Of a noun-clause, e.g. 2 S 20^' a man of the hill country of
Ephraira 1^3^ W'^ whose name was Sheba ; Zc 6'^ Jb i', 3'* with princes
Qv)< '^^\ that had gold; V'li*, Pr2 2"; when referring to a noun-
suffix, e. g. \p 49" i^? ''DS D3"]l ni this is the way of them who have
{seU-)confidence. — On periphrases of this kind to express negative
attributes, as in Jb 38^^ E'''X~Ni' Yl^'PV^on a land where no ma7i is,
see § 152 w, and cf. for this very short form of the relative clause,
Gn 15'^ Dn^ iO p.K| in a land that belongs not to them; Dt 32''
(rl'Sx iih D'>nE'^); Hb I^ Pr 26'' {fi-i6).
f (6) Of a verbal clause.
Here we must distinguish the cases in which the retrospective
pronoun —
(i) Is the subject of the relative clause, and is contained in the
1 The old view that all these cases arise from the omission of IJJ'X is incorrect.
These coordinated attributive clauses are rather a mere subdivision of the
various kinds of circumstantial clauses (see § 156) which may be attached to
a nomen regens. Cf. in English this is the letter (which) he wrote to me.
2 So Baumann, op. cit., p. 14 f., following BOttcher, Lehrbuch, ii. 80.
§i555'-t] Relative Clauses 487
verb ; so after a determinate substantive, V' 34* hapj)y is the man
i3~nDn^ that trusteth in him ; Jb 3^'' ipN HTpn the night which said ;
after "bs \j/ 71'*; referring to a vocative, wbich is determinate in
itself even without the article, Is 54^ or to a noun-suffix (see under e),
yj/^ 16*; after an indeterminate substantive, e.g. Jb 31'^ it is a Jire
(that) devoureth unto Abaddon; Dt 32^^^ i S 6', Is 55'^ 56-, i/^ 68^\ 78^
Pr 30'', La i'°, 2 Ch 28^; referring to the suffix in ^J3n Is 28'", prop.
behold me, who have laid, &c., but perhaps the participle Tp> is to be
read ; 29", 38* (but probably again the participle '^^V should be read
instead of the imperfect); Ez 2 5^ The relative clause is used in this
way especially to supply the place of an adjective, e. g. Gn 49^ 3??T
^^P^ a wo// that ravineth, i.e. u ravining wolf; Is 51'^; to express a
negative quality, e. g. Is 40^", Ho 4" r?J"^^^ DV an undiscerning 2)eoj)le.
Rem. Very frequently such relative sentences are attached to substantives §
which have the particle of comparison 3, e.g. Jb 7^ 72if~5)KK'^ "1?^? "* '^ servant
that earnestly desireth the shadow, &c. ; Dt 32*', Is 62^, Jer 23^'^, Ho 6^, ^ 42^, 83^^,
Jb 9^^, ii^^; so also after iD3 ^58"; after a determinate substantive, e.g.
Is 53'' (but the better reading is nb*!) without the article), 6i'0'-, Hb 2",
^ 49^5'^^, 125^ ; see also the examples under h. Sometimes it seems simpler
in such cases, to take the verb directly as predicate to the preceding
substantive, and to explain 3 (for 1J^X3 ; see Comparative Clauses, § 161 6) as
a conjunction— a view which even Hupfeld was ready to accept, at least as
regards ^ 90^, 125^, Is 53'', 61", but it can hardly be right.
(2) The cases in which the retrospective pronoun represents an It
accusative of the object, or would do so if not suppressed, as it usually
is in such cases in relative clauses with "'^^i cf. § 138 6. Examples
with the retrospective pronoun are, Dt 32'' ^^V}) iO D''n?N gods whom
tliey knew not (see also the end of the verse) ; after a substantive with 3
(see above, g), Jer 23', Jb 13^^ Without a retrospective pronoun,
after a determinate substantive, Ju 8\ \p 33'^ (preceded by a relative
clause with "^K'X) ; Jb 28'. Other examples of this kind, though the
article is omitted according to poetic usage, are Is 15^ ("^VV '^1^.> ^oi"
which Jer 48^® wy T\'\T\\ with the substantive in the construct state
governing the relative clause, see § 130 c?), ■<\r 7", 51^°, La i*'. — With-
out the retrospective pronoun, after an indeterminate substantive, e.g.
Is 6^ n3]E)n byo n\l? n^ni^J'On nsx") a live coal which he had taken with
the tongs from off the altar; Ex 15'', Is 42'® (48'^, i/f 25'^ all after
TDp^; but xp 32» TiJ)n ^nnna); is 64"; Ec 10* (in 6^ the same clause
with Tf «) ; moreover, in Jer i ^'^ read vnth the LXX ^VT N^J n.N-^K
into a land (that) they know not.
(3) The cases in which the retrospective pronoun is dependent on i
a preposition, or its place is taken by the adverb DK', as in Jer 2® end.
488 The Sentence [§ 155 it-n
Thus after a determinate substantive, i/^ i8^ i^'nons """l^if my rock in
which I take refuge; Ex i8^", Is 42'; in Jb 3^" also, the omission of
the article with Di'' is only a poetic licence. After an indeterminate
substantive, Jer 2*, last clause but one ; i/' 32^.
h In this case also the retrospective word is not infrequently sup-
pressed, giving rise to extremely short, bold expressions, such as
Is 51' look unto the rock Q^35fn (whence) ye were hewn, and to the hole
of the pit Df^"!i5;3 (whence) ye were digged; Jb 21^ the devices (where-
with) ye act violently against me. — A retrospective adverb is suppressed
in Jb 38'^ where is the way (to the place where) the light dwelleth ?
of. 38^
/ Rem. I. The omission of the retrospective word occurs most frequently in
relative clauses which are governed by the construct state of a preceding
substantive (especially an expression of time) and hence are virtually in the
genitive. In addition to the instances already given in § 130 d, cf. the
following : after DV3 Lv j^^ ^ 56^" ; after D'i'D Jer 36^^ ; after simple DV f 56*
(K"1"'N nV on the day when I am afraid) ; after HJJ^ 2 Ch 29^7 (n^iyn bm nj/2
at the time when the burnt offering began) ; 20^2, 24^1, Jb 6^'; after n^p Dt 52^^;
after n)/~iy Mi 5^ ; after D^ID ip 4* thou hast put gladness in my heart more than
(their gladness) at the time (when) their corn and their wine are increased.
in 2. The agreement (§ 138 d) of the retrospective pronoun with a pronominal
regens in the ist or 2nd person also takes place in a simple co-ordinated
relative clause in i S 26'* who art thou (that) criest? Cf., however, Is 63^^ we
are become as they over whom (D3 not 133) thou no longer bearest rule.
n 3. Occasionally — chiefly in poetic or otherwise elevated style — even
independent relative clauses are simply co-ordinated with a regens,
whereas we should expect them always to be preceded by a demon-
strative pronoun, on the analogy of the examples in § 138 e. The
suppressed pronoun would stand —
(a) As subject, Is 41^* an abomination (is he) (hat chooseth you (but
read perhaps "1^1??) ; Jb 30'^, cf. § 152 w.
(b) As object, Is 41^, with a retrospective pronoun ; Mai 2"^ nD31 and
him that covereth (or read nobl ?); Jb 29'^ / delivered . . . the fatherless
also, and him that had none to help him.
(c) In the genitive governed by a substantive (cf. § 130 c?), Ex 4'^
n,.^'ri~1^2 N3"n?^ send, I j)ray thee, by (he hand of him whom thou wilt
send, i. e. by the hand of some one else ; yjf 65' and Pr 8'^ verbal-
clauses after ■'l.tJ't? 0 the happiness of the man, &c.; yjr 8i^ 141", Jb 29'*,
La i^"*; after ~!?3 Gn 39'', but we must certainly read here, with the
Samaritan and LXX, v"l^.^. '^B'X"b3 as in verses 5 and 8 ; Ex 9* ;
verbal-clauses after "73 i Ch 29^ 2 Ch 30", 31", Ezr i*.
(d) Governed by a preposition ; so verbal-clauses after ^"inx Jer 2*;
after /X { = to the place where), 1 Ch 15'*, but Ex 23^ before the same
§ 156 0-0"] Relative Clauses 489
verb ^f« Dip'2n-^K ; after 3 Jer 2", 2 Ch i* (P3n3='nn3=<o the place
where) ; after ? Is 65' vNC* Kvp by them </ta< asked not for me . . .
''3K'i?n N7? them <7ta< sought me not; Ez 13' that which thei/ have not
seen, but the text is hardly correct; after 75 ^ 119^^*, cf. § 158 ft;
after Dy 2 Ch 1 6'. — A uoun-clause follows ? in Neh 8^°. An analogous
instance in Aramaic is Ezr 5'^ to one whose name was Sheshhazzar [so
in the papyri, see the Lexicon, p. 1 1 16 f^].
§ 156. Circumstantial Clauses.
1. The statement of the particular circumstances under which a,
a subject appears as performing some action, or under which an action
(or an occurrence) is accomplished, is made especially (apart from
relative clauses, see § 155) by means of noun-clauses connected by
Wdw with a following subject (see further on this kind oi circumstantial
clause in § 141 e), and by verbal-clauses (see § 142 c?). Very frequently,
however, such statements of the particular circumstances are sub-
ordinated to the main clause by being simply attached, without Waw,
either as noun-clauses, sometimes extremely short (see c), or as verbal-
clauses (see d-g).
Rem. Among relative clauses of this kind the commonest are the various O
noun-clauses, which are most closely subordinated to a preceding substantive
without "^p'K , e. g. Gn 16^2 ; also statements of weight, Gn 24^2 ; of name, Jb 1^
(also introduced by *I0B'1 Gn 24^9, 1 S i\ &c., or ROB'I Gn 16S 22", &c.) ; of
a condition of body, Ju 1'', and others. —Noun-clauses which begin with wdw
and the predicate have a somewhat more independent character +han those
introduced by wdw and the subject'^ (Gn 19^, &c.). The former, however, are
also to be regarded as circumstantial clauses, in so far as they describe
a state which is simultaneous with the principal action ; thus Is i' I will not
be an healer, DrO pX ""n^^?^ while in my house is neither bread nor clothing ; Is 6'
(Am 7'') ; 2 S 13^*, i6^ Cf. also the instances in § 152 J of pNI followed by
a participle, as P''Jf1p pSI, &c.
2. Characteristic examples of ciicumstantial noun-clanses are Gn 12^ C
and pitched his tent D'l.i^O ""yni DJO ?N"n^3 with Bethel on the west and
Ai on the east; Nu 22^", 2 S 18''' through the heart of Absalom, '•H -13'liy
while lie was yet alive ; Jer 30^, Ez 9^ (cf. Ct 3*), Na 3^, Zc 1 4*,
2Ch23"'; with the predicate preceding, e.g. 1826'^, V' 32^ — In
Gn 41^ a noun-clause serves to announce a state in the future. — We
may also include here certain set phrases, as t]''3S"''^^ D^?S face to face
(prop, while face was turned towards face), Gn 32^', Ex 33", Dt 34'°,
^ In Dt 32^1 this form of sequence appears to be selected for another
purpose, and indeed our enemies are judges thereof, with wdw emphatic ; to take
it as a circumstantial clause is too artificial.
490 1^^^^ Sentence [§ 156 d-g
&c.; • so also-^o cast oneself down ^ "^^If? '^^^^ the face being turned ^o
</ie ear^/i, Gn 19', &c. (for Hif-lN we find H? in i K i^\ Is 49"^=').2— Cf.
finally the formula D''33~7y DX mother with children, Gu32'^; cf.
Ho 10" and § 119 aa note 2.
Rem. On circumlocutions of this kind to express negative attributes by
means of short noun-clauses (complete or incomplete), cf. § 152 u.
d 3. As circumstantial verfia^-clauees,^ we find (i) sometimes affirma-
tive clauses (see belovv^), but far more frequently (2) negative clauses
(see/), and among these (3) a certain number of expressions which
may be regarded simply as equivalent to negative adverbial ideas
(see g).
Examples of (i) Is 5"^ woe unto them, that tarry late in the evening,
^i?.V"l- Til w'**^* «'»'"« inflames them ; Is 1^, lo^*, 30'!, Jer 7^*, 20^^, \p 4^, 5^^, 21^',
62^ The circumstantial verbal-clause is used to particularize an action
which has before been expressed generally, in Gn 44^2, 48^* = crossing his
hands ; Dt 2^'', Ju 6^^ ; antithetically, 1X13^^ y? K'n3 wherewith however he lied
unto him. The verbal-claUse seems to assign a reason in f 7'' HMlf CBK'O since
thou hast commanded judgement ; a consequence in rp 103^.*
£ Rem. On the cases in which an imperfect in the sense of a final clause is
subordinated to a verb of motion (generally dp), see § 120 c.
f Of (2), subordinate verbal-clauses with Hp (in English usually rendered
by without and the gerund, if the subject be the same as in the principal
clause), e.g. Lv 1^'' ^'''^T N? without dividing it asunder; Jb 31^* ; N? with the
perfect is so used in Gn 44*, Ex 34^*, i S 30^, Jb 20^* (without its being blown
upon it). With a different subject, equivalent to a consecutive clause in
English, Is 27* ^Dp^"NP so that they shall rise up no more. — Moreover, verbal-
clauses in the same sense {without doing, &c.) are frequently connected by
Npl ; cf. I S 20^, Jb 24*^, 42^ ; in a concessive sense. Is 33', \f/ 44^^
fi^ Of (3), cf. VT Nb (prop, he knows it not) unawares, if/ 35*, Pr 5^ bbn^ ti?
unsparingly, Is 30^* (after an infinitive absolute) ; Hb i''', Jb6i<' (but /bn^ N?^
Jb 1 61', 27*2; see /at the end) ; ^"1/13 is? (prop, they hide not) openly, Is 3* (but
1 The expression D''3D HNinn to look one another in the/ace (i. e. to contend in
combat) 2 K i^^-^^, 2 Ch 2^^'^-^^, is probably only a shortened form for nsinn
• T V • T
2 That nif"!X (}^1^?) 19 really to be regarded as a virtual predicate to D^?K,
< < <
and not D"'ES as a casus instrumenti, is seen from Is 49*', where J*"1X D^BN
precedes the verb.
' Some examples of these have been already discussed in another connexion
above, § 120 a-c. _ ,
* In Gn 21I* the circumstantial verbal-clause nD3E'"?y Ob* is only due to
. L < ' ' ■
a harmonizing transposition; read 'K' 'V '^J* IJUlI'^^^V According to the
source used in cap. 21 Ishmael was still a young child; according to 17*'
he was about 16 or 17 years old.
§ 157 a-c] Circumstantial Clauses 491
Jb 15^* ^IHD N?")) ; Tjb'H ''5)3 (prop, ^e restrains not) unceasingly, Is 14^ ; t3iD''~P3
Jb 4115 (^t 93I Diriiri"i'3) and DIB^ N^ Is 4020 (without tottmng) immovably ; cf.
also lUDt< S<7 without wavering, \L 26^
§ 157. Object-Clauses {Oratio Obliqua).
Clauses which depend on a transitive verb, especially on what are a
called verba cordis, i. e. verbs denoting any mental act, such as to see,
to hear, to know, to perceive, to believe, to remember, to forget, to say, to
think, &c., may be subordinated to the governing verb without the
help of a conjunction by simple juxtaposition (§ 120 a), or they may
be co-ordinated with it either with or without wdw copulative
(§ 120 d-h). As a rule, however, the objective clause is introduced
by the conjunction ''3 that, less frequently by "^'^>? that}
Examples : —
(a) Object- clauses without a conjunction. Besides the passages mentioned
in § 120 (especially under e) there are a number of examples, in which
a clause depending on a verbum dicendi or sentiendi (the oratio obliqua of the
Latin and English Grammar) is added in the form of an independent noun-
clause or verbal-clause ; e.g. Gn 12^^ TiX TlHS N3"''"11DX say, I pray thee, thou
art my sister ; f 10", Jb a^s"-!*, Neh 6« *; Zc 8^3 (after ybc') ; f 9^1 (after V"!^) ;
verbal-clauses, e. g. ^ 50^^* thou thovghtest ^iD3 iTTINTlVn I was surely like thyself
[but read VH for ni^H] ; Gn 41^^, Ju 9^^ what ye have seen me do ; Is 48^, Ho 7^.
(6) Object-clauses introduced by ""S , e. g. Gn 6^ D'^^{^ DiH HST ""3 nin^ N"\*1 J)
and the Lord saw that the wickedness of man was great, &c. — Direct narration also
is very frequently introduced by ^3 (analogous to the on recitatirum ; frequently,
indeed, with the secondary idea of a particle of asseveration, as in Gn 26',
27'"'), e.g. Gn 21^", 22^'*^-, 26^^*, 29'^, 37**, Jos 2^*, &c., even when the direct
narration is not expressly indicated, Gn 4^^, 32^^ 4i"'', Ex 18^. — On the
expression of a second object by means of a clause introduced by ""S, see
§ 117 ;j.2
(c) Object-clauses introduced by IK'S, e.g. Est 3* NliTIK'K Ur\b TSH'-'S C
'*l^nVo»" fie had told them that he was a Jew ; i S i8^^ Ez 20^', Ec S^^,^ even before
direct narration, i S is***, 2 S 1*. Somewhat frequently "ISJ'K is preceded by
1 On these clauses with ""S and "^B'K and generally on clauses which we
should render as subordinate, cf. P. Dorwald ' Zur hebr. Syntax ' in Neue
Jahrbb. fur Philol. und Padag. 1890, p. 115 ff.
"^ Instead of a complete objective clause we sometimes find a kind of
accusative and infinitive construction, especially after jri3 (prop, to give «p)
in the sense of to allow, e.g. Nu 2i23 1^333 ")3y ^N^bTri^ I'T'P lOJ"'^^^. ""'^
Sihon did not suffer Israel to pass through his border; 26^^; followed by an
infinitive with p, e.g. Gn 20^, 31'', Ex 3*^ — Cf. also the analogous examples
in Dt 28"® (after nD3 to venture; see § 113 <f) ; Ju ii^" (after pOXH to trust) ;
I K 19* (after ^Nl^ to request).
' In Jer 28^ a subject-clause is thus introduced by "ItJ'X instead of the
usual *3.
492 The Sentence [§ 158 a-d
the nota accusativi "flN (equivalent to the circumstance, the fact, that), e. g. Jos 2^",
1 S 24"i9, 2 S ii^o, is 383, but in Gn so^*, Dt 2915 equivalent to the way in
which.
§ 158. Causal Clauses.
a A complete clause, assigning the reason for statements, demands,
threats, &c., sometimes follows with the simple wdw copulative, e. g.
yjA 60'^ give us help against the adversary, and (for) vain is the help of
man; Gn 6'^ 0?^}.)' ^2'^ Ex 23^, Jb 32''^, perhaps also >//■ 7'"; or even
without Wdw, e.g. Gn 17'*. As a rule, however, special conjunctions
in various combinations are used to introduce causal clauses.
I) The most common causal conjunctions are ""3 |y^ Is 3^^, &c., and "IK'S ]]}l
because, prop, on account of the fact that ; both, however, may also be shortened
to the simple ]]}l Nu 20", &c., or to ^3 because, Gn 3"", &c., or to "1*J'X Gn 30'*,
3i« 34"", I S 15", 20«, 26i«-2», I K 3", 83^ Ho 14*, Zc i«; 'also IB'Sa
Gn 39®^*. On the other hand, the simple \)}l is sometimes repeated for
< <
emphasis, jy'3^ ]Vl (something like the German sintemal und alldieweH) Lv 26*',
Ez 1310 (without 1 3O') ; also T^X'lpy 2 S i^, and ""S-by^ Dt 31I'', Ju 3",
Mai 2" on the ground that ; T.J'X "13"=]~7y because of the circumstance that, Dt 23^;
IK'S nni<~b3"?y for this very cause that, Jer 3*. But just as the simple |y^
is used for "ItJ'X ]^l, so also the simple ~p)} with the perfect stands for
nK'X-^y If' ii9"«, Ezr 3II ; cf. "'j'?"^!? Gtn 3120 and •'|)30 Dt 28" both with the
perfect, equivalent to because . . . not. — Cf. further ~WH 2p)} Gn 22^*, 26^,
2 S I2«, all with the perfect, and ""3 3py (2 S 12I0 with the perfect; Am 4'^
with the imperfect) prop, in return for the fact tJiat ; similarly again the
simple 3j5y Nu 14** with the perfect, and Dt 7*2^ 8^ with the imperfect ;
finally, "^K'SO Is 43* arising from the fact that, = because; IK'S nnn i S 26^', &c.,
and '•3 DHri Dt 4*'', Pr i^^for the reason that.
C Rem. I. The preposition "?y {because of, on account of) with the infinitive
(§ 114 e) is frequently used as the equivalent of a full causal clause ; cf. e.g.
Am iS«i3, 2I*. Such a construction with the infinitive may, however,
according to § 114 r, be continued by means of a finite verb, in which case
"by governs the verb as a conjunction ; e.g. Am 1^ ^"13T N?"l . . . D"l''3Dn~?y
because they delivered up . , . and remembered not, &c. ; 1", 2* ; without Wdw,
Is 30".
d 2. The choice of tense is regulated by the general principles stated in
§ 106 S., viz. the perfect (cf. especially § 106/) refers to causes already brought
fully into effect, the imperfect to those which may contingently arise; cf.
e.g. Dt 7*', 820, I K 8", where the imperfect leaves the possibility still open
that the persons addressed will perhaps escape the threatened punishments
by avoiding disobedience. — Cf. further, § in /< on the imperfect consecutive,
and § 1 12 nw on the perfect consecutive in the apodosis to causal clauses.
1 Also I3~i'y""'3 prop, for therefore, Gn 18", 19*, 33W, 3820, Nu lo", I4",
2 S 1820 qfire, and p'^y "IK'S Jb 342^, always me&n forasmuch as.
§ 159 «-c] Conditional Sentences 493
§ 159. Conditional Sentences.
Cf. H. Ferguson, 'The Use of the Tenses in Conditional Sentences in
Hebrew ' {Journal of the Society of Bibl. Lit. and Exeg. , Middletown, Conn.,
June and September, 1882). — P. Friedrich, Die hebr. Conditionalsdtse, KOnigs-
berg, 1884 (Inaug.-Diss.). — Driver, Use of the Tenses, 3rd ed., p. 1746".
1. The great variety of construction in conditional sentences is a
owing to the fact that it frequently depends on the subjective judge-
ment of the speaker, whether he wishes a condition to be regarded as
capable of fvljilment (absolutely, or at least possibly), thus including
those already fulfilled, or as incapable of fulfilment. On this dis-
tinction depends the choice both of the conditional particle to be
used (see below), and especially (as also in Greek and Latin) of the
tense. The use of the latter is naturally determined according to
the general principles laid down in § 106 ft'.' In the following sketch,
for the sake of clearness, conditional sentences without conditional
particles will be first discussed (under 6), and aft^wards sentences
with these particles (under T).
2. The relation between condition and consequence may be expressed, u
as in English, by the simple juxtaposition of two clauses. At the
same time, it is to be observed in general as a fundamental rule (in
accordance with the original character of the two tenses), that the
imperfect, Avith its equivalents (the jussive, cohortative, imperative,
perfect consecutive, and participle), is used to express a condition
and consequence which are regarded as being cajyable of fulfilment
in present or future time, while the perfect represents a condition
already fulfilled in the past, and its consequence as an accomplished
fact. The other use of the perfect — to represent conditions regarded
as imj)ossible — occurs only in connexion with particles.
Examples: —
(a) Imperfect (cf. § 107 a;) in protasis and apodosis, Jos 22^^, ip 104^8 ^-C
ptSJJp^'^ DHp jriri (if) thou givest unto them, they gather, &c. ; ip 139'^ Pr 12",
Jb 20^*, Ec i^*, Neh i* ; with an interrogative imperfect in the apodosis,
Ju 13^^; with the jussive, Jb 10" ; with the cohortative, Pr. i''^ . -with the
perfect, Is 26^" {yet will he not learn righteousness ; the apodosis forcibly denies
^ It may, moreover, happen that a different idea is introduced in the
apodosis, from that with which the protasis started — a source of many
further variations.
^ On the termination |^- cf. § 47 m. In verse 28 b also jiy3b''' is probably to
be explained from its immediately preceding the greater pause. These termi-
nations in verses 28-30 and tp 139^* can scarcely have any connexion with the
conditional sentence, although it is strange that p- in Nu 32^^ appears after
N?"DN in the protasis. In Nu 16^^ 32^0 \K. as before N (as in Jb 31'° in the
apodosis) is to be explained from the dislike of hiatus.
494 ^^^^ Sentence [§ 159 d-i
what tlie imperfect in the protasis had represented as still conceivable ; cf.
Ho 81^^) ; with the perfect consecutive, Gn 47''^, Ex 33'' ; with the protasis
suppressed, Jb 5* (see § 107 x).
d (6) Jussive in protasis (cf. § 109 h, i) and apodosis, \p 104'" TJK'nTltJ'n
ripv ''^"'1 (if) thou makest darkness, it is night; imperfect in the apodosis,
if, 104^2^ " ; cohortative Pr i^^ Also in Ex 7^ r^Tlp '•n'' it shall become a serpent,
is the apodosis to a suppressed protasis if thou cast it down; so in 2 K 5^"
3B'^1 is the apodosis to a protasis if thou loash, contained in what precedes.
e (c) Cohortative (see § 108 e) in the protasis ; perfect in the apodosis, i// 40^ ;
<
imperfect consecutive, Jb 19^^ ''^"^"IST'I HDIpX (if) / arise, they speak against
/me ; on the cohortative in the apodosis, cf. § 108/.
(d) Imperfect consecutive in the protasis {^ iii x), \f/ 139" *110X1^ if I say, &c.
(with a noun-clause as the apodosis) ; with a frequentative perfect consecu-
tive in the apodosis, i S 2^*.
jO" (e) Perfect consecutive in the protasis and apodosis (see the examples, § 112 A,A;
and II), Gn 44^^ DDI VZlK 3TS?1 and should he leave his father, his father would die ;
9''"', 4429, Ex 4", 12", I S 1^62, 193, 2 S 1328, I K 830 ; with frequentative
perfects, Ex 16^^ (referring to the past, Jer 20^) ; with imperfect in the
apodosis (being separated from the Wdw by H?), Nu 23^", Jb 5^* ; introduced
by an infinitive absolute, i K 2^'' ; an interrogative clause in the apodosis,
Lv lo^^ ; a noun-clause, \f/ 371'', Jb 7^^.
fl (/) A simple perfect (to represent actions which are to be regarded as com-
pleted) in the protasis and apodosis, Pr iS^^ 2^12 5<2fJ3 ni^N NifD has one found
a wife, he has found a good thing ; an imperfect in the apodosis, Jb ig*, 23^' ; an
imperfect consecutive. Ex 20'''®, Pr ii^, Jb 3^*^, 231*^, 29^^; an interrogative
clause, Nu 12^^, Jb 7^" if J have sinned (prop., well, now I have sinned!) what
^ can I do unto thee? 21^', 35^, Am 3* ; a noun-clause, Jb 27^^
I (g) A participle as casus pendens (cf. § 143 d, and the sections of the Grammar
there cited, esp. § 116 w) or a complete noun-clause in the protasis; the
apodosis mostly introduced by wdw apodosis, e.g. Pr 23^* K^th. 0311 Ipi''
is nip'{J'"'1 if one begetteth a wise child, he shall have joy of him ; with perfect
frequentative in the apodosis, i S 2", &c. ; but also with a simple imperfect,
e.g. Ex 21" (cf. § 112 n) ; with an interrogative imperfect, 2 K 7^-^9 ; with an
interrogative perfect, Ju 6^^.
K (K) Infinitive with preposition (also as the equivalent of a conditional clause)
in the protasis, and a perfect consecutive in the apodosis (cf. § 112 mm), e. g.
2 S 7^**^- 01 Vnna'm in^yna »/ he commit iniquity, I will correct him; Ex 34" f-
(with imperfect, followed by perfects frequentative in the apodosis).
Rem. On the expression of condition and consequence by means of two
co-ordinate imperatives, see § no/.
/ 3. Particles used to introduce conditional sentences are D^5 (for
which in the later and latest Books sometimes |n, see below, under w)
and ^b' (i S i4^», Is 6^'^ wS; Ec 6\ Est f ^W, from ^b DN) if, negative
N? DN and N c'v (\W) unless ; ""S supposing that (Lat. ut), in case that,
sometimes used almost in the same sense as DN. With regard to the
difference between ON (iO ON) and ^? {^■<^-^), the fundamental rule is
that D{< is used if the condition be regarded either as already fulfilled,
or if it, together with its consequence, be thought of as possibly (or
^ On V cf. Kohler in Geiger's Zeitschr. fUr Wiss. und Lebtn, vi (1868), p. 21 ff.
§ 159 w», «] Conditional Sentences 495
probably) occurring in the present or future. In the former case, DX
is followed by the perfect, in the latter (corresponding to the Greek
lav with the present subjunctive) by the imperfect or its equivalent
(frequently in the apodosis also). On the other hand, ''O (N?'!^) is used
when the condition is to be represented as not fulfilled in the past,
or as not capable of fulfilment in the present or future, and the conse-
quence accordingly as not having occurred or never occuiTing. In the
former case, 1^ and *<.?^? are necessarily followed by the perfect (mostly
also in the apodosis) corresponding to the Greek el with the indicative
of an historic tense, and the Latin imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive.
In the latter case (which is extremely rare) the perfect, or the par-
ticiple, or even the imperfect, may be used.
Rem. Since it again frequently depends on the subjective judgement of the VI
speaker (see under a), whether a condition is to be regarded as possible or
impossible, we cannot wonder that the distinction between DK and V? is not
always consistently observed. Although naturally y? and ^{b^P cannot take
the place of DN and K? DK (on the strange use of 1p in Gn 50^^ see below),
yet conversely DK is sometimes used where \? would certainly be expected ;
cf. e.g. \j/ 50^'*, 137', 139*, Ho 9" (cf. verse 11). These examples, indeed (DX
with the imperfect), may without difficulty be explained from the fact that
the connexion of v with the imperfect was evidently avoided, because the
imperfect by its nature indicates a still unfinished action, and consequently
(as opposed to V^) a still open possibility. But DK is also used for V? in con-
nexion with the perfect, especially when an imprecation is attached by the
apodosis to the condition introduced by DK, e.g. ^ "j*^- , , , HNt ''ri^tt'y~DN
^ii\ fl"nT. '/ I ^^''^^ ^"^^ ff^is .... let the enemy pursue my soul, &c., cf. Jb 318 ff-
The speaker assumes for a moment as possible and even actual, that which
he really rejects as inconceivable, in order to invoke the most severe punish-
ment on himself, if it should prove to be the case.
On the frequent addition of an infinitive absolute to the verb in clauses
with DN see §1130 above.
Examples : —
A. DX I. with per/ec< in the protasis to express conditions, &c., which have 71
been completely fulfilled in the past or which will be completely fulfilled in
the future (the perfect is here equivalent to the futurum exactum, § 106 0).
The apodosis ^ takes —
(a) A. perfect also, e.g. Pr 9^^ !J? ROpn riDplTDN if thou art vnse, thou art wise
for thyself; if/ 73" (see below on \?).
(6) Imperfect, e. g. Dt 32*^ ''ni3C'"DK if I whet my glittering sword . . , S^E'K
I urill render vengeance, &c. ; Jb 9i5f.3o ^jj^ both cases we should expect
V^ rather than ~DN ; so also in ip 44"'', with an interrogative imperfect in
the apodosis) ; Jb 11'' (the apodosis is in verse 15).
(c) .Trissive (or optative), e.g. Jb 31'*^- (see m above) ; Gn 18'.
1 We are not here concerned with the fact that the logical apodosis (the
consequence of the condition") is sometimes mentioned before the condition;
as in Gn i8*^-'", Ju 11'", if/ 63* '■, 137®, and according to Dillmann Is 4*.
496
The Sentence [§ 159 o~v
0 {d) Perfect consecutive (see the examples in § 112 gg), e. g. Gn 43^ k!)"D{<
'31 1'rij<''3n if I bring him not . . . then I shall have sinned, &c. ; Ju 16", 2 S 15^3,
2 K 7*. On the other hand, e. g. Gn 47^, Mi 5'', Jb 7* refer to actions already
completed ; in Gn 38' and Nu 21' the perfect with 1 is a perfect frequentative
and refers to past time.
(e) Imperfect consecutive (see § jii q), e. g. Jb 8* if thy children have sinned
(^NtDH) , , , Dn?5J'"'1 he has delivered them, &c.
(/) Imperative, e. g. Gn 50* 'J1 Np-ia^ Da^p^ya |n \"1N^0 fc^J-DK if now
I have found grace in your eyes, speak, I pray you, &c. ; the imperative precedes
in Gn 471* and Jb 38*18.
Jp (_g) A (complete or incomplete) noun-clause, e.g. Jer 14I* (a vivid realization
of the future) if I have gone forth into the field { = if I go, &c.), then, behold, the
slain with the sword ! &c. ; Pr 24^* (apodosis with waw apodosis).
Q 2. DK with imperfect in the protasis, to express what is possible in the
present or future, as well as (according to § 107 b) what has continued or
been repeated in the past. The apodosis takes —
(o) The perfect, e.g. Nu 32^3 DnXDn Hlin J3 i^^Vr\ iib'tii^) but if ye will not do
so, behold, ye have sinned ; here the apodosis represents the time when the
consequence has already taken place ; so also Jb 2oi2~i*. On the other
liaud, Nu 16^' (as also i S 6' and i K 22^^*) is a case of a pregnant construction,
if these men die as all men die, then (it will follow from this) the Lord hath not
sent me.
T (6) The imperfect, e.g. 2 K 7* iT'nj 1J>n"'~DN if they save us alive, we shall live, &c. ;
Gn 13^^ iS^*'", 28^°^-, Ex 20^^ (the second imperfect is equivalent to a jussive) ;
Is 1^*, lo^^, Am 9^"*, ^ 50^2 (where DX ironically represents an impossibility
as possible) ; Jb 8^ '• (with the insertion of a second condition in the form of
a noun-clause) ; g^'^°, 14' ; a frequentative imperfect referring to the past,
Gn 31* "llpN^ n"3~DK if (ever) he said thus . . . , ^iy) then they bare . . . ; Ex 40^''.
In Gn 42''' the consequence (on fl^tDn cf. § T07 s) precedes the condition.
(c) The jussive (or optative), e.g. ^ 137"; ^f- § ^09 ^-
(d) The cohortative, e.g. Gn 13^, Jb 31''; cf. § 108/.
S (e) The perfect consecutive (see the examples in § 112^ and gg), e.g. i S 20*
M")lpX^ T*?^ ""inpS^ *lpS~DX if thy father miss me at all, then shall thou say, &c. ;
Gn 24*1, Ju 4'^°; with a frequentative perfect consecutive, Gn 31* if he said
(as often happened) . . . , then, &c.
(/) The imperfect consecutive • so perhaps if/ 59^®, if ^3"'p'l is to be explained
according to § 1 1 1 <.
(fir) The imperative, e.g. Gn 31^, i S 20^1 (with waw apodosis, but in verse 22
simply T]2), 21 10, Jb 33*.
t {h) A noun-clause, e.g. Gn 4', ip 139^ Jb 8®, 3126'.
3. DX with cohortative, e.g. Gn 30'^ ; cf. the passages in § 108 e.
U 4- DX with infinitive, Jb 9*'' ^")DN~DX prop, if my saying is (but probably we
should read ^ri"!DX).
V 5- DX with a noun-clause, e. g. Dt 5^^ (in the apodosis a perfect with
waw apodosis), Gn 27*^, Ju 9^^ (imperative in the apodosis) ; 11^ (imperfect in
the apodosis); 2 S 12* (cohortative in the apodosis); Ho 12^^; especially
if the subject of the conditional clause be a personal pronoun. In an
affirmative sentence this pronoun is often joined to {^^, in a negative sentence
to pX (cf. on both, § 100 0), while the predicate (cf. § 116 g) is represented
by a participle, usually expressing the future, e.g. Ju63^'^ ytJ'iD ^K'l'DX
§ 159 rv-cc] Conditional Sentences 497
if thou will save, &c. ; Gn 24" D''b'y DaB'^DX «/ 2/e will deal, " &c. ; i S 2323.
In Gn 24^'2'- the condition is expressed in a more humble form by the
addition of K3 . With fX Gn 43" H.^K'P '?I3''S"DK"! hut if thou wilt not send, &c. ;
ao'' (with imperatiTO in the apodosis) ; Ex S^'', 9^'-, i S 19" (all with a
participle also in the apodosis). But ^\ and p^ may also be used after DX
without a suffix; thus B'l Gn 238, i S 208, 2 K 9!', &c., |^X"D« (if it be not the
case) Gn 30I, Ex 32S2, Ju 91=, 2 K 210 ; cf. also f3"DK if it be so, Gn 2522.
B. fn if, generally supposed to be originally identical with fn behold!^ W
Probably, however, fn if, is a pure Aramaism, and since the Aramaic word
never has the meaning behold, it is at least improbable that it had originally
any connexion with fn or nSH. Cf. Ex 8^2, Lv 2520, Is 54I5, Jer 3I, Hag 2",
2 Ch 7^^, and frequently in Job, as <)^^-^^, 12"-^', 19'', 238, 402s, always with
waw apodosis following, except in i^'^'', where consequently the meaning see
is no doubt preferable.
c. ^b if, ab^b (\b^S ^fnot. X
1. With perfect in the protasis and apodosis (cf. § 106 j?), e.g. Ju 8^^; 1?X
is used in the same sense as y^ in Est 7*, cf. Ec 6' (with a question in the
apodosis). — With the perfect in protasis and apodosis after N^v Gn 31^2^ ^^lo^
Ju 14^8^ I S 258*, 2 S 22'', Is 1'. On the other hand, in Dt 322^ ^ with a perfect
is followed by an imperfect in the apodosis, if they were wise, they would
understand this ; in Mi 2*^ by a perfect consecutive.
2. With imperfect after ii,7\? Dt 322'', ")^3X probably as the modus rei repetitae, y
were it not that I ever and again feared, &c. ; so also the imperfect after 1? with
the apodosis suppressed, Gn 50'^ supposing (hat Joseph should hate us ; since,
according to the context, the danger was real, the use of v here is strange ;
conversely in other cases, e.g. if/ 73!^, Jb g^^t.so^ ^^ would be more natural
than DX.
3. A noun-clause occurs after ^> 2 S 18", 2 K 3^*, \p 81^*, all with imperfect Z
in the apodosis ; Jb 16* B'^ v, with cohortative in the apodosis.
D. ""l) supposing that, if: —
1. ^3 with perfect in the protasis, e.g. Nu 520 TT'D'Sf '•3 riX"! but thou, if thou CLCl
hast gone astray, &c. ; with a frequentative perfect consecutive in the apodosis,
Jb 7'8^-; with an imperfect consecutive, Jb 222^
2. ""S with imperfect in the protasis, e.g. \p 23* T]!?X~"'3 D3 yea, though I walk hb
(have to walk) . . ., I will fear no (X"1"'X~X^) evil; 372*; Ex 212 ^3y Hppri'^S
'31 ""l^y if thou buy an Hebrew servant, six years shall he serve (but in verses 3-5
a series of definite conditions with definite consequences is introduced by
DX ; so also the ""S in verse 7 is followed in verses 8-1 1 by the special cases
with DX ; cf. also verse 17 ff.) ; cf. Gn 42*, 24*1, Jb 38"; with a perfect con-
secutive in the apodosis, Gn 32"'-, Ex iS^^ ; with a noun-clause. Is i'^.
3. ^3 with a noun-clause (and imperfect in the apodosis), 2 S 198.
Remarks.
I. In 2 K 5" tne particle ""ax (Masora ""nX, probably in the sense of my CC
father) appears exceptionally for V? ; its meaning here is unquestionable, but
» There could be no doubt of their identity if nan"! in i S 9'', 2 S i8", simply
meant if. We must, however, keep to the meaning but behold.
cowLBT k: k
49^ The Sentence [§§ 159 dd-gg, 160 a, b
its origin is obscure. Cf. the exhaustive discussion of Delitzsch and
Wetzstein on Jb 34^*, where this "iDN appears to be used as a desiderative
particle. — Sometimes when one case has been already discussed, another of
the same character is added by means of IN or, e.g. Ex 2i-'6 OI VliJ IN or
(another possible case) it is known that, &c., i.e. but if it be known, &c., LXX
(av Se, Vulg. sin autem ; cf. Lv 4'5-2^, 5*, 25*^, 2 S 18^'; with a following
imperfect, Ez 14"'- — On the hypothetical use of "IK'N (which is interchange-
able with ""a in other senses also) Lv 4^^ (in verses 3 and 27 DN), Dt 11"
(verse 28 DN), Jos 4^21, see the Lexicon.
dd 2. The conditional sentence is frequently found in an abridged form,
where the suppressed clauses can be easily supplied from the context ; cf.
Gn 13^, 24^^, I S 2^8 N^"uN1 and if not, i. e. and if thou wilt not give it to me, then
1 take it (perfect according to § 106 n) by force ; cf. i S 6^ The use of E'^l
alone in Ju 6^' is peculiar, as also £'"1 in 2 K io^° (where read with the LXX
^11 ^'''T. 'l'?^*!) ^° *^® sense of if it be so.— In 2 S 13=6, 2 K 5" vh\ alone
appears to be used in the sense of if really . . . not, in each ease with a following
jussive equivalent to may there at least, &c. (cf. § 143 d) ; but perhaps with
Matthes, ZAW. 1903, p. 122 fif., following Kuipers, we should read h^\ would
that. '—In I S 13^^, Jb 3'^ the condition must be supplied from the preceding
clause to complete the sentence introduced by nny ^3, in Jb 31^^* by ''3, in
2 K I3"by TN. — The apodosis also appears sometimes in an abridged form
(e. g. Gn 4^*, Is 43^) or is entirely suppressed, e. g. Gn 30''', 38''', 50^^ (see y
above), Ex 32^^, i// 27'', Jb 38^, where properly ^|1^ must be supplied with
V^^l ^2 as in verses 4 and 18 ; cf. § 167 a. — In i// S*, instead of the apodosis
/ exclaim which we should expect, the exclamation itself follows.
ee 3. The absolute certainty with which a result is to be expected is frequently
emphasized by the insertion of ""3 Is 7'; TN ""S 2 S 2", ig'', Jb ii^^; or HPiy ^3
now verily, Nu 22^9, i S 1450 after ^b, Gn 3i« 43" after \b^^, Jb 8^ after DN.
On this corroborative ""S cf. such passages as Gn iS^", &c., and § I48 d. On
DN ''3 after an oath cf. 163 d.
-fF 4. Sometimes the force of a hypothetical particle extends beyond the
apodosis to a second conditional clause, as in the case of DN Pr9^'*, Jb lo*^,
16*, 22'^, and ''3 Is 43^^.
gg 5. In Ex 33''*' a negative statement takes the place of a condition with
a negative consequence, /or a man doth not see me and lire, instead of for if a man
sees me, he does not live ; cf. the similar passages, Dt 22'-* thou shalt not see . . . and
hide thyself, instead of if thou seest . . . thoti shalt not hide thyself.
§ 160. Concessive Clauses.
a Besides the use of the imperative in the sense of a concession, meant
either seriously (§ no a) or mockingly (§ no/), and of concessive
circumstantial clauses (§ 141 e, § 142 cZ, and § 156/), concessive clauses
may be introduced —
(a) By a simple DN if: thus Jb 9'^ with perfect, if ( = ikough) I had been in
the right ; Is i** and 10^* with imperfect in reft rence to a contingent event.
If (6) By "'3 D3 yea though, Is i^^ with imperfect ; for which we find simply
D3 in Is 49'^ with imperfect, yea, though these may forget, yet ... ; on the other
hand, with perfect, Jer ^6^^, \f/ 95^, Neh 6' ; finally D3 ""S even if, though, Ec 4".
§§ i6oc, i6ia-c] Concessive Clauses 499
(c) By the preposition "bv governing a complete noun-clause, as Jb 16" C
"•233 DDn"N^ Sy noticiihstanding that no violence is in mine hands, or a verbal-
clause, Is 63^ On ~bv with the infinitive in a similar sense (equivalent to in
addition to the fact th&t = notwithstanding that), cf. § 119 aa, note 2.
§ 161. ComjMrative Clauses.
1. A comparison between two facts is sometimes established by Ct
simply uniting them with wdw copulative, especially in gnomic poetry,
when facts of a moral nature are compared with those of the physical
world, e. g. Jb 5^ man is born unto trouble, and the sons of flame fly
upward, i.e. as the sparks by nature fly upward, so man, &c.; Jb 12"
(in an interrogative form; in 34^ the same comparison as a statement) ;
14"'-, Pr 17^ 25^ 26-^-^'^ 2 7^\ &c.^ Even without the connecting^
Jb 24'' drought and heat consume the snow waters, INDn plStJ* so doth
S/ieol those who have sinned (cf. § 155 »i) ; cf. Jer 17".
2. The conjunction "IW3 (cf. § i^Sg; the simple "IK'K occurs in the h
same sense in Ex 10*, 14*', 34'*) as, quemadmodum, is used as a com-
parative conjunction (Ob '"), frequently with )? so, corresponding to
it in the apodosis, Is 31*, 52'"'-. Sometimes, however, I? {so also)
occurs even after independent statements. Is 55', Jer 3^^". — Exact
coincidence of two facts is expressed in Ec 5'* by '^ nGV'bs ^ {n all
points as.
Rem. On the use of 3 as, with single nouns or pronouns to introduce C
comparisons, cf. 118s; on the alleged use of 3 as a conjunction (equivalent
to "IK'NS), cf. § 155 g. — It is to be further remarked that 3 — 3 when used in
correspondence with one another, as — so (e.g. Lv 7'', Ju 8^*, Is 24^, Ho 4^ ;
also so— as, Gn iS^s, 44^8, Dt 1", i K 22* ; in Jos 14", i S 302* 31—3 ; ^ 127* and
often, p— 3, cf. Jo 2*), are not to be regarded as conjunctions, but as virtual
substantives with a following genitive ; n"'n"' n33 D33 Nu 15*^ properly means
the like of you shall be the like of the stranger, i. e. your duty shaU be (also) the
stranger's duty ; cf. Lv 24^'''.
* On this wdw adaeguationis, and in general on these proverbial com-
parisons, see Delitzsch, Das Salomonische Fpruchbuch, p. 9 f. Moreover,
instead of entire clauses, the nouns alone (without predicates) are frequently
grouped together, e.g. Pr 25'''*, 262^ 27^^ (called by Delitzsch, the ' emblematic
Mashal '). The expressions Dj? 3K'n3 prop, to be counted with some one, \f/ 88^
and Dp ^tJ'03 to be likened with some one, \p 28I, 143'', also arise from the idea of
comparison implied in grouping things together. On this use of Dy cf. Jb 9^',
where with is equivalent to like.
' In spite of its form this particle has originally nothing to do with 73, "<53
aU. The expression is compounded of 3 and fltsyp, like the Aramaic ?3p~73
for b3pi>3; cf. M. Lambert, EEJ. xxx. '47.
•• t;|t:
K K 2
500 The Sentence [§§ 162 a, b, 163 a-c
§ 162. Disjunctive Sentences.
tt The introduction of another possible case, excluding that which
preceded, is effected by ix or, e. g. Ex 2 1^®, equivalent to the Latin
vel; but also equivalent to aut with an exclusive antithesis, 2X2'";
so Is 27^ iN = z7 would then happen that, for which elsewhere ""^ iN.
b In the sense of dve — sive we find i^* — ''^', or DX — DN, or DN^ — DN
(see the examples in the Lexicon), also ] — ] Lv 5^ Nu 9'*, Dt2 4',
Is 2^^*', Jer 32^", ^ 76^ Jb 34^', perhaps also Ex 21'® (but not Pr 29';
cf. Delitzsch on the passage), and p — p (see § 143 e); cf. also D3 — D3
(in Gn 24^" D5]— D?) both— and; but N^ D3— N^ D3 (in Gn 2 1^ «^ Q:]—
K? 051 ; Zp i^* Xv . . . D3 — D3) neither — nor. On disjunctive questions,
see § 1 50 gr.
§ 163. Adversative and Exceptive Clauses.
d 1. After negative sentences (especially after prohibitions) the anti-
thesis {hut) is introduced by D{< *?, e.g. i S 8^^ and they said, Nay,
hut we will have a king over us; yfr 1", &c.; frequently also by ""S alone,
e.g. Gn i8'^ 19^ or even simply connected with ], Gn 17^ ^M] as
perfect consecutive ; 42'"; cf. Ex 5^^
Jj Eem. Sometimes the negation is only virtually contained in the preceding
sentence, e.g. in the form of a rhetorical question (Mi 6^') or of conditions
which are to be regarded as not having been fulfilled (Jb 31^**) ; ''2 or D{< ^3
in such cases becomes equivalent to nay, rather,
C 2. Exceptive clauses, depending on another sentence, are introduced
by ""S DDX except that, and (again after negative sentences, see a above)
DN ""S 1 unless ; especially DK ^3 with the perfect (equivalent to unless
previously) after imperfects which contain a declaration, e.g. Gn 32^
/ will not let thee go, except thou hast previously hlessed me ; Lv 22®,
Is 55"> 65^ Am 3^, Eu 3^1 Finally, DX ''^% unless. Am 3'* (with perfect
after a rhetorical question), or simply ^Jp?? Gn 43'' with a noun-clause,
except your brother he with you ; Is 10'' after a rhetorical question, with
a verbal-clause.
^ Very probably this use of DN ""S arises from the original meaning/or if,
surely if (''S in an affirmative sense) ; so evidently in Ex 22-* as a forcible
resumption of the preceding DX. Thus, e.g. Ju 15'' is simply surely when
I have been avenged 0/ you, after that I will cease, equivalent to, I will not cease,
until I have, &c. When the exception follows, an ellipse must be assumed,
e.g. Ru 3^^ surehj {or for) uhen he has finished it (then the man will rest). It
is far less natural to assume such an ellipse with DN ""S but (before entire
clauses as before single nouns) ; see o above.
^l6sd,l64a,h'\ Adversative and Exceptive Clauses 501
Eem. The principal statement, to which DX '•3 appends an exception, U
must sometimes be supplied from the context ; thus, Gn 40^* (I desire
nothing else) except that thou remember me, equivalent to only do thou remember, &c,
(cf. § 106 n, note 2 ; but it is probably better to read T]K for "'3). Cf. Mi 6',
where DX ^3, equivalent to nothing but, is used before an infinitive, and
Jb 42^, equivalent to only, before a noun. Similarly when DX ^3 after an
oath introduces an emphatic assurance, e.g. in 2 K s''" as the Lord livelh (I can
do nothing else) except I run after him, &c. ; cf. 2 S 15^' KHh., Jer 51^*, Ku 3^*
KHh,, and even without the oath, Ju 15'' ; cf. the Rem. on c.
§ 164. Temporal Clauses.
1. The relations of time existing between two diffei'ent actions or a
events are frequently expressed without the aid of a conjunction simply
by juxtaposition : —
(a) Actions or events are represented as wholly or in part simultaneous by
connecting a noun-clause with another noun-clause or verbal-clause intro-
duced by "j (or niini), e.g. Gn 7* and Noah was six hundred years old (prop.
a son of six hundred years), nTl ?^3Dni and (i.e. when) the flood teas. This is
especially the case when the pi-edicate of the noun-clause (frequently intro-
duced by liy still) is expressed by an active participle, e. g. Jb i^^ '• HT "lii?
'Jl X3 mi "IS^O ^^ '^vas yet speaking, ayid there came another; &c. ; see the
numerous examples in § iii jr and § 116 m. Instead of a complete noun-
clause there often occurs a simple casus pendens after ~P3 with a participial
attribute in the sense of whenever any one . . ., e.g. i S 2^^ n3T HDI B'''X"b3
'y\ X31 ivhenever any man offered sacrifice, then came, &c. ; 2 S 2^, &c. ; see the
examples (in which the second member is generally introduced by ^vuiv
apodosis) in § 116 w.
(6) Sequence is expressed by the juxtaposition 0
(i) of two imperfects consecutive, e.g. Gn 24'^ "ipN^l ^J^P^O? ^?^\ ''"^^
wJten she had done giving him drink, she said, &c. ; 28®^-, 29'^, 30^, 32^^*, &c. ;
cf. § 1 1 1 d ;
(2) of a noun -clause with a passive participle as predicate, and a verbal-
clause attached by 1, e.g. Gn 38^^; cf. § 116 v; in Gn 49^* an imperative
follows without 1 ;
(3) of two perfects (frequently with the secondary idea of rapid succession '
of the two actions or events in past time), e.g. Gn 19^' '}) X3 D v1 . . , X2f^ C'tDli'L'
the sun was just risen . . . , and ( = when) Lot came, &c., cf. i S 9', 2 S 2^^;
Gn 44^'-, Ju 3^^*, 15'*, 2o'3'' — In all these examples the subject follows
immediately after the connective Wdio, and then the (simple) perfect. " On
the other hand,
(4) a perfect consecutive follows another perfect consecutive to express
the contingent succession of future actions, e. g. Gn 44* DH^X n"ipS1 DflJJJ'ni
* This secondary idea is implied here by the mere co-ordination of two
independent rtr6a?-clauses, just as the idea of simultaneous occurrence
(according to § 116 u, note i) is implied in the co-ordination of a nown-clause
with another clause. In Gn 2;'* the immediate succession is especially
emphasized by !]X and the infinitive absolute, Jacob was yet scarce gone out . . .
then Esau his brother came ; in I K 9^ by ^X only • in f 48' by |3 and the
addition of two more perfects without ).
502 The Sentence [§ 164 c-e
and ■when thou dost overtake them (as soon as thou shalt have overtaken), thou
Shalt say unto them. Naturally, examples of this kind are veiy close'y related
to conditional sentences; see, therefore, the examples in § 112 kk and
§ 159 5^. On the connexion of an imperfect consecutive or a perfect with
detached expressions of time (as equivalent to complete clauses), cf. § in 6;
on the imperfect consecutive after '•Pl^l and a statement of time, cf. § 1 1 1 jr ;
on the perfect consecutive following a detached statement of time, as in
Ex 16*, cf. § 112 00. — In I S 29I* an imperative with 1 follows the perfect
consecutive.
C (5) The fact that one action or event has not yet taken place on the
occurrence of another, is expressed by D^D (an adverb, not a conjunction)
with the imperfect (according to § 107 e). The apodosis, which may
consist of a subject and perfect or even of a noun-clause (Gn 24^^),^ is then
connected by 1 (or Hliri"!) as in the examples above, under no. 3, e.g. Gn 19*
(cf. Jos 2*) 'J1 i|3p3 , , , T>yn '►^aXI ^2i^1 did they had not yet lain doxvn,
and ( = when) the men of the city . , . comyassed, &c. ; Gn 24^^
d 2. Conjunctions used to introduce temporal clauses are ^? (with
perfect, e.g. Gn 6', Ju i^*, i6'^ iSi'^; with imperfect, Gn 4", 12'^
24^ EX32', Lv2i», Dt3i^', Is i'\ 8") and ^^^ ^j^^^ ^^3 ^jth the
imperfect al£0 = as often as, •^ 8^; with perfect Jb 1°); less frequently
DX' (joined with a perfect), e.g. Gn 38', Nu 21', Ju 6', ^ 41^, 94^^ cf.
also Is 2^^^=^quotiescunque ; also in the same sense with an imperfect,
NU36''; with a perfect, equivalent to i\iQ futurum exaclum, Is 4^
Other conjunctions of time are the compounds "1^3 when, Gnip'';
"K't^S when, after that; "i^«"iy, '?~iy until (also the simple "IJ?, e.g.
Gn 38", Jos 2^^, I S i^'^ [with the imperfect = owZy when, as in 2 S 10*]);
2", &c.; especially in the formula V 1*^5K'^ ""JjlpS'iy until there was
none left remaining to him (where indeed it would be very natural to
read l^^K'n the infin. consir., as elsewhere after "'Jp??, §1145) Nu 21*^,
Dt 3^ Jos 8^, ii« (but I S 14" while, as long as)'; «?> Tf^? IJ? before
that, Ec T2'-2* with an imperfect, as in Pr 8^^ IJ? with a perfect ; Di^'IJ?,
DN ■^B'Xpy until the time when ; "if ^^"'';^n^? (for which in Ez 40'
■»:f «"T« ; Lv 25^^ I S 5" simply nns ; Lv '14K Jer 4i>«, Jb 42^ simply
■^D^) after that ; tXD (prop, since that time ; the dependent clause is
attached to it in the same way as the attributive clause to the
demonstrative 1B'J< § 1 38 e) since, Gn 39* ; ^l^? (*"*^ simply D'!).^
§ 107 c) before; npi"? (for yvi npni?) before, •«/r i29\
e Rem. r. With regard to the tenses used with the above conjunctions, the
rules are practically the same as those given in § 158 d for causal clauses.
The perfect indicates actions completed in the past or future (in the former
case corresponding to the Latin pluperfect, § 106/, and in the latter to the
1 On the perfect in the protasis, which is critically doubtful, cf. § 107 c.
2 On "IB'N as an original demonstrative, cf. § 1 38 a ; hence yi^i ■^5?'6<"*iy
is properly up to that (moment) — we shall return.
' Cf. the frequent use of wenn [prop, if] for wann [ = w/jen] in German.
§§ 164/, i?, 165 a] Temporal Clauses 503
Latin futw-um exacium, § io6 o), the imperfect denotes actions occurring
contingently in the future. On D"n6j Dlt?^, and ly with the imperfect as
a iempus historimm, cf, 107 c. _ _
2. Clauses introduced by ly ""S'"'!? , or "lK'X~iy, sometimes express a limit J
which is not absolute (terminating the preceding action), but only relative,
beyond which the action or state described in the principal clause still
continues; thus, ny with the imperfect, ^iio'; ''3~'iy with the perfect,
Gn 26", with i.npf. 4910 ; IK'S'iy with the perfect, Gn zSi^ ; with the
imperfect, \f/ 112*. — Like the Arab. J!*^^ *iy may even introduce a main
clause ; e.g. Ex 15^^ 13y^~ny prop, no doubt = thus it came to this — they passed
through, i.e. so they passed through.
3. The infinitive construct governed by a preposition (§ 114^, e) is very £*
frequently used as the equivalent of a temporal clause ; the infinitive with 3
may usually be rendered by when, as, or whilst; the infinitive with 3 by
when, as soon as (in Pr lo^^^ followed by a noun-clause introduced by wdw
apod^sis), or, when referring to the future, by if; the infinitive after |tp by
since. According to § 11 1 gr such statements of time are generally preceded by
*n^1 and the apodosis follows in the imperfect consecutive ; hence in i S 1 7^''
(cf. Driver on the passage) niX"!3"! with a simple perfect following, is unusual.
On the continuation of these infinitival constructions by means of the perfect
consecutive, cf. § 112??, and in general, § 11^ r. — With the participle, 3
appears to be used as the equivalent of a conjunction in 3''^D3 as he drew back,
Gn 3829 (unless we should read 2^^r\3 [or 2^\^n iD3, cf. Gn 19^'^]), and in
< . ■ ■^ • ■ •• s
nn^DS when it budded, 40*".
§ 165. Final Clauses.'^
1. Like most of the dependent clauses hitherto treated, the final a
clause may also be joined bY3--simplfi_j^2aza-j;ejgMJalm JxL-tke-main
clause, unless the final clause is directly subordinated to the
governing verb.
^-
Examples of the connexion: (a) of a final imperfect (or jussive?) with
a perfect by means of 1, La i^*, see § 107 3 ; with an interrogative sentence,
2 S 91-^, Jb 38'^*; with an optative, ^ 51^; with an imperative, 1 K 11";
(/3) of a cohortative with an imperative by ), Gn 29^^^, i S 15^*, or a jnssivgT"
Neh 2^ (§ 108 d) ; (7) of a jussive with an imperative by 1, Ex 9^, 2 S 16",
1 K 5'", if/ 59", 86"; with a jussive, Jb 211^, or cohortative, § 109/, g (cf. also
2 S 2421 the infinitive with b,' Jon i** ilD with the ist plur. imperf., and
2 Ch 29'" ^33?~Dy, which are equivalent to cohortatives) ; (S) of an imperative
with a jussive, cohortative, or interrogative sentence byl, § iioi; («) of a
perfect consecutive after another perfect consecutive, Lv 14^* ; after an imper-
fect, § 112 m and p ', similarly after a jussive, § 112 <?; after an imperative,
§ 112 r. — On negative final clauses joined by ti?) to the imperfect (so Ex 2S*',
^q2o . and 2 S ij^B^after Ni"7K with a jussive in the main clause) see the
Rem. on § 109 g. In Ex 28^*, 39^^' the negative final clause is simply con-
nected by tip. — On the use of an historical statement after verbs of command-
^ Cf. H. G. T. Mitchell, Final Constructions 0/ Biblical Hebrew, Leipzig, 1879.
??
504 The Sentence [§§ 165 h, c, 166 a
ing, wliere we should expect a final clause (e.g. Neh 13^ (hen I commanded, and
they cleansed, equivalent to that they should cleanse, and they cleansed ; in Jb 9''
a negative final clause is connected in this way by iipV), cf. § 120/.
For examples of the direct subordination of the final imperfect (without \)
see § 1 20 c.
J) 2. Final conjunctions are ■*'^^5 IPpp to the end that ; also simply
fypi5 Gn I2'^ 2f', Ex 4^ V/ 5i«, &c.; Tf>< ninj?3 prop. /or the purpose
that, Gn 27'", and simply "i13p Gn 27*, Ex 9^*, 20'^°; also the simple
ns^X 1 Dt 4>«-^'', 6^ 32^ Jos 3', " Neh 8"^-; negatively, ^b 7^N Gn ii^
24=*, iK22>«; or f £03'"; also negatively, N^^ Din-n-bj? /or ^^ie
matter (2)urpose) that , . . «o/, Ec 7"; "'JJ')'?? with imperfect, Ex 20^°,
2 S 14''* that . . . not. — Quite exceptional is the use of "IP (if the text
be right) in Dt 33" I'l^lp^"!'?, with the imperfect, equivalent to that . . .
not [in prose, DIpOj.
C Rem. All the conjunctions here mentioned are naturally always used with
the imperfect, see § 107 q (on the apparent exception in Jos 4", see § 743). —
On the negative conjunctions 7N and jS that not, lest, see § 152/and w. On
the infinitive with p ^ (also ]]}^p Gn iS^^, 37"^ &c.) as the equivalent of a final
clause (Gn 11'', 28*, &c.), see § 11^/, h, p. On the continuation of such
infinitival constructions by means of the finite verb, see § 114 r. On the
negation of the final infinitive by 'flpIlP, § 114 s. On the preposition |0 with
a substantive or infinitive as the equivalent of a negative final clause (Gn 31*^,
I S 15^*, &c.), see § 119 X and y.
§ 166. Consecutive Clauses.
Cl 1. Consecutive clauses are added by means of simple ivdiv copulative
with the jussive,^ especially after negative and interrogative sentences,
e.g. Nu 23" Onjn^l D'jr??'' ^^9"}. ^^ ^'^ ^^ God is not a man, that he
should lie, and (i. e. neither) tJie son of man, that he should repent ; Is 53^
^nnrpmi; Ho 14'" ^V.X\ f^ ^^^ ??'! °?0 '? 'u^ho is wise, that lie may
understand these things ? ^>riic?en<, that he may know them ? Jb 5^^
NP^ = so that . . . not; in Pr 30^ ) is separated from the predicate by
the object. In Gn 16'" a negative consecutive clause comes after
a cohortative, and in Ex 10* after a perfect consecutive. — On the
other hand, in Jb 9^--^' the jussive in the sense of a consecutive clause
is attached without Wdtv to the preceding negative sentence (in
^ In Ez 36^'' a final clause is introduced by IC^X DS, thus at the same time
taking the form of an object-clause.
* On p as a supposed conjunction (equivalent to the Arabic li) 1 K 6^', see
§ 66 i.
3 That such examples as S^pM are to be regarded as jussive is probable
from the analogy of Ho 14^** and Jb 9^^
§§ i66 5, i67a,i] Consecutive Clauses 505
verse 32 a second jussive follows, likewise without Wdw, for he is not
a man, as I am, that I should answer him, that we should come together
in judgement). On the imperfect consecutive as expressing a logical
consequence, see § 1 1 1 Z ; on the perfect consecutive as a consecutive
clause after a participle, see § 112 n.
2. Conjunctions introducing consecutive clauses are again (see 0
§ 157 c, note 3) ^3 and ">K'X=so that; especially again after interro-
gative sentences, according to § 1071*; cf. Nu 16'^, ""S with the
imperfect, that ye murmur ; but in Gn 20'" with the perfect, in reference
to an action already completed. On T^^:5 with the imperfect (or jussive)
equivalent to so that, cf. further Gn 13'^, 22^''; with perfect and
imperfect, i K 3'"'*, with the demonstrative force clearly discernible,
depending on 3.^; on i6 'f^^ = ut nan, cf. Dt 28^ i K 3^ 2 K 9'^
On |D with a substantive or infinitive as the equivalent of a consecutive
clause, see § 119 t/.
§ 167. Ajwsiopesis, Anacoluthon, Involved Seizes of Sentences.
1. Aposiopesis is the concealment or suppression of entire sentences CL
Of clauses, which are of themselves necessary to complete the sense,'
and therefore must be supplied from the context. This is especially
frequent after conditional clauses; besides the examples already given
in § i^gdd, cf. also Ex 32^- (the LXX and Samaritan supply i^^);
Nu s'^*', Ju 9'^ (in verse 19, after a long parenthesis, an imperative
follows as the apodosis to this conditional clause); i S 12"'', 2 S 5*
(where indeed the text is probably very corrupt ; cf. the addition in
I Ch II*); 2 S 23'^, yj/ 27'', I Ch 4'°. For other examples of various
kinds, see § 117 I, and especially § 147; in Aramaic, Dn 3'°. — On
Gn 3^, cf. § 152 it; at the end.
2. Anacoluthon is the change from a construction which has been b
already begun to one of a different kind. It is found especially after
long parentheses, because the speaker has either lost sight of the
beginning of his sentence, or for the sake of clearness purposely makes
a new beginning; thus Gn 20", 31** and Ez 34'° (cf. § 149 at the
end); Nu I4«'^ 22^''; Dt if ; 24''-, 29*'^ Ju 10" (where, after
a series of intermediate sentences, the predicate I saved you is sup-
^ But those cases are not to be regarded as examples of aposiopesis, in
which the answer, being closely connected with the question, is given simply
in the infinitive with p ; cf. § 147 a, note i.
5o6 The Sentence [§ 167 c
pressed ; but the text can hardly be correct) ; perhaps also Is 66'* (cf.,
however, Delitzsch on the passage, which is certainly corrupt).' On
Gn 23'^ (^^ with the imperative), see § 1 10 e,
C 3. We may mention as instructive examples of involved series of
sentences Gn 24" and ^^ ^ and Gn 2 8^''-
1 On the other hand, from the Semitic point of view the various kinds of
compound sentences are not to be regarded as instances of anacoluthon, e.g.
Gn 17"", nor even Gn ai^" (cf. § 143).
I
THE PARADIGMS.
In the paradigms of the verbs, those forms which are to be
especially noticed by the beginner are marked throughout by an
asterisk as model foims. Thus e. g. in the strong verb the 3rd siny.
fern. i^P^i^ is the model for '•'^i^, which likewise has only a vocalic
afFormative, and J^^^\> is the model for ^'?^\^, ^^^'^\> and ^ibof?, which
in the same way have a toneless afforniative beginning with a conso-
nant. On the other hand, the forms D^?^? and IJ^r^^i?, where the
affix beginning with a consonant has the tone, stand by themselves. —
In the table of the pronouns the asteris^k has a different meaning ;
see the footnote there. — The bracketed forms (from Paradigm G
onwards) are merely analogous formations not occurring in the
Old Testament.
The newly added paradigm (Q) consists of forms actually found,
belonging to various verbs.
5o8
Paradigms
Nominative of the Pronoun,
or Pronomen separatum.
Sing. I . comm. ^^bX, in pause "'^3^? ;
''i^., in pause ^J^? /.
' m. nriK (J^t<)j in pause "
<
2. • nriN vthou.
' m. t*in he.
3-
Plur. I. comm. ^3n3S (1303)^ in
pause i^nix (^Jnj) M;e.
A. The Personal
Accusative of the Pronoun,
A.
Simple form.
m. DWN
■you.
Im.^T^, nr3n\
1/ nan
<Aey.
^3; ^:J_; ^34- me.
1; *?!— , in pause ^4-, '
• <Aee.
^n,i; in^(ri), i; ^nJLAm.
^3; y^; ')34.«5.
D3; D3_'
yOM.
(□^), iD4-* ^Aew (eos).
[fn],};I_,(|4_);[J_^]fAevn(ea4
The Personal Pronoun
509
Pronoun.
or Suffixiim Verbi.
B.
WithjV'dn energicum.
not found.
n3J_
T V
«4. ? (see § 58 k)
these forms are
not found.
Genitive of the Pronoun, or Sujffixum Nominis
{Pron. possessivum).
Attached to a sing,
noun.
''__ mi/ (prop. gen.
mei).
^, ^-^, in I %
pause ^4- f (P^°P-
^, ^^, (n-)J tui).
^n, 1; ^nj_, i(n) his
(eius and suus).
« ; 13^ ; (I34.) owr.
D3; D3_
V ' T
T
■ your.
■ their.
B.
Attached to a noun
plur. or dual.
-^ my.
T4-
/%.
V> V,0'■^'4-*)A^•5.
n*^ /ier.
^S"" * owr.
your.
Dn"'_, to^-^-*^
jn^—
■their.
ly
1 Forms with an asterisk are exclusively poetic, those in parentheses ( ) are
rare, those in brackets [ ] do not occur (cf. § 58 a, note).
5IO
Paradigms
B. Stroiuj
Qal.
A'iph'al. Pi'el.
Sincj, 3. m.
b^\>*
las*
jb^*
^;?i??*
^^1?, ^l?i?
3- /.
T : IT
m33*
T : IT-
njtsp *
T : V
n^top3*
T ; ': ■
nbtfp
2. m.
n^jp^*
m33*
T : - T
nytbi?*
n^Dpa*
T : - ': •
J?^^!?
2. f.
ri^^^
m33
• : ~ T
r^3bi?
'i'l'^P?
'^5'i^i?
I. c.
••riljoi?
"•mSs
^ri:t5i?
'•'jiS'^i??
■•ribop
Flur. 3. c.
"9P.
i^PP?
i^tsp
2. m.
Drijipi?*
Dri-!33*
Dri2Dp*
DJ^S'^i??
Dribtsp
2./.
I^l'^i?
J^l??
l^??i?
ii?!'^i??
l'?S'^i?
I. c.
«b6p
wn33
i3bp
''^I'^p?
la^Jop
Inf.
Inf. absol.
ht>\>^ 33^'*
f>iDp*
yt3p3,y:3i?n*
Imp. Sing. 2. m.
i?bp*
133*
ijL)i5n*
b^PJ
2. f
>55Dp*
^1??*
'^P(?!?*
^b^Pf
Plur. 2. m.
i^Dp
1133
: iT •
1^5 tap
2./.
njbtSp*
13133*
.I3f)^pn*
t: - It .
njfj^p*
Impf. Sing. 3. w.
ijbp^*
1??)*
i^i?:*
^;?i?^*
'^^P)*
3- /.
ijbpri
n33ri
^^m
b^pJ^
2. m.
i'bpn
*733n
^9)^^
b^P^
2- /
\!)L5pri*
^•7330*
''bt^pn*
•«i)i3pri*
I. C.
^i2p>?
*^??^?
^Pi?«
^tspx
PZwr. 3. m.
i^t3p>
1133^
'^'^^r.
i^tsp^
3./
njjjDpri*
.131330*
T : - : •
r\:bhpr\*
T; - 't •
.ijjj^po*
2. w.
i^tppn
11330
i^tDpn
i^ispri
2./
njbbpri
.131330
T :- : •
n35)Di?n
njis^pn
I. c.
^i3p3
1333
^Pi?3
bm
Shortened Impf [Jussive).
Part. act.
2>as8.
bop*
b^\2i>*
133
PP,
bcp3* b^Spp"
Strong Verb
511
Verb.
Pu'al.
Uiph'U.
HopKdl.
Hithpael.
h^\>*
fj^Bpn*
b^pn*
^tspnn*
nStppn*
njjtppnn*
rtjjop*
j^S'pp'?*
nb^pn*
rii)ii)pnn*
T\b^p
J^5'^i?n
Jli^^PC
nbtspnn
^rhhp
'J^.^PP^i
''^%\>^
*n[j^pnn
^b^p
^b'^hpr}
i^Pi'n
i^tspnn
Dnbtap
^^^^\>^
t3)?!'K)pri
nribtspnn
|j?!'t?i?.
i^l'^pn
l'?5'^i?\!
}ri!):|)pnn
^jjj^^
i^S'^pi?
''^S'^ipn
ijSj|pnn
wanting.
b'^P^
^^Dpn*
^Dpn*
wanting.
i^tapn*
^PPl"*
^tsi^nn*
wanting.
^i?''6pn
wanting.
^Jjtspnn*
'IjI'PPl'*
njb^jpnn*
^^i?r
i'^tsp:*
ijDpj*
^^(■^^r
^^pn
fj^tDpri
^^i?J?
^tspnjy'
b^pn
^^Dpn
^^\>T^
^t^i^r^Jii
••Jjisipn*
^Jj^cpn*
••Jjcpri*
"[jtspnn*
btSPN
^V\>^
^^i??
^^i^n?
^^tsp^
ifj^bp!
i^Pi?:
i^^pn^
n:b^i?n*
njijppri*
n:^t5pn*
t: - ': t
njl'^pnn*
^^^
^^'Dpn
^^tJpPl
i^tppnn
njSi^pri
'^^S'ppri
nj^cjpn
t: - ': t
njb^pnn
^13P3
^'tjp?
^^i??
^t?!^"?
^ispo*
ij^Ljpio*
^9i??*
b^[>T\'Q*
512
Paradigms
C. Strong Verb
Imp. Qal 2. ^3.^915
(from an Tmjierf. in a ^^rhf, ^3^yW)
Suffixes I
3- w^-
/Smp'.
2 /Si'rjg', m.
2 .S'mgf. /. ;
J /Smgr. m.
Perf. Qal
^I'|?i?
i^9P
h
3- /•
:n%p ^nV^p
^ri??i? •
wb"bp ■
2, m.
^^ribtap
rinnf)t2pi
■ ■
2- /•
i-nb^p —
irT'rib^p
I. C.
•^^pi^tsp
^''iiS'^P
Plur.
3- c.
^j^b'ep
^^^?i?
^m^'cp
2. m. *311^b^p —
imnf^Dp
I. c.
^^5^t2p
^^^fjDp
''''ii^J'^P
Inf. Qal
• ^fjLJi? ^3n3|
^.^9^
i^?i?
in.^'b^
f^?.^pp^
^S'?P!
TlStDp^
I'^.cPP^
Imjyf. Qal 3. m.
^ • •• T : •
^^i?!'!
m^'.
3. m.
^D^^t^p^
?i?^p^
^a^'tip^
with NUnenerg.
Plur. 3. m. ^ilijLJp^
^^^*Dp^
^^^^i?!
P«r/. Piel 3. 7/i. ''ii''tf)p ib^p 1I.^P ^^tSj?
Strong Verb with Suffixes
513
with Suffixes,
3 Sing.f. I Plur. 2 Plur. m. 2 Plur.f. 3 Plur. m. 3 Plur. f.
•^^9? ^^??i? wanting, wanting.
D^tDp
T T •:
\ T ■•: /
I^^i?
nn^'ep IJn^'^p — — Dn^ep wanting.
nn[)Cp
yri^K)p
Dnfjcp
wanting.
n^^S'^i?
y^nijcp
D^PlJj^p
wanting.
O'^i'S'^P
D3*ripDp wanting.
D^nfjop
pjyi.S'op
0^^*9i?
«^^op
wanting, wanting.
D^ijCp
pijop
wanting.
yij^jjep
— —
wanting.
wanting.
0"5'^i?
D2^3p^P wanting.
D«f)^p
wanting.
^ V : T ': /
wanting.
ch^\>
r^?5
13 ^Dp
D^CP
.. . If
TV T ; •
.ribepv
» T ; ': • '
na^Bp^
TV : ': •
COWLST
1^
t: •/
Dapep^ wanting. D.c'^i?^ wanting.
ni^ep^ ^3^^PP^ D^l^tJp^ wanting. D^^tip^ wanting.
nbtsp W^ wanting, wanting. D^'iSi? ?S'lfi?
Ll
514
Paradigms
D. Verbs prlmae gutturalis
Qal.
Niph'al.
Hiph'il.
HopKal.
Ferf. Sing. 3. m.
npy
-^m*
i^p.v.n*
"ipyp*
3- /.
T : IT-
T : V IV
nT-ttyn
T • •.■:|-.-
moyn*
T : T|T
2. m.
^W.
moyj
T : - vav
rn6yn
T :-v:iv
J^lpyp
2. /.
riipy
nnpyp..
moyn
; :-vj-/
moyn
: :-t:|t
I. c.
"•nnpy
Tnoyi
• : - viiv
"•nnpyn
^mioyn
• :-t:it
Plur. 3. c.
in»y
: |T
'^'^W:-
IT'^.V.'l
inoyn
: T|T
2. w.
DPilpy^
c
Dmioyj
V :-v:iv
orinDyn
DmDyn
V :-t:it
2./.
f^ipy*
t^l^E
irinpyn
irinpyn
I. c.
i:n6y
: ~ T
?31PJ?3.
''^IP.V.p
^noyn
: - t:it
Inf.
nbs?^
|c
noyn*
n^tpyn*
Inf. ahsdl.
T
plbxn, nioyp.*
noyn*
i»yn*
X
i^V,'^*
nioyn
Imp. Sing. m.
nby*
PW*
f
••iDy
^?l'^
noyn
nwn
Plur. m.
noy
^P!"
noyn
: r ••
wanting.
/•
njnBy*
IJPID*
nncyn
T :- Ti"
nnoyn
T ; "- 1-
Impf.Sing. 3, m.
-iby^''.*
Pl.n^.*
•• Tf
i^oy^ *
npy;*
3- /.
"itoyji!
fin,^
nioyn
•• Tl"
I^PKP
"^m
2. w.
ntoyn
Pinp
noyn
T'oyn
''m
2./.
noyr)*
P|n|?*
n^^yji)
ncyn*
• : TIT
I. c.
ito^N*
Pip.*?
*iDyN
"^'^V.^
^^m
Plur. 3. m.
Jinpy^*
ptni*
: IT"
nvpj;^!
: TIT
3-/-
nnoypi
T :- T 1"
nanoyri
!^J"!Py^
2. OT.
noyn ipinn
nroyn
: (T"
sn^rpyn
noyn
: T IT
2./.
njTr5yn napinn
T : -:i- T': -■.-x-
•"'H'^VP
njnoyri
'"ijlPj?!?
I. C.
1'»V3
P]n3.
"Tl"
^'W
- t: T
Shortened Impf. {Jussive).
loy^''.
Part. act.
T?"y
'^95'^.*
n"»Dj?D*
pass.
n^oy
^m
Verbs mediae gutturalis
515
E. Verbs mediae gutturalis.
Qal.
NipUal.
Pi'el.
Pu'al.
Hiilipa'el.
Perf. Sing. 3. m.
- T
Vinm
TJ13*
•113*
'n'*.?rin*
3. /•
2. m.
T -:|T
T : - T
ripn^3
T ;i"
'n3-l3'
n3n3
T ; —
n3i3nn
T-:iT : .
n3n3nn
T ; -T : •
2- /
ripriB'
ritpmj'i
ri313
ri3i3
n3n3nn
: : ~T : •
I. C.
'ntpnt^i
'Jji?!?
^ri3n3
"•npisrin
Plur. 3. c.
~:iT
!ionB>3*
:r'*
5i3n3
i3-i3nn
-:iT : -
2. m.
Dritpntj'
DriDne'3
V ; r*
Dri313
V : *"T : •
2. f
fr,t:nB>
fl?t5n^3
"jripna'
t^??!''?
fn3i3nn
I. c.
5|3tpnK'3
133^3
W313
i33i3nri
Inf
Inf. absol.
T
vr
vr
wanting.
^lann*
Imp. Sing. m.
DHK'*
•• T •
vr
■^isrii?*
Plur. m.
• -:iT •
-:iT •
-:iT
wanting.
"I3i3nn
.•|T : •
/.
T : - «
T : "T
n33n3nn
T : "T : •
Impf.Sing. 3. m.
- ; •
tan^^
^-i.?;*
:il3>*
vw.*
3- /•
DHK'n
•■ T •
v:^^
Tllbn
^l?!?"
2. w.
- J •
DnB?n
•• T •
v^
^Ibri
^■".anPi
'm^- /.
'•pntj'ri*
"•tpnji'ri*
'^2^^
>313ri"
"•'snsnn'
nWV. c.
UHK'K
L3nE?K
■* T V
^■>.?^
^"]3?<
^"'.?'??
PZur. 3. m.
^DHb;^
-:iT •
-;iTt
^3n3>
3. /.
njpriB'ri
T : - T •
T : "T ;
nj3n3n
T : ~ :
n33n3nn
T ; "T : •
2. TO.
siDnc'ri
iL3n{?n
-:iT •
: 1 :
i3i3nn
2./.
n^tpntj'n
T : - T •
T : "T :
T ; ~ :
n33n3nn
T : "T : •
I. C.
DnB'3
•• T •
V.^
•]133
^■i.?"?
/m;;/. WJt<A Suff.
'inpriK'^
Part. act.
2)a8S.
DHca
L 1 2
■Jinbo*
5i6
Paradigms
F. Verbs
Qal.
Niph'al.
Ptel.
Perf. Sing. 3. m.
3- /•
2. m.
t: it
T : * T
2./.
rin^V?*
nn^V*
I. c.
^nrv^V
'nnbVa
^rin^V
Plur. 3. c.
^nba?
^nfjB'j
^nijK?
2. m.
DFini>B'
Dnn^B'j
Dnn^B'
2. f.
jrin^a'
JC"?^^?
]^ip^
I- c.
ijn^K'j
^^rfip
Inf.
oV*
rh^r\*
n^B'*
Inf. ahsol.
ni^r
niV?
D.e'?'
Imp. Sing. m.
Plur. m.
^n^E?
inf'E'n
^n^K'
f-
T : - :
njn^'g^n
mni'V*
Impf. Sing. 3. m.
3- /.
2. m.
2. /.
^n^n
• ; |T •
^n-Jtyrj
I. c.
nbe'K
rh^ 2
Plur. 3. m.
^nfjB'^
^n^t?^ I
?B«
3. /.
njn^Vri*
nan^V'!'*
2. TO.
^Th^n
^nljB'Pi
^nWn
2. /•
nanbVn
T ; ~ T •
nan^V?
I. C.
rh^)
n^^i
ni'r?
Shortened Impf. (Jussive).
Impf. uxith Suff.
• •• T : •
Par<. act.
pass.
n^Jtya
nWo*
Verbs tertiae gutturalis
ST^l
tertiae gutturalis.
Pu'al
HipKil.
Hoph'al.
Ilithpa'el.
rvh^r\*
n^K^n
ni'PiB'ri
nn^K?
nn-'bVn
nnbe'n
nnijriK'n
nnbVn
nn^Wn
j^n^ntrn
nn^V*
nnbVn*
nnbVn*
; —^ ; T
nn^'jRB'n
^nn^V
»nnbVn
^nn^K'n
'•nn^ViK'n
^rb^
^n'-^Vn
inbK'n
^n^nt^n
Dnn^jr
DnnbtJ'n
Dnn^B'n
DDn^ntj'n
jrin^'^
l^ni'K'ri
|fini'?^n
jrin^riB'n
^jn^V
^n^JK'n
«nbVn
^n^riK'n
n"'5'K'ri*
n^B'n
n^mn*
nijtj'n
ni'riB'n*
^n^i)Vn
"n^ntyn
wanting.
^n""!5Vn
wanting.
^n^riB'n
r\yrf§m
njn^ntj'ri*
n^K'"»
ry^^l*
n^K>:
rh)m>
nWn
n^JjB'ri
n^DK'n
n^-<rn
n^^trn
ni'B'ri
n^riK'n
••n-'E'n
^n^bVn
inV'^
^n^riB'n
n^'i^^K
n\bB'K
n^B'N
Hi'riK'K
^nW*"
^n\bV:
: : T
in^nB'^
nsn^jj'n
njn^V^
run^iVn
njn^riB'n*
in->K'n
irf^Vni
^inijirn
^n->nB'n
nan^a^n
njnyB'ri
nanbVn
nan^nB'n
n-ttra
D^^K*?
n^p^
n^riK'3
rh^l
rh^
H'^bB'O^
pWd
n^ntj'D^
5i8
Paradigms
G. Verbs mediae geminatae
Qal.
Ni2)Kal.
Ferf. Sing. 3. m.
on, 330*
- J - T
DC3 3DJ*
•• T ' - T
3- /■
2. m.
nen, n33D
7 - ' T -: IT
niio*
T
n3DJ*
T - T
ni3D3*
2. /
n^3p
n'i3p3
I. €.
^niip
•"jiBp?
Plur. 3. c.
son, 1330
^3D3
- T
2. m.
Dnisp
Dri^3pj
2. /.
|ri^3p
JO^^P?
I. c.
^3l3p
^31303
Inf.
3b*
3pn*
Inf. absol.
3i3D
T
3iDn, Don
Imf. Sing. m.
3b*
3pn
/.
»3D*
••ipn*
Plur. m.
«D
«pn
f'
"n3>3D"
'nrlpn'
__>k^
Inipf. Sing. 3.^?n.
3b^*
T
fe§67i>)
3b^*
3p^*
3- /•
3Dn
T
3Dn
3pPl
2. m.
3bn
T
3bn
3pri
2. f
•"sbn*
• T
>3Bri
>3pn*
I. c.
3bK
T
3bK
r
^^^
Plur. 3. w».
13D^
T
«p^
^3p^
3- /
waon*
T V •■. :
"n33bn"
- T ;
■n3"'3Dn'
. TV--.
2. w.
I3i5n
T
^aen
i3pri
2. /.
"n3"3Dnl
. T V •.. : J
■n33bn"
_ T : • _
■nj''3Dn'
I. c.
3b3
T
3D:
3p3
<
Im2yf. with Wdw consec. 3pj1*
(pause 3b;i)
Impf. vnth Suff.
>33D''*
... ^_.
Pali,, act.
2)a8S.
2?D
313D*
3D3
{fem. nspj)
Verbs mediae geminatae or double v 519
or double V.
Biph'U.
Hoph'al.
Po'^Z.
Pdal.
3pn, 3Dn*
3pin*
33iD*
3310*
naon*
T •• ••
T ~
n33iD'
T-: 1 .
niion*
T ■ -;
niioin'
T - 1 .
n33'lD
T : -
03310
ni3Dn
ni3Din
- 1
03310
033*10
^niiipn
i^nn , !i3pn
- 1
i3wn
••03310
13310
'•03310
13310
": 1
nniapn
Qn*i3Din'
- 1 .
Dri33io
V : - 1
003310
iniapn
jrii3pin
15??^°
J033iD
wiipn
■«'i3Diri
L - 1
133310
'133310
3Dn*
" T
3310
3Dn
•• T
T - T
3310
"33i0"
3Dn*
■• T
3310
''Bon
• •• T
i2Dn
•• T
wanting.
^3310'
• -: 1 _
13.!li0
wanting.
"ny£pn"
"n333iD
2?-, 3p;*
3B'» 3DV*
-■-. '
33i0^
33ioy
3Dn
•• T
3pin"
33iDri
33100
3Dn
•• T
3pVl
33iDr»
33iOJp
>3Dn"
• •• T ,
^3wn*
^??iDn'
^33100
3DN
'• T
[3p1N
'33iDK
33*I0K
i3|:, i3pj
1301^
133*10^
13310^
nj''£Dn*
T V • S
nj^lpvi]*
'n333ion"
n333lDO
i3Dn
*• T
lapvi
i33ion
-: 1 :
1331 DO
nyipn
TV- 1
•1333100"
n333ioo
3D3
•• T
"3013
"33103
'33103
3D'1
VT-
^W)*
[D33p^)
^^?i?*l9^
3D»*
•• ••
s^Id?
3WD
33100
T 1
520
Paradigms
H. Verbs l"a.
(?a?.
Niph'al.
Iliph'il
Hoph'al.
,
m'^*
tj«an*
Perf. Sing. 3. m.
'tyy
^^33
- T
\^ir\*
3- f'
T • •
2. m.
^fh
nK'jn
riE'jn
T ; - -..
2. f.
nc'ss
mh
riB'jn
I. c.
regular.
^riB>|3
••riB'Sn
^riB'jn
Plar. 3. c.
1E?33
iB'^an
2. m.
DriK'a?
DriK'jn
2. /
Ji?^??
jriB'jn
I?^?0
I. c.
^3K'23
l3B'2n
^E'sn
/«/.
rm*
^b3*
K'33n
••T •
{jj-.3n*
E'jn*
7w/. aoso7.
T
tJ?33n, ^1^33
tran*
Imp. Sing. m.
m*
^03*
^i!3n
tyan*
/•
^^?
^S3D3
^^3
^i:?33n
• :iT'
, <
wanting.
/"Zwr. m.
^{^3
1E'33n
; IT •
ll^^jn
f-
n3B'3
n3i5b3
n3E'33n
n3B'2n
T ; -
t: ;
T ; -T •
T : "-
Jmpf.Sing. 3. w.
tiy^
•
{j?>3^*
lifi"*
3./.
K'an
^sn
ly-aFi
tin
2. w.
E'^n
bbn
K'^ari
ran
2. /.
^K'ari
••bEn
^^^jri
^c'an
I. c.
E?3K
i>3K
{y^3X
mK
Plur. 3. w.
^^T.
I^B^
regular.
ii^""?^
'5^a.'
,<
n3ysn
T:
. <
.<
3- /•
T ; - •
n:mr\
n3t;'2n
2. w.
^K'sn
^^en
^^"tn
'.tj'an
2./.
'n3E'ipi
- T : - •
03^30'
[n3B'an'
"na^'sn"
I. c.
^i?
^33
{?>a3
E'a3
Shortened Imj}f. [Jussive).
^t*
Part. act.
t??.!)
T*
iy^3D*
pass.
K^3
U'aD
T -
Weak Verbs, n'b
521
/. Weak Verbs, N^'Q.
Qal.
Niph'al. IlipKil. HopKal.
Perf.
i'^N
i)3W* b''3sn* bxn*
Like Verbs jprimae gutturalis.
Inf.
i'3«, ^3><'
•• T I-
^'?«i:
- t:|t
Inf. ahaol.
^i3N
T 1"
wanting.
wanting.
Im]). Sing. m.
^=??*
^??n
Plur. m.
&c.
&C.
wanting.
/
"5 5'^^
/to;;/ Sing. 3. w.
3./-
In pause ''5^,1.*
bx^) &c.
- t:ii
&c.
2. m.
ba^n
2. /.
• : 1
I. c.
^3«*
Plur. 3. TO.
ibaN'
3./.
2. TO.
2. /.
I. C.
conaec.
Part. act.
pass.
^5«
^3X3 ^^DND
b^ar^
522
Paradigms
K. Weak Verbs,
Qal.
Niph'al.
Perf. Sing 3. m.
3. /.
2. m.
2. /.
1. c.
Plur. 3. c.
2. m.
2. /.
I. c.
3B''
regular.
3K'i3*
T : I
: t
Inf.
Inf. ab&ol. .
2)^
2mr]*
*' T *
wanting.
Imp. Sing. m.
;
n, 2B'*
'* T *
/.
>3B'
• : IT •
Plur. m.
^aB'
: IT •
/■
■n33K'^n'
_ T : - T • _
^>^
Imff. Sing. 3. m.
" ^^T
{}?TS*
3. /•
^W
tTT"
•• T •
2. m.
"^^^
{^Tri
•• T •
2. /.
• : r"
I. c.
2??'«
K'TK
•• T •
P?«r. 3. m.
: 1-
• 1*
:iT*
3./
njnE'ri
'nJB'Tn'
_ T : - T • _
2. w.
; 1"
; r
: |T •
2. /.
"n33B'n'
"njB'Tri'
"n|3K'^^ri]
I. c.
ne'i
K'T?
2B^3
Shortened Impf. (Jussive).
Im^if with Wdw consec. 2^^)*
Part. act.
pass.
3K"
2Wl
2my
^"Q [for V'Q).
Verbs jpi^opeydy "•"a 523
L. Verbs properly ''"2.
HijpKtl.
Hoflial.
Cial.
HipKil.
ymn*
nnn*
3?:
n-o'^n*
T •
T : 1
T : -
T ; -
nntsM
nae'in
ri3B«in
^?^^n
"•riac'in
^3B'sn
: 1
regular.
nrac'in
DP12B'5n
V : - 1"
I^?^i'7
|ri2^'in
^Pl^DNT
»;iK'in
«2B'^n
^J?^*n
n-imn*
-ymrs*
:
2>cj>n*
3K'in*
T
3!?^n*
2mT\*
3C*n*
wanting.
3E'V^-
n^^v
3^«*
2'13''^*
a''^'in
iB'^n
iD^ri
n^ti^n
y^Sn
nB'^n
3e*n
2'tD'Pl
"•n^in
• : 1
• : 1-
tn^c^ri
a'K;'iK
2B'>N
2^^N
rc'K
^a^|'i'»
UB'V
^nn^''
!|3'6\1
- T : ••
T : -
T : - •
^3''B'in
UB'Vl
: 1-
u^B'n
- T : - J
L T : - • _
n33D^n"
T ; •• •• _
TK'iJ
3B'«
3e^3
P'l?'?.
atj'r*
a^v.
nK'i'i
3K)^?1
3?V1
a^K'iD*
3cr
3'ti*0
2E^D*
T
524
Paradigms
M. Weak
^aZ.
Nijjh'al.
Hiph'il.
-^
Dip3*
Perf. Sing. 3. m.
Dir
DD*
D^pn*
3. /.
ni?i5*
nriD*
T "
n»ip5*
nci>pn*
2. m.
no^*
nnb*
T -
niD^py
n'lD^pn*
2./.
J^ioi?
■J?P'
'nioipj
nicpn
I. c.
^ri»i2
^rip
^nicipa
••niio^pn
Plur. 3. c.
loj?
v\h
^Dipj
^^^pn
2. m.
ariDi?
^m
Dn^oj?:
Dnto^ pn
2. /
{\W\
[I^^
|rii»ii53"
[iJniD^pn]
I. c.
ijpil
«no
"13'l01p3
i3iD"'pn
/**/.
DP*
D^pn*
D'-pn*
*' T
Inf. absol.
D^p*
3^03, D^pn*
opn*
Imp. Sing. m.
Dip*
Dipn*
opn*
/•
>»^p*
■••oipn"
"P'P'^*
Flur. m.
101^
^»ipn
^J2^^T\
/•
njol?*
"njopn"
/mp/. Sing. 3. m.
t«i5
:, d^p:*
Dip^*
D>pj*
3-/
Dipri
Dipn
D^pn
2. m.
Dipn
Dipn
D^pn
2./.
'lo^'^n*
>Dipri"
^OipJR*
I. c.
wpK
DipK
D^PK
PZ2*r. 3. m.
lOlj^J
SDip:
ID^pj
3. /
T ; T ' T V ' ;
nro^pn, mppn*
2. m.
loipri
^oipn
itD^pri
2./.
n^Dpri
'!^^»i?^"
I. c.
D1P3
Dip3
B^i??.
Shortened Imif,
Di^:*
dp:*
Impf. with Wdw consec.
DiJ'l (pause
Dpji*)
Dpn*
Impf. with Suff.
'^S'lK'r
"iD'P^*
Part. ac<.
DP*
T
D;p*
D^PJ^
cpo'
Verbs, vy.
Weak Verbs, '<*)) 525
K Weak Verbs, '"y.
Hoph'al.
Folel.
Polal
Qal
Nijih'al.
Di5in*
Dpip*
Dpip*
ir
P33*
nopin"
nppii7
"nopiip]
ma*
TT
njifij
T T_
riDj^in
nppip
rippip
ni:u3
T :
ripi5!in
"rippip"
"npp'ip]
^}^
■niji33
■••ruDi^in
^nppip
^rippip
'''rin
^riiju?
?Di?in
!)opip
^»e^i7
W3
T
nripi^in"
Drippiip"
DFiDpiip]
D|?32"
See
f!!"?i5'"['
fJ?PPi^
fnppip
"|ri:3
Verbs Vy.
■yppin
"^jppip
'«ppip
«|
Dj5^n*
Dpip
r?*
f3*
Dpip
vr
'"•pcip"
iDpiip
wanting.
'naoDip'
Di5V*
Q^ip^
Dpip^
^^K
Di^^n
Dpipri
Dpipn]
• T
upyK
Dpipn
Dpipri
ij^an
'ppin
[DpiN
^Dp!in
pp^n
DPU
^Dr:ip>
-; I :
njppipn
^»pipn
njppipn
"'»i:ipn
• -: '1 :
[DpipK
^»pii5^
nappipn
njppipri
[Dpip3
Dpipp
DQIO*
Dnipp
• • T
i5^aK
• T
*T
naban
^^^an
• T
naban
T- •• T
^^aa
ba^
••ann^
at?. D>ab
Dit:', D^B'
P^?
526
Paradigms
0. Weak
Qal.
Niph'al.
Pi'el.
\ Sing.
3. m.
T T
•• T
.. . J • T •
3- /•
T : |T
'"'?^'??
'nx^tp]
2. m.
T T T
nx-bo
T ■• T
nxi*D3*
T •■ ; *
nxx»*
2. /.
T T
•• T
J^^rfP?
'nx3^n"
I. c.
T T
•• T
^riNy»3
^nx^n
Plur.
3. c.
: IT
!|X^»3
1x^0
2. m.
T :
ori^.^'?
DnXi*D3
V •■ : •
cinxs^D
2./
I. c.
T T
•• T
jnxvp3'
Inf.
Inf. ahsol.
xyrsn
•• T •
Xy03
/m^. AS'mg'. m.
T :
xvtsn
•• T •
^?»p
/•
^xvp
• : ir • _
^x^p
P^wr. m.
ixxtp
'5x:;on
!|X5fp
/•
n3Xyo*
■n3x^n
['■^^^^P]
Im'pf. Sing. 3. m.
xyi^"**
•• T •
XJi*D"»
• - 1
3- /•
x::on
T ; *
x:^n
•■ T •
xiTpn
2, w.
xi'tsn
•• T •
x^fpri
2. /.
^xvjori
>xy?3n
• : T •
"\svpn"
I. c.
T : V
N^X
•• T V
><??P^
Plur. 3. 7n.
ixvp^
1XXQ''
!|«JfO^
3- /.
T V : •
n3xii3n*
T V T •
n3xmi*
2. w.
ixvipJ^
^x^sn
: IT •
'ixvpn"
2. /.
n3Xirr2n
T V : *
n3Xirtsn
T V T •
n3x^n
T. C.
X2?D3
rxyD3i
X^3
Shortened Im'pf. (Jussive).
Impf with Suff. '????0?, 1^5V0^
Part. act.
2)0 ss.
X^D3
■'3X»»''
XJklDO
Weak Verbs, x^'b
527
Verba, K"^.
Pual.
Hiph'il.
HopKal.
ffithpa'el.
NSD] K-ip
'^7'?'!'
N^pnn'
nssD
T • : •
nx^JDn
nxJTipnn
nxSro
T •■ V.
HN^pn*
riNypn]*
ns^pnn*
riNJfo
nK;fpn
nK;ft:n
"riNJfionn
^nN^p
^riNXJon
•• : •-.
"riN^nn
^K^on
iNjrpnn
V
DriN2n?n
DriNVion
DnsjkTonri'
/^«???
fnsyDn"
10^!^''?
inxj^nn
"13nJ0
"^:Nk>n
■«N^n
'«N^pnn
wanting.
N^on
wanting.
xsronn
Kxpn
wanting.
Nxpn
wanting.
^N^ifpn
wanting.
■•Nspnn
• : -
iNiripnn
'njKyon"
■ :
K^pn^
■>■■•.;_
N^pri
T ; ■•.
N2;pnn
N^^Dn
T : -s
N^rann
• : V. :
"•N^iori
^N^Dn
^Nspnn'
K^K
«7DS
T : •%
'^i^pn?
: "^ :
^N7p:
: : •-.
^NlfiP^^
njN^on*
T V : ■..
"njxyDnn"
: V. :
^X^iTDPl
: : X
^xifonn
njxifcn
T V ■•. ;
nixVpn
T V : V.
njN^pnn"
"NSD3
L T s :
N^yoj
T : N
'^<?^'??
Nxp:
'^?<^^-
• : -
NjfpnD
T : N
528
Paradigms
P. Weak
^a/.
Niph'al.
Ptel.
Perf, Sing. 3. m.
n^3*
nbaa*
nba*
T •
3- /•
nn^^*
nnbaa*
nnba*
2. m.
n^!?3*
n^ , n^bw*
nfa*
2. /.
n^ba
n'k?
n^ba
I. c.
^n*!)3
'n^b'aa
'n^^a, *n»b*3
Flur. 3. c.
i^a*
'.baa
'^1
2. m.
DD^ba
DC^^??]
Dn>ba
2- /
in^l'3
[|ri\ba3
[fO^^?]
I. C.
• T
^y%
la^b'a
Inf.
niba*
niban*
nib3*
Inf. ahsol.
n5a
T
npan, n"b33
nbs, n1>a
Imp. Sing. m.
n>3*
nban*
"T •
ba, nba*
/.
.br
*b3n*
• T •
^ba»
Plur, m.
^^?
^ban
)b3
/.
nr?r
["r?^-']
[^r^?]
/mp/. /S'tVjgf. 3. «i.
'■^^?:*
"fe*
nb3^*
3. /
nban
V ; •
n^aJ?
n^an
2. »i.
nban
nban
rhin
2. /.
'ban*
""•ban'
-■■'■•.
\ban*
I. e.
n^3K
1«> "^?«
n^a«
Plur. 3. m.
.ba^
6a^
^b3'
3. /.
na'b*an*
TV:'
na-'Van*
T VT •
na^b'an*
TV-:
2. m.
^ban
'ban
'ban
2./.
na^i^an
na^b'an
T *T •
na^b'an
T V- :
I. c.
n^??
[•■'^??j
"fe
Shortened Impf.
V
^r
^r
Impf imth Suff. ^3.^r*, ^b?:
^a^a-"*, '?ib3'
... -, > »: -,
Part, act,
pass.
nbli*
V
'^b3*
n^33*
n^ao*
IVeak Verbs^ n"!? 529
Verhs, n'^.
Fu'al.
Hijjh'tl.
Hoph'al.
Hithpa'el.
nban*
T ; •
njjan*
n^ann*
nn^a*
nrib?n*
nn^an*
T : ; T
Tin^ann]
T
4-, J^^'^li*
n^^an*
T •• • T
n-'^'^ann*
["^h]
T\\
■^, n\i'?i?
"n^ban"
[rf^inn"
'J?\?3
•
-, 'J^'.^?!?
''J!'\??7
^n\^lnn
^^arj
; T
i^nn
Do^^f
Dri''_
_, an\^an
l^O'.^an'
on^bnn
iC"'.^?
[1^\^?!?]
jri\f>an
|ri''^ann]
"1J\^3
w^jjan
"ia''b'an
•■ : T
[^a^^'ann
ni-)3*
ni^an*
ni^ann*
'^.5'?n
nban*
~ s •
nban*
^arin [n^ann'
wanting.
5^an
wanting.
i-)ann
[ny^ann"
•"ife*
n^?:*
n^a^i*
n^an^*
n^an
nban
V ; -
nban
[nVann"
n^ari
nban
n^??
n^ann
vhri"
-.J53ri*
>J)ari*
"•brin*
'n^ax
n^aK
nSax*
^^^^
^fc
^■!)a>
; T
%^IT\\
na^b'an*
T V : -
na'-S'an*
T V : T
\pyHm\
^•)ari
^^an
\S>tryn
na^Van
na^'pan
T V : -
na''b*ain
T V : T
"na^^'anri]
"n^aa
nb??
[n^w
'"ikri?
^r
ban^*
*?&*, ij'?-
n^ap*
n^anrp'
n^ao*
nbao*
COWLKT
M m
530
Pai'adigms
Q. Verbs n'6
I. Sing.
2. Sing. m.
2. Sing. f.
Perf. Qal. 3. m.
• - T
ir?J 3«?.
P. '^?'V
p. ^jy ,^3?
3- /.
"ar.B'y
2. m.
"'^n''?!
p. "3n"3y
2. f.
Pi. ''?n"s"i
I. c.
^I^n^Nl
PZwr. 3. c.
"jiB'y
I^K-)
I. c.
Pi. ^^3"^i5
Tmper. 2. m.
2- /
-ffip^. 'Tkj^
PZttr. 2. m.
Pi. ^3^33
Pi. ^1E)3
Impf. 3. m.
3.
/.
2.
m.
2.
/.
I.
c.
P/wr.
3-
m.
2.
m.
I.
c.
"JNT'
■•aKin
"3?xn
1?^55
Pi. 'fjinQj
Verbs 7\'h with SiifRoces
with Suffixes.
^nb'y
T T
Pi. in^3 Pi. nrijv
i:i?y
531
3. Sing. m. 3. Sing. f. i. P/wr. 3. PZwr. m.
WV
Hiph. Dn^j?n
Pi. "in^Da
nri''b'y Pt. '>i^''?1
Dn^jy
^n#y
T
n^n^Ni
T ■»
Hiph. ^i^-y^
C3}/"!
^T]^%
Hiph. D«n
Eiph. ^ni?^ri
Pi. ^niriB"'
PIKT'
nsKn""
niB'y:
Pi. ^^)T.
n'B'yn ZTtpA. ^J^nn
Pi. ««j?:
D>fn^
DB'JIJ.J
Pi, n^Dajp
D-HSX
'3RK'3
nsB'ya
TV -:i"
M m 2
D^YH
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
The numbers refer to the sections, except where otherwise indicated.
N. =note.
A-sounds, 8 a, 9 a ff.
Abbreviations, 5 m.
Absolute cases, 143 c n.
Abstract, for concrete, 83 c: abstr. ideas
expressed by the feminine, 122 g, r:
by fem. in ffl-, 86 & : by the plu-
ral, 124 a, d-f : with the article,
126 n.
Accents, 3 b : names and laws of, 15 :
of the poetical books, 15 h, i.
Accentuation, 3 b : double accentua-
tion in certain passages, i^P-
Accusative expressed by nS , x 1 7 : as
direct object of verb, 117; syntax
of pronominal object and second
accus., 117 e : introduced by 7 (esp.
late), 117 n: cognate accus., 117P-
r : pronominal suffix with dative
force, 117 x: with verbs of putting
on and off, 117J/, being filled, 117 s,
dwelling (rare) 117 bb: double
accus. (to clothe, present, support,
meet, &c. with), ii^cc-gg : accus. of
material (to make of), 117 hh: of
product (make into), 1 1 7 tt : of the
part affected, 117 U : of place, 118
d-g : of nearer definition, 118 h:
of time, 118 i-k: of cause, 118 Z :
defining the manner of an action,
ii8wi-r, 120 b : construed with pas-
sive verb, 121 o, 6.
Accusative and infinitive construc-
tion, 157 b N.
Acrophony, 5 e.
Acrostic poems, 5 h.
Adjectival idea expressed by a sub-
stantive in the genitive, 128 0, p,
135 n; by a substantive as predi-
cate, 14T c, d : adjective used as a
substantive in the genitive, 128 to,
133 h, cf. with ordinal numerals,
134 P> crid : used poetically for
a substantive, 1320 «': rarely
stands before the subst., 132 6. See
also Attributive ideas.
Adjectives, construction of, with sub-
stantives, 132: with the article,
126 u, i; : with art. when subst. is
without it, 1 26 10, X and n : without
the article when subst. definite,
1262: syntax of, as predicate in a
noun-clause, 145 r.
Adverbs, 100 : with suffixes, 100 o,p :
adverbial ideas expressed by the
infin. abs.,ii3fc-& : by infin.constr.,
114M and N : by finite verb, 120 d-h.
Adversative clauses, 163.
Afformatives of the perfect, 40 c, 44 :
of the imperfect, 40 c, 47 : of the
noun, 85 s-v, 86 h-l.
Agreement of members of a sentence
in gender and number, 145.
Aleph four times with Mappiq, 14 d :
affixed to 3rd plur. perf. (rare),
23 t, 44 Z: verbs X"D, 68.
Aleph prostheticum, 19 m and N.
Alphabet, old Hebrew, 5 a : origin
of, 6 9-
Alphabetic poems, 5 h.
Amarna letters, 2 & n ', 2 / and n *.
Anacoluthon, 167 b.
Answers, affirmative, 150*1 : negative,
150 n.
Any one, 1 39 d.
Aphaeresis, 19 ft, t, 66 a-c, 69 b, c,/-h.
Apocope, 19 i : in verbs H"?, 75 ^•
Aposiopesis, 117 /, 167 o.
Appellatives, 1256-^,
Apposition, 127/8, 1306 : in the wider
sense, 131 : to express attribute,
material, contents, measure, &c.,
131 c-e.
Arabic language and Arabisms, i b,
m, 22 s, 24 fif N, 35 i and n', 44 o,
47 a N, 48 b, 58 I.
Aramaic language and Aramaisms,
534
Index of Subjects
I cm, 2 q, t, 24 e, 44 c, 47 a n, c n :
Pi'el, 52 a : Nun epentheticuin,
58 i-l : Aram, forms of verbs, VV,
67 g : of verbs W, 72 ee : of verbs
n"7, 75 ftA: Aram, termination of
the feminine, 80 h: of the plural,
87 e.
Araq al-Emir, inscription of, 5 a.
Archaisms, 2 k, q: supposed, in the
Pentateuch, 2 n.
Article, 35 : syntax of, 126 : with
demonstrative force, 126 a, b :
before names of classes, 1 26 l-n :
in comparisons, 1260, cf. p: with
the attributive, 126 u-x: used as a
relative, 138 i, k : punctuation of,
35, a-k, 0 : rarely retained after pre-
positions, 35 n : original form of,
35 Z : K elided after it, 35 d : omitted
with n"(, riNT, nVs after a subst.
with pronom. sufif., 126 j/: found
anomalously with a noun in constr.
St., 12'jf-i.
Ashdod, language of, 2 w.
Asher, ben, 7 A n'.
Aspirates, 6 n.
Asseverations, 149.
Assimilation, 19 b-f, 54 c, d, 66 d-g : of
1 and '> 71 : ' backward-assimila-
tion,' 19/ N.
Assuan papyri, i m.
Assyrian language, i d.
Asyndeton, cases of, 120 g, A, 154 a
N (a).
Athe merahiq, 20/, g.
Athnah, chief divider of verse in
prose, 15 /: secondary divider in
poetry, 15^.
Attraction, cases of, 145 u n', 146 a.
Attribute, see Adjective.
Attributive ideas expressed by tJ'^X,
~|3 ?y3 followed by a genitive,
128 s-v: by the genitive, 128 0, p,
135 m : by a substantive in appo-
sition, 131 c-e : by a subst. as pre-
dicate, 141 c, d : negative expressed
by a noun-clause, 152 u, v. See also
Adjectival idea.
Babylonian language, i a, d, e, i.
Babylonian punctuation, 42 n '.
B*gadk*phath letters, 3d, 6 n, 12 a.
13 c: aspiration of, 21.
Ben Abher's recension of the text,
7 /l n2.
Ben Naphthali's recension of the
text, 7 /« N 2.
Beth essentiae, 119 i : pretii, 119 p.
Bodily and mental defects denoted
by adjectives of the form 7^^^
84'' d.
Boustrophedon, i ft n '', 5 d n ^.
Ganaanite branch of the Semitic
languages, i & (ii).
Canaanite glosses in the cuneiform
tablets of Tell el-Amarna, 2 / n 1.
Cardinal numbers, 97.
Case-endings, remains of early, 90 :
n as locative, 90 c e, of time,
90 h, in place-names and as a poeti-
cal form without meaning, 90/, g
with N : punctuation and tone, 90 i :
I , 90 k-m, 0 : i- and ^-, 90 fc, w, 0.
Cases, absolute, 143c n : instrumental,
144 w N,
Casus pendens, various uses of, iii h,
112 n, t, mm, 00, 116 u, 143, 159 i.
Causal clauses, 106/, 112 nn: syntax
of, 158.
Chaldee, incorrect use of the term,
I c N.
Changes of consonants, 19.
Chiasmus in the arrangement of
words in parallel members of a
verse, 114 rN, 142 /n.
Circumstantial clauses, 156 : express-
ing negative qualities, 152 m: noun-
clauses, 156 c : verbal, 156 d.
Citation, formulae of, 150 e.
Cognate accusative, ii'jp-r.
Cohortative, 48 b : form of, 48 c, rf :
meaning, 48 e : syntax of, 108 :
very rare in verbs n"?, 75 i.
Coins, Hebrew, 2 d (4).
Collective nouns, 1 23 a, b : in fern,
sing., 122 s : names of classes used
collectively, 126 l-p : with the plu-
ral of the adj. or ptcp., 132 g :
with the predicate in the plur.
masc, 145 b-e, in 3rd pi. fem., 145 c
(|Nif), in masc. sing., 145/, in sing,
followed by plur., 145 g, in fem.
sing., 145 A; (cf. 135^).
Common gender, 122 b, d.
Comparatio decurtata, 1 18 r n, 133 e n.
Comparative, expression of, 1 33 a-/.
Comparative clauses, 161.
Comparison, use of article in, 126 0, p.
Compensatory lengthening, 25 a, 27 e,
e-h.
Composition of words, 30 p, (b), r,
81 d, 152 as : of particles, 99 e.
Compound ideas, how thrown into
the plural, i24p~r: with the article,
127 e : with suffixes, 135 n.
Compounds formed by X7 with a sub-
stantive or adjective, 152 a ».
Index of Subjects
535
Concessive clauses, 160.
Concord of subject and object in
gender and number, 145 a-t : cases
of false concord, 145 u.
Conditional sentences, perfect in,
io6p: imperf. in, 107 x: cohorta-
tive in, 108 e,f: jussive in, 109 h :
imperat. in, no/; ptcp. in, 159 v:
ptcp. without DN, 116 w, 159 i :
perf. consec. in apodosis, 112 ff-mm:
different types of, 159 : without
conditional particle, 112 kk, II, 159
h-k.
Conjugations, or verba derivata, 38 b,
39 c, rf : number and arrangement
of. 39 «-/: Niph'al, 51 : Pi'el and
Pu'al, 52 : Hiph il and Hoph'al, 53:
Hithpa'el, 54 : the less common
conjugations, 39 g, 55 : conjugation
of aim or attack (Po'el), 55 c.
Conjunctions, 104.
Conjunctive accents, 15 jr, i.
Consecutio temporum, perf. and im-
perf. with waw consec, 49 : perf.
with waw consec, 112.
Consecutive clauses, 107 u: syntax
of, 166.
Consonants, 5 : changes of, 19 : pro-
nunciation and division of, 6 :
transcription of their names, 5/N :
weak consonants, 7 a-g : softening
of, 19 0.
Constructio ad sensum, 132 g, 145 a-l :
asyndetos, 120 g, h, 154 a n (a) :
praegnans, i'i^x,y,ff, gg.
Continuous actjon expressed by infin^.
abs., 113 s-u.
Continuous progress expressed by
duplication of a word, 133 A;.
Contraction of vowels, 7 a.
Co-ordination of verbal ideas instead
of subordination, 120.
Copula, see Waw copulativum : verbal^
how expressed, 141 /-;«.
Cuneiform inscriptions, id, m n^,
5 9 (b), 6 b.
Dagei forte, 12 : in place of a letter
assimilated, 19 b-f: orthophoni-
cum, 20 g, 13 c : necessarium,,com-
pensativum, characteristicum, 20a :
euphonicum, 20 c : conjunctivum,
20 c-f: dirimens, 20 h : affectuo-
Bum, 20 i : firmativum, 20 k : im-
plicituni, 20 m, 22 c: omission of,
20 1, m : in gutturals, 22 b, s : occa-
sionally in "I, 22 q (a), s: four times
in N (ace to others Mappiq), 14 d:
omitted sometimes in 2nd radical
of verbs i?"y, 67 g, dd. See aUo
Strengthening.
Dages lene, 13, 21: after niH^ (i.e.
^jhX), 21 c: omitted anomalously
after consonantal "| and % 21c: ex-
ceptional cases of (33 33 S3 )D3'\
21 d. \ :' :' :J :/>
Dative, 119 s.
Dativus ethicus, 119 s, 1351: dative
expressed by a sufiBx, 117 a;.
Decalogue, double accentuation of,
15 i'-
Dehiq, 20 c.
Denominative nouns, see Nouns :
verbs, see Verb.
Desiderative sentences, 151.
Determination of nouns, 125 : omis-
sion of it, 117 q, Z26p: determina-
tion of proper names, 125 c-/:
determination by the article, 126 :
by a following determinate geni-
tive, 127 : determination of nu-
merals, 134 fc.
Diacritical points, see Puncta extra-
ordinaria.
Dialects in the 0. T., 3 w.
Diminutives, 86 g and n.
Diphthongs, 7 a, 8 m, 24/.
Disjunctive accents, 15/, h.
Disjunctive questions, 1^0 /-i.
Dissimilation of vowels, 27 x.
Distributive numerals, 134 q.
Doubling of consonants, see Strength-
ening.
Dual, 88: with the plural of the
adjective, 132/: with predicate in
the plur., 145 n: in numerals, 97 gr,
h, 134 r : place-names doubtfully
so explained, 88 c.
E-sounds, 7 a, b, e, 8 b, g i-m.
Each, every, how expressed, 139 b, c.
East Semitic, i d.
Elatives, 85 b, 133 a n.
Elegy, rhythm of, in Hebrew, 2 r.
Elision, see Syncope and elision.
Ellipse of the pronominal object,
117/: other cases of ellipse (real or
apparent), 116 s, 118 sn (in com-
parisons), 134 n (of names of mea-
sures, weights, &c.), 144 0 (due to
corruption).
'Emblematic Mashal,' 161 a n.
Emphasis expressed by infin. abs.,
114 l-r, v-x: by cognate accus., 113 ?«
(end) : by cognate accus. with de-
fining adjective, ii'jq: by duplica-
tion of a word, 123 e, 133 k. I: by
combination of different deriva-
tives from the same root, 133 J: by
536
Index of Subjects
the article or a genitire (the supec-
lative degree), 1 33 g-i : by a personal
pronoun added to the subject,
135 a, c: by the pronoun annexed
in the nominative to the suffix or
to a noun, 135 d-h : by nS with the
suffix, 135 A: : by position, 142 /, g,
152 e (after H?), 152 w (after jD).
Emphasis on indeterminate nouns,
117 q, 125 c.
Enallage of gender, 135 0, 144 a.
Epicene nouns, 122 &, e-g.
Epithets, poetical, used as substan-
tives, 132 o N.
Era, Jewish, 5 I.
Ethical dative, 119 s, 135 i.
Ethiopic, I b (i), 30 p n.
Exceptive clauses, 163 c.
Exclamations, 146 b (ySp= hark) : with
nun, 147 b : without npT\, 147 c:
with other interjections, 147 d :
expressing a wish, 148 a-d : in form
of a question expressing irony or
indignation, 148 a, b ; expressed by
•"3, 148 d, 151.
Extension of influence of a preposi-
tion over a parallel clause, 119 hh :
of a negative, 152 z : of an inter-
rogative, 150 m : of a conjunction,
150 m N.
Extension, plurals of, 124 a-g.
Feminine, forms of, 80, 94 : ending
in n_^, 80/, n_, 80 g, '>-^, Sol:
in the constr. state, 89 e : in the
plural, 87 i-l : paradigms, 95 : of
a land or people, 122 h, i : of ab-
stract ideas, 1 2 2 g : of holders of
offices ^, 122 r : of collectives, 122 s :
in verb or pronoun to express it,
i35p: in impersonal verbs (i< rains),
144 6, c : in the predicate of collec-
tive plurals, 145 k (cf. fem. of
pronoun referring to collectives,
135 P)- dislike of the fem. form,
132 d, 145 J), < : fem. forms of the
infinitive, 45 d, 66 6, g, h, 69 b (C), c :
fem. nouns with plur. in D^-^-, 87 q :
fem. denoting artificial (as opposed
to natural) objects, 122 m, in plur.
(as opp. to dual), 87 0.
Feminine pronoun = English it, 135J3,
144 b, c.
Figura etymologica, see Schema ety-
mologicum.
Final clauses, 107 q (imperf.), 109/, g
(jussive): syntax of, 165.
Final letters, 5 c.
Formae mixtae, 78 d.
Formative letters, or serviles, 30 c:
in formation of nouns, 81 b, 85.
Frequentative force of imperf., 1076-3:
of perf. with waw consec, 112 e-o,
cf. kk, II.
Fulcra, 8 ^ n.
Future tense, 47 a n : futurum ex-
actum, 106 0, 107 I : futurum in-
stans, 116 p.
Ga'ya, 16 c, g, h.
Ge'ez, I b (i).
Gemara, i c, 3 a.
Gender of nouns, 122 : in the con-
struction of subject and predicate,
145 : irregularities in use of, no k,
135 0, 144 a, 145 i), t, u.
Genitive, expression of, 89, 127 a,
128 : epexegetical or explicative,
128 k-q, X, y : subjective, 128 g,
135 m: objective, 128 h, 135 m:
partitive, 128 i, r: expressing the
genus, I, the species, m : expressed
periphrastically by p, 129 a-/: by
b l^K, 129 a, h,
Gentiiic names, in "i.— , 86 h: deter-
mination of, 125 e: of compounds
(as "•ro":"!?). 127 d.
Geogi-aphical names with a following
genitive, 125 h: with the article
(appellatives), 1256.
Germanic languages, i e.
Gerund, 45 /, g.
Grammarians, early, p. 20 n '.
Gutturals, pronunciation of, 6 c-/, 0,
r : peculiarities of, 22 : in verbal
stems, 62-65.
Hadad inscription, i m.
Hateph-Pathah, 10/, g : shorter than
' riateph-S'ghol, 27 r, 63/.
Hateph-Qames, 10 f, h.
Hateph-S'ghoi, 10/.
He interrogative, pointing of, loo/c-n.
He locale, 90 c-».
Hebrew language, i a, b (ii) : history
of, 2 : remains of the literature,
2 d, I, 0: dialects of, 2 w : gram-
matical treatment of, 3 : system of
writing, 2 i, 5.
Hebrews, 2 b.
Helping vowels, 9 h, m, 28 e (to keep
a syllable open), 84" a, 93 c (in
segholates).
» Cf. Driver, Introd.^, p. 466 : Segal, Misn. Heir., p. 63.
Index of Subjects
s-^i
Himyaritic, i 6 (i) : writing, i A; n'.
Hiph'il, 53: 'internal,' 53 d: infini-
tive pointed -n , 53 Z : the PI in infin.
elided after preposition, 53 g:imperf.
with __ for ___ (as 1D"}T), 53 n:
with n retained in imperf. after
preformatives, 535: denominatives
in Hiph., 539.
Hireq, different kinds of, 8 6, 9 ff, A :
compaginis, 90 k-n.
Hithpa'61, 54 : sometimes construed
with an accusative, 54/, Wj w.
Hithpa'lel, 55 d, 72 m, 75 kk.
Hithpalpel, 55 g, 67 I.
Hithpo'el, 65 b, 67 I.
Holem, 8 c-g : written defectively,
8 i-l : its origin, 9 p-s : changed to
qames in pause, 29 u.
Homogeneous consonants, 6g: vowels,
24 ?>,/•
Homorganic consonants, 6 q.
Hoph'al, 53 b, h, s,t: n retained once
in ptcp., 53 s.
Hothpa'al, 54 b, h, L
Hypothetical sentences, see Con-
ditional sentences.
I-sounds, 8 5, g g, h: from a 27 s, < :
in impf., 47 b : in Niph., 51 a : in
Pi , 52 a: in Hiph., 53a : in nouns
with preformative D, 85/: length-
ened to e, 93 c.
Imperative, forms in Qal, 46 : short-
ened and lengthened forms of,
4^ ^'h 75 ^ '■ with suflBxes, 6i/-h:
syntax of, no: infinitive absolute
used with force of imperative,
113 hb.
Imperfect, the name, 47 a n : forma-
tion and inflexion of, 47 : unusual
forms of, 47 k : form njpDpn as
3rd fern. sing, or 2nd masc. sing.,
47 k : 3rd pi. masc. in p, 47 »i : jus-
sive and cohortative forms of, 48 :
with waw consecutive, 49 c-g, in:
with suflBxes, 60: its syntax (alone),
107 : expressing custom or habit,
107 e, g : with waw consec, in :
subordinated to another verb, 120 c.
Imperfect Hiph'il with for __
(as ^3")"!^), 53 n : with n retained
after preformatives, 53 q.
Impersonal construction of nTI, &c.,
144 6: impersonal passive, 121 a.
Imprecation, formulae of, 149 d.
Incomplete retrocession of the tone,
39/
Indefinite subject of verb, expressed
by 3rd masc. sing., 144 d, e, by 3rd
plur., 144/, g, by 2nd sing. masc.
(rare), 144 h, by ptcp. plur., 144 i,
by passive, k.
Indeterminateness expressing am-
plification, 125 c.
Indogermanic languages compared,
I e, g, h, i (loan-words in), 10 eN ',
20 In, 22 c n, 27 t N, 31 a, 33 a,
51 c-e, 53/ N, 53srN, 55/ n, 996
and N, 132 a N, 133 bN', 135 i n,
qm, 145 fcN', 155 bN.
Infinitive, 45 : with suffixes, 61 a-e :
use of the infinitive absolute, 113:
as a casus adverbialis, 113 h-k: to
strengthen the idea of the verb,
113 Z-r : inj)lace of the finite verb,
113 y~gg : infinitive construct, un-
usual forms in Qal, 45 c-e, in Pi'el,
52 p (cf. 84* e), in Hiph'il, 53 ?,
86 k, in Hithpa'el, 54 fc : of JDi
66 J : in verbs V"V, 67 0 : in *"D,
69 TO with N : in V'J? (Hiph.), 72 s,
cf. 85 c: K"i5 74 /i, 75 qq : H"^, 75 n
(cf. 69 m n), ff, kk : syntax of the
infin. constr., 1 14 : with 7 to express
a future, 114^-^, obligation, 114/,
as object of another verb, 114 m,
gerundial, 114 0: after p^, 114 j) :
infinitive construct continued by
a finite verb, ii4r: how negatived,
114 s: construction with subject
and object, 115: infinitive Hiph'il
pointed -H, 53 I, with H elided
after preposition, 53 3: Niph'al
with n elided, 51 I.
Instrument, introduced by 3, 119 0 :
accusative as a supposed casus
instrumentalis, 144 w n.
Interjections, 30 s, 105 : syntax of,
148.
Interpunctuation, the accents as
marks of, 15 d, m-o.
Interrogative sentences, 107 t, 150 :
disjunctive, 150c, g : indirect, 150*:
expressing a wish, 151 a, b : ex-
pressed without an interrog. par-
ticle, 150 a, b.
Interrogative words and particles,
150 c, d.
Involved series of sentences, 167 c.
Jews, Jewish, 2 o.
Jussive, forms of, 48 a-c,/-h : syntax
of, 109 : used absolutely, 109 b, c :
depending on another verb, 109/,
g,i : in conditional sentences, 109 h,
i59d: jussive forms in poetry with-
out jussive force, 109 k.
538
Index of Subjects
Eaph veritatis, ii8 x.
K«thibh, 17 a-c.
Lamed auetoris, 129 c.
Lamentation metre, 2 r.
Letters, forms and names of, 5 a, h,
e, / : final, 5 c : order of, 5 h, i -.
numerical value, 5 k.
Litterae dilatabiles, 5 d : maiusculae,
minusculae, suspensae, 5^1: spi-
rantes, 6 n : quiescibiles, 8 A n, 23 :
incompatibiles, 30 m n : serviles,
30 jr, 81 6 : compaginis, 90 k-o.
Loan-words in Hebrew and Greek, i i.
Locative, 90 a, c-i.
Mandaeans, i c.
Mappiq, 8 wi n 1, 14 a-d : omitted in
3rd fem. sing, suffix of verb, 58 g:
of noun, 91 e : in PO, 103 gr (end) :
found four times in N, 14 d.
Maqqeph, 9m(c, d), 16 a, b.
Masculine as prior gender, 122 g,
146 d: masc. nouns with plur.
in ni-, 87 m-p.
Masora and Masoretic text, 3 6, c :
masora marginalis (magna and
parva) and finalis, j'j d, e.
Masoretic terms explained, 17 e.
Material expressed by tho genitive,
128 0, 135 n.
Matres lectionis, 8 h ta.
MeSa' inscription, i b (ii),fc, 2 d, final
vowels in, 7 6-d n^: •]:X = "'33X
p. 105 n: Nn = Nin, 32 &n: waw
consecutive, 49 a n: the forms
DnnSt, &c., 54 Z: nSD^, 69 an:
ljy>*) 75 & N : fem. sing. abs. in D-,
80/ n: plur. masc. in [-, 87 e n :
suffixes, 91 A; N : the imperfect,
107 6 N^: impf. consec. iiiAn:
article omitted with DNT though
the noun has it, 126 y: use of the
separate pronoun, 135 a n: casus
pendens, 143 6n.
Metathesis, see Transposition.
Metheg, distinguishing a from 0, 9 u,
V : marks secondary tone, 15 c, 29 b,
20/: various kinds of, 16 c-i : with
Bhort vowel in open syllable, 26 i~l
(but cf. 0 n) : with sere in closed
ultima, 29/: in perf. consec. 49 i.
Metre in Hebrew, 2 r.
Mil'el and Milra', 15 c, 20/.
Mishna, 3 a.
Mixed forms, 78 d.
Moods, expression of, 40 a, 106 p,
107 m-x : modus rei repetitae (im-
perf. as frequentative), 107 e.
Multiplicatives (once, twice, &c.), how
expressed, 1 34 r.
Nabataean inscriptions, i c.
Naphthali, ben, 'j h s.
Names of countries, peoples, and
towns, fem., 1221: of places and
peoples with the article, 125 ti n, e :
with a following genitive, 125 h.
Nasog ahor, 29 e.
Negative sentences, 152.
Negatives, 152 : two negatives in-
tensify negation, 152 1/ : influence
extending over a following clause,
152 3.
Neuter, wanting in Hebrew, 80 a:
expressed by feminine, 1223 with n,
135 P : by plur. of adjectives, 1223:
by suffix of 3rd plur., 135 p; in
pronoun, 136 6, in verb, 144 b, c.
Niph'al, 51 : tolerativum, 51 c : re-
flexive and reciprocal senses of,
51 c-e: infin. with H elided after
a preposition, 51 L
Nithqattel, 55 k (9).
Nomen regens and rectum, 89 a.
Nomen unitatis, 122 t.
Nominativus pendens resumed by
a pronoun, 143.
North Semitic, i c
Nota accusativi, 57 : when used,
117 a-e.
Nothing, no one, how expressed, 1 39 d.
Noun-clauses, ptcp. in, 116 »i-r: de-
fined, 1400: syntax of, 141 : short-
ened unusually (rare), 1476: nega-
tived by px and iS, 152 a, d, i-m:
relative, 155 e.
Noun-forms with verbal force ''no-
mina verbi), 45 e (with prefixed
tt), "5 d-
Nouns, derivation and various kinds
of, 81 : primitive, 30 /, 79 a, 82 :
on nouns in general, 83 : forms do-
rived from the simple stem, 84**,
from intensive stems, 84^ : nouns
formed with preformatives (X , n ,
D, &c.), 85 b-r, with afi"ormatives,
85S-V: quadriliterals and quinque-
literals, 85 w : denominatives, 86 :
with pronominal suffixes, 91 : para-
digms of, 93 : forms with peculiar
flexion (3K^ HN, &c.), 96 : distinc-
tions of gender in, 122 : collectives,
123a, b: with the article, 126: ap-
pellatives, 125 e~jr: nomina unitatis,
122 s, t, 123 b : abstracts, see Ab-
stract. See also Names.
Number in the construction of subject
and predicate, 145.
Index of Subjects
539
Number of words in the 0. T. , 2 iv n.
Numeral adverbs, 124 r.
Numerals, 97 : syntax of, 134 : order
of compound numerals in different
books, 134 c N, h, i.
Numeration, ascending (rhetorical
figure), cases of, 134 s.
Numerical signs, 5 k.
Nun paragogicum, in imperf., 47 m :
in perf. (?), 44 I: assimilation of
Nun, 19 &, c, 66 d: Nun energicum
(demonstrativum, epentheticum"),
58 i-l : inversum, 5 n.
0-sounds, 8 c, rf, 9 p-s.
Oaths, formulae of, 149.
Object, in the accusative, 117 : intro-
duced by p, 143 e: introduced
by 3 instrumenti, 119 ?: absolute
or internal (cognate accusative),
W] p,q: dative expressed by accus.
suffixes, 117 a;.
Object of verb anticipated by pro-
nom. suffix, as in Aram., 131 m, 0.
Object-clauses, 157.
Occupations denoted by nouns of the
form^;2i5, 84'' 6.
Old Hebrew, j k, 2 a.
'6I6 w^ydredh, principal divider of
verse in poetry, 15 b.
One,indefinite,how expressed, 144 fZ- A:.
Onomatopoetica, i h, 30 h.
Optative, 109 b, c.
Oratio obliqua, how expressed, 157.
Order of the alphabet, 5 h, i.
Order of words, 114 rN (chiasmus):
in noun-clauses, 141 l-n : varieties
of, in verbal clauses, 142 a,f,g: with
the infinitive constr., 115 e-k.
Ordinal numbers, 98, 134 0, p.
Oriental and Occidental texts, 7 A n.
Orthography of Hebrew in the maso-
retic text and previously, 7.
Pa'lel, 55 £?: in three H"? verbs, "jc^kk.
Panammu inscription, i m.
Papyri of Assuan, i m.
Parallel texts, 3 g.
Parallelism of members, 2 q, ifio h.
Participle, forms of, in Qal, 50 :
Niph'al, 51 a: Pi'el and Pu'al, 52
a-c: with aphaeresis of ID, 52 s:
Hiph'il and Hoph'al, 53 a, b :
anomalous forms in Hiph., 530:
with suffix, 61 h : fem. in PI
8408, 94 i: plur. in C^-^ 93 99;
force of, 107 d : syntax of, 116 : con-
strued as verb or noun, 116 /-i:
passive ptcp. construed with accus.
or genitive, 116 k, I: of imminent
future, 116 p : subject with n^n (of
continuous action), 116 r; subject
omitted, 116 s, t : participle abso-
lute, 116 Ml : continued by finite
verb, 116 X.
Particles, 99.
Partitive sense of 3, 119 m: of |0,
1 19 IV N.
Paseq, p. 59 N ^.
Passive, 39 e, 51 / (Niph'al) : pro-
bable passives of Qal, 526, 53 m :
construction of passives, 121 : ex-
pressed by the 3rd plur. active,
144 /, g, by the active participle,
1441: impersonal passive, 121a:
passive verbs construed with HN,
121 a, b: agent after passive ex-
pressed by b, |tt, and (rarely) 3,
121/.
Pathah, 8 a, 9 e : preferred with
gutturals, 22 d: furtive, 8/, 22/, fir,
65 a-e: as a helping vowel, 27 r,
28 c, e N «, 65 g, 84<* a : in the imper-
fect of verbs H"^ , 76 fcb : in pause
for Sere, 29 g, 51 w : before a guttural
(esp. n) with Qames changed to
S^ghol, 27 q, 291-: in perf. Pi'el for
Sere, 52 a, L
Patronymics, 86 h.
Pause, 29 i-v : pausal forms with
lesser distinctive accents, 29 i.
po'al'al, 55 e. , . ,
Pentateuch, linguistic character of,
2 m, n.
Perfect, 40 : flexion of, 44 : 3rd fem.
sing, in D.^, 44/. 72 0: 2nd fem.
sing, in *n, 44 '^ = "t sing, in n^
441: 3rd plur. in IH?). 44^: did
Hebrew possess a 3rd pi. fem, in
n ? 44 m : contraction of last
radical with aCformative of perfect,
44 0 : meaning of, 47 a n : with
suffixes, 59: syntax of, 106: not
precative, 106 n h '^ : perfectum con-
fidentiae,io6n:propheticum, io6n:
with ) consec, 49 a, ch.inge of
tone, 'h-l, syntax, 112 : with )
consec. as a frequentative, it 2 e-o,
dd, ee : carrying on the protasis,
112 p, introducing the apodosis,
112 ff-ii: with simple ^ of a single
act, in narrative, 1 1 2 pp-uu.
Periphrastic expression of qualities
by means of B^X, "I?, ^y?, I28s-r.
Periphrastic future, 114P N,
Permutation, 131 fc.
540
Index of Subjects
Permutative, 131 fc-o
Person, abrupt changes of, in poetry,
144 p.
Personification of countries or peoples,
122 i.
Phoenician and
I a, h (ii), 2 /,
§ 34 nS 36 N,
Punic
10 e N 1
49 a N,
language,
p. 106 N,
80/, 87 d:
writing, \ I, 'j d-s.
Phonetic system of Hebrew, 6 0, p.
Phonetics, 6 a, b.
Pi'el, 52: privativum, 52/1: inten-
sive sense of, 52/, k: rare in verbs
V'V, 72 rM.
Pi'lel, 55 d : in verbs V'J?, 72 m.
Pilpel, 55/: in verbs V"V, 67 i : in
verbs V'V, 72 m.
Pleonastic use of the pronoun, 135
a,b: of the negative, 152 ?/.
Pluperfect, 106/, 11 1 q: pluperf. sub-
junctive, 106 p.
Plural, terminations of, 87: in P— ^
87 e : 1 '• D not plural
endings, 87 f-h: double plural
ending in constr. st. of certain
words, 87 s : double plur. of subst.
and following genitive, 124 3 : uses
and senses of, 124: unusual con-
structions of, 145 h-m : plur. forms
of prepositions, 103 n, 0 : plur. suf-
fix referring to collective singular,
135 p : plur. predicate of a col-
lective singular, 145 b-g.
Pluralia tan turn, 124/N.
Pluralis excellentiae or majestatis,
124 g-i and n: its construction,
132 h : pi. of extension, 124 a-c:
intensive pi., 124 a, d, e : of the
result or product, 124m: amplify-
ing plur., 124 6, d-f: expressing
abstract ideas, 124 d,f: pi. of pro-
noun to denote a group of actions
Plurals of compound ideas, 12^ p-r:
of names of animals or things con-
strued with a fem. sing., 145 fc.
Po'el, 56 &, c : in verbs V'% 67 I.
Poetic style, 2 q-s.
Point used to divide words, 3 ff n,
Polpal, 55/.
Polysyndeton, 154 a n.
Potential sense of the imperfect,
107 r-w.
Precative, 109 b, c.
Predicate, without the ai*ticle, i26i,k:
agreeing (or not) with the subject,
145: with compound subj., 146:
attracted to the principal idea of
a compound subject, 146 a : subst.
as predicate where we should use
an adjective, 141 c, d.
Prefixes, see Prepositions.
Preformatives of the imperfect, 47 :
of the noun, 85.
Pregnant construction with preposi-
tions, 119 ee : with |0j 119 x, y,ff:
with nn?<, bi<, risnpb, a, p,
119 99-
Prepositions, loi : prefixed, 102 : with
suffixes, 103 : under the govern-
ment of the verb, 119: compound
prepositions, 119 b~e: chief mean-
ings of, ijX, 3, !?, p, hv, "9 9-dd :
pregnant uses of, iig ee-gg : force
of, extending over parallel clause,
119 M : with adverbs (rare), 119 ii:
prep. (esp. 3) not used after 3^
118 s-w, found exceptionally, 118 s
N.
Present expressed by the Perfect,
106 g, h.
Preterite, see Perfect. ,
Pretonic vowels, 26 e : with 3, 3, ?,
102 f-k: with Dy before suffix, 103c:
with 1, 104 gr.
Printed texts, earliest Hebrew, 3 e n.
Prohibitions, expressed by ?S or iO
with jussive or imperfect, 107 0,
109 c, d, 152/.
Pronominal ideas expressed by sub-
stantives, 139.
Pronominal suffix anticipating noun,
attached to verb, 131 m, 0 ; to
subst. or prep., 131 n.
Pronouns, 32 : syntax of, 135-8 : per-
sonal, 32, 135 : oblique cases of,
I35t-fc: suffixes, 33, with the verb,
58, with the noun, 91, with adverbs,
100 0, p, with prepositions, 103 :
suffix of 3rd fem. sing, referring to
entire sentences, 135 P : demon-
strative, 34, 136, used relatively,
13891, A: relative, 36, 138: indefi-
nite, 37 g, 137 c: interrogative,
37 a-/, 137 a-c: suffix reflexive,
1351, A; : suffix possessive, 33, 135
m-o : suffix as genitive, subjective
or objective, 135 m : separate pro-
noun in nominative emphasizing
a suffix, li^d-h: reciprocal, 139c
\\ith N, e.
Pronunciation of Hebrew, 6 a, b, 48/.
Prosthetic Aleph, 19 m.
Pu'al, 52 b-d, h (end), q-s : as passive
of Qal, 52 e.
Pu'lal, 55 d.
Puncta extraordinaria, 6 n.
Index of Subjects
541
Punctuation, Babylonian, 8 jr N.
Punic, see Phoenician.
Qal, form and meaning of, 43 : pro-
bable passives of, 52 e, 53 m.
Qames, 80,9 a-d : its pronunciation,
8 d: Qames impurum, 25 c.
Qames-hatuph, 8 c, 9s: how distin-
guished from Qames, 9 u, v.
Q*re, 17 a, 6 : perpetuum, 17 c,
Qibbus, 8 c, 9 n, 0.
Qina-metre, 2 r.
Quadriliterals, 30 p, 5 : nouns, 85 w :
verbs, 56.
Quantity of vowels, p. 40 (Prelimin-
ary remark).
Questions indicated by tone, 150 a, & :
disjunctive, 150 fir: double, 150^:
indirect, 150 i: expressing rhetori-
cally a denial, 148 c, 150 d, 151 a, b.
Quiescent letters, see Letters.
Quinqueliterals, ^op, r, 85 w.
Radical letters, 30 c-e.
Raphe, 6 n, 14 e.
Reciprocity expressed by , , , B'^N
Ony-I) Vnx: by Niph'al, 51 <i: by
Hithpa'el, 54/.
Reduplication of letters, in verbs,
55 d-g, in nouns, 8j^^k-p.
Reflexive use of p (ethical dative),
119 s: of Niph'al, 51c: of Hithp.,
54 6: of pronouns, 57 n, 135 i, k.
Relative sentences, 138 a-f, 155 : ex-
pressed without '^B'X, 155 f-m,
156 b : in genitive after constr. st.,
130 c, without IK'S, 130 rf, 152 a N
(end), M (2nd part), v, 155 e : ex-
pressed by n't, ^T, ^T, 138 g : by
article (in late Hebrew), 138 i
(cases due to false vocalization or
accentuation, 13S ft) : independent
rel. clause as subject or object of
verb, or genitive of a noun, or
governed by a preposition, 155 r>.
Relative pronoun, 36, 138.
Repetition of words, without ), to
express distribution ( = ' every'),
123 c, d : emphasis, 123 e: the
superlative, 133 J: with 1, to ex-
press summation, 123 c, to express
difference (pXI pN), 123/
Resh occasionally with DageS, 228.
Rhythm of Hebrew poetry, 2 q, r.
Roots, 30 c, d.
Sabaean, i h (i), h v.
Samaritan, 1 c.
Saph'el, 55 t, cf. 30 p.
Schema etymologicum, 117 p-r.
Scriptio continua, 3 fir n.
Scriptio plena and defectiva, 8 i-l,
256.
Seal stones, engraved, 2d.
S'ghol, 8 6, 9 m, 27 p-r : as a helping
vowel, 27 r, 28 e, 84" a : rarely after
gutturals, 22 h: before gutturals
(esp. n) with Qames, for Pathah,
27 q-, 29 v : in pause for Sere in
Pi'el, 52 n.
' Segholate' nouns, forms of, 84*' a-d :
in constr. st. and with suffixes
(paradigms), § 93 c-e, g-r, femi-
nine forms, 95 d-f: of the form
yi] in constr. st., 93 A : of the
form ^QD3 (dageS in 3rd radical)
in constr. st. plur., 93 m : explana-
tion of forms from verbs n"? (as
nS), 84^0 («), 93 x-z, 95 d-f : constr.
st. of nouns of the form Tj'lX some-
times segholate in form, 93 hh.
Self, idea of, how expressed, 135 a, i, k,
139/, with N, cf. gr.
Semitic languages, i : their gram-
matical structure, if: their rela-
tion to one another, i e, m, n: and
to other languages, i g-i: their age,
I m, n : writing, i k, I.
Sentences, 140: compound, 140 d, 143 :
incomplete, 147 : restrictive and
intensive, 153 : connected by 1, 154 :
divided by Paseq, 15 /n*.
Separating vowels, 67 d n, 72 i.
Septuagint, 3 a, 6 &, p. 35 n.
Sere, 86,9 i-l : in pause for S*gh6l in
verbs n 7, 75 M n: changed to
pathah in pause, 29 5 : in Hithpa'el
changed to qames in pause, 29 s,
55 fe-
Serviles, see Formative letters.
§®wa, simple and compound, 10, 2ie,/,
22l-p,2^b-d,6^ff: mobile, 10b, c, I,
20 m, 21 e,f, 22 I, 2'j e, i-m: simple,
under gutturals, 22 m, n, 63 a, c,
65 g : quiescent (silent, syllable
divider), 10 t, 22 w, 24 b.
Sibilants, 6 h-l: transposition of, 19 n,
54 &•
Silluq with Soph pasuq, 15/.
Siloam inscription, 2dN: orthography
of, 7/
Simultaneity of actions expressed by
noun-clauses, 141 e, 1640.
Singular with distributive force,
145 I, m.
Softening of consonants (rare), 19 0.
Some, how expressed, 139 A with H.
Sonants, 6 0, p.
542
Index of Subjects
South Semitic, i 5 (i).
Spirants, 6n, 13, 21.
Square character, 5 a.
Status absolutus of the noun, 89 a.
Status constructus, its form, 89 :
vowel-changes marking it in many
nouns, 91-6: its use, 128: before
an adjective treated as a subst.,
128 w, 133 h (end), 134 p (end):
wider use of it, 130: before preposi-
tions, 130a: before relative clauses,
1 30 c, d : in apposition with another
constr. St., 1306,/: before numerals,
1340,2?: anomalously with the arti-
cle, I2J f-i: before ni, used as a
relative, 138 jr (a).
Stem-consonants, or radicals, 30 c.
Stems, distinguisbed from roots, 30 a,
d, g-k.
Strengthening (doubling or sharpen-
ing) of consonants, 12, 20 : in
gutturals, 22 & : virtual, 22 c: to
intensify the idea of the stem,
52 a, d : of 3rd radical in fem. and
plur. of nouns of the forms D'K,
^Da , 84" h, 93 s, ee, kk, 94 c, 95 g, cf.
93 PS '• virtual sharpening of N ,
646: sharpening sometimes omitted
in 2nd radical of verbs ]}"]}, 67 g,dd.
Subject, omitted in participial clauses,
116 s,t: impersonal, 144 6, c : inde-
finite, 144 d-k: two subjects in a
verbal clause, 144 I, m : construc-
tion of compound subjects, 146.
Substantive, its construction with the
adjective, 132: as predicate of a
noun-clause, 141 b : used as pre-
dicate where we should use an
adjective, 141 c-d.
Suffixes, (pronominal) attached to
verbs, 58 : rare, irregular, or poetic,
with verb, 58 g. i, k (cf. 59 e-h,
60 d~h, 61 b-e, g, h) : with noun in
sing., 91 e, /: in plur. 91 I : the
sing, form after ni-, 91 n : with
prepositions, 103: 3rd sing. masc.
in ii-, 7 c, 58 sr, 91 e : 3rd sing. fem.
without Mappiq, 58 g, 91 e, 103 g :
omission of n in fem. nouns
before suffix, 91 e (end): 3rd plur.
iniO, 53fif, 91/, i, io^/N»: omis-
sion of "I in plur. nouns before suffix,
9 1 A; : original "i of sing, nouns from
n"? stems retained before suffix,
93 ss : denoting the remoter object,
117 I : use of 3rd fem. sing, and
3rd plur. to express 'it', 135 p ■■
anticipating the object (as in
Aram.), 131 m,o: apparent verbal
forms attached to nouns used as
adverbs, looo.p: anticipating the
genitive, 131 n : syntax of, 135 m-r :
heavy (or grave) and light, 59 e,
91 0, 93 & : masculine suffixes re-
ferring to feminines, 135 0 : fem.
sufiF. with collective force, 135 p :
suffixes which have lost their
meaning CyiN, nn^), 135 q, r :
omitted sometimes with infinitive,
115 eN.
Superlative, expression of, 132 c,
Sureq, 8 c, 9 n.
* Surface '-plurals, 124 6, c.
Suspended genitive, 1306,/.
Syllables, theory of, 26.
Syncope and elision, 19 fc, 35 d : of the
article, 35 m : of n in Hiph'il and
Hoph'al, 53 a, b, in infin. Niph.,
51 I, in infin. Hiph., 53 q, in infin.
Hoph., 67 y (end).
Syriac language, i c.
Syriasms in pronunciation, 24 e : cf.
Aramaisms.
Talmud, 3 a.
' Tam '-character, 5 a (end).
Targums, 1 c, 3 a.
Tell-el-Amarna tablets, 2 /.
Temporal clauses, 106/, iii d, 112 00,
164: expressed by infin. constr.
with a preposition, 164 g.
Tenses, 40 : their use, 10(1-9, in, 112 :
tempus historicum, 106 d.
Text of the 0. T. probably derived
from a single archetype, 3 c.
Textual criticism, 3 g : intentdonal
and unintentional changes in the
text, 3 ST.
Tiph'el, 55 h.
Titles indicated by the feminine
form, 122 r.
Tone of Hebrew words, 29 : marks of,
15 b, c, k, I: thrown forward, 29 e :
retrocession of, 29 d-g : incomplete
retrocession, 29/: tone in pause,
29 i-r : concurrence of two tone-
syllables avoided, 29 e,/, h. Tone
in perfect thrown forward after
waw consec, 49 h-l: in imperf.
often thrown back in jussive and
after waw consec, 48/, 49 d, 67 x,
68 d, e, 6g p, 71, 72 t, aa, 73 e.
Transitions in poetry from one per-
son to another, 144 p, cf. 135 r.
Translations of the O. T., 3 a.
Transposition (metathesis) of con-
sonants, 19 n, 54 b,
U-sound^, 8 c, 9 M, 0.
l7ideoc of Subjects
543
Verb, 38: its syntax, 106-116: its
government, 117-121 : weak verbs,
41, 66-76, relation to one another,
77 : verbs middle e and 0, 43 : deri-
vative, see Conjugations : denomi-
native, 38 c, d, 43 c (in Qal), 51 g
(Niph.), 52 h (Pi.), 53 9 (Hiph.),
54 i (Hithp.) : transitive and in-
transitive, 43, 117 M, fl: v?ith
suffixes, 57-61 : doubly weak, 76 :
N'!? and n"7 confused, 75 nn-rr:
defective, 78 : verba induendi et
exuendi, 117 y : copiae et inopiae,
117 s, aa: with prepositions, 119:
primitive '• retained exceptionally
in verbs n"7, 75 u, v, x, dd, gg (end),
cf. 29 t : verbs r\"^, 65 n, 75 b (end) :
verbs V '!?, 75 &, v, kk, nouns derived
from, 84" c (e),/ (end), g (end), 93 z.
Verbal clauses, 140 b, c, 142 : relative,
i55/-»i-
Verbal ideas subordinated to a verb,
120 o-c: co-ordinated with a verb,
120 d-h.
Verbal suffixes with prepositions
(rare), 103 d.
Verse arrangement of poetic passages,
2 r (end).
Vocalization of the text, "J k,i: Baby-
lonian, 8 gr N, 103 m N.
Vocative with and without the arti-
cle, 126/.
Vowel-letters, 7 b-g, 8 h-m.
Vowel-signs or points, 7 h, i, 8-10.
Vowels, 7 : influenced by the nature
of the syllable, 26 : firm or un-
changeable, 25 : changes in them
as regards quantity, 27 : impure,
25 c N : protonic, p. 86 n*, § 102 f-i,
103 c.
Waw consecutive, § 49 a, 6, before
N in 1st pers. impf. Pi. with ano-
malous pathah, 49 c, with the
perfect, 49 h-l, with the imperfect,
49 c-g : copulative, punctuation of,
104 d-g : wawapodosis introducing
the predicate, 143 d : explicative,
154 a N (b) : concomitantiae, 154 a
N (&) : adaequationis, 161 a n. See
also under Perfect and Imperfect.
Weak consonants, 6 s : K and H , 23 :
1 and ', 24.
Weak verbs, 41, 66-76 : their relation
to one another, 77: relation be-
tween t<"7 and n"^, 75 nn-rr.
Weakening (or softening) of conso-
nants, 19 0.
Wish, expressed by simple impf.,
107 n: by cobortative, 108 (with
N3, 108 c) : by jussive, 109 (with
W, 109 b), by imperative, 110 a : by
perf, consec, 112 aa: by a noun-
clause, 116 rN, 1419': by ''p, 151 a:
by ]r\> ■»», 151 b-d: by DK, ^b,
"^HK, 151 e.
Writing, Semitic, ik,l: old Hebrew,
2 rf, i, 5 a : its origin, 5 g.
Zenjirii, inscriptions, i in, 32 k n.
II
INDEX OF HEBREW WORDS AND FORMS
The numbers refer to the sections : the * superior ' figures after the letters refer to
the notes. Doubtful forms are marked ? Corrupt forms with f.
^< as consonant
and guttural 6 c, 22 ; qui-
escent 2^ a-i ; prosthetic
19 m
nx 96
1?N 68 6
nSK 50 e, 93 qq
nnx 68 b, 76 d
sm? 23 i
Dn^ni^K 91 n
inns 10^2
'?9 74 ^. 76 A
UN i'vr V 1 59 cc
nrfiN 68 1
n>3N 84^/
"^9^ 93 hh
-^^f???^ 53 P
ninsN 95 ,7
^V-^ 55 ^
K'inxi 113 «;»
WlH without arti-
cle, 125/, 126 e^
^r^ 87 ^, as Qerd
for nin"" 102 m, force of
suffix lost 135 ^ and note''
D3 OhK 21 c
D^3hx ,24 1, 145 ;i
1i|^« 69 6^
nnx 68 e
^^ri^. 64 a
^an UHNt 55 e
nnx 105 a
br}k 22 h
nSnN 01 e
D^nx 23 /i, 93 r
^^T^ 63/ ^
is 104 c, in dis-
junctive questions 150 g.
in indirect questions 1502.
in conditional sentences
159 cc, in disjunctive sen-
tences 162
b'^Sa 50 «
■•"in 105 a
njix 105 a
^^ix 84" 0
i>*3^N 68 i
DJ"IN 92 g
• n^JN 84^ c
ni>3it< 93 r
IBiN 84" r
I^X 72 c^,n
niN 95 n
DHJ^'lX 103 6
T
perf. and
io8^»
-liTX
' • T
T T : -
• : IT
T V
n5>"nnN
ninx
T
i^nx
"•tnx
nacjnx
Tinvnx
^Jnx ,\bnx
nnx ,inx
^•nnx
v:iv
1036
103 b
100 ?", wil
imperf. 107
23 A
68 t
856
44/
75 M
84" w
96, 105 a
96
not in const
St. 130^
63/
I i
>j5bb
90 k
p. 283
64 c
64 c
23/ 7500
91 n
67 y
in wishes 151
1030
64 d
64 h
I
fffi
50
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
545
|3 ->nK 2gg
n'?inN 85 w
■•{< island 93 y
^N woe I 105 a
■•i* not 152 q
T« 148
n3^X loot, 148
n33"'N 100 i
^'k^ 10 d
<
1!^ ,r?? connecting
3J. and predicate 141 k,
2 z-5'
PK? 1500'
£3TP;K 24/^ 706
B'\S* 96 (and nE'K)
ed distributively 1396,0
liB'^K 86 g
>»^N 47 61
1B':X 706
Dn''N1 67 p
■^^ 100 i, uses of
153
^m 85^i33a^
bx 68 6
-^3K 220
^3N (ptcp.) 52 s
npDX 91 e
68/, 7566
^!)D^{ 61 (Z^
D3J)3X 61 d
|DN 100 i
)r n^N) b^ 34 6
"bx with jussive
09 c, 152 /, forming a
egative compound 152 gr,
ot standing immediately
efore a verb 152 A
V^ ,"''? 103 0, ii9gr
i^n6^ 35 m
f?^K 9 ?, 87 <
n^K 20 ^
D^nPX pluralis maje-
statis 124 gf and note^
without article 125/, with
article 126 e^, with the
singular 145 h; with a
plural 132 A '^j 1451
ni^N (inf.abs.)75w
D?\^^ 22 0
i')>^, 84" 0
to\^N: 103 ^'^
D^aobs 35 m
n^^k] 35 771
n^i^^^t* 641
nnri-^K 119 e*
^r>^f? 95 ^
COWLET
wishes 151 «, in condi-
tional sentences 159 Z-«,
(^0?, in double questions
i^oc-i, in oaths 149, con-
cessive 1 60 a
^^ fir]Tp6iro\i<i
122 A'
noK 96
n^N I h
pOK 63 p
:D^^t?K 60 d
I'lyoX 86(7^
fok forn3DNi2 2/'
npK 68 6
npK 23/ 68 c
^'^m 44 f
•rifm 6ir,dd
IN fori:«orrN7/
N n
4^,"3f? i6/S 105 a,
and Additions
n:k 80 t
"N (Jer42«)32(£
n»n:x (Is5i>«)47i^
^3S; ;-?:H use of, in dif-
ferent books p, 105 note
^3X 32 c
2JN (Moab.) Td^
K'JN 96
DD''pNt 72 aa, 113^^
TDK 84V
m^DN 656
PjOXf 72 a«, 113 M/^
natpNt 69 A'
HEDX 481
^SDX 481
?|Dpk? 68 A
PEN 19/ 66 e
n-IDN 91/5;
DnDSi 71
"?i'?< 63/
nays 63 A*
IJVN (Moab.) 75 6*
'TV? 63 w
^N 104 c, inten-
sive 153, (^N...^N)i54a^(c)
Dn^NQK 58aS75w»t
nSN 68 6, 76 d
DnsN 91 c*, 93 ss
1QN 63 t, 76 c?
NiDN 231
^?-^N I54«'(c)
V2DN 93 r
DDS 152 s, "3 DQN
163 c
YpSN 47 6»
DnsN 88 c
nyb'DN 6(^6
T t: : ••* <-'
nari'^t^t 71
546
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
P2f« 71
N-JPN
log
3
o^l^< 52 n
^ri I2gg,^^dd
n? 67^;
njf-is 90/
B>>=V{< 47 6>, ii4;<'
HE'N 96
DESK'S
53
k
DDK'S 9366
nC)|'?K''K 10/t, 48 c
IB'N as relative
pron. 36, its syntax 138,
in relative clauses 155,
introducing obj. -clause
157 c, after ]V\ by, &c.
158 a, hypothetical (rare)
159 cc, introd. tempoi-al
clauses 16^ d, final 1656,
consecutive 166 h, with
prepositions forming con-
junctions 1046; ? IK'S for
the genitive 129 ^
lie's 84^^-
TIB'S 93 I
'ns ,ns 103 h, syntax
of 1 1 7 a-m, ; before an un-
determined noun i 1 7 fZ; not
denoting accas. 117 i-m
JjiS 20I, 32 A; as
masc. 32 gr
ris =npis 32^
Nns 75 rr
nris 76 (i
DDnt? 1036
inris 1036
nanns 54 a^
"•ns /ns 32 A
vns 29 «, cf. 75 M
p''n"i|5 ^ns 20/
fPiS 32 t
^jns 75 rr
21 preposition
102 ; punctuation of 102
d, k, m; with suffixes
103 gr; senses of 1 19 h-q ;
3 essentiae 119 t; ? par-
titive 119 w; 3 pretii,
1 1 9^> ; 3 instrument! with
the object 1199'
^N31 72 0, 76 ^,
152a;
D^bsa 200
• •• |T »7
*:S3 qv
• t: IT > *^
i"nm 61 b
'i?? 93 /fc
Dsna 74 i
bna 84^0
^^nii 67;;
|n3 22 A
niyns 93 r
j-inii 51 z
nsB'ns 672/
sin 76^
Ds'i'ia 23 c
"9)3 75??
D"'pi3 72JJ
D3t?Bn3] 61 e
t3 72rf(i
^Snb 72 z
y'n|3 20 j^
"•jj^ns 27*1
fn"3 64 d
ipn3 67 r
D"'3tD3 93?.
D"1t33 107 c
"'3 forays? 19/
as interjection 105 6
nin''3 102 m
r? 73 «
n 1030
^jnij*-]! 103 2>^
iW] 1030
^^3? 1030
r?? r? 73 ^
^nb'^l 73 a
r\)l 96
n33 103^
n-)W3? 91 e
DTJ?< ^33 127 c^
i^K'33 !iil
: IT • <J
sjnss? 93 M
?3 152 <
nb3? 19^2
^sibs 93 a;
.".ibs 8 k
'h 152 <
bvi>2 81 (i
*n5'? with iui
constr. 1 1 4 «, with an t
jective 152 < ; ^J?^?!? </ ii
. . . not, with infin. ii^
with impf. 152a;; (DS) 'J;
except, 163 c
D3 23 k
i03 103 A
Index of Hebrew Wo?'ds and Forms
93 2
'r>»3 87 8, 95 0
i? 96
iJ3 90 0
Dn'3? 60 ^
nja (Moab.) for
^"33 7 d^
J?3? 73 «
^ny3 103 i
^'V? 29 <, 75 u
^V? (^73^)53 2
lOvv? 93 m
n-iyi 80 /fc
">5?'V? 53 A
P^v? 35 fl'
'd^V?? 93 y
«")?(p?) 75 rr
Dn^3-12 93 n
npia 80/
K'2 72 c', w, 786
D3B'3 67^
^331B'3'J 91 «
ri3 96; to per-
jnify a people 1221
n? for n^3 7/
^wna 90 /fc
035*"^? log, <)\ d
D-ni 9 w; p. 285
B.v. n:?
^I^ODii^nat 72 cc
«^l?3 44/
D^■^ba 124 A
^32 86 1, 87^
^i;33 85 s
0^^*13 93 a;
o:nV.a 95 0
,nia 23/
t'T'ia 84" r
Ma 8 A;
."•.ia 8/t
bSl 67 n
via 65 a
^\l 93 S'. V
^jVa 85 V
n^aba 95 r
n^aj 91 e
J^-b 80/, g
^i?h 44/ ^
Da intensive 153,
1 54 a'(c); Da(1)...Da?6eU;
("•3) Da concessive 1606
33a 84'' 6
^ma"i3 91 n
' ' '<
nj'ia 90 i
-m 66 c
ItJ'E 66 c
Ta 66 c
lOB'a 90 /fc
liDN-n 85 w
aK-^t 96
•'^i??'! 44 c
ns'n 52 0
D^N-J^l 93 CB
D^'n 67 w
DWl 100 gr*
33n 84" r
K n 2
?:^
?n
^^.
t: jt
T 'IT
ninb'H
T :
D'.nS-n
d4
T
D"'t?'n
D^pn-n
547
72?
64 d
20 c
91 c2
84" 6
93 a:. 95/
932
84*^^
67 CO
95/
93%
93 mm
124 ?i
58 ^, 59/
69 m
69 c, m*
48 Z
e-jbh
85 w
93 71
91 k
Soh
22 «
n with Mappiq
14, as a weak consonant
23 A;, /, in verbs n"? 75, as
a mere vowel-letter 6 d,
>jb,c, 24 g
n locale, origin
90 b, use 90 c-i, with
constr. st. before a geni-
tive 90 c, sometimes pti-
ose 90 e, mere poetic
ornament 90/, g, in place-
names 90 g^, added in se-
gholate nouns to the de-
veloped form 90 {, 93 t
n (Article) punc-
548
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
26
tuation 35, syntax t.^
see Article in Index I
n interrog. 100,
origin and pointing 100
i-n, uses of 1 50 ; ^^^O) • ♦ • H
150 ^
n_. (with the tone),
ending of fern, nouns 80 c
H— -(toneless), end-
ing of the Cohortative and
Imperative 4 8 c,rf, I ; an old
case-ending 90 a-i
n — 3rd masc. sing,
pronominal suffix 916
n__ (without Map-
piq) anomalous 3rd fem.
sing, pronora. suff. 916
Nil 1056
n31?L> (Mi 6") 47 6»
B^'KH one, 144 cZ*
V^^ai^Nn 127/1
nX^n 74 gr
nriNan 74^
nKai!} 72 w
nan 1056
^'^O 72?/, 74^
nnleJ^an 786
B'n'n 72 a;, 786
nw n»an (Moab.) 80/^
nan 67 f
nan an logr (end)
T T-:r
na-ian 160
naan Q«re for
Ii8e'
n3n 69 w
aan
T -
Wh 75 n, aa
ni3"l3.n 93 r
r^in 72 u
)^i)nn-in^n 127/^
r\V2>^r} 54 /i
TO\nn] 72 e
TiaSinf 90 n
n7?nn ^2 «
T T -..I" ^
N^n ,K*n 32/5;; i^in with
(^e.;.^ K^^ 17 c, Kin as fem.,
not an archaism 32 Z
wn (N-'n, nen) =
ijyse or idem 135 o^, demon-
strative 136, for the copula
141 ^, resuming the sub-
ject 145 w*, in questions
136 e (end), 150 I
«?.n 75/*^
ly^ain 72 fc
yiin 69 w
"•in 105 a
na^n 65/
ri7.^^n 71
ni^b^n 86/
Dyl D^in 29/
na^n] 72 ee'
y^Bini 69 V
K*5fin 74?
«pi-iiin 59 A
yBnn 65/
niMni 80 t
riv''^n 67 y, 72 ee
' «?n 54 d
M"13in 53 Z
nnsann 75 00
"50? 75i>P
>nhnn e^k
• : -t:iv J
"On/n? 35/ 27?
t'nn 67 t
'te 74^, 75"
D'??Dn 35/
O^^nqfl 35/
nonnn 90/
jnnnn 67 t«
^nn^n 27 j
K^n 32 A;
":=? 16/63^,75
with participle 1 1 6 r, wit
p before infin. 114 h-k, \
copula 141 g-i. Cf. IT'ri
'^.''.n 75 w
D^*n = one c?ay
126 s
nB'!?^ni»n 134 ©^
ac^n 113 A;
^f n 9 «. 85 c
■•a'^'n 1 69 a, 78 6
ns|n? 90/
srn 69 V
ri?^n 70 e
nB'^n 24/^ 706
I
iii
•)7i:
n"'n 75 m
riian (inf.abs,
'?r! 150 c?, e
r?n 72 «
^yan 75 mm
yo^'an 53;,
^san 72 w
^?\\ expressing
assurance 1 50 e
JTiln 69 w, 71
^^^ 34/
^^^ 34/
^T.S7 34/
"^^ inflexion
69 a;, use of, to express
tinuance 1 1 3 w
^Sn 69 m^
waS^ni 231
If
C(
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
549
"^^^J}. log
cbn 50 e
Dnn^n (Moab.) 54 I
Dn ,T]1Zl^ 32W, for the
ninine, 32 n
ncn its Dage§ 20 k
niion 91 ^
3K'^Qn in close con-
xion 72 66, 93 2)p, cf,
»3K'^on 67 V
^itsn 672/
*t:!)Bn 2go^
HE'ipn i25(i'
DQn 67 t
vpon 7 5 it
n^DOn (Moab.) 8o/'
nyrpn 64^1
c'-yon 133 c'
n-'Wisn 126 w^
<
nripn 72 w
Driipn 72 1«
in with suffixes
J30 0, 147 6, origin 105 6,
T]}iJ} with suffixes
00 0, 1476, origin 105 b,
ith ptcp. of present time
16 n; more often of future
me 116 p
<
f^^^ 20 k
ni?nn 85 c (A dit.)
nan 72 «e
nran 64 h
5in''3n
nean
on
IT
nnon
T - ••
ri-iayn
ntyn
nbyn
nbyn
T -: 1
n-iyn
D^aijjn
Vtyyn
T-nyn
by Dpn ?
T J-..
•inbivi.
n3"'^pn
nann
nain
72 e«
log
58 A
10^
72 k
66/
105 a
72 ee
35^
72 ee
72 ee
72 w
63^
35^
35 9
35 9
67 cZci
63^
63 2>
113^
35 fl'
116^^
75 «
63 0
67 V
6i a
7500
29 ?> 53^
29 5-, 67 V
113(^2
72 m
67 w
29^
72 w
log
22 «
113 A
75/
75/
n"'2"!n 1
rnn
75jf
2oA',
22 S
pnnn
T -IT
nnn
^yin
T V T-:
T-;,-
myi'n
T-:|- -
— T
T - T
•'iyE'n
mnncyn
T-:i-: •
nnn
nnannn
vnn
T ••
Dfe'niinn 1
nbnn
279-, 93 aa
75 »*> ««
29 ^, 64 A
64 A
84^
72 6C
67 «, 72d(/
35 <^
67 cc
61 V
22 «
90*1
93 aa
93 aa
93 aa
93 aa
73a
66 «
67 V
90 1
64/
29 q, 12 y
65 <
(fern.) 59 /i
113^
61 y
67 cc
15 99
If
35^
75 M
29 y, 6717,
12 (id
54k
68 t
641
67rf(i
550 Index of
'"'ipsnn 54 I
"i???nn 54 I
D'^JD nxinn ic6c^
• T T 1 : • O^ ^
T as a vowel -
letter 5 &S 7 ft-gr, 8 A-m,
9 n-8, its changes 24,
initial 26 a ; a firm conso-
nant in verbs V'y 72 grgr, in
verbs orig. Vv 75 a, 6, kh,
cf, in nouns 93 x
\ pointing of
104 d-g, connecting sen-
tences 154, = and that, or
and especially 114^, 1540^
{b), introducing predicate
143 c?; •! introducing pre-
dicate 1 1 1 A, or apodosis
(rare) 1 1 15^, 1590(e), s(/).
143 c? ; \ with perf. intro-
ducing predicate or apodo-
sitii2_^-oo, 143 c?, 1590,8.
See also Waw in Index I.
nW}r 23 d, 68 k
;D3.-i?NI1 60 d
^W.}A 49 c
V'i«V2 3c/, 26f7,
102m, i04d
■nV^) 53n,g,6Si
^I'Wl II I It, 1
'^^h 64 A, 68 e
nhE' '•inN^t 113 c'
!^?^n^<)j 49 «
Hebrew Words and Forms
■:i — :i" ■
49 «
^?**?T
68 e
T : J T
49 «
?JB3t<1_
49c
-%\
= rather than
133 &'
^)n
692?
1"
102 d, 104 c?
(Moab.) 7 c
nTVNi ]
49 €
w^l).
49 6, 72 <
!^rTi??i'?' 48 C^
mxi
75 9'9'
n^^
29 i^
m\
i04g
nyni
73 &
^n'JiKH'jt
53 S'
^h^^'^\}\
76 A
T ; • ;
75 ««
D'nnB'im ^
72 a?
••ririnm
67 dd
'^^^ni
'J2k, w
in prophetic
style 112 y,z
28b
: I'
286
i. .. .
70 e
63?, 104/
^rincion^
(Am 4^)112/4='
72 w
T ••-:!-
72 w
rnoni
I... . -.,-
72 w
nn"'iini ]
72 66
T : -I-.;
72 W
nin^yni
T ' " ;
71
67 66
inspni.
76A
«K'"npni
292
*^^k!n)-
72 1
53 p. 75 ce
njtjpitrnni 546
nnn 166, 1046
nyj 1049'
J^N^ni (Ex5'«)74 3
>m] 761
^m 761
Drin^n"! 7 2 m
'.Tm 67 A;
n^m with e for
286, 639', 104/, in paui
sometimes H^ni 7571
^nbm 6766
v*l 76 (f
:nci4.>i (in Jb)68e
PlDN>1t 68 A
nbK»'! 236
^^Xl 23 (i, 68 6
n^n 23 d
«^?n 74^
m 75?
^i?:i 64^
^HK'an 69 w, 70 6
n3>i 691*
^3*1 67 p
HE'-lJ^I 7 c
''paiil 53 »»
^•1*1 69 rt
«lin 53 «
njiTI^ 102 m
W 104/
*n^l 16 p^; as
narrative formula 1 1 1 /
^f^''^:.\ 29 g
^^^'^. 6t y
iniMj 68 1
rfe 646
N^V^>1 74 Z
m 75 »•
Index of Heh^eiv Words and Forms
551
•• T*
Dpijn'i ?
V T* "
T V - *
^31DM
75»*.
766
65 «
29^
ui
\6g
1$rr
(Ho 8
yiiiw'
24e
(Moab.) 7 c
6371
69/
69/
75^
75^
75'-
471
69 «
76/
71
53 w,
73/
60 (£
58 S'
72 cc
67^,
y
80 (Z,
94/
24 e
72 ee
60 ^
72 ee
67y
67?, 73/
59 A
72#
(Moab.) 75 6=
72 <
63 7n
53^
T •
A" : —
PV\
with accus.
V : • !•
- t-
IT : - : •-
T
75 cc
67 a;
75 7
65/
71
71
619
6ig
71
75?
75 ?T
68 i
755^
49 d^
270, 670;
121 ci'*
75 75'
23/ 75 95'
69 s
69 s
44 d
44 d
26p\ 75 q
6gk
60 d, 75 66,
131 m'
65/
69 u
71
75 9
75 kk
68 h
75hh
55 fl'
67 fl'
299'
104^
73 c^
\S\ 73 d
p- in' perfect
feet
rith
Cf.
p— iir periect
(rare) 44 I; in impeifect
47 m, n; less frequent with
waw consec. 49 <i*. Cf.
-iNK'WIt 641
DT?11 69r, 76/
"I'^pi 49 6^
•*l'?'y31 75 /'A
31% 49 6^
D'?31 67 y
nri3K'3"! 44/
npE'31] 19 p
nv^r?! 75 ^
TifVi 286, 104 d
nnv4 104 g
DF^Q^ 44<Z
n'??l 75 99
nmpi 67^6
^nsr;"! 75rr
n3E?i 44/720
''riaB'V(,/.2 3'')?69m'
ni- nouns ending
in 86 k, 95 t, plur. of 95 m
njiNrn. 72/fc
nxanit 76 A
•"nNoni 48 ci
n3''n33ni 47?
D'nrii 7 2 A
^3^ni 69 r
DBr^3|ni 75 n
'np for''1Wril23/
68 A
s«3nri\ 74 z
^nm 23 /
552
Dppnni 63w»
*TO 76/
Bhbnn 72 «
^3310ril 72CC
inp^jrii 70 6
3ayn\ 63w>
tarn 72 if
WSVW 60 d
«1D1 75i>
r"«?i 270, 67 p
pD-'^Jp^J 58 <?
3JfD^.lt 7>
r (Moab.) for r\\
Id}
nXT 34, use of 136
nf 34, use of 136;
enclitic 136 c, c/; = Af^'e
or now 1360?; as a rela-
tive 138 gf
nriT 82
nt 3r 34 &
If deiuonst.pron.
34 d; relat. pron. 138 gr
np^T 90 Z, 101 a
rrviT 73 d
n^P*T 20 »
«1 67 «e
"•ripO! 67 aa
ni^fl 52 p
nioi] 80 sr
nu3i 93C«
-r^ 86 g^
nosi 63^,640
riy?. 95 «
<
nt 67 w»
«5lt 55 i
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
n with dage§ f. =».^-n 93 ^
implicitum22C ^?^0t 87 5-
'?n 75 g?
^nbn 63 1
1
ic
59P
in-inn 84'' g
wn 95 d
*?.?D 93 35
'h 67 if
(nnK) nn 96
??*in 20 1
cniTf 93 IV
KO'in 7500
b^nn b"ini 73<i
D^nta'in 950
^gfln 2 7 «
^n^n 86 i, 87 gr
Dmn 84" r
nS (2S2 4")l93'^
n-^rn 84"©
nnn 84"©
f'ClO 45 <^
'?.]!? 93 ««
D^NDh 23 c, 74*.
7500
•iBO 75 92
?)B?D3 in p\7\\ ^n 93 aa ^
149 o\ c
»3K "•n 32 c
n"'n what forms
take Metheg 16/ pointing
of 63 5, shortened forms of
in imperfect 75 », perfect
forms aa if from ':n 761
fix^n 27 w
T\\n% 80/
^n^n 90 0
I '•ID 23?, 'jsattyhh
I ni*to3n 86 i
Pi
ti
iiiei
itter
ij-j
litis
»P!
ifvt
N\T ^ni^n 67 r
nb"'bn 1056
^bn 67 cc
D'-sabni 93 £c
DPI 96
noD 23/
7C^n 90 A;
Titon 67 «e
nbon nbpn 45ft
^E'pn 98 a
nfon 94/
vnebnt 91 1
n'un 67 r
l]3n 91 e
DSn 118 q
••aan 67 a
^3:3n 20 6, 63 1,
67 cc
"•ntpn 93m
HTon 82
i^ii 91 A;
*i?iin 55 6
n-jxivn 55 e, 84" n
T???n 93&fe
?j^n 9366
DSjpn 93 66
'P.pn 10 gr, 93^
«")n 46 i
••ann 63 Z
r»1lO 95^
nn 67 ee
enn 84* 6
^wiyn? 87^
"B^n 46 d, 63 1
D^C'nt 72j>
I ^pB'n 85 «
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
553
«^NP 55/
n'3tD 656
nab 84^ h
3it3 72 c, n, 78 &
niBKJitp 190, 84^ 0
N39 22 6
CJO with impf., of
aet time 107 c, of present
me 152 r
** as a vowel-
jtter 5 6\ 7 J-g-, 8 h-m,
g-m, its changes 24, as
litial vowel 47 &' ; orig. ^
eappearing in poet, forms
f verbs ^"7 75 w, v, dd, gg
">?e 53 »*
tns^ 68 6
^'nx^ 68 6
•pmVij 64 a
DtDK: 63 Wl
n^ax; 68 c
nDK-- 68 c
«1DN> 68 6, h
"IDK^. 26 t, 63 e
■<i<^ It
K'K! 64 «
^OB'K': 67 ^'^
( vin: 72 h
vSy!^ 72 A
Knn''. 72 A
"^W 53 w
riB'f^ 69 «, 70 a N
I"?.: 53»»
Nsa^ 75 00
fe 67 i)
nb; impf. of 786
nr 67 g (Addit.)
T 93 mm
nT 76 a
nT 76 a
""i: 76/
IT 69 w
niT 67 cc, 76 a
fi'\'\ 7 2 r
n^i 87/
h: 67^ (Addit.)
^tST 67 gr
«T 67^
i»i?yiH 1206^
1?V"C 44 *
n3^T? 48 i
an^^ 690
nan"; 63 m
p|M"n^ 63 6
wni; 2 7 w
«^n; 231, 75 s
^^ 53 5-
nin^ 176, its pro-
nunciation with prefixes
102m; niN2X" i2Sh
^2'''"': 53 ?
T^r\\ 53 gr
'o: 75 «
''X 9/> 75«
bn: 67 2>
?n:? 68;fc
nxn: 90/
nxV 53 M
'^Vi^M 556
Vnv 53 w
bnv 53 M
p^^ 65/
''?^' 53 «. 69 r
n^V (ptcp.) 52 «
DV 96
DO^* 100 gi'
nip3i^, 95 q
PlpiM 50 e
njn^ 74 1
D^C^ijV (ptcp.) 52 «
N"3V 69 w
nni-' 69 r
^nnB'r 9071
^.m 53 ,,
""K^l' 53«*> V3«
1^?*'' 53««. 73 «*
D?l^ 656
V2]l e^dd
^n: 63 g
^")3n^ 60 6, 63 m
B'sn?. 63 c?
K'3n''_ 63 c?
■^d! 28 e^ 75»*
nn! 91 A;
135 »•
}Vtn^ 47 m
ipini 63 5r
^0: 75 «
'":.. 75 «
rn^HM 20 n, 60 d,
'a- • :
67 ■»
v^n) 20 i
Dn^ 67^
*3nbn^ 64^
ID!. 53 w
'^jn^ 606, 67*1
J5ni 67 cc
Dn^ 7 2 r
I'sn'' 29 tt
W.. 53 «, 67 2/
nn''. 66/
nrin! 63 w
^nn'' 20 1
554
•• T •
«^^:
&.
■ ^^
DM
no-
m)
•• T
ftm. iinperf.
plur. for D''-
r»?.:
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
6g 6', p
70(Z
70 e
70 (£
73/
696'
706
75 5'?
44 <;
75 mm
l^dd
53«*» 67gr, 2/
67 cc
275, 44 cZ
27 w, 84^ e
72 ee
72 ee
72 ce
72 ee
72 ee
69P
60 e
27 I
(Siloam inscr.)
7/
(Moab.) 7 c
752/
132 A'
675-
23 «, 75i'P
l^hh
'J2 dd
68 h
in 2n(l sing.
470; Aram.
-876.
735^
64 d
nor
• T
mi
^^^)
2b)
: — I
3pv:
Div:
.. I-.,-
T T
— "T
T -tit'
TT
2V
- T
^?i?:
66 e
Uk, 76 ^
72 ee
66/
15 hh
23^47^.7500
(Addit.) 675^
72 cZci
72 ee
72 ee
67 0
69;i\ 78 c
68 6
52 ;>
61 (?
59/
53**
72 cc
55/
107?'
1586
72 cc
(verb) 63 c
63 m
15 hh
10 g\ 60 b
forms of 76/
23A;S 84" w
72 c?c?
55 «
65 «
75 rr
76 e
75 95'
9 ?, 69 p
71
64 A
71
23/
93 ^
T :': T
np>
ns:
t; ': •
XT'
•T
NT
' vt; :•
HT
TT
yin;;
•* T 1;
f]nn^
T : :•
21 e'
72 r
72 t
72 A
53 w
20 m>
47A
29 i^
(juss.) 72 <
53 w
forms of 7 8 6
93 «?«;
84«ra
75 rr
60 c
60 c, 74 e
75 rr
72 r
21 e'
76 e
75 /t A
75^,?
7500
93 «'*
749-
69?, 75^^
63 n
60 d
10 A
forms of 76/
72 cW
67i>
67 <
67 p
88 c
52 w
95*'
23^
67 n
67 n
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
555
NIB'^ 75 rr
9k 75 2
P''??: 66 e
wirK'^? 47 w
naCB'^ 47 6^
B'l'. meaning 1 521;
ith suffixes 100 0,- 2>;
hypothetical sentences
6 q (with ptcp.), ^'"I
yrpoth. 159 cW; in ques-
Dns 141 A; (with ptcp.)
KE^: 74?
'qi?3 nsj'H 47 &^
DnnB'^ 20 6, 67 cc
*"!^^ 476^
yiE'."'. 27 w
D-B'! 67 y
'^^) 67 gr
D^K-: 53 n
DiS^ 67 ^ (Addit.)
^NirtDK''' 23 c
N3B'^. 75 rr
Klj^) 75 rr
W!^ its suffix 670';
doubtful form 100 o"^
□ n ^D^E3B'^ 47 gr
1 ' inB*; 86 gr
I ^3^™^ 60 e
n^__ nouns ending
n 86 I, 94/, 95 «
iNin^ 7566
rnxn" 64 i
Dn: 67 gr
Dh^ 67 g
vzh 67 gf
IJ?!. 53 «. 66 ^
Dn3rii 279, 29 V
'^m) 54 «
Y^:. 53 ^
mn> 80 gr
T ; • if
3 for *3 (Moab.)
'jd^
3 its meaning
102 c; with sufF. 103 A ;
construction of 118 s-x,
pi-epositions often omitted
after iiS s-w; exception-
ally with prep. 118 s^; 3
veritatis 1 18 x; omitted in
comparisons 141 d; not
= T^3i55g'
IXBt 19^:2
lE'Sa 161 b, c
*Xn33 118 s'^
033 52 I
n^nri33 uSs'*
1313 2 1 d
t^^*!]? 35 «
«]i3n3] 51 ^, 66/
33b 190, 84^ 0
■•3 for ■'13 246.
cf. 93 1/
"•a omitted in
obj. -clause 157 a, inti'o-
ducing obj.-clause 157 b,
introducing direct narra-
tion 157 6, causal 158 6,
in conditional clauses
159 aa, bb, asseverative
159 ee, adversative and
exceptive 163, temporal
164 d, consecutive 107 w,
1666
DK ^3 163 a-d
>b^3 86 i
|3-V'3 1586'
D^30 35 &
pin^s 246
n33 1 00 i
T T
0^133 88 6, 131 ^'^
^3 (veib^"y)73^
73 used abso-
lutely 117c, with a fol-
lowing genitive 117c,
127 b, c; construction of
its predicate, 146 c ; with
a participle abeol. 11 6 w;
with a negative 152 6
'm^'z 7500
ri?3 91 e
•31^5)i?» n^t 6 1 h
^b-2 (MINI'S) 75 W
^^3 96
73p3 72 7»
to3 103 A;
••iiDI 103 ^^ k
''3ED3 118 s'
|3 100 i
N"»n-I? 20 g
nibs 20 h, 53 q
033 85*, 87 h
niQ?? 93 ee
^^03 84^0
"»#? 35 9-
niQiys 35^
^ys 118 s^
i?V?-t 35 n
iJD-a? 103/''
n3E)3 Qi «
D^^D3 134 r^
^i? 858
niS 22 8, 64 e
nnn3 646
T IT ^
^rp3 44 0
556
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
nfs 20 g
b^-Z forms of 78 c
ari3 25 c'', a qital
form 84" n, the d un-
changeable 93 WW
nans 95 r
•in? 656
J* preposition
45/5'; pointed ^ 102 f-i,
103 e, /; uses of 1 1 9 r-w ;
reflexive use 119s; intro-
ducing the object 1 1 7 n ;
denoting the genitive 129 ;
with a passive and with
passive ideas 121/; h in-
scriptionis 119 w; distri-
tributive 1236?; with the
infinitive 114/-S, "71 with
infin. 114 p; = {w respect
to 143 e ; perhaps = Arab.
Id, surely 143 e.
^^ origin 100 a;
in prohibitions 107 0 ;
with the Jussive 109 <£;
as negative answer 150 w,
uses of 152 a-(i, u ; nega-
tiving a single idea 152 a';
exceptional positions of for
emphasis 152 e; N?^ = m
order that . . . not 165 a ;
^^1 forming hypothetical
sentence 159 c/d
^^ written for v
103 g
2^^^- 53 q
'^^^.? 51 I, 72 V
i:Nb 72 2?
-ibK^ 23 ci
"^onb 286
"i^P 119 c
T^3^ 67 w
"inb 67 r
NJ?h 80^
^nbb with infin.
114 s; with impf. 152 x
"f?r' 93 <^^
re ■^.v.^i' 29/
D-j3b 67^
nnS 69 c
^T-I't 45.9
nj> 23^, 103^
^n^B'inbt 90 TO
ni^nb 286
b'^nb 68 i
•i?5l]^ 72 «
T^^nb 66/
n^Dnb 67 i«
Dsisn!) 67dcZ
niyoK'nb 53 z
V written for N?
1039'
V in wishes, its
construction 151 e; in con-
ditional clauses 159' Z,m,
Nib 231
Dip 72;;
"'iS' 91 k
I":!!* 86/
'^.c*'^ ,\^''b formation
2 7 tt7, in conditional clauset
159 I, m, x-z
lihb pie
«^^-n,^ 53 q
ninb 88 b
pS'"^ 53?
on^ 22 A
Donp 28 6, 67 cc
njjrip 67 cc
niia nsn^) ? 84^ n
nycib 66 6
nin""? 102 m
n^S 90/
Tbv 69 w, 71
NIT? 75rr
«Kn''b 6Qm
•■ :it: :'
^? imperative,
for i^^p 48 i; as an inter
jection 105 6
nap pronoun, fo
^r' 103 9
^3? 1056
n\ilhb 93 a?
S 53 ?
rhb (Moab.) fo
n^:^ 7/
^bb 19 <i, 69 w
noS ,nob' .ne!? nob' ii
TT ' TT > TT > VT
punctuation 49/, g', 102 I
in requests or warning
often nearly =Z<!s< 150 «
^ob 103/'
iOp 103 ^
ri*""?^ 53 9
?i?b 119 c'
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
557
VT
T
T|*"
• —.\
Dank-)!?
V : I :-
iigc
53?
45 «
66 6
8oi
53 7
53 q> 66/
102 i
szq
53 2
72?
35 5'
lOo 6, Toi a
51 I
53^
119 c, 130 a^
45 fl'
53?
29^
55/
66 gr
66^
52 s (ptcp.)
10 A, 52 c2
66^
65?
i<)k, 74 A
69 n
51 Z
53?
616
10 gr'
53?
65 e
1340^
•lor^ 53 ?
yPri' 53 ?
DB? nn.K'!) 64 ^
n^? 69 »i
nnn-nn^^ 102/
|pinb? 66 i
O as preforma-
tive of participles 52 c,
sometimes dropped 52 s; of
infin. (rare) 45 e; of nouns.
85 e-m
'12 ,-~no for no 20 d!, 37
HDIND 90/
|KO (ptcp.) 52 s
D3DN0 61 <£
^'?9^'?t 52 p
noB' nxD 29/
nc3o 925'
^3» with final X
dropped 72^, 74^, 76^
nX^3D 91 k
i) n^30 130 «»
■•bsp 119 c*
'^J{S'?'? 119 c«
^^30 for '^SD 20 m
Dnni3ao 20 m
nni)13D (Moab.)9iP
^330 85/
^ya infin. 45 e
nenapi 91 /fc
""i"^? 19 c?. 54 c
nni-ij? 26 A, 67 o
PJ^P? 91 e
np 27a
jn^P 99 e
no ,--np ,«p 20 rf, 37 ; its
uses 137 ; in exclamations
148
ni^np 1026
D^abnp? 530
nasnp followed by
nx ii^d, cf. 45 «
^^J'^P'!? 53 ?
t'^9 (ptcp.) 52 s
ID- verbal suffix
58 gr; noun suff. 91 f, I,
103/'
1310 72 q
b^D 72 p
1D10 71
ninpio see Additions
myiot 52 s
«?no 53 0
X5fiD 7500
nxxip 95^
fi«i"9 74 ^ 94/
p"'niD 932>/>
nn^p 90 /
riP 68 1
^jsni nnpt 113 h^
nnp 119 c
D^piJnpt 53 0
nana fem. 122 Z*
1''5Dp 93 5«
*prip 136
Dnxnpt 530
ri^BTini? 95?
\inpo >j^kk
*P 37 ; its uses
137
|n^ ""p in wishes
151 a, d
njn^p I02 m
D>p 88 d, 96
D^rp^p 2 4 /^ 706
558 Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
b rp^o
I30a=
|Jp^D? (Siloam inscr.) too little for 133c; preg
7/
nn^p 69 m
nbso 23/
D-130 48 ^■, 6i 6
nnbp 91 it
^nbp 91 %
N^r? 7500
^K^O 74gr
naxbo 23 c, 85^
nasN^pt 91 c, Z
nxbif) 75^5-
nab 119 c'
n3^!?0 46 e
^JK^ibtp 55 6, 90 m
ppp 72 e«
^3^0 46 d
njjypbt? 99 6, 119 c'
fl.W 68 ^
^JK'bp 641
^fi.^9 23/
'2^0?*? 75 <^c?, 93 ss
<
13BD 103 m, 1350'
pjtet? 119c*
Cipnpp 85^*
p? preposition
1 01 a; its punctuation
102 h ; with suffixes
103 i, m; its meanings
119 v-z', partitive 1 1 9 «;*;
negative force of 1 1 9 w-y ;
with the comparative
133 <*) ^; = ^^'o «tMcA or
nant yse in comparisons
"9^' 133 «
{«'!."i"|0 103 »n
^ 376
nab 1190^
<
^nap 103 »i
""I"? plur. apoc. 1
S'j f; poet, for Jt? 90 to,
102 6, for ^3QD 103 i (in
pause '•30)
"•30 twice poet, for
fp 102 6
^Dl? 85 h, k
nniDD 3 b
Tj^pp? 67 iJ
D'X?pp 75 rr
ypp (iufin.) 45 e
nibo 23/
Tiyo 85 ^
n*3tyo? 200
^'l|V^t 530
^3^yiD 90 0
i^'^yo 1190^
n^JlP (infin.) 45 (i
IvJJO 93 s«
nyp 133 e*
*3Qp 119c
,r«^9 74 ^
3irp 92 gr
^m^p 91 n
^5rp 67 V
SjfiBirp 130 a'
'onxp 88 c
^jp?? 23/
D\^Oi?P 93 ?2
Dipp
n^p
n3PP
T?.i?P
•'n33po
nx")b
T ; -
^'^"!P
V3np
m-iD
Pl'Tnp
sinipt
;Pnnp
T T : V
Ksip
- T
74 ^t
pKB^p
~ : T
Di^^P
T •
D^pe^
"•nx ^mc'D
■■ :iT :
Dn'^wp
np
n^I'Vip
nnrip
" I ~ I • •
85^
(infill.) 45 e
15 99
93 «s
90 n
(infin.) 45 e
15'rr
93 ss
93 ««
93 ss
65 (i
22 s
69 m
22 8
102 h
85 A
85^
85 /i
75 rr
22 s
i
I
(iufin.) 4,!) (
85 M
80 6«
46 ci
(Inf.) 45 e
119 c'
67 cc
85 /i
92^
Sod, 94/
75 M
976'
93**
7 2 c*, ?i
90 k
go k
119 c*
64 i
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
559
nhtp 85/fc
jrip 92 g
i as preforma-
te of nouns 85 n
I W 105 h, em-
icislzing a cohortative
I ? 6, c, a jussive 109 6, c;
v:h an imperative iiq (2
1 "TIW 236
n-nwi 90 Z
' iinw 68 i
bw 50 a^
r^? 52 0, 64 e
^'nixK3 84'' e
1X3 646
Dnsi3 67 w
'1)?"|^'?. 64 e
CNIl? 93 00
m33 67 (/tZ
T T I
rh^i 61 dd
T :iT I
^^^^? 51 ^
n333 931
1ninii3 93 r
•>m3>33 86 i
n3>33i 80/
n*!^?? 750?
i933 61 a
1^33 forms of 78 c
13] 72 w
ni"i3 67 ce
ini3 92 h^
"•nis 20m
^ni3 92 6^
3n3 66 c
nn3 66 c
pibnj 640?
d^Il],- 88 c, 93 66
'?." 69 <
Dni3 93 s«
ni3 (inf. constr.)
72 9
Dn"'t?i3 93 ss
'n^^3 69 <
jn3 (inf. constr.)
72?
nt3 forms of 76 c
1^|3 67 (id
D-Nin3 93 00
ns3n3 6cic
nn3 forms of 78 c
nn3 66 c
nn3 916
^503 67 «
njtm (from nbn)
63 c
rhnl 90/
nSn3j 80^
'b'm 66/
D^»n3 6'ju,dd
!i3n3 32 <Z
rismt 23/'
■>n3 67 M
''"'n?. 75 »
nn3 95 ^
nns 67 u
aSnm 63 c
nt)3 forms of 76 c
np? 66 c
ni1t33 75 V
VK>3 75 a;
D'*SO03 93 00
ybi 65 d
nh333 121 d'
n03 forms of 76 c
in33 27 w
yic' "133 29^
^l|53 (imper.) 51 0
nnoat 75 2^
3iD3 72 V
pi's? 7 2 €6
DFlbp3 6^] dd
D^Ni'P? 93 00
-193 ^2dd
nflD3 67 d<Z
T : IT '
nD3 766
3iD3 72 r, v
-l^nN 3iD3 29 e
DnilD3 91 k
msyj 606
•• : TIT
"iiV3 72 ee, u
niny3 63 c
nhnV? 63 c
ns^s? 74 gr
nmbw 7500
^^33 61 6
|»D3 67 (W, 78 b
nXD3 67 (£o?
T : Ir '
I2):p C'S3 132 gr, 134 e'
3S3 forms of 78 6
PTJf3 91 e
w:^: 85 u^
m« 481
I:f3p3 (imper.) 5 1 0
Dips 72/i
nep3^ 'j2dd
1l3p3 72(f<i
K*P3 231
TO 75^
N"ip3 75rr
560 Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
\r\}, (Is4i"Keth.)
•nna 26 r
iKsna 7500
Nb'a 66 c, 766
Nb'J forms of 76 6
nsis'3 766
nN'B^J 74^,94/
Wb'j 231, 7 5 00
^Vb'J 75 25-
r\\>m 66 e
KK'J 7500
nNK'3 48^^
«'nK'3 67 w
'^E'i 52 m
nywa 75 z
"^na forms of 78 c
}n3 66 A, i; with
accus. and infin. = allow to
157 &' .
in3 66 1, 6gm^
iJR? 66 A
<
^3ri3 44 0
<
nriri3 44 g^, 66 h
^W9'i 55/
iniap 67 (Z^
3''3D 103 0
n-'nb 50 e
i^3D 10^, 93 2
a^D 72J3
nriD^D 90/
iTllD 72^
nh^D 91 e
^yp 24^'
nbp 91 e
i?p 6^
D^D 85 <, 87/1
niDD (from ^IPJ) ?
69^1
Dnsp a ?e«er 124 6^
D^D 84*/
■>19 67 cc
Dionp 60 ^
V pronunciation
6 e ; with dages f. implici-
tum 22 Or-c
n^y 2 6, 9 6
n'jy 84" «
bS:v 93 M
'3n"*iy 32 w
*iy, poetic "•'ny 103 0; with
imperf. of past time 107 c
'nSiyj 91 71
D^ny 29 e>
Dany 1030
iiy 72m
nfiy 67 /
v>y 55 c
/jy 93 M
^^jy 61 h, 91 (i
133iy gik
^iiy 72 s
^iNiy 30 TO
T1^3i3^y 93 WM
n-i]y 80 gr
njLJ'y 75V
*y 246, 93 2/
ny 82
ni3''y 93 V
-i^y 96
n^y 91 6
^-i^y 93 V
D^"*)^ 27 Z<7
yy 2/'
/"y its origin
loia; poetic '.^ 1030;
158 c; concessit
uses of 1 19 aa~dd ; causa
with perfect 158 6, wit
infin.
1 60 c
nr^y is23^withoi
article 126 z^
i»\by 103/'
Dy its origin
loi a; pointing, withsu
103 c
^19^ 6i(i
ni?1»yi 93y5;/fc
'sy plur. apoc
87/
D"'r?oy 93 aa
'??V 20 A
«y 63 z
"V: 632
n^sy 75 aa
D^KSy 93 «
KJ^ 9 Z, 26 0'
jiajfy 93 uw
^3Jfy 61 a
3i?y 93A^i
3"ji?y 19m
n>N>3"iy 93 a;
D^|->y 88 c
^"ly 75 cc
Diiy iiSw, 146
D"'Bi')y 93 jyp
niny (Hb 3") 7,
na-iy 481*
^3"iy 481
"hV 95 rf
DDiy 91 e
nu^y 20 A. 93 0
nb^ 69 m^
We'y 2:5 /5;*
^nfe^j? 75 ji
101
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
561
'K*^ ptcp. passive
246, 75 u
nn^j; 80 Z
'dSs n'lK'y 97 ^
' '^'-k^. 931,91 f
m 93dd
HB'K'y 67 cc
IK'E'y 67 cc
I" T '
"•wy 97 gi
nn%y 95^*
nny 90^1
! p^ny 84V
rfiNQ 23c
I'lynna 23/5;'
Dins 85 «
ns 96
ri;^Q 80/
£3PS (Ne5")?9ie
ni>9 96
iO"'3 91/
^.h 93 ^
N^B 22 6
|3 with imperf.
itwice perf.) 107 5' and
lote', 152 t« (end), after
ieas of fearing 152 w
naa 91 e
bx^^s 90;!:
D>3S 1 45 A
Sm^ 103/"
''5?? 39 «, 41 <^
% 93 ?
n*i»Q3 96
nipnpst 84^ w
NHB 22 6
mx-iBf
na
ne
Bha
T T
TKha
ma
T
D'-Nna
75 rr
1 1
93 a:
9/
84 V
84'' 6
56
93c?i
80 gr
93 a;
coycLXX
}^^3f with 3rd fem.
pl. 1329', 145 c
irJNifl 123 a 1
riKx 69 »i
n«?? 956
nisn^ 125 /i
n^Nnif 93 X
Of^ 75 ??
I» PI? 133 &'
^^i?1^ 522'
onq^, 88 c
ni^f (verb) 67 w
^1« 72 s
D^3^1^ 86^
nnV 84^0
'V.^'-Vt 93 y
^ijW 67 cc
\^^V log
njobsf 3or, 8i(Z''
J?^^ 93 99
V^t 93 ^fl'
•"iVinGivt 55 ci
'm 46 ci
^B2f passive ptcp.
75^'
y^nsif 8ic?2, 85W
Pi??? 44^,72 0
o o
DN^ forDi'5 9^,235',
analogous cases 72 p
nXj? 80 gr
\^-nni3 9 V, 67 0
133|^ the 3 not com-
<
pensatory 20 0, for ^S^p
67 0, doubtful form looo'
n??i? 52 Z
n^n^i? 85 w
D^Ehi? 124 h
^?r!P 145^
^^P =Jiark!
146 6
"•pipt constr. st. 90*1
<
nip^P 72s
IKS loip 20^
D^jpip 72;;
nip It
^nnnp 2 1 c
njj? for npp 191,
on^t? forDn^lj 191,
66g
«Pni^ 585', eigr,
66 g
nnp 66 ^, 93 h
1?9i?x 93 ?
'S^Vi? 26 g
Vlb^p 19/
^^^e^ 93?
■l^P 520
N^p 76 A
Vp 76 A
niD^p 84" M
D*p 72 m
«D^pt 91/
*^p 67 ee
Dj^ 72 5f
562
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
D^itTBi? 85 u^
|irD3i? 93 MM
'»Rp, 46 i
nisp 2 7 w;
n (Isi8«)73&
njfp 91 e
'.l.ifl^ 93 a;
nan^p 61 c?
ny. 46/
J»<li? 74^
nxni? 74gr
31^ 52 w, 64 h
21P 84/1
nn-iij 481
Nn-ji^t 80 A
h^ 82
^'hi? 88 6, 93 w
^B'p 26 r, 93 p
"^ 6g,o
"^ 22 q,s
nsn 1056
IN'^ (N with Map-
piq) 14 cZ, 64 «
'1^?- 75"
ni^N-] 75 V
^ixi 61 h, 75 V
'^^l 23 gr, 72;;
B'NI 96
J^B'N"! 27 w
n^l adverbial ?
132 h^
nan 48 Z, 7500
^31 67 ee
^'i 67 m
Ki3T 231
ran
T • T ~
mi
T :
"SI"}
Di'-i
onn
norn
T T T
nl£n
T •
••DDn
T
••31
ny"i
T •*
nvn
T
Danyi
T T :
nsn
T ;
PI
nun
YT » -T
93^3'
73 «
90 Z
65 c«
93 "
19 z, 69 gr
69 m^
61 c
12 q
22 A
80^
93^, 145^
24 &, cf. 93 y
73«
73 «2
23 e
6'j ee
93 r
67 w
20 i
87/
67/
85 w
64 i
84"*, 93?^
67 0, s
91 /b
91 k
Uh
7500
75 PP
113s'
153
(Moab.) 7 c
pronunciation
6 i, ^
766, 93 <
84V, 93 U
r1^ 93 ««
nb' 96
|i-inb' 86^
HDVi^ 73/
^riK' 24 c?, 93 X
I9V without arti-
cle 125 /, 126 e^
mbab' 6 k
pb'^ 66 e
^NW 23 c
"^yp 82
•^^ 93 S'^
•Tjyb' 82
nV (n. pr.) 80
in Ju 5»^ 87 ^
tive of noun
36 ; uses of
D'^tDNB'
• T
T T ;
^'•DXb'
T T : ■
5nniy
t;
as preforma
850
-K' (relative
p. 485 note
72_p
23c
646
(Is 7") 29 M
64/
64/
64/
44 ci
44 ti, 64/
67 s
86 sr'
91 e
97 c
616
69 c
206, 67 cc
form of tb
name 10 6''
iufiu. abs., ei.
Index of Hebrew Words and Forms
for 3iB'J ipe, 693'; in-
fi constr. (once) of 2W 723-
^3^65' (imper.) 72 s
^nit^t 726
V^TW 22 p, 64 a
^HB' 6'jee
innK' 67 cc
n^D^'l 64 a
nw 95;?;
^n^t? 93 V
3?t^ 45 c
r\22p 61 c, 935
1??^ 44 c
^nsaB' 90 n
^^i'?^ 55«, 850
n5 iJk? 21 c
^pp with accus.
121 cZ^
Oii'B' subst. and
adj. 141 c*
inJ)B> 520
injjbJ 61 h, 65 d
Jjinjc? 21/, 28 e»
v>?^ 84" <7
dW 52 0
D-'B'.^B' 93^^
nbV?'?' 129 A*
^r>fe 23/
DB' 26 oS 96
i?WD^ 90/fc
nil3^ (inf.) 67 r
Q^PE? 88 c?, 96
;i- ,D*DP"K' seg Additions
ityy nabK'
T T - :
ny»B'
''310B'
T"
aw
33J5J'
T
T :
ypb'
-nS DDK*
J T T
nysB'
D"'pptJ'
nipp.B'
nnB'
97 e
46/
80 gr
48t', 61/^
88 c
48^^6I/'
23 Z
75 rr
(Phoen.) 7 (f^
80^
65 d
135 i^*
29 t'
86^
log
80/
84'' m
930
95/
22 s
23/
22 s
□"'triK'
• TIT
9 r, 93 r
*
55/
* 1"^
9 w, 26 0^
nriB'
T T
(only Qal) 786
T -
73 «^
^hp
67 ee
T
(inf. abs.)75 w
••nK'
73 <^
D^RE'
97 &'
D"'riB'
97 (i
n as preforma-
tive of nouns 85 p-r
ri__ ,n__ original femi-
nine ending 80/, g, 89 e
iQnXJp 63 m, 93 t^
002
b?Nn
pDpNnt
nnsri
T T
''Vf.
— : !•
T : *
n33n
'* T •
"•33^X3*10
KB'ir)
nbnri?
ybin
p)pin
D^nn
563
656
68 c
68/
51m
68^
93?
68/
IBhh
72 k
48 cZ
48 (Z
as 3rd pi. fern.
47^
85i'
75^^
53 »*
15hh
27 Z
52 w
7500
67 <
75rfi
53 »*
85 r
75 M
72 A;
53 *»
69 X
Sog
53?
15 99
84V
50 e
23/
26 r, 69 V
5^9
41 k
72 r
564
Index of Hebrew Words and Forins
<
nnri 103 0
nnri 66/
narinri 1036?
■•srinri 103 ci
i*o"'n 2710
"K'V'f^t 63 A
'iti-]^ri (Jb62^t)75«
^JDK^^^l(Ez6«)?67i3^c^(^
'fjllDrif 60/
D""??!!. I i
nbpri ^^ rr
"bn 2ogr
D^N^ri 7 5 rr
D*nS"j1 75 rr
^JV-Tl 72 ee
'b^'zgq, 73 6
Jib-;} 10^^
njnicn 72 A;
"'npn-^S] 75 iz
i:Dn 67 g, c?(Z
1J?;n (Lams")? 200
D^!? 85 p
t': - •
nrion
Dnayn
•• : T IT
nuyn
n33yn
T--T1"
naSyn
TV. :
nsiyn
TAv-:i
nsyn
T %. T
nb'yri'bsi
nn.K'yn
TV* :
nabirn
t; "• •
67 Jc?
67 y
66/
19 cZ
121 6^
60 b
41 9
51 «i
58 ^
75y
(Ju 5^9) 75 w
48 i
75 AA
609-
91 I
61P
67 gr
67c?i
679'
72 cc
41k
72 A;
41 k, 75 rr
75P
75 M
75 t«
nann
T T
nahn
T" " :
: T ; *
TV; •
T V *
T : •• T
yriB'ri
T : •
T T •
lann
T : •
nnri
T —
oriri
DriPi
6gp
857
(Jb 17^)720
41 k
440
124 h, 1327*
i^n
(Ez23«)?7(
(RuO 74
766
72 k
72 ^
75«
(anomalous!
41 k
41 9
75 &6
15bb
15bb'
6tI
TSbb
19 i, 66 &
672/
67i'
20 m
53 w
Ill
INDEX OF PASSAGES
The references are to the sections and their marginal letters, except where
otherwise indicated. N. = note.
Genesis
1 1 . 5 n, 21 6, 117 a,
125/, 142 fir, 145 A
2 . 141 c N., 142 c
3 . . 109 6, 145 h
4 . . . 53n, 117A
5 . 29 e, 98 a, III c
6 . . 102 h, ii6r
7 . 16 6, 21 6, 1386
8 . . . . 126 w
9 76',^o7W) 109 aN.
11 . 16 A, 20/, 117 r
12 . . . 20/, 91 d
14 1122, 1450, 145 s
16 133/
30 . . . 15WI, 1173
31 . 91 c, 91 Ar, 117 c,
126 X
22 649
24 90 0
26 75 If 119 ft, 122 s,
124^ N.
27 . . wjkk, 122 fir
28 HOC
29 16 a, 106 OT, 141 n
31 . . 126 W, 131 q
2 1 ... . Ill A;
2 . . 106/, 138 a
3 . . 1140, 126 ;<;
4 . 5n, 20/, 1142
5 106/, 107c, 1420,
152 fc, 152 r
6 1076, io7d, 112 e,
142 6
7 . . 70 a, 117 M
9 . . Ii5d, 1276
10 107 d, 112 e, 141 a
11 98 o, 117 g, I26fc,
134/1;, i4in
12 . . . logr, 141 6
13 . . . . 260 N.
14 ii8sr
15 122 I
16 . .360 N., 113 p
17 61 d, ii3n, 1146,
135c N., 143c
18 . . . 75^, 114a
19 70 a, 107*, 131 n
N., 145 m
Genesis
2 21 . . . . 103 d
23 \oh, 20 c, 52 d,
102 g, T25 i, 126 b,
141 a
24 . . 107 gr, 112 m
25 9 0, 72 m, 85 t,
9ZPP' 107^ "!«'>
134^
3 1 III a, Ii9«7,i42c,
1526
2 107 s
3 72 M
4 . . . 72M, 113??
5 61 d, 11200, ii6n
6 . 35^, ii6e, 13U
7 • . • 85<, gzpp
8 . . 1182', 146/
10 142/
11 , . 114s, 1506
12 . 44 fir, 68 e, 135 c
13 136 c, 142 a, 148 6
14 116 r N., 118 A;,
I19U7
15 ... . 117 M
16 . . . 154 a N.
17 lOfir
19 . 296, 95 6, 141 I
21 . . . 60 fir, 128 0
22 76 i, 96 (in«),
I07?,ii223, 1140,
124 fir N., 130 a,
152 M?
24 ... . 1 28 A
4 2 . . 131 ft, 142 d
4 91 c, 106 d, 154 a
N.
6 . . . 20/, 1446
7 145 M
9 . . 106 g, 150 d
10 . . 1466, 148 6
12 I09d, 114m, 164^
13 766, 133 c, 141 m
14 . . 1I2P, ii6<7
15 97^, ii4«, "S'c
ii6w, 117 e, I34r
16 liSgr
17 296
18 121 6
Genesis
4
20
22
• •
• •
11766
127 6
23
• •
• 44
0. 46/
24
295',
134'-. I
5966,
159 dd
25
gu, 1
6/, 26 0 N.,
167 &
26
107 c.
135 ^
144 A;
5
I
115 «.
119ft
. J 2.5/
3
• .
•
134 d
5
. .
146 c
20
.
134ft
23
1452
146 c
24
• •
152TO
6
I
.
164 d
2
117ft,
128V
119
w N.,
3
.
. 67P, 72r
4
107 e,
ii2e,
I2St
5
. . •
1.57 &
8
• *
142 6
9
.
166
II
.
117s
13
. . •
117s
H
ii2r,
117 «,
126m
17
lJ2t,
ii6p,
131 A;
N., 158 a
18
•
• 49 '
72 «?
19
.
• • •
35/
31
.
• • 1
107^
22
.
•
1176
7
I
2
. .
ii7e,
• • •
117ft
1386
4
112 t,
141a,
ii6p,
141/
118 A;,
.•i
. ,
. . •
117 6
6
.
.
164 a
7
.
. * ■
146/
9
.
.
134 (?
II
I26y,
129/,
1340
13
• 97 c,
104 fir,
139?
1.1
.
.
127c
19
, ,
106 d,
133 'c
20
. ,
, ,
ii8ft
21
,
.
119*
22
.
119
wN.
23
• .
51 n
, 750
8
3
.
63/,
113M
566
Genesis
8 4.
Index of Passages
0
10
11
12
9
12
17
18
21
22
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
II
15
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
5
9
1 1
17
19
21
26
I
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
28
29
30
31
I
2
3
4
7
16
16
2rf,
67drf,
1240
■ . 129/, 134^'
70 a N., 1135,
i26r, 126 <
. . . 1504
■ • • 135 «■
. . . 69*
5 I, 72 t, 72 aa
. . . 129/
69 c, 706, 1191
, i5Sf, 146/
. . . 72 aa
104 g, 146 d
• • I35»»
117c, 1386
119W, 131 k
. • .139 c
w, 121/, 143 b
• . 143 «
h, 1191, 1436
121/, 1526
1 1 2 y, 1 1 7 r
. . .1593
131 <
134 '^
. . 1206
7566, 91 e
. -117/
17/, 141 e, 146/
70 «> 133?
. ii6r N.
• 75 5-9'
. .139*'
. .107 fir
. .118/
36 3-
144ft
135 '^
. . . 35TO
. . . 141 d
. 69 o, II 7 r
107 q, 152 w
. . .Ii4fi'
6'jw,6-jdd, 133 d,
1476
(^•j dd, 1073, 1 24 fir
N., 1656
...... 63/
144 (2
118 i
.. . . . 125 A
146/
1520
2t)/
121 C
141 d
ii6fif
134;*
,1160
91 d,
. . 119s
63 g, IIOJ,
Genesis
12 8 .
9 •
II .
12
13
14
15
91 e, 156 c
113W
. . Ill J7, 114 wi
1 1 2 c, 1 1 2 2/, 1 1 2 /jA,
164 d
13 iioi, 112 p, 141 1,
157a, 1656
14 III g, 117 ft, ii8m
15 "8/
16 1450
17 "79
19 iiim, 117/, 1476
... 126 »i
138 c, 154 a N.
. . . .1450
... 131 6
51 n, 56, 159 dd
. . . .144ft
. . . .139 6
. . . . 142 c
. . . 140 a
. . . .104^
• 142 fir, 143 c
. . . .166 b
. . . .i2ogf
118 i, 1340
... 134"
. 9300,131/
. 134 A;
. _. 90 c, 90 i,
93 aa, 1236, 130 e
. 2 6, 126 r, 128 M
ii5«
129 c
. . .121/, 128 a
106 i
io2b, io()g, 135 a,
149 c, 164 a N.
135 c
. . I26r, 131 q
ii6n, ii8n, I28r,
141 e
i50»
II2SS, 122?, I35P
. 29/, 66 1, 138 d
139 b, 139 c
. .I26r
1141
2
3
5
8
9
10
II
12
13
14
15
16
17
4
5
6
9
10
13
17
18
19
22
23
24
I
2
5
6
7
10
II
12
27 9,
13 "30. 135 JJ. 155 «
14 . . . . Ii9n
15 ... . 135 a
16 . . . . 1x8 g
17 ... . Ill fir
18 . . 106 »i, 136 b
16 I . . 142 b, 156 b
2 . 51S1, 51P, 119X
3 102/
4 672)
5 5w, 1030, 135 a,
135 »»
Genesis
16 7 . . . 6od, i2Te
8 10 k, 76 jr, 107 ft,
116 n
10 . . , . 166 a
11 . Sod, 94/, ii6n
12 127 c, 128 i, 156 b
16 115/
17 I 110/
4 143 a
5 Ii7u, 121 b, 163a
8 . . . . 1282?
9 . . . 142/N.
10 ... . ii3srgr
11 67dd, ii2oa,i2id,
144 b
14 29 g, 671), 112mm,
158 a, 167 b N.
15 143 &
17 96, 100 I, 107 t,
134 d, 1503
19 49 J
20 , . 106 m, 112 s
21 . . . . 154 a
26 72 ee
18 I 116 0, 118 (7, 141 e
5 . . . 158b N.
6 . 90 c, 90 i, 131 d
7 . . 117/, 126 r
9 . . . . A47b
10 . . . . ii8?<
11 . . 116 d, 146 d
12 106 n, 139/, 1415,
150 a, 150 b
13 . . 106 fi^, 136 c
14 133c, 139'^. MI*"
15 . . 106 b, 163 a
17 lool
18 . . 75 n, 142 d
19 . . 1140, 165 c
20 128ft, 148^, 15966
31 lool, 108 b, 135W,
138*
24 . . 1179', 122 {
25 112 V, 115b, 161 C
26 . . . . II2if
27 . . . . 141 e
28 47 TO, 117 aa,
119P, 134 Z, 159 n
N., I59r
29 ... . 134*
19 I 116 0, 141 e, 141/,
156 c
a 176, 20 d, 20 g,
1000, 1353, 142 gr,
150 n, 152 c
4 152, 107 c, 152 r,
154a N., 164c
5 29/
6 93 »■
8 34 b, 103 b, 139 d
Genesis 8, 4 — 28, 6
567
Genesis
19 9 .
11 .
12 .
14 .
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
28
29
30
31
32
15/-
115/
66c, ii3r
126M
. 1506
Ii6d
152 w
55 9,
20 g,
60 d, 72 n
152 w, 154a
I07P
152s'
107/,
109/
61 a
120 g
164 &
126 0
115a,
1240
i26r
133/, 1520
69 X, 1 1 7 cc
33 5«,47^6ic,93s,
1262/
34 ... . 126 &
20 I 90 c
5 32 i
6 66 6, 75 qq, 114 m,
167 ^ N.
7 . . . 63^5, iioi
9 . . . . 107 w
10 . . 107 c, 166 6
ir . . . II2X, 153
12 . . . . 152 d
13 119 ?«, 124 A N.,
I27e, 141/, 1451,
167 &
16 . . ii6s, I34n
17 . . . . 145M
18 . , 106/, 113 n
21 3 ... . i38fc
5 . . 121 ft, 128 1;
6 . lojr, 64/^, 114 c
7 106 p, 1240, 142/,
151a
5IW*
52n
67P
143 c
156^
8
9
II
13
14
95 ^ 128 g,
16 75kk, loSb, II zh,
iigk, 1195
1386
. 1 17 cc
. 1316
20/, 51 0
51 P. 135 «
II 2 rr
162 b
17
19
20
23
24
25
26
28
29
)i c.
1276
91/, 126X
22
Genesis
21 30
32
1
3
4
5
7
12
H
17
23
24
I
3
4
5
6
23
24
8
9
10
II
13
20
3
5
6
7
8
9
14
15
18
19
20
21
22
23
26
27
29
30
31
33
35
37
41
4a
43
44
45
48
49
51
65
56
68
60
61
Hid, 157 &
138/, 146^
. . iiigr
. . . 135*
. . .1116
. . . 1 19s
. . .1476
lies', 158a
. 130 dN^
• • . 75#
. . .134A;
III h, 147 e
134 d, 134;!
. . . 122/
. 52/, 128 m
. . . iioe
75g5f,ii9x, i28»-,
142/N2, 1526
. , . 6isr
. . . . 119P
116 A, 141 6, I43 e
106 w, 152 c
. . . . iioe
. . . Ill k
128 a, 165 b
100 n, Ii3g
51 n, 152 w
. . . .138 a
75 X, 109 d,i26y
.... 16/1
112 6&, 135 jj,
167c
106/, 107 c, 152 r
i2od
. . 1060, 164 6
75ib
. , 1 30 a, 1 50 i
• • 134 w, 1566
. . . 37 a, ii8sf
67 gr
• 75 «. I35«, 143 &
156 &
1156 N., ii6s
ii6i
73/
. . . 154a N.
149c
95 "» "7/, 164 d
. . 169", 167 c
112 <
. 1 64 a N., 162 &
135 «
75 <
169'^
• . 109/, 117/
. . 139/1, 146/
142 d
. . . . i5on
• 635', 97 fir, 134 gr
. . 146 fif, 146 A
Genes
24 63
65
67
25 I
6
16
21
23
24
26
31
34
26 7
9
10
13
15
16
18
23
25
28
29
27
I
3
4
7
9
12
13
19
20
21
24
26
28
29
30
31
33
34
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
45
28 2
3
4
6
N.
.114/N.
• . 34/
• • 127/
. .I20d
. . i6a
. .136^
121/
iigff
23/
15a, 115c, 1156
51 w.
. . 35 ", 48 1
. • . .750
44 p N., 147 a N.
486, 152W, 1576
. . 49 Z, 106 p
113 w, 164/
. . 60 A, 1350
. . . .133 c
60 h, HI q, i2od
. . . .118/
. . . .76 c
• 75^. I03P N.
• • 65;}, 75 M
II g, 114 d, 119?/
. . 118/, 122 t
20 b, 106 g, 108 d
. • . .58?
. . . 117 u
. . 49 ?, 1 1 2 JJ
. . log, 141/
. . . . 6od
14 M N., 136 c,
486
. 67 r, 136 d
. . 150 a
. . . log
. . . 20 m
. . . 145 1
113M, 164 6 N.
. . . . 72t
07 c, 116 d, 117 g,
6°^ 153
II h N., 113W,
6"3w, 136 d, 1506
o3Sr, ii7ir. ii7">
42 gr, 1502
log, 16 g, lool
. . 20 m, 1 19 c
.... 63/
. . 61 a, 121 a
. . 112 r, 119 s
14 d, 114 r,
17 aa, 118 i,
50 e, 154 a N.
. . 16 /j, 90*
. . . .75"
■ • 95 9, ^H9
. . . . 167 c
568
Oenesis
28 8
9
II
15
i6
iS
2
6
7
9
lO
H
15
17
19
21
29
25
26
67
13
15
16
18
19
20
23
27
39
31
32
34
37
38
39
40
41
43
6
7
8
9
13
14
Index of Passages
Genesis
\iid 31 32 . . . 69fir, 138/
119 aaN. 34 III g, 124/1 N.,
I26r 132/! N.
1060, 147 h 35 106 Z
106 flf 36 . . . 2od, 37 d
71 39 23/, 74''^. 76 00;
me, 144/ 7535, 90 Z, 1076
150*1 40 67 cc, 76 a, 1043,
1261, 152^ 143a N., 167 b N.
ii6m, 129 /i 41 ... . 136 d
V, 7599, 106/ 42 io6iJ
131 (i 44 69 X
112 cc, 1506 45 ... . 11711
145" 47 ic
133 « 52 • . i49c> 1676
690, 1650 53 1451
142 g 32 I . . 1036, I22gr
3 136 &
5 . . . 64 ft, 68/
6 . 496, 104 y, 123 &
7 ii6s
8 . . . 67P, 144 b
9 . . ii2i>, 145M
10 1160
11 Jo6g, 11911, 133 c
12 119 aa N., 152 w,
156 c
13 ... . 107W7
15 134 c
16 28 b, 122 d, 132 e,
1350
17 ... . 123d
18 9 r, 10^,606,64/,
137 &
107 sr
27 121 b
30 ^33?'
32 60 d
30 3 519
6 . . . 265r, 59/
8 85*1, 1x79, 154 a
N. •
. . 106 n
. . .114a
. . .126t/
. 17 c. 135m
... 96
11766, ii7#
. . 135 m
111 A N., 120/,
159 dd
. . .157c
I20£r, 120 h
. . 112 mm
109 b, 1516
ii7r, 123b
47 &, 76 sr,
95/. 138 c, 145 c
. . , 69/, 145 p
. 11900 N., 142/
. . , 91/, 112 ee
132 g
31 6 321
. . 67 w, 1 1 2 /i
145 M, 159 r, 159 s
1350
127/
. . 146 gf, 146 A
ii3r
19 ... .
23 . . . .
27 63 c, mm,
N.
28 ... .
29 ... .
30 . . . f I J,
32 ... .
10 Sf,
. 67 cc
• iiS/t
1 14 n
75"
, 1521
II3P
138/
. 1241
52 n, 61 d, 74 A
.... 6IW
60/ 65 A, 163 c
20/, 107/1
19
20
25
27
30 ...
31 90 &, me, 156c,
33
i57«'
146 e N.
. . 66 b
34
2
3
4 5w
6 37 a> 67 a, 117 jr,
137a
7 146 A
8 . . . 147 a N.
10 . 112 jr^, 1586 N.
II 749
13 60 h, 104 g, 122 d,
1261, 1350
18 ... ,
19 ... .
5
7
8
9
15
16
ii8n
134 Jr
112 ss
45 c, 45 9
140 d
117 tc
72A, 119P
44 0. 49 *
Genesis
34 19 64 d
22 72 ce
23 ... . 143 a
24 ^45 d
25 . . ii8g, 131 3
27 144 fif
30 . . I28n, 141 d
31 . . . 107*, Il8l7
35 1 6~ia
3 . . . . 1 1 6 d
7 . 124/! N., 145 »
8 . . 126 d, 144 d
" 145/
13 1429
14 138 c
22 . . . IBP, 45 9
26 121 b
36 7 133 c
37 2 126 s
3 . . lI2/», 133 b
4 "5C
7 . . . 47?, 1160
8 . . 1133, 150/1
15 . . .107/ ii6s
16 ... . 142/N.
17 "7/
18 ... . 117 tc
19 ... . 128M
21 ... . 11711
23 . . . . 117 cc
39 152 '
30 . . ii6p, 143 a
33 150*
33 . . .6od, 113M;
35 ii8n
38 5 . . . . 112 MM
9 . 13 c, 661, 112 gg
11 . . ii8jr, 152 M)
17 ... . i59dd
31 1262/
34 20 m, 97 c, 116 s,
iigy N.
25 32 2, 74 ». "6i!,
1426
26 . . . . 133 b N.
38 i44d
29 164 jf
30 1 142 b
4 i3od, i55d, 155 n
5 145?
6 . . . . 128 X
8 137 c
9 . . 107 <, II 2 p
10 i23e
II . . . 35 n, 126s
14 . .2 b, 293, 64 sr
16 72 ee
18 ... . ii4r
20 130 c
33 Ii6s
Genesis 28, 8 — Exodus
Qenesis
39 23 . . 1160, 152^
40 4 139 fe
5 . . . . .139/t
7 . . . 84b/, 87 1
8 152 0
9 143 <i
10 . . . 91 e, 164 g
13 72 to
14 105 6N., 106 mN.,
163 d
15 26
16 135/
20 . 69 M), 71, 121 6
22 . . . . i44n
41 I ii6s, 1 19 cc, 131 d
6 ii62
8 . . , 64 6, 1 2 2 I
II 49 6
\2 139 c
15 . . 1520, 1570
21 . . . 91/, 93 .SS
25 . . . . 116 d
26 . . 126 a;, 141 h
28 53 p
29 156c
30 112a;
33 . • • 75P,75hh
39 ... . 115 a
40 118A
43 . . . . 117 cc
43 85 ^> I13 3» 1 29 A
49 75if
51 52»n
67 145 e
42 I 54/
3 109 g
4 75*^
6 126 A;
7 122 g
9 "4fi'
10 163 a
11 . . . 32d, 91/
13 1339'. 141 ^ I52»»
16 HOC
18 110/
19 I34<^
23 I26r
25 93 m. I30/, 124 1,
I39«
28 . . . . 119 (/fir
30 . . 1241, 126 p
33 i34<^
35 iiigr, ii6m, 139c
36 . . . 91/, 135 p
37 159''
48 3 . . ii3n, 163 c
5 . . ii6g, i59t)
6 . . . . 1501 N.
7 107*. 107 <, 113 3.
150 d
Qenesis
43 9 1590
10 . . 106 p, 159X
12 65 d. 7266, 93 pp,
131 e
14 . . . 29 w, 1060
15 . . .20 c, 131 q
16 65 b
17 90 c
18 ... . ii6d
11 49 6
26 14 d
27 . . . , 141 c N.
a8 67 gr
29 6771
33 • • • • ^^999
34 . . 134 r, 144 n
44 I . . . 47 m, 138 e
a . . . 135'* N.
3 , . 1426, 144 c
4 1386, 156/, 164 b
5 . . . 119 w N.
9 . . nan, 138/
10 153
12 ... . 156 d
16 , . . 20 d, 58 A:
22 1695-
23 137 &
28 ... . 11310
29 . . . . 112 kk
31 . . . . 112 00
33 . . . 69 p, 109 b
34 • • • • 152 w
45 4 138 d
7 ii7n
8 . . . . II 9 M
14 93 PP
23 102^
46 a . . . 1 24 6, 1 26 r
3 69 m
4 . . . . I13U7
22 121 b
27 . . I2t b, 12,2 g
30 108 b
34 I27«
47 3 145 r
6 i2oe
9 128a
II 69 p
17 93 SS
19 67P
21 . 1396 N., 143 c
22 112 t
24 ... . 145 M
48 I ... . 144 ({
a . . . i44dN»
9 . 58sr, 6od, 61 jr
11 . . . 75*1, 115b
14 . . 141 e, i56d
aa . 96, 106m, 130 J/
49 I 76 rr
3. II 569
Genesis
49 3 29 M
4 53 w. 124^) 144P.
147c
8 135 «
10 . . . 2oh, 164/
11 7c, 52^,90 TO, 91 e,
93^. 96, 106 fc,
Ii6x, ii8p
12 93 dd
13 95*
15 . . . .117b N.
17 . . . 20h, 109 A
18 106 jr
21 126 b
2 2 44 TO, 80 sr, 96,
145 A;
23 . . 67TO, 112 rr
25 • . "7.^. "9c
27 29?, 29 M, 107 jr,
156/
30 . . . 138 bN.
50 13 . . . 138b N.
15 • • ^^Iffy 1592/
18 58 A;
20 75 n
23 128c
25 1160
36 . . 73/, 144 dN.
Exodus
1 I . . . . 49 b N.
7 1175, I2id, 133 A;
10 .47*, 75 rr, 112 y
la 1076
14 ." . . . .1190
16 . 67 A;, 7210, 76*
18 47 «
19 . . . 47 ^ 112 00
20 47 i
21 1350
22 . . . 127 b N.
2 I ... . ii7d
2 117 A
3 2oh, 58 sf, 114W,
126 m
4 . . . 69TO, 71
6 . . . . 131 TO
9 . 69X, 70 e, 135 m
10 Ill d
15 136 r
16 76 to
17 . 6od,6oh, 1350
20 . . . 46/, 154 b
3 2 . 52 s, 1191, 126 r
3 . . 108 b, 126»
8 128X
9 "7'-
10 not
11 ... . 107 u
570
Sxodus
3 13
15
18
19
20
21
22
4 I
2
4
10
12
13
H
21
5 2
5
7
10
II
16
18
»9
20
21
23
6 3
6
10
14
28
7 9
II
20
27
8 I
4
10
17
20
22
9 4
9
15
16
18
23
27
30
31
10 I
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
II
22
Index of Passages
II
74 S'
,11
. 112 1
■ 133 «
. 49«
69 a;, 157 b N.
. . 63 m
164 d
95 'f- 139 ^
. . 107 »
• . 37 c
29 gr, 64 c
izSt, 152 d
• . 75««
i3od, 155 n
.159?
2 Mini, 143 d
. .107M
1 1 2 cc
. . 68A
. 152 w
. .1386
ii6<, 152 0
. 163 a
57 N., 135 ft
. . I26r
66 i, 102/
. .Ii3»
9«, 144 J N.
. . 112 X
. 20 c N.
• . I24r
520, 130 d
T09A, 159 d
. .131'
. .1199
. . 52s
20 »i, 75fir3
. . 630
. . 1236
. . 1173
. .107&
150a, 159 m;
i3od, 155 n
. .1173
. . 106 p
. iiseN.
91 e, 127/
63 n, 69 X
126&
107 c
141 d
126 y
51 1, 106 h
. . 656
161 b
107 c, isar
• 137 «
91 ft, 1276
1540 N.
. 135 P
Exodus
10 28 6gv
11 6 1350
8 gv
12 4 . . .133c, 139c
5 128 w
6 88 c
8 . . . 154 a N.
12 124 g
13 i59£'
14 67 w
15 20 gr, 112 mm,
116 w, 126W
16 . . I46 c, 152 b
18 1340
21 46 d
23 , . . . 126; N.
27 61 a
31 2ogr
34 107 c
39 ... . 117 li
43 ... . 119 m
48 . . . . 113 39'
49 ... . 145 u
13 2 52 n
3 . . . . 1136ft
7 , . 118 A;, 121 b
8 . . . . 138 ;i
18 672/
21 533
14 2 93 g
II . . . 61 c, 152 y
20 . . . . 1396 N.
15 I . 20 e, 107 c, 146/
2 . 58 &, 8ogr, 117 &
4 I28r
5 • 58 3, 75 d<i, 91 '
6 go I
7 116 1
8 15 c
9 117 s, i2ogr N.,
154 a N.
10 35fif
II. . . 20 e, 20 gr
13 . . . . io7d
13 . 20 e, 64 d, 138 gf
14 4'j m
15 107 c
16 20 c, 673, 90 gr,
132 c, 1383, 164/
17 . . . 20h, 155 A
20 . . . 47 {, 146 c
2 1 20 «
24 20 c
26 II30
16 2 72 ee
6 . . . . 1 1 2 00
7 32 rf, 72 ee, 141 ;N.
8 72 ee
12 88 c
14 55 ft
Exodus
16 16 .
20
17
18
19
20
21
21
22
23
29
32
33
I
2
3
4
6
7
12
14
4
5
9
H
18
20
21
22
23
26
27
I
3
5
8
13
15
18
19
23
2
3
5
8
9
IS
18
30
24
25
2
4
5
8
12
13
18
20
28
29
31
35
36
118A
27 0, 67 M, 121 d
N., 139^ N.
123c, 1593
. . •I34«
. 63 i, 76 d
9h 69 P. 139'*
. . II 7 cc
. . .1256
. . .115/
. . .47 m
. 72 ee, 1176
. . 112 X
. . . 4gk
. . .I52fe
141 d, 145 n
. . . 126s
. . . 119*
. . .118^
. . •75'-
, . . 102 6
• 75 ". 1 33 c
155 «*. 155 »■
, . . 97A
. . 1276
• • • 49«
• 47 9'. "2 gr
, . . 119 s
102/
... 63"
. . .1130
• • •I35'-
, . . 69<
. 1340 N.
. . 93 dd
. . I13M
. 72 w, 72 X
. 15P, i38d
1070, 132 h
. 606, 129*
• . 113 66
. . .Ii8k
. . . 1070
. . . I160
i35w», 152 a;
. . . 127 e
72 k, 11"] kk
. . 15966
. 145 A, 1466
. . .1130
6x 6, 75 ee, 103 gr
04 gr, II 2 n, 116 10
. .112 1«
. . 47 »»
, . . I26r
1 1 7 d, 1 2 1 6
. . 1 24 t
. 291 N.
. 135 »»
, . 159 cc
Exodus 3, 13 — Leviticus 26, 43
571
Exodus
21 37 •
22 I
3
4
5
8
II
17
22
25
29
30
23 4
8
9
16
21
22
24
26
27
28
30
31
3
4
10
12
5
II
15
18
28
39
31
33
35
40
2
3
19
33
II
9
10
17
20
21
32
43
I
2
12
31
35
4
20
32
4
13
:>3
49 /»
47/. 123 a
124 n
51ft, 1130
• -53"
• •"7«
. .1386
• .1130
. . 94rf
m, 163 c N.
• -1350
60 d
• .131^
. . 21 h
• .107 ST
158 a
. . 61 a
51 n, 67 y
. .1130
. . 606
. . 94d
117 u N.
. . I26(
133*:
• 58 sr
. ii8g
• 134/
139?
154 « N.
• 523
• 49'
135 0 N.
, ii'jhh
117M
20/, Ii'jhh
. . 6ih
1236,
. .123d
. .I2^d
. . 121 C
. i34n
123d, 1396
. .123d
Sir, 133 1
• I34«
ii7d
134 c N.
. .I3id
. .1172/
• .139 c
. .165 a
165a
. . 66g
126m
119W N.
I28p
. 1036
• • 1039
117 y N.
• . 73/
. . 63»
. . 60/
Exodus
31 17 51 m
18 124?
32 I . . 1 26 aa, 137 c
3 . . . 54/, 117M;
4 . . . 72 ^, 145 t
6 . . . 62«, ii3e
12 1506
25 • i". 58 sr, ii6i
26 137 c
29 114P
30 ... . 108 h
32 . . 159 dd, 167 a
33 137 c
34 . . . . 1 1 2 00
33 3 279
6 . . . 54/, 117 w
7 1076, 112 c, 113 A
10 . . . . 112 kk
II 156 c
12 75firfir
13 . . 696 N., 91 k
14 ... . 150a
19 67 ee
20 . . 60 d, i59g'fl'
23 124 6
34 I 1245
10 122 q
13 47 »»
19 5^9
24 51 '
34 ... . 159 A;
36 I 103 gr
29 . . . . 112 ss
38 3 . . . . 117 M
5 95 n
39 17 i3id
18 6oh
23 ... . 165 a
Leviticus
1 I
2
2 I
2
8
4 2
23
5 9
II
n
15
6 2
3
7
8
9
13
7 8
35
. . 49bN.
. . -iSQ*^
.I39d, 145 <
. . . 856
. 144P N.
1910 N,, i39d
6gw
75 hh
• I3id
119 w N.
. I28d
. 91 e
.I28d
"3</^
1350 N.
. 1189
131 c
ii7d
63 ^ 155'
iiSsT;
75
Leviticus
8 II
16
9 6
10 6
10
19
11 7
23
35
42
43
44
13 4
19
34
55
1434
43
46
55
15 29
16 8
17 14
18 7
21
25
27
28
19 9
16
20
28
20 7
10
14
19
21 4
9
21
23 17
22
39
42
24 5
22
25 5
10
20
21
33
36
48
26 15
18
25
33
34
37
42
43
rr.
107 Q:
look,
76 c
91 c
1 20 c
109 sr
114P
1599
. 67 (/
. 88/
• 53"
. 5n
. 74&
• 54 fc
. 91 e
. 131 »•
. 127*
• 54A
1 01 a
• 53i
• 53'
. 54 '^
• 63 »•
. 30 w
• 145'
.75M
95 gN.
. 76/4
34 &N.
. 1163
142/N.
. 1183
I13W
. 102 i
. 54A:
ii7d
ii7d
• 75 >>h
. . 67t
67 1, 164 d
142/N.
. . I4d
. . 61 d
. . 61 a
. . 126 r
492, 117 n
. 134 d
. , 2oh
1340 N.
. 159 M)
49 h 75 »*
I45«.N.
. . 76 »■
• • 130 d
. 67 dd
. . 5^P
. . 49^
• • 52 n
67 V, 75 »»
. .iiSsN.
128 d, 131 r
67 y
572
Index of Passages
Leviticus
27 2 . .
23 . •
I2%d
. 1271
Numbers
1 I . . . . 49 6 N.
2 124 r
47 64^
2 33 54'
3 I . . . 52 0, 130 d
9 1236
26 117?
46 . . 1 17 w, 134 &
49 85 <
4 2 . . . . 113 66
23 45 fl'
27 1281;
5 2 102 i
3 "9e
10 . . 117 m, 139 c
17 ... . 128p
19 iioi
20 ... . 167 a
22 . . . 53 5.66/
23 126s
27 ... . 112 J/
67.... 746,96
9 . 133 fcN., 1446
26 109 6
7 2 5n
11 ... . 123(2
8 7 . . . 27 3, 64 d
24 455'
9 20 1316
10 3 145 c
4 . . . . i34r N.
29 1386
35 5"
36 "8/
XI 4 . . 35 d, 151 a N.
5 106 g
7 93'»
10 117 A
II 74 fc
12 . . 69 s, 122/ N.
15 32 </
16 481
17 ... . Ii9»w
20 Soh
25 23 d, 68/, 72 q,
120 d N., 126 X
27 I26r
29 154 ^
12 I 146^
2 . . . 133* N.
4 97 »■
6 i28d
13 . . . 105 6 N.
14 154^
13 21 102/
14
Numbers
13 27 . .
32 . .
2 . .
16 . .
17 . .
21 . .
24 . .
27 . .
31 • •
33 • •
34 • •
35 • •
40 . .
41 . .
15 • •
24 . .
29 . .
31 • •
35 • •
16 13 . .
15 . .
22 . .
29
. . . 118/
. . . 72I
106 p, 151 e
. 69 M, 1 14 s
, . . Sn
, . .1676
. . 119 gg
. . . 72 ee
15
j6h
91 2
123d
67 fir
58^^
.... I35P
161 c
. . . . iigw
143 c
61*
. • . . 113 ra
546
117 d
. loom, 150m
121 6, 159 cN.,
1592
17 6 72 w
67 t, 72 dd
. .139 c
. . 72 ee
25 1280
27 106 w
28 676, 67 dd, i^og
N.
.... 1436
. . . . 72 t
. . . . 74&
. .65 a, 1546
•59«. 152 a N.
... 152 m;
.... 66»
. . • .752
.... 59a
. . . .ii7d
.... 127/
. . . 112|>p
. . . .631
. . . 1 1 3 SS
. . .I576N.
. . . Ii2pp
• •54 c, 75**
67 s'. 69 r, 76/
, . . .164(2
22 I 125 h
aoc, 53 u, 670,
1 20 c, 1 38 e
. . . 103 c
.69 a;, 115 c
. . . 67 0
. . 109 (f, t
151 e N.
18
19
20
21
6
10
17
20
8
26
12
3
5
18
21
I
5
9
14
15
17
20
23
24
27
30
35
I
6
12
13
17
19
29
33
23
24
103 6, 117 6
Numbers
22 38 . . . . 114 w
3 . . 130 d, 137 c
6 . 64 c, 67 0, 93 aa
8 58 g
10 . . . . 151a
13 20 0, 48 t, 67 oN.,
69 X, 100 0 N.,
152 6
14 "8/
'6 51 P
18 . . . . 90 0, 96
19 27 q, 64 d, 109 i,
166 a
159 £/
124 n
10 h, 67 g
123 c
90 0, 96
116 k
148 6
• 75 •'e
54 c, 93 2
.113 r
• 55/
• 29/
115 k
' 93 y
5n, i2Sd, 131 rN.
• 54 i
1350
.93 m
. 91 K
.134(2
it;0 7n
. 69 A
• 72P
159 cN., 1676
47 w, 159 g
. 68 f
• iid
103?
• 131/
75 bb N.
• 23 c
• i3.'>o
20
24
25
I
3
4
5
6
7
10
17
22
23
24
25 12
2662
27 7
2939
30
31
32
34
36
5.
28 ,
6
M
17 ■
20 ,
23
30
32 .
42 ,
2 .
7 •
14 ,
6 .
Deuteronomy
1 I ... . loi a
2 . . 118(7, 134/
3 . . . . 134 0
5 . . 120 fir, 120 A
7 . . . . 119 s
13 ... . 119s
16 . . . 75 <, 113 U
17 47"*, 53'-, 133 c.
161 c
18 ... . 117 gg
19 . . 118 h, 126 V
21 69/
23 134/
Leviticus
27,2
—Deuterono
mij 33
>j
2 573
Deuteronomy
Deuteronomy
Deuteronomy
1 24 . . . . 120 h
9 7
138 c
27 2 72 w
27 .
■ 115 c. "5/
8
54 ^
6
. . 117M
28 .
. . . 1245
18
54 *
9
. . . . 16 6
33 •
• • • -53 9
10 5
29 sr
28 24
■ . . .589'
34 •
. . 65 e, 149 h
17
102 m, 126 1;, 1331
36
. . 131 d
40 .
. . . 119 s
19
. . . . 112 aa
43
• • 133 'f
4' •
■ . . 135 w
22
. . . . 119 i
48
53 h 145 »*
44 • 6
7 g, 67 y, 107 g
11 2
. . . . 117 I
49
. • 155 d
46.
. . . 138 c
15
49 m
52
. . . 67 V
2 9.
• 75 6&, iiSg
30
. . . . 1506
56
113 d, 142/N,
13 •
. . . 119 s
12 3
. . , . 52 n
57
. . . 74i
14 .
. . . 134 A
14
61 h
59
. . . 91 n
23 •
. . . 12610
13 1
. . . . loy d
62
. . . 1191
24 20 g, 69/, 75 cc,
3
60 6
66
■ . . 75"*
no A, 120 gi, h
6
. . . . 116/
67
. . . 151 6
27 108 c, 1236, 133 ft,
9
. . . . 109 d
29 14
100 u N.
156 d
14 17
80 k
15
• • 157 c
28 49 m
15 2
. . . ■ iiigg
18
. . . 69 A N.
31 .
. . 67 U', 69/
7
. 119 w N., 139 d
21
. . 167 6
3 3 ■
. . . 164 d
14
93*
28
. . . 5 n
5 •
128 c
18
. . 128 c, 133 ft
30 4
. . 92 6 N.
II .
. . 100 i
16 6
... 119 fif
31 12
. . 120 s
13 ■
. 125 dN.
13
93 'c
16
• • 92 99
21 .
. . 126 &
20
. . . . 133ft
21
. . 164 d
26 .
. , . 69 «
17 2
. . . 167 b
29
■ ■ -14 9
4 I . .
. 44 d, 69 s
5
, . . . 1240
32 I .
2 r, 91 i, 117 6
8 .
. . . I28p
6
. . . . 144 e
3
. . . 69 0
10 . .
115 d, 165 b
8
. . . T02 h
4
. . 126 c
15 •
52 0, 130 d
14
' .44^, 49 m
5
. "3 c, 152 e
20 . .
21 . .
. . .741
. . . 64 A
17
18 I
... 109 gf
. . . 68 c, 131 A
6 20 g, 75 11, 100 i,
152 a N.
26 .
36 .
. . . 51 ft
. . . 61 d
16
10 5
20 2
. . . 109 d
. . . . 126 r
61 d
7 . 60/, 87 n, 123 c
8 . . 53 ft, 109 ft
39 •
2l,72W
5
8
. . . . 137 c
1 21 6
10 . . .58 i, 58 ft
41 . .
. . . 90 c
II . . 52 w, 155 fif
' 53..
. • 135 9
14
21 3
4
7
8
. . . 128 A
15 20 ST, 144 p, 154
6 . .
9 . •
ISP, 138 d
. . . 60 b
. 121 a, 145 q
. . . 121 a
• 44 m, 145 ft
. • . . 55/^
NCa)
17 144 p, 152 a N.,
12 . .
19 . .
23 . .
24 . .
26 . .
. . ii^bb
120 d N.
. . 132 A
. . , 32A
ii5rf, 151 c
155 e, 155/' 'SS'*
18 . . . 75 s, 109 ft
ao . . . . 108 a
10
II
• 135 P, 145 »w
49 m, 96, 130 e
21 . . . 152 a N.
32 69/
63.-
n . .
118 g, 165 I
. . . 119 Z
. 49 m, 96
13 •
22 I .
19 .
23 •
23 5
11
loi a
• • • 159 5'9'
. . 17 c, 127 e
. . . 131 6
61 d, 130 c N^
24 . . 116 h, 116 I
26 . 58 a N., 75 mm
27 ... . 139 y
17 . .
. . . 58 ?
28 50 e, 93 qq, 124 e
i 7 6.-
. . . 52 n
. . . . 20 h
29 ... . 159 a;
! 15 . .
16 . .
. . . 6od
72 r, 109 d
15
25 •
. 93 ss, 128 p
.... 96
30 ... . 134 «
31 . . . 156 6 N.
24 • •
• . . 53^
24 I
... 167 6
32 20 A
25 • •
. . 127 e
4 •
8 .
. . . . S4'»
. . . . 51 M
. . . . 23 d
35 520, 1450. 155 i
83..
. 44 ^ 72 0
36 . 29 », 44/, 152 3
5 • •
. . . 61 A
10
37 •
. 29 t, 75 M
9 • •
. . 93 aa
I? •
.... 58 t
39 •
. . 141 AN*
13 . .
. . 75.**
25 '2 .
. . 96, 128 0
. . . . 67 ee
. . . 123/
40 .
. 93 aa N.
14 . .
. . 1x6/
12
41 .
. . 169 »*
IS • •
. . 127 t
13 •
46 .
^1199, 1656
16 . .
• 44 ^> 72 0
2e 5 .
... 1191
. • . . 53 &
50 •
. . no c
19 . .
. . 106 t
12 .
33 2
. . . mpp
574
Index of Passages
Deuteronomy
33 3
34
4
9
II
12
i6
19
21
23
24
26
27
8
9
Joshua
1 I
2
5
7
8
12
2 2
4
5
6
ID
13
15
i6
17
i8
20
3 5
7
9
II
12
14
i6
4 3
4
6
7
14
24
6 2
8
8
9
13
17
22
7
9
15
21
24
25
3
6
116 s
. • 131 s
19 c, 117 bN.
116 i, 117ZZ, 165 b
44 c
48 d, 90 I, 90 m
130/. 133 h
. 68 /t, 76 d
. 48 i, 69/
119 to, 126 m
. . . 91 i
• . 131 s
. . . 67sr
. . 116/
. . 49 6 N.
. . 131 w
. . 106 c
107 p, 135 oN.
. . 91 k
125 d N.
• . 63 t
60 d, 135 1>
114 k
■ • 59 9
117 c, 157 c
63 q, 96
, . 126 r
63 c, 72 g, 74 k
34 a N., 59 h
59 '^
126 1/
54*
11^ c
66 c
128 c
1342
127 fir
120 g
72 s
134 A;
47 ^
9 »
52 i
74 9
20 fir, 124 g-
63 q
134 '
113 M
112 i, 113 <
75 00
134 ^
13 a;, 120 e,
63 P.
154''
8
75 '''*
121 b
134 5'
54 «N. (a)
1 1 7 ee
. . 60 c
27 t,
Joshua
8 II .
25 •
28 .
33 •
2 .
8 .
12
0
10
11
20
24
2
13
17
24
36
2
54/; 7
126 aa
107
14
12 9
13 5
7
14
14 I
7
15
II
3
5
12
14
18
19
II
21 .
3856
16 2
3,
17 II
18 12
13
20
19 II
13
21 II
22 3
9
17
20
25
5
15
7
10
'4
•9
Judges
1 I
2
3
6
23
24
23 «,
• i27fir
146 c
20 g, 1 17 u
127/, 127 J
. .ii8g
• ^37 a
2 TO, 112 SS,
• • ' 13 «
• 75''^
, 107 c
1 35 p. 150 e
9300
1381
. 90 e
• • logr
126 y
■ • 53i
2 r (end)
• 127/
125 d N.
145 mN.
. . 64^
72 aa, 115 i
■ • 75"
115 A;, 161 c
II 2 SS
. . god
• • 90/
• -^34^
. . i6f
H7#, 1262/
. . 90 <!
. 2 1 e N.
. 1 1 2 SS
126 2/
97c, Ii7i
90 i, 112 SS
126 2/
. 47/
1 12 SS
. 90 i
. 91 k
112 SS
. 68 t
117 aa
150 nt
. 69 n
. 60 a
1036
145 wi
113 r
• 75 0"
12^ h, 145 i
. -49 b N.
1 06 m
. . 49A
• • 93»'
Judges
1 7 116 fc, I2id,
156 b
1411,
2
12
15
19
22
28
I
18
19
23
24
25
28
4
6
8
18
19
21
24
I
6
10
12
13
14
15
17
21
22
24
26
27
28
29
9
10
II
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
25
28
31
36
39
3
4
6
72 s
. 112 ii
59 A, 126 y
114 I
■ 145 c
13 n, 164 d
107 b
. 112 M
12 e, 112 66
112 tt
67 V, 164 6
116 d
129 e
131 b
1506
49 m
126 r
74*
72 <,
'y /^ "•
20 58 fir, 64/, 110 fc,
147c, i5(?n, 152^
. . . 72 p, 72 t
. 113 A N., 113 M
2 r, 73 6, 117 b,
146 sr
. . . 117 s
67 dd, 136 d N.
20 i, 36, 44/1 N.
-07 b, 149 6
876, 130 a
10 fir, 72 s
. .69(7
- . 93 «a
10 g, 87 fir, 93 bb
. 117 bb
. 118 q
20 ^, 123 e
. 119 to
• • 47*
154 a N.
64 h
75
w,
28 i, 133 /»
49 c, 49 «
• • 49«
127 d
. 159 dd
126 y
• . 49'
. . 36
14 9. 136 a
53 w, 156 d
• • 34/
16 w, 128 c
• ■ ^ip
73 6, 100 TO
6 g, 159 V
109 a N.
137 c
. 136 b
• • 93"
Deuteronomy 33, 3 — i Samuel 3, 12 575
74
h.
63
Judges
7 8 .
12 .
13 .
19 .
20 .
23 •
25
8 I
2
4
10
II
18
19
32
9 8
9
10
15
16
17
28
29 48 I,
154^
39
41
45
48
53
65
10 4
II
18
11 5
TO
18
20
25
29
33
34
35
36
39
12 5
6
7
13 2
55
rf.
131 s
. 36
112 gg
1132
147 c
102 h
124 r
20 m
118 M
• 97 «
130 a N.
126 0, 161 c
63 <1, 159 a:
125 ^, 128 c
• • 1130
100 n, 106 w
46 d, 46 e
• 159"
167 a
. 119 66
137 «
151 6,
76
27
67;?,
51
35
8
12
16
21
23
25
2
3
4
6
44 d
0,
100
6gp
35 <^
117 ee
157 a
125 6
145 d
96
167 6
137 c
. 21 6
159 n N.
.47 m
157 6 N.
133 aN.
118/
134 «
135 0 N.
119 i
124 6
1446
112 ee
2 w
124 0
125 6
. 80 d
127 e
• 52 s
135 »»
119 m
• 75 2/
90 h N.
. 61 c
. 90 e
135 a
122 g, 135P
. isap
w.
64/,
Judges
14 15 .
N.
15
16
18
19
20
9u, 69 n, 150 sr
17
18
I
7
12
13
14
5
9
10
II
13
14
15
16
18
20
25
26
27
28
30
17 2
37««,
133a
. . i34»»
90 /> 93 a;,
, . . iign
163 c, 163 dN.
152 w
II3P
164 6
. 66 A
1260
67 dd
1130
28 cN.
127 g
141 e
60 d,
10 jf, 52 d,
i64d
34 «
N.
3
3
19
23
29
30
I
2
5
6
8
9
II
13
18
20
22
30
2
15
16
31
32
38
39
43
44
21 7
9
16
21
117
112 tt
123c
. 52 n
. 67 V
I26x
N., 88/, 97 6
. . 72 r
32 ^ 121/
. 154 N.
. . 142 e
2og,ii,og
67 g, 67 2/
• -529
. . 5 w
• 131^
- • • 75<
9M, 64 c N.,
ff
110 h, 120 d
. . 64 V
. . 91 k
. . igi
69 X, 73 d
ii8eN.
29 Q, 73 «
• 54c, 130 «
2 ee, 00, 116 w
. . 29/
54 ^, 15s rf
90 i N.
. 66/
. 20 h
75.
118
. 22
117
131
■)99
u
s
' m
: n
• 64
123
1 Samuel
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
. 49 6 N., 125 6,
125/}, 1566
• • 134 ^ 1450
. . 112 dd, 123 c
112 g, 126 s
22 s, 59 Sf,
20 h,
117P
10
II
12
13
16
17
20
22
24
27
28
I
4
6
8
9
14
15
16
. 91
141 e
107 e, 123 c
. 37 e, 102 i
e, 113 e N.,
128J/
.... 1130
112 MM, 114 n N.,
164 d
20 gr
47 0
. . . . 128 V
. • . 23/ 95 h
. . , 44 d, 64/
. . . 112 00
• . • . 135*
95 '*
64/
. . . 2 r, ic6 g
3 io3fif, i2osr, 1246,
133 'C) 152 s
146 a
. . Ill u, 1x6 X
107 fif, ii6x, 135P
67 fir
112 00, 116 w,
131 c, 159 i, 164 o
. . 131 h, 132 g
. . . . 112 00
103 gr, 106 wi,
',i59/»
Il2ll,Il^lV
159 dd
18 ii6k, 118 q, 121 d
19 ... . 112 e
20 ... . 145 M
22 . . . . 1X2 A;
23 ... . 126 y
24 ... . X16 s
25 ... . 1x7 x
26 ... . 113 u
27 113 q, 1x46, i5oe
28 49 e, 113 2, 1x9 w
29 ... . 133 6
30 XI3P, ii65r, X490
. . 112 X, 116 d
53 g, 118 q, X45e
. . X07 6, X20 6
. . X07 c, 152 r
31
33
2
3
5 46 c, 120 g
7 . . . .
10 54 fc, 1x8 M
120 A
107 c
iu 5^ a, 110 It, X23 c
IX 673, 67i5, 116
w.
12
155 <^
1x3 A
576
Index of Passages
Samuel
1 Samuel
1 Sami
ael
3 13 112 qq, 130 c N.,
10 8 , . , . 112 ?)
14 39
. 100 0 N., T49 c
119P
9 . . . . 112 uu
43
. . . . 113P
14 ... . 149 c
II 20 A, III fir, 116 s,
44
. ... 149 d
17 . . . . 149 d
116 w, 136 c
45
. . . 119 10 N.
21 75 2/
12 ... . 154 b
49
. . . 47 6 N.
4 I . . 131 c, 145 c
13
... 75 9Q
52
. . . 112B
3 • . . • 1273
14
... 152 fc
15 I
9"
5 . . 72 A, 146 c
16
. . . I130
2 .
, . . 106 g
6 37/
18
. . . 1.^5 «
4
. . . .93 a;
7 1266
23 .
... 133 «>
5
. . . . 68 i
8 132 fe, 136^, 147 d
24
. . 22 s, 100 I
6
20 g, 22 s, 60/,
10 . . 124 h, 146 0
25
. . . . 126 s
58 h, 154 a N.
12 . . . . 127 e
27
... 1366
9
67 <» 75 y, 132 d,
15 44 w, 145^,145 n
11 I
... 125 ;»
135 cN.
16 ... . 126 k
2
... 135 p
13
. . . 121/
19 . . 6g m, J 12 tt
5
. . . 107 V
14
. -37/ 154 &
21 ... . 152 g
II
. Ill fir, 116 w
16
... 165 a
53.... 116 d
12
... 150 a
19
. . . . 72#
7 . . . . 112 rr
12 3
... 137 b
20
... 167 c
9 • • 67 I', 130^7,
7 •
. . . S^P
23
291, 53 h "I h>
164 d
13
. . . 44 d, 64/
119 X
10 . . 116 c, 145 »»
14
. . . 167 a
32
. . , . 118 g
II . . . . 1176
17
. . . 114 0
33
. . . . 119 w
6 4 . . 118 /}, 135 r
19
... 107 p
16 I
. . 65A, i27d
7 . . 72 J N., 1350
30
... 135 a
2
• . "4 9'. 159 fl'
9 155 <^> 155 /, 1593
23
. 126 X, 135 g
3
... 1386
10 . . 60 A, 75 qq
24
... 75 00
4
I4in, I44d, 145M,
II . . . 154 a N.
25
. .290,1130
150a
12 . 47 k, 71, 75 n.
13 3
....2b
7
• . 355'. '32c
113 s
6
. . . . 93 w
8
. , . , I26i
14 ... . 127 d
7
. . . 11999
II
' . • • 133 s'
18 ... . 126 X
8
. . . . 69 i
12
. . . . 128X
19 . . . . 119 k
II
... 67 dd
14
. . . . ii2h
79.... 131 fc
12
. . . . 64^^
16
1206N., 1241
10 ... . 116 u
13
. . . 1^9^
18
128 /, 129c
II ... . 119 c
15
. 93 00, 132 .g-
20
. . . . I28g
12 ... . Ill d
17 Ii8g, 126 w, 1260,
23]
[I2ee, II300, 126X
14 • • . . 72 k
134^
17 6
. . 121 d, 131 g
16 ... . 112/
19 ... . 152 w
12
. . . 126 X
17 . . . . 29 i N.
20
. . , 118/
14
• • 1333,134'
811 72 i
21
35 n, 96, 112 dd
15
. . 113 M, ii8g
12 ... . 114P
32
, . , . 112 ee
16
. . . . 113A;
19 . . 20 g, 163 a
23
. . , . 92 fif
17
. . 126 X, 134 n
9 2,,.. 133 a
14 I
. . . 126 s
20
. . . 1 1 2 rr
3 . 96, 117 d, 130 fif
13
. . . . 72 w
21
. . . . 122 »■
4 . . 104 g, 152 A
14
. . . 118 sN.
24
. . . Ill h
7 . . , 159 M> N.
15
95 9
25
22 s, 53 n, 60 fir,
9 . 107 e, 144 dN^
16
. . . . 129 h
lool, 114 fir, ii6s
10 ... . I20flf
19
III A, 113 M, 164 d
26
. . 34/. 132 h,
II ... . 116 M
31
.... 26
28
... 1 36 c
13 . • • 35 w>47 »»
22
. . . . 63W
32
. . . II2P
17 ... . 138 6
24
". 76 d, 112 w
34
112 kk, 126 r,
20 73 «, 134 w, 143 c
27
72 A;
164 a N.
21 ... . 1335'
28
. . . . 72 (
38.
... 112 tt
24 , . 1381, 138 k
29
. • . 126 a;
40
... 152 c
0 3 97 «
30
106 p, 1130, 1590;
41
. . . 113"
4 - • • . 134W
33
23 c, 74 »■> 75 00
43
. . , 1240
5 2951,101 a, 109 fc,
34
. . 96 (p. 286)
46.
. . . 145 «
112 2
36 485rN.,67dd, io9d
47
. . 53 9. 145 c
6 . . . . 75 gg
38 .
. . . .66 c
48.
. . . 112 MM
I Samuel 3, 13 — 2 Samuel 6, i
577
1 Samuel
1 Samuel
1 Samuel
17 50 . . . . Ill fc
23 I 93 f
29 8 . . 49 TO, 1 30 c
55 ... . 1.^6 c,
7 . . . . 128 a
10 ... . 144 c
137 &
10 . . 113 0, 117 n
80 2 ... . 156/
58 . . 126 e, 126/
II . 150 3 N., 150 n
6 . . . . 144 &
18 I 60 d
IS 90 «
8 . 150 a Ni, 154 0
9 55 c
19 ... . 150 e
13 . . . 1340 Ni
lo . . 54 e, 118 M
21 ... . 121/
24 ... . 161 c
15 • • • • 157 c
22 63 n, 135 b, 144 d
26 91 fc
18 ... . 137 a
N»
28 log
19 . 114 q, 1156 N.
23 . . . 100 0 N.
31 2 53 »i
21 ... . 134 r
28 22 s
7 . . • . 103 g
32 59 c
24 5 ... . 1386
9 . . . . 1 24 r
23 . . . . 1140
6 . . . . 117 rf
28 . . . 59 g, 59 1
II 9 u, 112 rr, 144 0
29 . . . 68 A, 69 n
12 114 r, 154 N. (c)
2 Samuel
19 I ... . 115 a
18 ... . ii7#
1 4 ... . 157 c
2 . . . 51 ". 63 c
19 . 113 hh N., 117 c
6 . . 15 rr, 1130
3 . . . . "9'
25 I 21 d
9 . . 72 TO, 128 e
10 ... . 126 J/
2 67 cc
10 49 c, 61 b, 107 5N.
13 . \2^h, 132 h N.
5 . . . 44 d!, 64 /
18 . , . . 150 e
17 • • .59'*. 150 «
7 53 P
21 126TO, 130 a, 152^
22 ... . 126 X
8 . 72 0, 74 k, 76 g
23 • 44 c, 154 «N.
23 . • "3«, 135?
10 . . 67 ee, 126 m;
24 ... . 116/
20 I . . 37 rf, 116 s
II . . . . 112 cc
25 • •
. . 148 6
2 . . 103 gr, 156/
14 72if
26 .
. . 75 00
3 . 118 X, 149 0 N.
15 ... • isod
25..
. . 121/
6 51 e, 51 i, 113 n,
18 . 24 b, 75 r, 132 g
16 . .
. . 144 d
159 s
20 . . 47 fc, 1 1 2 MM
20 .
. . 136 d
8 . . . . 142 ff
22 ... . 149 b
21 .
. 64 c, 119s
9 ■
... 150 a
24 • • • • 135?
22 .
102 Z, 150 e
10
. 150 i, 151 0
25 ... . 107 p
23 .
III g, 116 w
II
. . . 118/
36 65/, ii3e, 11339,
26 . .
. . •44?
^ '
117 Z N., 149 d
144 ? N', 149 a N.
27 • .
. . 159 ee
16
. . . ii7ff
27 143 d, 1450,1450
32 .
. 72 r, 118 g
19
. . . 120 c
Ni
3 I .
113 M, 145 C
20
... 127 e
28 . . . 119 w N.
2 . .
. . i2gg
23
... 143 a
29 ... . 143 c
8 .
75 90-, III e
26
... 152 d
31 ... . 114P
10 . ,
. . I140
27
. . . 80 jr N.
33 • • • • 75 QQ
II .
. . 115 d
31
. 128 V, 138 c
34 J6h, 106 p, 149 d
16 . .
. . 113M
33
. . . 115 c
26 9 . . 112 h, 151 a
18 . .
. 113 ddN.
37
... 1506
12 . . . 87 s, 152 I
25 . .
. . 117 h
40
. . . . 72 y
13 ... . 156 c
27 •
. . 117 «
42
• 134 f«. 135/
14 ... . 155 m
30 .
. . . 117 n
21 2
jot, 119 firjr, 152 0
16 . 117 I, 117 TO N.
33 •
. . 107 <
3
• • 55 ^ 137 c
19 ... . 72 aa
34 •
152 d, 152 e
5
. . . 119 cN.
20 . . . . 117 d
39 •
. . 141 e
6
. . . . 123 &
22 ... . 127/
4 I .
. . 145 P
8
. . . 129 ^
27 9 . . 1 1 2 e, 1 1 2 dd
2 .
. . 128 c
9
. . . 150 cN»
10 . . . 150 a N.
4 •
. . i2Sh
10
. . 102 g, 126 r
28 3 . 106/, 154 a N.
7 •
, . . 141 e
14 60 d, 75 6b, 131 TO
7 52 d. 96, 128 u,
10 .
III h, 114 I N.
N.
130 e
11 .
. . . 117 d
16 . . . . 150 b
8 . 10 /i, 46 d, 46 e
5 2 .
. . . . 74^^
22 2 ... . 75 00
10 20 A
6 .
35 gr, 106 TO
5 . . . . 119 s
13 . . . 132 ;j N. I
8 35
gr, 1 16 If, 107 u
7 11771, 124 p, 153
15 48<«, 59/, 75",
10 .
. . . 125 ?i
9 90 »
102 I
21 .
. . 146/
13 • • • . 113 «
24 68 h
24 109 fc, 112 2, 117 d
15
• • 67 M7, 150 6
29 6 . . . . 149 c
6 I .
. . . 68 A
COWIiXT
PP
578
Index of Passages
2 Samuel
2 Samuel
2 Samuel
6 2
. . . . 125 c
14 7 73 &
19 19
• . • -53 9
3
, . . . 126 s
10 .
. . . 116 w
20 .
■ . . 116J'
6
. . . 1179'
II .
75 if, 119 m;N.
25
• . 62i, 127/
i6
. . . . 1 1 2 MM
13 •
. 92 b, II 5 i
27
. . . 122/
20
• 75 y, 148 b
19 .
. 47 b N., 70 c
30
. . . 106 i
7 5
. 1 1 2 r, 1 50 d
21 .
, . . 106 m
43
. . . .76 b
14
. . .112 mm
26 .
118 h, 134 sr
44
. . . 67 w
29
. . . 120 d
30 . .
... 71
20 I
... 147 c
8 2
. . . 126 m
31 •
. . . 102 Z
F,
. . . . 68i
3
. . . .176
15 2 .
[II g, 127 b N.
8
. . . 142 e
4
. . . . 69 c
4 • •
112 p, 161 a
9
. . 68 h, 141 c
8
... 131 e
6 .
. 103N8
II .
. . . 137c
e I
. . . 165 al
7 .
. . . 10 g
12
. 112 00, 116 «
3
. 128 y, 152 s\
12 .
. . 113M
13
... 69 w
10 7
... 131 ?f^
16 .
. . 117 d
14
... 125 A
9
. 145 ft, 146 a
20 .
, . . i6oa
18
. . . II3M?
12
. . . .54*
21 93 aa N., 130 c,
19 .
. . 130/ N.
H 1
. . . . 23Sf
163 d
20
. 149 a, 149 e
4
. . . 141 e
23 ... . 117 <
21 .
• .535. 165 e
11
. . 149 0 N.
25
. . 1176
23
, .16 b, 127/
J9
. . 142/N2
27
. . . . 72 s
21 2
. . . . 74 A
20
. . • 157 c
32
. 116 k, 121 d
3
. . . 1 10 1
24
• . 69 r, 75 rr
33
• 49 '. 75 w
4
. . . 1 20 c
25
... 117 J
34
67 dd, 143 d
9
. . . ii8t
27
. . . . 60 d
37
. . . 93 K
II
. . . 121 a
12 I
. . . . 72^
16 I
• . 134 w
1.2
... 76''''
2
126 d, 126 X, 146/
5
112 W, 113 <
15
.... 72 <
3 .
• • • 152P
7
128 <
20
. . . • 35 »»
6
. . . . 97A
13
9i99, "2/
22
. . . . 121 b
9 ■
. . . 144 n
17 5
• . 135/
22 I
2 s, 63 I, 13° <*
10
. . . . ii4gr
8
. . . 117*
24
. . . . 49 e
M
. . . .520
9
. . . 1446
27
.... 67 Z
15 ■
. . . . 51 w
10
. . . 67t
33
• .35<^, 131'-
16
. 112/, 117 9
II
, . , 106 i
37
. . . 103 d
17
. . . 75 rr
12 .
109 d, 122 I
38
. . . 108 e
28
5i/, 135 a, 150 m
13
. . 106 0
40
. . . . 68 ft
N.
15
.' . 135 0
41
19 t, 1 16 to
30
... 127 «
16
• . 121 a
44 ■
.... 87/
13 4
• • . P.457N1
17
112 ^,"126 r
, 96, 130 gr
23 I
. . 2 S, 29 fir
5
... 76 cc
22
3 .
. . . 116 W
8 .
. . . . 72 <
23
. . . 61 w
4
... 152 M
12
. 76 hh, 107 g
26
. . llSfiT
5
135 »». 150 « N.
14
. . . 117 M
18 3
. 63 i, 97 g
6
• -91/. 143 «
15
... 1173
11 114^, 11900, 164^.
7
. • . 113 w
J7
. . . . 64 C
169 m; N.
8 .
• • 476,87/
18
47i,ii2«N.,is6b
12 . . 137 c, 164 «>
11
. . . 127*
19
. . . ii3<
13 •
. . 169 cc
»3
. . . 134*^
20
84 as, 118 p,
14 .
108 e, 156 c
»7
. . . 167 a
164 «N
16 .
. . . 22s
19
... 150 d
33
... 131 d
18 .
. . 117 d
24 3
• 145 », 154 ^
^§
. 152 g, 165 0
19 . .
• . ii9#
6
. . . . 90 »■
26
... 159 dd
22 .
... 74 t
11
. . . . 93 rr
38
. 72W, if9sr
23 •
. . no b
13
. . . 145 '»
31
. . . . ii6fe
29 .
1 14/, 150 a
16
. . . 142/
32
73/
33 •
. 133 «N.
21
. . . 165 a
39
. 1313,1440
19 I . .
136/, '51 f>
22
■ ' . 9iPP
14 2
• 76"»''36d
6 .
. 70 c, 128 a
23
. . . 106 TO
3
768-
13 .
. , 112 1
24
75»*, 1I3P
4
... 126 e
14 .
. . . 68h
6
60 d
18
97 c, 112 «
2 Samuel 6, 2 — i Kings 20, 25
579
1 Kings
1 Kings
1 Kings
1 I .
■ • 49 ^. 67 fl'
6 16 .
. . . 117 d
12 15 .
. . . 1150
2 ,
. 131 h, 144/
19 .
. . . . 66t
28 .
. . . 133 c
5 .
. . . 116 0
7 6 .
. . . . 92 sr
31 .
. . . 117 d
6 .
. . 119 wN.
7 •
. 1181), 126 w
32 31
d, 65 e, II 2 pp
13 .
. . . II7P
8 .
. . . iiSjr
13 3.
. . . 112 tt
14 .
. . . 116 M
14 .
. .410,131b
7 •
. . . . 10 h
15 •
. . 80 d, 90 c
15 •
. . I I 7 /i/i
II .
. . . .125b
20 .
. • . 1359-
37 .
. . . 134 «
12 .
■ • . 155 d
31 .
. . . 146 (f
28 .
. . . .20 m
14 .
. . . 126 r
34 .
. 150 a, 150 6
37 •
. ... 91/
18 .
. . . 156 d
36 .
■ • . 135^
8 I .
, 107 c, 109 k
30 •
. . . 147 d
37 .
• • . 150/
5 •
1193, 145 c
33 •
. 109/, 109 fir
31 •
, . 156 c
12 . ,
. . 138 e
14 2 .
. . . . 32 A
40 .
. 1175-, 145 c
13 •
. . 118 &
3 •
. . . 65gr
41 .
. . . 146 a
39 .
. . . gi k
§ •
. . 94 d, 1 1 2 3
47 •
. . . . •joe
30 •
• 11917, 159 ff
6 . I]
iSp, 121 dNi
52 .
. . 119 M7 N.
31 • •
. . 1450
10 .
. . . 64d
2 3 .
. , . ii6p
32 •
. . ii8g
12 .
. . . 72 r N,
3 •
. 95M, 1140
33 • •
. . 158 rf
13 •
. . . 129 flr
6 .
. . 109 d
44 .
. . , 75 w
14 .
. 136 dN.
7 •
. . Ji6h
46. .
. . . 49 m
15 .
. . . 91 n
17 . .
• • 131 S'
48 .
. . . . 44 t
16 .
. . .23 c
18 .
. • 135 a
64. .
. • 133 c
17 •
. . 116 M
21 .
. . 121 6
9 3 • •
. . . 75 to
19 .
129 d, 150 e
22 .
, 1100,1546
8 . .
. . .67^
21 .
. . . 10 g
23 •
. . 149 d
II .
. . . 75 00
24 .
. • 1279-
26 75
s, 93 ss, 118/,
17 . .
126 y
15 13 .
. . 119a;
128
t
25 . •
112 dd, 113 z
23 .
. . 1185
30 .
■ . . 75 «
26 . .
. . 122 t
25 .
• . 134 P
31 •
. . . 128 to
10 9 . .
. . iisd
16 2 .
• . . 74^
36 . .
. 80 t, 90 i
II . .
. . . 35 »w
10 .
. . 134 0
40 .
. . . 90 i
13 . ,
. . 117 n
24 .
. 29 /, 88 b
42 . .
. . 73 aa
21 . .
• 152 y N.
25 •
. . . . 67 X
43 •
. . 128 A
32 . .
... 74'
31 • .
. . 150 d
3 4. .
107 b
23 . >
. , 119 M
17 I .
. . 92 PP
7 . .
. . 114 c
24 . .
. 164 b N.
3 .
. . 119s
8 . .
. . 166 6
37 . .
, . 126^7
9 •
. . . 90 »■
II .
. . 112 «
29 . .
. . • 75<
II .
. . . 66g
13 .
. . 166 6
11 I . .
. . . 10 h
13 ■
. . . 75 »«
15 ■
. . . . 71
3 • •
H5 0. 145 P
14 . .
• 66 I, 75 rr
16 . .
. . 107 c
6 • •
. . 122/
15 • .
. . . Z2l
18 .
128/, 135 r
8 . .
. 131 h N.
16 . .
. . 146 a
26 .
. . . 46 e
9 • •
. . 138 ft
18 5 • .
. 119 tuN.
4 5 .
. . . . 93«
12 . .
• . '351'
10 . .
. . 107 e
7 .
. . 112 I
15 • •
... 62/
27 . .
• 53 9. 67 y
12 .
. . . 90 1
16 . .
. . . 53^
32 . .
117 a, 117 kk
13 •
128 c
19 . .
• • .54*
43 • .
. . 152 P
14 .
. . . 90 d
21 . .
. . 165 a
44 . •
. . .589
5 I .
. . 144 »■
25 • •
. 117 m N.
19 4 . .
. 157 6 N»
3 • ■
. . 131 c
30 • •
. . 117 n
9 • •
. . 126 r
7 • •
. . 112 dd
31 • •
. . 134 2
II . .
. . 132 d
9 • •
131 e
33 • •
. . . 87 e
•5 •
26 h, 90 c, 90 t
12 . .
• • 134 s'
34 • •
. . 117 n
19 . .
. . 1340
17 . .
. . 117 h
39 • •
. . . 23 d
20 . .
. . 20 m
20 .
. . . 68 c
41 . .
1506
21 . ,
. . 131 wt
25 • •
• 23/, 107 e
12 2 . .
. . 138 d
20 14 . .
• . 137 ^
29 .
. . 131 6
6 . .
64 b, 1 1 7 ^gr
20 . .
. . 145 c
61..
134 A, 1340
8 . .
116 g, 118 ?
21 . .
. . 1 1 2 «
6 . .
• . .63.-
10 . .
. • .939
22 . .
. . -54*
7 • .
• . 131 c
12 . .
. . . 74A
35 . .
. . 103 6
21
58o
1 Kings
20 27
33
35
39
40
2
8
10
II
12
13
15
19
21
25
3
4
7
10
12
Index of Passages
22
15
16
23
25
27
38
30
35
49
. 54^
. 53"
75 mm, 128 u
. . 51 &
116 gN.
• . 34 c
134 6 N.
• 104 flf
16 q, 118 3
. 1 1 2 gg
119 c
. . 69/
74 't. I3£/
74 'f* 74 '
. 72 w
150 «
161 c
108 6
121 c2
110/
150 c
102 h, 134 r
126 2/
75?^
131 c
135 ^ H4P> 159?
104 gf, 113 dd N.
. ... 71
.... 44 ^
2 Kings
1 I .
3 .
3 .
7 .
9 •
10 .
11 .
2 I .
9 •
10 .
16 .
20 .
21 .
22 .
24 .
3 3
4 2^
8 .
15 •
16 .
33 •
24 •
25 •
27 •
4 I .
3 •
8 .
13 .
93".
49 ^
126 y
152 2/
37/
97 t
154''
120 d
10 h,l\^q
. . 107 c
52 s, 114 n N.
107 3 N'
72 aa
7500
7593
122 e
136 P
131 k
155 d
112 uu
bb, 123 e
113 w
' IBff
use
107 k
125 &
91 I, 133 c N.
. . 126 s
114 fc, 117 r
12
13
h,
2 Kings
4 14 .
16 .
23 •
24 .
25 .
27 •
31 .
41 •
43 •
5 3 .
3 •
9 •
10
II
12
10
no
. 154 6
32 h, 116 p
. . 90 n
. . 66 c
. . 34/
. . 63 e
. . 29 A;
. . 69/
. 113 ee
. 118 q
129 d
13 6&, 159 d
112 p
107 t
13 no/, 142/, 159 cc
17 . . 104 gr, 159 dd
18 ... . 75 kk
30 . . 112 gg, 163 d
22 . . . . 136 d
23 .72 t, 88 b, 131 d
26 . . . 150 a N^
5 . . . 117 r» N.
8 91 n
9 51 «
10 ... . 134 r
II 36
19 . . 34&N3, 52 u
22 . . .p. 457 N^
27 . . 109 h, 1503
29 74'
32 . . . 22 s, 100 I
1 . . . . 131 d
4 . . . . ii2ir
8 47 »'
10 . . . i35PNi
13 ... . 127/
18 10 A
I 32 'i
6 . 53 *». 72 y, 91 «
8 . . . . 126 y
16 52 2
17 ^34e
21 50 e
2 . . . 72 to, 76 /j
4 »27gr
17 80/
18 33 n, 1030, 119 &
19 . . . 150a N^
27 147 c
31 ... . 144 p
33 76 c
35 . . . . 119 m
37 75 »"
I . 124b N., 127/
6 . . . 131 ^i N.
15 ... . 159 ce
31 . . . . 102 h
23 ... . 152 w
29 930
2 Kings
11 I . . . . II2PP
2 Ii6e
4 • 75 99' 75 3. 97 9
5 . . . . 116A
12 74I
13 87 6
15 . . 113CC, 1196
12 9 . 72 h, 66 g, 93 h
13 , . , II2PP N'
13 6 74 A:
17 . . . 69r, 76/
19 . . Ii4fc, ic,gdd
21 Ill g
7 . . . 21 e, 112 tt
8 1560
14 9300,II2pp,II2«,
1242
76 c, 1271
14
15
19
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
16
29
4
7
14
17
18
4
6
II
15
29
I
4
17
20
26
28
29
30
36
2
4
14
21
25
I
19
II
12
13
15
26
I
13
20
3
4
10
12
Sok
. . 656
. . 72P
127A
. .127A
. . 80&
. .ii8u
• I34P
• • 53^
. .103!
. .I24r
. -134?
II 2 ti
128 w N.
. . 441
. . 2 a
. . 2a
. . 74^
121 6 N.
. .112 it
1^1 h N.
. 132 A
1246 N.
. . 72?
23/ 75 M
. . 49 a
126 X, 141 n
. . 74Z
. . 673
113;* N,
112 tt
144 d N.
. . 1346
. .1386
61 h, 124c
. . 127c
750,II2pp,II2pp
N.
. . . 112 pp'S.
. . II2PP, 114s
. . ii2rr, 127/
. . . II2PP N.
I Kings 20, 27 — Isaiah 10, 15
581
2 Kings
23 15 671)
17 . . 127/, I27Sf
20 1 1 7 d
35 ^59c
24 7 ... . 1446
14 . . . 97gr, 112 <«
25 9 . . . . Hid
15 1236
16 . . . 1263, 134 i
17 i34«
18 131 6
19 127/
28 122 g
39 75""
Isaiah
12 I26e
3 124*
4 . . i28Z,x, 147 d
5 37 «» 127 c, 137 &>
is6(i
6 67m, 126m, 144b,
1520
7 ii6i, 116 n, Ii8x,
143 a
9 106 p, ii8x, 159 a;
11 106 y, 107/, 1172
12 . 51 i, 106 g, 164 d
14 66 6, 766, 102 A,
114c, 119 aa
15 60/, 61 e. 1173,
124 n, 145 n
16 . . . 54^, i28r
17 . . 113d, ii7t<
18 . . 1260, 160 a
19 . . . . i2oe
30 . . . 52«, 121 c
21 90 Z, 95 A, 1076,
148 &
33 ... . 126 m
33 . . 107 (7, 124/
24 6iP
35 . . 118 u;, 1242
26 . ii8s N., 135m
37 ii6t
38 147 c
29 ... . I44I'
30 , 91 d, ii6t, 1520
31 93 9
2 I . . . 1540 N.
2 116 r
4 91 n
6 449
7 "7*
8 . . . . 145 »i
9 . . 1096, 117 sr
II . . II2C, 146a
17 145 0
J8 15/
saiah
Isaiah
2 20 63 J, 84* M, 135 n,
6 II
1060, laid, 144 d,
145OT
[522/
22 . . .ii6e, 119s
12 .
. . . . 67fc
3 I . . ii^p, 122 V
13 522', "2 mm.
3 116A;
ii4fc N., i2od
6 . . 103 fir, 118 fir
7 2
. . 729, 122 t
7 1179-, 117M, 1566
3 •
... 95s
8 . . . 53 9, 122 i
i •
. . 113 bb
9 • • 135 «■» 1563
6
. . .1231
12 . . 124&, 145 I
7
122 g, 144 b
13 "5^
8
• . "9?'
14 . . liS A, 154b
9
148 d, 15966
15 37c
II
. . . . 29 u
16 52 n, 75 u, iiir,
13
. 1140,1330
ii2nn, 113M, 1350
14 74 fir, 1121!, 113 A,
17 . 91 c, 91/, 142/
I26r, 135 a N.,
18 . . . . 86£?N.
135 c
22 35/
15
"3/
24 ... . 131 b
17
.... 49a
4 4 1060, 107 i, 113 e,
18
124*
i59nN.
20
. . . . 126 X
5 I 87/N., 1086, 128U
23
. . . . 134 »
2 . . 114W, Ii7ee
25
. . . 118 Z, 144 A
3 iioa
8 I
. 29J, 52 s, 119U
4 753, ii4fc, ISO TO
2
. . , . 496, 96
5 112 M, 113d, 113/,
4
144 (i
114 k N., 116 d,
6
. . 2d N., 130a
Ii6p
7
1.54 &
6 1172, 117 u, 119 «/
8
1450
8 ii2to, ii6x, 144P,
9
110/
147 d
II
, . . 46 d, 59 A
9 • • •M9«. 152?/
12
. . 47 TO, 117 r
10 93 TO
16
67 »i
II II2TO, I20C, 130a,
17
75 ^
156 d
19
164 d
12 9.5 «s, 106 2, 141 d
20
. . . . 145 TO
13 . . 106 W, I28v'
21
. . .64A, Ii8n
14 . . . 20/, II2S
23
. 67 r, 90/, 1 28 A
15 ... . Ill ic
9 I
io6m, 130 a, 1323
17. . 118^142/
2
. . 1039'. 130 a
19 . . . 48 d, 108 d
3
10 A, 20 A, 67 ?i>,
23 . . ij6x, 145 to
93 g, 118 M, 13511
24 . . ii4r, 115A;
4
112 mm, 12471,
35 1366
143d, 146 e
26 . 133/c N., 145 to
5
. . .93fc, I44d
28 , . . 20 A, 117 a
6
• . • 5w. 152W
29 1,^2 I
8
. . . 127 c, 145 c
30 136 b
II
127c
6 I Ill b
12
116/
2 88/, 1 19 cc, 134 g'
18
1450
3 11 2 A, 133 A;, I39«
10 I
, . . 10 gr, 93 bb
N., 141 i
2
ii4r
4 107 b, 107 d, 1173
4
163 c
5 106 «, 1281/, 147 d
5
152a
6 94 b, 155 A, 156 b
9
31 d
7 II2X
10
133 <
8 6iflf, 117 c, 124 fir
12
. . . 47*. 127"
N., 137 b
13
23d, 752, 107 bN.
9 • • . 75». "3''
14
118 M), 1260, 132*
10 . . . 67P, 136b
»5
1151, 124*, 150 A
582
Isaiah
10 i6
17
18
22
24
30
32
33
34
11 2
7
8
Index of Passages
69/
930
67 cc
11;
10
12
14
12 I
2
5
6
13 3
4
6
8
18
19
20
22
14 2
3
4
6
9
II
14
'7
19
23
24
27
30
31
15 2
16
4
6
7
8
9
10
17 I
4
5
6
i, 1 190, 156(1
132 &, 144 wi
114 /c, 1190
. . .23 c
. . 119 0
. . 128a
. . . 122 e
. . . 142/
io6m, I [4c, 115^,
I i6/N.,i 17W, 1263
. . . . iiggg
20 m
. . . . 93 M
109 k
809
ii6e
1228
. . . . 135"
. . 146 b, 147 c
'. . . . Ii8x
• • 47»»»"9S'?
52n
iiS<*
68 fc
>46o
54/. 57 N», 117W
22 s, 102 6, 1x5 fir,
121 b, 121/
49 &, 49 m, 148 b
117 2, 130 a
. . . 145 <
93 ss, 145 0
. .87 s
ii6x, 117 0
29/, 126 p, 130a
55/, "3«
1446, 1496
116 g, i26fc
72 m;, 133/*
72 r, 113 &b
. 70 d, 96
. . 72 cc
' -155 'I
. 119A/1
. . 1 26 p
. .145'*
. . I22V
■JOd
145"
76 dd
72 &b, i2ia, &, 14^ e
119X, 121 b
. .I38r
122 n
118 u, 131 n N*,
134 s
75'»».
Isaiah
IV 8 .35/, 154 a N. (5)
18
10
II
12
I
2
3
4
5
20 »n N., 47 fe
72 n
. . . 47 »n, 75 «
1240
, . . 52 5, 103 m
66 6
loA
293. 677;, 72 dd,
142/, 145 q
6 73 2'
19 I 72 Z
3 . . . . 67 dd
4 . . 124 t, 132 A
6 • 53 f'. 53 P. 1246
9 86 1
10 ia8 y
II 133 't
12 169/
13 142/
17 . 80 A, 95 d, 1436
18 2 a
23 .... . 113s
20 I 115 &
a . . . 1131, u87ik
4 . . . 87 gr, 1180
21 I 1 140
3 . 440, 72 s, 121 &
7 . . 93 dd, 117 3
8 ii8r
9 136 d
11 . 90/, 93 w, 116 t
12 39 <, 75 u, 75 rr,
76 d
14 76 d
17 127 a, 128 a,
146 a
22 I . . . 91 0, 150 Z
a 75 », 9ie, 117s,
136 e, 128 X, 152 d
3 . . . . 119W
5 . . .1280, 133 i
7 i38r
10 30 m
II . . . 950, 124 A;
13 75'*, "3<*» 113/1
1 13 dd
14 107 c, II2SS, 149 &,
I 10 . . 90 m, 144 p
/ 17 "3''
/ 18 118 r
L_i9 .... 144 p
34 . . 128W, 133A
23 I . . iiok,iigy
4 IS2«
5 . . ii8u, 128 A
7 . . . . I263N.
8 93^?
II . . . 200, 63 2
Isaiah
23 12 . 356, 466, 118/,
1306, 1326
13 . . . 136 dN.
15 . 44/, Ii6p, 1x8 <
17 . . . 72 J, 91 e
24 a . 36 fir, xx6s, 127*
3 67 <
10 ... . X19X
12 121 d
16 117 g
19 . . .670, 11310
32 1x7 q
25 6 . . 75 dd, 93 ss
7 72P
10 72 t>
26 4 . . . . 1x91 N.
9 . . . . X44m
10 X69C
II 47 m
16 . . . 44 Z, 7a 0
18 X24e
19 . . • 95A, 122 s
20 75 3«
27 3 60 a
4 10 A, 65 b, 71,
I17X, 151 6
162 a
55/
156/
. . 70 a N., 1246
152a;
. . .1246, 128 c
125 c
47*
91 e, 12810, 135*1,
1448
90 1, 119 7iA
. 72 Z, 1x8 sf
. . . 127c
. . .1300
102 A, 147 c
. . .1166
33 i, 114 m N.
71, 119 », 130/
N., 155/
. . . a9M, 142/
1450
133c
. . .Ii8^ 132 b
M4«
. . . . 1 1 2 rr
1523
112m, 113 wN.
150a
X9C, 66/, 69 A N.,
liod
1 20 y
. ia6p, i33fcN.
. . 84" s, 1446
• 75 3?, 116 », 118 <
5
8
9
II
18
28 I
a
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
II
13
16
17
18
20
31
\t
27
28
29 I
4
5
6
7
Isaiah lo, i6 — 48, 9
Isaiah
29 8 .
16 s
72^
9 • • • ^59,72 1
13 115 d, 1270, 142 d
14 .50e, 113U), 155/
i.i; . . . t;.^ (7. 112 n
15
16
30
31
32
53 <7, II
lu . . . 147 c, IJuy
19 128?, 132 c, 133 h
2? 131 0
. 69 h
63 », 7
'■3
I
2
5
6
8
ir
12
2 n
50/
I 0
61 d,
N.
. Q
786
P
b
III r, II4<2,
• -135
61/, 135
. . 102
ii4r
. . . . 116 d
■ 631, 1131, 156 fir
. . .67 cc, 130 a
• 58?, 6771, 75 »
. . 131 c, 145 n
56
22 . . 135 n, 145 m
23 93 s«
.... 53s
74*
. .Ii4r, I34r
. . . . 72 3
. . . .156^
.... 32 i
. . . .141/
. . • . 75 "
■ .67P, ii3<
138/N., 144P
. 125 c, 152 a
... 143 e
. . 154 a N.
.... 440
48 t, 67 0, Jio k
116 s, 144 t
. . . 128 c
... 113 c
. . 1240
30 n, 53 q, 53 u,
67 V, 120 6, 156/
- - - . 67 dd
. . 85A
116 s
. 130 &
• • 75 w
29?, 145 t
64 c, 133 i
. . 20 i
13
14
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
31
33
2
3
5
6
8
I
7
9
II
13
13
17
18
33 I 20 h.
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
12
14 . _^
15 ii7'-N.,
124 e
84-
, 117 bb
1193,
34
16
30
4
5
124 &
152 t
67 t, 126 0
. . 52 A;
36
Isaiah
34 6
10
II
13
17
35 I
a
4
7
9
2
8
9
II
14
16
17
37 3
II
14
17
19
22
24
25
36
28
29
30
38 3
5
9
10
J4
15
16
17
18
20
I
3
39
40
I
3
4
6
9
10
II
14
18
19
30
32
25
36
29
30
31
41 I
a
75
QQ,
"3
50
75
. . 54*
102 t
21 c, 80 fir
1173
• . 59 5^
. . 47 n
1306
. 65/
. • 135 P
84V, 132 c
"7 9.
128 w N
• . 127/
119 s, 119 u
. . . 2 a
• . -74^
no/, 127/
. . 114 r
69 m, 152 k
. . 150 a
124 b N.
. . . 10 ^
"3/, "3^
130 e
. . 128 r
. . 124 e
1 1 4 fc, 1 1 7 it
. . 114 c
. . 112 nw
z, 113 e«, 126 6
16/N., 157 c
«i "3 t&, 155/
. . ii4r
108 g, 121 d
48 iN., 61 /N.
55 9'
mm, io35r,i35p
n6 h, 152 z
. 86 I, 114 i
124 6 N.
15 e N., 126 a;
• . 107/
. . 146 b
' . . 93^^
112 qq, 127 c
. . 119 s
. . 1191
. . .93 a;
. . 124 e
, 15 c, 75 dd
. . iig hh
155/. 156 fir
. . 126 6
. . 1 50 m
. . 124 e
. . 152 c
. . . 69 g
. . . 8/c
. . 11999
35"N.,75</fir,i56n
Isaiah
41 3
4
5
7
8
10
12
15
17
583
11817
135 «N.
• 75 "
. 29/
138 d
.75 bb
135 »i
. 96
20 i
28
42
13
iS
20
21
23
43
44
45
46
47
23 48 9- N., 75 Z, 75 u,
109 d
24 ... . 15s n
25 • • . 23 d, 76 (i
109 A, cf. 159 d
4 67 7
5 -65 rf, 93 ss, 124 A;
6 . 107 b N., 109 &
. . . . I26p
35 fir, 126 e, 126/
. . 75 w, 144.P
. . . . 120 c
29 q, 72 y, iighh,
I24g
34 113 d, 114 m N.,
138?
.... 131 &
. 61 h, 74 e, 91 d
. . i59dd, i59#
. . . . 122 V
. 53 m, 69 V, 74 I
51 0, 106 n N*
, 135 a N.
. . 141 h
... 71
. . . 5 »i
. . . 64 »
66 e, 103 /N,
67 ee
150 a
57 N., 117 X
. . 654
53 n, ri4p
• • 67P
. . 70 6
b N., 131 g
. 153 M
. . 470
. . 103
• 75 <^^
120 c
46 <i, 63 :
ff N2, 118 0
• • 94 9^
90 I, 144 p
61 h, 75 t),
48
25
I
2
6
8
9
10
25
3
9
13
15
16
19
31
24
28
I
2
4
9
10
14
5
I
3
5
7
8
10
13
14
8
9
20/,
in
100
59 9,
116/
• .138/
, 28 b, 67 cc
52 k, 157 a
. . 119 hh
584
Isaiah
48 II .
14 .
17 .
18 .
6
Index of Passages
49
60
51
62
63
64
65
66
1
II
13
15
18
19
21
33
26
2
8
9
10
II
I
2
3
9
10
12
13
15
17
19
21
I
5
7
8
II
12
14
I
2
3
4
6
8
9
10
II
I
4
5
6
10
II
12
14
2
3
9
3
67
N2
133
7a
. . . 67 <
. . iighh
• 61 ^, 93 li
m a:, 151 e
115 a, 142/
III q
145 M
126 0
160 h
. 32 c
67 dd
122/N., 156 c
. ■ 135 i
c, igowi, isay
. 15 c, 20/
. . 136 c
. . 137 c
. . . 20 n
• . 155 *:
. 107 h N.
. . 146 e
,.ii8 M, 124 g
93 PP. 138 &
61 A, III m
. . . 52 A
. . . 65d
. . 128 g
.476, 122 g
. 50/. 130 l>
. . 1 20 c
. . . 65&
75 %, 106 sf
i7aN2, 1466
. 67 <
. 61 n
' 93 ff
151 a
166 a
. 96, 128 q
116 Z, 117 a
121 a, 128 9
. .103/N.
. . 160 c
• 74 K 75 "
1 17 n, 120 A, 132 b
67 #, 144 P, 155/"
.... 91 I
124 /c, I24A;N.
• • . 68ff
. . 103 h
152 a N.
. . . 21 (2
. 54 c, 1 10 c
137 c, 159 «'
. 152 a N.
. . . 93 »»
. . 161 6
. . 138 A;
Isaiah
Jeremiah
56 4 . .
. . 138/
2 16 ... . 117 8
5 • •
. .112 mm
17 . . , 116 flr N.
8 . .
. . 20 m
19 60 a
9 .
. . . 29 1
20 . . . . 44 /i N.
12 .
. . . 29 <
21 ... . 126 2
57 4 • •
. . • 93 »»
24 . . .60 e, 122 d
5 •
. . . 67 M
27 . . . 69 ;», 69 s
6 . .
. . . 20 h
31 85 A
8 . .
. . . 47 fc
33 44 '»
17 .
. . . 113/1
35 • . • . 114 <^
20 .
. . . 113 d
36 68 h
58 3 19
c, 20 h, 150 m
3 I . ■ . ii3ee, 159 w
9 • •
, . 115 6
5 . 47fc, 66/, 69r
13 •
. . 119 M
6 • • 75 "» 132 b
59 3 .
. . . 51 A
7 84- fc
5 •
. 73<*. 8ot
8 91 Z
9 •
• . . 93'-
9 . . . . 112 ss
10 .
. . 152 t)
15 ... . 113 A
12 .
. . . . 67 A;
22 . . 75 pp. 75 ^f
13 .5-
se, 75n, 113 d
4 I ... . 143 d
14 .
. . 72 ee
2 log
21 . .
. . 143 «
5 . . . . I2C A
60 3 .
. 107 bN.
7 . . . 20 A, 93 «
4 •
51 TO, 122 V
II 67 t)
7 • •
. . . 60 e
13 6766
9 • •
. . .58?
18 75**
14 .
. 118 q, I2fi h
. . . 84^ M
19 44 h, 108 g, 133 I
61 1 .
N.
7 . .
. . 119;!^
30 ... . 145 <
62 2 . .
... 16/
5 6 . . . 20 &, 67 cc
9 • .
• 30 m, 52 i>
7 65 b
12 .
. . 152 a N.
13 . . • 52 0, 138 t
63 3 .
• 53 P. 76 c
22 . 58 i, 58 A;, 60 e
II .
128 c
26 67 J9
16 .
. . . 6od
6 4 lOflr
19 .
151 e. 155 »»
8 . 51 c, 152 aN.
64 3 •
. . 75"''
10 ... . 108 g
6 . .
. . . 72 cc
17 . . . . 112 dd
65 I .
• -S^c. ^55"
20 ... . 126 X
2 . .
. . 1262
a8 . . . . 133 i
5 .
. . 117 a;
29 67 u
II . .
. . . iS9
7 4 • • . 133 i N.
14 . .
. . . 70 d
9 . . 112 0, 113 ee
17 .
29 t N., 51 TO
19 . . 57 N*, 136*
18 .
. . HOC
84.... 16° TO
20 .
. . 75 00
5 . . . . 128 c
24 .
. . 107 c
II . • 75ff2. 133'
66 13 .
. . 155 <*
13 . .72 aa, 113 w
15 •
. . 1191
14 ... . 67 dd
18 .
. . 167 6
19 . . lOOTO, 102 TO
9 I . . 108/, 161 b
a . • 53 ". "9 "
Jeremiah
3 63 c
1 10 .
. . -451?
4- • 53 3. "3 <*
13 •
. . . . 90 e
II. . . . 109 1
2 2 .
. . . 49fc
12 ... . 114 r
8 .
. . 155 «
17 74*
II .
. • 73 e, 155 "
23 113d, ii3g, 144*
12 .
. . . 46 d
10 3 . . . 145 uN»
15 .
. . .44 TO
4 . . . . 109 3
Isaiah 48, 11 — Jeremiah 52, 20
585
Jeremiah
10 5 23 »,
113 I
47 «. 75 00)
II
17
18
9
12
23
32
15
16
19
10
16
17
19
20
21
14 I
16
18
16 10
18
16 16
17 2
7
II
17
18
18 7
16
23
10 5
II
20 9
17
21 I
»3
22 14
15
16
»9
20
22
23
24
26
a8
29
23 6
9
M
32
33
63
n
. . I c
46 d, 90 n
67 ee
63 c, 126 y
146 6
72 s
113 fc
90 g, 91 e
84" a
• 45?
145 fc
• 55 h
. 68 i
1276
. 52 s
144 c
. 69 p
118 q
145 m
. 64 a
138 «N.
103 sr
155 *. 159 P
61 /i, 91 c N.
. 50/, 102 I
' 73 h 132 b
• 28 a, 45 5f
. . . 93 00
. . 161 a
, . 75 M
53 "». 72 y, 74 ^
45?
nd,
10
23
75
m.
. . 119 3
... 76 it
. . I44 h
• . . 75 99
• • •74'^
112 fcfc, 132 d
... 59/
II I, 122 n N.
. . .list
... 66/
. . . 87J7
g, 55 h, 142 g
. . 144 p
. . li^h
. 10 h, 46 d
. . . . 22 s
/N., 80 d, 90 M
... 58 .•
. . . 72 A:
. . . log
. 133 I N.
d, 60 c, 74 e
. . I26p
AN^, 152X
. . 62 8
ii7Jn N.
20
«3
24
25
26
31
Jeremiah
23 37 .
39 .
7 .
3 •
15 .
26 .
27 .
34 •
36 .
5 •
6 .
9 •
27 16 .
18 .
ao .
29 I .
8 .
17 •
23 •
25 •
30 II .
16 .
26 .
1 .
2 .
3 .
8 .
15 •
18 .
21 .
22 .
28 .
32 .
33 .
38 .
40 .
4 .
10 .
12 .
M •
35 •
33 20 .
22 .
34 9 .
8633 •
37 3 .
11 .
13 .
15 •
16 .
4 •
6 .
9 •
II .
13 .
14 •
16 .
33 .
26 .
28 .
32
38
63
44
0,
58 g, 75 «
23 I
115 c
53 fc
131 k
127 ff
76 h
91 I
24 e
113 k
8 fc, 37 b
75 99
90 e
720, 76 sr
53 9
531'
• 53 0
132 e
. 64 e
124 h N.
113 n
. 67 s
134 m
75 hh
113 dd
117 X
"9 9
146 m
. 61 c
h, 126 y
. 470
. 45 9
138 b N.
. 60 a
. 17 b
127 fir
. 61 *
126 s
127 h
124 b N.
. 74 &
d, 131 r
116 g
132 d
117 I
• 53 9
112 uu
• 53 9
112 tt
. 87 t
75"-
127/
III I
. 8k
• 93 a;
126 w
. 17 b
144 »•
116 a
112 qq
28
Jeremiah
39 7
12
14
40 3
4
5
16
41 6
12
42 2
6
10
16
44 7
8
18
19
21
23
25
46 I
5
8
16
20
47 4
48 2
II
15
31
32
36
44
45
49 3
8
10
II
12
16
25
38
30
36
37
50 6
II
34
61 3
9
13
H
29
33
56
58
59
52 12
20
53 'f.
47*;
17
53 9. 722
. . 22 s
. 115 c
. 1 1 2 33
• • 35 rf
. . 72 s
. 75 hh
. "3 M
. 119 sr
. . 76#
17 a, 32 d
. . 19 1
112 y
114 0
. . 8 A:
. . 67 c
58?, »44w
. ■ 52 0
• • 74?
72 k, 146 g
138 e N.
117 3
. 68 I
126 w
84'' n
45 9' 67 cc
. 67 t
72 dd
145 M
. 70 d
127/
. 80 sf
31 nNi
11^ w
• 54 b
46aN»
75 PP
60 a N.
141 h
90 I, 147 c
80 g
20 6, 67 cc
20 g
20 m
67 aa
51 0
80 A
53 ^ 73 <*
5, 152 h N.
• 75 QQ
. . 90 n
. 163 d
III w N.
. . 53^
ao h, 52 %
20 t
. 134 P
• 155'*
. 138 d
586
Index of Passages
Esekiel
1 6 .
11 .
14 .
ao .
2 3 .
10 .
8 3 .
4 9 .
la .
5 II .
12 .
13 .
16 .
6 3 .
6 .
8 .
9 •
10 .
11 .
13 .
7 7 •
14 . •
24 .
8 2 .
3 •
16 .
9 2 .
3 . J
7 .
8 .
II .
10 3 . 1
17 .
11 3 .
13 •
24 .
13 2 .
3 •
II .
18 .
19 .
20 .
M 3 .
14 .
22 .
16 4 22
64
5
6
10
27
31
32
33
34
45
47
cc,
67
72
87 t, 88/
. . 91 I
113 s N.
i23dN2
126 X
. . 19 h
. .49 6
154 a N.(6)
. . 87 e
58 k, 95 e
72 r, 109 d
52 n, 75 hh
• 54 c
109 d
■ 91^
N., 67 dd
. 91 Z
72 dd
1 1 9 it
128 c
. 91 e
133'
127 g
113 3 N.
93 00
. 90/
75 9?
75 A-fc
116 A;
21 dNi
112 <^
. 64 t
116 fc
n, 131 n N''
72 dd
73 g, 72 d(i
150 a N'
150 a N*
. . 90 c
. 93 00
52 x, 155 w
• 35 »»
87/. 103/N2
72 fc, 93 r
32 t, 91 I
51 ft. 51 P
117 J, 126 10
52 g, 53 «,
71
. . 71
.33 d N"
. . 49 c
. 131 »■
. . 91 2
. 117 d
20 Z, 64 c
121 a
. . 96
. 103 m
A,
Ezekiel
16 50 47 Z
51 96
52 521), 91M, 95p,96
17
18
10
20
53
54
55
57
59
5
7
9
15
19
21
6
7
10
28
29
32
1
2
12
9
16
22
37
38
41
12
15
18
21
22
29
31
32
33
35
4
20
5
20
28
32
42
44
45
47
48
49
24 II ,
19
26 ,
3
4 ■
6 .
15 •
91 e, 91/
. . . . 103 &
72 k
72 p
44 »'
. . . 191, 66 g
52 d
45 «. 93 »»», 150 a
29 i, 93 rr
67 u
21
22
23
25
19
74
■w
N.
76
117 m
131 c
131 r
139 d
103 i
. lit
145 M
139 d
124 e
. 80/1
. 63"
. 67 t
117 m
112 rt
. 23/
145 w
. 119 t
. 67 <
. 75 »»
. 64 d
' 73 a
124 0
• 53 i
3 66N»
133 i
45 c> 68 t
72 y
47 fc
66/
63 •/»
. 48 d
e, 138 e
. 47 A:
. 21 c
. 96
103 h
103 6
5 ft» 91 /
h, 144 a
. 67 q
75 "»
53 «, 54 ^■
67 u
91 e
23 c, 74 e
. 117 3
27
28
Ezekiel
26 2 .
10 .
14 .
15 .
17 •
21 .
3 .
7 .
19 .
31 .
32 .
34 •
35 .
4 .
16 23 d, 68
III u) N.
17 .
23 .
24 .
3 .
7 •
9 •
12 .
16 .
3 .
5 .
7 .
16 .
32 13 .
19 .
52
. 67 t
1306
. 47 A
. 51 i
s, 138 k
. 10 g
90 m
121 h
. 20 i
. 80 h
. 23 k
116 gf N.
1170-
32 9
ft. 75 32.
29
30
31
30
32
33 17
34
35
36
37
26
2
8
10 57N<,
21
31
6
9
10
12
3
5
II
13
25
32
3
7
8
II
16
17
19
38 21
23
39 -»
67 r,
117
75 «
65 d
72 P
124 e
127 c
93 2/
124 e
73 <*
67 0
44/
76/
i28aN^
. . 51 «
46aN2
20 m, 72 n
. . 53 s
143 a N'
. 44 &
57 N*
57 N«
149 c, 167 6
103 b
. 32 »■
. 10 h
. 72 k
117 Ml
75
84"
y, "3 9'
. 91 e
. 70 e
. 69 s
. 34/
152 d
112 pp
60 a N.
9 M. 29 t
116 t, 119 s
66 g, 119 M
52 n, 64 h
1 1 7 m N.
• 49^
• 54 ft
• 55/
. 66 e
Kz
elael i, 6-
—Amos 4, 7
587
Ezekiel
Hosea
Hosea
39 26 . ,
. . 75 M
35..
. . 2 t) N.
14 5 ... . 118 g
40 3 . .
. . ' ui
4 2..
. . ii3i^'
10 . 69 b, 166 a N.
4 • •
. . . 74 '^
3 . .
. . 119 t
5 • •
. . 134"
8 . .
• 145 »»
16 . .
. . .91'
14 . .
. . '55/
Joel
17 . .
. . 121 d
15 • •
. 145 »»
1 3 loon, ia6«, 150 gr
19 . .
. . . 80 fc
16 . .
. . 150 a
5 . . . . I26e
27 . .
. . 1349'
18 . .
. . • 55 «
6
. . . . 1521)
28 . .
. . 126 to
62..
. . . 64 a
7
. . . . 1 1 3 M
31 . .
. . . 93 ss
3 . .
. . 135 a
8
. . . 63^, 116*
43 • .
, . 20 OT
8 . .
. . 147 c
12
. . . 102 b
45 • .
. 136 d N.
15 . •
. . . 60 6
15
. . . . 147 d
48 . .
. . . 92 fif
6 1..
, . 109 k
17
20 A
41 7 . .
. . 67 dd
2 . 119
y N., 134 s
18
. . . 148 a
IS . .
. . 91 2
3 . .
. . 155?
20
. . . . 145*
i8 . .
. . 121 d
4 . .
. . I20$r
2 2
. . . 109 d
20 . .
. . . 5"
6 . . I
19 "*» 133 b
4
72 M, 1262;
22 . .
. . 141 b
9 . 23 i,
75 «a, 93 s
6
. . . .23 d
25 . .
, i3inN»
10 . .
. . 114 J
13
. . . . I52gf
42 5 . .
68 h, 131 n
7 2..
• 157 «
17
. . . 150*
43 7 . . .
. 117 m
4 • .
. . 80A;
21
. . . . 461!
17 . .
. . 103 0
5 . .
. . 93 ss
22
... 144 a
37 . .
. . 75"-
6 . .
, . . 91 c
24
• • • • 93»'
44 3 . .
. . 117m
12 . .
. 24/, 70 h
26 .
. . . 1 140
8 . .
. . . 58 ^
14 . .
. . . 7od
4 I
. . . 125*:
9 •
J3 hh, 143 e
16 . .
. . 34 '' N.
3 •
. . . . 69 M
12 . . .
.112 6 N.
83..
. . . 60 d
II
. . 51 0, 64 A
45 z . .
. . . 65d
4 • •
. . . 67 u
14 .
. 123 6, 147 c
12 . . ,
. • 97«
7 • .
. . . 90/
18
. . . 1172
i6 . .
• 127?
9 . •
. . 119s
21
. . 49 fc, 7=, s
46 6 . .
132 g N.
10 . 20
g, III ro N.
9. .
. . 93 3
9 6..
. 130 a
17 . .
. . 72 0
9 • •
. . 120 gi
19 . . .
22 , .
• .127/
533,53 s
11 . .
12 . . .
, . 69 m
. 159 m
Amos
23 . .
121 d
15 . •
. 109 d
1 3 . . 134 s, 1580
24 . .
124 r
10 ^. .
. . 75"
4 49 »»
47 3 . . .
. 128 n
6 . .
121 6
5 . . . • 145 c
4 . •
131 «
10 . . ,
60 0, 71
8 . . . . 145 e
7 . .
. . 91 e
II . .
. . 90 Z
9 . . 1 14 r, 158 c
8 . .
• 7500
14 96,
23 5', 53 M,
II .58gr, 113 1, 114 r
15 . . I
27/and N.
72 p, 1
56 c
2 6 61 6
17 . .
. . 117m
15 . • .
. 133 i
7 . . . . 126 6
48 14 . .
. . 72 dd
11 I . .
. . 68/
9 53 »»
3 . 19'
■, 55 A, 66 g
10 69 X
4 . . .
. . 68 c
12 51 n
Hosea
7 • •
• 75 '-^
16 . . Ii8n, I28y
12..
52 0, 130 d
12 I . . .
124/1
84.... 163 c
6 . I2C
)c, 152 a N.
5 . . .
. . 58*
5 . . • . "33
7 . . .
119 0
II . .
. 1 1 2 dd
7 . . . . 163 c
2 r . .
. 130 c
14 . . .
. 118 q
8 . . . . 159 A
3 . . .
. . 96
18 2 . . .
91 e, 128 2
9 . . . . 124 e
5 . . .
. .72 M»
3 • . ■
. 120 gr
11 . .67 <, 154 a N.
6 . . .
. . 52 n
8 . . .
122 e
12 . . . 88/, 126 r
II . . .
120 e
10 . . ,
. .150;
13 ... . 125/1
14 . . .
. . 91 e
14 . . .
• . 93?
4 I . . 135 0, 144 «
21 . . .
• 133 ^
15 • . .
• 75''''
2 . . 75 00, 112 X
25 • •
152 0 N.
14 I . . I
l^' a, 145 u
3 44 *
3 I . .
125 c
3 • • •
. 128 e
4. . . . 113a
3 . . ,
. . 20h
4 . . .
. . 68/
7 .
112 /j N., 144 c
588
Index of Passages
Amos
4 8
9 •
10 .
11 ,
13
5 1 ,
3 •
4 .
5 .
7 .
8 .
II .
14 .
15 .
i8 ,
19
21
26
6 I
2
6
8
9
29 e N.,
117
in
134 s
126 n
154 a N.
115 d
116 firN.
128 fc
3, 129 s-
110/
122 h
126 &
M, 117 U
61 e
109 &, 152 ST
, 67 cc
152 d
112 m, 126 r
20 h, 106 g, 154 a
N.
. . II 3 X, 1 1 2 rr
. . . . 112 n
. . 125 A, 126 J/
636, 93 k, iigm
N.
10 Tl^li 145 ?>2, 152 s
12 . 123 a N., 144 d
13 . . . 152 a N.
14 ... . 125 c
1 . . . 86 », 147 6
2 . . . . II 2 uu
4 . . . . 112 tt
7 . . . . 156 b
14 . . . . 128 V
15 ... . 119 6
4 53 3
8 . . . . 125 e
9 49 2
10 . . 128 h, 135 p
13 . . .54 ft, I46gr
I . . . 61 g, 144 e
3 . . . . 112P
7 . . . . 150 e
8 53*, "3 w, 1137)
11 . . 116 d, 118 u
13 54*^
Obadiah
3 .
10 .
II
»3
. . 90 i, 93 a;
. . . 128 h
qv, 61/N., 69 M
. . . . 47&
Jonah
1 3 116 d, 122 t, 135P
51 m
5
6
7
9
10
II
120 b
150 /c
. 2 b
1173
13 u, 165 a
Jonah.
1 14 16/
15 61 c
2a.... 122 s
4 . . . . 117 r
3 5 . • • . 133 »
4 I ... . 1173
2 . .16/, 114 n N.
6 . . . . 117 2
9 . . . . 113 /c
10 . . . 96, 128 c
11 20 »», 97 b, 150 a
Micah
1 2 109 A;, 135 r, 144 p
5 . . . 23 c, 137 a
7 . 52 ', 67 y, 117 a
8 . 69 6 N., 118 n
10 ... . 113 13
11 122 s, 131 c, 145 wt
13 ... . no ft
15 74 fc
23.... 118 5
4 67 M, 144 d, 148 b
6 . . 72 dd, 145 0
7 . . 100 n, 118 M
8 . . . 72 p, 116 A
12 . . . 72 ft, 127 t
3 I . . . 114Z, i5oe
4 109 ft
6 . . 119 w, 144c
13 . . . 876, 121 d
4 3 . . . 9in, 145c
6 68 A, 84" s, 122 s
8 68/
9 ii7«
10 . 10 ft, 76 jr, 145 n
11 . . . . iig dd
13 901
13 . 44^ 73 g, 11711
14 . . . . 119 0
5 1 . . 135 sr, 142 gr
2 . . .1060, 155 1
4 . 72 1, 128 I, 134s
6 I 1386
3 • 531', 76 ee, 163 ^
5 . . . . I17srflr
8 163 d
9 1466
10 . . 47 6N., iiSgf
" 47''
13 115c
7 I 93P
3 II 7#, 1191, 152 ft
3 135/
4 • • I33«, 133?
8 I32S
»o 75 p, 75 u>, 75 hh
M5"
Mioah
7 II 126a;
13 . . . . 1 26 aa
14 90 m
17 116A
18 148c
19 129 <7
Nahum
1 2
3
4
5
13
2 4
5
8
9
II
14
3 5
7
8
9
10
II
15
17
5 A, 128 m
76 M, 1430
. . 69 u
. .126ft
. . 67<
. . 52 g
55 9, 93 ss
63 P, 91c
130 d N.
67 <, 133 i
. . 9U
53^
523,6700
70 e, 133 b
. . gie
. . 69U
• 145 P
iioa, iioft
. . . 20h
Habakkuk
15-.
6 . .
8 . ,
II . .
14 . .
15 • •
16 . .
17 . .
2 I . .
. . .ii6s
• 13c, i55«
. . . 6766
. . 138 A
. , 152 M
. . . 63P
• . 1033
II4&, 1563
• . ■ Z7b
. . .72dd
. . .147c
ii6s, ii8i>
12 II2»
3
6
10
'4
15
17
19
3
6
8
9
10
13
15
17
19
. . . 116/N.,
. . .90m, ii3«
30 n, 60 d, 67 V
. loog N,, 153 p
. . . . 75 mm
. . . 67 ft, 676*
131 »•
"73
91 i
75",
22 s, 75 aa,
113A
144 m
95/, 145 "
. . 86»
Amos 4, 8 — Psalms 12, 2
589
Zephaniah
1 3 . 72 aa, iiju) N.
14 . . . 52 s. 900
2 2 152 tf
7 . • . • 135 P
9 8fc
15 152 s
81 75 rr
7 I20flr
II ... . I35»*
16 ... . 145 p
18 69 <
30 91 2
Haggai
1 I 129/
4 1263, 131 h N.,
6 1132
9 37/
2 5 . . . 440, 117 Z
7 M5«
13 ... . I59W
17 . 117 mN., 152 n
Zechariah
1 a ii7g
8 . . . . 132 d
13 131 c
14 "72
17 72 A;
2 8 ii8r
10 1546
II . . . . 290 N.
17 . . . 72U, 72e«
3 I . . . 61 6, Hfc
4 "33
7 530
8 i26e
9 . 88/, 97 c, 123 n
4 3 . . . 91 e, 97 c
7 126 a;
10 . . 73 dd, 127 h
13 lOejT
5 2.... i?,4n
4 • • 73 <^> 75 w«»»,
80 i
7 . . 74 i, 136 dN.
9 74*
10 32 n
n . 23 &, 72 ee, 103 Sf
6 7 £4*
10 49 Z
12 1556
7 I ... . 134P
6 59«> "3^. "7^;,
135 «
7 "7^
Zechariah
7 10 . .
14 . .
2 . .
8
10
11
12
13
14
5
6
17
23
5
9
II
12
3
5
6
2
5
7
10
17
10
12
7
4
TO
12
• 139c
. II79
I32d
150a
. 117 I
i57«
75 P. 75 '^'^
72 s, 1240, 154a
N.
135/ 152 w
.ii6s
124/i
• 721>
. 72 X
126 w
. 19/c
96, 130 gr, 132 c,
133'*
67 w
90 1
. . . 138 eNi
. . . . 123 d
. 73 s, 110&, 144 a
93 D, 128M) N.
. . 72 Pi 126 w
. . 67 dd, 145 m
Malachi
1 2 .
6 .
10 .
13 .
14 .
2 6 .
14 .
15 •
16 .
3 I .
2 .
9 •
14 .
20 .
. . 68/
. .32 c
151 «, 153
37 c. 147 c
80 dN.
. 67U
. 95*
144P
"6s, 155 n
150 fl'
136 A;
67
. 144 P
100 g
. 44d
Psalms
1 2 .
3
6
I
2
3
4
6
7
10
12
I
3
. . . 163 a
16 gr, 107 gr, 1 19 cc
. . .68 c
. . .1061
119 dd, 126 A
. 91 1, 108 6
. . 126 h
a, 135". 154 &
. 44 d, 69 s
126 A, 154 b
18 g N., 130 a
. . 129 c
. . . 67 ee
135
Fsalma
3 3 .
6
8
9
10
11
12
5
6
8
I
3
4
7
8
4
5
7
8
9
10
II
13
13
2
4
6
7
10
3
4
5
6
7
10
la
13
16
17
3
3
4
5
6
I
2
7
II
M
15
16
19
21
I
5
9
10
II
12
I
2
4
6
7
2
90 gr, 15a n N.
. 144m
. . 49e
72 s, 117 II
- - . 124/
37 e, 47»tt, 156 d
154&
. - .766
1336 N., 155 i
. . .ii8t
1073,116/, 1176b
128 a, 128 t
. . 107 s
24/N., 706
1223, 1246, 145W,
152 0
. . . 29 e
116 gr, 156 d
117 ee
152 fe
147 c
1520
106 gr
.142/
. 152^
I59W
• 49 «
. 63 n
72 s, ii9grfif, 156 d
I24gr, 132 /s, 158a
1276
120 gr
155 ''
. 10 h
. 66 h
128a
159 dd
107 f, mm, 150A
117 cc
. . 5h
. . 13c
. .135/
106 fc
20 b, 63 I
. . 91 I
. 138 flf
. 1523
. 157a
. . 5^
141 c
. . 91 e
93 X, 154 N.
106 g
66 c. 76 b
iiSr, 129.-, 148 h
.47W
145". 155 «
109 fc
103/
I2ib
590
Psalms
12 3
4
7
8
9
13 4
6
14 I
3
5
7
15 2
16 I
2
3
4
6
6
8
9
JO
II
17 3
4
5
9
10
12
13
18 I
Index of Passages
,->
4
7
10
12
17
18
22
26
28
30
31
33
35
38
40
41
49
3
4
5
6
8
10
II
M
3
4
2
44
93 m
117 f, 123/
122 q
log, 97 A
I26y
. . 54^^
117 r N.
. 59»» 152*
154 a N.
152 0
. 151^
ii8n
48tNS 61/N.
, 44 », 152 <
i3od, 1436
145 iJ, 165/
• . 60«
80 g, i2iq
ii6s
III r
114TO
q, 1246
• 69 '^
143 e
1139'fi'
I38sr
. 91/
126 J9
144 Wl
i3od,
12
2n 63 ^
154 a N.
931^. J55«
ii6e, 132 6
lOflr N*, 107 h
. 69P
lOQ fc.
"7S'
1262
ix9i?'
93*. 93 s
. 132/
679, "90
126c, i^od, 143a
116/, 1 16 X, 117 cc
. 145*
107 6 N»
. . 116 1
1 1 7 n N.
. . ii6t
. . 20/
. . 152 t
• 135P
122 0
Ii6gi
126 b, 141 c
. . I i6e
49 ^, 67 p
135 »w
. 48 d
109 Ac, 126 h, 148 6
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
12
Psalms
21. 4 • . . . "7ir
7 . . 1 17 n, 124 c
13 . 117 it N., }c,6d
2 59*
3 . . . . 152 'i
4 . . . . 11766
6 . . . . 1X2 h
7 ii6Z
8 . . . . 1195
9 . . . . 144P
14 ... . Ii8r
15 67 <
16 . . .121 c, 122 n
18 ... . 107s
22 . . . 23/, ii9Jf
29 116 s
3a ii6c
2 . . 1246, 128p
107 X, 1596b
n, 141 c, 141a!
69 »t N.
129 c, 130 a
107 6, 1246
. . i2Sy
. . .136c
... 5*
. . . 141 c
. . 1 1 2 wn
. . . 1142
. . .481
. . ii2rr
. . .128^
. . . 53«
. . . 20/
. . .93 QQ
. . 144 m
159 d<f, 1670
. . ii9i?'
. . .539
. . .log
124 q, 128 V
. 141 cN2
. . . iiir
. . . 60/
, . . 69 «t
90 n, 93 aa
. . .io8c
. . . 93r
75 39, 116 fc
. . .I56»
. 143 «, 153
107 g, 138 fir, 156 c
114 a, 114 A;, 114 s
ii6s
.... ii8w
.... 145 e
67 V
.... 155*
, . . . 1266
5*
34
4
5
6
I
2
4
10
I
10
II
14
2
3
4
7
10
12
7
13
I
7
9
I
4
10
a
4
8
2
ai
I
2
6
8
9
5
7
8
10
13
16
I
Psalms
34 2 .
6 .
9 .
13 .
35 I .
8 .
10 .
14 .
16 .
19 .
36 6 .
& .
9 .
13 .
87 I .
5 .
9 .
14 .
16 .
id.
20 .
23 .
24 .
31 .
38 II .
13 .
21 .
3913 .
14 .
40 2 .
h •
6 .
15 .
18 .
41 3 .
5 •
8 .
42 2 .
4 •
5 •
6 .
10 .
43 I .
3 .
3 .
44 3 .
6 .
18 .
30 .
23 .
36 .
27 .
45 I .
3 •
5 •
6 .
7 .
8 .
9 .
10 .
5*:
290,
21 d
1096
155/
60/, 1260
. 73rf
156 sr
. gu
95 hh
113*
131 9 N.
. 35 «
. 75"
. 75 «*
. 6^d
35 ^. 75 ^b
67 w
20/
45fi'
20 A
129 6
76 w
121/
15966
145 fc
. 55 e
. 124 e
. 61 c
. 10 h
IF' 99
75 oa
.9300
.108/
290 N.
. 393
109 e
. 74*
• 64/
/, 155?
ii5eN.
117a;
. Ill t
6Sg, 102 1
. 72 s
. 102 I
124 b
144m
119 0
.156/
119 q
1283
. 67 A:
. 72 s
. 1246
. 56 «
54 a N.
290 N.
I28d
1 17 fie
87/, 141 d
.30AN«
13
Psalms 12, 3 — 103, i
591
Psalms
45 12 75 6J),
16
18
3
4
5
7
6
II
15
6
7
8
14
15
109 fc,
46
48
49
JOS',
N.
1241
76 fir
53 5, 123 c
. 115?
132 A N.
1246, 132c
. 1195
1646 N,
92) 9, n^
. 1260a
102 i
. .126b
ii3«
. .i55«
6766, 1 14 A;
60
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
68
59
60
61
62
3
4
10
12
17
21
22
23
4
5
7
9
10
14
18
19
6
f5
6
6
3
10
16
18
19
22
23
4
2
5
2
5
9
6
8
16
4
5
13
I
8
4
5
8
113
CC,
109 e, 144 c
115 b
90 n
159'"
142 d
I67a
116 6
. . 68«
75fi'5'. 1 20 fir
. .142/
59 m,
113X,
. . 6j^h
165 a
. 165''
. .108/
128 h
, Jigw
. . 68»
91 e, 116 1
. . 119 »■
108 gr
. .52"
. . 74^^
108 fir
. . lOfir
117a;
. . 155 i
• -75"
7 66, 144 m
. .52/1
. . 63n
69 X, 96, 118 r
125A, 128 X, 131S
. 151a
. .1595
• 7F>PP
. .131C
803, 158 a
. . 80/
. . 75 CC
. .525
. 145 »»
. . i3c^
Psalms
63 2
4
6
64 5
7
8
9
65 6
10
II
66 6
13
17
68 3
5
7
9
17
18
19
22
23
24
34
69 4
5
9
10
11
24
33
I
7
23
72 2
13
14
17
20
73 2
7
9
14
16
17
20
27
28
74 7
8
10
19
75 4
76 6
II
77 2
4
10
II
16
71
132 d
60 e
117 t
69 r
676
ii7i^
1300
925'
53". ^°9
loSg
119 n
144 m
19 c, 51 fc, 67 <
1191 N', 122 t
117 66, 1246
136 dN.
. .131C
21 f, 97/1
20/, 1 1 7 66
128 c
• 75"
gr, 103 m
1195
Il8p
131 ?N.
. 48 i
95«'N.
144 iN»
. 64 A
69 s
108 c
131 r
440
107 n
72 r
69/
10^
52?
75"
1450
63 n, 69 X
123 c
10
53 2;
49 6,
108 e
108 h
1192/ N.
. lid
11999
76/
64 c
80/
16 w, 146 fir
64«N2
1246
. .630
75 ^ 75"
. . 67 r
. . 67r
20 fir, 125 c
Psalms
77 18
20
78 6
15
16
21
44
54
80 8
II
14
15
19
9
II
83 12
19
81
84
86
87
88
89
90
9
2
9
3
5
5
6
17
7
10
40
48
51
53
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
13
15
4
6
9
II
12
92 12
93 5
94 I
9
12
20
99 6
100 3
101 5
102 4
9
14
19
28
103 I
91
9»,
48
[21
74«»
55
67
56 &. 93 bb
. . 20A
107*
132 AN.
. . 74^
. . 66«
75 «. "4 6
. 1389
1318
52 «, 121 d
. 5 », 5<5
. 125A
. . 72 <
109 6
. .116/
131 0
144 iN*
. 125A
N.,6i/N.
117 n
dNS 145 u
. .123c
. 152 u
116 /I
• • 55<*
24 g, 128 t)
. .761*
. .646
• 135/
. 1326
. . 20 h
107 c, 152 r
109 fc, III <
. ii8r
. 155 Sf
. 112 m
. . 73 d
. . 496
. .147c
87 n, 130 d
67 p, 109 &
675, 118 i
. 1 1 7 ii
. , 20 c
. . 60 e
. .132&
• . 75 a'
53 m, 6gv
' 93 9?
. . 20 fir
60 6, 63 m
7500. "9»
. 103 gr
I, 64 t, 90 m
. 67 u
I j6i
67 CC
106 e
9, 135 «N»
. . . lOfif
592
Index of Passages
Fsalms
Fsalms
Fsalms
103 3 . •
. 91 e, 9U
II9117 .
• • . -75 i
144 14 .
. . . 122*
4 • •
. . 58 S'
12S .
. . 130/N.
145 I .
. . . . 5f<'
5 . . I
45*. 156 <^
136
. . .155"
7 •
. . . 1336
9 • •
. . i^ig
137
. . . 145 »-
13 .
. . . 123c
104 I . .
. . 106 g
120 I .
. gog, i27«
147 I .
. . . 52 P
3 2omNS 35 h,
5
. . . 117 66
2 .
. . . 20 TO
126 &
6 ,
. . . 119s
149 2 .
. . . 1 24 Ac
8 . .
. . izSg
7 ■
. . 14ICN'
II . .
. . 90 n
121 I .
. . . 1276
Froverbs
12 . .
• .933
3 .
. 107 p, 1096
19..
. . . 91 n
18 . . 2
om, 126 a;
5 .
. . . 124^
10 . .
.68 A, -JBhh
20 . .1
ogh, 159 d
122 6 .
... 75"
16 . .
. . 145 M
21 . .
. . 114P
123 I
... 90 TO
19 . .
... 29/
25 . .
. . I36d
4 .
. 119s, i27sr
20 .
47&,48d, 86i
26 . .
. . 1389'
124 4 .
... .90/
21 . .
. . .750
28 . . -
47 TO, 159 C
125 I .
. . . 1559'
22 . .
63 TO, 93 t N.
105 12 . .
. . 118a;
126 6
. iiSP. "3w
23 . .
. . i59<*
28 . .
. . 53W
127 I
. . . 118 t
28 . .
. . . 6o«
43 . .
. . .78Z
2
23 Z, Soh, 114*1
2 8..
1141 N.
107 23 . .
. 5w, i7e
128 3
. . 75 ". 96
10 . .
. . 145"
43 . .
. . 93»»
5
. . . 1 10 1
II . .
. . . 58»
108 7 . .
. . 1 44 TO
131 I .
. . . .72;
14 . .
. . 12810
109 3 . .
. . ii7<
132 I
... 52r
19 . .
. . .ii6»
3 . •
. . 57 N^
3
. , . 128TO
22 . .
. . 144?
10 . .
. . 646
4
... Sog
33..
. . 110/
13 • •
■ . 75 2/
12 .
346,91*1,1383
8 . .
. . .22 s
110 I . .
. . 164/
133 2
. . . 126X
12 . .
. . . 166
2 . .
. . HOC
135 7
. . . .530
25 • .
. . 109 e
3 • •
. . 141 c
136 I .
. . . . 2r
26 . .
. . .119*
4 • •
. . .go I
3
. . . 102 TO
44..
. . . 75"
111 I . .
. . . Bh
6 .
... 65 d
8 . .
. 6o/,67Z
112 I . .
. . Bh
137 I .
. . . 1246
13 . •
. . . 20A
8 . .
. . 164/
3
. . .1179'S'
21 . .
. . . 72 ee
9 • •
. . I20sr
5
. . . I59TO
25 . .
. . .706
113 5 . •
. . 90 TO
6
... 583
5 2..
. . 145"
7 • •
. . 90 TO
7
. . 75 CC, 116 d
4 . •
... 96
8 . .
. . 90 M
138 2
. . . . 16/
6 . .
. . . 72Z
9 • •
, . 90 n
6
, . 696 N., 69 p
13 . .
. . .75««
114 I . . .
i28aN2
139 I
... 59 '^
16 . .
. . 150 a
8 . .
90 TO, 90 n
2
. . . 73a N.
17 . .
. . 1520
115 7 . .1
43 d, 1476
5
91 e
22 .
60 e, 131 TO N.
116 I . .
. . 90 n
8
. . 66 e, 159 TO
6 24 . ]
141 N., 128W
4 • •
. . 16/
II
103d, HI X, 159/
7 2..
. . . 75"
6 . .
. . 53 9
12
. . . 133b N2
5 . •
1141 N.
7 . •
. 72 s, 9U
14
. . 75 gg, 118 p
7 • .
. . 108 A
12 . .
. . .911
18
. . . 159c N.
8 . .
. . . 91 c
15 • •
• .90/
20
23 », 68 h, 7500
II . .
. . . g4d
118 5 20fir, <
59/. ^^999
21
. . . . 72 cc
13 • .
. 67 dd, 68 e
7 • •
. 1191
22
. . 117?, I28»-
26 . .
. . . Ii6«
10 . .
. , 60 d
140 4
91 {
83..
. . .47*
II . .
, . 67 cc
10
. . . . 75 TOTO
4 . •
... 96
13 . .
. . 113P
13
44*
12 . .
. . 11766
14 . . .
8osr
141 3
. . . 20 A, 48 i
13 • •
. . 132»
18 . .
. 20 gr, 59/
4
96
17 . .
... 68/
23 . .
. • 74S'
5
. . . . 74*
22 . .
. . . 59/
25 . .
. . 53»»
8
. . . , 75bb
25 . .
107 c, 152 r
26 . .
. . 59 e
10
. . . . 145 »"
26 . .
. . .124!
110 I . .
5 »». 75 00
142 5
. . . 113^6
27 . .
. . . 67r
18 . .
. 75 cc
143 6
. ... 106 g
28 . .
. . .930
28 . .
. 91 n
144 2
. . . . 87/
30 . .
. . . 122/
Psalms 103, 3 — Job 5, 8
593
Proverbs
Proverbs
Proverbs
8 32 , . 130 rf, 155 n
19 25 . . 63 n, 144 k
30 31
35 »»
9 1,.
. . . 86Z
20 2
. . 128/1
31 I
. . . . 128 A
5 • •
. . II9»M
9
. . 107 i
2
37/
9 • .
. . 109 h
10
. .123/
3
. . . 539,876
10 .
. . 124 A
13
iioh
4
75 »»
12 . .
. . I59#
16
. . 63?
10
2 r, 5 A
13 .
137 c, 152 M N.
22
. . 22 s
30
546'
18 . .
. . . 116I
25
1141
10 4. 2
iy, i^p, liV
21 6
. 128c
26 .
. . 124^
12
125c
Job
31 •
, . . 1173
22 21
10
K
124 A:, 131 c
1 I
. . 1556,1566
11 3 .
. . • 67 n
23 I
73 «) 73 <^
3
. . . . 123a
14 •
. . 1236
7
. .152'
4
. . 97 c, 112 dd
15 .
. . . 67 <
22
. 138?
5
107 e, 112/, 118 h
21 .
. . . 22s
24
. .159*
164 d
25 .
. . . 69 w
29
. 131 9
6
iigcc, 126 s, 128 V
12 1 .
... 16/
35
120 c
7
. . . 107 A
10 .
. . 145 h
24 I
. . 5'*
12
. . . 136**
17 .
. . . 159c
4
. . 29 0
14
Il6»-, 119 cc, I22C,
i& .
. . . 75 9V
14
. . . 48i
1350. 141 ». 145 c
19 .
. . 108 h
17
. . 51'
15
49 6, 122 J, 1350
28 .
. . . i52Sr
22
. 151 «
16
116 M, 164 a
13 4 .
. . I3in
31
, ■ ii7«
i8
, . . . ii6m
6 .
. . 142/
25 2
. . 53fc
19
. . . 1223
10 .
... 153
3
. 291! N.
21
■ 23/, 74^,1 18 n
21 . .
. . 117 c
5
I26n
2 I
. . . . 128W
23 .
• . . 23 fir
9
. 75 W
3
Ill I
24 . .
. . ii7ff
II
. .93'-
9
. . . 110/
14 I .
86?, 145 fcN.
13
. 161 a N.
10
. . i50«- 153
2 .
. . . ii6fc
13
. . 124/c
3 2
68 e
3 .
. . . .47 9'
16
. 76 h, 91 d
3
296, 68 d, 107 Ar,
. 152 u N.
17
. . . 69 V
155/. 155*'
10 .
. . . . 22 s
19
52
s, 67 s, 929-
4
. . . 141 c N.
13 .
. i3inNi
23
. 72 bb
6
75'-
14 .
. . . . 72P
26
. . .53 s
8
. . . . ii4»«
20 .
. . . 121/
27
. 1136
9
. 109a N., 152 A
30 .
. . . 124^2
26 7
. . 75M
II
. . . . 1523
34 •
. . . 72 66
8
. . 67 cc
13
. . 106 p, 159 dd
35 .
, . 114 iN.
17
. . 155 e
IS
. . . . loSe
15 I .
. . 20 c, 22 s
23
. 145 u
17
106 1
5 •
. . . . 63 n
28
. . 1 2 2 «
19
. . . 135 a N.
20 .
. . 107/
27 6
. .63 c
20
. . . . 1282/
16 3 .
. . 1246
7
. 143 a
24
. . . . 145 P
4 •
. . .1278
9
. . 1466
25
75"
II .
. i28aN.
15
. . .75 a;
4 2
. 286, 87 e, I50W
30 .
, . 141 i N.
24
iboo N.
3
. . 1076, 132 /■
33 .
. . . 121 6
25
. . • 20 h
5
, . Ill «, 1446
17 4 .
. . . . 68^•
28 6
. . 88eN.
6
. . . . 143 d
10 .
. . . . 66/
22
. . 10 h
7
. . . . 136 c
12 113CC, 133 6 N.,
29 6 .
. .672
17
107/, i33«'N.,
1629-
30 I
. . . 96
i^o/j
15 . . 154 a N. (c)
3
124A, 166a
19
. ■ . 144 gr, 145 <
21 .
. . 1 1 4 J N.
6
io/(, 69 V
20
29 i, 67 sr, 67 y
26 .
. ... 153
13
. . . 72?
21
- . . 150m
18 6 .
. • 145 "
14
ii4iN.
5 I
. . 61 /t, 91 d
16 .
. . . . 92g
17
I
09
N., 20 ;j N.
2
. . . ii7n
22 .
. . . 159A
18
• 134s
3
. . . I35«
24 .
. . . . 47 b
24
■ • 13.^^
5
. . . 1190
19 7 .
. . . . 9U
28
, . 144/1
7
128 V, 161 a
8 .
. . . . 1141
30
. . 1526
8
... 107 X
COWLEl
r
Q <
1
594
Index of Passages
Job
Job
Job
5 lo .
. . . 126 b
9 29 .
. , . I07n
15 6 ... . 145 M
12 .
. . . i66a
31 .
. . . .I26r
7 . . . . 121 d
13 .
. . . . 91 e
32 lie
>s, 152 d, 166 a
10 ... . 1319
M .
. . . 118 M
33 .
1091, 152 d
II ... . 133c
i6 .
. . . .90s'
34 •
. . . . 6od
13 . . . . 125c
i8 .
. . . 75 9?
10 I .
. . . 72 dd
15 67 ee
19 .
. . . 134 s
7 •
. . 1 1 9 aa N.
16 ... , ii6e
22 .
. . . 109 e
8 .
. . . Ill e
17 75^'', 138/*, 143 rf
24 .
. . . 1599
15 •
. . . i59#
20 ... . 146 a
27 •
. . . . 2og
16 .
109 A, I20 5r
21 ... , 118/
6 2 .
■ ii3M'»i44 9'
17 •
. . 154 «N,
22 75"
5 .
. . 150 ;*
18 .
. . . 107W
23 ... . 147 c
7 .
. 66 b, 106 g
19 .
. . . 17W
26 ... , 128 r
8 .
.95/}, I5id
31 .
. . .107 c
16 3 ... . 150 jf
9 •
. . 120 d
22 .
gog, 152a N.
4 103 Z, 108/, iigq
10 .
. . 108/
11 2 .
. . . .128^
6 60/
12 .
1^1 d. 150/
3 •
. . . iii<
6 .63/, 108 e, I59ir
13 .
. 1503 N.
5 .
. . 151^
7 •531', 76««, 144P
16 .
. . 1266
6 .
1 10 a, 134 r N.
8 . . . . 12OC
J7 .
12,0 d, 155;
9 •
. . . 91 e
9 . . 1189, 1199
19 . .
. . .119s
II .
. . .I28<
10 . . . 54 i, 1199
20 . .
135 P, M5M
12 .
. 5ifir, 131 cN.
12 ... . II2«
21 .
. 75 ^ 152 a
15 •
iigw, 15966
13 95 A
22 .
22^, 64 a, 690
17 48<
i, 108 e, 1336
14 ... . 126p
25 . .
• . i54«
144
c
16 . . . 44 m, 55 6
26 .
. 65/, 69 V
20 .
. . 103 w
17 . 152a N., 1600
28 .
. . 120 g
12 3 .
, . . I52d
19 ... . 1246
7 2 .
. . 1559'
4 .
. . Ill M
22 .69 a;, 75 M, 145 U
3 .
121 c, 144 gr
6 . :
igt, 75 M, 1246
17 I 124 c
4 ■
. . 124/
7 •
. . . 145 /c
2 . 20A, 736, 75jr
6 .
. . 133 «>
II . .
135 «, 161 a
4 72 cc
13 . .
Ii2hh, iigm
12 . .
. . 141 d
5 75"'
14 . .
. 581, 60 d
14 . .
. . 159M;
7 75P
15 .
. . mb
16 . ^
... 15c
9 loh
18 .
. . 123c
17 116
s, ii6x, 118 0
10 . . i2oe, I35r
20 102
/, ii9aa, 159/1
23 .
. . ii7n
13 ... . 1246
21 .
... 37/
24 .
128 a, 152 M
16 47*
8 6 .
. . 159 r
13 3 .
.53^, Ii3<i
18 2 ... . 130 a
7 .
. . 145 M
7 •
. . ISC'"
3 • • • • 7599
9 . .
. . 141 d
9 •
. . . 67gr
4 • • . 51W. 139/
10 . .
. . 125c
13 .
"9^. 13'/ c
7 . . 67 dd, 135 n
II 75»
t.^5oA, 152 a
15 •
... 153
8 54fc
N.
16 .
. . . 1526
12 . . . . 109 A
14 . .
. 72 r, 9300
17 •
. . .113'"
18 ... . I44gr
18 .
. 29sr, 64fif
21 .
2gq, 60 d, 64 h
21 ... . J3od
19 . .
. . H5d
25 •
. . 117c
19 2 21 d, 60 6, 75 gg,
21 . .
. 236, 75 pp
26 .
. . 1246
7500
9 6 .
. . . 54^^
27 .
• 54/, 93 r
3 . . . 53n, 120C
7 •
I09gr, 165 a
28 .
H4P, 155 '^
7 , 63 AN., 159 ir
8 , ,
. . .87s
14 I . .
. . . ii6Z
10 ... . 69 p, X
II . .
1 17*1, 159 w
2 . .
. . iii«
15 60 a
15 55^
), 159 n, 160 a
3 . ■
. 150 ^ 153
17 67 ee
16 . ,
. . Ill X
4 • •
. . 151 b
18 ... . 1596
18 .
2oh, Jj^m
6 . .
109/, I56gr
19 ... . 138A
19 . .
. . .147 ft
9 • •
656, 112 w
23 53 M> 67 y, 126 s,
20 . .
•53W, 107 X
TO • .
. . .lilt
iSid
22 . .
. , .106 1
II . .
, . 161 a
24 5i»»
24 .
. 150 ZN.
19 . ,
. . 145*
25 ... . 118 n
26 .
1553, 161 a N.
22 . .
... 153
2(5 . . 119W, 144?
27 . ,
. . 159 M
15 3 . ,
113^, ijghh
28 ... . 117W
Job 5, iQ— 39, 13
Job
Job
Job
20 4 1 50 e
25 3 91 d
31 28
9 122I
5 67 ee
29
10 72 A;
26 2 152 a N., 152 M,
31
12 ... . 159(7
152U
34
17 . . 109 e, 1306
4 . . . . ii7srfif
35
19 . . . 154 a N.
5
. . . 119c
32 6
7
. . . .ii6s
7
33 • • . 103/ N.
9
. . . . 56
II
14
. . . IIQTO
12
' 26 .68/, 145 M, 156/
27 3 .
. . . .I28e
17
5
. . . 149a
18
21 4 loow, 135/ 143a,
6
. . 119 w N.
22
150 ff
7
. . . ii8x
33 4
5 67 «
J2
. . . 117?
5
7 "7^
'9
68 A, i2od N.
21
9 . 1191c, 141 c Ns
23
. . 103/N.
25
11 52 n
28 I
. . . 155^
30
13 . . . 20 1, 66/
2
, 121 d, 127 it
32
16 . 20/, 106 n N^
4
. . . 1266
34 13
17 ... . 150A
5
. . . ii8m)
18
21 . . n d, 146 a
6
. . . .124^
22
22 ... . 142^
II .
. . . 119a;
36
23 ... . 139 »
12 .
. . . ngff
35 10
25 . . . . 119W
17 .
. . . 1523
II
27 ... . 155 fe
25 •
. . . Ii4r
15
29 . . . 44 d, 64/
27 •
. . . . 6od
36 2
32 ... . 124 c
29 2 1 1 8 ?«, 1 30 d, 1 5 1 5
7
22 2 . . , J03/N*
3 67P, 118A, 131 0
18
3 672/
6 23/
32
7 . . . . 1526
8 .
. 1 20 fir N.
36
9 . . . . 121 6
10 .
. 44 c, 146 a
37 5
12 20 i, 117/1, 141 c.
12 .
152 M, 165 n
6
'5 •
. . 141 d
12
16 . . 121 rf, 149 a
16 . .
130 d, 155 w
14
21 .
20 t, 24 e, 67 g
16
20 . . . 91/, 1496
23 . .
. . iiSw
18
21 48 d, no/, i35/>
25 • .
. log, 12677
24
23 ... . i59#
30 3 . .
1266, 133 i
38 2
6 . .
' 114k, 133A
3
30 ... . 152 <7
10 . .
. . 106 g
5
23 2 . . . . 1 19 aa
13 . •
152 M, 155 »»
6
3 i2oe
14 . .
. . .75"
7
6 lool
J5 • .
. . 121 b
12
9 . . , . 109 fc
19 . .
. 59/. 75 «
13
II 76 c
20 . .
. . . 72 66
14
12 ... . 143 <i
26 . .
. 49 6, 108 e
16
J3 119 «
28 . .
n8 n, 120 c
18
16 67 V
31 I . .
. . 148 a
19
24 I . . .75m, 121/
6 • •
. . . 72Jf
21
5 . . 1 18 r, 145 TO
7 . .
. 23 c, 108/
24
7 . . . . 1180
9 • •
. . 159TO
26
10 . . 118 0, 152 M
10 . .
. . . 87 e
27
14 109 A;, 118 X, 120 c
II . .
. . 32 «, 131 s
28
19 ... . 161 a
12 . .
. . 1.15/
30
21 ... . 7od
^h • •
. 58 A:, 72 cc
32
22 . . . 876, 156/
J 8 117X, 126 p, 1636
30 I
23 9"
22 91 e
2
24 . 51m 67 m, 67!/
26 67 p, III q, Ii8n,
3
25 . 150 J N., 152 a
ii8g
9
25 2 . . . 1163
27 .
.
. . .75 9-1
13
595
I59dd
112 6
151 6
. I.s6/
1516
68 c, 69 m
146 a
. 68 i
1030
. 63/
23/, 74 's
120C
16 A, 75 mm
48 i, 54 k
I4d, 646
. . 56
51 1, 72 t)
. 61 d
. 90/
1 1 3 ee N.
1 59 cc •
124 A;
. 68 A;
152 k
. 6i;e
1 1 1 6 N.
145 M
122 0
143 d
1 1877
rshh
. 90/
117M;
124 6
1506
. 59 i
136c
126 p
159 dd
• 137^
, 67 w, 128 V
119 w N.
5M, ii4r
i8m7, I34r
150 A
223, 1506
. 155^
07 c, 146 a
165a
52 M, 1556
. . 133'
150?
. 118 W
. »45 »"
. . 64 d
91/ 150''
. i35«
. . 22s
. . 1 50/
596
Index of Passages
Job
Canticle
Lamentations
39 15 . .
. . 13-iP
7 10 . . I26.r, 133 h
2 18 80/
17 . .
. . 119m
8 2 .
87/, 131 c N.
3 I ... . 144^5
24 . .
. . 75 00
4 •
. 137 bN.
5 53 "
26 . .
. -53'*
5 .
. .59 9rN.
12 80 /t
30 . .
• . . 65/
6 .
. . . 93 w
14 87/
40 2 . .1
i3««i lists'
10 .
. . . 741
22 20 0
5 • •
134 >". 134 s
14 .
. . 119s
26 . 100 g N., 107 q
S . .
. ^b°9
33 69 M
19 . ii(
Sg N., 127 I
48 . 295^, 69P, 117 s
22 . .
. . 67 n
Ruth
50 ... . 109 A:
23 • •
. 159 »<'
1 I . . . . 49 6 N.
^5 69 M
24 . .
. . 66/
8 . . 135 0, 144 «
4 I . . . 54 fc, 75 rr
25 . .
1 50 a N 1
9 46/, 74^, 74 '^^
2 . . .- . 75-rr
30 . .
. 1506
no I
5 . . . . 117 w
32 . .
. . 69?;
12 . . 106 p, 107 a;
14 . . 51 h, 120 g
41 I . 93-
ss, 150 a N^
13 51 m, 103/ N.,
17 . . . . 100 0
2 . .
. . . 72 cc
I52£r
21 . . . , . 90 n
4 • •
103 gr, 1246
14 76 b
5 5 . 72 ee N., 121 a
7 . .
, . ii8r
16 .
. . .i38fi
10 . . . .745 u
12 . .
154 a N.
19 .
. . . 91/
15 • •
. 1563
20 .
. 46 /, 80 h
17 . .
20 . .
. .76 b
21 .
. . 118 w
. 12SV
22 .
. 32 H, 138 k
Ecclesiastes
22 . .
• 133 'i
2 2 .
. 10 h, 64 i
1 I ... . 122 r
25 . 246
, 75», 126 5
3 •
. . 129 d
2 . . . . 1331
26 . 16
/, ii7aN^
6 . .
. . 138 fc
4 . . . . 116 Z
6 . . . . 113U
42 2 . .
. .44!
8 .
• 47 .'7, 470
3 . .
i33rf. 156/
9 • •
75 qq. 112 kk
9 • • • • 137 c
6 . . .
. 75 mm
14 53 n, 66 c, 69 V,
13 . . . 112 pp N.
7 . •
164 d
Jo^g
16 ... . 135 b
8 . .
. 163 rf
15 35 ^
17 86 1
10 . . .
. . 91 k
16 67 0
2 I ... . 135 b
'3 . •
. . 97 c
20 . . . . 121/
5 . . . 1 1 2 pp N.
15 . .
135 «>> 1450
31 . . .470, 122 g
7 . . . . MS"
16 . .
• • 75<
3 2 . . . 91/, 141 c
8 . . . . 122 I'
3 . . 44 ;», 104 f?
13 . . . 24 e, 133 b
4 47 0, 109 k, 112 c
15 • • 93'-'-, 135 «
Canticle
6 59 S'
19 ... . 150 fif
1 I . .
• . 1 33 i
12 , . . . 163 d
20 64 e
6 . .
60 a, 75 a;
14 ... . 107 c
21 . . . . 131 'H
7 . .
. -36, 75«
15 64 c, 69 0, 134 «
22 36
8 . .
. . . 20 h
18 . . 163 c and N.
26 ... . 75 00
10 . .
. 75a:, 141 c
4 I . . . 69 p, 72 <
3 2 2 s
15 • •
141 d
3 . . 129 /t, 138 k
4 . . . . 114 b
27..
. 144 a
4 . . 29 «' N., 1520
II ... . 152 2/
12 . .
. 85 u N.
7 . . . . 112/*
14 ... . 165 b
13 . • <
141 d
15 59 S'
15 ... . 114 i
14 . .
69 V, 93 ss
18 . . . . 36, 67i)
17 . . .
. .119s
Lamentations
19 • • • • 93 rr
37..
. 131 M
1 I . . . 5 /i, 90 Z
21 . ICO m, 150 i N.
8 . .
. . 50/
4 . . , 69 <, 87 e
22 ... . 102 A:
II . .
• . 75W
8 67 y, 72 ce, 117 p
4 2 . . . . iiigg
65..
• 1 35 b
9 124/
3 . . . . "7 i
8 . .
137 bN.
10 . . 120 c, 155/
10 . . 1240, 131 n
9 . .
• .59''
14 . . 130 d, 155 n
14 35 f*
16 . .8 =
j/N., 14IC
16 . . . 75 0, 117 z
17 • • • • 133 e
6 8..
. . 32n
19 . . 107 q. 165 a
5 5 53 9
11 . . .
. 67rf<i
27 64 e
6 . . . . 143 rf
7 1...
137&N.
II 51 '
7 . . . . 124^1
3 . .
. . 93X
16 . .
. . . 15 c
8 32'
»/«/> 39' 15— I
Chronicles
15' 8
597
Ecclesiastes
Daniel
Nehemiah
5 1 1 69 n
1 15 ... . 93 ss
4 9 . . 49 c N., 67 X
14 . .
. . 109 i
2 I . .
. . 124 0
12 . .
. 116 fcN.
15 • •
. . 161 6
4 • •
. . . I c
17 .
. , 152 n
16 . .
. . 1476
3 .5 . .
. . 167 a
5 14 .
. . . 91 e
18 . II
2 jjpN., 141 A
83..
. . . 93 »i
6 6..
. . 90 A;
7 7.-
. . 117 c
9 • •
. . 1350
8 .
23 c, 74 i
16 . 5.
^c, 54 ^^ 131 5
II . .
. . 72 ee
10 ,
. . 144 i
24 . .
. . 133'^-
13 125 b, 1263, 127/
II .
, . 1 00 m
26 . .
. . 75 00
22 47 A:, 87 i, 95 u,
72..
. Ii8x
27 .
. . 122 >■
116 to
64 .
. . 64i
81..
• 35 n, 75 rr
95 91 »*
66 .
. . . 23i
10 54sr
, 119U, i28?/.'N.
13 ... . II7W
8 2 .
. . .74'
9 I ,
. . 93 low
19 48 i
8 .
. . . 2 K
4 . •
. . 143 e
11 6 116/, 127 i, 139 /i
10 . 8
5 5f N.. I28i7,
12 .
. . . 52 s
II ... . 131 n
152
V, 155 n
14 . ,
. \12 pp'^.
20 ... . 93 drf
II .
. . 105 ffl
10 5 . .
75 93' ^55''
23 . • • 53 ', 54 'f
9 13 .
. . 132d
15 •
. . 145 m
35 53 5
35 .
. . 12605
17 •
. . . 91 I
12 2 . . 102 6, 124 e
10 37 .
. 123 rN.
18 .
. . . 88 b
7 . . . 93 aa N.
39 .
. . . 53 fc
20 .
. . .53W
II.... 134 3
11 17 .
. . . 53 g
11 2 .
. . 134 «
13 87 e
12 44 .
. . . 95 n
3 .
. 23 i, 75 s
47 •
. • . 95 «
12 I .
. . 124 fc
13 9 .
. . 165 a
4 •
. 72 ;, 128 »
Ezra
13 .
• 53 9', 53 w
5 .
• • •73 5'
2 62 ... . 131 r
16 .
. . . gb
6 .
. 67 q, 67 t
69 .
. . . 97 ?
21 .
• . .73/
7 •
. . 109 fc
3 3 .
124 q, 147 a
24 .
2 a, 2 w
9 •
. . 145*
6 .
. . 134/'
1
12 .
. . 126 aa
1
1
4 7 .
. . .55 h
1 Chronicles
Esther
8 .
. . . I c
; 2 13 47 &
1 4 .... 93 WW
6 21 .
. . . 8k
30 . .
. 152 M
5
. . . . 74 ;i
7 12 .
. . . . I c
48 . .
1 45 u
8
. , . 123 c
28 .
. . . 49 e
35..
. . 69 <
17
. . . 93 w
8 I .
. . . . 64 i
4 10 .
61 a, 167 a
2 9 .
. . . .75"
18 .
. . . 14 d
42 . .
131 n
II
. . . 123 c
23 •
. . . 51 n
5 I . .
114 A;
3 4
. . . 157 c
25 •
93 00, 1*38 i
2 . .
141 a
8
. . 100 0 N.
29 .
. . . 127 A-
20 . .
• .63 c
4 2 .
. . 114 I
30 .
. . • .923
6 65 . .
• . 90/
8
, . . 93 WW
36.
. . 112 rr
75..
. 124 g
6 13
. . . . 20 g
9 6 .
. . . 22 s
8 8..
■ . 52 0
7 2
. . . 109/
10 13 .
. . 141 d
38 . .
. .299
5
. .74sr, 137 a
14 .
, 127 i, 138 i
9 13 .
. . 128 c
8
. . . 114 i
16 .
• . • 45 g'
22 . 1
35
a N*. 155 rf
8 I
. . . 1 37 c
17 •
I27CN.
25 . .
. 134 »»
8
. . . . 63 c
27 . .
123 c
9 I
. . 135 «N.
33 • •
. 147 «
6
. . . 1133
Nehemiah
10 2 . .
. • 53 »•
7
. . . . 2 s
23.... 67 rfrf
13 . •
. ii4fe
23
124 c, 1450 N.
i •
. . .68/7
11 6 . .
. 116 w
12 ,
131 «, 137 c
39 . •
. . 23/
'3 .
■ • • • 5 «
12 2 . .
2
4/N.,7o6
Daniel
3 8 .
. 124 0, 128 V
8 . .
114 b
1 4 . 23 c, 128 a N.
13 .
. . . 35^^
17 . .
. . 61 c
5 . . • . 1350
31 .
. . 128 «
23 • .
. 165 <«
10 ... . 93 ss
4 3 •
49 6 N., 53 n
33 . •
. 123/
12.... 75 cc
4 •
. . . II 9 w
3^ . .
. . 23/
13
. . . I^hh
7 •
. , . . 20 h
598
Index of Passages
1 Chronicles
15 12
19
24
26
27
16 8
19 8
20 8
21 1
17
22 7
23 6
26
24 3
26 28
27 12
28 2
II
15.
29 I
3
8
33
• 155 »»
• 131 d
530, 55 e
• -631
56, 127 gr
. . 2 S
• 131 b
. . 69^
• 125/
141 AN.
143 a N.
. 63 n
114 fc
• 63 n
1381
127 d
143 a N.
. 96
131 d
155 <^
155 w
I38t
. 65/
2 Chronicles
1 4 . . 1382,
2 12 . . . .
'55 M
117 w
2 Chronicle
3
2 Chronicles
317. . . . I26fc
26 5 . . .
4 3
123 a N.
10 . . .
13
. . 1 3 1 d
15 75»"»', •
5 II
. . 114A;
18 . . .
8 18
. • •93''
28 10 . . .
11 22
114 A:, I47 a
21 . . .
15 3
. 147 a
23 • • •
8
. . 127/
29 6 . . .
16 4
. . 125 /j
10 . . .
9
• 155"
17 . . .
10
. . 147 a
18 . . .
12
75 rr, 147 a
27 . . .
14
124c
30 9 . . I
17 II
• -933;
17 . . .
18 3
• • 147 a
18 . . .
23
155 '^
19 . . .
26
. 131 c
31 7 69 w, 7
19 2
. . 114A;
10 . . .
6
. 147a
17 . . .
20 I
1026
32 9 . . .
19
. 128 c
13 • • •
22 .
• .155^
30 . . .
34
. . • 63P
34 10 . . .
35
. 54aN.
II . . .
21 4
1 1 9 tc N.
12 . . .
17 •
• 133?
35 4 . . .
22 5 .
• • 35^
21 109 gr, I
23 I .
1 17*1
23 • • •
25 17 ,
156CN.
36 23 . . .
1 14 c
. 22 s
14 n, I 26 3
142/N.
. 147 a
• -53 0
• .672,'
. 1650
• 1342'
117 n
• • • 55 '
I4P, 1470
130 d N'
'55"
I, 142/N2
1 2 1 d N»
117 m
101 a
. . 8ft
. . 69 M
• • 45</
. . 16/
. . loh
. 93 WW
359, 147 «
. . 69 r
■ 137 c
I
i
f
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKEI
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11